Chapter 1.

General

ARTICLE 1.0 — INTRODUCTION

1.0.1.1 Purpose.

(a) Practical Safeguarding. The purpose of this Code is the

practical safeguarding of persons and property from hazards arising
from the use of electricity.
(b) Adequacy. This Code contains provisions that are considered
minimum requirements necessary for safety. Compliance therewith
and proper maintenance will result in an installation that is essentially
free from hazard but not necessarily efficient, convenient, or adequate
for good service or future expansion of electrical use.

FPN No. 1: Hazards often occur because of overloading of wiring systems by

methods or usage not in conformity with this Code. This occurs because initial
wiring did not provide for increases in the use of electricity. An initial adequate
installation and reasonable provisions for system changes will provide for future
increases in the use of electricity.

FPN No 2: It is highly recommended that a licensed electrical practitioner be

consulted for any electrical requirements, including changes. Failure to do so may
result in fire, serious injury, or death.

FPN No. 3: Fire hazard, electrocution, serious injury or even death may also occur
with lack or improper maintenance of wiring system. Wiring system is
recommended to be inspected and tested by a licensed electrical practitioner at
least once a year for wiring system of more than three (3) years in installation.

(c) Intention. This Code is intended for the exclusive use of

licensed electrical practitioners (PEE, REE, and RME). This Code is
not intended as a design specification nor an instruction manual for a
non-licensed electrical practitioner, unless under the supervision of a
licensed electrical practitioner.

(d) Relation to Other International Standards. The requirements

in this Code address the fundamental principles of protection for safety
contained in Section 131 of International Electrotechnical Commission 1.0.1.3 Authority.
Standard 60364-1, Electrical Installations of Buildings.
(a) This Code has been approved and adopted by the Board of
FPN: IEC 60364-1, Section 131. Contains fundamental principles of protection for Electrical Engineering, Professional Regulation Commission.
safety that encompass protection against thermal effects, protection against
overcurrent, protection against fault currents, and protection against overvoltage.
All of these potential hazards are addressed by the requirements in this Code. (b) By virtue of authority vested in the Board under RA 7920, it
hereby direct strict adherence to the provisions of this Code.
1.0.1.2 Scope.
(c) Where deviations from these provisions are necessary, such
(a) Covered. This Code covers the installation of electrical deviations shall not be made, except with written permission from this
conductors, equipment, and raceways; signaling and communications government bodies exercising legal jurisdiction applicable only to the
conductors, equipment, and raceways; and optical fiber cables and particular job for which such permission was granted.
raceways installed within or on, to or from:
1.0.1.4 Enforcement.
(1) Public and private buildings, including but not limited to
residential, commercial, industrial, institutional, cultural, agricultural, (a) This Code is intended for mandatory application by government
agro-industrial, planned unit development and all other bodies exercising legal jurisdiction over electrical installations.
buildings/premises that may require practical safeguarding of persons
and property from the hazards arising from the use of electricity. (b) These government bodies, only through a licensed electrical
(2) Electric generating plants practitioner, shall have the responsibility of implementing the
(3) Industrial plants provisions of this Code in deciding on the approval of equipment and
(4) Transformer stations materials and for granting the special permission contemplated in this
(5) Permanent and temporary substations, etc. Code, where it is assured that equivalent objectives can be achieved by
(6) Airfields establishing and maintaining effective safety.
(7) Railways switchyards
(8) Yards, carnival, parks, parking and other lots (c) The authority having jurisdiction may waive specific
(9) Quarries and mines requirements in this Code or permit alternate methods where it is
(10) Watercraft assured that equivalent objectives can be achieved by establishing and
(11) Dockyards maintaining effective safety.
(12) Trailers
(13) Mobile homes and recreational vehicles (d) This Code may require new products, constructions, or materials
(14) Offshore facilities that may not yet be available at the time this Code is adopted. In such
event, the authority having jurisdiction may permit the use of the
(b) Not Covered. This Code does not cover the following: products, constructions, or materials that comply with the most recent
previous edition of this Code adopted by the jurisdiction.
(1) Installations in railway rolling stock, aircraft, or automotive
vehicles FPN: Application of electrical products and equipment for additional installation or
replacement is suggested to be consulted with a licensed electrical practitioner
(2) Installations of railways for generation, transformation, prior to installation for safety.
transmission, or distribution of power used exclusively for operation
of rolling stock
1.0.1.5 Mandatory Rules, Permissive Rules, and Explanatory
Material. FPN No. 1: See requirements in Section 1.10.1.3.

FPN No. 2: Listed is defined in Article 1.0

(a) Mandatory Rules. Mandatory rules of this Code are those that
identify actions that are specifically required or prohibited and are FPN No. 3: Appendix A contains an informative list of product safety standards for
electrical equipment.
characterized by the use of the terms shall or shall not.
FPN No. 4: Application of electrical equipment and devices shall always be
consulted with a licensed electrical practitioner.
(b) Permissive Rules. Permissive rules of this Code are those that
identify actions that are allowed but not required, are normally used to
1.0.1.8 Wiring Planning.
describe options or alternative methods, and are characterized by the
use of the terms shall be permitted or shall not be required.
(a) Future Expansion and Convenience. Plans and specifications
that provide ample space in raceways, spare raceways, and additional
(c) Explanatory Material. Explanatory material, such as references
spaces allow for future increases in electric power and communication
to other standards, references to related sections of this Code, or
circuits. Distribution centers located in readily accessible locations
information related to a Code rule, is included in this Code in the form
provide convenience and safety of operation.
of fine print notes (FPN). Fine print notes are informational only and
are not enforceable as requirements of this Code.
(b) Number of Circuits in Enclosures. It is elsewhere provided in
this Code that the number of wires and circuits confined in a single
1.0.1.6 Interpretation. In case of controversy, the recommendation of
enclosure be varyingly restricted. Limiting the number of circuits in a
the Code Committee and concurrence of the Board of Electrical
single enclosure will minimizes the effects from a short circuit or
Engineering shall be the final interpretation of any portion of the
ground fault in one circuit.
Philippine Electrical Code Part 1.
1.0.1.9 Metric Units of Measurement. For the purpose of this Code,
1.0.1.7 Examination of Equipment for Safety. For specific items of
metric units of measurement are in accordance with the modernized
equipment and materials referred to in this Code, examinations for
metric system known as the International System of Units (SI).
safety made under standard conditions will provide a basis for
approval where the record is made generally available through
promulgation by organizations properly equipped and qualified for
ARTICLE 1.1 — DEFINITIONS
experimental testing, inspections of the run of goods at factories, and
service-value determination through field inspections. This avoids the
1.1.1.1 Scope. This article contains only those definitions essential to
necessity for repetition of examinations by different examiners,
the proper application of this Code. It is not intended to include
frequently with inadequate facilities for such work, and the confusion
commonly defined general terms or commonly defined technical terms
that would result from conflicting reports as to the suitability of
from related codes and standards. In general, only those terms that are
devices and materials examined for a given purpose.
used in two or more articles are defined in Article 100. Other
It is the intent of this Code that factory-installed internal wiring or the
definitions are included in the article in which they are used but may
construction of equipment need not be inspected at the time of
be referenced in Article 1.0.
installation of the equipment, except to detect alterations or damage, if
Part 1.1.1 of this article contains definitions intended to apply
the equipment has been listed by a qualified electrical testing
wherever the terms are used throughout this Code. Part 1.1.2 contains
laboratory that is recognized as having the facilities described in the
definitions applicable only to the parts of articles specifically covering
preceding paragraph and that requires suitability for installation in
installations and equipment operating at over 600 volts, nominal.
accordance with this Code.
 1.1.1 General FPN: The phrase “authority having jurisdiction” is used in NFPA documents in a
broad manner, since jurisdictions and approval agencies vary, as do their
responsibilities. Where public safety is primary, the AHJ may be a federal, state,
Accessible (as applied to equipment). Admitting close approach; local, or other regional department or individual such as a fire chief; fire marshal;
not guarded by locked doors, elevation, or other effective means. chief of a fire prevention bureau, labor department, or health department; building
official; electrical inspector; or others having statutory authority. For insurance
purposes, an insurance inspection department, rating bureau, or other insurance
Accessible (as applied to wiring methods). Capable of being company representative may be the AHJ. In many circumstances, the property
owner or his or her designated agent assumes the role of the AHJ; at government
removed or exposed without damaging the building structure or finish installations, the commanding officer or departmental official may be the AHJ.
or not permanently closed in by the structure or finish of the building.
Automatic. Self-acting, operating by its own mechanism when
Accessible, Readily (Readily Accessible). Capable of being actuated by some impersonal influence, as, for example, a change in
reached quickly for operation, renewal, or inspections without current, pressure, temperature, or mechanical configuration.
requiring those to whom ready access is requisite to climb over or
remove obstacles or to resort to portable ladders, and so forth. Bathroom. An area including a basin with one or more of the
following: a toilet, a tub, or a shower.
Ampacity. The current, in amperes, that a conductor can carry
continuously under the conditions of use without exceeding its Bonding (Bonded). The permanent joining of metallic parts to form
temperature rating. an electrically conductive path that ensures electrical continuity and
the capacity to conduct safely any current likely to be imposed.
Appliance. Utilization equipment, generally other than industrial,
that is normally built in standardized sizes or types and is installed or Bonding Jumper. A reliable conductor to ensure the required
connected as a unit to perform one or more functions such as clothes electrical conductivity between metal parts required to be electrically
washing, air conditioning, food mixing, deep frying, and so forth. connected.
Approved. Acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. Bonding Jumper, Equipment. The connection between two or
more portions of the equipment grounding conductor.
Askarel. A generic term for a group of nonflammable synthetic
chlorinated hydrocarbons used as electrical insulating media. Askarels Bonding Jumper, Main. The connection between the grounded
of various compositional types are used. Under arcing conditions, the circuit conductor and the equipment grounding conductor at the
gases produced, while consisting predominantly of noncombustible service.
hydrogen chloride, can include varying amounts of combustible gases,
depending on the askarel type. Bonding Jumper, System. The connection between the grounded
circuit conductor and the equipment grounding conductor at a
Attachment Plug (Plug Cap) (Plug). A device that, by insertion in separately derived system.
a receptacle, establishes a connection between the conductors of the
attached flexible cord and the conductors connected permanently to Branch Circuit. The circuit conductors between the final
the receptacle. overcurrent device protecting the circuit and the outlet(s).
Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). The organization, office, or Branch Circuit, Appliance. A branch circuit that supplies energy to
individual responsible for approving equipment, materials, an one or more outlets to which appliances are to be connected and that
installation, or a procedure.
has no permanently connected luminaires (lighting fixtures) that are action of the circuit breaker, which delay decreases as the magnitude
not a part of an appliance. of the current increases.

Branch Circuit, General-Purpose. A branch circuit that supplies Nonadjustable (as applied to circuit breakers). A qualifying term
two or more receptacles or outlets for lighting and appliances. indicating that the circuit breaker does not have any adjustment to alter
the value of current at which it will trip or the time required for its
Branch Circuit, Individual. A branch circuit that supplies only one operation.
utilization equipment.
Setting (of circuit breakers). The value of current, time, or both, at
Branch Circuit, Multiwire. A branch circuit that consists of two or which an adjustable circuit breaker is set to trip.
more ungrounded conductors that have a voltage between them, and a
grounded conductor that has equal voltage between it and each Concealed. Rendered inaccessible by the structure or finish of the
ungrounded conductor of the circuit and that is connected to the building. Wires in concealed raceways are considered concealed, even
neutral or grounded conductor of the system. though they may become accessible by withdrawing them.

Building. A structure that stands alone or that is cut off from Conductor, Bare. A conductor having no covering or electrical
adjoining structures by fire walls with all openings therein protected insulation whatsoever.
by approved fire doors.
Conductor, Covered. A conductor encased within material of
Cabinet. An enclosure that is designed for either surface mounting composition or thickness that is not recognized by this Code as
or flush mounting and is provided with a frame, mat, or trim in which electrical insulation.
a swinging door or doors are or can be hung.
Conductor, Insulated. A conductor encased within material of
Circuit Breaker. A device designed to open and close a circuit by composition and thickness that is recognized by this Code as electrical
nonautomatic means and to open the circuit automatically on a insulation.
predetermined overcurrent without damage to itself when properly
applied within its rating. Conduit Body. A separate portion of a conduit or tubing system that
provides access through a removable cover(s) to the interior of the
FPN: The automatic opening means can be integral, direct acting with the circuit system at a junction of two or more sections of the system or at a
breaker, or remote from the circuit breaker.
terminal point of the system.
Boxes such as FS and FD or larger cast or sheet metal boxes are not
Adjustable (as applied to circuit breakers). A qualifying term
classified as conduit bodies.
indicating that the circuit breaker can be set to trip at various values of
current, time, or both, within a predetermined range.
Connector, Pressure (Solderless). A device that establishes a
connection between two or more conductors or between one or more
Instantaneous Trip (as applied to circuit breakers). A qualifying
conductors and a terminal by means of mechanical pressure and
term indicating that no delay is purposely introduced in the tripping
without the use of solder.
action of the circuit breaker.
Continuous Load. A load where the maximum current is expected
Inverse Time (as applied to circuit breakers). A qualifying term
to continue for 3 hours or more.
indicating that there is purposely introduced a delay in the tripping
 Controller. A device or group of devices that serves to govern, in Duty, Continuous. Operation at a substantially constant load for an
some predetermined manner, the electric power delivered to the indefinitely long time.
apparatus to which it is connected.
Duty, Intermittent. Operation for alternate intervals of (1) load and
Cooking Unit, Counter-Mounted. A cooking appliance designed no load; or (2) load and rest; or (3) load, no load, and rest.
for mounting in or on a counter and consisting of one or more heating
elements, internal wiring, and built-in or mountable controls. Duty, Periodic. Intermittent operation in which the load conditions
are regularly recurrent.
Coordination (Selective). Localization of an overcurrent condition
to restrict outages to the circuit or equipment affected, accomplished Duty, Short-Time. Operation at a substantially constant load for a
by the choice of overcurrent protective devices and their ratings or short and definite, specified time.
settings.
Duty, Varying. Operation at loads, and for intervals of time, both of
Copper-Clad Aluminum Conductors. Conductors drawn from a which may be subject to wide variation.
copper-clad aluminum rod with the copper metallurgically bonded to
an aluminum core. The copper forms a minimum of 10 percent of the Dwelling Unit. A single unit, providing complete and independent
cross-sectional area of a solid conductor or each strand of a stranded living facilities for one or more persons, including permanent
conductor. provisions for living, sleeping, cooking, and sanitation.

Cutout Box. An enclosure designed for surface mounting that has Dwelling, One-Family. A building that consists solely of one
swinging doors or covers secured directly to and telescoping with the dwelling unit.
walls of the box proper.
Dwelling, Two-Family. A building that consists solely of two
Dead Front. Without live parts exposed to a person on the operating dwelling units.
side of the equipment.
Dwelling, Multifamily. A building that contains three or more
Demand Factor. The ratio of the maximum demand of a system, or dwelling units.
part of a system, to the total connected load of a system or the part of
the system under consideration. Electric Sign. A fixed, stationary, or portable self-contained,
electrically illuminated utilization equipment with words or symbols
Device. A unit of an electrical system that is intended to carry or designed to convey information or attract attention.
control but not utilize electric energy.
Electrical Practitioner, Licensed. One who has undergone training
Disconnecting Means. A device, or group of devices, or other in electrical engineering and has complied with the requirements of
means by which the conductors of a circuit can be disconnected from Republic Act 7920 or otherwise known as the New Electrical
their source of supply. Engineering Law.

Dusttight. Constructed so that dust will not enter the enclosing case Electrical Practitioner, Non-Licensed. An electrical practitioner
under specified test conditions. that has not complied with the requirements of RA 7920 or a qualified
person with relevant education and experience to enable him or her to
perceive risks and to avoid hazards which electricity can create.
 Festoon Lighting. A string of outdoor lights that is suspended
Enclosed. Surrounded by a case, housing, fence, or wall(s) that between two points.
prevents persons from accidentally contacting energized parts.
Fitting. An accessory such as a locknut, bushing, or other part of a
Enclosure. The case or housing of apparatus, or the fence or walls wiring system that is intended primarily to perform a mechanical
surrounding an installation to prevent personnel from accidentally rather than an electrical function.
contacting energized parts or to protect the equipment from physical
damage. Garage. A building or portion of a building in which one or more
self-propelled vehicles can be kept for use, sale, storage, rental, repair,
FPN: See Table 4.30.7.11 for examples of enclosure types. exhibition, or demonstration purposes.
Energized. Electrically connected to a source of voltage. FPN: For commercial garages, repair and storage, see Article 5.11.

Equipment. A general term including material, fittings, devices, Ground. A conducting connection, whether intentional or
appliances, luminaires (fixtures), apparatus, and the like used as a part accidental, between an electrical circuit or equipment and the earth or
of, or in connection with, an electrical installation. to some conducting body that serves in place of the earth.

Explosionproof Apparatus. Apparatus enclosed in a case that is Grounded. Connected to earth or to some conducting body that
capable of withstanding an explosion of a specified gas or vapor that serves in place of the earth.
may occur within it and of preventing the ignition of a specified gas or
vapor surrounding the enclosure by sparks, flashes, or explosion of the Grounded, Effectively. Intentionally connected to earth through a
gas or vapor within, and that operates at such an external temperature ground connection or connections of sufficiently low impedance and
that a surrounding flammable atmosphere will not be ignited thereby. having sufficient current-carrying capacity to prevent the buildup of
voltages that may result in undue hazards to connected equipment or
FPN: For further information, see ANSI/UL 1203-1999, Explosion-Proof and Dust- to persons.
Ignition-Proof Electrical Equipment for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations.

Grounded, Solidly. Connected to ground without inserting any

Exposed (as applied to live parts). Capable of being inadvertently
resistor or impedance device.
touched or approached nearer than a safe distance by a person. It is
applied to parts that are not suitably guarded, isolated, or insulated.
Grounded Conductor. A system or circuit conductor that is
intentionally grounded.
Exposed (as applied to wiring methods). On or attached to the
surface or behind panels designed to allow access.
Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI). A device intended for
the protection of personnel that functions to de-energize a circuit or
Externally Operable. Capable of being operated without exposing
portion thereof within an established period of time when a current to
the operator to contact with live parts.
ground exceeds the values established for a Class A device.
Feeder. All circuit conductors between the service equipment, the FPN: Class A ground-fault circuit interrupters trip when the current to ground has a
source of a separately derived system, or other power supply source value in the range of 4 mA to 6 mA. For further information, see UL 943, Standard
and the final branch-circuit overcurrent device. for Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters.
 Ground-Fault Protection of Equipment. A system intended to sized to allow personnel to reach into, but not enter, for the purpose of
provide protection of equipment from damaging line-to-ground fault installing, operating, or maintaining equipment or wiring or both.
currents by operating to cause a disconnecting means to open all
ungrounded conductors of the faulted circuit. This protection is Hoistway. Any shaftway, hatchway, well hole, or other vertical
provided at current levels less than those required to protect opening or space in which an elevator or dumbwaiter is designed to
conductors from damage through the operation of a supply circuit operate.
overcurrent device.
Identified (as applied to equipment). Recognizable as suitable for
Grounding Conductor. A conductor used to connect equipment or the specific purpose, function, use, environment, application, and so
the grounded circuit of a wiring system to a grounding electrode or forth, where described in a particular Code requirement.
electrodes.
FPN: Some examples of ways to determine suitability of equipment for a specific
purpose, environment, or application include investigations by a qualified testing
Grounding Conductor, Equipment. The conductor used to laboratory (listing and labeling), an inspection agency, or other organizations
connect the non–current-carrying metal parts of equipment, raceways, concerned with product evaluation.
and other enclosures to the system grounded conductor, the grounding
electrode conductor, or both, at the service equipment or at the source In Sight From (Within Sight From, Within Sight). Where this
of a separately derived system. Code specifies that one equipment shall be “in sight from,” “within
sight from,” or “within sight,” and so forth, of another equipment, the
Grounding Electrode. A device that establishes an electrical specified equipment is to be visible and not more than 15 m distant
connection to the earth. from the other.

Grounding Electrode Conductor. The conductor used to connect Interrupting Rating. The highest current at rated voltage that a
the grounding electrode(s) to the equipment grounding conductor, to device is intended to interrupt under standard test conditions.
the grounded conductor, or to both, at the service, at each building or
structure where supplied by a feeder(s) or branch circuit(s), or at the FPN: Equipment intended to interrupt current at other than fault levels may have its
interrupting rating implied in other ratings, such as horsepower or locked rotor
source of a separately derived system. current.

Guarded. Covered, shielded, fenced, enclosed, or otherwise Isolated (as applied to location). Not readily accessible to persons
protected by means of suitable covers, casings, barriers, rails, screens, unless special means for access are used.
mats, or platforms to remove the likelihood of approach or contact by
persons or objects to a point of danger. Labeled. Equipment or materials to which has been attached a label,
symbol, or other identifying mark of an organization that is acceptable
Guest Room. An accommodation combining living, sleeping, to the authority having jurisdiction and concerned with product
sanitary, and storage facilities within a compartment. evaluation, that maintains periodic inspection of production of labeled
equipment or materials, and by whose labeling the manufacturer
Guest Suite. An accommodation with two or more contiguous indicates compliance with appropriate standards or performance in a
rooms comprising a compartment, with or without doors between such specified manner.
rooms, that provides living, sleeping, sanitary, and storage facilities.
Lighting Outlet. An outlet intended for the direct connection of a
Handhole Enclosure. An enclosure identified for use in lampholder, a luminaire (lighting fixture), or a pendant cord
underground systems, provided with an open or closed bottom, and terminating in a lampholder.
 ventilating openings and inspection windows) containing primary
Listed. Equipment, materials, or services included in a list published power circuit switching, interrupting devices, or both, with buses and
by an organization that is acceptable to the authority having connections. The assembly may include control and auxiliary devices.
jurisdiction and concerned with evaluation of products or services, that Access to the interior of the enclosure is provided by doors, removable
maintains periodic inspection of production of listed equipment or covers, or both.
materials or periodic evaluation of services, and whose listing states
that the equipment, material, or services either meets appropriate Motor Control Center. An assembly of one or more enclosed
designated standards or has been tested and found suitable for a sections having a common power bus and principally containing motor
specified purpose. control units.

FPN: The means for identifying listed equipment may vary for each organization Multioutlet Assembly. A type of surface, flush, or freestanding
concerned with product evaluation, some of which do not recognize equipment as
listed unless it is also labeled. Use of the system employed by the listing raceway designed to hold conductors and receptacles, assembled in the
organization allows the authority having jurisdiction to identify a listed product. field or at the factory.

Live Parts. Conductor or conductive part intended to be energized Nonautomatic. Action requiring personal intervention for its
in normal use. control. As applied to an electric controller, nonautomatic control does
not necessarily imply a manual controller, but only that personal
Location, Damp. Locations protected from weather and not subject intervention is necessary.
to saturation with water or other liquids but subject to moderate
degrees of moisture. Examples of such locations include partially Nonlinear Load. A load where the wave shape of the steady-state
protected locations under canopies, marquees, roofed open porches, current does not follow the wave shape of the applied voltage.
and like locations, and interior locations subject to moderate degrees
of moisture, such as some basements, some barns, and some cold- FPN: Electronic equipment, electronic/electric-discharge lighting, adjustable-speed
drive systems, and similar equipment may be nonlinear loads.
storage warehouses.
Outlet. A point on the wiring system at which current is taken to
Location, Dry. A location not normally subject to dampness or
supply utilization equipment.
wetness. A location classified as dry may be temporarily subject to
dampness or wetness, as in the case of a building under construction.
Outline Lighting. An arrangement of incandescent lamps, electric
discharge lighting, or other electrically powered light sources to
Location, Wet. Installations under ground or in concrete slabs or
outline or call attention to certain features such as the shape of a
masonry in direct contact with the earth; in locations subject to
building or the decoration of a window.
saturation with water or other liquids, such as vehicle washing areas;
and in unprotected locations exposed to weather.
Overcurrent. Any current in excess of the rated current of
equipment or the ampacity of a conductor. It may result from
Luminaire. A complete lighting unit consisting of a lamp or lamps
overload, short circuit, or ground fault.
together with the parts designed to distribute the light, to position and
protect the lamps and ballast (where applicable), and to connect the FPN: A current in excess of rating may be accommodated by certain equipment
lamps to the power supply. and conductors for a given set of conditions. Therefore, the rules for overcurrent
protection are specific for particular situations.
Metal-Enclosed Power Switchgear. A switchgear assembly
completely enclosed on all sides and top with sheet metal (except for
 Overload. Operation of equipment in excess of normal, full-load raceways, cellular metal floor raceways, surface raceways, wireways,
rating, or of a conductor in excess of rated ampacity that, when it and busways.
persists for a sufficient length of time, would cause damage or
dangerous overheating. A fault, such as a short circuit or ground fault, Rainproof. Constructed, protected, or treated so as to prevent rain
is not an overload. from interfering with the successful operation of the apparatus under
specified test conditions.
Panelboard. A single panel or group of panel units designed for
assembly in the form of a single panel, including buses and automatic Raintight. Constructed or protected so that exposure to a beating
overcurrent devices, and equipped with or without switches for the rain will not result in the entrance of water under specified test
control of light, heat, or power circuits; designed to be placed in a conditions.
cabinet or cutout box placed in or against a wall, partition, or other
support; and accessible only from the front. Receptacle. A receptacle is a contact device installed at the outlet
for the connection of an attachment plug. A single receptacle is a
Plenum. A compartment or chamber to which one or more air ducts single contact device with no other contact device on the same yoke. A
are connected and that forms part of the air distribution system. multiple receptacle is two or more contact devices on the same yoke.

Power Outlet. An enclosed assembly that may include receptacles, Receptacle Outlet. An outlet where one or more receptacles are
circuit breakers, fuseholders, fused switches, buses, and watt-hour installed.
meter mounting means; intended to supply and control power to
mobile homes, recreational vehicles, park trailers, or boats or to serve Remote-Control Circuit. Any electric circuit that controls any
as a means for distributing power required to operate mobile or other circuit through a relay or an equivalent device.
temporarily installed equipment.
Sealable Equipment. Equipment enclosed in a case or cabinet that
Premises Wiring (System). That interior and exterior wiring, is provided with a means of sealing or locking so that live parts cannot
including power, lighting, control, and signal circuit wiring together be made accessible without opening the enclosure. The equipment
with all their associated hardware, fittings, and wiring devices, both may or may not be operable without opening the enclosure.
permanently and temporarily installed, that extends from the service
point or source of power, such as a battery, a solar photovoltaic Separately Derived System. A premises wiring system whose
system, or a generator, transformer, or converter windings, to the power is derived from a source of electric energy or equipment other
outlet(s). Such wiring does not include wiring internal to appliances, than a service. Such systems have no direct electrical connection,
luminaires (fixtures), motors, controllers, motor control centers, and including a solidly connected grounded circuit conductor, to supply
similar equipment. conductors originating in another system.

Raceway. An enclosed channel of metal or nonmetallic materials Service. The conductors and equipment for delivering electric
designed expressly for holding wires, cables, or busbars, with energy from the serving utility to the wiring system of the premises
additional functions as permitted in this Code. Raceways include, but served.
are not limited to, rigid metal conduit, rigid nonmetallic conduit,
intermediate metal conduit, liquidtight flexible conduit, flexible Service Cable. Service conductors made up in the form of a cable.
metallic tubing, flexible metal conduit, electrical nonmetallic tubing,
electrical metallic tubing, underfloor raceways, cellular concrete floor Service Conductors. The conductors from the service point to the
service disconnecting means.
 Service Drop. The overhead service conductors from the last pole Solar Photovoltaic System. The total components and subsystems
or other aerial support to and including the splices, if any, connecting that, in combination, convert solar energy into electrical energy
to the service-entrance conductors at the building or other structure. suitable for connection to a utilization load.

Service-Entrance Conductors, Overhead System. The service Special Permission. The written consent of the authority having
conductors between the terminals of the service equipment and a point jurisdiction.
usually outside the building, clear of building walls, where joined by
tap or splice to the service drop. Structure. That which is built or constructed.

Service-Entrance Conductors, Underground System. The Supplementary Overcurrent Protective Device. A device
service conductors between the terminals of the service equipment and intended to provide limited overcurrent protection for specific
the point of connection to the service lateral. applications and utilization equipment such as luminaires (lighting
fixtures) and appliances. This limited protection is in addition to the
FPN: Where service equipment is located outside the building walls, there may be protection provided in the required branch circuit by the branch circuit
no service-entrance conductors or they may be entirely outside the building.
overcurrent protective device.
Service Equipment. The necessary equipment, usually consisting
Switch, Bypass Isolation. A manually operated device used in
of a circuit breaker(s) or switch(es) and fuse(s) and their accessories,
conjunction with a transfer switch to provide a means of directly
connected to the load end of service conductors to a building or other
connecting load conductors to a power source and of disconnecting the
structure, or an otherwise designated area, and intended to constitute
transfer switch.
the main control and cutoff of the supply.
Switch, General-Use. A switch intended for use in general
Service Lateral. The underground service conductors between the
distribution and branch circuits. It is rated in amperes, and it is capable
street main, including any risers at a pole or other structure or from
of interrupting its rated current at its rated voltage.
transformers, and the first point of connection to the service-entrance
conductors in a terminal box or meter or other enclosure, inside or
Switch, General-Use Snap. A form of general-use switch
outside the building wall. Where there is no terminal box, meter, or
constructed so that it can be installed in device boxes or on box covers,
other enclosure, the point of connection is considered to be the point
or otherwise used in conjunction with wiring systems recognized by
of entrance of the service conductors into the building.
this Code.
Service Point. The point of connection between the facilities of the
Switch, Isolating. A switch intended for isolating an electric circuit
serving utility and the premises wiring.
from the source of power. It has no interrupting rating, and it is
intended to be operated only after the circuit has been opened by some
Show Window. Any window used or designed to be used for the
other means.
display of goods or advertising material, whether it is fully or partly
enclosed or entirely open at the rear and whether or not it has a
Switch, Motor-Circuit. A switch rated in horsepower that is
platform raised higher than the street floor level.
capable of interrupting the maximum operating overload current of a
motor of the same horsepower rating as the switch at the rated voltage.
Signaling Circuit. Any electric circuit that energizes signaling
equipment.
 Switch, Transfer. An automatic or nonautomatic device for
transferring one or more load conductor connections from one power Voltage, Nominal. A nominal value assigned to a circuit or system
source to another. for the purpose of conveniently designating its voltage class (e.g.,
120/240 volts, 480Y/277 volts, 600 volts). The actual voltage at which
Switchboard. A large single panel, frame, or assembly of panels on a circuit operates can vary from the nominal within a range that
which are mounted on the face, back, or both, switches, overcurrent permits satisfactory operation of equipment.
and other protective devices, buses, and usually instruments.
Switchboards are generally accessible from the rear as well as from FPN: See ANSI C84.1-1995, Voltage Ratings for Electric Power Systems and
Equipment (60 Hz).
the front and are not intended to be installed in cabinets.
Voltage to Ground. For grounded circuits, the voltage between the
Thermally Protected (as applied to motors). The words
given conductor and that point or conductor of the circuit that is
Thermally Protected appearing on the nameplate of a motor or motor-
grounded; for ungrounded circuits, the greatest voltage between the
compressor indicate that the motor is provided with a thermal
given conductor and any other conductor of the circuit.
protector.
Watertight. Constructed so that moisture will not enter the
Thermal Protector (as applied to motors). A protective device for
enclosure under specified test conditions.
assembly as an integral part of a motor or motor-compressor that,
when properly applied, protects the motor against dangerous
Weatherproof. Constructed or protected so that exposure to the
overheating due to overload and failure to start.
weather will not interfere with successful operation.
FPN: The thermal protector may consist of one or more sensing elements integral
with the motor or motor-compressor and an external control device. FPN: Rainproof, raintight, or watertight equipment can fulfill the requirements for
weatherproof where varying weather conditions other than wetness, such as snow,
ice, dust, or temperature extremes, are not a factor.
Utilization Equipment. Equipment that utilizes electric energy for
electronic, electromechanical, chemical, heating, lighting, or similar 1.1.2 Over 600 Volts, Nominal
purposes.
Whereas the preceding definitions are intended to apply wherever the
Ventilated. Provided with a means to permit circulation of air terms are used throughout this Code, the following definitions are
sufficient to remove an excess of heat, fumes, or vapors. applicable only to parts of the article specifically covering installations
and equipment operating at over 600 volts, nominal.
Volatile Flammable Liquid. A flammable liquid having a flash
point below 38°C, or a flammable liquid whose temperature is above Electronically Actuated Fuse. An overcurrent protective device that
its flash point, or a Class II combustible liquid that has a vapor generally consists of a control module that provides current sensing,
pressure not exceeding 276 kPa at 38°C and whose temperature is electronically derived time–current characteristics, energy to initiate
above its flash point. tripping, and an interrupting module that interrupts current when an
overcurrent occurs. Electronically actuated fuses may or may not
Voltage (of a circuit). The greatest root-mean-square (rms) operate in a current-limiting fashion, depending on the type of control
(effective) difference of potential between any two conductors of the selected.
circuit concerned.
Fuse. An overcurrent protective device with a circuit-opening
FPN: Some systems, such as 3-phase 4-wire, single-phase 3-wire, and 3-wire
direct current, may have various circuits of various voltages.
fusible part that is heated and severed by the passage of overcurrent
through it. carrier, or disconnecting blade. The fuseholder or fuse carrier may
include a conducting element (fuse link) or may act as the
FPN: A fuse comprises all the parts that form a unit capable of performing the disconnecting blade by the inclusion of a nonfusible member.
prescribed functions. It may or may not be the complete device necessary to
connect it into an electrical circuit.
Disconnecting (or Isolating) Switch (Disconnector, Isolator). A
Controlled Vented Power Fuse. A fuse with provision for mechanical switching device used for isolating a circuit or equipment
controlling discharge circuit interruption such that no solid material from a source of power.
may be exhausted into the surrounding atmosphere.
Disconnecting Means. A device, group of devices, or other means
FPN: The fuse is designed so that discharged gases will not ignite or damage whereby the conductors of a circuit can be disconnected from their
insulation in the path of the discharge or propagate a flashover to or between source of supply.
grounded members or conduction members in the path of the discharge where the
distance between the vent and such insulation or conduction members conforms to
manufacturer’s recommendations. Interrupter Switch. A switch capable of making, carrying, and
interrupting specified currents.
Expulsion Fuse Unit (Expulsion Fuse). A vented fuse unit in
which the expulsion effect of gases produced by the arc and lining of Oil Cutout (Oil-Filled Cutout). A cutout in which all or part of the
the fuseholder, either alone or aided by a spring, extinguishes the arc. fuse support and its fuse link or disconnecting blade is mounted in oil
with complete immersion of the contacts and the fusible portion of the
Nonvented Power Fuse. A fuse without intentional provision for the conducting element (fuse link) so that arc interruption by severing of
escape of arc gases, liquids, or solid particles to the atmosphere during the fuse link or by opening of the contacts will occur under oil.
circuit interruption.
Oil Switch. A switch having contacts that operate under oil (or
Power Fuse Unit. A vented, nonvented, or controlled vented fuse askarel or other suitable liquid).
unit in which the arc is extinguished by being drawn through solid
material, granular material, or liquid, either alone or aided by a spring. Regulator Bypass Switch. A specific device or combination of
devices designed to bypass a regulator.
Vented Power Fuse. A fuse with provision for the escape of arc
gases, liquids, or solid particles to the surrounding atmosphere during
circuit interruption. ARTICLE 1.2 — PERMITS AND
INSPECTION CERTIFICATES
Multiple Fuse. An assembly of two or more single-pole fuses.
1.2.1 Electrical Permits
Switching Device. A device designed to close, open, or both, one or
more electric circuits. 1.2.1.1 Electrical Permit Needed Before Work is Started. Before
starting any installation work, alternation, repair or extension on any
Circuit Breaker. A switching device capable of making, carrying, electrical system, the owners, lessors, operators, occupants, or licensed
and interrupting currents under normal circuit conditions, and also of electrical practitioners shall obtain Electrical Permit for buildings,
making, carrying for a specified time, and interrupting currents under trailers, mobile homes, or other premises from the Office of the Local
specified abnormal circuit conditions, such as those of short circuit. Building Official, and for watercrafts from the Maritime Industry
Authority (Marina). In securing the electrical permit, the services of a
Cutout. An assembly of a fuse support with either a fuseholder, fuse
licensed electrical practitioner is required under the New Electrical Licensed Electrical Practitioner in-charge of the design, and the
Engineering Law (RA 7920). licensed electrical practitioner in-charge of the installation shall post a
copy of their respective Professional Regulation Commission (PRC)
1.2.1.2 Requirement for Electrical Permit: Signatures and identification card together with the electrical permit at all times.
submittals.
1.2.2 Electrical Inspection
(a) The Electrical Permit shall include the following minimum
information: 1.2.2.1 Application for Inspection. An application for inspection
shall be filed with the government authority concerned before a
1. Applicant. preliminary and/or final inspection is done.
2.Professional Electrical Engineer who signed and sealed
electrical plans and specifications. 1.2.2.2 Certificate of Inspection. No electrical installation,
3. Licensed Electrical Practitioner who is in-charge of electrical alteration, and/or addition shall be connected or reconnected to any
works. power supply or any other source of electrical energy without a
4. Building Owner. Certificate of Final Electrical Inspection/Completion obtained from
5. Lot Owner. the local building official signed by their respective licensed electrical
6. Building Official practitioner.

(b) Five (5) sets of complete electrical plans and specifications 1.2.3 Special
signed and sealed by Professional Electrical Engineer.
1.2.3.1 Temporary Installation. For temporary electrical installation,
1.2.1.3 Electrical Permit to Be Issued Immediately. the same procedure as stated above shall be followed. At the end of the
period covered by the certificate of inspection, the temporary
(a) The application, upon receipt, shall be checked immediately by installation shall be removed. Extended use of the temporary
the local building official or his representatives for compliance with installation shall require a new approval electrical permit.
the requirements. If complying, the Electrical Permits shall be issued
upon payment of the corresponding electrical fees. 1.2.3.3 Special Permission Required. Electrical equipment and
wiring not specifically covered or mentioned in the various articles of
(b) If the project is extensive and required more time for checking this Code shall require special permission and written approval of a
and for computations of fees, the issuance of the Electrical Permit licensed electrical practitioner under the enforcing government
need not be issued immediately. The delay shall not be longer than authority concerned, prior to installation.
five (5) working days after which time application together with the
accompanying plans shall be considered as complying with all the 1.2.3.4 Reconnection of Disconnected Services. In cases where
requirement and the electrical permit shall be issued immediately service has been cut off for more than one (1) year, a new certificate of
thereafter. final electrical inspection shall be required before reconnection.

1.2.1.4 Posting of Electrical Permit. A copy of the Electrical Permit,

upon issuance, shall be posted at a conspicuous location at the job site
and shall not be removed until final inspection and approval of the
work shall have been made.
 1.3.1 General
(2) Location of service drop, service equipment and nearest pole
1.3.1.1 Drawing Sheet Sizes. of the utility company furnishing electrical energy; location of the
meter as well as sizes of service entrance wires, conduits and service
(a) Electrical plans and drawings shall be drawn on drawing sheets equipment; and
of the following standard sizes:
(3) Clearance of the path or run of service drops and entrance
760 mm x 1 000 mm wires to adjacent existing and/or proposed structures.
600 mm x 900 mm
500 mm x 760 mm (b) Legend or Symbols. Refer to Appendix A – Electrical Symbols

(b) In cases such as projects of large magnitude, exemption in the (c) General Notes and/or Specifications. General Notes and/or
use of the standard drawing sheets may be granted by the office of the Specifications, written on the plans or submitted on separate standard
local building official. Refer to Appendix E. size sheets shall show:

(c) For a dwelling unit having a floor area of not more than 50 (1) Nature of electrical service, including number of phases,
square meters with a total load not exceeding 3 680 VA, a drawing number of wires, voltage and frequency;
sheet of size 297 mm x 420 mm (A3 size) is permitted.
(2) Type of wiring;
1.3.1.2 Drawing Scale. Appropriate metric drawing scales shall be
used. a. Service entrance
b. Feeders, sub-feeders and branch circuit wires for lighting
1.3.1.3. Graphic Scale. Since the size of the drawing sheet can be and/or power load
changed photographically, graphic scale shall be shown on each c. Fire alarm system, if required by law
drawing sheet. d. Signaling and communication

FPN: Graphic scale denotes nominal or average plan scale and remains true when (3) Special equipment to be installed, indicating ratings and
plans are photographically reduced.
classification of service or duty cycle of;

a. Rectifiers
1.3.2 Plans and Specifications
b. Heaters
c. X-ray apparatus
1.3.2.1 Plan Requirements.
d. Electric welding equipment
e. Others
(a) Location and Site Plans. Location and site plans, with proposed
structure and owner’s land drawn to appropriate metric scale shall
(4) System or method of grounding;
show:
(5) Type and rating of main disconnecting means, overcurrent
(1) Bordering areas showing public or well-known streets,
protection (OCP) and branch circuit wiring;
landmarks and/or structures which need not be drawn to scale unless
they extend into the area concerned;
(6) Clearances of service drop, burial depth for service lateral,
mounting height and clearance for service equipment, mounting height
and clearance for kWh meter. a. Location of outlets, equipment and/or apparatus and controls;
b. Complete circuit showing no. and size of raceway and wire;
(d) Electrical Layout. Floor plan showing location of equipment
and devices, and their interconnection wiring. (e) Schedule of Loads. Schedule of load in tabulated form shall
indicate:
(1) Plan for Power. Layout and wiring plans for power on the
floor plans drawn to scale, shall show: (1) Motor Loads;

a. Sizes and location of service entrance conductors, raceways, a. Motors as numbered or identified in power layout
metering equipment, main switchboard, layout of feeders and b. Type of motor
distribution panels or switches and their sizes, types and ratings; c. Horsepower/kilowatt/kilovolt ampere rating
b. Complete circuits of motors and other electrical equipment, d. Voltage rating
their controlling devices, their locations and ratings; e. Full-load current rating
c. Complete wiring of emergency power system, if any; f. Frequency rating other than 60 hertz
d. Nature of processes/activities carried out in each room or area g. Number of phases
h. Type and size of wiring
FPN: In residences, apartment houses and small commercial establishments, i. Protective device rating
layout of equipment and motors of one horsepower or less may be incorporated in
the layout for General Lighting and Receptacle Outlets. In general, layout of motors
and power outlets not exceeding a total of ten, may be included in the lighting (2) Lighting and Receptacle Loads;
layout provided such inclusion will not make reading, interpretation and/or checking
of said plan difficult.
a. Panel as numbered in the feeder diagram
(2) Plan for Lighting and Receptacle Outlets. Layout and wiring b. Circuit designation number
plans for general lighting and receptacle outlets on floor plans drawn c. Number of lighting outlets in each circuit
to scale, shall show: d. Number of switches in each circuit
e. Number of receptacles outlets (convenience outlets)
a. Location, type and rating of lighting fixtures, indicating f. Voltage of circuit
illumination in lux in each room or area. In residences, hotels, g. Type and size of wiring
apartment houses, and churches, the illumination level in each room or h. Protective device rating
area need not be shown nor computed;
b. Location of switches for each fixtures or group of fixtures; (3) Other Loads.
c. Location of receptacle outlets and appliances to be served and
their ratings; a. Designation number on plan
d. Complete circuits of the lighting and receptacle outlets; b. Description of load
e. Complete wiring of emergency lighting system, if any; c. Classification of service duty, if required
f. A separate drawing showing layout of receptacle outlets may d. Rating of kilovolt-ampere or kilowatt
be made at the discretion of the design engineer. e. Phase loading indicating full load line current
f. Voltage rating
(3) Plan for Fire Alarm Circuits. Layout and wiring plans of fire g. Type and size of wiring
alarm station, fire alarm bell, fire alarm control panel, and other shall h. Protective device rating
be drawn to scale and show:
 (f) Design Analysis. Design analysis shall be included on the the conductor
drawings or shall be submitted on separate sheets of standard size, and
shall show: (4) Load Center.

(1)Branch circuits, sub-feeders, feeders, busways, and service a. Identification and/or labeling of load center showing type and
entrance; rating of transformer, switches, circuit breaker and other related
devices
(2) Types, ratings, and trip settings of overload protective devices; b. Incoming and outgoing feeders, type, size and voltage
c. Equipment grounding
(3) Calculation of short circuit current for determining the
interrupting capacity of overurrent protection device for residential, 1.3.2.2 Title Block. Title block or nameplate of plans and drawing
commercial, and industrial establishment; shall be a standard strip of 40 mm high at the bottom of the sheet.
It shall contain the following:
(4) Calculation of voltage drops.
(a) Name and location of installation or project;
(g) One Line Diagram. One line diagram shall indicate:
(b) Name, signature and address of owner/manager/operator;
(1) Lighting and Receptacle Outlet Loads;
(c) Title of sheet;
a. Single line or schematics diagram of lighting and receptacles
panelboards showing mains and branch circuit rating; (d) Name, signature and seal of Professional Electrical Engineer
b. Size of conductors for feeders. together with Professional Regulation Commission professional
license number and validity, Professional Tax Receipt Number, and
(2) Motor Loads; Tax Identification Number;

a. Rating in kilowatts/horsepower/kilovolt ampere (e) Scale used, date drawn; and

b. Full load current
c. Locked rotor current (f) Sheet number.
d. Phase connection for 1-phase motor on a 3-phase system
e. Rated voltage 1.3.2.3 Other Details.
f. Type and size of wiring, indicating load in amperes
g. Electric motors shall be numbered consecutively to (a) Exposed conductors shall show:
correspond to their numbers in the layout
(1) Means of support and types of insulators; and
(3) Feeders and Subfeeders;
(2) Spacings and clearances.
a. Identification and/or labeling of feeders and subfeeders
b. Size and type of wires and raceway (b) Auxiliary gutters, wireways, busways, cabinets, boxes,
c. Protective devices and controls metallic raceways, underground installations, other than specified
d. The allowable ampacity of the conductor over the designed in the Code shall show:
load current in amperes expressed as a ratio and indicated along side
 (1) Installation details;
(1) Materials and construction of walls, floors, roof, windows,
(2) Conductor supports, separators, and attachments where enclosures, doors, and their dimensions, and
required by this Code; and
(2) Ventilation and drainage systems and other safeguards.
(3) Dimensions and description or specifications.
(c) Substation electrical requirements such as;
(c) Private pole installations shall show:
(1) Plan view showing location and sizes of equipment installed,
(1) Construction and installation details and dimensions;
(2) Clearances and spacings between exposed current-carrying and
(2) Pole top wiring details including line hardware; and noncurrent-carrying portions and grounding equipment, and

(3) Guying details. (3) Grounding system.

(d) Low energy power and low voltage power installation shall (d) Cross sectional views showing;
show:
(1) Horizontal and vertical clearances between exposed parts and
(1) Details of battery installation and/or other source of low adjacent surfaces,
voltage or low energy power;
(2) Horizontal and vertical clearances of exposed parts from
(2) Equipment, wiring, actuating mechanism and protective floor/ceiling,
devices; and
(3) Finished floor level and ground level.
(3) Ventilation details whenever necessary.
(e) Miscellaneous;
1.3.3 Substation Plans and Specifications
(1) Specification of equipment,
1.3.3.1 Indoor Substation. Indoor substation plans shall show:
(2) Wiring of lighting and remote control systems,
(a) Location and dimensions of;
(3) One-line diagram(s) of entire installation with voltage
(1) Substation in building plan drawn to scale, indicated,

(2) Building with respect to entire compound or property, (4) Computations on size of wires, busbar, transformer, fuses,
switches and breaker, and
(3) Incoming and outgoing lines, and
(5) Class of insulation or insulators.
(4) Windows, doors, and other openings.
1.3.3.2 Outdoor Substation. Outdoor substation plans shall show
(b) Substation structural requirements; same items as indoor substation except that in lieu of walls and roof,
details of fence and supporting steel structure shall be shown in
accordance with the latest edition of the Philippine Electrical Code, (5) Heating effects under normal conditions of use and also under
Part 2. abnormal conditions likely to arise in service

(6) Arcing effects

ARTICLE 110 — REQUIREMENTS FOR
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS (7) Classification by type, size, voltage, current capacity, and
specific use
1.10.1 General
(8) Other factors that contribute to the practical safeguarding of
1.10.1.1 Scope. This article covers general requirements for the persons using or likely to come in contact with the equipment
examination and approval, installation and use, access to and spaces
about electrical conductors and equipment; enclosures intended for (b) Installation and Use. Listed or labeled equipment shall be
personnel entry; and tunnel installations. installed and used in accordance with any instructions included in the
listing or labeling.
1.10.1.2 Approval. The conductors and equipment required or
permitted by this Code shall be acceptable only if approved. 1.10.1.4 Voltages. Throughout this Code, the voltage considered shall
be that at which the circuit operates. The voltage rating of electrical
FPN: See 1.0.1.7, Examination of Equipment for Safety, and 1.10.1.3, equipment shall not be less than the nominal voltage of a circuit to
Examination, Identification, Installation, and Use of Equipment. See definitions of
Approved, Identified, Labeled, and Listed. which it is connected.

1.10.1.3 Examination, Identification, Installation, and Use of 1.10.1.5 Conductors. Conductors normally used to carry current shall
Equipment. be of copper unless otherwise provided in this Code. Where the
conductor material is not specified, the material and the sizes given in
(a) Examination. In judging equipment, considerations such as the this Code shall apply to copper conductors. Where other materials are
following shall be evaluated: used, the size shall be changed accordingly.

FPN: For aluminum and copper-clad aluminum conductors, see 3.10.1.15.

(1) Suitability for installation and use in conformity with the
provisions of this Code
1.10.1.6 Conductor Sizes. Conductor sizes are expressed in square
FPN: Suitability of equipment use may be identified by a description marked on or millimetres (mm2) for stranded or in millimetres diameter (mm dia.)
provided with a product to identify the suitability of the product for a specific for solid.
purpose, environment, or application. Suitability of equipment may be evidenced
by listing or labeling.
1.10.1.7 Insulation Integrity. Completed wiring installations shall be
(2) Mechanical strength and durability, including, for parts free from short circuits and from grounds other than as required or
designed to enclose and protect other equipment, the adequacy of the permitted in Article 2.50.
protection thus provided
1.10.1.8 Wiring Methods. Only wiring methods recognized as
(3) Wire-bending and connection space suitable are included in this Code. The recognized methods of wiring
shall be permitted to be installed in any type of building or occupancy,
(4) Electrical insulation except as otherwise provided in this Code.
1.10.1.9 Interrupting Rating. Equipment intended to interrupt current (a) Unused Openings. Unused cable or raceway openings in boxes,
at fault levels shall have an interrupting rating sufficient for the raceways, auxiliary gutters, cabinets, cutout boxes, meter socket
nominal circuit voltage and the current that is available at the line enclosures, equipment cases, or housings shall be effectively closed to
terminals of the equipment. afford protection substantially equivalent to the wall of the equipment.
Equipment intended to interrupt current at other than fault levels shall Where metallic plugs or plates are used with nonmetallic enclosures,
have an interrupting rating at nominal circuit voltage sufficient for the they shall be recessed at least 6 mm from the outer surface of the
current that must be interrupted. enclosure.

1.10.1.10 Circuit Impedance and Other Characteristics. The (b) Subsurface Enclosures. Conductors shall be racked to provide
overcurrent protective devices, the total impedance, the component ready and safe access in underground and subsurface enclosures into
short-circuit current ratings, and other characteristics of the circuit to which persons enter for installation and maintenance.
be protected shall be selected and coordinated to permit the circuit-
protective devices used to clear a fault to do so without extensive (c) Integrity of Electrical Equipment and Connections. Internal
damage to the electrical components of the circuit. This fault shall be parts of electrical equipment, including busbars, wiring terminals,
assumed to be either between two or more of the circuit conductors or insulators, and other surfaces, shall not be damaged or contaminated
between any circuit conductor and the grounding conductor or by foreign materials such as paint, plaster, cleaners, abrasives, or
enclosing metal raceway. Listed products applied in accordance with corrosive residues. There shall be no damaged parts that may
their listing shall be considered to meet the requirements of this adversely affect safe operation or mechanical strength of the
section. equipment such as parts that are broken; bent; cut; or deteriorated by
corrosion, chemical action, or overheating.
1.10.1.11 Deteriorating Agents. Unless identified for use in the
operating environment, no conductors or equipment shall be located in 1.10.1.13 Mounting and Cooling of Equipment.
damp or wet locations; where exposed to gases, fumes, vapors, liquids,
or other agents that have a deteriorating effect on the conductors or (a) Mounting. Electrical equipment shall be firmly secured to the
equipment; or where exposed to excessive temperatures. surface on which it is mounted. Wooden plugs driven into holes in
masonry, concrete, plaster, or similar materials shall not be used.
FPN No. 1: See 3.0.1.6 for protection against corrosion.

FPN No. 2: Some cleaning and lubricating compounds can cause severe (b) Cooling. Electrical equipment that depends on the natural
deterioration of many plastic materials used for insulating and structural circulation of air and convection principles for cooling of exposed
applications in equipment. surfaces shall be installed so that room airflow over such surfaces is
not prevented by walls or by adjacent installed equipment. For
Equipment identified only as “dry locations,” “Type 1,” or “indoor use equipment designed for floor mounting, clearance between top
only” shall be protected against permanent damage from the weather surfaces and adjacent surfaces shall be provided to dissipate rising
during building construction. warm air.
Electrical equipment provided with ventilating openings shall be
1.10.1.12 Mechanical Execution of Work. Electrical equipment shall installed so that walls or other obstructions do not prevent the free
be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. circulation of air through the equipment.
FPN: Accepted industry practices are described in ANSI/NECA 1-2000, Standard
Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting, and other ANSI- 1.10.1.14 Electrical Connections. Because of different characteristics
approved installation standards. of dissimilar metals, devices such as pressure terminal or pressure
splicing connectors and soldering lugs shall be identified for the provisions of equipment shall be based on 1.10.1.14(c)(1)a or (c)(1)b.
material of the conductor and shall be properly installed and used. Unless the equipment is listed and marked otherwise, conductor
Conductors of dissimilar metals shall not be intermixed in a terminal ampacities used in determining equipment termination provisions shall
or splicing connector where physical contact occurs between be based on Table 3.10.1.16 as appropriately modified by
dissimilar conductors (such as copper and aluminum, copper and 3.10.1.15(b)(6).
copper-clad aluminum, or aluminum and copper-clad aluminum),
unless the device is identified for the purpose and conditions of use. a. Termination provisions of equipment for circuits rated 100
Materials such as solder, fluxes, inhibitors, and compounds, where amperes or less, or marked for 2.0 mm2 (1.6 mm dia.) through 38 mm2
employed, shall be suitable for the use and shall be of a type that will conductors, shall be used only for one of the following:
not adversely affect the conductors, installation, or equipment.
1. Conductors rated 60°C (140°F).
FPN: Many terminations and equipment are marked with a tightening torque. 2. Conductors with higher temperature ratings, provided the
ampacity of such conductors is determined based on the 60°C (140°F)
(a) Terminals. Connection of conductors to terminal parts shall ampacity of the conductor size used.
ensure a thoroughly good connection without damaging the conductors 3. Conductors with higher temperature ratings if the
and shall be made by means of pressure connectors (including set- equipment is listed and identified for use with such conductors.
screw type), solder lugs, or splices to flexible leads. Connection by 4. For motors marked with design letters B, C, or D,
means of wire-binding screws or studs and nuts that have upturned conductors having an insulation rating of 75°C (167°F) or higher shall
lugs or the equivalent shall be permitted for 5.5 mm2 (2.6 mm dia.) or be permitted to be used, provided the ampacity of such conductors
smaller conductors. does not exceed the 75°C (167°F) ampacity.
Terminals for more than one conductor and terminals used to
connect aluminum shall be so identified. b. Termination provisions of equipment for circuits rated over
100 amperes, or marked for conductors larger than 38 mm2, shall be
(b) Splices. Conductors shall be spliced or joined with splicing used only for one of the following:
devices identified for the use or by brazing, welding, or soldering with
a fusible metal or alloy. Soldered splices shall first be spliced or joined 1. Conductors rated 75°C (167°F)
so as to be mechanically and electrically secure without solder and 2. Conductors with higher temperature ratings, provided the
then be soldered. All splices and joints and the free ends of conductors ampacity of such conductors does not exceed the 75°C (167°F)
shall be covered with an insulation equivalent to that of the conductors ampacity of the conductor size used, or up to their ampacity if the
or with an insulating device identified for the purpose. equipment is listed and identified for use with such conductors
Wire connectors or splicing means installed on conductors for direct
burial shall be listed for such use. (2) Separate Connector Provisions. Separately installed pressure
connectors shall be used with conductors at the ampacities not
(c) Temperature Limitations. The temperature rating associated exceeding the ampacity at the listed and identified temperature rating
with the ampacity of a conductor shall be selected and coordinated so of the connector.
as not to exceed the lowest temperature rating of any connected
termination, conductor, or device. Conductors with temperature ratings FPN: With respect to 1.10.1.14(c)(1) and (c)(2), equipment markings or listing
higher than specified for terminations shall be permitted to be used for information may additionally restrict the sizing and temperature ratings of
connected conductors.
ampacity adjustment, correction, or both.
1.10.1.15 High-Leg Marking. On a 4-wire, delta-connected system
(1) Equipment Provisions. The determination of termination
where the midpoint of one phase winding is grounded, only the
conductor or busbar having the higher phase voltage to ground shall be Other markings that indicate voltage, current, wattage, or other ratings
durably and permanently marked by an outer finish that is orange in shall be provided as specified elsewhere in this Code. The marking
color or by other effective means. Such identification shall be placed shall be of sufficient durability to withstand the environment involved.
at each point on the system where a connection is made if the
grounded conductor is also present. 1.10.1.22 Identification of Disconnecting Means. Each
disconnecting means shall be legibly marked to indicate its purpose
1.10.1.16 Flash Protection. Switchboards, panelboards, industrial unless located and arranged so the purpose is evident. The marking
control panels, meter socket enclosures, and motor control centers that shall be of sufficient durability to withstand the environment involved.
are in other than dwelling occupancies and are likely to require Where circuit breakers or fuses are applied in compliance with the
examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized series combination ratings marked on the equipment by the
shall be field marked to warn licensed electrical practitioner or non- manufacturer, the equipment enclosure(s) shall be legibly marked in
licensed electrical practitioner under the supervision of a licensed the field to indicate the equipment has been applied with a series
electrical practitioner of potential electric arc flash hazards. The combination rating. The marking shall be readily visible and state the
marking shall be located so as to be clearly visible to licensed following:
electrical practitioner or non-licensed electrical practitioner under the
supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner before examination, CAUTION
adjustment, servicing, or maintenance of the equipment. SERIES COMBINATION SYSTEM RATED ____ AMPERES
IDENTIFIED REPLACEMENT COMPONENTS REQUIRED
FPN No. 1: NFPA 70E-2004, Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace,
provides assistance in determining severity of potential exposure, planning safe FPN: See 2.40.7.7(b) for interrupting rating marking for end-use equipment.
work practices, and selecting personal protective equipment.

FPN No. 2: ANSI Z535.4-1998, Product Safety Signs and Labels, provides 1.10.1.23 Current Transformers. Unused current transformers
guidelines for the design of safety signs and labels for application to products. associated with potentially energized circuits shall be short-circuited.
1.10.1.18 Arcing Parts. Parts of electric equipment that in ordinary 1.10.2 600 Volts, Nominal, or Less
operation produce arcs, sparks, flames, or molten metal shall be
enclosed or separated and isolated from all combustible material. 1.10.2.1 Spaces About Electrical Equipment. Sufficient access and
FPN: For hazardous (classified) locations, see Articles 5.0 through 5.17. For
working space shall be provided and maintained about all electric
motors, see 4.30.1.14. equipment to permit ready and safe operation and maintenance of such
equipment. Enclosures housing electrical apparatus that are controlled
1.10.1.19 Light and Power from Railway Conductors. Circuits for by a lock(s) shall be considered accessible to licensed electrical
lighting and power shall not be connected to any system that contains practitioner or non-licensed electrical practitioner under the
trolley wires with a ground return. supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner.

Exception: Such circuit connections shall be permitted in car houses, (a) Working Space. Working space for equipment operating at 600
power houses, or passenger and freight stations operated in volts, nominal, or less to ground and likely to require examination,
connection with electric railways. adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized shall comply
with the dimensions of 1.10.2.1(a)(1), (a)(2), and (a)(3) or as required
1.10.1.21 Marking. The manufacturer’s name, trademark, or other or permitted elsewhere in this Code.
descriptive marking by which the organization responsible for the
product can be identified shall be placed on all electric equipment. (1) Depth of Working Space. The depth of the working space in
the direction of live parts shall not be less than that specified in Table (2) Width of Working Space. The width of the working space in
1.10.2.1(a)(1) unless the requirements of 1.10.2.1(a)(1)a, (a)(1)b, or front of the electric equipment shall be the width of the equipment or
(a)(1)c are met. Distances shall be measured from the exposed live 750 mm, whichever is greater. In all cases, the work space shall permit
parts or from the enclosure or opening if the live parts are enclosed. at least a 90 degree opening of equipment doors or hinged panels.

(3) Height of Working Space. The work space shall be clear and
Table 1.10.2.1(a)(1) Working Spaces extend from the grade, floor, or platform to the height required by
Nominal Voltage Minimum Clear Distance (mm) 1.10.2.1(e). Within the height requirements of this section, other
to Ground Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3 equipment that is associated with the electrical installation and is
0–150 900 900 900 located above or below the electrical equipment shall be permitted to
151–600 900 1 000 1 200 extend not more than 150 mm beyond the front of the electrical
Note: Where the conditions are as follows: equipment.
Condition 1 — Exposed live parts on one side of the working space and no live or
grounded parts on the other side of the working space, or exposed live parts on both (b) Clear Spaces. Working space required by this section shall not
sides of the working space that are effectively guarded by insulating materials.
Condition 2 — Exposed live parts on one side of the working space and grounded
be used for storage. When normally enclosed live parts are exposed for
parts on the other side of the working space. Concrete, brick, or tile walls shall be inspection or servicing, the working space, if in a passageway or
considered as grounded. general open space, shall be suitably guarded.
Condition 3 — Exposed live parts on both sides of the working space.
(c) Entrance to Working Space.

a. Dead-Front Assemblies. Working space shall not be required (1) Minimum Required. At least one entrance of sufficient area
in the back or sides of assemblies, such as dead-front switchboards or shall be provided to give access to working space about electrical
motor control centers, where all connections and all renewable or equipment.
adjustable parts, such as fuses or switches, are accessible from
locations other than the back or sides. Where rear access is required to (2) Large Equipment. For equipment rated 1 200 amperes or more
work on nonelectrical parts on the back of enclosed equipment, a that contains overcurrent devices, switching devices, or control
minimum horizontal working space of 750 mm shall be provided. devices, there shall be one entrance to the required working space not
b. Low Voltage. By special permission, smaller working spaces less than 600 mm wide and 2 000 mm high at each end of the working
shall be permitted where all exposed live parts operate at not greater space. Where the entrance has a personnel door(s), the door(s) shall
than 30 volts rms, 42 volts peak, or 60 volts dc. open in the direction of egress and be equipped with panic bars,
c. Existing Buildings. In existing buildings where electrical pressure plates, or other devices that are normally latched but open
equipment is being replaced, Condition 2 working clearance shall be under simple pressure.
permitted between dead-front switchboards, panelboards, or motor A single entrance to the required working space shall be permitted
control centers located across the aisle from each other where where either of the conditions in 1.10.2.1(c)(2)a or (c)(2)b is met.
conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that written
procedures have been adopted to prohibit equipment on both sides of a. Unobstructed Exit. Where the location permits a continuous
the aisle from being open at the same time and licensed electrical and unobstructed way of exit travel, a single entrance to the working
practitioner or non-licensed electrical practitioner under the space shall be permitted.
supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner who are authorized will b. Extra Working Space. Where the depth of the working space
service the installation. is twice that required by 1.10.2.1(a)(1), a single entrance shall be
permitted. It shall be located so that the distance from the equipment
to the nearest edge of the entrance is not less than the minimum clear permitted within the 1 800 mm zone.
distance specified in Table 1.10.2.1(a)(1) for equipment operating at
that voltage and in that condition. b. Foreign Systems. The area above the dedicated space required
by 1.10.2.1(f)(1)a shall be permitted to contain foreign systems,
(d) Illumination. Illumination shall be provided for all working provided protection is installed to avoid damage to the electrical
spaces about service equipment, switchboards, panelboards, or motor equipment from condensation, leaks, or breaks in such foreign
control centers installed indoors. Additional lighting outlets shall not systems.
be required where the work space is illuminated by an adjacent light c. Sprinkler Protection. Sprinkler protection shall be permitted
source or as permitted by 2.10.3.21(a)(1), Exception No. 1, for for the dedicated space where the piping complies with this section.
switched receptacles. In electrical equipment rooms, the illumination d. Suspended Ceilings. A dropped, suspended, or similar ceiling
shall not be controlled by automatic means only. that does not add strength to the building structure shall not be
considered a structural ceiling.
(e) Headroom. The minimum headroom of working spaces about
service equipment, switchboards, panelboards, or motor control (2) Outdoor. Outdoor electrical equipment shall be installed in
centers shall be 2 000 mm. Where the electrical equipment exceeds suitable enclosures and shall be protected from accidental contact by
2 000 m in height, the minimum headroom shall not be less than the unauthorized personnel, or by vehicular traffic, or by accidental
height of the equipment. spillage or leakage from piping systems. The working clearance space
shall include the zone described in 1.10.2.1(a). No architectural
Exception: In existing dwelling units, service equipment or appurtenance or other equipment shall be located in this zone.
panelboards that do not exceed 200 amperes shall be permitted in
spaces where the headroom is less than 2 000 mm. 1.10.2.2 Guarding of Live Parts.

(f) Dedicated Equipment Space. All switchboards, panelboards, (a) Live Parts Guarded Against Accidental Contact. Except as
distribution boards, and motor control centers shall be located in elsewhere required or permitted by this Code, live parts of electrical
dedicated spaces and protected from damage. equipment operating at 50 volts or more shall be guarded against
accidental contact by approved enclosures or by any of the following
Exception: Control equipment that by its very nature or because of means:
other rules of the Code must be adjacent to or within sight of its
operating machinery shall be permitted in those locations. (1) By location in a room, vault, or similar enclosure that is
accessible only to licensed electrical practitioner or non-licensed
(1) Indoor. Indoor installations shall comply with 1.10.2.1(f)(1)a electrical practitioner under the supervision of a licensed electrical
through (f)(1)d. practitioner.

a. Dedicated Electrical Space. The space equal to the width and (2) By suitable permanent, substantial partitions or screens
depth of the equipment and extending from the floor to a height of arranged so that only licensed electrical practitioner or non-licensed
1 800 m above the equipment or to the structural ceiling, whichever is electrical practitioner under the supervision of a licensed electrical
lower, shall be dedicated to the electrical installation. No piping, ducts, practitioner have access to the space within reach of the live parts.
leak protection apparatus, or other equipment foreign to the electrical Any openings in such partitions or screens shall be sized and located
installation shall be located in this zone. so that persons are not likely to come into accidental contact with the
live parts or to bring conducting objects into contact with them.
Exception: Suspended ceilings with removable panels shall be
 (3) By location on a suitable balcony, gallery, or platform elevated distance from the fence to live parts shall be not less than given in
and arranged so as to exclude unqualified persons. Table 1.10.3.2.

(4) By elevation of 2 400 mm or more above the floor or other

working surface. Table 1.10.3.2 Minimum Distance from Fence to Live Parts
Nominal Voltage Minimum Distance to Live Parts (m)
(b) Prevent Physical Damage. In locations where electric 601 – 13,799 3.05
equipment is likely to be exposed to physical damage, enclosures or 13,800 – 230,000 4.57
guards shall be so arranged and of such strength as to prevent such Over 230,000 5.49
damage. Note: For clearances of conductors for specific system voltages and typical BIL
ratings, see ANSI C2-2002, National Electrical Safety Code.
(c) Warning Signs. Entrances to rooms and other guarded locations
FPN: See Article 4.50 for construction requirements for transformer vaults.
that contain exposed live parts shall be marked with conspicuous
warning signs forbidding unqualified persons to enter.

FPN: For motors, see 4.30.12.2 and 4.30.12.3. For over 600 volts, see 1.10.3.5. (a) Fire Resistivity of Electrical Vaults. The walls, roof, floors,
and doorways of vaults containing conductors and equipment over 600
1.10.3 Over 600 Volts, Nominal volts, nominal, shall be constructed of materials that have adequate
structural strength for the conditions, with a minimum fire rating of 3
1.10.3.1 General. Conductors and equipment used on circuits over hours. The floors of vaults in contact with the earth shall be of
600 volts, nominal, shall comply with Part 1.10.1 and with the concrete that is not less than 100 mm thick, but where the vault is
following sections, which supplement or modify Part 1.10.1. In no constructed with a vacant space or other stories below it, the floor
case shall the provisions of this part apply to equipment on the supply shall have adequate structural strength for the load imposed on it and a
side of the service point. minimum fire resistance of 3 hours. For the purpose of this section,
studs and wallboards shall not be considered acceptable.
1.10.3.2 Enclosure for Electrical Installations. Electrical
installations in a vault, room, or closet or in an area surrounded by a (b) Indoor Installations.
wall, screen, or fence, access to which is controlled by a lock(s) or
other approved means, shall be considered to be accessible to licensed (1) In Places Accessible to Unqualified Persons. Indoor electrical
electrical practitioner or non-licensed electrical practitioner under the installations that are accessible to unqualified persons shall be made
supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner only. The type of with metal-enclosed equipment. Metal-enclosed switchgear, unit
enclosure used in a given case shall be designed and constructed substations, transformers, pull boxes, connection boxes, and other
according to the nature and degree of the hazard(s) associated with the similar associated equipment shall be marked with appropriate caution
installation. signs. Openings in ventilated dry-type transformers or similar
For installations other than equipment as described in 1.10.3.2(d), a openings in other equipment shall be designed so that foreign objects
wall, screen, or fence shall be used to enclose an outdoor electrical inserted through these openings are deflected from energized parts.
installation to deter access by persons who are not qualified. A fence
shall not be less than 2 100 mm in height or a combination of (2) In Places Accessible to Licensed Electrical Practitioner or
1 800 mm or more of fence fabric and a 300 mm or more extension Non-Licensed Electrical Practitioner Under the Supervision of a
utilizing three or more strands of barbed wire or equivalent. The Licensed Electrical Practitioner Only. Indoor electrical installations
considered accessible only to licensed electrical practitioner or non-
licensed electrical practitioner under the supervision of a licensed parts are exposed, the minimum clear work space shall not be less than
electrical practitioner in accordance with this section shall comply 2 000 mm high (measured vertically from the floor or platform) or less
with 1.10.3.5, 1.10.3.7, and 4.90.2.4. than 900 mm wide (measured parallel to the equipment). The depth
shall be as required in 1.10.3.5(a). In all cases, the work space shall
(c) Outdoor Installations. permit at least a 90 degree opening of doors or hinged panels.

(1) In Places Accessible to Unqualified Persons. Outdoor electrical 1.10.3.4 Entrance and Access to Work Space.
installations that are open to unqualified persons shall comply with
Parts 2.25.1, 2.25.2, and 2.25.3. (a) Entrance. At least one entrance not less than 600 mm wide and
2 000 mm high shall be provided to give access to the working space
FPN: For clearances of conductors for system voltages over 600 volts, nominal, about electric equipment. Where the entrance has a personnel door(s),
see ANSI C2-2002, National Electrical Safety Code.
the door(s) shall open in the direction of egress and be equipped with
panic bars, pressure plates, or other devices that are normally latched
(2) In Places Accessible to Licensed electrical practitioner or non-
but open under simple pressure.
licensed electrical practitioner under the supervision of a licensed
electrical practitioner Only. Outdoor electrical installations that have
(1) Large Equipment. On switchboard and control panels
exposed live parts shall be accessible to licensed electrical practitioner
exceeding 1 800 mm in width, there shall be one entrance at each end
or non-licensed electrical practitioner under the supervision of a
of the equipment. A single entrance to the required working space
licensed electrical practitioner only in accordance with the first
shall be permitted where either of the conditions in 1.10.3.4(a)(1)a or
paragraph of this section and shall comply with 1.10.3.5, 1.10.3.7, and
(a)(1)b is met.
4.90.2.4.
a. Unobstructed Exit. Where the location permits a continuous
(d) Enclosed Equipment Accessible to Unqualified Persons.
and unobstructed way of exit travel, a single entrance to the working
Ventilating or similar openings in equipment shall be designed such
space shall be permitted.
that foreign objects inserted through these openings are deflected from
b. Extra Working Space. Where the depth of the working space
energized parts. Where exposed to physical damage from vehicular
is twice that required by 1.10.3.5(a), a single entrance shall be
traffic, suitable guards shall be provided. Nonmetallic or metal-
permitted. It shall be located so that the distance from the equipment
enclosed equipment located outdoors and accessible to the general
to the nearest edge of the entrance is not less than the minimum clear
public shall be designed such that exposed nuts or bolts cannot be
distance specified in Table 1.10.3.5(a) for equipment operating at that
readily removed, permitting access to live parts. Where nonmetallic or
voltage and in that condition.
metal-enclosed equipment is accessible to the general public and the
bottom of the enclosure is less than 2 400 mm above the floor or grade
(2) Guarding. Where bare energized parts at any voltage or
level, the enclosure door or hinged cover shall be kept locked. Doors
insulated energized parts above 600 volts, nominal, to ground are
and covers of enclosures used solely as pull boxes, splice boxes, or
located adjacent to such entrance, they shall be suitably guarded.
junction boxes shall be locked, bolted, or screwed on. Underground
box covers that weigh over 45.4 kg shall be considered as meeting this
(b) Access. Permanent ladders or stairways shall be provided to give
requirement.
safe access to the working space around electric equipment installed
on platforms, balconies, or mezzanine floors or in attic or roof rooms
1.10.3.3 Work Space About Equipment. Sufficient space shall be
or spaces.
provided and maintained about electric equipment to permit ready and
safe operation and maintenance of such equipment. Where energized
1.10.3.5 Work Space and Guarding. voltage equipment shall be effectively separated from the space
occupied by the low-voltage equipment by a suitable partition, fence,
(a) Working Space. Except as elsewhere required or permitted in or screen.
this Code, the minimum clear working space in the direction of access
to live parts of electrical equipment shall not be less than specified in Exception: Switches or other equipment operating at 600 volts,
Table 1.10.3.5(a). Distances shall be measured from the live parts, if nominal, or less and serving only equipment within the high-voltage
such are exposed, or from the enclosure front or opening if such are vault, room, or enclosure shall be permitted to be installed in the high-
enclosed. voltage vault, room or enclosure without a partition, fence, or screen
if accessible to licensed electrical practitioner or non-licensed
Exception: Working space shall not be required in back of equipment electrical practitioner under the supervision of a licensed electrical
such as dead-front switchboards or control assemblies where there practitioner only.
are no renewable or adjustable parts (such as fuses or switches) on
the back and where all connections are accessible from locations (c) Locked Rooms or Enclosures. The entrance to all buildings,
other than the back. Where rear access is required to work on de- vaults, rooms, or enclosures containing exposed live parts or exposed
energized parts on the back of enclosed equipment, a minimum conductors operating at over 600 volts, nominal, shall be kept locked
working space of 750 mm horizontally shall be provided. unless such entrances are under the observation of a licensed electrical
practitioner or non-licensed electrical practitioner under the
supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner at all times.
Table 1.10.3.5(a) Minimum Depth of Clear Working Where the voltage exceeds 600 volts, nominal, permanent and
Space at Electrical Equipment conspicuous warning signs shall be provided, reading as follows:

Nominal Voltage Minimum Clear Distance (mm) DANGER — HIGH VOLTAGE — KEEP OUT
to Ground Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3
601–2500 V 900 1 200 1 500 (d) Illumination. Illumination shall be provided for all working
2501–9000 V 1 200 1 500 1 800 spaces about electrical equipment. The lighting outlets shall be
9001–25,000 V 1 500 1 800 2 700 arranged so that persons changing lamps or making repairs on the
25,001V–75 kV 1 800 2 400 3 000 lighting system are not endangered by live parts or other equipment.
Above 75 kV 2 400 3 000 3 600 The points of control shall be located so that persons are not likely
Note: Where the conditions are as follows: to come in contact with any live part or moving part of the equipment
Condition 1 — Exposed live parts on one side of the working space and no live or while turning on the lights.
grounded parts on the other side of the working space, or exposed live parts on both
sides of the working space that are effectively guarded by insulating materials.
Condition 2 — Exposed live parts on one side of the working space and grounded
(e) Elevation of Unguarded Live Parts. Unguarded live parts
parts on the other side of the working space. Concrete, brick, or tile walls shall be above working space shall be maintained at elevations not less than
considered as grounded. required by Table 1.10.3.5(e).
Condition 3 — Exposed live parts on both sides of the working space.
(f) Protection of Service Equipment, Metal-Enclosed Power
Switchgear, and Industrial Control Assemblies. Pipes or ducts
(b) Separation from Low-Voltage Equipment. Where switches, foreign to the electrical installation and requiring periodic maintenance
cutouts, or other equipment operating at 600 volts, nominal, or less are or whose malfunction would endanger the operation of the electrical
installed in a vault, room, or enclosure where there are exposed live system shall not be located in the vicinity of the service equipment,
parts or exposed wiring operating at over 600 volts, nominal, the high- metal-enclosed power switchgear, or industrial control assemblies.
Protection shall be provided where necessary to avoid damage from 1.10.4 Tunnel Installations over 600 Volts, Nominal
condensation leaks and breaks in such foreign systems. Piping and
other facilities shall not be considered foreign if provided for fire 1.10.4.1 General.
protection of the electrical installation.
(a) Covered. The provisions of this part shall apply to the
installation and use of high-voltage power distribution and utilization
Table 1.10.3.5(e) Elevation of Unguarded Live Parts equipment that is portable, mobile, or both, such as substations,
Above Working Space trailers, cars, mobile shovels, draglines, hoists, drills, dredges,
compressors, pumps, conveyors, underground excavators, and the like.
Nominal Voltage Between Elevation
Phases (mm) (b) Other Articles. The requirements of this part shall be additional
601–7500 V 2 700 to, or amendatory of, those prescribed in Articles 1.0 through 4.90 of
7501–35,000 V 2 900 this Code. Special attention shall be paid to Article 2.50.
Over 35 kV 2 900 + 9.5 /kV
above 35kV (c) Protection Against Physical Damage. Conductors and cables in
tunnels shall be located above the tunnel floor and so placed or
guarded to protect them from physical damage.

1.10.3.7 Circuit Conductors. Circuit conductors shall be permitted to 1.10.4.2 Overcurrent Protection. Motor-operated equipment shall be
be installed in raceways; in cable trays; as metal-clad cable, as bare protected from overcurrent in accordance with Parts 4.30.3, 4.30.4,
wire, cable, and busbars; or as Type MV cables or conductors as and 4.30.5. Transformers shall be protected from overcurrent in
provided in 3.0.2.7, 3.0.2.9, 3.0.2.10, and 3.0.2.20. Bare live accordance with 4.50.1.3.
conductors shall conform with 4.90.2.4.
Insulators, together with their mounting and conductor attachments, 1.10.4.3 Conductors. High-voltage conductors in tunnels shall be
where used as supports for wires, single-conductor cables, or busbars, installed in metal conduit or other metal raceway, Type MC cable, or
shall be capable of safely withstanding the maximum magnetic forces other approved multiconductor cable. Multiconductor portable cable
that would prevail when two or more conductors of a circuit were shall be permitted to supply mobile equipment.
subjected to short-circuit current.
Exposed runs of insulated wires and cables that have a bare lead 1.10.4.4 Bonding and Equipment Grounding Conductors.
sheath or a braided outer covering shall be supported in a manner
designed to prevent physical damage to the braid or sheath. Supports (a) Grounded and Bonded. All non–current-carrying metal parts of
for lead-covered cables shall be designed to prevent electrolysis of the electric equipment and all metal raceways and cable sheaths shall be
sheath. effectively grounded and bonded to all metal pipes and rails at the
portal and at intervals not exceeding 300 m throughout the tunnel.
1.10.3.11 Temperature Limitations at Terminations. Conductors
shall be permitted to be terminated based on the 90°C temperature (b) Equipment Grounding Conductors. An equipment grounding
rating and ampacity as given in Table 3.10.1.67 through Table conductor shall be run with circuit conductors inside the metal
3.10.1.86, unless otherwise identified. raceway or inside the multiconductor cable jacket. The equipment
grounding conductor shall be permitted to be insulated or bare.

1.10.4.5 Transformers, Switches, and Electrical Equipment. All

transformers, switches, motor controllers, motors, rectifiers, and other industrial wiring system operating under conditions of maintenance
equipment installed below ground shall be protected from physical and supervision that ensure that only licensed electrical practitioner
damage by location or guarding. or non-licensed electrical practitioner under the supervision of a
licensed electrical practitioner monitor and supervise the system, they
1.10.4.6 Energized Parts. Bare terminals of transformers, switches, shall be permitted to be designed and installed in accordance with
motor controllers, and other equipment shall be enclosed to prevent appropriate engineering practice. If required by the authority having
accidental contact with energized parts. jurisdiction, design documentation shall be provided.

1.10.4.7 Ventilation System Controls. Electrical controls for the 1.10.5.2 Strength. Manholes, vaults, and their means of access shall
ventilation system shall be arranged so that the airflow can be be designed under qualified engineering supervision and shall
reversed. withstand all loads likely to be imposed on the structures.

1.10.4.8 Disconnecting Means. A switch or circuit breaker that FPN: See ANSI C2-2002, National Electrical Safety Code, for additional
information on the loading that can be expected to bear on underground
simultaneously opens all ungrounded conductors of the circuit shall be enclosures.
installed within sight of each transformer or motor location for
disconnecting the transformer or motor. The switch or circuit breaker 1.10.5.3 Cabling Work Space. A clear work space not less than
for a transformer shall have an ampere rating not less than the 900 mm wide shall be provided where cables are located on both
ampacity of the transformer supply conductors. The switch or circuit sides, and not less than 750 mm where cables are only on one side.
breaker for a motor shall comply with the applicable requirements of The vertical headroom shall not be less than 1 800 mm unless the
Article 4.30. opening is within 300 mm, measured horizontally, of the adjacent
interior side wall of the enclosure.
1.10.4.9 Enclosures. Enclosures for use in tunnels shall be dripproof,
weatherproof, or submersible as required by the environmental Exception: A manhole containing only one or more of the following
conditions. Switch or contactor enclosures shall not be used as shall be permitted to have one of the horizontal work space
junction boxes or as raceways for conductors feeding through or dimensions reduced to 600 mm where the other horizontal clear work
tapping off to other switches, unless the enclosures comply with space is increased so the sum of the two dimensions is not less than 1
3.12.1.8. 800 mm:
(1) Optical fiber cables as covered in Article 7.70
1.10.5 Manholes and Other Electric Enclosures (2) Power-limited fire alarm circuits supplied in accordance with
Intended for Personnel Entry, All Voltages 7.60.3.1(a)
(3) Class 2 or Class 3 remote-control and signaling circuits, or
1.10.5.1 General. Electric enclosures intended for personnel entry and both, supplied in accordance with 7.25.3.1.
specifically fabricated for this purpose shall be of sufficient size to
provide safe work space about electric equipment with live parts that 1.10.5.4 Equipment Work Space. Where electric equipment with live
is likely to require examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance parts that is likely to require examination, adjustment, servicing, or
while energized. Such enclosures shall have sufficient size to permit maintenance while energized is installed in a manhole, vault, or other
ready installation or withdrawal of the conductors employed without enclosure designed for personnel access, the work space and
damage to the conductors or to their insulation. They shall comply associated requirements in 1.10.2.1 shall be met for installations
with the provisions of this part. operating at 600 volts or less. Where the installation is over 600 volts,
the work space and associated requirements in 1.10.3.5 shall be met. A
Exception: Where electric enclosures covered by 1.10.5 are part of an manhole access cover that weighs over 45 kg (100 lb) shall be
considered as meeting the requirements of 1.10.3.5(c). restrained so they cannot fall into the manhole or protrude sufficiently
to contact electrical conductors or equipment within the manhole.
1.10.5.5 Bending Space for Conductors. Bending space for
conductors operating at 600 volts or below shall be provided in (e) Marking. Manhole covers shall have an identifying mark or logo
accordance with the requirements of 3.14.2.14. Conductors operating that prominently indicates their function, such as “electric.”
over 600 volts shall be provided with bending space in accordance
with 3.14.4.2(a) and 3.14.4.2(b), as applicable. All conductors shall be
cabled, racked up, or arranged in an approved manner that provides 1.10.5.7 Access to Vaults and Tunnels.
ready and safe access for persons to enter for installation and
maintenance. (a) Location. Access openings for personnel shall be located where
they are not directly above electric equipment or conductors in the
Exception: Where 3.14.4.2(b) applies, each row or column of ducts on enclosure. Other openings shall be permitted over equipment to
one wall of the enclosure shall be calculated individually, and the facilitate installation, maintenance, or replacement of equipment.
single row or column that provides the maximum distance shall be
used. (b) Locks. In addition to compliance with the requirements of
1.10.3.5, if applicable, access openings for personnel shall be arranged
1.10.5.6 Access to Manholes. such that a person on the inside can exit when the access door is
locked from the outside, or in the case of normally locking by padlock,
(a) Dimensions. Rectangular access openings shall not be less than the locking arrangement shall be such that the padlock can be closed
650 mm × 550 mm. Round access openings in a manhole shall not be on the locking system to prevent locking from the outside.
less than 650 mm in diameter.
1.10.5.8 Ventilation. Where manholes, tunnels, and vaults have
Exception: A manhole that has a fixed ladder that does not obstruct communicating openings into enclosed areas used by the public,
the opening or that contains only one or more of the following shall be ventilation to open air shall be provided wherever practicable.
permitted to reduce the minimum cover diameter to 600 mm:
(1) Optical fiber cables as covered in Article 7.70 1.10.5.9 Guarding. Where conductors or equipment, or both, could be
(2) Power-limited fire alarm circuits supplied in accordance with contacted by objects falling or being pushed through a ventilating
7.60.3.1 grating, both conductors and live parts shall be protected in
(3) Class 2 or Class 3 remote-control and signaling circuits, or accordance with the requirements of 1.10.2.2(a)(2) or 1.10.3.2(b)(1),
both, supplied in accordance with 7.25.3.1 depending on the voltage.

(b) Obstructions. Manhole openings shall be free of protrusions 1.10.5.10 Fixed Ladders. Fixed ladders shall be corrosion resistant.
that could injure personnel or prevent ready egress.

(c) Location. Manhole openings for personnel shall be located

where they are not directly above electric equipment or conductors in
the enclosure. Where this is not practicable, either a protective barrier
or a fixed ladder shall be provided.

(d) Covers. Covers shall be over 45 kg (100 lb) or otherwise

designed to require the use of tools to open. They shall be designed or
 Chapter 2. Wiring and Protection

ARTICLE 2.0 — USE AND IDENTIFICATION

OF GROUNDED CONDUCTORS

2.0.1.1 Scope. This article provides requirements for the following:

(1) Identification of terminals

(2) Grounded conductors in premises wiring systems
(3) Identification of grounded conductors

FPN: See Article 1.0 for definitions of Grounded Conductor and Grounding
Conductor.

2.0.1.2 General. All premises wiring systems, other than circuits and
systems exempted or prohibited by 2.10.1.10, 2.15.1.7, 2.50.2.2,
2.50.2.3, 2.50.8.3, 5.3.3.56, 5.17.4.4, 6.68.1.11, 6.68.1.21, and
6.90.5.1 Exception, shall have a grounded conductor that is identified
in accordance with 2.0.1.6.
The grounded conductor, where insulated, shall have insulation that is
(1) suitable, other than color, for any ungrounded conductor of the
same circuit on circuits of less than 1000 volts or impedance grounded
neutral systems of 1 kV and over, or (2) rated not less than 600 volts
for solidly grounded neutral systems of 1 kV and over as described in
2.50.10.5(a).

2.0.1.3 Connection to Grounded System. Premises wiring shall not

be electrically connected to a supply system unless the latter contains,
for any grounded conductor of the interior system, a corresponding
conductor that is grounded. For the purpose of this section, electrically
connected shall mean connected so as to be capable of carrying
current, as distinguished from connection through electromagnetic
induction.
2.0.1.6 Means of Identifying Grounded Conductors. conductor shall be identified by system. Identification that
distinguishes each system grounded conductor shall be permitted by
(a) Sizes 14 mm2 or Smaller. An insulated grounded conductor of one of the following means:
14 mm2 or smaller shall be identified by a continuous white or gray
outer finish or by three continuous white stripes on other than green (1) One system grounded conductor shall have an outer covering
insulation along its entire length. Wires that have their outer covering conforming to 2.0.1.6(a) or 2.0.1.6(b).
finished to show a white or gray color but have colored tracer threads (2) The grounded conductor(s) of other systems shall have a
in the braid identifying the source of manufacture shall be considered different outer covering conforming to 2.0.1.6(a) or 2.0.1.6(b) or by an
as meeting the provisions of this section. Insulated grounded outer covering of white or gray with a readily distinguishable colored
conductors shall also be permitted to be identified as follows: stripe other than green running along the insulation.
(3) Other and different means of identification as allowed by
(1) The grounded conductor of a mineral-insulated, metal- 2.0.1.6(a) or 2.0.1.6(b) that will distinguish each system grounded
sheathed cable shall be identified at the time of installation by conductor.
distinctive marking at its terminations.
(2) A single-conductor, sunlight-resistant, outdoor-rated cable This means of identification shall be permanently posted at each
used as a grounded conductor in photovoltaic power systems as branch-circuit panelboard.
permitted by 6.90.4.1 shall be identified at the time of installation by
distinctive white marking at all terminations. (e) Grounded Conductors of Multiconductor Cables. The
(3) Fixture wire shall comply with the requirements for grounded insulated grounded conductors in a multiconductor cable shall be
conductor identification as specified in 4.2.1.8. identified by a continuous white or gray outer finish or by three
(4) For aerial cable, the identification shall be as above, or by continuous white stripes on other than green insulation along its entire
means of a ridge located on the exterior of the cable so as to identify it. length. Multiconductor flat cable 22 mm2 or larger shall be permitted
to employ an external ridge on the grounded conductor.
(b) Sizes Larger Than 14 mm2. An insulated grounded conductor
larger than 14 mm2 shall be identified by one of the following means: Exception No. 1: Where the conditions of maintenance and
supervision ensure that only licensed electrical practitioner or non
(1) By a continuous white or gray outer finish. licensed electrical practitioner under the supervision of a licensed
(2) By three continuous white stripes along its entire length on electrical practitioner service the installation, grounded conductors in
other than green insulation. multiconductor cables shall be permitted to be permanently identified
(3) At the time of installation, by a distinctive white or gray at their terminations at the time of installation by a distinctive white
marking at its terminations. This marking shall encircle the conductor marking or other equally effective means.
or insulation.
Exception No. 2: The grounded conductor of a multiconductor
(c) Flexible Cords. An insulated conductor that is intended for use varnished-cloth-insulated cable shall be permitted to be identified at
as a grounded conductor, where contained within a flexible cord, shall its terminations at the time of installation by a distinctive white
be identified by a white or gray outer finish or by methods permitted marking or other equally effective means.
by 4.0.2.3.
FPN: The color gray may have been used in the past as an ungrounded conductor.
Care should be taken when working on existing systems.
(d) Grounded Conductors of Different Systems. Where grounded
conductors of different systems are installed in the same raceway,
cable, box, auxiliary gutter, or other type of enclosure, each grounded
2.0.1.7 Use of Insulation of a White or Gray Color or with Three connected to outlets whether or not the outlet is supplied by a circuit
Continuous White Stripes. that has a grounded conductor.

(a) General. The following shall be used only for the grounded FPN: The color gray may have been used in the past as an ungrounded conductor.
Care should be taken when working on existing systems.
circuit conductor, unless otherwise permitted in 2.0.1.7(b) and
2.0.1.7(c):
2.0.1.9 Means of Identification of Terminals. The identification of
terminals to which a grounded conductor is to be connected shall be
(1) A conductor with continuous white or gray covering
substantially white in color. The identification of other terminals shall
(2) A conductor with three continuous white stripes on other than
be of a readily distinguishable different color.
green insulation
(3) A marking of white or gray color at the termination
Exception: Where the conditions of maintenance and supervision
ensure that only licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed
(b) Circuits of Less Than 50 Volts. A conductor with white or gray
electrical practitioner under the supervision of a licensed electrical
color insulation or three continuous white stripes or having a marking
practitioner service the installations, terminals for grounded
of white or gray at the termination for circuits of less than 50 volts
conductors shall be permitted to be permanently identified at the time
shall be required to be grounded only as required by 2.50.2.1(a).
of installation by a distinctive white marking or other equally effective
(c) Circuits of 50 Volts or More. The use of insulation that is white
means.
or gray or that has three continuous white stripes for other than a
grounded conductor for circuits of 50 volts or more shall be permitted
2.0.1.10 Identification of Terminals.
only as in (1) through (3).
(a) Device Terminals. All devices, excluding panelboards, provided
(1) If part of a cable assembly and where the insulation is
with terminals for the attachment of conductors and intended for
permanently reidentified to indicate its use as an ungrounded
connection to more than one side of the circuit shall have terminals
conductor, by painting or other effective means at its termination, and
properly marked for identification, unless the electrical connection of
at each location where the conductor is visible and accessible.
the terminal intended to be connected to the grounded conductor is
Identification shall encircle the insulation and shall be a color other
clearly evident.
than white, gray, or green.
(2) Where a cable assembly contains an insulated conductor for
Exception: Terminal identification shall not be required for devices
single-pole, 3-way or 4-way switch loops and the conductor with
that have a normal current rating of over 30 amperes, other than
white or gray insulation or a marking of three continuous white stripes
polarized attachment plugs and polarized receptacles for attachment
is used for the supply to the switch but not as a return conductor from
plugs as required in 2.0.1.10(b).
the switch to the switched outlet. In these applications, the conductor
with white or gray insulation or with three continuous white stripes
(b) Receptacles, Plugs, and Connectors. Receptacles, polarized
shall be permanently reidentified to indicate its use by painting or
attachment plugs, and cord connectors for plugs and polarized plugs
other effective means at its terminations and at each location where the
shall have the terminal intended for connection to the grounded
conductor is visible and accessible.
conductor identified as follows:
(3) Where a flexible cord, having one conductor identified by a
white or gray outer finish or three continuous white stripes or by any
(1) Identification shall be by a metal or metal coating that is
other means permitted by 4.0.2.3, is used for connecting an appliance
substantially white in color or by the word white or the letter W
or equipment permitted by 4.0.1.7. This shall apply to flexible cords
located adjacent to the identified terminal.
 (2) If the terminal is not visible, the conductor entrance hole for applicable provisions of other articles of this Code. The provisions for
the connection shall be colored white or marked with the word white branch circuits supplying equipment listed in Table 2.10.1.2 amend or
or the letter W. supplement the provisions in this article and shall apply to branch
circuits referred to therein.
FPN: See 2.50.6.17 for identification of wiring device equipment grounding
conductor terminals.
2.10.1.3 Rating. Branch circuits recognized by this article shall be
rated in accordance with the maximum permitted ampere rating or
(c) Screw Shells. For devices with screw shells, the terminal for the
setting of the overcurrent device. The rating for other than individual
grounded conductor shall be the one connected to the screw shell.
branch circuits shall be 15, 20, 30, 40, and 50 amperes. Where
conductors of higher ampacity are used for any reason, the ampere
(d) Screw Shell Devices with Leads. For screw shell devices with
rating or setting of the specified overcurrent device shall determine the
attached leads, the conductor attached to the screw shell shall have a
circuit rating.
white or gray finish. The outer finish of the other conductor shall be of
Exception: Multioutlet branch circuits greater than 50 amperes shall
a solid color that will not be confused with the white or gray finish
be permitted to supply nonlighting outlet loads on industrial premises
used to identify the grounded conductor.
where conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that only
FPN: The color gray may have been used in the past as an ungrounded licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner
conductor. Care should be taken when working on existing systems. under the supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner service the
equipment.
(e) Appliances. Appliances that have a single-pole switch or a
single-pole overcurrent device in the line or any line-connected screw 2.10.1.4 Multiwire Branch Circuits.
shell lampholders, and that are to be connected by (1) a permanent
wiring method or (2) field-installed attachment plugs and cords with (a) General. Branch circuits recognized by this article shall be
three or more wires (including the equipment grounding conductor), permitted as multiwire circuits. A multiwire circuit shall be permitted
shall have means to identify the terminal for the grounded circuit to be considered as multiple circuits. All conductors shall originate
conductor (if any). from the same panelboard or similar distribution equipment.

2.0.1.11 Polarity of Connections. No grounded conductor shall be FPN: A 3-phase, 4-wire, wye-connected power system used to supply power to
nonlinear loads may necessitate that the power system design allow for the
attached to any terminal or lead so as to reverse the designated possibility of high harmonic neutral currents.
polarity.
(b) Devices or Equipment. Where a multiwire branch circuit
ARTICLE 2.10 — BRANCH CIRCUITS supplies more than one device or equipment on the same yoke, a
means shall be provided to disconnect simultaneously all ungrounded
2.10.1 General Provisions conductors supplying those devices or equipment at the point where
the branch circuit originates.
2.10.1.1 Scope. This article covers branch circuits except for branch
circuits that supply only motor loads, which are covered in Article
4.30. Provisions of this article and Article 4.30 apply to branch circuits
with combination loads.

2.10.1.2 Other Articles for Specific-Purpose Branch Circuits.

Branch circuits shall comply with this article and also with the
 Table 2.10.1.2 Specific-Purpose Branch Circuits Table 2.10.1.2 (Continued)
Equipment Article Section Equipment Article Section
Air-conditioning and refrigerating 4.40.1.6, Motors, motor circuits, and 4.30
equipment 4.40.4.1, controllers
Audio signal processing, 4.40.4.2 Pipe organs 6.50.1.7
amplification, and reproduction 6.40.1.8 Recreational vehicles and 5.51
equipment recreational vehicle parks
Busways Switchboards and panelboards 4.8.4.3
Circuits and equipment operating at 7.20 3.68.2.8 Theaters, audience areas of motion 5.20.3.1,
less than 50 volts picture and television studios, and 5.20.4.3,
Central heating equipment other similar locations 5.20.5.2
than fixed electric space-heating 4.22.2.3 X-ray equipment
equipment 6.60.1.2,
Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 7.25 5.17.5.3
remote-control, signaling, and
power-limited circuits
Closed-loop and programmed 7.80
power distribution (c) Line-to-Neutral Loads. Multiwire branch circuits shall supply
Cranes and hoists only line-to-neutral loads.
Electric signs and outline lighting 6.10.5.2
Electric welders 6.30 6.0.1.6 Exception No. 1: A multiwire branch circuit that supplies only one
Elevators, dumbwaiters, escalators, utilization equipment.
moving walks, wheelchair lifts, 6.20.7.1 Exception No. 2: Where all ungrounded conductors of the multiwire
and stairway chair lifts branch circuit are opened simultaneously by the branch-circuit
Fire alarm systems 7.60 overcurrent device.
Fixed electric heating equipment for
pipelines and vessels 4.27.1.4 FPN: See 3.0.1.13(b) for continuity of grounded conductor on multiwire circuits.

Fixed electric space-heating

equipment 4.24.1.3 2.10.1.5 Identification for Branch Circuits.
Fixed outdoor electric deicing and
snow-melting equipment 4.26.1.4 (a) Grounded Conductor. The grounded conductor of a branch
Information technology equipment circuit shall be identified in accordance with 2.0.1.6.
Infrared lamp industrial heating 6.45.1.5
equipment 4.22.4.9, (b) Equipment Grounding Conductor. The equipment grounding
Induction and dielectric heating 6.65 4.24.1.3 conductor shall be identified in accordance with 2.50.6.10.
equipment
Marinas and boatyards (c) Ungrounded Conductors. Where the premises wiring system
Mobile homes, manufactured 5.50 has branch circuits supplied from more than one nominal voltage
homes, and mobile home parks 5.55.1.19 system, each ungrounded conductor of a branch circuit, where
Motion picture and television 5.30 accessible, shall be identified by system. The means of identification
studios and similar locations shall be permitted to be by separate color coding, marking tape,
tagging, or other approved means and shall be permanently posted at (6) Cord-and-plug-connected or permanently connected utilization
each branch-circuit panelboard or similar branch-circuit distribution equipment
equipment.
(d) 600 Volts Between Conductors. Circuits exceeding 277 volts,
2.10.1.6 Branch-Circuit Voltage Limitations. The nominal voltage nominal, to ground and not exceeding 600 volts, nominal, between
of branch circuits shall not exceed the values permitted by 2.10.1.6(a) conductors shall be permitted to supply the following:
through 2.10.1.6(e).
(1) The auxiliary equipment of electric-discharge lamps mounted
(a) Occupancy Limitation. In dwelling units and guest rooms or in permanently installed luminaires (fixtures) where the luminaires
guest suites of hotels, motels, and similar occupancies, the voltage (fixtures) are mounted in accordance with one of the following:
shall not exceed 230 volts, nominal, between conductors that supply
the terminals of the following: a. Not less than a height of 6 700 mm on poles or similar
(1) Luminaires (lighting fixtures) structures for the illumination of outdoor areas such as highways,
(2) Cord-and-plug-connected loads 1440 volt-amperes, nominal, roads, bridges, athletic fields, or parking lots
or less or less than ¼ hp b. Not less than a height of 5 500 mm on other structures such as
tunnels
(b) 230 Volts Between Conductors. Circuits not exceeding 230
volts, nominal, between conductors shall be permitted to supply the (2) Cord-and-plug-connected or permanently connected utilization
following: equipment other than luminaires (fixtures)

(1) The terminals of lampholders applied within their voltage FPN: See 4.10.13.6 for auxiliary equipment limitations.
ratings
(2) Auxiliary equipment of electric-discharge lamps Exception No. 1 to (b), (c), and (d): For lampholders of infrared
(3) Cord-and-plug-connected or permanently connected utilization industrial heating appliances as provided in 4.22.2.5.
equipment Exception No. 2 to (b), (c), and (d): For railway properties as
described in 1.10.1.19.
(c) 277 Volts to Ground. Circuits exceeding 230 volts, nominal,
between conductors and not exceeding 277 volts, nominal, to ground (e) Over 600 Volts Between Conductors. Circuits exceeding 600
shall be permitted to supply the following: volts, nominal, between conductors shall be permitted to supply
utilization equipment in installations where conditions of maintenance
(1) Listed electric-discharge luminaires (lighting fixtures) and supervision ensure that only licensed electrical practitioner or non
(2) Listed incandescent luminaires (lighting fixtures), where licensed electrical practitioner under the supervision of a licensed
supplied at 230 volts or less from the output of a stepdown electrical practitioner service the installation.
autotransformer that is an integral component of the luminaire
(fixture) and the outer shell terminal is electrically connected to a 2.10.1.7 Branch Circuit Receptacle Requirements.
grounded conductor of the branch circuit
(3) Luminaires (lighting fixtures) equipped with mogul-base screw (a) Receptacle Outlet Location. Receptacle outlets shall be located
shell lampholders in branch circuits in accordance with Part 2.10.3.
(4) Lampholders, other than the screw shell type, applied within
their voltage ratings (b) Multiple Branch Circuits. Where two or more branch circuits
(5) Auxiliary equipment of electric-discharge lamps supply devices or equipment on the same yoke, a means to
simultaneously disconnect the ungrounded conductors supplying those Exception No. 2 to (5): A single receptacle or a duplex receptacle for
devices shall be provided at the point at which the branch circuits two appliances located within dedicated space for each appliance that,
originate. in normal use, is not easily moved from one place to another and that
is cord-and-plug connected in accordance with 4.0.1.7(a)(6), (a)(7),
2.10.1.8 Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection for or (a)(8).
Personnel. Exception No. 3 to (5): A receptacle supplying only a permanently
installed fire alarm or burglar alarm system shall not be required to
FPN: See 2.15.1.9 for ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection for personnel on have ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection.
feeders.

(6) Kitchens — where the receptacles are installed to serve the

(a) Dwelling Units. All 125-volt and/or 250 volts, single-phase, 15-
countertop surfaces
and 20-ampere receptacles installed in the locations specified in (1)
(7) Laundry, utility, and wet bar sinks — where the receptacles are
through (8) shall have ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection for
installed within 1 800 mm of the outside edge of the sink
personnel.
(8) Boathouses
(1) Bathrooms
(b) Other Than Dwelling Units. All 125-volt and/or 250 volts,
(2) Garages, and also accessory buildings that have a floor located
single-phase, 15- and 20-ampere receptacles installed in the locations
at or below grade level not intended as habitable rooms and limited to
specified in (1) through (5) shall have ground-fault circuit-interrupter
storage areas, work areas, and areas of similar use
protection for personnel:
Exception No. 1 to (2): Receptacles that are not readily accessible.
(1) Bathrooms
Exception No. 2 to (2): A single receptacle or a duplex receptacle for
(2) Commercial and institutional kitchens — for the purposes of
two appliances located within dedicated space for each appliance that,
this section, a kitchen is an area with a sink and permanent facilities
in normal use, is not easily moved from one place to another and that
for food preparation and cooking
is cord-and-plug connected in accordance with 4.0.1.7(a)(6), (a)(7),
(3) Rooftops
or (a)(8).
(4) Outdoors in public spaces—for the purpose of this section a
public space is defined as any space that is for use by, or is accessible
Receptacles installed under the exceptions to 2.10.1.8(a)(2) shall
to, the public
not be considered as meeting the requirements of 2.10.3.3(g)
Exception to (3) and (4): Receptacles that are not readily accessible
(3) Outdoors. Receptacles installed under the exceptions to
and are supplied from a dedicated branch circuit for electric snow-
2.10.1.8(a)(5) shall not be considered as meeting the requirements of
melting or deicing equipment shall be permitted to be installed in
2.10.3.3(g).
accordance with the applicable provisions of Article 4.26.
(4) Crawl spaces — at or below grade level
(5) Unfinished basements — for purposes of this section,
(5) Outdoors, where installed to comply with 2.10.3.14
unfinished basements are defined as portions or areas of the basement
not intended as habitable rooms and limited to storage areas, work
(c) Boat Hoists. Ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection for
areas, and the like
personnel shall be provided for outlets that supply boat hoists installed
in dwelling unit locations and supplied by 125-volt and/or 250 volts,
Exception No. 1 to (5): Receptacles that are not readily accessible.
15- and 20-ampere branch circuits.
2.10.1.9 Circuits Derived from Autotransformers. Branch circuits
shall not be derived from autotransformers unless the circuit supplied (a) Number of Branch Circuits. The minimum number of branch
has a grounded conductor that is electrically connected to a grounded circuits shall be determined from the total calculated load and the size
conductor of the system supplying the autotransformer. or rating of the circuits used. In all installations, the number of circuits
shall be sufficient to supply the load served. In no case shall the load
Exception No. 1: An autotransformer shall be permitted without the on any circuit exceed the maximum specified by 2.20.2.9.
connection to a grounded conductor where transforming from a
nominal 208 volts to a nominal 240-volt supply or similarly from 240 (b) Load Evenly Proportioned Among Branch Circuits. Where
volts to 208 volts. the load is calculated on the basis of volt-amperes per square meter or
Exception No. 2: In industrial occupancies, where conditions of per square foot, the wiring system up to and including the branch-
maintenance and supervision ensure that only licensed electrical circuit panelboard(s) shall be provided to serve not less than the
practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner under the calculated load. This load shall be evenly proportioned among
supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner service the multioutlet branch circuits within the panelboard(s). Branch-circuit
installation, autotransformers shall be permitted to supply nominal overcurrent devices and circuits shall only be required to be installed
600-volt loads from nominal 480-volt systems, and 480-volt loads to serve the connected load.
from nominal 600-volt systems, without the connection to a similar
grounded conductor. (c) Dwelling Units.

2.10.1.10 Ungrounded Conductors Tapped from Grounded (1) Small-Appliance Branch Circuits. In addition to the number of
Systems. Two-wire dc circuits and ac circuits of two or more branch circuits required by other parts of this section, two or more 20-
ungrounded conductors shall be permitted to be tapped from the ampere small-appliance branch circuits shall be provided for all
ungrounded conductors of circuits that have a grounded neutral receptacle outlets specified by 2.10.3.3(b).
conductor. Switching devices in each tapped circuit shall have a pole (2) Laundry Branch Circuits. In addition to the number of branch
in each ungrounded conductor. All poles of multipole switching circuits required by other parts of this section, at least one additional
devices shall manually switch together where such switching devices 20-ampere branch circuit shall be provided to supply the laundry
also serve as a disconnecting means as required by the following: receptacle outlet(s) required by 2.10.3.3(f). This circuit shall have no
other outlets.
(1) 4.10.8.2 for double-pole switched lampholders (3) Bathroom Branch Circuits. In addition to the number of branch
(2) 4.10.10.2(b) for electric-discharge lamp auxiliary equipment circuits required by other parts of this section, at least one 20-ampere
switching devices branch circuit shall be provided to supply bathroom receptacle
(3) 4.22.3.2(b) for an appliance outlet(s). Such circuits shall have no other outlets.
(4) 4.24.3.2 for a fixed electric space-heating unit
(5) 4.30.7.5 for a motor controller Exception: Where the 20-ampere circuit supplies a single bathroom,
(6) 4.30.9.3 for a motor outlets for other equipment within the same bathroom shall be
permitted to be supplied in accordance with 2.10.2.5(a)(1) and (a)(2).
2.10.1.11 Branch Circuits Required. Branch circuits for lighting and
for appliances, including motor-operated appliances, shall be provided FPN: See Examples D1(a), D1(b), D2(b), and D4(a) in Appendix D.
to supply the loads calculated in accordance with 2.20.2.1. In addition,
branch circuits shall be provided for specific loads not covered by
2.20.2.1 where required elsewhere in this Code and for dwelling unit
loads as specified in 2.10.1.11(c).
2.10.1.12 Arc-Fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection. noncontinuous loads, the minimum branch-circuit conductor size,
before the application of any adjustment or correction factors, shall
(a) Definition: Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter. An arc-fault circuit have an allowable ampacity not less than the noncontinuous load plus
interrupter is a device intended to provide protection from the effects 125 percent of the continuous load.
of arc faults by recognizing characteristics unique to arcing and by
functioning to de-energize the circuit when an arc fault is detected. Exception: Where the assembly, including the overcurrent devices
protecting the branch circuit(s), is listed for operation at 100 percent
(b) Dwelling Unit Bedrooms. All 115-volt and/or 230-volt, single of its rating, the allowable ampacity of the branch circuit conductors
phase, 15- and 20-ampere branch circuits supplying outlets installed in shall be permitted to be not less than the sum of the continuous load
dwelling unit bedrooms shall be protected by a listed arc-fault circuit plus the noncontinuous load.
interrupter, combination type installed to provide protection of the
branch circuit. This requirement shall become effective January 1, FPN No. 1: See 3.10.1.15 for ampacity ratings of conductors.
FPN No. 2: See Part 4.30.2 for minimum rating of motor branch-circuit conductors.
2014. FPN No. 3: See 3.10.1.10 for temperature limitation of conductors.
FPN No. 4: Conductors for branch circuits as defined in Article 1.0, sized to
FPN: For information on types of arc-fault circuit interrupters, see UL 1699-1999, prevent a voltage drop exceeding 3 percent at the farthest outlet of power, heating,
Standard for Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupters. and lighting loads, or combinations of such loads, and where the maximum total
voltage drop on both feeders and branch circuits to the farthest outlet does not
exceed 5 percent, provide reasonable efficiency of operation. See FPN No. 2 of
Exception: The location of the arc-fault circuit interrupter shall be 2.15.1.2(a)(3) for voltage drop on feeder conductors.
permitted to be at other than the origination of the branch circuit in
compliance with (a) and (b): (2) Multioutlet Branch Circuits. Conductors of branch circuits
(a) The arc-fault circuit interrupter installed within 1800 mm of the supplying more than one receptacle for cord-and-plug-connected
branch circuit overcurrent device as measured along the branch portable loads shall have an ampacity of not less than the rating of the
circuit conductors. branch circuit.
(b) The circuit conductors between the branch circuit overcurrent (3) Household Ranges and Cooking Appliances. Branch-circuit
device and the arc-fault circuit interrupter shall be installed in a metal conductors supplying household ranges, wall-mounted ovens, counter-
raceway or a cable with a metallic sheath. mounted cooking units, and other household cooking appliances shall
have an ampacity not less than the rating of the branch circuit and not
2.10.1.18 Guest Rooms and Guest Suites. Guest rooms and guest less than the maximum load to be served. For ranges of 8¾ kW or
suites that are provided with permanent provisions for cooking shall more rating, the minimum branch-circuit rating shall be 40 amperes.
have branch circuits and outlets installed to meet the rules for dwelling
units. Exception No. 1: Tap conductors supplying electric ranges, wall-
mounted electric ovens, and counter-mounted electric cooking units
2.10.2 Branch-Circuit Ratings from a 50-ampere branch circuit shall have an ampacity of not less
than 20 and shall be sufficient for the load to be served. These tap
2.10.2.1 Conductors — Minimum Ampacity and Size. conductors include any conductors that are a part of the leads
supplied with the appliance that are smaller than the branch circuit
(a) Branch Circuits Not More Than 600 Volts. conductors. The taps shall not be longer than necessary for servicing
the appliance.
(1) General. Branch-circuit conductors shall have an ampacity not Exception No. 2: The neutral conductor of a 3-wire branch circuit
less than the maximum load to be served. Where a branch circuit supplying a household electric range, a wall-mounted oven, or a
supplies continuous loads or any combination of continuous and counter-mounted cooking unit shall be permitted to be smaller than
the ungrounded conductors where the maximum demand of a range of engineering supervision. Supervised installations are defined as those
8¾ kW or more rating has been calculated according to Column C of portions of a facility where both of the following conditions are met:
Table 2.20.3.16, but such conductor shall have an ampacity of not less
than 70 percent of the branch-circuit rating and shall not be smaller a. Conditions of design and installation are provided under
than 5.5 mm2 (2.6 mm dia.). engineering supervision.
b. Licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical
(4) Other Loads. Branch-circuit conductors that supply loads other practitioner under the supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner
than those specified in 2.10.1.2 and other than cooking appliances as with documented training and experience in over 600-volt systems
covered in 2.10.2.1(a)(3) shall have an ampacity sufficient for the provide maintenance, monitoring, and servicing of the system.
loads served and shall not be smaller than 2.0 mm2 (1.6 mm dia.).
2.10.2.2 Overcurrent Protection. Branch-circuit conductors and
Exception No. 1: Tap conductors shall have an ampacity sufficient for equipment shall be protected by overcurrent protective devices that
the load served. In addition, they shall have an ampacity of not less have a rating or setting that complies with 2.10.2.2(a) through (d).
than 15 for circuits rated less than 40 amperes and not less than 20
for circuits rated at 40 or 50 amperes and only where these tap (a) Continuous and Noncontinuous Loads. Where a branch circuit
conductors supply any of the following loads: supplies continuous loads or any combination of continuous and
(a) Individual lampholders or luminaires (fixtures) with taps noncontinuous loads, the rating of the overcurrent device shall not be
extending not longer than 450 mm beyond any portion of the less than the noncontinuous load plus 125 percent of the continuous
lampholder or luminaire (fixture). load.
(b) A fixture having tap conductors as provided in 4.10.11.4.
(c) Individual outlets, other than receptacle outlets, with taps not Exception: Where the assembly, including the overcurrent devices
over 450 mm long. protecting the branch circuit(s), is listed for operation at 100 percent
(d) Infrared lamp industrial heating appliances. of its rating, the ampere rating of the overcurrent device shall be
(e) Nonheating leads of deicing and snow-melting cables and permitted to be not less than the sum of the continuous load plus the
mats. noncontinuous load.
Exception No. 2: Fixture wires and flexible cords shall be permitted
to be smaller than 2.0 mm2 (1.6 mm dia.) as permitted by 2.40.1.5. (b) Conductor Protection. Conductors shall be protected in
accordance with 2.40.1.4. Flexible cords and fixture wires shall be
(b) Branch Circuits Over 600 Volts. The ampacity of conductors protected in accordance with 2.40.1.5.
shall be in accordance with 3.10.1.15 and 3.10.160, as applicable.
Branch-circuit conductors over 600 volts shall be sized in accordance (c) Equipment. The rating or setting of the overcurrent protective
with 2.10.2.1(b)(1) or (b)(2). device shall not exceed that specified in the applicable articles
referenced in Table 2.40.1.3 for equipment.
(1) General. The ampacity of branch-circuit conductors shall not
be less than 125 percent of the designed potential load of utilization (d) Outlet Devices. The rating or setting shall not exceed that
equipment that will be operated simultaneously. specified in 2.10.2.3 for outlet devices.
(2) Supervised Installations. For supervised installations, branch-
circuit conductor sizing shall be permitted to be determined by 2.10.2.3 Outlet Devices. Outlet devices shall have an ampere rating
licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner that is not less than the load to be served and shall comply with
under the supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner under 2.10.2.3(a) and (b).
 (a) Lampholders. Where connected to a branch circuit having a
rating in excess of 20 amperes, lampholders shall be of the heavy-duty Exception No. 1: Receptacles for one or more cord-and-plug-
type. A heavy-duty lampholder shall have a rating of not less than 660 connected arc welders shall be permitted to have ampere ratings not
watts if of the admedium type, or not less than 750 watts if of any less than the minimum branch-circuit conductor ampacity permitted
other type. by 6.30.2.1(a) or (b) as applicable for arc welders.
Exception No. 2: The ampere rating of a receptacle installed for
(b) Receptacles. electric discharge lighting shall be permitted to be based on
4.10.6.9(c).
(1) Single Receptacle on an Individual Branch Circuit. A single
receptacle installed on an individual branch circuit shall have an
ampere rating not less than that of the branch circuit. Table 2.10.2.3(b)(3) Receptacle Ratings for Various Size Circuits

Exception No. 1: A receptacle installed in accordance with Circuit Rating Receptacle Rating
4.30.7.1(b). (Amperes) (Amperes)
Exception No. 2: A receptacle installed exclusively for the use of a 15 Not over 15
cord-and-plug-connected arc welder shall be permitted to have an 20 15 or 20
ampere rating not less than the minimum branch-circuit conductor 30 30
ampacity determined by 6.30.2.1(a) for arc welders. 40 40 or 50
50 50
FPN: See the definition of receptacle in Article 1.0.

(2) Total Cord-and-Plug-Connected Load. Where connected to a

(4) Range Receptacle Rating. The ampere rating of a range
branch circuit supplying two or more receptacles or outlets, a
receptacle shall be permitted to be based on a single range demand
receptacle shall not supply a total cord-and-plug-connected load in
load as specified in Table 2.20.3.16.
excess of the maximum specified in Table 2.10.2.3(b)(2).
2.10.2.5 Permissible Loads. In no case shall the load exceed the
branch-circuit ampere rating. An individual branch circuit shall be
Table 2.10.2.3(b)(2) Maximum Cord-and-Plug-Connected
permitted to supply any load for which it is rated. A branch circuit
Load to Receptacle
supplying two or more outlets or receptacles shall supply only the
Circuit Rating Receptacle Rating Maximum Load loads specified according to its size as specified in 2.10.2.5(a) through
(Amperes) (Amperes) (Amperes) (d) and as summarized in 2.10.2.6 and Table 2.10.2.6.
15 or 20 15 12
20 20 16 (a) 15- and 20-Ampere Branch Circuits. A 15- or 20-ampere
30 30 24 branch circuit shall be permitted to supply lighting units or other
utilization equipment, or a combination of both, and shall comply with
2.10.2.5(a)(1) and (a)(2).
(3) Receptacle Ratings. Where connected to a branch circuit
supplying two or more receptacles or outlets, receptacle ratings shall Exception: The small appliance branch circuits, laundry branch
conform to the values listed in Table 2.10.2.3(b)(3), or where larger circuits, and bathroom branch circuits required in a dwelling unit(s)
than 50 amperes, the receptacle rating shall not be less than the by 2.10.1.11(c)(1), (c)(2), and (c)(3) shall supply only the receptacle
branch-circuit rating. outlets specified in that section.
 (1) Cord-and-Plug-Connected Equipment Not Fastened in Place.
The rating of any one cord-and-plug-connected utilization equipment
not fastened in place shall not exceed 80 percent of the branch-circuit
ampere rating.
(2) Utilization Equipment Fastened in Place. The total rating of
utilization equipment fastened in place, other than luminaires (lighting
fixtures), shall not exceed 50 percent of the branch-circuit ampere
rating where lighting units, cord-and-plug-connected utilization
equipment not fastened in place, or both, are also supplied.

(b) 30-Ampere Branch Circuits. A 30-ampere branch circuit shall

be permitted to supply fixed lighting units with heavy-duty
lampholders in other than a dwelling unit(s) or utilization equipment in
any occupancy. A rating of any one cord-and-plug-connected
utilization equipment shall not exceed 80 percent of the branch-circuit
ampere rating.

(c) 40- and 50-Ampere Branch Circuits. A 40- or 50-ampere

branch circuit shall be permitted to supply cooking appliances that are
fastened in place in any occupancy. In other than dwelling units, such
circuits shall be permitted to supply fixed lighting units with heavy-
duty lampholders, infrared heating units, or other utilization
equipment.

(d) Branch Circuits Larger Than 50 Amperes. Branch circuits

larger than 50 amperes shall supply only nonlighting outlet loads.
2.10.2.6 Branch-Circuit Requirements — Summary.
The requirements for circuits that have two or more outlets or
receptacles, other than the receptacle circuits of 2.10.1.11(c)(1) and
(c)(2), are summarized in Table 2.10.2.6. This table provides only a
summary of minimum requirements. See 2.10.2.1, 2.10.2.2, and
2.10.2.3 for the specific requirements applying to branch circuits.

2.10.2.7 Common Area Branch Circuits. Branch circuits in dwelling

units shall supply only loads within that dwelling unit or loads
associated only with that dwelling unit. Branch circuits required for
the purpose of lighting, central alarm, signal, communications, or
other needs for public or common areas of a two-family or multifamily
dwelling shall not be supplied from equipment that supplies an
individual dwelling unit.
 Table 2.10.2.6 Summary of Branch-Circuit Requirements
Circuit Rating 15 A 20 A 30 A 40 A 50 A
Conductors (min. size):
Circuit wires1 14 12 10 8 6
Taps 14 14 14 12 12
Fixture wires and cords — see
2.40.1.5
Overcurrent Protection 15 A 20 A 30 A 40 A 50 A
Outlet devices:
Lampholders permitted Any type Any type Heavy duty Heavy duty Heavy duty
2
Receptacle rating 15 max. A 15 or 20 A 30 A 40 or 50 A 50 A
Maximum Load 15 A 20 A 30 A 40 A 50 A
Permissible load See See See See See
2.10.2.5(a) 2.10.2.5(a) 2.10.2.5(b) 2.10.2.5(c) 2.10.2.5(c)
1
These gauges are for copper conductors.
2
For receptacle rating of cord-connected electric-discharge luminaires (lighting fixtures), see 4.10.6.9(c).
 2.10.3 Required Outlets (1) Spacing. Receptacles shall be installed so that no point
measured horizontally along the floor line in any wall space is more
2.10.3.1 General. Receptacle outlets shall be installed as specified in than 1 800 mm from a receptacle outlet.
2.10.3.3 through 2.10.3.14. (2) Wall Space. As used in this section, a wall space shall include
the following:
(a) Cord Pendants. A cord connector that is supplied by a
permanently connected cord pendant shall be considered a receptacle a. Any space 600 mm or more in width (including space
outlet. measured around corners) and unbroken along the floor line by
doorways, fireplaces, and similar openings
(b) Cord Connections. A receptacle outlet shall be installed b. The space occupied by fixed panels in exterior walls,
wherever flexible cords with attachment plugs are used. Where excluding sliding panels
flexible cords are permitted to be permanently connected, receptacles c. The space afforded by fixed room dividers such as
shall be permitted to be omitted for such cords. freestanding bar-type counters or railings

(c) Appliance Outlets. Appliance receptacle outlets installed in a (3) Floor Receptacles. Receptacle outlets in floors shall not be
dwelling unit for specific appliances, such as laundry equipment, shall counted as part of the required number of receptacle outlets unless
be installed within 1 800 mm of the intended location of the appliance. located within 450 mm of the wall.

2.10.3.3 Dwelling Unit Receptacle Outlets. This section provides (b) Small Appliances.
requirements for 125-volt, 15- and 20-ampere receptacle outlets.
Receptacle outlets required by this section shall be in addition to any (1) Receptacle Outlets Served. In the kitchen, pantry, breakfast
receptacle that is part of a luminaire (lighting fixture) or appliance, room, dining room, or similar area of a dwelling unit, the two or more
located within cabinets or cupboards, or located more than 1 700 mm 20-ampere small-appliance branch circuits required by 2.10.1.11(c)(1)
above the floor. shall serve all wall and floor receptacle outlets covered by 2.10.3.3(a),
Permanently installed electric baseboard heaters equipped with all countertop outlets covered by 2.10.3.3(c), and receptacle outlets for
factory-installed receptacle outlets or outlets provided as a separate refrigeration equipment.
assembly by the manufacturer shall be permitted as the required outlet
or outlets for the wall space utilized by such permanently installed Exception No. 1: In addition to the required receptacles specified by
heaters. Such receptacle outlets shall not be connected to the heater 2.10.3.3, switched receptacles supplied from a general-purpose
circuits. branch circuit as defined in 2.10.3.21(a)(1), Exception No. 1, shall be
permitted.
FPN: Listed baseboard heaters include instructions that may not permit their Exception No. 2: The receptacle outlet for refrigeration equipment
installation below receptacle outlets.
shall be permitted to be supplied from an individual branch circuit
rated 15 amperes or greater.
(a) General Provisions. In every kitchen, family room, dining
room, living room, parlor, library, den, sunroom, bedroom, recreation
(2) No Other Outlets. The two or more small-appliance branch
room, or similar room or area of dwelling units, receptacle outlets
circuits specified in 2.10.3.3(b)(1) shall have no other outlets.
shall be installed in accordance with the general provisions specified
in 2.10.3.3(a)(1) through (a)(3).
Exception No. 1: A receptacle installed solely for the electrical supply
to and support of an electric clock in any of the rooms specified in
2.10.3.3(b)(1).
Exception No. 2: Receptacles installed to provide power for (5) Receptacle Outlet Location. Receptacle outlets shall be located
supplemental equipment and lighting on gas-fired ranges, ovens, or above, but not more than 500 mm above, the countertop. Receptacle
counter-mounted cooking units. outlets rendered not readily accessible by appliances fastened in place,
appliance garages, sinks, or rangetops as covered in 2.10.3.3(c)(1),
(3) Kitchen Receptacle Requirements. Receptacles installed in a Exception, or appliances occupying dedicated space shall not be
kitchen to serve countertop surfaces shall be supplied by not fewer considered as these required outlets.
than two small-appliance branch circuits, either or both of which shall
also be permitted to supply receptacle outlets in the same kitchen and
in other rooms specified in 2.10.3.3(b)(1). Additional small-appliance
branch circuits shall be permitted to supply receptacle outlets in the
kitchen and other rooms specified in 2.10.3.3(b)(1). No small-
appliance branch circuit shall serve more than one kitchen.

(c) Countertops. In kitchens and dining rooms of dwelling units,

receptacle outlets for counter spaces shall be installed in accordance
with 2.10.3.3(c)(1) through (c)(5).

(1) Wall Counter Spaces. A receptacle outlet shall be installed at

each wall counter space that is 300 mm or wider. Receptacle outlets
shall be installed so that no point along the wall line is more than 600
mm measured horizontally from a receptacle outlet in that space.

Exception: Receptacle outlets shall not be required on a wall directly

behind a range or sink in the installation described in Figure 2.10.3.3.

(2) Island Counter Spaces. At least one receptacle shall be

installed at each island counter space with a long dimension of 600
mm or greater and a short dimension of 300 mm or greater. Where a
rangetop or sink is installed in an island counter and the width of the
counter behind the rangetop or sink is less than 300 mm, the rangetop
or sink is considered to divide the island into two separate countertop
spaces as defined in 2.10.3.3(c)(4).
(3) Peninsular Counter Spaces. At least one receptacle outlet shall
be installed at each peninsular counter space with a long dimension of
600 mm or greater and a short dimension of 300 mm or greater. A
peninsular countertop is measured from the connecting edge.
(4) Separate Spaces. Countertop spaces separated by rangetops,
refrigerators, or sinks shall be considered as separate countertop
spaces in applying the requirements of 2.10.3.3(c)(1), (c)(2), and Figure 2.10.3.3 Determination of Area Behind Sink or Range.
(c)(3).
Exception to (5): To comply with the conditions specified in (1) or (2),
receptacle outlets shall be permitted to be mounted not more than (g) Basements and Garages. For a one-family dwelling, at least
300 mm below the countertop. Receptacles mounted below a one receptacle outlet, in addition to any provided for laundry
countertop in accordance with this exception shall not be located equipment, shall be installed in each basement and in each attached
where the countertop extends more than 150 mm beyond its support garage, and in each detached garage with electric power. See
base. 2.10.1.8(a)(2) and (a)(5). Where a portion of the basement is finished
(1) Construction for the physically impaired into one or more habitable rooms, each separate unfinished portion
(2) On island and peninsular countertops where the countertop is shall have a receptacle outlet installed in accordance with this section.
flat across its entire surface (no backsplashes, dividers, etc.) and there
are no means to mount a receptacle within 500 mm above the (h) Hallways. In dwelling units, hallways of 3 000 mm or more in
countertop, such as an overhead cabinet length shall have at least one receptacle outlet.
As used in this subsection, the hall length shall be considered the
(d) Bathrooms. In dwelling units, at least one receptacle outlet shall length along the centerline of the hall without passing through a
be installed in bathrooms within 900 mm of the outside edge of each doorway.
basin. The receptacle outlet shall be located on a wall or partition that
is adjacent to the basin or basin countertop. 2.10.3.11 Guest Rooms or Guest Suites.

Exception: The receptacle shall not be required to be mounted in the (a) General. Guest rooms or guest suites in hotels, motels, and
wall or partition where it is installed on the side or face of the basin similar occupancies shall have receptacle outlets installed in
cabinet not more than 300 mm below the countertop. accordance with 2.10.3.3(a) and 2.10.3.3(d). Guest rooms or guest
suites provided with permanent provisions for cooking shall have
(e) Outdoor Outlets. For a one-family dwelling and each unit of a receptacle outlets installed in accordance with all of the applicable
two-family dwelling that is at grade level, at least one receptacle outlet rules in 2.10.3.3.
accessible at grade level and not more than 2 000 mm above grade
shall be installed at the front and back of the dwelling. (b) Receptacle Placement. In applying the provisions of
For each dwelling unit of a multifamily dwelling where the dwelling 2.10.3.3(a), the total number of receptacle outlets shall not be less than
unit is located at grade level and provided with individual exterior the minimum number that would comply with the provisions of that
entrance/egress, at least one receptacle outlet accessible from grade section. These receptacle outlets shall be permitted to be located
level and not more than 2 000 mm above grade shall be installed. See conveniently for permanent furniture layout. At least two receptacle
2.10.1.8(a)(3). outlets shall be readily accessible. Where receptacles are installed
behind the bed, the receptacle shall be located to prevent the bed from
(f) Laundry Areas. In dwelling units, at least one receptacle outlet contacting any attachment plug that may be installed or the receptacle
shall be installed for the laundry. shall be provided with a suitable guard.

Exception No. 1: In a dwelling unit that is an apartment or living area 2.10.3.13 Show Windows. At least one receptacle outlet shall be
in a multifamily building where laundry facilities are provided on the installed directly above a show window for each 3 600 linear mm or
premises and are available to all building occupants, a laundry major fraction thereof of show window area measured horizontally at
receptacle shall not be required. its maximum width.
Exception No. 2: In other than one-family dwellings where laundry
facilities are not to be installed or permitted, a laundry receptacle 2.10.3.14 Heating, Air-Conditioning, and Refrigeration
shall not be required. Equipment Outlet. A 125-volt and/or 250 volts, single-phase, 15- or
20-ampere-rated receptacle outlet shall be installed at an accessible c. Where one or more lighting outlet(s) are installed for interior
location for the servicing of heating, air-conditioning, and refrigeration stairways, there shall be a wall switch at each floor level, and landing
equipment. The receptacle shall be located on the same level and level that includes an entryway, to control the lighting outlet(s) where
within 7 600 mm of the heating, air-conditioning, and refrigeration the stairway between floor levels has six risers or more.
equipment. The receptacle outlet shall not be connected to the load
side of the equipment disconnecting means. Exception to (a)(2)a, (a)(2)b, and (a)(2)c: In hallways, stairways, and
at outdoor entrances, remote, central, or automatic control of lighting
Exception: A receptacle outlet shall not be required at one- and two- shall be permitted.
family dwellings for the service of evaporative coolers.
(3) Storage or Equipment Spaces. For attics, underfloor spaces,
FPN: See 2.10.1.8 for ground-fault circuit-interrupter requirements. utility rooms, and basements, at least one lighting outlet containing a
switch or controlled by a wall switch shall be installed where these
2.10.3.21 Lighting Outlets Required. Lighting outlets shall be spaces are used for storage or contain equipment requiring servicing.
installed where specified in 2.10.3.21(a), (b), and (c). At least one point of control shall be at the usual point of entry to these
spaces. The lighting outlet shall be provided at or near the equipment
(a) Dwelling Units. In dwelling units, lighting outlets shall be requiring servicing.
installed in accordance with 2.10.3.21(a)(1), (a)(2), and (a)(3).
(b) Guest Rooms or Guest Suites. In hotels, motels, or similar
(1) Habitable Rooms. At least one wall switch-controlled lighting occupancies, guest rooms or guest suites shall have at least one wall
outlet shall be installed in every habitable room and bathroom. switch–controlled lighting outlet installed in every habitable room and
bathroom.
Exception No. 1: In other than kitchens and bathrooms, one or more
receptacles controlled by a wall switch shall be permitted in lieu of Exception No. 1: In other than bathrooms and kitchens where
lighting outlets. provided, one or more receptacles controlled by a wall switch shall be
Exception No. 2: Lighting outlets shall be permitted to be controlled permitted in lieu of lighting outlets.
by occupancy sensors that are (1) in addition to wall switches or (2) Exception No. 2: Lighting outlets shall be permitted to be controlled
located at a customary wall switch location and equipped with a by occupancy sensors that are (1) in addition to wall switches or (2)
manual override that will allow the sensor to function as a wall located at a customary wall switch location and equipped with a
switch. manual override that will allow the sensor to function as a wall
switch.
(2) Additional Locations. Additional lighting outlets shall be
installed in accordance with (a)(2)a, (a)(2)b, and (a)(2)c. (c) Other Than Dwelling Units. For attics and underfloor spaces
containing equipment requiring servicing, such as heating, air-
a. At least one wall switch-controlled lighting outlet shall be conditioning, and refrigeration equipment, at least one lighting outlet
installed in hallways, stairways, attached garages, and detached containing a switch or controlled by a wall switch shall be installed in
garages with electric power. such spaces. At least one point of control shall be at the usual point of
b. For dwelling units, attached garages, and detached garages entry to these spaces. The lighting outlet shall be provided at or near
with electric power, at least one wall switch–controlled lighting outlet the equipment requiring servicing.
shall be installed to provide illumination on the exterior side of
outdoor entrances or exits with grade level access. A vehicle door in a
garage shall not be considered as an outdoor entrance or exit.
 ARTICLE 2.15 — FEEDERS
FPN No. 1: See Examples D1 through D12 in Appendix D.
FPN No. 2: Conductors for feeders as defined in Article 1.0, sized to prevent a
2.15.1.1 Scope. This article covers the installation requirements, voltage drop exceeding 3 percent at the farthest outlet of power, heating, and
overcurrent protection requirements, minimum size, and ampacity of lighting loads, or combinations of such loads, and where the maximum total
conductors for feeders supplying branch-circuit loads. voltage drop on both feeders and branch circuits to the farthest outlet does not
exceed 5 percent, will provide reasonable efficiency of operation.
FPN No. 3: See 2.10.2.1(a), FPN No. 4, for voltage drop for branch circuits.
Exception: Feeders for electrolytic cells as covered in 6.68.1.3(c)(1)
and (c)(4). (b) Feeders Over 600 Volts. The ampacity of conductors shall be in
accordance with 3.10.1.15 and 3.10.1.60 as applicable. Where
2.15.1.2 Minimum Rating and Size. installed, the size of the feeder circuit grounded conductor shall not be
smaller than that required by 2.50.6.13, except that 2.50.6.13(f) shall
(a) Feeders Not More Than 600 Volts. not apply where grounded conductors are run in parallel. Feeder
conductors over 600 volts shall be sized in accordance with
(1) General. Feeder conductors shall have an ampacity not less 2.15.1.2(b)(1), (b)(2), or (b)(3).
than required to supply the load as calculated in Parts 2.20.3, 2.20.4,
and 2.20.5. The minimum feeder-circuit conductor size, before the (1) Feeders Supplying Transformers. The ampacity of feeder
application of any adjustment or correction factors, shall have an conductors shall not be less than the sum of the nameplate ratings of
allowable ampacity not less than the noncontinuous load plus 125 the transformers supplied when only transformers are supplied.
percent of the continuous load. (2) Feeders Supplying Transformers and Utilization Equipment.
The ampacity of feeders supplying a combination of transformers and
Exception: Where the assembly, including the overcurrent devices utilization equipment shall not be less than the sum of the nameplate
protecting the feeder(s), is listed for operation at 100 percent of its ratings of the transformers and 125 percent of the designed potential
rating, the allowable ampacity of the feeder conductors shall be load of the utilization equipment that will be operated simultaneously.
permitted to be not less than the sum of the continuous load plus the (3) Supervised Installations. For supervised installations, feeder
noncontinuous load. conductor sizing shall be permitted to be determined by licensed
electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner under the
The size of the feeder circuit grounded conductor shall not be supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner. Supervised
smaller than that required by 2.50.6.13, except that 2.50.6.13(f) shall installations are defined as those portions of a facility where all of the
not apply where grounded conductors are run in parallel. following conditions are met:
Additional minimum sizes shall be as specified in 2.15.1.2(a)(2)
and (a)(3) under the conditions stipulated. a. Conditions of design and installation are provided under
engineering supervision.
(2) Ampacity Relative to Service Conductors. The feeder b. Licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical
conductor ampacity shall not be less than that of the service practitioner under the supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner
conductors where the feeder conductors carry the total load supplied with documented training and experience in over 600-volt systems
by service conductors with an ampacity of 55 amperes or less. provide maintenance, monitoring, and servicing of the system.

(3) Individual Dwelling Unit or Mobile Home Conductors. Feeder 2.15.1.3 Overcurrent Protection. Feeders shall be protected against
conductors for individual dwelling units or mobile homes need not be overcurrent in accordance with the provisions of Part 2.40.1. Where a
larger than service conductors. Paragraph 3.10.1.15(b)(6) shall be feeder supplies continuous loads or any combination of continuous
permitted to be used for conductor size. and noncontinuous loads, the rating of the overcurrent device shall not
be less than the noncontinuous load plus 125 percent of the continuous conductor. Switching devices in each tapped circuit shall have a pole
load. in each ungrounded conductor.

Exception No. 1: Where the assembly, including the overcurrent 2.15.1.9 Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection for
devices protecting the feeder(s), is listed for operation at 100 percent Personnel. Feeders supplying 15- and 20-ampere receptacle branch
of its rating, the ampere rating of the overcurrent device shall be circuits shall be permitted to be protected by a ground-fault circuit
permitted to be not less than the sum of the continuous load plus the interrupter in lieu of the provisions for such interrupters as specified in
noncontinuous load. 2.10.1.8 and 5.90.1.6(a).
Exception No. 2: Overcurrent protection for feeders over 600 volts,
nominal, shall comply with Part 2.40.11. 2.15.1.10 Ground-Fault Protection of Equipment. Each feeder
disconnect rated 1000 amperes or more and installed on solidly
2.15.1.4 Feeders with Common Neutral. grounded wye electrical systems of more than 150 volts to ground, but
not exceeding 600 volts phase-to-phase, shall be provided with
(a) Feeders with Common Neutral. Two or three sets of 3-wire ground-fault protection of equipment in accordance with the
feeders or two sets of 4-wire or 5-wire feeders shall be permitted to provisions of 2.30.7.6.
utilize a common neutral.
FPN: For buildings that contain healthcare occupancies, see the requirements of
5.17.2.8.
(b) In Metal Raceway or Enclosure. Where installed in a metal
raceway or other metal enclosure, all conductors of all feeders using a
Exception No. 1: The provisions of this section shall not apply to a
common neutral shall be enclosed within the same raceway or other
disconnecting means for a continuous industrial process where a
enclosure as required in 3.0.1.20.
nonorderly shutdown will introduce additional or increased hazards.
Exception No. 2: The provisions of this section shall not apply to fire
2.15.1.5 Diagrams of Feeders. If required by the authority having
pumps.
jurisdiction, a diagram showing feeder details shall be provided prior
Exception No. 3: The provisions of this section shall not apply if
to the installation of the feeders. Such a diagram shall show the area in
ground-fault protection of equipment is provided on the supply side of
square feet of the building or other structure supplied by each feeder,
the feeder.
the total calculated load before applying demand factors, the demand
factors used, the calculated load after applying demand factors, and the
2.15.1.11 Circuits Derived from Autotransformers. Feeders shall
size and type of conductors to be used.
not be derived from autotransformers unless the system supplied has a
grounded conductor that is electrically connected to a grounded
2.15.1.6 Feeder Conductor Grounding Means. Where a feeder
conductor of the system supplying the autotransformer.
supplies branch circuits in which equipment grounding conductors are
required, the feeder shall include or provide a grounding means, in
Exception No. 1: An autotransformer shall be permitted without the
accordance with the provisions of 2.50.7.5, to which the equipment
connection to a grounded conductor where transforming from a
grounding conductors of the branch circuits shall be connected.
nominal 208 volts to a nominal 240-volt supply or similarly from 240
volts to 208 volts.
2.15.1.7 Ungrounded Conductors Tapped from Grounded
Exception No. 2: In industrial occupancies, where conditions of
Systems. Two-wire dc circuits and ac circuits of two or more
maintenance and supervision ensure that only licensed electrical
ungrounded conductors shall be permitted to be tapped from the
practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner under the
ungrounded conductors of circuits having a grounded neutral
supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner service the
installation, autotransformers shall be permitted to supply nominal
600-volt loads from nominal 480-volt systems, and 480-volt loads
from nominal 600-volt systems, without the connection to a similar
grounded conductor.

2.15.1.12 Identification for Feeders.

(a) Grounded Conductor. The grounded conductor of a feeder

shall be identified in accordance with 2.0.1.6.

(b) Equipment Grounding Conductor. The equipment grounding

conductor shall be identified in accordance with 2.50.6.10.

(c) Ungrounded Conductors. Where the premises wiring system

has feeders supplied from more than one nominal voltage system, each
ungrounded conductor of a feeder, where accessible, shall be
identified by system. The means of identification shall be permitted to
be by separate color coding, marking tape, tagging, or other approved
means and shall be permanently posted at each feeder panelboard or
similar feeder distribution equipment.

ARTICLE 2.20 — BRANCH-CIRCUIT, FEEDER,

AND SERVICE CALCULATIONS

2.20.1 General
Figure 2.20.1.1 Branch-Circuit, Feeder, and
2.20.1.1 Scope. This article provides requirements for calculating Service Calculation Methods.
branch-circuit, feeder, and service loads. Part 2.20.1 provides for
general requirements for calculation methods. Part 2.20.2 provides
calculation methods for branch circuit loads. Parts 2.20.3 and 2.20.4
provide calculation methods for feeders and services. Part 2.20.5
provides calculation methods for farms.

FPN: See Figure 2.20.1.1 for information on the organization of Article 2.20.

2.20.1.3 Application of Other Articles. In other articles applying to

the calculation of loads in specialized applications, there are
requirements provided in Table 2.20.1.3 that are in addition to, or
modifications of, those within this article.
 Table 2.20.1.3 Additional Load Calculation References
Calculation Article Section (or Part)
Air-Conditioning and Refrigerating Equipment, Branch-Circuit 4.40 Part 4.40.4
Conductor Sizing
Cranes and Hoists, Rating and Size of Conductors 6.10 6.10.2.4
Electric Welders, ampacity calculations 6.30 6.30.2.1, 6.30.3.1
Electrically Driven or Controlled Irrigation Machines 6.75 6.75.1.7(a), 6.75.2.2(a)

Electrolytic Cell Lines 6.68 6.68.13(c)

Electroplating, Branch-Circuit Conductor Sizing 6.69 6.69.1.5
Elevator Feeder Demand Factors 6.20 6.20.2.4
Fire Pumps, Voltage Drop (mandatory calculation) 6.95 6.95.1.7

Fixed Electric Heating Equipment for Pipelines and Vessels, 4.27 4.27.1.4
Branch-Circuit Sizing
Fixed Electric Space Heating Equipment, Branch-Circuit Sizing 4.24 4.24.1.3
Fixed Outdoor Electric Deicing and Snow-Melting Equipment, 4.26 4.26.1.4
Branch-Circuit Sizing

Industrial Machinery, Supply Conductor Sizing 6.70 6.70.1.4(a)

Marinas and Boatyards, Feeder and Service Load Calculations 5.55 5.55.1.12
Mobile Homes, Manufactured Homes, and Mobile Home Parks, 5.50 5.50.2.9(b)
Total Load for Determining Power Supply
Table 2.20.1.3 (Continued)
Calculation Article Section (or Part)
Mobile Homes, Manufactured Homes, and Mobile Home Parks, 5.50 5.50.3.2
Allowable Demand Factors for Park Electrical Wiring Systems
Motion Picture and Television Studios and Similar Locations – 5.30 5.30.2.9
Sizing of Feeder Conductors for Television Studio Sets

Motors, Feeder Demand Factor 4.30 4.30.2.26

Motors, Multimotor and Combination-Load Equipment 4.30 4.30.2.25
Motors, Several Motors or a Motor(s) and Other Load(s)] 4.30 4.30.2.24
Over 600 Volt Branch Circuit Calculations 2.10 2.10.2.1(b)
Over 600 Volt Feeder Calculations 2.15 2.15.1.2(b)

Phase Converters, Conductors 4.55 4.55.1.6

Recreational Vehicle Parks, Basis of Calculations 5.51 5.51.6.3(a)
Sensitive Electrical Equipment, Voltage Drop (mandatory 6.47 6.47.1.4(d)
calculation)
Solar Photovoltaic Systems, Circuit Sizing and Current 6.90 6.90.2.2
Storage-Type Water Heaters 4.22 4.22.2.2(e)
Theaters, Stage Switchboard Feeders 5.20 5.20.2.7
2.20.1.5 Calculations. Table 2.20.2.3 General Lighting Loads by Occupancy
Unit Load
(a) Voltages. Unless other voltages are specified, for purposes of Type of Occupancy Volt-Amperes per
calculating branch-circuit and feeder loads, nominal system voltages Square Meter
of 115, 115/230, 208Y/120, 230, 347, 400Y/230, 460Y/265, 460, Armories and auditoriums 11
600Y/347, and 600 volts shall be used. Banks 39b
Barber shops and beauty parlors 33
(b) Fractions of an Ampere. Where calculations result in a fraction Churches 11
of an ampere that is less than 0.5, such fractions shall be permitted to Clubs 22
be dropped. Court rooms 22
Dwelling unitsa 33
2.20.2 Branch Circuit Load Calculations Garages — commercial (storage) 6
Hospitals 22
2.20.2.1 General. Branch-circuit loads shall be calculated as shown in Hotels and motels, including apartment 22
2.20.2.3, 2.20.2.5, and 2.20.2.7. houses without provision for cooking by
tenantsa
2.20.2.3 Lighting Load for Specified Occupancies. A unit load of Industrial commercial (loft) buildings 22
not less than that specified in Table 2.20.2.3 for occupancies specified Lodge rooms 17
therein shall constitute the minimum lighting load. The floor area for Office buildings 39b
each floor shall be calculated from the outside dimensions of the Restaurants 22
building, dwelling unit, or other area involved. For dwelling units, the Schools 33
calculated floor area shall not include open porches, garages, or Stores 33
unused or unfinished spaces not adaptable for future use. Warehouses (storage) 3
In any of the preceding occupancies except
FPN: The unit values herein are based on minimum load conditions and 100
percent power factor and may not provide sufficient capacity for the installation one-family dwellings and individual
contemplated. dwelling units of two-family and
multifamily dwellings:
2.20.2.5 Other Loads — All Occupancies. In all occupancies, the Assembly halls and auditoriums 11
minimum load for each outlet for general-use receptacles and outlets Halls, corridors, closets, stairways 6
not used for general illumination shall not be less than that calculated Storage spaces 3
a
in 2.20.2.5(a) through (l), the loads shown being based on nominal See 2.20.2.5(j).
branch-circuit voltages. bSee2.20.2.5(k).

Exception: The loads of outlets serving switchboards and switching

frames in telephone exchanges shall be waived from the calculations. (b) Electric Dryers and Household Electric Cooking Appliances.
Load calculations shall be permitted as specified in 2.20.3.15 for
(a) Specific Appliances or Loads. An outlet for a specific appliance electric dryers and in 2.20.3.16 for electric ranges and other cooking
or other load not covered in 2.20.2.5(b) through (l) shall be calculated appliances.
based on the ampere rating of the appliance or load served.
(c) Motor Loads. Outlets for motor loads shall be calculated in
accordance with the requirements in 4.30.2.2, 4.30.2.4, and 4.40.1.6.
 (j) Dwelling Occupancies. In one-family, two-family, and
(d) Luminaires (Lighting Fixtures). An outlet supplying multifamily dwellings and in guest rooms or guest suites of hotels and
luminaire(s) [lighting fixture(s)] shall be calculated based on the motels, the outlets specified in (j)(1), (j)(2), and (j)(3) are included in
maximum volt-ampere rating of the equipment and lamps for which the general lighting load calculations of 2.20.2.3. No additional load
the luminaire(s) [fixture(s)] is rated. calculations shall be required for such outlets.

(e) Heavy-Duty Lampholders. Outlets for heavy-duty lampholders (1) All general-use receptacle outlets of 20-ampere rating or less,
shall be calculated at a minimum of 600 volt-amperes. including receptacles connected to the circuits in 2.10.1.11(c)(3)
(2) The receptacle outlets specified in 2.10.3.3(e) and (g)
(f) Sign and Outline Lighting. Sign and outline lighting outlets (3) The lighting outlets specified in 2.10.3.21(a) and (b)
shall be calculated at a minimum of 1200 volt-amperes for each
required branch circuit specified in Section 6.0.1.5(a). (k) Banks and Office Buildings. In banks or office buildings, the
receptacle loads shall be calculated to be the larger of (1) or (2):
(g) Show Windows. Show windows shall be calculated in
accordance with either of the following: (1) The computed load from 2.20.2.5
(2) 11 volt-amperes/m2
(1) The unit load per outlet as required in other provisions of this
section (l) Other Outlets. Other outlets not covered in 2.20.2.5(a) through
(2) At 200 volt-amperes per 300 mm of show window (k) shall be calculated based on 180 volt-amperes per outlet.

(h) Fixed Multioutlet Assemblies. Fixed multioutlet assemblies 2.20.2.7 Loads for Additions to Existing Installations.
used in other than dwelling units or the guest rooms or guest suites of
hotels or motels shall be calculated in accordance with (h)(1) or (h)(2). (a) Dwelling Units. Loads added to an existing dwelling unit(s)
For the purposes of this section, the calculation shall be permitted to shall comply with the following as applicable:
be based on the portion that contains receptacle outlets.
(1) Loads for structural additions to an existing dwelling unit or
(1) Where appliances are unlikely to be used simultaneously, each for a previously unwired portion of an existing dwelling unit, either of
1 500 mm or fraction thereof of each separate and continuous length which exceeds 46.5 m2 (500 ft2), shall be calculated in accordance
shall be considered as one outlet of not less than 180 volt-amperes. with 2.20.2.3 and 2.20.2.5.
(2) Where appliances are likely to be used simultaneously, each (2) Loads for new circuits or extended circuits in previously wired
300 mm or fraction thereof shall be considered as an outlet of not less dwelling units shall be calculated in accordance with either 2.20.2.3 or
than 180 volt-amperes. 2.20.2.5, as applicable.

(i) Receptacle Outlets. Except as covered in 2.20.2.5(j) and (k), (b) Other Than Dwelling Units. Loads for new circuits or extended
receptacle outlets shall be calculated at not less than 180 volt-amperes circuits in other than dwelling units shall be calculated in accordance
for each single or for each multiple receptacle on one yoke. A single with either 2.20.2.3 or 2.20.2.5, as applicable.
piece of equipment consisting of a multiple receptacle comprised of
four or more receptacles shall be calculated at not less than 90 volt- 2.20.2.9 Maximum Loads. The total load shall not exceed the rating
amperes per receptacle. This provision shall not be applicable to the of the branch circuit, and it shall not exceed the maximum loads
receptacle outlets specified in 2.10.1.11(c)(1) and (c)(2). specified in 2.20.2.9(a) through (c) under the conditions specified
therein.
 (a) Motor-Operated and Combination Loads. Where a circuit Table 2.20.3.3 Lighting Load Demand Factors
supplies only motor-operated loads, Article 4.30 shall apply. Where a Portion of Lighting
circuit supplies only air-conditioning equipment, refrigerating Load to Which
equipment, or both, Article 4.40 shall apply. For circuits supplying Demand Factor
loads consisting of motor-operated utilization equipment that is Applies Demand Factor
fastened in place and has a motor larger than hp in combination with Type of Occupancy (Volt-Amperes) (Percent)
other loads, the total calculated load shall be based on 125 percent of Dwelling units First 3000 or less at 100
the largest motor load plus the sum of the other loads. From 3001 to 120,000
at 35
(b) Inductive Lighting Loads. For circuits supplying lighting units Remainder over
that have ballasts, transformers, or autotransformers, the calculated 120,000 at 25
load shall be based on the total ampere ratings of such units and not on Hospitals* First 50,000 or less at 40
the total watts of the lamps. Remainder over
50,000 at 20
(c) Range Loads. It shall be permissible to apply demand factors for Hotels and motels, First 20,000 or less at 50
range loads in accordance with Table 2.20.3.16, including Note 4. including apartment From 20,001 to
houses without 100,000 at 40
2.20.3 Feeder and Service Load Calculations provision for cooking Remainder over
by tenants* 100,000 at 30
2.20.3.1 General. The calculated load of a feeder or service shall not Warehouses (storage) First 12,500 or less at 100
be less than the sum of the loads on the branch circuits supplied, as Remainder over
determined by Part II of this article, after any applicable demand 12,500 at 50
factors permitted by Parts III or IV or required by Part V have been All others Total volt-amperes 100
applied. *The demand factors of this table shall not apply to the calculated load of feeders or
services supplying areas in hospitals, hotels, and motels where the entire lighting is
FPN: See Examples D1(a) through D10 in Appendix D. See 2.20.2.9(b) for the likely to be used at one time, as in operating rooms, ballrooms, or dining rooms.
maximum load in amperes permitted for lighting units operating at less than 100
percent power factor.

2.20.3.3 General Lighting. The demand factors specified in Table

2.20.3.3 shall apply to that portion of the total branch-circuit load (b) Track Lighting. For track lighting in other than dwelling units
calculated for general illumination. They shall not be applied in or guest rooms or guest suites of hotels or motels, an additional load of
determining the number of branch circuits for general illumination. 150 volt-amperes shall be included for every 600 mm of lighting track
or fraction thereof. Where multicircuit track is installed, the load shall
2.20.3.4 Show-Window and Track Lighting. be considered to be divided equally between the track circuits.

(a) Show Windows. For show-window lighting, a load of not less 2.20.3.5 Receptacle Loads — Other Than Dwelling Units.
than 660 volt-amperes/linear meter shall be included for a show Receptacle loads calculated in accordance with 2.20.2.5(h) and (i)
window, measured horizontally along its base. shall be permitted to be made subject to the demand factors given in
Table 2.20.3.3 or Table 2.20.3.5.
FPN: See 2.20.2.5(g) for branch circuits supplying show windows.
 Table 2.20.3.5 Demand Factors for Non-dwelling Receptacle (b) Laundry Circuit Load. A load of not less than 1500 volt-
Loads amperes shall be included for each 2-wire laundry branch circuit
Portion of Receptacle Load to Which installed as required by 2.10.1.11(c)(2). This load shall be permitted to
Demand Factor Applies Demand Factor be included with the general lighting load and subjected to the demand
(Volt-Amperes) (Percent) factors provided in Table 2.20.3.3.
First 10 kVA or less at 100
Remainder over 10 kVA at 50 2.20.3.14 Appliance Load — Dwelling Unit(s). It shall be
permissible to apply a demand factor of 75 percent to the nameplate
rating load of four or more appliances fastened in place, other than
electric ranges, clothes dryers, space-heating equipment, or air-
2.20.3.11 Motors. Motor loads shall be calculated in accordance with conditioning equipment, that are served by the same feeder or service
4.30.2.4, 4.30.2.5, and 4.30.2.6 and with 4.40.1.6 for hermetic in a one-family, two-family, or multifamily dwelling.
refrigerant motor compressors.
2.20.3.15 Electric Clothes Dryers — Dwelling Unit(s). The load for
2.20.3.12 Fixed Electric Space Heating. Fixed electric space heating household electric clothes dryers in a dwelling unit(s) shall be either
loads shall be calculated at 100 percent of the total connected load. 5 000 watts (volt-amperes) or the nameplate rating, whichever is
However, in no case shall a feeder or service load current rating be larger, for each dryer served. The use of the demand factors in Table
less than the rating of the largest branch circuit supplied. 2.20.3.15 shall be permitted. Where two or more single-phase dryers
are supplied by a 3-phase, 4-wire feeder or service, the total load shall
Exception: Where reduced loading of the conductors results from be calculated on the basis of twice the maximum number connected
units operating on duty-cycle, intermittently, or from all units not between any two phases.
operating at the same time, the authority having jurisdiction may
grant permission for feeder and service conductors to have an
ampacity less than 100 percent, provided the conductors have an Table 2.20.3.15 Demand Factors for Household
ampacity for the load so determined. Electric Clothes Dryers
Number of Demand Factor
2.20.3.13 Small Appliance and Laundry Loads — Dwelling Unit. Dryers (Percent)
1–4 100%
(a) Small Appliance Circuit Load. In each dwelling unit, the load 5 85%
shall be calculated at 1 500 volt-amperes for each 2-wire small- 6 75%
appliance branch circuit required by 2.10.1.11(c)(1). Where the load is 7 65%
subdivided through two or more feeders, the calculated load for each 8 60%
shall include not less than 1 500 volt-amperes for each 2-wire small- 9 55%
appliance branch circuit. These loads shall be permitted to be included 10 50%
with the general lighting load and subjected to the demand factors 11 47%
provided in Table 2.20.3.3. 12–22 % = 47 – (number of dryers - 11)
23 35%
Exception: The individual branch circuit permitted by 2.10.3.3(b)(1), 24–42 % = 35 – [0.5 × (number of dryers - 23)]
Exception No. 2, shall be permitted to be excluded from the 43 and over 25%
calculation required by 2.20.3.13.
2.20.3.16 Electric Ranges and Other Cooking Appliances —
Dwelling Unit(s). The load for household electric ranges, wall-
mounted ovens, counter-mounted cooking units, and other household
cooking appliances individually rated in excess of 1¾ kW shall be
permitted to be calculated in accordance with Table 2.20.3.16.
Kilovolt-amperes (kVA) shall be considered equivalent to kilowatts
(kW) for loads calculated under this section.
Where two or more single-phase ranges are supplied by a 3-phase, 4-
wire feeder or service, the total load shall be calculated on the basis of
twice the maximum number connected between any two phases.

FPN No. 1: See Example D8 in Appendix D.

FPN No. 2: See Table 2.20.3.17 for commercial cooking equipment.
FPN No. 3: See the examples in Appendix D.
Table 2.20.3.16 Demand Factors and Loads for Household Electric Ranges, Wall-Mounted Ovens,
Counter-Mounted Cooking Units, and Other Household Cooking Appliances over 1¾ kW Rating
(Column C to be used in all cases except as otherwise permitted in Note 3.)
Demand Factor (Percent) (See Notes) Column C
Maximum Demand (kW)
Number of Column A Column B
(See Notes)
Appliances (Less than 3½ kW Rating) (3½ kW to 8¾ kW Rating)
(Not over 12 kW Rating)
1 80 80 8
2 75 65 11
3 70 55 14
4 66 50 17
5 62 45 20
6 59 43 21
7 56 40 22
8 53 36 23
9 51 35 24
10 49 34 25
11 47 32 26
12 45] 32 27
13 43 32 28
14 41 32 29
15 40 32 30
Table 2.20.3.16 (Continued)
Demand Factor (Percent) (See Notes) Column C
Maximum Demand (kW)
Number of Column A Column B
(See Notes)
Appliances (Less than 3½ kW Rating) (3½ kW to 8¾ kW Rating)
(Not over 12 kW Rating)
16 39 28 31
17 38 28 32
18 37 28 33
19 36 28 34
20 35 28 35
21 34 26 36
22 33 26 37
23 32 26 38
24 31 26 39
25 30 26 40
26–30 30 24 15 kW + 1 kW for each
31–40 30 22 range
41–50 30 20 25 kW + ¾ kW for each
51–60 30 18 range
61 and over 30 16
1. Over 12 kW through 27 kW ranges all of same rating. For ranges individually rated more than 12 kW but not more than 27 kW, the
maximum demand in Column C shall be increased 5 percent for each additional kilowatt of rating or major fraction thereof by which the rating of
individual ranges exceeds 12 kW.
2. Over 8¾ kW through 27 kW ranges of unequal ratings. For ranges individually rated more than 8¾ kW and of different ratings, but none
exceeding 27 kW, an average value of rating shall be calculated by adding together the ratings of all ranges to obtain the total connected load
(using 12 kW for any range rated less than 12 kW) and dividing by the total number of ranges. Then the maximum demand in Column C shall be
increased 5 percent for each kilowatt or major fraction thereof by which this average value exceeds 12 kW.
3. Over 1¾ kW through 8¾ kW. In lieu of the method provided in Column C, it shall be permissible to add the nameplate ratings of all
household cooking appliances rated more than 1¾ kW but not more than 8¾ kW and multiply the sum by the demand factors specified in
Column A or B for the given number of appliances. Where the rating of cooking appliances falls under both Column A and Column B, the
demand factors for each column shall be applied to the appliances for that column, and the results added together.
4. Branch-Circuit Load. It shall be permissible to calculate the branch-circuit load for one range in accordance with Table 2.20.3.16. The
branch-circuit load for one wall-mounted oven or one counter-mounted cooking unit shall be the nameplate rating of the appliance. The branch-
circuit load for a counter-mounted cooking unit and not more than two wall-mounted ovens, all supplied from a single branch circuit and located
in the same room, shall be calculated by adding the nameplate rating of the individual appliances and treating this total as equivalent to one
range.
5. This table also applies to household cooking appliances rated over 1¾ kW and used in instructional programs.
2.20.3.17 Kitchen Equipment — Other Than Dwelling Unit(s). It
shall be permissible to calculate the load for commercial electric (b) Permitted Reductions. A service or feeder supplying the
cooking equipment, dishwasher booster heaters, water heaters, and following loads shall be permitted to have an additional demand factor
other kitchen equipment in accordance with Table 2.20.3.17. These of 70 percent applied to the amount in 2.20.3.22(b)(1) or portion of the
demand factors shall be applied to all equipment that has either amount in 2.20.3.22(b)(2) determined by the basic calculation:
thermostatic control or intermittent use as kitchen equipment. These
demand factors shall not apply to space-heating, ventilating, or air- (1) A feeder or service supplying household electric ranges, wall-
conditioning equipment. mounted ovens, counter-mounted cooking units, and electric dryers,
However, in no case shall the feeder or service calculated load be less where the maximum unbalanced load has been determined in
than the sum of the largest two kitchen equipment loads. accordance with Table 2.20.3.16 for ranges and Table 2.20.3.15 for
dryers
(2) That portion of the unbalanced load in excess of 200 amperes
Table 2.20.3.17 Demand Factors for Kitchen where the feeder or service is supplied from a 3-wire dc or single-
Equipment — Other Than Dwelling Unit(s) phase ac system, or a 4-wire, 3-phase; 3-wire, 2-phase system, or a 5-
Number of Units of Demand Factor wire, 2-phase system
Equipment (Percent)
1 100 (c) Prohibited Reductions. There shall be no reduction of the
2 100 neutral or grounded conductor capacity applied to the amount in
3 90 2.20.3.22(c)(1), or portion of the amount in (c)(2), from that
4 80 determined by the basic calculation:
5 70
6 and over 65 (1) Any portion of a 3-wire circuit consisting of 2-phase wires and
the neutral of a 4-wire, 3-phase, wye-connected system
(2) That portion consisting of nonlinear loads supplied from a 4-
wire, wye-connected, 3-phase system
2.20.3.21 Noncoincident Loads. Where it is unlikely that two or more
FPN No. 1: See Examples D1(a), D1(b), D2(b), D4(a), and D5(a) in Appendix D.
noncoincident loads will be in use simultaneously, it shall be FPN No. 2: A 3-phase, 4-wire, wye-connected power system used to supply power
permissible to use only the largest load(s) that will be used at one time to nonlinear loads may necessitate that the power system design allow for the
for calculating the total load of a feeder or service. possibility of high harmonic neutral currents.

2.20.3.22 Feeder or Service Neutral Load.

2.20.4 Optional Feeder and Service Load Calculations
(a) Basic Calculation. The feeder or service neutral load shall be
the maximum unbalance of the load determined by this article. The 2.20.4.1 General. Optional feeder and service load calculations shall
maximum unbalanced load shall be the maximum net calculated load be permitted in accordance with Part 2.20.4.
between the neutral and any one ungrounded conductor.
2.20.4.3 Dwelling Unit.
Exception: For 3-wire, 2-phase or 5-wire, 2-phase systems, the
maximum unbalanced load shall be the maximum net calculated load (a) Feeder and Service Load. This section applies to a dwelling
between the neutral and any one ungrounded conductor multiplied by unit having the total connected load served by a single 120/240-volt or
140 percent. 208Y/120-volt set of 3-wire service or feeder conductors with an
ampacity of 100 or greater. It shall be permissible to calculate the prevented from operating at the same time as the supplementary heat,
feeder and service loads in accordance with this section instead of the it does not need to be added to the supplementary heat for the total
method specified in Part 2.20.3. The calculated load shall be the result central space heating load.
of adding the loads from 2.20.4.3(b) and (c). Feeder and service- (5) 65 percent of the nameplate rating(s) of electric space heating
entrance conductors whose calculated load is determined by this if less than four separately controlled units.
optional calculation shall be permitted to have the neutral load (6) 40 percent of the nameplate rating(s) of electric space heating
determined by 2.20.3.22. if four or more separately controlled units.

(b) General Loads. The general calculated load shall be not less 2.20.4.4 Existing Dwelling Unit. This section shall be permitted to be
than 100 percent of the first 10 kVA plus 40 percent of the remainder used to determine if the existing service or feeder is of sufficient
of the following loads: capacity to serve additional loads. Where the dwelling unit is served
by a 120/240-volt or 208Y/120-volt, 3-wire service, it shall be
(1) 33 volt-amperes/m2 for general lighting and general-use permissible to calculate the total load in accordance with 2.20.4.4(a) or
receptacles. The floor area for each floor shall be calculated from the (b).
outside dimensions of the dwelling unit. The calculated floor area shall
not include open porches, garages, or unused or unfinished spaces not (a) Where Additional Air-Conditioning Equipment or Electric
adaptable for future use. Space-Heating Equipment Is Not to Be Installed. The following
(2) 1500 volt-amperes for each 2-wire, 20-ampere small-appliance formula shall be used for existing and additional new loads.
branch circuit and each laundry branch circuit specified in 2.20.3.13.
(3) The nameplate rating of all appliances that are fastened in Load (kVA) Percent of Load
place, permanently connected, or located to be on a specific circuit, First 8 kVA of load at 100
ranges, wall-mounted ovens, counter-mounted cooking units, clothes Remainder of load at 40
dryers, and water heaters.
(4) The nameplate ampere or kVA rating of all motors and of all
low-power-factor loads. Load calculations shall include the following:

(c) Heating and Air-Conditioning Load. The largest of the (1) General lighting and general-use receptacles at 33 volt-
following six selections (load in kVA) shall be included: amperes/m2 as determined by 2.20.2.3
(2) 1500 volt-amperes for each 2-wire, 20-ampere small-
(1) 100 percent of the nameplate rating(s) of the air conditioning appliance branch circuit and each laundry branch circuit specified in
and cooling. 2.20.3.13
(2) 100 percent of the nameplate rating(s) of the heating when a (3) Household range(s), wall-mounted oven(s), and counter-
heat pump is used without any supplemental electric heating. mounted cooking unit(s)
(3) 100 percent of the nameplate ratings of electric thermal storage (4) All other appliances that are permanently connected, fastened
and other heating systems where the usual load is expected to be in place, or connected to a dedicated circuit, at nameplate rating
continuous at the full nameplate value. Systems qualifying under this
selection shall not be calculated under any other selection in (b) Where Additional Air-Conditioning Equipment or Electric
2.20.4.3(c). Space-Heating Equipment Is to Be Installed. The following formula
(4) 100 percent of the nameplate rating(s) of the heat pump shall be used for existing and additional new loads. The larger
compressor and 65 percent of the supplemental electric heating for connected load of air-conditioning or space-heating, but not both, shall
central electric space heating systems. If the heat pump compressor is be used.
 whose calculated load is determined by this optional calculation shall
Load Percent of Load be permitted to have the neutral load determined by 2.20.3.22.
Air-conditioning equipment 100
Central electric space heating 100 (b) House Loads. House loads shall be calculated in accordance
Less than four separately 100 with Part III of this article and shall be in addition to the dwelling unit
controlled space-heating units loads calculated in accordance with Table 2.20.4.5.
First 8 kVA of all other loads 100
Remainder of all other loads 40
Table 2.20.4.5 Optional Calculations — Demand Factors
for Three or More Multifamily Dwelling Units
Other loads shall include the following: Number of Demand Factor
Dwelling Units (Percent)
(1) General lighting and general-use receptacles at 33 volt- 3–5 45
amperes/m2 as determined by 2.20.2.3 6–7 44
(2) 1 500 volt-amperes for each 2-wire, 20-ampere small- 8–10 43
appliance branch circuit and each laundry branch circuit specified in
2.20.3.13 11 42
(3) Household range(s), wall-mounted oven(s), and counter- 12–13 41
mounted cooking unit(s) 14–15 40
(4) All other appliances that are permanently connected, fastened 16–17 39
in place, or connected to a dedicated circuit, including four or more 18–20 38
separately controlled space-heating units, at nameplate rating
21 37
2.20.4.5 Multifamily Dwelling. 22–23 36
24–25 35
(a) Feeder or Service Load. It shall be permissible to calculate the 26–27 34
load of a feeder or service that supplies three or more dwelling units of 28–30 33
a multifamily dwelling in accordance with Table 2.20.4.5 instead of
Part 2.20.3 if all the following conditions are met: 31 32
32–33 31
(1) No dwelling unit is supplied by more than one feeder. 34–36 30
(2) Each dwelling unit is equipped with electric cooking 37–38 29
equipment. 39–42 28

Exception: When the calculated load for multifamily dwellings 43–45 27

without electric cooking in Part 2.20.3 exceeds that calculated under 46–50 26
Part 2.20.4 for the identical load plus electric cooking (based on 8 kW 51–55 25
per unit), the lesser of the two loads shall be permitted to be used. 56–61 24
62 and over 23
(3) Each dwelling unit is equipped with either electric space
heating or air conditioning, or both. Feeders and service conductors
 (c) Connected Loads. The calculated load to which the demand Table 2.20.4.7 Optional Method — Demand Factors for Feeders
factors of Table 2.20.4.5 apply shall include the following: and Service-Entrance Conductors for Schools
Demand Factor
(1) 33 volt-amperes/m2 for general lighting and general-use Connected Load
(Percent)
receptacles. First 33 VA/m2 (3 VA/ft2) at 100
(2) 1 500 volt-amperes for each 2-wire, 20-ampere small- Plus,
appliance branch circuit and each laundry branch circuit specified in Over 33 to 220 VA/m2 (3 to 20 VA/ft2) at 75
2.20.3.13. Plus,
(3) The nameplate rating of all appliances that are fastened in Remainder over 220 (20 VA/ft2) at 25
place, permanently connected or located to be on a specific circuit, VA/m2
ranges, wall-mounted ovens, counter-mounted cooking units, clothes
dryers, water heaters, and space heaters. If water heater elements are
interlocked so that all elements cannot be used at the same time, the 2.20.4.8 Determining Existing Loads. The calculation of a feeder or
maximum possible load shall be considered the nameplate load. service load for existing installations shall be permitted to use actual
(4) The nameplate ampere or kilovolt-ampere rating of all motors maximum demand to determine the existing load under all of the
and of all low-power-factor loads. following conditions:
(5) The larger of the air-conditioning load or the space-heating
load. (1) The maximum demand data is available for a 1-year period.

2.20.4.6 Two Dwelling Units. Where two dwelling units are supplied Exception: If the maximum demand data for a 1-year period is not
by a single feeder and the calculated load under Part 2.20.3 exceeds available, the calculated load shall be permitted to be based on the
that for three identical units calculated under 2.20.4.5, the lesser of the maximum demand (measure of average power demand over a 15-
two loads shall be permitted to be used. minute period) continuously recorded over a minimum 30-day period
using a recording ammeter or power meter connected to the highest
2.20.4.7 Schools. The calculation of a feeder or service load for loaded phase of the feeder or service, based on the initial loading at
schools shall be permitted in accordance with Table 2.20.4.7 in lieu of the start of the recording. The recording shall reflect the maximum
Part III of this article where equipped with electric space heating, air demand of the feeder or service by being taken when the building or
conditioning, or both. The connected load to which the demand factors space is occupied and shall include by measurement or calculation the
of Table 2.20.4.7 apply shall include all of the interior and exterior larger of the heating or cooling equipment load, and other loads that
lighting, power, water heating, cooking, other loads, and the larger of may be periodic in nature due to seasonal or similar conditions.
the air-conditioning load or space-heating load within the building or
structure. (2) The maximum demand at 125 percent plus the new load does not
Feeders and service-entrance conductors whose calculated load is exceed the ampacity of the feeder or rating of the service.
determined by this optional calculation shall be permitted to have the (3) The feeder has overcurrent protection in accordance with
neutral load determined by 2.20.3.22. Where the building or structure 2.40.1.4, and the service has overload protection in accordance with
load is calculated by this optional method, feeders within the building 2.30.7.1.
or structure shall have ampacity as permitted in Part 2.20.3 of this
article; however, the ampacity of an individual feeder shall not be 2.20.4.9 New Restaurants. Calculation of a service or feeder load,
required to be larger than the ampacity for the entire building. where the feeder serves the total load, for a new restaurant shall be
This section shall not apply to portable classroom buildings. permitted in accordance with Table 2.20.4.9 in lieu of Part 2.20.3.
The overload protection of the service conductors shall be in (b) Other Than Dwelling Unit. Where a feeder or service supplies
accordance with 2.30.7.1 and 2.40.1.4. a farm building or other load having two or more separate branch
Feeder conductors shall not be required to be of greater ampacity than circuits, the load for feeders, service conductors, and service
the service conductors. equipment shall be calculated in accordance with demand factors not
Service or feeder conductors whose calculated load is determined by less than indicated in Table 2.20.5.3.
this optional calculation shall be permitted to have the neutral load
determined by 2.20.3.22.
Table 2.20.5.3 Method for Calculating Farm Loads
for Other Than Dwelling Unit
Table 2.20.4.9 Optional Method — Permitted Load Calculations Demand Factor
for Service and Feeder Conductors for New Restaurants Ampere Load at 240 Volts Maximum
(Percent)
Loads expected to operate simultaneously, but 100
Total not less than 125 percent full-load current of
All Electric Restaurant Not All Electric
Connected the largest motor and not less than the first 60
Calculated Loads Restaurant Calculated
Load amperes of load
(kVA) Loads (kVA)
(kVA) Next 60 amperes of all other loads 50
0–200 80% 100% Remainder of other load 25
201–325 10% (amount over 200) 50% (amount over 200)
+ 160.0 + 200.0
326–800 50% (amount over 325) 45% (amount over 325) 2.20.5.4 Farm Loads — Total. Where supplied by a common service,
+ 172.5 + 262.5 the total load of the farm for service conductors and service equipment
Over 800 50% (amount over 800) 20% (amount over 800) shall be calculated in accordance with the farm dwelling unit load and
+ 410.0 + 476.3 demand factors specified in Table 2.20.5.4. Where there is equipment
Note: Add all electrical loads, including both heating and cooling loads, to calculate in two or more farm equipment buildings or for loads having the same
the total connected load. Select the one demand factor that applies from the table, then function, such loads shall be calculated in accordance with Table
multiply the total connected load by this single demand factor.
2.20.5.3 and shall be permitted to be combined as a single load in
Table 2.20.5.4 for calculating the total load.
2.20.5 Farm Load Calculation
Table 2.20.5.4 Method for Calculating Total Farm Load
2.20.5.1 General. Farm loads shall be calculated in accordance with
Part 2.20.5. Individual Loads Calculated in Accordance Demand Factor
with Table 2.20.5.3 (Percent)
2.20.5.3 Farm Loads — Buildings and Other Loads. Largest load 100
Second largest load 75
(a) Dwelling Unit. The feeder or service load of a farm dwelling Third largest load 65
unit shall be calculated in accordance with the provisions for dwellings Remaining loads 50
Note: To this total load, add the load of the farm dwelling unit calculated in
in Parts 2.20.3 or 2.20.4. Where the dwelling has electric heat and the accordance with Parts 2.20.3 or 2.20.4.
farm has electric grain-drying systems, Part 2.20.4 shall not be used to
calculate the dwelling load where the dwelling and farm load are
supplied by a common service.
 ARTICLE 2.25 — OUTSIDE BRANCH CIRCUITS Table 2.25.1.2 Other Articles
AND FEEDERS Equipment/Conductors Article
Branch circuits 2.10
2.25.1.1 Scope. This article covers requirements for outside branch Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote-control, 7.25
circuits and feeders run on or between buildings, structures, or poles signaling, and power-limited circuits
on the premises; and electric equipment and wiring for the supply of Communications circuits 8.0
utilization equipment that is located on or attached to the outside of Community antenna television and radio 8.20
buildings, structures, or poles. distribution systems
Conductors for general wiring 3.10
FPN: For additional information on wiring over 600 volts, see ANSI C2-2002,
National Electrical Safety Code.
Electrically driven or controlled irrigation 6.75
machines
2.25.1.2 Other Articles. Application of other articles, including Electric signs and outline lighting 6.0
additional requirements to specific cases of equipment and conductors, Feeders 2.15
is shown in Table 2.25.1.2. Fire alarm systems 7.60
Fixed outdoor electric deicing and snow-melting 4.26
2.25.1 General equipment
Floating buildings 5.53
2.25.1.3 Calculation of Loads 600 Volts, Nominal, or Less. Grounding 2.50
Hazardous (classified) locations 5.0
(a) Branch Circuits. The load on outdoor branch circuits shall be as Hazardous (classified) locations — specific 5.10
determined by 2.20.2.1. Marinas and boatyards 5.55
Messenger supported wiring 3.96
(b) Feeders. The load on outdoor feeders shall be as determined by Mobile homes, manufactured homes, and 5.50
Part 2.20.3. mobile home parks
Open wiring on insulators 3.98
2.25.1.4 Conductor Covering. Where within 3 000 mm of any Over 600 volts, general 4.90
building or structure other than supporting poles or towers, open Overcurrent protection 2.40
individual (aerial) overhead conductors shall be insulated or covered. Radio and television equipment 8.10
Conductors in cables or raceways, except Type MI cable, shall be of Services 2.30
the rubber-covered type or thermoplastic type and, in wet locations, Solar photovoltaic systems 6.90
shall comply with 3.10.1.8. Conductors for festoon lighting shall be of Swimming pools, fountains, and similar 6.80
the rubber-covered or thermoplastic type. installations
Use and identification of grounded conductors 2.0
Exception: Equipment grounding conductors and grounded circuit
conductors shall be permitted to be bare or covered as specifically
permitted elsewhere in this Code.
2.25.1.5 Size of Conductors 600 Volts, Nominal, or Less. The
ampacity of outdoor branch-circuit and feeder conductors shall be in
accordance with 3.10.1.15 based on loads as determined under
2.20.2.1 and Part 2.20.3.
2.25.1.6 Conductor Size and Support. (d) 600 Volts Between Conductors. Circuits exceeding 277 volts,
nominal, to ground and not exceeding 600 volts, nominal, between
(a) Overhead Spans. Open individual conductors shall not be smaller conductors shall be permitted to supply the auxiliary equipment of
than the following: electric-discharge lamps in accordance with 2.10.1.6(d)(1).

(1) For 600 volts, nominal, or less, 5.5 mm2 (2.6 mm dia.) copper 2.25.1.10 Wiring on Buildings. The installation of outside wiring on
or 8.0 mm2 (3.2 mm dia.) aluminum for spans up to 15 m in length, surfaces of buildings shall be permitted for circuits of not over 600
and 8.0 mm2 (3.2 mm dia.) copper or 14 mm2 aluminum for a longer volts, nominal, as open wiring on insulators, as multiconductor cable,
span unless supported by a messenger wire as Type MC cable, as Type MI cable, as messenger supported wiring,
(2) For over 600 volts, nominal, 14 mm2 copper or 22 mm2 in rigid metal conduit, in intermediate metal conduit, in rigid
aluminum where open individual conductors, and 8.0 mm2 (3.2 mm nonmetallic conduit, in cable trays, as cablebus, in wireways, in
dia.) copper or 14 mm2 aluminum where in cable. auxiliary gutters, in electrical metallic tubing, in flexible metal
conduit, in liquidtight flexible metal conduit, in liquidtight flexible
(b) Festoon Lighting. Overhead conductors for festoon lighting nonmetallic conduit, and in busways. Circuits of over 600 volts,
shall not be smaller than 3.5 mm2 (2.0 mm dia.) unless the conductors nominal, shall be installed as provided in 3.0.2.7.
are supported by messenger wires. In all spans exceeding 12 m, the
conductors shall be supported by messenger wire. The messenger wire 2.25.1.11 Circuit Exits and Entrances. Where outside branch and
shall be supported by strain insulators. Conductors or messenger wires feeder circuits leave or enter a building, the requirements of 2.30.4.13
shall not be attached to any fire escape, downspout, or plumbing and 2.30.4.15 shall apply.
equipment.
2.25.1.12 Open-Conductor Supports. Open conductors shall be
2.25.1.7 Lighting Equipment Installed Outdoors. supported on glass or porcelain knobs, racks, brackets, or strain
insulators.
(a) General. For the supply of lighting equipment installed
outdoors, the branch circuits shall comply with Article 2.10 and 2.25.1.14 Open-Conductor Spacings.
2.25.1.7(b) through (d).
(a) 600 Volts, Nominal, or Less. Conductors of 600 volts, nominal,
(b) Common Neutral. The ampacity of the neutral conductor shall or less, shall comply with the spacings provided in Table 2.30.4.12(c).
not be less than the maximum net computed load current between the
neutral and all ungrounded conductors connected to any one phase of (b) Over 600 Volts, Nominal. Conductors of over 600 volts,
the circuit. nominal, shall comply with the spacings provided in Sections 1.10.3.7
and 4.90.2.4.
(c) 277 Volts to Ground. Circuits exceeding 120 volts, nominal,
between conductors and not exceeding 277 volts, nominal, to ground (c) Separation from Other Circuits. Open conductors shall be
shall be permitted to supply luminaires (lighting fixtures) for separated from open conductors of other circuits or systems by not less
illumination of outdoor areas of industrial establishments, office than 100 mm.
buildings, schools, stores, and other commercial or public buildings
where the luminaires (fixtures) are not less than 900 mm from (d) Conductors on Poles. Conductors on poles shall have a
windows, platforms, fire escapes, and the like. separation of not less than 300 mm where not placed on racks or
brackets. Conductors supported on poles shall provide a horizontal
climbing space not less than the following:
 (2) 3 600 mm — over residential property and driveways, and
(1) Power conductors below communications conductors — 750 those commercial areas not subject to truck traffic where the voltage
mm does not exceed 300 volts to ground
(2) Power conductors alone or above communications conductors: (3) 4 500 mm — for those areas listed in the 3 600 mm
classification where the voltage exceeds 300 volts to ground
a. 300 volts or less — 600 mm (4) 5 500 mm — over public streets, alleys, roads, parking areas
b. Over 300 volts — 750 mm subject to truck traffic, driveways on other than residential property,
and other land traversed by vehicles, such as cultivated, grazing,
(3) Communications conductors below power conductors — same forest, and orchard
as power conductors
(4) Communications conductors alone — no requirement 2.25.1.19 Clearances from Buildings for Conductors of Not Over
600 Volts, Nominal.
2.25.1.15 Supports over Buildings. Supports over a building shall be
in accordance with 2.30.2.8. (a) Above Roofs. Overhead spans of open conductors and open
multiconductor cables shall have a vertical clearance of not less than
2.25.1.16 Attachment to Buildings. 2 400 mm above the roof surface. The vertical clearance above the
roof level shall be maintained for a distance not less than 900 mm in
(a) Point of Attachment. The point of attachment to a building all directions from the edge of the roof.
shall be in accordance with 2.30.2.5.
Exception No. 1: The area above a roof surface subject to pedestrian
(b) Means of Attachment. The means of attachment to a building or vehicular traffic shall have a vertical clearance from the roof
shall be in accordance with 2.30.2.6. surface in accordance with the clearance requirements of 2.25.1.18.
Exception No. 2: Where the voltage between conductors does not
2.25.1.17 Masts as Supports. Where a mast is used for the support of exceed 300, and the roof has a slope of 100 mm in 300 mm or greater,
final spans of feeders or branch circuits, it shall be of adequate a reduction in clearance to 900 mm shall be permitted.
strength or be supported by braces or guys to withstand safely the Exception No. 3: Where the voltage between conductors does not
strain imposed by the overhead drop. Where raceway-type masts are exceed 300, a reduction in clearance above only the overhanging
used, all raceway fittings shall be identified for use with masts. Only portion of the roof to not less than 450 mm shall be permitted if (1) not
the feeder or branch circuit conductors specified within this section more than 1 800 mm of the conductors, 1 200 mm horizontally, pass
shall be permitted to be attached to the feeder and/or branch circuit above the roof overhang and (2) they are terminated at a through-the-
mast. roof raceway or approved support.
Exception No. 4: The requirement for maintaining the vertical
2.25.1.18 Clearance from Ground. Overhead spans of open clearance 900 mm from the edge of the roof shall not apply to the final
conductors and open multiconductor cables of not over 600 volts, conductor span where the conductors are attached to the side of a
nominal, shall have a clearance of not less than the following: building.

(1) 3 000 mm — above finished grade, sidewalks, or from any (b) From Nonbuilding or Nonbridge Structures. From signs,
platform or projection from which they might be reached where the chimneys, radio and television antennas, tanks, and other nonbuilding
voltage does not exceed 150 volts to ground and accessible to or nonbridge structures, clearances — vertical, diagonal, and
pedestrians only horizontal — shall not be less than 900 mm.
 (c) Horizontal Clearances. Clearances shall not be less than 900
mm. Exception: Flexible metal conduit, where permitted in 3.48.2.3(1),
shall not be required to be raintight.
(d) Final Spans. Final spans of feeders or branch circuits shall
comply with 2.25.1.19(d)(1), (d)(2), and (d)(3). 2.25.1.24 Outdoor Lampholders. Where outdoor lampholders are
attached as pendants, the connections to the circuit wires shall be
(1) Clearance from Windows. Final spans to the building they staggered. Where such lampholders have terminals of a type that
supply, or from which they are fed, shall be permitted to be attached to puncture the insulation and make contact with the conductors, they
the building, but they shall be kept not less than 900 mm from shall be attached only to conductors of the stranded type.
windows that are designed to be opened, and from doors, porches,
balconies, ladders, stairs, fire escapes, or similar locations. 2.25.1.25 Location of Outdoor Lamps. Locations of lamps for
Exception: Conductors run above the top level of a window shall be outdoor lighting shall be below all energized conductors, transformers,
permitted to be less than the 900 mm requirement. or other electric utilization equipment, unless either of the following
apply:
(2) Vertical Clearance. The vertical clearance of final spans above,
or within 900 mm measured horizontally of, platforms, projections, or (1) Clearances or other safeguards are provided for relamping
surfaces from which they might be reached shall be maintained in operations.
accordance with 2.25.1.18. (2) Equipment is controlled by a disconnecting means that can be
(3) Building Openings. The overhead branch-circuit and feeder locked in the open position.
conductors shall not be installed beneath openings through which
materials may be moved, such as openings in farm and commercial 2.25.1.26 Vegetation as Support. Vegetation such as trees shall not
buildings, and shall not be installed where they obstruct entrance to be used for support of overhead conductor spans.
these buildings’ openings.
2.25.2 More Than One Building or Other Structure
(e) Zone for Fire Ladders. Where buildings exceed three stories or
15 m in height, overhead lines shall be arranged, where practicable, so 2.25.2.1 Number of Supplies. Where more than one building or other
that a clear space (or zone) at least 1 800 mm wide will be left either structure is on the same property and under single management, each
adjacent to the buildings or beginning not over 2 400 mm from them additional building or other structure that is served by a branch circuit
to facilitate the raising of ladders when necessary for fire fighting. or feeder on the load side of the service disconnecting means shall be
supplied by only one feeder or branch circuit unless permitted in
2.25.1.20 Mechanical Protection of Conductors. Mechanical 2.25.2.1(a) through (e). For the purpose of this section, a multiwire
protection of conductors on buildings, structures, or poles shall be as branch circuit shall be considered a single circuit.
provided for services in 2.30.4.11.
(a) Special Conditions. Additional feeders or branch circuits shall
2.25.1.21 Multiconductor Cables on Exterior Surfaces of be permitted to supply the following:
Buildings. Supports for multiconductor cables on exterior surfaces of
buildings shall be as provided in 2.30.4.12. (1) Fire pumps
(2) Emergency systems
2.25.1.22 Raceways on Exterior Surfaces of Buildings or Other (3) Legally required standby systems
Structures. Raceways on exteriors of buildings or other structures (4) Optional standby systems
shall be arranged to drain and shall be raintight in wet locations. (5) Parallel power production systems
 (6) Systems designed for connection to multiple sources of supply Exception No. 2: For buildings or other structures qualifying under
for the purpose of enhanced reliability the provisions of Article 6.85, the disconnecting means shall be
permitted to be located elsewhere on the premises.
(b) Special Occupancies. By special permission, additional feeders Exception No. 3: For towers or poles used as lighting standards, the
or branch circuits shall be permitted for either of the following: disconnecting means shall be permitted to be located elsewhere on the
premises.
(1) Multiple-occupancy buildings where there is no space Exception No. 4: For poles or similar structures used only for support
available for supply equipment accessible to all occupants of signs installed in accordance with Article 6.0, the disconnecting
(2) A single building or other structure sufficiently large to make means shall be permitted to be located elsewhere on the premises.
two or more supplies necessary
2.25.2.4 Maximum Number of Disconnects.
(c) Capacity Requirements. Additional feeders or branch circuits
shall be permitted where the capacity requirements are in excess of (a) General. The disconnecting means for each supply permitted by
2000 amperes at a supply voltage of 600 volts or less. 2.25.2.1 shall consist of not more than six switches or six circuit
breakers mounted in a single enclosure, in a group of separate
(d) Different Characteristics. Additional feeders or branch circuits enclosures, or in or on a switchboard. There shall be no more than six
shall be permitted for different voltages, frequencies, or phases or for disconnects per supply grouped in any one location.
different uses, such as control of outside lighting from multiple
locations. Exception: For the purposes of this section, disconnecting means used
solely for the control circuit of the ground-fault protection system, or
(e) Documented Switching Procedures. Additional feeders or the control circuit of the power-operated supply disconnecting means,
branch circuits shall be permitted to supply installations under single installed as part of the listed equipment, shall not be considered a
management where documented safe switching procedures are supply disconnecting means.
established and maintained for disconnection.
(b) Single-Pole Units. Two or three single-pole switches or breakers
2.25.2.2 Disconnecting Means. Means shall be provided for capable of individual operation shall be permitted on multiwire
disconnecting all ungrounded conductors that supply or pass through circuits, one pole for each ungrounded conductor, as one multipole
the building or structure. disconnect, provided they are equipped with handle ties or a master
handle to disconnect all ungrounded conductors with no more than six
2.25.2.3 Location. The disconnecting means shall be installed either operations of the hand.
inside or outside of the building or structure served or where the
conductors pass through the building or structure. The disconnecting 2.25.2.5 Grouping of Disconnects.
means shall be at a readily accessible location nearest the point of
entrance of the conductors. For the purposes of this section, the (a) General. The two to six disconnects as permitted in 2.25.2.4
requirements in 2.30.1.6 shall be utilized. shall be grouped. Each disconnect shall be marked to indicate the load
served.
Exception No. 1: For installations under single management, where
documented safe switching procedures are established and maintained Exception: One of the two to six disconnecting means permitted in
for disconnection, and where the installation is monitored by qualified 2.25.2.4, where used only for a water pump also intended to provide
individuals, the disconnecting means shall be permitted to be located fire protection, shall be permitted to be located remote from the other
elsewhere on the premises. disconnecting means.
 (b) Additional Disconnecting Means. The one or more additional 2.25.2.9 Disconnect Construction. Disconnecting means shall meet
disconnecting means for fire pumps or for emergency, legally required the requirements of 2.25.2.9(a) through (d).
standby or optional standby system permitted by 2.25.2.1 shall be
installed sufficiently remote from the one to six disconnecting means Exception: For garages and outbuildings on residential property,
for normal supply to minimize the possibility of simultaneous snap switches or sets of 3-way or 4-way snap switches shall be
interruption of supply. permitted as the disconnecting means.

2.25.2.6 Access to Occupants. In a multiple-occupancy building, each (a) Manually or Power Operable. The disconnecting means shall
occupant shall have access to the occupant’s supply disconnecting consist of either (1) a manually operable switch or a circuit breaker
means. equipped with a handle or other suitable operating means or (2) a
power-operable switch or circuit breaker, provided the switch or
Exception: In a multiple-occupancy building where electric supply circuit breaker can be opened by hand in the event of a power failure.
and electrical maintenance are provided by the building management
and where these are under continuous building management (b) Simultaneous Opening of Poles. Each building or structure
supervision, the supply disconnecting means supplying more than one disconnecting means shall simultaneously disconnect all ungrounded
occupancy shall be permitted to be accessible to authorized supply conductors that it controls from the building or structure wiring
management personnel only. system.

2.25.2.7 Suitable for Service Equipment. The disconnecting means (c) Disconnection of Grounded Conductor. Where the building or
specified in 2.25.2.2 shall be suitable for use as service equipment. structure disconnecting means does not disconnect the grounded
Exception: For garages and outbuildings on residential property, a conductor from the grounded conductors in the building or structure
snap switch or a set of 3-way or 4-way snap switches shall be wiring, other means shall be provided for this purpose at the location
permitted as the disconnecting means. of disconnecting means. A terminal or bus to which all grounded
conductors can be attached by means of pressure connectors shall be
2.25.2.8 Identification. Where a building or structure has any permitted for this purpose.
combination of feeders, branch circuits, or services passing through it In a multisection switchboard, disconnects for the grounded
or supplying it, a permanent plaque or directory shall be installed at conductor shall be permitted to be in any of the switchboard, provided
each feeder and branch-circuit disconnect location denoting all other any such switchboard is marked.
services, feeders, or branch circuits supplying that building or
structure or passing through that building or structure and the area (d) Indicating. The building or structure disconnecting means shall
served by each. plainly indicate whether it is in the open or closed position.

Exception No. 1: A plaque or directory shall not be required for 2.25.2.10 Rating of Disconnect. The feeder or branch-circuit
large-capacity multibuilding industrial installations under single disconnecting means shall have a rating of not less than the load to be
management, where it is ensured that disconnection can be supplied, determined in accordance with Parts 2.20.1 and 2.20.2 for
accomplished by establishing and maintaining safe switching branch circuits, Parts 2.20.3 or 2.20.4 for feeders, or Part 2.20.5 for
procedures. farm loads. In no case shall the rating be lower than specified in
Exception No. 2: This identification shall not be required for branch 2.25.2.10(a), (b), (c), or (d).
circuits installed from a dwelling unit to a second building or
structure.
 (a) One-Circuit Installation. For installations to supply only 2.25.3.3 Location. A building or structure disconnecting means shall
limited loads of a single branch circuit, the branch circuit be located in accordance with 2.25.2.3, or it shall be electrically
disconnecting means shall have a rating of not less than 15 amperes. operated by a similarly located remote-control device.

(b) Two-Circuit Installations. For installations consisting of not 2.25.3.4 Type. Each building or structure disconnect shall
more than two 2-wire branch circuits, the feeder or branch-circuit simultaneously disconnect all ungrounded supply conductors it
disconnecting means shall have a rating of not less than 30 amperes. controls and shall have a fault-closing rating not less than the
maximum available short-circuit current available at its supply
(c) One-Family Dwelling. For a one-family dwelling, the feeder terminals.
disconnecting means shall have a rating of not less than 100 amperes, Where fused switches or separately mounted fuses are installed, the
3-wire. fuse characteristics shall be permitted to contribute to the fault closing
rating of the disconnecting means.
(d) All Others. For all other installations, the feeder or branch-
circuit disconnecting means shall have a rating of not less than 60 2.25.3.11 Clearances over Roadways, Walkways, Rail, Water, and
amperes. Open Land.

2.25.2.11 Access to Overcurrent Protective Devices. Where a feeder (a) 22 kV Nominal to Ground or Less. The clearances over
overcurrent device is not readily accessible, branch-circuit overcurrent roadways, walkways, rail, water, and open land for conductors and
devices shall be installed on the load side, shall be mounted in a live parts up to 22 kV nominal to ground or less shall be not less than
readily accessible location, and shall be of a lower ampere rating than the values shown in Table 2.25.3.11.
the feeder overcurrent device.
(b) Over 22 kV Nominal to Ground. Clearances for the categories
2.25.3 Over 600 Volts shown in Table 2.25.3.11 shall be increased by 10 mm (0.4 in.) per kV
above 22,000 volts.
2.25.3.1 Sizing of Conductors. The sizing of conductors over 600
volts shall be in accordance with 2.10.2.1(b) for branch circuits and (c) Special Cases. For special cases, such as where crossings will be
2.15.1.2(b) for feeders. made over lakes, rivers, or areas using large vehicles such as mining
operations, specific designs shall be engineered considering the special
2.25.3.2 Isolating Switches. Where oil switches or air, oil, vacuum, or circumstances and shall be approved by the authority having
sulfur hexafluoride circuit breakers constitute a building disconnecting jurisdiction.
means, an isolating switch with visible break contacts and meeting the
requirements of 2.30.8.5(b), (c), and (d) shall be installed on the FPN: For additional information, see ANSI C2-2002, National Electrical Safety
Code.
supply side of the disconnecting means and all associated equipment.
2.25.3.12 Clearances over Buildings and Other Structures.
Exception: The isolating switch shall not be required where the
disconnecting means is mounted on removable truck panels or metal-
(a) 22 kV Nominal to Ground or Less. The clearances over
enclosed switchgear units that cannot be opened unless the circuit is
buildings and other structures for conductors and live parts up to 22
disconnected and that, when removed from the normal operating
kV, nominal, to ground or less shall be not less than the values shown
position, automatically disconnect the circuit breaker or switch from
in Table 2.25.3.12.
all energized parts.
 (b) Over 22 kV Nominal to Ground. Clearances for the categories
shown in Table 2.25.3.12 shall be increased by 10 mm (0.4 in.) per kV ARTICLE 2.30 — SERVICES
above 22,000 volts.
2.30.1 General
FPN: For additional information, see ANSI C2-2002, National Electrical Safety
Code.
2.30.1.1 Scope. This article covers service conductors and equipment
for control and protection of services and their installation
requirements.
Table 2.25.3.11 Clearances over Roadways, Walkways,
Rail, Water, and Open Land FPN: See Figure 2.30.1.1.
Clearance
Location
(m)
Open land subject to vehicles, cultivation, 5.6
or grazing
Roadways, driveways, parking lots, and 5.6
alleys
Walkways 4.1
Rails 8.1
Spaces and ways for pedestrians and 4.4
restricted traffic
Water areas not suitable for boating 5.2

Table 2.25.3.12 Clearances over Buildings and Other Structures

Clearance from Conductors or Horizontal Vertical
Live Parts from: (m) (m)
Building walls, projections, and 2.3 —
windows
Balconies, catwalks, and similar 2.3 4.1
areas accessible to people
Over or under roofs or projections — 3.8
not readily accessible to people
Over roofs accessible to vehicles — 4.1
but not trucks
Over roofs accessible to trucks — 5.6
Other structures 2.3 —
Figure 2.30.1.1 Services.
Figure 2.30.1.1(a) Overhead Service Supply (not Exceeding 600 Volts), Single Occupancy
Figure 2.30 1.1(b) Overhead Service Supply (not Exceeding 600 Volts), Multiple Occupancy
Figure 2.30.1.1 (c) Underground Service Supply (not Exceeding 600 Volts), Single Occupancy
Figure 2.30.1.1(d) Underground Service Supply (not Exceeding 600 Volts),
Multiple Occupancy where electric service
Figure 2.30.1.1(e) High Rise Building Services (not Exceeding 600 Volts), Multiple Occupancy
2.30.1.2 Number of Services. A building or other structure served (e) Identification. Where a building or structure is supplied by more
shall be supplied by only one service unless permitted in 2.30.1.2(a) than one service, or any combination of branch circuits, feeders, and
through (d). For the purpose of 2.30.4.1, Exception No. 2 only, services, a permanent plaque or directory shall be installed at each
underground sets of conductors, 50 mm2 and larger, running to the service disconnect location denoting all other services, feeders, and
same location and connected together at their supply end but not branch circuits supplying that building or structure and the area served
connected together at their load end shall be considered to be by each. See Section 2.25.2.8.
supplying one service.
2.30.1.3 One Building or Other Structure Not to Be Supplied
(a) Special Conditions. Additional services shall be permitted to Through Another. Service conductors supplying a building or other
supply the following: structure shall not pass through the interior of another building or
other structure.
(1) Fire pumps
(2) Emergency systems 2.30.1.6 Conductors Considered Outside the Building. Conductors
(3) Legally required standby systems shall be considered outside of a building or other structure under any
(4) Optional standby systems of the following conditions:
(5) Parallel power production systems
(6) Systems designed for connection to multiple sources of supply (1) Where installed under not less than 50 mm of concrete
for the purpose of enhanced reliability beneath a building or other structure
(2) Where installed within a building or other structure in a
(b) Special Occupancies. By special permission, additional services raceway that is encased in concrete or brick not less than 50 mm thick
shall be permitted for either of the following: (3) Where installed in any vault that meets the construction
requirements of Article 4.50.3.
(1) Multiple-occupancy buildings where there is no available (4) Where installed in conduit and under not less than 450 mm of
space for service equipment accessible to all occupants earth beneath a building or other structure
(2) A single building or other structure sufficiently large to make
two or more services necessary 2.30.1.7 Other Conductors in Raceway or Cable. Conductors other
than service conductors shall not be installed in the same service
(c) Capacity Requirements. Additional services shall be permitted raceway or service cable.
under any of the following:
Exception No. 1: Grounding conductors and bonding jumpers.
(1) Where the capacity requirements are in excess of 2000 Exception No. 2: Load management control conductors having
amperes at a supply voltage of 600 volts or less overcurrent protection.
(2) Where the load requirements of a single-phase installation are
greater than the serving agency normally supplies through one service 2.30.1.8 Raceway Seal. Where a service raceway enters a building or
(3) By special permission structure from an underground distribution system, it shall be sealed in
accordance with Section 3.0.1.5(g). Spare or unused raceways shall
(d) Different Characteristics. Additional services shall be also be sealed. Sealants shall be identified for use with the cable
permitted for different voltages, frequencies, or phases, or for different insulation, shield, or other components.
uses, such as for different rate schedules.
2.30.1.9 Clearances on Buildings. Service conductors and final spans
shall comply with 2.30.1.9(a), (b), and (c).
 Exception: Conductors supplying only limited loads of a single
(a) Clearances. Service conductors installed as open conductors or branch circuit — such as small polyphase power, controlled water
multiconductor cable without an overall outer jacket shall have a heaters, and similar loads — shall not be smaller than 12 AWG hard-
clearance of not less than 900 mm from windows that are designed to drawn copper or equivalent.
be opened, doors, porches, balconies, ladders, stairs, fire escapes, or
similar locations. (c) Grounded Conductors. The grounded conductor shall not be
less than the minimum size as required by 2.50.2.5(c).
Exception: Conductors run above the top level of a window shall be
permitted to be less than the 900 mm requirement. 2.30.2.3 Clearances. Service-drop conductors shall not be readily
accessible and shall comply with 2.30.2.3(a) through (d) for services
(b) Vertical Clearance. The vertical clearance of final spans above, not over 600 volts, nominal.
or within 900 mm measured horizontally of, platforms, projections, or
surfaces from which they might be reached shall be maintained in (a) Above Roofs. Conductors shall have a vertical clearance of not
accordance with 2.30.2.3(b). less than 2 400 mm above the roof surface. The vertical clearance
above the roof level shall be maintained for a distance of not less than
(c) Building Openings. Overhead service conductors shall not be 900 mm in all directions from the edge of the roof.
installed beneath openings through which materials may be moved,
such as openings in farm and commercial buildings, and shall not be Exception No. 1: The area above a roof surface subject to pedestrian
installed where they obstruct entrance to these building openings. or vehicular traffic shall have a vertical clearance from the roof
surface in accordance with the clearance requirements of 2.30.2.3(b).
2.30.1.10 Vegetation as Support. Vegetation such as trees shall not Exception No. 2: Where the voltage between conductors does not
be used for support of overhead service conductors. exceed 300 and the roof has a slope of 100 mm in 300 mm or greater,
a reduction in clearance to 900 mm shall be permitted.
2.30.2 Overhead Service-Drop Conductors Exception No. 3: Where the voltage between conductors does not
exceed 300, a reduction in clearance above only the overhanging
2.30.2.1 Insulation or Covering. Individual conductors shall be portion of the roof to not less than 450 mm shall be permitted if (1) not
insulated or covered. more than 1 800 mm of service-drop conductors, 1 200 mm
horizontally, pass above the roof overhang, and (2) they are
Exception: The grounded conductor of a multiconductor cable shall terminated at a through-the-roof raceway or approved support.
be permitted to be bare.
FPN: See 2.30.2.7 for mast supports.
2.30.2.2 Size and Rating.
Exception: The requirement for maintaining the vertical clearance
(a) General. Conductors shall have sufficient ampacity to carry the 900 mm from the edge of the roof shall not apply to the final
current for the load as calculated in accordance with Article 2.20 and conductor span where the service drop is attached to the side of a
shall have adequate mechanical strength. building.

(b) Minimum Size. The conductors shall not be smaller than 8.0 (b) Vertical Clearance from Ground. Service-drop conductors,
mm2 (3.2 mm dia.) copper or 14 mm2 aluminum or copper-clad where not in excess of 600 volts, nominal, shall have the following
aluminum. minimum clearance from final grade:
 (1) 3 000 mm — at the electric service entrance to buildings, also 2.30.2.8 Supports over Buildings. Service-drop conductors passing
at the lowest point of the drip loop of the building electric entrance, over a roof shall be securely supported by substantial structures.
and above areas or sidewalks accessible only to pedestrians, measured Where practicable, such supports shall be independent of the building.
from final grade or other accessible surface only for service-drop
cables supported on and cabled together with a grounded bare 2.30.3 Underground Service-Lateral Conductors
messenger where the voltage does not exceed 150 volts to ground
(2) 3 600 mm — over residential property and driveways, and 2.30.3.1 Insulation. Service-lateral conductors shall be insulated for
those commercial areas not subject to truck traffic where the voltage the applied voltage.
does not exceed 300 volts to ground
(3) 4 500 mm — for those areas listed in the 3 600 mm Exception: A grounded conductor shall be permitted to be uninsulated
classification where the voltage exceeds 300 volts to ground as follows:
(4) 5 500 mm — over public streets, alleys, roads, parking areas (1) Bare copper used in a raceway.
subject to truck traffic, driveways on other than residential property, (2) Bare copper for direct burial where bare copper is judged to
and other land such as cultivated, grazing, forest, and orchard be suitable for the soil conditions.
(3) Bare copper for direct burial without regard to soil conditions
(c) Clearance from Building Openings. See 2.30.1.9. where part of a cable assembly identified for underground use.
(4) Aluminum or copper-clad aluminum without individual
(d) Clearance from Swimming Pools. See 6.80.1.8. insulation or covering where part of a cable assembly identified for
underground use in a raceway or for direct burial.
2.30.2.5 Point of Attachment. The point of attachment of the service-
drop conductors to a building or other structure shall provide the 2.30.3.2 Size and Rating.
minimum clearances as specified in 2.30.1.9 and 2.30.2.3. In no case
shall this point of attachment be less than 3 000 mm above finished (a) General. Service-lateral conductors shall have sufficient
grade. ampacity to carry the current for the load as calculated in accordance
with Article 2.20 and shall have adequate mechanical strength.
2.30.2.6 Means of Attachment. Multiconductor cables used for
service drops shall be attached to buildings or other structures by (b) Minimum Size. The conductors shall not be smaller than 8.0
fittings identified for use with service conductors. Open conductors mm2 (3.2 mm dia.) copper or 14 mm2 aluminum or copper-clad
shall be attached to fittings identified for use with service conductors aluminum.
or to noncombustible, nonabsorbent insulators securely attached to the
building or other structure. Exception: Conductors supplying only limited loads of a single
branch circuit — such as small polyphase power, controlled water
2.30.2.7 Service Masts as Supports. Where a service mast is used for heaters, and similar loads — shall not be smaller than 3.5 mm2 (2.0
the support of service-drop conductors, it shall be of adequate strength mm dia.) copper or 5.5 mm2 (2.6 mm dia.) aluminum or copper-clad
or be supported by braces or guys to withstand safely the strain aluminum.
imposed by the service drop. Where raceway-type service masts are
used, all raceway fittings shall be identified for use with service masts. (c) Grounded Conductors. The grounded conductor shall not be
Only power service-drop conductors shall be permitted to be attached less than the minimum size required by 2.50.2.5(c).
to a service mast.
2.30.3.3 Protection Against Damage. Underground service-lateral
conductors shall be protected against damage in accordance with
300.5. Service-lateral conductors entering a building shall be installed (1) Bare copper used in a raceway or part of a service cable
in accordance with 2.30.1.6 or protected by a raceway wiring method assembly.
identified in 2.30.4.4. (2) Bare copper for direct burial where bare copper is judged to
be suitable for the soil conditions.
2.30.3.4 Spliced Conductors. Service-lateral conductors shall be (3) Bare copper for direct burial without regard to soil conditions
permitted to be spliced or tapped in accordance with 1.10.1.14, where part of a cable assembly identified for underground use.
3.0.1.5(e), 3.0.1.13, and 3.0.1.15. (4) Aluminum or copper-clad aluminum without individual
insulation or covering where part of a cable assembly or identified for
2.30.4 Service-Entrance Conductors underground use in a raceway, or for direct burial.
(5) Bare conductors used in an auxiliary gutter.
2.30.4.1 Number of Service-Entrance Conductor Sets. Each service
drop or lateral shall supply only one set of service-entrance 2.30.4.3 Minimum Size and Rating.
conductors.
(a) General. The ampacity of the service-entrance conductors
Exception No. 1: A building shall be permitted to have one set of before the application of any adjustment or correction factors shall not
service-entrance conductors for each service, as defined in 2.30.1.2, be less than either (a)(1) or (a)(2). Loads shall be determined in
run to each occupancy or group of occupancies. accordance with Article 2.20. Ampacity shall be determined from
Exception No. 2: Where two to six service disconnecting means in 3.10.1.15. The maximum allowable current of busways shall be that
separate enclosures are grouped at one location and supply separate value for which the busway has been listed or labeled.
loads from one service drop or lateral in multiple-occupancy building
or group of single detached buildings owned/managed/operated by a (1) The sum of the noncontinuous loads plus 125 percent of
person or entity, one set of service-entrance conductors shall be continuous loads
permitted to supply each or several such service equipment (2) The sum of the noncontinuous load plus the continuous load if
enclosures. the service-entrance conductors terminate in an overcurrent device
Exception No. 3: A single-family dwelling unit and a separate where both the overcurrent device and its assembly are listed for
structure shall be permitted to have one set of service-entrance operation at 100 percent of their rating
conductors run to each from a single service drop or lateral.
Exception No. 4: A two-family dwelling or a multifamily dwelling (b) Specific Installations. In addition to the requirements of
shall be permitted to have one set of service-entrance conductors 2.30.4.3(a), the minimum ampacity for ungrounded conductors for
installed to supply the circuits covered in 2.10.2.7. specific installations shall not be less than the rating of the service
Exception No. 5: One set of service-entrance conductors connected to disconnecting means specified in 2.30.6.10(a) through (d).
the supply side of the normal service disconnecting means shall be
permitted to supply each or several systems covered by 2.30.6.13(4) or (c) Grounded Conductors. The grounded conductor shall not be
2.30.6.13(5). less than the minimum size as required by 2.50.2.5(c).

2.30.4.2 Insulation of Service-Entrance Conductors. Service- 2.30.4.4 Wiring Methods for 600 Volts, Nominal, or Less. Service-
entrance conductors entering or on the exterior of buildings or other entrance conductors shall be installed in accordance with the
structures shall be insulated. applicable requirements of this Code covering the type of wiring
method used and shall be limited to the following methods:
Exception: A grounded conductor shall be permitted to be uninsulated
as follows: (1) Open wiring on insulators
 (2) Type IGS cable 2.30.4.11 Protection of Open Conductors and Cables Against
(3) Rigid metal conduit Damage — Above Ground. Service-entrance conductors installed
(4) Intermediate metal conduit above ground shall be protected against physical damage as specified
(5) Electrical metallic tubing in 2.30.4.11(a) or (b).
(6) Electrical nonmetallic tubing (ENT)
(7) Service-entrance cables (a) Service Cables. Service cables, where subject to physical
(8) Wireways damage, shall be protected by any of the following:
(9) Busways (1) Rigid metal conduit
(10) Auxiliary gutters (2) Intermediate metal conduit
(11) Rigid nonmetallic conduit (3) Schedule 80 rigid nonmetallic conduit
(12) Cablebus (4) Electrical metallic tubing
(13) Type MC cable (5) Other approved means
(14) Mineral-insulated, metal-sheathed cable
(15) Flexible metal conduit not over 1 800 mm long or liquidtight (b) Other Than Service Cable. Individual open conductors and
flexible metal conduit not over 1 800 mm long between raceways, or cables other than service cables shall not be installed within 3 000 mm
between raceway and service equipment, with equipment bonding of grade level or where exposed to physical damage.
jumper routed with the flexible metal conduit or the liquidtight flexible
metal conduit according to the provisions of 2.50.5.13(a), (b), (c), and Exception: Type MI and Type MC cable shall be permitted within
(e) 3 000 mm of grade level where not exposed to physical damage or
(16) Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit where protected in accordance with 3.0.1.5(d).

2.30.4.5 Cable Trays. Cable tray systems shall be permitted to 2.30.4.12 Mounting Supports. Cables or individual open service
support service-entrance conductors. Cable trays used to support conductors shall be supported as specified in 2.30.4.12(a), (b), or (c).
service-entrance conductors shall contain only service-entrance
conductors. (a) Service Cables. Service cables shall be supported by straps or
other approved means within 300 mm of every service head,
Exception: Conductors other than service-entrance conductors shall gooseneck, or connection to a raceway or enclosure and at intervals
be permitted to be installed in a cable tray with service-entrance not exceeding 750 mm.
conductors, provided a solid fixed barrier of a material compatible
with the cable tray is installed to separate the service-entrance (b) Other Cables. Cables that are not approved for mounting in
conductors from other conductors installed in the cable tray. contact with a building or other structure shall be mounted on
insulating supports installed at intervals not exceeding 4 500 mm and
2.30.4.7 Spliced Conductors. Service-entrance conductors shall be in a manner that maintains a clearance of not less than 50 mm from the
permitted to be spliced or tapped in accordance with 1.10.1.14, surface over which they pass.
3.0.1.5(e), 3.0.1.13, and 3.0.1.15.
(c) Individual Open Conductors. Individual open conductors shall
2.30.4.10 Protection Against Physical Damage — Underground. be installed in accordance with Table 2.30.4.12(c). Where exposed to
Underground service-entrance conductors shall be protected against the weather, the conductors shall be mounted on insulators or on
physical damage in accordance with 3.0.1.5. insulating supports attached to racks, brackets, or other approved
means. Where not exposed to the weather, the conductors shall be
mounted on glass or porcelain knobs.
 (c) Service Heads and Goosenecks Above Service-Drop
Table 2.30.4.12(c) Supports Attachment. Service heads and goosenecks in service-entrance cables
Minimum Clearance shall be located above the point of attachment of the service-drop
Maximum Distance Between conductors to the building or other structure.
Maximum Between Supports Conductors From Surface
Volts (m) (mm) (mm) Exception: Where it is impracticable to locate the service head or
600 2.7 150 50 gooseneck above the point of attachment, the service head or
600 4.5 300 50 gooseneck location shall be permitted not farther than 600 mm from
300 1.4 75 50 the point of attachment.
600* 1.4* 65* 25*
*Where not exposed to weather. (d) Secured. Service cables shall be held securely in place.

(e) Separately Bushed Openings. Service heads shall have

2.30.4.13 Individual Conductors Entering Buildings or Other conductors of different potential brought out through separately
Structures. Where individual open conductors enter a building or bushed openings.
other structure, they shall enter through roof bushings or through the
wall in an upward slant through individual, noncombustible, Exception: For jacketed multiconductor service cable without splice.
nonabsorbent insulating tubes. Drip loops shall be formed on the
conductors before they enter the tubes. (f) Drip Loops. Drip loops shall be formed on individual
conductors. To prevent the entrance of moisture, service-entrance
2.30.4.14 Raceways to Drain. Where exposed to the weather, conductors shall be connected to the service-drop conductors either (1)
raceways enclosing service-entrance conductors shall be raintight and below the level of the service head or (2) below the level of the
arranged to drain. Where embedded in masonry, raceways shall be termination of the service-entrance cable sheath.
arranged to drain.
(g) Arranged That Water Will Not Enter Service Raceway or
Exception: As permitted in 3.48.2.3(1). Equipment. Service-drop conductors and service-entrance conductors
shall be arranged so that water will not enter service raceway or
2.30.4.15 Overhead Service Locations. equipment.

(a) Raintight Service Head. Service raceways shall be equipped 2.30.4.17 Service Conductor with the Higher Voltage to Ground.
with a raintight service head at the point of connection to service-drop On a 4-wire, delta-connected service where the midpoint of one phase
conductors. winding is grounded, the service conductor having the higher phase
voltage to ground shall be durably and permanently marked by an
(b) Service Cable Equipped with Raintight Service Head or outer finish that is orange in color, or by other effective means, at each
Gooseneck. Service cables shall be equipped with a raintight service termination or junction point.
head.

Exception: Type SE cable shall be permitted to be formed in a

gooseneck and taped with a self-sealing weather-resistant
thermoplastic.
 2.30.5 Service Equipment — General (b) Marking. Each service disconnect shall be permanently marked
to identify it as a service disconnect.
2.30.5.1 Service Equipment — Enclosed or Guarded. Energized
parts of service equipment shall be enclosed as specified in 2.30.5.1(a) (c) Suitable for Use. Each service disconnecting means shall be
or guarded as specified in 2.30.5.1(b). suitable for the prevailing conditions. Service equipment installed in
hazardous (classified) locations shall comply with the requirements of
(a) Enclosed. Energized parts shall be enclosed so that they will not Articles 5.0 through 5.17.
be exposed to accidental contact or shall be guarded as in 2.30.5.1(b).
2.30.6.2 Maximum Number of Disconnects.
(b) Guarded. Energized parts that are not enclosed shall be installed
on a switchboard, panelboard, or control board and guarded in (a) General. The service disconnecting means for each service
accordance with 1.10.1.18 and 1.10.2.2. Where energized parts are permitted by 2.30.1.2, or for each set of service-entrance conductors
guarded as provided in 1.10.2.2(a)(1) and (a)(2), a means for locking permitted by 2.30.4.1, Exception Nos. 1, 3, 4, or 5, shall consist of not
or sealing doors providing access to energized parts shall be provided. more than six switches or sets of circuit breakers, or a combination of
not more than six switches and sets of circuit breakers, mounted in a
2.30.5.5 Marking. Service equipment rated at 600 volts or less shall single enclosure, in a group of separate enclosures, or in or on a
be marked to identify it as being suitable for use as service equipment. switchboard. There shall be not more than six sets of disconnects per
Individual meter socket enclosures shall not be considered service service grouped in any one location. For the purpose of this section,
equipment. disconnecting means used solely for power monitoring equipment,
transient voltage surge suppressors, or the control circuit of the
2.30.6 Service Equipment — Disconnecting Means ground-fault protection system or power-operable service
disconnecting means, installed as part of the listed equipment, shall
2.30.6.1 General. Means shall be provided to disconnect all not be considered a service disconnecting means.
conductors in a building or other structure from the service-entrance
conductors. (b) Single-Pole Units. Two or three single-pole switches or
breakers, capable of individual operation, shall be permitted on
(a) Location. The service disconnecting means shall be installed in multiwire circuits, one pole for each ungrounded conductor, as one
accordance with 2.30.6.1(a)(1), (a)(2), and (a)(3). multipole disconnect, provided they are equipped with handle ties or a
master handle to disconnect all conductors of the service with no more
(1) Readily Accessible Location. The service disconnecting means than six operations of the hand.
shall be installed at a readily accessible location of a building or a
structure. For a building, the service disconnecting means shall be FPN: See 4.8.3.7(a) for service equipment in panelboards, and see 4.30.8.4 for
service equipment in motor control centers.
installed either at the outside wall or inside nearest the point of
entrance of the service conductors to the building.
2.30.6.3 Grouping of Disconnects.
(2) Bathrooms. Service disconnecting means shall not be installed
in bathrooms.
(a) General. The two to six disconnects as permitted in 2.30.6.2
(3) Remote Control. Where a remote control device(s) is used to
shall be grouped. Each disconnect shall be marked to indicate the load
actuate the service disconnecting means, the service disconnecting
served.
means shall be located in accordance with 2.30.6.1(a)(1).
Exception: One of the two to six service disconnecting means (1) A manually operable switch or circuit breaker equipped with a
permitted in 2.30.6.2, where used only for a water pump also intended handle or other suitable operating means
to provide fire protection, shall be permitted to be located remote from (2) A power-operated switch or circuit breaker, provided the
the other disconnecting means. switch or circuit breaker can be opened by hand in the event of a
power supply failure
(b) Additional Service Disconnecting Means. The one or more
additional service disconnecting means for fire pumps, emergency 2.30.6.8 Indicating. The service disconnecting means shall plainly
systems, legally required standby, or optional standby services indicate whether it is in the open or closed position.
permitted by 2.30.1.2 shall be installed remote from the one to six
service disconnecting means for normal service to minimize the 2.30.6.10 Rating of Service Disconnecting Means. The service
possibility of simultaneous interruption of supply. disconnecting means shall have a rating not less than the load to be
carried, determined in accordance with Article 2.20. In no case shall
(c) Access to Occupants. In a multiple-occupancy building, each the rating be lower than specified in 2.30.6.10(a), (b), (c), or (d).
occupant shall have access to the occupant’s service disconnecting
means. (a) One-Circuit Installation. For installations to supply only
limited loads of a single branch circuit, the service disconnecting
Exception: In a multiple-occupancy building where electric service means shall have a rating of not less than 15 amperes.
and electrical maintenance are provided by the building management
and where these are under continuous building management (b) Two-Circuit Installations. For installations consisting of not
supervision, the service disconnecting means supplying more than one more than two 2-wire branch circuits, the service disconnecting means
occupancy shall be permitted to be accessible to authorized shall have a rating of not less than 30 amperes.
management personnel only.
(c) One-Family Dwelling. For a one-family dwelling, the service
2.30.6.5 Simultaneous Opening of Poles. Each service disconnect disconnecting means shall have a rating of not less than 100 amperes,
shall simultaneously disconnect all ungrounded service conductors 3-wire.
that it controls from the premises wiring system.
(d) All Others. For all other installations, the service disconnecting
2.30.6.6 Disconnection of Grounded Conductor. Where the service means shall have a rating of not less than 60 amperes.
disconnecting means does not disconnect the grounded conductor from
the premises wiring, other means shall be provided for this purpose in 2.30.6.11 Combined Rating of Disconnects. Where the service
the service equipment. A terminal or bus to which all grounded disconnecting means consists of more than one switch or circuit
conductors can be attached by means of pressure connectors shall be breaker, as permitted by 2.30.6.2, the combined ratings of all the
permitted for this purpose. In a multisection switchboard, disconnects switches or circuit breakers used shall not be less than the rating
for the grounded conductor shall be permitted to be in any section of required by 2.30.6.10.
the switchboard, provided any such switchboard section is marked.
2.30.6.12 Connection to Terminals. The service conductors shall be
2.30.6.7 Manually or Power Operable. The service disconnecting connected to the service disconnecting means by pressure connectors,
means for ungrounded service conductors shall consist of one of the clamps, or other approved means. Connections that depend on solder
following: shall not be used.
2.30.6.13 Equipment Connected to the Supply Side of Service Single-pole circuit breakers, grouped in accordance with 2.30.6.2(b),
Disconnect. Only the following equipment shall be permitted to be shall be considered as one protective device.
connected to the supply side of the service disconnecting means:
Exception No. 1: For motor-starting currents, ratings that conform
(1) Cable limiters or other current-limiting devices with 4.30.4.2, 4.30.5.2, and 4.30.5.3 shall be permitted.
(2) Meters and meter sockets nominally rated not in excess of 600 Exception No. 2: Fuses and circuit breakers with a rating or setting
volts, provided all metal housings and service enclosures are grounded that conforms with 2.40.1.4(b) or (c) and 2.40.1.6 shall be permitted.
(3) Meter disconnect switches nominally rated not in excess of Exception No. 3: Two to six circuit breakers or sets of fuses shall be
600 volts that have a short-circuit current rating equal to or greater permitted as the overcurrent device to provide the overload protection.
than the available short circuit current, provided all metal housings The sum of the ratings of the circuit breakers or fuses shall be
and service enclosures are grounded permitted to exceed the ampacity of the service conductors, provided
(4) Instrument transformers (current and voltage), impedance the calculated load does not exceed the ampacity of the service
shunts, load management devices, and arresters conductors.
(5) Taps used only to supply load management devices, circuits Exception No. 4: Overload protection for fire pump supply
for standby power systems, fire pump equipment, and fire and conductors shall conform with 6.95.1.4(b)(1).
sprinkler alarms, if provided with service equipment and installed in Exception No. 5: Overload protection for 120/240-volt, 3-wire,
accordance with requirements for service-entrance conductors single-phase dwelling services shall be permitted in accordance with
(6) Solar photovoltaic systems, fuel cell systems, or the requirements of 3.10.1.15(b)(6).
interconnected electric power production sources
(7) Control circuits for power-operable service disconnecting (b) Not in Grounded Conductor. No overcurrent device shall be
means, if suitable overcurrent protection and disconnecting means are inserted in a grounded service conductor except a circuit breaker that
provided simultaneously opens all conductors of the circuit.
(8) Ground-fault protection systems or transient voltage surge
suppressors, where installed as part of listed equipment, if suitable 2.30.7.2 Location. The service overcurrent device shall be an integral
overcurrent protection and disconnecting means are provided part of the service disconnecting means or shall be located
(9) Fusible disconnect switch or circuit breaker as deemed immediately adjacent thereto.
necessary. This equipment is considered as additional protection,
while the next disconnecting means mentioned in 2.30.6.1(a)(1) shall 2.30.7.3 Locked Service Overcurrent Devices. Where the service
still be considered as the service equipment. overcurrent devices are locked or sealed or are not readily accessible
to the occupant, branch-circuit overcurrent devices shall be installed
2.30.7 Service Equipment — Overcurrent Protection on the load side, shall be mounted in a readily accessible location, and
shall be of lower ampere rating than the service overcurrent device.
2.30.7.1 Where Required. Each ungrounded service conductor shall
have overload protection. 2.30.7.4 Protection of Specific Circuits. Where necessary to prevent
tampering, an automatic overcurrent device that protects service
(a) Ungrounded Conductor. Such protection shall be provided by conductors supplying only a specific load, such as a water heater, shall
an overcurrent device in series with each ungrounded service be permitted to be locked or sealed where located so as to be
conductor that has a rating or setting not higher than the allowable accessible.
ampacity of the conductor. A set of fuses shall be considered all the
fuses required to protect all the ungrounded conductors of a circuit.
2.30.7.5 Relative Location of Overcurrent Device and Other industrial process where a nonorderly shutdown will introduce
Service Equipment. The overcurrent device shall protect all circuits additional or increased hazards.
and devices. Exception No. 2: The ground-fault protection provisions of this
section shall not apply to fire pumps.
Exception No. 1: The service switch shall be permitted on the supply
side. (a) Setting. The ground-fault protection system shall operate to
Exception No. 2: High-impedance shunt circuits, surge arresters, cause the service disconnect to open all ungrounded conductors of the
surge-protective capacitors, and instrument transformers (current and faulted circuit. The maximum setting of the ground-fault protection
voltage) shall be permitted to be connected and installed on the supply shall be 1200 amperes, and the maximum time delay shall be one
side of the service disconnecting means as permitted in 2.30.6.13. second for ground-fault currents equal to or greater than 3000
Exception No. 3: Circuits for load management devices shall be amperes.
permitted to be connected on the supply side of the service overcurrent
device where separately provided with overcurrent protection. (b) Fuses. If a switch and fuse combination is used, the fuses
Exception No. 4: Circuits used only for the operation of fire alarm, employed shall be capable of interrupting any current higher than the
other protective signaling systems, or the supply to fire pump interrupting capacity of the switch during a time that the ground-fault
equipment shall be permitted to be connected on the supply side of the protective system will not cause the switch to open.
service overcurrent device where separately provided with
overcurrent protection. (c) Performance Testing. The ground-fault protection system shall
Exception No. 5: Meters nominally rated not in excess of 600 volts be performance tested when first installed on site. The test shall be
shall be permitted, provided all metal housings and service enclosures conducted in accordance with instructions that shall be provided with
are grounded. the equipment. A written record of this test shall be made and shall be
Exception No. 6: Where service equipment is power operable, the available to the authority having jurisdiction.
control circuit shall be permitted to be connected ahead of the service
equipment if suitable overcurrent protection and disconnecting means FPN No. 1: Ground-fault protection that functions to open the service disconnect
affords no protection from faults on the line side of the protective element. It serves
are provided. only to limit damage to conductors and equipment on the load side in the event of
an arcing ground fault on the load side of the protective element.
2.30.7.6 Ground-Fault Protection of Equipment. Ground-fault FPN No. 2: This added protective equipment at the service equipment may make it
necessary to review the overall wiring system for proper selective overcurrent
protection of equipment shall be provided for solidly grounded wye protection coordination. Additional installations of ground-fault protective
electrical services of more than 150 volts to ground but not exceeding equipment may be needed on feeders and branch circuits where maximum
continuity of electrical service is necessary.
600 volts phase-to-phase for each service disconnect rated 1000 FPN No. 3: Where ground-fault protection is provided for the service disconnect
amperes or more. The grounded conductor for the solidly grounded and interconnection is made with another supply system by a transfer device,
wye system shall be connected directly to ground without inserting means or devices may be needed to ensure proper ground-fault sensing by the
ground-fault protection equipment.
any resistor or impedance device. FPN No. 4: See 5.17.2.8(a) for information on where an additional step of ground
The rating of the service disconnect shall be considered to be the fault protection is required for hospitals and other buildings with critical areas or life
rating of the largest fuse that can be installed or the highest continuous support equipment.

current trip setting for which the actual overcurrent device installed in
a circuit breaker is rated or can be adjusted. 2.30.8 Services Exceeding 600 Volts, Nominal

Exception No. 1: The ground-fault protection provisions of this 2.30.8.1 General. Service conductors and equipment used on circuits
section shall not apply to a service disconnect for a continuous exceeding 600 volts, nominal, shall comply with all the applicable
provisions of the preceding sections of this article and with the
following sections that supplement or modify the preceding sections. practitioner Only. The isolating switch shall be accessible to licensed
In no case shall the provisions of Part 2.30.8 apply to equipment on electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner under the
the supply side of the service point. supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner only.

FPN: For clearances of conductors of over 600 volts, nominal, see ANSI C2-2002, (d) Grounding Connection. Isolating switches shall be provided
National Electrical Safety Code.
with a means for readily connecting the load side conductors to ground
when disconnected from the source of supply.
2.30.8.3 Service-Entrance Conductors. Service-entrance conductors
A means for grounding the load side conductors shall not be
to buildings or enclosures shall be installed to conform to 2.30.8.3(a)
required for any duplicate isolating switch installed and maintained by
and (b).
the electric supply company.
(a) Conductor Size. Service-entrance conductors shall not be
2.30.8.6 Disconnecting Means.
smaller than 14 mm2 unless in multiconductor cable. Multiconductor
cable shall not be smaller than 8.0 mm2 (3.2 mm dia.).
(a) Location. The service disconnecting means shall be located in
accordance with 2.30.6.1.
(b) Wiring Methods. Service-entrance conductors shall be installed
by one of the wiring methods covered in 3.0.2.7 and 3.0.2.20.
(b) Type. Each service disconnect shall simultaneously disconnect
all ungrounded service conductors that it controls and shall have a
2.30.8.5 Isolating Switches.
fault-closing rating that is not less than the maximum short-circuit
current available at its supply terminals.
(a) Where Required. Where oil switches or air, oil, vacuum, or
Where fused switches or separately mounted fuses are installed, the
sulfur hexafluoride circuit breakers constitute the service
fuse characteristics shall be permitted to contribute to the fault-closing
disconnecting means, an isolating switch with visible break contacts
rating of the disconnecting means.
shall be installed on the supply side of the disconnecting means and all
associated service equipment.
(c) Remote Control. For multibuilding, industrial installations
under single management, the service disconnecting means shall be
Exception: An isolating switch shall not be required where the circuit
permitted to be located at a separate building or structure. In such
breaker or switch is mounted on removable truck panels or metal-
cases, the service disconnecting means shall be permitted to be
enclosed switchgear units where both of the following conditions
electrically operated by a readily accessible, remote-control device.
apply:
(1) Cannot be opened unless the circuit is disconnected.
2.30.8.7 Overcurrent Devices as Disconnecting Means. Where the
(2) Where all energized parts are automatically disconnected
circuit breaker or alternative for it, as specified in 2.30.8.9 for service
when the circuit breaker or switch is removed from the normal
overcurrent devices, meets the requirements specified in 2.30.8.6, they
operating position.
shall constitute the service disconnecting means.
(b) Fuses as Isolating Switch. Where fuses are of the type that can
2.30.8.9 Protection Requirements. A short-circuit protective device
be operated as a disconnecting switch, a set of such fuses shall be
shall be provided on the load side of, or as an integral part of, the
permitted as the isolating switch.
service disconnect, and shall protect all ungrounded conductors that it
supplies. The protective device shall be capable of detecting and
(c) Accessible to Licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed
interrupting all values of current, in excess of its trip setting or melting
electrical practitioner under the supervision of a licensed electrical
point, that can occur at its location. A fuse rated in continuous amperes
not to exceed three times the ampacity of the conductor, or a circuit ARTICLE 2.40 — OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
breaker with a trip setting of not more than six times the ampacity of
the conductors, shall be considered as providing the required short- 2.40.1 General
circuit protection.
2.40.1.1 Scope. Parts 2.40.1 through 2.40.7 of this article provide the
FPN: See Table 3.10.1.67 through Table 3.10.1.86 for ampacities of conductors general requirements for overcurrent protection and overcurrent
rated 2001 volts and above.
protective devices not more than 600 volts, nominal. Part 2.40.8
covers overcurrent protection for those portions of supervised
Overcurrent devices shall conform to 2.30.8.9(a) and (b).
industrial installations operating at voltages of not more than 600
volts, nominal. Part 2.40.9 covers overcurrent protection over 600
(a) Equipment Type. Equipment used to protect service-entrance
volts, nominal.
conductors shall meet the requirements of Part 4.90.2.
FPN: Overcurrent protection for conductors and equipment is provided to open the
(b) Enclosed Overcurrent Devices. The restriction to 80 percent of circuit if the current reaches a value that will cause an excessive or dangerous
the rating for an enclosed overcurrent device for continuous loads shall temperature in conductors or conductor insulation. See also 1.10.1.9 for
requirements for interrupting ratings and 1.10.1.10 for requirements for protection
not apply to overcurrent devices installed in systems operating at over against fault currents.
600 volts.
2.40.1.2 Definitions.
2.30.8.10 Surge Arresters (Lightning Arresters). Surge arresters
installed in accordance with the requirements of Article 2.80 shall be Current-Limiting Overcurrent Protective Device. A device that,
permitted on each ungrounded overhead service conductor. when interrupting currents in its current-limiting range, reduces the
current flowing in the faulted circuit to a magnitude substantially less
2.30.8.11 Service Equipment — General Provisions. Service than that obtainable in the same circuit if the device were replaced
equipment, including instrument transformers, shall conform to Part with a solid conductor having comparable impedance.
4.90.1.
Supervised Industrial Installation. For the purposes of Part 2.40.8,
2.30.8.12 Metal-Enclosed Switchgear. Metal-enclosed switchgear the industrial portions of a facility where all of the following
shall consist of a substantial metal structure and a sheet metal conditions are met:
enclosure. Where installed over a combustible floor, suitable
protection thereto shall be provided. (1) Conditions of maintenance and engineering supervision ensure
that only licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical
2.30.8.13 Over 35,000 Volts. Where the voltage exceeds 35,000 volts practitioner under the supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner
between conductors that enter a building, they shall terminate in a monitor and service the system.
metal-enclosed switchgear compartment or a vault conforming to the (2) The premises wiring system has 2500 kVA or greater of load
requirements of 4.50.3.1 through 4.50.3.8. used in industrial process(es), manufacturing activities, or both, as
calculated in accordance with Article 2.20.
(3) The premises has at least one service or feeder that is more
than 150 volts to ground and more than 300 volts phase-to-phase.

This definition excludes installations in buildings used by the

industrial facility for offices, warehouses, garages, machine shops, and
recreational facilities that are not an integral part of the industrial Table 2.40.1.3 Other Articles
plant, substation, or control center. Equipment Article
Air-conditioning and refrigerating equipment 4.40
Tap Conductors. As used in this article, a tap conductor is defined Appliances 4.22
Assembly occupancies 5.18
as a conductor, other than a service conductor, that has overcurrent Audio signal processing, amplification, and reproduction
protection ahead of its point of supply that exceeds the value permitted equipment 6.40
for similar conductors that are protected as described elsewhere in Branch circuits 2.10
2.40.1.4. Busways 3.68
Capacitors 4.60
Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote-control, signaling, and
2.40.1.3 Other Articles. Equipment shall be protected against power-limited circuits 7.25
overcurrent in accordance with the article in this Code that covers the Closed-loop and programmed power distribution 7.80
type of equipment specified in Table 2.40.1.3. Cranes and hoists 6.10
Electric signs and outline lighting 6.0
Electric welders 6.30
2.40.1.4 Protection of Conductors. Conductors, other than flexible Electrolytic cells 6.68
cords, flexible cables, and fixture wires, shall be protected against Elevators, dumbwaiters, escalators, moving walks,
overcurrent in accordance with their ampacities specified in 3.10.1.15, wheelchair lifts, and stairway chair lifts 6.20
unless otherwise permitted or required in 2.40.1.4(a) through (g). Emergency systems 7.0
Fire alarm systems 7.60
Fire pumps 6.95
(a) Power Loss Hazard. Conductor overload protection shall not be Fixed electric heating equipment for pipelines and vessels 4.27
required where the interruption of the circuit would create a hazard, Fixed electric space-heating equipment 4.24
such as in a material-handling magnet circuit or fire pump circuit. Fixed outdoor electric deicing and snow-melting
Short-circuit protection shall be provided. equipment 4.26
Generators 4.45
Health care facilities 5.17
FPN: See NFPA 20-2003, Standard for the Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire
Protection.
Induction and dielectric heating equipment 6.65
Industrial machinery 6.70
Luminaires (lighting fixtures), lampholders, and lamps 4.10
(b) Devices Rated 800 Amperes or Less. The next higher standard Motion picture and television studios and similar locations 5.30
overcurrent device rating (above the ampacity of the conductors being Motors, motor circuits, and controllers 4.30
protected) shall be permitted to be used, provided all of the following Phase converters 4.55
Pipe organs 6.50
conditions are met:
Receptacles 4.6
Services 2.30
(1) The conductors being protected are not part of a multioutlet Solar photovoltaic systems 6.90
branch circuit supplying receptacles for cord-and-plug-connected Switchboards and panelboards 4.8
portable loads. Theaters, audience areas of motion picture and television
studios, and similar locations 5.20
(2) The ampacity of the conductors does not correspond with the Transformers and transformer vaults 4.50
standard ampere rating of a fuse or a circuit breaker without overload X-ray equipment 6.60
trip adjustments above its rating (but that shall be permitted to have
other trip or rating adjustments).
(3) The next higher standard rating selected does not exceed 800
amperes.
 (c) Devices Rated Over 800 Amperes. Where the overcurrent
device is rated over 800 amperes, the ampacity of the conductors it Table 2.40.1.4(g) Specific Conductor Applications
protects shall be equal to or greater than the rating of the overcurrent Conductor Article Section
device defined in 2.40.1.6. Air-conditioning and 4.40.3, 4.40.6
refrigeration equipment
(d) Small Conductors. Unless specifically permitted in 2.40.1.4(e) circuit conductors
or 2.40.1.4(g), the overcurrent protection shall not exceed 15 amperes Capacitor circuit conductors 4.60 4.60.1.8(b) and
for 2.0 mm2 (1.6 mm dia.), 20 amperes for 3.5 mm2 (2.0 mm dia.), and 4.60.2.2(a)–(d)
30 amperes for 5.5 mm2 (2.6 mm dia.) copper; or 15 amperes for 3.5
mm2 (2.0 mm dia.) and 25 amperes for 5.5 mm2 (2.6 mm dia.) Control and instrumentation 7.27 7.27.1.9
aluminum and copper-clad aluminum after any correction factors for circuit conductors (Type
ambient temperature and number of conductors have been applied. ITC)
Electric welder circuit 6.30 6.30.2.2 and
(e) Tap Conductors. Tap conductors shall be permitted to be conductors 6.30.3.2
protected against overcurrent in accordance with the following:
Fire alarm system circuit 7.60 7.60.2.3,
(1) 2.10.2.1(a)(3) and (a)(4) Household Ranges and Cooking conductors 7.60.2.4,
Appliances and Other Loads 7.60.3.1, and
(2) 2.40.1.5(b)(2) Fixture Wire Chapter 9, Tables
(3) 2.40.2.2 Location in Circuit 12(a) and 12(b)
(4) 3.68.2.8(b) Reduction in Ampacity Size of Busway Motor-operated appliance 4.22.2
(5) 3.68.2.8(c) Feeder or Branch Circuits (busway taps) circuit conductors
(6) 4.30.4.3(d) Single Motor Taps Motor and motor-control 4.30.3, 4.30.4,
circuit conductors 4.30.5, 4.30.6,
(f) Transformer Secondary Conductors. Single-phase (other than 4.30.7
2-wire) and multiphase (other than delta-delta, 3-wire) transformer
secondary conductors shall not be considered to be protected by the Phase converter supply 4.55 4.55.17
primary overcurrent protective device. Conductors supplied by the conductors
secondary side of a single-phase transformer having a 2-wire (single- Remote-control, signaling, 7.25 7.25.2.3,
voltage) secondary, or a three-phase, delta-delta connected transformer and power- limited circuit 7.25.2.4, 725.41,
having a 3-wire (single-voltage) secondary, shall be permitted to be conductors and Chapter 9,
protected by overcurrent protection provided on the primary (supply) Tables 11(a) and
side of the transformer, provided this protection is in accordance with 11(b)
4.50.1.3 and does not exceed the value determined by multiplying the Secondary tie conductors 4.50 4.50.1.6
secondary conductor ampacity by the secondary to primary
transformer voltage ratio.

(g) Overcurrent Protection for Specific Conductor Applications. 2.40.1.5 Protection of Flexible Cords, Flexible Cables, and Fixture
Overcurrent protection for the specific conductors shall be permitted Wires. Flexible cord and flexible cable, including tinsel cord and
to be provided as referenced in Table 2.40.1.4(g). extension cords, and fixture wires shall be protected against
overcurrent by either 2.40.1.5(a) or (b).
 2.40.1.6 Standard Ampere Ratings.
(a) Ampacities. Flexible cord and flexible cable shall be protected
by an overcurrent device in accordance with their ampacity as (a) Fuses and Fixed-Trip Circuit Breakers. The standard ampere
specified in Table 4.0.1.5(a) and Table 4.0.1.5(b). Fixture wire shall be ratings for fuses and inverse time circuit breakers shall be considered
protected against overcurrent in accordance with its ampacity as 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175,
specified in Table 4.2.1.5. Supplementary overcurrent protection, as in 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800, 1000, 1200,
2.40.1.10, shall be permitted to be an acceptable means for providing 1600, 2000, 2500, 3000, 4000, 5000, and 6000 amperes. Additional
this protection. standard ampere ratings for fuses shall be 1, 3, 6, 10, and 601. The use
of fuses and inverse time circuit breakers with nonstandard ampere
(b) Branch Circuit Overcurrent Device. Flexible cord shall be ratings shall be permitted.
protected where supplied by a branch circuit in accordance with one of
the methods described in 2.40.1.5(b)(1), (b)(2), (b)(3), or (b)(4). (b) Adjustable-Trip Circuit Breakers. The rating of adjustable-
trip circuit breakers having external means for adjusting the current
(1) Supply Cord of Listed Appliance or Portable Lamps. Where setting (long-time pickup setting), not meeting the requirements of
flexible cord or tinsel cord is approved for and used with a specific 2.40.1.6(c), shall be the maximum setting possible.
listed appliance or portable lamp, it shall be considered to be protected
when applied within the appliance or portable lamp listing (c) Restricted Access Adjustable-Trip Circuit Breakers. A circuit
requirements. breaker(s) that has restricted access to the adjusting means shall be
(2) Fixture Wire. Fixture wire shall be permitted to be tapped to permitted to have an ampere rating(s) that is equal to the adjusted
the branch circuit conductor of a branch circuit in accordance with the current setting (long-time pickup setting). Restricted access shall be
following: defined as located behind one of the following:

a. 20-ampere circuits — 18 AWG, up to 15 m of run length (1) Removable and sealable covers over the adjusting means
b. 20-ampere circuits — 16 AWG, up to 30 m of run length (2) Bolted equipment enclosure doors
c. 20-ampere circuits — 2.0 mm2 (1.6 mm dia.) and larger (3) Locked doors accessible only to qualified personnel
d. 30-ampere circuits — 2.0 mm2 (1.6 mm dia.) and larger
e. 40-ampere circuits — 3.5 mm2 (2.0 mm dia.) and larger 2.40.1.8 Fuses or Circuit Breakers in Parallel. Fuses and circuit
f. 50-ampere circuits — 3.5 mm2 (2.0 mm dia.) and larger breakers shall be permitted to be connected in parallel where they are
factory assembled in parallel and listed as a unit. Individual fuses,
(3) Extension Cord Sets. Flexible cord used in listed extension circuit breakers, or combinations thereof shall not otherwise be
cord sets shall be considered to be protected when applied within the connected in parallel.
extension cord listing requirements.
(4) Field Assembled Extension Cord Sets. Flexible cord used in 2.40.1.9 Thermal Devices. Thermal relays and other devices not
extension cords made with separately listed and installed components designed to open short circuits or ground faults shall not be used for
shall be permitted to be supplied by a branch circuit in accordance the protection of conductors against overcurrent due to short circuits or
with the following: ground faults, but the use of such devices shall be permitted to protect
motor branch-circuit conductors from overload if protected in
20-ampere circuits — 16 AWG and larger accordance with 4.30.3.10.

2.40.1.10 Supplementary Overcurrent Protection. Where

supplementary overcurrent protection is used for luminaires (lighting
fixtures), appliances, and other equipment or for internal circuits and
components of equipment, it shall not be used as a substitute for FPN: For motor circuits, see Parts 4.30.3, 4.30.4, 4.30.5, and 4.30.9.
required branch-circuit overcurrent devices or in place of the required
branch-circuit protection. Supplementary overcurrent devices shall not (b) Circuit Breaker as Overcurrent Device. Circuit breakers shall
be required to be readily accessible. open all ungrounded conductors of the circuit both manually and
automatically unless otherwise permitted in 2.40.2.1(b)(1), (b)(2), and
2.40.1.12 Electrical System Coordination. Where an orderly (b)(3).
shutdown is required to minimize the hazard(s) to personnel and
equipment, a system of coordination based on the following two (1) Multiwire Branch Circuit. Except where limited by 2.10.1.4(b),
conditions shall be permitted: individual single-pole circuit breakers, with or without identified
handle ties, shall be permitted as the protection for each ungrounded
(1) Coordinated short-circuit protection conductor of multiwire branch circuits that serve only single-phase
(2) Overload indication based on monitoring systems or devices line-to-neutral loads.
(2) Grounded Single-Phase and 3-Wire dc Circuits. In grounded
FPN: The monitoring system may cause the condition to go to alarm, allowing systems, individual single-pole circuit breakers with identified handle
corrective action or an orderly shutdown, thereby minimizing personnel hazard and ties shall be permitted as the protection for each ungrounded conductor
equipment damage.
for line-to-line connected loads for single-phase circuits or 3-wire,
direct-current circuits.
2.40.1.13 Ground-Fault Protection of Equipment. Ground-fault
(3) 3-Phase and 2-Phase Systems. For line-to-line loads in 4-wire,
protection of equipment shall be provided in accordance with the
3-phase systems or 5-wire, 2-phase systems having a grounded neutral
provisions of 2.30.7.6 for solidly grounded wye electrical systems of
and no conductor operating at a voltage greater than permitted in
more than 150 volts to ground but not exceeding 600 volts phase-to-
2.10.1.6, individual single-pole circuit breakers with identified handle
phase for each individual device used as a building or structure main
ties shall be permitted as the protection for each ungrounded
disconnecting means rated 1000 amperes or more.
conductor.
The provisions of this section shall not apply to the disconnecting
means for the following:
(c) Closed-Loop Power Distribution Systems. Listed devices that
provide equivalent overcurrent protection in closed-loop power
(1) Continuous industrial processes where a nonorderly shutdown
distribution systems shall be permitted as a substitute for fuses or
will introduce additional or increased hazards
circuit breakers.
(2) Installations where ground-fault protection is provided by other
requirements for services or feeders
2.40.2.2 Location in Circuit. Overcurrent protection shall be provided
(3) Fire pumps
in each ungrounded circuit conductor and shall be located at the point
where the conductors receive their supply except as specified in
2.40.2 Location
2.40.2.2(a) through (g). No conductor supplied under the provisions of
2.40.2.2(a) through (g) shall supply another conductor under those
2.40.2.1 Ungrounded Conductors.
provisions, except through an overcurrent protective device meeting
the requirements of 2.40.1.4.
(a) Overcurrent Device Required. A fuse or an overcurrent trip
unit of a circuit breaker shall be connected in series with each
(a) Branch-Circuit Conductors. Branch-circuit tap conductors
ungrounded conductor. A combination of a current transformer and
meeting the requirements specified in 2.10.2.1 shall be permitted to
overcurrent relay shall be considered equivalent to an overcurrent trip
have overcurrent protection located as specified in that section.
unit.
 conductors. This device shall be permitted to supply any number of
(b) Feeder Taps. Conductors shall be permitted to be tapped, additional overcurrent devices on its load side.
without overcurrent protection at the tap, to a feeder as specified in c. The tap conductors are protected from physical damage by
2.40.2.2(b)(1) through (b)(5). The provisions of 2.40.1.4(b) shall not being enclosed in an approved raceway or by other approved means.
be permitted for tap conductors.
(3) Taps Supplying a Transformer [Primary Plus Secondary Not
(1) Taps Not Over 3 000 mm Long. Where the length of the tap Over 7 600 mm Long]. Where the tap conductors supply a transformer
conductors does not exceed 3 000 mm and the tap conductors comply and comply with all the following conditions:
with all of the following:
a. The conductors supplying the primary of a transformer have
a. The ampacity of the tap conductors is an ampacity at least one-third the rating of the overcurrent device
protecting the feeder conductors.
1. Not less than the combined calculated loads on the circuits b. The conductors supplied by the secondary of the transformer
supplied by the tap conductors, and shall have an ampacity that is not less than the value of the primary-to-
2. Not less than the rating of the device supplied by the tap secondary voltage ratio multiplied by one-third of the rating of the
conductors or not less than the rating of the overcurrent-protective overcurrent device protecting the feeder conductors.
device at the termination of the tap conductors. c. The total length of one primary plus one secondary conductor,
excluding any portion of the primary conductor that is protected at its
b. The tap conductors do not extend beyond the switchboard, ampacity, is not over 7 600 mm.
panelboard, disconnecting means, or control devices they supply. d. The primary and secondary conductors are protected from
c. Except at the point of connection to the feeder, the tap physical damage by being enclosed in an approved raceway or by
conductors are enclosed in a raceway, which shall extend from the tap other approved means.
to the enclosure of an enclosed switchboard, panelboard, or control e. The secondary conductors terminate in a single circuit breaker
devices, or to the back of an open switchboard. or set of fuses that limit the load current to not more than the
d. For field installations where the tap conductors leave the conductor ampacity that is permitted by 3.10.1.15.
enclosure or vault in which the tap is made, the rating of the
overcurrent device on the line side of the tap conductors shall not (4) Taps Over 7 600 mm Long. Where the feeder is in a high bay
exceed 10 times the ampacity of the tap conductor. manufacturing building over 11 m high at walls and the installation
complies with all the following conditions:
FPN: For overcurrent protection requirements for lighting and appliance branch-
circuit panelboards and certain power panelboards, see 4.8.3.7(a), (b), and (e).
a. Conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that only
licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner
(2) Taps Not Over 7 600 mm Long. Where the length of the tap
under the supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner service the
conductors does not exceed 7 600 mm and the tap conductors comply
systems.
with all the following:
b. The tap conductors are not over 7 600 mm long horizontally
and not over 30 m total length.
a. The ampacity of the tap conductors is not less than one-third
c. The ampacity of the tap conductors is not less than one-third
of the rating of the overcurrent device protecting the feeder
the rating of the overcurrent device protecting the feeder conductors.
conductors.
d. The tap conductors terminate at a single circuit breaker or a
b. The tap conductors terminate in a single circuit breaker or a
single set of fuses that limit the load to the ampacity of the tap
single set of fuses that will limit the load to the ampacity of the tap
conductors. This single overcurrent device shall be permitted to supply (1) Protection by Primary Overcurrent Device. Conductors
any number of additional overcurrent devices on its load side. supplied by the secondary side of a single-phase transformer having a
e. The tap conductors are protected from physical damage by 2-wire (single-voltage) secondary, or a three-phase, delta-delta
being enclosed in an approved raceway or by other approved means. connected transformer having a 3-wire (single-voltage) secondary,
f. The tap conductors are continuous from end-to-end and shall be permitted to be protected by overcurrent protection provided
contain no splices. on the primary (supply) side of the transformer, provided this
g. The tap conductors are sized 14 mm2 copper or 22 mm2 protection is in accordance with 4.50.1.3 and does not exceed the
aluminum or larger. value determined by multiplying the secondary conductor ampacity by
h. The tap conductors do not penetrate walls, floors, or ceilings. the secondary to primary transformer voltage ratio.
i. The tap is made no less than 9 000 mm from the floor. Single-phase (other than 2-wire) and multiphase (other than delta-
delta, 3-wire) transformer secondary conductors are not considered to
(5) Outside Taps of Unlimited Length. Where the conductors are be protected by the primary overcurrent protective device.
located outdoors of a building or structure, except at the point of load (2) Transformer Secondary Conductors Not Over 3 000 mm Long.
termination, and comply with all of the following conditions: Where the length of secondary conductor does not exceed 3 000 mm
and complies with all of the following:
a. The conductors are protected from physical damage in an
approved manner. a. The ampacity of the secondary conductors is
b. The conductors terminate at a single circuit breaker or a
single set of fuses that limit the load to the ampacity of the conductors. 1. Not less than the combined calculated loads on the circuits
This single overcurrent device shall be permitted to supply any supplied by the secondary conductors, and
number of additional overcurrent devices on its load side. 2. Not less than the rating of the device supplied by the
c. The overcurrent device for the conductors is an integral part secondary conductors or not less than the rating of the overcurrent-
of a disconnecting means or shall be located immediately adjacent protective device at the termination of the secondary conductors, and
thereto. 3. Not less than one-tenth of the rating of the overcurrent
d. The disconnecting means for the conductors is installed at a device protecting the primary of the transformer, multiplied by the
readily accessible location complying with one of the following: primary to secondary transformer voltage ratio

1. Outside of a building or structure b. The secondary conductors do not extend beyond the
2. Inside, nearest the point of entrance of the conductors switchboard, panelboard, disconnecting means, or control devices they
3. Where installed in accordance with 2.30.1.6, nearest the supply.
point of entrance of the conductors c. The secondary conductors are enclosed in a raceway, which
shall extend from the transformer to the enclosure of an enclosed
(c) Transformer Secondary Conductors. Each set of conductors switchboard, panelboard, or control devices or to the back of an open
feeding separate loads shall be permitted to be connected to a switchboard.
transformer secondary, without overcurrent protection at the
secondary, as specified in 2.40.2.2(c)(1) through (c)(6). The provisions FPN: For overcurrent protection requirements for lighting and appliance branch-
circuit panelboards and certain power panelboards, see 4.8.3.7(a), (b), and (e).
of 2.40.1.4(b) shall not be permitted for transformer secondary
conductors.
(3) Industrial Installation Secondary Conductors Not Over 7 600
FPN: For overcurrent protection requirements for transformers, see 4.50.1.3.
mm Long. For industrial installations only, where the length of the
secondary conductors does not exceed 7 600 mm and complies with a. The secondary conductors shall have an ampacity that is not
all of the following: less than the value of the primary-to-secondary voltage ratio
multiplied by one-third of the rating of the overcurrent device
a. The ampacity of the secondary conductors is not less than the protecting the primary of the transformer.
secondary current rating of the transformer, and the sum of the ratings b. The secondary conductors terminate in a single circuit breaker
of the overcurrent devices does not exceed the ampacity of the or set of fuses that limit the load current to not more than the
secondary conductors. conductor ampacity that is permitted by 3.10.1.15.
b. All overcurrent devices are grouped. c. The secondary conductors are protected from physical
c. The secondary conductors are protected from physical damage by being enclosed in an approved raceway or by other
damage by being enclosed in an approved raceway or by other approved means.
approved means.
(d) Service Conductors. Service-entrance conductors shall be
(4) Outside Secondary Conductors. Where the conductors are permitted to be protected by overcurrent devices in accordance with
located outdoors of a building or structure, except at the point of load 2.30.7.2.
termination, and comply with all of the following conditions:
(e) Busway Taps. Busways and busway taps shall be permitted to
a. The conductors are protected from physical damage in an be protected against overcurrent in accordance with 3.68.2.8.
approved manner.
b. The conductors terminate at a single circuit breaker or a (f) Motor Circuit Taps. Motor-feeder and branch-circuit
single set of fuses that limit the load to the ampacity of the conductors. conductors shall be permitted to be protected against overcurrent in
This single overcurrent device shall be permitted to supply any accordance with 4.30.2.8 and 4.30.4.3, respectively.
number of additional overcurrent devices on its load side.
c. The overcurrent device for the conductors is an integral part (g) Conductors from Generator Terminals. Conductors from
of a disconnecting means or shall be located immediately adjacent generator terminals that meet the size requirement in 4.45.1.13 shall be
thereto. permitted to be protected against overload by the generator overload
d. The disconnecting means for the conductors is installed at a protective device(s) required by 4.45.1.12.
readily accessible location complying with one of the following:
2.40.2.3 Grounded Conductor. No overcurrent device shall be
1. Outside of a building or structure connected in series with any conductor that is intentionally grounded,
2. Inside, nearest the point of entrance of the conductors unless one of the following two conditions is met:
3. Where installed in accordance with 2.30.1.6, nearest the
point of entrance of the conductors (1) The overcurrent device opens all conductors of the circuit,
including the grounded conductor, and is designed so that no pole can
(5) Secondary Conductors from a Feeder Tapped Transformer. operate independently.
Transformer secondary conductors installed in accordance with (2) Where required by 4.30.3.6 or 4.30.3.7 for motor overload
2.40.2.2(b)(3) shall be permitted to have overcurrent protection as protection.
specified in that section.
(6) Secondary Conductors Not Over 7 600 mm Long. Where the 2.40.2.4 Change in Size of Grounded Conductor. Where a change
length of secondary conductor does not exceed 7 600 mm and occurs in the size of the ungrounded conductor, a similar change shall
complies with all of the following: be permitted to be made in the size of the grounded conductor.
2.40.2.5 Location in or on Premises.
(d) Not in Vicinity of Easily Ignitible Material. Overcurrent
(a) Accessibility. Overcurrent devices shall be readily accessible devices shall not be located in the vicinity of easily ignitible material,
and shall be installed so that the center of the grip of the operating such as in clothes closets.
handle of the switch or circuit breaker, when in its highest position, is
not more than 2.0 m (6 ft 7 in.) above the floor or working platform (e) Not Located in Bathrooms. In dwelling units and guest rooms
unless one of the following applies: or guest suites of hotels and motels, overcurrent devices, other than
supplementary overcurrent protection, shall not be located in
(1) For busways, as provided in 3.68.2.3. bathrooms.
(2) For supplementary overcurrent protection, as described in
2.40.1.10. 2.40.3 Enclosures
(3) For overcurrent devices, as described in 2.25.2.11 and
2.30.7.3. 2.40.3.1 General.
(4) For overcurrent devices adjacent to utilization equipment that
they supply, access shall be permitted to be by portable means. (a) Protection from Physical Damage. Overcurrent devices shall
be protected from physical damage by one of the following:
(b) Occupancy. Each occupant shall have ready access to all
overcurrent devices protecting the conductors supplying that (1) Installation in enclosures, cabinets, cutout boxes, or equipment
occupancy. assemblies
(2) Mounting on open-type switchboards, panelboards, or control
Exception No. 1: Where electric service and electrical maintenance boards that are in rooms or enclosures free from dampness and easily
are provided by the building management and where these are under ignitible material and are accessible only to qualified personnel
continuous building management supervision, the service overcurrent
devices and feeder overcurrent devices supplying more than one (b) Operating Handle. The operating handle of a circuit breaker
occupancy shall be permitted to be accessible to only authorized shall be permitted to be accessible without opening a door or cover.
management personnel in the following:
(1) Multiple-occupancy buildings 2.40.3.3 Damp or Wet Locations. Enclosures for overcurrent devices
(2) Guest rooms or guest suites of hotels and motels that are in damp or wet locations shall comply with 3.12.1.2(a).
intended for transient occupancy
Exception No. 2: Where electric service and electrical maintenance 2.40.3.4 Vertical Position. Enclosures for overcurrent devices shall be
are provided by the building management and where these are under mounted in a vertical position unless that is shown to be impracticable.
continuous building management supervision, the branch circuit Circuit breaker enclosures shall be permitted to be installed
overcurrent devices supplying any guest rooms or guest suites shall be horizontally where the circuit breaker is installed in accordance with
permitted to be accessible to only authorized management personnel 2.40.7.2. Listed busway plug-in units shall be permitted to be mounted
for guest rooms of hotels and motels that are intended for transient in orientations corresponding to the busway mounting position.
occupancy.
2.40.4 Disconnecting and Guarding
(c) Not Exposed to Physical Damage. Overcurrent devices shall be
located where they will not be exposed to physical damage. 2.40.4.1 Disconnecting Means for Fuses. A disconnecting means
shall be provided on the supply side of all fuses in circuits over 150
FPN: See 1.10.1.11, Deteriorating Agents. volts to ground and cartridge fuses in circuits of any voltage where
accessible to other than licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed
electrical practitioner under the supervision of a licensed electrical (d) No Energized Parts. Plug fuses, fuseholders, and adapters shall
practitioner, so that each circuit containing fuses can be independently have no exposed energized parts after fuses or fuses and adapters have
disconnected from the source of power. A current-limiting device been installed.
without a disconnecting means shall be permitted on the supply side of
the service disconnecting means as permitted by 2.30.6.13. A single (e) Screw Shell. The screw shell of a plug-type fuseholder shall be
disconnecting means shall be permitted on the supply side of more connected to the load side of the circuit.
than one set of fuses as permitted by 4.30.9.2, Exception, for group
operation of motors and 4.24.3.4(c) for fixed electric space-heating 2.40.5.2 Edison-Base Fuses.
equipment.
(a) Classification. Plug fuses of the Edison-base type shall be
2.40.4.2 Arcing or Suddenly Moving Parts. Arcing or suddenly classified at not over 125 volts and 30 amperes and below.
moving parts shall comply with 2.40.4.2(a) and (b).
(b) Replacement Only. Plug fuses of the Edison-base type shall be
(a) Location. Fuses and circuit breakers shall be located or shielded used only for replacements in existing installations where there is no
so that persons will not be burned or otherwise injured by their evidence of overfusing or tampering.
operation.
2.40.5.3 Edison-Base Fuseholders. Fuseholders of the Edison-base
(b) Suddenly Moving Parts. Handles or levers of circuit breakers, type shall be installed only where they are made to accept Type S
and similar parts that may move suddenly in such a way that persons fuses by the use of adapters.
in the vicinity are likely to be injured by being struck by them, shall be
guarded or isolated. 2.40.5.4 Type S Fuses. Type S fuses shall be of the plug type and
shall comply with 2.40.5.4(a) and (b).
2.40.5 Plug Fuses, Fuseholders, and Adapters
(a) Classification. Type S fuses shall be classified at not over 125
2.40.5.1 General. volts and 0 to 15 amperes, 16 to 20 amperes, and 21 to 30 amperes.

(a) Maximum Voltage. Plug fuses shall be permitted to be used in (b) Noninterchangeable. Type S fuses of an ampere classification
the following circuits: as specified in 2.40.5.4(a) shall not be interchangeable with a lower
ampere classification. They shall be designed so that they cannot be
(1) Circuits not exceeding 125 volts between conductors used in any fuseholder other than a Type S fuseholder or a fuseholder
(2) Circuits supplied by a system having a grounded neutral with a Type S adapter inserted.
where the line-to-neutral voltage does not exceed 150 volts
2.40.5.5 Type S Fuses, Adapters, and Fuseholders.
(b) Marking. Each fuse, fuseholder, and adapter shall be marked
with its ampere rating. (a) To Fit Edison-Base Fuseholders. Type S adapters shall fit
Edison-base fuseholders.
(c) Hexagonal Configuration. Plug fuses of 15-ampere and lower
rating shall be identified by a hexagonal configuration of the window, (b) To Fit Type S Fuses Only. Type S fuseholders and adapters
cap, or other prominent part to distinguish them from fuses of higher shall be designed so that either the fuseholder itself or the fuseholder
ampere ratings.
with a Type S adapter inserted cannot be used for any fuse other than a (4) Current limiting where applicable
Type S fuse. (5) The name or trademark of the manufacturer

(c) Nonremovable. Type S adapters shall be designed so that once The interrupting rating shall not be required to be marked on fuses
inserted in a fuseholder, they cannot be removed. used for supplementary protection.

(d) Nontamperable. Type S fuses, fuseholders, and adapters shall (d) Renewable Fuses. Class H cartridge fuses of the renewable type
be designed so that tampering or shunting (bridging) would be shall only be permitted to be used for replacement in existing
difficult. installations where there is no evidence of overfusing or tampering.

(e) Interchangeability. Dimensions of Type S fuses, fuseholders, 2.40.6.2 Classification. Cartridge fuses and fuseholders shall be
and adapters shall be standardized to permit interchangeability classified according to voltage and amperage ranges. Fuses rated 600
regardless of the manufacturer. volts, nominal, or less shall be permitted to be used for voltages at or
below their ratings.
2.40.6 Cartridge Fuses and Fuseholders
2.40.7 Circuit Breakers
2.40.6.1 General.
2.40.7.1 Method of Operation. Circuit breakers shall be trip free and
(a) Maximum Voltage — 300-Volt Type. Cartridge fuses and capable of being closed and opened by manual operation. Their
fuseholders of the 300-volt type shall be permitted to be used in the normal method of operation by other than manual means, such as
following circuits: electrical or pneumatic, shall be permitted if means for manual
operation are also provided.
(1) Circuits not exceeding 300 volts between conductors
(2) Single-phase line-to-neutral circuits supplied from a 3-phase, 2.40.7.2 Indicating. Circuit breakers shall clearly indicate whether
4-wire, solidly grounded neutral source where the line-to-neutral they are in the open “off” or closed “on” position.
voltage does not exceed 300 volts Where circuit breaker handles are operated vertically rather than
rotationally or horizontally, the “up” position of the handle shall be the
(b) Noninterchangeable — 0–6000-Ampere Cartridge “on” position.
Fuseholders. Fuseholders shall be designed so that it will be difficult
to put a fuse of any given class into a fuseholder that is designed for a 2.40.7.3 Nontamperable. A circuit breaker shall be of such design
current lower, or voltage higher, than that of the class to which the that any alteration of its trip point (calibration) or the time required for
fuse belongs. Fuseholders for current-limiting fuses shall not permit its operation requires dismantling of the device or breaking of a seal
insertion of fuses that are not current-limiting. for other than intended adjustments.

(c) Marking. Fuses shall be plainly marked, either by printing on 2.40.7.4 Marking.
the fuse barrel or by a label attached to the barrel showing the
following: (a) Durable and Visible. Circuit breakers shall be marked with their
ampere rating in a manner that will be durable and visible after
(1) Ampere rating installation. Such marking shall be permitted to be made visible by
(2) Voltage rating removal of a trim or cover.
(3) Interrupting rating where other than 10,000 amperes
 (b) Location. Circuit breakers rated at 100 amperes or less and 600 overcurrent protective device having a higher rating, the circuit
volts or less shall have the ampere rating molded, stamped, etched, or breaker shall meet the requirements specified in (a) or (b), and (c).
similarly marked into their handles or escutcheon areas.
(a) Selected Under Engineering Supervision in Existing
(c) Interrupting Rating. Every circuit breaker having an Installations. The series rated combination devices shall be selected
interrupting rating other than 5000 amperes shall have its interrupting by a licensed professional engineer engaged primarily in the design or
rating shown on the circuit breaker. The interrupting rating shall not be maintenance of electrical installations. The selection shall be
required to be marked on circuit breakers used for supplementary documented and stamped by the professional engineer. This
protection. documentation shall be available to those authorized to design, install,
inspect, maintain, and operate the system. This series combination
(d) Used as Switches. Circuit breakers used as switches in 120-volt rating, including identification of the upstream device, shall be field
and 277-volt fluorescent lighting circuits shall be listed and shall be marked on the end use equipment.
marked SWD or HID. Circuit breakers used as switches in high-
intensity discharge lighting circuits shall be listed and shall be marked (b) Tested Combinations. The combination of line-side overcurrent
as HID. device and load-side circuit breaker(s) is tested and marked on the end
use equipment, such as switchboards and panelboards.
(e) Voltage Marking. Circuit breakers shall be marked with a
voltage rating not less than the nominal system voltage that is (c) Motor Contribution. Series ratings shall not be used where
indicative of their capability to interrupt fault currents between phases
or phase to ground. (1) Motors are connected on the load side of the higher-rated
overcurrent device and on the line side of the lower-rated overcurrent
2.40.7.6 Applications. A circuit breaker with a straight voltage rating, device, and
such as 240V or 480V, shall be permitted to be applied in a circuit in (2) The sum of the motor full-load currents exceeds 1 percent of
which the nominal voltage between any two conductors does not the interrupting rating of the lower-rated circuit breaker.
exceed the circuit breaker’s voltage rating. A two-pole circuit breaker
shall not be used for protecting a 3-phase, corner-grounded delta 2.40.8 Supervised Industrial Installations
circuit unless the circuit breaker is marked 1–3 to indicate such
suitability. 2.40.8.1 General. Overcurrent protection in areas of supervised
A circuit breaker with a slash rating, such as 120/240V or 480Y/277V, industrial installations shall comply with all of the other applicable
shall be permitted to be applied in a solidly grounded circuit where the provisions of this article, except as provided in Part 2.40.8. The
nominal voltage of any conductor to ground does not exceed the lower provisions of Part 2.40.8 shall be permitted only to apply to those
of the two values of the circuit breaker’s voltage rating and the portions of the electrical system in the supervised industrial
nominal voltage between any two conductors does not exceed the installation used exclusively for manufacturing or process control
higher value of the circuit breaker’s voltage rating. activities.

FPN: Proper application of molded case circuit breakers on 3-phase systems, 2.40.8.3 Location in Circuit. An overcurrent device shall be
other than solidly grounded wye, particularly on corner grounded delta systems,
considers the circuit breakers’ individual pole-interrupting capability. connected in each ungrounded circuit conductor as required in
2.40.8.3(a) through (d).
2.40.7.7 Series Ratings. Where a circuit breaker is used on a circuit
having an available fault current higher than the marked interrupting (a) Feeder and Branch-Circuit Conductors. Feeder and branch-
rating by being connected on the load side of an acceptable circuit conductors shall be protected at the point the conductors
receive their supply as permitted in 2.40.2.2 or as otherwise permitted or in or on a switchboard. There shall be no more than six overcurrent
in 2.40.8.3(b), (c), or (d). devices grouped in any one location.
c. Overcurrent relaying is connected [with a current
(b) Transformer Secondary Conductors of Separately Derived transformer(s), if needed] to sense all of the secondary conductor
Systems. Conductors shall be permitted to be connected to a current and limit the load to the conductor ampacity by opening
transformer secondary of a separately derived system, without upstream or downstream devices.
overcurrent protection at the connection, where the conditions of d. Conductors shall be considered to be protected if calculations,
2.40.8.3(b)(1), (b)(2), and (b)(3) are met. made under engineering supervision, determine that the system
overcurrent devices will protect the conductors from overload
(1) Short-Circuit and Ground-Fault Protection. The conductors conditions.
shall be protected from short-circuit and ground-fault conditions by
complying with one of the following conditions: (3) Physical Protection. The secondary conductors are protected
from physical damage by being enclosed in an approved raceway or
a. The length of the secondary conductors does not exceed 30 m by other approved means.
and the transformer primary overcurrent device has a rating or setting
that does not exceed 150 percent of the value determined by (c) Outside Feeder Taps. Outside conductors shall be permitted to
multiplying the secondary conductor ampacity by the secondary-to- be tapped to a feeder or to be connected at a transformer secondary,
primary transformer voltage ratio. without overcurrent protection at the tap or connection, where all the
b. The conductors are protected by a differential relay with a trip following conditions are met:
setting equal to or less than the conductor ampacity.
(1) The conductors are protected from physical damage in an
FPN: A differential relay is connected to be sensitive only to short-circuit or fault approved manner.
currents within the protected zone and is normally set much lower than the
conductor ampacity. The differential relay is connected to trip protective devices (2) The sum of the overcurrent devices at the conductor
that will de-energize the protected conductors if a short-circuit condition occurs. termination limits the load to the conductor ampacity. The overcurrent
devices shall consist of not more than six circuit breakers or sets of
c. The conductors shall be considered to be protected if fuses mounted in a single enclosure, in a group of separate enclosures,
calculations, made under engineering supervision, determine that the or in or on a switchboard. There shall be no more than six overcurrent
system overcurrent devices will protect the conductors within devices grouped in any one location.
recognized time vs. current limits for all short-circuit and ground-fault (3) The tap conductors are installed outdoors of a building or
conditions. structure except at the point of load termination.
(4) The overcurrent device for the conductors is an integral part of
(2) Overload Protection. The conductors shall be protected against a disconnecting means or shall be located immediately adjacent
overload conditions by complying with one of the following: thereto.
(5) The disconnecting means for the conductors are installed at a
a. The conductors terminate in a single overcurrent device that readily accessible location complying with one of the following:
will limit the load to the conductor ampacity.
b. The sum of the overcurrent devices at the conductor a. Outside of a building or structure
termination limits the load to the conductor ampacity. The overcurrent b. Inside, nearest the point of entrance of the conductors
devices shall consist of not more than six circuit breakers or sets of c. Where installed in accordance with 2.30.1.6, nearest the point
fuses, mounted in a single enclosure, in a group of separate enclosures, of entrance of the conductors
 (d) Protection by Primary Overcurrent Device. Conductors the appropriate fault studies and time–current coordination analysis of
supplied by the secondary side of a transformer shall be permitted to the protective devices and the conductor damage curves. The
be protected by overcurrent protection provided on the primary overcurrent protection shall be permitted to be provided by either
(supply) side of the transformer, provided the primary device time– 2.40.9.1(a)(1) or (a)(2).
current protection characteristic, multiplied by the maximum effective
primary-to-secondary transformer voltage ratio, effectively protects (1) Overcurrent Relays and Current Transformers. Circuit breakers
the secondary conductors. used for overcurrent protection of 3-phase circuits shall have a
minimum of three overcurrent relay elements operated from three
2.40.8.4 Series Ratings. Where a circuit breaker is used on a circuit current transformers. The separate overcurrent relay elements (or
having an available fault current higher than its marked interrupting protective functions) shall be permitted to be part of a single electronic
rating by being connected on the load side of an acceptable protective relay unit.
overcurrent protective device having the higher rating, the circuit On 3-phase, 3-wire circuits, an overcurrent relay element in the
breaker shall meet the requirements specified in 2.40.8.4(a) or (b) and residual circuit of the current transformers shall be permitted to
(c). replace one of the phase relay elements.
An overcurrent relay element, operated from a current transformer
(a) Tested Combinations. The combination of line-side overcurrent that links all phases of a 3-phase, 3-wire circuit, shall be permitted to
device and load-side circuit breaker(s) is tested and marked on the end replace the residual relay element and one of the phase-conductor
use equipment, such as switchboards and panelboards. current transformers. Where the neutral is not regrounded on the load
side of the circuit as permitted in 2.50.10.5(b), the current transformer
(b) Selected Under Engineering Supervision. The line-side device shall be permitted to link all 3-phase conductors and the grounded
is selected under engineering supervision. This series combination circuit conductor (neutral).
rating, including identification of the upstream device, shall be field (2) Fuses. A fuse shall be connected in series with each
marked on the end use equipment. ungrounded conductor.

(c) Motor Contribution. Series ratings shall not be used where (b) Protective Devices. The protective device(s) shall be capable of
detecting and interrupting all values of current that can occur at their
(1) Motors are connected on the load side of the higher-rated location in excess of their trip-setting or melting point.
overcurrent device and on the line side of the lower-rated overcurrent
device, and (c) Conductor Protection. The operating time of the protective
(2) The sum of the motor full-load currents exceeds 1 percent of device, the available short-circuit current, and the conductor used shall
the interrupting rating of the lower-rated circuit breaker. be coordinated to prevent damaging or dangerous temperatures in
conductors or conductor insulation under short-circuit conditions.
2.40.9 Overcurrent Protection Over 600 Volts, Nominal
2.40.9.2 Additional Requirements for Feeders.
2.40.9.1 Feeders and Branch Circuits.
(a) Rating or Setting of Overcurrent Protective Devices. The
(a) Location and Type of Protection. Feeder and branch-circuit continuous ampere rating of a fuse shall not exceed three times the
conductors shall have overcurrent protection in each ungrounded ampacity of the conductors. The long-time trip element setting of a
conductor located at the point where the conductor receives its supply breaker or the minimum trip setting of an electronically actuated fuse
or at an alternative location in the circuit when designed under shall not exceed six times the ampacity of the conductor. For fire
engineering supervision that includes but is not limited to considering
pumps, conductors shall be permitted to be protected for overcurrent Ground-Fault Current Path. An electrically conductive path from
in accordance with 6.95.1.4(b). the point of a ground fault on a wiring system through normally non–
current-carrying conductors, equipment, or the earth to the electrical
(b) Feeder Taps. Conductors tapped to a feeder shall be permitted supply source.
to be protected by the feeder overcurrent device where that overcurrent
device also protects the tap conductor. FPN: Examples of ground-fault current paths could consist of any combination of
equipment grounding conductors, metallic raceways, metallic cable sheaths,
electrical equipment, and any other electrically conductive material such as metal
water and gas piping, steel framing members, stucco mesh, metal ducting,
reinforcing steel, shields of communications cables, and the earth itself.
ARTICLE 2.50 — GROUNDING AND BONDING

2.50.1 General 2.50.1.3 Application of Other Articles. In other articles applying to

particular cases of installation of conductors and equipment,
2.50.1.1 Scope. This article covers general requirements for grounding requirements are identified in Table 2.50.1.3 that are in addition to, or
and bonding of electrical installations, and specific requirements in (1) modifications of, those of this article.
through (6).
2.50.1.4 General Requirements for Grounding and Bonding. The
(1) Systems, circuits, and equipment required, permitted, or not following general requirements identify what grounding and bonding
permitted to be grounded of electrical systems are required to accomplish. The prescriptive
(2) Circuit conductor to be grounded on grounded systems methods contained in Article 2.50 shall be followed to comply with
(3) Location of grounding connections the performance requirements of this section.
(4) Types and sizes of grounding and bonding conductors and
electrodes (a) Grounded Systems.
(5) Methods of grounding and bonding
(6) Conditions under which guards, isolation, or insulation may be (1) Electrical System Grounding. Electrical systems that are
substituted for grounding grounded shall be connected to earth in a manner that will limit the
voltage imposed by lightning, line surges, or unintentional contact
2.50.1.2 Definitions. with higher-voltage lines and that will stabilize the voltage to earth
during normal operation.
Effective Ground-Fault Current Path. An intentionally (2) Grounding of Electrical Equipment. Non–current-carrying
constructed, permanent, low-impedance electrically conductive path conductive materials enclosing electrical conductors or equipment, or
designed and intended to carry current under ground-fault conditions forming part of such equipment, shall be connected to earth so as to
from the point of a ground fault on a wiring system to the electrical limit the voltage to ground on these materials.
supply source and that facilitates the operation of the overcurrent (3) Bonding of Electrical Equipment. Non–current-carrying
protective device or ground fault detectors on high-impedance conductive materials enclosing electrical conductors or equipment, or
grounded systems. forming part of such equipment, shall be connected together and to the
electrical supply source in a manner that establishes an effective
Ground Fault. An unintentional, electrically conducting connection ground-fault current path.
between an ungrounded conductor of an electrical circuit and the
normally non–current-carrying conductors, metallic enclosures,
metallic raceways, metallic equipment, or earth.
 Table 2.50.1.3 Additional Grounding Requirements
Conductor/Equipment Article Section
Agricultural buildings 5.47.1.9 and 5.47.1.10
Audio signal processing, amplification, and 6.40.1.7
reproduction equipment
Branch circuits 2.10.1.5, 2.10.1.6, 4.6.1.3
Cablebus 3.70.1.9
Cable trays 3.92 3.92.1.3(c), 3.92.1.7

Capacitors 4.60.1.10, 4.60.2.4

Circuits and equipment operating at less 7.20
than 50 volts
Closed-loop and programmed power 7.80.1.3
distribution
Communications circuits 8.0
Community antenna television and radio 8.20.3.1, 8.20.4.1, 8.20.4.4
distribution systems

Conductors for general wiring 3.10

Cranes and hoists 6.10
Electrically driven or controlled irrigation 6.75.1.11(c), 6.75.1.12, 6.75.1.13, 6.75.1.14,
machines 6.75.1.15
Electric signs and outline lighting 6.0
Electrolytic cells 6.68
Table 2.50.1.3 (Continued)
Conductor/Equipment Article Section
Elevators, dumbwaiters, escalators, moving 6.20
walks, wheelchair lifts, and stairway chair
lifts
Fire alarm systems 7.60.1.9
Fixed electric heating equipment for 4.27.4.5, 4.27.6.4
pipelines and vessels
Fixed outdoor electric deicing and snow- 4.26.3.8
melting equipment
Flexible cords and cables 4.0.2.3, 4.0.2.4
Floating buildings 5.53.3.1, 5.53.3.3, 5.53.3.4
Grounding-type receptacles, adapters, cord 4.6.1.9
connectors, and attachment plugs
Hazardous (classified) locations 5.0–5.17
Health care facilities 5.17
Induction and dielectric heating equipment 6.65
Industrial machinery 6.70
Information technology equipment 6.45.1.15
Intrinsically safe systems 5.4.1.50
Luminaires (lighting fixtures) and lighting 4.10.5.1, 4.10.5.2, 4.10.5.4, 4.10.5.5,
equipment 4.10.15.6(b)
Luminaires (fixtures), lampholders, and 4.10
lamps
Table 2.50.1.3 (Continued)
Conductor/Equipment Article Section
Marinas and boatyards 5.55.1.15
Mobile homes and mobile home park 5.50
Motion picture and television studios and 5.30.2.10, 5.30.6.4(b)
similar locations
Motors, motor circuits, and controllers 4.30
Outlet, device, pull, and junction boxes; 3.14.1.4, 3.14.2.11
conduit bodies; and fittings

Over 600 volts, nominal, underground 3.0.2.20(b)

wiring methods
Panelboards 4.8.3.11
Pipe organs 6.50
Radio and television equipment 8.10
Receptacles and cord connectors 4.6.1.3

Recreational vehicles and recreational 5.51

vehicle parks
Services 2.30
Solar photovoltaic systems 6.90.5.1, 6.90.5.2, 6.90.5.3, 6.90.5.5, 6.90.5.7
Swimming pools, fountains, and similar 6.80
installations
Switchboards and panelboards 4.8.1.3(d)
Table 2.50.1.3 (Continued)
Conductor/Equipment Article Section
Switches 4.4.1.12
Theaters, audience areas of motion picture 5.20.7.1
and television studios, and similar
locations
Transformers and transformer vaults 4.50.1.10
Use and identification of grounded 2.0
conductors
X-ray equipment 6.60 5.17.5.8
 (4) Bonding of Electrically Conductive Materials and Other occur on the wiring system. The earth shall not be considered as an
Equipment. Electrically conductive materials that are likely to become effective fault-current path.
energized shall be connected together and to the electrical supply
source in a manner that establishes an effective ground-fault current FPN No. 1: A second fault that occurs through the equipment enclosures and
bonding is considered a ground fault.
path. FPN No. 2: See Figure 2.50.1.4 for information on the organization of Article 2.50.
(5) Effective Ground-Fault Current Path. Electrical equipment and
wiring and other electrically conductive material likely to become
energized shall be installed in a manner that creates a permanent, low-
impedance circuit facilitating the operation of the overcurrent device
or ground detector for high-impedance grounded systems. It shall be
capable of safely carrying the maximum ground-fault current likely to
be imposed on it from any point on the wiring system where a ground
fault may occur to the electrical supply source. The earth shall not be
considered as an effective ground-fault current path.

(b) Ungrounded Systems.

(1) Grounding Electrical Equipment. Non–current-carrying

conductive materials enclosing electrical conductors or equipment, or
forming part of such equipment, shall be connected to earth in a
manner that will limit the voltage imposed by lightning or
unintentional contact with higher-voltage lines and limit the voltage to
ground on these materials.
(2) Bonding of Electrical Equipment. Non–current-carrying
conductive materials enclosing electrical conductors or equipment, or
forming part of such equipment, shall be connected together and to the
supply system grounded equipment in a manner that creates a
permanent, low-impedance path for ground-fault current that is
capable of carrying the maximum fault current likely to be imposed on
it.
(3) Bonding of Electrically Conductive Materials and Other
Equipment. Electrically conductive materials that are likely to become
energized shall be connected together and to the supply system
grounded equipment in a manner that creates a permanent, low-
impedance path for ground-fault current that is capable of carrying the
maximum fault current likely to be imposed on it.
(4) Path for Fault Current. Electrical equipment, wiring, and other
electrically conductive material likely to become energized shall be Figure 2.50.1.4 Grounding.
installed in a manner that creates a permanent, low-impedance circuit
from any point on the wiring system to the electrical supply source to
facilitate the operation of overcurrent devices should a second fault
2.50.1.6 Objectionable Current over Grounding Conductors. 2.50.1.8 Connection of Grounding and Bonding Equipment.
Grounding conductors and bonding jumpers shall be connected by
(a) Arrangement to Prevent Objectionable Current. The exothermic welding, listed pressure connectors, listed clamps, or other
grounding of electrical systems, circuit conductors, surge arresters, listed means. Connection devices or fittings that depend solely on
and conductive non–current-carrying materials and equipment shall be solder shall not be used. Sheet metal screws shall not be used to
installed and arranged in a manner that will prevent objectionable connect grounding conductors or connection devices to enclosures.
current over the grounding conductors or grounding paths.
(b) Alterations to Stop Objectionable Current. If the use of 2.50.1.10 Protection of Ground Clamps and Fittings. Ground
multiple grounding connections results in objectionable current, one or clamps or other fittings shall be approved for general use without
more of the following alterations shall be permitted to be made, protection or shall be protected from physical damage as indicated in
provided that the requirements of 2.50.1.4(a)(5) or (b)(4) are met: (1) or (2) as follows:

(1) Discontinue one or more but not all of such grounding (1) In installations where they are not likely to be damaged
connections. (2) Where enclosed in metal, wood, or equivalent protective
(2) Change the locations of the grounding connections. covering
(3) Interrupt the continuity of the conductor or conductive path
interconnecting the grounding connections. 2.50.1.12 Clean Surfaces. Nonconductive coatings (such as paint,
(4) Take other suitable remedial and approved action. lacquer, and enamel) on equipment to be grounded shall be removed
from threads and other contact surfaces to ensure good electrical
(c) Temporary Currents Not Classified as Objectionable continuity or be connected by means of fittings designed so as to make
Currents. Temporary currents resulting from accidental conditions, such removal unnecessary.
such as ground-fault currents, that occur only while the grounding
conductors are performing their intended protective functions shall not 2.50.2 System Grounding
be classified as objectionable current for the purposes specified in
2.50.1.6(a) and (b). 2.50.2.1 Alternating-Current Systems to Be Grounded.
Alternating-current systems shall be grounded as provided for in
(d) Limitations to Permissible Alterations. The provisions of this 2.50.2.1(a), (b), (c), or (d). Other systems shall be permitted to be
section shall not be considered as permitting electronic equipment grounded. If such systems are grounded, they shall comply with the
from being operated on ac systems or branch circuits that are not applicable provisions of this article.
grounded as required by this article. Currents that introduce noise or
data errors in electronic equipment shall not be considered the FPN: An example of a system permitted to be grounded is a corner-grounded delta
transformer connection. See 2.50.2.7(4) for conductor to be grounded.
objectionable currents addressed in this section.
(a) Alternating-Current Systems of Less Than 50 Volts.
(e) Isolation of Objectionable Direct-Current Ground Currents.
Alternating-current systems of less than 50 volts shall be grounded
Where isolation of objectionable dc ground currents from cathodic
under any of the following conditions:
protection systems is required, a listed ac coupling/dc isolating device
shall be permitted in the equipment grounding path to provide an
(1) Where supplied by transformers, if the transformer supply
effective return path for ac ground-fault current while blocking dc
system exceeds 150 volts to ground
current.
(2) Where supplied by transformers, if the transformer supply
system is ungrounded
 (3) Where installed as overhead conductors outside of buildings (2) Separately derived systems used exclusively for rectifiers that
supply only adjustable-speed industrial drives
(b) Alternating-Current Systems of 50 Volts to 1000 Volts. (3) Separately derived systems supplied by transformers that have a
Alternating-current systems of 50 volts to 1000 volts that supply primary voltage rating less than 1000 volts, provided that all the
premises wiring and premises wiring systems shall be grounded under following conditions are met:
any of the following conditions:
a. The system is used exclusively for control circuits.
(1) Where the system is 1-phase and can be grounded so that the b. The conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that
maximum voltage to ground on the ungrounded conductors does not only licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical
exceed 250 volts practitioner under the supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner
(2) Where the system is 3-phase, 4-wire, wye connected in which service the installation.
the neutral is used as a circuit conductor c. Continuity of control power is required.
(3) Where the system is 3-phase, 4-wire, delta connected in which d. Ground detectors are installed on the control system.
the midpoint of one phase winding is used as a circuit conductor
(4) Other systems that are not required to be grounded in accordance
(c) Alternating-Current Systems of 1 kV and Over. Alternating- with the requirements of 2.50.2.1(b).
current systems supplying mobile or portable equipment shall be Where an alternating-current system is not grounded as permitted in
grounded as specified in 2.50.10.9. Where supplying other than mobile 2.50.2.2(1) through (4), ground detectors shall be installed on the
or portable equipment, such systems shall be permitted to be system.
grounded.
Exception: Systems of less than 120 volts to ground as permitted by
(d) Separately Derived Systems. Separately derived systems, as this Code shall not be required to have ground detectors.
covered in 2.50.2.1(a) or (b), shall be grounded as specified in
2.50.2.11. 2.50.2.3 Circuits Not to Be Grounded. The following circuits shall
not be grounded:
FPN No. 1: An alternate ac power source such as an on-site generator is not a
separately derived system if the neutral is solidly interconnected to a service-
supplied system neutral. (1) Circuits for electric cranes operating over combustible fibers in
FPN No. 2: For systems that are not separately derived and are not required to be Class III locations, as provided in 5.3.3.56.
grounded as specified in 2.50.2.11, see 4.45.1.13 for minimum size of conductors (2) Circuits in health care facilities as provided in 5.17.4.2 and
that must carry fault current.
5.17.7.1
(e) Impedance Grounded Neutral Systems. Impedance grounded (3) Circuits for equipment within electrolytic cell working zone as
neutral systems shall be grounded in accordance with 2.50.2.17 or provided in Article 6.68
2.50.10.7. (4) Secondary circuits of lighting systems as provided in 4.11.1.5(a)

2.50.2.2 Alternating-Current Systems of 50 Volts to 1000 Volts Not 2.50.2.5 Grounding Service-Supplied Alternating-Current
Required to Be Grounded. The following ac systems of 50 volts to Systems.
1000 volts shall be permitted to be grounded but shall not be required
to be grounded: (a) System Grounding Connections. A premises wiring system
supplied by a grounded ac service shall have a grounding electrode
(1) Electric systems used exclusively to supply industrial electric conductor connected to the grounded service conductor, at each
furnaces for melting, refining, tempering, and the like service, in accordance with 2.50.2.5(a)(1) through (a)(5).
 grounded conductor within the enclosure for each service disconnect
(1) General. The connection shall be made at any accessible point in accordance with 2.50.2.9.
from the load end of the service drop or service lateral to and
including the terminal or bus to which the grounded service conductor Exception No. 1: Where more than one service disconnecting means
is connected at the service disconnecting means. is located in an assembly listed for use as service equipment, an
unspliced main bonding jumper shall bond the grounded conductor(s)
FPN: See definitions of Service Drop and Service Lateral in Article 1.0. to the assembly enclosure.
Exception No. 2: Impedance grounded neutral systems shall be
(2) Outdoor Transformer. Where the transformer supplying the permitted to be connected as provided in 2.50.2.17 and 2.50.10.7.
service is located outside the building, at least one additional
grounding connection shall be made from the grounded service (c) Grounded Conductor Brought to Service Equipment. Where
conductor to a grounding electrode, either at the transformer or an ac system operating at less than 1000 volts is grounded at any point,
elsewhere outside the building. the grounded conductor(s) shall be run to each service disconnecting
means and shall be bonded to each disconnecting means enclosure.
Exception: The additional grounding connection shall not be made on The grounded conductor(s) shall be installed in accordance with
high-impedance grounded neutral systems. The system shall meet the 2.50.2.5(c)(1) through (c)(3).
requirements of 2.50.2.17.
Exception: Where more than one service disconnecting means are
(3) Dual Fed Services. For services that are dual fed (double located in an assembly listed for use as service equipment, it shall be
ended) in a common enclosure or grouped together in separate permitted to run the grounded conductor(s) to the assembly, and the
enclosures and employing a secondary tie, a single grounding conductor(s) shall be bonded to the assembly enclosure.
electrode connection to the tie point of the grounded conductor(s) from
each power source shall be permitted. (1) Routing and Sizing. This conductor shall be routed with the
(4) Main Bonding Jumper as Wire or Busbar. Where the main phase conductors and shall not be smaller than the required grounding
bonding jumper specified in 2.50.2.9 is a wire or busbar and is electrode conductor specified in Table 2.50.3.17 but shall not be
installed from the grounded conductor terminal bar or bus to the required to be larger than the largest ungrounded service-entrance
equipment grounding terminal bar or bus in the service equipment, the phase conductor. In addition, for service-entrance phase conductors
grounding electrode conductor shall be permitted to be connected to larger than 1100 kcmil copper or 850 mm2 aluminum, the grounded
the equipment grounding terminal, bar, or bus to which the main conductor shall not be smaller than 12½ percent of the area of the
bonding jumper is connected. largest service-entrance phase conductor. The grounded conductor of a
(5) Load-Side Grounding Connections. A grounding connection 3-phase, 3-wire delta service shall have an ampacity not less than that
shall not be made to any grounded conductor on the load side of the of the ungrounded conductors.
service disconnecting means except as otherwise permitted in this (2) Parallel Conductors. Where the service-entrance phase
article. conductors are installed in parallel, the size of the grounded conductor
shall be based on the total circular mil area of the parallel conductors
FPN: See 2.50.2.11(a) for separately derived systems, 2.50.2.13 for connections at
separate buildings or structures, and 2.50.7.13 for use of the grounded circuit as indicated in this section. Where installed in two or more raceways,
conductor for grounding equipment. the size of the grounded conductor in each raceway shall be based on
the size of the ungrounded service-entrance conductor in the raceway
(b) Main Bonding Jumper. For a grounded system, an unspliced but not smaller than 50 mm2.
main bonding jumper shall be used to connect the equipment
grounding conductor(s) and the service-disconnect enclosure to the FPN: See 3.10.1.4 for grounded conductors connected in parallel.
 (a) Material. Main bonding jumpers and system bonding jumpers
(3) High Impedance. The grounded conductor on a high- shall be of copper or other corrosion-resistant material. A main
impedance grounded neutral system shall be grounded in accordance bonding jumper and a system bonding jumper shall be a wire, bus,
with 2.50.2.17. screw, or similar suitable conductor.

(d) Grounding Electrode Conductor. A grounding electrode (b) Construction. Where a main bonding jumper or a system
conductor shall be used to connect the equipment grounding bonding jumper is a screw only, the screw shall be identified with a
conductors, the service-equipment enclosures, and, where the system green finish that shall be visible with the screw installed.
is grounded, the grounded service conductor to the grounding
electrode(s) required by Part 2.50.3. (c) Attachment. Main bonding jumpers and system bonding
High-impedance grounded neutral system connections shall be made jumpers shall be attached in the manner specified by the applicable
as covered in 2.50.2.17. provisions of 2.50.1.8.

FPN: See 2.50.2.5(a) for ac system grounding connections. (d) Size. Main bonding jumpers and system bonding jumpers shall
not be smaller than the sizes shown in Table 2.50.3.17. Where the
(e) Ungrounded System Grounding Connections. A premises supply conductors are larger than 1100 kcmil copper or 850 mm2
wiring system that is supplied by an ac service that is ungrounded shall aluminum, the bonding jumper shall have an area that is not less than
have, at each service, a grounding electrode conductor connected to 12½ percent of the area of the largest phase conductor except that,
the grounding electrode(s) required by Part 2.50.3. The grounding where the phase conductors and the bonding jumper are of different
electrode conductor shall be connected to a metal enclosure of the materials (copper or aluminum), the minimum size of the bonding
service conductors at any accessible point from the load end of the jumper shall be based on the assumed use of phase conductors of the
service drop or service lateral to the service disconnecting means. same material as the bonding jumper and with an ampacity equivalent
to that of the installed phase conductors.
2.50.2.7 Conductor to Be Grounded — Alternating-Current
Systems. For ac premises wiring systems, the conductor to be 2.50.2.11 Grounding Separately Derived Alternating-Current
grounded shall be as specified in the following: Systems.
(1) Single-phase, 2-wire — one conductor (a) Grounded Systems. A separately derived ac system that is
(2) Single-phase, 3-wire — the neutral conductor grounded shall comply with 2.50.2.11(a)(1) through (a)(8). A
(3) Multiphase systems having one wire common to all phases — grounding connection shall not be made to any grounded circuit
the common conductor conductor on the load side of the point of grounding of the separately
(4) Multiphase systems where one phase is grounded — one derived system except as otherwise permitted in this article.
phase conductor
(5) Multiphase systems in which one phase is used as in (2) — the FPN: See 2.50.2.13 for connections at separate buildings or structures, and
neutral conductor 2.50.7.13 for use of the grounded circuit conductor for grounding equipment.

2.50.2.9 Main Bonding Jumper and System Bonding Jumper. For a Exception: Impedance grounded neutral system grounding
grounded system, main bonding jumpers and system bonding jumpers connections shall be made as specified in 2.50.2.17 or 2.50.10.7.
shall be installed as follows:
(1) System Bonding Jumper. An unspliced system bonding jumper
in compliance with 2.50.2.9(a) through (d) that is sized based on the
derived phase conductors shall be used to connect the equipment
grounding conductors of the separately derived system to the grounded Exception No. 1: Where the system bonding jumper specified in
conductor. This connection shall be made at any single point on the 2.50.2.11(a)(1) is a wire or busbar, it shall be permitted to connect the
separately derived system from the source to the first system grounding electrode conductor to the equipment grounding terminal,
disconnecting means or overcurrent device, or it shall be made at the bar, or bus, provided the equipment grounding terminal, bar, or bus is
source of a separately derived system that has no disconnecting means of sufficient size for the separately derived system.
or overcurrent devices. Exception No. 2: Where a separately derived system originates in
listed equipment suitable as service equipment, the grounding
Exception No. 1: For separately derived systems that are dual fed electrode conductor from the service or feeder equipment to the
(double ended) in a common enclosure or grouped together in grounding electrode shall be permitted as the grounding electrode
separate enclosures and employing a secondary tie, a single system conductor for the separately derived system, provided the grounding
bonding jumper connection to the tie point of the grounded circuit electrode conductor is of sufficient size for the separately derived
conductors from each power source shall be permitted. system. Where the equipment ground bus internal to the equipment is
Exception No. 2: A system bonding jumper at both the source and the not smaller than the required grounding electrode conductor for the
first disconnecting means shall be permitted where doing so does not separately derived system, the grounding electrode connection for the
establish a parallel path for the grounded conductor. Where a separately derived system shall be permitted to be made to the bus.
grounded conductor is used in this manner, it shall not be smaller than Exception No. 3: A grounding electrode conductor shall not be
the size specified for the system bonding jumper but shall not be required for a system that supplies a Class 1, Class 2, or Class 3
required to be larger than the ungrounded conductor(s). For the circuit and is derived from a transformer rated not more than 1000
purposes of this exception, connection through the earth shall not be volt-amperes, provided the grounded conductor is bonded to the
considered as providing a parallel path. transformer frame or enclosure by a jumper sized in accordance with
Exception No. 3: The size of the system bonding jumper for a system 2.50.2.11(a)(1), Exception No. 3, and the transformer frame or
that supplies a Class 1, Class 2, or Class 3 circuit, and is derived from enclosure is grounded by one of the means specified in 2.50.7.5.
a transformer rated not more than 1000 volt-amperes, shall not be
smaller than the derived phase conductors and shall not be smaller (4) Grounding Electrode Conductor, Multiple Separately Derived
than 2.0 mm2 (1.6 mm dia.) copper or 3.5 mm2 (2.0 mm dia.) Systems. Where more than one separately derived system is installed,
aluminum. it shall be permissible to connect a tap from each separately derived
system to a common grounding electrode conductor. Each tap
(2) Equipment Bonding Jumper Size. Where a bonding jumper of conductor shall connect the grounded conductor of the separately
the wire type is run with the derived phase conductors from the source derived system to the common grounding electrode conductor. The
of a separately derived system to the first disconnecting means, it shall grounding electrode conductors and taps shall comply with
be sized in accordance with 2.50.5.13(c), based on the size of the 2.50.2.11(a)(4)a through (a)(4)c.
derived phase conductors.
(3) Grounding Electrode Conductor, Single Separately Derived Exception No. 1: Where the system bonding jumper specified in
System. A grounding electrode conductor for a single separately 2.50.2.11(a)(1) is a wire or busbar, it shall be permitted to connect the
derived system shall be sized in accordance with 2.50.3.17 for the grounding electrode conductor to the equipment grounding terminal,
derived phase conductors and shall be used to connect the grounded bar, or bus, provided the equipment grounding terminal, bar, or bus is
conductor of the derived system to the grounding electrode as of sufficient size for the separately derived system.
specified in 2.50.2.11(a)(7). This connection shall be made at the same Exception No. 2: A grounding electrode conductor shall not be
point on the separately derived system where the system bonding required for a system that supplies a Class 1, Class 2, or Class 3
jumper is installed. circuit and is derived from a transformer rated not more than 1000
volt-amperes, provided the system grounded conductor is bonded to (7) Grounding Electrode. The grounding electrode shall be as near
the transformer frame or enclosure by a jumper sized in accordance as practicable to and preferably in the same area as the grounding
with 2.50.2.11(a)(1), Exception No. 3 and the transformer frame or electrode conductor connection to the system. The grounding electrode
enclosure is grounded by one of the means specified in 2.50.7.5. shall be the nearest one of the following:

a. Common Grounding Electrode Conductor Size. The common a. Metal water pipe grounding electrode as specified in
grounding electrode conductor shall not be smaller than 80 mm2 2.50.3.3(a)(1)
copper or 125 mm2 aluminum. b. Structural metal grounding electrode as specified in
b. Tap Conductor Size. Each tap conductor shall be sized in 2.50.3.3(a)(2)
accordance with 2.50.3.17 based on the derived phase conductors of
the separately derived system it serves. Exception No. 1: Any of the other electrodes identified in 2.50.3.3(a)
shall be used where the electrodes specified by 2.50.2.11(a)(7) are not
Exception: Where a separately derived system originates in listed available.
equipment suitable as service equipment, the grounding electrode Exception No. 2 to (1) and (2): Where a separately derived system
conductor from the service or feeder equipment to the grounding originates in listed equipment suitable for use as service equipment,
electrode shall be permitted as the grounding electrode conductor for the grounding electrode used for the service or feeder equipment shall
the separately derived system, provided the grounding electrode be permitted as the grounding electrode for the separately derived
conductor is of sufficient size for the separately derived system. Where system.
the equipment ground bus internal to the equipment is not smaller
than the required grounding electrode conductor for the separately FPN: See 2.50.5.15(d) for bonding requirements of interior metal water piping in
the area served by separately derived systems.
derived system, the grounding electrode connection for the separately
derived system shall be permitted to be made to the bus.
(8) Grounded Conductor. Where a grounded conductor is installed
and the system bonding jumper is not located at the source of the
c. Connections. All tap connections to the common grounding
separately derived system, 2.50.2.11(a)(8)a, (a)(8)b, and (a)(8)c shall
electrode conductor shall be made at an accessible location by one of
apply.
the following methods:
a. Routing and Sizing. This conductor shall be routed with the
1. A listed connector.
derived phase conductors and shall not be smaller than the required
2. Listed connections to aluminum or copper busbars not less
grounding electrode conductor specified in Table 2.50.3.17 but shall
than 6 mm × 50 mm. Where aluminum busbars are used, the
not be required to be larger than the largest ungrounded derived phase
installation shall comply with 2.50.3.15(a).
conductor. In addition, for phase conductors larger than 1100 kcmil
3. By the exothermic welding process.
copper or 850 mm2 aluminum, the grounded conductor shall not be
smaller than 12½ percent of the area of the largest derived phase
Tap conductors shall be connected to the common grounding
conductor. The grounded conductor of a 3-phase, 3-wire delta system
electrode conductor in such a manner that the common grounding
shall have an ampacity not less than that of the ungrounded
electrode conductor remains without a splice or joint.
conductors.
b. Parallel Conductors. Where the derived phase conductors are
(5) Installation. The installation of all grounding electrode
installed in parallel, the size of the grounded conductor shall be based
conductors shall comply with 2.50.3.15(a), (b), (c), and (e).
on the total circular mil area of the parallel conductors, as indicated in
(6) Bonding. Structural steel and metal piping shall be bonded in
this section. Where installed in two or more raceways, the size of the
accordance with 2.50.5.15(d).
grounded conductor in each raceway shall be based on the size of the
ungrounded conductors in the raceway but not smaller than 50 mm2. (b) Grounded Systems. For a grounded system at the separate
building or structure, the connection to the grounding electrode and
FPN: See 3.10.1.4 for grounded conductors connected in parallel. grounding or bonding of equipment, structures, or frames required to
be grounded or bonded shall comply with either 2.50.2.13(b)(1) or
c. Impedance Grounded System. The grounded conductor of an (b)(2).
impedance grounded neutral system shall be installed in accordance
with 2.50.2.17 or 2.50.10.7. (1) Equipment Grounding Conductor. An equipment grounding
conductor as described in 2.50.6.9 shall be run with the supply
(b) Ungrounded Systems. The equipment of an ungrounded conductors and connected to the building or structure disconnecting
separately derived system shall be grounded as specified in means and to the grounding electrode(s). The equipment grounding
2.50.2.11(b)(1) and (b)(2). conductor shall be used for grounding or bonding of equipment,
structures, or frames required to be grounded or bonded. The
(1) Grounding Electrode Conductor. A grounding electrode equipment grounding conductor shall be sized in accordance with
conductor, sized in accordance with 2.50.3.17 for the derived phase 2.50.6.13. Any installed grounded conductor shall not be connected to
conductors, shall be used to connect the metal enclosures of the the equipment grounding conductor or to the grounding electrode(s).
derived system to the grounding electrode as specified in (2) Grounded Conductor. Where (1) an equipment grounding
2.50.2.11(b)(2). This connection shall be made at any point on the conductor is not run with the supply to the building or structure, (2)
separately derived system from the source to the first system there are no continuous metallic paths bonded to the grounding system
disconnecting means. in each building or structure involved, and (3) ground-fault protection
(2) Grounding Electrode. Except as permitted by 2.50.2.15 for of equipment has not been installed on the supply side of the feeder(s),
portable and vehicle-mounted generators, the grounding electrode the grounded conductor run with the supply to the building or structure
shall comply with 2.50.2.11(a)(7). shall be connected to the building or structure disconnecting means
and to the grounding electrode(s) and shall be used for grounding or
2.50.2.13 Buildings or Structures Supplied by Feeder(s) or Branch bonding of equipment, structures, or frames required to be grounded or
Circuit(s). bonded. The size of the grounded conductor shall not be smaller than
the larger of either of the following:
(a) Grounding Electrode. Building(s) or structure(s) supplied by
feeder(s) or branch circuit(s) shall have a grounding electrode or a. That required by 2.20.3.22
grounding electrode system installed in accordance with 2.50.3.1. The b. That required by 2.50.6.13
grounding electrode conductor(s) shall be connected in accordance
with 2.50.2.13(b) or (c). Where there is no existing grounding (c) Ungrounded Systems. The grounding electrode(s) shall be
electrode, the grounding electrode(s) required in 2.50.3.1 shall be connected to the building or structure disconnecting means.
installed.
(d) Disconnecting Means Located in Separate Building or
Exception: A grounding electrode shall not be required where only a Structure on the Same Premises. Where one or more disconnecting
single branch circuit supplies the building or structure and the branch means supply one or more additional buildings or structures under
circuit includes an equipment grounding conductor for grounding the single management, and where these disconnecting means are located
conductive non–current-carrying parts of equipment. For the purpose remote from those buildings or structures in accordance with the
of this section, a multiwire branch circuit shall be considered as a provisions of 2.25.2.3, Exception Nos. 1 and 2, all of the following
single branch circuit. conditions shall be met:
 (2) The generator supplies only equipment located on the vehicle
(1) The connection of the grounded conductor to the grounding or cord-and-plug-connected equipment through receptacles mounted
electrode at a separate building or structure shall not be made. on the vehicle, or both equipment located on the vehicle and cord-and-
(2) An equipment grounding conductor for grounding any non– plug-connected equipment through receptacles mounted on the vehicle
current-carrying equipment, interior metal piping systems, and or on the generator, and
building or structural metal frames is run with the circuit conductors to (3) The non–current-carrying metal parts of equipment and the
a separate building or structure and bonded to existing grounding equipment grounding conductor terminals of the receptacles are
electrode(s) required in Part 2.50.3, or, where there are no existing bonded to the generator frame.
electrodes, the grounding electrode(s) required in Part 2.50.3 shall be
installed where a separate building or structure is supplied by more (c) Grounded Conductor Bonding. A system conductor that is
than one branch circuit. required to be grounded by 2.50.2.7 shall be bonded to the generator
(3) Bonding the equipment grounding conductor to the grounding frame where the generator is a component of a separately derived
electrode at a separate building or structure shall be made in a junction system.
box, panelboard, or similar enclosure located immediately inside or
outside the separate building or structure. FPN: For grounding portable generators supplying fixed wiring systems, see
2.50.2.1(d).

(e) Grounding Electrode Conductor. The size of the grounding

2.50.2.17 High-Impedance Grounded Neutral Systems. High-
electrode conductor to the grounding electrode(s) shall not be smaller
impedance grounded neutral systems in which a grounding impedance,
than given in 2.50.3.17, based on the largest ungrounded supply
usually a resistor, limits the ground-fault current to a low value shall
conductor. The installation shall comply with Part 2.50.3.
be permitted for 3-phase ac systems of 250 volts to 1000 volts where
all the following conditions are met:
2.50.2.15 Portable and Vehicle-Mounted Generators.
(1) The conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that
(a) Portable Generators. The frame of a portable generator shall
only licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical
not be required to be connected to a grounding electrode as defined in
practitioner under the supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner
2.50.3.3 for a system supplied by the generator under the following
service the installation.
conditions:
(2) Continuity of power is required.
(3) Ground detectors are installed on the system.
(1) The generator supplies only equipment mounted on the
(4) Line-to-neutral loads are not served.
generator, cord-and-plug-connected equipment through receptacles
High-impedance grounded neutral systems shall comply with the
mounted on the generator, or both, and
provisions of 2.50.2.17(a) through (g).
(2) The non–current-carrying metal parts of equipment and the
equipment grounding conductor terminals of the receptacles are
(a) Grounding Impedance Location. The grounding impedance
bonded to the generator frame.
shall be installed between the grounding electrode conductor and the
system neutral. Where a neutral is not available, the grounding
(b) Vehicle-Mounted Generators. The frame of a vehicle shall not
impedance shall be installed between the grounding electrode
be required to be connected to a grounding electrode as defined in
conductor and the neutral derived from a grounding transformer.
2.50.3.3 for a system supplied by a generator located on this vehicle
under the following conditions:

(1) The frame of the generator is bonded to the vehicle frame, and
 (b) Neutral Conductor. The neutral conductor from the neutral entrance conductors for a service or the derived phase conductors for a
point of the transformer or generator to its connection point to the separately derived system.
grounding impedance shall be fully insulated. (2) Where the grounding electrode conductor is connected at the
The neutral conductor shall have an ampacity of not less than the first system disconnecting means or overcurrent device, the equipment
maximum current rating of the grounding impedance. In no case shall bonding jumper shall be sized the same as the neutral conductor in
the neutral conductor be smaller than 8.0 mm2 (3.2 mm dia.) copper or 2.50.2.17(b).
14 mm2 aluminum or copper-clad aluminum.
2.50.3 Grounding Electrode System and
(c) System Neutral Connection. The system neutral conductor shall Grounding Electrode Conductor
not be connected to ground except through the grounding impedance.
2.50.3.1 Grounding Electrode System. All grounding electrodes as
FPN: The impedance is normally selected to limit the ground-fault current to a described in 2.50.3.3(a)(1) through (a)(6) that are present at each
value slightly greater than or equal to the capacitive charging current of the
system. This value of impedance will also limit transient overvoltages to safe building or structure served shall be bonded together to form the
values. For guidance, refer to criteria for limiting transient overvoltages in grounding electrode system. Where none of these grounding
ANSI/IEEE 142-1991, Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and electrodes exist, one or more of the grounding electrodes specified in
Commercial Power Systems.
2.50.3.3(a)(4) through (a)(7) shall be installed and used.
(d) Neutral Conductor Routing. The conductor connecting the
neutral point of the transformer or generator to the grounding Exception: Concrete-encased electrodes of existing buildings or
impedance shall be permitted to be installed in a separate raceway. It structures shall not be required to be part of the grounding electrode
shall not be required to run this conductor with the phase conductors to system where the steel reinforcing bars or rods are not accessible for
the first system disconnecting means or overcurrent device. use without disturbing the concrete.

(e) Equipment Bonding Jumper. The equipment bonding jumper 2.50.3.3 Grounding Electrodes.
(the connection between the equipment grounding conductors and the
grounding impedance) shall be an unspliced conductor run from the (a) Electrodes Permitted for Grounding.
first system disconnecting means or overcurrent device to the
grounded side of the grounding impedance. (1) Metal Underground Water Pipe. A metal underground water
pipe in direct contact with the earth for 3 000 mm or more (including
(f) Grounding Electrode Conductor Location. The grounding any metal well casing effectively bonded to the pipe) and electrically
electrode conductor shall be attached at any point from the grounded continuous (or made electrically continuous by bonding around
side of the grounding impedance to the equipment grounding insulating joints or insulating pipe) to the points of connection of the
connection at the service equipment or first system disconnecting grounding electrode conductor and the bonding conductors. Interior
means. metal water piping located more than 1 500 mm from the point of
entrance to the building shall not be used as a part of the grounding
(g) Equipment Bonding Jumper Size. The equipment bonding electrode system or as a conductor to interconnect electrodes that are
jumper shall be sized in accordance with (1) or (2) as follows: part of the grounding electrode system.

(1) Where the grounding electrode conductor connection is made Exception: In industrial and commercial buildings or structures
at the grounding impedance, the equipment bonding jumper shall be where conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that only
sized in accordance with 2.50.3.17, based on the size of the service licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner
under the supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner service the
installation, interior metal water piping located more than 1 500 mm outer surface galvanized or otherwise metal-coated for corrosion
from the point of entrance to the building shall be permitted as a part protection.
of the grounding electrode system or as a conductor to interconnect b. Electrodes of rods of iron or steel shall be at least 16 mm in
electrodes that are part of the grounding electrode system, provided diameter. Stainless steel rods less than 16 mm in diameter, nonferrous
that the entire length, other than short sections passing perpendicular rods, or their equivalent shall be listed and shall not be less than 13
through walls, floors, or ceilings, of the interior metal water pipe that mm in diameter.
is being used for the conductor is exposed.
(6) Plate Electrodes. Each plate electrode shall expose not less
(2) Metal Frame of the Building or Structure. The metal frame of than 0.186 m2 (2 ft2) of surface to exterior soil. Electrodes of iron or
the building or structure, where any of the following methods are used steel plates shall be at least 6 mm in thickness. Electrodes of
to make an earth connection: nonferrous metal shall be at least 1.5 mm in thickness.
(7) Other Local Metal Underground Systems or Structures. Other
a. 3 000 mm or more of a single structural metal member in local metal underground systems or structures such as piping systems,
direct contact with the earth or encased in concrete that is in direct underground tanks, and underground metal well casings that are not
contact with the earth effectively bonded to a metal water pipe.
b. The structural metal frame is bonded to one or more of the
grounding electrodes as defined in 2.50.3.3(a)(1), (a)(3), or (a)(4) (b) Electrodes Not Permitted for Grounding. The following shall
c. The structural metal frame is bonded to one or more of the not be used as grounding electrodes:
grounding electrodes as defined in 2.50.3.3(a)(5) or (a)(6) that comply
with 2.50.3.7, or (1) Metal underground gas piping system
d. Other approved means of establishing a connection to earth. (2) Aluminum electrodes

(3) Concrete-Encased Electrode. An electrode encased by at least FPN: See 2.50.5.15(b) for bonding requirements of gas piping.
50 mm of concrete, located within and near the bottom of a concrete
foundation or footing that is in direct contact with the earth, consisting 2.50.3.4 Grounding Electrode System Installation.
of at least 6 000 mm of one or more bare or zinc galvanized or other
FPN: See 5.47.1.9 and 5.47.1.10 for special grounding and bonding requirements
electrically conductive coated steel reinforcing bars or rods of not less for agricultural buildings.
than 13 mm in diameter, or consisting of at least 6 000 mm of bare
copper conductor not smaller than 22 mm2. Reinforcing bars shall be (a) Rod, Pipe, and Plate Electrodes. Where practicable, rod, pipe,
permitted to be bonded together by the usual steel tie wires or other and plate electrodes shall be embedded below permanent moisture
effective means. level. Rod, pipe, and plate electrodes shall be free from nonconductive
(4) Ground Ring. A ground ring encircling the building or coatings such as paint or enamel.
structure, in direct contact with the earth, consisting of at least
6 000 mm of bare copper conductor not smaller than 30 mm2. (b) Electrode Spacing. Where more than one of the electrodes of
(5) Rod and Pipe Electrodes. Rod and pipe electrodes shall not be the type specified in 2.50.3.3(a)(5) or (a)(6) are used, each electrode of
less than 2 400 mm in length and shall consist of the following one grounding system (including that used for air terminals) shall not
materials. be less than 1 800 mm from any other electrode of another grounding
system. Two or more grounding electrodes that are effectively bonded
a. Electrodes of pipe or conduit shall not be smaller than metric together shall be considered a single grounding electrode system.
designator 21 (trade size ¾) and, where of iron or steel, shall have the
 (c) Bonding Jumper. The bonding jumper(s) used to connect the permitted to be buried in a trench that is at least 750 mm deep. The
grounding electrodes together to form the grounding electrode system upper end of the electrode shall be flush with or below ground level
shall be installed in accordance with 2.50.3.15(a), (b), and (e), shall be unless the aboveground end and the grounding electrode conductor
sized in accordance with 2.50.3.17, and shall be connected in the attachment are protected against physical damage as specified in
manner specified in 2.50.3.21. 2.50.1.10.

(d) Metal Underground Water Pipe. Where used as a grounding (h) Plate Electrode. Plate electrodes shall be installed not less than
electrode, metal underground water pipe shall meet the requirements 750 mm below the surface of the earth.
of 2.50.3.4(d)(1) and (d)(2).
2.50.3.5 Supplementary Grounding Electrodes. Supplementary
(1) Continuity. Continuity of the grounding path or the bonding grounding electrodes shall be permitted to be connected to the
connection to interior piping shall not rely on water meters or filtering equipment grounding conductors specified in 2.50.6.9 and shall not be
devices and similar equipment. required to comply with the electrode bonding requirements of
(2) Supplemental Electrode Required. A metal underground water 2.50.3.1 or 2.50.3.4(c) or the resistance requirements of 2.50.3.7, but
pipe shall be supplemented by an additional electrode of a type the earth shall not be used as an effective ground-fault current path as
specified in 2.50.3.3(a)(2) through (a)(7). Where the supplemental specified in 2.50.1.4(a)(5) and 2.50.1.4(b)(4).
electrode is a rod, pipe, or plate type, it shall comply with 2.50.3.7.
The supplemental electrode shall be permitted to be bonded to the 2.50.3.7 Resistance of Rod, Pipe, and Plate Electrodes. A single
grounding electrode conductor, the grounded service-entrance electrode consisting of a rod, pipe, or plate that does not have a
conductor, the nonflexible grounded service raceway, or any grounded resistance to ground of 25 ohms or less shall be augmented by one
service enclosure. additional electrode of any of the types specified by 2.50.3.3(a)(2)
through (a)(7). Where multiple rod, pipe, or plate electrodes are
Exception: The supplemental electrode shall be permitted to be installed to meet the requirements of this section, they shall not be less
bonded to the interior metal water piping at any convenient point as than 1 800 mm apart.
covered in 2.50.3.3(a)(1), Exception.
FPN: The paralleling efficiency of rods longer than 2 400 mm is improved by
spacing greater than 1 800 mm.
(e) Supplemental Electrode Bonding Connection Size. Where the
supplemental electrode is a rod, pipe, or plate electrode, that portion of
2.50.3.9 Common Grounding Electrode. Where an ac system is
the bonding jumper that is the sole connection to the supplemental
connected to a grounding electrode in or at a building or structure, the
grounding electrode shall not be required to be larger than 14 mm2
same electrode shall be used to ground conductor enclosures and
copper wire or 22 mm2 aluminum wire.
equipment in or on that building or structure. Where separate services,
feeders, or branch circuits supply a building and are required to be
(f) Ground Ring. The ground ring shall be buried at a depth below
connected to a grounding electrode(s), the same grounding
the earth’s surface of not less than 750 mm.
electrode(s) shall be used.
Two or more grounding electrodes that are effectively bonded together
(g) Rod and Pipe Electrodes. The electrode shall be installed such
shall be considered as a single grounding electrode system in this
that at least 2 400 mm of length is in contact with the soil. It shall be
sense.
driven to a depth of not less than 2 400 mm except that, where rock
bottom is encountered, the electrode shall be driven at an oblique
2.50.3.11 Use of Air Terminals. Air terminal conductors and driven
angle not to exceed 45 degrees from the vertical or, where rock bottom
pipes, rods, or plate electrodes used for grounding air terminals shall
is encountered at an angle up to 45 degrees, the electrode shall be
not be used in lieu of the grounding electrodes required by 2.50.3.1 for
grounding wiring systems and equipment. This provision shall not (c) Continuous. Grounding electrode conductor(s) shall be installed
prohibit the required bonding together of grounding electrodes of in one continuous length without a splice or joint except as permitted
different systems. in (1) through (4):

FPN No. 1: See 2.50.5.17 for spacing from air terminals. See 8.0.4.1(d), (1) Splicing shall be permitted only by irreversible compression-
8.10.2.11(j), and 8.20.4.1(d) for bonding of electrodes.
FPN No. 2: Bonding together of all separate grounding electrodes will limit type connectors listed as grounding and bonding equipment or by the
potential differences between them and between their associated wiring systems. exothermic welding process.
(2) Sections of busbars shall be permitted to be connected
2.50.3.13 Grounding Electrode Conductor Material. The grounding together to form a grounding electrode conductor.
electrode conductor shall be of copper, aluminum, or copper-clad (3) Bonding jumper(s) from grounding electrode(s) and grounding
aluminum. The material selected shall be resistant to any corrosive electrode conductor(s) shall be permitted to be connected to an
condition existing at the installation or shall be suitably protected aluminum or copper busbar not less than 6 mm × 50 mm. The busbar
against corrosion. The conductor shall be solid or stranded, insulated, shall be securely fastened and shall be installed in an accessible
covered, or bare. location. Connections shall be made by a listed connector or by the
exothermic welding process.
2.50.3.15 Grounding Electrode Conductor Installation. Grounding (4) Where aluminum busbars are used, the installation shall
electrode conductors shall be installed as specified in 2.50.3.15(a) comply with 2.50.3.15(a).
through (f).
(d) Grounding Electrode Conductor Taps. Where a service
(a) Aluminum or Copper-Clad Aluminum Conductors. Bare consists of more than a single enclosure as permitted in 2.30.6.2(a), it
aluminum or copper-clad aluminum grounding conductors shall not be shall be permitted to connect taps to the common grounding electrode
used where in direct contact with masonry or the earth or where conductor. Each such tap conductor shall extend to the inside of each
subject to corrosive conditions. Where used outside, aluminum or such enclosure. The common grounding electrode conductor shall be
copper-clad aluminum grounding conductors shall not be terminated sized in accordance with 2.50.3.17, based on the sum of the circular
within 450 mm of the earth. mil area of the largest ungrounded service entrance conductors. Where
more than one set of service entrance conductors as permitted by
(b) Securing and Protection Against Physical Damage. Where 2.30.4.1, Exception No. 2 connect directly to a service drop or lateral,
exposed, a grounding electrode conductor or its enclosure shall be the common grounding electrode conductor shall be sized in
securely fastened to the surface on which it is carried. A 22 mm2 or accordance with Table 2.50.3.17 Note 1. The tap conductors shall be
larger copper or aluminum grounding electrode conductor shall be permitted to be sized in accordance with the grounding electrode
protected where exposed to physical damage. A 14 mm2 grounding conductors specified in 2.50.3.17 for the largest conductor serving the
electrode conductor that is free from exposure to physical damage respective enclosures. The tap conductors shall be connected to the
shall be permitted to be run along the surface of the building common grounding electrode conductor in such a manner that the
construction without metal covering or protection where it is securely common grounding electrode conductor remains without a splice or
fastened to the construction; otherwise, it shall be in rigid metal joint.
conduit, intermediate metal conduit, rigid nonmetallic conduit,
electrical metallic tubing, or cable armor. Grounding electrode (e) Enclosures for Grounding Electrode Conductors. Ferrous
conductors smaller than 14 mm2 shall be in rigid metal conduit, metal enclosures for grounding electrode conductors shall be
intermediate metal conduit, rigid nonmetallic conduit, electrical electrically continuous from the point of attachment to cabinets or
metallic tubing, or cable armor. equipment to the grounding electrode and shall be securely fastened to
the ground clamp or fitting. Nonferrous metal enclosures shall not be that is the sole connection to the grounding electrode shall not be
required to be electrically continuous. Ferrous metal enclosures that required to be larger than 22 mm2 copper wire.
are not physically continuous from cabinets or equipment to the
grounding electrode shall be made electrically continuous by bonding (c) Connections to Ground Rings. Where the grounding electrode
each end of the raceway or enclosure to the grounding electrode conductor is connected to a ground ring as permitted in 2.50.3.3(a)(4),
conductor. Bonding shall apply at each end and to all intervening that portion of the conductor that is the sole connection to the
ferrous raceways, boxes, and enclosures between the service grounding electrode shall not be required to be larger than the
equipment and the grounding electrode. The bonding jumper for a conductor used for the ground ring.
grounding electrode conductor raceway or cable armor shall be the
same size as, or larger than, the required enclosed grounding electrode
conductor. Where a raceway is used as protection for a grounding Table 2.50.3.17 Grounding Electrode Conductor for
electrode conductor, the installation shall comply with the Alternating-Current Systems
requirements of the appropriate raceway article. Size of Largest Ungrounded Service-
Entrance Conductor or Equivalent Size of Grounding
(f) To Electrode(s). A grounding electrode conductor shall be Area for Parallel Conductorsa Electrode Conductor
permitted to be run to any convenient grounding electrode available in mm2 mm2 (mm dia)
the grounding electrode system, or to one or more grounding Aluminum or Aluminum or
electrode(s) individually, or to the aluminum or copper busbar as Copper-Clad Copper-Clad
permitted in 2.50.3.15(c). The grounding electrode conductor shall be Copper Aluminum Copper Aluminumb
sized for the largest grounding electrode conductor required among all 30 or smaller 50 or smaller 8.0(3.2) 14
the electrodes connected to it. 38 or 50 60 or 80 14 22
60 or 80 100 or 125 22 30
2.50.3.17 Size of Alternating-Current Grounding Electrode Over 80 through Over 125 through 30 50
Conductor. The size of the grounding electrode conductor of a 175 250
grounded or ungrounded ac system shall not be less than given in Over 175 through Over 250 through 50 80
Table 2.50.3.17, except as permitted in 2.50.3.17(a) through (c). 600 900
FPN: See 2.50.2.5(c) for size of ac system conductor brought to service
Over 600 through Over 900 through 60 100
equipment. 1100 1750
Over 1100 Over 1750 80 125
(a) Connections to Rod, Pipe, or Plate Electrodes. Where the Notes:
grounding electrode conductor is connected to rod, pipe, or plate 1. Where multiple sets of service-entrance conductors are used as permitted in
2.30.4.1, Exception No. 2, the equivalent size of the largest service-entrance conductor
electrodes as permitted in 2.50.3.3(a)(5) or (a)(6), that portion of the shall be determined by the largest sum of the areas of the corresponding conductors of
conductor that is the sole connection to the grounding electrode shall each set.
not be required to be larger than 14 mm2 copper wire or 22 mm2 2. Where there are no service-entrance conductors, the grounding electrode
aluminum wire. conductor size shall be determined by the equivalent size of the largest service-
entrance conductor required for the load to be served.
a
This table also applies to the derived conductors of separately derived ac
(b) Connections to Concrete-Encased Electrodes. Where the systems.
b
grounding electrode conductor is connected to a concrete-encased See installation restrictions in 2.50.3.15(a).
electrode as permitted in 2.50.3.3(a)(3), that portion of the conductor
2.50.3.19 Grounding Electrode Conductor and Bonding Jumper (3) For indoor telecommunications purposes only, a listed sheet
Connection to Grounding Electrodes. metal strap-type ground clamp having a rigid metal base that seats on
the electrode and having a strap of such material and dimensions that it
(a) Accessibility. The connection of a grounding electrode is not likely to stretch during or after installation
conductor or bonding jumper to a grounding electrode shall be (4) An equally substantial approved means
accessible.
2.50.4 Enclosure, Raceway, and Service Cable Grounding
Exception No. 1: An encased or buried connection to a concrete-
encased, driven, or buried grounding electrode shall not be required 2.50.4.1 Service Raceways and Enclosures. Metal enclosures and
to be accessible. raceways for service conductors and equipment shall be grounded.
Exception No. 2: An exothermic or irreversible compression
connection to fire-proofed structural metal shall not be required to be Exception: A metal elbow that is installed in an underground
accessible. installation of rigid nonmetallic conduit and is isolated from possible
contact by a minimum cover of 450 mm to any part of the elbow shall
(b) Effective Grounding Path. The connection of a grounding not be required to be grounded.
electrode conductor or bonding jumper to a grounding electrode shall
be made in a manner that will ensure a permanent and effective 2.50.4.5 Underground Service Cable or Raceway.
grounding path. Where necessary to ensure the grounding path for a
metal piping system used as a grounding electrode, effective bonding (a) Underground Service Cable. The sheath or armor of a
shall be provided around insulated joints and around any equipment continuous underground metal-sheathed or armored service cable
likely to be disconnected for repairs or replacement. Bonding system that is bonded to the grounded underground system shall not be
conductors shall be of sufficient length to permit removal of such required to be grounded at the building or structure. The sheath or
equipment while retaining the integrity of the bond. armor shall be permitted to be insulated from the interior metal
raceway conduit or piping.
2.50.3.21 Methods of Grounding and Bonding Conductor
Connection to Electrodes. The grounding or bonding conductor shall (b) Underground Service Raceway Containing Cable. An
be connected to the grounding electrode by exothermic welding, listed underground metal service raceway that contains a metal-sheathed or
lugs, listed pressure connectors, listed clamps, or other listed means. armored cable bonded to the grounded underground system shall not
Connections depending on solder shall not be used. Ground clamps be required to be grounded at the building or structure. The sheath or
shall be listed for the materials of the grounding electrode and the armor shall be permitted to be insulated from the interior metal
grounding electrode conductor and, where used on pipe, rod, or other raceway or piping.
buried electrodes, shall also be listed for direct soil burial or concrete
encasement. Not more than one conductor shall be connected to the 2.50.4.7 Other Conductor Enclosures and Raceways. Except as
grounding electrode by a single clamp or fitting unless the clamp or permitted by 2.50.6.3(i), metal enclosures and raceways for other than
fitting is listed for multiple conductors. One of the following methods service conductors shall be grounded.
shall be used:
Exception No. 1: Metal enclosures and raceways for conductors
(1) A pipe fitting, pipe plug, or other approved device screwed added to existing installations of open wire, knob and tube wiring, and
into a pipe or pipe fitting nonmetallic-sheathed cable shall not be required to be grounded
(2) A listed bolted clamp of cast bronze or brass, or plain or where these enclosures or wiring methods comply with (1) through (4)
malleable iron as follows:
 (1) Do not provide an equipment ground (1) Bonding equipment to the grounded service conductor in a
(2) Are in runs of less than 7 600 mm manner provided in 2.50.1.8
(3) Are free from probable contact with ground, grounded metal, (2) Connections utilizing threaded couplings or threaded bosses
metal lath, or other conductive material on enclosures where made up wrenchtight
(4) Are guarded against contact by persons (3) Threadless couplings and connectors where made up tight for
Exception No. 2: Short sections of metal enclosures or raceways used metal raceways and metal-clad cables
to provide support or protection of cable assemblies from physical (4) Other listed devices, such as bonding-type locknuts, bushings,
damage shall not be required to be grounded. or bushings with bonding jumpers
Exception No. 3: A metal elbow shall not be required to be grounded
where it is installed in a nonmetallic raceway and is isolated from Bonding jumpers meeting the other requirements of this article shall
possible contact by a minimum cover of 450 mm to any part of the be used around concentric or eccentric knockouts that are punched or
elbow or is encased in not less than 50 mm of concrete. otherwise formed so as to impair the electrical connection to ground.
Standard locknuts or bushings shall not be the sole means for the
2.50.5 Bonding bonding required by this section.

2.50.5.1 General. Bonding shall be provided where necessary to 2.50.5.5 Bonding for Other Systems. An accessible means external
ensure electrical continuity and the capacity to conduct safely any fault to enclosures for connecting intersystem bonding and grounding
current likely to be imposed. electrode conductors shall be provided at the service equipment and at
the disconnecting means for any additional buildings or structures by
2.50.5.3 Services. at least one of the following means:

(a) Bonding of Services. The non–current-carrying metal parts of (1) Exposed nonflexible metallic raceways
equipment indicated in 2.50.5.3(a)(1), (a)(2), and (a)(3) shall be (2) Exposed grounding electrode conductor
effectively bonded together. (3) Approved means for the external connection of a copper or
other corrosion-resistant bonding or grounding conductor to the
(1) The service raceways, cable trays, cablebus framework, grounded raceway or equipment
auxiliary gutters, or service cable armor or sheath except as permitted
2
in 2.50.4.5. FPN No. 1: A 14 mm copper conductor with one end bonded to the grounded
nonflexible metallic raceway or equipment and with 150 mm or more of the other
(2) All service enclosures containing service conductors, end made accessible on the outside wall is an example of the approved means
including meter fittings, boxes, or the like, interposed in the service covered in 2.50.5.5(3).
raceway or armor. FPN No. 2: See 8.0.4.1, 8.10.2.11, and 8.20.4.1 for bonding and grounding
requirements for communications circuits, radio and television equipment, and
(3) Any metallic raceway or armor enclosing a grounding CATV circuits.
electrode conductor as specified in 2.50.3.15(b). Bonding shall apply
at each end and to all intervening raceways, boxes, and enclosures 2.50.5.7 Bonding Other Enclosures.
between the service equipment and the grounding electrode.
(a) General. Metal raceways, cable trays, cable armor, cable sheath,
(b) Method of Bonding at the Service. Electrical continuity at enclosures, frames, fittings, and other metal non–current-carrying parts
service equipment, service raceways, and service conductor enclosures that are to serve as grounding conductors, with or without the use of
shall be ensured by one of the following methods: supplementary equipment grounding conductors, shall be effectively
bonded where necessary to ensure electrical continuity and the
capacity to conduct safely any fault current likely to be imposed on
them. Any nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating shall be 2.50.5.9 Bonding Loosely Jointed Metal Raceways. Expansion
removed at threads, contact points, and contact surfaces or be fittings and telescoping sections of metal raceways shall be made
connected by means of fittings designed so as to make such removal electrically continuous by equipment bonding jumpers or other means.
unnecessary.
2.50.5.11 Bonding in Hazardous (Classified) Locations. Regardless
(b) Isolated Grounding Circuits. Where required for the reduction of the voltage of the electrical system, the electrical continuity of non–
of electrical noise (electromagnetic interference) on the grounding current-carrying metal parts of equipment, raceways, and other
circuit, an equipment enclosure supplied by a branch circuit shall be enclosures in any hazardous (classified) location as defined in Article
permitted to be isolated from a raceway containing circuits supplying 500 shall be ensured by any of the methods specified in 2.50.5.3(b)(2)
only that equipment by one or more listed nonmetallic raceway fittings through (b)(4) that are approved for the wiring method used. One or
located at the point of attachment of the raceway to the equipment more of these bonding methods shall be used whether or not
enclosure. The metal raceway shall comply with provisions of this supplementary equipment grounding conductors are installed.
article and shall be supplemented by an internal insulated equipment
grounding conductor installed in accordance with 2.50.7.17(d) to 2.50.5.13 Equipment Bonding Jumpers.
ground the equipment enclosure.
(a) Material. Equipment bonding jumpers shall be of copper or
FPN: Use of an isolated equipment grounding conductor does not relieve the other corrosion-resistant material. A bonding jumper shall be a wire,
requirement for grounding the raceway system.
bus, screw, or similar suitable conductor.
2.50.5.8 Bonding for Over 250 Volts. For circuits of over 250 volts
(b) Attachment. Equipment bonding jumpers shall be attached in
to ground, the electrical continuity of metal raceways and cables with
the manner specified by the applicable provisions of 2.50.1.8 for
metal sheaths that contain any conductor other than service conductors
circuits and equipment and by 2.50.3.21 for grounding electrodes.
shall be ensured by one or more of the methods specified for services
in 2.50.5.3(b), except for (b)(1).
(c) Size — Equipment Bonding Jumper on Supply Side of
Service. The bonding jumper shall not be smaller than the sizes shown
Exception: Where oversized, concentric, or eccentric knockouts are
in Table 2.50.3.17 for grounding electrode conductors. Where the
not encountered, or where a box or enclosure with concentric or
service-entrance phase conductors are larger than 1100 kcmil copper
eccentric knockouts listed to provide a permanent, reliable electrical
or 850 mm2 aluminum, the bonding jumper shall have an area not less
bond, the following methods shall be permitted:
than 12½ percent of the area of the largest phase conductor except
(1) Threadless couplings and connectors for cables with metal
that, where the phase conductors and the bonding jumper are of
sheaths
different materials (copper or aluminum), the minimum size of the
(2) Two locknuts, on rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal
bonding jumper shall be based on the assumed use of phase
conduit, one inside and one outside of boxes and cabinets
conductors of the same material as the bonding jumper and with an
(3) Fittings with shoulders that seat firmly against the box or
ampacity equivalent to that of the installed phase conductors. Where
cabinet, such as electrical metallic tubing connectors, flexible metal
the service-entrance conductors are paralleled in two or more
conduit connectors, and cable connectors, with one locknut on the
raceways or cables, the equipment bonding jumper, where routed with
inside of boxes and cabinets
the raceways or cables, shall be run in parallel. The size of the bonding
(4) Listed fittings
jumper for each raceway or cable shall be based on the size of the
service-entrance conductors in each raceway or cable.
 (d) Size — Equipment Bonding Jumper on Load Side of Service. metallically isolated from all other occupancies by use of nonmetallic
The equipment bonding jumper on the load side of the service water piping, the metal water piping system(s) for each occupancy
overcurrent devices shall be sized, as a minimum, in accordance with shall be permitted to be bonded to the equipment grounding terminal
the sizes listed in Table 2.50.6.13, but shall not be required to be larger of the panelboard or switchboard enclosure (other than service
than the largest ungrounded circuit conductors supplying the equipment) supplying that occupancy. The bonding jumper shall be
equipment and shall not be smaller than 2.0 mm2 (1.6 mm dia.). sized in accordance with Table 2.50.6.13.
A single common continuous equipment bonding jumper shall be (3) Multiple Buildings or Structures Supplied by a Feeder(s) or
permitted to bond two or more raceways or cables where the bonding Branch Circuit(s). The metal water piping system(s) installed in or
jumper is sized in accordance with Table 2.50.6.13 for the largest attached to a building or structure shall be bonded to the building or
overcurrent device supplying circuits therein. structure disconnecting means enclosure where located at the building
or structure, to the equipment grounding conductor run with the supply
(e) Installation. The equipment bonding jumper shall be permitted conductors, or to the one or more grounding electrodes used. The
to be installed inside or outside of a raceway or enclosure. Where bonding jumper(s) shall be sized in accordance with 2.50.3.17, based
installed on the outside, the length of the equipment bonding jumper on the size of the feeder or branch circuit conductors that supply the
shall not exceed 1 800 mm and shall be routed with the raceway or building. The bonding jumper shall not be required to be larger than
enclosure. Where installed inside of a raceway, the equipment bonding the largest ungrounded feeder or branch circuit conductor supplying
jumper shall comply with the requirements of 2.50.6.10 and 2.50.7.19. the building.

Exception: An equipment bonding jumper longer than 1 800 mm shall (b) Other Metal Piping. Where installed in or attached to a
be permitted at outside pole locations for the purpose of bonding or building or structure, metal piping system(s), including gas piping, that
grounding isolated sections of metal raceways or elbows installed in is likely to become energized shall be bonded to the service equipment
exposed risers of metal conduit or other metal raceway. enclosure, the grounded conductor at the service, the grounding
electrode conductor where of sufficient size, or to the one or more
2.50.5.15 Bonding of Piping Systems and Exposed Structural Steel. grounding electrodes used. The bonding jumper(s) shall be sized in
accordance with 2.50.6.13, using the rating of the circuit that is likely
(a) Metal Water Piping. The metal water piping system shall be to energize the piping system(s). The equipment grounding conductor
bonded as required in (a)(1), (a)(2), or (a)(3) of this section. The for the circuit that is likely to energize the piping shall be permitted to
bonding jumper(s) shall be installed in accordance with 2.50.3.15(a), serve as the bonding means. The points of attachment of the bonding
(b), and (e). The points of attachment of the bonding jumper(s) shall jumper(s) shall be accessible.
be accessible.
FPN: Bonding all piping and metal air ducts within the premises will provide
additional safety.
(1) General. Metal water piping system(s) installed in or attached
to a building or structure shall be bonded to the service equipment
(c) Structural Metal. Exposed structural metal that is
enclosure, the grounded conductor at the service, the grounding
interconnected to form a metal building frame and is not intentionally
electrode conductor where of sufficient size, or to the one or more
grounded and is likely to become energized shall be bonded to the
grounding electrodes used. The bonding jumper(s) shall be sized in
service equipment enclosure, the grounded conductor at the service,
accordance with Table 2.50.3.17 except as permitted in 2.50.5.15(a)(2)
the grounding electrode conductor where of sufficient size, or the one
and (a)(3).
or more grounding electrodes used. The bonding jumper(s) shall be
(2) Buildings of Multiple Occupancy. In buildings of multiple
sized in accordance with Table 2.50.3.17 and installed in accordance
occupancy where the metal water piping system(s) installed in or
attached to a building or structure for the individual occupancies is
with 2.50.3.15(a), (b), and (e). The points of attachment of the bonding Exception No. 2: A separate bonding jumper to the building
jumper(s) shall be accessible. structural metal shall not be required where the water piping of a
building or structure is used as the grounding electrode for a
(d) Separately Derived Systems. Metal water piping systems and separately derived system and is bonded to the building structural
structural metal that is interconnected to form a building frame shall metal in the area served by the separately derived system.
be bonded to separately derived systems in accordance with (d)(1)
through (d)(3). (3) Common Grounding Electrode Conductor. Where a common
grounding electrode conductor is installed for multiple separately
(1) Metal Water Piping System(s). The grounded conductor of derived systems as permitted by 2.50.2.11(a)(4), and exposed
each separately derived system shall be bonded to the nearest available structural metal that is interconnected to form the building frame or
point of the metal water piping system(s) in the area served by each interior metal piping exists in the area served by the separately derived
separately derived system. This connection shall be made at the same system, the metal piping and the structural metal member shall be
point on the separately derived system where the grounding electrode bonded to the common grounding electrode conductor.
conductor is connected. Each bonding jumper shall be sized in
accordance with Table 2.50.3.17 based on the largest ungrounded Exception: A separate bonding jumper from each derived system to
conductor of the separately derived system. metal water piping and to structural metal members shall not be
required where the metal water piping and the structural metal
Exception No. 1: A separate bonding jumper to the metal water members in the area served by the separately derived system are
piping system shall not be required where the metal water piping bonded to the common grounding electrode conductor.
system is used as the grounding electrode for the separately derived
system. 2.50.5.17 Lightning Protection Systems. The lightning protection
Exception No. 2: A separate water piping bonding jumper shall not be system ground terminals shall be bonded to the building or structure
required where the metal frame of a building or structure is used as grounding electrode system.
the grounding electrode for a separately derived system and is bonded
to the metal water piping in the area served by the separately derived FPN No. 1: See 2.50.3.11 for use of air terminals. For further information, see
NFPA 780-2004, Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems,
system. which contains detailed information on grounding, bonding, and spacing from
lightning protection systems.
(2) Structural Metal. Where exposed structural metal that is FPN No. 2: Metal raceways, enclosures, frames, and other non–current-carrying
metal parts of electric equipment installed on a building equipped with a lightning
interconnected to form the building frame exists in the area served by protection system may require bonding or spacing from the lightning protection
the separately derived system, it shall be bonded to the grounded conductors in accordance with NFPA 780-2004, Standard for the Installation of
Lightning Protection Systems. Separation from lightning protection conductors is
conductor of each separately derived system. This connection shall be typically 1 800 mm through air or 900 mm through dense materials such as
made at the same point on the separately derived system where the concrete, brick, or wood.
grounding electrode conductor is connected. Each bonding jumper
shall be sized in accordance with Table 2.50.3.17 based on the largest 2.50.6 Equipment Grounding and Equipment
ungrounded conductor of the separately derived system. Grounding Conductors

Exception No. 1: A separate bonding jumper to the building 2.50.6.1 Equipment Fastened in Place or Connected by Permanent
structural metal shall not be required where the metal frame of a Wiring Methods (Fixed). Exposed non–current-carrying metal parts
building or structure is used as the grounding electrode for the of fixed equipment likely to become energized shall be grounded
separately derived system. under any of the following conditions:
 (1) Where within 2 400 mm vertically or 1 500 mm horizontally (d) Enclosures for Motor Controllers. Enclosures for motor
of ground or grounded metal objects and subject to contact by persons controllers unless attached to ungrounded portable equipment.
(2) Where located in a wet or damp location and not isolated
(3) Where in electrical contact with metal (e) Elevators and Cranes. Electric equipment for elevators and
(4) Where in a hazardous (classified) location as covered by cranes.
Articles 5.0 through 5.17
(5) Where supplied by a metal-clad, metal-sheathed, metal- (f) Garages, Theaters, and Motion Picture Studios. Electric
raceway, or other wiring method that provides an equipment ground, equipment in commercial garages, theaters, and motion picture
except as permitted by 2.50.4.7, Exception No. 2, for short sections of studios, except pendant lampholders supplied by circuits not over 250
metal enclosures volts to ground.
(6) Where equipment operates with any terminal at over 150 volts
to ground (g) Electric Signs. Electric signs, outline lighting, and associated
equipment as provided in Article 6.0.
Exception No. 1: Metal frames of electrically heated appliances,
exempted by special permission, in which case the frames shall be (h) Motion Picture Projection Equipment. Motion picture
permanently and effectively insulated from ground. projection equipment.
Exception No. 2: Distribution apparatus, such as transformer and
capacitor cases, mounted on wooden poles, at a height exceeding (i) Power-Limited Remote-Control, Signaling, and Fire Alarm
2 400 mm above ground or grade level. Circuits. Equipment supplied by Class 1 power-limited circuits and
Exception No. 3: Listed equipment protected by a system of double Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote-control and signaling circuits, and
insulation, or its equivalent, shall not be required to be grounded. by fire alarm circuits, shall be grounded where system grounding is
Where such a system is employed, the equipment shall be distinctively required by Part 2.50.2 or Part 2.50.8.
marked.
(j) Luminaires (Lighting Fixtures). Luminaires (lighting fixtures)
2.50.6.3 Fastened in Place or Connected by Permanent Wiring as provided in Part 4.10.5.
Methods (Fixed) — Specific. Exposed, non–current-carrying metal
parts of the kinds of equipment described in 2.50.6.3(a) through (k), (k) Skid Mounted Equipment. Permanently mounted electrical
and non–current-carrying metal parts of equipment and enclosures equipment and skids shall be grounded with an equipment bonding
described in 2.50.6.3(l) and (m), shall be grounded regardless of jumper sized as required by 2.50.6.13.
voltage.
(l) Motor-Operated Water Pumps. Motor-operated water pumps,
(a) Switchboard Frames and Structures. Switchboard frames and including the submersible type.
structures supporting switching equipment, except frames of 2-wire dc
switchboards where effectively insulated from ground. (m) Metal Well Casings. Where a submersible pump is used in a
metal well casing, the well casing shall be bonded to the pump circuit
(b) Pipe Organs. Generator and motor frames in an electrically equipment grounding conductor.
operated pipe organ, unless effectively insulated from ground and the
motor driving it. 2.50.6.5 Equipment Connected by Cord and Plug. Under any of the
conditions described in 2.50.6.5(1) through (4), exposed non–current-
(c) Motor Frames. Motor frames, as provided by 4.30.13.2. carrying metal parts of cord-and-plug-connected equipment likely to
become energized shall be grounded.
 f. Cord-and-plug-connected appliances used in damp or wet
Exception: Listed tools, listed appliances, and listed equipment locations or by persons standing on the ground or on metal floors or
covered in 2.50.6.5(2) through (4) shall not be required to be working inside of metal tanks or boilers
grounded where protected by a system of double insulation or its g. Tools likely to be used in wet or conductive locations
equivalent. Double insulated equipment shall be distinctively marked.
Exception: Tools and portable handlamps likely to be used in wet or
(1) In hazardous (classified) locations (see Articles 5.0 through conductive locations shall not be required to be grounded where
5.17) supplied through an isolating transformer with an ungrounded
(2) Where operated at over 150 volts to ground secondary of not over 50 volts.

Exception No. 1: Motors, where guarded, shall not be required to be 2.50.6.7 Nonelectric Equipment. The metal parts of nonelectric
grounded. equipment described in this section shall be grounded.
Exception No. 2: Metal frames of electrically heated appliances,
exempted by special permission, shall not be required to be grounded, (1) Frames and tracks of electrically operated cranes and hoists
in which case the frames shall be permanently and effectively (2) Frames of nonelectrically driven elevator cars to which
insulated from ground. electric conductors are attached
(3) Hand-operated metal shifting ropes or cables of electric
(3) In residential occupancies: elevators

a. Refrigerators, freezers, and air conditioners FPN: Where extensive metal in or on buildings may become energized and is
subject to personal contact, adequate bonding and grounding will provide
b. Clothes-washing, clothes-drying, dish-washing machines; additional safety.
kitchen waste disposers; information technology equipment; sump
pumps and electrical aquarium equipment 2.50.6.9 Types of Equipment Grounding Conductors. The
c. Hand-held motor-operated tools, stationary and fixed motor- equipment grounding conductor run with or enclosing the circuit
operated tools, light industrial motor-operated tools conductors shall be one or more or a combination of the following:
d. Motor-operated appliances of the following types: hedge
clippers, lawn mowers, snow blowers, and wet scrubbers (1) A copper, aluminum, or copper-clad aluminum conductor.
e. Portable handlamps This conductor shall be solid or stranded; insulated, covered, or bare;
and in the form of a wire or a busbar of any shape.
(4) In other than residential occupancies: (2) Rigid metal conduit.
(3) Intermediate metal conduit.
a. Refrigerators, freezers, and air conditioners (4) Electrical metallic tubing.
b. Clothes-washing, clothes-drying, dish-washing machines; (5) Listed flexible metal conduit meeting all the following
information technology equipment; sump pumps and electrical conditions:
aquarium equipment
c. Hand-held motor-operated tools, stationary and fixed motor- a. The conduit is terminated in fittings listed for grounding.
operated tools, light industrial motor-operated tools b. The circuit conductors contained in the conduit are protected
d. Motor-operated appliances of the following types: hedge by overcurrent devices rated at 20 amperes or less.
clippers, lawn mowers, snow blowers, and wet scrubbers c. The combined length of flexible metal conduit and flexible
e. Portable handlamps metallic tubing and liquidtight flexible metal conduit in the same
ground return path does not exceed 1 800 mm.
 d. Where used to connect equipment where flexibility is b. The metallic sheath or the combined metallic sheath and
necessary after installation, an equipment grounding conductor shall grounding conductors of the smooth or corrugated tube type MC cable
be installed.
(11) Cable trays as permitted in 3.92.1.3(c) and 3.92.1.7.
(6) Listed liquidtight flexible metal conduit meeting all the (12) Cablebus framework as permitted in 3.70.1.3.
following conditions: (13) Other listed electrically continuous metal raceways and listed
auxiliary gutters.
a. The conduit is terminated in fittings listed for grounding. (14) Surface metal raceways listed for grounding.
b. For metric designators 12 through 16 (trade sizes through ½),
the circuit conductors contained in the conduit are protected by 2.50.6.10 Identification of Equipment Grounding Conductors.
overcurrent devices rated at 20 amperes or less. Unless required elsewhere in this Code, equipment grounding
c. For metric designators 21 through 35 (trade sizes ¾ through conductors shall be permitted to be bare, covered, or insulated.
1¼), the circuit conductors contained in the conduit are protected by Individually covered or insulated equipment grounding conductors
overcurrent devices rated not more than 60 amperes and there is no shall have a continuous outer finish that is either green or green with
flexible metal conduit, flexible metallic tubing, or liquidtight flexible one or more yellow stripes except as permitted in this section.
metal conduit in trade sizes metric designators 12 through 16 (trade Conductors with insulation or individual covering that is green, green
sizes through ½) in the grounding path. with one or more yellow stripes, or otherwise identified as permitted
d. The combined length of flexible metal conduit and flexible by this section shall not be used for ungrounded or grounded circuit
metallic tubing and liquidtight flexible metal conduit in the same conductors.
ground return path does not exceed 1 800 mm.
e. Where used to connect equipment where flexibility is (a) Conductors Larger Than 14 mm2. Equipment grounding
necessary after installation, an equipment grounding conductor shall conductors larger than 14 mm2 shall comply with 2.50.6.10(a)(1) and
be installed. (a)(2).

(7) Flexible metallic tubing where the tubing is terminated in (1) An insulated or covered conductor larger than 14 mm2 shall be
fittings listed for grounding and meeting the following conditions: permitted, at the time of installation, to be permanently identified as an
equipment grounding conductor at each end and at every point where
a. The circuit conductors contained in the tubing are protected by the conductor is accessible.
overcurrent devices rated at 20 amperes or less.
b. The combined length of flexible metal conduit and flexible Exception: Conductors larger than 14 mm2 shall not be required to be
metallic tubing and liquidtight flexible metal conduit in the same marked in conduit bodies that contain no splices or unused hubs.
ground return path does not exceed 1 800 mm.
(2) Identification shall encircle the conductor and shall be
(8) Armor of Type AC cable as provided in 3.20.3.9. accomplished by one of the following:
(9) The copper sheath of mineral-insulated, metal-sheathed cable.
(10) Type MC cable where listed and identified for grounding in a. Stripping the insulation or covering from the entire exposed
accordance with the following: length
b. Coloring the exposed insulation or covering green
a. The combined metallic sheath and grounding conductor of c. Marking the exposed insulation or covering with green tape or
interlocked metal tape–type MC cable green adhesive labels
 (b) Multiconductor Cable. Where the conditions of maintenance where run in hollow spaces of walls or partitions, where not subject to
and supervision ensure that only licensed electrical practitioner or non physical damage, or where protected from physical damage.
licensed electrical practitioner under the supervision of a licensed
electrical practitioner service the installation, one or more insulated 2.50.6.13 Size of Equipment Grounding Conductors.
conductors in a multiconductor cable, at the time of installation, shall
be permitted to be permanently identified as equipment grounding (a) General. Copper, aluminum, or copper-clad aluminum
conductors at each end and at every point where the conductors are equipment grounding conductors of the wire type shall not be smaller
accessible by one of the following means: than shown in Table 2.50.6.13 but shall not be required to be larger
than the circuit conductors supplying the equipment. Where a raceway
(1) Stripping the insulation from the entire exposed length or a cable armor or sheath is used as the equipment grounding
(2) Coloring the exposed insulation green conductor, as provided in 2.50.6.9 and 2.50.7.5(a), it shall comply with
(3) Marking the exposed insulation with green tape or green 2.50.1.4(a)(5) or (b)(4).
adhesive labels
(b) Increased in Size. Where ungrounded conductors are increased
(c) Flexible Cord. An uninsulated equipment grounding conductor in size, equipment grounding conductors, where installed, shall be
shall be permitted, but, if individually covered, the covering shall have increased in size proportionately according to circular mil area of the
a continuous outer finish that is either green or green with one or more ungrounded conductors.
yellow stripes.
(c) Multiple Circuits. Where a single equipment grounding
2.50.6.11 Equipment Grounding Conductor Installation. An conductor is run with multiple circuits in the same raceway or cable, it
equipment grounding conductor shall be installed in accordance with shall be sized for the largest overcurrent device protecting conductors
2.50.6.11(a), (b), and (c). in the raceway or cable.

(a) Raceway, Cable Trays, Cable Armor, Cablebus, or Cable (d) Motor Circuits. Where the overcurrent device consists of an
Sheaths. Where it consists of a raceway, cable tray, cable armor, instantaneous trip circuit breaker or a motor short-circuit protector, as
cablebus framework, or cable sheath or where it is a wire within a allowed in 4.30.4.2, the equipment grounding conductor size shall be
raceway or cable, it shall be installed in accordance with the applicable permitted to be based on the rating of the motor overload protective
provisions in this Code using fittings for joints and terminations device but shall not be less than the size shown in Table 2.50.6.13.
approved for use with the type raceway or cable used. All connections,
joints, and fittings shall be made tight using suitable tools. (e) Flexible Cord and Fixture Wire. The equipment grounding
conductor in a flexible cord with the largest circuit conductor 5.5 mm2
(b) Aluminum and Copper-Clad Aluminum Conductors. (2.6 mm dia.) or smaller, and the equipment grounding conductor used
Equipment grounding conductors of bare or insulated aluminum or with fixture wires of any size in accordance with 2.40.1.5, shall not be
copper-clad aluminum shall be permitted. Bare conductors shall not smaller than 18 AWG copper and shall not be smaller than the circuit
come in direct contact with masonry or the earth or where subject to conductors. The equipment grounding conductor in a flexible cord
corrosive conditions. Aluminum or copper-clad aluminum conductors with a circuit conductor larger than 5.5 mm2 (2.6 mm dia.) shall be
shall not be terminated within 450 mm of the earth. sized in accordance with Table 2.50.6.13.

(c) Equipment Grounding Conductors Smaller Than 14 mm2. (f) Conductors in Parallel. Where conductors are run in parallel in
Equipment grounding conductors smaller than 14 mm2 shall be multiple raceways or cables as permitted in 3.10.1.4, the equipment
protected from physical damage by a raceway or cable armor except grounding conductors, where used, shall be run in parallel in each
raceway or cable. One of the methods in 2.50.6.13(f)(1) or (f)(2) shall (b) Switches. No automatic cutout or switch shall be placed in the
be used to ensure the equipment grounding conductors are protected. equipment grounding conductor of a premises wiring system unless
the opening of the cutout or switch disconnects all sources of energy.
(1) Based on Rating of Overcurrent Protective Device. Each
parallel equipment grounding conductor shall be sized on the basis of
the ampere rating of the overcurrent device protecting the circuit
conductors in the raceway or cable in accordance with Table Table 2.50.6.13 Minimum Size Equipment Grounding Conductors
2.50.6.13. for Grounding Raceway and Equipment
(2) Ground-Fault Protection of Equipment Installed. Where Rating or Setting of
ground-fault protection of equipment is installed, each parallel Automatic Overcurrent Size mm2 (mm dia.)
equipment grounding conductor in a multiconductor cable shall be Device in Circuit Ahead Copper
permitted to be sized in accordance with Table 2.50.6.13 on the basis of Equipment, Conduit, etc., Aluminum or
of the trip rating of the ground-fault protection where the following Not Exceeding Copper-Clad
conditions are met: (Amperes) Copper Aluminum*
15 2.0(1.6) 3.5(2.0)
a. Conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that only 20 3.5(2.0) 5.5(2.6)
licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner 30 5.5(2.6) 8.0(3.2)
under the supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner will service 40 5.5(2.6) 8.0(3.2)
the installation. 60 5.5(2.6) 8.0(3.2)
b. The ground-fault protection equipment is set to trip at not 100 8.0(3.2) 14
more than the ampacity of a single ungrounded conductor of one of the 200 14 22
cables in parallel. 300 22 30
c. The ground-fault protection is listed for the purpose of 400 30 38
protecting the equipment grounding conductor. 500 30 50
600 38 60
(g) Feeder Taps. Equipment grounding conductors run with feeder 800 50 80
taps shall not be smaller than shown in Table 2.50.6.13 based on the 1000 60 100
rating of the overcurrent device ahead of the feeder but shall not be 1200 80 125
required to be larger than the tap conductors. 1600 100 175
2000 125 200
2.50.6.15 Equipment Grounding Conductor Continuity. 2500 175 325
3000 200 325
(a) Separable Connections. Separable connections such as those 4000 250 800
provided in drawout equipment or attachment plugs and mating 5000 700 1200
connectors and receptacles shall provide for first-make, last-break of 6000 800 1200
the equipment grounding conductor. First-make, last-break shall not be Note: Where necessary to comply with 2.50.1.4(a)(5) or (b)(4), the equipment
required where interlocked equipment, plugs, receptacles, and grounding conductor shall be sized larger than given in this table.
connectors preclude energization without grounding continuity. *See installation restrictions in 2.50.6.11.
 (b) Switches. No automatic cutout or switch shall be placed in the branch circuit, connections shall be permitted as indicated in
equipment grounding conductor of a premises wiring system unless 2.50.7.1(c).
the opening of the cutout or switch disconnects all sources of energy.
(a) For Grounded Systems. The connection shall be made by
2.50.6.17 Identification of Wiring Device Terminals. The terminal bonding the equipment grounding conductor to the grounded service
for the connection of the equipment grounding conductor shall be conductor and the grounding electrode conductor.
identified by one of the following:
(b) For Ungrounded Systems. The connection shall be made by
(1) A green, not readily removable terminal screw with a bonding the equipment grounding conductor to the grounding
hexagonal head. electrode conductor.
(2) A green, hexagonal, not readily removable terminal nut.
(3) A green pressure wire connector. If the terminal for the (c) Nongrounding Receptacle Replacement or Branch Circuit
grounding conductor is not visible, the conductor entrance hole shall Extensions. The equipment grounding conductor of a grounding-type
be marked with the word green or ground, the letters G or GR, a receptacle or a branch-circuit extension shall be permitted to be
grounding symbol, or otherwise identified by a distinctive green color. connected to any of the following:
If the terminal for the equipment grounding conductor is readily
removable, the area adjacent to the terminal shall be similarly marked. (1) Any accessible point on the grounding electrode system as
described in 2.50.3.1
FPN: See FPN Figure 2.50.6.17. (2) Any accessible point on the grounding electrode conductor
(3) The equipment grounding terminal bar within the enclosure
where the branch circuit for the receptacle or branch circuit originates
(4) For grounded systems, the grounded service conductor within
the service equipment enclosure
(5) For ungrounded systems, the grounding terminal bar within
the service equipment enclosure
FPN Figure 2.50.6.17 One Example of a Symbol Used
FPN: See 4.6.1.3(d) for the use of a ground-fault circuit-interrupting type of
to Identify the Grounding Termination Point receptacle.
for an Equipment Grounding Conductor.
2.50.7.3 Short Sections of Raceway. Isolated sections of metal
raceway or cable armor, where required to be grounded, shall be
grounded in accordance with 2.50.7.5.
2.50.7 Methods of Equipment Grounding
2.50.7.5 Equipment Fastened in Place or Connected by Permanent
2.50.7.1 Equipment Grounding Conductor Connections. Wiring Methods (Fixed) — Grounding. Unless grounded by
Equipment grounding conductor connections at the source of connection to the grounded circuit conductor as permitted by
separately derived systems shall be made in accordance with 2.50.2.13, 2.50.7.11, and 2.50.7.13, non–current-carrying metal parts
2.50.2.11(a)(1). Equipment grounding conductor connections at of equipment, raceways, and other enclosures, if grounded, shall be
service equipment shall be made as indicated in 2.50.7.1(a) or (b). For grounded by one of the following methods.
replacement of non–grounding-type receptacles with grounding-type
receptacles and for branch-circuit extensions only in existing
installations that do not have an equipment grounding conductor in the
 (a) Equipment Grounding Conductor Types. By any of the
equipment grounding conductors permitted by 2.50.6.9. Exception: The grounding contacting pole of grounding-type plug-in
ground-fault circuit interrupters shall be permitted to be of the
(b) With Circuit Conductors. By an equipment grounding movable, self-restoring type on circuits operating at not over 250 volts
conductor contained within the same raceway, cable, or otherwise run between any two conductors or over 250 volts between any conductor
with the circuit conductors. and ground

Exception No. 1: As provided in 2.50.7.1(c), the equipment grounding (b) By Means of a Separate Flexible Wire or Strap. By means of
conductor shall be permitted to be run separately from the circuit a separate flexible wire or strap, insulated or bare, protected as well as
conductors. practicable against physical damage, where part of equipment.
Exception No. 2: For dc circuits, the equipment grounding conductor
shall be permitted to be run separately from the circuit conductors. 2.50.7.11 Frames of Ranges and Clothes Dryers. Frames of electric
ranges, wall-mounted ovens, counter-mounted cooking units, clothes
FPN No. 1: See 2.50.5.13 and 2.50.8.9 for equipment bonding jumper dryers, and outlet or junction boxes that are part of the circuit for these
requirements.
FPN No. 2: See 4.0.1.7 for use of cords for fixed equipment. appliances shall be grounded in the manner specified by 2.50.7.5 or
2.50.7.9.
2.50.7.7 Equipment Considered Effectively Grounded. Under the
conditions specified in 2.50.7.7(a) and (b), the non–current-carrying Exception: For existing branch circuit installations only where an
metal parts of the equipment shall be considered effectively grounded. equipment grounding conductor is not present in the outlet or junction
box, the frames of electric ranges, wall-mounted ovens, counter-
(a) Equipment Secured to Grounded Metal Supports. Electrical mounted cooking units, clothes dryers, and outlet or junction boxes
equipment secured to and in electrical contact with a metal rack or that are part of the circuit for these appliances shall be permitted to be
structure provided for its support and grounded by one of the means grounded to the grounded circuit conductor if all the following
indicated in 2.50.7.5. The structural metal frame of a building shall not conditions are met:
be used as the required equipment grounding conductor for ac (1) The supply circuit is 230-volt, single-phase, 2-wire; or
equipment. 400Y/230-volt derived from a 3-phase, 4-wire, wye-connected system.
(2) The grounded conductor is not smaller than 5.5 mm2
(b) Metal Car Frames. Metal car frames supported by metal (2.6 mm dia.) copper or 8.0 mm2 (3.2 mm dia.) aluminum.
hoisting cables attached to or running over metal sheaves or drums of (3) The grounded conductor is insulated, or the grounded
elevator machines that are grounded by one of the methods indicated conductor is uninsulated and part of a Type SE service-entrance cable
in 2.50.7.5. and the branch circuit originates at the service equipment.
(4) Grounding contacts of receptacles furnished as part of the
2.50.7.9 Cord-and-Plug-Connected Equipment. Non–current- equipment are bonded to the equipment.
carrying metal parts of cord-and-plug-connected equipment, if
grounded, shall be grounded by one of the methods in 2.50.7.9(a) or 2.50.7.13 Use of Grounded Circuit Conductor for Grounding
(b). Equipment.

(a) By Means of an Equipment Grounding Conductor. By means (a) Supply-Side Equipment. A grounded circuit conductor shall be
of an equipment grounding conductor run with the power supply permitted to ground non–current-carrying metal parts of equipment,
conductors in a cable assembly or flexible cord properly terminated in raceways, and other enclosures at any of the following locations:
a grounding-type attachment plug with one fixed grounding contact.
 (1) On the supply side or within the enclosure of the ac service- 2.50.7.17 Connecting Receptacle Grounding Terminal to Box. An
disconnecting means equipment bonding jumper shall be used to connect the grounding
(2) On the supply side or within the enclosure of the main terminal of a grounding-type receptacle to a grounded box unless
disconnecting means for separate buildings as provided in 2.50.2.13(b) grounded as in 2.50.7.17(a) through (d).
(3) On the supply side or within the enclosure of the main
disconnecting means or overcurrent devices of a separately derived (a) Surface Mounted Box. Where the box is mounted on the
system where permitted by 2.50.2.11(a)(1) surface, direct metal-to-metal contact between the device yoke and the
box or a contact yoke or device that complies with 2.50.7.17(b) shall
(b) Load-Side Equipment. Except as permitted in 2.50.2.11(a)(1) be permitted to ground the receptacle to the box. At least one of the
and 2.50.2.13(b), a grounded circuit conductor shall not be used for insulating washers shall be removed from receptacles that do not have
grounding non–current-carrying metal parts of equipment on the load a contact yoke or device that complies with 2.50.7.17(b) to ensure
side of the service disconnecting means or on the load side of a direct metal-to-metal contact. This provision shall not apply to cover-
separately derived system disconnecting means or the overcurrent mounted receptacles unless the box and cover combination are listed
devices for a separately derived system not having a main as providing satisfactory ground continuity between the box and the
disconnecting means. receptacle.

Exception No. 1: The frames of ranges, wall-mounted ovens, counter- (b) Contact Devices or Yokes. Contact devices or yokes designed
mounted cooking units, and clothes dryers under the conditions and listed as self-grounding shall be permitted in conjunction with the
permitted for existing installations by 2.50.7.11 shall be permitted to supporting screws to establish the grounding circuit between the
be grounded by a grounded circuit conductor. device yoke and flush-type boxes.
Exception No. 2: It shall be permissible to ground meter enclosures by
connection to the grounded circuit conductor on the load side of the (c) Floor Boxes. Floor boxes designed for and listed as providing
service disconnect where all of the following conditions apply: satisfactory ground continuity between the box and the device shall be
(1) No service ground-fault protection is installed. permitted.
(2) All meter socket enclosures are located immediately adjacent
to the service disconnecting means. (d) Isolated Receptacles. Where required for the reduction of
(3) The size of the grounded circuit conductor is not smaller than electrical noise (electromagnetic interference) on the grounding
the size specified in Table 2.50.6.13 for equipment grounding circuit, a receptacle in which the grounding terminal is purposely
conductors. insulated from the receptacle mounting means shall be permitted. The
Exception No. 3: Direct-current systems shall be permitted to be receptacle grounding terminal shall be grounded by an insulated
grounded on the load side of the disconnecting means or overcurrent equipment grounding conductor run with the circuit conductors. This
device in accordance with 2.50.8.5. grounding conductor shall be permitted to pass through one or more
Exception No. 4: Electrode-type boilers operating at over 600 volts panelboards without connection to the panelboard grounding terminal
shall be grounded as required in 4.90.5.3(e)(1) and 4.90.5.5. as permitted in 4.8.3.11, Exception, so as to terminate within the same
building or structure directly at an equipment grounding conductor
2.50.7.15 Multiple Circuit Connections. Where equipment is terminal of the applicable derived system or service.
required to be grounded and is supplied by separate connection to
more than one circuit or grounded premises wiring system, a means FPN: Use of an isolated equipment grounding conductor does not relieve the
requirement for grounding the raceway system and outlet box.
for grounding shall be provided for each such connection as specified
in 2.50.7.5 and 2.50.7.9.
2.50.7.19 Continuity and Attachment of Equipment Grounding 2.50.8.3 Direct-Current Circuits and Systems to Be Grounded.
Conductors to Boxes. Where circuit conductors are spliced within a Direct-current circuits and systems shall be grounded as provided for
box, or terminated on equipment within or supported by a box, any in 2.50.8.3(a) and (b).
equipment grounding conductor(s) associated with those circuit
conductors shall be spliced or joined within the box or to the box with (a) Two-Wire, Direct-Current Systems. A 2-wire, dc system
devices suitable for the use in accordance with 2.50.7.19(a) through supplying premises wiring and operating at greater than 50 volts but
(e). not greater than 300 volts shall be grounded.

Exception: The equipment grounding conductor permitted in Exception No. 1: A system equipped with a ground detector and
2.50.7.17(d) shall not be required to be connected to the other supplying only industrial equipment in limited areas shall not be
equipment grounding conductors or to the box. required to be grounded.
Exception No. 2: A rectifier-derived dc system supplied from an ac
(a) Connections. Connections and splices shall be made in system complying with 2.50.2.1 shall not be required to be grounded.
accordance with 110.14(b) except that insulation shall not be required. Exception No. 3: Direct-current fire alarm circuits having a
maximum current of 0.030 amperes as specified in Part 7.60.3 shall
(b) Grounding Continuity. The arrangement of grounding not be required to be grounded.
connections shall be such that the disconnection or the removal of a
receptacle, luminaire (fixture), or other device fed from the box does (b) Three-Wire, Direct-Current Systems. The neutral conductor
not interfere with or interrupt the grounding continuity. of all 3-wire, dc systems supplying premises wiring shall be grounded.

(c) Metal Boxes. A connection shall be made between the one or 2.50.8.5 Point of Connection for Direct-Current Systems.
more equipment grounding conductors and a metal box by means of a
grounding screw that shall be used for no other purpose or a listed (a) Off-Premises Source. Direct-current systems to be grounded
grounding device. and supplied from an off-premises source shall have the grounding
connection made at one or more supply stations. A grounding
(d) Nonmetallic Boxes. One or more equipment grounding connection shall not be made at individual services or at any point on
conductors brought into a nonmetallic outlet box shall be arranged the premises wiring.
such that a connection can be made to any fitting or device in that box
requiring grounding. (b) On-Premises Source. Where the dc system source is located on
the premises, a grounding connection shall be made at one of the
(e) Solder. Connections depending solely on solder shall not be following:
used.
(1) The source
2.50.8 Direct-Current Systems (2) The first system disconnection means or overcurrent device
(3) By other means that accomplish equivalent system protection
2.50.8.1 General. Direct-current systems shall comply with Part and that utilize equipment listed and identified for the use
2.50.8 and other sections of Article 2.50 not specifically intended for
ac systems. 2.50.8.7 Size of Direct-Current Grounding Electrode Conductor.
The size of the grounding electrode conductor for a dc system shall be
as specified in 2.50.8.7(a) through (e).
 (a) Not Smaller Than the Neutral Conductor. Where the dc metal parts of equipment. The grounding electrode conductor
system consists of a 3-wire balancer set or a balancer winding with connection shall be to the metal enclosure at any point on the
overcurrent protection as provided in 445.12(d), the grounding separately derived system from the source to the first system
electrode conductor shall not be smaller than the neutral conductor and disconnecting means or overcurrent device, or it shall be made at the
not smaller than 8.0 mm2 (3.2 mm dia.) copper or 14 mm2 aluminum. source of a separately derived system that has no disconnecting means
or overcurrent devices.
(b) Not Smaller Than the Largest Conductor. Where the dc The size of the grounding electrode conductor shall be in accordance
system is other than as in 2.50.8.7(a), the grounding electrode with 2.50.8.7.
conductor shall not be smaller than the largest conductor supplied by
the system, and not smaller than 8.0 mm2 (3.2 mm dia.) copper or 14 2.50.9 Instruments, Meters, and Relays
mm2 aluminum.
2.50.9.1 Instrument Transformer Circuits. Secondary circuits of
(c) Connected to Rod, Pipe, or Plate Electrodes. Where connected current and potential instrument transformers shall be grounded where
to rod, pipe, or plate electrodes as in 2.50.3.3(a)(5) or 2.50.3.3(a)(6), the primary windings are connected to circuits of 300 volts or more to
that portion of the grounding electrode conductor that is the sole ground and, where on switchboards, shall be grounded irrespective of
connection to the grounding electrode shall not be required to be larger voltage.
than 14 mm2 copper wire or 22 mm2 aluminum wire.
Exception: Circuits where the primary windings are connected to
(d) Connected to a Concrete-Encased Electrode. Where circuits of less than 1000 volts with no live parts or wiring exposed or
connected to a concrete-encased electrode as in 2.50.3.3(a)(3), that accessible to other than licensed electrical practitioner or non
portion of the grounding electrode conductor that is the sole licensed electrical practitioner under the supervision of a licensed
connection to the grounding electrode shall not be required to be larger electrical practitioner.
than 22 mm2 copper wire.
2.50.9.3 Instrument Transformer Cases. Cases or frames of
(e) Connected to a Ground Ring. Where connected to a ground instrument transformers shall be grounded where accessible to other
ring as in 2.50.3.3(a)(4), that portion of the grounding electrode than licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical
conductor that is the sole connection to the grounding electrode shall practitioner under the supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner.
not be required to be larger than the conductor used for the ground
ring. Exception: Cases or frames of current transformers, the primaries of
which are not over 150 volts to ground and that are used exclusively
2.50.8.9 Direct-Current Bonding Jumper. For dc systems, the size to supply current to meters.
of the bonding jumper shall not be smaller than the system grounding
electrode conductor specified in 2.50.8.7. 2.50.9.5 Cases of Instruments, Meters, and Relays Operating at
Less Than 1000 Volts. Instruments, meters, and relays operating with
2.50.8.10 Ungrounded Direct-Current Separately Derived windings or working parts at less than 1000 volts shall be grounded as
Systems. Except as otherwise permitted in 2.50.2.15 for portable and specified in 2.50.9.5(a), (b), or (c).
vehicle-mounted generators, an ungrounded dc separately derived
system supplied from a stand-alone power source (such as an engine– (a) Not on Switchboards. Instruments, meters, and relays not
generator set) shall have a grounding electrode conductor connected to located on switchboards, operating with windings or working parts at
an electrode that complies with Part 2.50.3 to provide for grounding of 300 volts or more to ground, and accessible to other than licensed
metal enclosures, raceways, cables, and exposed non–current-carrying electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner under the
supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner, shall have the cases
and other exposed metal parts grounded. 2.50.10.3 Derived Neutral Systems. A system neutral derived from a
grounding transformer shall be permitted to be used for grounding
(b) On Dead-Front Switchboards. Instruments, meters, and relays high-voltage systems.
(whether operated from current and potential transformers or
connected directly in the circuit) on switchboards having no live parts 2.50.10.5 Solidly Grounded Neutral Systems. Solidly grounded
on the front of the panels shall have the cases grounded. neutral systems shall be permitted to be either single point grounded or
multigrounded neutral.
(c) On Live-Front Switchboards. Instruments, meters, and relays
(whether operated from current and potential transformers or (a) Neutral Conductor.
connected directly in the circuit) on switchboards having exposed live
parts on the front of panels shall not have their cases grounded. Mats (1) Insulation Level. The minimum insulation level for neutral
of insulating rubber or other suitable floor insulation shall be provided conductors of solidly grounded systems shall be 600 volts.
for the operator where the voltage to ground exceeds 150.
Exception No. 1: Bare copper conductors shall be permitted to be
2.50.9.7 Cases of Instruments, Meters, and Relays — Operating used for the neutral of service entrances and the neutral of direct-
Voltage 1 kV and Over. Where instruments, meters, and relays have buried portions of feeders.
current-carrying parts of 1 kV and over to ground, they shall be Exception No. 2: Bare conductors shall be permitted for the neutral of
isolated by elevation or protected by suitable barriers, grounded metal, overhead portions installed outdoors.
or insulating covers or guards. Their cases shall not be grounded. Exception No. 3: The neutral grounded conductor shall be permitted
to be a bare conductor if isolated from phase conductors and
Exception: Cases of electrostatic ground detectors where the internal protected from physical damage.
ground segments of the instrument are connected to the instrument
case and grounded and the ground detector is isolated by elevation. FPN: See 2.25.1.4 for conductor covering where within 3 000 mm of any building
or other structure.

2.50.9.9 Instrument Grounding Conductor. The grounding

(2) Ampacity. The neutral conductor shall be of sufficient
conductor for secondary circuits of instrument transformers and for
ampacity for the load imposed on the conductor but not less than 33
instrument cases shall not be smaller than 3.5 mm2 (2.0 mm dia.)
percent of the ampacity of the phase conductors.
copper or 5.5 mm2 (2.6 mm dia.) aluminum. Cases of instrument
transformers, instruments, meters, and relays that are mounted directly
Exception: In industrial and commercial premises under engineering
on grounded metal surfaces of enclosures or grounded metal
supervision, it shall be permissible to size the ampacity of the neutral
switchboard panels shall be considered to be grounded, and no
conductor to not less than 20 percent of the ampacity of the phase
additional grounding conductor shall be required.
conductor.
2.50.10 Grounding of Systems and Circuits of 1 kV
(b) Single Point Grounded System. Where a single point grounded
and Over (High Voltage)
neutral system is used, the following shall apply:
2.50.10.1 General. Where high-voltage systems are grounded, they
(1) A single point grounded system shall be permitted to be
shall comply with all applicable provisions of the preceding sections
supplied from (a) or (b):
of this article and with 2.50.10.3 through 2.50.10.11, which
supplement and modify the preceding sections.
 a. A separately derived system (4) The maximum distance between any two adjacent electrodes
b. A multigrounded neutral system with an equipment shall not be more than 400 m (1300 ft).
grounding conductor connected to the multigrounded neutral at the (5) In a multigrounded shielded cable system, the shielding shall
source of the single point grounded system be grounded at each cable joint that is exposed to personnel contact.

(2) A grounding electrode shall be provided for the system. 2.50.10.7 Impedance Grounded Neutral Systems. Impedance
(3) A grounding electrode conductor shall connect the grounding grounded neutral systems in which a grounding impedance, usually a
electrode to the system neutral. resistor, limits the ground-fault current, shall be permitted where all of
(4) A bonding jumper shall connect the equipment grounding the following conditions are met:
conductor to the grounding electrode conductor.
(5) An equipment bonding conductor shall be provided to each (1) The conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that
building, structure, and equipment enclosure. only licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical
(6) A neutral shall only be required where phase to neutral loads practitioner under the supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner
are supplied. will service the installation.
(7) The neutral, where provided, shall be insulated and isolated (2) Ground detectors are installed on the system.
from earth except at one location. (3) Line-to-neutral loads are not served.
(8) An equipment grounding conductor shall be run with the
phase conductors and shall comply with (a), (b), and (c): Impedance grounded neutral systems shall comply with the provisions
of 2.50.10.7(a) through (d).
a. Shall not carry continuous load
b. May be bare or insulated (a) Location. The grounding impedance shall be inserted in the
c. Shall have sufficient ampacity for fault current duty grounding conductor between the grounding electrode of the supply
system and the neutral point of the supply transformer or generator.
(c) Multigrounded Neutral Systems. Where a multigrounded
neutral system is used, the following shall apply: (b) Identified and Insulated. The neutral conductor of an
(1) The neutral of a solidly grounded neutral system shall be impedance grounded neutral system shall be identified, as well as fully
permitted to be grounded at more than one point. Grounding shall be insulated with the same insulation as the phase conductors.
permitted at one or more of the following locations:
(c) System Neutral Connection. The system neutral shall not be
a. Transformers supplying conductors to a building or other connected to ground, except through the neutral grounding impedance.
structure
b. Underground circuits where the neutral is exposed (d) Equipment Grounding Conductors. Equipment grounding
c. Overhead circuits installed outdoors conductors shall be permitted to be bare and shall be electrically
connected to the ground bus and grounding electrode conductor.
(2) The multigrounded neutral conductor shall be grounded at
each transformer and at other additional locations by connection to a 2.50.10.9 Grounding of Systems Supplying Portable or Mobile
made or existing electrode. Equipment. Systems supplying portable or mobile high-voltage
(3) At least one grounding electrode shall be installed and equipment, other than substations installed on a temporary basis, shall
connected to the multigrounded neutral circuit conductor every 400 m comply with 2.50.10.9(a) through (f).
(1300 ft).
 (a) Portable or Mobile Equipment. Portable or mobile high- Exception: Where isolated from ground and located so as to prevent
voltage equipment shall be supplied from a system having its neutral any person who can make contact with ground from contacting such
grounded through an impedance. Where a delta-connected high- metal parts when the equipment is energized.
voltage system is used to supply portable or mobile equipment, a
system neutral shall be derived. Grounding conductors not an integral part of a cable assembly shall
not be smaller than 14 mm2 copper or 22 mm2 aluminum.
(b) Exposed Non–Current-Carrying Metal Parts. Exposed non–
current-carrying metal parts of portable or mobile equipment shall be FPN: See 2.50.6.1, Exception No. 2, for pole-mounted distribution apparatus.
connected by an equipment grounding conductor to the point at which
the system neutral impedance is grounded.
ARTICLE 2.80 — SURGE ARRESTERS
(c) Ground-Fault Current. The voltage developed between the
portable or mobile equipment frame and ground by the flow of 2.80.1 General
maximum ground-fault current shall not exceed 100 volts.
2.80.1.1 Scope. This article covers general requirements, installation
(d) Ground-Fault Detection and Relaying. Ground-fault detection requirements, and connection requirements for surge arresters installed
and relaying shall be provided to automatically de-energize any high- on premises wiring systems.
voltage system component that has developed a ground fault. The
continuity of the equipment grounding conductor shall be continuously 2.80.1.2 Definition. Surge Arrester. A protective device for limiting
monitored so as to de-energize automatically the high-voltage circuit surge voltages by discharging or bypassing surge current, and it also
to the portable or mobile equipment upon loss of continuity of the prevents continued flow of follow current while remaining capable of
equipment grounding conductor. repeating these functions.

(e) Isolation. The grounding electrode to which the portable or 2.80.1.3 Number Required. Where used at a point on a circuit, a
mobile equipment system neutral impedance is connected shall be surge arrester shall be connected to each ungrounded conductor. A
isolated from and separated in the ground by at least 6 000 mm from single installation of such surge arresters shall be permitted to protect
any other system or equipment grounding electrode, and there shall be a number of interconnected circuits, provided that no circuit is
no direct connection between the grounding electrodes, such as buried exposed to surges while disconnected from the surge arresters.
pipe and fence, and so forth.
2.80.1.4 Surge Arrester Selection.
(f) Trailing Cable and Couplers. High-voltage trailing cable and
couplers for interconnection of portable or mobile equipment shall (a) Circuits of Less Than 1 000 Volts. Surge arresters installed on
meet the requirements of Part 4.0.3 for cables and 4.90.4.5 for a circuit of less than 1 000 volts shall comply with all of the following:
couplers.
(1) The rating of the surge arrester shall be equal to or greater
2.50.10.11 Grounding of Equipment. All non–current-carrying metal than the maximum continuous phase-to-ground power frequency
parts of fixed, portable, and mobile equipment and associated fences, voltage available at the point of application.
housings, enclosures, and supporting structures shall be grounded. (2) Surge arresters installed on circuits of less than 1 000 volts
shall be listed.
 (3) Surge arresters shall be marked with a short circuit current (1) Grounded service conductor
rating and shall not be installed at a point on the system where the (2) Grounding electrode conductor
available fault current is in excess of that rating. (3) Grounding electrode for the service
(4) Surge arresters shall not be installed on ungrounded systems, (4) Equipment grounding terminal in the service equipment
impedance grounded systems, or corner grounded delta systems unless
listed specifically for use on these systems. 2.80.3.2 Installed on the Load Side Services of Less Than 1000
Volts. Line and ground connecting conductors shall not be smaller
(b) Circuits of 1 kV and Over — Silicon Carbide Types. The than 2.0 mm2 (1.6 mm dia.) copper or 3.5 mm2 (2.0 mm dia.)
rating of a silicon carbide-type surge arrester shall be not less than 125 aluminum. A surge arrester shall be permitted to be connected
percent of the maximum continuous phase-to-ground voltage available between any two conductors — ungrounded conductor(s), grounded
at the point of application. conductor, grounding conductor. The grounded conductor and the
grounding conductor shall be interconnected only by the normal
FPN No. 1: For further information on surge arresters, see ANSI/IEEE C62.1-1989, operation of the surge arrester during a surge.
Standard for Gapped Silicon-Carbide Surge Arresters for AC Power Circuits;
ANSI/IEEE C62.2-1987, Guide for the Application of Gapped Silicon-Carbide
Surge Arresters for Alternating-Current Systems; ANSI/IEEE C62.11-1993, 2.80.3.3 Circuits of 1 kV and Over — Surge-Arrester Conductors.
Standard for Metal-Oxide Surge Arresters for Alternating-Current Power Circuits; The conductor between the surge arrester and the line and the surge
and ANSI/IEEE C62.22-1991, Guide for the Application of Metal-Oxide Surge
Arresters for Alternating-Current Systems. arrester and the grounding connection shall not be smaller than 14
FPN No. 2: The selection of a properly rated metal oxide arrester is based on mm2 copper or aluminum.
considerations of maximum continuous operating voltage and the magnitude and
duration of overvoltages at the arrester location as affected by phase-to-ground
faults, system grounding techniques, switching surges, and other causes. See the 2.80.3.4 Circuits of 1 kV and Over — Interconnections. The
manufacturer’s application rules for selection of the specific arrester to be used at grounding conductor of a surge arrester protecting a transformer that
a particular location.
supplies a secondary distribution system shall be interconnected as
specified in 2.80.3.4(a), (b), or (c).
2.80.2 Installation
(a) Metallic Interconnections. A metallic interconnection shall be
2.80.2.1 Location. Surge arresters shall be permitted to be located
made to the secondary grounded circuit conductor or the secondary
indoors or outdoors. Surge arresters shall be made inaccessible to
circuit grounding conductor provided that, in addition to the direct
unqualified persons, unless listed for installation in accessible
grounding connection at the surge arrester, the following occurs:
locations.
(1) The grounded conductor of the secondary has elsewhere a
2.80.2.2 Routing of Surge Arrester Connections. The conductor
grounding connection to a continuous metal underground water piping
used to connect the surge arrester to line or bus and to ground shall not
system. However, in urban water-pipe areas where there are at least
be any longer than necessary and shall avoid unnecessary bends.
four water-pipe connections on the neutral and not fewer than four
such connections in each mile of neutral, the metallic interconnection
2.80.3 Connecting Surge Arresters
shall be permitted to be made to the secondary neutral with omission
of the direct grounding connection at the surge arrester.
2.80.3.1 Installed at Services of Less Than 1 000 Volts. Line and
(2) The grounded conductor of the secondary system is a part of a
ground connecting conductors shall not be smaller than 2.0 mm2
multiground neutral system or static wire of which the primary neutral
(1.6 mm dia.) copper or 3.5 mm2 (2.0 mm dia.) aluminum. The arrester
or static wire has at least four ground connections in each mile of line
grounding conductor shall be connected to one of the following:
in addition to a ground at each service.
 (b) Through Spark Gap or Device. Where the surge arrester 2.85.1.2 Definition.
grounding conductor is not connected as in 2.80.3.4(a) or where the
secondary is not grounded as in 2.80.3.4(a) but is otherwise grounded Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor (TVSS). A protective device
as in 2.50.3.3, an interconnection shall be made through a spark gap or for limiting transient voltages by diverting or limiting surge current; it
listed device as follows: also prevents continued flow of follow current while remaining
capable of repeating these functions.
(1) For ungrounded or unigrounded primary systems, the spark
gap or listed device shall have a 60-Hz breakdown voltage of at least 2.85.1.3 Uses Not Permitted. A TVSS device shall not be installed in
twice the primary circuit voltage but not necessarily more than 10 kV, the following:
and there shall be at least one other ground on the grounded conductor
of the secondary that is not less than 6 000 mm distant from the surge (1) Circuits exceeding 600 volts
arrester grounding electrode. (2) On ungrounded systems, impedance grounded systems, or
(2) For multigrounded neutral primary systems, the spark gap or corner grounded delta systems unless listed specifically for use on
listed device shall have a 60-Hz breakdown of not more than 3 kV, these systems.
and there shall be at least one other ground on the grounded conductor (3) Where the rating of the TVSS is less than the maximum
of the secondary that is not less than 6 000 mm distant from the surge continuous phase-to-ground power frequency voltage available at the
arrester grounding electrode. point of application

(c) By Special Permission. An interconnection of the surge arrester FPN: For further information on TVSSs, see NEMA LS 1-1992, Standard for Low
Voltage Surge Suppression Devices. The selection of a properly rated TVSS is
ground and the secondary neutral, other than as provided in 2.80.3.4(a) based on criteria such as maximum continuous operating voltage, the magnitude
or (b), shall be permitted to be made only by special permission. and duration of overvoltages at the suppressor location as affected by phase-to-
ground faults, system grounding techniques, and switching surges.

2.80.3.5 Grounding. Except as indicated in this article, surge arrester

grounding connections shall be made as specified in Article 2.50. 2.85.1.4 Number Required. Where used at a point on a circuit, the
Grounding conductors shall not be run in metal enclosures unless TVSS shall be connected to each ungrounded conductor.
bonded to both ends of such enclosure.
2.85.1.5 Listing. A TVSS shall be a listed device.

ARTICLE 285 — TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE 2.85.1.6 Short Circuit Current Rating. The TVSS shall be marked
SUPPRESSORS: TVSSS with a short circuit current rating and shall not be installed at a point
on the system where the available fault current is in excess of that
2.85.1 General rating. This marking requirement shall not apply to receptacles.

2.85.1.1 Scope. This article covers general requirements, installation 2.85.2 Installation
requirements, and connection requirements for transient voltage surge
suppressors (TVSSs) permanently installed on premises wiring 2.85.2.1 Location. TVSSs shall be permitted to be located indoors or
systems. outdoors and shall be made inaccessible to unqualified persons, unless
listed for installation in accessible locations.
2.85.2.2 Routing of Connections. The conductors used to connect the
TVSS to the line or bus and to ground shall not be any longer than
necessary and shall avoid unnecessary bends.

2.85.3 Connecting Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors

2.85.3.1 Connection. Where a TVSS is installed, it shall comply with

2.85.3.1(a) through (c).

(a) Location.

(1) Service Supplied Building or Structure. The transient voltage

surge suppressor shall be connected on the load side of a service
disconnect overcurrent device required in 2.30.7.2, unless installed in
accordance with 2.30.6.13(8).
(2) Feeder Supplied Building or Structure. The transient voltage
surge suppressor shall be connected on the load side of the first
overcurrent device at the building or structure.

Exception to (1) and (2): Where the TVSS is also listed as a surge
arrester, the connection shall be as permitted by Article 2.80.

(3) Separately Derived System. The TVSS shall be connected on

the load side of the first overcurrent device in a separately derived
system.

(b) Conductor Size. Line and ground connecting conductors shall

not be smaller than 2.0 mm2 (1.6 mm dia.) copper or 3.5 mm2
(2.0 mm dia.) aluminum.

(c) Connection Between Conductors. A TVSS shall be permitted

to be connected between any two conductors — ungrounded
conductor(s), grounded conductor, grounding conductor. The
grounded conductor and the grounding conductor shall be
interconnected only by the normal operation of the TVSS during a
surge.

2.85.3.5 Grounding. Grounding conductors shall not be run in metal

enclosures unless bonded to both ends of such enclosure.
 Table 3.0.1.1(c) Metric Designator and Trade Sizes
Metric Designator Trade Size
12 ⅜
16 ½
Chapter 3. Wiring Methods and Materials 21 ¾
27 1
35 1¼
ARTICLE 3.0 — WIRING METHODS 41 1½
53 2
3.0.1 General Requirements 63 2½
78 3
3.0.1.1 Scope. 91 3½
103 4
(a) All Wiring Installations. This article covers wiring methods for 129 5
all wiring installations unless modified by other articles. 155 6
Note: The metric designators and trade sizes are for identification purposes only and
are not actual dimensions.
(b) Integral Parts of Equipment. The provisions of this article are
not intended to apply to the conductors that form an integral part of
equipment, such as motors, controllers, motor control centers, or
3.0.1.3 Conductors.
factory assembled control equipment or listed utilization equipment.
(a) Single Conductors. Single conductors specified in Table
(c) Metric Designators and Trade Sizes. Metric designators and
3.10.1.13 shall only be installed where part of a recognized wiring
trade sizes for conduit, tubing, and associated fittings and accessories
method of Chapter 3.
shall be as designated in Table 3.0.1.1(c).
Exception: Individual conductors shall be permitted where installed
3.0.1.2 Limitations.
as separate overhead conductors in accordance with 2.25.1.6.
(a) Voltage. Wiring methods specified in Chapter 3 shall be used for
(b) Conductors of the Same Circuit. All conductors of the same
600 volts, nominal, or less where not specifically limited in some
circuit and, where used, the grounded conductor and all equipment
section of Chapter 3. They shall be permitted for over 600 volts,
grounding conductors and bonding conductors shall be contained
nominal, where specifically permitted elsewhere in this Code.
within the same raceway, auxiliary gutter, cable tray, cablebus
assembly, trench, cable, or cord, unless otherwise permitted in
(b) Temperature. Temperature limitation of conductors shall be in
accordance with 3.0.1.3(b)(1) through (b)(4).
accordance with 3.10.1.10.
(1) Paralleled Installations. Conductors shall be permitted to be
run in parallel in accordance with the provisions of 3.10.1.4. The
requirement to run all circuit conductors within the same raceway,
auxiliary gutter, cable tray, trench, cable, or cord shall apply separately
to each portion of the paralleled installation, and the equipment
grounding conductors shall comply with the provisions of 2.50.6.3.
Parallel runs in cable tray shall comply with the provisions of
3.92.1.8(d). (2) Over 600 Volts, Nominal. Conductors of circuits rated over
600 volts, nominal, shall not occupy the same equipment wiring
Exception: Conductors installed in nonmetallic raceways run enclosure, cable, or raceway with conductors of circuits rated 600
underground shall be permitted to be arranged as isolated phase volts, nominal, or less unless otherwise permitted in (c)(2)(a) through
installations. The raceways shall be installed in close proximity, and (c)(2)(e).
the conductors shall comply with the provisions of 3.0.1.20(b).
a. Secondary wiring to electric-discharge lamps of 1000 volts or
(2) Grounding and Bonding Conductors. Equipment grounding less, if insulated for the secondary voltage involved, shall be permitted
conductors shall be permitted to be installed outside a raceway or to occupy the same luminaire (fixture), sign, or outline lighting
cable assembly where in accordance with the provisions of 2.50.7.1(c) enclosure as the branch-circuit conductors.
for certain existing installations or in accordance with 2.50.7.5(b), b. Primary leads of electric-discharge lamp ballasts insulated for
Exception No. 2, for dc circuits. Equipment bonding conductors shall the primary voltage of the ballast, where contained within the
be permitted to be installed on the outside of raceways in accordance individual wiring enclosure, shall be permitted to occupy the same
with 2.50.5.3(e). luminaire (fixture), sign, or outline lighting enclosure as the branch-
(3) Nonferrous Wiring Methods. Conductors in wiring methods circuit conductors.
with a nonmetallic or other nonmagnetic sheath, where run in different c. Excitation, control, relay, and ammeter conductors used in
raceways, auxiliary gutters, cable trays, trenches, cables, or cords, connection with any individual motor or starter shall be permitted to
shall comply with the provisions of 3.0.1.20(b). Conductors in single- occupy the same enclosure as the motor-circuit conductors.
conductor Type MI cable with a nonmagnetic sheath shall comply d. In motors, switchgear and control assemblies, and similar
with the provisions of 3.32.2.22. Conductors of single-conductor Type equipment, conductors of different voltage ratings shall be permitted.
MC cable with a nonmagnetic sheath shall comply with the provisions e. In manholes, if the conductors of each system are
of 3.30.2.22, 3.30.3.13, and 3.0.1.20(b). permanently and effectively separated from the conductors of the other
(4) Enclosures. Where an auxiliary gutter runs between a column- systems and securely fastened to racks, insulators, or other approved
width panelboard and a pull box, and the pull box includes neutral supports, conductors of different voltage ratings shall be permitted.
terminations, the neutral conductors of circuits supplied from the
panelboard shall be permitted to originate in the pull box. Conductors having nonshielded insulation and operating at
different voltage levels shall not occupy the same enclosure, cable, or
(c) Conductors of Different Systems. raceway.

(1) 600 Volts, Nominal, or Less. Conductors of circuits rated 600 3.0.1.4 Protection Against Physical Damage. Where subject to
volts, nominal, or less, ac circuits, and dc circuits shall be permitted to physical damage, conductors shall be protected.
occupy the same equipment wiring enclosure, cable, or raceway. All
conductors shall have an insulation rating equal to at least the (a) Cables and Raceways Through Wood Members.
maximum circuit voltage applied to any conductor within the
enclosure, cable, or raceway. (1) Bored Holes. In both exposed and concealed locations, where a
cable- or raceway-type wiring method is installed through bored holes
Exception: For solar photovoltaic systems in accordance with in joists, rafters, or wood members, holes shall be bored so that the
6.90.1.4(b). edge of the hole is not less than 30 mm from the nearest edge of the
wood member. Where this distance cannot be maintained, the cable or
FPN: See 7.25.3.15(a) for Class 2 and Class 3 circuit conductors. raceway shall be protected from penetration by screws or nails by a
steel plate or bushing, at least 1.60 mm thick, and of appropriate Exception: A listed and marked steel plate less than 1.60 mm thick
length and width installed to cover the area of the wiring. that provides equal or better protection against nail or screw
penetration shall be permitted.
Exception No. 1: Steel plates shall not be required to protect rigid
metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit, rigid nonmetallic conduit, (c) Cables Through Spaces Behind Panels Designed to Allow
or electrical metallic tubing. Access. Cables or raceway-type wiring methods, installed behind
Exception No. 2: A listed and marked steel plate less than 1.60 mm panels designed to allow access, shall be supported according to their
thick that provides equal or better protection against nail or screw applicable articles.
penetration shall be permitted.
(d) Cables and Raceways Parallel to Framing Members and
(2) Notches in Wood. Where there is no objection because of Furring Strips. In both exposed and concealed locations, where a
weakening the building structure, in both exposed and concealed cable- or raceway-type wiring method is installed parallel to framing
locations, cables or raceways shall be permitted to be laid in notches in members, such as joists, rafters, or studs, or is installed parallel to
wood studs, joists, rafters, or other wood members where the cable or furring strips, the cable or raceway shall be installed and supported so
raceway at those points is protected against nails or screws by a steel that the nearest outside surface of the cable or raceway is not less than
plate at least 1.60 mm thick, and of appropriate length and width, 30 mm from the nearest edge of the framing member or furring strips
installed to cover the area of the wiring. The steel plate shall be where nails or screws are likely to penetrate. Where this distance
installed before the building finish is applied. cannot be maintained, the cable or raceway shall be protected from
penetration by nails or screws by a steel plate, sleeve, or equivalent at
Exception No. 1: Steel plates shall not be required to protect rigid least 1.60 mm thick.
metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit, rigid nonmetallic conduit,
or electrical metallic tubing. Exception No. 1: Steel plates, sleeves, or the equivalent shall not be
Exception No. 2: A listed and marked steel plate less than 1.60 mm required to protect rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit,
thick that provides equal or better protection against nail or screw rigid nonmetallic conduit, or electrical metallic tubing.
penetration shall be permitted. Exception No. 2: For concealed work in finished buildings, or
finished panels for prefabricated buildings where such supporting is
(b) Nonmetallic-Sheathed Cables and Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing impracticable, it shall be permissible to fish the cables between access
Through Metal Framing Members. points.
Exception No. 3: A listed and marked steel plate less than 1.60 mm
(1) Nonmetallic-Sheathed Cable. In both exposed and concealed thick that provides equal or better protection against nail or screw
locations where nonmetallic-sheathed cables pass through either penetration shall be permitted.
factory or field punched, cut, or drilled slots or holes in metal
members, the cable shall be protected by listed bushings or listed (e) Cables and Raceways Installed in Shallow Grooves. Cable- or
grommets covering all metal edges that are securely fastened in the raceway-type wiring methods installed in a groove, to be covered by
opening prior to installation of the cable. wallboard, siding, paneling, carpeting, or similar finish, shall be
(2) Nonmetallic-Sheathed Cable and Electrical Nonmetallic protected by 1.60 mm thick steel plate, sleeve, or equivalent or by not
Tubing. Where nails or screws are likely to penetrate nonmetallic- less than 30 mm free space for the full length of the groove in which
sheathed cable or electrical nonmetallic tubing, a steel sleeve, steel the cable or raceway is installed.
plate, or steel clip not less than 1.60 mm in thickness shall be used to
protect the cable or tubing.
Exception No. 1: Steel plates, sleeves, or the equivalent shall not be (1) Emerging from Grade. Direct-buried conductors and
required to protect rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit, enclosures emerging from grade shall be protected by enclosures or
rigid nonmetallic conduit, or electrical metallic tubing. raceways extending from the minimum cover distance below grade
Exception No. 2: A listed and marked steel plate less than 1.60 mm required by 3.0.1.5(a) to a point at least 2 400 mm above finished
thick that provides equal or better protection against nail or screw grade. In no case shall the protection be required to exceed 450 mm
penetration shall be permitted. below finished grade.
(2) Conductors Entering Buildings. Conductors entering a building
(f) Insulated Fittings. Where raceways containing ungrounded shall be protected to the point of entrance.
conductors 22 mm2 or larger enter a cabinet, box enclosure, or (3) Service Conductors. Underground service conductors that are
raceway, the conductors shall be protected by a substantial fitting not encased in concrete and that are buried 450 mm or more below
providing a smoothly rounded insulating surface, unless the grade shall have their location identified by a warning ribbon that is
conductors are separated from the fitting or raceway by substantial placed in the trench at least 300 mm above the underground
insulating material that is securely fastened in place. installation.
(4) Enclosure or Raceway Damage. Where the enclosure or
Exception: Where threaded hubs or bosses that are an integral part of raceway is subject to physical damage, the conductors shall be
a cabinet, box enclosure, or raceway provide a smoothly rounded or installed in rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit, Schedule
flared entry for conductors. 80 rigid nonmetallic conduit, or equivalent.

Conduit bushings constructed wholly of insulating material shall not (e) Splices and Taps. Direct-buried conductors or cables shall be
be used to secure a fitting or raceway. The insulating fitting or permitted to be spliced or tapped without the use of splice boxes. The
insulating material shall have a temperature rating not less than the splices or taps shall be made in accordance with 1.10.1.14(b).
insulation temperature rating of the installed conductors.
(f) Backfill. Backfill that contains large rocks, paving materials,
3.0.1.5 Underground Installations. cinders, large or sharply angular substances, or corrosive material shall
not be placed in an excavation where materials may damage raceways,
(a) Minimum Cover Requirements. Direct-buried cable or conduit cables, or other substructures or prevent adequate compaction of fill or
or other raceways shall be installed to meet the minimum cover contribute to corrosion of raceways, cables, or other substructures.
requirements of Table 3.0.1.5. Where necessary to prevent physical damage to the raceway or
cable, protection shall be provided in the form of granular or selected
(b) Listing. Cables and insulated conductors installed in enclosures material, suitable running boards, suitable sleeves, or other approved
or raceways in underground installations shall be listed for use in wet means.
locations.
(g) Raceway Seals. Conduits or raceways through which moisture
(c) Underground Cables Under Buildings. Underground cable may contact live parts shall be sealed or plugged at either or both ends.
installed under a building shall be in a raceway that is extended
beyond the outside walls of the building. FPN: Presence of hazardous gases or vapors may also necessitate sealing of
underground conduits or raceways entering buildings.

(d) Protection from Damage. Direct-buried conductors and cables

shall be protected from damage in accordance with 3.0.1.5(d)(1)
through (d)(4).
 Table 3.0.1.5 Minimum Cover Requirements, 0 to 600 Volts, Nominal, Burial in Millimeters
Type of Wiring Method or Circuit
Column 5
Circuits for
Column 4 Control of
Column 3 Residential Branch Irrigation and
Nonmetallic Circuits Rated 120 Landscape
Raceways Listed Volts or Less with Lighting Limited to
Column 2 for Direct Burial GFCI Protection Not More Than 30
Column 1 Rigid Metal Without Concrete and Maximum Volts and Installed
Direct Burial Conduit or Encasement or Overcurrent with Type UF or in
Cables or Intermediate Metal Other Approved Protection of 20 Other Identified
Location of Wiring Method or Conductors Conduit Raceways Amperes Cable or Raceway
Circuit (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
All locations not specified below 600 150 450 300 150
In trench below 50 mm thick
450 150 300 150 150
concrete or equivalent
Under a building 0 0 0 0 0
(in raceway only) (in raceway only) (in raceway only)
Under minimum of 100 mm 450 100 100 150 150
thick concrete exterior slab (direct burial)
with no vehicular traffic and
the slab extending not less than
150 mm beyond the 100
underground installation (in raceway)
Under minimum of 100 mm 450 100 100 150 150
thick concrete exterior slab (direct burial)
with no vehicular traffic and
the slab extending not less than
150 mm beyond the 100
underground installation (in raceway)
Table 3.0.1.5 (Continued)
Type of Wiring Method or Circuit
Column 5 Circuits
Column 4 for Control of
Column 3 Residential Branch Irrigation and
Nonmetallic Circuits Rated 120 Landscape
Raceways Listed Volts or Less with Lighting Limited to
for Direct Burial GFCI Protection Not More Than 30
Column 2 Rigid Without Concrete and Maximum Volts and Installed
Column 1 Direct Metal Conduit or Encasement or Overcurrent with Type UF or in
Burial Cables or Intermediate Metal Other Approved Protection of 20 Other Identified
Location of Wiring Method or Conductors Conduit Raceways Amperes Cable or Raceway
Circuit (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
Under streets, highways, roads, 600 600 600 600 600
alleys, driveways, and parking
lots
One- and two-family dwelling 450 450 450 450 450
driveways and outdoor parking
areas, and used only for
dwelling-related purposes
In or under airport runways, 450 450 450 450 450
including adjacent areas where
trespassing prohibited
Notes:
1. Cover is defined as the shortest distance in millimeters (inches) measured between a point on the top surface of any direct-buried
conductor, cable, conduit, or other raceway and the top surface of finished grade, concrete, or similar cover.
2. Raceways approved for burial only where concrete encased shall require concrete envelope not less than 50 mm thick.
3. Lesser depths shall be permitted where cables and conductors rise for terminations or splices or where access is otherwise required.
4. Where one of the wiring method types listed in Columns 1–3 is used for one of the circuit types in Columns 4 and 5, the shallowest
depth of burial shall be permitted.
5. Where solid rock prevents compliance with the cover depths specified in this table, the wiring shall be installed in metal or nonmetallic
raceway permitted for direct burial. The raceways shall be covered by a minimum of 50 mm of concrete extending down to rock.
 (h) Bushing. A bushing, or terminal fitting, with an integral bushed (a) Ferrous Metal Equipment. Ferrous metal raceways, cable
opening shall be used at the end of a conduit or other raceway that trays, cablebus, auxiliary gutters, cable armor, boxes, cable sheathing,
terminates underground where the conductors or cables emerge as a cabinets, metal elbows, couplings, nipples, fittings, supports, and
direct burial wiring method. A seal incorporating the physical support hardware shall be suitably protected against corrosion inside
protection characteristics of a bushing shall be permitted to be used in and outside (except threads at joints) by a coating of listed corrosion-
lieu of a bushing. resistant material. Where corrosion protection is necessary and the
conduit is threaded in the field, the threads shall be coated with an
(i) Conductors of the Same Circuit. All conductors of the same approved electrically conductive, corrosion-resistant compound.
circuit and, where used, the grounded conductor and all equipment
grounding conductors shall be installed in the same raceway or cable Exception: Stainless steel shall not be required to have protective
or shall be installed in close proximity in the same trench. coatings.

Exception No. 1: Conductors in parallel in raceways or cables shall (1) Protected from Corrosion Solely by Enamel. Where protected
be permitted, but each raceway or cable shall contain all conductors from corrosion solely by enamel, ferrous metal raceways, cable trays,
of the same circuit including grounding conductors. cablebus, auxiliary gutters, cable armor, boxes, cable sheathing,
Exception No. 2: Isolated phase, polarity, grounded conductor, and cabinets, metal elbows, couplings, nipples, fittings, supports, and
equipment grounding and bonding conductor installations shall be support hardware shall not be used outdoors or in wet locations as
permitted in nonmetallic raceways or cables with a nonmetallic described in 3.0.1.6(d).
covering or nonmagnetic sheath in close proximity where conductors (2) Organic Coatings on Boxes or Cabinets. Where boxes or
are paralleled as permitted in 3.10.1.4, and where the conditions of cabinets have an approved system of organic coatings and are marked
3.0.1.20(b) are met. “Raintight,” “Rainproof,” or “Outdoor Type,” they shall be permitted
outdoors.
(j) Ground Movement. Where direct-buried conductors, raceways, (3) In Concrete or in Direct Contact with the Earth. Ferrous metal
or cables are subject to movement by settlement or frost, direct-buried raceways, cable armor, boxes, cable sheathing, cabinets, elbows,
conductors, raceways, or cables shall be arranged so as to prevent couplings, nipples, fittings, supports, and support hardware shall be
damage to the enclosed conductors or to equipment connected to the permitted to be installed in concrete or in direct contact with the earth,
raceways. or in areas subject to severe corrosive influences where made of
material approved for the condition, or where provided with corrosion
FPN: This section recognizes “S” loops in underground direct burial to raceway protection approved for the condition.
transitions, expansion fittings in raceway risers to fixed equipment, and, generally,
the provision of flexible connections to equipment subject to settlement or frost
heaves. (b) Non-Ferrous Metal Equipment. Non-ferrous raceways, cable
trays, cablebus, auxiliary gutters, cable armor, boxes, cable sheathing,
(k) Directional Boring. Cables or raceways installed using cabinets, elbows, couplings, nipples, fittings, supports, and support
directional boring equipment shall be approved for the purpose. hardware embedded or encased in concrete or in direct contact with
the earth shall be provided with supplementary corrosion protection.
3.0.1.6 Protection Against Corrosion and Deterioration. Raceways,
cable trays, cablebus, auxiliary gutters, cable armor, boxes, cable (c) Nonmetallic Equipment. Nonmetallic raceways, cable trays,
sheathing, cabinets, elbows, couplings, fittings, supports, and support cablebus, auxiliary gutters, boxes, cables with a nonmetallic outer
hardware shall be of materials suitable for the environment in which jacket and internal metal armor or jacket, cable sheathing, cabinets,
they are to be installed. elbows, couplings, nipples, fittings, supports, and support hardware
shall be made of material approved for the condition and shall comply contraction.
with (c)(1) and (c)(2) as applicable to the specific installation.
FPN: Table 3.52.2.35(a) provides the expansion information for polyvinyl chloride
(PVC). A nominal number for steel conduit can be determined by multiplying the
(1) Exposed to Sunlight. Where exposed to sunlight, the materials expansion length in this table by 0.20. The coefficient of expansion for steel
shall be listed as sunlight resistant or shall be identified as sunlight electrical metallic tubing, intermediate metal conduit, and rigid conduit is 11.70 ×
resistant. 10-6 (0.0000117 mm per mm of conduit for each °C in temperature change) [6.50
× 10-6 (0.0000065 in. per inch of conduit for each °F in temperature change)].
(2) Chemical Exposure. Where subject to exposure to chemical
solvents, vapors, splashing, or immersion, materials or coatings shall 3.0.1.8 Installation of Conductors with Other Systems. Raceways
either be inherently resistant to chemicals based on its listing or be or cable trays containing electric conductors shall not contain any
identified for the specific chemical reagent. pipe, tube, or equal for steam, water, air, gas, drainage, or any service
other than electrical.
(d) Indoor Wet Locations. In portions of dairy processing facilities,
laundries, canneries, and other indoor wet locations, and in locations 3.0.1.10 Electrical Continuity of Metal Raceways and Enclosures.
where walls are frequently washed or where there are surfaces of Metal raceways, cable armor, and other metal enclosures for
absorbent materials, such as damp paper or wood, the entire wiring conductors shall be metallically joined together into a continuous
system, where installed exposed, including all boxes, fittings, electric conductor and shall be connected to all boxes, fittings, and
raceways, and cable used therewith, shall be mounted so that there is cabinets so as to provide effective electrical continuity. Unless
at least a 6 mm airspace between it and the wall or supporting surface. specifically permitted elsewhere in this Code, raceways and cable
assemblies shall be mechanically secured to boxes, fittings, cabinets,
Exception: Nonmetallic raceways, boxes, and fittings shall be and other enclosures.
permitted to be installed without the airspace on a concrete, masonry,
tile, or similar surface. Exception No. 1: Short sections of raceways used to provide support
FPN: In general, areas where acids and alkali chemicals are handled and stored
or protection of cable assemblies from physical damage shall not be
may present such corrosive conditions, particularly when wet or damp. Severe required to be made electrically continuous.
corrosive conditions may also be present in portions of meatpacking plants, Exception No. 2: Equipment enclosures to be isolated, as permitted by
tanneries, glue houses, and some stables; in installations immediately adjacent to
a seashore and swimming pool areas; in areas where chemical deicers are used;
2.50.5.7(b), shall not be required to be metallically joined to the metal
and in storage cellars or rooms for hides, casings, fertilizer, salt, and bulk raceway.
chemicals.
3.0.1.11 Securing and Supporting.
3.0.1.7 Raceways Exposed to Different Temperatures.
(a) Secured in Place. Raceways, cable assemblies, boxes, cabinets,
(a) Sealing. Where portions of a cable raceway or sleeve are known and fittings shall be securely fastened in place. Support wires that do
to be subjected to different temperatures and where condensation is not provide secure support shall not be permitted as the sole support.
known to be a problem, as in cold storage areas of buildings or where Support wires and associated fittings that provide secure support and
passing from the interior to the exterior of a building, the raceway or that are installed in addition to the ceiling grid support wires shall be
sleeve shall be filled with an approved material to prevent the permitted as the sole support. Where independent support wires are
circulation of warm air to a colder section of the raceway or sleeve. An used, they shall be secured at both ends. Cables and raceways shall not
explosionproof seal shall not be required for this purpose. be supported by ceiling grids.
(b) Expansion Fittings. Raceways shall be provided with expansion (1) Fire-Rated Assemblies. Wiring located within the cavity of a
fittings where necessary to compensate for thermal expansion and fire-rated floor–ceiling or roof–ceiling assembly shall not be secured
to, or supported by, the ceiling assembly, including the ceiling support
wires. An independent means of secure support shall be provided and 3.0.1.12 Mechanical Continuity — Raceways and Cables. Metal or
shall be permitted to be attached to the assembly. Where independent nonmetallic raceways, cable armors, and cable sheaths shall be
support wires are used, they shall be distinguishable by color, tagging, continuous between cabinets, boxes, fittings, or other enclosures or
or other effective means from those that are part of the fire-rated outlets.
design.
Exception: Short sections of raceways used to provide support or
Exception: The ceiling support system shall be permitted to support protection of cable assemblies from physical damage shall not be
wiring and equipment that have been tested as part of the fire-rated required to be mechanically continuous.
assembly.
3.0.1.13 Mechanical and Electrical Continuity — Conductors.
FPN: One method of determining fire rating is testing in accordance with NFPA
251-1999, Standard Methods of Tests of Fire Endurance of Building Construction
and Materials. (a) General. Conductors in raceways shall be continuous between
outlets, boxes, devices, and so forth. There shall be no splice or tap
(2) Non–Fire-Rated Assemblies. Wiring located within the cavity within a raceway unless permitted by 3.0.1.15; 3.68.2.47(a); 3.76.2.47;
of a non–fire-rated floor–ceiling or roof–ceiling assembly shall not be 3.78.2.47; 3.84.2.47; 3.86.2.47; 3.88.2.47; or 3.90.1.6.
secured to, or supported by, the ceiling assembly, including the ceiling
support wires. An independent means of secure support shall be (b) Device Removal. In multiwire branch circuits, the continuity of
provided. a grounded conductor shall not depend on device connections such as
lampholders, receptacles, and so forth, where the removal of such
Exception: The ceiling support system shall be permitted to support devices would interrupt the continuity.
branch-circuit wiring and associated equipment where installed in
accordance with the ceiling system manufacturer’s instructions. 3.0.1.14 Length of Free Conductors at Outlets, Junctions, and
Switch Points. At least 150 mm of free conductor, measured from the
(b) Raceways Used as Means of Support. Raceways shall be used point in the box where it emerges from its raceway or cable sheath,
only as a means of support for other raceways, cables, or nonelectric shall be left at each outlet, junction, and switch point for splices or the
equipment under any of the following conditions: connection of luminaires (fixtures) or devices. Where the opening to
an outlet, junction, or switch point is less than 200 mm in any
(1) Where the raceway or means of support is identified for the dimension, each conductor shall be long enough to extend at least
purpose 75 mm outside the opening.
(2) Where the raceway contains power supply conductors for
electrically controlled equipment and is used to support Class 2 circuit Exception: Conductors that are not spliced or terminated at the
conductors or cables that are solely for the purpose of connection to outlet, junction, or switch point shall not be required to comply with
the equipment control circuits 3.0.1.14.
(3) Where the raceway is used to support boxes or conduit bodies
in accordance with 3.14.2.9 or to support luminaires (fixtures) in 3.0.1.15 Boxes, Conduit Bodies, or Fittings — Where Required. A
accordance with 4.10.4.2(f) box shall be installed at each outlet and switch point for concealed
knob-and-tube wiring.
(c) Cables Not Used as Means of Support. Cable wiring methods Fittings and connectors shall be used only with the specific wiring
shall not be used as a means of support for other cables, raceways, or methods for which they are designed and listed.
nonelectrical equipment.
Where the wiring method is conduit, tubing, Type AC cable, Type MC conductors and cables.
cable, Type MI cable, nonmetallic-sheathed cable, or other cables, a
box or conduit body shall be installed at each conductor splice point, (h) Insulated Devices. As permitted in 3.34.2.31(b), a box or
outlet point, switch point, junction point, termination point, or pull conduit body shall not be required for insulated devices supplied by
point, unless otherwise permitted in 3.0.1.15(a) through (m). nonmetallic-sheathed cable.

(a) Wiring Methods with Interior Access. A box or conduit body (i) Enclosures. A box or conduit body shall not be required where a
shall not be required for each splice, junction, switch, pull, splice, switch, terminal, or pull point is in a cabinet or cutout box, in
termination, or outlet points in wiring methods with removable covers, an enclosure for a switch or overcurrent device as permitted in
such as wireways, multioutlet assemblies, auxiliary gutters, and 3.12.1.8, in a motor controller as permitted in 4.30.1.10(a), or in a
surface raceways. The covers shall be accessible after installation. motor control center.

(b) Equipment. An integral junction box or wiring compartment as (j) Luminaires (Fixtures). A box or conduit body shall not be
part of approved equipment shall be permitted in lieu of a box. required where a luminaire (fixture) is used as a raceway as permitted
in 4.10.6.10 and 4.10.6.11.
(c) Protection. A box or conduit body shall not be required where
cables enter or exit from conduit or tubing that is used to provide cable (k) Embedded. A box or conduit body shall not be required for
support or protection against physical damage. A fitting shall be splices where conductors are embedded as permitted in 4.24..5.7,
provided on the end(s) of the conduit or tubing to protect the cable 4.24.5.8(d), 4.26.3.3(b), 4.26.3.5(a), and 4.27.3.6(a).
from abrasion.
(l) Manholes and Handhole Enclosures. Where accessible only to
(d) Type MI Cable. A box or conduit body shall not be required licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner
where accessible fittings are used for straight-through splices in under the supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner, a box or
mineral-insulated metal-sheathed cable. conduit body shall not be required for conductors in manholes or
handhole enclosures, except where connecting to electrical equipment.
(e) Integral Enclosure. A wiring device with integral enclosure The installation shall comply with the provisions of Part 1.10.5 for
identified for the use, having brackets that securely fasten the device to manholes, and 3.14.2.16 for handhole enclosures.
walls or ceilings of conventional on-site frame construction, for use
with nonmetallic-sheathed cable, shall be permitted in lieu of a box or (m) Closed Loop. A box shall not be required with a closed-loop
conduit body. power distribution system where a device identified and listed as
suitable for installation without a box is used.
FPN: See 3.34.2.21(c); 5.45.1.10; 5.50.2.6(i); 5.51.4.8(e), Exception No. 1; and
5.52.4.9(e), Exception No. 1.
3.0.1.16 Raceway or Cable to Open or Concealed Wiring.
(f) Fitting. A fitting identified for the use shall be permitted in lieu
(a) Box or Fitting. A box or terminal fitting having a separately
of a box or conduit body where conductors are not spliced or
bushed hole for each conductor shall be used wherever a change is
terminated within the fitting. The fitting shall be accessible after
made from conduit, electrical metallic tubing, electrical nonmetallic
installation.
tubing, nonmetallic-sheathed cable, Type AC cable, Type MC cable,
or mineral-insulated, metal-sheathed cable and surface raceway wiring
(g) Direct-Buried Conductors. As permitted in 3.0.1.5(e), a box or
to open wiring or to concealed knob-and-tube wiring. A fitting used
conduit body shall not be required for splices and taps in direct-buried
for this purpose shall contain no taps or splices and shall not be used at (b) Welding. Metal raceways shall not be supported, terminated, or
luminaire (fixture) outlets. connected by welding to the raceway unless specifically designed to
be or otherwise specifically permitted to be in this Code.
(b) Bushing. A bushing shall be permitted in lieu of a box or
terminal where the conductors emerge from a raceway and enter or 3.0.1.19 Supporting Conductors in Vertical Raceways.
terminate at equipment, such as open switchboards, unenclosed control
equipment, or similar equipment. The bushing shall be of the (a) Spacing Intervals — Maximum. Conductors in vertical
insulating type for other than lead-sheathed conductors. raceways shall be supported if the vertical rise exceeds the values in
Table 3.0.1.19(a). One cable support shall be provided at the top of the
3.0.1.17 Number and Size of Conductors in Raceway. The number vertical raceway or as close to the top as practical. Intermediate
and size of conductors in any raceway shall not be more than will supports shall be provided as necessary to limit supported conductor
permit dissipation of the heat and ready installation or withdrawal of lengths to not greater than those values specified in Table 3.0.1.19(a).
the conductors without damage to the conductors or to their insulation.
Exception: Steel wire armor cable shall be supported at the top of the
FPN: See the following sections of this Code: intermediate metal conduit, riser with a cable support that clamps the steel wire armor. A safety
3.42.2.13; rigid metal conduit, 3.44.2.13; flexible metal conduit, 3.48.2.13;
liquidtight flexible metal conduit, 3.50.2.13; rigid nonmetallic conduit, 3.52.2.13; device shall be permitted at the lower end of the riser to hold the cable
liquidtight nonmetallic flexible conduit, 3.56.2.13; electrical metallic tubing, in the event there is slippage of the cable in the wire-armored cable
3.58.2.13; flexible metallic tubing, 3.60.2.13; electrical nonmetallic tubing, support. Additional wedge-type supports shall be permitted to relieve
3.62.2.13; cellular concrete floor raceways, 3.72.1.11; cellular metal floor
raceways, 3.74.1.5; metal wireways, 3.76.2.13; nonmetallic wireways, 3.78.2.13; the strain on the equipment terminals caused by expansion of the cable
surface metal raceways, 3.86.2.13; surface nonmetallic raceways, 3.88.2.13; under load.
underfloor raceways, 3.90.1.5; fixture wire, 4.2.1.7; theaters, 5.20.1.6; signs,
6.0.2.2(c); elevators, 6.20.4.2; audio signal processing, amplification, and
reproduction equipment, 6.40.2.3(a) and 6.40.2.4; Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 (b) Support Methods. One of the following methods of support
circuits, Article 7.25; fire alarm circuits, Article 7.60; and optical fiber cables and shall be used.
raceways, Article 7.70.

(1) By clamping devices constructed of or employing insulating

3.0.1.18 Raceway Installations.
wedges inserted in the ends of the raceways. Where clamping of
insulation does not adequately support the cable, the conductor also
(a) Complete Runs. Raceways, other than busways or exposed
shall be clamped.
raceways having hinged or removable covers, shall be installed
(2) By inserting boxes at the required intervals in which insulating
complete between outlet, junction, or splicing points prior to the
supports are installed and secured in a satisfactory manner to
installation of conductors. Where required to facilitate the installation
withstand the weight of the conductors attached thereto, the boxes
of utilization equipment, the raceway shall be permitted to be initially
being provided with covers.
installed without a terminating connection at the equipment. Prewired
(3) In junction boxes, by deflecting the cables not less than 90
raceway assemblies shall be permitted only where specifically
degrees and carrying them horizontally to a distance not less than
permitted in this Code for the applicable wiring method.
twice the diameter of the cable, the cables being carried on two or
more insulating supports and additionally secured thereto by tie wires
Exception: Short sections of raceways used to contain conductors or
if desired. Where this method is used, cables shall be supported at
cable assemblies for protection from physical damage shall not be
intervals not greater than 20 percent of those mentioned in the
required to be installed complete between outlet, junction, or splicing
preceding tabulation.
points.
(4) By a method of equal effectiveness.
 Table 3.0.1.19(a) Spacings for Conductor Supports
Conductors
Aluminum or
Copper-Clad
Size of Wire Support of Conductors Aluminum Copper
mm2(mm dia.) in Vertical Raceways (m) (m)
0.75(1.0) through 8.0(3.2) Not greater than 30 30
14 through 38 Not greater than 60 30
60 through 100 Not greater than 55 25
Over 100 through 175 Not greater than 40 18
Over 175 through 250 Not greater than 35 15
Over 250 through 400 Not greater than 30 12
Over 400 Not greater than 25 11
3.0.1.20 Induced Currents in Metal Enclosures or Metal partitions, floors, or ceilings shall be firestopped using approved
Raceways. methods to maintain the fire resistance rating.

(a) Conductors Grouped Together. Where conductors carrying FPN: Directories of electrical construction materials published by qualified testing
laboratories contain many listing installation restrictions necessary to maintain the
alternating current are installed in metal enclosures or metal raceways, fire-resistive rating of assemblies where penetrations or openings are made.
they shall be arranged so as to avoid heating the surrounding metal by Building codes also contain restrictions on membrane penetrations on opposite
induction. To accomplish this, all phase conductors and, where used, sides of a fire-resistance–rated wall assembly. An example is the 600 mm
minimum horizontal separation that usually applies between boxes installed on
the grounded conductor and all equipment grounding conductors shall opposite sides of the wall. Assistance in complying with 3.0.1.21 can be found in
be grouped together. building codes, fire resistance directories, and product listings.

Exception No. 1: Equipment grounding conductors for certain 3.0.1.22 Wiring in Ducts, Plenums, and Other Air-Handling
existing installations shall be permitted to be installed separate from Spaces. The provisions of this section apply to the installation and
their associated circuit conductors where run in accordance with the uses of electric wiring and equipment in ducts, plenums, and other air-
provisions of 2.50.7.1(c). handling spaces.
Exception No. 2: A single conductor shall be permitted to be installed
FPN: See Part 4.24.6, for duct heaters.
in a ferromagnetic enclosure and used for skin-effect heating in
accordance with the provisions of 4.26.5.3 and 4.27.6.3.
(a) Ducts for Dust, Loose Stock, or Vapor Removal. No wiring
systems of any type shall be installed in ducts used to transport dust,
(b) Individual Conductors. Where a single conductor carrying
loose stock, or flammable vapors. No wiring system of any type shall
alternating current passes through metal with magnetic properties, the
be installed in any duct, or shaft containing only such ducts, used for
inductive effect shall be minimized by (1) cutting slots in the metal
vapor removal or for ventilation of commercial-type cooking
between the individual holes through which the individual conductors
equipment.
pass or (2) passing all the conductors in the circuit through an
insulating wall sufficiently large for all of the conductors of the circuit.
(b) Ducts or Plenums Used for Environmental Air. Only wiring
methods consisting of Type MI cable, Type MC cable employing a
Exception: In the case of circuits supplying vacuum or electric-
smooth or corrugated impervious metal sheath without an overall
discharge lighting systems or signs or X-ray apparatus, the currents
nonmetallic covering, electrical metallic tubing, flexible metallic
carried by the conductors are so small that the inductive heating effect
tubing, intermediate metal conduit, or rigid metal conduit without an
can be ignored where these conductors are placed in metal enclosures
overall nonmetallic covering shall be installed in ducts or plenums
or pass through metal.
specifically fabricated to transport environmental air. Flexible metal
FPN: Because aluminum is not a magnetic metal, there will be no heating due to conduit shall be permitted, in lengths not to exceed 1 200 mm, to
hysteresis; however, induced currents will be present. They will not be of sufficient connect physically adjustable equipment and devices permitted to be
magnitude to require grouping of conductors or special treatment in passing
conductors through aluminum wall sections.
in these ducts and plenum chambers. The connectors used with
flexible metal conduit shall effectively close any openings in the
3.0.1.21 Spread of Fire or Products of Combustion. Electrical connection. Equipment and devices shall be permitted within such
installations in hollow spaces, vertical shafts, and ventilation or air- ducts or plenum chambers only if necessary for their direct action
handling ducts shall be made so that the possible spread of fire or upon, or sensing of, the contained air. Where equipment or devices are
products of combustion will not be substantially increased. Openings installed and illumination is necessary to facilitate maintenance and
around electrical penetrations through fire-resistant–rated walls, repair, enclosed gasketed-type luminaires (fixtures) shall be permitted.
 (c) Other Space Used for Environmental Air. This section applies 3.0.1.23 Panels Designed to Allow Access. Cables, raceways, and
to space used for environmental air-handling purposes other than ducts equipment installed behind panels designed to allow access, including
and plenums as specified in 3.0.1.22(a) and (b). It does not include suspended ceiling panels, shall be arranged and secured so as to allow
habitable rooms or areas of buildings, the prime purpose of which is the removal of panels and access to the equipment.
not air handling.
3.0.2 Requirements for Over 600 Volts, Nominal
FPN: The space over a hung ceiling used for environmental air-handling purposes
is an example of the type of other space to which this section applies.
3.0.2.1 Covers Required. Suitable covers shall be installed on all
boxes, fittings, and similar enclosures to prevent accidental contact
Exception: This section shall not apply to the joist or stud spaces of
with energized parts or physical damage to parts or insulation.
dwelling units where the wiring passes through such spaces
perpendicular to the long dimension of such spaces.
3.0.2.2 Conductors of Different Systems. See 3.0.1.3(c)(2).
(1) Wiring Methods. The wiring methods for such other space
3.0.2.4 Conductor Bending Radius. The conductor shall not be bent
shall be limited to totally enclosed, nonventilated, insulated busway
to a radius less than 8 times the overall diameter for nonshielded
having no provisions for plug-in connections, Type MI cable, Type
conductors or 12 times the overall diameter for shielded or lead-
MC cable without an overall nonmetallic covering, Type AC cable, or
covered conductors during or after installation. For multiconductor or
other factory-assembled multiconductor control or power cable that is
multiplexed single conductor cables having individually shielded
specifically listed for the use, or listed prefabricated cable assemblies
conductors, the minimum bending radius is 12 times the diameter of
of metallic manufactured wiring systems without nonmetallic sheath.
the individually shielded conductors or 7 times the overall diameter,
Other types of cables and conductors shall be installed in electrical
whichever is greater.
metallic tubing, flexible metallic tubing, intermediate metal conduit,
rigid metal conduit without an overall nonmetallic covering, flexible
3.0.2.5 Protection Against Induction Heating. Metallic raceways
metal conduit, or, where accessible, surface metal raceway or metal
and associated conductors shall be arranged so as to avoid heating of
wireway with metal covers or solid bottom metal cable tray with solid
the raceway in accordance with the applicable provisions of 3.0.1.20.
metal covers.
(2) Equipment. Electrical equipment with a metal enclosure, or
3.0.2.7 Aboveground Wiring Methods. Aboveground conductors
with a nonmetallic enclosure listed for the use and having adequate
shall be installed in rigid metal conduit, in intermediate metal conduit,
fire-resistant and low-smoke-producing characteristics, and associated
in electrical metallic tubing, in rigid nonmetallic conduit, in cable
wiring material suitable for the ambient temperature shall be permitted
trays, as busways, as cablebus, in other identified raceways, or as
to be installed in such other space unless prohibited elsewhere in this
exposed runs of metal-clad cable suitable for the use and purpose. In
Code.
locations accessible to licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed
electrical practitioner under the supervision of a licensed electrical
Exception: Integral fan systems shall be permitted where specifically
practitioner only, exposed runs of Type MV cables, bare conductors,
identified for such use.
and bare busbars shall also be permitted. Busbars shall be permitted to
be either copper or aluminum.
(d) Information Technology Equipment. Electric wiring in air-
handling areas beneath raised floors for information technology
3.0.2.9 Braid-Covered Insulated Conductors — Exposed
equipment shall be permitted in accordance with Article 6.45.
Installation. Exposed runs of braid-covered insulated conductors shall
have a flame-retardant braid. If the conductors used do not have this
protection, a flame-retardant saturant shall be applied to the braid
covering after installation. This treated braid covering shall be stripped
back a safe distance at conductor terminals, according to the operating
voltage. Where practicable, this distance shall not be less than 25 mm
for each kilovolt of the conductor-to-ground voltage of the circuit.

3.0.2.10 Insulation Shielding. Metallic and semiconducting insulation

shielding components of shielded cables shall be removed for a
distance dependent on the circuit voltage and insulation. Stress
reduction means shall be provided at all terminations of factory-
applied shielding.
Metallic shielding components such as tapes, wires, or braids, or
combinations thereof, and their associated conducting or
semiconducting components shall be grounded.

3.0.2.12 Moisture or Mechanical Protection for Metal-Sheathed

Cables. Where cable conductors emerge from a metal sheath and
where protection against moisture or physical damage is necessary, the
insulation of the conductors shall be protected by a cable sheath
terminating device.

3.0.2.20 Underground Installations.

(a) General. Underground conductors shall be identified for the

voltage and conditions under which they are installed. Direct burial
cables shall comply with the provisions of 3.10.1.7. Underground
cables shall be installed in accordance with 3.0.2.20(a)(1) or (a)(2),
and the installation shall meet the depth requirements of Table
3.0.2.20.

(1) Shielded Cables and Nonshielded Cables in Metal-Sheathed

Cable Assemblies. Underground cables, including nonshielded, Type
MC and moisture-impervious metal sheath cables, shall have those
sheaths grounded through an effective grounding path meeting the
requirements of 2.50.1.4(a)(5) or (b)(4). They shall be direct buried or
installed in raceways identified for the use.
(2) Other Nonshielded Cables. Other nonshielded cables not
covered in 3.0.2.20(a)(1) shall be installed in rigid metal conduit,
intermediate metal conduit, or rigid nonmetallic conduit encased in not
less than 75 mm of concrete.
 Table 3.0.2.20 Minimum Cover1 Requirements
General Conditions (not otherwise specified) Special Conditions (use if applicable)
(4)
Raceways (5) (6)
under Cables in Areas subject
(3) buildings or airport to vehicular
Rigid Metal exterior runways or traffic, such as
(2) Conduit and concrete adjacent thoroughfares
(1) Rigid Intermediate slabs, 100mm areas where and
Direct-Buried Nonmetallic Metal minimum trespass is commercial
Cables Conduit2 Conduit thickness3 prohibited parking areas
Circuit Voltage (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
Over 600 V through 760 460 150 100 450 600
22 kV
Over 22 kV through 900 600 150 100 450 600
40 kV
Over 40 kV 1000 760 150 100 450 600
Notes:
1. Lesser depths shall be permitted where cables and conductors rise for terminations or splices or where access is otherwise required.
2. Where solid rock prevents compliance with the cover depths specified in this table, the wiring shall be installed in a metal or nonmetallic
raceway permitted for direct burial. The raceways shall be covered by a minimum of 50 mm of concrete extending down to rock.

1
Cover is defined as the shortest distance in millimeters measured between a point on the top surface of any direct-buried conductor, cable,
conduit, or other raceway and the top surface of finished grade, concrete, or similar cover.
2
Listed by a qualified testing agency as suitable for direct burial without encasement. All other nonmetallic systems shall require 50 mm of
concrete or equivalent above conduit in addition to the table depth.
3
The slab shall extend a minimum of 150 mm beyond the underground installation, and a warning ribbon or other effective means suitable for
the conditions shall be placed above the underground installation.
 ARTICLE 3.10 — CONDUCTORS FOR GENERAL WIRING
(b) Protection from Damage. Conductors emerging from the
ground shall be enclosed in listed raceways. Raceways installed on 3.10.1.1 Scope. This article covers general requirements for
poles shall be of rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit, PVC conductors and their type designations, insulations, markings,
Schedule 80, or equivalent, extending from the minimum cover depth mechanical strengths, ampacity ratings, and uses. These requirements
specified in Table 3.0.2.20 to a point 2 400 mm above finished grade. do not apply to conductors that form an integral part of equipment,
Conductors entering a building shall be protected by an approved such as motors, motor controllers, and similar equipment, or to
enclosure or raceway from the minimum cover depth to the point of conductors specifically provided for elsewhere in this Code.
entrance. Where direct-buried conductors, raceways, or cables are
subject to movement by settlement or frost, they shall be installed to FPN: For flexible cords and cables, see Article 400. For fixture wires, see Article
4.2.
prevent damage to the enclosed conductors or to the equipment
connected to the raceways. Metallic enclosures shall be grounded.
3.10.1.2 Conductors.
(c) Splices. Direct burial cables shall be permitted to be spliced or
(a) Insulated. Conductors shall be insulated.
tapped without the use of splice boxes, provided they are installed
using materials suitable for the application. The taps and splices shall
Exception: Where covered or bare conductors are specifically
be watertight and protected from mechanical damage. Where cables
permitted elsewhere in this Code.
are shielded, the shielding shall be continuous across the splice or tap.
FPN: See 2.50.10.5 for insulation of neutral conductors of a solidly grounded high-
Exception: At splices of an engineered cabling system, metallic voltage system.
shields of direct-buried single-conductor cables with maintained
spacing between phases shall be permitted to be interrupted and (b) Conductor Material. Conductors in this article shall be of
overlapped. Where shields are interrupted and overlapped, each aluminum, copper-clad aluminum, or copper unless otherwise
shield section shall be grounded at one point. specified.

(d) Backfill. Backfill containing large rocks, paving materials, 3.10.1.3 Stranded Conductors. Where installed in raceways,
cinders, large or sharply angular substances, or corrosive materials conductors of size 8.0 mm2 (3.2 mm dia.) and larger shall be stranded.
shall not be placed in an excavation where materials can damage or
contribute to the corrosion of raceways, cables, or other substructures Exception: As permitted or required elsewhere in this Code.
or where it may prevent adequate compaction of fill.
Protection in the form of granular or selected material or suitable 3.10.1.4 Conductors in Parallel. Aluminum, copper-clad aluminum,
sleeves shall be provided to prevent physical damage to the raceway or or copper conductors of size 50 mm2 and larger, comprising each
cable. phase, polarity, neutral, or grounded circuit conductor, shall be
permitted to be connected in parallel (electrically joined at both ends).
(e) Raceway Seal. Where a raceway enters from an underground
system, the end within the building shall be sealed with an identified Exception No. 1: As permitted in 6.20.2.2(a)(1).
compound so as to prevent the entrance of moisture or gases, or it shall Exception No. 2: Conductors in sizes smaller than 50 mm2 shall be
be so arranged to prevent moisture from contacting live parts. permitted to be run in parallel to supply control power to indicating
instruments, contactors, relays, solenoids, and similar control devices,
provided all of the following apply:
(a) They are contained within the same raceway or cable.
 (b) The ampacity of each individual conductor is sufficient to 3.10.1.5 Minimum Size of Conductors. The minimum size of
carry the entire load current shared by the parallel conductors. conductors shall be as shown in Table 3.10.1.5, except as permitted
(c) The overcurrent protection is such that the ampacity of each elsewhere in this Code.
individual conductor will not be exceeded if one or more of the
parallel conductors become inadvertently disconnected.
Exception No. 3: Conductors in sizes smaller than 50 mm2 shall be Table 3.10.1.5 Minimum Size of Conductors
permitted to be run in parallel for frequencies of 360 Hz and higher Conductor
where conditions (a), (b), and (c) of Exception No. 2 are met. Voltage Rating Minimum Conductor Size
Exception No. 4: Under the supervision of a licensed electrical (Volts) mm2(mm dia.)
engineer, grounded neutral conductors in sizes 30 mm2 and larger Aluminum or
shall be permitted to be run in parallel for existing installations. Copper-Clad
Copper Aluminum
FPN: Exception No. 4 can be used to alleviate overheating of neutral conductors in
existing installations due to high content of triplen harmonic currents. 0–2000 2.0(1.6) 3.5(2.0)
2001–8000 8.0(3.2) 8.0(3.2)
The paralleled conductors in each phase, polarity, neutral, or grounded 8001–15,000 30 30
circuit conductor shall comply with all of the following: 15,001–28,000 38 38
28,001–35,000 50 50
(1) Be the same length
(2) Have the same conductor material
(3) Be the same cross sectional area of the conducting material 3.10.1.6 Shielding. Solid dielectric insulated conductors operated
(4) Have the same insulation type above 2000 volts in permanent installations shall have ozone-resistant
(5) Be terminated in the same manner insulation and shall be shielded. All metallic insulation shields shall be
grounded through an effective grounding path meeting the
Where run in separate raceways or cables, the raceways or cables shall requirements of 2.50.1.4(a)(5) or 2.50.1.4(b)(4). Shielding shall be for
have the same physical characteristics. Where conductors are in the purpose of confining the voltage stresses to the insulation.
separate raceways or cables, the same number of conductors shall be
used in each raceway or cable. Conductors of one phase, polarity, Exception: Nonshielded insulated conductors listed by a qualified
neutral, or grounded circuit conductor shall not be required to have the testing laboratory shall be permitted for use up to 2 400 volts under
same physical characteristics as those of another phase, polarity, the following conditions:
neutral, or grounded circuit conductor to achieve balance. (a) Conductors shall have insulation resistant to electric
discharge and surface tracking, or the insulated conductor(s) shall be
FPN: Differences in inductive reactance and unequal division of current can be covered with a material resistant to ozone, electric discharge, and
minimized by choice of materials, methods of construction, and orientation of surface tracking.
conductors.
(b) Where used in wet locations, the insulated conductor(s) shall
Where equipment grounding conductors are used with conductors in have an overall nonmetallic jacket or a continuous metallic sheath.
parallel, they shall comply with the requirements of this section except (c) Insulation and jacket thicknesses shall be in accordance with
that they shall be sized in accordance with 2.50.6.13. Table 3.10.1.63.
Conductors installed in parallel shall comply with the provisions of
3.10.1.15(b)(2)(a). 3.10.1.7 Direct Burial Conductors. Conductors used for direct burial
applications shall be of a type identified for such use.
Cables rated above 2 000 volts shall be shielded.
Exception: Nonshielded multiconductor cables rated 2 001– 5000 3.10.1.9 Corrosive Conditions. Conductors exposed to oils, greases,
volts shall be permitted if the cable has an overall metallic sheath or vapors, gases, fumes, liquids, or other substances having a deleterious
armor. effect on the conductor or insulation shall be of a type suitable for the
application.
The metallic shield, sheath, or armor shall be grounded through an
effective grounding path meeting the requirements of 2.50.1.4(a)(5) or 3.10.1.10 Temperature Limitation of Conductors. No conductor
(b)(4). shall be used in such a manner that its operating temperature exceeds
that designated for the type of insulated conductor involved. In no case
FPN No. 1: See 3.0.1.5 for installation requirements for conductors rated 600 volts shall conductors be associated together in such a way, with respect to
or less.
FPN No. 2: See 3.0.2.20 for installation requirements for conductors rated over type of circuit, the wiring method employed, or the number of
600 volts. conductors, that the limiting temperature of any conductor is
exceeded.
3.10.1.8 Locations.
FPN No. 1: The temperature rating of a conductor (see Table 3.10.1.13 and Table
3.10.1.61) is the maximum temperature, at any location along its length, that the
(a) Dry Locations. Insulated conductors and cables used in dry conductor can withstand over a prolonged time period without serious degradation.
locations shall be any of the types identified in this Code. The allowable ampacity tables, the ampacity tables of Article 3.10 and the
ampacity tables of Annex B, the correction factors at the bottom of these tables,
and the notes to the tables provide guidance for coordinating conductor sizes,
(b) Dry and Damp Locations. Insulated conductors and cables types, allowable ampacities, ampacities, ambient temperatures, and number of
used in dry and damp locations shall be Types FEP, FEPB, MTW, associated conductors.
PFA, RHH, RHW, RHW-2, SA, THHN, THW, THW-2, THHW, The principal determinants of operating temperature are as follows:
(1) Ambient temperature — ambient temperature may vary along the
THHW-2, THWN, THWN-2, TW, XHH, XHHW, XHHW-2, Z, or conductor length as well as from time to time.
ZW. (2) Heat generated internally in the conductor as the result of load current flow,
including fundamental and harmonic currents.
(3) The rate at which generated heat dissipates into the ambient medium.
(c) Wet Locations. Insulated conductors and cables used in wet Thermal insulation that covers or surrounds conductors affects the rate of heat
locations shall be dissipation.
(4) Adjacent load-carrying conductors — adjacent conductors have the dual
effect of raising the ambient temperature and impeding heat dissipation.
(1) Moisture-impervious metal-sheathed; FPN No. 2: Conductors installed in conduit exposed to direct sunlight in close
(2) Types MTW, RHW, RHW-2, TW, THW, THW-2, THHW, proximity to rooftops have been shown, under certain conditions, to experience a
temperature rise of 17°C (30°F) above ambient temperature on which the ampacity
THHW-2, THWN, THWN-2, XHHW, XHHW-2, ZW; or is based.
(3) Of a type listed for use in wet locations.
3.10.1.11 Marking.
(d) Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight. Insulated conductors or
cables used where exposed to direct rays of the sun shall comply with (a) Required Information. All conductors and cables shall be
one of the following: marked to indicate the following information, using the applicable
method described in 3.10.1.11(b):
(1) Cables listed, or listed and marked, as being sunlight resistant
(2) Conductors listed, or listed and marked, as being sunlight (1) The maximum rated voltage
resistant (2) The proper type letter or letters for the type of wire or cable as
(3) Covered with insulating material, such as tape or sleeving, that specified elsewhere in this Code
is listed, or listed and marked, as being sunlight resistant
 (3) The manufacturer’s name, trademark, or other distinctive metallic sheath of Type ITC or Type PLTC cable at intervals not
marking by which the organization responsible for the product can be exceeding 1 000 mm.
readily identified
(4) The size in millimeter square or millimeter diameter FPN: Included in the group of metal-covered cables are Type AC cable (Article
3.20), Type MC cable (Article 3.30), and lead-sheathed cable.

FPN: See Conductor Properties, Table 8 of Chapter 9, for conductor area

2
expressed in SI units for conductor sizes specified in mm or mm dia. (3) Tag Marking. The following conductors and cables shall be
marked by means of a printed tag attached to the coil, reel, or carton:
(5) Cable assemblies where the neutral conductor is smaller than
the ungrounded conductors shall be so marked a. Mineral-insulated, metal-sheathed cable
b. Switchboard wires
(b) Method of Marking. c. Metal-covered, single-conductor cables
d. Type AC cable
(1) Surface Marking. The following conductors and cables shall be
durably marked on the surface. The size in mm2 or mm diameter shall (4) Optional Marking of Wire Size. The information required in
be repeated at intervals not exceeding 600 mm. All other markings 3.10.1.11(a)(4) shall be permitted to be marked on the surface of the
shall be repeated at intervals not exceeding 1 000 mm. individual insulated conductors for the following multiconductor
cables:
a. Single-conductor and multiconductor rubber- and
thermoplastic-insulated wire and cable a. Type MC cable
b. Nonmetallic-sheathed cable b. Tray cable
c. Service-entrance cable c. Irrigation cable
d. Underground feeder and branch-circuit cable d. Power-limited tray cable
e. Tray cable e. Power-limited fire alarm cable
f. Irrigation cable f. Instrumentation tray cable
g. Power-limited tray cable
h. Instrumentation tray cable (c) Suffixes to Designate Number of Conductors. A type letter or
letters used alone shall indicate a single insulated conductor. The letter
(2) Marker Tape. Metal-covered multiconductor cables shall suffixes shall be indicated as follows:
employ a marker tape located within the cable and running for its
complete length. (1) D — For two insulated conductors laid parallel within an outer
nonmetallic covering
Exception No. 1: Mineral-insulated, metal-sheathed cable. (2) M — For an assembly of two or more insulated conductors
Exception No. 2: Type AC cable. twisted spirally within an outer nonmetallic covering
Exception No. 3: The information required in 3.10.1.11(a) shall be
permitted to be durably marked on the outer nonmetallic covering of (d) Optional Markings. All conductors and cables contained in
Type MC, Type ITC, or Type PLTC cables at intervals not exceeding Chapter 3 shall be permitted to be surface marked to indicate special
1.0 m (40 in.). characteristics of the cable materials. These markings include, but are
Exception No. 4: The information required in 3.10.1.11(a) shall be not limited to, markings for limited smoke, sunlight resistant, and so
permitted to be durably marked on a nonmetallic covering under the forth.
3.10.1.12 Conductor Identification.

(a) Grounded Conductors. Insulated or covered grounded

conductors shall be identified in accordance with 2.0.1.6.

(b) Equipment Grounding Conductors. Equipment grounding

conductors shall be in accordance with 2.50.6.10.

(c) Ungrounded Conductors. Conductors that are intended for use

as ungrounded conductors, whether used as a single conductor or in
multiconductor cables, shall be finished to be clearly distinguishable
from grounded and grounding conductors. Distinguishing markings
shall not conflict in any manner with the surface markings required by
3.10.1.11(b)(1). Branch-circuit ungrounded conductors shall be
identified in accordance with 2.10.1.5(c). Feeders shall be identified in
accordance with 2.15.1.12.

Exception: Conductor identification shall be permitted in accordance

with 2.0.1.7.

3.10.1.13 Conductor Constructions and Applications. Insulated

conductors shall comply with the applicable provisions of one or more
of the following: Table 3.10.1.13, Table 3.10.1.61, Table 3.10.1.62,
Table 3.10.1.63, and Table 3.10.1.64.
These conductors shall be permitted for use in any of the wiring
methods recognized in Chapter 3 and as specified in their respective
tables or as permitted elsewhere in this Code.

FPN: Thermoplastic insulation may stiffen at temperatures lower than -10°C

(+14°F). Thermoplastic insulation may also be deformed at normal temperatures
where subjected to pressure, such as at points of support. Thermoplastic
insulation, where used on dc circuits in wet locations, may result in
electroendosmosis between conductor and insulation.

3.10.1.14 Aluminum Conductor Material. Solid aluminum

conductors 8.0(3.2), 5.5(2.6), and 3.5(2.0) mm2(dia.) shall be made of
an AA-8000 series electrical grade aluminum alloy conductor
material. Stranded aluminum conductors 8.0 mm2 (3.2 mm dia.)
through 500 mm2 marked as Type RHH, RHW, XHHW, THW,
THHW, THWN, THHN, service-entrance Type SE Style U and SE
Style R shall be made of an AA-8000 series electrical grade aluminum
alloy conductor material.
 Table 3.10.1.13 Conductor Application and Insulations
Maximum Thickness of
Type Operating Insulation Outer
Trade Name Letter Temperature Application Provisions Insulation (mm) Covering1
Fluorinated ethylene FEP or 90°C Dry and damp locations Fluorinated ethylene 0.51 None
propylene FEPB 194°F propylene 0.76

200°C Dry locations — special Fluorinated ethylene

392°F applications2 propylene 0.36 Glass braid
0.36 Glass or other
suitable braid
material
Mineral insulation MI 90°C Dry and wet locations Magnesium oxide 0.58 Copper or alloy
(metal sheathed) 194°F For special applications2 0.91 steel
1.27
250°C 1.40
482°F
Moisture-, heat-, MTW 60°C Machine tool wiring in wet Flame-retardant moisture-, (a) (b) (a) None
and oil-resistant 140°F locations heat-, and oil-resistant 0.76 0.38 (b) Nylon jacket
thermoplastic thermoplastic 0.76 0.51 or equivalent
90°C Machine tool wiring in dry 1.14 0.76
194°F locations. 1.52 0.76
FPN: See NFPA 79. 1.52 1.02
2.03 1.27
2.41 1.52
2.79 1.78
Paper 85°C For underground service Paper Lead sheath
185°F conductors, or by special
permission
Perfluoro- alkoxy PFA 90°C Dry and damp locations Perfluoro- alkoxy 0.51 None
194°F 0.76
Dry locations — special 1.14
200°C applications2
392°F
Table 3.10.1.13 (Continued)
Maximum Thickness of
Type Operating Insulation Outer
Trade Name Letter Temperature Application Provisions Insulation (mm) Covering1
Perfluoro- alkoxy PFAH 250°C Dry locations only. Only Perfluoro- alkoxy 0.51 None
482°F for leads within apparatus 0.76
or within raceways 1.14
connected to apparatus
(nickel or nickel-coated
copper only)
Thermoset RHH 90°C Dry and damp locations 1.14 Moisture-
194°F 1.52 resistant,
2.03 flame-
2.41 retardant,
2.79 nonmetallic
3.18 covering1
Moisture-resistant RHW4 75°C Dry and wet locations Flame-retardant, moisture- 1.14 Moisture-
thermoset 167°F resistant thermoset 1.52 resistant,
2.03 flame-
2.41 retardant,
2.79 nonmetallic
3.18 covering5
Moisture-resistant RHW-2 90°C Dry and wet locations Flame-retardant moisture- 1.14 Moisture-
thermoset 194°F resistant thermoset 1.52 resistant,
2.03 flame-
2.41 retardant,
2.79 nonmetallic
3.18 covering5
Silicone SA 90°C Dry and damp locations Silicone rubber 1.14 Glass or other
194°F 1.52 suitable braid
2.03 material
200°C For special application2 2.41
392°F 2.79
3.18
Table 3.10.1.13 (Continued)
Maximum Thickness of
Type Operating Insulation Outer
Trade Name Letter Temperature Application Provisions Insulation (mm) Covering1
Thermoset SIS 90°C Switchboard wiring only Flame-retardant thermoset 0.76 None
194°F 1.14
2.41
Thermoplastic and TBS 90°C Switchboard wiring only Thermoplastic 0.76 Flame-retardant,
fibrous outer braid 194°F 1.14 nonmetallic
1.52 covering
2.03
Extended polytetra- TFE 250°C Dry locations only. Only Extruded polytetra-fluoro- 0.51 None
fluoro- 482°F for leads within apparatus ethylene 0.76
ethylene or within raceways 1.14
connected to apparatus, or
as open wiring (nickel or
nickel-coated copper
only)
Heat-resistant THHN 90°C Dry and damp locations Flame-retardant, heat- 0.38 Nylon jacket or
thermoplastic 194°F resistant thermoplastic 0.51 equivalent
0.76
1.02
1.27
1.52
1.78
Moisture- and heat- THHW 75°C Wet location Flame-retardant, moisture- 0.76 None
resistant 167°F and heat-resistant 1.14
thermoplastic thermoplastic 1.52
90°C Dry location 2.03
194°F 2.41
2.79
Table 3.10.1.13 (Continued)
Maximum Thickness of
Type Operating Insulation Outer
Trade Name Letter Temperature Application Provisions Insulation (mm) Covering1
Moisture- and heat- THW4 75°C Dry and wet locations Flame-retardant, moisture- 0.76 None
resistant 167°F and heat-resistant 1.14
thermoplastic thermoplastic 1.52
90°C Special applications within 2.03
194°F electric discharge lighting 2.41
equipment. Limited to 2.79
1000 open-circuit volts or 3.18
less. (size 14-8 only as
permitted in 410.33)
Moisture- and heat- THWN4 75°C Dry and wet locations Flame-retardant, moisture- 0.38 Nylon jacket or
resistant 167°F and heat-resistant 0.51 equivalent
thermoplastic thermoplastic 0.76
1.02
1.27
1.52
1.78
Moisture-resistant TW 60°C Dry and wet locations Flame-retardant, moisture- 0.76 None
thermoplastic 140°F resistant thermoplastic 1.14
1.52
2.03
2.41
2.79
3.18
Table 3.10.1.13 (Continued)
Maximum Thickness of
Type Operating Insulation Outer
Trade Name Letter Temperature Application Provisions Insulation (mm) Covering1
Underground feeder UF 60°C See Article 3.40. Moisture-resistant 1.52 Integral with
and branch-circuit 140°F 2.03 insulation
cable — single 2.41
conductor (for 75°C Moisture- and heat-
Type UF cable 167°F7 resistant
employing more
than one
conductor, see
Article 3.40.)
Underground USE4 75°C See Article 3.38. Heat- and moisture- 1.14 Moisture-
service-entrance 167°F resistant 1.52 resistant
cable — single 2.03 nonmetallic
conductor (for 2.41 covering (See
Type USE cable 2.79 3.38.1.2.)
employing more 3.18
than one
conductor, see
Article 3.38.)
Thermoset XHH 90°C Dry and damp locations Flame-retardant thermoset 0.76 None
194°F 1.14
1.40
1.65
2.03
2.41
Moisture-resistant XHHW4 90°C Dry and damp locations Flame-retardant, moisture- 0.76 None
thermoset 194°F resistant thermoset 1.14
Wet locations 1.40
75°C 1.65
167°F 2.03
2.41
Table 3.10.1.13 (Continued)
Maximum Thickness of
Type Operating Insulation Outer
Trade Name Letter Temperature Application Provisions Insulation (mm) Covering1
Moisture-resistant XHHW-2 90°C Dry and wet locations Flame-retardant, moisture- 0.76 None
thermoset 194°F resistant thermoset 1.14
1.40
1.65
2.03
2.41
Modified ethylene Z 90°C Dry and damp locations Modified ethylene 0.38 None
tetrafluoro- 194°F tetrafluoro-ethylene 0.51
ethylene Dry locations — special 0.64
150°C applications2 0.89
302°F 1.14
Modified ethylene ZW4 75°C Wet locations Modified ethylene 0.76 None
tetrafluoro- 167°F tetrafluoro-ethylene 1.14
ethylene
90°C Dry and damp locations
194°F
Dry locations — special
150°C applications2
302°F
1 Some insulations do not require an outer covering.
2 Where design conditions require maximum conductor operating temperatures above 90°C (194°F).
3 For signaling circuits permitting 300-volt insulation.
4 Listed wire types designated with the suffix “2,” such as RHW-2, shall be permitted to be used at a continuous 90°C (194°F) operating temperature, wet or
dry.
5 Some rubber insulations do not require an outer covering.
6 Includes integral jacket.
7 For ampacity limitation, see 3.40.2.71.
8 Insulation thickness shall be permitted to be 2.03 mm (80 mils) for listed Type USE conductors that have been subjected to special investigations. The
nonmetallic covering over individual rubber-covered conductors of aluminum-sheathed cable and of lead-sheathed or multiconductor cable shall not be required to
be flame retardant. For Type MC cable, see 3.30.3.1. For nonmetallic-sheathed cable, see Article 3.34, Part III. For Type UF cable, see Part 3.40.3.
 see 3.10.1.13. For installation requirements, see 3.10.1.1 through
3.10.1.15 Ampacities for Conductors Rated 0–2000 Volts. 3.10.1.10 and the various articles of this Code. For flexible cords, see
Table 4.0.1.4, Table 4.0.1.5(a), and Table 4.0.1.5(b).
(a) General.
(2) Adjustment Factors.
(1) Tables or Engineering Supervision. Ampacities for conductors
shall be permitted to be determined by tables as provided in a. More Than Three Current-Carrying Conductors in a Raceway
3.10.1.15(b) or under engineering supervision, as provided in or Cable. Where the number of current-carrying conductors in a
3.10.1.15(c). raceway or cable exceeds three, or where single conductors or
multiconductor cables are stacked or bundled longer than 600 mm
FPN No. 1: Ampacities provided by this section do not take voltage drop into without maintaining spacing and are not installed in raceways, the
consideration. See 2.10.2.1(a), FPN No. 4, for branch circuits and 2.15.1.2(a), FPN
No. 2, for feeders. allowable ampacity of each conductor shall be reduced as shown in
FPN No. 2: For the allowable ampacities of Type MTW wire, see Table 13.5.1 in Table 3.10.1.15(b)(2)(a). Each current-carrying conductor of a
NFPA 79-2002, Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery. paralleled set of conductors shall be counted as a current-carrying
conductor.
(2) Selection of Ampacity. Where more than one calculated or
tabulated ampacity could apply for a given circuit length, the lowest FPN No. 1: See Annex B, Table B.3.10.1.11, for adjustment factors for more than
value shall be used. three current-carrying conductors in a raceway or cable with load diversity.
FPN No. 2: See 3.66.2.14(a) for correction factors for conductors in sheet metal
auxiliary gutters and 3.76.2.13 for correction factors for conductors in metal
Exception: Where two different ampacities apply to adjacent portions wireways.
of a circuit, the higher ampacity shall be permitted to be used beyond
the point of transition, a distance equal to 3 000 mm or 10 percent of Exception No. 1: Where conductors of different systems, as provided
the circuit length figured at the higher ampacity, whichever is less. in 3.0.1.3, are installed in a common raceway or cable, the derating
factors shown in Table 3.10.1.15(b)(2)(a) shall apply only to the
FPN: See 1.10.1.14(c) for conductor temperature limitations due to termination number of power and lighting conductors (Articles 2.10, 2.15, 2.20,
provisions.
and 2.30).
Exception No. 2: For conductors installed in cable trays, the
(b) Tables. Ampacities for conductors rated 0 to 2000 volts shall be
provisions of 3.92.1.11 shall apply.
as specified in the Allowable Ampacity Table 3.10.1.16 through Table
Exception No. 3: Derating factors shall not apply to conductors in
3.10.1.19, and Ampacity Table 3.10.1.20 and Table 3.10.1.21 as
nipples having a length not exceeding 600 mm.
modified by (b)(1) through (b)(6).
Exception No. 4: Derating factors shall not apply to underground
FPN: Table 3.10.1.16 through Table 3.10.1.19 are application tables for use in conductors entering or leaving an outdoor trench if those conductors
determining conductor sizes on loads calculated in accordance with Article 220. have physical protection in the form of rigid metal conduit,
Allowable ampacities result from consideration of one or more of the following: intermediate metal conduit, or rigid nonmetallic conduit having a
(1) Temperature compatibility with connected equipment, especially the
connection points. length not exceeding 3 000 mm and if the number of conductors does
(2) Coordination with circuit and system overcurrent protection. not exceed four.
(3) Compliance with the requirements of product listings or certifications. See
110.3(b).
Exception No. 5: Adjustment factors shall not apply to Type AC cable
(4) Preservation of the safety benefits of established industry practices and or to Type MC cable without an overall outer jacket under the
standardized procedures. following conditions:
(1) Each cable has not more than three current-carrying
(1) General. For explanation of type letters used in tables and for conductors.
recognized sizes of conductors for the various conductor insulations,
 (2) The conductors are 3.5 mm2 (2.0 mm dia.) copper. c. On a 4-wire, 3-phase wye circuit where the major portion of
(3) Not more than 20 current-carrying conductors are bundled, the load consists of nonlinear loads, harmonic currents are present in
stacked, or supported on “bridle rings.” the neutral conductor; the neutral shall therefore be considered a
current-carrying conductor.
A 60 percent adjustment factor shall be applied where the current-
carrying conductors in these cables that are stacked or bundled longer (5) Grounding or Bonding Conductor. A grounding or bonding
than 600 mm without maintaining spacing exceeds 20. conductor shall not be counted when applying the provisions of
3.10.1.15(b)(2)(a).
(6) 120/240-Volt, 3-Wire, Single-Phase Dwelling Services and
Table 3.10.1.15(b)(2)(a) Adjustment Factors for More Than Three Feeders. For individual dwelling units of one family, two-family, and
Current-Carrying Conductors in a Raceway or Cable multifamily dwellings, conductors, as listed in Table 3.10.1.15(b)(6),
Percent of Values in Tables shall be permitted as 120/240-volt, 3-wire, single-phase service-
Number of 3.10.1.16 through 3.10.1.19 as entrance conductors, service lateral conductors, and feeder conductors
Current-Carrying Adjusted for Ambient that serve as the main power feeder to each dwelling unit and are
Conductors Temperature if Necessary installed in raceway or cable with or without an equipment grounding
4–6 80 conductor. For application of this section, the main power feeder shall
7–9 70 be the feeder(s) between the main disconnect and the lighting and
10–20 50 appliance branch-circuit panelboards(s). The feeder conductors to a
21–30 45 dwelling unit shall not be required to have an allowable ampacity
31–40 40 rating greater than their service-entrance conductors. The grounded
41 and above 35 conductor shall be permitted to be smaller than the ungrounded
conductors, provided the requirements of 2.15.1.2, 2.20.3.22, and
2.30.4.3 are met.
b. More Than One Conduit, Tube, or Raceway. Spacing
between conduits, tubing, or raceways shall be maintained.

(3) Bare or Covered Conductors. Where bare or covered

conductors are used with insulated conductors, their allowable
ampacities shall be limited to those permitted for the adjacent
insulated conductors.
(4) Neutral Conductor.

a. A neutral conductor that carries only the unbalanced current

from other conductors of the same circuit shall not be required to be
counted when applying the provisions of 3.10.1.15(b)(2)(a).
b. In a 3-wire circuit consisting of two phase wires and the
neutral of a 4-wire, 3-phase, wye-connected system, a common
conductor carries approximately the same current as the line-to-neutral
load currents of the other conductors and shall be counted when
applying the provisions of 3.10.1.15(b)(2)(a).
Table 3.10.1.15(b)(6) Conductor Types and Sizes for 120/240-Volt,
3-Wire, Single-Phase Dwelling Services and Feeders. Conductor
Types RHH, RHW, RHW-2, THHN, THHW, THW, THW-2,
THWN, THWN-2, XHHW, XHHW-2, SE, USE, USE-2
Conductor mm2
Aluminum or
Copper-Clad Service or Feeder
Copper Aluminum Rating (Amperes)
22 30 100
30 30 110
30 50 125
38 60 150

50 80 175
60 100 200
80 125 225
100 150 250

125 175 300

175 250 350
200 325 400

(c) Engineering Supervision. Under engineering supervision,

conductor ampacities shall be permitted to be calculated by means of
the following general formula:

TC – (TA + ΔTD)
I=
RDC(1 + YC)RCA

where:
TC= conductor temperature in degrees Celsius (°C)
TA= ambient temperature in degrees Celsius (°C)
TD= dielectric loss temperature rise
RDC= dc resistance of conductor at temperature TC
YC= component ac resistance resulting from skin effect and
proximity effect
RCA= effective thermal resistance between conductor and
surrounding ambient

FPN: See Appendix B for examples of formula applications.

 Table 3.10.1.16 Allowable Ampacities of Insulated Conductors Rated 0 Through 2000 Volts, 60°C Through
90°C (140°F Through 194°F), Not More Than Three Current-Carrying Conductors in Raceway, Cable, or
Earth (Directly Buried), Based on Ambient Temperature of 30°C (86°F)
Temperature Rating of Conductor (See Table 3.10.1.13.)
60°C (140°F) 75°C (167°F) 90°C (194°F) 60°C (140°F) 75°C (167°F) 90°C (194°F)
Types TBS, SA, Types TBS, SA,
SIS, FEP, SIS, FEP,
FEPB, MI, FEPB, MI,
RHH, RHW-2, RHH, RHW-2,
THHN, THHW, THHN, THHW,
THW-2, THW-2,
Types RHW, THWN-2, USE- Types RHW, THWN-2, USE-
THHW, THW, 2, XHH, THHW, THW, 2, XHH,
THWN, XHHW, THWN, XHHW,
XHHW, USE, XHHW-2, ZW- XHHW, USE, XHHW-2, ZW-
Size Types TW, UF ZW 2 Types TW, UF ZW 2 Size
mm2(mm dia.) COPPER ALUMINUM OR COPPER-CLAD ALUMINUM mm2(mm dia.)
2.0(1.6)* 20 20 25 — — — 2.0(1.6)*
3.5(2.0)* 25 25 30 20 20 25 3.5(2.0)*
5.5(2.6)* 30 35 40 25 30 35 5.5(2.6)*
8.0(3.2) 40 50 55 30 40 45 8.0(3.2)
14 55 65 70 40 50 60 14
22 70 85 90 55 65 80 22
30 90 110 115 65 80 90 30
38 100 125 130 75 90 105 38
50 120 145 150 95 110 125 50
60 135 160 170 100 120 135 60
80 160 195 205 120 145 165 80
100 185 220 225 140 170 190 100
125 210 255 265 165 200 225 125
150 240 280 295 185 225 250 150
175 260 305 345 205 245 275 175
200 280 330 355 220 265 300 200
250 315 375 400 255 305 345 250
Table 3.10.1.16 (Continued)
Temperature Rating of Conductor (See Table 3.10.1.13.)
60°C (140°F) 75°C (167°F) 90°C (194°F) 60°C (140°F) 75°C (167°F) 90°C (194°F)
Types TBS, SA, Types TBS, SA,
SIS, FEP, SIS, FEP,
FEPB, MI, FEPB, MI,
RHH, RHW-2, RHH, RHW-2,
THHN, THHW, THHN, THHW,
THW-2, THW-2,
Types RHW, THWN-2, USE- Types RHW, THWN-2, USE-
THHW, THW, 2, XHH, THHW, THW, 2, XHH,
THWN, XHHW, THWN, XHHW,
XHHW, USE, XHHW-2, ZW- XHHW, USE, XHHW-2, ZW-
Size Types TW, UF ZW 2 Types TW, UF ZW 2 Size
mm2(mm dia.) COPPER ALUMINUM OR COPPER-CLAD ALUMINUM mm2(mm dia.)
325 370 435 470 305 365 410 325
375 395 470 530 315 380 430 375
400 405 485 515 335 405 460 400
500 445 540 580 370 440 495 500
CORRECTION FACTORS
Ambient For ambient temperatures other than 30°C (86°F), multiply the allowable ampacities shown above by the Ambient Temp.
Temp. (°C) appropriate factor shown below. (°F)
21–25 1.08 1.05 1.04 1.08 1.05 1.04 70-77
26-30 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 78-86
31-35 0.91 0.94 0.96 0.91 0.94 0.96 87-95
36-40 0.82 0.88 0.91 0.82 0.88 0.91 96-104
41-45 0.71 0.82 0.87 0.71 0.82 0.87 105-113
46-50 0.58 0.75 0.82 0.58 0.75 0.82 114-122
51-55 0.41 0.67 0.76 0.41 0.67 0.76 123-131
56-60 — 0.58 0.71 — 0.58 0.71 132-140
61-70 — 0.33 0.58 — 0.33 0.58 141-158
71-80 — — 0.41 — — 0.41 159-176
* See 2.40.1.4(d).
Table 3.10.1.17 Allowable Ampacities of Single-Insulated Conductors Rated 0 Through 2000 Volts in Free Air,
Based on Ambient Air Temperature of 30°C (86°F)
Temperature Rating of Conductor (See Table 3.10.1.13.)
60°C (140°F) 75°C (167°F) 90°C (194°F) 60°C (140°F) 75°C (167°F) 90°C (194°F)
Types TBS, SA, Types TBS, SA,
SIS, FEP, SIS, FEP,
FEPB, MI, FEPB, MI,
RHH, RHW-2, RHH, RHW-2,
THHN, THHW, THHN, THHW,
THW-2, THW-2,
Types RHW, THWN-2, USE- Types RHW, THWN-2, USE-
THHW, THW, 2, XHH, THHW, THW, 2, XHH,
THWN, XHHW, THWN, XHHW,
XHHW, USE, XHHW-2, ZW- XHHW, USE, XHHW-2, ZW-
Size Types TW, UF ZW 2 Types TW, UF ZW 2 Size mm2(mm
mm2(mm dia.) COPPER ALUMINUM OR COPPER-CLAD ALUMINUM dia.)
2.0(1.6)* 25 30 35 — — — 2.0(1.6)*
3.5(2.0)* 30 35 40 25 30 35 3.5(2.0)*
5.5(2.6)* 40 50 55 35 40 40 5.5(2.6)*
8.0(3.2) 55 65 75 45 50 55 8.0(3.2)
14 80 95 105 65 80 85 14
22 105 130 140 85 105 115 22
30 130 160 170 95 115 130 30
38 155 185 195 115 135 155 38
50 180 220 235 135 165 185 50
60 205 250 260 155 185 210 60
80 250 300 320 185 225 255 80
100 290 355 370 220 265 295 100
125 35 400 420 260 310 350 125
150 375 440 475 295 355 400 150
175 410 495 560 325 390 440 175
200 440 540 570 345 410 465 200
250 505 620 655 405 485 545 250
Table 3.10.1.17 (Continued)
Temperature Rating of Conductor (See Table 3.10.1.13.)
60°C (140°F) 75°C (167°F) 90°C (194°F) 60°C (140°F) 75°C (167°F) 90°C (194°F)
Types TBS, SA, Types TBS, SA,
SIS, FEP, SIS, FEP,
FEPB, MI, FEPB, MI,
RHH, RHW-2, RHH, RHW-2,
THHN, THHW, THHN, THHW,
THW-2, THW-2,
Types RHW, THWN-2, USE- Types RHW, THWN-2, USE-
THHW, THW, 2, XHH, THHW, THW, 2, XHH,
THWN, XHHW, THWN, XHHW,
XHHW, USE, XHHW-2, ZW- XHHW, USE, XHHW-2, ZW-
Size Types TW, UF ZW 2 Types TW, UF ZW 2 Size
mm2(mm dia.) COPPER ALUMINUM OR COPPER-CLAD ALUMINUM mm2(mm dia.)
325 600 720 770 475 560 640 325
375 645 775 875 510 615 690 375
400 675 810 875 530 640 725 400
500 770 930 995 620 745 835 500
CORRECTION FACTORS
Ambient For ambient temperatures other than 30°C (86°F), multiply the allowable ampacities shown above by the Ambient Temp.
Temp. (°C) appropriate factor shown below. (°F)
21–25 1.08 1.05 1.04 1.08 1.05 1.04 70-77
26-30 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 78-86
31-35 0.91 0.94 0.96 0.91 0.94 0.96 87-95
36-40 0.82 0.88 0.91 0.82 0.88 0.91 96-104
41-45 0.71 0.82 0.87 0.71 0.82 0.87 105-113
46-50 0.58 0.75 0.82 0.58 0.75 0.82 114-122
51-55 0.41 0.67 0.76 0.41 0.67 0.76 123-131
56-60 — 0.58 0.71 — 0.58 0.71 132-140
61-70 — 0.33 0.58 — 0.33 0.58 141-158
71-80 — — 0.41 — — 0.41 159-176
* See 2.0.1.4(d).
Table 3.10.1.18 Allowable Ampacities of Insulated Conductors Rated 0 Through 2000 Volts, 150°C Through
250°C (302°F Through 482°F). Not More Than Three Current-Carrying Conductors in Raceway or Cable,
Based on Ambient Air Temperature of 40°C (104°F)
Temperature Rating of Conductor (See Table 3.10.1.13.)
150°C (302°F) 200°C (392°F) 250°C (482°F) 150°C (302°F)
Type Z Types FEP, FEPB, PFA, SA Types PFAH, TFE Type Z
Size NICKEL OR NICKEL-COATED ALUMINUM OR COPPER- Size
mm2(mm dia.) COPPER COPPER CLAD ALUMINUM mm2(mm dia.)
2.0(1.6) 34 36 39 — 2.0(1.6)
3.5(2.0) 43 45 54 30 3.5(2.0)
5.5(2.6) 55 60 73 44 5.5(2.6)
8.0(3.2) 76 83 93 57 8.0(3.2)
14 96 110 117 75 14
22 120 125 148 94 22
30 143 152 166 109 30
30 160 171 191 124 30
38 186 197 215 145 38
50 215 229 244 169 50
60 251 260 273 198 60
80 288 297 308 227 80
100 332 346 361 260 100
CORRECTION FACTORS
Ambient Temp. For ambient temperatures other than 40°C (104°F), multiply the allowable ampacities shown above by the appropriate Ambient Temp. (°F)
(°C) factor shown below.
41-50 0.95 0.97 0.98 0.95 105-122
51-60 0.90 0.94 0.95 0.90 123-140
61-70 0.85 0.90 0.93 0.85 141-158
71-80 0.80 0.87 0.90 0.80 159-176
81-90 0.74 0.83 0.87 0.74 177-194
91-100 0.67 0.79 0.85 0.67 195-212
101-120 0.52 0.71 0.79 0.52 213-248
121-140 0.30 0.61 0.72 0.30 249-284
141-160 — 0.50 0.65 — 285-320
161-180 — 0.35 0.58 — 321-356
181-200 — — 0.49 — 357-392
201-225 — — 0.35 — 393-437
Table 3.10.1.19 Allowable Ampacities of Single-Insulated Conductors, Rated 0 Through 2 000 Volts, 150°C
Through 250°C (302°F Through 482°F), in Free Air, Based on Ambient Air Temperature of 40°C (104°F)
Temperature Rating of Conductor (See Table 3.10.1.13.)
150°C (302°F) 200°C (392°F) 250°C (482°F) 150°C (302°F)
Types FEP, FEPB,
Type Z PFA, SA Types PFAH, TFE Type Z
Size NICKEL OR NICKEL- ALUMINUM OR COPPER-CLAD Size
mm2(mm dia.) COPPER COATED COPPER ALUMINUM mm2(mm dia.)
2.0(1.6) 46 54 59 — 2.0(1.6)
3.5(2.0) 60 68 78 47 3.5(2.0)
5.5(2.6) 80 90 107 63 5.5(2.6)
8.0(3.2) 106 124 142 83 8.0(3.2)
14 155 165 205 112 14
22 190 220 278 148 22
30 214 252 327 170 30
30 255 293 381 198 30
38 293 344 440 228 38
50 339 399 532 263 50
60 390 467 591 305 60
80 451 546 708 351 80
100 529 629 830 411 100
CORRECTION FACTORS
Ambient Temp. For ambient temperatures other than 40°C (104°F), multiply the allowable ampacities shown above by the appropriate Ambient Temp. (°F)
(°C) factor shown below.
41-50 0.95 0.97 0.98 0.95 105-122
51-60 0.90 0.94 0.95 0.90 123-140
61-70 0.85 0.90 0.93 0.85 141-158
71-80 0.80 0.87 0.90 0.80 159-176
81-90 0.74 0.83 0.87 0.74 177-194
91-100 0.67 0.79 0.85 0.67 195-212
101-120 0.52 0.71 0.79 0.52 213-248
121-140 0.30 0.61 0.72 0.30 249-284
141-160 — 0.50 0.65 — 285-320
161-180 — 0.35 0.58 — 321-356
181-200 — — 0.49 — 357-392
201-225 — — 0.35 — 393-437
 Table 3.10.1.20 Ampacities of Not More Than Three Single Insulated Conductors, Rated 0 Through 2 000 Volts, Supported on a
Messenger, Based on Ambient Air Temperature of 40°C (104°F)
Temperature Rating of Conductor (See Table 3.10.1.13.)
150°C (302°F) 200°C (392°F) 250°C (482°F) 150°C (302°F)
Type Z Types FEP, FEPB, PFA, SA Types PFAH, TFE Type Z
Size NICKEL OR NICKEL- ALUMINUM OR COPPER- Size
mm2(mm dia.) COPPER COATED COPPER CLAD ALUMINUM mm2(mm dia.)
8.0(3.2) 53 62 41 48 8.0(3.2)
14 80 94 62 73 14
22 105 121 81 94 22
30 116 136 91 106 30
38 138 162 107 126 38
50 165 193 129 150 50
60 187 218 146 170 60
80 227 266 178 208 80
100 270 315 210 246 100
125 316 369 248 288 125
150 363 423 285 331 150
175 175
200 416 486 327 382 200
250 496 581 392 458 250
325 576 674 458 535 325
375 375
400 659 771 529 617 400
500 741 870 606 709 500
CORRECTION FACTORS
Ambient Temp. (°C) For ambient temperatures other than 40°C (104°F), multiply the allowable ampacities shown above by the appropriate Ambient Temp. (°F)
factor shown below.
21-25 1.20 1.14 1.20 1.14 70-77
26-30 1.13 1.10 1.13 1.10 19-86
31-35 1.07 1.05 1.07 1.05 88-95
36-40 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 97-104
41-45 0.93 0.95 0.93 0.95 106-113
46-50 0.85 0.89 0.85 0.89 115-122
51-55 0.76 0.84 0.76 0.84 124-131
56-60 0.65 0.77 0.65 0.77 133-140
61-70 0.38 0.63 0.38 0.63 142-158
71-80 — 0.45 — 0.45 160-176
Table 3.10.1.21 Ampacities of Bare or Covered Conductors in Free Air, Based on 40°C (104°F) Ambient, 80°C
(176°F) Total Conductor Temperature, 610 mm/sec (2 ft/sec) Wind Velocity
Copper Conductors AAC Aluminum Conductors
Bare Covered Bare Covered
mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2
(mm dia.) Amperes (mm dia.) Amperes (mm dia.) Amperes (mm dia.) Amperes
8.0(3.2) 92 8.0(3.2) 97 8.0(3.2) 71 8.0(3.2) 75
14 131 14 137 14 101 14 106
22 161 22 169 22 125 22 132
30 180 30 189 30 141 30 147
50 254 50 268 50 198 50 208
60 291 60 304 60 225 60 237
80 354 80 372 80 275 80 289
100 417 100 438 100 325 100 342
125 398 125 418
125 488 125 512 150 473 150 497
150 562 150 590 175 175
175 175 200 505 200 530
250 774 250 813 250 651 250 683
375 375 325 738 325 775
400 1033 400 1084 375 375
500 1181 500 1241 400 846 400 888
500 911 — —
3.10.1.60 Conductors Rated 2001 to 35,000 Volts. (1) Grounded Shields. Ampacities shown in Table 3.10.1.69,
Table 3.10.1.70, Table 3.10.1.81, and Table 3.10.1.82 are for cable
(a) Definitions. with shields grounded at one point only. Where shields are grounded
at more than one point, ampacities shall be adjusted to take into
Electrical Ducts. As used in Article 3.10, electrical ducts shall consideration the heating due to shield currents.
include any of the electrical conduits recognized in Chapter 3 as (2) Burial Depth of Underground Circuits. Where the burial depth
suitable for use underground; other raceways round in cross section, of direct burial or electrical duct bank circuits is modified from the
listed for underground use, and embedded in earth or concrete. values shown in a figure or table, ampacities shall be permitted to be
modified as indicated in (c)(1) and (c)(2).
Thermal Resistivity. As used in this Code, the heat transfer
capability through a substance by conduction. It is the reciprocal of a. Where burial depths are increased in part(s) of an electrical
thermal conductivity and is designated Rho and expressed in the units duct run, no decrease in ampacity of the conductors is needed,
°C-cm/watt. provided the total length of parts of the duct run increased in depth is
less than 25 percent of the total run length.
(b) Ampacities of Conductors Rated 2001 to 35,000 Volts. b. Where burial depths are deeper than shown in a specific
Ampacities for solid dielectric-insulated conductors shall be permitted underground ampacity table or figure, an ampacity derating factor of 6
to be determined by tables or under engineering supervision, as percent per 300 mm increase in depth for all values of rho shall be
provided in 3.10.1.60(c) and (d). permitted.

(1) Selection of Ampacity. Where more than one calculated or No rating change is needed where the burial depth is decreased.
tabulated ampacity could apply for a given circuit length, the lowest
value shall be used. (3) Electrical Ducts in Figure 3.10.1.60. At locations where
electrical ducts enter equipment enclosures from under ground,
Exception: Where two different ampacities apply to adjacent portions spacing between such ducts, as shown in Figure 3.10.1.60, shall be
of a circuit, the higher ampacity shall be permitted to be used beyond permitted to be reduced without requiring the ampacity of conductors
the point of transition, a distance equal to 3 000 mm or 10 percent of therein to be reduced.
the circuit length figured at the higher ampacity, whichever is less.
(4) Ambients Not in Tables. Ampacities at ambient temperatures
FPN: See 1.10.3.11 for conductor temperature limitations due to termination other than those shown in the tables shall be determined by means of
provisions.
the following formula:
(c) Tables. Ampacities for conductors rated 2001 to 35,000 volts
shall be as specified in the Ampacity Table 3.10.1.67 through Table TC – TA2 + ΔTD
I2 = I1
3.10.1.86. Ampacities at ambient temperatures other than those shown TC – TA1 + ΔTD
in the tables shall be determined by the formula in 3.10.1.60(c)(4).
where:
FPN No. 1: For ampacities calculated in accordance with 3.10.1.60(b), reference I1= ampacity from tables at ambient TA1
IEEE 835-1994 (IPCEA Pub. No. P-46-426), Standard Power Cable Ampacity I2= ampacity at desired ambient TA2
Tables, and the references therein for availability of all factors and constants.
FPN No. 2: Ampacities provided by this section do not take voltage drop into TC= conductor temperature in degrees Celsius (°C)
consideration. See 2.10.2.1(a), FPN No. 4, for branch circuits and 2.15.1.2(a), FPN TA1= surrounding ambient from tables in degrees Celsius (°C)
No. 2, for feeders. TA2= desired ambient in degrees Celsius (°C)
TD= dielectric loss temperature rise
 (d) Engineering Supervision. Under engineering supervision,
conductor ampacities shall be permitted to be calculated by means of
the following general formula:

TC – (TA + ΔTD)
I=
RDC(1 + YC)RCA

where:
TC= conductor temperature in °C
TA= ambient temperature in °C
TD= dielectric loss temperature rise
RDC= dc resistance of conductor at temperature TC
YC= component ac resistance resulting from skin effect and
proximity effect
RCA= effective thermal resistance between conductor and
surrounding ambient

FPN: See Appendix B for examples of formula applications.

Table 3.10.1.61 Conductor Application and Insulation

Maximum
Trade Type Operating Application Outer
Name Letter Temperature Provision Insulation Covering
Medium MV-90 90°C Dry or wet Thermoplastic Jacket,
voltage MV-105* 105°C locations rated or sheath, or
solid 2001 volts and thermosetting armor
dielectric higher
*Where design conditions require maximum conductor temperatures above 90°C.

Figure 3.10.1.60 Cable Installation Dimensions for Use with Table

3.10.1.77 Through Table 3.10.1.86.
 Table 3.10.1.62 Thickness of Insulation for 601- to 2000-Volt
Nonshielded Types RHH and RHW
Conductor Size Column A1 Column B2
2
mm (mm dia.) mm mm
2.0(1.6)–5.5(2.6) 2.03 1.52
8.0(3.2) 2.03 1.78
14 – 30 2.41 1.78
38 – 60 2.79 2.29
80 – 100 2.79 2.29
213 – 250 3.18 2.67
251 – 500 3.56 3.05
501 – 1000 3.56 3.56
1
Column A insulations are limited to natural, SBR, and butyl rubbers.
2
Column B insulations are materials such as cross-linked polyethylene, ethylene
propylene rubber, and composites thereof.
 Table 3.10.1.63 Thickness of Insulated Conductors Rated 2400 Volts and
Jacket for Nonshielded Solid Dielectric Insulation
Dry Locations, Single Conductor Wet or Dry Locations
Without With Jacket Single Conductor
Jacket Multiconductor
Conductor Size Insulation Insulation Jacket Insulation Jacket Insulation*
mm2(mm dia.) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
8.0(3.2) 2.79 2.29 0.76 3.18 2.03 2.29
14 2.79 2.29 0.76 3.18 2.03 2.29
22 – 30 2.79 2.29 1.14 3.18 2.03 2.29
38 – 60 2.79 2.29 1.14 3.18 2.03 2.29
80 – 100 2.79 2.29 1.65 3.18 2.41 2.29
213 – 250 3.05 2.29 1.65 3.56 2.79 2.29
251 – 400 3.30 2.29 1.65 3.94 3.18 2.29
401 – 500 3.30 2.29 1.65 3.94 3.18 2.29
*Under a common overall covering such as a jacket, sheath, or armor.
 Table 3.10.1.64 Thickness of Insulation for Shielded Solid Dielectric
Insulated Conductors Rated 2001 to 35,000 Volts
5001–8000 volts 8001–15,000 volts 15,001–25,000 volts
Conductor 2001– 100 133 173 100 133 173 100 133 173
Size 5000 Percent Percent Percent Percent Percent Percent Percent Percent Percent
mm2 Volts Insulation Insulation Insulation Insulation Insulation Insulation Insulation Insulation Insulation
(mm dia.) (mm) Level 1 Level 2 Level3 Level 1 Level 2 Level3 Level 1 Level 2 Level3
8.0(3.2) 2.29 — — — — — — — — —
14 – 22 2.29 2.92 3.56 4.45 — — — — — —
30 2.29 2.92 3.56 4.45 4.45 5.59 6.60 — — —
38 2.29 2.92 3.56 4.45 4.45 5.59 6.60 6.60 8.13 10.67
50 – 1000 2.29 2.92 3.56 4.45 4.45 5.59 6.60 6.60 8.13 10.67

Table 3.10.1.64 (Continued)

25 001–28 000 volts 28 001–35 000 volts
Conductor 2001– 100 133 173 100 133 173
Size 5000 Percent Percent Percent Percent Percent Percent
mm2 Volts Insulation Insulation Insulation Insulation Insulation Insulation
(mm dia.) (mm) Level 1 Level 2 Level3 Level 1 Level 2 Level3
38 2.29 7.11 8.76 11.30 — — —
50 – 1000 2.29 7.11 8.76 11.30 8.76 10.67 14.73
Notes:
1
100 Percent Insulation Level. Cables in this category shall be permitted to be applied where the system is provided with relay protection
such that ground faults will be cleared as rapidly as possible but, in any case, within 1 minute. While these cables are applicable to the great
majority of cable installations that are on grounded systems, they shall be permitted to be used also on other systems for which the application of
cables is acceptable, provided the above clearing requirements are met in completely de-energizing the faulted section.
2
133 Percent Insulation Level. This insulation level corresponds to that formerly designated for ungrounded systems. Cables in this category
shall be permitted to be applied in situations where the clearing time requirements of the 100 percent level category cannot be met and yet there
is adequate assurance that the faulted section will be de-energized in a time not exceeding 1 hour. Also, they shall be permitted to be used in 100
percent insulation level applications where additional insulation is desirable.
3
173 Percent Insulation Level. Cables in this category shall be permitted to be applied under all of the following conditions:
(1) In industrial establishments where the conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that only licensed electrical practitioner or non
licensed electrical practitioner under the supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner service the installation
(2) Where the fault clearing time requirements of the 133 percent level category cannot be met
(3) Where an orderly shutdown is essential to protect equipment and personnel
(4) There is adequate assurance that the faulted section will be de-energized in an orderly shutdown
Also, cables with this insulation thickness shall be permitted to be used in 100 or 133 percent insulation level applications where additional
insulation strength is desirable.
Table 3.10.1.67 Ampacities of Insulated Single Copper Conductor Table 3.10.1.68 Ampacities of Insulated Single Aluminum
Cables Triplexed in Air Based on Conductor Temperatures of Conductor Cables Triplexed in Air Based on Conductor
90°C (194°F) and 105°C (221°F) and Ambient Air Temperature of Temperatures of 90°C (194°F) and 105°C (221°F) and Ambient
40°C (104°F) Air Temperature of 40°C (104°F)

Temperature Rating of Conductor Temperature Rating of Conductor

(See Table 3.10.1.61.) (See Table 3.10.1.61.)
2001–5000 Volts 5001–35,000 Volts 2001–5000 Volts 5001–35,000 Volts
Ampacity Ampacity Ampacity Ampacity
Conductor 105°C 105°C Conductor 105°C 105°C
Size (221°F) (221°F) Size (221°F) (221°F)
mm2 90°C Type Type 90°C Type Type mm2 90°C Type Type 90°C Type Type
(mm dia.) MV-90 MV-105 MV-90 MV-105 (mm dia.) MV-90 MV-105 MV-90 MV-105
8.0(3.2) 61 70 — — 8.0(3.2) 47 53 — —
14 95 104 105 115 14 74 81 79 88
22 120 135 135 145 22 93 100 100 110
30 135 150 145 165 30 105 115 110 125
38 160 175 170 195 38 125 140 130 150
50 190 215 200 230 50 150 165 155 180
60 220 240 230 260 60 170 190 175 200
80 265 295 275 315 80 205 230 210 245
100 315 350 320 365 100 245 270 250 285
125 370 410 375 420 125 290 320 295 330
175 175
250 580 640 580 650 250 460 510 460 515
375 375
400 770 860 750 845 400 620 685 605 680
500 870 970 840 940 500 705 790 690 770
 Table 3.10.1.69 Ampacities of Insulated Single Copper Conductor Isolated in Air Based on Conductor
Temperatures of 90°C (194°F) and 105°C (221°F) and Ambient Air Temperature of 40°C (104°F)
Temperature Rating of Conductor (See Table 3.10.1.61.)
Conductor 2001–5000 Volts Ampacity 5001–15,000 Volts Ampacity 15,001–35,000 Volts Ampacity
Size 105°C 105°C 105°C
mm2 90°C (194°F) (221°F) 90°C (194°F) (221°F) 90°C (194°F) (221°F)
(mm dia.) Type MV-90 Type MV-105 Type MV-90 Type MV-105 Type MV-90 Type MV-105
8.0(3.2) 78 87 — — — —
14 115 125 115 130 — —
22 150 165 155 170 — —
30 160 185 165 185 — —
38 195 220 195 220 195 220
50 235 260 235 260 235 260
60 265 290 265 295 265 290
80 320 355 320 355 320 350
100 375 415 375 415 370 415
125 435 485 435 485 430 480
175
250 695 775 685 765 680 755
375
400 925 1 030 910 1 020 895 1 000
500 1 060 1 185 1 050 1 030 1 030 1 145
 Table 3.10.1.70 Ampacities of Insulated Single Aluminum Conductor Isolated in Air Based on Conductor
Temperatures of 90°C (194°F) and 105°C (221°F) and Ambient Air Temperature of 40°C (104°F)
Temperature Rating of Conductor (See Table 3.10.1.61.)
Conductor 2001–5000 Volts Ampacity 5001–15,000 Volts Ampacity 15,001–35,000 Volts Ampacity
Size 105°C 105°C 105°C
mm2 90°C (194°F) (221°F) 90°C (194°F) (221°F) 90°C (194°F) (221°F)
(mm dia.) Type MV-90 Type MV-105 Type MV-90 Type MV-105 Type MV-90 Type MV-105
8.0(3.2) 60 67 — — — —
14 89 100 92 102 — —
22 115 125 115 130 — —
30 125 140 125 145 — —
38 150 170 150 170 150 170
50 180 200 180 200 180 200
60 200 230 205 230 200 230
80 250 275 250 275 250 275
100 290 325 290 325 290 320
125 340 380 340 380 340 375
175
250 545 605 535 600 530 590
375
400 730 815 720 805 705 790
500 845 940 830 930 815 910
 Table 3.10.1.71 Ampacities of an Insulated Three-Conductor Table 3.10.1.72 Ampacities of an Insulated Three-Conductor
Copper Cable Isolated in Air Based on Conductor Temperatures Aluminum Cable Isolated in Air Based on Conductor
of 90°C (194°F) and 105°C (221°F) and Ambient Air Temperature Temperatures of 90°C (194°F) and 105°C (221°F) and Ambient
of 40°C (104°F) Air Temperature of 40°C (104°F)

Temperature Rating of Conductor Temperature Rating of Conductor

(See Table 3.10.1.61.) (See Table 3.10.1.61.)
2001–5000 Volts 5001–35,000 Volts 2001–5000 Volts 5001–35,000 Volts
Ampacity Ampacity Ampacity Ampacity
Conductor 105°C 105°C Conductor 105°C 105°C
Size (221°F) (221°F) Size (221°F) (221°F)
mm2 90°C Type Type 90°C Type Type mm2 90°C Type Type 90°C Type Type
(mm dia.) MV-90 MV-105 MV-90 MV-105 (mm dia.) MV-90 MV-105 MV-90 MV-105
8.0(3.2) 55 62 — — 8.0(3.2) 43 48 — —
14 83 93 98 110 14 64 71 76 84
22 105 115 120 140 22 95 93 98 105
30 120 130 140 160 30 105 100 105 125
38 140 155 160 180 38 120 125 140
50 165 185 190 215 50 130 140 150 165
60 190 210 215 240 60 150 160 165 190
80 230 260 260 290 80 180 195 200 225
100 265 300 305 335 100 210 235 240 265
125 315 350 355 395 125 250 280 280 315
175 175
250 485 545 535 600 250 385 430 425 475
375 375
400 635 705 690 765 400 510 565 555 615
500 695 780 760 850 500 575 640 625 695
 Table 3.10.1.73 Ampacities of an Insulated Triplexed or Three Table 3.10.1.74 Ampacities of an Insulated Triplexed or Three
Single-Conductor Copper Cables in Isolated Conduit in Air Based Single-Conductor Aluminum Cables in Isolated Conduit in Air
on Conductor Temperatures of 90°C (194°F) and 105°C (221°F) Based on Conductor Temperatures of 90°C (194°F) and 105°C
and Ambient Air Temperature of 40°C (104°F) (221°F) and Ambient Air Temperature of 40°C (104°F)

Temperature Rating of Conductor Temperature Rating of Conductor

(See Table 3.10.1.61.) (See Table 3.10.1.61.)
2001–5000 Volts 5001–35,000 Volts 2001–5000 Volts 5001–35,000 Volts
Ampacity Ampacity Ampacity Ampacity
Conductor 105°C 105°C Conductor 105°C 105°C
Size (221°F) (221°F) Size (221°F) (221°F)
mm2 90°C Type Type 90°C Type Type mm2 90°C Type Type 90°C Type Type
(mm dia.) MV-90 MV-105 MV-90 MV-105 (mm dia.) MV-90 MV-105 MV-90 MV-105
8.0(3.2) 52 57 — — 8.0(3.2) 40 45 — —
14 79 88 87 98 14 61 68 68 76
22 100 110 110 120 22 79 88 87 97
30 110 125 125 140 30 86 99 99 110
38 135 150 145 165 38 105 115 110 130
50 160 180 175 190 50 125 140 135 150
60 180 195 195 225 60 140 150 150 175
80 220 250 240 265 80 175 195 185 205
100 260 285 275 310 100 200 225 215 240
125 310 350 325 360 125 250 280 255 290
175 175
250 475 530 480 535 250 380 425 385 430
375 375
400 615 685 600 675 400 505 560 500 555
500 680 760 665 745 500 570 635 555 630
 Table 3.10.1.75 Ampacities of an Insulated Three-Conductor Table 3.10.1.76 Ampacities of an Insulated Three-Conductor
Copper Cable in Isolated Conduit in Air Based on Conductor Aluminum Cable in Isolated Conduit in Air Based on Conductor
Temperatures of 90°C (194°F) and 105°C (221°F) and Ambient Temperatures of 90°C (194°F) and 105°C (221°F) and Ambient
Air Temperature of 40°C (104°F) Air Temperature of 40°C (104°F)

Temperature Rating of Conductor Temperature Rating of Conductor

(See Table 3.10.1.61.) (See Table 3.10.1.61.)
2001–5000 Volts 5001–35,000 Volts 2001–5000 Volts 5001–35,000 Volts
Ampacity Ampacity Ampacity Ampacity
Conductor 105°C 105°C Conductor 105°C 105°C
Size (221°F) (221°F) Size (221°F) (221°F)
mm2 90°C Type Type 90°C Type Type mm2 90°C Type Type 90°C Type Type
(mm dia.) MV-90 MV-105 MV-90 MV-105 (mm dia.) MV-90 MV-105 MV-90 MV-105
8.0(3.2) 49 54 — — 8.0(3.2) 38 43 — —
14 73 81 87 97 14 56 62 67 75
22 94 103 109 124 22 73 82 87 97
30 105 115 125 140 30 83 90 99 105
38 120 135 140 160 38 96 105 110 125
50 145 165 175 190 50 115 130 135 150
60 165 185 190 215 60 130 145 150 165
80 200 225 230 260 80 155 175 180 200
100 240 265 270 300 100 185 210 210 240
125 275 310 310 345 125 215 240 245 275
175 175
250 425 475 470 525 250 340 380 380 425
375 375
400 540 600 585 655 400 440 495 485 535
500 580 650 640 715 500 500 550 540 605
Table 3.10.1.77 Ampacities of Three Single-Insulated Copper Conductors Table 3.10.1.78 Ampacities of Three Single-Insulated Aluminum Conductors
in Underground Electrical Ducts (Three Conductors per Electrical Duct) in Underground Electrical Ducts (Three Conductors per Electrical Duct)
Based on Ambient Earth Temperature of 20°C, Electrical Duct Based on Ambient Earth Temperature of 20°C, Electrical Duct Arrangement
Arrangement per Figure 3.10.1.60, 100 Percent Load Factor, Thermal per Figure 3.10.1.60, 100 Percent Load Factor, Thermal Resistance (RHO) of
Resistance (RHO) of 90, Conductor Temperatures of 90°C and 105°C 90, Conductor Temperatures of 90°C and 105°C
Conductor Temperature Rating of Conductor (See Table 3.10.1.61.) Conductor Temperature Rating of Conductor (See Table 3.10.1.61.)
Size 2001–5000 Volts Ampacity 5001–35,000 Volts Ampacity Size 2001–5000 Volts Ampacity 5001–35,000 Volts Ampacity
mm 2
90°C Type 105°C 90°C Type 105°C mm2 90°C Type 105°C 90°C Type 105°C
(mm dia.) MV-90 Type MV-105 MV-90 Type MV-105 (mm dia.) MV-90 Type MV-105 MV-90 Type MV-105
One Circuit (See Figure 3.10.1.60, Detail 1.) One Circuit (See Figure 3.10.1.60, Detail 1.)
8.0(3.2) 60 65 — — 8.0(3.2) 47 51 — —
14 89 97 95 100 14 69 75 74 79
22 110 120 115 125 22 89 96 94 100
30 125 130 130 140 30 99 105 100 110
38 145 155 150 160 38 110 120 115 125
50 175 185 180 190 50 135 140 140 145
60 190 205 200 215 60 150 160 150 165
80 230 250 240 255 80 180 195 185 195
100 270 290 275 295 100 210 230 215 230
125 315 340 320 340 125 2454 265 245 265
175 175
250 470 505 465 500 250 370 400 370 400
375 375
400 600 650 580 630 400 485 520 470 505
500 660 710 630 680 500 535 580 520 555
Three Circuits (See Figure 3.10.1.60, Detail 2.) Three Circuits (See Figure 3.10.1.60, Detail 2.)
8.0(3.2) 52 56 — — 8.0(3.2) 41 44 — —
14 77 83 81 87 14 60 64 63 68
22 98 100 100 105 22 76 83 80 86
30 105 110 110 115 30 83 90 86 90
38 120 130 125 135 38 96 105 96 105
50 140 155 145 155 50 110 120 110 125
60 160 170 160 175 60 125 135 125 135
80 195 205 195 205 80 145 160 150 160
100 220 240 225 240 100 170 185 170 185
125 255 275 255 275 125 200 215 195 215
175 175
250 375 405 370 395 250 295 320 290 315
375 375
400 475 510 454 490 400 380 405 365 395
500 520 555 490 530 500 420 455 400 435
Six Circuits (See Figure 3.10.1.60, Detail 3.) Six Circuits (See Figure 3.10.1.60, Detail 3.)
8.0(3.2) 45 49 — — 8.0(3.2) 35 38 — —
14 65 70 67 71 14 50 55 52 57
22 83 89 85 91 22 64 69 66 71
30 90 95 90 99 30 69 74 69 76
38 100 105 105 105 38 79 85 78 86
50 120 130 120 130 50 94 99 94 99
60 130 140 130 145 60 100 110 100 110
80 155 170 155 170 80 125 130 120 130
100 180 195 175 190 100 140 155 140 150
125 205 220 205 220 125 160 175 160 170
175 175
250 300 325 290 310 250 240 255 230 250
375 375
400 375 405 360 385 400 295 325 285 315
500 405 440 385 410 500 330 355 315 340
Table 3.10.1.79 Ampacities of Three Insulated Copper Conductors Cabled Table 3.10.1.80 Ampacities of Three Insulated Aluminum Conductors Cabled
Within an Overall Covering (Three-Conductor Cable) in Underground Electrical Within an Overall Covering (Three-Conductor Cable) in Underground Electrical
Ducts (One Cable per Electrical Duct) Based on Ambient Earth Temperature of Ducts (One Cable per Electrical Duct) Based on Ambient Earth Temperature of
20°C, Electrical Duct Arrangement per Figure 3.10.1.60, 100 Percent Load 20°C, Electrical Duct Arrangement per Figure 3.10.1.60, 100 Percent Load
Factor, Thermal Resistance (RHO) of 90, Conductor Temperatures of 90°C and Factor, Thermal Resistance (RHO) of 90, Conductor Temperatures of 90°C and
105°C 105°C
Conductor Temperature Rating of Conductor (See Table 3.10.1.61.) Conductor Temperature Rating of Conductor (See Table 3.10.1.61.)
Size 2001–5000 Volts Ampacity 5001–35,000 Volts Ampacity Size 2001–5000 Volts Ampacity 5001–35,000 Volts Ampacity
mm2 90°C Type 105°C 90°C Type 105°C mm2 90°C Type 105°C 90°C Type 105°C
(mm dia.) MV-90 Type MV-105 MV-90 Type MV-105 (mm dia.) MV-90 Type MV-105 MV-90 Type MV-105
One Circuit (See Figure 3.10.1.60, Detail 1.) One Circuit (See Figure 3.10.1.60, Detail 1.)
8.0(3.2) 55 60 — — 8.0(3.2) 43 47 — —
14 82 88 93 100 14 64 69 73 78
22 100 110 115 125 22 83 89 92 99
30 115 125 125 135 30 90 95 99 105
38 135 140 145 160 38 105 110 115 125
50 155 170 175 185 50 125 135 135 145
60 175 190 190 205 60 140 150 150 160
80 210 230 230 250 80 165 180 180 195
100 245 265 265 285 100 190 205 205 225
125 285 310 305 330 125 225 240 240 260
175 175
250 430 460 450 485 250 340 365 355 385
375 375
400 545 585 560 600 400 435 475 450 490
500 590 635 605 650 500 490 530 505 535
Three Circuits (See Figure 3.10.1.60, Detail 2.) Three Circuits (See Figure 3.10.1.60, Detail 2.)
8.0(3.2) 50 53 — — 8.0(3.2) 38 41 — —
14 73 78 79 85 14 57 61 62 67
22 92 99 100 105 22 72 77 77 84
30 99 105 105 115 30 77 83 86 90
38 115 125 120 135 38 92 96 96 105
50 135 145 140 155 50 105 110 110 120
60 150 160 160 170 60 115 125 120 135
80 180 195 190 200 80 140 150 145 160
100 210 225 215 235 100 160 170 165 180
125 240 260 250 265 125 185 200 195 210
175 175
250 355 380 360 385 250 280 300 285 305
375 375
400 440 480 440 480 400 355 385 360 385
500 480 515 480 510 500 395 425 395 425
Six Circuits (See Figure 3.10.1.60, Detail 3.) Six Circuits (See Figure 3.10.1.60, Detail 3.)
8.0(3.2) 43 47 — — 8.0(3.2) 34 36 — —
14 63 68 66 71 14 48 52 51 56
22 80 86 84 90 22 62 67 65 70
30 84 90 90 95 30 66 71 69 74
38 96 105 100 105 38 76 82 78 85
50 110 120 115 130 50 89 94 94 99
60 125 135 130 140 60 97 105 100 110
80 150 160 155 165 80 120 130 120 130
100 174 185 175 185 100 135 145 140 150
125 195 215 200 215 125 155 165 155 165
175 175
250 290 310 290 305 250 230 245 230 245
375 375
400 360 385 350 375 400 285 315 280 300
500 385 415 375 400 500 315 340 310 330
Table 3.10.1.81 Ampacities of Single Insulated Copper Conductors Table 3.10.1.82 Ampacities of Single Insulated Aluminum
Directly Buried in Earth Based on Ambient Earth Temperature of Conductors Directly Buried in Earth Based on Ambient Earth
20°C (68°F), Arrangement per Figure 3.10.1.60, 100 Percent Load Temperature of 20°C (68°F), Arrangement per Figure 3.10.1.60,
Factor, Thermal Resistance (RHO) of 90, Conductor 100 Percent Load Factor, Thermal Resistance (RHO) of 90,
Temperatures of 90°C (194°F) and 105°C (221°C) Conductor Temperatures of 90°C (194°F) and 105°C (221°F)
Temperature Rating of Conductor Temperature Rating of Conductor
(See Table 3.10.1.61.) (See Table 3.10.1.61.)
2001–5000 Volts 5001–35,000 Volts 2001–5000 Volts 5001–35,000 Volts
Conductor Ampacity Ampacity Conductor Ampacity Ampacity
Size 105°C 105°C Size 105°C 105°C
mm2 90°C Type Type MV- 90°C Type Type MV- mm2 90°C Type Type MV- 90°C Type Type MV-
(mm dia.) MV-90 105 MV-90 105 (mm dia.) MV-90 105 MV-90 105
One Circuit, Three Conductors (See Figure 3.10.1.60, Detail 9.) One Circuit, Three Conductors (See Figure 3.10.1.60, Detail 9.)
8.0(3.2) 100 105 — — 8.0(3.2) 80 84 — —
14 145 155 135 145 14 115 120 120 127
22 185 200 175 185 22 145 155 150 160
30 195 215 180 190 30 155 164 160 170
38 225 245 210 225 38 175 185 180 195
50 265 285 245 265 50 205 220 215 230
60 295 320 270 295 60 230 245 235 255
80 355 385 325 350 80 270 295 280 305
100 405 435 380 405 100 315 335 325 350
125 460 500 430 465 125 360 390 375 405
175 175
250 690 745 650 700 250 530 570 550 590
375 375
400 870 940 830 890 400 670 720 685 740
500 970 1 045 920 995 500 720 775 740 800
Two Circuits, Six Conductors (See Figure 3.10.1.60, Detail 10.) Two Circuits, Six Conductors (See Figure 3.10.1.60, Detail 10.)
8.0(3.2) 94 100 — — 8.0(3.2) 75 79 — —
14 135 145 125 135 14 105 110 110 120
22 170 185 165 175 22 135 145 140 150
30 185 195 170 180 30 140 155 145 160
38 210 225 195 210 38 160 175 170 180
50 245 265 230 245 50 190 205 195 210
60 270 295 255 275 60 210 230 220 235
80 325 350 305 325 80 255 270 260 280
100 375 400 350 380 100 290 315 300 320
125 425 460 405 430 125 335 340 325 350
175 175
250 630 680 600 645 250 490 525 500 535
375 375
400 800 860 760 820 400 610 660 625 670
500 880 950 845 910 500 655 705 665 720
Table 3.10.1.83 Ampacities of Three Insulated Copper Conductors Table 3.10.1.84 Ampacities of Three Insulated Aluminum
Cabled Within an Overall Covering (Three-Conductor Cable), Conductors Cabled Within an Overall Covering (Three-
Directly Buried in Earth Based on Ambient Earth Temperature of Conductor Cable), Directly Buried in Earth Based on Ambient
20°C (68°F), Arrangement per Figure 3.10.1.60, 100 Percent Load Earth Temperature of 20°C (68°F), Arrangement per Figure
Factor, Thermal Resistance (RHO) of 90, Conductor 3.10.1.60, 100 Percent Load Factor, Thermal Resistance (RHO) of
Temperatures of 90°C (194°F) and 105°C (221°F) 90, Conductor Temperatures of 90°C (194°F) and 105°C (221°F)
Temperature Rating of Conductor Temperature Rating of Conductor
(See Table 3.10.1.61.) (See Table 3.10.1.61.)
2001–5000 Volts 5001–35,000 Volts 2001–5000 Volts 5001–35,000 Volts
Conductor Ampacity Ampacity Conductor Ampacity Ampacity
Size 105°C 105°C Size 105°C 105°C
mm2 90°C Type Type MV- 90°C Type Type MV- mm2 90°C Type Type MV- 90°C Type Type MV-
(mm dia.) MV-90 105 MV-90 105 (mm dia.) MV-90 105 MV-90 105
One Circuit (See Figure 3.10.1.60, Detail 5.) One Circuit (See Figure 3.10.1.60, Detail 5.)
8.0(3.2) 80 84 — — 8.0(3.2) 61 66 — —
14 110 120 120 127 14 84 93 95 100
22 140 155 150 160 22 105 115 115 125
30 155 164 160 170 30 120 125 125 130
38 175 185 180 195 38 135 145 140 150
50 205 220 215 230 50 160 170 165 180
60 230 245 235 255 60 180 190 185 195
80 270 295 280 305 80 210 230 220 240
100 315 335 325 350 100 240 260 250 275
125 360 390 375 405 125 280 305 295 315
175 175
250 530 570 550 590 250 420 450 435 470
375 375
400 670 720 685 740 400 535 575 555 595
500 720 775 740 800 500 590 640 610 655
Two Circuits, (See Figure 3.10.1.60, Detail 6.) Two Circuits, (See Figure 3.10.1.60, Detail 6.)
8.0(3.2) 75 79 — — 8.0(3.2) 56 62 — —
14 105 110 110 120 14 79 87 84 100
22 135 145 140 150 22 100 110 105 115
30 140 155 145 160 30 110 120 115 125
38 160 175 170 180 38 125 135 130 140
50 190 205 195 210 50 145 160 150 165
60 210 230 220 235 60 165 180 170 185
80 255 270 260 280 80 195 210 200 220
100 290 315 300 320 100 230 240 235 250
125 335 340 325 350 125 260 280 270 290
175 175
250 490 525 500 535 250 385 415 395 425
375 375
400 610 660 625 670 400 495 530 500 540
500 655 705 665 720 500 540 580 550 590
Table 3.10.1.85 Ampacities of Three Triplexed Single Insulated Table 3.10.1.86 Ampacities of Three Triplexed Single Insulated
Copper Conductors Directly Buried in Earth Based on Ambient Aluminum Conductors Directly Buried in Earth Based on
Earth Temperature of 20°C (68°F), Arrangement per Figure Ambient Earth Temperature of 20°C (68°F), Arrangement per
3.10.1.60, 100 Percent Load Factor, Thermal Resistance (RHO) of Figure 3.10.1.60, 100 Percent Load Factor, Thermal Resistance
90, Conductor Temperatures 90°C (194°F) and 105°C (221°F) (RHO) of 90, Conductor Temperatures 90°C (194°F) and 105°C
Temperature Rating of Conductor (221°F)
(See Table 3.10.1.61.) Temperature Rating of Conductor
2001–5000 Volts 5001–35,000 Volts (See Table 3.10.1.61.)
Conductor Ampacity Ampacity 2001–5000 Volts 5001–35,000 Volts
Size 105°C 105°C Conductor Ampacity Ampacity
mm2 90°C Type Type MV- 90°C Type Type MV- Size 105°C 105°C
(mm dia.) MV-90 105 MV-90 105 mm2 90°C Type Type MV- 90°C Type Type MV-
One Circuit, Three Conductors (See Figure 3.10.1.60, Detail 7.) (mm dia.) MV-90 105 MV-90 105
8.0(3.2) 85 89 — — One Circuit, Three Conductors (See Figure 3.10.1.60, Detail 7.)
14 125 135 120 125 8.0(3.2) 66 70 — —
22 155 170 155 165 14 95 105 95 100
30 165 175 165 175 22 120 135 115 125
38 195 210 185 200 30 130 140 125 130
50 230 240 220 235 38 150 165 140 150
60 255 270 240 260 50 180 185 170 185
80 305 330 290 315 60 195 210 190 200
100 350 380 335 360 80 235 255 225 245
125 405 435 385 405 100 270 290 260 285
175 125 315 345 300 320
250 590 635 565 605 175
375 250 465 500 445 480
400 745 805 705 760 375
500 815 875 760 820 400 595 645 565 605
Two Circuits, Six Conductors (See Figure 3.10.1.60, Detail 8.) 500 660 715 625 670
8.0(3.2) 80 85 — — Two Circuits, Six Conductors (See Figure 3.10.1.60, Detail 8.)
14 115 120 110 120 8.0(3.2) 61 66 — —
22 145 155 145 155 14 89 100 89 95
30 155 165 150 160 22 110 120 105 115
38 175 190 175 185 30 120 130 115 125
50 210 225 200 215 38 140 145 135 145
60 230 250 225 240 50 160 175 155 170
80 275 295 265 290 60 180 190 175 190
100 320 340 305 325 80 215 230 205 225
125 365 390 350 375 100 245 265 240 255
175 125 285 305 275 295
250 535 575 510 545 175
375 250 420 455 405 435
400 670 720 635 680 375
500 730 785 680 735 400 535 575 500 540
500 590 635 555 595
 ARTICLE 3.12 — CABINETS, CUTOUT BOXES, protected from abrasion and shall comply with 3.12.1.5(a) through (c).
AND METER SOCKET ENCLOSURES
(a) Openings to Be Closed. Openings through which conductors
3.12.1.1 Scope. This article covers the installation and construction enter shall be adequately closed.
specifications of cabinets, cutout boxes, and meter socket enclosures.
(b) Metal Cabinets, Cutout Boxes, and Meter Socket Enclosures.
I. Installation Where metal enclosures within the scope of this article are installed
with messenger supported wiring, open wiring on insulators, or
3.12.1.2 Damp, Wet, or Hazardous (Classified) Locations. concealed knob-and-tube wiring, conductors shall enter through
insulating bushings or, in dry locations, through flexible tubing
(a) Damp and Wet Locations. In damp or wet locations, surface- extending from the last insulating support and firmly secured to the
type enclosures within the scope of this article shall be placed or enclosure.
equipped so as to prevent moisture or water from entering and
accumulating within the cabinet or cutout box, and shall be mounted (c) Cables. Where cable is used, each cable shall be secured to the
so there is at least 6 mm airspace between the enclosure and the wall cabinet, cutout box, or meter socket enclosure.
or other supporting surface. Enclosures installed in wet locations shall
be weatherproof. For enclosures in wet locations, raceways or cables Exception: Cables with entirely nonmetallic sheaths shall be
entering above the level of uninsulated live parts shall use fittings permitted to enter the top of a surface-mounted enclosure through one
listed for wet locations. or more nonflexible raceways not less than 450 mm and not more than
3 000 mm in length, provided all of the following conditions are met:
Exception: Nonmetallic enclosures shall be permitted to be installed (a) Each cable is fastened within 300 mm, measured along the
without the airspace on a concrete, masonry, tile, or similar surface. sheath, of the outer end of the raceway.
(b) The raceway extends directly above the enclosure and does
FPN: For protection against corrosion, see 3.0.1.6. not penetrate a structural ceiling.
(c) A fitting is provided on each end of the raceway to protect the
(b) Hazardous (Classified) Locations. Installations in hazardous cable(s) from abrasion and the fittings remain accessible after
(classified) locations shall conform to Articles 5.0 through 5.17. installation.
(d) The raceway is sealed or plugged at the outer end using
3.12.1.3 Position in Wall. In walls of concrete, tile, or other approved means so as to prevent access to the enclosure through the
noncombustible material, cabinets shall be installed so that the front raceway.
edge of the cabinet is not set back of the finished surface more than (e) The cable sheath is continuous through the raceway and
6 mm. In walls constructed of wood or other combustible material, extends into the enclosure beyond the fitting not less than 6 mm (¼
cabinets shall be flush with the finished surface or project therefrom. in.).
(f) The raceway is fastened at its outer end and at other points in
3.12.1.4 Repairing Plaster and Drywall or Plasterboard. Plaster, accordance with the applicable article.
drywall, or plasterboard surfaces that are broken or incomplete shall (g) Where installed as conduit or tubing, the allowable cable fill
be repaired so there will be no gaps or open spaces greater than 3 mm does not exceed that permitted for complete conduit or tubing systems
at the edge of the cabinet or cutout box employing a flush-type cover. by Table 1 of Chapter 9 of this Code and all applicable notes thereto.
3.12.1.5 Cabinets, Cutout Boxes, and Meter Socket Enclosures. FPN: See Table 1 in Chapter 9, including Note 9, for allowable cable fill in circular
Conductors entering enclosures within the scope of this article shall be raceways. See 3.10.1.15(b)(2)(a) for required ampacity reductions for multiple
cables installed in a common raceway.
 (b) Wire-Bending Space at Terminals. Wire-bending space at each
3.12.1.6 Deflection of Conductors. Conductors at terminals or terminal shall be provided in accordance with 3.12.1.6(b)(1) or (b)(2).
conductors entering or leaving cabinets or cutout boxes and the like (1) Conductors Not Entering or Leaving Opposite Wall. Table
shall comply with 3.12.1.6(a) through (c). 3.12.1.6(a) shall apply where the conductor does not enter or leave the
enclosure through the wall opposite its terminal.
Exception: Wire-bending space in enclosures for motor controllers (2) Conductors Entering or Leaving Opposite Wall. Table
with provisions for one or two wires per terminal shall comply with 3.12.1.6(b) shall apply where the conductor does enter or leave the
4.30.1.10(b). enclosure through the wall opposite its terminal.

(a) Width of Wiring Gutters. Conductors shall not be deflected Exception No. 1: Where the distance between the wall and its
within a cabinet or cutout box unless a gutter having a width in terminal is in accordance with Table 3.12.1.6(a), a conductor shall be
accordance with Table 3.12.1.6(a) is provided. Conductors in parallel permitted to enter or leave an enclosure through the wall opposite its
in accordance with 3.10.1.4 shall be judged on the basis of the number terminal, provided the conductor enters or leaves the enclosure where
of conductors in parallel. the gutter joins an adjacent gutter that has a width that conforms to
Table 3.12.1.6(b) for the conductor.
Exception No. 2: A conductor not larger than 175 mm2 shall be
permitted to enter or leave an enclosure containing only a meter
Table 3.12.1.6(a) Minimum Wire-Bending Space at Terminals and socket(s) through the wall opposite its terminal, provided the distance
Minimum Width of Wiring Gutters between the terminal and the opposite wall is not less than that
Wires per Terminal specified in Table 3.12.1.6(a) and the terminal is a lay-in type, where
Wire Size 1 2 3 4 5 the terminal is either of the following:
mm2(mm dia.) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (a) Directed toward the opening in the enclosure and within a 45
2.0(1.6) – 5.5(2.6) Not specified — — — — degree angle of directly facing the enclosure wall
8.0(3.2) – 14 38.1 — — — — (b) Directly facing the enclosure wall and offset not greater than
22 – 30 50.8 — — — — 50 percent of the bending space specified in Table 3.12.1.6(a)
30 63.5 — — — —
38 76.2 — — — —
FPN: Offset is the distance measured along the enclosure wall from the axis of the
50 – 60 88.9 127 178 — — centerline of the terminal to a line passing through the center of the opening in the
80 – 100 102 152 203 — — enclosure.
125 114 152 203 254 —
150 – 175 127 203 254 305 —
200 – 250 152 203 254 305 356 (c) Conductors 4 AWG or Larger. Installation shall comply with
325 – 700 203 254 305 356 406 3.0.1.4(f).
400 – 900 203 305 356 406 457
500 – 600 254 — — — — 3.12.1.7 Space in Enclosures. Cabinets and cutout boxes shall have
725 – 1000 305 — — — —
Note: Bending space at terminals shall be measured in a straight line from the end of
sufficient space to accommodate all conductors installed in them
the lug or wire connector (in the direction that the wire leaves the terminal) to the without crowding.
wall, barrier, or obstruction.
 Table 3.12.1.6(b) Minimum Wire-Bending Space at Terminals
Wires per Terminal 3.12.1.8 Enclosures for Switches or Overcurrent Devices.
Wire Size mm2(mm dia.) 1 2 3 4 Enclosures for switches or overcurrent devices shall not be used as
Compact junction boxes, auxiliary gutters, or raceways for conductors feeding
Stranded
AA-8000 through or tapping off to other switches or overcurrent devices, unless
Aluminum adequate space for this purpose is provided. The conductors shall not
Alloy fill the wiring space at any cross section to more than 40 percent of the
All Other Conductors cross-sectional area of the space, and the conductors, splices, and taps
Conductors (See Note 3.) mm mm mm mm
shall not fill the wiring space at any cross section to more than 75
2.0(1.6)-5.5(2.6) 12-8 Not specified — — —
8.0(3.2) 6 38.1 — — — percent of the cross-sectional area of that space.
14 4 50.8 — — —
22 2 76.2 — — — 3.12.1.9 Side or Back Wiring Spaces or Gutters. Cabinets and
30 1 76.2 — — — cutout boxes shall be provided with back-wiring spaces, gutters, or
30 1/0 88.2 — — —
38 2/0 114 — — — wiring compartments as required by 3.12.2.2(c) and (d).
50 3/0 140 140 178 —
60 4/0 152 152 190 — 3.12.2 Construction Specifications
80 250 165a 165a 203 —
100 300 178b 190c 216a — 3.12.2.1 Material. Cabinets, cutout boxes, and meter socket
125 350 216d 229d 254b 254
150 400 254e 254d 279b 305 enclosures shall comply with 3.12.2.1(a) through (c).
175 500 305e 305e 330e 356d
200 600 330e 330e 356e 381e (a) Metal Cabinets and Cutout Boxes. Metal enclosures within the
250 700-750 356e 356e 381e 406e scope of this article shall be protected both inside and outside against
e e e
325 800-900 381 406 457 483e
700 1000 406 e
457e
508e
559e
corrosion.
400 — 432e 483e 559e 610e
FPN: For information on protection against corrosion, see 3.0.1.6.
800 — 457 508 559 610
900 — 483 559 610 610
500 — 508 — — — (b) Strength. The design and construction of enclosures within the
600 — 559 — — — scope of this article shall be such as to secure ample strength and
725 — 610 — — — rigidity. If constructed of sheet steel, the metal thickness shall not be
850 — 610 — — —
1000 — 610 — — — less than 1.35 mm (0.053 in.) uncoated.
1. Bending space at terminals shall be measured in a straight line from the end of
the lug or wire connector in a direction perpendicular to the enclosure wall. (c) Nonmetallic Cabinets. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed, or
2. For removable and lay-in wire terminals intended for only one wire, bending they shall be submitted for approval prior to installation.
space shall be permitted to be reduced by the following number of millimeters:
a 13 mm
b 25 mm 3.12.2.2 Spacing. The spacing within cabinets and cutout boxes shall
c 40 mm comply with 3.12.2.2(a) through (d).
d 50 mm
e 75 mm (a) General. Spacing within cabinets and cutout boxes shall be
3. This column shall be permitted to determine the required wire-bending space for
compact stranded aluminum conductors in sizes up to 500 mm2 and manufactured sufficient to provide ample room for the distribution of wires and
using AA-8000 series electrical grade aluminum alloy conductor material in cables placed in them and for a separation between metal parts of
accordance with 3.10.1.14. devices and apparatus mounted within them as follows.
 from the bases of the devices contained in the cabinet, to the door,
(1) Base. Other than at points of support, there shall be an airspace frame, or sides of the cabinet.
of at least 1.60 mm between the base of the device and the wall of any
metal cabinet or cutout box in which the device is mounted. Exception: Side-wiring spaces, side gutters, and side-wiring
(2) Doors. There shall be an airspace of at least 25 mm between compartments of cabinets shall not be required to be made tight
any live metal part, including live metal parts of enclosed fuses, and enclosures where those side spaces contain only conductors that enter
the door. the cabinet directly opposite to the devices where they terminate.

Exception: Where the door is lined with an approved insulating Partially enclosed back-wiring spaces shall be provided with covers
material or is of a thickness of metal not less than 2.35 mm uncoated, to complete the enclosure. Wiring spaces that are required by
the airspace shall not be less than 13 mm. 3.12.2.2(c) and are exposed when doors are open shall be provided
with covers to complete the enclosure. Where adequate space is
(3) Live Parts. There shall be an airspace of at least 13 mm provided for feed-through conductors and for splices as required in
between the walls, back, gutter partition, if of metal, or door of any 3.12.1.8, additional barriers shall not be required.
cabinet or cutout box and the nearest exposed current-carrying part of
devices mounted within the cabinet where the voltage does not exceed
250. This spacing shall be increased to at least 25 mm for voltages of ARTICLE 3.14 — OUTLET, DEVICE, PULL, AND
251 to 600, nominal. JUNCTION BOXES; CONDUIT BODIES; FITTINGS;
AND HANDHOLE ENCLOSURES
Exception: Where the conditions in 3.12.2.2(a)(2), Exception, are
met, the airspace for nominal voltages from 251 to 600 shall be 3.14.1 Scope and General
permitted to be not less than 13 mm.
3.14.1.1 Scope. This article covers the installation and use of all boxes
(b) Switch Clearance. Cabinets and cutout boxes shall be deep and conduit bodies used as outlet, device, junction, or pull boxes,
enough to allow the closing of the doors when 30-ampere branch- depending on their use, and handhole enclosures. Cast, sheet metal,
circuit panelboard switches are in any position, when combination nonmetallic, and other boxes such as FS, FD, and larger boxes are not
cutout switches are in any position, or when other single-throw classified as conduit bodies. This article also includes installation
switches are opened as far as their construction permits. requirements for fittings used to join raceways and to connect
raceways and cables to boxes and conduit bodies.
(c) Wiring Space. Cabinets and cutout boxes that contain devices or
apparatus connected within the cabinet or box to more than eight 3.14.1.2 Round Boxes. Round boxes shall not be used where conduits
conductors, including those of branch circuits, meter loops, feeder or connectors requiring the use of locknuts or bushings are to be
circuits, power circuits, and similar circuits, but not including the connected to the side of the box.
supply circuit or a continuation thereof, shall have back-wiring spaces
or one or more side-wiring spaces, side gutters, or wiring 3.14.1.3 Nonmetallic Boxes. Nonmetallic boxes shall be permitted
compartments. only with open wiring on insulators, concealed knob-and-tube wiring,
cabled wiring methods with entirely nonmetallic sheaths, flexible
(d) Wiring Space — Enclosure. Side-wiring spaces, side gutters, or cords, and nonmetallic raceways.
side-wiring compartments of cabinets and cutout boxes shall be made
tight enclosures by means of covers, barriers, or partitions extending Exception No. 1: Where internal bonding means are provided
between all entries, nonmetallic boxes shall be permitted to be used
with metal raceways or metal-armored cables.
Exception No. 2: Where integral bonding means with a provision for FPN: For volume requirements of motor terminal housings, see 4.30.1.12.
attaching an equipment bonding jumper inside the box are provided
between all threaded entries in nonmetallic boxes listed for the Boxes and conduit bodies enclosing conductors 22 mm2 or larger shall
purpose, nonmetallic boxes shall be permitted to be used with metal also comply with the provisions of 3.14.2.14.
raceways or metal-armored cables.
(a) Box Volume Calculations. The volume of a wiring enclosure
3.14.1.4 Metal Boxes. All metal boxes shall be grounded in (box) shall be the total volume of the assembled sections and, where
accordance with the provisions of Article 2.50. used, the space provided by plaster rings, domed covers, extension
rings, and so forth, that are marked with their volume or are made
3.14.1.5 Short-Radius Conduit Bodies. Conduit bodies such as from boxes the dimensions of which are listed in Table 3.14.2.2(a).
capped elbows and service-entrance elbows that enclose conductors 14
mm2 or smaller, and are only intended to enable the installation of the (1) Standard Boxes. The volumes of standard boxes that are not
raceway and the contained conductors, shall not contain splices, taps, marked with their volume shall be as given in Table 3.14.2.2(a).
or devices and shall be of sufficient size to provide free space for all (2) Other Boxes. Boxes 1650 cm3 (100 in3) or less, other than
conductors enclosed in the conduit body. those described in Table 3.14.2.2(a), and nonmetallic boxes shall be
durably and legibly marked by the manufacturer with their volume.
3.14.2 Installation Boxes described in Table 3.14.2.2(a) that have a volume larger than is
designated in the table shall be permitted to have their volume marked
3.14.2.1 Damp, Wet, or Hazardous (Classified) Locations. as required by this section.

(a) Damp or Wet Locations. In damp or wet locations, boxes,

conduit bodies, and fittings shall be placed or equipped so as to
prevent moisture from entering or accumulating within the box,
conduit body, or fitting. Boxes, conduit bodies, and fittings installed in
wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

FPN No. 1: For boxes in floors, see 3.14.2.13(c).

FPN No. 2: For protection against corrosion, see 3.0.1.6.

(b) Hazardous (Classified) Locations. Installations in hazardous

(classified) locations shall conform to Articles 5.0 through 5.17.

3.14.2.2 Number of Conductors in Outlet, Device, and Junction

Boxes, and Conduit Bodies. Boxes and conduit bodies shall be of
sufficient size to provide free space for all enclosed conductors. In no
case shall the volume of the box, as calculated in 3.14.2.2(a), be less
than the fill calculation as calculated in 3.14.2.2(b). The minimum
volume for conduit bodies shall be as calculated in 3.14.2.2(c).
The provisions of this section shall not apply to terminal housings
supplied with motors.
 Table 3.14.2.2(a) Metal Boxes
Minimum Maximum Number of Conductors*
Box Trade Size Volume
mm cm3 18 16 2.0(1.6) 3.5(2.0) 5.5(2.6) 8.0(3.2) 14
100 × 32 round/octagonal 205 8 7 6 5 5 5 2
100 × 38 round/octagonal 254 10 8 7 6 6 5 3
100 × 54 round/octagonal 353 14 12 10 9 8 7 4
100 × 32 square 295 12 10 9 8 7 6 3
100 × 38 square 344 14 12 10 9 8 7 4
100 × 54 square 497 20 17 15 13 12 10 6
120 × 32 square 418 17 14 12 11 10 8 5
120 × 38 square 484 19 16 14 13 11 9 5
120 × 54 square 689 28 24 21 18 16 14 8
75 × 50 × 38 device 123 5 4 3 3 3 2 1
75 × 50 × 50 device 164 6 5 5 4 4 3 2
75 × 50 × 57 device 172 7 6 5 4 4 3 2
75 × 50 × 65 device 205 8 7 6 5 5 4 2
75 × 50 × 70 device 230 9 8 7 6 5 4 2
75 × 50 × 90 device 295 12 10 9 8 7 6 3
100 × 54 × 38 device 169 6 5 5 4 4 3 2
100 × 54 × 48 device 213 8 7 6 5 5 4 2
100 × 54 × 54 device 238 9 8 7 6 5 4 2
95 × 50 × 65 masonry box/gang 230 9 8 7 6 5 4 2
95 × 50 × 90 masonry box/gang 344 14 12 10 9 8 7 4
min. 44.5 depth FS — single cover/gang 221 9 7 6 6 5 4 2
min. 60.3 depth FD — single cover/gang 295 12 10 9 8 7 6 3
min. 44.5 depth FS — multiple cover/gang 295 12 10 9 8 7 6 3
min. 60.3 depth FD — multiple cover/gang 395 16 13 12 10 9 8 4
*Where no volume allowances are required by 3.14.2.2(b)(2) through (b)(5).
 (b) Box Fill Calculations. The volumes in paragraphs Table 3.14.2.2(b) Volume Allowance Required per Conductor
3.14.2.2(b)(1) through (b)(5), as applicable, shall be added together. Free Space Within Box for
No allowance shall be required for small fittings such as locknuts and Size of Conductor Each Conductor
bushings. mm2(mm dia.) cm3
18 24.6
(1) Conductor Fill. Each conductor that originates outside the box 16 28.7
and terminates or is spliced within the box shall be counted once, and 2.0(1.6) 32.8
each conductor that passes through the box without splice or 3.5(2.0) 36.9
termination shall be counted once. A looped, unbroken conductor not 5.5(2.6) 41.0
less than twice the minimum length required for free conductors in 8.0(3.2) 49.2
3.0.1.14 shall be counted twice. The conductor fill shall be calculated 14 81.9
using Table 3.14.2.2(b). A conductor, no part of which leaves the box,
shall not be counted.
(5) Equipment Grounding Conductor Fill. Where one or more
Exception: An equipment grounding conductor or conductors or not equipment grounding conductors or equipment bonding jumpers enter
over four fixture wires smaller than 2.0 mm2(1.6 mm dia.), or both, a box, a single volume allowance in accordance with Table 3.14.2.2(b)
shall be permitted to be omitted from the calculations where they enter shall be made based on the largest equipment grounding conductor or
a box from a domed luminaire (fixture) or similar canopy and equipment bonding jumper present in the box. Where an additional set
terminate within that box. of equipment grounding conductors, as permitted by 2.50.7.17(d), is
present in the box, an additional volume allowance shall be made
(2) Clamp Fill. Where one or more internal cable clamps, whether based on the largest equipment grounding conductor in the additional
factory or field supplied, are present in the box, a single volume set.
allowance in accordance with Table 3.14.2.2(b) shall be made based
on the largest conductor present in the box. No allowance shall be (c) Conduit Bodies.
required for a cable connector with its clamping mechanism outside
the box. (1) General. Conduit bodies enclosing 14 mm2 conductors or
smaller, other than short-radius conduit bodies as described in
(3) Support Fittings Fill. Where one or more luminaire (fixture) 3.14.1.5, shall have a cross-sectional area not less than twice the cross-
studs or hickeys are present in the box, a single volume allowance in sectional area of the largest conduit or tubing to which it is attached.
accordance with Table 3.14.2.2(b) shall be made for each type of The maximum number of conductors permitted shall be the maximum
fitting based on the largest conductor present in the box. number permitted by Table 1 of Chapter 9 for the conduit or tubing to
which it is attached.
(4) Device or Equipment Fill. For each yoke or strap containing (2) With Splices, Taps, or Devices. Only those conduit bodies that
one or more devices or equipment, a double volume allowance in are durably and legibly marked by the manufacturer with their volume
accordance with Table 3.14.2.2(b) shall be made for each yoke or strap shall be permitted to contain splices, taps, or devices. The maximum
based on the largest conductor connected to a device(s) or equipment number of conductors shall be calculated in accordance with
supported by that yoke or strap. 3.14.2.2(b). Conduit bodies shall be supported in a rigid and secure
manner.
3.14.2.3 Conductors Entering Boxes, Conduit Bodies, or Fittings.
Conductors entering boxes, conduit bodies, or fittings shall be FPN: See 1.10.1.12(a) for requirements on closing unused cable and raceway
knockout openings.
protected from abrasion and shall comply with 3.14.2.3(a) through (d).
3.14.2.5 Boxes Enclosing Flush Devices. Boxes used to enclose flush
(a) Openings to Be Closed. Openings through which conductors
devices shall be of such design that the devices will be completely
enter shall be adequately closed.
enclosed on back and sides and substantial support for the devices will
be provided. Screws for supporting the box shall not be used in
(b) Metal Boxes and Conduit Bodies. Where metal boxes or
attachment of the device contained therein.
conduit bodies are installed with messenger supported wiring, open
wiring on insulators, or concealed knob-and-tube wiring, conductors
3.14.2.6 In Wall or Ceiling. In walls or ceilings with a surface of
shall enter through insulating bushings or, in dry locations, through
concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster, or other noncombustible material,
flexible tubing extending from the last insulating support to not less
boxes employing a flush-type cover or faceplate shall be installed so
than 6 mm inside the box and beyond any cable clamps. Except as
that the front edge of the box, plaster ring, extension ring, or listed
provided in 3.0.1.15(c), the wiring shall be firmly secured to the box
extender will not be set back of the finished surface more than 6 mm.
or conduit body. Where raceway or cable is installed with metal boxes
In walls and ceilings constructed of wood or other combustible surface
or conduit bodies, the raceway or cable shall be secured to such boxes
material, boxes, plaster rings, extension rings, or listed extenders shall
and conduit bodies.
be flush with the finished surface or project therefrom.
(c) Nonmetallic Boxes and Conduit Bodies. Nonmetallic boxes
3.14.2.7 Repairing Plaster and Drywall or Plasterboard. Plaster,
and conduit bodies shall be suitable for the lowest temperature-rated
drywall, or plasterboard surfaces that are broken or incomplete around
conductor entering the box. Where nonmetallic boxes and conduit
boxes employing a flush-type cover or faceplate shall be repaired so
bodies are used with messenger supported wiring, open wiring on
there will be no gaps or open spaces greater than 3 mm at the edge of
insulators, or concealed knob-and-tube wiring, the conductors shall
the box.
enter the box through individual holes. Where flexible tubing is used
to enclose the conductors, the tubing shall extend from the last
3.14.2.8 Exposed Surface Extensions. Surface extensions from a
insulating support to not less than 6 mm inside the box and beyond
flush-mounted box shall be made by mounting and mechanically
any cable clamp. Where nonmetallic-sheathed cable or multiconductor
securing an extension ring over the flush box. Equipment grounding
Type UF cable is used, the sheath shall extend not less than 6 mm
and bonding shall be in accordance with Article 2.50.
inside the box and beyond any cable clamp. In all instances, all
permitted wiring methods shall be secured to the boxes.
Exception: A surface extension shall be permitted to be made from the
cover of a flush-mounted box where the cover is designed so it is
Exception: Where nonmetallic-sheathed cable or multiconductor Type
unlikely to fall off or be removed if its securing means becomes loose.
UF cable is used with single gang boxes not larger than a nominal
The wiring method shall be flexible for a length sufficient to permit
size 57 mm × 100 mm mounted in walls or ceilings, and where the
removal of the cover and provide access to the box interior, and
cable is fastened within 200 mm of the box measured along the sheath
arranged so that any bonding or grounding continuity is independent
and where the sheath extends through a cable knockout not less than 6
of the connection between the box and cover.
mm, securing the cable to the box shall not be required. Multiple cable
entries shall be permitted in a single cable knockout opening.
3.14.2.9 Supports. Enclosures within the scope of this article shall be
supported in accordance with one or more of the provisions in
(d) Conductors 22 mm2 or Larger. Installation shall comply with
3.14.2.9(a) through (h).
3.0.1.4(f).
 including any additional support wire(s) installed for that purpose.
(a) Surface Mounting. An enclosure mounted on a building or Support wire(s) used for enclosure support shall be fastened at each
other surface shall be rigidly and securely fastened in place. If the end so as to be taut within the ceiling cavity.
surface does not provide rigid and secure support, additional support
in accordance with other provisions of this section shall be provided. (e) Raceway Supported Enclosure, Without Devices, Luminaires
(Fixtures), or Lampholders. An enclosure that does not contain a
(b) Structural Mounting. An enclosure supported from a structural device(s) other than splicing devices or support a luminaire(s)
member of a building or from grade shall be rigidly supported either [fixture(s)], lampholder, or other equipment and is supported by
directly or by using a metal, polymeric, or wood brace. entering raceways shall not exceed 1650 cm3 (100 in3) in size. It shall
have threaded entries or have hubs identified for the purpose. It shall
(1) Nails and Screws. Nails and screws, where used as a fastening be supported by two or more conduits threaded wrenchtight into the
means, shall be attached by using brackets on the outside of the enclosure or hubs. Each conduit shall be secured within 900 mm of the
enclosure, or they shall pass through the interior within 6 mm of the enclosure, or within 450 mm of the enclosure if all conduit entries are
back or ends of the enclosure. Screws shall not be permitted to pass on the same side.
through the box unless exposed threads in the box are protected using
approved means to avoid abrasion of conductor insulation. Exception: Rigid metal, intermediate metal, or rigid nonmetallic
(2) Braces. Metal braces shall be protected against corrosion and conduit or electrical metallic tubing shall be permitted to support a
formed from metal that is not less than 0.50 mm thick uncoated. Wood conduit body of any size, including a conduit body constructed with
braces shall have a cross section not less than nominal only one conduit entry, provided the trade size of the conduit body is
25 mm × 50 mm. Wood braces in wet locations shall be treated for the not larger than the largest trade size of the conduit or electrical
conditions. Polymeric braces shall be identified as being suitable for metallic tubing.
the use.
(f) Raceway Supported Enclosures, with Devices, Luminaires
(c) Mounting in Finished Surfaces. An enclosure mounted in a (Fixtures), or Lampholders. An enclosure that contains a device(s),
finished surface shall be rigidly secured thereto by clamps, anchors, or other than splicing devices, or supports a luminaire(s) [fixture(s)],
fittings identified for the application. lampholder, or other equipment and is supported by entering raceways
shall not exceed 1650 cm3 (100 in3) in size. It shall have threaded
(d) Suspended Ceilings. An enclosure mounted to structural or entries or have hubs identified for the purpose. It shall be supported by
supporting elements of a suspended ceiling shall be not more than two or more conduits threaded wrenchtight into the enclosure or hubs.
1650 cm3 (100 in3) in size and shall be securely fastened in place in Each conduit shall be secured within 450 mm of the enclosure.
accordance with either (d)(1) or (d)(2).
Exception No. 1: Rigid metal or intermediate metal conduit shall be
(1) Framing Members. An enclosure shall be fastened to the permitted to support a conduit body of any size, including a conduit
framing members by mechanical means such as bolts, screws, or body constructed with only one conduit entry, provided the trade size
rivets, or by the use of clips or other securing means identified for use of the conduit body is not larger than the largest trade size of the
with the type of ceiling framing member(s) and enclosure(s) conduit.
employed. The framing members shall be adequately supported and Exception No. 2: An unbroken length(s) of rigid or intermediate metal
securely fastened to each other and to the building structure. conduit shall be permitted to support a box used for luminaire (fixture)
(2) Support Wires. The installation shall comply with the or lampholder support, or to support a wiring enclosure that is an
provisions of 3.0.1.11(a). The enclosure shall be secured, using integral part of a luminaire (fixture) and used in lieu of a box in
methods identified for the purpose, to ceiling support wire(s),
accordance with 3.0.1.15(b), where all of the following conditions are suitable for the location. At the luminaire (fixture) end, the conduit(s)
met: shall be threaded wrenchtight into the box or wiring enclosure, or into
(a) The conduit is securely fastened at a point so that the length of hubs identified for the purpose.
conduit beyond the last point of conduit support does not exceed Where supported by only a single conduit, the threaded joints shall
900 mm. be prevented from loosening by the use of set-screws or other effective
(b) The unbroken conduit length before the last point of conduit means, or the luminaire (fixture), at any point, shall be at least
support is 300 mm or greater, and that portion of the conduit is 2 400 mm above grade or standing area and at least 900 mm measured
securely fastened at some point not less than 300 mm from its last horizontally to the 2 400 mm elevation from windows, doors, porches,
point of support. fire escapes, or similar locations. A luminaire (fixture) supported by a
(c) Where accessible to unqualified persons, the luminaire single conduit shall not exceed 300 mm in any horizontal direction
(fixture) or lampholder, measured to its lowest point, is at least from the point of conduit entry.
2 400 mm above grade or standing area and at least 900 mm
measured horizontally to the 2 400 mm elevation from windows, 3.14.2.10 Depth of Outlet Boxes. No box shall have an internal depth
doors, porches, fire escapes, or similar locations. of less than 13 mm. Boxes intended to enclose flush devices shall have
(d) A luminaire (fixture) supported by a single conduit does not an internal depth of not less than 24 mm.
exceed 300 mm in any direction from the point of conduit entry.
(e) The weight supported by any single conduit does not exceed 3.14.2.11 Covers and Canopies. In completed installations, each box
9 kg (20 lb). shall have a cover, faceplate, lampholder, or luminaire (fixture)
(f) At the luminaire (fixture) or lampholder end, the conduit(s) is canopy, except where the installation complies with 4.10.3.5(b).
threaded wrenchtight into the box, conduit body, or integral wiring
enclosure, or into hubs identified for the purpose. Where a box or (a) Nonmetallic or Metal Covers and Plates. Nonmetallic or metal
conduit body is used for support, the luminaire (fixture) shall be covers and plates shall be permitted. Where metal covers or plates are
secured directly to the box or conduit body, or through a threaded used, they shall comply with the grounding requirements of 2.50.6.1.
conduit nipple not over 75 mm long.
FPN: For additional grounding requirements, see 4.10.5.2(a) for metal luminaire
(fixture) canopies, and 4.4.1.12 and 4.6.1.5(b) for metal faceplates.
(g) Enclosures in Concrete or Masonry. An enclosure supported
by embedment shall be identified as suitably protected from corrosion
(b) Exposed Combustible Wall or Ceiling Finish. Where a
and securely embedded in concrete or masonry.
luminaire (fixture) canopy or pan is used, any combustible wall or
ceiling finish exposed between the edge of the canopy or pan and the
(h) Pendant Boxes. An enclosure supported by a pendant shall
outlet box shall be covered with noncombustible material.
comply with 3.14.2.9(h)(1) or (h)(2).
(c) Flexible Cord Pendants. Covers of outlet boxes and conduit
(1) Flexible Cord. A box shall be supported from a multiconductor
bodies having holes through which flexible cord pendants pass shall be
cord or cable in an approved manner that protects the conductors
provided with bushings designed for the purpose or shall have smooth,
against strain, such as a strain-relief connector threaded into a box
well-rounded surfaces on which the cords may bear. So-called hard
with a hub.
rubber or composition bushings shall not be used.
(2) Conduit. A box supporting lampholders or luminaires (lighting
fixtures), or wiring enclosures within luminaires (fixtures) used in lieu
of boxes in accordance with 3.0.1.15(b), shall be supported by rigid or
intermediate metal conduit stems. For stems longer than 450 mm, the
stems shall be connected to the wiring system with flexible fittings
3.14.2.13 Outlet Boxes. 3.14.2.14 Pull and Junction Boxes and Conduit Bodies. Boxes and
conduit bodies used as pull or junction boxes shall comply with
(a) Boxes at Luminaire (Lighting Fixture) Outlets. Boxes used at 3.14.2.14(a) through (d).
luminaire (lighting fixture) or lampholder outlets shall be designed for
the purpose. At every outlet used exclusively for lighting, the box shall Exception: Terminal housings supplied with motors shall comply with
be designed or installed so that a luminaire (lighting fixture) may be the provisions of 4.30.1.12.
attached.
(a) Minimum Size. For raceways containing conductors of 22 mm2
Exception: A wall-mounted luminaire (fixture) weighing not more or larger, and for cables containing conductors of 22 mm2 or larger,
than 3 kg (6 lb) shall be permitted to be supported on other boxes or the minimum dimensions of pull or junction boxes installed in a
plaster rings that are secured to other boxes, provided the luminaire raceway or cable run shall comply with (a)(1) through (a)(3). Where
(fixture) or its supporting yoke is secured to the box with no fewer an enclosure dimension is to be calculated based on the diameter of
than two No. 6 or larger screws. entering raceways, the diameter shall be the metric designator (trade
size) expressed in the units of measurement employed.
(b) Maximum Luminaire (Fixture) Weight. Outlet boxes or
fittings installed as required by 3.14.2.9 shall be permitted to support (1) Straight Pulls. In straight pulls, the length of the box shall not
luminaires (lighting fixtures) weighing 23 kg (50 lb) or less. A be less than eight times the metric designator (trade size) of the largest
luminaire (lighting fixture) that weighs more than 23 kg (50 lb) shall raceway.
be supported independently of the outlet box unless the outlet box is (2) Angle or U Pulls. Where splices or where angle or U pulls are
listed for the weight to be supported. made, the distance between each raceway entry inside the box and the
opposite wall of the box shall not be less than six times the metric
(c) Floor Boxes. Boxes listed specifically for this application shall designator (trade size) of the largest raceway in a row. This distance
be used for receptacles located in the floor. shall be increased for additional entries by the amount of the sum of
the diameters of all other raceway entries in the same row on the same
Exception: Where the authority having jurisdiction judges them free wall of the box. Each row shall be calculated individually, and the
from likely exposure to physical damage, moisture, and dirt, boxes single row that provides the maximum distance shall be used.
located in elevated floors of show windows and similar locations shall
be permitted to be other than those listed for floor applications. Exception: Where a raceway or cable entry is in the wall of a box or
Receptacles and covers shall be listed as an assembly for this type of conduit body opposite a removable cover, the distance from that wall
location. to the cover shall be permitted to comply with the distance required
for one wire per terminal in Table 3.12.1.6(a).
(d) Boxes at Ceiling-Suspended (Paddle) Fan Outlets. Outlet
boxes or outlet box systems used as the sole support of a ceiling- The distance between raceway entries enclosing the same
suspended (paddle) fan shall be listed, shall be marked by their conductor shall not be less than six times the metric designator (trade
manufacturer as suitable for this purpose, and shall not support size) of the larger raceway.
ceiling-suspended (paddle) fans that weigh more than 32 kg (70 lb). When transposing cable size into raceway size in 3.14.2.14(a)(1)
For outlet boxes or outlet box systems designed to support ceiling- and (a)(2), the minimum metric designator (trade size) raceway
suspended (paddle) fans that weigh more than 16 kg (35 lb), the required for the number and size of conductors in the cable shall be
required marking shall include the maximum weight to be supported. used.
(3) Smaller Dimensions. Boxes or conduit bodies of dimensions
less than those required in 3.14.2.14(a)(1) and (a)(2) shall be permitted
for installations of combinations of conductors that are less than the For handhole enclosures without bottoms where the provisions of
maximum conduit or tubing fill (of conduits or tubing being used) 3.14.2.14(a)(2), Exception, or 3.14.4.2(b)(1), Exception No. 1, apply,
permitted by Table 1 of Chapter 9, provided the box or conduit body the measurement to the removable cover shall be taken from the end of
has been listed for, and is permanently marked with, the maximum the conduit or cable assembly.
number and maximum size of conductors permitted.
(b) Wiring Entries. Underground raceways and cable assemblies
(b) Conductors in Pull or Junction Boxes. In pull boxes or entering a handhole enclosure shall extend into the enclosure, but they
junction boxes having any dimension over 1 800 mm, all conductors shall not be required to be mechanically connected to the enclosure.
shall be cabled or racked up in an approved manner.
(c) Handhole Enclosures Without Bottoms. Where handhole
(c) Covers. All pull boxes, junction boxes, and conduit bodies shall enclosures without bottoms are installed, all enclosed conductors and
be provided with covers compatible with the box or conduit body any splices or terminations, if present, shall be listed as suitable for
construction and suitable for the conditions of use. Where used, metal wet locations.
covers shall comply with the grounding requirements of 2.50.6.1. An
extension from the cover of an exposed box shall comply with (d) Covers. Handhole enclosure covers shall have an identifying
3.14.2.8, Exception. mark or logo that prominently identifies the function of the enclosure,
such as “electric.” Handhole enclosure covers shall require the use of
(d) Permanent Barriers. Where permanent barriers are installed in tools to open, or they shall weigh over 45 kg (100 lb). Metal covers
a box, each section shall be considered as a separate box. and other exposed conductive surfaces shall be bonded in accordance
with 2.50.5.7(a).
3.14.2.15 Boxes, Conduit Bodies, and Handhole Enclosures to Be
Accessible. Boxes, conduit bodies, and handhole enclosures shall be 3.14.3 Construction Specifications
installed so that the wiring contained in them can be rendered
accessible without removing any part of the building or, in 3.14.3.1 Metal Boxes, Conduit Bodies, and Fittings.
underground circuits, without excavating sidewalks, paving, earth, or
other substance that is to be used to establish the finished grade. (a) Corrosion Resistant. Metal boxes, conduit bodies, and fittings
shall be corrosion resistant or shall be well-galvanized, enameled, or
Exception: Listed boxes and handhole enclosures shall be permitted otherwise properly coated inside and out to prevent corrosion.
where covered by gravel, light aggregate, or noncohesive granulated
soil if their location is effectively identified and accessible for FPN: See 3.0.1.6 for limitation in the use of boxes and fittings protected from
corrosion solely by enamel.
excavation.
(b) Thickness of Metal. Sheet steel boxes not over 1650 cm3
3.14.2.16 Handhole Enclosures. Handhole enclosures shall be
(100 in.3) in size shall be made from steel not less than 1.60 mm thick.
designed and installed to withstand all loads likely to be imposed.
The wall of a malleable iron box or conduit body and a die-cast or
FPN: See ANSI/SCTE 77-2002, Specification for Underground Enclosure Integrity,
permanent-mold cast aluminum, brass, bronze, or zinc box or conduit
for additional information on deliberate and nondeliberate traffic loading that can be body shall not be less than 2.40 mm thick. Other cast metal boxes or
expected to bear on underground enclosures. conduit bodies shall have a wall thickness not less than 3 mm.
(a) Size. Handhole enclosures shall be sized in accordance with
3.14.2.14(a) for conductors operating at 600 volts or below, and in
accordance with 3.14.4.2 for conductors operating at over 600 volts.
Exception No. 1: Listed boxes and conduit bodies shown to have 3.14.4. Pull and Junction Boxes for Use on
equivalent strength and characteristics shall be permitted to be made Systems Over 600 Volts, Nominal
of thinner or other metals.
Exception No. 2: The walls of listed short radius conduit bodies, as 3.14.4.1 General. Where pull and junction boxes are used on systems
covered in 3.14.1.5, shall be permitted to be made of thinner metal. over 600 volts, the installation shall comply with the provisions of Part
IV and also with the following general provisions of this article:
(c) Metal Boxes Over 1650 cm3 (100 in.3). Metal boxes over 1650 (1) Part 3.14.1, 3.14.1.2, 3.14.1.3, and 3.14.1.4
cm3 (100 in.3) in size shall be constructed so as to be of ample strength (2) Part 3.14.2, 3.14.2.1; 3.14.2.3; 3.14.2.6; 3.14.2.9(a), (b), or
and rigidity. If of sheet steel, the metal thickness shall not be less than (g); 3.14.2.14(b); and 3.14.2.15
1.35 mm uncoated. (3) Part 3.14.3, 3.14.3.1(a) and (c) and 3.14.3.2

(d) Grounding Provisions. A means shall be provided in each 3.14.4.2 Size of Pull and Junction Boxes. Pull and junction boxes
metal box for the connection of an equipment grounding conductor. shall provide adequate space and dimensions for the installation of
The means shall be permitted to be a tapped hole or equivalent. conductors, and they shall comply with the specific requirements of
this section.
3.14.3.2 Covers. Metal covers shall be of the same material as the box
or conduit body with which they are used, or they shall be lined with Exception: Terminal housings supplied with motors shall comply with
firmly attached insulating material that is not less than 0.80 mm thick, the provisions of 4.30.1.12.
or they shall be listed for the purpose. Metal covers shall be the same
thickness as the boxes or conduit body for which they are used, or they (a) For Straight Pulls. The length of the box shall not be less than
shall be listed for the purpose. Covers of porcelain or other approved 48 times the outside diameter, over sheath, of the largest shielded or
insulating materials shall be permitted if of such form and thickness as lead-covered conductor or cable entering the box. The length shall not
to afford the required protection and strength. be less than 32 times the outside diameter of the largest nonshielded
conductor or cable.
3.14.3.3 Bushings. Covers of outlet boxes and conduit bodies having
holes through which flexible cord pendants may pass shall be provided (b) For Angle or U Pulls.
with approved bushings or shall have smooth, well-rounded surfaces
on which the cord may bear. Where individual conductors pass (1) Distance to Opposite Wall. The distance between each cable or
through a metal cover, a separate hole equipped with a bushing of conductor entry inside the box and the opposite wall of the box shall
suitable insulating material shall be provided for each conductor. Such not be less than 36 times the outside diameter, over sheath, of the
separate holes shall be connected by a slot as required by 3.0.1.20. largest cable or conductor. This distance shall be increased for
additional entries by the amount of the sum of the outside diameters,
3.14.3.4 Nonmetallic Boxes. Provisions for supports or other over sheath, of all other cables or conductor entries through the same
mounting means for nonmetallic boxes shall be outside of the box, or wall of the box.
the box shall be constructed so as to prevent contact between the
conductors in the box and the supporting screws. Exception No. 1: Where a conductor or cable entry is in the wall of a
box opposite a removable cover, the distance from that wall to the
3.14.3.5 Marking. All boxes and conduit bodies, covers, extension cover shall be permitted to be not less than the bending radius for the
rings, plaster rings, and the like shall be durably and legibly marked conductors as provided in 3.0.2.4.
with the manufacturer’s name or trademark.
Exception No. 2: Where cables are nonshielded and not lead covered,
the distance of 36 times the outside diameter shall be permitted to be (f) Suitable for Expected Handling. Boxes and their covers shall
reduced to 24 times the outside diameter. be capable of withstanding the handling to which they are likely to be
subjected.
(2) Distance Between Entry and Exit. The distance between a
cable or conductor entry and its exit from the box shall not be less than
36 times the outside diameter, over sheath, of that cable or conductor. ARTICLE 3.20 — ARMORED CABLE: TYPE AC

Exception: Where cables are nonshielded and not lead covered, the 3.20.1 General
distance of 36 times the outside diameter shall be permitted to be
reduced to 24 times the outside diameter. 3.20.1.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and
construction specifications for armored cable, Type AC.
(c) Removable Sides. One or more sides of any pull box shall be
removable. 3.20.1.2 Definition.

3.14.4.3 Construction and Installation Requirements. Armored Cable, Type AC. A fabricated assembly of insulated
conductors in a flexible metallic enclosure. See 3.20.3.1.
(a) Corrosion Protection. Boxes shall be made of material
inherently resistant to corrosion or shall be suitably protected, both 3.20.2 Installation
internally and externally, by enameling, galvanizing, plating, or other
means. 3.20.2.1 Uses Permitted. Type AC cable shall be permitted as
follows:
(b) Passing Through Partitions. Suitable bushings, shields, or
fittings having smooth, rounded edges shall be provided where (1) In both exposed and concealed work
conductors or cables pass through partitions and at other locations (2) In cable trays
where necessary. (3) In dry locations
(4) Embedded in plaster finish on brick or other masonry, except
(c) Complete Enclosure. Boxes shall provide a complete enclosure in damp or wet locations
for the contained conductors or cables. (5) To be run or fished in the air voids of masonry block or tile
walls where such walls are not exposed or subject to excessive
(d) Wiring Is Accessible. Boxes shall be installed so that the wiring moisture or dampness
is accessible without removing any part of the building. Working
space shall be provided in accordance with 1.10.3.5. FPN: The “Uses Permitted” is not an all-inclusive list.

(e) Suitable Covers. Boxes shall be closed by suitable covers 3.20.2.3 Uses Not Permitted. Type AC cable shall not be used as
securely fastened in place. Underground box covers that weigh over follows:
45 kg (100 lb) shall be considered meeting this requirement. Covers
for boxes shall be permanently marked “DANGER — HIGH (1) Where subject to physical damage
VOLTAGE — KEEP OUT.” The marking shall be on the outside of (2) In damp or wet locations
the box cover and shall be readily visible. Letters shall be block type (3) In air voids of masonry block or tile walls where such walls
and at least 13 mm in height. are exposed or subject to excessive moisture or dampness
 (4) Where exposed to corrosive fumes or vapors (b) Securing. Unless otherwise provided, Type AC cable shall be
(5) Embedded in plaster finish on brick or other masonry in damp secured within 300 mm of every outlet box, junction box, cabinet, or
or wet locations fitting and at intervals not exceeding 1 400 mm where installed on or
across framing members.
3.20.2.6 Exposed Work. Exposed runs of cable, except as provided in
3.0.1.11(a), shall closely follow the surface of the building finish or of (c) Supporting. Unless otherwise provided, Type AC cable shall be
running boards. Exposed runs shall also be permitted to be installed on supported at intervals not exceeding 1 400 mm.
the underside of joists where supported at each joist and located so as Horizontal runs of Type AC cable installed in wooden or metal
not to be subject to physical damage. framing members or similar supporting means shall be considered
supported where such support does not exceed 1 400 mm intervals.
3.20.2.8 Through or Parallel to Framing Members. Type AC cable
shall be protected in accordance with 3.0.1.4(a), (c), and (d) where (d) Unsupported Cables. Type AC cable shall be permitted to be
installed through or parallel to framing members. unsupported where the cable complies with any of the following:

3.20.2.14 In Accessible Attics. Type AC cables in accessible attics or (1) Is fished between access points through concealed spaces in
roof spaces shall be installed as specified in 3.20.2.14(a) and (b). finished buildings or structures and supporting is impracticable
(2) Is not more than 600 mm in length at terminals where
(a) Where Run Across the Top of Floor Joists. Where run across flexibility is necessary
the top of floor joists, or within 2 100 mm of floor or floor joists (3) Is not more than 1 800 mm in length from the last point of
across the face of rafters or studding, in attics and roof spaces that are cable support to the point of connection to a luminaire(s) [lighting
accessible, the cable shall be protected by substantial guard strips that fixture(s)] or other electrical equipment and the cable and point of
are at least as high as the cable. Where this space is not accessible by connection are within an accessible ceiling. For the purposes of this
permanent stairs or ladders, protection shall only be required within section, Type AC cable fittings shall be permitted as a means of cable
1 800 mm of the nearest edge of the scuttle hole or attic entrance. support.

(b) Cable Installed Parallel to Framing Members. Where the 3.20.2.31 Boxes and Fittings. At all points where the armor of AC
cable is installed parallel to the sides of rafters, studs, or floor joists, cable terminates, a fitting shall be provided to protect wires from
neither guard strips nor running boards shall be required, and the abrasion, unless the design of the outlet boxes or fittings is such as to
installation shall also comply with 3.0.1.4(d). afford equivalent protection, and, in addition, an insulating bushing or
its equivalent protection shall be provided between the conductors and
3.20.2.15 Bending Radius. Bends in Type AC cable shall be made the armor. The connector or clamp by which the Type AC cable is
such that the cable is not damaged. The radius of the curve of the inner fastened to boxes or cabinets shall be of such design that the insulating
edge of any bend shall not be less than five times the diameter of the bushing or its equivalent will be visible for inspection. Where change
Type AC cable. is made from Type AC cable to other cable or raceway wiring
methods, a box, fitting, or conduit body shall be installed at junction
3.20.2.21 Securing and Supporting. points as required in 3.0.1.15.

(a) General. Type AC cable shall be supported and secured by 3.20.2.71 Ampacity. The ampacity shall be determined by 3.10.1.15.
staples, cable ties, straps, hangers, or similar fittings, designed and
installed so as not to damage the cable. (a) Thermal Insulation. Armored cable installed in thermal
insulation shall have conductors rated at 90°C (194°F). The ampacity
of cable installed in these applications shall be that of 60°C (140°F) specifically designed for field installation in surface metal raceway.
conductors. The 90°C (194°F) rating shall be permitted to be used for
ampacity derating purposes, provided the final derated ampacity does 3.22.2 Installation
not exceed that for a 60°C (140°F) rated conductor.
3.22.2.1 Uses Permitted. Flat cable assemblies shall be permitted only
(b) Cable Tray. The ampacity of Type AC cable installed in cable as follows:
tray shall be determined in accordance with 3.92.1.11.
(1) As branch circuits to supply suitable tap devices for lighting,
3.20.3 Construction Specifications small appliances, or small power loads. The rating of the branch
circuit shall not exceed 30 amperes.
3.20.3.1 Construction. Type AC cable shall have an armor of flexible (2) Where installed for exposed work.
metal tape and shall have an internal bonding strip of copper or (3) In locations where they will not be subjected to physical
aluminum in intimate contact with the armor for its entire length. damage. Where a flat cable assembly is installed less than 2 400 mm
above the floor or fixed working platform, it shall be protected by a
3.20.3.5 Conductors. Insulated conductors shall be of a type listed in cover identified for the use.
Table 3.10.1.13 or those identified for use in this cable. In addition, (4) In surface metal raceways identified for the use. The channel
the conductors shall have an overall moisture-resistant and fire- portion of the surface metal raceway systems shall be installed as
retardant fibrous covering. For Type ACT, a moisture-resistant fibrous complete systems before the flat cable assemblies are pulled into the
covering shall be required only on the individual conductors. raceways.

3.20.3.9 Equipment Grounding. Type AC cable shall provide an 3.22.2.3 Uses Not Permitted. Flat cable assemblies shall not be used
adequate path for equipment grounding as required by 2.50.1.4(a)(5) as follows:
or 2.50.1.4(b)(4).
(1) Where subject to corrosive vapors unless suitable for the
3.20.3.21 Marking. The cable shall be marked in accordance with application
3.10.1.11, except that Type AC shall have ready identification of the (2) In hoistways or on elevators or escalators
manufacturer by distinctive external markings on the cable sheath (3) In any hazardous (classified) location
throughout its entire length. (4) Outdoors or in wet or damp locations unless identified for the
use

ARTICLE 3.22 — FLAT CABLE ASSEMBLIES: TYPE FC 3.22.2.21 Securing and Supporting. The flat cable assemblies shall
be supported by means of their special design features, within the
3.22.1 General surface metal raceways.
The surface metal raceways shall be supported as required for the
3.22.1.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and specific raceway to be installed.
construction specifications for flat cable assemblies, Type FC.
3.22.2.31 Boxes and Fittings.
3.22.1.2 Definition.
(a) Dead Ends. Each flat cable assembly dead end shall be
Flat Cable Assembly, Type FC. An assembly of parallel terminated in an end-cap device identified for the use.
conductors formed integrally with an insulating material web
 The dead-end fitting for the enclosing surface metal raceway shall the surface at intervals not exceeding 600 mm.
be identified for the use.
(b) Identification of Grounded Conductor. The grounded
(b) Luminaire (Fixture) Hangers. Luminaire (fixture) hangers conductor shall be identified throughout its length by means of a
installed with the flat cable assemblies shall be identified for the use. distinctive and durable white or gray marking.

(c) Fittings. Fittings to be installed with flat cable assemblies shall FPN: The color gray may have been used in the past as an ungrounded conductor.
Care should be taken when working on existing systems.
be designed and installed to prevent physical damage to the cable
assemblies.
(c) Terminal Block Identification. Terminal blocks identified for
the use shall have distinctive and durable markings for color or word
(d) Extensions. All extensions from flat cable assemblies shall be
coding. The grounded conductor section shall have a white marking or
made by approved wiring methods, within the junction boxes, installed
other suitable designation. The next adjacent section of the terminal
at either end of the flat cable assembly runs.
block shall have a black marking or other suitable designation. The
next section shall have a red marking or other suitable designation.
3.22.2.47 Splices and Taps.
The final or outer section, opposite the grounded conductor section of
the terminal block, shall have a blue marking or other suitable
(a) Splices. Splices shall be made in listed junction boxes.
designation.
(b) Taps. Taps shall be made between any phase conductor and the
grounded conductor or any other phase conductor by means of devices
ARTICLE 3.24 — FLAT CONDUCTOR CABLE: TYPE FCC
and fittings identified for the use. Tap devices shall be rated at not less
than 15 amperes, or more than 300 volts to ground, and shall be color-
3.24.1 General
coded in accordance with the requirements of 3.22.3.21(c).
3.24.1.1 Scope. This article covers a field-installed wiring system for
3.22.3 Construction
branch circuits incorporating Type FCC cable and associated
accessories as defined by the article. The wiring system is designed for
3.22.3.1 Construction. Flat cable assemblies shall consist of two,
installation under carpet squares.
three, four, or five conductors.
3.24.1.2 Definitions.
3.22.3.5 Conductors. Flat cable assemblies shall have conductors of
5.5 mm2 (2.6 mm dia.) special stranded copper wires.
Bottom Shield. A protective layer that is installed between the floor
and Type FCC flat conductor cable to protect the cable from physical
3.22.3.13 Insulation. The entire flat cable assembly shall be formed to
damage and may or may not be incorporated as an integral part of the
provide a suitable insulation covering all the conductors and using one
cable.
of the materials recognized in Table 3.10.1.13 for general branch-
circuit wiring.
Cable Connector. A connector designed to join Type FCC cables
without using a junction box.
3.22.3.21 Marking.
FCC System. A complete wiring system for branch circuits that is
(a) Temperature Rating. In addition to the provisions of 3.10.1.11,
designed for installation under carpet squares. The FCC system
Type FC cable shall have the temperature rating durably marked on
includes Type FCC cable and associated shielding, connectors, (2) Current. General-purpose and appliance branch circuits shall
terminators, adapters, boxes, and receptacles. have ratings not exceeding 20 amperes. Individual branch circuits shall
have ratings not exceeding 30 amperes.
Insulating End. An insulator designed to electrically insulate the
end of a Type FCC cable. (c) Floors. Use of FCC systems shall be permitted on hard, sound,
smooth, continuous floor surfaces made of concrete, ceramic, or
Metal Shield Connections. Means of connection designed to composition flooring, wood, and similar materials.
electrically and mechanically connect a metal shield to another metal
shield, to a receptacle housing or self-contained device, or to a (d) Walls. Use of FCC systems shall be permitted on wall surfaces
transition assembly. in surface metal raceways.

Top Shield. A grounded metal shield covering under-carpet (e) Damp Locations. Use of FCC systems in damp locations shall
components of the FCC system for the purposes of providing be permitted.
protection against physical damage.
(f) Heated Floors. Materials used for floors heated in excess of
Transition Assembly. An assembly to facilitate connection of the 30°C (86°F) shall be identified as suitable for use at these
FCC system to other wiring systems, incorporating (1) a means of temperatures.
electrical interconnection and (2) a suitable box or covering for
providing electrical safety and protection against physical damage. (g) System Height. Any portion of an FCC system with a height
above floor level exceeding 2.30 mm shall be tapered or feathered at
Type FCC Cable. Three or more flat copper conductors placed the edges to floor level.
edge-to-edge and separated and enclosed within an insulating
assembly. (h) Coverings. Floor-mounted Type FCC cable, cable connectors,
and insulating ends shall be covered with carpet squares not larger
3.24.1.6 Listing Requirements. Type FCC cable and associated than 900 mm square. Carpet squares that are adhered to the floor shall
fittings shall be listed. be attached with release-type adhesives.

3.24.2 Installation (i) Corrosion Resistance. Metal components of the system shall be
either corrosion resistant, coated with corrosion-resistant materials, or
3.24.2.1 Uses Permitted. insulated from contact with corrosive substances.

(a) Branch Circuits. Use of FCC systems shall be permitted both (j) Metal-Shield Connectors. Metal shields shall be connected to
for general-purpose and appliance branch circuits and for individual each other and to boxes, receptacle housings, self-contained devices,
branch circuits. and transition assemblies using metal-shield connectors.

(b) Branch-Circuit Ratings. 3.24.2.3 Uses Not Permitted. FCC systems shall not be used in the
following locations:
(1) Voltage. Voltage between ungrounded conductors shall not
exceed 300 volts. Voltage between ungrounded conductors and the (1) Outdoors or in wet locations
grounded conductor shall not exceed 150 volts. (2) Where subject to corrosive vapors
(3) In any hazardous (classified) location
 (4) In residential, school, and hospital buildings
(e) Metal-Shield Connectors. Metal shields shall be connected to
3.24.2.9 Crossings. Crossings of more than two Type FCC cable runs each other and to boxes, receptacle housings, self-contained devices,
shall not be permitted at any one point. Crossings of a Type FCC cable and transition assemblies using metal-shield connectors.
over or under a flat communications or signal cable shall be permitted.
In each case, a grounded layer of metal shielding shall separate the 3.24.2.32 Floor Coverings. Floor-mounted Type FCC cable, cable
two cables, and crossings of more than two flat cables shall not be connectors, and insulating ends shall be covered with carpet squares
permitted at any one point. not larger than 900 mm square. Carpet squares that are adhered to the
floor shall be attached with release-type adhesives.
3.24.2.21 Securing and Supporting. All FCC system components
shall be firmly anchored to the floor or wall using an adhesive or 3.24.2.33 Devices.
mechanical anchoring system identified for this use. Floors shall be
prepared to ensure adherence of the FCC system to the floor until the (a) Receptacles. All receptacles, receptacle housings, and self-
carpet squares are placed. contained devices used with the FCC system shall be identified for this
use and shall be connected to the Type FCC cable and metal shields.
3.24.2.31 Boxes and Fittings. Connection from any grounding conductor of the Type FCC cable
shall be made to the shield system at each receptacle.
(a) Cable Connections and Insulating Ends. All Type FCC cable
connections shall use connectors identified for their use, installed such (b) Receptacles and Housings. Receptacle housings and self-
that electrical continuity, insulation, and sealing against dampness and contained devices designed either for floor mounting or for in-wall or
liquid spillage are provided. All bare cable ends shall be insulated and on-wall mounting shall be permitted for use with the FCC system.
sealed against dampness and liquid spillage using listed insulating Receptacle housings and self-contained devices shall incorporate
ends. means for facilitating entry and termination of Type FCC cable and for
electrically connecting the housing or device with the metal shield.
(b) Polarization of Connections. All receptacles and connections Receptacles and self-contained devices shall comply with 4.6.1.3.
shall be constructed and installed so as to maintain proper polarization Power and communications outlets installed together in common
of the system. housing shall be permitted in accordance with 8.0.5.24(a)(1)c,
Exception No. 2.
(c) Shields.
3.24.2.47 Splices and Taps.
(1) Top Shield. A metal top shield shall be installed over all floor-
mounted Type FCC cable, connectors, and insulating ends. The top (a) FCC Systems Alterations. Alterations to FCC systems shall be
shield shall completely cover all cable runs, corners, connectors, and permitted. New cable connectors shall be used at new connection
ends. points to make alterations. It shall be permitted to leave unused cable
(2) Bottom Shield. A bottom shield shall be installed beneath all runs and associated cable connectors in place and energized. All cable
Type FCC cable, connectors, and insulating ends. ends shall be covered with insulating ends.

(d) Connection to Other Systems. Power feed, grounding (b) Transition Assemblies. All transition assemblies shall be
connection, and shield system connection between the FCC system identified for their use. Each assembly shall incorporate means for
and other wiring systems shall be accomplished in a transition facilitating entry of the Type FCC cable into the assembly, for
assembly identified for this use. connecting the Type FCC cable to grounded conductors, and for
electrically connecting the assembly to the metal cable shields and to information required by 3.10.1.11(a) and with the following additional
equipment grounding conductors. information:

3.24.2.51 Grounding. All metal shields, boxes, receptacle housings, (1) Material of conductors
and self-contained devices shall be electrically continuous to the (2) Maximum temperature rating
equipment grounding conductor of the supplying branch circuit. All (3) Ampacity
such electrical connections shall be made with connectors identified
for this use. The electrical resistivity of such shield system shall not be (b) Conductor Identification. Conductors shall be clearly and
more than that of one conductor of the Type FCC cable used in the durably identified on both sides throughout their length as specified in
installation. 3.10.1.12.

3.24.3 Construction
ARTICLE 3.26 — INTEGRATED GAS SPACER
3.24.3.1 Construction. CABLE: TYPE IGS

(a) Type FCC Cable. Type FCC cable shall be listed for use with 3.26.1 General
the FCC system and shall consist of three, four, or five flat copper
conductors, one of which shall be an equipment grounding conductor. 3.26.1.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and
construction specifications for integrated gas spacer cable, Type IGS.
(b) Shields.
3.26.1.2 Definition.
(1) Materials and Dimensions. All top and bottom shields shall be
of designs and materials identified for their use. Top shields shall be Integrated Gas Spacer Cable, Type IGS. A factory assembly of
metal. Both metallic and nonmetallic materials shall be permitted for one or more conductors, each individually insulated and enclosed in a
bottom shields. loose fit, nonmetallic flexible conduit as an integrated gas spacer cable
(2) Resistivity. Metal shields shall have cross-sectional areas that rated 0 through 600 volts.
provide for electrical resistivity of not more than that of one conductor
of the Type FCC cable used in the installation. 3.26.2 Installation

3.24.3.2 Corrosion Resistance. Metal components of the system shall 3.26.2.1 Uses Permitted. Type IGS cable shall be permitted for use
be either corrosion resistant, coated with corrosion-resistant materials, under ground, including direct burial in the earth, as the following:
or insulated from contact with corrosive substances.
(1) Service-entrance conductors
3.24.3.13 Insulation. The insulating material of the cable shall be (2) Feeder or branch-circuit conductors
moisture resistant and flame retardant. All insulating materials in the
FCC systems shall be identified for their use. 3.26.2.3 Uses Not Permitted. Type IGS cable shall not be used as
interior wiring or be exposed in contact with buildings.
3.24.3.21 Markings.
3.26.2.15 Bending Radius. Where the coilable nonmetallic conduit
(a) Cable Marking. Type FCC cable shall be clearly and durably and cable is bent for installation purposes or is flexed or bent during
marked on both sides at intervals of not more than 600 mm with the
shipment or installation, the radii of bends measured to the inside of 3.26.3 Construction Specifications
the bend shall not be less than specified in Table 3.26.2.15.
3.26.3.1 Conductors. The conductors shall be solid aluminum rods,
laid parallel, consisting of one to nineteen 13 mm diameter rods. The
Table 3.26.2.15 Minimum Radii of Bends minimum conductor size shall be 125 mm2, and the maximum size
Conduit Size Minimum Radii shall be 4750 kcmil.
Metric Designator mm
53 600 3.26.3.9 Insulation. The insulation shall be dry kraft paper tapes and a
78 900 pressurized sulfur hexafluoride gas (SF6), both approved for electrical
103 1150 use. The nominal gas pressure shall be 138 kPa gauge (20 pounds per
square inch gauge). The thickness of the paper spacer shall be as
specified in Table 3.26.3.9.
3.26.2.17 Bends. A run of Type IGS cable between pull boxes or
terminations shall not contain more than the equivalent of four quarter
bends (360 degrees total), including those bends located immediately Table 3.26.3.9 Paper Spacer Thickness
at the pull box or terminations. Thickness
2
Size (mm ) mm
3.26.2.31 Fittings. Terminations and splices for Type IGS cable shall 125 – 500 1.02
be identified as a type that is suitable for maintaining the gas pressure 600 – 4750 1.52
within the conduit. A valve and cap shall be provided for each length
of the cable and conduit to check the gas pressure or to inject gas into
the conduit. 3.26.3.13 Conduit. The conduit shall be a medium density
polyethylene identified as suitable for use with natural gas rated pipe
3.26.2.71 Ampacity. The ampacity of Type IGS cable shall not exceed in metric designator 53, 78, or 103 (trade size 2, 3, or 4). The percent
the values shown in Table 3.26.2.71. fill dimensions for the conduit are shown in Table 3.26.3.13.
The size of the conduit permitted for each conductor size shall be
calculated for a percent fill not to exceed those found in Table 1,
Table 3.26.2.71 Ampacity of Type IGS Cable Chapter 9.
Size (mm2) Amperes Size (kcmil) Amperes
125 119 2500 376
250 168 3000 412 Table 3.26.3.13 Conduit Dimensions
400 206 3250 429
500 238 3500 445 Actual Outside Actual Inside
600 266 3750 461 Conduit Size Diameter Diameter
725 292 4000 476 Metric Designator mm mm
850 344 4250 491 53 60 49.46
1000 336 4500 505 78 89 73.30
2250 357 4750 519 103 114 94.23
3.26.3.17 Marking. The cable shall be marked in accordance with 3.28.3 Construction Specifications
3.10.1.11(a), 3.10.1.11(b)(1), and 3.10.1.11(d).
3.28.3.1 Construction. Type MV cables shall have copper, aluminum,
or copper-clad aluminum conductors and shall comply with Table
ARTICLE 3.28 — MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE: TYPE MV 3.10.1.61 and Table 3.10.1.63 or Table 3.10.1.64.

3.28.1 General 3.28.3.21 Marking. Medium voltage cable shall be marked as

required by 3.10.1.11.
3.28.1.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and
construction specifications for medium voltage cable, Type MV.
ARTICLE 3.30 — METAL-CLAD CABLE: TYPE MC
3.28.1.2 Definition.
3.30.1 General
Medium Voltage Cable, Type MV. A single or multiconductor
solid dielectric insulated cable rated 2 001 volts or higher. 3.30.1.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and
construction specifications of metal-clad cable, Type MC.
3.28.2 Installation
3.30.1.2 Definition.
3.28.2.1 Uses Permitted. Type MV cable shall be permitted for use on
power systems rated up to 35 000 volts nominal as follows: Metal Clad Cable, Type MC. A factory assembly of one or more
insulated circuit conductors with or without optical fiber members
(1) In wet or dry locations enclosed in an armor of interlocking metal tape, or a smooth or
(2) In raceways corrugated metallic sheath.
(3) In cable trays as specified in 3.92.1.3(b)(2)
(4) Direct buried in accordance with 3.0.2.20 3.30.2 Installation
(5) In messenger-supported wiring
3.30.2.1 Uses Permitted.
FPN: The “Uses Permitted” is not an all-inclusive list.
(a) General Uses. Type MC cable shall be permitted as follows:
3.28.2.3 Uses Not Permitted. Unless identified for the use, Type MV
cable shall not be used as follows: (1) For services, feeders, and branch circuits
(2) For power, lighting, control, and signal circuits
(1) Where exposed to direct sunlight (3) Indoors or outdoors
(2) In cable trays, unless specified in 3.92.1.3(b)(2) (4) Exposed or concealed
(3) Direct buried, unless in accordance with 3.0.2.20 (5) To be direct buried where identified for such use
(6) In cable tray where identified for such use
3.28.2.71 Ampacity. The ampacity of Type MV cable shall be (7) In any raceway
determined in accordance with 3.10.1.60. The ampacity of Type MV (8) As aerial cable on a messenger
cable installed in cable tray shall be determined in accordance with (9) In hazardous (classified) locations as permitted
3.92.1.13. (10) In dry locations and embedded in plaster finish on brick or
other masonry except in damp or wet locations
 (11) In wet locations where any of the following conditions are
met: (4) Where subject to cinder fills, strong chlorides, caustic alkalis,
or vapors of chlorine or of hydrochloric acids
a. The metallic covering is impervious to moisture.
b. A lead sheath or moisture-impervious jacket is provided 3.30.2.8 Through or Parallel to Framing Members. Type MC cable
under the metal covering. shall be protected in accordance with 3.0.1.4(a), (c), and (d) where
c. The insulated conductors under the metallic covering are installed through or parallel to framing members.
listed for use in wet locations.
3.30.2.14 In Accessible Attics. The installation of Type MC cable in
(12) Where single-conductor cables are used, all phase conductors accessible attics or roof spaces shall also comply with 3.20.2.14.
and, where used, the neutral conductor shall be grouped together to
minimize induced voltage on the sheath. 3.30.2.15 Bending Radius. Bends in Type MC cable shall be so made
that the cable will not be damaged. The radius of the curve of the inner
(b) Specific Uses. Type MC cable shall be permitted to be installed edge of any bend shall not be less than required in 3.30.2.15(a)
in compliance with Parts 7.25.2 and 7.25.3 and 770.52 as applicable through (c).
and in accordance with 3.30.2.1(b)(1) through (b)(4).
(a) Smooth Sheath.
(1) Cable Tray. Type MC cable installed in cable tray shall
comply with 3.92.1.3, 3.92.1.4, 3.92.1.6, and 3.92.1.8 through (1) Ten times the external diameter of the metallic sheath for
3.92.1.13. cable not more than 19 mm in external diameter
(2) Direct Buried. Direct-buried cable shall comply with 3.0.1.5 or (2) Twelve times the external diameter of the metallic sheath for
3.0.2.20, as appropriate. cable more than 19 mm but not more than 40 mm in external diameter
(3) Installed as Service-Entrance Cable. Type MC cable installed (3) Fifteen times the external diameter of the metallic sheath for
as service-entrance cable shall be permitted in accordance with cable more than 40 mm in external diameter
230.43.
(4) Installed Outside of Buildings or as Aerial Cable. Type MC (b) Interlocked-Type Armor or Corrugated Sheath. Seven times
cable installed outside of buildings or as aerial cable shall comply with the external diameter of the metallic sheath.
225.10, 3.96.2.1, and 3.96.2.3.
(c) Shielded Conductors. Twelve times the overall diameter of one
FPN: The “Uses Permitted” is not an all-inclusive list. of the individual conductors or seven times the overall diameter of the
multiconductor cable, whichever is greater.
3.30.2.3 Uses Not Permitted. Type MC cable shall not be used where
exposed to the following destructive corrosive conditions, unless the 3.30.2.21 Securing and Supporting.
metallic sheath is suitable for the conditions or is protected by material
suitable for the conditions: (a) General. Type MC cable shall be supported and secured by
staples, cable ties, straps, hangers, or similar fittings or other approved
(1) Where subject to physical damage means designed and installed so as not to damage the cable.
(2) Direct burial in the earth
(3) In concrete (b) Securing. Unless otherwise provided, cables shall be secured at
intervals not exceeding 1 800 mm. Cables containing four or fewer
FPN to (3): MC cable that is identified for direct burial applications is suitable for
installation in concrete. conductors sized no larger than 5.5 mm2 (2.6 mm dia.) shall be
secured within 300 mm of every box, cabinet, fitting, or other cable (b) Single Type MC Conductors Grouped Together. Where
termination. single Type MC conductors are grouped together in a triangular or
square configuration and installed on a messenger or exposed with a
(c) Supporting. Unless otherwise provided, cables shall be maintained free airspace of not less than 2.15 times one conductor
supported at intervals not exceeding 1 800 mm. diameter (2.15 × O.D.) of the largest conductor contained within the
Horizontal runs of Type MC cable installed in wooden or metal configuration and adjacent conductor configurations or cables, the
framing members or similar supporting means shall be considered ampacity of the conductors shall not exceed the allowable ampacities
supported and secured where such support does not exceed 1 800 mm in the following tables:
intervals.
(1) Table 3.10.1.20 for conductors rated 0 through 2 000 volts
(d) Unsupported Cables. Type MC cable shall be permitted to be (2) Table 3.10.1.67 and Table 3.10.1.68 for conductors rated over
unsupported where the cable: 2000 volts

(1) Is fished between access points through concealed spaces in 3.30.3 Construction Specifications
finished buildings or structures and supporting is impractical; or
(2) Is not more than 1 800 mm in length from the last point of 3.30.3.1 Conductors. The conductors shall be of copper, aluminum,
cable support to the point of connection to a luminaire (lighting or copper-clad aluminum, solid or stranded. The minimum conductor
fixture) or other piece of electrical equipment and the cable and point size shall be 18 AWG copper and 3.5 mm2 (2.0 mm dia.) aluminum or
of connection are within an accessible ceiling. For the purpose of this copper-clad aluminum.
section, Type MC cable fittings shall be permitted as a means of cable
support. 3.30.3.5 Equipment Grounding. Where Type MC cable is used for
equipment grounding, it shall comply with 2.50.6.9(10) and 2.50.6.13.
3.30.2.22 Single Conductors. Where single-conductor cables with a
nonferrous armor or sheath are used, the installation shall comply with 3.30.3.9 Insulation. Insulated conductors shall comply with
3.0.1.20. 3.30.3.9(a) or (b).

3.30.2.31 Boxes and Fitting. Fittings used for connecting Type MC (a) 600 Volts. Insulated conductors in sizes 18 AWG and 16 AWG
cable to boxes, cabinets, or other equipment shall be listed and shall be of a type listed in Table 402.3, with a maximum operating
identified for such use. temperature not less than 90°C (194°F) and as permitted by 7.25.2.7.
Conductors larger than 16 AWG shall be of a type listed in Table
3.30.2.71 Ampacity. The ampacity of Type MC cable shall be 3.10.1.13 or of a type identified for use in Type MC cable.
determined in accordance with 3.10.1.15 or 3.10.1.60 for 2.0 mm2
(1.6 mm dia.) and larger conductors and in accordance with Table (b) Over 600 Volts. Insulated conductors shall be of a type listed in
4.2.1.5 for 18 AWG and 16 AWG conductors. The installation shall Table 3.10.1.61 through Table 3.10.1.64.
not exceed the temperature ratings of terminations and equipment.
3.30.3.13 Sheath. Metallic covering shall be one of the following
(a) Type MC Cable Installed in Cable Tray. The ampacities for types: smooth metallic sheath, corrugated metallic sheath, interlocking
Type MC cable installed in cable tray shall be determined in metal tape armor. The metallic sheath shall be continuous and close
accordance with 3.92.1.11 and 3.92.1.13. fitting. A nonmagnetic sheath or armor shall be used on single
conductor Type MC. Supplemental protection of an outer covering of
corrosion-resistant material shall be permitted and shall be required
where such protection is needed. The sheath shall not be used as a FPN: The “Uses Permitted” is not an all-inclusive list.
current-carrying conductor.
3.32.2.3 Uses Not Permitted. Type MI cable shall not be used under
FPN: See 3.0.1.6 for protection against corrosion. the following conditions or in the following locations:

(1) In underground runs unless protected from physical damage,

ARTICLE 3.32 — MINERAL-INSULATED, METAL- where necessary
SHEATHED CABLE: TYPE MI (2) Where exposed to conditions that are destructive and corrosive
to the metallic sheath, unless additional protection is provided
3.32.1 General
3.32.2.8 Through or Parallel to Framing Members. Type MI cable
3.32.1.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and shall be protected in accordance with 3.0.1.4 where installed through
construction specifications for mineral-insulated, metal-sheathed or parallel to framing members.
cable, Type MI.
3.32.2.15 Bending Radius. Bends in Type MI cable shall be so made
3.32.1.2 Definition. that the cable will not be damaged. The radius of the inner edge of any
bend shall not be less than required as follows:
Mineral-Insulated, Metal-Sheathed Cable, Type MI. A factory
assembly of one or more conductors insulated with a highly (1) Five times the external diameter of the metallic sheath for
compressed refractory mineral insulation and enclosed in a liquidtight cable not more than 19 mm in external diameter
and gastight continuous copper or alloy steel sheath. (2) Ten times the external diameter of the metallic sheath for
cable greater than 19 mm but not more than 25 mm in external
3.32.2 Installation diameter

3.32.2.1 Uses Permitted. Type MI cable shall be permitted as follows: 3.32.2.21 Securing and Supporting. Type MI cable shall be
supported and secured by staples, straps, hangers, or similar fittings,
(1) For services, feeders, and branch circuits designed and installed so as not to damage the cable, at intervals not
(2) For power, lighting, control, and signal circuits exceeding 1 800 mm.
(3) In dry, wet, or continuously moist locations
(4) Indoors or outdoors (a) Horizontal Runs Through Holes and Notches. In other than
(5) Where exposed or concealed vertical runs, cables installed in accordance with 3.0.1.4 shall be
(6) Where embedded in plaster, concrete, fill, or other masonry, considered supported and secured where such support does not exceed
whether above or below grade 1 800 mm intervals.
(7) In any hazardous (classified) location
(8) Where exposed to oil and gasoline (b) Unsupported Cable. Type MI cable shall be permitted to be
(9) Where exposed to corrosive conditions not deteriorating to its unsupported where the cable is fished between access points through
sheath concealed spaces in finished buildings or structures and supporting is
(10) In underground runs where suitably protected against physical impracticable.
damage and corrosive conditions
(11) In or attached to cable tray (c) Cable Trays. All MI cable installed in cable trays shall comply
with 3.92.1.8(b).
 3.32.3.5 Equipment Grounding. Where the outer sheath is made of
3.32.2.22 Single Conductors. Where single-conductor cables are copper, it shall provide an adequate path for equipment grounding
used, all phase conductors and, where used, the neutral conductor shall purposes. Where made of steel, an equipment grounding conductor
be grouped together to minimize induced voltage on the sheath. shall be provided.

3.32.2.31 Boxes and Fittings. 3.32.3.9 Insulation. The conductor insulation in Type MI cable shall
be a highly compressed refractory mineral that provides proper
(a) Fittings. Fittings used for connecting Type MI cable to boxes, spacing for all conductors.
cabinets, or other equipment shall be identified for such use.
3.32.3.13 Sheath. The outer sheath shall be of a continuous
(b) Terminal Seals. Where Type MI cable terminates, an end seal construction to provide mechanical protection and moisture seal.
fitting shall be installed immediately after stripping to prevent the
entrance of moisture into the insulation. The conductors extending
beyond the sheath shall be individually provided with an insulating ARTICLE 3.34 — NONMETALLIC-SHEATHED CABLE:
material. TYPES NM, NMC, AND NMS

3.32.2.71 Ampacity. The ampacity of Type MI cable shall be 3.34.1 General

determined in accordance with 3.10.1.15. The conductor temperature
at the end seal fitting shall not exceed the temperature rating of the 3.34.1.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and
listed end seal fitting, and the installation shall not exceed the construction specifications of nonmetallic-sheathed cable.
temperature ratings of terminations or equipment.
3.34.1.2 Definitions.
(a) Type MI Cable Installed in Cable Tray. The ampacities for
Type MI cable installed in cable tray shall be determined in Nonmetallic-Sheathed Cable. A factory assembly of two or more
accordance with 3.92.1.11. insulated conductors enclosed within an overall nonmetallic jacket.

(b) Single Type MI Conductors Grouped Together. Where single Type NM. Insulated conductors enclosed within an overall
Type MI conductors are grouped together in a triangular or square nonmetallic jacket.
configuration, as required by 3.32.2.22, and installed on a messenger
or exposed with a maintained free air space of not less than 2.15 times Type NMC. Insulated conductors enclosed within an overall,
one conductor diameter (2.15 × O.D.) of the largest conductor corrosion resistant, nonmetallic jacket.
contained within the configuration and adjacent conductor
configurations or cables, the ampacity of the conductors shall not Type NMS. Insulated power or control conductors with signaling,
exceed the allowable ampacities of Table 3.10.1.17. data, and communications conductors within an overall nonmetallic
jacket.
3.32.3 Construction Specifications
3.34.1.6 Listed. Type NM, Type NMC, and Type NMS cables shall be
3.32.3.1 Conductors. Type MI cable conductors shall be of solid listed.
copper, nickel, or nickel-coated copper with a resistance
corresponding to standard mm2 and mm dia. sizes.
 3.34.2 Installation (1) For both exposed and concealed work in normally dry
locations except as prohibited by 3.34.2.1(3)
3.34.2.1 Uses Permitted. Type NM, Type NMC, and Type NMS (2) To be installed or fished in air voids in masonry block or tile
cables shall be permitted to be used in the following: walls

(1) One- and two-family dwellings. 3.34.2.3 Uses Not Permitted.

(2) Multifamily dwellings permitted to be of Types III, IV, and V
construction except as prohibited in 3.34.2.3. (a) Types NM, NMC, and NMS. Types NM, NMC, and NMS
(3) Other structures permitted to be of Types III, IV, and V cables shall not be permitted as follows:
construction except as prohibited in 3.34.2.3. Cables shall be
concealed within walls, floors, or ceilings that provide a thermal (1) In any dwelling or structure not specifically permitted in
barrier of material that has at least a 15-minute finish rating as 3.34.2.1(1), (2), and (3)
identified in listings of fire-rated assemblies. (2) Exposed in dropped or suspended ceilings in other than one-
and two-family and multifamily dwellings
FPN No. 1: Types of building construction and occupancy classifications are (3) As service-entrance cable
defined in NFPA 220-1999, Standard on Types of Building Construction, or the
applicable building code, or both. (4) In commercial garages having hazardous (classified)
FPN No. 2: See Annex E for determination of building types [NFPA 220, Table 3- locations as defined in 5.11.1.3
1]. (5) In theaters and similar locations, except where permitted in
5.18.1.4(b)
(4) Cable trays in structures permitted to be Types III, IV, or V (6) In motion picture studios
where the cables are identified for the use. (7) In storage battery rooms
FPN: See 3.10.1.10 for temperature limitation of conductors.
(8) In hoistways or on elevators or escalators
(9) Embedded in poured cement, concrete, or aggregate
(a) Type NM. Type NM cable shall be permitted as follows: (10) In hazardous (classified) locations, except where permitted by
the following:
(1) For both exposed and concealed work in normally dry
locations except as prohibited in 3.34.2.1(3) a. 5.1.2.1(b)(3)
(2) To be installed or fished in air voids in masonry block or tile b. 5.2.2.1(b)(3)
walls c. 5.4.1.20

(b) Type NMC. Type NMC cable shall be permitted as follows: (b) Types NM and NMS. Types NM and NMS cables shall not be
used under the following conditions or in the following locations:
(1) For both exposed and concealed work in dry, moist, damp, or
corrosive locations, except as prohibited by 3.34.2.1(3) (1) Where exposed to corrosive fumes or vapors
(2) In outside and inside walls of masonry block or tile (2) Where embedded in masonry, concrete, adobe, fill, or plaster
(3) In a shallow chase in masonry, concrete, or adobe protected (3) In a shallow chase in masonry, concrete, or adobe and covered
against nails or screws by a steel plate at least 1.60 mm thick and with plaster, adobe, or similar finish
covered with plaster, adobe, or similar finish (4) Where exposed or subject to excessive moisture or dampness

(c) Type NMS. Type NMS cable shall be permitted as follows:

3.34.2.6 Exposed Work. In exposed work, except as provided in 3.34.2.15 Bending Radius. Bends in Types NM, NMC, and NMS
3.0.1.11(a), cable shall be installed as specified in 3.34.2.6(a) through cable shall be so made that the cable will not be damaged. The radius
(c). of the curve of the inner edge of any bend during or after installation
shall not be less than five times the diameter of the cable.
(a) To Follow Surface. Cable shall closely follow the surface of the
building finish or of running boards. 3.34.2.21 Securing and Supporting. Nonmetallic-sheathed cable
shall be supported and secured by staples, cable ties, straps, hangers,
(b) Protection from Physical Damage. Cable shall be protected or similar fittings designed and installed so as not to damage the cable,
from physical damage where necessary by rigid metal conduit, at intervals not exceeding 1 400 mm and within 300 mm of every
intermediate metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing, Schedule 80 outlet box, junction box, cabinet, or fitting. Flat cables shall not be
PVC rigid nonmetallic conduit, or other approved means. Where stapled on edge.
passing through a floor, the cable shall be enclosed in rigid metal Sections of cable protected from physical damage by raceway shall not
conduit, intermediate metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing, be required to be secured within the raceway.
Schedule 80 PVC rigid nonmetallic conduit, or other approved means
extending at least 150 mm above the floor. (a) Horizontal Runs Through Holes and Notches. In other than
Where Type NMC cable is installed in shallow chases in masonry, vertical runs, cables installed in accordance with 3.0.1.4 shall be
concrete, or adobe, the cable shall be protected against nails or screws considered to be supported and secured where such support does not
by a steel plate at least 1.60 mm thick and covered with plaster, adobe, exceed 1 400 mm intervals and the nonmetallic-sheathed cable is
or similar finish. securely fastened in place by an approved means within 300 mm of
each box, cabinet, conduit body, or other nonmetallic-sheathed cable
(c) In Unfinished Basements. Where cable is run at angles with termination.
joists in unfinished basements, it shall be permissible to secure cables
not smaller than two 14 mm2 or three 8.0 mm2 (3.2 mm dia.) FPN: See 3.14.2.3(c) for support where nonmetallic boxes are used.
conductors directly to the lower edges of the joists. Smaller cables
shall be run either through bored holes in joists or on running boards. (b) Unsupported Cables. Nonmetallic-sheathed cable shall be
NM cable used on a wall of an unfinished basement shall be permitted permitted to be unsupported where the cable:
to be installed in a listed conduit or tubing. Conduit or tubing shall
utilize a nonmetallic bushing or adapter at the point the cable enters (1) Is fished between access points through concealed spaces in
the raceway. Metal conduit and tubings and metal outlet boxes shall be finished buildings or structures and supporting is impracticable.
grounded. (2) Is not more than 1 400 mm from the last point of cable support
to the point of connection to a luminaire (lighting fixture) or other
3.34.2.8 Through or Parallel to Framing Members. Types NM, piece of electrical equipment and the cable and point of connection are
NMC, or NMS cable shall be protected in accordance with 3.0.1.4 within an accessible ceiling.
where installed through or parallel to framing members. Grommets
used as required in 3.0.1.4(b)(1) shall remain in place and be listed for (c) Wiring Device Without a Separate Outlet Box. A wiring
the purpose of cable protection. device identified for the use, without a separate outlet box, and
incorporating an integral cable clamp shall be permitted where the
3.34.2.14 In Accessible Attics. The installation of cable in accessible cable is secured in place at intervals not exceeding 1 400 mm and
attics or roof spaces shall also comply with 3.20.2.14. within 300 mm from the wiring device wall opening, and there shall
be at least a 300 mm loop of unbroken cable or 150 mm of a cable end
available on the interior side of the finished wall to permit 3.34.3.5 Conductors. The 600 volt insulated conductors shall be sizes
replacement. 2.0 mm2 (1.6 mm dia.) through 30 mm2 copper conductors or sizes
3.5 mm2 (2.0 mm dia.) through 2.0 mm2 aluminum or copper-clad
3.34.2.31 Boxes and Fittings. aluminum conductors. The signaling conductors shall comply with
7.80.1.5. The communication conductors shall comply with Part 8.0.5.
(a) Boxes of Insulating Material. Nonmetallic outlet boxes shall be
permitted as provided by 3.14.1.3. 3.34.3.9 Equipment Grounding. In addition to the insulated
conductors, the cable shall have an insulated or bare conductor for
(b) Devices of Insulating Material. Switch, outlet, and tap devices equipment grounding purposes only.
of insulating material shall be permitted to be used without boxes in
exposed cable wiring and for rewiring in existing buildings where the 3.34.3.13 Insulation. The insulated power conductors shall be one of
cable is concealed and fished. Openings in such devices shall form a the types listed in Table 3.10.1.13 that are suitable for branch circuit
close fit around the outer covering of the cable, and the device shall wiring or one that is identified for use in these cables. Conductor
fully enclose the part of the cable from which any part of the covering insulation shall be rated at 90°C (194°F).
has been removed. Where connections to conductors are by binding-
screw terminals, there shall be available as many terminals as FPN: Types NM, NMC, and NMS cable identified by the markings NM-B, NMC-B,
and NMS-B meet this requirement.
conductors.
3.34.3.17 Sheath. The outer sheath of nonmetallic-sheathed cable
(c) Devices with Integral Enclosures. Wiring devices with integral
shall comply with 3.34.3.17(a), (b), and (c).
enclosures identified for such use shall be permitted as provided by
3.0.1.15(e).
(a) Type NM. The overall covering shall be flame retardant and
moisture resistant.
3.34.2.71 Ampacity. The ampacity of Types NM, NMC, and NMS
cable shall be determined in accordance with 3.10.1.15. The ampacity
(b) Type NMC. The overall covering shall be flame retardant,
shall be in accordance with the 60°C (140°F) conductor temperature
moisture resistant, fungus resistant, and corrosion resistant.
rating. The 90°C (194°F) rating shall be permitted to be used for
ampacity derating purposes, provided the final derated ampacity does
(c) Type NMS. The overall covering shall be flame retardant and
not exceed that for a 60°C (140°F) rated conductor. The ampacity of
moisture resistant. The sheath shall be applied so as to separate the
Types NM, NMC, and NMS cable installed in cable tray shall be
power conductors from the communications and signaling conductors.
determined in accordance with 3.92.1.11.
The signaling conductors shall be permitted to be shielded. An
Where more than two NM cables containing two or more current-
optional outer jacket shall be permitted.
carrying conductors are bundled together and pass through wood
framing that is to be fire- or draft-stopped using thermal insulation or FPN: For composite optical cable, see 770.9 and 770.133.
sealing foam, the allowable ampacity of each conductor shall be
adjusted in accordance with Table 3.10.1.15(b)(2)a.

3.34.3 Construction Specifications

3.34.3.1 Construction. The outer cable sheath of nonmetallic-

sheathed cable shall be a nonmetallic material.
 ARTICLE 3.36 — POWER AND CONTROL conductors shall be permanently identified as an equipment grounding
TRAY CABLE: TYPE TC conductor in accordance with 2.50.6.10(b).
(8) Where installed in wet locations, Type TC cable shall also be
3.36.1 General resistant to moisture and corrosive agents.

3.36.1.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and FPN: See 3.10.1.10 for temperature limitation of conductors.
construction specifications for power and control tray cable, Type TC.
3.36.2.3 Uses Not Permitted. Type TC tray cable shall not be
3.36.1.2 Definition. installed or used as follows:

Power and Control Tray Cable, Type TC. A factory assembly of (1) Installed where it will be exposed to physical damage
two or more insulated conductors, with or without associated bare or (2) Installed outside a raceway or cable tray system, except as
covered grounding conductors, under a nonmetallic jacket. permitted in 3.36.2.1(7)
(3) Used where exposed to direct rays of the sun, unless identified
3.36.2 Installation as sunlight resistant
(4) Direct buried, unless identified for such use
3.36.2.1 Uses Permitted. Type TC cable shall be permitted to be used
as follows: 3.36.2.15 Bending Radius. Bends in Type TC cable shall be made so
as not to damage the cable. For Type TC cable without metal
(1) For power, lighting, control, and signal circuits. shielding, the minimum bending radius shall be as follows:
(2) In cable trays.
(3) In raceways. (1) Four times the overall diameter for cables 25 mm or less in
(4) In outdoor locations supported by a messenger wire. diameter
(5) For Class 1 circuits as permitted in Parts 7.25.2 and 7.25.3. (2) Five times the overall diameter for cables larger than 25 mm
(6) For non–power-limited fire alarm circuits if conductors (1 in.) but not more than 50 mm in diameter
comply with the requirements of 7.60.2.7. (3) Six times the overall diameter for cables larger than 50 mm in
(7) In industrial establishments where the conditions of diameter
maintenance and supervision ensure that only licensed electrical
practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner under the Type TC cables with metallic shielding shall have a minimum bending
supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner service the installation, radius of not less than 12 times the cable overall diameter.
and where the cable is continuously supported and protected against
physical damage using mechanical protection, such as struts, angles, or 3.36.2.71 Ampacity. The ampacity of Type TC tray cable shall be
channels, Type TC tray cable that complies with the crush and impact determined in accordance with 3.92.1.11 for 2.0 mm2 (1.6 mm dia.)
requirements of Type MC cable and is identified for such use with the and larger conductors, in accordance with 4.2.1.5 for 18 AWG through
marking Type TC–ER shall be permitted between a cable tray and the 16 AWG conductors where installed in cable tray, and in accordance
utilization equipment or device. The cable shall be secured at intervals with 3.10.1.15 where installed in a raceway or as messenger supported
not exceeding 1 800 mm. Equipment grounding for the utilization wiring.
equipment shall be provided by an equipment grounding conductor
within the cable. In cables containing conductors sized 14 mm2 or 3.36.3 Construction Specifications
smaller, the equipment grounding conductor shall be provided within
the cable or, at the time of installation, one or more insulated 3.36.3.1 Construction. A metallic sheath or armor as defined in
3.30.3.13 shall not be permitted either under or over the nonmetallic Service-Entrance Cable. A single conductor or multiconductor
jacket. Metallic shield(s) shall be permitted over groups of conductors, assembly provided with or without an overall covering, primarily used
under the outer jacket, or both. for services, and of the following types:
Type SE. Service-entrance cable having a flame-retardant,
3.36.3.5 Conductors. The insulated conductors of Type TC tray cable moisture-resistant covering.
shall be in sizes 18 AWG through 500 mm2 copper and sizes 3.5 mm2 Type USE. Service-entrance cable, identified for underground
(2.0 mm dia.) through 500 mm2 aluminum or copper-clad aluminum. use, having a moisture-resistant covering, but not required to have a
Insulated conductors of sizes 2.0 mm2 (1.6 mm dia.) and larger copper flame-retardant covering.
and sizes 3.5 mm2 (2.0 mm dia.) and larger aluminum or copper-clad
aluminum shall be one of the types listed in Table 3.10.1.13 or Table 3.38.2 Installation
3.10.1.62 that is suitable for branch circuit and feeder circuits or one
that is identified for such use. 3.38.2.1 Uses Permitted.

(a) Fire Alarm Systems. Where used for fire alarm systems, (a) Service-Entrance Conductors. Service-entrance cable shall be
conductors shall also be in accordance with 7.60.2.7. permitted to be used as service-entrance conductors and shall be
installed in accordance with 2.30.1.6, 2.30.1.7, and Parts 2.30.2,
(b) Thermocouple Circuits. Conductors in Type TC cable used for 2.30.3, and 2.30.4.
thermocouple circuits in accordance with Part 7.25.3 shall also be Type USE used for service laterals shall be permitted to emerge
permitted to be any of the materials used for thermocouple extension from the ground outside at terminations in meter bases or other
wire. enclosures where protected in accordance with 3.0.1.5(d).

(c) Class I Circuit Conductors. Insulated conductors of 18 AWG (b) Branch Circuits or Feeders.
and 16 AWG copper shall also be in accordance with 7.25.2.7.
(1) Grounded Conductor Insulated. Type SE service-entrance
3.36.3.17 Jacket. The outer jacket shall be a flame-retardant, cables shall be permitted in wiring systems where all of the circuit
nonmetallic material. conductors of the cable are of the rubber-covered or thermoplastic
type.
3.36.3.21 Marking. There shall be no voltage marking on a Type TC (2) Grounded Conductor Not Insulated. Type SE service-entrance
cable employing thermocouple extension wire. cable shall be permitted for use where the insulated conductors are
used for circuit wiring and the uninsulated conductor is used only for
equipment grounding purposes.
ARTICLE 3.38 — SERVICE-ENTRANCE CABLE:
TYPES SE AND USE Exception: Uninsulated conductors shall be permitted as a grounded
conductor in accordance with 2.50.7.11, 2.50.2.13, and 2.25.2.1
3.38.1 General through 2.25.2.11.

3.38.1.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and (3) Temperature Limitations. Type SE service-entrance cable used
construction specifications of service-entrance cable. to supply appliances shall not be subject to conductor temperatures in
excess of the temperature specified for the type of insulation involved.
3.38.1.2 Definitions. (4) Installation Methods for Branch Circuits and Feeders.
 a. Interior Installations. In addition to the provisions of this the ungrounded conductors shall be so marked.
article, Type SE service-entrance cable used for interior wiring shall
comply with the installation requirements of Parts 3.34.1 and 3.34.2,
excluding 3.34.2.71. ARTICLE 3.40 — UNDERGROUND FEEDER AND
BRANCH-CIRCUIT CABLE: TYPE UF
FPN: See 3.10.1.10 for temperature limitation of conductors.
3.40.1 General
b. Exterior Installations. In addition to the provisions of this
article, service-entrance cable used for feeders or branch circuits, 3.40.1.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and
where installed as exterior wiring, shall be installed in accordance with construction specifications for underground feeder and branch-circuit
Part 2.25.1. The cable shall be supported in accordance with 3.34.2.21, cable, Type UF.
unless used as messenger-supported wiring as permitted in Part 3.96.2.
Type USE cable installed as underground feeder and branch circuit 3.40.1.2 Definition.
cable shall comply with Part 3.40.2. Where Type USE cable emerges
from the ground at terminations, it shall be protected in accordance Underground Feeder and Branch-Circuit Cable, Type UF. A
with 3.0.1.5(d). Multiconductor service-entrance cable shall be factory assembly of one or more insulated conductors with an integral
permitted to be installed as messenger-supported wiring in accordance or an overall covering of nonmetallic material suitable for direct burial
with 2.25.1.10 and Part 3.96.2. in the earth.
3.38.2.15 Bending Radius. Bends in Types USE and SE cable shall 3.40.1.6 Listing Requirements. Type UF cable shall be listed.
be so made that the cable will not be damaged. The radius of the curve
of the inner edge of any bend, during or after installation, shall not be 3.40.2 Installation
less than five times the diameter of the cable.
3.40.2.1 Uses Permitted. Type UF cable shall be permitted as follows:
3.38.3 Construction
(1) For use underground, including direct burial in the earth. For
3.38.3.1 Construction. Cabled, single-conductor, Type USE underground requirements, see 3.0.1.5.
constructions recognized for underground use shall be permitted to (2) As single-conductor cables. Where installed as single-
have a bare copper conductor cabled with the assembly. Type USE conductor cables, all conductors of the feeder grounded conductor or
single, parallel, or cabled conductor assemblies recognized for branch circuit, including the grounded conductor and equipment
underground use shall be permitted to have a bare copper concentric grounding conductor, if any, shall be installed in accordance with
conductor applied. These constructions shall not require an outer 3.0.1.3.
overall covering. (3) For wiring in wet, dry, or corrosive locations under the
recognized wiring methods of this Code.
FPN: See 2.30.4.2, Exception, item (2), for directly buried, uninsulated service-
entrance conductors. (4) Installed as nonmetallic-sheathed cable. Where so installed,
the installation and conductor requirements shall comply with Parts
Type SE or USE cable containing two or more conductors shall be 3.34.2 and 3.34.3 and shall be of the multiconductor type.
permitted to have one conductor uninsulated. (5) For solar photovoltaic systems in accordance with 6.90.4.1.
(6) As single-conductor cables as the nonheating leads for heating
3.38.3.21 Marking. Service-entrance cable shall be marked as cables as provided in 4.24.5.10.
required in 3.10.1.11. Cable with the neutral conductor smaller than
 (7) Supported by cable trays. Type UF cable supported by cable 3.40.3.9 Insulation. The conductors of Type UF shall be one of the
trays shall be of the multiconductor type. moisture-resistant types listed in Table 3.10.1.13 that is suitable for
branch-circuit wiring or one that is identified for such use. Where
FPN: See 3.10.1.10 for temperature limitation of conductors. installed as a substitute wiring method for NM cable, the conductor
insulation shall be rated 90°C (194°F).
3.40.2.3 Uses Not Permitted. Type UF cable shall not be used as
follows: 3.40.3.13 Sheath. The overall covering shall be flame retardant;
moisture, fungus, and corrosion resistant; and suitable for direct burial
(1) As service-entrance cable in the earth.
(2) In commercial garages
(3) In theaters and similar locations
(4) In motion picture studios ARTICLE 3.42 — INTERMEDIATE METAL
(5) In storage battery rooms CONDUIT: TYPE IMC
(6) In hoistways or on elevators or escalators
(7) In hazardous (classified) locations 3.42.1 General
(8) Embedded in poured cement, concrete, or aggregate, except
where embedded in plaster as nonheating leads where permitted in 3.42.1.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and
4.24.5.10 construction specifications for intermediate metal conduit (IMC) and
(9) Where exposed to direct rays of the sun, unless identified as associated fittings.
sunlight resistant
(10) Where subject to physical damage 3.42.1.2 Definition.
(11) As overhead cable, except where installed as messenger-
supported wiring in accordance with Part 3.96.2 Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC). A steel threadable raceway of
circular cross section designed for the physical protection and routing
3.40.2.15 Bending Radius. Bends in Type UF cable shall be so made of conductors and cables and for use as an equipment grounding
that the cable is not damaged. The radius of the curve of the inner edge conductor when installed with its integral or associated coupling and
of any bend shall not be less than five times the diameter of the cable. appropriate fittings.
3.40.2.71 Ampacity. The ampacity of Type UF cable shall be that of 3.42.1.6 Listing Requirements. IMC, factory elbows and couplings,
60°C (140°F) conductors in accordance with 3.10.1.15. and associated fittings shall be listed.
3.40.3 Construction Specifications 3.42.2 Installation
3.40.3.1 Conductors. The conductors shall be sizes 2.0 mm2 3.42.2.1 Uses Permitted.
(1.6 mm dia.) copper or 3.5 mm2 (2.0 mm dia.) aluminum or copper-
clad aluminum through 100 mm2. (a) All Atmospheric Conditions and Occupancies. Use of IMC
shall be permitted under all atmospheric conditions and occupancies.
3.40.3.5 Equipment Grounding. In addition to the insulated
conductors, the cable shall be permitted to have an insulated or bare (b) Corrosion Environments. IMC, elbows, couplings, and fittings
conductor for equipment grounding purposes only. shall be permitted to be installed in concrete, in direct contact with the
earth, or in areas subject to severe corrosive influences where
protected by corrosion protection and judged suitable for the 3.42.2.15 Bends — How Made. Bends of IMC shall be so made that
condition. the conduit will not be damaged and the internal diameter of the
conduit will not be effectively reduced. The radius of the curve of any
(c) Cinder Fill. IMC shall be permitted to be installed in or under field bend to the centerline of the conduit shall not be less than
cinder fill where subject to permanent moisture where protected on all indicated in Table 2, Chapter 9.
sides by a layer of noncinder concrete not less than 50 mm thick;
where the conduit is not less than 450 mm under the fill; or where 3.42.2.17 Bends — Number in One Run. There shall not be more
protected by corrosion protection and judged suitable for the than the equivalent of four quarter bends (360 degrees total) between
condition. pull points, for example, conduit bodies and boxes.

(d) Wet Locations. All supports, bolts, straps, screws, and so forth, 3.42.2.19 Reaming and Threading. All cut ends shall be reamed or
shall be of corrosion-resistant materials or protected against corrosion otherwise finished to remove rough edges. Where conduit is threaded
by corrosion-resistant materials. in the field, a standard cutting die with a taper of 1 in 16 (¾ in. taper
per foot) shall be used.
FPN: See 3.0.1.6 for protection against corrosion.
FPN: See ANSI/ASME B.1.20.1-1983, Standard for Pipe Threads, General
3.42.2.5 Dissimilar Metals. Where practicable, dissimilar metals in Purpose (Inch).
contact anywhere in the system shall be avoided to eliminate the
possibility of galvanic action. 3.42.2.21 Securing and Supporting. IMC shall be installed as a
Aluminum fittings and enclosures shall be permitted to be used with complete system in accordance with 3.0.1.18 and shall be securely
IMC. fastened in place and supported in accordance with 3.42.2.21(a) and
(b).
3.42.2.11 Size.
(a) Securely Fastened. Each IMC shall be securely fastened within
(a) Minimum. IMC smaller than metric designator 16 (trade size ½) 900 mm of each outlet box, junction box, device box, cabinet, conduit
shall not be used. body, or other conduit termination. Fastening shall be permitted to be
increased to a distance of 1 500 mm where structural members do not
(b) Maximum. IMC larger than metric designator 103 (trade size 4) readily permit fastening within 900 mm. Where approved, conduit
shall not be used. shall not be required to be securely fastened within 900 mm of the
service head for above-the-roof termination of a mast.
FPN: See 3.0.1.1(c) for the metric designators and trade sizes. These are for
identification purposes only and do not relate to actual dimensions. (b) Supports. IMC shall be supported in accordance with one of the
following:
3.42.2.13 Number of Conductors. The number of conductors shall
not exceed that permitted by the percentage fill specified in Table 1, (1) Conduit shall be supported at intervals not exceeding
Chapter 9. 3 000 mm.
Cables shall be permitted to be installed where such use is not (2) The distance between supports for straight runs of conduit
prohibited by the respective cable articles. The number of cables shall shall be permitted in accordance with Table 3.44.2.21(b)(2), provided
not exceed the allowable percentage fill specified in Table 1, Chapter the conduit is made up with threaded couplings and such supports
9. prevent transmission of stresses to termination where conduit is
deflected between supports.
 (3) Exposed vertical risers from industrial machinery or fixed
equipment shall be permitted to be supported at intervals not 3.42.3.11 Standard Lengths. The standard length of IMC shall be
exceeding 6 000 mm if the conduit is made up with threaded 3 000 mm, including an attached coupling, and each end shall be
couplings, the conduit is supported and securely fastened at the top threaded. Longer or shorter lengths with or without coupling and
and bottom of the riser, and no other means of intermediate support is threaded or unthreaded shall be permitted.
readily available.
(4) Horizontal runs of IMC supported by openings through
framing members at intervals not exceeding 3 000 mm and securely ARTICLE 3.44 — RIGID METAL CONDUIT: TYPE RMC
fastened within 900 mm of termination points shall be permitted.
3.44.1 General
3.42.2.33 Couplings and Connectors.
3.44.1.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and
(a) Threadless. Threadless couplings and connectors used with construction specifications for rigid metal conduit (RMC) and
conduit shall be made tight. Where buried in masonry or concrete, associated fittings.
they shall be the concretetight type. Where installed in wet locations,
they shall comply with 3.14.2.1(a). Threadless couplings and 3.44.1.2 Definition.
connectors shall not be used on threaded conduit ends unless listed for
the purpose. Rigid Metal Conduit (RMC). A threadable raceway of circular
cross section designed for the physical protection and routing of
(b) Running Threads. Running threads shall not be used on conduit conductors and cables and for use as an equipment grounding
for connection at couplings. conductor when installed with its integral or associated coupling and
appropriate fittings. RMC is generally made of steel (ferrous) with
3.42.2.37 Bushings. Where a conduit enters a box, fitting, or other protective coatings or aluminum (nonferrous). Special use types are
enclosure, a bushing shall be provided to protect the wire from silicon bronze and stainless steel.
abrasion unless the design of the box, fitting, or enclosure is such as to
afford equivalent protection. 3.44.1.6 Listing Requirements. RMC, factory elbows and couplings,
and associated fittings shall be listed.
2
FPN: See 3.0.1.4(f) for the protection of conductors 22 mm and larger at
bushings.
3.44.2 Installation
3.42.2.47 Splices and Taps. Splices and taps shall be made in
3.44.2.1 Uses Permitted.
accordance with 3.0.1.15.
(a) All Atmospheric Conditions and Occupancies. Use of RMC
3.42.2.51 Grounding. IMC shall be permitted as an equipment
shall be permitted under all atmospheric conditions and occupancies.
grounding conductor.
Ferrous raceways and fittings protected from corrosion solely by
enamel shall be permitted only indoors and in occupancies not subject
3.42.3 Construction Specifications
to severe corrosive influences.
3.42.3.1 Marking. Each length shall be clearly and durably marked at
(b) Corrosion Environments. RMC, elbows, couplings, and fittings
least every 1 500 mm with the letters IMC. Each length shall be
shall be permitted to be installed in concrete, in direct contact with the
marked as required in 1.10.1.21.
earth, or in areas subject to severe corrosive influences where
protected by corrosion protection and judged suitable for the not exceed the allowable percentage fill specified in Table 1, Chapter
condition. 9.

(c) Cinder Fill. RMC shall be permitted to be installed in or under 3.44.2.15 Bends — How Made. Bends of RMC shall be so made that
cinder fill where subject to permanent moisture where protected on all the conduit will not be damaged and so that the internal diameter of
sides by a layer of noncinder concrete not less than 50 mm thick; the conduit will not be effectively reduced. The radius of the curve of
where the conduit is not less than 450 mm under the fill; or where any field bend to the centerline of the conduit shall not be less than
protected by corrosion protection and judged suitable for the indicated in Table 2, Chapter 9.
condition.
3.44.2.17 Bends — Number in One Run. There shall not be more
(d) Wet Locations. All supports, bolts, straps, screws, and so forth, than the equivalent of four quarter bends (360 degrees total) between
shall be of corrosion-resistant materials or protected against corrosion pull points, for example, conduit bodies and boxes.
by corrosion-resistant materials.
3.44.2.19 Reaming and Threading. All cut ends shall be reamed or
FPN: See 3.0.1.6 for protection against corrosion. otherwise finished to remove rough edges. Where conduit is threaded
in the field, a standard cutting die with a 1 in 16 taper (¾-in. taper per
3.44.2.5 Dissimilar Metals. Where practicable, dissimilar metals in foot) shall be used.
contact anywhere in the system shall be avoided to eliminate the
possibility of galvanic action. Aluminum fittings and enclosures shall FPN: See ANSI/ASME B.1.20.1-1983, Standard for Pipe Threads, General
be permitted to be used with steel RMC, and steel fittings and Purpose (Inch).
enclosures shall be permitted to be used with aluminum RMC where
not subject to severe corrosive influences. 3.44.2.21 Securing and Supporting. RMC shall be installed as a
complete system in accordance with 3.0.1.18 and shall be securely
3.44.2.11 Size. fastened in place and supported in accordance with 3.44.2.21(a) and
(b).
(a) Minimum. RMC smaller than metric designator 16 (trade size
½) shall not be used. (a) Securely Fastened. RMC shall be securely fastened within
900 mm of each outlet box, junction box, device box, cabinet, conduit
Exception: For enclosing the leads of motors as permitted in body, or other conduit termination. Fastening shall be permitted to be
4.30.13.5(b). increased to a distance of 1 500 mm where structural members do not
readily permit fastening within 900 mm. Where approved, conduit
(b) Maximum. RMC larger than metric designator 155 (trade size shall not be required to be securely fastened within 900 mm of the
6) shall not be used. service head for above-the-roof termination of a mast.

FPN: See 3.0.1.1(c) for the metric designators and trade sizes. These are for (b) Supports. RMC shall be supported in accordance with one of
identification purposes only and do not relate to actual dimensions. the following:
3.44.2.13 Number of Conductors. The number of conductors shall (1) Conduit shall be supported at intervals not exceeding
not exceed that permitted by the percentage fill specified in Table 1, 3 000 mm.
Chapter 9. (2) The distance between supports for straight runs of conduit
Cables shall be permitted to be installed where such use is not shall be permitted in accordance with Table 3.44.2.21(b)(2), provided
prohibited by the respective cable articles. The number of cables shall
the conduit is made up with threaded couplings, and such supports FPN: See 3.0.1.4(f) for the protection of conductors sizes 4 AWG and larger at
bushings.
prevent transmission of stresses to termination where conduit is
deflected between supports.
3.44.2.47 Splices and Taps. Splices and taps shall be made in
(3) Exposed vertical risers from industrial machinery or fixed
accordance with 3.0.1.15.
equipment shall be permitted to be supported at intervals not
exceeding 6 000 mm if the conduit is made up with threaded
3.44.2.51 Grounding. RMC shall be permitted as an equipment
couplings, the conduit is supported and securely fastened at the top
grounding conductor.
and bottom of the riser, and no other means of intermediate support is
readily available.
3.44.3 Construction Specifications
(4) Horizontal runs of RMC supported by openings through
framing members at intervals not exceeding 3 000 mm and securely
3.44.3.1 Marking. Each length shall be clearly and durably identified
fastened within 900 mm of termination points shall be permitted.
in every 3 000 mm as required in the first sentence of 1.10.1.21.
Nonferrous conduit of corrosion-resistant material shall have suitable
markings.
Table 3.44.2.21(b)(2) Supports for Rigid Metal Conduit
Maximum Distance Between 3.44.3.11 Standard Lengths. The standard length of RMC shall be
Conduit Size Rigid Metal Conduit Supports 3 000 mm, including an attached coupling, and each end shall be
(Metric Designator) (m) threaded. Longer or shorter lengths with or without coupling and
16–21 3.0 threaded or unthreaded shall be permitted.
27 3.7
35–41 4.3
53–63 4.9 ARTICLE 3.48 — FLEXIBLE METAL
78 and larger 6.1 CONDUIT: TYPE FMC

3.48.1 General
3.44.2.33 Couplings and Connectors.
3.48.1.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and
(a) Threadless. Threadless couplings and connectors used with construction specifications for flexible metal conduit (FMC) and
conduit shall be made tight. Where buried in masonry or concrete, associated fittings.
they shall be the concretetight type. Where installed in wet locations,
they shall comply with 3.14.2.1(a). Threadless couplings and
connectors shall not be used on threaded conduit ends unless listed for
the purpose. 3.48.1.2 Definition.
(b) Running Threads. Running threads shall not be used on conduit
for connection at couplings. Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC). A raceway of circular cross
section made of helically wound, formed, interlocked metal strip.
3.44.2.37 Bushings. Where a conduit enters a box, fitting, or other
enclosure, a bushing shall be provided to protect the wire from 3.48.1.6 Listing Requirements. FMC and associated fittings shall be
abrasion unless the design of the box, fitting, or enclosure is such as to listed.
afford equivalent protection.
 3.48.2 Installation
FPN: See 3.0.1.1(c) for the metric designators and trade sizes. These are for
identification purposes only and do not relate to actual dimensions.
3.48.2.1 Uses Permitted. FMC shall be permitted to be used in
exposed and concealed locations.
3.48.2.13 Number of Conductors. The number of conductors shall
not exceed that permitted by the percentage fill specified in Table 1,
3.48.2.3 Uses Not Permitted. FMC shall not be used in the following:
Chapter 9, or as permitted in Table 3.48.2.13, or for metric designator
12 (trade size ).
(1) In wet locations unless the conductors are approved for the
Cables shall be permitted to be installed where such use is not
specific conditions and the installation is such that liquid is not likely
prohibited by the respective cable articles. The number of cables shall
to enter raceways or enclosures to which the conduit is connected
not exceed the allowable percentage fill specified in Table 1, Chapter
(2) In hoistways, other than as permitted in 6.20.3.1(a)(1)
9.
(3) In storage battery rooms
(4) In any hazardous (classified) location other than as permitted
in 5.1.2.1(b) and 5.4.1.20
Table 3.48.2.13 Maximum Number of Insulated Conductors in
(5) Where exposed to materials having a deteriorating effect on
Metric Designator 12 (Trade Size ) Flexible Metal Conduit*
the installed conductors, such as oil or gasoline
(6) Underground or embedded in poured concrete or aggregate Types RFH-2, Types TF, Types TFN, Types FEP,
(7) Where subject to physical damage SF-2 XHHW, TW THHN, THWN FEBP, PF, PGF
Size Fittings Fittings Fittings Fittings Fittings Fittings Fittings Fittings
3.48.2.11 Size. mm2 Inside Outside Inside Outside Inside Outside Inside Outside
(mm dia) Conduit Conduit Conduit Conduit Conduit Conduit Conduit Conduit
18 2 3 3 5 5 8 5 8
(a) Minimum. FMC less than metric designator 16 (trade size ½) 16 1 2 3 4 4 6 4 6
shall not be used unless permitted in 3.48.2.11(a)(1) through (a)(5) for 2.0(1.6) 1 2 2 3 3 4 3 4
3.5(2.0) — — 1 2 2 3 2 3
metric designator 12 (trade size ). 5.5(2.6) — — 1 1 1 1 1 2
*In addition, one covered or bare equipment grounding conductor of the same size
(1) For enclosing the leads of motors as permitted in 4.30.13.5(b) shall be permitted.
(2) In lengths not in excess of 1 800 mm for any of the following
uses:
3.48.2.15 Bends — How Made. Bends in conduit shall be made so
a. For utilization equipment that the conduit is not damaged and the internal diameter of the
b. As part of a listed assembly conduit is not effectively reduced. Bends shall be permitted to be made
c. For tap connections to luminaires (lighting fixtures) as manually without auxiliary equipment. The radius of the curve to the
permitted in 4.10.11.4(c) centerline of any bend shall not be less than shown in Table 2, Chapter
9 using the column “Other Bends.”
(3) For manufactured wiring systems as permitted in 6.4.1.6(a)
(4) In hoistways as permitted in 6.20.3.1(a)(1) 3.48.2.17 Bends — Number in One Run. There shall not be more
(5) As part of a listed assembly to connect wired luminaire than the equivalent of four quarter bends (360 degrees total) between
(fixture) sections as permitted in 4.10.13.5(c) pull points, for example, conduit bodies and boxes.

(b) Maximum. FMC larger than metric designator 103 (trade size 4)
shall not be used.
3.48.2.19 Trimming. All cut ends shall be trimmed or otherwise conductor shall be installed.
finished to remove rough edges, except where fittings that thread into Where flexibility is not required, FMC shall be permitted to be used as
the convolutions are used. an equipment grounding conductor when installed in accordance with
2.50.6.9(5).
3.48.2.21 Securing and Supporting. FMC shall be securely fastened Where required or installed, equipment grounding conductors shall be
in place and supported in accordance with 3.48.2.21(a) and (b). installed in accordance with 2.50.7.5(b).
Where required or installed, equipment bonding jumpers shall be
(a) Securely Fastened. FMC shall be securely fastened in place by installed in accordance with 2.50.5.13.
an approved means within 300 mm of each box, cabinet, conduit body,
or other conduit termination and shall be supported and secured at
intervals not to exceed 1 400 mm. ARTICLE 3.50 — LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL
CONDUIT: TYPE LFMC
Exception No. 1: Where FMC is fished.
Exception No. 2: At terminals where flexibility is required, lengths 3.50.1 General
shall not exceed the following:
(1) 900 mm for metric designators 16 through 35 (trade sizes ½ 3.50.1.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and
through 1¼) construction specifications for liquidtight flexible metal conduit
(2) 1 200 mm for metric designators 41 through 53 (trade sizes (LFMC) and associated fittings.
1½ through 2)
(3) 1 500 mm for metric designators 63 (trade size 2½) and larger 3.50.1.2 Definition.
Exception No. 3: Lengths not exceeding 1 800 mm from a luminaire
(fixture) terminal connection for tap connections to luminaires (light Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit (LFMC). A raceway of
fixtures) as permitted in 4.10.11.4(c). circular cross section having an outer liquidtight, nonmetallic,
Exception No. 4: Lengths not exceeding 1 800 mm from the last point sunlight-resistant jacket over an inner flexible metal core with
where the raceway is securely fastened for connections within an associated couplings, connectors, and fittings for the installation of
accessible ceiling to luminaire(s) [lighting fixture(s)] or other electric conductors.
equipment.
3.50.1.6 Listing Requirements. LFMC and associated fittings shall
(b) Supports. Horizontal runs of FMC supported by openings be listed.
through framing members at intervals not greater than 1 400 mm and
securely fastened within 300 mm of termination points shall be 3.50.2 Installation
permitted.
3.50.2.1 Uses Permitted. LFMC shall be permitted to be used in
3.48.2.33 Couplings and Connectors. Angle connectors shall not be exposed or concealed locations as follows:
used for concealed raceway installations.
(1) Where conditions of installation, operation, or maintenance
3.48.2.47 Splices and Taps. Splices and taps shall be made in require flexibility or protection from liquids, vapors, or solids
accordance with 3.0.1.15. (2) As permitted by 5.1.2.1(b), 5.2.2.1, 5.3.2.1, and 5.4.1.20 and
in other hazardous (classified) locations where specifically approved,
3.48.2.51 Grounding and Bonding. Where used to connect and by 5.53..2.4(b)
equipment where flexibility is required, an equipment grounding (3) For direct burial where listed and marked for the purpose
 3.50.2.17 Bends — Number in One Run. There shall not be more
3.50.2.3 Uses Not Permitted. LFMC shall not be used as follows: than the equivalent of four quarter bends (360 degrees total) between
pull points, for example, conduit bodies and boxes.
(1) Where subject to physical damage
(2) Where any combination of ambient and conductor temperature 3.50.2.21 Securing and Supporting. LFMC shall be securely
produces an operating temperature in excess of that for which the fastened in place and supported in accordance with 3.50.2.21(a) and
material is approved (b).

3.50.2.11 Size. (a) Securely Fastened. LFMC shall be securely fastened in place by
an approved means within 300 mm of each box, cabinet, conduit body,
(a) Minimum. LFMC smaller than 15 mm electrical trade size shall or other conduit termination and shall be supported and secured at
not be used. intervals not to exceed 1 400 mm.

Exception: LFMC of 10 mm electrical trade size shall be permitted as Exception No. 1: Where LFMC is fished.
covered in 3.48.2.11(a). Exception No. 2: Lengths not exceeding 900 mm at terminals where
flexibility is necessary.
(b) Maximum. The maximum size of LFMC shall be 100 mm Exception No. 3: Lengths not exceeding 1 800 mm from a luminaire
electrical trade size. (fixture) terminal connection for tap conductors to luminaires (lighting
fixtures), as permitted in 4.10.11.4(c).
FPN: See 3.0.1.1(c) for the metric designators and trade sizes. These are for Exception No. 4: Lengths not exceeding 1 800 mm from the last point
identification purposes only and do not relate to actual dimensions.
where the raceway is securely fastened for connections within an
accessible ceiling to luminaire(s) [lighting fixture(s)] or other
3.50.2.13 Number of Conductors or Cables.
equipment.
(a) 15 mm through 100 mm Sizes. The number of conductors shall
(b) Supports. Horizontal runs of LFMC supported by openings
not exceed that permitted by the percentage fill specified in Table 1,
through framing members at intervals not greater than 1 400 mm and
Chapter 9.
securely fastened within 300 mm of termination points shall be
Cables shall be permitted to be installed where such use is not
permitted.
prohibited by the respective cable articles. The number of cables shall
not exceed the allowable percentage fill specified in Table 1, Chapter
3.50.2.33 Couplings and Connectors. Angle connectors shall not be
9.
used for concealed raceway installations.
(b) 10 mm Size. The number of conductors shall not exceed that
permitted in Table 3.48.2.13, “Fittings Outside Conduit” columns.
3.50.2.47 Splices and Taps. Splices and taps shall be made in
accordance with 3.0.1.15.
3.50.2.15 Bends — How Made. Bends in conduit shall be so made
that the conduit will not be damaged and the internal diameter of the
3.50.2.51 Grounding and Bonding. Where used to connect
conduit will not be effectively reduced. Bends shall be permitted to be
equipment where flexibility is required, an equipment grounding
made manually without auxiliary equipment. The radius of the curve
conductor shall be installed.
to the centerline of any bend shall not be less than required in Table 2,
Where flexibility is not required, LFMC shall be permitted to be used
Chapter 9 using the column “Other Bends.”
as an equipment grounding conductor when installed in accordance
with 2.50.6.9(6).
Where required or installed, equipment grounding conductors shall be
installed in accordance with 2.50.7.5(b). (a) Concealed. RNC shall be permitted in walls, floors, and
Where required or installed, equipment bonding jumpers shall be ceilings.
installed in accordance with 2.50.5.13.
(b) Corrosive Influences. RNC shall be permitted in locations
FPN: See 5.1.2.21(b), 5.2.2.21(b), and 5.3.2.21(b) for types of equipment subject to severe corrosive influences as covered in 3.0.1.6 and where
grounding conductors.
subject to chemicals for which the materials are specifically approved.
3.50.3 Construction Specifications
(c) Cinders. RNC shall be permitted in cinder fill.
3.50.3.1 Marking. LFMC shall be marked according to 1.10.1.21. The
(d) Wet Locations. RNC shall be permitted in portions of dairies,
trade size and other information required by the listing shall also be
laundries, canneries, or other wet locations and in locations where
marked on the conduit. Conduit suitable for direct burial shall be so
walls are frequently washed, the entire conduit system including boxes
marked.
and fittings used therewith shall be installed and equipped so as to
prevent water from entering the conduit. All supports, bolts, straps,
screws, and so forth, shall be of corrosion-resistant materials or be
ARTICLE 3.52 — RIGID NONMETALLIC
protected against corrosion by approved corrosion-resistant materials.
CONDUIT: TYPE RNC
(e) Dry and Damp Locations. RNC shall be permitted for use in
3.52.1 General
dry and damp locations not prohibited by 3.52.2.3.
3.52.1.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and
(f) Exposed. RNC shall be permitted for exposed work where not
construction specifications for rigid nonmetallic conduit (RNC) and
subject to physical damage if identified for such use.
associated fittings.
(g) Underground Installations. For underground installations, see
3.52.1.2 Definition.
3.0.1.5 and 3.0.2.20.
Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (RNC). A nonmetallic raceway of FPN: Refer to Article 3.53 for High Density Polyethylene Conduit: Type HDPE.
circular cross section, with integral or associated couplings,
connectors, and fittings for the installation of electrical conductors and (h) Support of Conduit Bodies. Rigid nonmetallic conduit shall be
cables. permitted to support nonmetallic conduit bodies not larger than the
largest trade size of an entering raceway. These conduit bodies shall
3.52.1.6 Listing Requirements. RNC, factory elbows, and associated not support luminaires (fixtures) or other equipment and shall not
fittings shall be listed. contain devices other than splicing devices as permitted by
1.10.1.14(b) and 3.14.2.2(c)(2).
3.52.2 Installation
3.52.2.3 Uses Not Permitted. RNC shall not be used under the
3.52.2.1 Uses Permitted. The use of RNC shall be permitted in following conditions.
accordance with 3.52.2.1(a) through (h).

FPN: Extreme cold may cause some nonmetallic conduits to become brittle and
therefore more susceptible to damage from physical contact.
 (a) Hazardous (Classified) Locations. Chapter 9.
Cables shall be permitted to be installed where such use is not
(1) In hazardous (classified) locations, except as permitted in prohibited by the respective cable articles. The number of cables shall
5.3.2.1(a), 5.4.1.20, 5.14.1.8 Exception No. 2, and 5.15.1.8 not exceed the allowable percentage fill specified in Table 1, Chapter
(2) In Class I, Division 2 locations, except as permitted in 9.
5.1.2.1(b)(3)
3.52.2.15 Bends — How Made. Bends shall be so made that the
(b) Support of Luminaires (Fixtures). For the support of conduit will not be damaged and the internal diameter of the conduit
luminaires (fixtures) or other equipment not described in 3.52.2.1(h). will not be effectively reduced. Field bends shall be made only with
bending equipment identified for the purpose. The radius of the curve
(c) Physical Damage. Where subject to physical damage unless to the centerline of such bends shall not be less than shown in Table 2,
identified for such use. Chapter 9.

(d) Ambient Temperatures. Where subject to ambient 3.52.2.17 Bends — Number in One Run. There shall not be more
temperatures in excess of 50°C (122°F) unless listed otherwise. than the equivalent of four quarter bends (360 degrees total) between
pull points, for example, conduit bodies and boxes.
(e) Insulation Temperature Limitations. For conductors or cables
operating at a temperature higher than the RNC listed operating 3.52.2.19 Trimming. All cut ends shall be trimmed inside and outside
temperature rating. to remove rough edges.

Exception: Conductors or cables rated at a temperature higher than 3.52.2.21 Securing and Supporting. RNC shall be installed as a
the RNC listed temperature rating shall be permitted to be installed in complete system as provided in 3.0.1.18 and shall be fastened so that
RNC, provided they are not operated at a temperature higher than the movement from thermal expansion or contraction is permitted. RNC
RNC listed temperature rating. shall be securely fastened and supported in accordance with
3.52.2.21(a) and (b).
(f) Theaters and Similar Locations. In theaters and similar
locations, except as provided in 5.18.1.4 and 5.20.1.5. (a) Securely Fastened. RNC shall be securely fastened within
900 mm of each outlet box, junction box, device box, conduit body, or
3.52.2.11 Size. other conduit termination. Conduit listed for securing at other than 900
mm shall be permitted to be installed in accordance with the listing.
(a) Minimum. RNC smaller than metric designator 16 (trade size
½) shall not be used. (b) Supports. RNC shall be supported as required in Table
3.52.2.21(b). Conduit listed for support at spacings other than as
(b) Maximum. RNC larger than metric designator 155 (trade size 6) shown in Table 3.52.2.21(b) shall be permitted to be installed in
shall not be used. accordance with the listing. Horizontal runs of RNC supported by
openings through framing members at intervals not exceeding those in
FPN: The trade sizes and metric designators are for identification purposes only Table 3.52.2.21(b) and securely fastened within 900 mm of
and do not relate to actual dimensions. See 3.0.1.1(c).
termination points shall be permitted.
3.52.2.13 Number of Conductors. The number of conductors shall
not exceed that permitted by the percentage fill specified in Table 1,
 Table 3.52.2.21(b) Support of Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (RNC)
Maximum Spacing Between
Conduit Size Supports
Metric Designator (mm)
16–27 900
35–53 1 500
63–78 1 800
91–129 2 100
155 2 400

3.52.2.35 Expansion Fittings. Expansion fittings for RNC shall be

provided to compensate for thermal expansion and contraction where
the length change, in accordance with Table 3.52.2.35(a) or Table
3.52.2.35(b), is expected to be 6 mm or greater in a straight run
between securely mounted items such as boxes, cabinets, elbows, or
other conduit terminations.

3.52.2.37 Bushings. Where a conduit enters a box, fitting, or other

enclosure, a bushing or adapter shall be provided to protect the wire
from abrasion unless the box, fitting, or enclosure design provides
equivalent protection.
2
FPN: See 3.0.1.4(f) for the protection of conductors 22 mm and larger at
bushings.

3.52.2.39 Joints. All joints between lengths of conduit, and between

conduit and couplings, fittings, and boxes, shall be made by an
approved method.
 Table 3.52.2.35(a) Expansion Characteristics of PVC Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit Coefficient of Thermal
Expansion = 6.084 × 10-5 mm/mm/°C (3.38 × 10–5 in./in./°F)
Temperature Length Change of Temperature Length Change of Temperature Length Change of
Change PVC Conduit Change PVC Conduit Change PVC Conduit
(°C) (mm/m) (°F) (in./100 ft) (°F) (in./100 ft)
5 0.30 5 0.20 105 4.26
10 0.61 10 0.41 110 4.46
15 0.91 15 0.61 115 4.66
20 1.22 20 0.81 120 4.87
25 1.52 25 1.01 125 5.07
30 1.83 30 1.22 130 5.27
35 2.13 35 1.42 135 5.48
40 2.43 40 1.62 140 5.68
45 2.74 45 1.83 145 5.88
50 3.04 50 2.03 150 6.08
55 3.35 55 2.23 155 6.29
60 3.65 60 2.43 160 6.49
65 3.95 65 2.64 165 6.69
70 4.26 70 2.84 170 6.90
75 4.56 75 3.04 175 7.10
80 4.87 80 3.24 180 7.30
85 5.17 85 3.45 185 7.50
90 5.48 90 3.65 190 7.71
95 5.78 95 3.85 195 7.91
100 6.08 100 4.06 200 8.11
Table 3.52.2.35(b) Expansion Characteristics of Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit (RTRC) Coefficient
of Thermal Expansion = 2.7 × 10–5 mm/mm/°C (1.5 × 10–5 in./in./°F)
Temperature Length Change of Temperature Length Change of Temperature Length Change of
Change RTRC Conduit Change RTRC Conduit Change RTRC Conduit
(°C) (mm/m) (°F) (in./100 ft) (°F) (in./100 ft)
5 0.14 5 0.09 105 1.89
10 0.27 10 0.18 110 1.98
15 0.41 15 0.27 115 2.07
20 0.54 20 0.36 120 2.16
25 0.68 25 0.45 125 2.25
30 0.81 30 0.54 130 2.34
35 0.95 35 0.63 135 2.43
40 1.08 40 0.72 140 2.52
45 1.22 45 0.81 145 2.61
50 1.35 50 0.90 150 2.70
55 1.49 55 0.99 155 2.79
60 1.62 60 1.08 160 2.88
65 1.76 65 1.17 165 2.97
70 1.89 70 1.26 170 3.06
75 2.03 75 1.35 175 3.15
80 2.16 80 1.44 180 3.24
85 2.30 85 1.53 185 3.33
90 2.43 90 1.62 190 3.42
95 2.57 95 1.71 195 3.51
100 2.70 100 1.80 200 3.60
3.52.2.47 Splices and Taps. Splices and taps shall be made in
accordance with 3.0.1.15. ARTICLE 3.53 — HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE
CONDUIT: TYPE HDPE CONDUIT
3.52.2.51 Grounding. Where equipment grounding is required, a
separate equipment grounding conductor shall be installed in the 3.53.1 General
conduit.
3.53.1.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and
Exception No. 1: As permitted in 2.50.7.5(b), Exception No. 2, for dc construction specifications for high density polyethylene (HDPE)
circuits and 2.50.7.5(b), Exception No. 1, for separately run conduit and associated fittings.
equipment grounding conductors.
Exception No. 2: Where the grounded conductor is used to ground 3.53.1.2 Definition.
equipment as permitted in 2.50.7.13.
High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Conduit. A nonmetallic
3.52.3 Construction Specifications raceway of circular cross section, with associated couplings,
connectors, and fittings for the installation of electrical conductors.
3.52.3.1 Construction. RNC and fittings shall be composed of
suitable nonmetallic material that is resistant to moisture and chemical 3.53.1.6 Listing Requirements. HDPE conduit and associated fittings
atmospheres. For use above ground, it shall also be flame retardant, shall be listed.
resistant to impact and crushing, resistant to distortion from heat under
conditions likely to be encountered in service, and resistant to low 3.53.2 Installation
temperature and sunlight effects. For use underground, the material
shall be acceptably resistant to moisture and corrosive agents and shall 3.53.2.1 Uses Permitted. The use of HDPE conduit shall be permitted
be of sufficient strength to withstand abuse, such as by impact and under the following conditions:
crushing, in handling and during installation. Where intended for
direct burial, without encasement in concrete, the material shall also be (1) In discrete lengths or in continuous lengths from a reel
capable of withstanding continued loading that is likely to be (2) In locations subject to severe corrosive influences as covered
encountered after installation. in 3.0.1.6 and where subject to chemicals for which the conduit is
listed
3.52.3.21 Marking. Each length of RNC shall be clearly and durably (3) In cinder fill
marked at least every 3 000 mm as required in the first sentence of (4) In direct burial installations in earth or concrete
1.10.1.21. The type of material shall also be included in the marking
unless it is visually identifiable. For conduit recognized for use above FPN to (4): Refer to 3.0.1.5 and 3.0.2.20 for underground installations.
ground, these markings shall be permanent. For conduit limited to
underground use only, these markings shall be sufficiently durable to 3.53.2.3 Uses Not Permitted. HDPE conduit shall not be used under
remain legible until the material is installed. Conduit shall be the following conditions:
permitted to be surface marked to indicate special characteristics of the
material. (1) Where exposed
(2) Within a building
FPN: Examples of these markings include but are not limited to “limited smoke” (3) In hazardous (classified) locations, except as permitted in
and “sunlight resistant.” 5.4.1.20
 (4) Where subject to ambient temperatures in excess of 50°C to remove rough edges.
(122°F) unless listed otherwise
(5) For conductors or cables operating at a temperature higher 3.53.2.37 Bushings. Where a conduit enters a box, fitting, or other
than the HDPE conduit listed operating temperature rating enclosure, a bushing or adapter shall be provided to protect the wire
from abrasion unless the box, fitting, or enclosure design provides
Exception: Conductors or cables rated at a temperature higher than equivalent protection.
the HDPE conduit listed temperature rating shall be permitted to be
2
installed in HDPE conduit, provided they are not operated at a FPN: See 3.0.1.4(f) for the protection of conductors 22 mm and larger at
bushings.
temperature higher than the HDPE conduit listed temperature rating.
3.53.2.39 Joints. All joints between lengths of conduit, and between
3.53.2.11 Size.
conduit and couplings, fittings, and boxes, shall be made by an
approved method.
(a) Minimum. HDPE conduit smaller than metric designator 16
(trade size ½) shall not be used.
3.53.2.47 Splices and Taps. Splices and taps shall be made in
accordance with 3.0.1.15.
(b) Maximum. HDPE conduit larger than metric designator 103
(trade size 4) shall not be used.
3.53.2.51 Grounding. Where equipment grounding is required, a
FPN: The trade sizes and metric designators are for identification purposes only
separate equipment grounding conductor shall be installed in the
and do not relate to actual dimensions. See 3.0.1.1(c). conduit.

3.53.2.13 Number of Conductors. The number of conductors shall Exception No. 1: The equipment grounding conductor shall be
not exceed that permitted by the percentage fill specified in Table 1, permitted to be run separately from the conduit where used for
Chapter 9. grounding dc circuits as permitted in 2.50.7.5, Exception No. 2.
Cables shall be permitted to be installed where such use is not Exception No. 2: The equipment grounding conductor shall not be
prohibited by the respective cable articles. The number of cables shall required where the grounded conductor is used to ground equipment
not exceed the allowable percentage fill specified in Table 1, Chapter as permitted in 2.50.7.13.
9.
3.53.3 Construction Specifications
3.53.2.15 Bends — How Made. Bends shall be so made that the
conduit will not be damaged and the internal diameter of the conduit 3.53.3.1 Construction. HDPE conduit shall be composed of high
will not be effectively reduced. Bends shall be permitted to be made density polyethylene that is resistant to moisture and chemical
manually without auxiliary equipment, and the radius of the curve to atmospheres. The material shall be resistant to moisture and corrosive
the centerline of such bends shall not be less than shown in Table agents and shall be of sufficient strength to withstand abuse, such as
3.54.2.15. by impact and crushing, in handling and during installation. Where
intended for direct burial, without encasement in concrete, the material
3.53.2.17 Bends — Number in One Run. There shall not be more shall also be capable of withstanding continued loading that is likely to
than the equivalent of four quarter bends (360 degrees total) between be encountered after installation.
pull points, for example, conduit bodies and boxes.
3.53.3.21 Marking. Each length of HDPE shall be clearly and durably
3.53.2.19 Trimming. All cut ends shall be trimmed inside and outside marked at least every 3 000 mm as required in 1.10.1.21. The type of
material shall also be included in the marking. Exception: The conductor or the cable portion of the assembly, where
suitable, shall be permitted to extend within the building for
termination purposes in accordance with 3.0.1.3.
ARTICLE 3.54 — NONMETALLIC UNDERGROUND
CONDUIT WITH CONDUCTORS: TYPE NUCC (3) In hazardous (classified) locations except as permitted by
5.3.2.1(a), 5.4.1.20, 5.14.1.8, and 5.15.1.8, and in Class I, Division 2
3.54.1 General locations as permitted in 5.1.2.1(b)(3)

3.54.1.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and 3.54.2.11 Size.
construction specifications for nonmetallic underground conduit with
conductors (NUCC). (a) Minimum. NUCC smaller than metric designator 16 (trade size
½) shall not be used.
3.54.1.2 Definition.
(b) Maximum. NUCC larger than metric designator 103 (trade size
Nonmetallic Underground Conduit with Conductors (NUCC). A 4) shall not be used.
factory assembly of conductors or cables inside a nonmetallic, smooth
wall conduit with a circular cross section. FPN: See 3.0.1.1(c) for the metric designators and trade sizes. These are for
identification purposes only and do not relate to actual dimensions.

3.54.1.6 Listing Requirements. NUCC and associated fittings shall

3.54.2.13 Number of Conductors. The number of conductors or
be listed.
cables shall not exceed that permitted by the percentage fill in Table 1,
Chapter 9.
3.54.2 Installation
3.54.2.15 Bends — How Made. Bends shall be manually made so that
3.54.2.1 Uses Permitted. The use of NUCC and fittings shall be
the conduit will not be damaged and the internal diameter of the
permitted in the following:
conduit will not be effectively reduced. The radius of the curve of the
centerline of such bends shall not be less than shown in Table
(1) For direct burial underground installation (For minimum cover
3.54.2.15.
requirements, see Table 3.0.1.5 and Table 3.0.2.20 under Rigid
Nonmetallic Conduit.)
3.54.2.17 Bends — Number in One Run. There shall not be more
(2) Encased or embedded in concrete
than the equivalent of four quarter bends (360 degrees total) between
(3) In cinder fill
termination points.
(4) In underground locations subject to severe corrosive
influences as covered in 3.0.1.6 and where subject to chemicals for
3.54.2.19 Trimming. For termination, the conduit shall be trimmed
which the assembly is specifically approved
away from the conductors or cables using an approved method that
will not damage the conductor or cable insulation or jacket. All
3.54.2.3 Uses Not Permitted. NUCC shall not be used in the
conduit ends shall be trimmed inside and out to remove rough edges.
following:
3.54.2.37 Bushings. Where the NUCC enters a box, fitting, or other
(1) In exposed locations
enclosure, a bushing or adapter shall be provided to protect the
(2) Inside buildings
conductor or cable from abrasion unless the design of the box, fitting, 3.54.3 Construction Specifications
or enclosure provides equivalent protection.
3.54.3.1 Construction.
2
FPN: See 3.0.1.4(f) for the protection of conductors size 22 mm or larger.
(a) General. NUCC is an assembly that is provided in continuous
lengths shipped in a coil, reel, or carton.
Table 3.54.2.15 Minimum Bending Radius for Nonmetallic (b) Nonmetallic Underground Conduit. The nonmetallic
Underground Conduit with Conductors (NUCC) underground conduit shall be listed and composed of a material that is
resistant to moisture and corrosive agents. It shall also be capable of
Conduit Size Minimum Bending Radius being supplied on reels without damage or distortion and shall be of
Metric Designator (mm) sufficient strength to withstand abuse, such as impact or crushing, in
16 250 handling and during installation without damage to conduit or
21 300 conductors.
27 350
35 450 (c) Conductors and Cables. Conductors and cables used in NUCC
41 500 shall be listed and shall comply with 3.10.1.8(c). Conductors of
53 650 different systems shall be installed in accordance with 3.0.1.3(c).
63 900
78 1200 (d) Conductor Fill. The maximum number of conductors or cables
103 1500 in NUCC shall not exceed that permitted by the percentage fill in
Table 1, Chapter 9.

3.54.3.21 Marking. NUCC shall be clearly and durably marked at

least every 3 000 mm as required by 1.10.1.21. The type of conduit
3.54.2.39 Joints. All joints between conduit, fittings, and boxes shall material shall also be included in the marking.
be made by an approved method. Identification of conductors or cables used in the assembly shall be
provided on a tag attached to each end of the assembly or to the side of
3.54.2.41 Conductor Terminations. All terminations between the a reel. Enclosed conductors or cables shall be marked in accordance
conductors or cables and equipment shall be made by an approved with 3.10.1.11.
method for that type of conductor or cable.

3.54.2.47 Splices and Taps. Splices and taps shall be made in junction ARTICLE 3.56 — LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE
boxes or other enclosures. NONMETALLIC CONDUIT: TYPE LFNC

3.54.2.51 Grounding. Where equipment grounding is required, an 3.56 General

assembly containing a separate equipment grounding conductor shall
be used. 3.56.1.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and
construction specifications for liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit
(LFNC) and associated fittings.
3.56.1.2 Definition. (1) Where subject to physical damage
(2) Where any combination of ambient and conductor
Liquidtight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit (LFNC). A raceway of temperatures is in excess of that for which the LFNC is approved
circular cross section of various types as follows: (3) In lengths longer than 1 800 mm, except as permitted by
3.56.2.1(5) or where a longer length is approved as essential for a
(1) A smooth seamless inner core and cover bonded together and required degree of flexibility
having one or more reinforcement layers between the core and covers, (4) Where the operating voltage of the contained conductors is in
designated as Type LFNC-A excess of 600 volts, nominal, except as permitted in 6.0.2.3(a)
(2) A smooth inner surface with integral reinforcement within the (5) In any hazardous (classified) location other than as permitted
conduit wall, designated as Type LFNC-B in 5.1.2.1(b), 5.2.2.1(a) and (b), 5.3.2.1(a), and 5.4.1.20
(3) A corrugated internal and external surface without integral
reinforcement within the conduit wall, designated as LFNC-C 3.56.2.11 Size.
LFNC is flame resistant and with fittings and is approved for the
installation of electrical conductors. (a) Minimum. LFNC smaller than metric designator 16 (trade size
½) shall not be used unless permitted in 3.56.2.11(a)(1) through (a)(3)
FPN: FNMC is an alternative designation for LFNC. for metric designator 12 (trade size ).
3.56.1.6 Listing Requirements. LFNC and associated fittings shall be (1) For enclosing the leads of motors as permitted in 4.30.13.5(b)
listed. (2) In lengths not exceeding 1 800 mm as part of a listed assembly
for tap connections to luminaires (lighting fixtures) as required in
3.56.2 Installation 4.10.11.4(c), or for utilization equipment
(3) For electric sign conductors in accordance with 6.0.2.3(a)
3.56.2.1 Uses Permitted. LFNC shall be permitted to be used in
exposed or concealed locations for the following purposes: (b) Maximum. LFNC larger than metric designator 103 (trade size
4) shall not be used.
FPN: Extreme cold may cause some types of nonmetallic conduits to become
brittle and therefore more susceptible to damage from physical contact.
FPN: See 3.0.1.1(c) for the metric designators and trade sizes. These are for
identification purposes only and do not relate to actual dimensions.
(1) Where flexibility is required for installation, operation, or
maintenance 3.56.2.13 Number of Conductors. The number of conductors shall
(2) Where protection of the contained conductors is required from not exceed that permitted by the percentage fill specified in Table 1,
vapors, liquids, or solids Chapter 9.
(3) For outdoor locations where listed and marked as suitable for Cables shall be permitted to be installed where such use is not
the purpose prohibited by the respective cable articles. The number of cables shall
(4) For direct burial where listed and marked for the purpose not exceed the allowable percentage fill specified in Table 1, Chapter
(5) Type LFNC-B shall be permitted to be installed in lengths 9.
longer than 1 800 mm where secured in accordance with 3.56.2.21
(6) Type LFNC-B as a listed manufactured prewired assembly, 3.56.2.15 Bends — How Made. Bends in conduit shall be so made
metric designator 16 through 27 (trade size ½ through 1) conduit that the conduit is not damaged and the internal diameter of the
conduit is not effectively reduced. Bends shall be permitted to be made
3.56.2.3 Uses Not Permitted. LFNC shall not be used as follows: manually without auxiliary equipment. The radius of the curve to the
centerline of any bend shall not be less than shown in Table 2, Chapter 3.56.2.51 Grounding and Bonding. Where used to connect
9 using the column “Other Bends.” equipment where flexibility is required, an equipment grounding
conductor shall be installed.
3.56.2.17 Bends — Number in One Run. There shall not be more Where required or installed, equipment grounding conductors shall be
than the equivalent of four quarter bends (360 degrees total) between installed in accordance with 2.50.7.5(b).
pull points, for example, conduit bodies and boxes. Where required or installed, equipment bonding jumpers shall be
installed in accordance with 2.50.5.13.
3.56.2.19 Trimming. All cut ends of conduit shall be trimmed inside
and outside to remove rough edges. 3.56.3 Construction Specifications

3.56.2.21 Securing and Supporting. Type LFNC-B shall be securely 3.56.3.1 Construction. LFNC-B as a prewired manufactured
fastened and supported in accordance with one of the following: assembly shall be provided in continuous lengths capable of being
shipped in a coil, reel, or carton without damage.
(1) Where installed in lengths exceeding 1 800 mm, the conduit
shall be securely fastened at intervals not exceeding 900 mm and 3.56.3.21 Marking. LFNC shall be marked at least every 600 mm in
within 300 mm on each side of every outlet box, junction box, cabinet, accordance with 1.10.1.21. The marking shall include a type
or fitting. designation in accordance with 3.56.1.2 and the trade size. Conduit
(2) Securing or supporting of the conduit shall not be required that is intended for outdoor use or direct burial shall be marked.
where it is fished, installed in lengths not exceeding 900 mm at The type, size, and quantity of conductors used in prewired
terminals where flexibility is required, or installed in lengths not manufactured assemblies shall be identified by means of a printed tag
exceeding 1 800 mm from a luminaire (fixture) terminal connection or label attached to each end of the manufactured assembly and either
for tap conductors to luminaires (lighting fixtures) permitted in the carton, coil, or reel. The enclosed conductors shall be marked in
4.10.11.4(c). accordance with 3.10.1.11.
(3) Horizontal runs of LFNC supported by openings through
framing members at intervals not exceeding 900 mm and securely
fastened within 300 mm of termination points shall be permitted. ARTICLE 3.58 — ELECTRICAL METALLIC
(4) Securing or supporting of LFNC-B shall not be required TUBING: TYPE EMT
where installed in lengths not exceeding 1 800 mm from the last point
where the raceway is securely fastened for connections within an 3.58 General
accessible ceiling to luminaire(s) [lighting fixture(s)] or other
equipment. 3.58.1.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and
construction specifications for electrical metallic tubing (EMT) and
3.56.2.33 Couplings and Connectors. Only fittings listed for use with associated fittings.
LFNC shall be used. Angle connectors shall not be used for concealed
raceway installations. Straight LFNC fittings are permitted for direct 3.58.1.2 Definition.
burial or encasement in concrete.
Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT). An unthreaded thinwall
3.56.2.47 Splices and Taps. Splices and taps shall be made in raceway of circular cross section designed for the physical protection
accordance with 3.0.1.15. and routing of conductors and cables and for use as an equipment
grounding conductor when installed utilizing appropriate fittings.
EMT is generally made of steel (ferrous) with protective coatings or (6) Where practicable, dissimilar metals in contact anywhere in
aluminum (nonferrous). the system shall be avoided to eliminate the possibility of galvanic
action
3.58.1.6 Listing Requirements. EMT, factory elbows, and associated
fittings shall be listed. Exception: Aluminum fittings and enclosures shall be permitted to be
used with steel EMT where not subject to severe corrosive influences.
3.58.10 Installation
3.58.2.11 Size.
3.58.2.1 Uses Permitted.
(a) Minimum. EMT smaller than metric designator 16 (trade size
(a) Exposed and Concealed. The use of EMT shall be permitted for ½) shall not be used.
both exposed and concealed work.
Exception: For enclosing the leads of motors as permitted in
(b) Corrosion Protection. Ferrous or nonferrous EMT, elbows, 4.30.13.5(b).
couplings, and fittings shall be permitted to be installed in concrete, in
direct contact with the earth, or in areas subject to severe corrosive (b) Maximum. The maximum size of EMT shall be metric
influences where protected by corrosion protection and judged suitable designator 103 (trade size 4).
for the condition.
FPN: See 3.0.1.1(c) for the metric designators and trade sizes. These are for
identification purposes only and do not relate to actual dimensions.
(c) Wet Locations. All supports, bolts, straps, screws, and so forth
shall be of corrosion-resistant materials or protected against corrosion
3.58.2.13 Number of Conductors. The number of conductors shall
by corrosion-resistant materials.
not exceed that permitted by the percentage fill specified in Table 1,
FPN: See 3.0.1.6 for protection against corrosion.
Chapter 9.
Cables shall be permitted to be installed where such use is not
3.58.2.3 Uses Not Permitted. EMT shall not be used under the prohibited by the respective cable articles. The number of cables shall
following conditions: not exceed the allowable percentage fill specified in Table 1, Chapter
9.
(1) Where, during installation or afterward, it will be subject to
severe physical damage 3.58.2.15 Bends — How Made. Bends shall be made so that the
(2) Where protected from corrosion solely by enamel tubing is not damaged and the internal diameter of the tubing is not
(3) In cinder concrete or cinder fill where subject to permanent effectively reduced. The radius of the curve of any field bend to the
moisture unless protected on all sides by a layer of noncinder concrete centerline of the tubing shall not be less than shown in Table 2,
at least 50 mm thick or unless the tubing is at least 450 mm under the Chapter 9 for one-shot and full shoe benders.
fill
(4) In any hazardous (classified) location except as permitted by 3.58.2.17 Bends — Number in One Run. There shall not be more
5.2.2.1, 5.3.2.1, and 5.4.1.20 than the equivalent of four quarter bends (360 degrees total) between
(5) For the support of luminaires (fixtures) or other equipment pull points, for example, conduit bodies and boxes.
except conduit bodies no larger than the largest trade size of the tubing
3.58.2.19 Reaming and Threading.
3.58.2.51 Grounding. EMT shall be permitted as an equipment
(a) Reaming. All cut ends of EMT shall be reamed or otherwise grounding conductor.
finished to remove rough edges.
3.58.3 Construction Specifications
(b) Threading. EMT shall not be threaded.
3.58.3.1 Construction. Factory-threaded integral couplings shall be
Exception: EMT with factory threaded integral couplings complying permitted. Where EMT with a threaded integral coupling is used,
with 3.58.3.1. threads for both the tubing and coupling shall be factory-made. The
coupling and EMT threads shall be designed so as to prevent bending
3.58.2.21 Securing and Supporting. EMT shall be installed as a of the tubing at any part of the thread.
complete system in accordance with 3.0.1.18 and shall be securely
fastened in place and supported in accordance with 3.58.2.21(a) and 3.58.3.21 Marking. EMT shall be clearly and durably marked at least
(b). every 3 000 mm as required in the first sentence of 1.10.1.21.

(a) Securely Fastened. EMT shall be securely fastened in place at

least every 3 000 mm. In addition, each EMT run between termination ARTICLE 3.60 — FLEXIBLE METALLIC
points shall be securely fastened within 900 mm of each outlet box, TUBING: TYPE FMT
junction box, device box, cabinet, conduit body, or other tubing
termination. 3.60.1 General

Exception No. 1: Fastening of unbroken lengths shall be permitted to 3.60.1.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and
be increased to a distance of 1 500 mm where structural members do construction specifications for flexible metallic tubing (FMT) and
not readily permit fastening within 900 mm. associated fittings.
Exception No. 2: For concealed work in finished buildings or
prefinished wall panels where such securing is impracticable, 3.60.1.2 Definition.
unbroken lengths (without coupling) of EMT shall be permitted to be
fished. Flexible Metallic Tubing (FMT). A raceway that is circular in
cross section, flexible, metallic, and liquidtight without a nonmetallic
(b) Supports. Horizontal runs of EMT supported by openings jacket.
through framing members at intervals not greater than 3 000 mm and
securely fastened within 900 mm of termination points shall be 3.60.1.6 Listing Requirements. FMT and associated fittings shall be
permitted. listed.

3.58.2.33 Couplings and Connectors. Couplings and connectors used 3.60.2 Installation
with EMT shall be made up tight. Where buried in masonry or
concrete, they shall be concretetight type. Where installed in wet 3.60.2.1 Uses Permitted. FMT shall be permitted to be used for
locations, they shall comply with 3.14.2.1(a). branch circuits as follows:

3.58.2.47 Splices and Taps. Splices and taps shall be made in (1) In dry locations
accordance with 3.0.1.15. (2) Where concealed
 (3) In accessible locations
(4) For system voltages of 1 000 volts maximum (b) FMT — Metric Designator 12 (Trade Size ). The number of
conductors in metric designator 12 (trade size ) shall not exceed that
3.60.2.3 Uses Not Permitted. FMT shall not be used as follows: permitted in Table 3.48.2.13.

(1) In hoistways 3.60.2.15 Bends.

(2) In storage battery rooms
(3) In hazardous (classified) locations unless otherwise permitted (a) Infrequent Flexing Use. Where FMT may be infrequently
under other articles in this Code flexed in service after installation, the radii of bends measured to the
(4) Under ground for direct earth burial, or embedded in poured inside of the bend shall not be less than specified in Table
concrete or aggregate 3.60.2.15(a).
(5) Where subject to physical damage
(6) In lengths over 1 800 mm
Table 3.60.2.15(a) Minimum Radii for Flexing Use
3.60.2.11 Size. Minimum Radii for Flexing Use
Metric Designator (mm)
(a) Minimum. FMT smaller than metric designator 16 (trade size 12 25.4
½) shall not be used. 16 317.5
21 444.5
Exception No. 1: FMT of metric designator 12 (trade size ) shall be
permitted to be installed in accordance with 3.0.1.22(b) and (c).
Exception No. 2: FMT of metric designator 12 (trade size ) shall be (b) Fixed Bends. Where FMT is bent for installation purposes and
permitted in lengths not in excess of 1 800 mm as part of an approved is not flexed or bent as required by use after installation, the radii of
assembly or for luminaires (lighting fixtures). See 4.10.11.4(c). bends measured to the inside of the bend shall not be less than
specified in Table 3.60.2.15(b).
(b) Maximum. The maximum size of FMT shall be metric
designator 21 (trade size ¾).

FPN: See 3.0.1.1(c) for the metric designators and trade sizes. These are for
identification purposes only and do not relate to actual dimensions. Table 3.60.2.15(b) Minimum Radii for Fixed Bends
Minimum Radii for Fixed Bends
3.60.2.13 Number of Conductors. Metric Designator (mm)
12 88.9
(a) FMT — Metric Designators 16 and 21 (Trade Sizes ½ and 16 101.6
¾). The number of conductors in metric designators 16 (trade size ½) 21 127.0
and 21 (trade size ¾) shall not exceed that permitted by the percentage
fill specified in Table 1, Chapter 9.
Cables shall be permitted to be installed where such use is not
prohibited by the respective cable articles. The number of cables shall 3.60.2.31 Boxes and Fittings. Fittings shall effectively close any
not exceed the allowable percentage fill specified in Table 1, Chapter openings in the connection.
9.
3.60.2.47 Splices and Taps. Splices and taps shall be made in shall be permitted. The use of ENT and fittings shall be permitted in
accordance with 3.0.1.15. the following:

3.60.2.51 Grounding. FMT shall be permitted as an equipment (1) In any building not exceeding three floors above grade as
grounding conductor where installed in accordance with 2.50.6.9(7). follows:

3.60.3 Construction Specifications a. For exposed work, where not prohibited by 3.62.2.3
b. Concealed within walls, floors, and ceilings
3.60.3.1 Marking. FMT shall be marked according to 1.10.1.21.
(2) In any building exceeding three floors above grade, ENT shall
be concealed within walls, floors, and ceilings where the walls, floors,
ARTICLE 3.62 — ELECTRICAL NONMETALLIC and ceilings provide a thermal barrier of material that has at least a 15-
TUBING: TYPE ENT minute finish rating as identified in listings of fire-rated assemblies.
The 15-minute-finish-rated thermal barrier shall be permitted to be
3.62.1 General used for combustible or noncombustible walls, floors, and ceilings.

3.62.1.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and Exception to (2): Where a fire sprinkler system(s) is installed in
construction specifications for electrical nonmetallic tubing (ENT) and accordance with NFPA 13-2002, Standard for the Installation of
associated fittings. Sprinkler Systems, on all floors, ENT shall be permitted to be used
within walls, floors, and ceilings, exposed or concealed, in buildings
3.62.1.2 Definition. exceeding three floors above grade.

Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing (ENT). A nonmetallic pliable FPN: A finish rating is established for assemblies containing combustible (wood)
supports. The finish rating is defined as the time at which the wood stud or wood
corrugated raceway of circular cross section with integral or associated joist reaches an average temperature rise of 121°C (250°F) or an individual
couplings, connectors, and fittings for the installation of electric temperature of 163°C (325°F) as measured on the plane of the wood nearest the
conductors. ENT is composed of a material that is resistant to moisture fire. A finish rating is not intended to represent a rating for a membrane ceiling.

and chemical atmospheres and is flame retardant.

A pliable raceway is a raceway that can be bent by hand with a (3) In locations subject to severe corrosive influences as covered
reasonable force but without other assistance. in 3.0.1.6 and where subject to chemicals for which the materials are
specifically approved.
3.62.1.6 Listing Requirements. ENT and associated fittings shall be (4) In concealed, dry, and damp locations not prohibited by
listed. 3.62.2.3.
(5) Above suspended ceilings where the suspended ceilings
3.62.2 Installation provide a thermal barrier of material that has at least a 15-minute
finish rating as identified in listings of fire-rated assemblies, except as
3.62.2.1 Uses Permitted. For the purpose of this article, the first floor permitted in 3.62.2.1(1)(a).
of a building shall be that floor that has 50 percent or more of the
exterior wall surface area level with or above finished grade. One Exception to (5): ENT shall be permitted to be used above suspended
additional level that is the first level and not designed for human ceilings in buildings exceeding three floors above grade where the
habitation and used only for vehicle parking, storage, or similar use building is protected throughout by a fire sprinkler system installed in
accordance with NFPA 13-2002, Standard for the Installation of
Sprinkler Systems.
(a) Minimum. ENT smaller than metric designator 16 (trade size ½)
(6) Encased in poured concrete, or embedded in a concrete slab shall not be used.
on grade where ENT is placed on sand or approved screenings,
provided fittings identified for this purpose are used for connections. (b) Maximum. ENT larger than metric designator 53 (trade size 2)
(7) For wet locations indoors as permitted in this section or in a shall not be used.
concrete slab on or below grade, with fittings listed for the purpose.
(8) Metric designator 16 through 27 (trade size ½ through 1) as FPN: See 3.0.1.1(c) for the metric designators and trade sizes. These are for
identification purposes only and do not relate to actual dimensions.
listed manufactured prewired assembly.

FPN: Extreme cold may cause some types of nonmetallic conduits to become
3.62.2.13 Number of Conductors. The number of conductors shall
brittle and therefore more susceptible to damage from physical contact. not exceed that permitted by the percentage fill in Table 1, Chapter 9.
Cables shall be permitted to be installed where such use is not
3.62.2.3 Uses Not Permitted. ENT shall not be used in the following: prohibited by the respective cable articles. The number of cables shall
not exceed the allowable percentage fill specified in Table 1, Chapter
(1) In hazardous (classified) locations, except as permitted by 9.
5.4.1.20 and 5.5.1.15(a)(1)
(2) For the support of luminaires (fixtures) and other equipment 3.62.2.15 Bends — How Made. Bends shall be so made that the
(3) Where subject to ambient temperatures in excess of 50°C tubing will not be damaged and the internal diameter of the tubing will
(122°F) unless listed otherwise not be effectively reduced. Bends shall be permitted to be made
(4) For conductors or cables operating at a temperature higher manually without auxiliary equipment, and the radius of the curve to
than the ENT listed temperature rating the centerline of such bends shall not be less than shown in Table 2,
Chapter 9 using the column “Other Bends.”
Exception to (4): Conductors or cables rated at a temperature higher
than the ENT listed temperature rating shall be permitted to be 3.62.2.17 Bends — Number in One Run. There shall not be more
installed in ENT, provided they are not operated at a temperature than the equivalent of four quarter bends (360 degrees total) between
higher than the ENT listed temperature rating. pull points, for example, conduit bodies and boxes.

(5) For direct earth burial 3.62.2.19 Trimming. All cut ends shall be trimmed inside and outside
(6) Where the voltage is over 600 volts to remove rough edges.
(7) In exposed locations, except as permitted by 3.62.2.1(1),
3.62.2.1(5), and 3.62.2.1(7) 3.62.2.21 Securing and Supporting. ENT shall be installed as a
(8) In theaters and similar locations, except as provided in complete system in accordance with 3.0.1.18 and shall be securely
5.18.1.4 and 5.20.1.5 fastened in place and supported in accordance with 3.62.2.21(a) and
(9) Where exposed to the direct rays of the sun, unless identified (b).
as sunlight resistant
(10) Where subject to physical damage (a) Securely Fastened. ENT shall be securely fastened at intervals
not exceeding 900 mm. In addition, ENT shall be securely fastened in
place within 900 mm of each outlet box, device box, junction box,
cabinet, or fitting where it terminates.
3.62.2.11 Size.
Exception No. 1: Lengths not exceeding a distance of 1 800 mm from 3.62.3.21 Marking. ENT shall be clearly and durably marked at least
a luminaire (fixture) terminal connection for tap connections to every 3 000 mm as required in the first sentence of 1.10.1.21. The type
lighting luminaires (fixtures) shall be permitted without being secured. of material shall also be included in the marking. Marking for limited
Exception No. 2: Lengths not exceeding 1 800 mm from the last point smoke shall be permitted on the tubing that has limited smoke-
where the raceway is securely fastened for connections within an producing characteristics.
accessible ceiling to luminaire(s) [lighting fixture(s)] or other The type, size, and quantity of conductors used in prewired
equipment. manufactured assemblies shall be identified by means of a printed tag
or label attached to each end of the manufactured assembly and either
(b) Supports. Horizontal runs of ENT supported by openings in the carton, coil, or reel. The enclosed conductors shall be marked in
framing members at intervals not exceeding 900 mm and securely accordance with 3.10.1.11.
fastened within 900 mm of termination points shall be permitted.

3.62.2.37 Bushings. Where a tubing enters a box, fitting, or other ARTICLE 3.66 — AUXILIARY GUTTERS
enclosure, a bushing or adapter shall be provided to protect the wire
from abrasion unless the box, fitting, or enclosure design provides 3.66 General
equivalent protection.
3.66.1.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and
2
FPN: See 3.0.1.4(f) for the protection of conductors size 22 mm or larger. construction requirements of metal auxiliary gutters and nonmetallic
auxiliary gutters and associated fittings.
3.62.2.39 Joints. All joints between lengths of tubing and between
tubing and couplings, fittings, and boxes shall be by an approved 3.66.1.2 Definitions.
method.
Metallic Auxiliary Gutters. Sheet metal enclosures with hinged or
3.62.2.47 Splices and Taps. Splices and taps shall be made only in removable covers for housing and protecting electric wires, cable, and
accordance with 3.0.1.15. busbars in which conductors are laid in place after the wireway has
been installed as a complete system.
FPN: See Article 3.14 for rules on the installation and use of boxes and conduit
bodies.
Nonmetallic Auxiliary Gutters. Flame retardant, nonmetallic
3.62.2.51 Grounding. Where equipment grounding is required, a enclosures with removable covers for housing and protecting electric
separate equipment grounding conductor shall be installed in the wires, cable, and busbars in which conductors are laid in place after
raceway. the wireway has been installed as a complete system.

3.62.3 Construction Specifications 3.66.1.6 Listing Requirements.

3.62.3.1 Construction. ENT shall be made of material that does not (a) Outdoors. Nonmetallic auxiliary gutters installed outdoors shall
exceed the ignitibility, flammability, smoke generation, and toxicity comply with the following:
characteristics of rigid (nonplasticized) polyvinyl chloride.
ENT, as a prewired manufactured assembly, shall be provided in (1) Be listed as suitable for exposure to sunlight
continuous lengths capable of being shipped in a coil, reel, or carton (2) Be listed as suitable for use in wet locations
without damage. (3) Be listed for maximum ambient temperature of the installation
 (b) Indoors. Nonmetallic auxiliary gutters installed indoors shall be equipment that it supplements.
listed for the maximum ambient temperature of the installation.
Exception: As permitted in 6.20.4.4 for elevators, an auxiliary gutter
3.66.2 Installation shall be permitted to extend a distance greater than 9 000 mm beyond
the equipment it supplements.
3.66.2.1 Uses Permitted. Auxiliary gutters shall be permitted to
supplement wiring spaces at meter centers, distribution centers, FPN: For wireways, see Articles 3.76 and 3.78. For busways, see Article 3.68.
switchboards, and similar points of wiring systems and may enclose
conductors or busbars. 3.66.2.13 Number of Conductors.

(a) Sheet Metal Auxiliary Gutters. (a) Sheet Metal Auxiliary Gutters. The sum of the cross-sectional
areas of all contained conductors at any cross section of a sheet metal
(1) Indoor and Outdoor Use. Sheet metal auxiliary gutters shall be auxiliary gutter shall not exceed 20 percent of the interior cross-
permitted for indoor and outdoor use. sectional area of the sheet metal auxiliary gutter. The derating factors
(2) Wet Locations. Sheet metal auxiliary gutters installed in wet in 3.10.1.15(b)(2)(a) shall be applied only where the number of
locations shall be suitable for such locations. current-carrying conductors, including neutral conductors classified as
current-carrying under the provisions of 3.10.1.15(b)(4), exceeds 30.
(b) Nonmetallic Auxiliary Gutters. Nonmetallic auxiliary gutters Conductors for signaling circuits or controller conductors between a
shall be listed for the maximum ambient temperature of the installation motor and its starter and used only for starting duty shall not be
and marked for the installed conductor insulation temperature rating. considered as current-carrying conductors.

(1) Outdoors. Nonmetallic auxiliary gutters shall be permitted to (b) Nonmetallic Auxiliary Gutters. The sum of cross-sectional
be installed outdoors where listed and marked as suitable for the areas of all contained conductors at any cross section of the
purpose. nonmetallic auxiliary gutter shall not exceed 20 percent of the interior
cross-sectional area of the nonmetallic auxiliary gutter.
FPN: Extreme cold may cause nonmetallic auxiliary gutter to become brittle and
therefore more susceptible to damage from physical contact. 3.66.2.14 Ampacity of Conductors.
(2) Indoors. Nonmetallic auxiliary gutters shall be permitted to be (a) Sheet Metal Auxiliary Gutters. Where the number of current-
installed indoors. carrying conductors contained in the sheet metal auxiliary gutter is 30
or less, the correction factors specified in 3.10.1.15(b)(2)a shall not
3.66.2.3 Uses Not Permitted. Auxiliary gutters shall not be used apply. The current carried continuously in bare copper bars in sheet
under the following conditions: metal auxiliary gutters shall not exceed 1.55 amperes/mm2 (1000
amperes/in.2) of cross section of the conductor. For aluminum bars, the
(1) To enclose switches, overcurrent devices, appliances, or other current carried continuously shall not exceed 1.09 amperes/mm2 (700
similar equipment. amperes/in.2) of cross section of the conductor.
FPN: Assembly of individual circuit breakers mounted in common enclosure
without other feeder or circuit wiring passing through such enclosure is not (b) Nonmetallic Auxiliary Gutters. The derating factors specified
considered as auxiliary gutter in 3.10.1.15(b)(2)a shall be applicable to the current-carrying
conductors in the nonmetallic auxiliary gutter.
(2) To extend a greater distance than 9 000 mm beyond the
3.66.2.21 Securing and Supporting. degrees, dimensions corresponding to one wire per terminal in Table
3.12.1.6(a) shall apply.
(a) Sheet Metal Auxiliary Gutters. Sheet metal auxiliary gutters
shall be supported throughout their entire length at intervals not (b) Auxiliary Gutters Used as Pullboxes. Where insulated
exceeding 1 500 mm. conductors 22 mm2 or larger are pulled through an auxiliary gutter, the
distance between raceway and cable entries enclosing the same
(b) Nonmetallic Auxiliary Gutters. Nonmetallic auxiliary gutters conductor shall not be less than that required in 3.14.2.14(a)(1) for
shall be supported at intervals not to exceed 900 mm and at each end straight pulls and 3.14.2.14(a)(2) for angle pulls.
or joint, unless listed for other support intervals. In no case shall the
distance between supports exceed 3 000 mm. 3.66.2.51 Grounding. Metal auxiliary gutters shall be grounded.

3.66.2.35 Expansion Fittings. Expansion fittings shall be installed 3.66.3 Construction Specifications
where expected length change, due to expansion and contraction due
to temperature change, is more than 6 mm. 3.66.3.1 Construction.

3.66.2.47 Splices and Taps. Splices and taps shall comply with (a) Electrical and Mechanical Continuity. Gutters shall be
3.66.2.47(a) through (d). constructed and installed so that adequate electrical and mechanical
continuity of the complete system is secured.
(a) Within Gutters. Splices or taps shall be permitted within gutters
where they are accessible by means of removable covers or doors. The (b) Substantial Construction. Gutters shall be of substantial
conductors, including splices and taps, shall not fill the gutter to more construction and shall provide a complete enclosure for the contained
than 75 percent of its area. conductors. All surfaces, both interior and exterior, shall be suitably
protected from corrosion. Corner joints shall be made tight, and where
(b) Bare Conductors. Taps from bare conductors shall leave the the assembly is held together by rivets, bolts, or screws, such fasteners
gutter opposite their terminal connections, and conductors shall not be shall be spaced not more than 300 mm apart.
brought in contact with uninsulated current-carrying parts of different
potential. (c) Smooth Rounded Edges. Suitable bushings, shields, or fittings
having smooth, rounded edges shall be provided where conductors
(c) Suitably Identified. All taps shall be suitably identified at the pass between gutters, through partitions, around bends, between
gutter as to the circuit or equipment that they supply. gutters and cabinets or junction boxes, and at other locations where
necessary to prevent abrasion of the insulation of the conductors.
(d) Overcurrent Protection. Tap connections from conductors in
auxiliary gutters shall be provided with overcurrent protection as (d) Covers. Covers shall be securely fastened to the gutter.
required in 2.40.2.2.
(e) Clearance of Bare Live Parts. Bare conductors shall be
3.66.2.49 Insulated Conductors. securely and rigidly supported so that the minimum clearance between
bare current-carrying metal parts of different potential mounted on the
(a) Deflected Insulated Conductors. Where insulated conductors same surface will not be less than 50 mm, nor less than 25 mm for
are deflected within an auxiliary gutter, either at the ends or where parts that are held free in the air. A clearance not less than 25 mm shall
conduits, fittings, or other raceways or cables enter or leave the gutter, be secured between bare current-carrying metal parts and any metal
or where the direction of the gutter is deflected greater than 30
surface. Adequate provisions shall be made for the expansion and (b) Concealed. Busways shall be permitted to be installed behind
contraction of busbars. access panels, provided the busways are totally enclosed, of
nonventilating-type construction, and installed so that the joints
3.66.3.21 Marking. between sections and at fittings are accessible for maintenance
purposes. Where installed behind access panels, means of access shall
(a) Outdoors. Nonmetallic auxiliary gutters installed outdoors shall be provided, and either of the following conditions shall be met:
have the following markings:
(1) The space behind the access panels shall not be used for air-
(1) Suitable for exposure to sunlight handling purposes.
(2) Suitable for use in wet locations (2) Where the space behind the access panels is used for
(3) Installed conductor insulation temperature rating environmental air, other than ducts and plenums, there shall be no
provisions for plug-in connections, and the conductors shall be
(b) Indoors. Nonmetallic auxiliary gutters installed indoors shall insulated.
have the following markings:
(c) Through Walls and Floors. Busways shall be permitted to be
(1) Installed conductor insulation temperature rating installed through walls or floors in accordance with (c)(1) and (c)(2).

(1) Walls. Unbroken lengths of busway shall be permitted to be

ARTICLE 3.68 — BUSWAYS extended through dry walls.
(2) Floors. Floor penetrations shall comply with (a) and (b):
3.68.1 General Requirements
a. Busways shall be permitted to be extended vertically through
3.68.1.1 Scope. This article covers service-entrance, feeder, and dry floors if totally enclosed (unventilated) where passing through and
branch-circuit busways and associated fittings. for a minimum distance of 1 800 mm above the floor to provide
adequate protection from physical damage.
3.68.1.2 Definition. b. In other than industrial establishments, where a vertical riser
penetrates two or more dry floors, a minimum 100 mm high curb shall
Busway. A grounded metal enclosure containing factory-mounted, be installed around all floor openings for riser busways to prevent
bare or insulated conductors, which are usually copper or aluminum liquids from entering the opening. The curb shall be installed within
bars, rods, or tubes. 300 mm of the floor opening. Electrical equipment shall be located so
that it will not be damaged by liquids that are retained by the curb.
FPN: For cablebus, refer to Article 3.70.
FPN: See 3.0.1.21 for information concerning the spread of fire or products of
3.68.2 Installation combustion.

3.68.2.1 Uses Permitted. Busways shall be permitted to be installed 3.68.2.3 Uses Not Permitted.
where they are located in accordance with 3.68.2.1(a) through (c).
(a) Physical Damage. Busways shall not be installed where subject
(a) Exposed. Busways shall be permitted to be located in the open to severe physical damage or corrosive vapors.
where visible, except as permitted in 3.68.2.1(c).
(b) Hoistways. Busways shall not be installed in hoistways.
 consist of an externally operable circuit breaker or an externally
(c) Hazardous Locations. Busways shall not be installed in any operable fusible switch. Where such devices are mounted out of reach
hazardous (classified) location, unless specifically approved for such and contain disconnecting means, suitable means such as ropes,
use. chains, or sticks shall be provided for operating the disconnecting
means from the floor.
FPN: See 5.1.2.1(b).
Exception No. 1: As permitted in 2.40.2.2.
(d) Wet Locations. Busways shall not be installed outdoors or in Exception No. 2: For fixed or semifixed luminaires (lighting fixtures),
wet or damp locations unless identified for such use. where the branch-circuit overcurrent device is part of the luminaire
(fixture) cord plug on cord-connected luminaires (fixtures).
(e) Working Platform. Lighting busway and trolley busway shall Exception No. 3: Where luminaires (fixtures) without cords are
not be installed less than 2 400 mm above the floor or working plugged directly into the busway and the overcurrent device is
platform unless provided with a cover identified for the purpose. mounted on the luminaire (fixture).
3.68.2.8 Overcurrent Protection. Overcurrent protection shall be (d) Rating of Overcurrent Protection — Branch Circuits. A
provided in accordance with 3.68.2.8(a) through (d). busway used as a branch circuit shall be protected against overcurrent
in accordance with 2.10.2.2.
(a) Rating of Overcurrent Protection — Feeders. A busway shall
be protected against overcurrent in accordance with the allowable 3.68.2.21 Support. Busways shall be securely supported at intervals
current rating of the busway. not exceeding 1 500 mm unless otherwise designed and marked.
Exception No. 1: The applicable provisions of 2.40.1.4 shall be 3.68.2.47 Branches from Busways. Branches from busways shall be
permitted. permitted to be made in accordance with 3.68.2.47(a), (b), and (c).
Exception No. 2: Where used as transformer secondary ties, the
provisions of 4.50.1.6(a)(3) shall be permitted. (a) General. Branches from busways shall be permitted to use any
of the following wiring methods:
(b) Reduction in Ampacity Size of Busway. Overcurrent
protection shall be required where busways are reduced in ampacity. (1) Type AC armored cable
(2) Type MC metal-clad cable
Exception: For industrial establishments only, omission of (3) Type MI mineral-insulated, metal-sheathed cable
overcurrent protection shall be permitted at points where busways are (4) Type IMC intermediate metal conduit
reduced in ampacity, provided that the length of the busway having the (5) Type RMC rigid metal conduit
smaller ampacity does not exceed 15 m and has an ampacity at least (6) Type FMC flexible metal conduit
equal to one-third the rating or setting of the overcurrent device next (7) Type LFMC liquidtight flexible metal conduit
back on the line, and provided that such busway is free from contact (8) Type RNC rigid nonmetallic conduit
with combustible material. (9) Type LFNC liquidtight flexible nonmetal conduit
(10) Type EMT electrical metallic tubing
(c) Feeder or Branch Circuits. Where a busway is used as a feeder, (11) Type ENT electrical nonmetallic tubing
devices or plug-in connections for tapping off feeder or branch circuits (12) Busways
from the busway shall contain the overcurrent devices required for the (13) Strut-type channel raceway
protection of the feeder or branch circuits. The plug-in device shall (14) Surface metal raceways
 (15) Surface nonmetallic raceways
3.68.3 Construction
Where a separate equipment grounding conductor is used,
connection of the equipment grounding conductor to the busway shall 3.68.3.1 Marking. Busways shall be marked with the voltage and
comply with 2.50.1.8 and 2.50.1.12. current rating for which they are designed, and with the manufacturer's
name or trademark in such a manner as to be visible after installation.
(b) Cord and Cable Assemblies. Suitable cord and cable
assemblies approved for extra-hard usage or hard usage, and listed bus 3.68.4 Requirements for Over 600 Volts, Nominal
drop cable shall be permitted as branches from busways for the
connection of portable equipment or the connection of stationary 3.68.4.1 Adjacent and Supporting Structures. Metal-enclosed
equipment to facilitate their interchange in accordance with 4.0.1.7 busways shall be installed so that temperature rise from induced
and 4.0.1.8 and the following conditions: circulating currents in any adjacent metallic parts will not be
hazardous to personnel or constitute a fire hazard.
(1) The cord or cable shall be attached to the building by an
approved means. 3.68.4.21 Barriers and Seals.
(2) The length of the cord or cable from a busway plug-in device
to a suitable tension take-up support device shall not exceed (a) Vapor Seals. Busway runs that have sections located both inside
1 800 mm. and outside of buildings shall have a vapor seal at the building wall to
(3) The cord and cable shall be installed as a vertical riser from prevent interchange of air between indoor and outdoor sections.
the tension take-up support device to the equipment served.
(4) Strain relief cable grips shall be provided for the cord or cable Exception: Vapor seals shall not be required in forced-cooled bus.
at the busway plug-in device and equipment terminations.
(b) Fire Barriers. Fire barriers shall be provided where fire walls,
Exception to (b)(2): In industrial establishments only, where the floors, or ceilings are penetrated.
conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that only licensed
electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner under the FPN: See 3.0.1.21 for information concerning the spread of fire or products of
combustion.
supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner service the
installation, lengths exceeding 1 800 mm shall be permitted between
3.68.4.23 Drain Facilities. Drain plugs, filter drains, or similar
the busway plug-in device and the tension take-up support device
methods shall be provided to remove condensed moisture from low
where the cord or cable is supported at intervals not exceeding 2 400
points in busway run.
mm.
3.68.4.24 Ventilated Bus Enclosures. Ventilated busway enclosures
(c) Branches from Trolley-Type Busways. Suitable cord and cable
shall be installed in accordance with Part 1.10.3, and 4.90.2.4.
assemblies approved for extra-hard usage or hard usage and listed bus
drop cable shall be permitted as branches from trolley-type busways
3.68.4.25 Terminations and Connections. Where bus enclosures
for the connection of movable equipment in accordance with 4.0.1.7
terminate at machines cooled by flammable gas, seal-off bushings,
and 4.0.1.8.
baffles, or other means shall be provided to prevent accumulation of
flammable gas in the busway enclosures.
3.68.2.49 Dead Ends. A dead end of a busway shall be closed.
All conductor termination and connection hardware shall be accessible
for installation, connection, and maintenance.
3.68.2.51 Grounding. Busway shall be grounded.
 FPN: See ANSI C37.23-1987 (R1991), Guide for Metal-Enclosed Bus and
Calculating Losses in Isolated-Phase Bus, for construction and testing
3.68.4.26 Switches. Switching devices or disconnecting links provided requirements for metal-enclosed buses.
in the busway run shall have the same momentary rating as the
busway. Disconnecting links shall be plainly marked to be removable
only when bus is de-energized. Switching devices that are not load- ARTICLE 3.70 — CABLEBUS
break shall be interlocked to prevent operation under load, and
disconnecting link enclosures shall be interlocked to prevent access to 3.70.1.1 Scope. This article covers the use and installation
energized parts. requirements of cablebus and associated fittings.

3.68.4.27 Wiring 600 Volts or Less, Nominal. Secondary control 3.70.1.2 Definition.
devices and wiring that are provided as part of the metal-enclosed bus
run shall be insulated by fire-retardant barriers from all primary circuit Cablebus. An assembly of insulated conductors with fittings and
elements with the exception of short lengths of wire, such as at conductor terminations in a completely enclosed, ventilated protective
instrument transformer terminals. metal housing. Cablebus is ordinarily assembled at the point of
installation from the components furnished or specified by the
3.68.4.31 Expansion Fittings. Flexible or expansion connections shall manufacturer in accordance with instructions for the specific job. This
be provided in long, straight runs of bus to allow for temperature assembly is designed to carry fault current and to withstand the
expansion or contraction, or where the busway run crosses building magnetic forces of such current.
vibration insulation joints.
3.70.1.3 Use. Approved cablebus shall be permitted at any voltage or
3.68.4.45 Neutral. Neutral bus, where required, shall be sized to carry current for which spaced conductors are rated and shall be installed
all neutral load current, including harmonic currents, and shall have only for exposed work, except as permitted in 3.70.1.6. Cablebus
adequate momentary and short-circuit rating consistent with system installed outdoors or in corrosive, wet, or damp locations shall be
requirements. identified for such use. Cablebus shall not be installed in hoistways or
hazardous (classified) locations unless specifically approved for such
3.68.4.47 Grounding. Metal-enclosed busway shall be grounded. use. Cablebus shall be permitted to be used for branch circuits,
feeders, and services.
3.68.4.107 Marking. Each busway run shall be provided with a Cablebus framework, where bonded, shall be permitted to be used as
permanent nameplate on which the following information shall be the equipment grounding conductor for branch circuits and feeders.
provided:

(1) Rated voltage.

(2) Rated continuous current; if bus is forced-cooled, both the 3.70.1.4 Conductors.
normal forced-cooled rating and the self-cooled (not forced-cooled)
rating for the same temperature rise shall be given. (a) Types of Conductors. The current-carrying conductors in
(3) Rated frequency. cablebus shall have an insulation rating of 75°C (167°F) or higher and
(4) Rated impulse withstand voltage. be an approved type suitable for the application.
(5) Rated 60-Hz withstand voltage (dry).
(6) Rated momentary current. (b) Ampacity of Conductors. The ampacity of conductors in
(7) Manufacturer's name or trademark. cablebus shall be in accordance with Table 3.10.1.17 and Table
3.10.1.19, or with Table 3.10.1.69 and Table 3.10.1.70 for installations
over 600 volts. (d) Through Floors and Platforms in Wet Locations. Except
where firestops are required, cablebus shall be permitted to extend
(c) Size and Number of Conductors. The size and number of vertically through floors and platforms in wet locations where (1) there
conductors shall be that for which the cablebus is designed, and in no are curbs or other suitable means to prevent waterflow through the
case smaller than 50 mm2. floor or platform opening, and (2) where the cablebus is totally
enclosed at the point where it passes through the floor or platform and
(d) Conductor Supports. The insulated conductors shall be for a distance of 1 800 mm above the floor or platform.
supported on blocks or other mounting means designed for the
purpose. 3.70.1.7 Fittings. A cablebus system shall include approved fittings
The individual conductors in a cablebus shall be supported at for the following:
intervals not greater than 900 mm for horizontal runs and 450 mm for
vertical runs. Vertical and horizontal spacing between supported (1) Changes in horizontal or vertical direction of the run
conductors shall not be less than one conductor diameter at the points (2) Dead ends
of support. (3) Terminations in or on connected apparatus or equipment or
the enclosures for such equipment
3.70.1.5 Overcurrent Protection. Cablebus shall be protected against (4) Additional physical protection where required, such as guards
overcurrent in accordance with the allowable ampacity of the cablebus where subject to severe physical damage
conductors in accordance with 2.40.1.4.
3.70.1.8 Conductor Terminations. Approved terminating means
Exception: Overcurrent protection shall be permitted in accordance shall be used for connections to cablebus conductors.
with 240.100 and 240.101 for over 600 volts, nominal.
3.70.1.9 Grounding. A cablebus installation shall be grounded and
3.70.1.6 Support and Extension Through Walls and Floors. bonded in accordance with Article 2.50, excluding 2.50.4.7, Exception
No. 2.
(a) Support. Cablebus shall be securely supported at intervals not
exceeding 3 600 mm. 3.70.1.10 Marking. Each section of cablebus shall be marked with the
manufacturer’s name or trade designation and the maximum diameter,
Exception: Where spans longer than 3 600 mm are required, the number, voltage rating, and ampacity of the conductors to be installed.
structure shall be specifically designed for the required span length. Markings shall be located so as to be visible after installation.

(b) Transversely Routed. Cablebus shall be permitted to extend

transversely through partitions or walls, other than fire walls, provided ARTICLE 3.72 — CELLULAR CONCRETE
the section within the wall is continuous, protected against physical FLOOR RACEWAYS
damage, and unventilated.
3.72.1.1 Scope. This article covers cellular concrete floor raceways,
(c) Through Dry Floors and Platforms. Except where firestops are the hollow spaces in floors constructed of precast cellular concrete
required, cablebus shall be permitted to extend vertically through dry slabs, together with suitable metal fittings designed to provide access
floors and platforms, provided the cablebus is totally enclosed at the to the floor cells.
point where it passes through the floor or platform and for a distance
of 1 800 mm above the floor or platform. 3.72.1.2 Definitions.
 3.72.1.9 Inserts. Inserts shall be leveled and sealed against the
Cell. A single, enclosed tubular space in a floor made of precast entrance of concrete. Inserts shall be of metal and shall be fitted with
cellular concrete slabs, the direction of the cell being parallel to the grounded-type receptacles. A grounding conductor shall connect the
direction of the floor member. insert receptacles to a positive ground connection provided on the
header. Where cutting through the cell wall for setting inserts or other
Header. Transverse metal raceways for electric conductors, purposes (such as providing access openings between header and
providing access to predetermined cells of a precast cellular concrete cells), chips and other dirt shall not be allowed to remain in the
floor, thereby permitting the installation of electric conductors from a raceway, and the tool used shall be designed so as to prevent the tool
distribution center to the floor cells. from entering the cell and damaging the conductors.

3.72.1.4 Uses Not Permitted. Conductors shall not be installed in 3.72.1.10 Size of Conductors. No conductor larger than 50 mm2 shall
precast cellular concrete floor raceways as follows: be installed, except by special permission.

(1) Where subject to corrosive vapor 3.72.1.11 Maximum Number of Conductors. The combined cross-
(2) In any hazardous (classified) locations except as permitted by sectional area of all conductors or cables shall not exceed 40 percent
5.4.1.20, and in Class I, Division 2 locations as permitted in of the cross-sectional area of the cell or header.
5.1.2.1(b)(3)
(3) In commercial garages, other than for supplying ceiling outlets 3.72.1.12 Splices and Taps. Splices and taps shall be made only in
or extensions to the area below the floor but not above header access units or junction boxes.
For the purposes of this section, so-called loop wiring (continuous
FPN: See 3.0.1.8 for installation of conductors with other systems. unbroken conductor connecting the individual outlets) shall not be
considered to be a splice or tap.
3.72.1.5 Header. The header shall be installed in a straight line at right
angles to the cells. The header shall be mechanically secured to the top 3.72.1.13 Discontinued Outlets. When an outlet is abandoned,
of the precast cellular concrete floor. The end joints shall be closed by discontinued, or removed, the sections of circuit conductors supplying
a metal closure fitting and sealed against the entrance of concrete. The the outlet shall be removed from the raceway. No splices or
header shall be electrically continuous throughout its entire length and reinsulated conductors, such as would be the case of abandoned outlets
shall be electrically bonded to the enclosure of the distribution center. on loop wiring, shall be allowed in raceways.
3.72.1.6 Connection to Cabinets and Other Enclosures. 3.72.1.17 Ampacity of Conductors. The ampacity adjustment factors,
Connections from headers to cabinets and other enclosures shall be provided in 3.10.1.15(b)(2), shall apply to conductors installed in
made by means of listed metal raceways and listed fittings. cellular concrete floor raceways.
3.72.1.7 Junction Boxes. Junction boxes shall be leveled to the floor
grade and sealed against the free entrance of water or concrete. ARTICLE 3.74 — CELLULAR METAL
Junction boxes shall be of metal and shall be mechanically and FLOOR RACEWAYS
electrically continuous with the header.
3.74.1.1 Scope. This article covers the use and installation
3.72.1.8 Markers. A suitable number of markers shall be installed for requirements for cellular metal floor raceways.
the future location of cells.
3.74.1.2 Definitions. unbroken conductor connecting the individual outlets) shall not be
considered to be a splice or tap.
Cellular Metal Floor Raceway. The hollow spaces of cellular
metal floors, together with suitable fittings, that may be approved as 3.74.1.7 Discontinued Outlets. When an outlet is abandoned,
enclosures for electric conductors. discontinued, or removed, the sections of circuit conductors supplying
the outlet shall be removed from the raceway. No splices or
Cell. A single enclosed tubular space in a cellular metal floor reinsulated conductors, such as would be the case with abandoned
member, the axis of the cell being parallel to the axis of the metal floor outlets on loop wiring, shall be allowed in raceways.
member.
3.74.1.8 Markers. A suitable number of markers shall be installed for
Header. A transverse raceway for electric conductors, providing locating cells in the future.
access to predetermined cells of a cellular metal floor, thereby
permitting the installation of electric conductors from a distribution 3.74.1.9 Junction Boxes. Junction boxes shall be leveled to the floor
center to the cells. grade and sealed against the free entrance of water or concrete.
Junction boxes used with these raceways shall be of metal and shall be
3.74.1.3 Uses Not Permitted. Conductors shall not be installed in electrically continuous with the raceway.
cellular metal floor raceways as follows:
3.74.1.10 Inserts. Inserts shall be leveled to the floor grade and sealed
(1) Where subject to corrosive vapor against the entrance of concrete. Inserts shall be of metal and shall be
(2) In any hazardous (classified) location except as permitted by electrically continuous with the raceway. In cutting through the cell
5.4.1.20, and in Class I, Division 2 locations as permitted by wall and setting inserts, chips and other dirt shall not be allowed to
5.1.2.1(b)(3) remain in the raceway, and tools shall be used that are designed to
(3) In commercial garages, other than for supplying ceiling outlets prevent the tool from entering the cell and damaging the conductors.
or extensions to the area below the floor but not above
3.74.1.11 Connection to Cabinets and Extensions from Cells.
FPN: See 3.0.1.8 for installation of conductors with other systems. Connections between raceways and distribution centers and wall
outlets shall be made by means of liquidtight flexible metal conduit,
3.74.1 Installation flexible metal conduit where not installed in concrete, rigid metal
conduit, intermediate metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing, or
3.74.1.4 Size of Conductors. No conductor larger than 50 mm2 shall approved fittings. Where there are provisions for the termination of an
be installed, except by special permission. equipment grounding conductor, nonmetallic conduit, electrical
nonmetallic tubing, or liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit shall be
3.74.1.5 Maximum Number of Conductors in Raceway. The permitted. Where installed in concrete, liquidtight flexible nonmetallic
combined cross-sectional area of all conductors or cables shall not conduit shall be listed and marked for direct burial.
exceed 40 percent of the interior cross-sectional area of the cell or
header. FPN: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit and liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit
that is suitable for installation in concrete is listed and marked for direct burial.
3.74.1.6 Splices and Taps. Splices and taps shall be made only in
header access units or junction boxes. 3.74.1.17 Ampacity of Conductors. The ampacity adjustment factors
in 3.10.1.15(b)(2) shall apply to conductors installed in cellular metal
For the purposes of this section, so-called loop wiring (continuous floor raceways.
 3.76.2.3 Uses Not Permitted. Metal wireways shall not be used in the
3.74.2 Construction Specifications following:

3.74.2.1 General. Cellular metal floor raceways shall be constructed (1) Where subject to severe physical damage
so that adequate electrical and mechanical continuity of the complete (2) Where subject to severe corrosive environments
system will be secured. They shall provide a complete enclosure for
the conductors. The interior surfaces shall be free from burrs and sharp 3.76.2.12 Size of Conductors. No conductor larger than that for which
edges, and surfaces over which conductors are drawn shall be smooth. the wireway is designed shall be installed in any wireway.
Suitable bushings or fittings having smooth rounded edges shall be
provided where conductors pass. 3.76.2.13 Number of Conductors. The sum of the cross-sectional
areas of all contained conductors at any cross section of a wireway
shall not exceed 20 percent of the interior cross-sectional area of the
ARTICLE 3.76 — METAL WIREWAYS wireway. The derating factors in 3.10.1.15(b)(2)a shall be applied only
where the number of current-carrying conductors, including neutral
3.76.1 General conductors classified as current-carrying under the provisions of
3.10.1.15(b)(4), exceeds 30. Conductors for signaling circuits or
3.76.1.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and controller conductors between a motor and its starter and used only for
construction specifications for metal wireways and associated fittings. starting duty shall not be considered as current-carrying conductors.

3.76.1.2 Definition. 3.76.2.14 Insulated Conductors. Insulated conductors installed in a

metallic wireway shall comply with 3.76.2.14(a) and (b).
Metal Wireways. Sheet metal troughs with hinged or removable
covers for housing and protecting electric wires and cable and in (a) Deflected Insulated Conductors. Where insulated conductors
which conductors are laid in place after the wireway has been installed are deflected within a metallic wireway, either at the ends or where
as a complete system. conduits, fittings, or other raceways or cables enter or leave the
metallic wireway, or where the direction of the metallic wireway is
3.76.2 Installation deflected greater than 30 degrees, dimensions corresponding to one
wire per terminal in Table 3.12.1.6(a) shall apply.
3.76.2.1 Uses Permitted. The use of metal wireways shall be
permitted in the following: (b) Metallic Wireways Used as Pull Boxes. Where insulated
conductors 22 mm2 or larger are pulled through a wireway, the
(1) For exposed work distance between raceway and cable entries enclosing the same
(2) In concealed spaces as permitted in 3.76.2.1(4) conductor shall not be less than that required by 3.14.2.14(a)(1) for
(3) In hazardous (classified) locations as permitted by 5.1.2.1(b) straight pulls and 3.14.2.14(a)(2) for angle pulls. When transposing
for Class I, Division 2 locations; 5.2.2.1(b) for Class II, Division 2 cable size into raceway size, the minimum metric designator (trade
locations; and 5.4.1.20 for intrinsically safe wiring. Where installed in size) raceway required for the number and size of conductors in the
wet locations, wireways shall be listed for the purpose. cable shall be used.
(4) As extensions to pass transversely through walls if the length
passing through the wall is unbroken. Access to the conductors shall 3.76.2.21 Securing and Supporting. Metal wireways shall be
be maintained on both sides of the wall. supported in accordance with 3.76.2.21(a) and (b).
 (a) Horizontal Support. Wireways shall be supported where run 3.76.3 Construction Specifications
horizontally at each end and at intervals not to exceed 1 500 mm or for
individual lengths longer than 1 500 mm at each end or joint, unless 3.76.3.1 Marking. Metal wireways shall be so marked that their
listed for other support intervals. The distance between supports shall manufacturer’s name or trademark will be visible after installation.
not exceed 3 000 mm.

(b) Vertical Support. Vertical runs of wireways shall be securely ARTICLE 3.78 — NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS
supported at intervals not exceeding 4 500 mm and shall not have
more than one joint between supports. Adjoining wireway sections 3.78.1 General
shall be securely fastened together to provide a rigid joint.
3.78.1.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and
3.76.2.47 Splices, Taps, and Power Distribution Blocks. construction specifications for nonmetallic wireways and associated
fittings.
(a) Splices and Taps. Splices and taps shall be permitted within a
wireway, provided they are accessible. The conductors, including 3.78.1.2 Definition.
splices and taps, shall not fill the wireway to more than 75 percent of
its area at that point. Nonmetallic Wireways. Flame retardant, nonmetallic troughs with
removable covers for housing and protecting electric wires and cables
(b) Power Distribution Blocks. in which conductors are laid in place after the wireway has been
installed as a complete system.
(1) Installation. Power distribution blocks installed in metal
wireways shall be listed. 3.78.1.6 Listing Requirements. Nonmetallic wireways and associated
(2) Size of Enclosure. In addition to the wiring space requirement fittings shall be listed.
in 3.76.2.47(a), the power distribution block shall be installed in a
wireway with dimensions not smaller than specified in the installation 3.78.2 Installation
instructions of the power distribution block.
(3) Wire Bending Space. Wire bending space at the terminals of 3.78.2.1 Uses Permitted. The use of nonmetallic wireways shall be
power distribution blocks shall comply with 3.12.1.6(b). permitted in the following:
(4) Live Parts. Power distribution blocks shall not have exposed
live parts in the wireway after installation. (1) Only for exposed work, except as permitted in 3.78.2.1(4).
(2) Where subject to corrosive environments where identified for
3.76.2.49 Dead Ends. Dead ends of metal wireways shall be closed. the use.
(3) In wet locations where listed for the purpose.
3.76.2.61 Extensions from Metal Wireways. Extensions from
wireways shall be made with cord pendants installed in accordance FPN: Extreme cold may cause nonmetallic wireways to become brittle and
therefore more susceptible to damage from physical contact.
with 400.10 or with any wiring method in Chapter 3 that includes a
means for equipment grounding. Where a separate equipment
(4) As extensions to pass transversely through walls if the length
grounding conductor is employed, connection of the equipment
passing through the wall is unbroken. Access to the conductors shall
grounding conductors in the wiring method to the wireway shall
be maintained on both sides of the wall.
comply with 2.50.1.8 and 2.50.1.12.
3.78.2.3 Uses Not Permitted. Nonmetallic wireways shall not be used conductor shall not be less than that required in 3.14.2.14(a)(1) for
in the following: straight pulls and in 3.14.2.14(a)(2) for angle pulls. When transposing
cable size into raceway size, the minimum metric designator (trade
(1) Where subject to physical damage size) raceway required for the number and size of conductors in the
(2) In any hazardous (classified) location, except as permitted in cable shall be used.
5.4.1.20
(3) Where exposed to sunlight unless listed and marked as 3.78.2.21 Securing and Supporting. Nonmetallic wireway shall be
suitable for the purpose supported in accordance with 3.78.2.21(a) and (b).
(4) Where subject to ambient temperatures other than those for
which nonmetallic wireway is listed (a) Horizontal Support. Nonmetallic wireways shall be supported
(5) For conductors whose insulation temperature limitations where run horizontally at intervals not to exceed 900 mm, and at each
would exceed those for which the nonmetallic wireway is listed end or joint, unless listed for other support intervals. In no case shall
the distance between supports exceed 3 000 mm.
3.78.2.12 Size of Conductors. No conductor larger than that for which
the nonmetallic wireway is designed shall be installed in any (b) Vertical Support. Vertical runs of nonmetallic wireway shall be
nonmetallic wireway. securely supported at intervals not exceeding 1 200 mm, unless listed
for other support intervals, and shall not have more than one joint
3.78.2.13 Number of Conductors. The sum of cross-sectional areas between supports. Adjoining nonmetallic wireway sections shall be
of all contained conductors at any cross section of the nonmetallic securely fastened together to provide a rigid joint.
wireway shall not exceed 20 percent of the interior cross-sectional area
of the nonmetallic wireway. Conductors for signaling circuits or 3.78.2.35 Expansion Fittings. Expansion fittings for nonmetallic
controller conductors between a motor and its starter and used only for wireway shall be provided to compensate for thermal expansion and
starting duty shall not be considered as current-carrying conductors. contraction where the length change is expected to be 6 mm or greater
The derating factors specified in 3.10.1.15(b)(2)a shall be applicable to in a straight run.
the current-carrying conductors up to and including the 20 percent fill
specified above. FPN: See Table 3.52.2.35(a) for expansion characteristics of PVC rigid nonmetallic
conduit. The expansion characteristics of PVC nonmetallic wireway are identical.

3.78.2.14 Insulated Conductors. Insulated conductors installed in a

3.78.2.47 Splices and Taps. Splices and taps shall be permitted within
nonmetallic wireway shall comply with 3.78.2.14(a) and (b).
a nonmetallic wireway, provided they are accessible. The conductors,
including splices and taps, shall not fill the nonmetallic wireway to
(a) Deflected Insulated Conductors. Where insulated conductors
more than 75 percent of its area at that point.
are deflected within a nonmetallic wireway, either at the ends or where
conduits, fittings, or other raceways or cables enter or leave the
3.78.2.49 Dead Ends. Dead ends of nonmetallic wireway shall be
nonmetallic wireway, or where the direction of the nonmetallic
closed using listed fittings.
wireway is deflected greater than 30 degrees, dimensions
corresponding to one wire per terminal in Table 3.12.1.6(a) shall
3.78.2.51 Grounding. Where equipment grounding is required, a
apply.
separate equipment grounding conductor shall be installed in the
nonmetallic wireway. A separate equipment grounding conductor shall
(b) Nonmetallic Wireways Used as Pull Boxes. Where insulated
not be required where the grounded conductor is used to ground
conductors 22 mm2 or larger are pulled through a wireway, the
equipment as permitted in 2.50.7.13.
distance between raceway and cable entries enclosing the same
 3.80.1.3 Metal Multioutlet Assembly Through Dry Partitions. It
3.78.2.61 Extensions from Nonmetallic Wireways. Extensions from shall be permissible to extend a metal multioutlet assembly through
nonmetallic wireway shall be made with cord pendants or any wiring (not run within) dry partitions if arrangements are made for removing
method of Chapter 3. A separate equipment grounding conductor shall the cap or cover on all exposed portions and no outlet is located within
be installed in, or an equipment grounding connection shall be made the partitions.
to, any of the wiring methods used for the extension.

3.78.3 Construction Specifications ARTICLE 3.82 — NONMETALLIC EXTENSIONS

3.78.3.1 Marking. Nonmetallic wireways shall be marked so that the 3.82.1 General
manufacturer’s name or trademark and interior cross-sectional area in
square inches shall be visible after installation. Marking for limited 3.82.1.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and
smoke shall be permitted on the nonmetallic wireways that have construction specifications for nonmetallic extensions.
limited smoke-producing characteristics.
3.82.1.2 Definition.

ARTICLE 3.80 — MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLY Nonmetallic Extension. An assembly of two insulated conductors
within a nonmetallic jacket or an extruded thermoplastic covering. The
3.80.1.1 Scope. This article covers the use and installation classification includes surface extensions intended for mounting
requirements for multioutlet assemblies. directly on the surface of walls or ceilings.

3.80.1.2 Use. 3.82.2 Installation

(a) Permitted. The use of a multioutlet assembly shall be permitted 3.82.2.1 Uses Permitted. Nonmetallic extensions shall be permitted
in dry locations. only in accordance with 3.82.2.1(a), (b), and (c).
(b) Not Permitted. A multioutlet assembly shall not be installed as
follows: (a) From an Existing Outlet. The extension shall be from an
existing outlet on a 15- or 20-ampere branch circuit.
(1) Where concealed, except that it shall be permissible to
surround the back and sides of a metal multioutlet assembly by the (b) Exposed and in a Dry Location. The extension shall be run
building finish or recess a nonmetallic multioutlet assembly in a exposed and in a dry location.
baseboard
(2) Where subject to severe physical damage (c) Residential or Offices. For nonmetallic surface extensions
(3) Where the voltage is 300 volts or more between conductors mounted directly on the surface of walls or ceilings, the building shall
unless the assembly is of metal having a thickness of not less than 1.02 be occupied for residential or office purposes and shall not exceed
mm (0.040 in.) three floors above grade.
(4) Where subject to corrosive vapors
(5) In hoistways FPN No. 1: See 3.10.1.10 for temperature limitation of conductors.
FPN No. 2: See 3.62.2.1 for definition of first floor.
(6) In any hazardous (classified) locations except Class I,
Division 2 locations as permitted in 5.1.2.1(b)(3)
3.82.2.3 Uses Not Permitted. Nonmetallic extensions shall not be
used as follows: ARTICLE 3.84 — STRUT-TYPE CHANNEL RACEWAY

(1) In unfinished basements, attics, or roof spaces 3.84.1 General

(2) Where the voltage between conductors exceeds 150 volts for
nonmetallic surface extension and 300 volts for aerial cable 3.84.1.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and
(3) Where subject to corrosive vapors construction specifications of strut-type channel raceway.
(4) Where run through a floor or partition, or outside the room in
which it originates 3.84.1.2 Definition.

3.82.2.6 Exposed. One or more extensions shall be permitted to be run Strut-Type Channel Raceway. A metallic raceway that is intended
in any direction from an existing outlet, but not on the floor or within to be mounted to the surface of or suspended from a structure, with
50 mm from the floor. associated accessories for the installation of electrical conductors and
cables.
3.82.2.17 Bends. A bend that reduces the normal spacing between the
conductors shall be covered with a cap to protect the assembly from 3.84.1.6 Listing Requirements. Strut-type channel raceways, closure
physical damage. strips, and accessories shall be listed and identified for such use.

3.82.2.21 Securing and Supporting. Nonmetallic surface extensions 3.84.2 Installation

shall be secured in place by approved means at intervals not exceeding
200 mm, with an allowance for 300 mm to the first fastening where 3.84.2.1 Uses Permitted. The use of strut-type channel raceways shall
the connection to the supplying outlet is by means of an attachment be permitted in the following:
plug. There shall be at least one fastening between each two adjacent
outlets supplied. An extension shall be attached to only woodwork or (1) Where exposed.
plaster finish and shall not be in contact with any metal work or other (2) In dry locations.
conductive material other than with metal plates on receptacles. (3) In locations subject to corrosive vapors where protected by
finishes judged suitable for the condition.
3.82.2.31 Boxes and Fittings. Each run shall terminate in a fitting that (4) Where the voltage is 600 volts or less.
covers the end of the assembly. All fittings and devices shall be of a (5) As power poles.
type identified for the use. (6) In Class I, Division 2 hazardous (classified) locations as
permitted in 5.1.2.1(b)(3).
3.82.2.47 Splices and Taps. Extensions shall consist of a continuous (7) As extensions of unbroken lengths through walls, partitions,
unbroken length of the assembly, without splices, and without exposed and floors where closure strips are removable from either side and the
conductors between fittings. Taps shall be permitted where approved portion within the wall, partition, or floor remains covered.
fittings completely covering the tap connections are used. Aerial cable (8) Ferrous channel raceways and fittings protected from
and its tap connectors shall be provided with an approved means for corrosion solely by enamel shall be permitted only indoors.
polarization. Receptacle-type tap connectors shall be of the locking
type. 3.84.2.3 Uses Not Permitted. Strut type channel raceways shall not be
used as follows:

(1) Where concealed.

 (2) Ferrous channel raceways and fittings protected from (b) Suspension Mount. Strut-type channel raceways shall be
corrosion solely by enamel shall not be permitted where subject to permitted to be suspension mounted in air with approved appropriate
severe corrosive influences. methods designed for the purpose at intervals not to exceed 3 000 mm
and within 900 mm of channel raceway terminations and ends.
3.84.2.12 Size of Conductors. No conductor larger than that for which
the raceway is listed shall be installed in strut-type channel raceways.
Table 3.84.2.13 Channel Size and Inside Diameter Area
3.84.2.13 Number of Conductors. The number of conductors
permitted in strut-type channel raceways shall not exceed the Size Area 40% Area* 25% Area**
percentage fill using Table 3.84.2.13 and applicable outside diameter Channel mm2 mm2 mm2
(O.D.) dimensions of specific types and sizes of wire given in the 1⅝ x 13/16 572 229 143
tables in Chapter 9. 1⅝ x 1 743 297 186
The derating factors of 3.10.1.15(b)(2)a shall not apply to conductors
installed in strut-type channel raceways where all of the following 1⅝ x 1⅜ 1076 433 270
conditions are met: 1⅝ x 1⅝ 1308 523 327
1⅝ x 2 7/16 2045 817 511
(1) The cross-sectional area of the raceway exceeds 2500 mm2 (4 1⅝ x 3¼ 2780 1112 695
in.2). 1½ x ¾ 548 219 137
(2) The current-carrying conductors do not exceed 30 in number.
(3) The sum of the cross-sectional areas of all contained 1½ x 1½ 1179 472 295
conductors does not exceed 20 percent of the interior cross-sectional 1½ x⅞ 1485 594 371
area of the strut-type channel raceways, calculated in accordance with 1½ x 3 2487 995 622
the following formula for wire fill: *Raceways with external joiners shall use a 40 percent wire fill calculation to
determine the number of conductors permitted.
**Raceways with internal joiners shall use a 25 percent wire fill calculation to
ca determine the number of conductors permitted.
n=
wa

where: 3.84.2.47 Splices and Taps. Splices and taps shall be permitted in
n= number of wires raceways that are accessible after installation by having a removable
ca= channel area in square inches cover. The conductors, including splices and taps, shall not fill the
wa= wire area raceway to more than 75 percent of its area at that point. All splices
and taps shall be made by approved methods.
3.84.2.21 Securing and Supporting. 3.84.2.51 Grounding. Strut-type channel raceway enclosures
providing a transition to or from other wiring methods shall have a
(a) Surface Mount. A surface mount strut-type channel raceway means for connecting an equipment grounding conductor. Strut-type
shall be secured to the mounting surface with retention straps external channel raceways shall be permitted as an equipment grounding
to the channel at intervals not exceeding 3 000 mm and within 900 conductor in accordance with 2.50.6.9(14). Where a snap-fit metal
mm of each outlet box, cabinet, junction box, or other channel cover for strut-type channel raceways is used to achieve electrical
raceway termination. continuity in accordance with the listing, this cover shall not be
permitted as the means for providing electrical continuity for a connectors, boxes, and fittings for the installation of electrical
receptacle mounted in the cover. conductors.

3.84.3 Construction Specifications 3.86.1.6 Listing Requirements. Surface metal raceway and associated
fittings shall be listed.
3.84.3.1 Construction. Strut-type channel raceways and their
accessories shall be of a construction that distinguishes them from 3.86.2 Installation
other raceways. Raceways and their elbows, couplings, and other
fittings shall be designed such that the sections can be electrically and 3.86.2.1 Uses Permitted. The use of surface metal raceways shall be
mechanically coupled together and installed without subjecting the permitted in the following:
wires to abrasion. They shall comply with 3.84.3.1(a), (b), and (c).
(1) In dry locations.
(a) Material. Raceways and accessories shall be formed of steel, (2) In Class I, Division 2 hazardous (classified) locations as
stainless steel, or aluminum. permitted in 5.1.2.1(b)(3).
(3) Under raised floors, as permitted in 6.45.1.5(d)(2).
(b) Corrosion Protection. Steel raceways and accessories shall be (4) Extension through walls and floors. Surface metal raceway
protected against corrosion by galvanizing or by an organic coating. shall be permitted to pass transversely through dry walls, dry
partitions, and dry floors if the length passing through is unbroken.
FPN: Enamel and PVC coatings are examples of organic coatings that provide Access to the conductors shall be maintained on both sides of the wall,
corrosion protection.
partition, or floor.
(c) Cover. Covers of strut-type channel raceways shall be either
3.86.2.3 Uses Not Permitted. Surface metal raceways shall not be
metallic or nonmetallic.
used in the following:
3.84.3.21 Marking. Each length of strut-type channel raceways shall
(1) Where subject to severe physical damage, unless otherwise
be clearly and durably identified as required in the first sentence of
approved
1.10.1.21.
(2) Where the voltage is 300 volts or more between conductors,
unless the metal has a thickness of not less than 1.0 mm nominal
(3) Where subject to corrosive vapors
ARTICLE 3.86 — SURFACE METAL RACEWAYS
(4) In hoistways
(5) Where concealed, except as permitted in 3.86.2.1
3.86.1 General
3.86.2.12 Size of Conductors. No conductor larger than that for which
3.86.1.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and
the raceway is designed shall be installed in surface metal raceway.
construction specifications for surface metal raceways and associated
fittings.
3.86.2.13 Number of Conductors or Cables. The number of
conductors or cables installed in surface metal raceway shall not be
3.86.1.2 Definition.
greater than the number for which the raceway is designed. Cables
shall be permitted to be installed where such use is not prohibited by
Surface Metal Raceway. A metallic raceway that is intended to be
the respective cable articles.
mounted to the surface of a structure, with associated couplings,
The derating factors of 3.10.1.15(b)(2)a shall not apply to conductors coupled together and installed without subjecting the wires to
installed in surface metal raceways where all of the following abrasion.
conditions are met: Where covers and accessories of nonmetallic materials are used on
surface metal raceways, they shall be identified for such use.
(1) The cross-sectional area of the raceway exceeds 2500 mm2
(4 in.2)
(2) The current-carrying conductors do not exceed 30 in number ARTICLE 3.88 — SURFACE NONMETALLIC RACEWAYS
(3) The sum of the cross-sectional areas of all contained
conductors does not exceed 20 percent of the interior cross-sectional 3.88.1 General
area of the surface metal raceway
3.88.1.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and
3.86.2.21 Securing and Supporting. Surface metal raceways shall be construction specifications for surface nonmetallic raceways and
supported at intervals in accordance with the manufacturer's associated fittings.
installation instructions.
3.88.1.2 Definition.
3.86.2.47 Splices and Taps. Splices and taps shall be permitted in
surface metal raceways having a removable cover that is accessible Surface Nonmetallic Raceway. A nonmetallic raceway that is
after installation. The conductors, including splices and taps, shall not intended to be mounted to the surface of a structure, with associated
fill the raceway to more than 75 percent of its area at that point. couplings, connectors, boxes, and fittings for the installation of
Splices and taps in surface metal raceways without removable covers electrical conductors.
shall be made only in boxes. All splices and taps shall be made by
approved methods. 3.88.1.6 Listing Requirements. Surface nonmetallic raceway and
Taps of Type FC cable installed in surface metal raceway shall be associated fittings shall be listed.
made in accordance with 3.22.2.47(b).
3.88.2 Installation
3.86.2.51 Grounding. Surface metal raceway enclosures providing a
transition from other wiring methods shall have a means for 3.88.2.1 Uses Permitted. Surface nonmetallic raceway shall be
connecting an equipment grounding conductor. permitted as follows:

3.86.2.61 Combination Raceways. When combination surface (1) The use of surface nonmetallic raceways shall be permitted in
metallic raceways are used for both signaling and for lighting and dry locations.
power circuits, the different systems shall be run in separate (2) Extension through walls and floors shall be permitted. Surface
compartments identified by stamping, imprinting, or color coding of nonmetallic raceway shall be permitted to pass transversely through
the interior finish. dry walls, dry partitions, and dry floors if the length passing through is
unbroken. Access to the conductors shall be maintained on both sides
3.86.3 Construction Specifications of the wall, partition, or floor.

3.86.3.1 Construction. Surface metal raceways shall be of such 3.88.2.3 Uses Not Permitted. Surface nonmetallic raceways shall not
construction as will distinguish them from other raceways. Surface be used in the following:
metal raceways and their elbows, couplings, and similar fittings shall
be designed so that the sections can be electrically and mechanically (1) Where concealed, except as permitted in 3.88.2.1(2)
 (2) Where subject to severe physical damage 3.88.3 Construction Specifications
(3) Where the voltage is 300 volts or more between conductors,
unless listed for higher voltage 3.88.3.1 Construction. Surface nonmetallic raceways shall be of such
(4) In hoistways construction as will distinguish them from other raceways. Surface
(5) In any hazardous (classified) location except Class I, Division nonmetallic raceways and their elbows, couplings, and similar fittings
2 locations as permitted in 5.1.2.1(b)(3) shall be designed so that the sections can be mechanically coupled
(6) Where subject to ambient temperatures exceeding those for together and installed without subjecting the wires to abrasion.
which the nonmetallic raceway is listed Surface nonmetallic raceways and fittings are made of suitable
(7) For conductors whose insulation temperature limitations nonmetallic material that is resistant to moisture and chemical
would exceed those for which the nonmetallic raceway is listed atmospheres. It shall also be flame retardant, resistant to impact and
crushing, resistant to distortion from heat under conditions likely to be
3.88.2.12 Size of Conductors. No conductor larger than that for which encountered in service, and resistant to low-temperature effects.
the raceway is designed shall be installed in surface nonmetallic
raceway. 3.88.3.21 Marking. Surface nonmetallic raceways that have limited
smoke-producing characteristics shall be permitted to be so identified.
3.88.2.13 Number of Conductors or Cables. The number of
conductors or cables installed in surface nonmetallic raceway shall not
be greater than the number for which the raceway is designed. Cables ARTICLE 3.90 — UNDERFLOOR RACEWAYS
shall be permitted to be installed where such use is not prohibited by
the respective cable articles. 3.90.1.1 Scope. This article covers the use and installation
requirements for underfloor raceways.
3.88.2.47 Splices and Taps. Splices and taps shall be permitted in
surface nonmetallic raceways having a removable cover that is 3.90.1.2 Use.
accessible after installation. The conductors, including splices and
taps, shall not fill the raceway to more than 75 percent of its area at (a) Permitted. The installation of underfloor raceways shall be
that point. Splices and taps in surface nonmetallic raceways without permitted beneath the surface of concrete or other flooring material or
removable covers shall be made only in boxes. All splices and taps in office occupancies where laid flush with the concrete floor and
shall be made by approved methods. covered with linoleum or equivalent floor covering.

3.88.2.51 Grounding. Where equipment grounding is required, a (b) Not Permitted. Underfloor raceways shall not be installed (1)
separate equipment grounding conductor shall be installed in the where subject to corrosive vapors or (2) in any hazardous (classified)
raceway. locations, except as permitted by 5.4.1.20 and in Class I, Division 2
locations as permitted in 5.1.2.1(b)(3). Unless made of a material
3.88.2.61 Combination Raceways. When combination surface judged suitable for the condition or unless corrosion protection
nonmetallic raceways are used both for signaling and for lighting and approved for the condition is provided, ferrous or nonferrous metal
power circuits, the different systems shall be run in separate underfloor raceways, junction boxes, and fittings shall not be installed
compartments identified by stamping, imprinting, or color coding of in concrete or in areas subject to severe corrosive influences.
the interior finish.
3.90.1.3 Covering. Raceway coverings shall comply with 3.90.1.3(a)
through (d).
 (a) Raceways Not Over 100 mm (4 in.) Wide. Half-round and flat- raceway having a removable cover that is accessible after installation.
top raceways not over 100 mm in width shall have not less than The conductors, including splices and taps, shall not fill more than 75
19 mm of concrete or wood above the raceway. percent of the raceway area at that point.

Exception: As permitted in 3.90.1.3(c) and (d) for flat-top raceways. 3.90.1.7 Discontinued Outlets. When an outlet is abandoned,
discontinued, or removed, the sections of circuit conductors supplying
(b) Raceways Over 100 mm Wide But Not Over 200 mm Wide. the outlet shall be removed from the raceway. No splices or
Flat-top raceways over 100 mm but not over 200 mm wide with a reinsulated conductors, such as would be the case with abandoned
minimum of 25 mm spacing between raceways shall be covered with outlets on loop wiring, shall be allowed in raceways.
concrete to a depth of not less than 25 mm. Raceways spaced less than
25 mm apart shall be covered with concrete to a depth of 40 mm. 3.90.1.8 Laid in Straight Lines. Underfloor raceways shall be laid so
that a straight line from the center of one junction box to the center of
(c) Trench-Type Raceways Flush with Concrete. Trench-type the next junction box coincides with the centerline of the raceway
flush raceways with removable covers shall be permitted to be laid system. Raceways shall be firmly held in place to prevent disturbing
flush with the floor surface. Such approved raceways shall be designed this alignment during construction.
so that the cover plates provide adequate mechanical protection and
rigidity equivalent to junction box covers. 3.90.1.9 Markers at Ends. A suitable marker shall be installed at or
near each end of each straight run of raceways to locate the last insert.
(d) Other Raceways Flush with Concrete. In office occupancies,
approved metal flat-top raceways, if not over 100 mm in width, shall 3.90.1.10 Dead Ends. Dead ends of raceways shall be closed.
be permitted to be laid flush with the concrete floor surface, provided
they are covered with substantial linoleum that is not less than 3.90.1.13 Junction Boxes. Junction boxes shall be leveled to the floor
1.60 mm thick or with equivalent floor covering. Where more than one grade and sealed to prevent the free entrance of water or concrete.
and not more than three single raceways are each installed flush with Junction boxes used with metal raceways shall be metal and shall be
the concrete, they shall be contiguous with each other and joined to electrically continuous with the raceways.
form a rigid assembly.
3.90.1.14 Inserts. Inserts shall be leveled and sealed to prevent the
3.90.1.4 Size of Conductors. No conductor larger than that for which entrance of concrete. Inserts used with metal raceways shall be metal
the raceway is designed shall be installed in underfloor raceways. and shall be electrically continuous with the raceway. Inserts set in or
on fiber raceways before the floor is laid shall be mechanically
3.90.1.5 Maximum Number of Conductors in Raceway. The secured to the raceway. Inserts set in fiber raceways after the floor is
combined cross-sectional area of all conductors or cables shall not laid shall be screwed into the raceway. When cutting through the
exceed 40 percent of the interior cross-sectional area of the raceway. raceway wall and setting inserts, chips and other dirt shall not be
allowed to remain in the raceway, and tools shall be used that are
3.90.1.6 Splices and Taps. Splices and taps shall be made only in designed so as to prevent the tool from entering the raceway and
junction boxes. damaging conductors that may be in place.
For the purposes of this section, so-called loop wiring (continuous,
unbroken conductor connecting the individual outlets) shall not be 3.90.1.15 Connections to Cabinets and Wall Outlets. Connections
considered to be a splice or tap. from underfloor raceways to distribution centers and wall outlets shall
be made by approved fittings or by any of the wiring methods in
Exception: Splices and taps shall be permitted in trench-type flush Chapter 3, where installed in accordance with the provisions of the
respective articles. supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner service the installed
cable tray system, any of the cables in 3.92.1.3(b)(1) and (b)(2) shall
3.90.1.17 Ampacity of Conductors. The ampacity adjustment factors, be permitted to be installed in ladder, ventilated trough, solid bottom,
in 3.10.1.15(b)(2), shall apply to conductors installed in underfloor or ventilated channel cable trays.
raceways.

ARTICLE 3.92 — CABLE TRAYS Table 3.92.1.3(a) Wiring Methods

Wiring Method Article Section
3.92.1.1 Scope. This article covers cable tray systems, including Armored cable 3.20
ladder, ventilated trough, ventilated channel, solid bottom, and other Communication raceways 8.0
similar structures. Electrical metallic tubing 3.58
Electrical nonmetallic tubing 3.62
FPN: For further information on cable trays, see ANSI/NEMA–VE 1-1998,Metal
Cable Tray Systems; NEMA–VE 2-1996, Metal Cable Tray Installation Guidelines;
Fire alarm cables 7.60
and NEMA–FG-1998, Nonmetallic Cable Tray Systems. Flexible metal conduit 3.48
Flexible metallic tubing 3.60
3.92.1.2 Definition. Instrumentation tray cable 7.27
Intermediate metal conduit 3.42
Cable Tray System. A unit or assembly of units or sections and Liquidtight flexible metal conduit 3.50
associated fittings forming a structural system used to securely fasten Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit 3.56
or support cables and raceways. Metal-clad cable 3.30
Mineral-insulated, metal-sheathed cable 3.32
3.92.1.3 Uses Permitted. Cable tray shall be permitted to be used as a Multiconductor service-entrance cable 3.38
support system for service conductors, feeders, branch circuits, Multiconductor underground feeder and 3.40
communications circuits, control circuits, and signaling circuits. Cable branch-circuit cable
tray installations shall not be limited to industrial establishments. Multipurpose and communications 8.0
Where exposed to direct rays of the sun, insulated conductors and cables
jacketed cables shall be identified as being sunlight resistant. Cable Nonmetallic-sheathed cable 3.34
trays and their associated fittings shall be identified for the intended Power and control tray cable 3.36
use. Power-limited tray cable 7.25.3.21(c),
7.25.4.1(e)
(a) Wiring Methods. The wiring methods in Table 3.92.1.3(a) shall Optical fiber cables 7.70
be permitted to be installed in cable tray systems under the conditions Optical fiber raceways 7.70
described in their respectve articles and sections. Other factory-assembled,
multiconductor control, signal, or power
(b) In Industrial Establishments. The wiring methods in Table cables that are specifically approved for
3.92.1.3(a) shall be permitted to be used in any industrial installation in cable trays
establishment under the conditions described in their respective Rigid metal conduit 3.44
articles. In industrial establishments only, where conditions of Rigid nonmetallic conduit 3.52
maintenance and supervision ensure that only licensed electrical
practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner under the
 3.92.1.5 Construction Specifications.
(1) Single Conductors. Single-conductor cables shall be permitted
to be installed in accordance with (b)(1)a through (b)(1)c. (a) Strength and Rigidity. Cable trays shall have suitable strength
and rigidity to provide adequate support for all contained wiring.
a. Single-conductor cable shall be 50 mm2 or larger and shall be
of a type listed and marked on the surface for use in cable trays. (b) Smooth Edges. Cable trays shall not have sharp edges, burrs, or
Where 50 mm2 through 100 mm2 single-conductor cables are installed projections that could damage the insulation or jackets of the wiring.
in ladder cable tray, the maximum allowable rung spacing for the
ladder cable tray shall be 230 mm. (c) Corrosion Protection. Cable tray systems shall be corrosion
b. Welding cables shall comply with the provisions of resistant. If made of ferrous material, the system shall be protected
Part 6.30.4. from corrosion as required by 3.0.1.6.
c. Single conductors used as equipment grounding conductors
shall be insulated, covered, or bare, and they shall be 22 mm2 or (d) Side Rails. Cable trays shall have side rails or equivalent
larger. structural members.

(2) Medium Voltage. Single- and multiconductor medium voltage (e) Fittings. Cable trays shall include fittings or other suitable
cables shall be Type MV cable. Single conductors shall be installed in means for changes in direction and elevation of runs.
accordance with 3.92.1.3(b)(1).
(f) Nonmetallic Cable Tray. Nonmetallic cable trays shall be made
(c) Equipment Grounding Conductors. Metallic cable trays shall of flame-retardant material.
be permitted to be used as equipment grounding conductors where
continuous maintenance and supervision ensure that licensed electrical 3.92.1.6 Installation.
practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner under the
supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner service the installed (a) Complete System. Cable trays shall be installed as a complete
cable tray system and the cable tray complies with provisions of system. Field bends or modifications shall be so made that the
3.92.1.7. electrical continuity of the cable tray system and support for the cables
is maintained. Cable tray systems shall be permitted to have
(d) Hazardous (Classified) Locations. Cable trays in hazardous mechanically discontinuous segments between cable tray runs or
(classified) locations shall contain only the cable types permitted in between cable tray runs and equipment. The system shall provide for
5.1.2.1, 5.2.2.1, 5.3.2.1, 5.4.1.20, and 5.5.1.15. the support of the cables in accordance with their corresponding
articles.
(e) Nonmetallic Cable Tray. In addition to the uses permitted Where cable trays support individual conductors and where the
elsewhere in 3.92.1.3, nonmetallic cable tray shall be permitted in conductors pass from one cable tray to another, or from a cable tray to
corrosive areas and in areas requiring voltage isolation. raceway(s) or from a cable tray to equipment where the conductors are
terminated, the distance between cable trays or between the cable tray
3.92.1.4 Uses Not Permitted. Cable tray systems shall not be used in and the raceway(s) or the equipment shall not exceed 1 800 mm. The
hoistways or where subject to severe physical damage. Cable tray conductors shall be secured to the cable tray(s) at the transition, and
systems shall not be used in ducts, plenums, and other air-handling they shall be protected, by guarding or by location, from physical
spaces, except as permitted in 3.0.1.22, to support wiring methods damage.
recognized for use in such spaces. A bonding jumper sized in accordance with 2.50.5.13 shall connect
the two sections of cable tray, or the cable tray and the raceway or
equipment. Bonding shall be in accordance with 2.50.5.7. (j) Raceways, Cables, Boxes, and Conduit Bodies Supported
from Cable Tray Systems. In industrial facilities where conditions of
(b) Completed Before Installation. Each run of cable tray shall be maintenance and supervision ensure that only licensed electrical
completed before the installation of cables. practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner under the
supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner service the installation
(c) Supports. Supports shall be provided to prevent stress on cables and where the cable tray systems are designed and installed to support
where they enter raceways or other enclosures from cable tray the load, such systems shall be permitted to support raceways and
systems. cables, and boxes and conduit bodies covered in 3.14.1.1. For
Cable trays shall be supported at intervals in accordance with the raceways terminating at the tray, a listed cable tray clamp or adapter
installation instructions. shall be used to securely fasten the raceway to the cable tray system.
Additional supporting and securing of the raceway shall be in
(d) Covers. In portions of runs where additional protection is accordance with the requirements of the appropriate raceway article.
required, covers or enclosures providing the required protection shall For raceways or cables running parallel to and attached to the
be of a material that is compatible with the cable tray. bottom or side of a cable tray system, fastening and supporting shall
be in accordance with the requirements of the appropriate raceway or
(e) Multiconductor Cables Rated 600 Volts or Less. cable article.
Multiconductor cables rated 600 volts or less shall be permitted to be For boxes and conduit bodies attached to the bottom or side of a
installed in the same cable tray. cable tray system, fastening and supporting shall be in accordance
with the requirements of 3.14.2.9.
(f) Cables Rated Over 600 Volts. Cables rated over 600 volts and
those rated 600 volts or less installed in the same cable tray shall 3.92.1.7 Grounding.
comply with either of the following:
(a) Metallic Cable Trays. Metallic cable trays that support
(1) The cables rated over 600 volts are Type MC. electrical conductors shall be grounded as required for conductor
(2) The cables rated over 600 volts are separated from the cables enclosures in accordance with 2.50.5.7.
rated 600 volts or less by a solid fixed barrier of a material compatible
with the cable tray. (b) Steel or Aluminum Cable Tray Systems. Steel or aluminum
cable tray systems shall be permitted to be used as equipment
(g) Through Partitions and Walls. Cable trays shall be permitted grounding conductors, provided that all the following requirements are
to extend transversely through partitions and walls or vertically met:
through platforms and floors in wet or dry locations where the
installations, complete with installed cables, are made in accordance (1) The cable tray sections and fittings shall be identified for
with the requirements of 3.0.1.21. grounding purposes.
(2) The minimum cross-sectional area of cable trays shall
(h) Exposed and Accessible. Cable trays shall be exposed and conform to the requirements in Table 3.92.1.7(b).
accessible except as permitted by 3.92.1.6(g). (3) All cable tray sections and fittings shall be legibly and durably
marked to show the cross-sectional area of metal in channel cable
(i) Adequate Access. Sufficient space shall be provided and trays, or cable trays of one-piece construction, and the total cross-
maintained about cable trays to permit adequate access for installing sectional area of both side rails for ladder or trough cable trays.
and maintaining the cables. (4) Cable tray sections, fittings, and connected raceways shall be
bonded in accordance with 2.50.5.7, using bolted mechanical
connectors or bonding jumpers sized and installed in accordance with (d) Connected in Parallel. Where single conductor cables
2.50.5.13. comprising each phase, neutral; or grounded conductor of an
alternating-current circuit are connected in parallel as permitted in
3.10.1.4, the conductors shall be installed in groups consisting of not
Table 3.92.1.7(b) Metal Area Requirements for Cable more than one conductor per phase, neutral, or grounded conductor to
Trays Used as Equipment Grounding Conductor prevent current imbalance in the paralleled conductors due to
Maximum Fuse Ampere Rating, Minimum Cross-Sectional inductive reactance.
Circuit Breaker Ampere Trip Area of Metala Single conductors shall be securely bound in circuit groups to
Setting, or Circuit Breaker prevent excessive movement due to fault-current magnetic forces
Protective Relay Ampere Trip unless single conductors are cabled together, such as triplexed
Setting for Ground-Fault Steel Cable Aluminum assemblies.
Protection of Any Cable Circuit Trays Cable Trays
in the Cable Tray System mm2 mm2 (e) Single Conductors. Where any of the single conductors installed
60 129 129 in ladder or ventilated trough cable trays are 50 mm2 through
100 258 129 100 mm2, all single conductors shall be installed in a single layer.
200 451.5 129 Conductors that are bound together to comprise each circuit group
400 645 258 shall be permitted to be installed in other than a single layer.
600 967.5 258
1000 — 387 3.92.1.9 Number of Multiconductor Cables, Rated 2000 Volts or
1200 — 645 Less, in Cable Trays. The number of multiconductor cables, rated
1600 — 967.5 2 000 volts or less, permitted in a single cable tray shall not exceed the
2000 — 1290 requirements of this section. The conductor sizes herein apply to both
a
Total cross-sectional area of both side rails for ladder or trough cable trays; or the aluminum and copper conductors.
minimum cross-sectional area of metal in channel cable trays or cable trays of one-
piece construction. (a) Any Mixture of Cables. Where ladder or ventilated trough cable
trays contain multiconductor power or lighting cables, or any mixture
of multiconductor power, lighting, control, and signal cables, the
maximum number of cables shall conform to the following:
3.92.1.8 Cable Installation.
(1) Where all of the cables are 100 mm2 or larger, the sum of the
(a) Cable Splices. Cable splices made and insulated by approved diameters of all cables shall not exceed the cable tray width, and the
methods shall be permitted to be located within a cable tray, provided cables shall be installed in a single layer.
they are accessible and do not project above the side rails. (2) Where all of the cables are smaller than 100 mm2, the sum of
the cross-sectional areas of all cables shall not exceed the maximum
(b) Fastened Securely. In other than horizontal runs, the cables allowable cable fill area in Column 1 of Table 3.92.1.9 for the
shall be fastened securely to transverse members of the cable trays. appropriate cable tray width.
(3) Where 100 mm2 or larger cables are installed in the same
(c) Bushed Conduit and Tubing. A box shall not be required cable tray with cables smaller than 100 mm2, the sum of the cross-
where cables or conductors are installed in bushed conduit and tubing sectional areas of all cables smaller than 100 mm2 shall not exceed the
used for support or for protection against physical damage. maximum allowable fill area resulting from the calculation in Column
2 of Table 3.92.1.9 for the appropriate cable tray width. The 100 mm2
and larger cables shall be installed in a single layer, and no other
cables shall be placed on them.

(b) Multiconductor Control and/or Signal Cables Only. Where a

ladder or ventilated trough cable tray having a usable inside depth of
150 mm or less contains multiconductor control and/or signal cables
only, the sum of the cross-sectional areas of all cables at any cross
section shall not exceed 50 percent of the interior cross-sectional area
of the cable tray. A depth of 150 mm shall be used to calculate the
allowable interior cross-sectional area of any cable tray that has a
usable inside depth of more than 150 mm.

(c) Solid Bottom Cable Trays Containing Any Mixture. Where

solid bottom cable trays contain multiconductor power or lighting
cables, or any mixture of multiconductor power, lighting, control, and
signal cables, the maximum number of cables shall conform to the
following:

(1) Where all of the cables are 100 mm2 or larger, the sum of the
diameters of all cables shall not exceed 90 percent of the cable tray
width, and the cables shall be installed in a single layer.
(2) Where all of the cables are smaller than 100 mm2, the sum of
the cross-sectional areas of all cables shall not exceed the maximum
allowable cable fill area in Column 3 of Table 3.92.1.9 for the
appropriate cable tray width.
(3) Where 100 mm2 or larger cables are installed in the same
cable tray with cables smaller than 100 mm2, the sum of the cross-
sectional areas of all cables smaller than 100 mm2 shall not exceed the
maximum allowable fill area resulting from the computation in
Column 4 of Table 3.92.1.9 for the appropriate cable tray width. The
100 mm2 and larger cables shall be installed in a single layer, and no
other cables shall be placed on them.

(d) Solid Bottom Cable Tray — Multiconductor Control and/or

Signal Cables Only. Where a solid bottom cable tray having a usable
inside depth of 150 mm or less contains multiconductor control and/or
signal cables only, the sum of the cross-sectional areas of all cables at
any cross section shall not exceed 40 percent of the interior cross-
sectional area of the cable tray. A depth of 150 mm shall be used to
calculate the allowable interior cross-sectional area of any cable tray
that has a usable inside depth of more than 150 mm.
 Table 3.92.1.9 Allowable Cable Fill Area for Multiconductor Cables in Ladder, Ventilated Trough, or Solid
Bottom Cable Trays for Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less
Maximum Allowable Fill Area for Multiconductor Cables
Ladder or Ventilated Trough Cable Trays,
3.92.1.9(a) Solid Bottom Cable Trays, 3.92.1.9(c)
Column 1 Column 2a Column 3 Column 4a
Inside Width of Applicable for Applicable for Applicable for Applicable for
Cable Tray 3.92.1.9(a)(2) Only 3.92.1.9(a)(3) Only 3.92.1.9(c)(2) Only 3.92.1.9(c)(3) Only
mm mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2
b
150 4 500 4 500 – (30 Sd) 3 500 3 500–(25 Sdb)
225 6 800 6 800 – (30 Sd) 5 100 5 100–(25 Sd)
300 9 000 9 000 – (30 Sd) 7 100 7 100–(25 Sd)
450 13 500 13 500 – (30 Sd) 10 600 10 600–(25 Sd)
600 18 000 18 000 – (30 Sd) 14 200 14 200–(25 Sd)
750 22 500 22 500 – (30 Sd) 17 700 17,700–(25 Sd)
900 27 000 27 000 – (30 Sd) 21 300 21 300–(25 Sd)
a
The maximum allowable fill areas in Columns 2 and 4 shall be calculated. For example, the maximum allowable fill in mm2 for a 150 mm
wide cable tray in Column 2 shall be 4 500 minus (30 multiplied by Sd) [the maximum allowable fill, in square inches, for a 150 mm wide cable
tray in Column 2 shall be 7 minus (1.2 multiplied by Sd)].
b
The term Sd in Columns 2 and 4 is equal to the sum of the diameters, in mm, of all cables 107.2 mm (in inches, of all 4/0 AWG) and larger
multiconductor cables in the same cable tray with smaller cables.
 Table 3.92.1.9(f) Allowable Cable Fill Area for Multiconductor
(e) Ventilated Channel Cable Trays. Where ventilated channel Cables in Solid Channel Cable Trays for Cables Rated 2000 Volts
cable trays contain multiconductor cables of any type, the following or Less
shall apply:
Column 2
(1) Where only one multiconductor cable is installed, the cross- Inside Width of Column 1 More Than One
sectional area shall not exceed the value specified in Column 1 of Cable Tray One Cable Cable
Table 3.92.1.9(e). mm mm2 mm2
(2) Where more than one multiconductor cable is installed, the 50 850 500
sum of the cross-sectional area of all cables shall not exceed the value 75 1 300 700
specified in Column 2 of Table 3.92.1.9(e). 100 2 400 1 400
150 3 600 2 100

Table 3.92.1.9(e) Allowable Cable Fill Area for Multiconductor

Cables in Ventilated Channel Cable Trays for Cables Rated 2000
Volts or Less 3.92.1.10 Number of Single-Conductor Cables, Rated 2000 Volts
or Less, in Cable Trays. The number of single-conductor cables,
Maximum Allowable Fill Area for rated 2000 volts or less, permitted in a single cable tray section shall
Multiconductor Cables not exceed the requirements of this section. The single conductors, or
Column 2 conductor assemblies, shall be evenly distributed across the cable tray.
Inside Width of Column 1 More Than One The conductor sizes herein apply to both aluminum and copper
Cable Tray One Cable Cable conductors.
mm mm2 mm2
75 1 500 850 (a) Ladder or Ventilated Trough Cable Trays. Where ladder or
100 2 900 1 600 ventilated trough cable trays contain single-conductor cables, the
150 4 500 2 450 maximum number of single conductors shall conform to the following:

(1) Where all of the cables are 500 mm2 or larger, the sum of the
diameters of all single conductor cables shall not exceed cable tray
(f) Solid Channel Cable Trays. Where solid channel cable trays width, and the cables shall be installed in a single layer. Conductors
contain multiconductor cables of any type, the following shall apply: that are bound together to comprise each circuit group shall be
permitted to be installed in other than a single layer.
(1) Where only one multiconductor cable is installed, the cross- (2) Where all of the cables are from 125 mm2 up to 500 mm2, the
sectional area of the cable shall not exceed the value specified in sum of the cross-sectional areas of all single-conductor cables shall not
Column 1 of Table 3.92.1.9(f). exceed the maximum allowable cable fill area in Column 1 of Table
(2) Where more than one multiconductor cable is installed, the 3.92.1.10(a) for the appropriate cable tray width.
sum of the cross-sectional area of all cable shall not exceed the value (3) Where 500 mm2 or larger single-conductor cables are installed
specified in Column 2 of Table 3.92.1.9(f). in the same cable tray with single-conductor cables smaller than
500 mm2, the sum of the cross-sectional areas of all cables smaller
than 500 mm2 shall not exceed the maximum allowable fill area
resulting from the computation in Column 2 of Table 3.92.1.10(a) for Table 3.92.1.10(a) Allowable Cable Fill Area for Single-
the appropriate cable tray width. Conductor Cables in Ladder or Ventilated Trough Cable Trays
(4) Where any of the single conductor cables are 50 mm2 through for Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less
100 mm2, the sum of the diameters of all single conductor cables shall
not exceed the cable tray width. Maximum Allowable Fill Area for Single-
Conductor Cables in Ladder or Ventilated
(b) Ventilated Channel Cable Trays. Where 50 mm, 75 mm, Trough Cable Trays
100 mm, or 150 mm wide ventilated channel cable trays contain Column 1 Column 2a
single-conductor cables, the sum of the diameters of all single Inside Width of Applicable for Applicable for
conductors shall not exceed the inside width of the channel. Cable Tray 3.92.1.10(a)(2) Only 3.92.1.10(a)(3) Only
mm mm2 mm2
3.92.1.11 Ampacity of Cables, Rated 2000 Volts or Less, in Cable 150 4 200 4 200 – (28 Sd)b
Trays. 225 6 100 6 100 – (28 Sd)
300 8 400 8 400 – (28 Sd)
(a) Multiconductor Cables. The allowable ampacity of 450 12 600 12 600 – (28 Sd)
multiconductor cables, nominally rated 2 000 volts or less, installed 600 16 800 16 800 – (28 Sd)
according to the requirements of 3.92.1.9 shall be as given in Table 750 21 000 21 000 – (28 Sd)
3.10.1.16 and Table 3.10.1.18, subject to the provisions of (1), (2), (3), 900 25 200 25 200 – (28 Sd)
and 3.10.1.15(a)(2). a
The maximum allowable fill areas in Column 2 shall be calculated. For example,
the maximum allowable fill, in mm2, for a 150 mm wide cable tray in Column 2 shall
(1) The derating factors of 3.10.1.15(b)(2)a shall apply only to be 4 200 minus (28 multiplied by Sd) [the maximum allowable fill, in square inches,
for a 6-in. wide cable tray in Column 2 shall be 6.5 minus (1.1 multiplied by Sd)].
multiconductor cables with more than three current-carrying b
The term Sd in Column 2 is equal to the sum of the diameters, in mm, of all cables
conductors. Derating shall be limited to the number of current-carrying 507 mm2 (in inches, of all 500 mm2) and larger single-conductor cables in the same
conductors in the cable and not to the number of conductors in the ladder or ventilated trough cable tray with small cables.
cable tray.
(2) Where cable trays are continuously covered for more than 1.8
m (6 ft) with solid unventilated covers, not over 95 percent of the
allowable ampacities of Table 3.10.1.16 and Table 3.10.1.18 shall be (b) Single-Conductor Cables. The allowable ampacity of single-
permitted for multiconductor cables. conductor cables shall be as permitted by 3.10.1.15(a)(2). The derating
(3) Where multiconductor cables are installed in a single layer in factors of 3.10.1.15(b)(2)(a) shall not apply to the ampacity of cables
uncovered trays, with a maintained spacing of not less than one cable in cable trays. The ampacity of single-conductor cables, or single
diameter between cables, the ampacity shall not exceed the allowable conductors cabled together (triplexed, quadruplexed, etc.), nominally
ambient temperature-corrected ampacities of multiconductor cables, rated 2000 volts or less, shall comply with the following:
with not more than three insulated conductors rated 0 through 2000
volts in free air, in accordance with 3.10.1.15(c). (1) Where installed according to the requirements of 3.92.1.10,
the ampacities for 600 kcmil and larger single-conductor cables in
FPN: See Table B.3.10.1.3. uncovered cable trays shall not exceed 75 percent of the allowable
ampacities in Table 3.10.1.17 and Table 3.10.1.19. Where cable trays
are continuously covered for more than 1 800 mm with solid
unventilated covers, the ampacities for 325 mm2 and larger cables
shall not exceed 70 percent of the allowable ampacities in Table 3.92.1.13 Ampacity of Type MV and Type MC Cables (2001 Volts
3.10.1.17 and Table 3.10.1.19. or Over) in Cable Trays. The ampacity of cables, rated 2001 volts,
(2) Where installed according to the requirements of 3.92.1.10, nominal, or over, installed according to 3.92.1.12 shall not exceed the
the ampacities for 50 mm2 through 125 mm2 single-conductor cables requirements of this section.
in uncovered cable trays shall not exceed 65 percent of the allowable
ampacities in Table 3.10.1.17 and Table 3.10.1.19. Where cable trays (a) Multiconductor Cables (2001 Volts or Over). The allowable
are continuously covered for more than 1.8 m (6 ft) with solid ampacity of multiconductor cables shall be as given in Table 3.10.1.75
unventilated covers, the ampacities for 50 mm2 through 250 mm2 and Table 3.10.1.76, subject to the following provisions:
cables shall not exceed 60 percent of the allowable ampacities in Table
3.10.1.17 and Table 3.10.1.19. (1) Where cable trays are continuously covered for more than
(3) Where single conductors are installed in a single layer in 1 800 mm with solid unventilated covers, not more than 95 percent of
uncovered cable trays, with a maintained space of not less than one the allowable ampacities of Table 3.10.1.75 and Table 3.10.1.76 shall
cable diameter between individual conductors, the ampacity of be permitted for multiconductor cables.
50 mm2 and larger cables shall not exceed the allowable ampacities in (2) Where multiconductor cables are installed in a single layer in
Table 3.10.1.17 and Table 3.10.1.19. uncovered cable trays, with maintained spacing of not less than one
cable diameter between cables, the ampacity shall not exceed the
Exception to (b)(3): For solid bottom cable trays the ampacity of allowable ampacities of Table 3.10.1.71 and Table 3.10.1.72.
single conductor cables shall be determined by 3.10.1.15(c).
(b) Single-Conductor Cables (2001 Volts or Over). The ampacity
(4) Where single conductors are installed in a triangular or square of single-conductor cables, or single conductors cabled together
configuration in uncovered cable trays, with a maintained free airspace (triplexed, quadruplexed, etc.), shall comply with the following:
of not less than 2.15 times one conductor diameter (2.15 × O.D.) of the
largest conductor contained within the configuration and adjacent (1) The ampacities for 50 mm2 and larger single-conductor cables
conductor configurations or cables, the ampacity of 50 mm2 and larger in uncovered cable trays shall not exceed 75 percent of the allowable
cables shall not exceed the allowable ampacities of two or three single ampacities in Table 3.10.1.69 and Table 3.10.1.70. Where the cable
insulated conductors rated 0 through 2 000 volts supported on a trays are covered for more than 1 800 mm with solid unventilated
messenger in accordance with 3.10.1.15(b). covers, the ampacities for 50 mm2 and larger single-conductor cables
shall not exceed 70 percent of the allowable ampacities in Table
FPN: See Table 3.10.1.20. 3.10.1.69 and Table 3.10.1.70.
(2) Where single-conductor cables are installed in a single layer in
3.92.1.12 Number of Type MV and Type MC Cables (2001 Volts uncovered cable trays, with a maintained space of not less than one
or Over) in Cable Trays. The number of cables rated 2001 volts or cable diameter between individual conductors, the ampacity of
over permitted in a single cable tray shall not exceed the requirements 50 mm2 and larger cables shall not exceed the allowable ampacities in
of this section. Table 3.10.1.69 and Table 3.10.1.70.
The sum of the diameters of single-conductor and multiconductor (3) Where single conductors are installed in a triangular or square
cables shall not exceed the cable tray width, and the cables shall be configuration in uncovered cable trays, with a maintained free air
installed in a single layer. Where single conductor cables are triplexed, space of not less than 2.15 times the diameter (2.15 × O.D.) of the
quadruplexed, or bound together in circuit groups, the sum of the largest conductor contained within the configuration and adjacent
diameters of the single conductors shall not exceed the cable tray conductor configurations or cables, the ampacity of 50 mm2 and larger
width, and these groups shall be installed in single layer arrangement. cables shall not exceed the allowable ampacities in Table 3.10.1.67
and Table 3.10.1.68.
 ARTICLE 3.94 — CONCEALED KNOB-AND-TUBE WIRING 3.94.2.10 Clearances.

3.94.1 General (a) General. A clearance of not less than 75 mm shall be maintained
between conductors and a clearance of not less than 25 mm between
3.94.1.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and the conductor and the surface over which it passes.
construction specifications of concealed knob-and-tube wiring.
(b) Limited Conductor Space. Where space is too limited to
3.94.1.2. Definition. provide these minimum clearances, such as at meters, panelboards,
outlets, and switch points, the individual conductors shall be enclosed
Concealed Knob-and-Tube Wiring. A wiring method using knobs, in flexible nonmetallic tubing, which shall be continuous in length
tubes, and flexible nonmetallic tubing for the protection and support of between the last support and the enclosure or terminal point.
single insulated conductors.
(c) Clearance from Piping, Exposed Conductors, and So Forth.
3.94.2 Installation Conductors shall comply with 3.98.2.10 for clearances from other
exposed conductors, piping, and so forth.
3.94.2.1 Uses Permitted. Concealed knob-and-tube wiring shall be
permitted to be installed in the hollow spaces of walls and ceilings or 3.94.2.14 In Accessible Attics. Conductors in unfinished attics and
in unfinished attics and roof spaces as provided by 3.94.2.14 only as roof spaces shall comply with 3.94.2.14(a) or (b).
follows:
FPN: See 3.10.1.10 for temperature limitation of conductors.
(1) For extensions of existing installations
(2) Elsewhere by special permission (a) Accessible by Stairway or Permanent Ladder. Conductors
shall be installed along the side of or through bored holes in floor
3.94.2.3 Uses Not Permitted. Concealed knob-and-tube wiring shall joists, studs, or rafters. Where run through bored holes, conductors in
not be used in the following: the joists and in studs or rafters to a height of not less than 2 100 mm
above the floor or floor joists shall be protected by substantial running
(1) Commercial garages boards extending not less than 25 mm on each side of the conductors.
(2) Theaters and similar locations Running boards shall be securely fastened in place. Running boards
(3) Motion picture studios and guard strips shall not be required where conductors are installed
(4) Hazardous (classified) locations along the sides of joists, studs, or rafters.
(5) Hollow spaces of walls, ceilings, and attics where such spaces
are insulated by loose, rolled, or foamed-in-place insulating material (b) Not Accessible by Stairway or Permanent Ladder.
that envelops the conductors Conductors shall be installed along the sides of or through bored holes
in floor joists, studs, or rafters.
3.94.2.8 Through or Parallel to Framing Members. Conductors
shall comply with 3.98.2.8 where passing through holes in structural Exception: In buildings completed before the wiring is installed, attic
members. Where passing through wood cross members in plastered and roof spaces that are not accessible by stairway or permanent
partitions, conductors shall be protected by noncombustible, ladder and have headroom at all points less than 900 mm, the wiring
nonabsorbent, insulating tubes extending not less than 75 mm beyond shall be permitted to be installed on the edges of rafters or joists
the wood member. facing the attic or roof space.
 using a messenger wire to support insulated conductors by any one of
3.94.2.21 Securing and Supporting. the following:

(a) Supporting. Conductors shall be rigidly supported on (1) A messenger with rings and saddles for conductor support
noncombustible, nonabsorbent insulating materials and shall not (2) A messenger with a field-installed lashing material for
contact any other objects. Supports shall be installed as follows: conductor support
(3) Factory-assembled aerial cable
(1) Within 150 mm of each side of each tap or splice, and (4) Multiplex cables utilizing a bare conductor, factory assembled
(2) At intervals not exceeding 1 400 mm. and twisted with one or more insulated conductors, such as duplex,
triplex, or quadruplex type of construction
Where it is impracticable to provide supports, conductors shall be
permitted to be fished through hollow spaces in dry locations, 3.96.2 Installation
provided each conductor is individually enclosed in flexible
nonmetallic tubing that is in continuous lengths between supports, 3.96.2.1 Uses Permitted.
between boxes, or between a support and a box.
(a) Cable Types. The cable types in Table 3.96.2.1(a) shall be
(b) Securing. Where solid knobs are used, conductors shall be permitted to be installed in messenger supported wiring under the
securely tied thereto by tie wires having insulation equivalent to that conditions described in the article or section referenced for each.
of the conductor.
(b) In Industrial Establishments. In industrial establishments only,
3.94.2.33 Devices. Switches shall comply with 4.4.1.4 and 4.4.1.10(b). where conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that only
licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner
3.94.2.47 Splices and Taps. Splices shall be soldered unless approved under the supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner service the
splicing devices are used. In-line or strain splices shall not be used. installed messenger supported wiring, the following shall be
permitted:
3.94.3 Construction Specifications
(1) Any of the conductor types shown in Table 3.10.1.13 or Table
3.94.3.1 Conductors. Conductors shall be of a type specified by 3.10.1.62
Article 3.10. (2) MV cable

Where exposed to weather, conductors shall be listed for use in wet

ARTICLE 3.96 — MESSENGER SUPPORTED WIRING locations. Where exposed to direct rays of the sun, conductors or
cables shall be sunlight resistant.
3.96.1 General
(c) Hazardous (Classified) Locations. Messenger supported wiring
3.96.1.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and shall be permitted to be used in hazardous (classified) locations where
construction specifications for messenger supported wiring. the contained cables are permitted for such use in 5.1.2.1, 5.2.2.1,
5.3.2.1, and 5.4.1.20.
3.96.1.2 Definition.
3.96.2.3 Uses Not Permitted. Messenger supported wiring shall not
Messenger Supported Wiring. An exposed wiring support system be used in hoistways or where subject to physical damage.
 ARTICLE 398 — OPEN WIRING ON INSULATORS

Table 3.96.2.1(a) Cable Types 3.98 General

Cable Type Section Article
Metal-clad cable 3.30 3.98.1.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and
Mineral-insulated, metal- 3.32 construction specifications of open wiring on insulators.
sheathed cable
Multiconductor service- 3.38 3.98.1.2 Definition.
entrance cable
Multiconductor underground 3.40 Open Wiring on Insulators. An exposed wiring method using
feeder and branch-circuit cleats, knobs, tubes, and flexible tubing for the protection and support
cable of single insulated conductors run in or on buildings.
Other factory-assembled,
multiconductor control, 3.98.2 Installation
signal, or power cables that
are identified for the use 3.98.2.1 Uses Permitted. Open wiring on insulators shall be permitted
Power and control tray cable 3.36 only for industrial or agricultural establishments on systems of 600
Power-limited tray cable 7.25.3.21(c) and volts, nominal, or less, as follows:
7.25.3.21(c) and 7.25.4.1(e) 7.25.4.1(e)
(1) Indoors or outdoors
(2) In wet or dry locations
(3) Where subject to corrosive vapors
(4) For services
3.96.2.21 Messenger Support. The messenger shall be supported at
dead ends and at intermediate locations so as to eliminate tension on 3.98.2.3 Uses Not Permitted. Open wiring on insulators shall not be
the conductors. The conductors shall not be permitted to come into installed where concealed by the building structure.
contact with the messenger supports or any structural members, walls,
or pipes. 3.98.2.6 Exposed Work.

3.96.2.47 Conductor Splices and Taps. Conductor splices and taps (a) Dry Locations. In dry locations, where not exposed to physical
made and insulated by approved methods shall be permitted in damage, conductors shall be permitted to be separately enclosed in
messenger supported wiring. flexible nonmetallic tubing. The tubing shall be in continuous lengths
not exceeding 4 500 mm and secured to the surface by straps at
3.96.2.51 Grounding. The messenger shall be grounded as required intervals not exceeding 1 400 mm.
by 2.50.4.1 and 2.50.4.7 for enclosure grounding.
(b) Entering Spaces Subject to Dampness, Wetness, or Corrosive
Vapors. Conductors entering or leaving locations subject to dampness,
wetness, or corrosive vapors shall have drip loops formed on them and
shall then pass upward and inward from the outside of the buildings,
or from the damp, wet, or corrosive location, through noncombustible,
nonabsorbent insulating tubes.
 and from any exposed lighting, power, or signaling conductor, or shall
FPN: See 2.30.4.13 for individual conductors entering buildings or other structures. be separated therefrom by a continuous and firmly fixed nonconductor
in addition to the insulation of the conductor. Where any insulating
(c) Exposed to Physical Damage. Conductors within 2 100 mm tube is used, it shall be secured at the ends. Where practicable,
from the floor shall be considered exposed to physical damage. Where conductors shall pass over rather than under any piping subject to
open conductors cross ceiling joists and wall studs and are exposed to leakage or accumulations of moisture.
physical damage, they shall be protected by one of the following
methods: 3.98.2.14 In Accessible Attics. Conductors in unfinished attics and
roof spaces shall comply with 3.98.2.14(a) or (b).
(1) Guard strips not less than 25 mm nominal in thickness and at
least as high as the insulating supports, placed on each side of and (a) Accessible by Stairway or Permanent Ladder. Conductors
close to the wiring. shall be installed along the side of or through bored holes in floor
(2) A substantial running board at least 13 mm thick in back of joists, studs, or rafters. Where run through bored holes, conductors in
the conductors with side protections. Running boards shall extend at the joists and in studs or rafters to a height of not less than 2 100 mm
least 25 mm outside the conductors, but not more than 50 mm, and the above the floor or floor joists shall be protected by substantial running
protecting sides shall be at least 50 mm high and at least 25 mm boards extending not less than 25 mm on each side of the conductors.
nominal in thickness. Running boards shall be securely fastened in place. Running boards
(3) Boxing made in accordance with 3.98.2.6(c)(1) or (c)(2) and and guard strips shall not be required for conductors installed along
furnished with a cover kept at least 25 mm away from the conductors the sides of joists, studs, or rafters.
within. Where protecting vertical conductors on side walls, the boxing
shall be closed at the top and the holes through which the conductors (b) Not Accessible by Stairway or Permanent Ladder.
pass shall be bushed. Conductors shall be installed along the sides of or through bored holes
(4) Rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit, rigid in floor joists, studs, or rafters.
nonmetallic conduit, or electrical metallic tubing. When installed in
metal piping, the conductors shall be encased in continuous lengths of Exception: In buildings completed before the wiring is installed, attic
approved flexible tubing. and roof spaces that are not accessible by stairway or permanent
ladder and have headroom at all points less than 900 mm, the wiring
3.98.2.8 Through or Parallel to Framing Members. Open shall be permitted to be installed on the edges of rafters or joists
conductors shall be separated from contact with walls, floors, wood facing the attic or roof space.
cross members, or partitions through which they pass by tubes or
bushings of noncombustible, nonabsorbent insulating material. Where 3.98.2.21 Securing and Supporting.
the bushing is shorter than the hole, a waterproof sleeve of
noninductive material shall be inserted in the hole and an insulating (a) Conductor Sizes Smaller Than 8.0 mm2(3.2 mm dia.).
bushing slipped into the sleeve at each end in such a manner as to keep Conductors smaller than 8.0 mm2(3.2 mm dia.) shall be rigidly
the conductors absolutely out of contact with the sleeve. Each supported on noncombustible, nonabsorbent insulating materials and
conductor shall be carried through a separate tube or sleeve. shall not contact any other objects. Supports shall be installed as
follows:
FPN: See 3.10.1.10 for temperature limitation of conductors.

(1) Within 150 mm from a tap or splice

3.98.2.10 Clearances. Open conductors shall be separated at least 50
(2) Within 300 mm of a dead-end connection to a lampholder or
mm (2 in.) from metal raceways, piping, or other conducting material,
receptacle
 (3) At intervals not exceeding 1 400 mm and at closer intervals 3.98.3.1 Conductors. Conductors shall be of a type specified by
sufficient to provide adequate support where likely to be disturbed Article 3.10.

(b) Conductor Sizes 8.0 mm2(3.2 mm dia.) and Larger. Supports

for conductors 8.0 mm2(3.2 mm dia.) or larger installed across open
spaces shall be permitted up to 4 500 mm apart if noncombustible,
nonabsorbent insulating spacers are used at least every 1 400 mm to
maintain at least 65 mm between conductors.
Where not likely to be disturbed in buildings of mill construction,
8.0 mm2(3.2 mm dia.) and larger conductors shall be permitted to be
run across open spaces if supported from each wood cross member on
approved insulators maintaining 150 mm between conductors.

(c) Industrial Establishments. In industrial establishments only,

where conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that only
licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner
under the supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner service the
system, conductors of sizes 125 mm2 and larger shall be permitted to
be run across open spaces where supported at intervals up to 9 000
mm.

(d) Mounting of Conductor Supports. Where nails are used to

mount knobs, they shall not be smaller than tenpenny. Where screws
are used to mount knobs, or where nails or screws are used to mount
cleats, they shall be of a length sufficient to penetrate the wood to a
depth equal to at least one-half the height of the knob and the full
thickness of the cleat. Cushion washers shall be used with nails.

(e) Tie Wires. 8.0 mm2(3.2 mm dia.) or larger conductors supported

on solid knobs shall be securely tied thereto by tie wires having an
insulation equivalent to that of the conductor.

3.98.2.33 Devices. Surface-type snap switches shall be mounted in

accordance with 4.4.1.10(a), and boxes shall not be required. Other
type switches shall be installed in accordance with 4.4.1.4.

3.98.3 Construction Specifications

 Chapter 4. Equipment for General Use

ARTICLE 4.0 — FLEXIBLE CORDS AND CABLES

4.0.1 General

4.0.1.1 Scope. This article covers general requirements, applications,

and construction specifications for flexible cords and flexible cables.

4.0.1.2 Other Articles. Flexible cords and flexible cables shall

comply with this article and with the applicable provisions of other
articles of this Code.

4.0.1.3 Suitability. Flexible cords and cables and their associated

fittings shall be suitable for the conditions of use and location.

4.0.1.4 Types. Flexible cords and flexible cables shall conform to the
description in Table 4.0.1.4. Types of flexible cords and flexible
cables other than those listed in the table shall be the subject of special
investigation.

4.0.1.5 Ampacities for Flexible Cords and Cables.

(a) Ampacity Tables. Table 4.0.1.5(a) provides the allowable

ampacities, and Table 4.0.1.5(b) provides the ampacities for flexible
cords and cables with not more than three current-carrying conductors.
These tables shall be used in conjunction with applicable end-use
product standards to ensure selection of the proper size and type.
Where cords are used in ambient temperatures exceeding 30°C (86°F),
the temperature correction factors from Table 3.10.1.16 that
correspond to the temperature rating of the cord shall be applied to the
ampacity from Table 4.0.1.5(b). Where the number of current-carrying
conductors exceeds three, the allowable ampacity or the ampacity of
each conductor shall be reduced from the 3-conductor rating as shown
in Table 4.0.1.5.
 Table 4.0.1.4 Flexible Cords and Cables (See 4.0.1.4.)
Nominal
Insulation Braid
Trade Type mm 2 Number of Thickness1 on Each Outer
Name Letter Voltage (mm dia) Conductors Insulation (mm) Conductor Covering Use
Lamp C 300 18–16 2 or more Thermoset or 0.76 Cotton None Pendant Dry Not
Cord 600 2.0(1.6)– thermoplastic 1.14 or locations hard
5.5(2.6) portable usage

Elevator E 300 or 20–30 2 or more Thermoset 0.51 Cotton Three cotton, Elevator Unclassified
cable See Note 5. 600 0.76 Outer one lighting locations
See Note 9. 1.14 flame- and
See Note 10. 1.52 retardant & control
0.51 Flexible moisture-
0.76 nylon jacket resistant.
1.14 See Note 3.
1.52
Elevator EO 300 or 20–30 2 or more Thermoset 0.51 Cotton Outer one Elevator Unclassified
cable See Note 5. 600 0.76 Three cotton, lighting locations
See Note 10. 1.14 flame- and
1.52 retardant & control
moisture-
resistant.
See Note 3.
One cotton and Hazardous
a neoprene (classified) locations
jacket.
See Note 3.
Elevator ETP 300 or Rayon Thermoplastic Hazardous (classified) locations
cable See Note 5. 600
See Note 10.
ETT 300 or None One cotton or
See Note 5. 600 equivalent and
See Note 10. a thermoplastic
jacket
Table 4.0.1.4 (Continued)
Nominal
Insulation Braid
Trade Type mm 2 Number of Thickness1 on Each Outer
Name Letter Voltage (mm dia) Conductors Insulation (mm) Conductor Covering Use
Electric EV 600 18–250 2 or more Thermoset 0.76 (0.51) Optional Thermoset Electric Wet Extra
vehicle See Note 11 plus with optional 1.14 (0.76) vehicle locations hard
cable grounding nylon 1.52 (1.14) charging usage
conductor(s), See Note 12. 2.03 (1.52)
plus optional 2.41 (1.90)
hybrid data,
signal
communicati
ons, and
optical fiber
cables
EVJ 300 18– 0.76 (0.51) Hard
3.5(2.0) usage
See Note 11
EVE 600 18–250 2 or more Thermoplastic 0.76 (0.51) Thermoplastic Extra
See Note 11 plus elastomer with 1.14 (0.76) elastomer hard
grounding optional nylon 1.52 (1.14) usage
conductor(s), See Note 12 2.03 (1.52)
plus optional 2.41 (1.90)
hybrid data,
signal
communicati
ons, and
optical fiber
cables
EVJE 300 18– 0.76 (0.51) Hard
3.5(2.0) usage
See Note 11
Table 4.0.1.4 (Continued)
Nominal
Insulation Braid
Trade Type mm 2 Number of Thickness1 on Each Outer
Name Letter Voltage (mm dia) Conductors Insulation (mm) Conductor Covering Use
Electric EVT 600 18–250 2 or more Thermoplastic 0.76 (0.51) Optional Thermoplastic Electric Wet Extra
vehicle See Note 11 plus with optional 1.14 (0.76) vehicle Locations hard
cable grounding nylon 1.52 (1.14) charging usage
conductor(s), See Note 12 2.03 (1.52)
plus optional 2.41 (1.90)
hybrid data,
signal
communicati
ons, and
optical fiber
cables
EVJT 300 18– 0.76 (0.51) Hard
3.5(2.0) usage
See Note 11
Portable G 2000 3.5(2.0) 2–6 plus Thermoset 1.52 Oil-resistant
power –250 grounding 2.03 thermoset
cable conductor(s) 2.41
G-GC 2000 3.5(2.0) 3–6 plus Thermoset 1.52 Oil-resistant Portable and extra hard usage
–250 grounding 2.03 thermoset
conductors 2.41
and 1 ground
check
conductor
Heater HPD 300 18– 2, 3, or 4 Thermoset 0.38 None Cotton or Portable Dry Not
cord 3.5(2.0) 0.76 rayon heaters locations hard
usage
Parallel HPN 300 18– 2 or 3 Oil-resistant 1.14 None Oil-resistant Portable Damp Not
Heater See Note 6. 3.5(2.0) thermoset 1.52 thermoset locations hard
cord 2.41 usage
Table 4.0.1.4 (Continued)
Nominal
Insulation Braid
Trade Type mm 2 Number of Thickness1 on Each Outer
Name Letter Voltage (mm dia) Conductors Insulation (mm) Conductor Covering Use
Thermoset HSJ 300 18– 2, 3, or 4 Thermoset 0.76 None Cotton and Portable Damp Hard
jacketed 3.5(2.0) Thermoset or locations usage
heater portable
cords heater
HSJO 300 18– Oil-resistant 1.14 Cotton and oil-
3.5(2.0) thermoset resistant
thermoset
HSJOO 300 18–
3.5(2.0)

Non- NISP-1 300 20–18 2 or 3 Thermoset 0.38 None Thermoset Pendant Damp Not
integral See Note 6. or locations hard
parallel NISP-2 300 18–16 0.76 portable usage
cords See Note 6.
NISPE-1 300 20–18 Thermoplastic 0.38 Thermoplastic
See Note 6. elastomer elastomer
NISPE-2 300 18–16 0.76
See Note 6.
NISPT-1 300 20–18 Thermoplastic 0.38 Thermoplastic
See Note 6.
NISPT-2 300 18–16 0.76
See Note 6.
Twisted PD 300 18–16 2 or more Thermoset or 0.76 Cotton Cotton or Pendant Dry Not
portable 600 2.0(1.6) thermoplastic 1.14 rayon or locations hard
cord – portable usage
5.5(2.6)
Portable PPE 2000 3.5(2.0)- 1–6 plus Thermoplastic 1.52 Oil-resistant Portable, extra hard usage
power 250 optional elastomer 2.03 thermoplastic
cable grounding 2.41 elastomer
conductor(s)
Hard S 600 18– 2 or more Thermoset 0.76 None Thermoset Pendant Damp Extra
service See Note 4. 3.5(2.0) 1.14 or locations hard
cord 1.52 portable usage
Table 4.0.1.4 (Continued)
Nominal
Insulation Braid
Trade Type mm 2 Number of Thickness1 on Each Outer
Name Letter Voltage (mm dia) Conductors Insulation (mm) Conductor Covering Use
Flexible SC 600 8.0(3.2) 1 or more 1.52 Thermoset2 Portable, extra hard usage
stage and –125 2.03
lighting SCE 600 Thermoplastic 2.41 Thermoplastic
power elastomer elastomer2
cable SCT 600 Thermoplastic Thermoplastic2
Hard SE 600 18–30 2 or more Thermoplastic 0.76 None Thermoplastic Pendant Damp Extra
service See Note 4. elastomer 1.14 elastomer or locations hard
cord SEW 600 1.52 portable Damp and usage
See Note 4. wet
See Note 13. locations
SEO 600 Oil-resistant Damp
See Note 4. thermoplastic locations
SEOW 600 elastomer Damp and
See Note 4. wet
See Note 13. locations
SEOO 600 Oil-resistant Damp
See Note 4. thermoplastic locations
SEOOW 600 elastomer Damp and
See Note 4. wet
See Note 13. locations
Junior SJ 300 18- 2-6 Thermoset 0.76 None Thermoset Pendant Damp Hard
hard SJE 300 5.5(2.6) Thermoplastic Thermoplastic or locations usage
service SJEW 300 elastomer elastomer portable Damp and
cord See Note 13. wet
locations
SJEO 300 Oil-resistant Damp
thermoplastic locations
SJEOW 300 elastomer Damp and
See Note 13. wet
locations
Table 4.0.1.4 (Continued)
Nominal
Insulation Braid
Trade Type mm 2 Number of Thickness1 on Each Outer
Name Letter Voltage (mm dia) Conductors Insulation (mm) Conductor Covering Use
Junior SJEOO 300 18- 2-6 Oil-resistant 0.76 None Oil-resistant Damp Hard
hard 5.5(2.6) thermoplastic thermoplastic locations usage
service elastomer elastomer
cord SJEOOW 300 Damp and
See Note 13. wet
locations
SJO 300 Thermoset Oil-resistant Damp
thermoset locations
SJOW 300 Damp and
See Note 13. wet
locations
SJOO 300 Oil-resistant 1.14 Damp
thermoset locations
SJOOW 300 Damp and
See Note 13. wet
locations
SJT 300 Thermoplastic 0.76 Thermoplastic Damp
locations
SJTW 300 Damp and
See Note 13. wet
locations
SJTO 300 Oil-resistant Damp
thermoplastic locations
SJTOW 300 Damp and
See Note 13. wet
locations
SJTOO 300 Oil-resistant Damp
thermoplastic locations
SJTOOW 300 Damp and
See Note 13. wet
locations
Table 4.0.1.4 (Continued)
Nominal
Insulation Braid
Trade Type mm 2 Number of Thickness1 on Each Outer
Name Letter Voltage (mm dia) Conductors Insulation (mm) Conductor Covering Use
Hard SO 600 18-30 2 or more Thermoset 0.76 None Oil-resistant Pendant Damp Extra
service See Note 4. thermoset or locations hard
cord SOW 600 portable Damp and usage
See Note 4. wet
See Note 13. locations
SOO 600 Oil-resistant 1.14 Damp
See Note 4. thermoset 1.52 locations
SOOW 600 Damp and
See Note 4. wet
See Note 13. locations
All SP-1 300 20–18 2 or 3 Thermoset 0.76 None None Pendant Damp Not
thermoset See Note 6. or locations hard
parallel SP-2 300 18–16 1.14 portable usage
cord See Note 6.
SP-3 300 18– 1.52 Refrigerators,
See Note 6. 5.5(2.6) 2.03 room air
2.41 conditioners,
2.80 and as
permitted in
4.22.2.7(b)
All SPE-1 300 20-18 2 or 3 Thermoplastic 0.76 None None Pendant Damp Not
elastomer See Note 6. elastomer or locations Hard
(thermo- SPE-2 300 18-16 1.14 portable usage
plastic) See Note 6.
parallel SPE-3 300 18– 1.52 Refrigerators,
cord See Note 6. 5.5(2.6) 2.03 room air
2.41 conditioners,
2.80 and as
permitted in
4.22.2.7(b)
Table 4.0.1.4 (Continued)
Nominal
Insulation Braid
Trade Type mm 2 Number of Thickness1 on Each Outer
Name Letter Voltage (mm dia) Conductors Insulation (mm) Conductor Covering Use
All plastic SPT-1 300 20-18 2 or 3 Thermoplastic 0.76 None None Pendant Damp Not
parallel See Note 6. or locations hard
cord SPT-1W 300 portable Damp and usage
See Note 6. wet
See Note 13. locations
SPT-2 300 18-16 1.14 Damp Not
See Note 6. locations hard
SPT-2W 300 Damp and usage
See Note 6. wet
See Note 13. locations
SPT-3 300 18– 1.52 Refrigerators, Damp Not
See Note 6. 5.5(2.6) 2.03 room air locations hard
2.41 conditioners, usage
2.80 and as
permitted in
4.22.2.7(b)
Range, SRD 300 5.5(12.6)– 3 or 4 Thermoset 1.14 None Thermoset Portable Damp Ranges,
dryer cable 22 locations dryers
SRDE 300 5.5(12.6)– 3 or 4 Thermoplastic Thermoplastic
22 elastomer elastomer
SRDT 300 5.5(12.6)– 3 or 4 Thermoplastic Thermoplastic
22
Hard ST 600 18-30 2 or more Thermoplastic 0.76 None Thermoplastic Pendant Damp Extra
service See Note 4. 1.14 or locations hard
cord STW 600 1.52 portable Damp and usage
See Note 4. wet
See Note 13. locations
STO 600 Oil-resistant Damp
See Note 4. thermolastic locations
STOW 600 Damp and
See Note 4. wet
See Note 13. locations
Table 4.0.1.4 (Continued)
Nominal
Insulation Braid
Trade Type mm 2 Number of Thickness1 on Each Outer
Name Letter Voltage (mm dia) Conductors Insulation (mm) Conductor Covering Use
Hard STOO 600 18-30 2 or more Oil-resistant 0.76 None Oil-resistant Pendant Damp Extra
service See Note 4. thermolastic 1.14 thermolastic or locations hard
cord STOOW 600 1.52 portable Damp and usage
See Note 4. wet
locations
Vacuum SV 300 18–16 2 or 3 Thermoset 0.38 None Thermoset Pendant Damp Not
cleaner See Note 6. or locations hard
cord SVE 300 Thermoplastic Thermoplastic portable usage
See Note 6. elastomer elastomer
SVEO 300 Oil-resistant
See Note 6. thermoplastic
SVEOO 300 Oil-resistant elastomer
See Note 6. thermoplastic
elastomer
SVO 300 Thermoset Oil-resistant
thermoset
SVOO 300 Oil-resistant Oil-resistant
thermoset thermoset
SVT 300 Thermoplastic Thermoplastic
See Note 6.
SVTO 300 Thermoplastic Oil-resistant
See Note 6. thermoplastic
SVTOO 300 Oil-resistant
thermoplastic
Parallel TPT 300 27 2 Thermoplastic 0.76 None Thermoplastic Attached Damp Not
tinsel cord See Note 2. to an locations hard
appliance usage
Jacketed TST 300 27 2 Thermoplastic 0.38 None Thermoplastic Attached Damp Not
tinsel See Note 2. to an locations hard
cord appliance usage
Table 4.0.1.4 (Continued)
Nominal
Insulation Braid
Trade Type mm 2 Number of Thickness1 on Each Outer
Name Letter Voltage (mm dia) Conductors Insulation (mm) Conductor Covering Use
Portable W 2000 3.5(2.0) 1–6 Thermoset 1.52 Oil-resistant Portable, extra hard usage
power- –250 1 2.03 thermoset
cable 251–500 2.41
2.80
*See Note 8.
**The required outer covering on some single conductor cables may be integral with the insulation.

Notes:
1. All types listed in Table 4.0.1.4 shall have individual conductors twisted together except for Types HPN, SP-1, SP-2, SP-3, SPE-1, SPE-2,
SPE-3, SPT-1, SPT-2, SPT-3, TPT, NISP-1, NISP-2, NISPT-1, NISPT-2, NISPE-1, NISPE-2, and three-conductor parallel versions of SRD,
SRDE, and SRDT.
2. Types TPT and TST shall be permitted in lengths not exceeding 2 400 mm where attached directly, or by means of a special type of plug, to
a portable appliance rated at 50 watts or less and of such nature that extreme flexibility of the cord is essential.
3. Rubber-filled or varnished cambric tapes shall be permitted as a substitute for the inner braids.
4. Types G, G-GC, S, SC, SCE, SCT, SE, SEO, SEOO, SO, SOO, ST, STO, STOO, PPE, and W shall be permitted for use on theater stages,
in garages, and elsewhere where flexible cords are permitted by this Code.
5. Elevator traveling cables for operating control and signal circuits shall contain nonmetallic fillers as necessary to maintain concentricity.
Cables shall have steel supporting members as required for suspension by 6.20.5.1. In locations subject to excessive moisture or corrosive vapors
or gases, supporting members of other materials shall be permitted. Where steel supporting members are used, they shall run straight through the
center of the cable assembly and shall not be cabled with the copper strands of any conductor.
In addition to conductors used for control and signaling circuits, Types E, EO, ETP, and ETT elevator cables shall be permitted to incorporate
in the construction one or more 20 AWG telephone conductor pairs, one or more coaxial cables, or one or more optical fibers. The 20 AWG
conductor pairs shall be permitted to be covered with suitable shielding for telephone, audio, or higher frequency communications circuits; the
coaxial cables consist of a center conductor, insulation, and shield for use in video or other radio frequency communications circuits. The optical
fiber shall be suitably covered with flame-retardant thermoplastic. The insulation of the conductors shall be rubber or thermoplastic of thickness
not less than specified for the other conductors of the particular type of cable. Metallic shields shall have their own protective covering. Where
used, these components shall be permitted to be incorporated in any layer of the cable assembly but shall not run straight through the center.
 6. The third conductor in these cables shall be used for equipment grounding purpose only. The insulation of the grounding conductor for
Types SPE-1, SPE-2, SPE-3, SPT-1, SPT-2, SPT-3, NISPT-1, NISPT-2, NISPE-1, and NISPE-2 shall be permitted to be thermoset polymer.
7. The individual conductors of all cords, except those of heat-resistant cords, shall have a thermoset or thermoplastic insulation, except that
the equipment grounding conductor where used shall be in accordance with 4.0.2.4(b).
8. Where the voltage between any two conductors exceeds 300, but does not exceed 600, flexible cord of 5.5 mm2 (2.6 mm dia.) and smaller
shall have thermoset or thermoplastic insulation on the individual conductors at least 1.14 mm (45 mils) in thickness, unless Type S, SE, SEO,
SEOO, SO, SOO, ST, STO, or STOO cord is used.
9. Insulations and outer coverings that meet the requirements as flame retardant, limited smoke, and are so listed, shall be permitted to be
marked for limited smoke after the code type designation.
10. Elevator cables in sizes 20 AWG through 2.0 mm2 (1.6 mm dia.) are rated 300 volts, and sizes 5.5 mm2 (2.6 mm dia.) through 30 mm2 are
rated 600 volts. 3.5 mm2 (2.0 mm dia.) is rated 300 volts with a 0.76-mm (30-mil) insulation thickness and 600 volts with a 1.14-mm (45-mil)
insulation thickness.
11. Conductor size for Types EV, EVJ, EVE, EVJE, EVT, and EVJT cables apply to nonpower-limited circuits only. Conductors of power-
limited (data, signal, or communications) circuits may extend beyond the stated AWG size range. All conductors shall be insulated for the same
cable voltage rating.
12. Insulation thickness for Types EV, EVJ, EVEJE, EVT, and EVJT cables of nylon construction is indicated in parentheses.
13. Cords that comply with the requirements for outdoor cords and are so listed shall be permitted to be designated as weather and water
resistant with the suffix “W” after the code type designation. Cords with the “W” suffix are suitable for use in wet locations.
 Table 4.0.1.5(a) Allowable Ampacity for Flexible Cords and
Cables Based on Ambient Temperatureof 30°C (86°F).
See 4.0.1.13 and Table 4.0.1.4.]
Thermoset Types C, E, EO,
PD, S, SJ, SJO, SJOW,
SJOO, SJOOW, SO, SOW,
SOO, SOOW, SP-1, SP-2, SP-
3, SRD, SV, SVO, SVOO
Thermoplastic Types ET,
ETLB, ETP, ETT, SE, SEW,
SEO, SEOW, SEOOW, SJE,
SJEW, SJEO, SJEOW,
SJEOOW, SJT, SJTW,
Table 4.0.1.5 Adjustment Factors for More Than Three Current- SJTO, SJTOW, SJTOO,
Carrying Conductors in a Flexible Cord or Cable SJTOOW, SPE-1, SPE-2, Types
SPE-3, SPT-1, SPT-1W, SPT- HPD,
Percent of Value in Tables 2, SPT-2W, SPT-3, ST, HPN,
Size Thermoplastic SRDE, SRDT, STO, STOW, HSJ,
Number of Conductors 4.0.1.5(a) and 4.0.1.5(b)
mm m Types TPT, STOO, STOOW, SVE, HSJO,
4–6 80 TST HSJOO
(mm dia.) SVEO, SVT, SVTO, SVTOO
7–9 70 A+ B+
10 – 20 50 27* 0.5 — — —
21 – 30 45 20 — 5** *** —
31 – 40 40 18 — 7 10 10
41 and above 35 17 — — 12 13
16 — 10 13 15
15 — — — 17
2.0(1.6) — 15 18 20
3.5(2.0) — 20 25 30
5.5(2.6) — 25 30 35
8.0(3.2) — 35 40 —
14 — 45 55 —
22 — 60 70 —
30 — 80 95 —
*Tinsel cord.
**Elevator cables only.
***7 amperes for elevator cables only; 2 amperes for other types.
+The allowable currents under Column A apply to 3-conductor cords and other
multiconductor cords connected to utilization equipment so that only 3 conductors are
current-carrying. The allowable currents under Column B apply to 2 conductor cords
and other multiconductor cords connected to utilization equipment so that only 2
conductors are current carrying.
 Table 4.0.1.5(b) Ampacity of Cable Types SC, SCE, SCT, PPE, G, G-GC, and W. [Based on Ambient
Temperature of 30°C (86°F). See Table 4.0.1.4.] Temperature Rating of Cable.
60°C (140°F) 75°C (167°F) 90°C (194°F)
Size D1 E2 F3 D1 E2 F3 D1 E2 F3
3.5(2.0) — 31 26 — 37 31 — 42 35
5.5(2.6) — 44 37 — 52 43 — 59 49
8.0(3.2) 60 55 48 70 65 57 80 74 65
14 80 72 63 95 88 77 105 99 87
22 105 96 84 125 115 101 140 130 114
30 140 128 112 170 152 133 190 174 152
38 165 150 131 195 178 156 220 202 177
50 195 173 151 230 207 181 260 234 205
60 225 199 174 265 238 208 300 271 237
80 260 230 201 310 275 241 350 313 274
100 300 265 232 360 317 277 405 361 316
125 340 296 259 405 354 310 455 402 352
150 375 330 289 445 395 346 505 449 393
175 420 363 318 505 435 381 570 495 433
200 455 392 343 545 469 410 615 535 468
250 515 448 392 620 537 470 700 613 536
1
The ampacities under subheading D shall be permitted for single-conductor Types SC, SCE, SCT, PPE, and W cable only where the
individual conductors are not installed in raceways and are not in physical contact with each other except in lengths not to exceed 600 mm where
passing through the wall of an enclosure.
2
The ampacities under subheading E apply to two-conductor cables and other multiconductor cables connected to utilization equipment so that
only two conductors are current carrying.
3
The ampacities under subheading F apply to three-conductor cables and other multiconductor cables connected to utilization equipment so
that only three conductors are current carrying.
 (b) Ultimate Insulation Temperature. In no case shall conductors
be associated together in such a way with respect to the kind of circuit, (b) Optional Markings. Flexible cords and cable types listed in
the wiring method used, or the number of conductors such that the Table 4.0.1.4 shall be permitted to be surface marked to indicate
limiting temperature of the conductors is exceeded. special characteristics of the cable materials. These markings include,
A neutral conductor that carries only the unbalanced current from but are not limited to, markings for limited smoke, sunlight resistance,
other conductors of the same circuit shall not be required to meet the and so forth.
requirements of a current-carrying conductor.
In a 3-wire circuit consisting of two phase wires and the neutral of a 4.0.1.7 Uses Permitted.
4-wire, 3-phase, wye-connected system, a common conductor carries
approximately the same current as the line-to-neutral currents of the (a) Uses. Flexible cords and cables shall be used only for the
other conductors and shall be considered to be a current-carrying following:
conductor.
On a 4-wire, 3-phase, wye circuit where the major portion of the (1) Pendants
load consists of nonlinear loads, there are harmonic currents present in (2) Wiring of luminaires (fixtures)
the neutral conductor and the neutral shall be considered to be a (3) Connection of portable lamps, portable and mobile signs, or
current-carrying conductor. appliances
An equipment grounding conductor shall not be considered a (4) Elevator cables
current-carrying conductor. (5) Wiring of cranes and hoists
Where a single conductor is used for both equipment grounding and (6) Connection of utilization equipment to facilitate frequent
to carry unbalanced current from other conductors, as provided for in interchange
250.140 for electric ranges and electric clothes dryers, it shall not be (7) Prevention of the transmission of noise or vibration
considered as a current-carrying conductor. (8) Appliances where the fastening means and mechanical
connections are specifically designed to permit ready removal for
Exception: For other loading conditions, adjustment factors shall be maintenance and repair, and the appliance is intended or identified for
permitted to be calculated under 3.10.1.15(c). flexible cord connection
(9) Connection of moving parts
FPN: See Annex B, Table B 3.10.1.11, for adjustment factors for more than three (10) Where specifically permitted elsewhere in this Code
current-carrying conductors in a raceway or cable with load diversity.

(b) Attachment Plugs. Where used as permitted in 4.0.1.7(a)(3),

4.0.1.6 Markings.
(a)(6), and (a)(8), each flexible cord shall be equipped with an
attachment plug and shall be energized from a receptacle outlet.
(a) Standard Markings. Flexible cords and cables shall be marked
by means of a printed tag attached to the coil reel or carton. The tag
Exception: As permitted in 3.68.2.47.
shall contain the information required in 3.10.1.11(a). Types S, SC,
SCE, SCT, SE, SEO, SEOO, SJ, SJE, SJEO, SJEOO, SJO, SJT, SJTO,
4.0.1.8 Uses Not Permitted. Unless specifically permitted in 4.0.1.7,
SJTOO, SO, SOO, ST, STO, STOO, SEW, SEOW, SEOOW, SJEW,
flexible cords and cables shall not be used for the following:
SJEOW, SJEOOW, SJOW, SJTW, SJTOW, SJTOOW, SOW, SOOW,
STW, STOW, and STOOW flexible cords and G, G-GC, PPE, and W
(1) As a substitute for the fixed wiring of a structure
flexible cables shall be durably marked on the surface at intervals not
(2) Where run through holes in walls, structural ceilings,
exceeding 600 mm with the type designation, size, and number of
suspended ceilings, dropped ceilings, or floors
conductors.
(3) Where run through doorways, windows, or similar openings
 (4) Where attached to building surfaces Exception No. 2: As supply cords for portable lamps and other
merchandise being displayed or exhibited.
Exception to (4): Flexible cord and cable shall be permitted to be
attached to building surfaces in accordance with the provisions of 4.0.1.12 Minimum Size. The individual conductors of a flexible cord
3.68.2.47(b) or cable shall not be smaller than the sizes in Table 4.0.1.4.

(5) Where concealed by walls, floors, or ceilings or located above Exception: The size of the insulated ground-check conductor of Type
suspended or dropped ceilings G-GC cables shall be not smaller than 5.5 mm2 (2.6 mm dia.).
(6) Where installed in raceways, except as otherwise permitted in
this Code 4.0.1.13 Overcurrent Protection. Flexible cords not smaller than 18
(7) Where subject to physical damage AWG, and tinsel cords or cords having equivalent characteristics of
smaller size approved for use with specific appliances, shall be
4.0.1.9 Splices. Flexible cord shall be used only in continuous lengths considered as protected against overcurrent by the overcurrent devices
without splice or tap where initially installed in applications permitted described in 2.40.1.5.
by 4.0.1.7(a). The repair of hard-service cord and junior hard-service
cord (see Trade Name column in Table 4.0.1.4) 2.0 mm2 4.0.1.14 Protection from Damage. Flexible cords and cables shall be
(1.6 mm dia.) and larger shall be permitted if conductors are spliced in protected by bushings or fittings where passing through holes in
accordance with 1.10.1.14(b) and the completed splice retains the covers, outlet boxes, or similar enclosures.
insulation, outer sheath properties, and usage characteristics of the In industrial establishments where the conditions of maintenance and
cord being spliced. supervision ensure that only licensed electrical practitioner or non
licensed electrical practitioner under the supervision of a licensed
4.0.1.10 Pull at Joints and Terminals. Flexible cords and cables shall electrical practitioner service the installation, flexible cords and cables
be connected to devices and to fittings so that tension is not shall be permitted to be installed in aboveground raceways that are no
transmitted to joints or terminals. longer than 15 m to protect the flexible cord or cable from physical
damage. Where more than three current-carrying conductors are
Exception: Listed portable single-pole devices that are intended to installed within the raceway, the allowable ampacity shall be reduced
accommodate such tension at their terminals shall be permitted to be in accordance with Table 4.0.1.5.
used with single-conductor flexible cable.
4.0.2 Construction Specifications
FPN: Some methods of preventing pull on a cord from being transmitted to joints or
terminals are knotting the cord, winding with tape, and fittings designed for the
purpose. 4.0.2.1 Labels. Flexible cords shall be examined and tested at the
factory and labeled before shipment.
4.0.1.11 In Show Windows and Show Cases. Flexible cords used in
show windows and show cases shall be Type S, SE, SEO, SEOO, SJ, 4.0.2.2 Nominal Insulation Thickness. The nominal thickness of
SJE, SJEO, SJEOO, SJO, SJOO, SJT, SJTO, SJTOO, SO, SOO, ST, insulation for conductors of flexible cords and cables shall not be less
STO, STOO, SEW, SEOW, SEOOW, SJEW, SJEOW, SJEOOW, than specified in Table 4.0.1.4.
SJOW, SJOOW, SJTW, SJTOW, SJTOOW, SOW, SOOW, STW,
STOW, or STOOW. Exception: The nominal insulation thickness for the ground-check
conductors of Type G-GC cables shall not be less than 1.14 mm (45
Exception No. 1: For the wiring of chain-supported luminaires mils) for 8.0 mm2 (3.2 mm dia.) and not less than 0.76 mm (30 mils)
(lighting fixtures). for 5.5 mm2 (2.6 mm dia.).
4.0.2.3 Grounded-Conductor Identification. One conductor of (e) Tinned Conductors. One conductor having the individual
flexible cords that is intended to be used as a grounded circuit strands tinned and the other conductor or conductors having the
conductor shall have a continuous marker that readily distinguishes it individual strands untinned for cords having insulation on the
from the other conductor or conductors. The identification shall individual conductors integral with the jacket.
consist of one of the methods indicated in 4.0.2.3(a) through 4.0.2.3(f).
(f) Surface Marking. One or more ridges, grooves, or white stripes
(a) Colored Braid. A braid finished to show a white or gray color located on the exterior of the cord so as to identify one conductor for
and the braid on the other conductor or conductors finished to show a cords having insulation on the individual conductors integral with the
readily distinguishable solid color or colors. jacket.

(b) Tracer in Braid. A tracer in a braid of any color contrasting 4.0.2.4 Equipment Grounding Conductor Identification. A
with that of the braid and no tracer in the braid of the other conductor conductor intended to be used as an equipment grounding conductor
or conductors. No tracer shall be used in the braid of any conductor of shall have a continuous identifying marker readily distinguishing it
a flexible cord that contains a conductor having a braid finished to from the other conductor or conductors. Conductors having a
show white or gray. continuous green color or a continuous green color with one or more
yellow stripes shall not be used for other than equipment grounding
Exception: In the case of Types C and PD and cords having the purposes. The identifying marker shall consist of one of the methods
braids on the individual conductors finished to show white or gray. In in 4.0.2.4(a) or 4.0.2.4(b).
such cords, the identifying marker shall be permitted to consist of the
solid white or gray finish on one conductor, provided there is a (a) Colored Braid. A braid finished to show a continuous green
colored tracer in the braid of each other conductor. color or a continuous green color with one or more yellow stripes.

(c) Colored Insulation. A white or gray insulation on one conductor (b) Colored Insulation or Covering. For cords having no braids on
and insulation of a readily distinguishable color or colors on the other the individual conductors, an insulation of a continuous green color or
conductor or conductors for cords having no braids on the individual a continuous green color with one or more yellow stripes.
conductors.
For jacketed cords furnished with appliances, one conductor having 4.0.2.5 Attachment Plugs. Where a flexible cord is provided with an
its insulation colored light blue, with the other conductors having their equipment grounding conductor and equipped with an attachment
insulation of a readily distinguishable color other than white or gray. plug, the attachment plug shall comply with 2.50.7.9(a) and
2.50.7.9(b).
Exception: Cords that have insulation on the individual conductors
integral with the jacket. 4.0.3 Portable Cables Over 600 Volts, Nominal

The insulation shall be permitted to be covered with an outer finish 4.0.3.1 Scope. This part applies to multiconductor portable cables used
to provide the desired color. to connect mobile equipment and machinery.

(d) Colored Separator. A white or gray separator on one conductor 4.0.3.2 Construction.
and a separator of a readily distinguishable solid color on the other
conductor or conductors of cords having insulation on the individual (a) Conductors. The conductors shall be 8.0 mm2 (3.2 mm dia.)
conductors integral with the jacket. copper or larger and shall employ flexible stranding.
 4.2.1.2 Other Articles. Fixture wires shall comply with this article
Exception: The size of the insulated ground-check conductor of Type and also with the applicable provisions of other articles of this Code.
G-GC cables shall be not smaller than 5.5 mm2 (2.6 mm dia.).
FPN: For application in luminaires (lighting fixtures), see Article 4.10.
(b) Shields. Cables operated at over 2 000 volts shall be shielded.
Shielding shall be for the purpose of confining the voltage stresses to 4.2.1.3 Types. Fixture (luminaire) wires shall be of a type listed in
the insulation. Table 4.2.1.3, and they shall comply with all requirements of that
table. The fixture (luminaire) wires listed in Table 4.2.1.3 are all
(c) Equipment Grounding Conductor(s). An equipment grounding suitable for service at 600 volts, nominal, unless otherwise specified.
conductor(s) shall be provided. The total area shall not be less than
FPN: Thermoplastic insulation may stiffen at temperatures colder than -10°C
that of the size of the equipment grounding conductor required in (+14°F), requiring that care be exercised during installation at such temperatures.
2.50.6.13. Thermoplastic insulation may also be deformed at normal temperatures where
subjected to pressure, requiring that care be exercised during installation and at
points of support.
4.0.3.3 Shielding. All shields shall be grounded.
4.2.1.5 Allowable Ampacities for Fixture (luminaire) Wires. The
4.0.3.4 Grounding. Grounding conductors shall be connected in allowable ampacity of fixture wire shall be as specified in Table
accordance with Part 2.50.5. 4.2.1.5.
No conductor shall be used under such conditions that its operating
4.0.3.5 Minimum Bending Radii. The minimum bending radii for temperature exceeds the temperature specified in Table 4.2.1.3 for the
portable cables during installation and handling in service shall be type of insulation involved.
adequate to prevent damage to the cable.
FPN: See 3.10.1.10 for temperature limitation of conductors.
4.0.3.6 Fittings. Connectors used to connect lengths of cable in a run
shall be of a type that lock firmly together. Provisions shall be made to 4.2.1.6 Minimum Size. Fixture (luminaire) wires shall not be smaller
prevent opening or closing these connectors while energized. Suitable than 18 AWG.
means shall be used to eliminate tension at connectors and
terminations. 4.2.1.7 Number of Conductors in Conduit or Tubing. The number
of fixture wires permitted in a single conduit or tubing shall not exceed
4.0.3.7 Splices and Terminations. Portable cables shall not contain the percentage fill specified in Table 1, Chapter 9.
splices unless the splices are of the permanent molded, vulcanized
types in accordance with 1.10.1.14(b). Terminations on portable cables 4.2.1.8 Grounded Conductor Identification. Fixture wires that are
rated over 600 volts, nominal, shall be accessible only to authorized intended to be used as grounded conductors shall be identified by one
and licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical or more continuous white stripes on other than green insulation or by
practitioner under the supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner. the means described in 4.0.2.3(a) through 4.0.2.3(e).

4.2.1.9 Marking.
ARTICLE 402 — FIXTURE (Luminaires) WIRES
(a) Method of Marking. Thermoplastic insulated fixture
4.2.1.1 Scope. This article covers general requirements and (luminaire) wire shall be durably marked on the surface at intervals
construction specifications for fixture (luminaire) wires. not exceeding 600 mm. All other fixture wire shall be marked by
means of a printed tag attached to the coil, reel, or carton.
 Table 4.2.1.3 Fixture Wires
Thickness of Maximum
Type Insulation Outer Operating Application
Name Letter Insulation mm mils Covering Temperature Provisions
Heat-resistant FFH-2 Heat-resistant 0.76 30 Nonmetallic 75°C Fixture
rubber-covered rubber covering 167°F wiring
fixture wire — Cross-linked 0.76 30
flexible stranding synthetic polymer
ECTFE — solid or HF Ethylene chlorotri- 0.38 15 None 150°C Fixture
7- strand fluoroethylene 302°F wiring
ECTFE — flexible HFF Ethylene 0.38 15 None 150°C Fixture
stranding chlorotriflu- 302°F wiring
oroethylene
Tape insulated KF-1 Aromatic 0.14 5.5 None 200°C Fixture
fixture wire — polyimide tape 392°F wiring —
solid or 7-strand limited to
300 volts
KF-2 Aromatic 0.21 8.4 None 200°C Fixture
polyimide tape 392°F wiring
Tape insulated KFF-1 Aromatic 0.14 5.5 None 200°C Fixture
fixture wire — polyimide tape 392°F wiring —
flexible limited to
stranding 300 volts
KFF-2 Aromatic 0.21 8.4 None 200°C Fixture
polyimide tape 392°F wiring
Table 4.2.1.3 (Continued)
Thickness of Maximum
Type Insulation Outer Operating Application
Name Letter Insulation mm mils Covering Temperature Provisions
Perfluoro-alkoxy PAF Perfluoro-alkoxy 0.51 20 None 250°C Fixture
— solid or 7- 482°F wiring
strand (nickel or (nickel or
nickel-coated nickel-
copper) coated
copper)
Perfluoro-alkoxy PAFF Perfluoro-alkoxy 0.51 20 None 150°C Fixture
— flexible 302°F wiring
stranding
Fluorinated PF Fluorinated 0.51 20 None 200°C Fixture
ethylene propylene ethylene 392°F wiring
fixture wire — propylene
solid or 7-strand
Fluorinated PFF Fluorinated 0.51 20 None 150°C Fixture
ethylene propylene ethylene 302°F wiring
fixture wire — propylene
flexible stranding
Fluorinated PGF Fluorinated 0.36 14 Glass braid 200°C Fixture
ethylene propylene ethylene 392°F wiring
fixture wire — propylene
solid or 7-strand
Table 4.2.1.3 (Continued)
Thickness of Maximum
Type Insulation Outer Operating Application
Name Letter Insulation mm mils Covering Temperature Provisions
Fluorinated PGFF Fluorinated 0.36 14 Glass braid 150°C Fixture
ethylene propylene ethylene 302°F wiring
fixture wire — propylene
flexible stranding
Extruded PTF Extruded 0.51 20 None 250°C Fixture
polytetraflu- polytetraflu- 482°F wiring
oroethylene — oroethylene (nickel or
solid or 7-strand nickel-
(nickel or nickel- coated
coated copper) copper)
Extruded PTFF Extruded 0.51 20 None 150°C Fixture
polytetraflu- polytetraflu- 302°F wiring
oroethylene — oroethylene (silver or
flexible stranding nickel-
26-36 (AWG coated
silver or nickel- copper)
coated copper)
Heat-resistant RFH-1 Heat-resistant 0.38 15 Nonmetallic 75°C Fixture
rubber-covered rubber covering 167°F wiring —
fixture wire — limited to
solid or 7-strand 300 volts
Table 4.2.1.3 (Continued)
Thickness of Maximum
Type Insulation Outer Operating Application
Name Letter Insulation mm mils Covering Temperature Provisions
Heat-resistant RFH-2 Heat-resistant 0.76 30 None or non- 75°C Fixture
rubber-covered rubber metallic 167°F wiring
fixture wire — Cross-linked covering
solid or 7-strand synthetic polymer
Heat-resistant RFHH-2* Cross-linked 0.76 30 None or non- 90°C Fixture
cross-linked synthetic polymer metallic 194°F wiring
synthetic polymer- covering
insulated fixture RFHH-3* 1.14 45 —
wire — solid or 7-
strand
Silicone insulated SF-1 Silicone rubber 0.38 15 Nonmetallic 200°C Fixture
fixture wire — covering 392°F wiring —
solid or 7-strand limited to
300 volts
SF-2 Silicone rubber 0.76 30 Nonmetallic 200°C Fixture
1.14 45 covering 392°F wiring
Silicone insulated SFF-1 Silicone rubber 0.38 15 Nonmetallic 150°C Fixture
fixture wire — covering 302°F wiring —
flexible stranding limited to
300 volts
SFF-2 Silicone rubber 0.76 30 Nonmetallic 150°C Fixture
1.14 45 covering 302°F wiring
Table 4.2.1.3 (Continued)
Thickness of Maximum
Type Insulation Outer Operating Application
Name Letter Insulation mm mils Covering Temperature Provisions
Thermoplastic TF* Thermoplastic 0.76 30 None 60°C Fixture
covered fixture 140°F wiring
wire — solid or 7-
strand
Thermoplastic TFF* Thermoplastic 0.76 30 None 60°C Fixture
covered fixture 140°F wiring
wire — flexible
stranding
Heat-resistant TFN* Thermoplastic 0.38 15 Nylon- 90°C Fixture
thermoplastic jacketed or 194°F wiring
covered fixture equivalent
wire — solid or 7-
strand
Heat-resistant TFFN* Thermoplastic 0.38 15 Nylon- 90°C Fixture
thermoplastic jacketed or 194°F wiring
covered fixture equivalent
wire — flexible
stranded
Cross-linked XF* Cross-linked 0.76 30 None 150°C Fixture
polyolefin polyolefin 1.14 45 302°F wiring —
insulated fixture limited to
wire — solid or 7- 300 volts
strand
Table 4.2.1.3 (Continued)
Thickness of Maximum
Type Insulation Outer Operating Application
Name Letter Insulation mm mils Covering Temperature Provisions
Cross-linked XFF* Cross-linked 0.76 30 None 150°C Fixture
polyolefin polyolefin 1.14 45 302°F wiring —
insulated fixture limited to
wire — flexible 300 volts
stranded
Modified ETFE — ZF Modified ethylene 0.38 15 None 150°C Fixture
solid or 7-strand tetrafluoro- 302°F wiring
ethylene
Flexible stranding ZFF Modified ethylene 0.38 15 None 150°C Fixture
tetrafluoro- 302°F wiring
ethylene
High temp. ZHF Modified ethylene 0.38 15 None 200°C Fixture
modified ETFE — tetrafluoro- 392°F wiring
solid or 7-strand ethylene
*Insulations and outer coverings that meet the requirements of flame retardant, limited smoke, and are so listed shall be permitted to be
marked for limited smoke after the Code type designation.
 4.4.1.2 Switch Connections.

Table 4.2.1.5 Allowable Ampacity for Fixture (luminaire) Wires (a) Three-Way and Four-Way Switches. Three-way and four-way
switches shall be wired so that all switching is done only in the
Size mm2(mm dia.) Allowable Ampacity ungrounded circuit conductor. Where in metal raceways or metal-
18 6 armored cables, wiring between switches and outlets shall be in
16 8 accordance with 3.0.1.20(a).
2.0(1.6) 17
3.5(2.6) 23 Exception: Switch loops shall not require a grounded conductor.
5.5(2.6) 28
(b) Grounded Conductors. Switches or circuit breakers shall not
disconnect the grounded conductor of a circuit.

Exception: A switch or circuit breaker shall be permitted to disconnect

(b) Optional Marking. Fixture (luminaire) wire types listed in a grounded circuit conductor where all circuit conductors are
Table 4.2.1.3 shall be permitted to be surface marked to indicate disconnected simultaneously, or where the device is arranged so that
special characteristics of the cable materials. These markings include, the grounded conductor cannot be disconnected until all the
but are not limited to, markings for limited smoke, sunlight resistance, ungrounded conductors of the circuit have been disconnected.
and so forth.
4.4.1.3 Enclosure.
4.2.1.10 Uses Permitted. Fixture (luminaire) wires shall be permitted
(1) for installation in luminaires (lighting fixtures) and in similar (a) General. Switches and circuit breakers shall be of the externally
equipment where enclosed or protected and not subject to bending or operable type mounted in an enclosure listed for the intended use. The
twisting in use, or (2) for connecting luminaires (lighting fixtures) to minimum wire-bending space at terminals and minimum gutter space
the branch-circuit conductors supplying the luminaires (fixtures). provided in switch enclosures shall be as required in 3.12.1.6.

4.2.1.11 Uses Not Permitted. Fixture wires shall not be used as Exception No. 1: Pendant- and surface-type snap switches and knife
branch-circuit conductors. switches mounted on an open-face switchboard or panelboard shall be
permitted without enclosures.
4.2.1.12 Overcurrent Protection. Overcurrent protection for fixture Exception No. 2: Switches and circuit breakers installed in accordance
wires shall be as specified in 2.40.1.5. with 1.10.2.2(a)(1), (a)(2), (a)(3), or (a)(4) shall be permitted without
enclosures.

ARTICLE 4.4 — SWITCHES (b) Used as a Raceway. Enclosures shall not be used as junction
boxes, auxiliary gutters, or raceways for conductors feeding through or
4.4.1 Installation tapping off to other switches or overcurrent devices, unless the
enclosure complies with 3.12.1.8.
4.4.1.1 Scope. The provisions of this article shall apply to all switches,
switching devices, and circuit breakers where used as switches. 4.4.1.4 Wet Locations. A switch or circuit breaker in a wet location or
outside of a building shall be enclosed in a weatherproof enclosure or
cabinet that shall comply with 3.12.1.2(a). Switches shall not be
installed within wet locations in tub or shower spaces unless installed position where the switch is connected to circuits or equipment
as part of a listed tub or shower assembly. inherently capable of providing a backfeed source of power. For such
installations, a permanent sign shall be installed on the switch
4.4.1.5 Time Switches, Flashers, and Similar Devices. Time enclosure or immediately adjacent to open switches with the following
switches, flashers, and similar devices shall be of the enclosed type or words or equivalent:
shall be mounted in cabinets or boxes or equipment enclosures.
Energized parts shall be barriered to prevent operator exposure when WARNING — LOAD SIDE TERMINALS MAY BE ENERGIZED BY
making manual adjustments or switching. BACKFEED.

Exception: Devices mounted so they are accessible only to licensed 4.4.1.7 Indicating. General-use and motor-circuit switches, circuit
electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner under the breakers, and molded case switches, where mounted in an enclosure as
supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner shall be permitted described in 4.4.1.3, shall clearly indicate whether they are in the open
without barriers, provided they are located within an enclosure such (off) or closed (on) position.
that any energized parts within 150 mm of the manual adjustment or Where these switch or circuit breaker handles are operated vertically
switch are covered by suitable barriers. rather than rotationally or horizontally, the up position of the handle
shall be the (on) position.
4.4.1.6 Position and Connection of Switches.
Exception No. 1: Vertically operated double-throw switches shall be
(a) Single-Throw Knife Switches. Single-throw knife switches shall permitted to be in the closed (on) position with the handle in either the
be placed so that gravity will not tend to close them. Single-throw up or down position.
knife switches, approved for use in the inverted position, shall be Exception No. 2: On busway installations, tap switches employing a
provided with an integral mechanical means that ensures that the center-pivoting handle shall be permitted to be open or closed with
blades remain in the open position when so set. either end of the handle in the up or down position. The switch position
shall be clearly indicating and shall be visible from the floor or from
(b) Double-Throw Knife Switches. Double-throw knife switches the usual point of operation.
shall be permitted to be mounted so that the throw is either vertical or
horizontal. Where the throw is vertical, integral mechanical means 4.4.1.8 Accessibility and Grouping.
shall be provided to hold the blades in the open position when so set.
(a) Location. All switches and circuit breakers used as switches
(c) Connection of Switches. Single-throw knife switches and shall be located so that they may be operated from a readily accessible
switches with butt contacts shall be connected such that their blades are place. They shall be installed such that the center of the grip of the
de-energized when the switch is in the open position. Bolted pressure operating handle of the switch or circuit breaker, when in its highest
contact switches shall have barriers that prevent inadvertent contact position, is not more than 1 980 mm above the floor or working
with energized blades. Single-throw knife switches, bolted pressure platform.
contact switches, molded case switches, switches with butt contacts,
and circuit breakers used as switches shall be connected so that the Exception No. 1: On busway installations, fused switches and circuit
terminals supplying the load are de-energized when the switch is in the breakers shall be permitted to be located at the same level as the
open position. busway. Suitable means shall be provided to operate the handle of the
device from the floor.
Exception: The blades and terminals supplying the load of a switch Exception No. 2: Switches and circuit breakers installed adjacent to
shall be permitted to be energized when the switch is in the open motors, appliances, or other equipment that they supply shall be
permitted to be located higher than 1 980 mm and to be accessible by than 0.75 mm in thickness or of nonferrous metal not less than
portable means. 1.00 mm in thickness. Faceplates of insulating material shall be
Exception No. 3: Hookstick operable isolating switches shall be noncombustible and not less than 0.25 mm in thickness, but they shall
permitted at greater heights. be permitted to be less than 0.25 mm in thickness if formed or
reinforced to provide adequate mechanical strength.
(b) Voltage Between Adjacent Devices. A snap switch shall not be
grouped or ganged in enclosures with other snap switches, receptacles, 4.4.1.10 Mounting of Snap Switches.
or similar devices, unless they are arranged so that the voltage between
adjacent devices does not exceed 300 volts, or unless they are installed (a) Surface-Type. Snap switches used with open wiring on
in enclosures equipped with identified, securely installed barriers insulators shall be mounted on insulating material that separates the
between adjacent devices. conductors at least 13 mm from the surface wired over.

4.4.1.9 Provisions for General-Use Snap Switches. (b) Box Mounted. Flush-type snap switches mounted in boxes that
are set back of the finished surface as permitted in 3.14.2.6 shall be
(a) Faceplates. Faceplates provided for snap switches mounted in installed so that the extension plaster ears are seated against the
boxes and other enclosures shall be installed so as to completely cover surface. Flush-type snap switches mounted in boxes that are flush with
the opening and, where the switch is flush mounted, seat against the the finished surface or project from it shall be installed so that the
finished surface. mounting yoke or strap of the switch is seated against the box.

(b) Grounding. Snap switches, including dimmer and similar 4.4.1.11 Circuit Breakers as Switches. A hand-operable circuit
control switches, shall be effectively grounded and shall provide a breaker equipped with a lever or handle, or a power-operated circuit
means to ground metal faceplates, whether or not a metal faceplate is breaker capable of being opened by hand in the event of a power
installed. Snap switches shall be considered effectively grounded if failure, shall be permitted to serve as a switch if it has the required
either of the following conditions is met: number of poles.

(1) The switch is mounted with metal screws to a metal box or to a FPN: See the provisions contained in 2.40.7.2 and 2.40.7.4.
nonmetallic box with integral means for grounding devices.
(2) An equipment grounding conductor or equipment bonding 4.4.1.12 Grounding of Enclosures. Metal enclosures for switches or
jumper is connected to an equipment grounding termination of the snap circuit breakers shall be grounded as specified in Article 2.50. Where
switch. nonmetallic enclosures are used with metal raceways or metal-armored
cables, provision shall be made for grounding continuity.
Exception to (b): Where no grounding means exists within the snap- Except as covered in 4.4.1.9(b), Exception, nonmetallic boxes for
switch enclosure or where the wiring method does not include or switches shall be installed with a wiring method that provides or
provide an equipment ground, a snap switch without a grounding includes an equipment ground.
connection shall be permitted for replacement purposes only. A snap
switch wired under the provisions of this exception and located within 4.4.1.13 Knife Switches.
reach of earth, grade, conducting floors, or other conducting surfaces
shall be provided with a faceplate of nonconducting, noncombustible (a) Isolating Switches. Knife switches rated at over 1 200 amperes
material or shall be protected by a ground-fault circuit interrupter. at 250 volts or less, and at over 600 amperes at 251 to 600 volts, shall
be used only as isolating switches and shall not be opened under load.
(c) Construction. Metal faceplates shall be of ferrous metal not less
 (b) To Interrupt Currents. To interrupt currents over 1 200 of the switch at the applied voltage. Switches rated in horsepower are
amperes at 250 volts, nominal, or less, or over 600 amperes at 251 to suitable for controlling motor loads within their rating at the voltage
600 volts, nominal, a circuit breaker or a switch of special design listed applied.
for such purpose shall be used. (3) Tungsten-filament lamp loads not exceeding the ampere rating
of the switch at the applied voltage if T-rated.
(c) General-Use Switches. Knife switches of ratings less than
specified in 4.4.1.13(a) and 4.4.1.13(b) shall be considered general-use (c) CO/ALR Snap Switches. Snap switches rated 20 amperes or less
switches. directly connected to aluminum conductors shall be listed and marked
CO/ALR.
FPN: See the definition of General-Use Switch in Article 100.
(d) Alternating-Current Specific-Use Snap Switches Rated for
(d) Motor-Circuit Switches. Motor-circuit switches shall be 347 Volts. Snap switches rated 347 volts ac shall be listed and shall be
permitted to be of the knife-switch type. used only for controlling the loads permitted by (d)(1) and (d)(2).
FPN: See the definition of a Motor-Circuit Switch in Article 1.1.
(1) Noninductive Loads. Noninductive loads other than tungsten-
filament lamps not exceeding the ampere and voltage ratings of the
4.4.1.14 Rating and Use of Snap Switches. Snap switches shall be
switch.
used within their ratings and as indicated in 4.4.1.14(a) through
(2) Inductive Loads. Inductive loads not exceeding the ampere and
4.4.1.14(d).
voltage ratings of the switch. Where particular load characteristics or
FPN No. 1: For switches on signs and outline lighting, see 6.0.1.6. limitations are specified as a condition of the listing, those restrictions
FPN No. 2: For switches controlling motors, see 4.30.7.3, 4.30.9.9, and 4.30.9.10. shall be observed regardless of the ampere rating of the load.

(a) Alternating Current General-Use Snap Switch. A form of The ampere rating of the switch shall not be less than 15 amperes at
general-use snap switch suitable only for use on ac circuits for a voltage rating of 347 volts ac. Flush-type snap switches rated 347
controlling the following: volts ac shall not be readily interchangeable in box mounting with
switches identified in 4.4.1.14(a) and 4.4.1.14(b).
(1) Resistive and inductive loads, including electric-discharge
lamps, not exceeding the ampere rating of the switch at the voltage (e) Dimmer Switches. General-use dimmer switches shall be used
involved only to control permanently installed incandescent luminaires (lighting
(2) Tungsten-filament lamp loads not exceeding the ampere rating fixtures) unless listed for the control of other loads and installed
of the switch at 120 volts accordingly.
(3) Motor loads not exceeding 80 percent of the ampere rating of
the switch at its rated voltage 4.4.2 Construction Specifications

(b) Alternating-Current or Direct-Current General-Use Snap 4.4.2.1 Marking.

Switch. A form of general-use snap switch suitable for use on either ac
or dc circuits for controlling the following: (a) Ratings. Switches shall be marked with the current voltage, and,
if horsepower rated, the maximum rating for which they are designed.
(1) Resistive loads not exceeding the ampere rating of the switch
at the voltage applied. (b) Off Indication. Where in the off position, a switching device
(2) Inductive loads not exceeding 50 percent of the ampere rating with a marked OFF position shall completely disconnect all
ungrounded conductors to the load it controls. (1) Isolated Equipment Grounding Conductor Required.
Receptacles so identified shall be used only with grounding conductors
4.4.2.2 600-Volt Knife Switches. Auxiliary contacts of a renewable or that are isolated in accordance with 2.50.7.17(d).
quick-break type or the equivalent shall be provided on all knife (2) Installation in Nonmetallic Boxes. Isolated ground receptacles
switches rated 600 volts and designed for use in breaking current over installed in nonmetallic boxes shall be covered with a nonmetallic
200 amperes. faceplate.

4.4.2.3 Fused Switches. A fused switch shall not have fuses in parallel Exception: Where an isolated ground receptacle is installed in a
except as permitted in 2.40.1.8. nonmetallic box, a metal faceplate shall be permitted if the box
contains a feature or accessory that permits the effective grounding of
4.4.2.4 Wire-Bending Space. The wire-bending space required by the faceplate.
4.4.1.3 shall meet Table 3.12.1.6(b) spacings to the enclosure wall
opposite the line and load terminals. 4.6.1.3 General Installation Requirements. Receptacle outlets shall
be located in branch circuits in accordance with Part 2.10.3. General
installation requirements shall be in accordance with 4.6.1.3(a) through
ARTICLE 4.6 — RECEPTACLES, CORD CONNECTORS, AND 4.6.1.3(f).
ATTACHMENT PLUGS (CAPS)
(a) Grounding Type. Receptacles installed on 15- and 20-ampere
4.6.1.1 Scope. This article covers the rating, type, and installation of branch circuits shall be of the grounding type. Grounding-type
receptacles, cord connectors, and attachment plugs (cord caps). receptacles shall be installed only on circuits of the voltage class and
current for which they are rated, except as provided in Table
4.6.1.2 Receptacle Rating and Type. 2.10.2.3(b)(2) and Table 2.10.2.3(b)(3).

(a) Receptacles. Receptacles shall be listed and marked with the Exception: Nongrounding-type receptacles installed in accordance
manufacturer’s name or identification and voltage and ampere ratings. with 4.6.1.3(d).

(b) Rating. Receptacles and cord connectors shall be rated not less (b) To Be Grounded. Receptacles and cord connectors that have
than 15 amperes, 125 volts, or 15 amperes, 250 volts, and shall be of a grounding contacts shall have those contacts effectively grounded.
type not suitable for use as lampholders.
Exception No. 1: Receptacles mounted on portable and vehicle-
FPN: See 2.10.2.3(b) for receptacle ratings where installed on branch circuits. mounted generators in accordance with 2.50.2.15.
Exception No. 2: Replacement receptacles as permitted by 4.6.1.3(d).
(c) Receptacles for Aluminum Conductors. Receptacles rated 20
amperes or less and designed for the direct connection of aluminum (c) Methods of Grounding. The grounding contacts of receptacles
conductors shall be marked CO/ALR. and cord connectors shall be grounded by connection to the equipment
grounding conductor of the circuit supplying the receptacle or cord
(d) Isolated Ground Receptacles. Receptacles incorporating an connector.
isolated grounding connection intended for the reduction of electrical
noise (electromagnetic interference) as permitted in 2.50.7.17(d) shall FPN: For installation requirements for the reduction of electrical noise, see
be identified by an orange triangle located on the face of the receptacle. 2.50.7.17(d).
 The branch-circuit wiring method shall include or provide an cord-and-plug-connected equipment be of the grounded type.
equipment-grounding conductor to which the grounding contacts of the
receptacle or cord connector are connected. FPN: See 2.50.6.5 for types of cord-and-plug-connected equipment to be
grounded.

FPN No. 1: See 2.50.6.9 for acceptable grounding means.

FPN No. 2: For extensions of existing branch circuits, see 2.50.7.1. (f) Noninterchangeable Types. Receptacles connected to circuits
that have different voltages, frequencies, or types of current (ac or dc)
(d) Replacements. Replacement of receptacles shall comply with on the same premises shall be of such design that the attachment plugs
4.6.1.3(d)(1), (d)(2), and (d)(3) as applicable. used on these circuits are not interchangeable.

(1) Grounding-Type Receptacles. Where a grounding means exists 4.6.1.4 Receptacle Mounting. Receptacles shall be mounted in boxes
in the receptacle enclosure or a grounding conductor is installed in or assemblies designed for the purpose, and such boxes or assemblies
accordance with 2.50.7.1(c), grounding-type receptacles shall be used shall be securely fastened in place unless otherwise permitted
and shall be connected to the grounding conductor in accordance with elsewhere in this Code.
4.6.1.3(c) or 2.50.7.1(c).
(2) Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters. Ground-fault circuit- (a) Boxes That Are Set Back. Receptacles mounted in boxes that
interrupter protected receptacles shall be provided where replacements are set back from the finished surface as permitted in 3.14.2.6 shall be
are made at receptacle outlets that are required to be so protected installed such that the mounting yoke or strap of the receptacle is held
elsewhere in this Code. rigidly at the finished surface.
(3) Non–grounding-Type Receptacles. Where grounding means
does not exist in the receptacle enclosure, the installation shall comply (b) Boxes That Are Flush. Receptacles mounted in boxes that are
with (d)(3)a, (d)(3)b, or (d)(3)c. flush with the finished surface or project therefrom shall be installed
such that the mounting yoke or strap of the receptacle is held rigidly
a. A non–grounding-type receptacle(s) shall be permitted to be against the box or box cover.
replaced with another non–grounding-type receptacle(s).
b. A non–grounding-type receptacle(s) shall be permitted to be (c) Receptacles Mounted on Covers. Receptacles mounted to and
replaced with a ground-fault circuit interrupter-type of receptacle(s). supported by a cover shall be held rigidly against the cover by more
These receptacles shall be marked “No Equipment Ground.” An than one screw or shall be a device assembly or box cover listed and
equipment grounding conductor shall not be connected from the identified for securing by a single screw.
ground-fault circuit-interrupter-type receptacle to any outlet supplied
from the ground-fault circuit-interrupter receptacle. (d) Position of Receptacle Faces. After installation, receptacle faces
c. A non–grounding-type receptacle(s) shall be permitted to be shall be flush with or project from faceplates of insulating material and
replaced with a grounding-type receptacle(s) where supplied through a shall project a minimum of 0.38 mm from metal faceplates.
ground-fault circuit interrupter. Grounding-type receptacles supplied
through the ground-fault circuit interrupter shall be marked “GFCI Exception No. 1: Listed kits or assemblies encompassing receptacles
Protected” and “No Equipment Ground.” An equipment grounding and nonmetallic faceplates that cover the receptacle face, where the
conductor shall not be connected between the grounding-type plate cannot be installed on any other receptacle, shall be permitted.
receptacles. Exception No. 2: Listed nonmetallic faceplates that cover the
receptacle face to a maximum thickness of 1.00 mm shall be permitted.
(e) Cord-and-Plug-Connected Equipment. The installation of
grounding-type receptacles shall not be used as a requirement that all (e) Receptacles in Countertops and Similar Work Surfaces in
Dwelling Units. Receptacles shall not be installed in a face-up position attachment plug with the contacts of the receptacle.
in countertops or similar work surfaces.
(d) Flanged Surface Inlet. A flanged surface inlet shall be installed
(f) Exposed Terminals. Receptacles shall be enclosed so that live such that the prongs, blades, or pins are not energized unless an
wiring terminals are not exposed to contact. energized cord connector is inserted into it.

4.6.1.5 Receptacle Faceplates (Cover Plates). Receptacle faceplates 4.6.1.7 Noninterchangeability. Receptacles, cord connectors, and
shall be installed so as to completely cover the opening and seat attachment plugs shall be constructed such that receptacle or cord
against the mounting surface. connectors do not accept an attachment plug with a different voltage or
current rating from that for which the device is intended. However, a
(a) Thickness of Metal Faceplates. Metal faceplates shall be of 20-ampere T-slot receptacle or cord connector shall be permitted to
ferrous metal not less than 0.75 mm in thickness or of nonferrous metal accept a 15-ampere attachment plug of the same voltage rating. Non–
not less than 1.00 mm in thickness. grounding-type receptacles and connectors shall not accept grounding-
type attachment plugs.
(b) Grounding. Metal faceplates shall be grounded.
4.6.1.8 Receptacles in Damp or Wet Locations.
(c) Faceplates of Insulating Material. Faceplates of insulating
material shall be noncombustible and not less than 0.25 mm in (a) Damp Locations. A receptacle installed outdoors in a location
thickness but shall be permitted to be less than 0.25 mm in thickness if protected from the weather or in other damp locations shall have an
formed or reinforced to provide adequate mechanical strength. enclosure for the receptacle that is weatherproof when the receptacle is
covered (attachment plug cap not inserted and receptacle covers
4.6.1.6 Attachment Plugs, Cord Connectors, and Flanged Surface closed).
Devices. All attachment plugs, cord connectors, and flanged surface An installation suitable for wet locations shall also be considered
devices (inlets and outlets) shall be listed and marked with the suitable for damp locations.
manufacturer’s name or identification and voltage and ampere ratings. A receptacle shall be considered to be in a location protected from
the weather where located under roofed open porches, canopies,
(a) Construction of Attachment Plugs and Cord Connectors. marquees, and the like, and will not be subjected to a beating rain or
Attachment plugs and cord connectors shall be constructed so that water runoff.
there are no exposed current-carrying parts except the prongs, blades,
or pins. The cover for wire terminations shall be a part that is essential (b) Wet Locations.
for the operation of an attachment plug or connector (dead-front
construction). (1) 15- and 20-Ampere Receptacles in a Wet Location. 15- and 20-
ampere, 125- and 250-volt receptacles installed in a wet location shall
(b) Connection of Attachment Plugs. Attachment plugs shall be have an enclosure that is weatherproof whether or not the attachment
installed so that their prongs, blades, or pins are not energized unless plug cap is inserted.
inserted into an energized receptacle. No receptacle shall be installed (2) Other Receptacles. All other receptacles installed in a wet
so as to require the insertion of an energized attachment plug as its location shall comply with (b)(2)a or (b)(2)b.
source of supply.
a. A receptacle installed in a wet location, where the product
(c) Attachment Plug Ejector Mechanisms. Attachment plug ejector intended to be plugged into it is not attended while in use, shall have an
mechanisms shall not adversely affect engagement of the blades of the enclosure that is weatherproof with the attachment plug cap inserted or
removed. green-colored rigid ear, lug, or similar device. The grounding
b. A receptacle installed in a wet location where the product connection shall be so designed that it cannot make contact with
intended to be plugged into it will be attended while in use (e.g., current-carrying parts of the receptacle, adapter, or attachment plug.
portable tools) shall have an enclosure that is weatherproof when the The adapter shall be polarized.
attachment plug is removed. (4) If the terminal for the grounding conductor is not visible, the
conductor entrance hole shall be marked with the word green or
(c) Bathtub and Shower Space. Receptacles shall not be installed ground, the letters G or GR, a grounding symbol, or otherwise
within or directly over a bathtub or shower stall. identified by a distinctive green color. If the terminal for the equipment
grounding conductor is readily removable, the area adjacent to the
(d) Protection for Floor Receptacles. Standpipes of floor terminal shall be similarly marked.
receptacles shall allow floor-cleaning equipment to be operated
without damage to receptacles. FPN: See FPN Figure 4.6.1.9(b)(4).

(e) Flush Mounting with Faceplate. The enclosure for a receptacle

installed in an outlet box flush-mounted in a finished surface shall be
made weatherproof by means of a weatherproof faceplate assembly
that provides a watertight connection between the plate and the
finished surface.
FPN Figure 4.6.1.9(b)(4) One Example of a Symbol Used to
4.6.1.9 Grounding-Type Receptacles, Adapters, Cord Connectors, Identify the Termination Point for an Equipment Grounding
and Attachment Plugs. Conductor.

(a) Grounding Poles. Grounding-type receptacles, cord connectors,

and attachment plugs shall be provided with one fixed grounding pole (c) Grounding Terminal Use. A grounding terminal or grounding-
in addition to the circuit poles. The grounding contacting pole of type device shall not be used for purposes other than grounding.
grounding-type plug-in ground-fault circuit interrupters shall be
permitted to be of the movable, self-restoring type on circuits operating (d) Grounding-Pole Requirements. Grounding-type attachment
at not over 150 volts between any two conductors or any conductor and plugs and mating cord connectors and receptacles shall be designed
ground. such that the grounding connection is made before the current-carrying
connections. Grounding-type devices shall be so designed that
(b) Grounding-Pole Identification. Grounding-type receptacles, grounding poles of attachment plugs cannot be brought into contact
adapters, cord connections, and attachment plugs shall have a means with current-carrying parts of receptacles or cord connectors.
for connection of a grounding conductor to the grounding pole.
A terminal for connection to the grounding pole shall be designated (e) Use. Grounding-type attachment plugs shall be used only with a
by one of the following: cord having an equipment grounding conductor.

FPN: See 2.0.1.10(b) for identification of grounded conductor terminals.

(1) A green-colored hexagonal-headed or -shaped terminal screw
or nut, not readily removable.
4.6.1.10 Connecting Receptacle Grounding Terminal to Box. The
(2) A green-colored pressure wire connector body (a wire barrel).
connection of the receptacle grounding terminal shall comply with
(3) A similar green-colored connection device, in the case of
2.50.7.17.
adapters. The grounding terminal of a grounding adapter shall be a
 (b) Overheating and Inductive Effects. The arrangement of
busbars and conductors shall be such as to avoid overheating due to
ARTICLE 4.8 — SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELBOARDS inductive effects.

4.8.1 General (c) Used as Service Equipment. Each switchboard or panelboard, if

used as service equipment, shall be provided with a main bonding
4.8.1.1 Scope. This article covers the following: jumper sized in accordance with 2.50.2.9(d) or the equivalent placed
within the panelboard or one of the sections of the switchboard for
(1) All switchboards, panelboards, and distribution boards connecting the grounded service conductor on its supply side to the
installed for the control of light and power circuits switchboard or panelboard frame. All sections of a switchboard shall
(2) Battery-charging panels supplied from light or power circuits be bonded together using an equipment bonding conductor sized in
accordance with Table 2.50.6.13 or Table 2.50.3.17 as appropriate.
4.8.1.2 Other Articles. Switches, circuit breakers, and overcurrent
devices used on switchboards, panelboards, and distribution boards, Exception: Switchboards and panelboards used as service equipment
and their enclosures shall comply with this article and also with the on high-impedance grounded-neutral systems in accordance with
requirements of Articles 2.40, 2.50, 3.12, 3.14, 4.4, and other articles 2.50.2.17 shall not be required to be provided with a main bonding
that apply. Switchboards and panelboards in hazardous (classified) jumper.
locations shall comply with the requirements of Articles 5.0 through
5.17. (d) Terminals. In switchboards and panelboards, load terminals for
field wiring, including grounded circuit conductor load terminals and
4.8.1.3 Support and Arrangement of Busbars and Conductors. connections to the ground bus for load equipment grounding
conductors, shall be so located that it is not necessary to reach across
(a) Conductors and Busbars on a Switchboard or Panelboard. or beyond an uninsulated ungrounded line bus in order to make
Conductors and busbars on a switchboard or panelboard shall comply connections.
with 4.8.1.3(a)(1), (a)(2), and (a)(3) as applicable.
(e) Phase Arrangement. The phase arrangement on 3-phase buses
(1) Location. Conductors and busbars shall be located so as to be shall be A, B, C from front to back, top to bottom, or left to right, as
free from physical damage and shall be held firmly in place. viewed from the front of the switchboard or panelboard. The B phase
(2) Service Switchboards. Barriers shall be placed in all service shall be that phase having the higher voltage to ground on 3-phase, 4-
switchboards such that no uninsulated, ungrounded service busbar or wire, delta-connected systems. Other busbar arrangements shall be
service terminal is exposed to inadvertent contact by persons or permitted for additions to existing installations and shall be marked.
maintenance equipment while servicing load terminations.
(3) Same Vertical Section. Other than the required Exception: Equipment within the same single section or multisection
interconnections and control wiring, only those conductors that are switchboard or panelboard as the meter on 3-phase, 4-wire, delta-
intended for termination in a vertical section of a switchboard shall be connected systems shall be permitted to have the same phase
located in that section. configuration as the metering equipment.

Exception: Conductors shall be permitted to travel horizontally FPN: See 1.10.1.15 for requirements on marking the busbar or phase conductor
having the higher voltage to ground where supplied from a 4-wire, delta-connected
through vertical sections of switchboards where such conductors are system.
isolated from busbars by a barrier.
 (f) Minimum Wire-Bending Space. The minimum wire-bending 4.8.2 Switchboards
space at terminals and minimum gutter space provided in panelboards
and switchboards shall be as required in 3.12.1.6. 4.8.2.1 Switchboards in Damp or Wet Locations. Switchboards in
damp or wet locations shall be installed in accordance with 3.12.1.2(a).
4.8.1.4 Circuit Directory or Circuit Identification. Every circuit and
circuit modification shall be legibly identified as to its clear, evident, 4.8.2.2 Location Relative to Easily Ignitible Material. Switchboards
and specific purpose or use. The identification shall include sufficient shall be placed so as to reduce to a minimum the probability of
detail to allow each circuit to be distinguished from all others. The communicating fire to adjacent combustible materials. Where installed
identification shall be included in a circuit directory that is located on over a combustible floor, suitable protection thereto shall be provided.
the face or inside of the panel door in the case of a panelboard, and 4.8.2.3 Clearances.
located at each switch on a switchboard.
(a) From Ceiling. For other than a totally enclosed switchboard, a
4.8.1.5 Clearance for Conductor Entering Bus Enclosures. Where space not less than 900 mm shall be provided between the top of the
conduits or other raceways enter a switchboard, floor-standing switchboard and any combustible ceiling, unless a noncombustible
panelboard, or similar enclosure at the bottom, sufficient space shall be shield is provided between the switchboard and the ceiling.
provided to permit installation of conductors in the enclosure. The
wiring space shall not be less than shown in Table 4.8.1.5 where the (b) Around Switchboards. Clearances around switchboards shall
conduit or raceways enter or leave the enclosure below the busbars, comply with the provisions of 1.10.2.1.
their supports, or other obstructions. The conduit or raceways,
including their end fittings, shall not rise more than 75 mm above the 4.8.2.4 Conductor Insulation. An insulated conductor used within a
bottom of the enclosure. switchboard shall be listed, shall be flame retardant, and shall be rated
not less than the voltage applied to it and not less than the voltage
applied to other conductors or busbars with which it may come in
Table 4.8.1.5 Clearance for Conductors Entering Bus Enclosures contact.

Minimum Spacing Between 4.8.2.5 Location of Switchboards. Switchboards that have any
Bottom of Enclosure and exposed live parts shall be located in permanently dry locations and
Busbars, Their Supports, or then only where under competent supervision and accessible only to
Other Obstructions licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner
Conductor (mm) under the supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner. Switchboards
Insulated busbars, their 200 shall be located such that the probability of damage from equipment or
supports, or other obstructions processes is reduced to a minimum.
Noninsulated busbars 250
4.8.2.7 Grounding of Instruments, Relays, Meters, and Instrument
Transformers on Switchboards. Instruments, relays, meters, and
instrument transformers located on switchboards shall be grounded as
4.8.1.7 Unused Openings. Unused openings for circuit breakers and specified in 2.50.9.1 through 2.50.9.9.
switches shall be closed using identified closures, or other approved
means that provide protection substantially equivalent to the wall of 4.8.3 Panelboards
the enclosure.
4.8.3.1 General. All panelboards shall have a rating not less than the
minimum feeder capacity required for the load calculated in panelboard shall be individually protected on the supply side by not
accordance with Article 2.20. Panelboards shall be durably marked by more than two main circuit breakers or two sets of fuses having a
the manufacturer with the voltage and the current rating and the combined rating not greater than that of the panelboard.
number of phases for which they are designed and with the
manufacturer’s name or trademark in such a manner so as to be visible Exception No. 1: Individual protection for a lighting and appliance
after installation, without disturbing the interior parts or wiring. panelboard shall not be required if the panelboard feeder has
overcurrent protection not greater than the rating of the panelboard.
FPN: See 1.10.1.22 for additional requirements. Exception No. 2: For existing installations, individual protection for
lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards shall not be
4.8.3.5 Classification of Panelboards. Panelboards shall be classified required where such panelboards are used as service equipment in
for the purposes of this article as either lighting and appliance branch- supplying an individual residential occupancy.
circuit panelboards or power panelboards, based on their content. A
lighting and appliance branch circuit is a branch circuit that has a (b) Power Panelboard Protection. In addition to the requirements
connection to the neutral of the panelboard and that has overcurrent of 4.8.3.1, a power panelboard with supply conductors that include a
protection of 30 amperes or less in one or more conductors. neutral, and having more than 10 percent of its overcurrent devices
protecting branch circuits rated 30 amperes or less, shall be protected
(a) Lighting and Appliance Branch-Circuit Panelboard. A by an overcurrent protective devic.e having a rating not greater than
lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboard is one having more that of the panelboard. This overcurrent protective device shall be
than 10 percent of its overcurrent devices protecting lighting and located within or at any point on the supply side of the panelboard.
appliance branch circuits.
Exception: This individual protection shall not be required for a
(b) Power Panelboard. A power panelboard is one having power panelboard used as service equipment with multiple
10 percent or fewer of its overcurrent devices protecting lighting and disconnecting means in accordance with 2.30.6.2.
appliance branch circuits.
(c) Snap Switches Rated at 30 Amperes or Less. Panelboards
4.8.3.6 Number of Overcurrent Devices on One Panelboard. Not equipped with snap switches rated at 30 amperes or less shall have
more than 42 overcurrent devices (other than those provided for in the overcurrent protection of 200 amperes or less.
mains) of a lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboard shall be
installed in any one cabinet or cutout box. (d) Supplied Through a Transformer. Where a panelboard is
A lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboard shall be provided supplied through a transformer, the overcurrent protection required by
with physical means to prevent the installation of more overcurrent 4.8.3.7(a), (b), and (c) shall be located on the secondary side of the
devices than that number for which the panelboard was designed, transformer.
rated, and approved.
For the purposes of this article, a 2-pole circuit breaker shall be Exception: A panelboard supplied by the secondary side of a
considered two overcurrent devices; a 3-pole circuit breaker shall be transformer shall be considered as protected by the overcurrent
considered three overcurrent devices. protection provided on the primary side of the transformer where that
protection is in accordance with 2.40.2.2(c)(1).
4.8.3.7 Overcurrent Protection.
(e) Delta Breakers. A 3-phase disconnect or overcurrent device
(a) Lighting and Appliance Branch-Circuit Panelboard shall not be connected to the bus of any panelboard that has less than
Individually Protected. Each lighting and appliance branch-circuit 3-phase buses. Delta breakers shall not be installed in panelboards.
 (f) Back-Fed Devices. Plug-in-type overcurrent protection devices Grounding conductors shall not be connected to a terminal bar
or plug-in type main lug assemblies that are backfed and used to provided for grounded conductors (may be a neutral) unless the bar is
terminate field-installed ungrounded supply conductors shall be identified for the purpose and is located where interconnection between
secured in place by an additional fastener that requires other than a pull equipment grounding conductors and grounded circuit conductors is
to release the device from the mounting means on the panel. permitted or required by Article 2.50.

4.8.3.8 Panelboards in Damp or Wet Locations. Panelboards in 4.8.3.12 Grounded Conductor Terminations. Each grounded
damp or wet locations shall be installed to comply with 3.12.1.2(a). conductor shall terminate within the panelboard in an individual
terminal that is not also used for another conductor.
4.8.3.9 Enclosure. Panelboards shall be mounted in cabinets, cutout
boxes, or enclosures designed for the purpose and shall be dead-front. Exception: Grounded conductors of circuits with parallel conductors
shall be permitted to terminate in a single terminal if the terminal is
Exception: Panelboards other than of the dead-front, externally identified for connection of more than one conductor.
operable type shall be permitted where accessible only to licensed
electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner under the 4.8.4 Construction Specifications
supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner.
4.8.4.1 Panels. The panels of switchboards shall be made of moisture-
4.8.3.10 Relative Arrangement of Switches and Fuses. In resistant, noncombustible material.
panelboards, fuses of any type shall be installed on the load side of any
switches. 4.8.4.2 Busbars. Insulated or bare busbars shall be rigidly mounted.

Exception: Fuses installed as part of service equipment in accordance 4.8.4.3 Protection of Instrument Circuits. Instruments, pilot lights,
with the provisions of 2.30.7.5 shall be permitted on the line side of the potential transformers, and other switchboard devices with potential
service switch. coils shall be supplied by a circuit that is protected by standard
overcurrent devices rated 15 amperes or less.
4.8.3.11 Grounding of Panelboards. Panelboard cabinets and
panelboard frames, if of metal, shall be in physical contact with each Exception No. 1: Overcurrent devices rated more than 15 amperes
other and shall be grounded. Where the panelboard is used with shall be permitted where the interruption of the circuit could create a
nonmetallic raceway or cable or where separate grounding conductors hazard. Short-circuit protection shall be provided.
are provided, a terminal bar for the grounding conductors shall be Exception No. 2: For ratings of 2 amperes or less, special types of
secured inside the cabinet. The terminal bar shall be bonded to the enclosed fuses shall be permitted.
cabinet and panelboard frame, if of metal; otherwise it shall be
connected to the grounding conductor that is run with the conductors 4.8.4.4 Component Parts. Switches, fuses, and fuseholders used on
feeding the panelboard. panelboards shall comply with the applicable requirements of Articles
2.40 and 4.4.
Exception: Where an isolated equipment grounding conductor is
provided as permitted by 2.50.7.17(d), the insulated equipment 4.8.4.6 Wire-Bending Space in Panelboards. The enclosure for a
grounding conductor that is run with the circuit conductors shall be panelboard shall have the top and bottom wire-bending space sized in
permitted to pass through the panelboard without being connected to accordance with Table 3.12.1.6(b) for the largest conductor entering or
the panelboard’s equipment grounding terminal bar. leaving the enclosure. Side wire-bending space shall be in accordance
with Table 3.12.1.6(a) for the largest conductor to be terminated in that FPN: UL 508A is a safety standard for industrial control panels.
space.

Exception No. 1: Either the top or bottom wire-bending space shall be Table 4.8.4.7 Minimum Spacings Between Bare Metal Parts
permitted to be sized in accordance with Table 3.12.1.6(a) for a Opposite Opposite
lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboard rated 225 amperes Polarity Where Polarity
or less. Mounted on the Where Held Live Parts
Exception No. 2: Either the top or bottom wire-bending space for any Same Surface Free in Air to Ground*
panelboard shall be permitted to be sized in accordance with Table Voltage (mm) (mm) (mm)
3.12.1.6(a) where at least one side wire-bending space is sized in Not over 125 19.1 12.7 12.7
accordance with Table 3.12.1.6(b) for the largest conductor to be volts, nominal
terminated in any side wire-bending space. Not over 250 31.8 19.1 12.7
Exception No. 3: The top and bottom wire-bending space shall be volts, nominal
permitted to be sized in accordance with Table 3.12.1.6(a) spacings if Not over 600 50.8 25.4 25.4
the panelboard is designed and constructed for wiring using only one volts, nominal
single 90 degree bend for each conductor, including the grounded *For spacing between live parts and doors of cabinets, see 3.12.2.2(a)(1), (2), and
(3).
circuit conductor, and the wiring diagram shows and specifies the
method of wiring that shall be used.
Exception No. 4: Either the top or the bottom wire-bending space, but
4.9.1.2 Definitions.
not both, shall be permitted to be sized in accordance with Table
3.12.1.6(a) where there are no conductors terminated in that space.
Industrial Control Panel. An assembly of a systematic and standard
arrangement of two or more components such as motor controllers,
4.8.4.7 Minimum Spacings. The distance between bare metal parts,
overload relays, fused disconnect switches, and circuit breakers and
busbars, and so forth shall not be less than specified in Table 4.8.4.7.
related control devices such as pushbutton stations, selector switches,
Where close proximity does not cause excessive heating, parts of the
timers, switches, control relays, and the like with associated wiring,
same polarity at switches, enclosed fuses, and so forth shall be
terminal blocks, pilot lights, and similar components. The industrial
permitted to be placed as close together as convenience in handling
control panel does not include the controlled equipment.
will allow.
4.9.1.3 Other Articles. In addition to the requirements of Article 4.9,
Exception: The distance shall be permitted to be less than that
industrial control panels that contain branch circuits for specific loads
specified in Table 4.8.4.7 at circuit breakers and switches and in listed
or components, or are for control of specific types of equipment
components installed in switchboards and panelboards.
addressed in other articles of this Code, shall be constructed and
installed in accordance with the applicable requirements from the
specific articles in Table 4.9.1.3.
ARTICLE 4.9 — INDUSTRIAL CONTROL PANELS
4.9.2 Installation
4.9.1 General
4.9.2.1 Conductor — Minimum Size and Ampacity. The size of the
4.9.1.1 Scope. This article covers industrial control panels intended for
industrial control panel supply conductor shall have an ampacity not
general use and operating at 600 volts or less.
less than 125 percent of the full-load current rating of all resistance
heating loads plus 125 percent of the full-load current rating of the
highest rated motor plus the sum of the full-load current ratings of all 4.9.2.2 Overcurrent Protection.
other connected motors and apparatus based on their duty cycle that
may be in operation at the same time. (a) General. Industrial control panels shall be provided with
overcurrent protection in accordance with Parts 2.40.1, 2.40.2, and
2.40.9.
Table 4.9.1.3 Other Articles
Equipment/Occupancy Article Section (b) Location. This protection shall be provided by either of the
Branch circuits 2.10 following:
Luminaires 4.10
Motors, motor circuits, and 4.30 (1) An overcurrent protective device located ahead of the
controllers industrial control panel.
Air-conditioning and 4.40 (2) A single main overcurrent protective device located within the
refrigerating equipment industrial control panel. Where overcurrent protection is provided as
Capacitors 4.60.1.8, part of the industrial control panel, the supply conductors shall be
Hazardous (classified) 5.0, 5.1, 5.2, 503, 4.60.1.9 considered as either feeders or taps as covered by 2.40.2.2.
locations 5.4, 5.5
Commercial garages; aircraft 5.11, 5.13, 5.14, (c) Rating. The rating or setting of the overcurrent protective device
hangars; motor fuel 5.15, 5.16, and for the circuit supplying the industrial control panel shall not be greater
dispensing facilities; bulk 5.17.4 than the sum of the largest rating or setting of the branch-circuit short-
storage plants; spray circuit and ground-fault protective device provided with the industrial
application, dipping, and control panel, plus 125 percent of the full-load current rating of all
coating processes; and resistance heating loads, plus the sum of the full-load currents of all
inhalation anesthetizing other motors and apparatus that could be in operation at the same time.
locations
Cranes and hoists 6.10 Exception: Where one or more instantaneous trip circuit breakers or
Electrically driven or 6.75 motor short-circuit protectors are used for motor branch-circuit short-
controlled irrigation circuit and ground-fault protection as permitted by 4.30.4.2(c), the
machines procedure specified above for determining the maximum rating of the
Elevators, dumbwaiters, 6.20 protective device for the circuit supplying the industrial control panel
escalators, moving walks, shall apply with the following provision: For the purpose of the
wheelchair lifts, and stairway calculation, each instantaneous trip circuit breaker or motor short-
chair lifts circuit protector shall be assumed to have a rating not exceeding the
Industrial machinery 6.70 maximum percentage of motor full-load current permitted by Table
Resistors and reactors 4.70 4.30.4.2 for the type of control panel supply circuit protective device
Transformers 4.50 employed.
Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 7.25
remote-control, signaling, Where no branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protective
and power-limited circuits device is provided with the industrial control panel for motor or
combination of motor and non-motor loads, the rating or setting of the
overcurrent protective device shall be based on 4.30.4.2 and 4.30.4.3,
as applicable. fill the wiring space at any cross section to more than 40 percent of the
cross-sectional area of the space, and the conductors, splices, and taps
4.9.2.11 Disconnecting Means. Disconnecting means that supply shall not fill the wiring space at any cross section to more than 75
motor loads shall comply with Part 4.30.9. percent of the cross-sectional area of that space.

4.9.2.41 Grounding. Multisection industrial control panels shall be (b) Wire Bending Space. Wire bending space for the main supply
bonded together with an equipment grounding conductor or an terminals shall be in accordance with the requirements in 3.12.1.6.
equivalent grounding bus sized in accordance with Table 2.50.6.13. Wire bending space for other terminals shall be in accordance with the
Equipment grounding conductors shall terminate on this grounding bus requirements in 4.30.1.10(b). The gutter space shall comply with
or to a grounding termination point provided in a single-section 3.12.1.8.
industrial control panel.
4.9.3.9 Service-Entrance Equipment. Where used as service
4.9.3 Construction Specifications equipment, each industrial control panel shall be of the type that is
suitable for use as service equipment.
4.9.3.1 Enclosures. Table 4.30.7.11 shall be used as the basis for Where a grounded conductor is provided, the industrial control panel
selecting industrial control panel enclosures for use in specific shall be provided with a main bonding jumper, sized in accordance
locations other than hazardous (classified) locations. The enclosures with 2.50.2.9(d), for connecting the grounded conductor, on its supply
are not intended to protect against conditions such as condensation, side, to the industrial control panel equipment ground bus or terminal.
icing, corrosion, or contamination that may occur within the enclosure
or enter via the conduit or unsealed openings. 4.9.3.11 Marking. An industrial control panel shall be marked with the
following information that is plainly visible after installation:
4.9.3.3 Busbars and Conductors. Industrial control panels utilizing
busbars shall comply with 4.9.3.3(a) and 4.9.3.3(b). (1) Manufacturer's name, trademark, or other descriptive marking
by which the organization responsible for the product can be identified.
(a) Support and Arrangement. Busbars shall be protected from (2) Supply voltage, phase, frequency, and full-load current.
physical damage and be held firmly in place. (3) Short-circuit current rating of the industrial control panel based
on one of the following:
(b) Phase Arrangement. The phase arrangement on 3-phase
horizontal common power and vertical buses shall be A, B, C from a. Short-circuit current rating of a listed and labeled assembly
front to back, top to bottom, or left to right, as viewed from the front of b. Short-circuit current rating established utilizing an approved
the industrial control panel. The B phase shall be that phase having the method
higher voltage to ground on 3-phase, 4-wire, delta-connected systems.
Other busbar arrangements shall be permitted for additions to existing FPN: UL 508A-2001, Supplement SB, is an example of an approved method.
installations and shall be marked.
(4) If the industrial control panel is intended as service equipment,
4.9.3.5 Wiring Space in Industrial Control Panels. it shall be marked to identify it as being suitable for use as service
equipment.
(a) General. Industrial control panel enclosures shall not be used as (5) Electrical wiring diagram or the number of the index to the
junction boxes, auxiliary gutters, or raceways for conductors feeding electrical drawings showing the electrical wiring diagram.
through or tapping off to other switches or overcurrent devices, unless (6) An enclosure type number shall be marked on the industrial
adequate space for this purpose is provided. The conductors shall not control panel enclosure.
 Locations” or “Suitable for Damp Locations.”

ARTICLE 4.10 — LUMINAIRES (LIGHTING FIXTURES), (b) Corrosive Locations. Luminaires (fixtures) installed in corrosive
LAMPHOLDERS, AND LAMPS locations shall be of a type suitable for such locations.

4.10.1 General (c) In Ducts or Hoods. Luminaires (fixtures) shall be permitted to

be installed in commercial cooking hoods where all of the following
4.10.1.1 Scope. This article covers luminaires (lighting fixtures), conditions are met:
lampholders, pendants, incandescent filament lamps, arc lamps,
electric-discharge lamps, decorative lighting products, lighting (1) The luminaire (fixture) shall be identified for use within
accessories for temporary seasonal and holiday use, portable flexible commercial cooking hoods and installed such that the temperature
lighting products, and the wiring and equipment forming part of such limits of the materials used are not exceeded.
products and lighting installations. (2) The luminaire (fixture) shall be constructed so that all exhaust
vapors, grease, oil, or cooking vapors are excluded from the lamp and
4.10.1.2 Application of Other Articles. Equipment for use in wiring compartment. Diffusers shall be resistant to thermal shock.
hazardous (classified) locations shall conform to Articles 5.0 through (3) Parts of the luminaire (fixture) exposed within the hood shall
5.17. Lighting systems operating at 30 volts or less shall conform to be corrosion resistant or protected against corrosion, and the surface
Article 4.11. Arc lamps used in theaters shall comply with 5.20.5.1, shall be smooth so as not to collect deposits and to facilitate cleaning.
and arc lamps used in projection machines shall comply with (4) Wiring methods and materials supplying the luminaire(s)
5.40.2.11. Arc lamps used on constant-current systems shall comply [fixture(s)] shall not be exposed within the cooking hood.
with the general requirements of Article 4.90.
FPN: See 1.10.1.11 for conductors and equipment exposed to deteriorating agents.
4.10.1.3 Live Parts. Luminaires (fixtures), lampholders, and lamps
shall have no live parts normally exposed to contact. Exposed (d) Bathtub and Shower Areas. No parts of cord-connected
accessible terminals in lampholders and switches shall not be installed luminaires (fixtures), chain-, cable-, or cord-suspended-luminaires
in metal luminaire (fixture) canopies or in open bases of portable table (fixtures), lighting track, pendants, or ceiling-suspended (paddle) fans
or floor lamps. shall be located within a zone measured 900 mm horizontally and
2 400 mm vertically from the top of the bathtub rim or shower stall
Exception: Cleat-type lampholders located at least 2 400 mm above threshold. This zone is all encompassing and includes the zone directly
the floor shall be permitted to have exposed terminals. over the tub or shower stall. Luminaires (lighting fixtures) located in
this zone shall be listed for damp locations, or listed for wet locations
4.10.2 Luminaire (Fixture) Locations where subject to shower spray.

4.10.2.1 Luminaires (Fixtures) in Specific Locations. (e) Luminaires (Fixtures) in Indoor Sports, Mixed-Use, and All-
Purpose Facilities. Luminaires (fixtures) subject to physical damage,
(a) Wet and Damp Locations. Luminaires (fixtures) installed in wet using a mercury vapor or metal halide lamp, installed in playing and
or damp locations shall be installed so that water cannot enter or spectator seating areas of indoor sports, mixed-use, or all-purpose
accumulate in wiring compartments, lampholders, or other electrical facilities shall be of the type that protects the lamp with a glass or
parts. All luminaires (fixtures) installed in wet locations shall be plastic lens. Such luminaires (fixtures) shall be permitted to have an
marked, “Suitable for Wet Locations.” All luminaires (fixtures) additional guard.
installed in damp locations shall be marked, “Suitable for Wet
4.10.2.2 Luminaires (Fixtures) Near Combustible Material.
Luminaires (fixtures) shall be constructed, installed, or equipped with
shades or guards so that combustible material is not subjected to
temperatures in excess of 90°C (194°F).

4.10.2.3 Luminaires (Fixtures) Over Combustible Material.

Lampholders installed over highly combustible material shall be of the
unswitched type. Unless an individual switch is provided for each
luminaire (fixture), lampholders shall be located at least 2 400 mm
above the floor or shall be located or guarded so that the lamps cannot
be readily removed or damaged.

4.10.2.4 Luminaires (Fixtures) in Show Windows. Chain-supported

luminaires (fixtures) used in a show window shall be permitted to be
externally wired. No other externally wired luminaires (fixtures) shall
be used.

4.10.2.5 Luminaires (Fixtures) in Clothes Closets.

(a) Definition. Figure 4.10.2.5 Closet Storage Space.

Storage Space. The volume bounded by the sides and back closet
walls and planes extending from the closet floor vertically to a height (c) Luminaire (Fixture) Types Not Permitted. Incandescent
of 1 800 mm or to the highest clothes-hanging rod and parallel to the luminaires (fixtures) with open or partially enclosed lamps and pendant
walls at a horizontal distance of 600 mm from the sides and back of the luminaires (fixtures) or lampholders shall not be permitted.
closet walls, respectively, and continuing vertically to the closet ceiling
parallel to the walls at a horizontal distance of 300 mm or the width of (d) Location. Luminaires (fixtures) in clothes closets shall be
the shelf, whichever is greater; for a closet that permits access to both permitted to be installed as follows:
sides of a hanging rod, this space includes the volume below the
highest rod extending 300 mm on either side of the rod on a plane (1) Surface-mounted incandescent luminaires (fixtures) installed
horizontal to the floor extending the entire length of the rod. on the wall above the door or on the ceiling, provided there is a
minimum clearance of 300 mm between the luminaire (fixture) and the
FPN: See Figure 4.10.2.5. nearest point of a storage space
(2) Surface-mounted fluorescent luminaires (fixtures) installed on
(b) Luminaire (Fixture) Types Permitted. Listed luminaires the wall above the door or on the ceiling, provided there is a minimum
(fixtures) of the following types shall be permitted to be installed in a clearance of 150 mm between the luminaire (fixture) and the nearest
closet: point of a storage space
(3) Recessed incandescent luminaires (fixtures) with a completely
(1) A surface-mounted or recessed incandescent luminaire enclosed lamp installed in the wall or the ceiling, provided there is a
(fixture) with a completely enclosed lamp minimum clearance of 150 mm between the luminaire (fixture) and the
(2) A surface-mounted or recessed fluorescent luminaire (fixture) nearest point of a storage space
 (4) Recessed fluorescent luminaires (fixtures) installed in the wall connected to the branch circuit through metal raceway, nonmetallic
or the ceiling, provided there is a minimum clearance of 150 mm raceway, Type MC cable, Type AC cable, Type MI cable, nonmetallic
between the luminaire (fixture) and the nearest point of a storage space sheathed cable, or by flexible cord as permitted in 4.10.6.9(b) or
4.10.6.9(c).
4.10.2.6 Space for Cove Lighting. Coves shall have adequate space
and shall be located so that lamps and equipment can be properly (b) Access to Boxes. Electric-discharge luminaires (fixtures) surface
installed and maintained. mounted over concealed outlet, pull, or junction boxes and designed
not to be supported solely by the outlet box shall be provided with
4.10.3 Provisions at Luminaire (Fixture) suitable openings in the back of the luminaire (fixture) to provide
Outlet Boxes, Canopies, and Pans access to the wiring in the box.

4.10.3.1 Space for Conductors. Canopies and outlet boxes taken 4.10.4 Luminaire (Fixture) Supports
together shall provide adequate space so that luminaire (fixture)
conductors and their connecting devices can be properly installed. 4.10.4.1 Supports.

4.10.3.2 Temperature Limit of Conductors in Outlet Boxes. (a) General. Luminaires (fixtures) and lampholders shall be securely
Luminaires (fixtures) shall be of such construction or installed so that supported. A luminaire (fixture) that weighs more than 3 kg (6 lb) or
the conductors in outlet boxes shall not be subjected to temperatures exceeds 410 mm in any dimension shall not be supported by the screw
greater than that for which the conductors are rated. shell of a lampholder.
Branch-circuit wiring, other than 2-wire or multiwire branch circuits
supplying power to luminaires (fixtures) connected together, shall not (b) Metal or Nonmetallic Poles Supporting Luminaires (Lighting
be passed through an outlet box that is an integral part of a luminaire Fixtures). Metal or nonmetallic poles shall be permitted to be used to
(fixture) unless the luminaire (fixture) is identified for through-wiring. support luminaires (lighting fixtures) and as a raceway to enclose
supply conductors, provided the following conditions are met:
FPN: See 4.10.6.11 for wiring supplying power to fixtures connected together.
(1) A pole shall have a handhole not less than 50 mm × 100 mm
4.10.3.3 Outlet Boxes to Be Covered. In a completed installation, with a raintight cover to provide access to the supply terminations
each outlet box shall be provided with a cover unless covered by within the pole or pole base.
means of a luminaire (fixture) canopy, lampholder, receptacle, or
similar device. Exception No. 1: No handhole shall be required in a pole 2 400 mm or
less in height above grade where the supply wiring method continues
4.10.3.4 Covering of Combustible Material at Outlet Boxes. Any without splice or pull point, and where the interior of the pole and any
combustible wall or ceiling finish exposed between the edge of a splices are accessible by removing the luminaire (fixture).
luminaire (fixture) canopy or pan and an outlet box shall be covered Exception No. 2: No handhole shall be required in a pole 6 000 mm or
with noncombustible material. less in height above grade that is provided with a hinged base.
4.10.3.5 Connection of Electric-Discharge Luminaires (Lighting (2) Where raceway risers or cable is not installed within the pole,
Fixtures). a threaded fitting or nipple shall be brazed, welded, or attached to the
pole opposite the handhole for the supply connection.
(a) Independent of the Outlet Box. Electric-discharge luminaires (3) A metal pole shall be provided with a grounding terminal as
(lighting fixtures) supported independently of the outlet box shall be follows:
 (d) Luminaire (Fixture) Studs. Luminaire (fixture) studs that are
a. A pole with a handhole shall have the grounding terminal not a part of outlet boxes, hickeys, tripods, and crowfeet shall be made
accessible from the handhole. of steel, malleable iron, or other material suitable for the application.
b. A pole with a hinged base shall have the grounding terminal
accessible within the base. (e) Insulating Joints. Insulating joints that are not designed to be
mounted with screws or bolts shall have an exterior metal casing,
Exception to (3): No grounding terminal shall be required in a pole insulated from both screw connections.
2 400 mm or less in height above grade where the supply wiring
method continues without splice or pull, and where the interior of the (f) Raceway Fittings. Raceway fittings used to support a
pole and any splices are accessible by removing the luminaire luminaire(s) [lighting fixture(s)] shall be capable of supporting the
(fixture). weight of the complete fixture assembly and lamp(s).

(4) A metal pole with a hinged base shall have the hinged base and (g) Busways. Luminaires (fixtures) shall be permitted to be
pole bonded together. connected to busways in accordance with 3.68.2.8(c).
(5) Metal raceways or other equipment grounding conductors shall
be bonded to the metal pole with an equipment grounding conductor (h) Trees. Outdoor luminaires (lighting fixtures) and associated
recognized by 2.50.6.9 and sized in accordance with 2.50.6.13. equipment shall be permitted to be supported by trees.
(6) Conductors in vertical poles used as raceway shall be
supported as provided in 3.0.1.19. FPN No. 1: See 2.25.1.26 for restrictions for support of overhead conductors.
FPN No. 2: See 3.0.1.5(d) for protection of conductors.

4.10.4.2 Means of Support.

4.10.5 Grounding
(a) Outlet Boxes. Outlet boxes or fittings installed as required by
4.10.5.1 General. Luminaires (fixtures) and lighting equipment shall
3.14.2.9 and complying with the provisions of 3.14.2.13(a) and
be grounded as required in Part 2.50.5.
3.14.2.13(b) shall be permitted to support luminaires (fixtures).
4.10.5.2 Exposed Luminaire (Fixture) Parts.
(b) Inspection. Luminaires (fixtures) shall be installed such that the
connections between the luminaire (fixture) conductors and the circuit
(a) Exposed Conductive Parts. Exposed metal parts shall be
conductors can be inspected without requiring the disconnection of any
grounded or insulated from ground and other conducting surfaces or be
part of the wiring unless the luminaires (fixtures) are connected by
inaccessible to unqualified personnel. Lamp tie wires, mounting
attachment plugs and receptacles.
screws, clips, and decorative bands on glass spaced at least 40 mm
from lamp terminals shall not be required to be grounded.
(c) Suspended Ceilings. Framing members of suspended ceiling
systems used to support luminaires (fixtures) shall be securely fastened
(b) Made of Insulating Material. Luminaires (fixtures) directly
to each other and shall be securely attached to the building structure at
wired or attached to outlets supplied by a wiring method that does not
appropriate intervals. Luminaires (fixtures) shall be securely fastened
provide a ready means for grounding shall be made of insulating
to the ceiling framing member by mechanical means such as bolts,
material and shall have no exposed conductive parts.
screws, or rivets. Listed clips identified for use with the type of ceiling
framing member(s) and luminaire(s) [fixture(s)] shall also be
Exception No. 1: Replacement luminaires (fixtures) shall be permitted
permitted.
to connect an equipment grounding conductor from the outlet in
compliance with 2.50.7.1(c). The luminaire (fixture) shall then be 4.10.6.6 Pendant Conductors for Incandescent Filament Lamps.
grounded in accordance with 4.10.5.2(a).
Exception No. 2: Where no equipment grounding conductor exists at (a) Support. Pendant lampholders with permanently attached leads,
the outlet, replacement luminaires (fixtures) that are GFCI protected where used for other than festoon wiring, shall be hung from separate
shall not be required to be connected to an equipment grounding stranded rubber-covered conductors that are soldered directly to the
conductor. circuit conductors but supported independently thereof.

4.10.5.4 Equipment Grounding Conductor Attachment. Luminaires (b) Size. Unless part of listed decorative lighting assemblies, pendant
(fixtures) with exposed metal parts shall be provided with a means for conductors shall not be smaller than 2.0 mm2 (1.6 mm dia.) for mogul-
connecting an equipment grounding conductor for such luminaires base or medium-base screw-shell lampholders or smaller than 18 AWG
(fixtures). for intermediate or candelabra-base lampholders.

4.10.5.5 Methods of Grounding. Luminaires (fixtures) and equipment (c) Twisted or Cabled. Pendant conductors longer than 900 mm
shall be considered grounded where mechanically connected to an shall be twisted together where not cabled in a listed assembly.
equipment grounding conductor as specified in 2.50.6.9 and sized in
accordance with 2.50.6.13. 4.10.6.7 Protection of Conductors and Insulation.

4.10.6 Wiring of Luminaires (Fixtures) (a) Properly Secured. Conductors shall be secured in a manner that
does not tend to cut or abrade the insulation.
4.10.6.1 Luminaire (Fixture) Wiring — General. Wiring on or
within fixtures shall be neatly arranged and shall not be exposed to (b) Protection Through Metal. Conductor insulation shall be
physical damage. Excess wiring shall be avoided. Conductors shall be protected from abrasion where it passes through metal.
arranged so that they are not subjected to temperatures above those for
which they are rated. (c) Luminaire (Fixture) Stems. Splices and taps shall not be located
within luminaire (fixture) arms or stems.
4.10.6.2 Polarization of Luminaires (Fixtures). Luminaires (fixtures)
shall be wired so that the screw shells of lampholders are connected to (d) Splices and Taps. No unnecessary splices or taps shall be made
the same luminaire (fixture) or circuit conductor or terminal. The within or on a luminaire (fixture).
grounded conductor, where connected to a screw-shell lampholder,
shall be connected to the screw shell. FPN: For approved means of making connections, see 1.10.1.14.

4.10.6.3 Conductor Insulation. Luminaires (fixtures) shall be wired (e) Stranding. Stranded conductors shall be used for wiring on
with conductors having insulation suitable for the environmental luminaire (fixture) chains and on other movable or flexible parts.
conditions, current, voltage, and temperature to which the conductors
will be subjected. (f) Tension. Conductors shall be arranged so that the weight of the
luminaire (fixture) or movable parts does not put tension on the
FPN: For ampacity of luminaire (fixture) wire, maximum operating temperature, conductors.
voltage limitations, minimum wire size, and so forth, see Article 4.2.
4.10.6.8 Cord-Connected Showcases. Individual showcases, other
than fixed, shall be permitted to be connected by flexible cord to
permanently installed receptacles, and groups of not more than six such
showcases shall be permitted to be coupled together by flexible cord Bushing having holes 7 mm in diameter shall be permitted for use
and separable locking-type connectors with one of the group connected with plain pendant cord and holes 11 mm in diameter with reinforced
by flexible cord to a permanently installed receptacle. cord.
The installation shall comply with 4.10.6.8(a) through 4.10.6.8(e).
(b) Adjustable Luminaires (Fixtures). Luminaires (fixtures) that
(a) Cord Requirements. Flexible cord shall be of the hard-service require adjusting or aiming after installation shall not be required to be
type, having conductors not smaller than the branch-circuit conductors, equipped with an attachment plug or cord connector, provided the
having ampacity at least equal to the branch-circuit overcurrent device, exposed cord is of the hard-usage or extra-hard-usage type and is not
and having an equipment grounding conductor. longer than that required for maximum adjustment. The cord shall not
be subject to strain or physical damage.
FPN: See Table 2.50.6.13 for size of equipment grounding conductor.
(c) Electric-Discharge Luminaires (Fixtures).
(b) Receptacles, Connectors, and Attachment Plugs. Receptacles,
connectors, and attachment plugs shall be of a listed grounding type (1) Cord Connected Installation. A listed luminaire (fixture) or a
rated 15 or 20 amperes. listed assembly shall be permitted to be cord connected if the following
conditions apply:
(c) Support. Flexible cords shall be secured to the undersides of
showcases such that all of the following conditions are ensured: a. The luminaire (fixture) is located directly below the outlet or
busway.
(1) The wiring is not exposed to mechanical damage. b. The flexible cord meets all the following:
(2) The separation between cases is not in excess of 50 mm, or
more than 300 mm between the first case and the supply receptacle. 1. Is visible for its entire length outside the luminaire (fixture)
(3) The free lead at the end of a group of showcases has a female 2. Is not subject to strain or physical damage
fitting not extending beyond the case. 3. Is terminated in a grounding-type attachment plug cap or
busway plug, or is a part of a listed assembly incorporating a
(d) No Other Equipment. Equipment other than showcases shall manufactured wiring system connector in accordance with 6.4.1.6(c),
not be electrically connected to showcases. or has a luminaire (fixture) assembly with a strain relief and canopy
(e) Secondary Circuit(s). Where showcases are cord-connected, the (2) Provided with Mogul-Base, Screw-Shell Lampholders.
secondary circuit(s) of each electric-discharge lighting ballast shall be Electric-discharge luminaires (lighting fixtures) provided with mogul-
limited to one showcase. base, screw-shell lampholders shall be permitted to be connected to
branch circuits of 50 amperes or less by cords complying with 2.40.1.5.
4.10.6.9 Cord-Connected Lampholders and Luminaires (Fixtures). Receptacles and attachment plugs shall be permitted to be of a lower
ampere rating than the branch circuit but not less than 125 percent of
(a) Lampholders. Where a metal lampholder is attached to a the luminaire (fixture) full-load current.
flexible cord, the inlet shall be equipped with an insulating bushing
that, if threaded, is not smaller than metric designator 12 (trade size) (3) Equipped with Flanged Surface Inlet. Electric-discharge
pipe size. The cord hole shall be of a size appropriate for the cord, and luminaires (lighting fixtures) equipped with a flanged surface inlet
all burrs and fins shall be removed in order to provide a smooth shall be permitted to be supplied by cord pendants equipped with cord
bearing surface for the cord. connectors. Inlets and connectors shall be permitted to be of a lower
ampere rating than the branch circuit but not less than 125 percent of
the luminaire (fixture) load current. including the ballast, transformer, or autotransformer.

4.10.6.10 Luminaires (Fixtures) as Raceways. Luminaires (fixtures) 4.10.7.3 Design and Material. Luminaires (fixtures) shall be
shall not be used as a raceway for circuit conductors unless listed and constructed of metal, wood, or other material suitable for the
marked for use as a raceway. application and shall be designed and assembled so as to secure
requisite mechanical strength and rigidity. Wiring compartments,
4.10.6.11 Wiring Supplying Luminaires (Fixtures) Connected including their entrances, shall be designed and constructed to permit
Together. Luminaires (fixtures) designed for end-to-end connection to conductors to be drawn in and withdrawn without physical damage.
form a continuous assembly, or luminaires (fixtures) connected
together by recognized wiring methods, shall be permitted to contain 4.10.7.4 Nonmetallic Luminaires (Fixtures). When luminaire
the conductors of a 2-wire branch circuit, or one multiwire branch (fixture) wiring compartments are constructed from combustible
circuit, supplying the connected luminaires (fixtures) and need not be material, armored or lead-covered conductors with suitable fittings
listed as a raceway. One additional 2-wire branch circuit separately shall be used or the wiring compartment shall be lined with metal.
supplying one or more of the connected luminaires (fixtures) shall also
be permitted. 4.10.7.5 Mechanical Strength.

FPN: See Article 100 for the definition of Multiwire Branch Circuit. (a) Tubing for Arms. Tubing used for arms and stems where
provided with cut threads shall not be less than 1.00 mm in thickness
4.10.6.12 Branch Circuit Conductors and Ballasts. Branch-circuit and, where provided with rolled (pressed) threads, shall not be less
conductors within 75 mm of a ballast shall have an insulation than 0.65 mm in thickness. Arms and other parts shall be fastened to
temperature rating not lower than 90°C (194°F) unless supplying a prevent turning.
luminaire (fixture) listed and marked as suitable for a different
insulation temperature. (b) Metal Canopies. Metal canopies supporting lampholders,
shades, and so forth exceeding 4 kg (8 lb), or incorporating attachment-
4.10.7 Construction of Luminaires (Fixtures) plug receptacles, shall not be less than 0.50 mm in thickness. Other
canopies shall not be less than 0.40 mm if made of steel and not less
4.10.7.1 Combustible Shades and Enclosures. Adequate airspace than 0.50 mm if of other metals.
shall be provided between lamps and shades or other enclosures of
combustible material. (c) Canopy Switches. Pull-type canopy switches shall not be
inserted in the rims of metal canopies that are less than 0.65 mm in
4.10.7.2 Luminaire (Fixture) Rating. thickness, unless the rims are reinforced by the turning of a bead or the
equivalent. Pull-type canopy switches, whether mounted in the rims or
(a) Marking. All luminaires (fixtures) shall be marked with the elsewhere in sheet metal canopies, shall not be located more than
maximum lamp wattage or electrical rating, manufacturer’s name, 90 mm from the center of the canopy. Double set-screws, double
trademark, or other suitable means of identification. A luminaire canopy rings, a screw ring, or equal method shall be used where the
(fixture) requiring supply wire rated higher than 60°C (140°F) shall be canopy supports a pull-type switch or pendant receptacle.
marked in letters not smaller than 6 mm high, prominently displayed The thickness requirements in the preceding paragraph shall apply to
on the luminaire (fixture) and shipping carton or equivalent. measurements made on finished (formed) canopies.
(b) Electrical Rating. The electrical rating shall include the voltage 4.10.7.6 Wiring Space. Bodies of luminaires (fixtures), including
and frequency and shall indicate the current rating of the unit, portable lamps, shall provide ample space for splices and taps and for
the installation of devices, if any. Splice compartments shall be of 4.10.8 Installation of Lampholders
nonabsorbent, noncombustible material.
4.10.8.1 Screw-Shell Type. Lampholders of the screw-shell type shall
4.10.7.9 Portable Lamps. be installed for use as lampholders only. Where supplied by a circuit
having a grounded conductor, the grounded conductor shall be
(a) General. Portable lamps shall be wired with flexible cord connected to the screw shell.
recognized by 4.0.1.4 and an attachment plug of the polarized or
grounding type. Where used with Edison-base lampholders, the 4.10.8.2 Double-Pole Switched Lampholders. Where supplied by the
grounded conductor shall be identified and attached to the screw shell ungrounded conductors of a circuit, the switching device of
and the identified blade of the attachment plug. lampholders of the switched type shall simultaneously disconnect both
conductors of the circuit.
(b) Portable Handlamps. In addition to the provisions of
4.10.7.9(a), portable handlamps shall comply with the following: 4.10.8.3 Lampholders in Wet or Damp Locations. Lampholders
installed in wet or damp locations shall be of the weatherproof type.
(1) Metal shell, paper-lined lampholders shall not be used.
(2) Handlamps shall be equipped with a handle of molded 4.10.9 Construction of Lampholders
composition or other insulating material.
(3) Handlamps shall be equipped with a substantial guard attached 4.10.9.1 Insulation. The outer metal shell and the cap shall be lined
to the lampholder or handle. with insulating material that prevents the shell and cap from becoming
(4) Metallic guards shall be grounded by means of an equipment a part of the circuit. The lining shall not extend beyond the metal shell
grounding conductor run with circuit conductors within the power- more than 3 mm but shall prevent any current-carrying part of the lamp
supply cord. base from being exposed when a lamp is in the lampholding device.
(5) Portable handlamps shall not be required to be grounded where
supplied through an isolating transformer with an ungrounded 4.10.9.3 Switched Lampholders. Switched lampholders shall be of
secondary of not over 50 volts. such construction that the switching mechanism interrupts the
electrical connection to the center contact. The switching mechanism
4.10.7.11 Cord Bushings. A bushing or the equivalent shall be shall also be permitted to interrupt the electrical connection to the
provided where flexible cord enters the base or stem of a portable screw shell if the connection to the center contact is simultaneously
lamp. The bushing shall be of insulating material unless a jacketed type interrupted.
of cord is used.
4.10.10 Lamps and Auxiliary Equipment
4.10.7.12 Tests. All wiring shall be free from short circuits and
grounds and shall be tested for these defects prior to being connected 4.10.10.1 Bases, Incandescent Lamps. An incandescent lamp for
to the circuit. general use on lighting branch circuits shall not be equipped with a
medium base if rated over 300 watts, or with a mogul base if rated over
4.10.7.13 Live Parts. Exposed live parts within porcelain luminaires 1 500 watts. Special bases or other devices shall be used for over
(fixtures) shall be suitably recessed and located so as to make it 1 500 watts.
improbable that wires come in contact with them. There shall be a
spacing of at least 13 mm between live parts and the mounting plane of 4.10.10.2 Electric-Discharge Lamp Auxiliary Equipment.
the luminaire (fixture).
(a) Enclosures. Auxiliary equipment for electric-discharge lamps
shall be enclosed in noncombustible cases and treated as sources of 4.10.11.3 Clearance and Installation.
heat.
(a) Clearance.
(b) Switching. Where supplied by the ungrounded conductors of a
circuit, the switching device of auxiliary equipment shall (1) Non-Type IC. A recessed luminaire (fixture) that is not
simultaneously disconnect all conductors. identified for contact with insulation shall have all recessed parts
spaced not less than 13 mm from combustible materials. The points of
4.10.11 Special Provisions for Flush and support and the trim finishing off the opening in the ceiling or wall
Recessed Luminaires (Fixtures) surface shall be permitted to be in contact with combustible materials.
(2) Type IC. A recessed luminaire (fixture) that is identified for
4.10.11.1 General. Luminaires (fixtures) installed in recessed cavities contact with insulation, Type IC, shall be permitted to be in contact
in walls or ceilings shall comply with 4.10.11.2 through 4.10.12.5. with combustible materials at recessed parts, points of support, and
portions passing through or finishing off the opening in the building
4.10.11.2 Temperature. structure.

(a) Combustible Material. Luminaires (fixtures) shall be installed (b) Installation. Thermal insulation shall not be installed above a
so that adjacent combustible material will not be subjected to recessed luminaire (fixture) or with 75 mm of the recessed luminaire's
temperatures in excess of 90°C (194°F). (fixture's) enclosure, wiring compartment, or ballast unless it is
identified for contact with insulation, Type IC.
(b) Fire-Resistant Construction. Where a luminaire (fixture) is
recessed in fire-resistant material in a building of fire-resistant 4.10.11.4 Wiring.
construction, a temperature higher than 90°C (194°F) but not higher
than 150°C (302°F) shall be considered acceptable if the luminaire (a) General. Conductors that have insulation suitable for the
(fixture) is plainly marked that it is listed for that service. temperature encountered shall be used.

(c) Recessed Incandescent Luminaires (Fixtures). Incandescent (b) Circuit Conductors. Branch-circuit conductors that have an
luminaires (fixtures) shall have thermal protection and shall be insulation suitable for the temperature encountered shall be permitted
identified as thermally protected. to terminate in the luminaire (fixture).

Exception No. 1: Thermal protection shall not be required in a (c) Tap Conductors. Tap conductors of a type suitable for the
recessed luminaire (fixture) identified for use and installed in poured temperature encountered shall be permitted to run from the luminaire
concrete. (fixture) terminal connection to an outlet box placed at least 300 mm
Exception No. 2: Thermal protection shall not be required in a from the luminaire (fixture). Such tap conductors shall be in suitable
recessed luminaire (fixture) whose design, construction, and thermal raceway or Type AC or MC cable of at least 450 mm but not more than
performance characteristics are equivalent to a thermally protected 1 800 mm in length.
luminaire (fixture) and are identified as inherently protected.
4.10.12 Construction of Flush and
Recessed Luminaires (Fixtures)

4.10.12.1 Temperature. Luminaires (fixtures) shall be constructed

such that adjacent combustible material is not subject to temperatures
in excess of 90°C (194°F). protection. Replacement ballasts shall also have thermal protection
integral with the ballast.
4.10.12.3 Lamp Wattage Marking. Incandescent lamp luminaires (2) Simple Reactance Ballasts. A simple reactance ballast in a
(fixtures) shall be marked to indicate the maximum allowable wattage fluorescent luminaire (fixture) with straight tubular lamps shall not be
of lamps. The markings shall be permanently installed, in letters at required to be thermally protected.
least 6 mm high, and shall be located where visible during relamping. (3) Exit Fixtures. A ballast in a fluorescent exit luminaire (fixture)
shall not have thermal protection.
4.10.12.4 Solder Prohibited. No solder shall be used in the (4) Egress Luminaires (Fixtures). A ballast in a fluorescent
construction of a luminaire (fixture) box. luminaire (fixture) that is used for egress lighting and energized only
during a failure of the normal supply shall not have thermal protection.
4.10.12.5 Lampholders. Lampholders of the screw-shell type shall be
of porcelain or other suitable insulating materials. Where used, (f) High-Intensity Discharge Luminaires (Fixtures).
cements shall be of the high-heat type.
(1) Recessed. Recessed high-intensity luminaires (fixtures)
4.10.13 Special Provisions for Electric-Discharge designed to be installed in wall or ceiling cavities shall have thermal
Lighting Systems of 1 000 Volts or Less protection and be identified as thermally protected.
(2) Inherently Protected. Thermal protection shall not be required
4.10.13.1 General. in a recessed high-intensity luminaire (fixture) whose design,
construction, and thermal performance characteristics are equivalent to
(a) Open-Circuit Voltage of 1 000 Volts or Less. Equipment for a thermally protected luminaire (fixture) and are identified as
use with electric-discharge lighting systems and designed for an open- inherently protected.
circuit voltage of 1 000 volts or less shall be of a type intended for such (3) Installed in Poured Concrete. Thermal protection shall not be
service. required in a recessed high-intensity discharge luminaire (fixture)
identified for use and installed in poured concrete.
(b) Considered as Energized. The terminals of an electric-discharge (4) Recessed Remote Ballasts. A recessed remote ballast for a
lamp shall be considered as energized where any lamp terminal is high-intensity discharge luminaire (fixture) shall have thermal
connected to a circuit of over 300 volts. protection that is integral with the ballast and be identified as thermally
protected.
(c) Transformers of the Oil-Filled Type. Transformers of the oil- (5) Metal Halide Lamp Containment. Luminaires (fixtures) that
filled type shall not be used. use a metal halide lamp other than a thick-glass parabolic reflector
lamp (PAR) shall be provided with a containment barrier that encloses
(d) Additional Requirements. In addition to complying with the the lamp, or shall be provided with a physical means that only allows
general requirements for luminaires (lighting fixtures), such equipment the use of a lamp that is Type O.
shall comply with Part 4.10.13.
FPN: See ANSI Standard C78.387, American National Standard for Electric Lamps
— Metal Halide Lamps, Methods of Measuring Characteristics.

(e) Thermal Protection — Fluorescent Luminaires (Fixtures).

(g) Disconnecting Means. In indoor locations, other than dwellings
and associated accessory structures, fluorescent luminaires (fixtures)
(1) Integral Thermal Protection. The ballast of a fluorescent
that utilize double-ended lamps and contain ballast(s) that can be
luminaire (fixture) installed indoors shall have integral thermal
serviced in place or ballasted luminaires that are supplied from
multiwire branch circuits and contain ballast(s) that can be serviced in 4.10.13.4 Luminaire (Fixture) Mounting.
place shall have a disconnecting means either internal or external to
each luminaire (fixture), to disconnect simultaneously from the source (a) Exposed Ballasts. Luminaires (fixtures) that have exposed
of supply all conductors of the ballast, including the grounded ballasts or transformers shall be installed so that such ballasts or
conductor if any. The line side terminals of the disconnecting means transformers will not be in contact with combustible material.
shall be guarded. The disconnecting means shall be located so as to be
accessible to licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical (b) Combustible Low-Density Cellulose Fiberboard. Where a
practitioner under the supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner surface-mounted luminaire (fixture) containing a ballast is to be
before servicing or maintaining the ballast. This requirement shall installed on combustible low-density cellulose fiberboard, it shall be
become effective January 1, 2008. listed for this condition or shall be spaced not less than 40 mm from
the surface of the fiberboard. Where such luminaires (fixtures) are
Exception No. 1: A disconnecting means shall not be required for partially or wholly recessed, the provisions of 4.10.11.1 through
luminaires (fixtures) installed in hazardous (classified) location(s). 4.10.12.5 shall apply.
Exception No. 2: A disconnecting means shall not be required for
emergency illumination required in 700.16. FPN: Combustible low-density cellulose fiberboard includes sheets, panels, and
3 3
tiles that have a density of 320 kg/m (20 lb/ft ) or less and that are formed of
Exception No. 3: For cord-and-plug-connected luminaires, an bonded plant fiber material but does not include solid or laminated wood or
3 3
accessible separable connector or an accessible plug and receptacle fiberboard that has a density in excess of 320 kg/m (20 lb/ft ) or is a material that
shall be permitted to serve as the disconnecting means. has been integrally treated with fire-retarding chemicals to the degree that the flame
spread in any plane of the material will not exceed 25, determined in accordance
Exception No. 4: A disconnecting means shall not be required in with tests for surface burning characteristics of building materials. See ANSI/ASTM
industrial establishments with restricted public access where E84-1997, Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that only licensed
electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner under the 4.10.13.5 Equipment Not Integral with Luminaire (Fixture).
supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner service the installation
by written procedures. (a) Metal Cabinets. Auxiliary equipment, including reactors,
Exception No. 5: Where more than one luminaire is installed and capacitors, resistors, and similar equipment, where not installed as part
supplied by other than a multiwire branch circuit, a disconnecting of a luminaire (lighting fixture) assembly, shall be enclosed in
means shall not be required for every luminaire when the design of the accessible, permanently installed metal cabinets.
installation includes locally accessible disconnects, such that the
illuminated space cannot be left in total darkness. (b) Separate Mounting. Separately mounted ballasts that are
intended for direct connection to a wiring system shall not be required
4.10.13.2 Direct-Current Equipment. Luminaires (fixtures) installed to be separately enclosed.
on dc circuits shall be equipped with auxiliary equipment and resistors
designed for dc operation. The luminaires (fixtures) shall be marked (c) Wired Luminaire (Fixture) Sections. Wired luminaire (fixture)
for dc operation. sections are paired, with a ballast(s) supplying a lamp or lamps in both.
For interconnection between paired units, it shall be permissible to use
4.10.13.3 Open-Circuit Voltage Exceeding 300 Volts. Equipment metric designator 12 (trade size) flexible metal conduit in lengths not
having an open-circuit voltage exceeding 300 volts shall not be exceeding 7 600 mm, in conformance with Article 3.48. Luminaire
installed in dwelling occupancies unless such equipment is designed so (fixture) wire operating at line voltage, supplying only the ballast(s) of
that there will be no exposed live parts when lamps are being inserted, one of the paired luminaires (fixtures), shall be permitted in the same
are in place, or are being removed. raceway as the lamp supply wires of the paired luminaires (fixtures).
4.10.13.6 Autotransformers. An autotransformer that is used to raise 4.10.14.3 Lamp Terminals and Lampholders. Parts that must be
the voltage to more than 300 volts, as part of a ballast for supplying removed for lamp replacement shall be hinged or held captive. Lamps
lighting units, shall be supplied only by a grounded system. or lampholders shall be designed so that there are no exposed live parts
when lamps are being inserted or removed.
4.10.13.7 Switches. Snap switches shall comply with 4.4.1.14.
4.10.14.4 Transformers.
4.10.14 Special Provisions for Electric-Discharge
Lighting Systems of More Than 1000 Volts (a) Type. Transformers shall be enclosed, identified for the use, and
listed.
4.10.14.1 General.
(b) Voltage. The secondary-circuit voltage shall not exceed
(a) Listing. Electric-discharge lighting systems with an open-circuit 15 000 volts, nominal, under any load condition. The voltage to ground
voltage exceeding 1000 volts shall be listed and installed in of any output terminals of the secondary circuit shall not exceed 7 500
conformance with that listing. volts, under any load conditions.

(b) Dwelling Occupancies. Equipment that has an open-circuit (c) Rating. Transformers shall have a secondary short-circuit current
voltage exceeding 1 000 volts shall not be installed in or on dwelling rating of not more than 150 mA if the open-circuit voltage is over
occupancies. 7 500 volts, and not more than 300 mA if the open-circuit voltage
rating is 7 500 volts or less.
(c) Live Parts. The terminal of an electric-discharge lamp shall be
considered as a live part. (d) Secondary Connections. Secondary circuit outputs shall not be
connected in parallel or in series.
(d) Additional Requirements. In addition to complying with the
general requirements for luminaires (lighting fixtures), such equipment 4.10.14.5 Transformer Locations.
shall comply with Part 4.10.14.
(a) Accessible. Transformers shall be accessible after installation.
FPN: For signs and outline lighting, see Article 6.0.
(b) Secondary Conductors. Transformers shall be installed as near
4.10.14.2 Control. to the lamps as practicable to keep the secondary conductors as short as
possible.
(a) Disconnection. Luminaires (fixtures) or lamp installation shall
be controlled either singly or in groups by an externally operable (c) Adjacent to Combustible Materials. Transformers shall be
switch or circuit breaker that opens all ungrounded primary located so that adjacent combustible materials are not subjected to
conductors. temperatures in excess of 90°C (194°F).
(b) Within Sight or Locked Type. The switch or circuit breaker 4.10.14.6 Exposure to Damage. Lamps shall not be located where
shall be located within sight from the luminaires (fixtures) or lamps, or normally exposed to physical damage.
it shall be permitted elsewhere if it is provided with a means for
locking in the open position. 4.10.14.7 Marking. Each luminaire (fixture) or each secondary circuit
of tubing having an open-circuit voltage of over 1 000 volts shall have
a clearly legible marking in letters not less than 6 mm high reading
“Caution ____ volts.” The voltage indicated shall be the rated open- designed specifically for the track on which they are to be installed.
circuit voltage. They shall be securely fastened to the track, shall maintain polarization
and grounding, and shall be designed to be suspended directly from the
4.10.14.8 Switches. Snap switches shall comply with 4.4.1.4. track.

4.10.15 Lighting Track 4.10.15.4 Heavy-Duty Lighting Track. Heavy-duty lighting track is
lighting track identified for use exceeding 20 amperes. Each fitting
4.10.15.1 Definition. attached to a heavy-duty lighting track shall have individual
overcurrent protection.
Lighting Track. A manufactured assembly designed to support and
energize luminaires (lighting fixtures) that are capable of being readily 4.10.15.5 Fastening. Lighting track shall be securely mounted so that
repositioned on the track. Its length can be altered by the addition or each fastening is suitable for supporting the maximum weight of
subtraction of sections of track. luminaires (fixtures) that can be installed. Unless identified for
supports at greater intervals, a single section 1 200 mm or shorter in
4.10.15.2 Installation. length shall have two supports, and, where installed in a continuous
row, each individual section of not more than 1 200 mm in length shall
(a) Lighting Track. Lighting track shall be permanently installed have one additional support.
and permanently connected to a branch circuit. Only lighting track
fittings shall be installed on lighting track. Lighting track fittings shall 4.10.15.6 Construction Requirements.
not be equipped with general-purpose receptacles.
(a) Construction. The housing for the lighting track system shall be
(b) Connected Load. The connected load on lighting track shall not of substantial construction to maintain rigidity. The conductors shall be
exceed the rating of the track. Lighting track shall be supplied by a installed within the track housing, permitting insertion of a luminaire
branch circuit having a rating not more than that of the track. (fixture), and designed to prevent tampering and accidental contact
with live parts. Components of lighting track systems of different
(c) Locations Not Permitted. Lighting track shall not be installed in voltages shall not be interchangeable. The track conductors shall be a
the following locations: minimum 3.5 mm2 (2.0 mm dia.) or equal and shall be copper. The
track system ends shall be insulated and capped.
(1) Where likely to be subjected to physical damage
(2) In wet or damp locations (b) Grounding. Lighting track shall be grounded in accordance with
(3) Where subject to corrosive vapors Article 2.50, and the track sections shall be securely coupled to
(4) In storage battery rooms maintain continuity of the circuitry, polarization, and grounding
(5) In hazardous (classified) locations throughout.
(6) Where concealed
(7) Where extended through walls or partitions 4.10.16 Decorative Lighting and Similar Accessories
(8) Less than 1 500 mm above the finished floor except where
protected from physical damage or track operating at less than 30 volts 4.10.16.1 Listing of Decorative Lighting. Decorative lighting and
rms open-circuit voltage similar accessories used for holiday lighting and similar purposes, in
(9) Where prohibited by 4.10.2.1(d) accordance with 5.90.1.3(b), shall be listed.

(d) Support. Fittings identified for use on lighting track shall be

 ARTICLE 4.11 — LIGHTING SYSTEMS OPERATING parts shall be permitted for indoor installations only. Bare conductors
AT 30 VOLTS OR LESS shall not be installed less than 2 100 mm above the finished floor,
unless specifically listed for a lower installation height.
4.11.1.1 Scope. This article covers lighting systems operating at 30
volts or less and their associated components. 4.11.1.6 Branch Circuit. Lighting systems operating at 30 volts or less
shall be supplied from a maximum 20-ampere branch circuit.
4.11.1.2 Definition.
4.11.1.7 Hazardous (Classified) Locations. Where installed in
Lighting Systems Operating at 30 Volts or Less. A lighting system hazardous (classified) locations, these systems shall conform with
consisting of an isolating power supply operating at 30 volts Articles 5.0 through 5.17 in addition to this article.
(42.4 volts peak) or less under any load condition, with one or more
secondary circuits, each limited to 25 amperes maximum, supplying
luminaires (lighting fixtures) and associated equipment identified for ARTICLE 4.22 — APPLIANCES
the use.
4.22.1 General
4.11.1.3 Listing Required. Lighting systems operating at 30 volts or
less shall be listed. 4.22.1.1 Scope. This article covers electric appliances used in any
occupancy.
4.11.1.4 Locations Not Permitted. Lighting systems operating at 30
volts or less shall not be installed in the locations described in 4.22.1.3 Other Articles. The requirements of Article 4.30 shall apply
4.11.1.4(a) and 4.11.1.4(b). to the installation of motor-operated appliances, and the requirements
of Article 4.40 shall apply to the installation of appliances containing a
(a) Where concealed or extended through a building wall unless hermetic refrigerant motor-compressor(s), except as specifically
permitted in (1) or (2): amended in this article.

(1) Installed using any of the wiring methods specified in Chapter 4.22.1.4 Live Parts. Appliances shall have no live parts normally
3 exposed to contact other than those parts functioning as open-
(2) Installed using wiring supplied by a listed Class 2 power resistance heating elements, such as the heating element of a toaster,
source and installed in accordance with 7.25.3.12 which are necessarily exposed.

(b) Where installed within 3 000 mm of pools, spas, fountains, or 4.22.2 Installation
similar locations, unless permitted by Article 6.80.
4.22.2.1 Branch-Circuit Rating. This section specifies the ratings of
4.11.1.5 Secondary Circuits. branch circuits capable of carrying appliance current without
overheating under the conditions specified.
(a) Grounding. Secondary circuits shall not be grounded.
(a) Individual Circuits. The rating of an individual branch circuit
(b) Isolation. The secondary circuit shall be insulated from the shall not be less than the marked rating of the appliance or the marked
branch circuit by an isolating transformer. rating of an appliance having combined loads as provided in 4.22.5.3.

(c) Bare Conductors. Exposed bare conductors and current-carrying

 The rating of an individual branch circuit for motor-operated
appliances not having a marked rating shall be in accordance with Part (e) Single Non–motor-Operated Appliance. If the branch circuit
4.30.2. supplies a single non–motor-operated appliance, the rating of
The branch-circuit rating for an appliance that is continuously overcurrent protection shall:
loaded, other than a motor-operated appliance, shall not be less than
125 percent of the marked rating, or not less than 100 percent of the (1) Not exceed that marked on the appliance.
marked rating if the branch-circuit device and its assembly are listed (2) Not exceed 20 amperes if the overcurrent protection rating is
for continuous loading at 100 percent of its rating. not marked and the appliance is rated 13.3 amperes or less; or
Branch circuits for household cooking appliances shall be permitted (3) Not exceed 150 percent of the appliance rated current if the
to be in accordance with Table 2.20.3.16. overcurrent protection rating is not marked and the appliance is rated
over 13.3 amperes. Where 150 percent of the appliance rating does not
(b) Circuits Supplying Two or More Loads. For branch circuits correspond to a standard overcurrent device ampere rating, the next
supplying appliance and other loads, the rating shall be determined in higher standard rating shall be permitted.
accordance with 2.10.2.4.
(f) Electric Heating Appliances Employing Resistance-Type
4.22.2.2 Overcurrent Protection. Appliances shall be protected Heating Elements Rated More Than 48 Amperes.
against overcurrent in accordance with 4.22.2.2(a) through 4.22.2.2(g)
and 4.22.2.1. (1) Electric Heating Appliances. Electric heating appliances
employing resistance-type heating elements rated more than 48
(a) Branch-Circuit Overcurrent Protection. Branch circuits shall amperes, other than household appliances with surface heating
be protected in accordance with 2.40.1.4. elements covered by 4.22.2.2(b), and commercial-type heating
If a protective device rating is marked on an appliance, the branch- appliances covered by 4.22.2.2(d), shall have the heating elements
circuit overcurrent device rating shall not exceed the protective device subdivided. Each subdivided load shall not exceed 48 amperes and
rating marked on the appliance. shall be protected at not more than 60 amperes.
These supplementary overcurrent protective devices shall be (1)
(b) Household-Type Appliances with Surface Heating Elements. factory-installed within or on the heater enclosure or provided as a
Household-type appliances with surface heating elements having a separate assembly by the heater manufacturer; (2) accessible; and (3)
maximum demand of more than 60 amperes calculated in accordance suitable for branch-circuit protection.
with Table 2.20.3.16 shall have its power supply subdivided into two The main conductors supplying these overcurrent protective
or more circuits, each of which shall be provided with overcurrent devices shall be considered branch-circuit conductors.
protection rated at not over 50 amperes. (2) Commercial Kitchen and Cooking Appliances. Commercial
kitchen and cooking appliances using sheathed-type heating elements
(c) Infrared Lamp Commercial and Industrial Heating not covered in 4.22.2.2(d) shall be permitted to be subdivided into
Appliances. Infrared lamp commercial and industrial heating circuits not exceeding 120 amperes and protected at not more than 150
appliances shall have overcurrent protection not exceeding 50 amperes. amperes where one of the following is met:

(d) Open-Coil or Exposed Sheathed-Coil Types of Surface a. Elements are integral with and enclosed within a cooking
Heating Elements in Commercial-Type Heating Appliances. Open- surface.
coil or exposed sheathed-coil types of surface heating elements in b. Elements are completely contained within an enclosure
commercial-type heating appliances shall be protected by overcurrent identified as suitable for this use.
protective devices rated at not over 50 amperes.
 c. Elements are contained within an ASME-rated and stamped Each section, panel, or strip carrying a number of infrared lampholders
vessel. (including the internal wiring of such section, panel, or strip) shall be
considered an appliance. The terminal connection block of each such
(3) Water Heaters and Steam Boilers. Water heaters and steam assembly shall be considered an individual outlet.
boilers employing resistance-type immersion electric heating elements
contained in an ASME-rated and stamped vessel or listed instantaneous 4.22.2.6 Central Vacuum Outlet Assemblies.
water heaters shall be permitted to be subdivided into circuits not
exceeding 120 amperes and protected at not more than 150 amperes. (a) Listed central vacuum outlet assemblies shall be permitted to be
connected to a branch circuit in accordance with 2.10.2.4(a).
(g) Motor-Operated Appliances. Motors of motor-operated
appliances shall be provided with overload protection in accordance (b) The ampacity of the connecting conductors shall not be less than
with Part III of Article 4.30. Hermetic refrigerant motor-compressors the ampacity of the branch circuit conductors to which they are
in air-conditioning or refrigerating equipment shall be provided with connected.
overload protection in accordance with Part 4.40.6. Where appliance (c) An equipment grounding conductor shall be used where the
overcurrent protective devices that are separate from the appliance are central vacuum outlet assembly has accessible non–current-carrying
required, data for selection of these devices shall be marked on the metal parts.
appliance. The minimum marking shall be that specified in 4.30.1.7
and 4.40.1.4. 4.22.2.7 Flexible Cords.

4.22.2.3 Central Heating Equipment. Central heating equipment (a) General. Flexible cord shall be permitted (1) for the connection
other than fixed electric space-heating equipment shall be supplied by of appliances to facilitate their frequent interchange or to prevent the
an individual branch circuit. transmission of noise or vibration or (2) to facilitate the removal or
disconnection of appliances that are fastened in place, where the
Exception No. 1: Auxiliary equipment, such as a pump, valve, fastening means and mechanical connections are specifically designed
humidifier, or electrostatic air cleaner directly associated with the to permit ready removal for maintenance or repair and the appliance is
heating equipment, shall be permitted to be connected to the same intended or identified for flexible cord connection.
branch circuit.
Exception No. 2: Permanently connected air-conditioning equipment (b) Specific Appliances.
shall be permitted to be connected to the same branch circuit.
(1) Electrically Operated Kitchen Waste Disposers. Electrically
4.22.2.4 Storage-Type Water Heaters. A fixed storage-type water operated kitchen waste disposers shall be permitted to be cord-and-
heater that has a capacity of 450 L (120 gal) or less shall be considered plug connected with a flexible cord identified as suitable for the
a continuous load. purpose in the installation instructions of the appliance manufacturer,
where all of the following conditions are met.
FPN: For branch-circuit rating, see 4.22.2.1.
a. The flexible cord shall be terminated with a grounding-type
4.22.2.5 Infrared Lamp Industrial Heating Appliances. In industrial attachment plug.
occupancies, infrared heating appliance lampholders shall be permitted
to be operated in series on circuits of over 150 volts to ground, Exception: A listed kitchen waste disposer distinctly marked to identify
provided the voltage rating of the lampholders is not less than the it as protected by a system of double insulation, or its equivalent, shall
circuit voltage. not be required to be terminated with a grounding-type attachment
plug. plug connected with a flexible cord identified as suitable for use on
range hoods in the installation instructions of the appliance
b. The length of the cord shall not be less than 450 mm and not manufacturer, where all of the following conditions are met:
over 900 mm.
c. Receptacles shall be located to avoid physical damage to the a. The flexible cord is terminated with a grounding-type
flexible cord. attachment plug.
d. The receptacle shall be accessible.
Exception: A listed range hood distinctly marked to identify it as
(2) Built-in Dishwashers and Trash Compactors. Built-in protected by a system of double insulation, or its equivalent, shall not
dishwashers and trash compactors shall be permitted to be cord-and- be required to be terminated with a grounding-type attachment plug.
plug connected with a flexible cord identified as suitable for the
purpose in the installation instructions of the appliance manufacturer b. The length of the cord is not less than 450 mm and not over
where all of the following conditions are met. 900 mm.
c. Receptacles are located to avoid physical damage to the
a. The flexible cord shall be terminated with a grounding-type flexible cord.
attachment plug. d. The receptacle is accessible.
e. The receptacle is supplied by an individual branch circuit.
Exception: A listed dishwasher or trash compactor distinctly marked
to identify it as protected by a system of double insulation, or its 4.22.2.8 Protection of Combustible Material. Each electrically
equivalent, shall not be required to be terminated with a grounding- heated appliance that is intended by size, weight, and service to be
type attachment plug. located in a fixed position shall be placed so as to provide ample
protection between the appliance and adjacent combustible material.
b. The length of the cord shall be 900 mm to 1 200 mm measured
from the face of the attachment plug to the plane of the rear of the 4.22.2.9 Support of Ceiling-Suspended (Paddle) Fans. Ceiling-
appliance. suspended (paddle) fans shall be supported independently of an outlet
c. Receptacles shall be located to avoid physical damage to the box or by listed outlet box or outlet box systems identified for the use
flexible cord. and installed in accordance with 3.14.2.13(d).
d. The receptacle shall be located in the space occupied by the
appliance or adjacent thereto. 4.22.2.11 Other Installation Methods. Appliances employing
e. The receptacle shall be accessible. methods of installation other than covered by this article shall be
permitted to be used only by special permission.
(3) Wall-Mounted Ovens and Counter-Mounted Cooking Units.
Wall-mounted ovens and counter-mounted cooking units complete 4.22.3 Disconnecting Means
with provisions for mounting and for making electrical connections
shall be permitted to be permanently connected or, only for ease in 4.22.3.1 General. A means shall be provided to disconnect each
servicing or for installation, cord-and-plug connected. appliance from all ungrounded conductors in accordance with the
A separable connector or a plug and receptacle combination in the following sections of Part 4.22.3. If an appliance is supplied by more
supply line to an oven or cooking unit shall be approved for the than one source, the disconnecting means shall be grouped and
temperature of the space in which it is located. identified.

(4) Range Hoods. Range hoods shall be permitted to be cord-and-

4.22.3.2 Disconnection of Permanently Connected Appliances. connected household electric ranges, an attachment plug and receptacle
connection at the rear base of a range, if it is accessible from the front
(a) Rated at Not Over 300 Volt-Amperes or Horsepower. For by removal of a drawer, shall be considered as meeting the intent of
permanently connected appliances rated at not over 300 volt-amperes 4.22.3.4(a).
or hp, the branch-circuit overcurrent device shall be permitted to serve
as the disconnecting means. (c) Rating. The rating of a receptacle or of a separable connector
shall not be less than the rating of any appliance connected thereto.
(b) Appliances Rated Over 300 Volt-Amperes or
1/8 Horsepower. For permanently connected appliances rated over Exception: Demand factors authorized elsewhere in this Code shall be
300 volt-amperes or hp, the branch-circuit switch or circuit breaker permitted to be applied to the rating of a receptacle or of a separable
shall be permitted to serve as the disconnecting means where the connector.
switch or circuit breaker is within sight from the appliance or is
capable of being locked in the open position. The provision for locking 4.22.3.5 Unit Switch(es) as Disconnecting Means. A unit switch(es)
or adding a lock to the disconnecting means shall be installed on or at with a marked-off position that is a part of an appliance and
the switch or circuit breaker used as the disconnecting means and shall disconnects all ungrounded conductors shall be permitted as the
remain in place with or without the lock installed. disconnecting means required by this article where other means for
disconnection are provided in occupancies specified in 4.22.3.5(a)
FPN: For appliances employing unit switches, see 4.22.3.5. through 4.22.3.5(d).
4.22.3.3 Disconnecting Means for Motor-Driven Appliance. If a (a) Multifamily Dwellings. In multifamily dwellings, the other
switch or circuit breaker serves as the disconnecting means for a disconnecting means shall be within the dwelling unit, or on the same
permanently connected motor-driven appliance of more than 1/8 hp, it floor as the dwelling unit in which the appliance is installed, and shall
shall be located within sight from the motor controller and shall be permitted to control lamps and other appliances.
comply with Part 4.30.9.
(b) Two-Family Dwellings. In two-family dwellings, the other
Exception: If a motor-driven appliance of more than 1/8 hp is disconnecting means shall be permitted either inside or outside of the
provided with a unit switch that complies with 4.22.3.5(a), (b), (c), or dwelling unit in which the appliance is installed. In this case, an
(d), the switch or circuit breaker serving as the other disconnecting individual switch or circuit breaker for the dwelling unit shall be
means shall be permitted to be out of sight from the motor controller. permitted and shall also be permitted to control lamps and other
appliances.
4.22.3.4 Disconnection of Cord-and-Plug-Connected Appliances.
(c) One-Family Dwellings. In one-family dwellings, the service
(a) Separable Connector or an Attachment Plug and Receptacle. disconnecting means shall be permitted to be the other disconnecting
For cord-and-plug-connected appliances, an accessible separable means.
connector or an accessible plug and receptacle shall be permitted to
serve as the disconnecting means. Where the separable connector or (d) Other Occupancies. In other occupancies, the branch-circuit
plug and receptacle are not accessible, cord-and-plug-connected switch or circuit breaker, where readily accessible for servicing of the
appliances shall be provided with disconnecting means in accordance appliance, shall be permitted as the other disconnecting means.
with 4.22.3.2.

(b) Connection at the Rear Base of a Range. For cord-and-plug-

4.22.3.6 Switch and Circuit Breaker to Be Indicating. Switches and heaters of the cord-and-plug-connected immersion type shall be
circuit breakers used as disconnecting means shall be of the indicating constructed and installed so that current-carrying parts are effectively
type. insulated from electrical contact with the substance in which they are
immersed.
4.22.4 Construction
4.22.4.6 Stands for Cord-and-Plug-Connected Appliances. Each
4.22.4.1 Polarity in Cord-and-Plug-Connected Appliances. If the smoothing iron and other cord-and-plug-connected electrically heated
appliance is provided with a manually operated, line-connected, single- appliance intended to be applied to combustible material shall be
pole switch for appliance on–off operation, an Edison-base equipped with an approved stand, which shall be permitted to be a
lampholder, or a 15- or 20-ampere receptacle, the attachment plug shall separate piece of equipment or a part of the appliance.
be of the polarized or grounding type.
A 2-wire, nonpolarized attachment plug shall be permitted to be used 4.22.4.7 Flatirons. Electrically heated smoothing irons shall be
on a listed double-insulated shaver. equipped with an identified temperature-limiting means.

FPN: For polarity of Edison-base lampholders, see 4.10.7.9(a). 4.22.4.8 Water Heater Controls. All storage or instantaneous-type
water heaters shall be equipped with a temperature-limiting means in
4.22.4.2 Cord-and-Plug-Connected Appliances Subject to addition to its control thermostat to disconnect all ungrounded
Immersion. Cord-and-plug-connected portable, freestanding conductors. Such means shall comply with both of the following:
hydromassage units and hand-held hair dryers shall be constructed to
provide protection for personnel against electrocution when immersed (1) Installed to sense maximum water temperature.
while in the “on” or “off” position. (2) Be either a trip-free, manually reset type or a type having a
replacement element. Such water heaters shall be marked to require the
4.22.4.3 Signals for Heated Appliances. In other than dwelling-type installation of a temperature and pressure relief valve.
occupancies, each electrically heated appliance or group of appliances
intended to be applied to combustible material shall be provided with a Exception No. 1: Storage water heaters that are identified as being
signal or an integral temperature-limiting device. suitable for use with supply water temperature of 82°C (180°F) or
above and a capacity of 60 kW or above.
4.22.4.4 Flexible Cords. Exception No. 2: Instantaneous-type water heaters that are identified
as being suitable for such use, with a capacity of 4 L (1 gal) or less.
(a) Heater Cords. All cord-and-plug-connected smoothing irons and
electrically heated appliances that are rated at more than 50 watts and FPN: See ANSI Z21.22-1999/CSA 4.4-M99, Relief Valves for Hot Water Supply
produce temperatures in excess of 121°C (250°F) on surfaces with Systems.
which the cord is likely to be in contact shall be provided with one of
the types of approved heater cords listed in Table 4.0.1.4. 4.22.4.9 Infrared Lamp Industrial Heating Appliances.

(b) Other Heating Appliances. All other cord-and-plug-connected (a) 300 Watts or Less. Infrared heating lamps rated at 300 watts or
electrically heated appliances shall be connected with one of the less shall be permitted with lampholders of the medium-base,
approved types of cord listed in Table 4.0.1.4, selected in accordance unswitched porcelain type or other types identified as suitable for use
with the usage specified in that table. with infrared heating lamps rated 300 watts or less.

4.22.4.5 Cord-and-Plug-Connected Immersion Heaters. Electric (b) Over 300 Watts. Screw-shell lampholders shall not be used with
infrared lamps rated over 300 watts, unless the lampholders are appliance shall be legibly marked with the ratings in volts and
identified as being suitable for use with infrared heating lamps rated amperes, or in volts and watts, or with the manufacturer’s part number.
over 300 watts.
4.22.5.3 Appliances Consisting of Motors and Other Loads.
4.22.4.10 High-Pressure Spray Washers. All single-phase cord-and-
plug-connected high-pressure spray washing machines rated at 250 (a) Nameplate Horsepower Markings. Where a motor-operated
volts or less shall be provided with factory-installed ground-fault appliance nameplate includes a horsepower rating, that rating shall not
circuit-interrupter protection for personnel. The ground-fault circuit be less than the horsepower rating on the motor nameplate. Where an
interrupter shall be an integral part of the attachment plug or shall be appliance consists of multiple motors, or one or more motors and other
located in the supply cord within 300 mm of the attachment plug. loads, the nameplate value shall not be less than the equivalent
horsepower of the combined loads, calculated in accordance with
4.22.4.11 Cord-and-Plug-Connected Pipe Heating Assemblies. 4.30.9.10(c)(1).
Cord-and-plug-connected pipe heating assemblies intended to prevent
freezing of piping shall be listed. (b) Additional Nameplate Markings. Appliances, other than those
factory-equipped with cords and attachment plugs and with nameplates
4.22.4.12 Cord-and-Plug-Connected Vending Machines. Cord-and- in compliance with 4.22.5.1, shall be marked in accordance with
plug-connected vending machines manufactured or re-manufactured on 4.22.5.3(b)(1) or (b)(2).
or after January 1, 2006, shall include a ground-fault circuit-interrupter
as an integral part of the attachment plug or located in the power (1) Marking. In addition to the marking required in 4.22.5.1, the
supply cord within 300 mm of the attachment plug. Cord-and-plug- marking on an appliance consisting of a motor with other load(s) or
connected vending machines not incorporating integral GFCI motors with or without other load(s) shall specify the minimum supply
protection shall be connected to a GFCI protected outlet. circuit conductor ampacity and the maximum rating of the circuit
overcurrent protective device. This requirement shall not apply to an
4.22.5 Marking appliance with a nameplate in compliance with 4.22.5.1 where both the
minimum supply circuit conductor ampacity and maximum rating of
4.22.5.1 Nameplate. the circuit overcurrent protective device are not more than 15 amperes.
(2) Alternate Marking Method. An alternative marking method
(a) Nameplate Marking. Each electric appliance shall be provided shall be permitted to specify the rating of the largest motor in volts and
with a nameplate giving the identifying name and the rating in volts amperes, and the additional load(s) in volts and amperes, or volts and
and amperes, or in volts and watts. If the appliance is to be used on a watts in addition to the marking required in 4.22.5.1. The ampere
specific frequency or frequencies, it shall be so marked. rating of a motor horsepower or less or a nonmotor load 1 ampere or
Where motor overload protection external to the appliance is less shall be permitted to be omitted unless such loads constitute the
required, the appliance shall be so marked. principal load.

FPN: See 4.22.2.2 for overcurrent protection requirements.

ARTICLE 4.24 — FIXED ELECTRIC
(b) To Be Visible. Marking shall be located so as to be visible or SPACE-HEATING EQUIPMENT
easily accessible after installation.
4.24.1 General
4.22.5.2 Marking of Heating Elements. All heating elements that are
rated over one ampere, replaceable in the field, and a part of an 4.24.1.1 Scope. This article covers fixed electric equipment used for
space heating. For the purpose of this article, heating equipment shall
include heating cable, unit heaters, boilers, central systems, or other 4.24.2.3 Supply Conductors. Fixed electric space-heating equipment
approved fixed electric space-heating equipment. This article shall not requiring supply conductors with over 60°C insulation shall be clearly
apply to process heating and room air conditioning. and permanently marked. This marking shall be plainly visible after
installation and shall be permitted to be adjacent to the field connection
4.24.1.2 Other Articles. Fixed electric space-heating equipment box.
incorporating a hermetic refrigerant motor-compressor shall also
comply with Article 4.40. 4.24.2.4 Locations.

4.24.1.3 Branch Circuits. (a) Exposed to Physical Damage. Where subject to physical
damage, fixed electric space-heating equipment shall be protected in an
(a) Branch-Circuit Requirements. Individual branch circuits shall approved manner.
be permitted to supply any size fixed electric space-heating equipment.
Branch circuits supplying two or more outlets for fixed electric (b) Damp or Wet Locations. Heaters and related equipment
space-heating equipment shall be rated 15, 20, 25, or 30 amperes. In installed in damp or wet locations shall be listed for such locations and
nondwelling occupancies, fixed infrared heating equipment shall be shall be constructed and installed so that water or other liquids cannot
permitted to be supplied from branch circuits rated not over 50 enter or accumulate in or on wired sections, electrical components, or
amperes. ductwork.

(b) Branch-Circuit Sizing. Fixed electric space heating equipment FPN No. 1: See 1.10.1.11 for equipment exposed to deteriorating agents.
FPN No. 2: See 6.80.2.8(c) for pool deck areas.
shall be considered continuous load.
4.24.2.5 Spacing from Combustible Materials. Fixed electric space-
4.24.1.6 Listed Equipment. Electric baseboard heaters, heating cables,
heating equipment shall be installed to provide the required spacing
duct heaters, and radiant heating systems shall be listed and labeled.
between the equipment and adjacent combustible material, unless it is
listed to be installed in direct contact with combustible material.
4.24.2 Installation
4.24.3 Control and Protection of Fixed Electric
4.24.2.1 General. All fixed electric space-heating equipment shall be
Space-Heating Equipment
installed in an approved manner.
Permanently installed electric baseboard heaters equipped with factory-
4.24.3.1 Disconnecting Means. Means shall be provided to disconnect
installed receptacle outlets, or outlets provided as a separate listed
the heater, motor controller(s), and supplementary overcurrent
assembly, shall be permitted in lieu of a receptacle outlet(s) that is
protective device(s) of all fixed electric space-heating equipment from
required by 2.10.3.1(b). Such receptacle outlets shall not be connected
all ungrounded conductors. Where heating equipment is supplied by
to the heater circuits.
more than one source, the disconnecting means shall be grouped and
FPN: Listed baseboard heaters include instructions that may not permit their
marked.
installation below receptacle outlets.
(a) Heating Equipment with Supplementary Overcurrent
4.24.2.2 Special Permission. Fixed electric space-heating equipment Protection. The disconnecting means for fixed electric space-heating
and systems installed by methods other than covered by this article equipment with supplementary overcurrent protection shall be within
shall be permitted only by special permission. sight from the supplementary overcurrent protective device(s), on the
supply side of these devices, if fuses, and, in addition, shall comply (2) Over 1/8 Horsepower. For motor-driven electric space-heating
with either 4.24.3.1(a)(1) or (a)(2). equipment with a motor rated over 1/8 hp, a disconnecting means shall
be located within sight from the motor controller or shall be permitted
(1) Heater Containing No Motor Rated Over 1/8 Horsepower. The to comply with the requirements in 4.24.3.1(a)(2).
above disconnecting means or unit switches complying with
4.24.3.1(c) shall be permitted to serve as the required disconnecting (c) Unit Switch(es) as Disconnecting Means. A unit switch(es) with
means for both the motor controller(s) and heater under either of the a marked “off” position that is part of a fixed heater and disconnects all
following conditions: ungrounded conductors shall be permitted as the disconnecting means
required by this article where other means for disconnection are
a. The disconnecting means provided is also within sight from provided in the types of occupancies in 4.24.3.1(c)(1) through (c)(4).
the motor controller(s) and the heater.
b. The disconnecting means provided is capable of being locked (1) Multifamily Dwellings. In multifamily dwellings, the other
in the open position. disconnecting means shall be within the dwelling unit, or on the same
floor as the dwelling unit in which the fixed heater is installed, and
(2) Heater Containing a Motor(s) Rated Over 1/8 Horsepower. The shall also be permitted to control lamps and appliances.
above disconnecting means shall be permitted to serve as the required (2) Two-Family Dwellings. In two-family dwellings, the other
disconnecting means for both the motor controller(s) and heater by one disconnecting means shall be permitted either inside or outside of the
of the following means: dwelling unit in which the fixed heater is installed. In this case, an
individual switch or circuit breaker for the dwelling unit shall be
a. Where the disconnecting means is also in sight from the motor permitted and shall also be permitted to control lamps and appliances.
controller(s) and the heater. (3) One-Family Dwellings. In one-family dwellings, the service
b. Where the disconnecting means is not within sight from the disconnecting means shall be permitted to be the other disconnecting
heater, a separate disconnecting means shall be installed, or the means.
disconnecting means shall be capable of being locked in the open (4) Other Occupancies. In other occupancies, the branch-circuit
position, or unit switches complying with 4.24.3.1(c) shall be switch or circuit breaker, where readily accessible for servicing of the
permitted. fixed heater, shall be permitted as the other disconnecting means.
c. Where the disconnecting means is not within sight from the
motor controller location, a disconnecting means complying with 4.24.3.2 Thermostatically Controlled Switching Devices.
4.30.9.2 shall be provided.
d. Where the motor is not in sight from the motor controller (a) Serving as Both Controllers and Disconnecting Means.
location, 4.30.9.2(b) shall apply. Thermostatically controlled switching devices and combination
thermostats and manually controlled switches shall be permitted to
(b) Heating Equipment Without Supplementary Overcurrent serve as both controllers and disconnecting means, provided all of the
Protection. following conditions are met:

(1) Without Motor or with Motor Not Over 1/8 Horsepower. For (1) Provided with a marked “off” position
fixed electric space-heating equipment without a motor rated over (2) Directly open all ungrounded conductors when manually
1/8 hp, the branch-circuit switch or circuit breaker shall be permitted to placed in the “off” position
serve as the disconnecting means where the switch or circuit breaker is (3) Designed so that the circuit cannot be energized automatically
within sight from the heater or is capable of being locked in the open after the device has been manually placed in the “off” position
position. (4) Located as specified in 4.24.3.1
 (b) Thermostats That Do Not Directly Interrupt All Ungrounded FPN No. 1: For supplementary overcurrent protection, see 2.40.1.10.
FPN No. 2: For disconnecting means for cartridge fuses in circuits of any voltage,
Conductors. Thermostats that do not directly interrupt all ungrounded see 2.40.4.1.
conductors and thermostats that operate remote-control circuits shall
not be required to meet the requirements of 4.24.3.2(a). These devices (d) Branch-Circuit Conductors. The conductors supplying the
shall not be permitted as the disconnecting means. supplementary overcurrent protective devices shall be considered
branch-circuit conductors.
4.24.3.3 Switch and Circuit Breaker to Be Indicating. Switches and Where the heaters are rated 50 kW or more, the conductors
circuit breakers used as disconnecting means shall be of the indicating supplying the supplementary overcurrent protective devices specified
type. in 4.24.3.4(c) shall be permitted to be sized at not less than 100 percent
of the nameplate rating of the heater, provided all of the following
4.24.3.4 Overcurrent Protection. conditions are met:

(a) Branch-Circuit Devices. Electric space-heating equipment, (1) The heater is marked with a minimum conductor size.
other than such motor-operated equipment as required by Article 4.30 (2) The conductors are not smaller than the marked minimum size.
and Article 4.40 to have additional overcurrent protection, shall be (3) A temperature-actuated device controls the cyclic operation of
permitted to be protected against overcurrent where supplied by one of the equipment.
the branch circuits in Article 2.10.
(e) Conductors for Subdivided Loads. Field-wired conductors
(b) Resistance Elements. Resistance-type heating elements in between the heater and the supplementary overcurrent protective
electric space-heating equipment shall be protected at not more than 60 devices shall be sized at not less than 125 percent of the load served.
amperes. Equipment rated more than 48 amperes and employing such The supplementary overcurrent protective devices specified in
elements shall have the heating elements subdivided, and each 4.24.3.4(c) shall protect these conductors in accordance with 2.40.1.4.
subdivided load shall not exceed 48 amperes. Where a subdivided load Where the heaters are rated 50 kW or more, the ampacity of field-
is less than 48 amperes, the rating of the supplementary overcurrent wired conductors between the heater and the supplementary
protective device shall comply with 4.24.1.3(b). A boiler employing overcurrent protective devices shall be permitted to be not less than
resistance-type immersion heating elements contained in an ASME 100 percent of the load of their respective subdivided circuits, provided
rated and stamped vessel shall be permitted to comply with 4.24.7.3(a). all of the following conditions are met:

(c) Overcurrent Protective Devices. The supplementary (1) The heater is marked with a minimum conductor size.
overcurrent protective devices for the subdivided loads specified in (2) The conductors are not smaller than the marked minimum size.
4.24.3.4(b) shall be (1) factory-installed within or on the heater (3) A temperature-activated device controls the cyclic operation of
enclosure or supplied for use with the heater as a separate assembly by the equipment.
the heater manufacturer; (2) accessible, but shall not be required to be
readily accessible; and (3) suitable for branch-circuit protection. 4.24.4 Marking of Heating Equipment
FPN: See 2.40.1.10.
4.24.4.1 Nameplate.
Where cartridge fuses are used to provide this overcurrent protection,
(a) Marking Required. Each unit of fixed electric space-heating
a single disconnecting means shall be permitted to be used for the
equipment shall be provided with a nameplate giving the identifying
several subdivided loads.
name and the normal rating in volts and watts or in volts and amperes.
 Electric space-heating equipment intended for use on alternating
current only or direct current only shall be marked to so indicate. The 4.24.5.5 Area Restrictions.
marking of equipment consisting of motors over 1/8 hp and other loads
shall specify the rating of the motor in volts, amperes, and frequency, (a) Shall Not Extend Beyond the Room or Area. Heating cables
and the heating load in volts and watts or in volts and amperes. shall not extend beyond the room or area in which they originate.

(b) Location. This nameplate shall be located so as to be visible or (b) Uses Prohibited. Heating cables shall not be installed in the
easily accessible after installation. following:

4.24.4.2 Marking of Heating Elements. All heating elements that are (1) In closets
replaceable in the field and are part of an electric heater shall be legibly (2) Over walls
marked with the ratings in volts and watts or in volts and amperes. (3) Over partitions that extend to the ceiling, unless they are
isolated single runs of embedded cable
4.24.5 Electric Space-Heating Cables (4) Over cabinets whose clearance from the ceiling is less than the
minimum horizontal dimension of the cabinet to the nearest cabinet
4.24.5.1 Heating Cable Construction. Heating cables shall be edge that is open to the room or area
furnished complete with factory-assembled nonheating leads at least
2 100 mm in length. (c) In Closet Ceilings as Low-Temperature Heat Sources to
Control Relative Humidity. The provisions of 4.24.5.5(b) shall not
4.24.5.2 Marking of Heating Cables. Each unit shall be marked with prevent the use of cable in closet ceilings as low-temperature heat
the identifying name or identification symbol, catalog number, and sources to control relative humidity, provided they are used only in
ratings in volts and watts or in volts and amperes. those portions of the ceiling that are unobstructed to the floor by
Each unit length of heating cable shall have a permanent legible shelves or other permanent luminaires (fixtures).
marking on each nonheating lead located within 75 mm of the terminal
end. The lead wire shall have the following color identification to 4.24.5.6 Clearance from Other Objects and Openings. Heating
indicate the circuit voltage on which it is to be used: elements of cables shall be separated at least 200 mm from the edge of
outlet boxes and junction boxes that are to be used for mounting
(1) 120 volt, nominal — yellow surface luminaires (lighting fixtures). A clearance of not less than
(2) 208 volt, nominal — blue 50 mm shall be provided from recessed luminaires (fixtures) and their
(3) 240 volt, nominal — red trims, ventilating openings, and other such openings in room surfaces.
(4) 277 volt, nominal — brown Sufficient area shall be provided to ensure that no heating cable is
(5) 480 volt, nominal — orange covered by any surface-mounted units.

4.24.5.3 Clearances of Wiring in Ceilings. Wiring located above 4.24.5.7 Splices. Embedded cables shall be spliced only where
heated ceilings shall be spaced not less than 50 mm above the heated necessary and only by approved means, and in no case shall the length
ceiling and shall be considered as operating at an ambient temperature of the heating cable be altered.
of 50°C (122°F). The ampacity of conductors shall be calculated on the
basis of the correction factors shown in the 0–2 000 volt ampacity 4.24.5.8 Installation of Heating Cables on Dry Board, in Plaster,
tables of Article 3.10. If this wiring is located above thermal insulation and on Concrete Ceilings.
having a minimum thickness of 50 mm, the wiring shall not require
correction for temperature. (a) In Walls. Cables shall not be installed in walls unless it is
necessary for an isolated single run of cable to be installed down a surfaces.
vertical surface to reach a dropped ceiling.
(i) Joists. In dry board applications, cable shall be installed parallel
(b) Adjacent Runs. Adjacent runs of cable not exceeding 9 watts/m to the joist, leaving a clear space centered under the joist of 65 mm
(2¾ watts/ft) shall not be installed less than 40 mm on centers. (width) between centers of adjacent runs of cable. A surface layer of
gypsum board shall be mounted so that the nails or other fasteners do
(c) Surfaces to Be Applied. Heating cables shall be applied only to not pierce the heating cable.
gypsum board, plaster lath, or other fire-resistant material. With metal
lath or other electrically conductive surfaces, a coat of plaster shall be (j) Crossing Joists. Cables shall cross joists only at the ends of the
applied to completely separate the metal lath or conductive surface room unless the cable is required to cross joists elsewhere in order to
from the cable. satisfy the manufacturer’s instructions that the installer avoid placing
the cable too close to ceiling penetrations and luminaires (lighting
FPN: See also 4.24.5.8(f). fixtures).
(d) Splices. All heating cables, the splice between the heating cable 4.24.5.9 Finished Ceilings. Finished ceilings shall not be covered with
and nonheating leads, and 75 mm minimum of the nonheating lead at decorative panels or beams constructed of materials that have thermal
the splice shall be embedded in plaster or dry board in the same insulating properties, such as wood, fiber, or plastic. Finished ceilings
manner as the heating cable. shall be permitted to be covered with paint, wallpaper, or other
approved surface finishes.
(e) Ceiling Surface. The entire ceiling surface shall have a finish of
thermally noninsulating sand plaster that has a nominal thickness of 4.24.5.10 Installation of Nonheating Leads of Cables.
13 mm, or other noninsulating material identified as suitable for this
use and applied according to specified thickness and directions. (a) Free Nonheating Leads. Free nonheating leads of cables shall
be installed in accordance with approved wiring methods from the
(f) Secured. Cables shall be secured by means of approved stapling, junction box to a location within the ceiling. Such installations shall be
tape, plaster, nonmetallic spreaders, or other approved means either at permitted to be single conductors in approved raceways, single or
intervals not exceeding 410 mm or at intervals not exceeding multiconductor Type UF, Type NMC, Type MI, or other approved
1 800 mm for cables identified for such use. Staples or metal fasteners conductors.
that straddle the cable shall not be used with metal lath or other
electrically conductive surfaces. (b) Leads in Junction Box. Not less than 150 mm of free
nonheating lead shall be within the junction box. The marking of the
(g) Dry Board Installations. In dry board installations, the entire leads shall be visible in the junction box.
ceiling below the heating cable shall be covered with gypsum board
not exceeding 13 mm thickness. The void between the upper layer of (c) Excess Leads. Excess leads of heating cables shall not be cut but
gypsum board, plaster lath, or other fire-resistant material and the shall be secured to the underside of the ceiling and embedded in plaster
surface layer of gypsum board shall be completely filled with or other approved material, leaving only a length sufficient to reach the
thermally conductive, nonshrinking plaster or other approved material junction box with not less than 150 mm of free lead within the box.
or equivalent thermal conductivity.

(h) Free from Contact with Conductive Surfaces. Cables shall be

kept free from contact with metal or other electrically conductive
4.24.5.11 Installation of Cables in Concrete or Poured Masonry provided as an integral part of the equipment.
Floors.
4.24.6.2 Identification. Heaters installed in an air duct shall be
(a) Watts per Linear Foot. Constant wattage heating cables shall identified as suitable for the installation.
not exceed 54 watts/linear meter (16½ watts/linear foot) of cable.
4.24.6.3 Airflow. Means shall be provided to ensure uniform and
(b) Spacing Between Adjacent Runs. The spacing between adequate airflow over the face of the heater in accordance with the
adjacent runs of cable shall not be less than 25 mm on centers. manufacturer’s instructions.

(c) Secured in Place. Cables shall be secured in place by FPN: Heaters installed within 1 200 mm of the outlet of an air-moving device, heat
pump, air conditioner, elbows, baffle plates, or other obstructions in ductwork may
nonmetallic frames or spreaders or other approved means while the require turning vanes, pressure plates, or other devices on the inlet side of the duct
concrete or other finish is applied. heater to ensure an even distribution of air over the face of the heater.
Cables shall not be installed where they bridge expansion joints
unless protected from expansion and contraction. 4.24.6.4 Elevated Inlet Temperature. Duct heaters intended for use
with elevated inlet air temperature shall be identified as suitable for use
(d) Spacings Between Heating Cable and Metal Embedded in the at the elevated temperatures.
Floor. Spacings shall be maintained between the heating cable and
metal embedded in the floor, unless the cable is a grounded metal-clad 4.24.6.5 Installation of Duct Heaters with Heat Pumps and Air
cable. Conditioners. Heat pumps and air conditioners having duct heaters
closer than 1 200 mm to the heat pump or air conditioner shall have
(e) Leads Protected. Leads shall be protected where they leave the both the duct heater and heat pump or air conditioner identified as
floor by rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit, rigid suitable for such installation and so marked.
nonmetallic conduit, electrical metallic tubing, or by other approved
means. 4.24.6.6 Condensation. Duct heaters used with air conditioners or
other air-cooling equipment that could result in condensation of
(f) Bushings or Approved Fittings. Bushings or approved fittings moisture shall be identified as suitable for use with air conditioners.
shall be used where the leads emerge within the floor slab.
4.24.6.7 Fan Circuit Interlock. Means shall be provided to ensure that
(g) Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection. Ground-fault the fan circuit is energized when any heater circuit is energized.
circuit-interrupter protection for personnel shall be provided for cables However, time- or temperature-controlled delay in energizing the fan
installed in electrically heated floors of bathrooms and in motor shall be permitted.
hydromassage bathtub locations.
4.24.6.8 Limit Controls. Each duct heater shall be provided with an
4.24.5.12 Inspection and Tests. Cable installations shall be made with approved, integral, automatic-reset temperature-limiting control or
due care to prevent damage to the cable assembly and shall be controllers to de-energize the circuit or circuits.
inspected and approved before cables are covered or concealed. In addition, an integral independent supplementary control or
controllers shall be provided in each duct heater that disconnects a
4.24.6 Duct Heaters sufficient number of conductors to interrupt current flow. This device
shall be manually resettable or replaceable.
4.24.6.1 General. Part 4.24.6 shall apply to any heater mounted in the
airstream of a forced-air system where the air-moving unit is not 4.24.6.9 Location of Disconnecting Means. Duct heater controller
equipment shall be either accessible with the disconnecting means elements not contained in an ASME rated and stamped vessel shall
installed at or within sight from the controller or as permitted by have the heating elements protected at not more than 60 amperes. Such
4.24.3.1(a). a boiler rated more than 48 amperes shall have the heating elements
subdivided into loads not exceeding 48 amperes.
4.24.6.10 Installation. Duct heaters shall be installed in accordance Where a subdivided load is less than 48 amperes, the rating of the
with the manufacturer’s instructions in such a manner that operation overcurrent protective device shall comply with 4.24.1.3(b).
does not create a hazard to persons or property. Furthermore, duct
heaters shall be located with respect to building construction and other (c) Supplementary Overcurrent Protective Devices. The
equipment so as to permit access to the heater. Sufficient clearance supplementary overcurrent protective devices for the subdivided loads
shall be maintained to permit replacement of controls and heating as required by 4.24.7.3(a) and 4.24.7.3(b) shall be as follows:
elements and for adjusting and cleaning of controls and other parts
requiring such attention. See 1.10.2.1. (1) Factory-installed within or on the boiler enclosure or provided
as a separate assembly by the boiler manufacturer
FPN: For additional installation information, see NFPA 90A-2002, Standard for the (2) Accessible, but need not be readily accessible
Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems, and NFPA 90B-2002,
Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning Systems. (3) Suitable for branch-circuit protection

4.24.7 Resistance-Type Boilers Where cartridge fuses are used to provide this overcurrent protection,
a single disconnecting means shall be permitted for the several
4.24.7.1 Scope. The provisions in Part 4.24.7 shall apply to boilers subdivided circuits. See 2.40.4.1.
employing resistance-type heating elements. Electrode-type boilers
shall not be considered as employing resistance-type heating elements. (d) Conductors Supplying Supplementary Overcurrent
See Part 4.24.8. Protective Devices. The conductors supplying these supplementary
overcurrent protective devices shall be considered branch-circuit
4.24.7.2 Identification. Resistance-type boilers shall be identified as conductors.
suitable for the installation. Where the heaters are rated 50 kW or more, the conductors
supplying the overcurrent protective device specified in 4.24.7.3(c)
4.24.7.3 Overcurrent Protection. shall be permitted to be sized at not less than 100 percent of the
nameplate rating of the heater, provided all of the following conditions
(a) Boiler Employing Resistance-Type Immersion Heating are met:
Elements in an ASME Rated and Stamped Vessel. A boiler
employing resistance-type immersion heating elements contained in an (1) The heater is marked with a minimum conductor size.
ASME rated and stamped vessel shall have the heating elements (2) The conductors are not smaller than the marked minimum size.
protected at not more than 150 amperes. Such a boiler rated more than (3) A temperature- or pressure-actuated device controls the cyclic
120 amperes shall have the heating elements subdivided into loads not operation of the equipment.
exceeding 120 amperes.
Where a subdivided load is less than 120 amperes, the rating of the (e) Conductors for Subdivided Loads. Field-wired conductors
overcurrent protective device shall comply with 4.24.1.3(b). between the heater and the supplementary overcurrent protective
devices shall be sized at not less than 125 percent of the load served.
(b) Boiler Employing Resistance-Type Heating Elements Rated The supplementary overcurrent protective devices specified in
More Than 48 Amperes and Not Contained in an ASME Rated 4.24.7.3(c) shall protect these conductors in accordance with 2.40.1.4.
and Stamped Vessel. A boiler employing resistance-type heating
 Where the heaters are rated 50 kW or more, the ampacity of field- 4.24.8.3 Branch-Circuit Requirements. The size of branch-circuit
wired conductors between the heater and the supplementary conductors and overcurrent protective devices shall be calculated on
overcurrent protective devices shall be permitted to be not less than the basis of 125 percent of the total load (motors not included). A
100 percent of the load of their respective subdivided circuits, provided contactor, relay, or other device, approved for continuous operation at
all of the following conditions are met: 100 percent of its rating, shall be permitted to supply its full-rated load.
See 2.10.2.1(a), Exception. The provisions of this section shall not
(1) The heater is marked with a minimum conductor size. apply to conductors that form an integral part of an approved boiler.
(2) The conductors are not smaller than the marked minimum size. Where an electrode boiler is rated 50 kW or more, the conductors
(3) A temperature-activated device controls the cyclic operation of supplying the boiler electrode(s) shall be permitted to be sized at not
the equipment. less than 100 percent of the nameplate rating of the electrode boiler,
provided all the following conditions are met:
4.24.7.4 Overtemperature Limit Control. Each boiler designed so
that in normal operation there is no change in state of the heat transfer (1) The electrode boiler is marked with a minimum conductor
medium shall be equipped with a temperature-sensitive limiting means. size.
It shall be installed to limit maximum liquid temperature and shall (2) The conductors are not smaller than the marked minimum size.
directly or indirectly disconnect all ungrounded conductors to the (3) A temperature- or pressure-actuated device controls the cyclic
heating elements. Such means shall be in addition to a temperature operation of the equipment.
regulating system and other devices protecting the tank against
excessive pressure. 4.24.8.4 Overtemperature Limit Control. Each boiler, designed so
that in normal operation there is no change in state of the heat transfer
4.24.7.5 Overpressure Limit Control. Each boiler designed so that in medium, shall be equipped with a temperature-sensitive limiting
normal operation there is a change in state of the heat transfer medium means. It shall be installed to limit maximum liquid temperature and
from liquid to vapor shall be equipped with a pressure-sensitive shall directly or indirectly interrupt all current flow through the
limiting means. It shall be installed to limit maximum pressure and electrodes. Such means shall be in addition to the temperature
shall directly or indirectly disconnect all ungrounded conductors to the regulating system and other devices protecting the tank against
heating elements. Such means shall be in addition to a pressure excessive pressure.
regulating system and other devices protecting the tank against
excessive pressure. 4.24.8.5 Overpressure Limit Control. Each boiler, designed so that in
normal operation there is a change in state of the heat transfer medium
4.24.8 Electrode-Type Boilers from liquid to vapor, shall be equipped with a pressure-sensitive
limiting means. It shall be installed to limit maximum pressure and
4.24.8.1 Scope. The provisions in Part 4.24.8 shall apply to boilers for shall directly or indirectly interrupt all current flow through the
operation at 600 volts, nominal, or less, in which heat is generated by electrodes. Such means shall be in addition to a pressure regulating
the passage of current between electrodes through the liquid being system and other devices protecting the tank against excessive
heated. pressure.

FPN: For over 600 volts, see Part 4.90.5. 4.24.8.6 Grounding. For those boilers designed such that fault currents
do not pass through the pressure vessel, and the pressure vessel is
4.24.8.2 Identification. Electrode-type boilers shall be identified as electrically isolated from the electrodes, all exposed non–current-
suitable for the installation. carrying metal parts, including the pressure vessel, supply, and return
connecting piping, shall be grounded in accordance with Article 2.50.
For all other designs, the pressure vessel containing the electrodes shall in volts and watts or in volts and amperes.
be isolated and electrically insulated from ground.
(d) Labels Provided by Manufacturer. The manufacturers of
4.24.8.7 Markings. All electrode-type boilers shall be marked to show heating panels or heating panel sets shall provide marking labels that
the following: indicate that the space-heating installation incorporates heating panels
or heating panel sets and instructions that the labels shall be affixed to
(1) The manufacturer’s name the panelboards to identify which branch circuits supply the circuits to
(2) The normal rating in volts, amperes, and kilowatts those space-heating installations. If the heating panels and heating
(3) The electrical supply required specifying frequency, number of panel set installations are visible and distinguishable after installation,
phases, and number of wires the labels shall not be required to be provided and affixed to the
(4) The marking “Electrode-Type Boiler” panelboards.
(5) A warning marking, “All Power Supplies Shall Be
Disconnected Before Servicing, Including Servicing the Pressure 4.24.9.4 Installation.
Vessel”
(a) General.
The nameplate shall be located so as to be visible after installation.
(1) Manufacturer's Instructions. Heating panels and heating panel
4.24.9 Electric Radiant Heating Panels and Heating Panel Sets sets shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions.
4.24.9.1 Scope. The provisions of Part 4.24.9 shall apply to radiant (2) Locations Not Permitted. The heating portion shall not be
heating panels and heating panel sets. installed as follows:

4.24.9.2 Definitions. a. In or behind surfaces where subject to physical damage

b. Run through or above walls, partitions, cupboards, or similar
Heating Panel. A complete assembly provided with a junction box portions of structures that extend to the ceiling.
or a length of flexible conduit for connection to a branch circuit. c. Run in or through thermal insulation, but shall be permitted to
be in contact with the surface of thermal insulation.
Heating Panel Set. A rigid or nonrigid assembly provided with
nonheating leads or a terminal junction assembly identified as being (3) Separation from Outlets for Luminaires (Lighting Fixtures).
suitable for connection to a wiring system. Edges of panels and panel sets shall be separated by not less than
200 mm from the edges of any outlet boxes and junction boxes that are
4.24.9.3 Markings. to be used for mounting surface luminaires (lighting fixtures). A
clearance of not less than 50 mm shall be provided from recessed
(a) Location. Markings shall be permanent and in a location that is luminaires (fixtures) and their trims, ventilating openings, and other
visible prior to application of panel finish. such openings in room surfaces, unless the heating panels and panel
sets are listed and marked for lesser clearances, in which case they
(b) Identified as Suitable. Each unit shall be identified as suitable shall be permitted to be installed at the marked clearances. Sufficient
for the installation. area shall be provided to ensure that no heating panel or heating panel
set is to be covered by any surface-mounted units.
(c) Required Markings. Each unit shall be marked with the (4) Surfaces Covering Heating Panels. After the heating panels or
identifying name or identification symbol, catalog number, and rating heating panel sets are installed and inspected, it shall be permitted to
install a surface that has been identified by the manufacturer’s operating at an ambient temperature of 40°C (104°F), and the ampacity
instructions as being suitable for the installation. The surface shall be shall be calculated on the basis of the correction factors given in the
secured so that the nails or other fastenings do not pierce the heating 0–2 000 volt ampacity tables of Article 3.10.
panels or heating panel sets.
(5) Surface Coverings. Surfaces permitted by 4.24.9.4(a)(4) shall 4.24.9.7 Connection to Branch-Circuit Conductors.
be permitted to be covered with paint, wallpaper, or other approved
surfaces identified in the manufacturer’s instructions as being suitable. (a) General. Heating panels or heating panel sets assembled together
in the field to form a heating installation in one room or area shall be
(b) Heating Panel Sets. connected in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

(1) Mounting Location. Heating panel sets shall be permitted to be (b) Heating Panels. Heating panels shall be connected to branch-
secured to the lower face of joists or mounted in between joists, circuit wiring by an approved wiring method.
headers, or nailing strips. (c) Heating Panel Sets.
(2) Parallel to Joists or Nailing Strips. Heating panel sets shall be
installed parallel to joists or nailing strips. (1) Connection to Branch Circuit Wiring. Heating panel sets shall
(3) Installation of Nails, Staples, or Other Fasteners. Nailing or be connected to branch-circuit wiring by a method identified as being
stapling of heating panel sets shall be done only through the unheated suitable for the purpose.
portions provided for this purpose. Heating panel sets shall not be cut (2) Panel Sets with Terminal Junction Assembly. A heating panel
through or nailed through any point closer than 6 mm to the element. set provided with terminal junction assembly shall be permitted to have
Nails, staples, or other fasteners shall not be used where they penetrate the nonheating leads attached at the time of installation in accordance
current-carrying parts. with the manufacturer’s instructions.
(4) Installed as Complete Unit. Heating panel sets shall be
installed as complete units unless identified as suitable for field cutting 4.24.9.8 Nonheating Leads. Excess nonheating leads of heating panels
in an approved manner. or heating panel sets shall be permitted to be cut to the required length.
They shall meet the installation requirements of the wiring method
4.24.9.5 Clearances of Wiring in Ceilings. Wiring located above employed in accordance with 4.24.9.7. Nonheating leads shall be an
heated ceilings shall be spaced not less than 50 mm above the heated integral part of a heating panel and a heating panel set and shall not be
ceiling and shall be considered as operating at an ambient of 50°C subjected to the ampacity requirements of 4.24.1.3(b) for branch
(122°F). The ampacity shall be calculated on the basis of the correction circuits.
factors given in the 0–2 000 volt ampacity tables of Article 3.10. If this
wiring is located above thermal insulations having a minimum 4.24.9.9 Installation in Concrete or Poured Masonry.
thickness of 50 mm, the wiring shall not require correction for
temperature. (a) Maximum Heated Area. Heating panels or heating panel sets
shall not exceed 355 watts/m2 (33 watts/ft2) of heated area.
4.24.9.6 Location of Branch-Circuit and Feeder Wiring in Walls.
(b) Secured in Place and Identified as Suitable. Heating panels or
(a) Exterior Walls. Wiring methods shall comply with Article 300 heating panel sets shall be secured in place by means specified in the
and 3.10.1.10. manufacturer’s instructions and identified as suitable for the
installation.
(b) Interior Walls. Any wiring behind heating panels or heating
panel sets located in interior walls or partitions shall be considered as (c) Expansion Joints. Heating panels or heating panel sets shall not
be installed where they bridge expansion joints unless provision is (4) Coverings. After heating panels or heating panel sets are
made for expansion and contraction. installed and inspected, they shall be permitted to be covered by a floor
covering that has been identified by the manufacturer as being suitable
(d) Spacings. Spacings shall be maintained between heating panels for the installation. The covering shall be secured to the heating panel
or heating panel sets and metal embedded in the floor. Grounded or heating panel sets with release-type adhesives or by means
metal-clad heating panels shall be permitted to be in contact with metal identified for this use.
embedded in the floor. (5) Fault Protection. A device to open all ungrounded conductors
supplying the heating panels or heating panel sets, provided by the
(e) Protection of Leads. Leads shall be protected where they leave manufacturer, shall function when a low- or high-resistance line-to-
the floor by rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit, rigid line, line-to-grounded conductor, or line-to-ground fault occurs, such
nonmetallic conduit, or electrical metallic tubing, or by other approved as the result of a penetration of the element or element assembly.
means.
FPN: An integral grounding shield may be required to provide this protection.
(f) Bushings or Fittings Required. Bushings or approved fittings
shall be used where the leads emerge within the floor slabs.
ARTICLE 4.27 — FIXED ELECTRIC HEATING
4.24.9.10 Installation Under Floor Covering. EQUIPMENT FOR PIPELINES AND VESSELS

(a) Identification. Heating panels or heating panel sets for 4.27.1 General
installation under floor covering shall be identified as suitable for
installation under floor covering. 4.27.1.1 Scope. The requirements of this article shall apply to
electrically energized heating systems and the installation of these
(b) Maximum Heated Area. Heating panels or panel sets installed systems used with pipelines or vessels or both.
under floor covering shall not exceed 160 watts/m2 (15 watts/ft2) of
FPN: For further information, see ANSI/IEEE Std. 515-1997, Standard for the
heated area. Testing, Design, Installation and Maintenance of Electrical Resistance Heat Tracing
for Industrial Applications, and ANSI/IEEE Std. 844-2000, Recommended Practice
(c) Installation. Listed heating panels or panel sets, if installed under for Electrical Impedance, Induction, and Skin Effect Heating of Pipelines and
Vessels.
floor covering, shall be installed on floor surfaces that are smooth and
flat in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and shall also 4.27.1.2 Definitions.
comply with 4.24.9.10(c)(1) through (c)(5).
Impedance Heating System. A system in which heat is generated in
(1) Expansion Joints. Heating panels or heating panel sets shall not a pipeline or vessel wall by causing current to flow through the
be installed where they bridge expansion joints unless protected from pipeline or vessel wall by direct connection to an ac voltage source
expansion and contraction. from a dual-winding transformer.
(2) Connection to Conductors. Heating panels and heating panel
sets shall be connected to branch-circuit and supply wiring by wiring Induction Heating System. A system in which heat is generated in a
methods recognized in Chapter 3. pipeline or vessel wall by inducing current and hysteresis effect in the
(3) Anchoring. Heating panels and heating panel sets shall be pipeline or vessel wall from an external isolated ac field source.
firmly anchored to the floor using an adhesive or anchoring system
identified for this use. Integrated Heating System. A complete system consisting of
components such as pipelines, vessels, heating elements, heat transfer
medium, thermal insulation, moisture barrier, nonheating leads, 4.27.2.3 Thermal Protection. External surfaces of pipeline and vessel
temperature controllers, safety signs, junction boxes, raceways, and heating equipment that operate at temperatures exceeding 60°C
fittings. (140°F) shall be physically guarded, isolated, or thermally insulated to
protect against contact by personnel in the area.
Pipeline. A length of pipe including pumps, valves, flanges, control
devices, strainers, and/or similar equipment for conveying fluids. 4.27.2.4 Identification. The presence of electrically heated pipelines,
vessels, or both, shall be evident by the posting of appropriate caution
Resistance Heating Element. A specific separate element to signs or markings at frequent intervals along the pipeline or vessel.
generate heat that is applied to the pipeline or vessel externally or
internally. 4.27.3 Resistance Heating Elements

FPN: Tubular heaters, strip heaters, heating cable, heating tape, heating blankets, 4.27.3.1 Secured. Heating element assemblies shall be secured to the
and immersion heaters are examples of resistance heaters.
surface being heated by means other than the thermal insulation.
Skin-Effect Heating System. A system in which heat is generated
4.27.3.2 Not in Direct Contact. Where the heating element is not in
on the inner surface of a ferromagnetic envelope attached to a pipeline
direct contact with the pipeline or vessel being heated, means shall be
or vessel, or both.
provided to prevent overtemperature of the heating element unless the
FPN: Typically, an electrically insulated conductor is routed through and connected design of the heater assembly is such that its temperature limitations
to the envelope at the other end. The envelope and the electrically insulated will not be exceeded.
conductor are connected to an ac voltage source from a dual-winding transformer.

4.27.3.3 Expansion and Contraction. Heating elements and

Vessel. A container such as a barrel, drum, or tank for holding fluids assemblies shall not be installed where they bridge expansion joints
or other material. unless provisions are made for expansion and contraction.
4.27.1.3 Application of Other Articles. Cord-connected pipe heating 4.27.3.4 Flexural Capability. Where installed on flexible pipelines,
assemblies intended for specific use and identified as suitable for this the heating elements and assemblies shall have a flexural capability
use shall be installed according to Article 4.22. that is compatible with the pipeline.
4.27.1.4 Continuous Load. Fixed electric heating equipment for 4.27.3.5 Power Supply Leads.
pipelines and vessels shall be considered continuous load.
(a) Nonheating Leads. Power supply nonheating leads (cold leads)
4.27.2 Installation for resistance elements shall be suitable for the temperature
encountered. Not less than 150 mm of nonheating leads shall be
4.27.2.1 General. Equipment for pipeline and vessel electrical heating provided within the junction box. Preassembled factory supplied and
shall be identified as being suitable for (1) the chemical, thermal, and field assembled nonheating leads on approved heaters shall be
physical environment and (2) installation in accordance with the permitted to be shortened if the markings specified in 4.27.3.7 are
manufacturer’s drawings and instructions. retained.
4.27.2.2 Use. Electrical heating equipment shall be installed in such a (b) Power Supply Leads Protection. Nonheating power supply
manner as to be afforded protection from physical damage. leads shall be protected where they emerge from electrically heated
pipeline or vessel heating units by rigid metal conduit, intermediate
metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing, or other raceways identified bus wires, if any, and their electrical insulation.
as suitable for the application.
(b) Heating Panels. Heating panels shall have a grounded
(c) Interconnecting Leads. Interconnecting nonheating leads conductive covering over the heating element and its electrical
connecting portions of the heating system shall be permitted to be insulation on the side opposite the side attached to the surface to be
covered by thermal insulation in the same manner as the heaters. heated.

4.27.3.6 Electrical Connections. 4.27.4 Impedance Heating

(a) Nonheating Interconnections. Nonheating interconnections, 4.27.4.1 Personnel Protection. All accessible external surfaces of the
where required under thermal insulation, shall be made with insulated pipeline, vessel, or both, being heated shall be physically guarded,
connectors identified as suitable for this use. isolated, or thermally insulated (with a weatherproof jacket for outside
installations) to protect against contact by personnel in the area.
(b) Circuit Connections. Splices and terminations outside the
thermal insulation shall be installed in a box or fitting in accordance 4.27.4.2 Isolation Transformer. A dual-winding transformer with a
with 1.10.1.14 and 3.0.1.15. grounded shield between the primary and secondary windings shall be
used to isolate the distribution system from the heating system.
4.27.3.7 Marking. Each factory-assembled heating unit shall be
legibly marked within 75 mm of each end of the nonheating leads with 4.27.4.3 Voltage Limitations. Unless protected by ground-fault
the permanent identification symbol, catalog number, and ratings in circuit-interrupter protection for personnel, the secondary winding of
volts and watts or in volts and amperes. the isolation transformer connected to the pipeline or vessel being
heated shall not have an output voltage greater than 30 volts ac.
4.27.3.9 Equipment Protection. Ground-fault protection of equipment Where ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection for personnel is
shall be provided for electric heat tracing and heating panels. This provided, the voltage shall be permitted to be greater than 30 but not
requirement shall not apply in industrial establishments where there is more than 80 volts.
alarm indication of ground faults and the following conditions apply:
Exception: In industrial establishments, the isolation transformer
(1) Conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that only connected to the pipeline or vessel being heated shall be permitted to
licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner have an output voltage not greater than 132 volts ac to ground where
under the supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner service the all of the following conditions apply:
installed systems. (1) Conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that only
(2) Continued circuit operation is necessary for safe operation of licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner
equipment or processes. under the supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner service the
installed systems.
4.27.3.10 Grounded Conductive Covering. Electric heating (2) Ground fault protection of equipment is provided.
equipment shall be listed and have a grounded conductive covering in (3) The pipeline or vessel being heated is completely enclosed in a
accordance with 4.27.3.10(a) or 4.27.3.10(b). The conductive covering grounded metal enclosure.
shall provide an effective ground path for equipment protection. (4) The transformer secondary connections to the pipeline or
vessel being heated are completely enclosed in a grounded metal mesh
(a) Heating Wires or Cables. Heating wires or cables shall have a or metal enclosure.
grounded conductive covering that surrounds the heating element and
4.27.4.4 Induced Currents. All current-carrying components shall be
installed in accordance with 3.0.1.20. 4.27.6.3 Single Conductor in Enclosure. The provisions of 3.0.1.20
shall not apply to the installation of a single conductor in a
4.27.4.5 Grounding. The pipeline, vessel, or both, that is being heated ferromagnetic envelope (metal enclosure).
and operating at a voltage greater than 30 but not more than 80 shall be
grounded at designated points. 4.27.6.4 Grounding. The ferromagnetic envelope shall be grounded at
both ends, and, in addition, it shall be permitted to be grounded at
4.27.4.6 Secondary Conductor Sizing. The ampacity of the intermediate points as required by its design. The ferromagnetic
conductors connected to the secondary of the transformer shall be at envelope shall be bonded at all joints to ensure electrical continuity.
least 100 percent of the total load of the heater. The provisions of 2.50.2.11 shall not apply to the installation of skin-
effect heating systems.
4.27.5 Induction Heating
FPN: See Article 2.50 for grounding methods.
4.27.5.1 Scope. This part covers the installation of line frequency
induction heating equipment and accessories for pipelines and vessels. 4.27.7 Control and Protection

FPN: See Article 6.65 for other applications. 4.27.7.1 Disconnecting Means.

4.27.5.2 Personnel Protection. Induction coils that operate or may (a) Switch or Circuit Breaker. Means shall be provided to
operate at a voltage greater than 30 volts ac shall be enclosed in a disconnect all fixed electric pipeline or vessel heating equipment from
nonmetallic or split metallic enclosure, isolated, or made inaccessible all ungrounded conductors. The branch-circuit switch or circuit
by location to protect personnel in the area. breaker, where readily accessible to the user of the equipment, shall be
permitted to serve as the disconnecting means. The disconnecting
4.27.5.3 Induced Current. Induction coils shall be prevented from means shall be of the indicating type and shall be provided with a
inducing circulating currents in surrounding metallic equipment, positive lockout in the “off” position.
supports, or structures by shielding, isolation, or insulation of the
current paths. Stray current paths shall be bonded to prevent arcing. (b) Cord-and-Plug-Connected Equipment. The factory-installed
attachment plug of cord-and-plug-connected equipment rated
4.27.6 Skin-Effect Heating 20 amperes or less and 150 volts or less to ground shall be permitted to
be the disconnecting means.
4.27.6.1 Conductor Ampacity. The ampacity of the electrically
insulated conductor inside the ferromagnetic envelope shall be 4.27.7.2 Controls.
permitted to exceed the values given in Article 3.10, provided it is
identified as suitable for this use. (a) Temperature Control with “Off” Position. Temperature
controlled switching devices that indicate an “off” position and that
4.27.6.2 Pull Boxes. Pull boxes for pulling the electrically insulated interrupt line current shall open all ungrounded conductors when the
conductor in the ferromagnetic envelope shall be permitted to be control device is in this “off” position. These devices shall not be
buried under the thermal insulation, provided their locations are permitted to serve as the disconnecting means unless provided with a
indicated by permanent markings on the insulation jacket surface and positive lockout in the “off” position.
on drawings. For outdoor installations, pull boxes shall be of watertight
construction. (b) Temperature Control Without “Off” Position. Temperature
controlled switching devices that do not have an “off” position shall
not be required to open all ungrounded conductors and shall not be
permitted to serve as the disconnecting means.

(c) Remote Temperature Controller. Remote controlled

temperature-actuated devices shall not be required to meet the
requirements of 4.27.7.2(a) and 4.27.7.2(b). These devices shall not be
permitted to serve as the disconnecting means.

(d) Combined Switching Devices. Switching devices consisting of

combined temperature-actuated devices and manually controlled
switches that serve both as the controllers and the disconnecting means
shall comply with all the following conditions:

(1) Open all ungrounded conductors when manually placed in the

“off” position
(2) Be designed so that the circuit cannot be energized
automatically if the device has been manually placed in the “off”
position
(3) Be provided with a positive lockout in the “off” position

4.27.7.3 Overcurrent Protection. Heating equipment shall be Figure 4.30.1.1 Article 4.30 Contents.
considered as protected against overcurrent where supplied by a branch
circuit as specified in 2.10.1.3 and 2.10.2.4.

4.30.1.2 Definitions.
ARTICLE 4.30 — MOTORS, MOTOR CIRCUITS,
AND CONTROLLERS Adjustable Speed Drive. A combination of the power converter,
motor, and motor mounted auxiliary devices such as encoders,
4.30.1 General tachometers, thermal switches and detectors, air blowers, heaters, and
vibration sensors.
4.30.1.1 Scope. This article covers motors, motor branch-circuit and
feeder conductors and their protection, motor overload protection, Adjustable-Speed Drive System. An interconnected combination of
motor control circuits, motor controllers, and motor control centers. equipment that provides a means of adjusting the speed of a
mechanical load coupled to a motor. A drive system typically consists
FPN No. 1: Installation requirements for motor control centers are covered in of an adjustable speed drive and auxiliary electrical apparatus.
1.10.2.1(f). Air conditioning and refrigerating equipment are covered in Article 4.40.
FPN No. 2: Figure 4.30.1.1 is for information only.
Controller. For the purpose of this article, a controller is any switch
or device that is normally used to start and stop a motor by making and
breaking the motor circuit current.
 Motor Control Circuit. The circuit of a control apparatus or system in accordance with 4.0.1.5. The required ampacity and motor ratings
that carries the electric signals directing the performance of the shall be determined as specified in 4.30.1.6(a), (b), and (c).
controller but does not carry the main power current.

System Isolation Equipment. A redundantly monitored, remotely Table 4.30.1.5 Other Articles
operated contactor-isolating system, packaged to provide the
disconnection/isolation function, capable of verifiable operation from Equipment/Occupancy Article Section
multiple remote locations by means of lockout switches, each having Air-conditioning and 4.40
the capability of being padlocked in the “off” (open) position. refrigerating equipment
Capacitors 4.60.1.8,
4.30.1.4 Part-Winding Motors. A part-winding start induction or Commercial garages; aircraft 5.11, 5.13, 5.14, 4.60.1.9
synchronous motor is one that is arranged for starting by first hangars; motor fuel 5.15, 5.16, and
energizing part of its primary (armature) winding and, subsequently, dispensing facilities; bulk Part 5.17.4
energizing the remainder of this winding in one or more steps. A storage plants; spray
standard part-winding start induction motor is arranged so that one-half application, dipping, and
of its primary winding can be energized initially, and, subsequently, coating processes; and
the remaining half can be energized, both halves then carrying equal inhalation anesthetizing
current. A hermetic refrigerant compressor motor shall not be locations
considered a standard part-winding start induction motor. Cranes and hoists 6.10
Where separate overload devices are used with a standard part-winding Electrically driven or 6.75
start induction motor, each half of the motor winding shall be controlled irrigation
individually protected in accordance with 4.30.3.2 and 4.30.3.7 with a machines
trip current one-half that specified. Elevators, dumbwaiters, 6.20
Each motor-winding connection shall have branch-circuit short-circuit escalators, moving walks,
and ground-fault protection rated at not more than one-half that wheelchair lifts, and stairway
specified by 4.30.4.2. chair lifts
Fire pumps 6.95
Exception: A short-circuit and ground-fault protective device shall be Hazardous (classified) 5.0–5.3 and 5.5
permitted for both windings if the device will allow the motor to start. locations
Where time-delay (dual-element) fuses are used, they shall be Industrial machinery 6.70
permitted to have a rating not exceeding 150 percent of the motor full- Motion picture projectors
load current. Motion picture and television 5.30 5.40.2.2 and
studios and similar locations 5.40.2.11
4.30.1.5 Other Articles. Motors and controllers shall also comply with Resistors and reactors 4.70
the applicable provisions of Table 4.30.1.5. Theaters, audience areas of
motion picture and television 5.20.3.8
4.30.1.6 Ampacity and Motor Rating Determination. The size of studios, and similar locations
conductors supplying equipment covered by Article 4.30 shall be Transformers and transformer 4.50
selected from the allowable ampacity tables in accordance with vaults
3.10.1.15(b) or shall be calculated in accordance with 3.10.1.15(c).
Where flexible cord is used, the size of the conductor shall be selected
 (a) General Motor Applications. For general motor applications, (b) Torque Motors. For torque motors, the rated current shall be
current ratings shall be determined based on (a)(1) and (a)(2). locked-rotor current, and this nameplate current shall be used to
determine the ampacity of the branch-circuit conductors covered in
(1) Table Values. Other than for motors built for low speeds (less 4.30.2.2 and 4.30.2.4, the ampere rating of the motor overload
than 1 200 RPM) or high torques, and for multispeed motors, the protection, and the ampere rating of motor branch-circuit short-circuit
values given in Table 4.30.14.1, Table 4.30.14.2, Table 4.30.14.3, and and ground-fault protection in accordance with 4.30.4.2(b).
Table 4.30.14.4 shall be used to determine the ampacity of conductors
or ampere ratings of switches, branch-circuit short-circuit and ground- FPN: For motor controllers and disconnecting means, see 4.30.7.3(d) and
4.30.9.10.
fault protection, instead of the actual current rating marked on the
motor nameplate. Where a motor is marked in amperes, but not
(c) Alternating-Current Adjustable Voltage Motors. For motors
horsepower, the horsepower rating shall be assumed to be that
used in alternating-current, adjustable voltage, variable torque drive
corresponding to the value given in Table 4.30.14.1, Table 4.30.14.2,
systems, the ampacity of conductors, or ampere ratings of switches,
Table 4.30.14.3, and Table 4.30.14.4, interpolated if necessary. Motors
branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protection, and so forth,
built for low speeds (less than 1 200 RPM) or high torques may have
shall be based on the maximum operating current marked on the motor
higher full-load currents, and multispeed motors will have full-load
or control nameplate, or both. If the maximum operating current does
current varying with speed, in which case the nameplate current ratings
not appear on the nameplate, the ampacity determination shall be based
shall be used.
on 150 percent of the values given in Table 4.30.14.3 and Table
4.30.14.4.
Exception No. 1: Multispeed motors shall be in accordance with
4.30.2.2(a) and 4.30.4.2.
4.30.1.7 Marking on Motors and Multimotor Equipment.
Exception No. 2: For equipment that employs a shaded-pole or
permanent-split capacitor-type fan or blower motor that is marked
(a) Usual Motor Applications. A motor shall be marked with the
with the motor type, the full load current for such motor marked on the
following information.
nameplate of the equipment in which the fan or blower motor is
employed shall be used instead of the horsepower rating to determine
(1) Manufacturer’s name.
the ampacity or rating of the disconnecting means, the branch-circuit
(2) Rated volts and full-load current. For a multispeed motor, full-
conductors, the controller, the branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-
load current for each speed, except shaded-pole and permanent-split
fault protection, and the separate overload protection. This marking on
capacitor motors where amperes are required only for maximum speed.
the equipment nameplate shall not be less than the current marked on
(3) Rated frequency and number of phases if an ac motor.
the fan or blower motor nameplate.
(4) Rated full-load speed.
Exception No. 3: For a listed motor-operated appliance that is marked
(5) Rated temperature rise or the insulation system class and rated
with both motor horsepower and full-load current, the motor full-load
ambient temperature.
current marked on the nameplate of the appliance shall be used instead
(6) Time rating. The time rating shall be 5, 15, 30, or 60 minutes,
of the horsepower rating on the appliance nameplate to determine the
or continuous.
ampacity or rating of the disconnecting means, the branch-circuit
(7) Rated horsepower if 1/8 hp or more. For a multispeed motor
conductors, the controller, the branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-
1/8 hp or more, rated horsepower for each speed, except shaded-pole
fault protection, and any separate overload protection.
and permanent-split capacitor motors 1/8 hp or more where rated
horsepower is required only for maximum speed. Motors of arc
(2) Nameplate Values. Separate motor overload protection shall be
welders are not required to be marked with the horsepower rating.
based on the motor nameplate current rating.
(8) Code letter or locked-rotor amperes if an alternating-current
motor rated ½ hp or more. On polyphase wound-rotor motors, the code
letter shall be omitted. Table 4.30.1.7(b) Locked-Rotor Indicating Code Letters

FPN: See 4.30.1.7(b).

Kilovolt-Amperes per
Code Letter Horsepower with Locked Rotor
(9) Design letter for design B, C, or D motors. A 0–3.14
FPN: Motor design letter definitions are found in ANSI/NEMA MG 1-1993, Motors
B 3.15–3.54
and Generators, Part 1, Definitions and in IEEE 100-1996, Standard Dictionary of C 3.55–3.99
Electrical and Electronic Terms. D 4.0–4.49

(10) Secondary volts and full-load current if a wound-rotor E 4.5–4.99

induction motor. F 5.0–5.59
(11) Field current and voltage for dc excited synchronous motors. G 5.6–6.29
(12) Winding — straight shunt, stabilized shunt, compound, or H 6.3–7.09
series, if a dc motor. Fractional horsepower dc motors 180 mm or less
in diameter shall not be required to be marked. J 7.1–7.99
(13) A motor provided with a thermal protector complying with K 8.0–8.99
4.30.3.2(a)(2) or (b)(2) shall be marked “Thermally Protected.” L 9.0–9.99
Thermally protected motors rated 100 watts or less and complying with M 10.0–11.19
4.30.3.2(b)(2) shall be permitted to use the abbreviated marking “T.P.”
(14) A motor complying with 4.30.3.2(b)(4) shall be marked N 11.2–12.49
“Impedance Protected.” Impedance protected motors rated 100 watts or P 12.5–13.99
less and complying with 4.30.3.2(b)(4) shall be permitted to use the R 14.0–15.99
abbreviated marking “Z.P.” S 16.0–17.99
(15) Motors equipped with electrically powered condensation
prevention heaters shall be marked with the rated heater voltage, T 18.0–19.99
number of phases, and the rated power in watts. U 20.0–22.39
V 22.4 and up
(b) Locked-Rotor Indicating Code Letters. Code letters marked on
motor nameplates to show motor input with locked rotor shall be in
accordance with Table 4.30.1.7(b).
The code letter indicating motor input with locked rotor shall be in (2) Single-Speed Motors. Single-speed motors starting on wye
an individual block on the nameplate, properly designated. connection and running on delta connections shall be marked with a
code letter corresponding to the locked-rotor kilovolt-ampere (kVA)
(1) Multispeed Motors. Multispeed motors shall be marked with per horsepower for the wye connection.
the code letter designating the locked-rotor kilovolt-ampere (kVA) per (3) Dual-Voltage Motors. Dual-voltage motors that have a
horsepower for the highest speed at which the motor can be started. different locked-rotor kilovolt-ampere (kVA) per horsepower on the
two voltages shall be marked with the code letter for the voltage giving
Exception: Constant horsepower multispeed motors shall be marked the highest locked-rotor kilovolt-ampere (kVA) per horsepower.
with the code letter giving the highest locked-rotor kilovolt-ampere (4) 50/60 Hz Motors. Motors with 50- and 60-Hz ratings shall be
(kVA) per horsepower. marked with a code letter designating the locked-rotor kilovolt-ampere
(kVA) per horsepower on 60 Hz. marked short-circuit current rating.
(5) Part Winding Motors. Part-winding start motors shall be Exception No. 4: Short-circuit ratings are not required for controllers
marked with a code letter designating the locked-rotor kilovolt-ampere rated less than 2 hp at 300 V or less and listed exclusively for general-
(kVA) per horsepower that is based on the locked-rotor current for the purpose branch circuits.
full winding of the motor.
A controller that includes motor overload protection suitable for group
(c) Torque Motors. Torque motors are rated for operation at motor application shall be marked with the motor overload protection
standstill and shall be marked in accordance with 4.30.1.7(a), except and the maximum branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault
that locked-rotor torque shall replace horsepower. protection for such applications.
Combination controllers that employ adjustable instantaneous trip
(d) Multimotor and Combination-Load Equipment. circuit breakers shall be clearly marked to indicate the ampere settings
of the adjustable trip element.
(1) Factory-Wired. Multimotor and combination-load equipment Where a controller is built-in as an integral part of a motor or of a
shall be provided with a visible nameplate marked with the motor-generator set, individual marking of the controller shall not be
manufacturer’s name, the rating in volts, frequency, number of phases, required if the necessary data are on the nameplate. For controllers that
minimum supply circuit conductor ampacity, and the maximum are an integral part of equipment approved as a unit, the above marking
ampere rating of the circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protective shall be permitted on the equipment nameplate.
device. The conductor ampacity shall be calculated in accordance with
4.30.2.4 and counting all of the motors and other loads that will be FPN: See 1.10.1.10 for information on circuit impedance and other characteristics.
operated at the same time. The short-circuit and ground-fault protective
device rating shall not exceed the value calculated in accordance with 4.30.1.9 Terminals.
4.30.4.3. Multimotor equipment for use on two or more circuits shall
be marked with the preceding information for each circuit. (a) Markings. Terminals of motors and controllers shall be suitably
(2) Not Factory-Wired. Where the equipment is not factory-wired marked or colored where necessary to indicate the proper connections.
and the individual nameplates of motors and other loads are visible
after assembly of the equipment, the individual nameplates shall be (b) Conductors. Motor controllers and terminals of control circuit
permitted to serve as the required marking. devices shall be connected with copper conductors unless identified for
use with a different conductor.
4.30.1.8 Marking on Controllers. A controller shall be marked with
the manufacturer’s name or identification, the voltage, the current or (c) Torque Requirements. Control circuit devices with screw-type
horsepower rating, the short-circuit current rating, and such other pressure terminals used with 2.0 mm2 (1.6 mm dia.) or smaller copper
necessary data to properly indicate the applications for which it is conductors shall be torqued to a minimum of 0.8 Nm (7 lb-in.) unless
suitable. identified for a different torque value.

Exception No. 1: The short-circuit current rating is not required for 4.30.1.10 Wiring Space in Enclosures.
controllers applied in accordance with 4.30.7.1(a) or (b).
Exception No. 2: The short-circuit rating is not required to be marked (a) General. Enclosures for motor controllers and disconnecting
on the controller when the short-circuit current rating of the controller means shall not be used as junction boxes, auxiliary gutters, or
is marked elsewhere on the assembly. raceways for conductors feeding through or tapping off to the other
Exception No. 3: The short-circuit rating is not required to be marked apparatus unless designs are employed that provide adequate space for
on the controller when the assembly into which it is installed has a this purpose.
 4.30.1.12 Motor Terminal Housings.
FPN: See 3.12.1.8 for switch and overcurrent-device enclosures.
(a) Material. Where motors are provided with terminal housings, the
(b) Wire-Bending Space in Enclosures. Minimum wire-bending housings shall be of metal and of substantial construction.
space within the enclosures for motor controllers shall be in
accordance with Table 4.30.1.10(b) where measured in a straight line Exception: In other than hazardous (classified) locations, substantial,
from the end of the lug or wire connector (in the direction the wire nonmetallic, nonburning housings shall be permitted, provided an
leaves the terminal) to the wall or barrier. Where alternate wire internal grounding means between the motor frame and the equipment
termination means are substituted for that supplied by the manufacturer grounding connection is incorporated within the housing.
of the controller, they shall be of a type identified by the manufacturer
for use with the controller and shall not reduce the minimum wire- (b) Dimensions and Space — Wire-to-Wire Connections. Where
bending space. these terminal housings enclose wire-to-wire connections, they shall
have minimum dimensions and usable volumes in accordance with
4.30.1.11 Protection Against Liquids. Suitable guards or enclosures Table 4.30.1.12(b).
shall be provided to protect exposed current-carrying parts of motors
and the insulation of motor leads where installed directly under (c) Dimensions and Space — Fixed Terminal Connections. Where
equipment, or in other locations where dripping or spraying oil, water, these terminal housings enclose rigidly mounted motor terminals, the
or other injurious liquid may occur, unless the motor is designed for terminal housing shall be of sufficient size to provide minimum
the existing conditions. terminal spacings and usable volumes in accordance with Table
4.30.1.12(c)(1) and Table 4.30.1.12(c)(2).
Table 4.30.1.10(b) Minimum Wire-Bending Space at the
Terminals of Enclosed Motor Controllers (d) Large Wire or Factory Connections. For motors with larger
Wires per Terminal* ratings, greater number of leads, or larger wire sizes, or where motors
Size of Wire 1 2 are installed as a part of factory-wired equipment, without additional
mm2 (mm dia.) (mm) (mm) connection being required at the motor terminal housing during
2.0(1.6)–5.5(2.6) Not specified — equipment installation, the terminal housing shall be of ample size to
8.0(3.2)–14 38 — make connections, but the foregoing provisions for the volumes of
22 50 — terminal housings shall not be considered applicable.
30 65 —
38 75 — (e) Equipment Grounding Connections. A means for attachment
50 125 125 of an equipment grounding conductor termination in accordance with
60 150 150 2.50.1.8 shall be provided at motor terminal housings for wire-to-wire
80–100 175 175 connections or fixed terminal connections. The means for such
125 200 200 connections shall be permitted to be located either inside or outside the
150 250 250 motor terminal housing.
175–250 300 300
325 350 400 Exception: Where a motor is installed as a part of factory-wired
400 450 475 equipment that is required to be grounded and without additional
*Where provision for three or more wires per terminal exists, the minimum wire- connection being required at the motor terminal housing during
bending space shall be in accordance with the requirements of Article 3.12.
equipment installation, a separate means for motor grounding at the
motor terminal housing shall not be required.
 Table 4.30.1.12(b) Terminal Housings — Wire-to-Wire
Connections Table 4.30.1.12(c)(1) Terminal Spacings — Fixed Terminals
Motors 280 mm in Diameter or Less Minimum Spacing
Cover Opening Usable Volume Between Line
Minimum Dimension Minimum
Horsepower (mm) (cm3)
Terminals and
1 and smallera 41 170 Between Line Other Uninsulated
1½, 2, and 3b 45 275 Nominal Terminals Metal Parts
5 and 7½ 50 365 Volts (mm) (mm)
10 and 15 65 595 240 or less 6 6
Motors Over 280 mm in Diameter — Alternating-Current Motors Over 250 – 600 10 10
Maximum Full
Load Current
for 3-Phase Terminal Box Typical
Motors with Cover Opening Maximum Table 4.30.1.12(c)(2) Usable Volumes — Fixed Terminals
Maximum of Minimum Usable Volume Horsepower Power-Supply Conductor Minimum Usable Volume per
12 Leads Dimension Minimum 3-Phase
(Amperes) (mm) (cm3) (230 Volt)
Size Power-Supply Conductor
45 65 595 15 mm2 (mm dia.) (cm3)
70 84 1 265 25 2.0(1.6) 16
110 100 2 295 40 3.5(2.0) and 5.5(2.6) 20
160 125 4 135 60
8.0(3.2) and 14 37
250 150 7 380 100
400 175 13 775 150
600 200 25 255 250
Direct-Current Motors
Maximum Full-Load 4.30.1.13 Bushing. Where wires pass through an opening in an
Current for Motors Terminal Box Usable Volume enclosure, conduit box, or barrier, a bushing shall be used to protect the
with Maximum of 6 Minimum Dimensions Minimum
Leads (Amperes) (mm) (cm3) conductors from the edges of openings having sharp edges. The
68 65 425 bushing shall have smooth, well-rounded surfaces where it may be in
105 84 900 contact with the conductors. If used where oils, greases, or other
165 100 1 640 contaminants may be present, the bushing shall be made of material
240 125 2 950
not deleteriously affected.
375 150 5 410
600 175 9 840
900 200 18 040 FPN: For conductors exposed to deteriorating agents, see 3.10.1.9.
Note: Auxiliary leads for such items as brakes, thermostats, space heaters, and
exciting fields shall be permitted to be neglected if their current-carrying area does not 4.30.1.14 Location of Motors.
exceed 25 percent of the current-carrying area of the machine power leads.
a
For motors rated 1 hp and smaller and with the terminal housing partially or wholly (a) Ventilation and Maintenance. Motors shall be located so that
integral with the frame or end shield, the volume of the terminal housing shall not be
less than 18.0 cm3 (1.1 in.3) per wire-to-wire connection. The minimum cover opening adequate ventilation is provided and so that maintenance, such as
dimension is not specified. lubrication of bearings and replacing of brushes, can be readily
b
For motors rated 1½, 2, and 3 hp and with the terminal housing partially or wholly accomplished.
integral with the frame or end shield, the volume of the terminal housing shall not be
less than 23.0 cm3 (1.4 in.3) per wire-to-wire connection. The minimum cover opening
dimension is not specified.
Exception: Ventilation shall not be required for submersible types of
motors.
 control equipment.
(b) Open Motors. Open motors that have commutators or collector
rings shall be located or protected so that sparks cannot reach adjacent FPN No. 1: See 3.0.1.1(b) and 3.10.1.1 for similar requirements.
FPN No. 2: See 1.10.1.14(c) and 4.30.1.9(b) for equipment device terminal
combustible material. requirements.
FPN No. 3: For over 600 volts, nominal, see Part 4.30.9.
Exception: Installation of these motors on wooden floors or supports
shall be permitted. 4.30.2.2 Single Motor.

4.30.1.16 Exposure to Dust Accumulations. In locations where dust (a) General. Conductors that supply a single motor used in a
or flying material collects on or in motors in such quantities as to continuous duty application shall have an ampacity of not less than 125
seriously interfere with the ventilation or cooling of motors and percent of the motor’s full-load current rating as determined by
thereby cause dangerous temperatures, suitable types of enclosed 4.30.1.6(a)(1).
motors that do not overheat under the prevailing conditions shall be
used. Exception: For dc motors operating from a rectified single-phase
power supply, the conductors between the field wiring terminals of the
FPN: Especially severe conditions may require the use of enclosed pipe-ventilated rectifier and the motor shall have an ampacity of not less than the
motors, or enclosure in separate dusttight rooms, properly ventilated from a source
of clean air.
following percent of the motor full-load current rating:
(a) Where a rectifier bridge of the single-phase half-wave type is
4.30.1.17 Highest Rated or Smallest Rated Motor. In determining used, 190 percent.
compliance with 4.30.2.4, 4.30.4.3(b), and 4.30.4.3(c), the highest (b) Where a rectifier bridge of the single-phase full-wave type is
rated or smallest rated motor shall be based on the rated full-load used, 150 percent.
current as selected from Table 4.30.14.1, Table 4.30.14.2, Table
4.30.14.3, and Table 4.30.14.4. (b) Multispeed Motor. For a multispeed motor, the selection of
branch-circuit conductors on the line side of the controller shall be
4.30.1.18 Nominal Voltage of Rectifier Systems. The nominal value based on the highest of the full-load current ratings shown on the
of the ac voltage being rectified shall be used to determine the voltage motor nameplate. The selection of branch-circuit conductors between
of a rectifier derived system. the controller and the motor shall be based on the current rating of the
winding(s) that the conductors energize.
Exception: The nominal dc voltage of the rectifier shall be used if it
exceeds the peak value of the ac voltage being rectified. (c) Wye-Start, Delta-Run Motor. For a wye-start, delta-run
connected motor, the selection of branch-circuit conductors on the line
4.30.2 Motor Circuit Conductors side of the controller shall be based on the motor full-load current. The
selection of conductors between the controller and the motor shall be
4.30.2.1 General. Part 4.30.2 specifies ampacities of conductors that based on 58 percent of the motor full-load current.
are capable of carrying the motor current without overheating under
the conditions specified. (d) Part-Winding Motor. For a part-winding connected motor, the
The provisions of Part II shall not apply to motor circuits rated over selection of branch-circuit conductors on the line side of the controller
600 volts, nominal. shall be based on the motor full-load current. The selection of
The provisions of Articles 2.50, 3.0, and 3.10 shall not apply to conductors between the controller and the motor shall be based on 50
conductors that form an integral part of equipment, such as motors, percent of the motor full-load current.
motor controllers, motor control centers, or other factory-assembled
 (e) Other Than Continuous Duty. Conductors for a motor used in a 4.30.2.3 Wound-Rotor Secondary.
short-time, intermittent, periodic, or varying duty application shall
have an ampacity of not less than the percentage of the motor (a) Continuous Duty. For continuous duty, the conductors
nameplate current rating shown in Table 4.30.2.2(e), unless the connecting the secondary of a wound-rotor ac motor to its controller
authority having jurisdiction grants special permission for conductors shall have an ampacity not less than 125 percent of the full-load
of lower ampacity. secondary current of the motor.

(b) Other Than Continuous Duty. For other than continuous duty,
these conductors shall have an ampacity, in percent of full-load
Table 4.30.2.2(e) Duty-Cycle Service secondary current, not less than that specified in Table 4.30.2.2(e).
Nameplate Current Rating Percentages
30- & 60- (c) Resistor Separate from Controller. Where the secondary
5-Minute 15-Minute Minute Continuous resistor is separate from the controller, the ampacity of the conductors
Classification of Rated Rated Rated Rated
Service Motor Motor Motor Motor between controller and resistor shall not be less than that shown in
Short-time duty 110 120 150 — Table 4.30.2.3(c).
operating valves,
raising or lowering
rolls, etc.
Intermittent duty 85 85 90 140
Table 4.30.2.3(c) Secondary Conductor
freight and Ampacity of Conductor in
passenger Percent of Full-Load Secondary
elevators, tool Resistor Duty Classification Current
heads, pumps,
drawbridges, Light starting duty 35
turntables, etc. (for Heavy starting duty 45
arc welders, see Extra-heavy starting duty 55
630.11) Light intermittent duty 65
Periodic duty rolls, 85 90 95 140
ore- and coal-
Medium intermittent duty 75
handling machines, Heavy intermittent duty 85
etc. Continuous duty 110
Varying duty 110 120 150 200
Note: Any motor application shall be considered as continuous duty unless the
nature of the apparatus it drives is such that the motor will not operate continuously
with load under any condition of use.
4.30.2.4 Several Motors or a Motor(s) and Other Load(s).
Conductors supplying several motors, or a motor(s) and other load(s),
shall have an ampacity not less than 125 percent of the full-load
(f) Separate Terminal Enclosure. The conductors between a current rating of the highest rated motor plus the sum of the full-load
stationary motor rated 1 hp or less and the separate terminal enclosure current ratings of all the other motors in the group, as determined by
permitted in 4.30.13.5(b) shall be permitted to be smaller than 2.0 mm2 4.30.1.6(a), plus the ampacity required for the other loads.
(1.6 mm dia.) but not smaller than 18 AWG, provided they have an
FPN: See Annex D, Example No. D8.
ampacity as specified in 4.30.2.2(a).
Exception No. 1: Where one or more of the motors of the group are 4.30.2.8 Feeder Taps. Feeder tap conductors shall have an ampacity
used for short-time, intermittent, periodic, or varying duty, the ampere not less than that required by Part II, shall terminate in a branch-circuit
rating of such motors to be used in the summation shall be determined protective device, and, in addition, shall meet one of the following
in accordance with 4.30.2.2(e). For the highest rated motor, the requirements:
greater of either the ampere rating from 4.30.2.2(e) or the largest
continuous duty motor full-load current multiplied by 1.25 shall be (1) Be enclosed either by an enclosed controller or by a raceway,
used in the summation. be not more than 3 000 mm in length, and, for field installation, be
Exception No. 2: The ampacity of conductors supplying motor- protected by an overcurrent device on the line side of the tap
operated fixed electric space-heating equipment shall conform with conductor, the rating or setting of which shall not exceed 1000 percent
4.24.1.3(b). of the tap conductor ampacity
Exception No. 3: Where the circuitry is interlocked so as to prevent (2) Have an ampacity of at least one-third that of the feeder
operation of selected motors or other loads at the same time, the conductors, be suitably protected from physical damage or enclosed in
conductor ampacity shall be permitted to be based on the summation of a raceway, and be not more than 7.5 m (25 ft) in length
the currents of the motors and other loads to be operated at the same (3) Have an ampacity not less than the feeder conductors
time that results in the highest total current.
Exception: Feeder taps over 7 600 mm long. In high-bay
4.30.2.5 Multimotor and Combination-Load Equipment. The manufacturing buildings [over 11 m high at walls], where conditions
ampacity of the conductors supplying multimotor and combination- of maintenance and supervision ensure that only licensed electrical
load equipment shall not be less than the minimum circuit ampacity practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner under the
marked on the equipment in accordance with 4.30.1.7(d). Where the supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner service the systems,
equipment is not factory-wired and the individual nameplates are conductors tapped to a feeder shall be permitted to be not over 7 600
visible in accordance with 4.30.1.7(d)(2), the conductor ampacity shall mm long horizontally and not over 30 m in total length where all of the
be determined in accordance with 4.30.2.4. following conditions are met:
(a) The ampacity of the tap conductors is not less than one-third
4.30.2.6 Feeder Demand Factor. Where reduced heating of the that of the feeder conductors.
conductors results from motors operating on duty-cycle, intermittently, (b) The tap conductors terminate with a single circuit breaker or a
or from all motors not operating at one time, the authority having single set of fuses conforming with (1) Part 4.30.4, where the load-side
jurisdiction may grant permission for feeder conductors to have an conductors are a branch circuit, or (2) Part 4.30.5, where the load-
ampacity less than specified in 4.30.2.4, provided the conductors have side conductors are a feeder.
sufficient ampacity for the maximum load determined in accordance (c) The tap conductors are suitably protected from physical
with the sizes and number of motors supplied and the character of their damage and are installed in raceways.
loads and duties. (d) The tap conductors are continuous from end-to-end and
contain no splices.
FPN: Demand factors determined in the design of new facilities can often be (e) The tap conductors shall be 14 mm2 copper or 22 mm2
validated against actual historical experience from similar installations. Refer to
ANSI/IEEE Std. 141, IEEE Recommended Practice for Electric Power Distribution aluminum or larger.
for Industrial Plants,and ANSI/IEEE Std. 241, Recommended Practice for Electric (f) The tap conductors shall not penetrate walls, floors, or
Power Systems in Commercial Buildings,for information on the calculation of loads ceilings.
and demand factor.
(g) The tap shall not be made less than 9 000 mm from the floor.
4.30.2.7 Capacitors with Motors. Where capacitors are installed in
motor circuits, conductors shall comply with 4.60.1.8 and 4.60.1.9. 4.30.2.9 Constant Voltage Direct-Current Motors — Power
Resistors. Conductors connecting the motor controller to separately
mounted power accelerating and dynamic braking resistors in the
armature circuit shall have an ampacity not less than the value The provisions of Part 4.30.3 shall not apply to motor circuits rated
calculated from Table 4.30.2.9 using motor full-load current. If an over 600 volts, nominal.
armature shunt resistor is used, the power accelerating resistor
conductor ampacity shall be calculated using the total of motor full- FPN No. 1: For over 600 volts, nominal, see Part 4.30.9.
FPN No. 2: See Appendix D, Example No. D8.
load current and armature shunt resistor current.
Armature shunt resistor conductors shall have an ampacity of not less
4.30.3.2 Continuous-Duty Motors.
than that calculated from Table 4.30.2.9 using rated shunt resistor
current as full-load current.
(a) More Than 1 Horsepower. Each motor used in a continuous
duty application and rated more than 1 hp shall be protected against
Table 4.30.2.9 Conductor Rating Factors for Power Resistors
overload by one of the means in 4.30.3.2(a)(1) through (a)(4).
Time in Seconds Ampacity of (1) Separate Overload Device. A separate overload device that is
Conductor in responsive to motor current. This device shall be selected to trip or
Percent of Full- shall be rated at no more than the following percent of the motor
On Off Load Current nameplate full-load current rating:
5 75 35
10 70 45 Motors with a marked service 125%
15 75 55 factor 1.15 or greater
15 45 65 Motors with a marked 125%
15 30 75 temperature rise 40°C or
15 15 85 less
Continuous Duty 110 All other motors 115%

Modification of this value shall be permitted as provided in

4.30.3 Motor and Branch-Circuit Overload Protection 4.30.3.2(c). For a multispeed motor, each winding connection shall be
considered separately.
4.30.3.1 General. Part 4.30.3 specifies overload devices intended to Where a separate motor overload device is connected so that it
protect motors, motor-control apparatus, and motor branch-circuit does not carry the total current designated on the motor nameplate,
conductors against excessive heating due to motor overloads and such as for wye-delta starting, the proper percentage of nameplate
failure to start. current applying to the selection or setting of the overload device shall
Overload in electrical apparatus is an operating overcurrent that, when be clearly designated on the equipment, or the manufacturer’s selection
it persists for a sufficient length of time, would cause damage or table shall take this into account.
dangerous overheating of the apparatus. It does not include short
circuits or ground faults. FPN: Where power factor correction capacitors are installed on the load side of the
These provisions shall not be interpreted as requiring overload motor overload device, see 4.60.1.9.
protection where it might introduce additional or increased hazards, as
in the case of fire pumps. (2) Thermal Protector. A thermal protector integral with the motor,
approved for use with the motor it protects on the basis that it will
FPN: For protection of fire pump supply conductors, see 6.95.1.6. prevent dangerous overheating of the motor due to overload and failure
to start. The ultimate trip current of a thermally protected motor shall to start. Where the motor current-interrupting device is separate from
not exceed the following percentage of motor full-load current given in the motor and its control circuit is operated by a protective device
Table 4.30.14.2, Table 4.30.14.3, and Table 4.30.14.4: integral with the motor, it shall be arranged so that the opening of the
control circuit results in interruption of current to the motor.
Motor full-load current 9 170%
amperes or less (3) Integral with Motor. A protective device integral with a motor
Motor full-load current from 156% that protects the motor against damage due to failure to start shall be
9.1 to, and including, 20 permitted (1) if the motor is part of an approved assembly that does not
amperes subject the motor to overloads, or (2) if the assembly is also equipped
Motor full-load current 140% with other safety controls (such as the safety combustion controls on a
greater than 20 amperes domestic oil burner) that protect the motor against damage due to
failure to start. Where the assembly has safety controls that protect the
If the motor current-interrupting device is separate from the motor motor, it shall be so indicated on the nameplate of the assembly where
and its control circuit is operated by a protective device integral with it will be visible after installation.
the motor, it shall be arranged so that the opening of the control circuit
will result in interruption of current to the motor. (4) Impedance-Protected. If the impedance of the motor windings
is sufficient to prevent overheating due to failure to start, the motor
(3) Integral with Motor. A protective device integral with a motor shall be permitted to be protected as specified in 4.30.3.2(d)(2)a for
that will protect the motor against damage due to failure to start shall manually started motors if the motor is part of an approved assembly in
be permitted if the motor is part of an approved assembly that does not which the motor will limit itself so that it will not be dangerously
normally subject the motor to overloads. overheated.

(4) Larger Than 1 500 Horsepower. For motors larger than FPN: Many ac motors of less than 1/20 hp, such as clock motors, series motors,
and so forth, and also some larger motors such as torque motors, come within this
1 500 hp, a protective device having embedded temperature detectors classification. It does not include split-phase motors having automatic switches that
that cause current to the motor to be interrupted when the motor attains disconnect the starting windings.
a temperature rise greater than marked on the nameplate in an ambient
temperature of 40°C. (c) Selection of Overload Relay. Where the sensing element or
setting of the overload relay selected in accordance with 4.30.3.2(a)(1)
(b) One Horsepower or Less, Automatically Started. Any motor and 4.30.3.2(b)(1) is not sufficient to start the motor or to carry the
of 1 hp or less that is started automatically shall be protected against load, higher size sensing elements or incremental settings shall be
overload by one of the following means. permitted to be used, provided the trip current of the overload relay
does not exceed the following percentage of motor nameplate full-load
(1) Separate Overload Device. By a separate overload device current rating:
following the requirements of 4.30.3.2(a)(1).
For a multispeed motor, each winding connection shall be Motors with marked service 140%
considered separately. Modification of this value shall be permitted as factor 1.15 or greater
provided in 4.30.3.2(c). Motors with a marked 140%
temperature rise 40°C or
(2) Thermal Protector. A thermal protector integral with the motor, less
approved for use with the motor that it protects on the basis that it will All other motors 130%
prevent dangerous overheating of the motor due to overload and failure
 4.30.3.5 Shunting During Starting Period.
If not shunted during the starting period of the motor as provided in
4.30.3.5, the overload device shall have sufficient time delay to permit (a) Nonautomatically Started. For a nonautomatically started
the motor to start and accelerate its load. motor, the overload protection shall be permitted to be shunted or cut
out of the circuit during the starting period of the motor if the device
FPN: A Class 20 or Class 30 overload relay will provide a longer motor acceleration by which the overload protection is shunted or cut out cannot be left in
time than a Class 10 or Class 20, respectively. Use of a higher class overload relay
may preclude the need for selection of a higher trip current. the starting position and if fuses or inverse time circuit breakers rated
or set at not over 400 percent of the full-load current of the motor are
(d) One Horsepower or Less, Nonautomatically Started. located in the circuit so as to be operative during the starting period of
the motor.
(1) Permanently Installed. Overload protection shall be in
accordance with 4.30.3.2(b). (b) Automatically Started. The motor overload protection shall not
(2) Not Permanently Installed. be shunted or cut out during the starting period if the motor is
automatically started.
a. Within Sight from Controller. Overload protection shall be
permitted to be furnished by the branch circuit short-circuit and Exception: The motor overload protection shall be permitted to be
ground-fault protective device; such device, however, shall not be shunted or cut out during the starting period on an automatically
larger than that specified in Part 4.30.4. started motor where the following apply:
(a) The motor starting period exceeds the time delay of available
Exception: Any such motor shall be permitted on a nominal 120 volt motor overload protective devices, and
branch circuit protected at not over 20 amperes. (b) Listed means are provided to perform the following:
(1) Sense motor rotation and automatically prevent the shunting
b. Not Within Sight from Controller. Overload protection shall or cutout in the event that the motor fails to start, and
be in accordance with 4.30.3.2(b). (2) Limit the time of overload protection shunting or cutout to less
than the locked rotor time rating of the protected motor, and
(e) Wound-Rotor Secondaries. The secondary circuits of wound- (3) Provide for shutdown and manual restart if motor running
rotor ac motors, including conductors, controllers, resistors, and so condition is not reached.
forth, shall be permitted to be protected against overload by the motor-
overload device. 4.30.3.6 Fuses — In Which Conductor. Where fuses are used for
motor overload protection, a fuse shall be inserted in each ungrounded
4.30.3.3 Intermittent and Similar Duty. A motor used for a condition conductor and also in the grounded conductor if the supply system is 3-
of service that is inherently short-time, intermittent, periodic, or wire, 3-phase ac with one conductor grounded.
varying duty, as illustrated by Table 4.30.2.2(e), shall be permitted to
be protected against overload by the branch-circuit short-circuit and 4.30.3.7 Devices Other Than Fuses — In Which Conductor. Where
ground-fault protective device, provided the protective device rating or devices other than fuses are used for motor overload protection, Table
setting does not exceed that specified in Table 4.30.4.2. 4.30.3.7 shall govern the minimum allowable number and location of
Any motor application shall be considered to be for continuous duty overload units such as trip coils or relays.
unless the nature of the apparatus it drives is such that the motor cannot
operate continuously with load under any condition of use. 4.30.3.8 Number of Conductors Opened by Overload Device. Motor
overload devices, other than fuses or thermal protectors, shall
simultaneously open a sufficient number of ungrounded conductors to of a dc motor, and in the running position in the case of an ac motor.
interrupt current flow to the motor.
4.30.3.10 Overload Relays. Overload relays and other devices for
motor overload protection that are not capable of opening short circuits
Table 4.30.3.7 Overload Units or ground faults shall be protected by fuses or circuit breakers with
Number and ratings or settings in accordance with 4.30.4.2 or by a motor short-
Location of circuit protector in accordance with 4.30.4.2.
Overload Units,
Such as Trip Coils Exception: Where approved for group installation and marked to
Kind of Motor Supply System or Relays indicate the maximum size of fuse or inverse time circuit breaker by
1-phase ac or dc 2-wire, 1-phase ac or 1 in either conductor which they must be protected, the overload devices shall be protected
dc ungrounded in accordance with this marking.
1-phase ac or dc 2-wire, 1-phase ac or 1 in ungrounded
FPN: For instantaneous trip circuit breakers or motor short-circuit protectors, see
dc, one conductor conductor 4.30.4.2.
grounded
1-phase ac or dc 3-wire, 1-phase ac or 1 in either 4.30.3.12 Motors on General-Purpose Branch Circuits. Overload
dc, grounded ungrounded protection for motors used on general-purpose branch circuits as
neutral conductor permitted in Article 2.10 shall be provided as specified in 4.30.3.12(a),
1-phase ac Any 3-phase 1 in ungrounded (b), (c), or (d).
conductor
2-phase ac 3-wire, 2-phase ac, 2, one in each phase (a) Not Over 1 Horsepower. One or more motors without
ungrounded individual overload protection shall be permitted to be connected to a
2-phase ac 3-wire, 2-phase ac, 2 in ungrounded general-purpose branch circuit only where the installation complies
one conductor conductors with the limiting conditions specified in 4.30.3.2(b) and 4.30.3.2(d)
grounded and 4.30.4.3(a)(1) and (a)(2).
2-phase ac 4-wire, 2-phase ac, 2, one per phase in
grounded or ungrounded con- (b) Over 1 Horsepower. Motors of ratings larger than specified in
ungrounded doctors 4.30.4.3(a) shall be permitted to be connected to general-purpose
2-phase ac Grounded neutral or 2, one per phase in branch circuits only where each motor is protected by overload
5-wire, 2-phase ac, any ungrounded protection selected to protect the motor as specified in 4.30.3.2. Both
ungrounded phase wire the controller and the motor overload device shall be approved for
3-phase ac Any 3-phase 3, one in each phase* group installation with the short-circuit and ground-fault protective
*Exception: An overload unit in each phase shall not be required where overload device selected in accordance with 4.30.4.3.
protection is provided by other approved means.
(c) Cord-and-Plug Connected. Where a motor is connected to a
branch circuit by means of an attachment plug and receptacle and
individual overload protection is omitted as provided in 4.30.3.12(a),
4.30.3.9 Motor Controller as Overload Protection. A motor the rating of the attachment plug and receptacle shall not exceed
controller shall also be permitted to serve as an overload device if the 15 amperes at 125 volts or 250 volts. Where individual overload
number of overload units complies with Table 4.30.3.7 and if these protection is required as provided in 4.30.3.12(b) for a motor or motor-
units are operative in both the starting and running position in the case
operated appliance that is attached to the branch circuit through an
attachment plug and receptacle, the overload device shall be an integral 4.30.4.2 Rating or Setting for Individual Motor Circuit.
part of the motor or of the appliance. The rating of the attachment plug
and receptacle shall determine the rating of the circuit to which the (a) General. The motor branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault
motor may be connected, as provided in Article 2.10. protective device shall comply with 4.30.4.2(b) and either 4.30.4.2(c)
or 4.30.4.2(d), as applicable.
(d) Time Delay. The branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault
protective device protecting a circuit to which a motor or motor- (b) All Motors. The motor branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-
operated appliance is connected shall have sufficient time delay to fault protective device shall be capable of carrying the starting current
permit the motor to start and accelerate its load. of the motor.

4.30.3.13 Automatic Restarting. A motor overload device that can (c) Rating or Setting.
restart a motor automatically after overload tripping shall not be
installed unless approved for use with the motor it protects. A motor (1) In Accordance with Table 4.30.4.2. A protective device that has
overload device that can restart a motor automatically after overload a rating or setting not exceeding the value calculated according to the
tripping shall not be installed if automatic restarting of the motor can values given in Table 4.30.4.2 shall be used.
result in injury to persons.
Exception No. 1: Where the values for branch-circuit short-circuit and
4.30.3.14 Orderly Shutdown. If immediate automatic shutdown of a ground-fault protective devices determined by Table 4.30.4.2 do not
motor by a motor overload protective device(s) would introduce correspond to the standard sizes or ratings of fuses, nonadjustable
additional or increased hazard(s) to a person(s) and continued motor circuit breakers, thermal protective devices, or possible settings of
operation is necessary for safe shutdown of equipment or process, a adjustable circuit breakers, a higher size, rating, or possible setting
motor overload sensing device(s) conforming with the provisions of that does not exceed the next higher standard ampere rating shall be
Part 4.30.3 shall be permitted to be connected to a supervised alarm permitted.
instead of causing immediate interruption of the motor circuit, so that Exception No. 2: Where the rating specified in Table 4.30.4.2, as
corrective action or an orderly shutdown can be initiated. modified by Exception No. 1, is not sufficient for the starting current of
the motor:
4.30.4 Motor Branch-Circuit Short-Circuit (a) The rating of a nontime-delay fuse not exceeding 600 amperes
and Ground-Fault Protection or a time-delay Class CC fuse shall be permitted to be increased but
shall in no case exceed 400 percent of the full-load current.
4.30.4.1 General. Part 4.30.4 specifies devices intended to protect the (b) The rating of a time-delay (dual-element) fuse shall be
motor branch-circuit conductors, the motor control apparatus, and the permitted to be increased but shall in no case exceed 225 percent of
motors against overcurrent due to short circuits or grounds. These rules the full-load current.
add to or amend the provisions of Article 2.40. The devices specified (c) The rating of an inverse time circuit breaker shall be permitted
in Part 4.30.4 do not include the types of devices required by 2.10.1.8, to be increased but shall in no case exceed 400 percent for full-load
2.30.7.6, and 5.90.1.6. currents of 100 amperes or less or 300 percent for full-load currents
The provisions of Part 4.30.4 shall not apply to motor circuits rated greater than 100 amperes.
over 600 volts, nominal. (d) The rating of a fuse of 601–6000 ampere classification shall be
permitted to be increased but shall in no case exceed 300 percent of
FPN No. 1: For over 600 volts, nominal, see Part 4.30.9. the full-load current.
FPN No. 2: See Appendix D, Example D8.
 FPN: See Appendix D, Example D8, and Figure 4.30.1.1. short-circuit and ground-fault protection in each conductor, and the
setting is adjusted to no more than the value specified in Table
4.30.4.2.
Table 4.30.4.2 Maximum Rating or Setting of Motor Branch-
Circuit Short-Circuit and Ground-Fault Protective Devices FPN: For the purpose of this article, instantaneous trip circuit breakers may include
Type of Percentage of Full-Load Current a damping means to accommodate a transient motor inrush current without
nuisance tripping of the circuit breaker.
Motor Nontime Dual Element Instantaneous Inverse
Delay (Time-Delay) Trip Time
Fuse1 Fuse1 Breaker Breaker2 Exception No. 1: Where the setting specified in Table 4.30.4.2 is not
Single-phase 300 175 800 250 sufficient for the starting current of the motor, the setting of an
motors instantaneous trip circuit breaker shall be permitted to be increased
AC polyphase motors other than wound-rotor but shall in no case exceed 1 300 percent of the motor full-load current
Squirrel cage 300 175 800 250 for other than Design B energy-efficient motors and no more than
— other than
Design B
1 700 percent of full-load motor current for Design B energy-efficient
energy- motors. Trip settings above 800 percent for other than Design B
efficient energy-efficient motors and above 1 100 percent for Design B energy-
Design B 300 175 1 100 250 efficient motors shall be permitted where the need has been
energy- demonstrated by engineering evaluation. In such cases, it shall not be
efficient
Synchronous3 300 175 800 250 necessary to first apply an instantaneous-trip circuit breaker at 800
Wound rotor 150 150 800 150 percent or 1 100 percent.
Direct current 150 150 250 150
(constant FPN: For additional information on the requirements for a motor to be classified
voltage) “energy efficient,” see NEMA Standards Publication No. MG1-1993, Revision,
Note: For certain exceptions to the values specified, see 4.30.4.4. Motors and Generators, Part 12.59.
1
The values in the Nontime Delay Fuse column apply to Time-Delay Class CC
fuses. Exception No. 2: Where the motor full-load current is 8 amperes or
2
The values given in the last column also cover the ratings of nonadjustable inverse less, the setting of the instantaneous-trip circuit breaker with a
time types of circuit breakers that may be modified as in 4.30.4.2(c), Exception No. 1
and No. 2. continuous current rating of 15 amperes or less in a listed combination
3
Synchronous motors of the low-torque, low-speed type (usually 450 rpm or lower), motor controller that provides coordinated motor branch-circuit
such as are used to drive reciprocating compressors, pumps, and so forth, that start overload and short-circuit and ground-fault protection shall be
unloaded, do not require a fuse rating or circuit-breaker setting in excess of 200 permitted to be increased to the value marked on the controller.
percent of full-load current.
(4) Multispeed Motor. For a multispeed motor, a single short-
circuit and ground-fault protective device shall be permitted for two or
more windings of the motor, provided the rating of the protective
(2) Overload Relay Table. Where maximum branch-circuit short- device does not exceed the above applicable percentage of the
circuit and ground-fault protective device ratings are shown in the nameplate rating of the smallest winding protected.
manufacturer’s overload relay table for use with a motor controller or
are otherwise marked on the equipment, they shall not be exceeded Exception: For a multispeed motor, a single short-circuit and ground-
even if higher values are allowed as shown above. fault protective device shall be permitted to be used and sized
(3) Instantaneous Trip Circuit Breaker. An instantaneous trip according to the full-load current of the highest current winding,
circuit breaker shall be used only if adjustable and if part of a listed where all of the following conditions are met:
combination motor controller having coordinated motor overload and
 (a) Each winding is equipped with individual overload protection in 4.30.4.3(d) and in 4.30.4.3(a), (b), or (c).
sized according to its full-load current.
(b) The branch-circuit conductors supplying each winding are (a) Not Over 1 Horsepower. Several motors, each not exceeding 1
sized according to the full-load current of the highest full-load current hp in rating, shall be permitted on a nominal 120-volt branch circuit
winding. protected at not over 20 amperes or a branch circuit of 600 volts,
(c) The controller for each winding has a horsepower rating not nominal, or less, protected at not over 15 amperes, if all of the
less than that required for the winding having the highest horsepower following conditions are met:
rating.
(1) The full-load rating of each motor does not exceed 6 amperes.
(5) Power Electronic Devices. Suitable fuses shall be permitted in (2) The rating of the branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault
lieu of devices listed in Table 4.30.4.2 for power electronic devices in a protective device marked on any of the controllers is not exceeded.
solid state motor controller system, provided that the marking for (3) Individual overload protection conforms to 4.30.3.2.
replacement fuses is provided adjacent to the fuses.
(6) Self-Protected Combination Controller. A listed self-protected (b) If Smallest Rated Motor Protected. If the branch-circuit short-
combination controller shall be permitted in lieu of the devices circuit and ground-fault protective device is selected not to exceed that
specified in Table 4.30.4.2. Adjustable instantaneous-trip settings shall allowed by 4.30.4.2 for the smallest rated motor, two or more motors
not exceed 1 300 percent of full-load motor current for other than or one or more motors and other load(s), with each motor having
Design B energy-efficient motors and not more than 1 700 percent of individual overload protection, shall be permitted to be connected to a
full-load motor current for Design B energy-efficient motors. branch circuit where it can be determined that the branch-circuit short-
circuit and ground-fault protective device will not open under the most
FPN: Proper application of self-protected combination controllers on 3-phase severe normal conditions of service that might be encountered.
systems, other than solidly grounded wye, particularly on corner grounded delta
systems, considers the self-protected combination controllers' individual pole-
interrupting capability. (c) Other Group Installations. Two or more motors of any rating or
one or more motors and other load(s), with each motor having
(7) Motor Short-Circuit Protector. A motor short-circuit protector individual overload protection, shall be permitted to be connected to
shall be permitted in lieu of devices listed in Table 4.30.4.2 if the one branch circuit where the motor controller(s) and overload device(s)
motor short-circuit protector is part of a listed combination motor are (1) installed as a listed factory assembly and the motor branch-
controller having coordinated motor overload protection and short- circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protective device either is
circuit and ground-fault protection in each conductor and it will open provided as part of the assembly or is specified by a marking on the
the circuit at currents exceeding 1 300 percent of motor full-load assembly, or (2) the motor branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault
current for other than Design B energy-efficient motors and 1 700 protective device, the motor controller(s), and overload device(s) are
percent of motor full-load motor current for Design B energy-efficient field-installed as separate assemblies listed for such use and provided
motors. with manufacturers’ instructions for use with each other, and (3) all of
the following conditions are complied with:
(d) Torque Motors. Torque motor branch circuits shall be protected
based on the motor nameplate current rating in accordance with (1) Each motor overload device is listed for group installation with
2.40.1.4(b). a specified maximum rating of fuse, inverse time circuit breaker, or
both.
4.30.4.3 Several Motors or Loads on One Branch Circuit. Two or (2) Each motor controller is listed for group installation with a
more motors or one or more motors and other loads shall be permitted specified maximum rating of fuse, circuit breaker, or both.
to be connected to the same branch circuit under conditions specified (3) Each circuit breaker is listed and is of the inverse time type.
 (4) The branch circuit shall be protected by fuses or inverse time
circuit breakers having a rating not exceeding that specified in 4.30.4.2 4.30.4.4 Multimotor and Combination-Load Equipment. The rating
for the highest rated motor connected to the branch circuit plus an of the branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protective device
amount equal to the sum of the full-load current ratings of all other for multimotor and combination-load equipment shall not exceed the
motors and the ratings of other loads connected to the circuit. Where rating marked on the equipment in accordance with 4.30.1.7(d).
this calculation results in a rating less than the ampacity of the supply
conductors, it shall be permitted to increase the maximum rating of the 4.30.4.5 Combined Overcurrent Protection. Motor branch-circuit
fuses or circuit breaker to a value not exceeding that permitted by short-circuit and ground-fault protection and motor overload protection
2.40.1.4(b). shall be permitted to be combined in a single protective device where
(5) The branch-circuit fuses or inverse time circuit breakers are the rating or setting of the device provides the overload protection
not larger than allowed by 4.30.3.10 for the overload relay protecting specified in 4.30.3.2.
the smallest rated motor of the group.
(6) Overcurrent protection for loads other than motor loads shall 4.30.4.6 Branch-Circuit Protective Devices — In Which
be in accordance with Parts 2.40.1 through 2.40.7. Conductor. Branch-circuit protective devices shall comply with the
provisions of 2.40.2.1.
FPN: See 1.10.1.10 for circuit impedance and other characteristics.
4.30.4.7 Size of Fuseholder. Where fuses are used for motor branch-
(d) Single Motor Taps. For group installations described above, the circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protection, the fuseholders shall
conductors of any tap supplying a single motor shall not be required to not be of a smaller size than required to accommodate the fuses
have an individual branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault specified by Table 4.30.4.2.
protective device, provided they comply with one of the following:
Exception: Where fuses having time delay appropriate for the starting
(1) No conductor to the motor shall have an ampacity less than characteristics of the motor are used, it shall be permitted to use
that of the branch-circuit conductors. fuseholders sized to fit the fuses that are used.
(2) No conductor to the motor shall have an ampacity less than
one-third that of the branch-circuit conductors, with a minimum in 4.30.4.8 Rating of Circuit Breaker. A circuit breaker for motor
accordance with 4.30.2.2, the conductors to the motor overload device branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protection shall have a
being not more than 7 600 mm long and being protected from physical current rating in accordance with 4.30.4.2 and 4.30.9.10.
damage.
(3) Conductors from the branch-circuit short-circuit and ground- 4.30.5 Motor Feeder Short-Circuit and Ground-Fault Protection
fault protective device to a listed manual motor controller additionally
marked “Suitable for Tap Conductor Protection in Group Installations” 4.30.5.1 General. Part 4.30.5 specifies protective devices intended to
shall be permitted to have an ampacity not less than the rating or protect feeder conductors supplying motors against overcurrents due to
setting of the branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protective short circuits or grounds.
device. The conductors from the controller to the motor shall have an
ampacity in accordance with 4.30.2.2. The conductors from the branch- FPN: See Appendix D, Example D8.
circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protective device to the controller
shall (1) be suitably protected from physical damage and enclosed 4.30.5.2 Rating or Setting — Motor Load.
either by an enclosed controller or by a raceway and shall be not more
than 3 000 mm long or (2) shall have an ampacity not less than that of (a) Specific Load. A feeder supplying a specific fixed motor load(s)
the branch circuit conductors. and consisting of conductor sizes based on 4.30.2.4 shall be provided
with a protective device having a rating or setting not greater than the permitted by 4.40.3.2
largest rating or setting of the branch-circuit short-circuit and ground- (3) For two or more motors, the rating permitted by 4.30.5.2
fault protective device for any motor supplied by the feeder [based on
the maximum permitted value for the specific type of a protective Exception: Where the feeder overcurrent device provides the
device in accordance with 4.30.4.2, or 4.40.3.2(a) for hermetic overcurrent protection for a motor control center, the provisions of
refrigerant motor-compressors], plus the sum of the full-load currents 4.30.8.3 shall apply.
of the other motors of the group.
Where the same rating or setting of the branch-circuit short-circuit 4.30.6 Motor Control Circuits
and ground-fault protective device is used on two or more of the
branch circuits supplied by the feeder, one of the protective devices 4.30.6.1 General. Part 4.30.6 contains modifications of the general
shall be considered the largest for the above calculations. requirements and applies to the particular conditions of motor control
circuits.
Exception No. 1: Where one or more instantaneous trip circuit
breakers or motor short-circuit protectors are used for motor branch- FPN: See 4.30.1.9(b) for equipment device terminal requirements.
circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protection as permitted in
4.30.4.2(c), the procedure provided above for determining the 4.30.6.2 Overcurrent Protection.
maximum rating of the feeder protective device shall apply with the
following provision: For the purpose of the calculation, each (a) General. A motor control circuit tapped from the load side of a
instantaneous trip circuit breaker or motor short-circuit protector motor branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protective device(s)
shall be assumed to have a rating not exceeding the maximum and functioning to control the motor(s) connected to that branch circuit
percentage of motor full-load current permitted by Table 4.30.4.2 for shall be protected against overcurrent in accordance with 4.30.6.2.
the type of feeder protective device employed. Such a tapped control circuit shall not be considered to be a branch
Exception No. 2: Where the feeder overcurrent protective device also circuit and shall be permitted to be protected by either a supplementary
provides overcurrent protection for a motor control center, the or branch-circuit overcurrent protective device(s). A motor control
provisions of 4.30.8.3 shall apply. circuit other than such a tapped control circuit shall be protected
against overcurrent in accordance with 7.25.2.3 or the notes to Table
FPN: See Appendix D, Example D8. 11(a) and Table 11(b) in Chapter 9, as applicable.
(b) Conductor Protection. The overcurrent protection for
(b) Other Installations. Where feeder conductors have an ampacity conductors shall be provided as specified in 4.30.6.2(b)(1) or (b)(2).
greater than required by 4.30.2.4, the rating or setting of the feeder
overcurrent protective device shall be permitted to be based on the Exception No. 1: Where the opening of the control circuit would create
ampacity of the feeder conductors. a hazard as, for example, the control circuit of a fire pump motor, and
the like, conductors of control circuits shall require only short-circuit
4.30.5.3 Rating or Setting — Power and Lighting Loads. Where a and ground-fault protection and shall be permitted to be protected by
feeder supplies a motor load and, in addition, a lighting or a lighting the motor branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protective
and appliance load, the feeder protective device shall have a rating device(s).
sufficient to carry the lighting or lighting and appliance load, plus the Exception No. 2: Conductors supplied by the secondary side of a
following: single-phase transformer having only a two-wire (single-voltage)
secondary shall be permitted to be protected by overcurrent protection
(1) For a single motor, the rating permitted by 4.30.4.2 provided on the primary (supply) side of the transformer, provided this
(2) For a single hermetic refrigerant motor-compressor, the rating protection does not exceed the value determined by multiplying the
appropriate maximum rating of the overcurrent device for the
secondary conductor from Table 4.30.6.2(b) by the secondary-to-
primary voltage ratio. Transformer secondary conductors (other than
two-wire) shall not be considered to be protected by the primary
overcurrent protection.

(1) Separate Overcurrent Protection. Where the motor branch-

circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protective device does not
provide protection in accordance with 4.30.6.2(b)(2), separate
overcurrent protection shall be provided. The overcurrent protection
shall not exceed the values specified in Column A of Table 4.30.6.2(b).
(2) Branch-Circuit Overcurrent Protective Device. Conductors
shall be permitted to be protected by the motor branch-circuit short-
circuit and ground-fault protective device and shall require only short-
circuit and ground-fault protection. Where the conductors do not
extend beyond the motor control equipment enclosure, the rating of the
protective device(s) shall not exceed the value specified in Column B
of Table 4.30.6.2(b). Where the conductors extend beyond the motor
control equipment enclosure, the rating of the protective device(s) shall
not exceed the value specified in Column C of Table 4.30.6.2(b).

(c) Control Circuit Transformer. Where a motor control circuit

transformer is provided, the transformer shall be protected in
accordance with 4.30.6.2(c)(1), (c)(2), (c)(3), (c)(4), or (c)(5).

Exception: Overcurrent protection shall be omitted where the opening

of the control circuit would create a hazard as, for example, the
control circuit of a fire pump motor and the like.

(1) Compliance with Article 7.25. Where the transformer supplies

a Class 1 power-limited circuit, Class 2, or Class 3 remote-control
circuit conforming with the requirements of Article 7.25, protection
shall comply with Article 7.25.
(2) Compliance with Article 4.50. Protection shall be permitted to
be provided in accordance with 4.50.1.3.
(3) Less Than 50 Volt-Amperes. Control circuit transformers rated
less than 50 volt-amperes (VA) and that are an integral part of the
motor controller and located within the motor controller enclosure shall
be permitted to be protected by primary overcurrent devices,
impedance limiting means, or other inherent protective means.
 Table 4.30.6.2(b) Maximum Rating of Overcurrent Protective Device in Amperes

Protection Provided by Motor Branch-Circuit Protective

Device(s)
Column B Column C
Control Column A Conductors Within Conductors Extend Beyond
Circuit Separate Protection Provided Enclosure Enclosure
Conductor Aluminum or Aluminum or Aluminum or
Size Copper-Clad Copper-Clad Copper-Clad
mm2 (mm dia.) Copper Aluminum Copper Aluminum Copper Aluminum
18 7 — 25 — 7 —
16 10 — 40 — 10 —
2.0(1.6) (Note 1) — 100 — 45 —
3.5(2.0) (Note 1) (Note 1) 120 100 60 45
5.5(2.6) (Note 1) (Note 1) 160 140 90 75
Larger than
5.5(2.6) (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 2) (Note 2) (Note 3) (Note 3)
Notes:
1. Value specified in 3.10.1.15 as applicable.
2. 400 percent of value specified in Table 310.17 for 60°C conductors.
3. 300 percent of value specified in Table 3.10.1.16 for 60°C conductors.
 (4) Primary Less Than 2 Amperes. Where the control circuit and identification of each disconnect. Where energized parts are not
transformer rated primary current is less than 2 amperes, an in an equipment enclosure as permitted by 4.30.12.2 and 4.30.12.3, an
overcurrent device rated or set at not more than 500 percent of the additional warning sign(s) shall be located where visible to persons
rated primary current shall be permitted in the primary circuit. who may be working in the area of the energized parts.
(5) Other Means. Protection shall be permitted to be provided by Exception No. 2: The motor control circuit disconnecting means shall
other approved means. be permitted to be remote from the motor controller power supply
disconnecting means where the opening of one or more motor control
4.30.6.3 Mechanical Protection of Conductor. Where damage to a circuit disconnect means may result in potentially unsafe conditions
motor control circuit would constitute a hazard, all conductors of such for personnel or property and the conditions of items (a) and (b) of
a remote motor control circuit that are outside the control device itself Exception No. 1 are complied with.
shall be installed in a raceway or be otherwise suitably protected from
physical damage. (b) Control Transformer in Controller Enclosure. Where a
Where one side of the motor control circuit is grounded, the motor transformer or other device is used to obtain a reduced voltage for the
control circuit shall be arranged so that an accidental ground in the motor control circuit and is located in the controller enclosure, such
control circuit remote from the motor controller will (1) not start the transformer or other device shall be connected to the load side of the
motor and (2) not bypass manually operated shutdown devices or disconnecting means for the motor control circuit.
automatic safety shutdown devices.
4.30.7 Motor Controllers
4.30.6.4 Disconnection.
4.30.7.1 General. Part 4.30.7 is intended to require suitable controllers
(a) General. Motor control circuits shall be arranged so that they for all motors.
will be disconnected from all sources of supply when the
disconnecting means is in the open position. The disconnecting means (a) Stationary Motor of 1/8 Horsepower or Less. For a stationary
shall be permitted to consist of two or more separate devices, one of motor rated at 1/8 hp or less that is normally left running and is
which disconnects the motor and the controller from the source(s) of constructed so that it cannot be damaged by overload or failure to
power supply for the motor, and the other(s), the motor control start, such as clock motors and the like, the branch-circuit protective
circuit(s) from its power supply. Where separate devices are used, they device shall be permitted to serve as the controller.
shall be located immediately adjacent to each other.
(b) Portable Motor of 1/3 Horsepower or Less. For a portable
Exception No. 1: Where more than 12 motor control circuit motor rated at 1/3 hp or less, the controller shall be permitted to be an
conductors are required to be disconnected, the disconnecting means attachment plug and receptacle.
shall be permitted to be located other than immediately adjacent to
each other where all of the following conditions are complied with: 4.30.7.2 Controller Design.
(a) Access to energized parts is limited to licensed electrical
practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner under the (a) Starting and Stopping. Each controller shall be capable of
supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner in accordance with starting and stopping the motor it controls and shall be capable of
Part 4.30.11. interrupting the locked-rotor current of the motor.
(b) A warning sign is permanently located on the outside of each
equipment enclosure door or cover permitting access to the live parts (b) Autotransformer. An autotransformer starter shall provide an
in the motor control circuit(s), warning that motor control circuit “off” position, a running position, and at least one starting position. It
disconnecting means are remotely located and specifying the location shall be designed so that it cannot rest in the starting position or in any
position that will render the overload device in the circuit inoperative. (2) On ac circuits, a general-use snap switch suitable only for use
on ac (not general-use ac–dc snap switches) where the motor full-load
(c) Rheostats. Rheostats shall be in compliance with the following: current rating is not more than 80 percent of the ampere rating of the
switch
(1) Motor-starting rheostats shall be designed so that the contact
arm cannot be left on intermediate segments. The point or plate on (d) Torque Motors. For torque motors, the controller shall have a
which the arm rests when in the starting position shall have no continuous-duty, full-load current rating not less than the nameplate
electrical connection with the resistor. current rating of the motor. For a motor controller rated in horsepower
(2) Motor-starting rheostats for dc motors operated from a but not marked with the foregoing current rating, the equivalent
constant voltage supply shall be equipped with automatic devices that current rating shall be determined from the horsepower rating by using
will interrupt the supply before the speed of the motor has fallen to Table 4.30.14.1, Table 4.30.14.2, Table 4.30.14.3, or Table 4.30.14.4.
less than one-third its normal rate.
(e) Voltage Rating. A controller with a straight voltage rating, for
4.30.7.3 Ratings. The controller shall have a rating as specified in example, 240 volts or 480 volts, shall be permitted to be applied in a
4.30.7.3(a), unless otherwise permitted in 4.30.7.3(b) or 4.30.7.3(c), or circuit in which the nominal voltage between any two conductors does
as specified in 4.30.7.3(d), under the conditions specified. not exceed the controller’s voltage rating. A controller with a slash
rating, for example, 240/120 volts or 480Y/277 volts, shall only be
(a) General. applied in a solidly grounded circuit in which the nominal voltage to
ground from any conductor does not exceed the lower of the two
(1) Horsepower Ratings. Controllers, other than inverse time values of the controller’s voltage rating and the nominal voltage
circuit breakers and molded case switches, shall have horsepower between any two conductors does not exceed the higher value of the
ratings at the application voltage not lower than the horsepower rating controller’s voltage rating.
of the motor.
(2) Circuit Breaker. A branch-circuit inverse time circuit breaker 4.30.7.4 Need Not Open All Conductors. The controller shall not be
rated in amperes shall be permitted as a controller for all motors. required to open all conductors to the motor.
Where this circuit breaker is also used for overload protection, it shall
conform to the appropriate provisions of this article governing Exception: Where the controller serves also as a disconnecting
overload protection. means, it shall open all ungrounded conductors to the motor as
(3) Molded Case Switch. A molded case switch rated in amperes provided in 4.30.9.11.
shall be permitted as a controller for all motors.
4.30.7.5 In Grounded Conductors. One pole of the controller shall
(b) Small Motors. Devices as specified in 4.30.7.1(a) and be permitted to be placed in a permanently grounded conductor,
4.30.7.1(b) shall be permitted as a controller. provided the controller is designed so that the pole in the grounded
conductor cannot be opened without simultaneously opening all
(c) Stationary Motors of 2 Horsepower or Less. For stationary conductors of the circuit.
motors rated at 2 hp or less and 300 volts or less, the controller shall
be permitted to be either of the following: 4.30.7.7 Number of Motors Served by Each Controller. Each motor
shall be provided with an individual controller.
(1) A general-use switch having an ampere rating not less than
twice the full-load current rating of the motor Exception: For motors rated 600 volts or less, a single controller
rated at not less than the equivalent horsepower, as determined in
accordance with 4.30.9.10(c)(1), of all the motors in the group shall specified in Part 4.30.3 shall be permitted.
be permitted to serve the group under any of the following conditions:
(a) Where a number of motors drive several parts of a single 4.30.7.11 Motor Controller Enclosure Types. Table 4.30.7.11
machine or piece of apparatus, such as metal and woodworking provides the basis for selecting enclosures for use in specific locations
machines, cranes, hoists, and similar apparatus other than hazardous (classified) locations. The enclosures are not
(b) Where a group of motors is under the protection of one intended to protect against conditions such as condensation, icing,
overcurrent device as permitted in 4.30.4.3(a) corrosion, or contamination that may occur within the enclosure or
(c) Where a group of motors is located in a single room within enter via the conduit or unsealed openings. These internal conditions
sight from the controller location shall require special consideration by the installer and user.

4.30.7.8 Adjustable-Speed Motors. Adjustable-speed motors that are 4.30.8 Motor Control Centers
controlled by means of field regulation shall be equipped and
connected so that they cannot be started under a weakened field. 4.30.8.1 General. Part 4.30.8 covers motor control centers installed
for the control of motors, lighting, and power circuits.
Exception: Starting under a weakened field shall be permitted where
the motor is designed for such starting. 4.30.8.3 Overcurrent Protection. Motor control centers shall be
provided with overcurrent protection in accordance with Parts 2.40.1,
4.30.7.9 Speed Limitation. Machines of the following types shall be 2.40.2, and 2.40.9. The ampere rating or setting of the overcurrent
provided with speed-limiting devices or other speed-limiting means: protective device shall not exceed the rating of the common power
bus. This protection shall be provided by (1) an overcurrent protective
(1) Separately excited dc motors device located ahead of the motor control center or (2) a main
(2) Series motors overcurrent protective device located within the motor control center.
(3) Motor-generators and converters that can be driven at
excessive speed from the dc end, as by a reversal of current or 4.30.8.4 Service-Entrance Equipment. Where used as service
decrease in load equipment, each motor control center shall be provided with a single
main disconnecting means to disconnect all ungrounded service
Exception: Separate speed-limiting devices or means shall not be conductors.
required under either of the following conditions:
(1) Where the inherent characteristics of the machines, the Exception: A second service disconnect shall be permitted to supply
system, or the load and the mechanical connection thereto are such as additional equipment.
to safely limit the speed
(2) Where the machine is always under the manual control of a Where a grounded conductor is provided, the motor control center
qualified operator shall be provided with a main bonding jumper, sized in accordance
with 2.50.2.9(d), within one of the sections for connecting the
4.30.7.10 Combination Fuseholder and Switch as Controller. The grounded conductor, on its supply side, to the motor control center
rating of a combination fuseholder and switch used as a motor equipment ground bus.
controller shall be such that the fuseholder will accommodate the size
of the fuse specified in Part 4.30.3 for motor overload protection. Exception: High-impedance grounded neutral systems shall be
permitted to be connected as provided in 2.50.2.17.
Exception: Where fuses having time delay appropriate for the starting
characteristics of the motor are used, fuseholders of smaller size than
 Table 4.30.7.11 Motor Controller Enclosure Selection
For Outdoor Use
Provides a Degree of Protection Against the Enclosure Type Number1
Following Environmental Conditions 3 3R 3S 3X 3RX 3SX 4 4X 6 6P
Incidental contact with the enclosed equipment X X X X X X X X X X
Rain, snow, and sleet X X X X X X X X X X
Sleet2 — — X — — X — — — —
Windblown dust X — X X — X X X X X
Hosedown — — — — — — X X X X
Corrosive agents — — — X X X — X — X
Temporary submersion — — — — — — — — X X
Prolonged submersion — — — — — — — — — X
For Indoor Use
Provides a Degree of Protection Against the Enclosure Type Number1
Following Environmental Conditions 1 2 4 4X 5 6 6P 12 12K 13
Incidental contact with the enclosed equipment X X X X X X X X X X
Falling dirt X X X X X X X X X X
Falling liquids and light splashing — X X X X X X X X X
Circulating dust, lint, fibers, and flyings — — X X — X X X X X
Settling airborne dust, lint, fibers, and flyings — — X X X X X X X X
Hosedown and splashing water — — X X — X X — — —
Oil and coolant seepage — — — — — — — X X X
Oil or coolant spraying and splashing — — — — — — — — — X
Corrosive agents — — — X — — X — — —
Temporary submersion — — — — — X X — — —
Prolonged submersion — — — — — — X — — —
1
Enclosure type number shall be marked on the motor controller enclosure.
2
Mechanism shall be operable when ice covered.

FPN: The term raintight is typically used in conjunction with Enclosure Types 3, 3S, 3SX, 3X, 4, 4X, 6, 6P. The term rainproof is typically used
in conjunction with Enclosure Type 3R, 3RX. The term watertight is typically used in conjunction with Enclosure Types 4, 4X, 6, 6P. The term
driptight is typically used in conjunction with Enclosure Types 2, 5, 12, 12K, 13. The term dusttight is typically used in conjunction with
Enclosure Types 3, 3S, 3SX, 3X, 5, 12, 12K, 13.
 control centers to isolate service busbars and terminals from the
4.30.8.5 Grounding. Multisection motor control centers shall be remainder of the motor control center.
bonded together with an equipment grounding conductor or an
equivalent grounding bus sized in accordance with Table 2.50.6.13.
Equipment grounding conductors shall terminate on this grounding Table 4.30.8.6 Minimum Spacing Between Bare Metal Parts
bus or to a grounding termination point provided in a single-section
motor control center. Opposite
Polarity
4.30.8.6 Busbars and Conductors. Where Opposite
Mounted on Polarity Live
(a) Support and Arrangement. Busbars shall be protected from the Same Where Held Parts to
Nominal Voltage Surface Free in Air Ground
physical damage and be held firmly in place. Other than for required
Not over 125 volts, nominal 19.1 12.7 12.7
interconnections and control wiring, only those conductors that are
Not over 250 volts, nominal 31.8 19.7 12.7
intended for termination in a vertical section shall be located in that Not over 600 volts, nominal 50.8 25.4 25.4
section.

Exception: Conductors shall be permitted to travel horizontally

through vertical sections where such conductors are isolated from the 4.30.8.7 Marking.
busbars by a barrier.
(a) Motor Control Centers. Motor control centers shall be marked
(b) Phase Arrangement. The phase arrangement on 3-phase according to 1.10.1.21, and such marking shall be plainly visible after
horizontal common power and vertical buses shall be A, B, C from installation. Marking shall also include common power bus current
front to back, top to bottom, or left to right, as viewed from the front rating and motor control center short-circuit rating.
of the motor control center. The B phase shall be that phase having the
higher voltage to ground on 3-phase, 4-wire, delta-connected systems. (b) Motor Control Units. Motor control units in a motor control
Other busbar arrangements shall be permitted for additions to existing center shall comply with 4.30.1.8.
installations and shall be marked.
4.30.9 Disconnecting Means
Exception: Rear-mounted units connected to a vertical bus that is
common to front-mounted units shall be permitted to have a C, B, A 4.30.9.1 General. Part 4.30.9 is intended to require disconnecting
phase arrangement where properly identified. means capable of disconnecting motors and controllers from the
circuit.
(c) Minimum Wire-Bending Space. The minimum wire-bending
space at the motor control center terminals and minimum gutter space FPN No. 1: See Figure 4.30.1.1.
shall be as required in Article 3.12. FPN No. 2: See 1.10.1.22 for identification of disconnecting means.

(d) Spacings. Spacings between motor control center bus terminals 4.30.9.2 Location.
and other bare metal parts shall not be less than specified in Table
4.30.8.6 or as specified in related PNS, IEC, or ANSI. (a) Controller. An individual disconnecting means shall be
provided for each controller and shall disconnect the controller. The
(e) Barriers. Barriers shall be placed in all service-entrance motor disconnecting means shall be located in sight from the controller
location. location.

Exception No. 1: For motor circuits over 600 volts, nominal, a 4.30.9.3 Operation. The disconnecting means shall open all
controller disconnecting means capable of being locked in the open ungrounded supply conductors and shall be designed so that no pole
position shall be permitted to be out of sight of the controller, can be operated independently. The disconnecting means shall be
provided the controller is marked with a warning label giving the permitted in the same enclosure with the controller.
location of the disconnecting means.
Exception No. 2: A single disconnecting means shall be permitted for FPN: See 4.30.9.13 for equipment receiving energy from more than one source.
a group of coordinated controllers that drive several parts of a single
machine or piece of apparatus. The disconnecting means shall be 4.30.9.4 To Be Indicating. The disconnecting means shall plainly
located in sight from the controllers, and both the disconnecting indicate whether it is in the open (off) or closed (on) position.
means and the controllers shall be located in sight from the machine
or apparatus. 4.30.9.5 Grounded Conductors. One pole of the disconnecting
means shall be permitted to disconnect a permanently grounded
(b) Motor. A disconnecting means shall be located in sight from the conductor, provided the disconnecting means is designed so that the
motor location and the driven machinery location. pole in the grounded conductor cannot be opened without
simultaneously disconnecting all conductors of the circuit.
Exception: The disconnecting means shall not be required to be in
sight from the motor and the driven machinery location under either 4.30.9.7 Readily Accessible. At least one of the disconnecting means
condition (a) or (b), provided the disconnecting means required in shall be readily accessible.
accordance with 4.30.9.2(a) is individually capable of being locked in
the open position. The provision for locking or adding a lock to the 4.30.9.8 Every Disconnecting Means. Every disconnecting means in
disconnecting means shall be installed on or at the switch or circuit the motor circuit between the point of attachment to the feeder and the
breaker used as the disconnecting means and shall remain in place point of connection to the motor shall comply with the requirements of
with or without the lock installed. 4.30.9.9 and 4.30.9.10.
(a) Where such a location of the disconnecting means is
impracticable or introduces additional or increased hazards to 4.30.9.9 Type. The disconnecting means shall be a type specified in
persons or property 4.30.9.9(a), unless otherwise permitted in 4.30.9.9(b) through
(b) In industrial installations, with written safety procedures, where 4.30.9.9(g), under the conditions specified.
conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that only licensed
electrical practitioner or under the supervision of a licensed electrical (a) General.
practitioner service the equipment
(1) Motor Circuit Switch. A listed motor-circuit switch rated in
FPN No. 1: Some examples of increased or additional hazards include, but are not horsepower.
limited to, motors rated in excess of 100 hp, multimotor equipment, submersible (2) Molded Case Circuit Breaker. A listed molded case circuit
motors, motors associated with adjustable speed drives, and motors located in
hazardous (classified) locations. breaker.
FPN No. 2: For information on lockout/tagout procedures, see NFPA 70E-2004, (3) Molded Case Switch. A listed molded case switch.
Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace. (4) Instantaneous Trip Circuit Breaker. An instantaneous trip
circuit breaker that is part of a listed combination motor controller.
The disconnecting means required in accordance with 4.30.9.2(a) (5) Self-Protected Combination Controller. Listed self-protected
shall be permitted to serve as the disconnecting means for the motor if combination controller.
it is located in sight from the motor location and the driven machinery
 (6) Manual Motor Controller. Listed manual motor controllers
additionally marked “Suitable as Motor Disconnect” shall be permitted (1) The motor drives a generator that is provided with overload
as a disconnecting means where installed between the final motor protection.
branch-circuit short-circuit protective device and the motor. Listed (2) The controller is capable of interrupting the locked-rotor
manual motor controllers additionally marked “Suitable as Motor current of the motors, is provided with a no voltage release, and is
Disconnect” shall be permitted as disconnecting means on the line side provided with running overload protection not exceeding 125 percent
of the fuses permitted in 4.30.4.2(c)(5). In this case, the fuses of the motor full-load current rating.
permitted in 4.30.4.2(c)(5) shall be considered supplementary fuses, (3) Separate fuses or an inverse time circuit breaker rated or set at
and suitable branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protective not more than 150 percent of the motor full-load current are provided
devices shall be installed on the line side of the manual motor in the motor branch circuit.
controller additionally marked “Suitable as Motor Disconnect.”
(7) System Isolation Equipment. System isolation equipment shall (e) Isolating Switches. For stationary motors rated at more than 40
be listed for disconnection purposes. System isolation equipment shall hp dc or 100 hp ac, the disconnecting means shall be permitted to be a
be installed on the load side of the overcurrent protection and its general-use or isolating switch where plainly marked “Do not operate
disconnecting means. The disconnecting means shall be one of the under load.”
types permitted by 4.30.9.9(a)(1) through (a)(3).
(f) Cord-and-Plug-Connected Motors. For a cord-and-plug-
(b) Stationary Motors of 1/8 Horsepower or Less. For stationary connected motor, a horsepower-rated attachment plug and receptacle
motors of 1/8 hp or less, the branch-circuit overcurrent device shall be having ratings no less than the motor ratings shall be permitted to
permitted to serve as the disconnecting means. serve as the disconnecting means. A horsepower-rated attachment plug
and receptacle shall not be required for a cord-and-plug-connected
(c) Stationary Motors of 2 Horsepower or Less. For stationary appliance in accordance with 4.22.3.3, a room air conditioner in
motors rated at 2 hp or less and 300 volts or less, the disconnecting accordance with 4.40.7.4, or a portable motor rated 1/3 hp or less.
means shall be permitted to be one of the devices specified in (1), (2),
or (3): (g) Torque Motors. For torque motors, the disconnecting means
shall be permitted to be a general-use switch.
(1) A general-use switch having an ampere rating not less than
twice the full-load current rating of the motor 4.30.9.10 Ampere Rating and Interrupting Capacity.
(2) On ac circuits, a general-use snap switch suitable only for use
on ac (not general-use ac–dc snap switches) where the motor full-load (a) General. The disconnecting means for motor circuits rated 600
current rating is not more than 80 percent of the ampere rating of the volts, nominal, or less shall have an ampere rating not less than 115
switch percent of the full-load current rating of the motor.
(3) A listed manual motor controller having a horsepower rating
not less than the rating of the motor and marked “Suitable as Motor Exception: A listed nonfused motor-circuit switch having a
Disconnect” horsepower rating not less than the motor horsepower shall be
permitted to have an ampere rating less than 115 percent of the full-
(d) Autotransformer-Type Controlled Motors. For motors of over load current rating of the motor.
2 hp to and including 100 hp, the separate disconnecting means
required for a motor with an autotransformer-type controller shall be (b) For Torque Motors. Disconnecting means for a torque motor
permitted to be a general-use switch where all of the following shall have an ampere rating of at least 115 percent of the motor
provisions are met: nameplate current.
 Exception: A listed nonfused motor-circuit switch having a
(c) For Combination Loads. Where two or more motors are used horsepower rating equal to or greater than the equivalent horsepower
together or where one or more motors are used in combination with of the combined loads, determined in accordance with 4.30.9.10(c)(1),
other loads, such as resistance heaters, and where the combined load shall be permitted to have an ampere rating less than 115 percent of
may be simultaneous on a single disconnecting means, the ampere and the sum of all currents at the full-load condition.
horsepower ratings of the combined load shall be determined as
follows. (3) Small Motors. For small motors not covered by Table
4.30.14.1, Table 4.30.14.2, Table 4.30.14.3, or Table 4.30.14.4, the
(1) Horsepower Rating. The rating of the disconnecting means locked-rotor current shall be assumed to be six times the full-load
shall be determined from the sum of all currents, including resistance current.
loads, at the full-load condition and also at the locked-rotor condition.
The combined full-load current and the combined locked-rotor current 4.30.9.11 Switch or Circuit Breaker as Both Controller and
so obtained shall be considered as a single motor for the purpose of Disconnecting Means. A switch or circuit breaker shall be permitted
this requirement as follows. to be used as both the controller and disconnecting means if it
The full-load current equivalent to the horsepower rating of each complies with 4.30.9.11(a) and is one of the types specified in
motor shall be selected from Table 4.30.14.1, Table 4.30.14.2, Table 4.30.9.11(b).
4.30.14.3, or Table 4.30.14.4. These full-load currents shall be added
to the rating in amperes of other loads to obtain an equivalent full-load (a) General. The switch or circuit breaker complies with the
current for the combined load. requirements for controllers specified in 4.30.7.3, opens all
The locked-rotor current equivalent to the horsepower rating of ungrounded conductors to the motor, and is protected by an
each motor shall be selected from Table 4.30.14.5(a) or Table overcurrent device in each ungrounded conductor (which shall be
4.30.14.5(b). The locked-rotor currents shall be added to the rating in permitted to be the branch-circuit fuses). The overcurrent device
amperes of other loads to obtain an equivalent locked-rotor current for protecting the controller shall be permitted to be part of the controller
the combined load. Where two or more motors or other loads cannot assembly or shall be permitted to be separate. An autotransformer-type
be started simultaneously, the largest sum of locked rotor currents of a controller shall be provided with a separate disconnecting means.
motor or group of motors that can be started simultaneously and the
full load currents of other concurrent loads shall be permitted to be (b) Type. The device shall be one of the types specified in
used to determine the equivalent locked-rotor current for the 4.30.9.11(b)(1), (b)(2), or (b)(3).
simultaneous combined loads.
(1) Air-Break Switch. An air-break switch, operable directly by
Exception: Where part of the concurrent load is resistance load, and applying the hand to a lever or handle.
where the disconnecting means is a switch rated in horsepower and (2) Inverse Time Circuit Breaker. An inverse time circuit breaker
amperes, the switch used shall be permitted to have a horsepower operable directly by applying the hand to a lever or handle. The circuit
rating that is not less than the combined load of the motor(s), if the breaker shall be permitted to be both power and manually operable.
ampere rating of the switch is not less than the locked-rotor current of (3) Oil Switch. An oil switch used on a circuit whose rating does
the motor(s) plus the resistance load. not exceed 600 volts or 100 amperes, or by special permission on a
circuit exceeding this capacity where under expert supervision. The oil
(2) Ampere Rating. The ampere rating of the disconnecting means switch shall be permitted to be both power and manually operable.
shall not be less than 115 percent of the sum of all currents at the full-
load condition determined in accordance with 4.30.9.10(c)(1). 4.30.9.12 Motors Served by Single Disconnecting Means. Each
motor shall be provided with an individual disconnecting means.
 4.30.10.3 Conductors — Minimum Size and Ampacity.
Exception: A single disconnecting means shall be permitted to serve a
group of motors under any one of the conditions of (a), (b), and (c). (a) Branch/Feeder Circuit Conductors. Circuit conductors
The single disconnecting means shall be rated in accordance with supplying power conversion equipment included as part of an
4.30.9.10(c). adjustable-speed drive system shall have an ampacity not less than 125
(a) Where a number of motors drive several parts of a single percent of the rated input to the power conversion equipment.
machine or piece of apparatus, such as metal- and woodworking
machines, cranes, and hoists. (b) Bypass Device. For an adjustable speed drive system that
(b) Where a group of motors is under the protection of one set of utilizes a bypass device, the conductor ampacity shall not be less than
branch-circuit protective devices as permitted by 4.30.4.3(a). required by 4.30.1.6. The ampacity of circuit conductors supplying
(c) Where a group of motors is in a single room within sight from power conversion equipment included as part of an adjustable-speed
the location of the disconnecting means. drive system that utilizes a bypass device shall be the larger of either
of the following:
4.30.9.13 Energy from More Than One Source. Motor and motor-
operated equipment receiving electrical energy from more than one (1) 125 percent of the rated input to the power conversion
source shall be provided with disconnecting means from each source equipment
of electrical energy immediately adjacent to the equipment served. (2) 125 percent of the motor full-load current rating as determined
Each source shall be permitted to have a separate disconnecting by 4.30.1.6
means. Where multiple disconnecting means are provided, a
permanent warning sign shall be provided on or adjacent to each 4.30.10.5 Overload Protection. Overload protection of the motor
disconnecting means. shall be provided.

Exception No. 1: Where a motor receives electrical energy from more (a) Included in Power Conversion Equipment. Where the power
than one source, the disconnecting means for the main power supply conversion equipment is marked to indicate that motor overload
to the motor shall not be required to be immediately adjacent to the protection is included, additional overload protection shall not be
motor, provided the controller disconnecting means is capable of required.
being locked in the open position.
Exception No. 2: A separate disconnecting means shall not be (b) Bypass Circuits. For adjustable speed drive systems that utilize
required for a Class 2 remote-control circuit conforming with Article a bypass device to allow motor operation at rated full load speed,
7.25, rated not more than 30 volts, and isolated and ungrounded. motor overload protection as described in Article 4.30, Part III, shall
be provided in the bypass circuit.
4.30.10 Adjustable-Speed Drive Systems
(c) Multiple Motor Applications. For multiple motor application,
4.30.10.1 General. The installation provisions of Part 4.30.1 through individual motor overload protection shall be provided in accordance
Part 4.30.9 are applicable unless modified or supplemented by Part with Part 4.30.3.
4.30.10.
4.30.10.7 Motor Overtemperature Protection.
FPN: Electrical resonance can result from the interaction of the nonsinusoidal
currents from this type of load with power factor correction capacitors.
(a) General. Adjustable speed drive systems shall protect against
motor overtemperature conditions. Overtemperature protection is in
addition to the conductor protection required in 4.30.3.2. Protection 4.30.11 Over 600 Volts, Nominal
shall be provided by one of the following means.
4.30.11.1 General. Part 4.30.11 recognizes the additional hazard due
(1) Motor thermal protector in accordance with 4.30.3.2 to the use of higher voltages. It adds to or amends the other provisions
(2) Adjustable speed drive controller with load and speed- of this article.
sensitive overload protection and thermal memory retention upon
shutdown or power loss 4.30.11.2 Marking on Controllers. In addition to the marking
(3) Overtemperature protection relay utilizing thermal sensors required by 4.30.1.8, a controller shall be marked with the control
embedded in the motor and meeting the requirements of 4.30.3.2(a)(2) voltage.
or (b)(2)
(4) Thermal sensor embedded in the motor that is received and 4.30.11.3 Conductor Enclosures Adjacent to Motors. Flexible metal
acted upon by an adjustable speed drive conduit or liquidtight flexible metal conduit not exceeding 1 800 mm
in length shall be permitted to be employed for raceway connection to
(b) Motors with Cooling Systems. Motors that utilize external a motor terminal enclosure.
forced air or liquid cooling systems shall be provided with protection
that shall be continuously enabled or enabled automatically if the 4.30.11.4 Size of Conductors. Conductors supplying motors shall
cooling system fails. have an ampacity not less than the current at which the motor overload
protective device(s) is selected to trip.
FPN: Protection against cooling system failure can take many forms. Some
examples of protection against inoperative or failed cooling systems are direct
sensing of the motor temperature as described in 4.30.3.2(a)(1), (a)(3), and (a)(4) 4.30.11.5 Motor-Circuit Overcurrent Protection.
or sensing of the presence or absence of the cooling media (flow or pressure
sensing). (a) General. Each motor circuit shall include coordinated protection
to automatically interrupt overload and fault currents in the motor, the
(c) Multiple Motor Applications. For multiple motor application, motor-circuit conductors, and the motor control apparatus.
individual motor overtemperature protection shall be provided.

FPN: The relationship between motor current and motor temperature changes
Exception: Where a motor is vital to operation of the plant and the
when the motor is operated by an adjustable speed drive. When operated at motor should operate to failure if necessary to prevent a greater
reduced speed, overheating of motors may occur at current levels less than or hazard to persons, the sensing device(s) shall be permitted to be
equal to a motor’s rated full load current. This is the result of reduced motor cooling
when its shaft-mounted fan is operating less than rated nameplate RPM.
connected to a supervised annunciator or alarm instead of
interrupting the motor circuit.
(d) Automatic Restarting and Orderly Shutdown. The provisions
of 4.30.3.13 and 4.30.3.14 shall apply to the motor over temperature (b) Overload Protection.
protection means.
(1) Type of Overload Device. Each motor shall be protected
4.30.10.9 Disconnecting Means. The disconnecting means shall be against dangerous heating due to motor overloads and failure to start
permitted to be in the incoming line to the conversion equipment and by a thermal protector integral with the motor or external current-
shall have a rating not less than 115 percent of the rated input current sensing devices, or both.
of the conversion unit. (2) Wound-Rotor AC Motors. The secondary circuits of wound-
rotor ac motors, including conductors, controllers, and resistors rated
for the application, shall be considered as protected against
overcurrent by the motor overload protection means.
 (3) Operation. Operation of the overload interrupting device shall
simultaneously disconnect all ungrounded conductors. 4.30.11.7 Disconnecting Means. The controller disconnecting means
(4) Automatic Reset. Overload sensing devices shall not shall be capable of being locked in the open position.
automatically reset after trip unless resetting of the overload sensing
device does not cause automatic restarting of the motor or there is no 4.30.12 Protection of Live Parts — All Voltages
hazard to persons created by automatic restarting of the motor and its
connected machinery. 4.30.12.1 General. Part 4.30.12 specifies that live parts shall be
protected in a manner judged adequate for the hazard involved.
(c) Fault-Current Protection.
4.30.12.2 Where Required. Exposed live parts of motors and
(1) Type of Protection. Fault-current protection shall be provided controllers operating at 50 volts or more between terminals shall be
in each motor circuit by one of the following means. guarded against accidental contact by enclosure or by location as
follows:
a. A circuit breaker of suitable type and rating arranged so that it
can be serviced without hazard. The circuit breaker shall (1) By installation in a room or enclosure that is accessible only to
simultaneously disconnect all ungrounded conductors. The circuit licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner
breaker shall be permitted to sense the fault current by means of under the supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner
integral or external sensing elements. (2) By installation on a suitable balcony, gallery, or platform,
b. Fuses of a suitable type and rating placed in each ungrounded elevated and arranged so as to exclude unqualified persons
conductor. Fuses shall be used with suitable disconnecting means, or (3) By elevation 2 400 mm or more above the floor
they shall be of a type that can also serve as the disconnecting means.
They shall be arranged so that they cannot be serviced while they are Exception: Live parts of motors operating at more than 50 volts
energized. between terminals shall not require additional guarding for stationary
motors that have commutators, collectors, and brush rigging located
(2) Reclosing. Fault-current interrupting devices shall not inside of motor-end brackets and not conductively connected to supply
automatically reclose the circuit. circuits operating at more than 150 volts to ground.

Exception: Automatic reclosing of a circuit shall be permitted where 4.30.12.3 Guards for Attendants. Where live parts of motors or
the circuit is exposed to transient faults and where such automatic controllers operating at over 150 volts to ground are guarded against
reclosing does not create a hazard to persons. accidental contact only by location as specified in 4.30.12.2, and
where adjustment or other attendance may be necessary during the
(3) Combination Protection. Overload protection and fault-current operation of the apparatus, suitable insulating mats or platforms shall
protection shall be permitted to be provided by the same device. be provided so that the attendant cannot readily touch live parts unless
standing on the mats or platforms.
4.30.11.6 Rating of Motor Control Apparatus. The ultimate trip
current of overcurrent (overload) relays or other motor-protective FPN: For working space, see 1.10.2.1 and 1.10.3.5.
devices used shall not exceed 115 percent of the controller’s
continuous current rating. Where the motor branch-circuit 4.30.13 Grounding — All Voltages
disconnecting means is separate from the controller, the disconnecting
means current rating shall not be less than the ultimate trip setting of 4.30.13.1 General. Part 4.30.13 specifies the grounding of exposed
the overcurrent relays in the circuit. non–current-carrying metal parts, likely to become energized, of motor
and controller frames to prevent a voltage above ground in the event of FPN: See 4.30.1.12(e) for equipment grounding connection means required at
motor terminal housings.
accidental contact between energized parts and frames. Insulation,
isolation, or guarding are suitable alternatives to grounding of motors
(b) Separation of Junction Box from Motor. The junction box
under certain conditions.
required by 4.30.13.5(a) shall be permitted to be separated from the
motor by not more than 1 800 mm, provided the leads to the motor are
4.30.13.2 Stationary Motors. The frames of stationary motors shall
stranded conductors within Type AC cable, interlocked metal tape
be grounded under any of the following conditions:
Type MC cable where listed and identified in accordance with
2.50.6.9(10)(a), or armored cord or are stranded leads enclosed in
(1) Where supplied by metal-enclosed wiring
liquidtight flexible metal conduit, flexible metal conduit, intermediate
(2) Where in a wet location and not isolated or guarded
metal conduit, rigid metal conduit, or electrical metallic tubing not
(3) If in a hazardous (classified) location as covered in Articles
smaller than metric designator 12 (trade size ), the armor or raceway
5.0 through 5.17
being connected both to the motor and to the box.
(4) If the motor operates with any terminal at over 150 volts to
Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit and rigid nonmetallic
ground
conduit shall be permitted to enclose the leads to the motor, provided
the leads are stranded and the required equipment grounding
Where the frame of the motor is not grounded, it shall be permanently
conductor is connected to both the motor and to the box.
and effectively insulated from the ground.
Where stranded leads are used, protected as specified above, each
strand within the conductor shall be not larger than 5.5 mm2
4.30.13.3 Portable Motors. The frames of portable motors that
(2.6 mm dia.) and shall comply with other requirements of this Code
operate at over 150 volts to ground shall be guarded or grounded.
for conductors to be used in raceways.
FPN No. 1: See 2.50.6.5(4) for grounding of portable appliances in other than
residential occupancies. (c) Grounding of Controller-Mounted Devices. Instrument
FPN No. 2: See 2.50.6.10(c) for color of equipment grounding conductor. transformer secondaries and exposed non–current-carrying metal or
other conductive parts or cases of instrument transformers, meters,
4.30.13.4 Controllers. Controller enclosures shall be grounded instruments, and relays shall be grounded as specified in 2.50.9.1
regardless of voltage. Controller enclosures shall have means for through 2.50.9.9.
attachment of an equipment grounding conductor termination in
accordance with 2.50.1.8.

Exception: Enclosures attached to ungrounded portable equipment

shall not be required to be grounded.

4.30.13.5 Method of Grounding. Where required, grounding shall be

done in the manner specified in Part 2.50.6.

(a) Grounding Through Terminal Housings. Where the wiring to

fixed motors is metal-enclosed cable or in metal raceways, junction
boxes to house motor terminals shall be provided, and the armor of the
cable or the metal raceways shall be connected to them in the manner
specified in Article 2.50.
 4.30.14 Tables
Table 4.30.14.1 Full-Load Current in Amperes, Direct-Current Motors
The following values of full-load currents* are for motors running at base speed.
Armature Voltage Rating*
Horsepower 90 Volts 120 Volts 180 Volts 240 Volts 500 Volts 550 Volts
¼ 4.0 3.1 2.0 1.6 — —
1/3 5.2 4.1 2.6 2.0 — —
½ 6.8 5.4 3.4 2.7 — —
¾ 9.6 7.6 4.8 3.8 — —
1 12.2 9.5 6.1 4.7 — —
1½ — 13.2 8.3 6.6 — —
2 — 17 10.8 8.5 — —
3 — 25 16 12.2 — —
5 — 40 27 20 — —
7½ — 58 — 29 13.6 12.2
10 — 76 — 38 18 16
15 — — — 55 27 24
20 — — — 72 34 31
25 — — — 89 43 38
30 — — — 106 51 46
40 — — — 140 67 61
50 — — — 173 83 75
60 — — — 206 99 90
75 — — — 255 123 111
100 — — — 341 164 148
125 — — — 425 205 185
150 — — — 506 246 222
200 — — — 675 330 294
*These are average dc quantities.
Table 4.30.14.2 Full-Load Currents in Amperes, Single-Phase Table 4.30.14.3 Full-Load Current, Two-Phase Alternating-
Alternating-Current Motors Current Motors (4-Wire)
The following values of full-load currents are for motors running at The following values of full-load current are for motors running at
usual speeds and motors with normal torque characteristics. The speeds usual for belted motors and motors with normal torque
voltages listed are rated motor voltages. The currents listed shall be characteristics. Current in the common conductor of a 2-phase, 3-wire
permitted for system voltage ranges of 110 to 120 and 220 to 240 system will be 1.41 times the value given. The voltages listed are rated
volts. motor voltages. The currents listed shall be permitted for system
voltage ranges of 110 to 120, 220 to 240, 440 to 480, and 550 to 600
Horsepower 115 Volts 200 Volts 208 Volts 230 Volts volts.
4.4 2.5 2.4 2.2
¼ 5.8 3.3 3.2 2.9 Induction-Type Squirrel Cage and
7.2 4.1 4.0 3.6 Horsepower Wound Rotor (Amperes)
½ 9.8 5.6 5.4 4.9 115 230 460 575 2 300
¾ 13.8 7.9 7.6 6.9 Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts
½ 4.0 2.0 1.0 .08 —
1 16 9.2 8.8 8.0 ¾ 4.8 2.4 1.2 1.0 —
1½ 20 11.5 11.0 10 1 6.4 3.2 1.6 1.3 —
2 24 13.8 13.2 12 1½ 9.0 4.5 2.3 1.8 —
3 34 19.6 18.7 17 2 11.8 5.9 3.0 2.4 —
5 56 32.2 30.8 28 3 — 8.3 4.2 3.3 —
7½ 80 46.0 44.0 40 5 — 13.2 6.6 5.3 —
10 100 57.5 55.0 50 7½ — 19 9.0 8.0 —
10 — 24 12 10 —
15 — 36 18 14 —
20 — 47 23 19 —
25 — 59 29 24 —
30 — 69 35 28 —
40 — 90 45 36 —
50 — 113 56 45 —
60 — 133 67 53 14
75 — 166 83 66 18
100 — 218 109 87 23
125 — 270 135 108 28
150 — 312 156 125 32
200 — 416 208 167 43
 Table 4.30.14.4 Full-Load Current, Three-Phase Alternating-Current Motors
The following values of full-load currents are typical for motors running at speeds usual for belted motors and motors with normal torque characteristics.
The voltages listed are rated motor voltages. The currents listed shall be permitted for system voltage ranges of 110 to 120, 220 to 240, 440 to 480,
and 550 to 600 volts.
Induction-Type Squirrel Cage and Wound Rotor (Amperes) Synchronous-Type Unity Power Factor* (Amperes)
115 200 208 230 460 575 2300 230 460 575 2300
Horsepower Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts
½ 4.4 2.5 2.4 2.2 1.1 0.9 — — — — —
¾ 6.4 3.7 3.5 3.2 1.6 1.3 — — — — —
1 8.4 4.8 4.6 4.2 2.1 1.7 — — — — —
1½ 12.0 6.9 6.6 6.0 3.0 2.4 — — — — —
2 13.6 7.8 7.5 6.8 3.4 2.7 — — — — —
3 — 11.0 10.6 9.6 4.8 3.9 — — — — —
5 — 17.5 16.7 15.2 7.6 6.1 — — — — —
7½ — 25.3 24.2 22 11 9 — — — — —
10 — 32.2 30.8 28 14 11 — — — — —
15 — 48.3 46.2 42 21 17 — — — — —
20 — 62.1 59.4 54 27 22 — — — — —
25 — 78.2 74.8 68 34 27 — 53 26 21 —
30 — 92 88 80 40 32 — 63 32 26 —
40 — 120 114 104 52 41 — 83 41 33 —
50 — 150 143 130 65 52 — 104 52 42 —
60 — 177 169 154 77 62 16 123 61 49 12
75 — 221 211 192 96 77 20 155 78 62 15
100 — 285 273 248 124 99 26 202 101 81 20
125 — 359 343 312 156 125 31 253 126 101 25
150 — 414 396 360 180 144 37 302 151 121 30
200 — 552 528 480 240 192 49 400 201 161 40
250 — — — — 302 242 60 — — — —
300 — — — — 361 289 72 — — — —
350 — — — — 414 336 83 — — — —
400 — — — — 477 382 95 — — — —
450 — — — — 515 412 103 — — — —
500 — — — — 590 472 118 — — — —
*For 90 and 80 percent power factor, the figures shall be multiplied by 1.1 and 1.25, respectively.
 Table 4.30.14.5(a) Conversion Table of Single-Phase Locked-
Rotor Currents for Selection of Disconnecting Means and
Controllers as Determined from Horsepower and Voltage Rating
For use only with 4.30.9.10, 4.40.2.2, 4.40.5.1, and 4.55.1.8(c).

Maximum Locked-Rotor Current in

Rated Amperes, Single Phase
Horsepower 115 Volts 208 Volts 230 Volts
½ 58.8 32.5 29.4
¾ 82.8 45.8 41.4
1 96 53 48
1½ 120 66 60
2 144 80 72
3 204 113 102
5 336 186 168
7½ 480 265 240
10 600 332 300
 Table 4.30.14.5(b) Conversion Table of Polyphase Design B, C, and D Maximum Locked-Rotor
Currents for Selection of Disconnecting Means and Controllers as
Determined from Horsepower and Voltage Rating and Design Letter
For use only with 4.30.9.10, 4.40.2.2, 4.40.5.1 and 4.55.1.8(c).
Maximum Motor Locked-Rotor Current in Amperes, Two- and Three-Phase, Design B, C, and D*
Rated 115 Volts 200 Volts 208 Volts 230 Volts 460 Volts 575 Volts
Horsepower B, C, D B, C, D B, C, D B, C, D B, C, D B, C, D
½ 40 23 22.1 20 10 8
¾ 50 28.8 27.6 25 12.5 10
1 60 34.5 33 30 15 12
1½ 80 46 44 40 20 16
2 100 57.5 55 50 25 20
3 — 73.6 71 64 32 25.6
5 — 105.8 102 92 46 36.8
7½ — 146 140 127 63.5 50.8
10 — 186.3 179 162 81 64.8
15 — 267 257 232 116 93
20 — 334 321 290 145 116
25 — 420 404 365 183 146
30 — 500 481 435 218 174
40 — 667 641 580 290 232
50 — 834 802 725 363 290
60 — 1001 962 870 435 348
75 — 1248 1200 1085 543 434
100 — 1668 1603 1450 725 580
125 — 2087 2007 1815 908 726
150 — 2496 2400 2170 1085 868
200 — 3335 3207 2900 1450 1160
250 — — — — 1825 1460
300 — — — — 2200 1760
350 — — — — 2550 2040
400 — — — — 2900 2320
450 — — — — 3250 2600
500 — — — — 3625 2900
*Design A motors are not limited to a maximum starting current or locked rotor current.
 ARTICLE 4.40 — AIR-CONDITIONING AND 4.40.1.3 Other Articles.
REFRIGERATING EQUIPMENT
(a) Article 4.30. These provisions are in addition to, or amendatory
4.40.1 General of, the provisions of Article 4.30 and other articles in this Code, which
apply except as modified in this article.
4.40.1.1 Scope. The provisions of this article apply to electric motor-
driven air-conditioning and refrigerating equipment and to the branch (b) Articles 4.22, 4.24, or 4.30. The rules of Articles 4.22, 4.24, or
circuits and controllers for such equipment. It provides for the special 4.30, as applicable, shall apply to air-conditioning and refrigerating
considerations necessary for circuits supplying hermetic refrigerant equipment that does not incorporate a hermetic refrigerant motor-
motor-compressors and for any air-conditioning or refrigerating compressor. This equipment includes devices that employ refrigeration
equipment that is supplied from a branch circuit that supplies a compressors driven by conventional motors, furnaces with air-
hermetic refrigerant motor-compressor. conditioning evaporator coils installed, fan-coil units, remote forced
air-cooled condensers, remote commercial refrigerators, and so forth.
4.40.1.2 Definitions.
(c) Article 4.22. Equipment such as room air conditioners,
Branch-Circuit Selection Current. The value in amperes to be household refrigerators and freezers, drinking water coolers, and
used instead of the rated-load current in determining the ratings of beverage dispensers shall be considered appliances, and the provisions
motor branch-circuit conductors, disconnecting means, controllers, of Article 4.22 shall also apply.
and branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protective devices
wherever the running overload protective device permits a sustained (d) Other Applicable Articles. Hermetic refrigerant motor-
current greater than the specified percentage of the rated-load current. compressors, circuits, controllers, and equipment shall also comply
The value of branch-circuit selection current will always be equal to or with the applicable provisions of Table 4.40.1.3(d).
greater than the marked rated-load current.
Table 4.40.1.3(d) Other Articles
Hermetic Refrigerant Motor-Compressor. A combination
consisting of a compressor and motor, both of which are enclosed in Equipment/Occupancy Article Section
the same housing, with no external shaft or shaft seals, the motor Capacitors 4.60.1.9
operating in the refrigerant. Commercial garages, aircraft 5.11, 5.13, 5.14,
hangars, motor fuel 5.15, 5.16, and
Leakage Current Detection and Interruption (LCDI) Protection. dispensing facilities, bulk Part 5.17.4
A device provided in a power supply cord or cord set that senses storage plants, spray
leakage current flowing between or from the cord conductors and application, dipping, and
interrupts the circuit at a predetermined level of leakage current. coating processes, and
inhalation anesthetizing
Rated-Load Current. The rated-load current for a hermetic locations
refrigerant motor-compressor is the current resulting when the motor- Hazardous (classified) 5.0–5.3 and 5.5
compressor is operated at the rated load, rated voltage, and rated locations
frequency of the equipment it serves. Motion picture and television 5.30
studios and similar locations
Resistors and reactors 4.70
 15- or 20-ampere, 120-volt, or a 15-ampere, 208- or 240-volt, single-
4.40.1.4 Marking on Hermetic Refrigerant Motor-Compressors phase branch circuit shall be permitted to be marked as a single load.
and Equipment. Exception No. 2: The minimum supply circuit conductor ampacity and
the maximum rating of the branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-
(a) Hermetic Refrigerant Motor-Compressor Nameplate. A fault protective device shall not be required to be marked on a room
hermetic refrigerant motor-compressor shall be provided with a air conditioner conforming with 4.40.7.3(a).
nameplate that shall indicate the manufacturer’s name, trademark, or Exception No. 3: Multimotor and combination-load equipment used in
symbol; identifying designation; phase; voltage; and frequency. The one- and two-family dwellings, cord-and- attachment-plug-connected
rated-load current in amperes of the motor-compressor shall be equipment, or equipment supplied from a branch circuit protected at
marked by the equipment manufacturer on either or both the motor- 60 A or less shall not be required to be marked with a short-circuit
compressor nameplate and the nameplate of the equipment in which current rating.
the motor-compressor is used. The locked-rotor current of each single-
phase motor-compressor having a rated-load current of more than (c) Branch-Circuit Selection Current. A hermetic refrigerant
9 amperes at 115 volts, or more than 4.5 amperes at 230 volts, and motor-compressor, or equipment containing such a compressor,
each polyphase motor-compressor shall be marked on the motor- having a protection system that is approved for use with the motor-
compressor nameplate. Where a thermal protector complying with compressor that it protects and that permits continuous current in
4.40.6.2(a)(2) and (b)(2) is used, the motor-compressor nameplate or excess of the specified percentage of nameplate rated-load current
the equipment nameplate shall be marked with the words “thermally given in 4.40.6.2(b)(2) or (b)(4) shall also be marked with a branch-
protected.” Where a protective system complying with 4.40.6.2(a)(4) circuit selection current that complies with 4.40.6.2(b)(2) or (b)(4).
and (b)(4) is used and is furnished with the equipment, the equipment This marking shall be provided by the equipment manufacturer and
nameplate shall be marked with the words, “thermally protected shall be on the nameplate(s) where the rated-load current(s) appears.
system.” Where a protective system complying with 4.40.6.2(a)(4) and
(b)(4) is specified, the equipment nameplate shall be appropriately 4.40.1.5 Marking on Controllers. A controller shall be marked with
marked. the manufacturer’s name, trademark, or symbol; identifying
designation; voltage; phase; full-load and locked-rotor current (or
(b) Multimotor and Combination-Load Equipment. Multimotor horsepower) rating; and such other data as may be needed to properly
and combination-load equipment shall be provided with a visible indicate the motor-compressor for which it is suitable.
nameplate marked with the maker's name, the rating in volts,
frequency and number of phases, minimum supply circuit conductor 4.40.1.6 Ampacity and Rating. The size of conductors for equipment
ampacity, the maximum rating of the branch-circuit short-circuit and covered by this article shall be selected from Table 3.10.1.16 through
ground-fault protective device, and the short-circuit current rating of Table 3.10.1.19 or calculated in accordance with 3.10.1.15 as
the motor controllers or industrial control panel. The ampacity shall be applicable. The required ampacity of conductors and rating of
calculated by using Part 4.40.4 and counting all the motors and other equipment shall be determined according to 4.40.1.6(a) and
loads that will be operated at the same time. The branch-circuit short- 4.40.1.6(b).
circuit and ground-fault protective device rating shall not exceed the
value calculated by using Part 4.40.3. Multimotor or combination-load (a) Hermetic Refrigerant Motor-Compressor. For a hermetic
equipment for use on two or more circuits shall be marked with the refrigerant motor-compressor, the rated-load current marked on the
above information for each circuit. nameplate of the equipment in which the motor-compressor is
employed shall be used in determining the rating or ampacity of the
Exception No. 1: Multimotor and combination-load equipment that is disconnecting means, the branch-circuit conductors, the controller, the
suitable under the provisions of this article for connection to a single branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protection, and the
separate motor overload protection. Where no rated-load current is
shown on the equipment nameplate, the rated-load current shown on 4.40.1.8 Single Machine. An air-conditioning or refrigerating system
the compressor nameplate shall be used. shall be considered to be a single machine under the provisions of
4.30.7.7, Exception, and 4.30.9.12, Exception. The motors shall be
Exception No. 1: Where so marked, the branch-circuit selection permitted to be located remotely from each other.
current shall be used instead of the rated-load current to determine
the rating or ampacity of the disconnecting means, the branch-circuit 4.40.2 Disconnecting Means
conductors, the controller, and the branch-circuit short-circuit and
ground-fault protection. 4.40.2.1 General. The provisions of Part 4.40.2 are intended to require
Exception No. 2: For cord-and-plug-connected equipment, the disconnecting means capable of disconnecting air-conditioning and
nameplate marking shall be used in accordance with 4.40.3.2(b), refrigerating equipment, including motor-compressors and controllers
Exception No. 2. from the circuit conductors.

FPN: For disconnecting means and controllers, see 4.40.2.2 and 4.40.5.1. 4.40.2.2 Rating and Interrupting Capacity.
(b) Multimotor Equipment. For multimotor equipment employing (a) Hermetic Refrigerant Motor-Compressor. A disconnecting
a shaded-pole or permanent split-capacitor-type fan or blower motor, means serving a hermetic refrigerant motor-compressor shall be
the full-load current for such motor marked on the nameplate of the selected on the basis of the nameplate rated-load current or branch-
equipment in which the fan or blower motor is employed shall be used circuit selection current, whichever is greater, and locked-rotor
instead of the horsepower rating to determine the ampacity or rating of current, respectively, of the motor-compressor as follows.
the disconnecting means, the branch-circuit conductors, the controller,
the branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protection, and the (1) Ampere Rating. The ampere rating shall be at least 115 percent
separate overload protection. This marking on the equipment of the nameplate rated-load current or branch-circuit selection current,
nameplate shall not be less than the current marked on the fan or whichever is greater.
blower motor nameplate.
Exception: A listed nonfused motor circuit switch having a
4.40.1.7 Highest Rated (Largest) Motor. In determining compliance horsepower rating not less than the equivalent horsepower determined
with this article and with 4.30.2.4, 4.30.4.3(b) and 4.30.4.3(c), and in accordance with 4.40.2.2(a)(2) shall be permitted to have an
4.30.5.2(a), the highest rated (largest) motor shall be considered to be ampere rating less than 115 percent of the specified current.
the motor that has the highest rated-load current. Where two or more
motors have the same highest rated-load current, only one of them (2) Equivalent Horsepower. To determine the equivalent
shall be considered as the highest rated (largest) motor. For other than horsepower in complying with the requirements of 4.30.9.9, the
hermetic refrigerant motor-compressors, and fan or blower motors as horsepower rating shall be selected from Table 4.30.14.2, Table
covered in 4.40.1.6(b), the full-load current used to determine the 4.30.14.3, or Table 4.30.14.4 corresponding to the rated-load current
highest rated motor shall be the equivalent value corresponding to the or branch-circuit selection current, whichever is greater, and also the
motor horsepower rating selected from Table 4.30.14.2, Table horsepower rating from Table 4.30.14.5(a) or Table 4.30.14.5(b)
4.30.14.3, or Table 4.30.14.4. corresponding to the locked-rotor current. In case the nameplate rated-
load current or branch-circuit selection current and locked-rotor
Exception: Where so marked, the branch-circuit selection current current do not correspond to the currents shown in Table 4.30.14.2,
shall be used instead of the rated-load current in determining the Table 4.30.14.3, Table 4.30.14.4, Table 4.30.14.5(a), or Table
highest rated (largest) motor-compressor. 4.30.14.5(b), the horsepower rating corresponding to the next higher
value shall be selected. In case different horsepower ratings are Exception: Where part of the concurrent load is a resistance load and
obtained when applying these tables, a horsepower rating at least equal the disconnecting means is a switch rated in horsepower and amperes,
to the larger of the values obtained shall be selected. the switch used shall be permitted to have a horsepower rating not
less than the combined load to the motor-compressor(s) and other
(b) Combination Loads. Where the combined load of two or more motor(s) at the locked-rotor condition, if the ampere rating of the
hermetic refrigerant motor-compressors or one or more hermetic switch is not less than this locked-rotor load plus the resistance load.
refrigerant motor-compressor with other motors or loads may be
simultaneous on a single disconnecting means, the rating for the (2) Full-Load Current Equivalent. The ampere rating of the
disconnecting means shall be determined in accordance with disconnecting means shall be at least 115 percent of the sum of all
4.40.2.2(b)(1) and (b)(2). currents at the rated-load condition determined in accordance with
4.40.2.2(b)(1).
(1) Horsepower Rating. The horsepower rating of the
disconnecting means shall be determined from the sum of all currents, Exception: A listed nonfused motor circuit switch having a
including resistance loads, at the rated-load condition and also at the horsepower rating not less than the equivalent horsepower determined
locked-rotor condition. The combined rated-load current and the by 4.40.2.2(b)(1) shall be permitted to have an ampere rating less than
combined locked-rotor current so obtained shall be considered as a 115 percent of the sum of all currents.
single motor for the purpose of this requirement as follows.
(c) Small Motor-Compressors. For small motor-compressors not
a The full-load current equivalent to the horsepower rating of having the locked-rotor current marked on the nameplate, or for small
each motor, other than a hermetic refrigerant motor-compressor, and motors not covered by Table 4.30.14.1, Table 4.30.14.2, Table
fan or blower motors as covered in 4.40.1.6(b) shall be selected from 4.30.14.3, or Table 4.30.14.4, the locked-rotor current shall be
Table 4.30.14.2, Table 4.30.14.3, or Table 4.30.14.4. These full-load assumed to be six times the rated-load current.
currents shall be added to the motor-compressor rated-load current(s)
or branch-circuit selection current(s), whichever is greater, and to the (d) Disconnecting Means. Every disconnecting means in the
rating in amperes of other loads to obtain an equivalent full-load refrigerant motor-compressor circuit between the point of attachment
current for the combined load. to the feeder and the point of connection to the refrigerant motor-
b The locked-rotor current equivalent to the horsepower rating compressor shall comply with the requirements of 4.40.2.2.
of each motor, other than a hermetic refrigerant motor-compressor,
shall be selected from Table 4.30.14.5(a) or Table 4.30.14.5(b), and, (e) Disconnecting Means Rated in Excess of 100 Horsepower.
for fan and blower motors of the shaded-pole or permanent split- Where the rated-load or locked-rotor current as determined above
capacitor type marked with the locked-rotor current, the marked value would indicate a disconnecting means rated in excess of 100 hp, the
shall be used. The locked-rotor currents shall be added to the motor- provisions of 4.30.9.9(e) shall apply.
compressor locked-rotor current(s) and to the rating in amperes of
other loads to obtain an equivalent locked-rotor current for the 4.40.2.3 Cord-Connected Equipment. For cord-connected equipment
combined load. Where two or more motors or other loads such as such as room air conditioners, household refrigerators and freezers,
resistance heaters, or both, cannot be started simultaneously, drinking water coolers, and beverage dispensers, a separable connector
appropriate combinations of locked-rotor and rated-load current or or an attachment plug and receptacle shall be permitted to serve as the
branch-circuit selection current, whichever is greater, shall be an disconnecting means.
acceptable means of determining the equivalent locked-rotor current
for the simultaneous combined load. FPN: For room air conditioners, see 4.40.7.4.
4.40.2.4 Location. Disconnecting means shall be located within sight protective device having a rating or setting not exceeding 175 percent
from and readily accessible from the air-conditioning or refrigerating of the motor-compressor rated-load current or branch-circuit selection
equipment. The disconnecting means shall be permitted to be installed current, whichever is greater, shall be permitted, provided that, where
on or within the air-conditioning or refrigerating equipment. the protection specified is not sufficient for the starting current of the
The disconnecting means shall not be located on panels that are motor, the rating or setting shall be permitted to be increased but shall
designed to allow access to the air-conditioning or refrigeration not exceed 225 percent of the motor rated-load current or branch-
equipment. circuit selection current, whichever is greater.

Exception No. 1: Where the disconnecting means provided in Exception: The rating of the branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-
accordance with 4.30.9.2(a) is capable of being locked in the open fault protective device shall not be required to be less than
position, and the refrigerating or air-conditioning equipment is 15 amperes.
essential to an industrial process in a facility with written safety
procedures, and where the conditions of maintenance and supervision (b) Rating or Setting for Equipment. The equipment branch-
ensure that only licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protective device shall be capable
electrical practitioner under the supervision of a licensed electrical of carrying the starting current of the equipment. Where the hermetic
practitioner service the equipment, a disconnecting means within sight refrigerant motor-compressor is the only load on the circuit, the
from the equipment shall not be required. The provision for locking or protection shall conform with 4.40.3.2(a). Where the equipment
adding a lock to the disconnecting means shall be permanently incorporates more than one hermetic refrigerant motor-compressor or
installed on or at the switch or circuit breaker used as the a hermetic refrigerant motor-compressor and other motors or other
disconnecting means. loads, the equipment short-circuit and ground-fault protection shall
Exception No. 2: Where an attachment plug and receptacle serve as conform with 4.30.4.3 and 4.40.3.2(b)(1) and (b)(2).
the disconnecting means in accordance with 4.40.2.3, their location
shall be accessible but shall not be required to be readily accessible. (1) Motor-Compressor Largest Load. Where a hermetic refrigerant
motor-compressor is the largest load connected to the circuit, the
FPN: See Parts 4.30.7 and 4.30.9 for additional requirements. rating or setting of the branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault
protective device shall not exceed the value specified in 4.40.3.2(a) for
4.40.3 Branch-Circuit Short-Circuit and the largest motor-compressor plus the sum of the rated-load current or
Ground-Fault Protection branch-circuit selection current, whichever is greater, of the other
motor-compressor(s) and the ratings of the other loads supplied.
4.40.3.1 General. The provisions of Part 4.40.3 specify devices (2) Motor-Compressor Not Largest Load. Where a hermetic
intended to protect the branch-circuit conductors, control apparatus, refrigerant motor-compressor is not the largest load connected to the
and motors in circuits supplying hermetic refrigerant motor- circuit, the rating or setting of the branch-circuit short-circuit and
compressors against overcurrent due to short circuits and grounds. ground-fault protective device shall not exceed a value equal to the
They are in addition to or amendatory of the provisions of Article sum of the rated-load current or branch-circuit selection current,
2.40. whichever is greater, rating(s) for the motor-compressor(s) plus the
value specified in 4.30.4.3(c)(4) where other motor loads are supplied,
4.40.3.2 Application and Selection. or the value specified in 2.40.1.4 where only nonmotor loads are
supplied in addition to the motor-compressor(s).
(a) Rating or Setting for Individual Motor-Compressor. The motor-
compressor branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protective Exception No. 1: Equipment that starts and operates on a 15- or 20-
device shall be capable of carrying the starting current of the motor. A ampere 120-volt, or 15-ampere 208- or 240-volt single-phase branch
circuit, shall be permitted to be protected by the 15- or 20-ampere
overcurrent device protecting the branch circuit, but if the maximum FPN: The individual motor circuit conductors of wye-start, delta-run connected
motor-compressors carry 58 percent of the rated load current. The multiplier of 72
branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protective device rating percent is obtained by multiplying 58 percent by 1.25.
marked on the equipment is less than these values, the circuit
protective device shall not exceed the value marked on the equipment 4.40.4.3 Motor-Compressor(s) With or Without Additional Motor
nameplate. Loads. Conductors supplying one or more motor-compressor(s) with
Exception No. 2: The nameplate marking of cord-and-plug-connected or without an additional load(s) shall have an ampacity not less than
equipment rated not greater than 250 volts, single-phase, such as the sum of the rated-load or branch-circuit selection current ratings,
household refrigerators and freezers, drinking water coolers, and whichever is larger, of all the motor-compressors plus the full-load
beverage dispensers, shall be used in determining the branch-circuit currents of the other motors, plus 25 percent of the highest motor or
requirements, and each unit shall be considered as a single motor motor-compressor rating in the group.
unless the nameplate is marked otherwise.
Exception No. 1: Where the circuitry is interlocked so as to prevent
(c) Protective Device Rating Not to Exceed the Manufacturer’s the starting and running of a second motor-compressor or group of
Values. Where maximum protective device ratings shown on a motor-compressors, the conductor size shall be determined from the
manufacturer’s overload relay table for use with a motor controller are largest motor-compressor or group of motor-compressors that is to be
less than the rating or setting selected in accordance with 4.40.3.2(a) operated at a given time.
and 4.40.3.2(b), the protective device rating shall not exceed the Exception No. 2: The branch circuit conductors for room air
manufacturer’s values marked on the equipment. conditioners shall be in accordance with Part 4.40.7.

4.40.4 Branch-Circuit Conductors 4.40.4.4 Combination Load. Conductors supplying a motor-

compressor load in addition to a lighting or appliance load as
4.40.4.1 General. The provisions of Part 4.40.4 and Article 3.10 calculated from Article 2.20 and other applicable articles shall have an
specify ampacities of conductors required to carry the motor current ampacity sufficient for the lighting or appliance load plus the required
without overheating under the conditions specified, except as modified ampacity for the motor-compressor load determined in accordance
in 4.40.1.6(a), Exception No. 1. with 4.40.4.3 or, for a single motor-compressor, in accordance with
The provisions of these articles shall not apply to integral conductors 4.40.4.2.
of motors, motor controllers and the like, or to conductors that form an
integral part of approved equipment. Exception: Where the circuitry is interlocked so as to prevent
simultaneous operation of the motor-compressor(s) and all other
FPN: See 3.0.1.1(b) and 3.10.1.1 for similar requirements.
loads connected, the conductor size shall be determined from the
largest size required for the motor-compressor(s) and other loads to
4.40.4.2 Single Motor-Compressor. Branch-circuit conductors
be operated at a given time.
supplying a single motor-compressor shall have an ampacity not less
than 125 percent of either the motor-compressor rated-load current or
4.40.4.5 Multimotor and Combination-Load Equipment. The
the branch-circuit selection current, whichever is greater.
ampacity of the conductors supplying multimotor and combination-
For a wye-start, delta-run connected motor-compressor, the selection
load equipment shall not be less than the minimum circuit ampacity
of branch-circuit conductors between the controller and the motor-
marked on the equipment in accordance with 4.40.1.4(b).
compressor shall be permitted to be based on 72 percent of either the
motor-compressor rated-load current or the branch-circuit selection
current, whichever is greater.
 4.40.5 Controllers for Motor-Compressors (2) A thermal protector integral with the motor-compressor,
approved for use with the motor-compressor that it protects on the
4.40.5.1 Rating. basis that it will prevent dangerous overheating of the motor-
compressor due to overload and failure to start. If the current-
(a) Motor-Compressor Controller. A motor-compressor controller interrupting device is separate from the motor-compressor and its
shall have both a continuous-duty full-load current rating and a control circuit is operated by a protective device integral with the
locked-rotor current rating not less than the nameplate rated-load motor-compressor, it shall be arranged so that the opening of the
current or branch-circuit selection current, whichever is greater, and control circuit will result in interruption of current to the motor-
locked-rotor current, respectively, of the compressor. In case the motor compressor.
controller is rated in horsepower but is without one or both of the (3) A fuse or inverse time circuit breaker responsive to motor
foregoing current ratings, equivalent currents shall be determined from current, which shall also be permitted to serve as the branch-circuit
the ratings as follows. Table 4.30.14.2, Table 4.30.14.3, and Table short-circuit and ground-fault protective device. This device shall be
4.30.14.4 shall be used to determine the equivalent full-load current rated at not more than 125 percent of the motor-compressor rated-load
rating. Table 4.30.14.5(a) and Table 4.30.14.5(b) shall be used to current. It shall have sufficient time delay to permit the motor-
determine the equivalent locked-rotor current ratings. compressor to start and accelerate its load. The equipment or the
motor-compressor shall be marked with this maximum branch-circuit
(b) Controller Serving More Than One Load. A controller fuse or inverse time circuit breaker rating.
serving more than one motor-compressor or a motor-compressor and (4) A protective system, furnished or specified and approved for
other loads shall have a continuous-duty full-load current rating and a use with the motor-compressor that it protects on the basis that it will
locked-rotor current rating not less than the combined load as prevent dangerous overheating of the motor-compressor due to
determined in accordance with 4.40.2.2(b). overload and failure to start. If the current-interrupting device is
separate from the motor-compressor and its control circuit is operated
4.40.6 Motor-Compressor and Branch-Circuit by a protective device that is not integral with the current-interrupting
Overload Protection device, it shall be arranged so that the opening of the control circuit
will result in interruption of current to the motor-compressor.
4.40.6.1 General. The provisions of Part 4.40.6 specify devices
intended to protect the motor-compressor, the motor-control apparatus, (b) Protection of Motor-Compressor Control Apparatus and
and the branch-circuit conductors against excessive heating due to Branch-Circuit Conductors. The motor-compressor controller(s), the
motor overload and failure to start. disconnecting means, and the branch-circuit conductors shall be
protected against overcurrent due to motor overload and failure to start
FPN: See 2.40.1.4(g) for application of Parts 4.40.3 and 4.40.6. by one of the following means, which shall be permitted to be the
same device or system protecting the motor-compressor in accordance
4.40.6.2 Application and Selection. with 4.40.6.2(a):
(a) Protection of Motor-Compressor. Each motor-compressor shall Exception: Overload protection of motor-compressors and equipment
be protected against overload and failure to start by one of the on 15- and 20-ampere, single-phase, branch circuits shall be
following means: permitted to be in accordance with 4.40.6.4 and 4.40.6.5.
(1) A separate overload relay that is responsive to motor- (1) An overload relay selected in accordance with 4.40.6.2(a)(1)
compressor current. This device shall be selected to trip at not more (2) A thermal protector applied in accordance with 4.40.6.2(a)(2)
than 140 percent of the motor-compressor rated-load current. that will not permit a continuous current in excess of 156 percent of
the marked rated-load current or branch-circuit selection current ampere 120-volt, or 15-ampere 208- or 240-volt, single-phase branch
(3) A fuse or inverse time circuit breaker selected in accordance circuits as permitted in Article 210 shall be permitted as indicated in
with 4.40.6.2(a)(3) 4.40.6.5(a), (b), and (c).
(4) A protective system, in accordance with 4.40.6.2(a)(4), that
will not permit a continuous current in excess of 156 percent of the (a) Overload Protection. The motor-compressor shall be provided
marked rated-load current or branch-circuit selection current with overload protection as specified in 4.40.6.2(a). Both the
controller and the motor overload protective device shall be approved
4.40.6.3 Overload Relays. Overload relays and other devices for for installation with the short-circuit and ground-fault protective
motor overload protection that are not capable of opening short device for the branch circuit to which the equipment is connected.
circuits shall be protected by fuses or inverse time circuit breakers
with ratings or settings in accordance with Part 4.40.3 unless approved (b) Attachment Plug and Receptacle Rating. The rating of the
for group installation or for part-winding motors and marked to attachment plug and receptacle shall not exceed 20 amperes at 125
indicate the maximum size of fuse or inverse time circuit breaker by volts or 15 amperes at 250 volts.
which they shall be protected.
(c) Time Delay. The short-circuit and ground-fault protective device
Exception: The fuse or inverse time circuit breaker size marking shall protecting the branch circuit shall have sufficient time delay to permit
be permitted on the nameplate of approved equipment in which the the motor-compressor and other motors to start and accelerate their
overload relay or other overload device is used. loads.

4.40.6.4 Motor-Compressors and Equipment on 15- or 20-Ampere 4.40.7 Provisions for Room Air Conditioners
Branch Circuits — Not Cord-and-Attachment-Plug-Connected.
Overload protection for motor-compressors and equipment used on 4.40.7.1 General. The provisions of Part 4.40.7 shall apply to
15- or 20-ampere 120-volt, or 15-ampere 208- or 240-volt single- electrically energized room air conditioners that control temperature
phase branch circuits as permitted in Article 210 shall be permitted as and humidity. For the purpose of Part 4.40.7, a room air conditioner
indicated in 4.40.6.4(a) and 4.40.6.4(b). (with or without provisions for heating) shall be considered as an ac
appliance of the air-cooled window, console, or in-wall type that is
(a) Overload Protection. The motor-compressor shall be provided installed in the conditioned room and that incorporates a hermetic
with overload protection selected as specified in 4.40.6.2(a). Both the refrigerant motor-compressor(s). The provisions of Part 4.40.7 cover
controller and motor overload protective device shall be approved for equipment rated not over 250 volts, single phase, and such equipment
installation with the short-circuit and ground-fault protective device shall be permitted to be cord-and-attachment-plug-connected.
for the branch circuit to which the equipment is connected. A room air conditioner that is rated three phase or rated over 250 volts
shall be directly connected to a wiring method recognized in Chapter
(b) Time Delay. The short-circuit and ground-fault protective 3, and provisions of Part 4.40.7 shall not apply.
device protecting the branch circuit shall have sufficient time delay to
permit the motor-compressor and other motors to start and accelerate 4.40.7.2 Grounding. Room air conditioners shall be grounded in
their loads. accordance with 2.50.6.1, 2.50.6.3, and 2.50.6.5.
4.40.7.3 Branch-Circuit Requirements.
4.40.6.5 Cord-and-Attachment-Plug-Connected Motor-
Compressors and Equipment on 15- or 20-Ampere Branch (a) Room Air Conditioner as a Single Motor Unit. A room air
Circuits. Overload protection for motor-compressors and equipment conditioner shall be considered as a single motor unit in determining
that are cord-and-attachment-plug-connected and used on 15- or 20- its branch-circuit requirements where all the following conditions are
met: connected room air conditioners shall be provided with factory-
installed LCDI or AFCI protection. The LCDI or AFCI protection
(1) It is cord-and-attachment-plug-connected. shall be an integral part of the attachment plug or be located in the
(2) Its rating is not more than 40 amperes and 250 volts, single power supply cord within 300 mm of the attachment plug.
phase.
(3) Total rated-load current is shown on the room air-conditioner
nameplate rather than individual motor currents. ARTICLE 4.45 — GENERATORS
(4) The rating of the branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault
protective device does not exceed the ampacity of the branch-circuit 4.45.1.1 Scope. This article covers the installation of generators.
conductors or the rating of the receptacle, whichever is less.
4.45.1.10 Location. Generators shall be of a type suitable for the
(b) Where No Other Loads Are Supplied. The total marked rating locations in which they are installed. They shall also meet the
of a cord-and-attachment-plug-connected room air conditioner shall requirements for motors in 4.30.1.14.
not exceed 80 percent of the rating of a branch circuit where no other
loads are supplied. 4.45.1.11 Marking. Each generator shall be provided with a
nameplate giving the manufacturer’s name, the rated frequency, power
(c) Where Lighting Units or Other Appliances Are Also factor, number of phases if of alternating current, the subtransient and
Supplied. The total marked rating of a cord-and-attachment-plug- transient impedances, the rating in kilowatts or kilovolt amperes, the
connected room air conditioner shall not exceed 50 percent of the normal volts and amperes corresponding to the rating, rated
rating of a branch circuit where lighting outlets, other appliances, or revolutions per minute, insulation system class and rated ambient
general-use receptacles are also supplied. Where the circuitry is temperature or rated temperature rise, and time rating.
interlocked to prevent simultaneous operation of the room air
conditioner and energization of other outlets on the same branch 4.45.1.12 Overcurrent Protection.
circuit, a cord-and-attachment-plug-connected room air conditioner
shall not exceed 80 percent of the branch-circuit rating. (a) Constant-Voltage Generators. Constant-voltage generators,
except ac generator exciters, shall be protected from overloads by
4.40.7.4 Disconnecting Means. An attachment plug and receptacle inherent design, circuit breakers, fuses, or other acceptable overcurrent
shall be permitted to serve as the disconnecting means for a single- protective means suitable for the conditions of use.
phase room air conditioner rated 250 volts or less if (1) the manual
controls on the room air conditioner are readily accessible and located (b) Two-Wire Generators. Two-wire, dc generators shall be
within 1 800 mm of the floor or (2) an approved manually operable permitted to have overcurrent protection in one conductor only if the
disconnecting means is installed in a readily accessible location within overcurrent device is actuated by the entire current generated other
sight from the room air conditioner. than the current in the shunt field. The overcurrent device shall not
open the shunt field.
4.40.7.5 Supply Cords. Where a flexible cord is used to supply a
room air conditioner, the length of such cord shall not exceed (c) 65 Volts or Less. Generators operating at 65 volts or less and
3 000 mm for a nominal, 120-volt rating or 1 800 mm for a nominal, driven by individual motors shall be considered as protected by the
208- or 240-volt rating. overcurrent device protecting the motor if these devices will operate
when the generators are delivering not more than 150 percent of their
4.40.7.6 Leakage Current Detection and Interruption (LCDI) and full-load rated current.
Arc Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI). Single-phase cord-and-plug-
 (d) Balancer Sets. Two-wire, dc generators used in conjunction 4.45.1.15 Guards for Attendants. Where necessary for the safety of
with balancer sets to obtain neutrals for 3-wire systems shall be attendants, the requirements of 4.30.12.3 shall apply.
equipped with overcurrent devices that disconnect the 3-wire system
in case of excessive unbalancing of voltages or currents. 4.45.1.16 Bushings. Where wires pass through an opening in an
enclosure, conduit box, or barrier, a bushing shall be used to protect
(e) Three-Wire, Direct-Current Generators. Three-wire, dc the conductors from the edges of an opening having sharp edges. The
generators, whether compound or shunt wound, shall be equipped with bushing shall have smooth, well-rounded surfaces where it may be in
overcurrent devices, one in each armature lead, and connected so as to contact with the conductors. If used where oils, grease, or other
be actuated by the entire current from the armature. Such overcurrent contaminants may be present, the bushing shall be made of a material
devices shall consist either of a double-pole, double-coil circuit not deleteriously affected.
breaker or of a 4-pole circuit breaker connected in the main and
equalizer leads and tripped by two overcurrent devices, one in each 4.45.1.17 Generator Terminal Housings. Generator terminal
armature lead. Such protective devices shall be interlocked so that no housings shall comply with 4.30.1.12. Where a horsepower rating is
one pole can be opened without simultaneously disconnecting both required to determine the required minimum size of the generator
leads of the armature from the system. terminal housing, the full-load current of the generator shall be
compared with comparable motors in Table 4.30.14.1 through Table
Exception to (a) through (e): Where deemed by the authority having 4.30.14.4. The higher horsepower rating of Table 4.30.14.1 and Table
jurisdiction, a generator is vital to the operation of an electrical 4.30.14.4 shall be used whenever the generator selection is between
system and the generator should operate to failure to prevent a two ratings.
greater hazard to persons. The overload sensing device(s) shall be
permitted to be connected to an annunciator or alarm supervised by 4.45.1.18 Disconnecting Means Required for Generators.
authorized personnel instead of interrupting the generator circuit. Generators shall be equipped with disconnect(s) by means of which
the generator and all protective devices and control apparatus are able
4.45.1.13 Ampacity of Conductors. The ampacity of the conductors to be disconnected entirely from the circuits supplied by the generator
from the generator terminals to the first distribution device(s) except where both of the following conditions apply:
containing overcurrent protection shall not be less than 115 percent of
the nameplate current rating of the generator. It shall be permitted to (1) The driving means for the generator can be readily shut down.
size the neutral conductors in accordance with 2.20.3.22. Conductors (2) The generator is not arranged to operate in parallel with
that must carry ground-fault currents shall not be smaller than required another generator or other source of voltage.
by 2.50.2.5(c). Neutral conductors of dc generators that must carry
ground-fault currents shall not be smaller than the minimum required
size of the largest conductor. ARTICLE 4.50 — TRANSFORMERS AND TRANSFORMER
VAULTS (INCLUDING SECONDARY TIES)
Exception: Where the design and operation of the generator prevent
overloading, the ampacity of the conductors shall not be less than 100 4.50.1.1 Scope. This article covers the installation of all transformers.
percent of the nameplate current rating of the generator.
Exception No. 1: Current transformers.
4.45.1.14 Protection of Live Parts. Live parts of generators operated Exception No. 2: Dry-type transformers that constitute a component
at more than 50 volts to ground shall not be exposed to accidental part of other apparatus and comply with the requirements for such
contact where accessible to unqualified persons. apparatus.
Exception No. 3: Transformers that are an integral part of an X-ray, (b) Transformers 600 Volts, Nominal, or Less. Overcurrent
high-frequency, or electrostatic-coating apparatus. protection shall be provided in accordance with Table 4.50.1.3(b).
Exception No. 4: Transformers used with Class 2 and Class 3 circuits
that comply with Article 7.25. Exception: Where the transformer is installed as a motor-control
Exception No. 5: Transformers for sign and outline lighting that circuit transformer in accordance with 4.30.6.2(c)(1) through (c)(5).
comply with Article 6.0.
Exception No. 6: Transformers for electric-discharge lighting that
comply with Article 4.10. (c) Voltage Transformers. Voltage transformers installed indoors
Exception No. 7: Transformers used for power-limited fire alarm or enclosed shall be protected with primary fuses.
circuits that comply with Part 7.60.3.
Exception No. 8: Transformers used for research, development, or FPN: For protection of instrument circuits including voltage transformers, see
4.8.4.3.
testing, where effective arrangements are provided to safeguard
persons from contacting energized parts.
4.50.1.4 Autotransformers 600 Volts, Nominal, or Less.
This article covers the installation of transformers dedicated to
(a) Overcurrent Protection. Each autotransformer 600 volts,
supplying power to a fire pump installation as modified by Article
nominal, or less shall be protected by an individual overcurrent device
6.95.
installed in series with each ungrounded input conductor. Such
This article also covers the installation of transformers in hazardous
overcurrent device shall be rated or set at not more than 125 percent of
(classified) locations as modified by Articles 5.1 through 5.4.
the rated full-load input current of the autotransformer. Where this
calculation does not correspond to a standard rating of a fuse or
4.50.1 General Provisions
nonadjustable circuit breaker and the rated input current is 9 amperes
or more, the next higher standard rating described in 2.40.1.6 shall be
4.50.1.2 Definition. For the purpose of this article, the following
permitted. An overcurrent device shall not be installed in series with
definition shall apply.
the shunt winding (the winding common to both the input and the
output circuits) of the autotransformer between Points A and B as
Transformer. An individual transformer, single- or polyphase,
shown in Figure 4.50.1.4.
identified by a single nameplate, unless otherwise indicated in this
article.
Exception: Where the rated input current of the autotransformer is
less than 9 amperes, an overcurrent device rated or set at not more
4.50.1.3 Overcurrent Protection. Overcurrent protection of
than 167 percent of the input current shall be permitted.
transformers shall comply with 4.50.1.3(a), (b), or (c). As used in this
section, the word transformer shall mean a transformer or polyphase
(b) Transformer Field-Connected as an Autotransformer. A
bank of two or more single-phase transformers operating as a unit.
transformer field-connected as an autotransformer shall be identified
FPN No. 1: See 2.40.1.4, 2.40.2.2, 2.40.9.1, and 2.40.9.2 for overcurrent
for use at elevated voltage.
protection of conductors.
FPN No. 2: Nonlinear loads can increase heat in a transformer without operating FPN: For information on permitted uses of autotransformers, see 2.10.1.9 and
its overcurrent protective device. 2.15.1.11.

(a) Transformers Over 600 Volts, Nominal. Overcurrent

protection shall be provided in accordance with Table 4.50.1.3(a).
 Table 4.50.1.3(a) Maximum Rating or Setting of Overcurrent Protection for Transformers Over 600 Volts
(as a Percentage of Transformer-Rated Current)
Secondary Protection (See Note 2.)
Circuit Breaker
Transformer Primary Protection Over 600 Volts Over 600 Volts or Fuse Rating
Location Rated Circuit Breaker Circuit Breaker Circuit Breaker
Limitations Impedance (See Note 4.) Fuse Rating (See Note 4.) Fuse Rating or Fuse Rating
Not more than 6% 600% 300% 300% 250% 125%
(See Note 1.) (See Note 1.) (See Note 1.) (See Note 1.) (See Note 1.)
Any location More than 6% and 400% 300% 250% 225% 125%
not more than (See Note 1.) (See Note 1.) (See Note 1.) (See Note 1.) (See Note 1.)
10%
Any 300% 250% Not required Not required Not required
(See Note 1.) (See Note 1.)
Not more than 6% 600% 300% 300% 250% 250%
Supervised locations
(See Note 5.) (See Note 5.) (See Note 5.)
only (See Note 3.)
More than 6% and 400% 300% 250% 225% 250%
not more than (See Note 5.) (See Note 5.) (See Note 5.)
10%
Notes:
1. Where the required fuse rating or circuit breaker setting does not correspond to a standard rating or setting, a higher rating or setting that
does not exceed the next higher standard rating or setting shall be permitted.
2. Where secondary overcurrent protection is required, the secondary overcurrent device shall be permitted to consist of not more than six
circuit breakers or six sets of fuses grouped in one location. Where multiple overcurrent devices are utilized, the total of all the device ratings
shall not exceed the allowed value of a single overcurrent device. If both circuit breakers and fuses are used as the overcurrent device, the total of
the device ratings shall not exceed that allowed for fuses.
3. A supervised location is a location where conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that only licensed electrical practitioner or non
licensed electrical practitioner under the supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner monitor and service the transformer installation.
4. Electronically actuated fuses that may be set to open at a specific current shall be set in accordance with settings for circuit breakers.
5. A transformer equipped with a coordinated thermal overload protection by the manufacturer shall be permitted to have separate secondary
protection omitted.
 Table 4.50.1.3(b) Maximum Rating or Setting of Overcurrent
Protection for Transformers 4.50.1.5 Grounding Autotransformers. Grounding autotransformers
600 Volts and Less (as a Percentage of Transformer-Rated Current) covered in this section are zigzag or T-connected transformers
Secondary Protection connected to 3-phase, 3-wire ungrounded systems for the purpose of
Primary Protection (See Note 2.) creating a 3-phase, 4-wire distribution system or providing a neutral
Currents Currents Currents Currents Currents reference for grounding purposes. Such transformers shall have a
of Less Less of Less continuous per-phase current rating and a continuous neutral current
Protection 9 Amperes Than 9 Than 2 9 Amperes Than 9 rating. Zig-zag connected transformers shall not be installed on the
Method or More Amperes Amperes or More Amperes load side of any system grounding connection, including those made
Primary
125% Not Not in accordance with 2.50.2.5(b), 2.50.2.11(a)(1), or 2.50.2.13(b)(2).
only 167% 300%
(See Note 1.) required required
protection FPN: The phase current in a grounding autotransformer is one-third the neutral
Primary current.
and 250% 250% 250% 125%
167%
secondary (See Note 3.) (See Note 3.) (See Note 3.) (See Note 1.) (a) Three-Phase, 4-Wire System. A grounding autotransformer
protection used to create a 3-phase, 4-wire distribution system from a 3-phase, 3-
Notes:
1. Where 125 percent of this current does not correspond to a standard rating of a wire ungrounded system shall conform to 4.50.1.5(a)(1) through
fuse or nonadjustable circuit breaker, a higher rating that does not exceed the next (a)(4).
higher standard rating shall be permitted.
2. Where secondary overcurrent protection is required, the secondary overcurrent (1) Connections. The transformer shall be directly connected to
device shall be permitted to consist of not more than six circuit breakers or six sets of
fuses grouped in one location. Where multiple overcurrent devices are utilized, the
the ungrounded phase conductors and shall not be switched or
total of all the device ratings shall not exceed the allowed value of a single overcurrent provided with overcurrent protection that is independent of the main
device. If both breakers and fuses are utilized as the overcurrent device, the total of the switch and common-trip overcurrent protection for the 3-phase, 4-wire
device ratings shall not exceed that allowed for fuses. system.
3. A transformer equipped with coordinated thermal overload protection by the (2) Overcurrent Protection. An overcurrent sensing device shall be
manufacturer and arranged to interrupt the primary current shall be permitted to have
primary overcurrent protection rated or set at a current value that is not more than six provided that will cause the main switch or common-trip overcurrent
times the rated current of the transformer for transformers having not more than 6 protection referred to in 4.50.1.5(a)(1) to open if the load on the
percent impedance and not more than four times the rated current of the transformer autotransformer reaches or exceeds 125 percent of its continuous
for transformers having more than 6 percent but not more than 10 percent impedance. current per-phase or neutral rating. Delayed tripping for temporary
overcurrents sensed at the autotransformer overcurrent device shall be
permitted for the purpose of allowing proper operation of branch or
feeder protective devices on the 4-wire system.
(3) Transformer Fault Sensing. A fault-sensing system that causes
the opening of a main switch or common-trip overcurrent device for
the 3-phase, 4-wire system shall be provided to guard against single-
phasing or internal faults.

FPN: This can be accomplished by the use of two subtractive-connected donut-

type current transformers installed to sense and signal when an unbalance occurs
in the line current to the autotransformer of 50 percent or more of rated current.

Figure 4.50.1.4 Autotransformer. (4) Rating. The autotransformer shall have a continuous neutral-
current rating that is sufficient to handle the maximum possible neutral protection at each end as required in Parts 2.40.1, 2.40.2, and 2.40.8.
unbalanced load current of the 4-wire system. Under the conditions described in 4.50.1.6(a)(1) and 4.50.1.6(a)(2),
the overcurrent protection shall be permitted to be in accordance with
(b) Ground Reference for Fault Protection Devices. A grounding 4.50.1.6(a)(3).
autotransformer used to make available a specified magnitude of
ground-fault current for operation of a ground-responsive protective (1) Loads at Transformer Supply Points Only. Where all loads are
device on a 3-phase, 3-wire ungrounded system shall conform to connected at the transformer supply points at each end of the tie and
4.50.1.5(b)(1) and (b)(2). overcurrent protection is not provided in accordance with Parts 2.40.1,
2.40.2, and 2.40.8, the rated ampacity of the tie shall not be less than
(1) Rating. The autotransformer shall have a continuous neutral- 67 percent of the rated secondary current of the highest rated
current rating sufficient for the specified ground-fault current. transformer supplying the secondary tie system.

(2) Overcurrent Protection. An overcurrent protective device of (2) Loads Connected Between Transformer Supply Points. Where
adequate short-circuit rating that will open simultaneously all load is connected to the tie at any point between transformer supply
ungrounded conductors when it operates shall be applied in the points and overcurrent protection is not provided in accordance with
grounding autotransformer branch circuit and shall be rated or set at a Parts 2.40.1, 2.40.2, and 2.40.8, the rated ampacity of the tie shall not
current not exceeding 125 percent of the autotransformer continuous be less than 100 percent of the rated secondary current of the highest
per-phase current rating or 42 percent of the continuous-current rating rated transformer supplying the secondary tie system.
of any series connected devices in the autotransformer neutral
connection. Delayed tripping for temporary overcurrents to permit the Exception: Tie circuits comprised of multiple conductors per phase
proper operation of ground-responsive tripping devices on the main shall be permitted to be sized and protected in accordance with
system shall be permitted but shall not exceed values that would be 4.50.1.6(a)(4).
more than the short-time current rating of the grounding
autotransformer or any series connected devices in the neutral (3) Tie Circuit Protection. Under the conditions described in
connection thereto. 4.50.1.6(a)(1) and (a)(2), both supply ends of each ungrounded tie
conductor shall be equipped with a protective device that opens at a
(c) Ground Reference for Damping Transitory Overvoltages. A predetermined temperature of the tie conductor under short-circuit
grounding autotransformer used to limit transitory overvoltages shall conditions. This protection shall consist of one of the following: (1) a
be of suitable rating and connected in accordance with 4.50.1.5(a)(1). fusible link cable connector, terminal, or lug, commonly known as a
limiter, each being of a size corresponding with that of the conductor
4.50.1.6 Secondary Ties. As used in this article, a secondary tie is a and of construction and characteristics according to the operating
circuit operating at 600 volts, nominal, or less between phases that voltage and the type of insulation on the tie conductors or (2)
connects two power sources or power supply points, such as the automatic circuit breakers actuated by devices having comparable
secondaries of two transformers. The tie shall be permitted to consist time-current characteristics.
of one or more conductors per phase or neutral. Conductors
connecting the secondaries of transformers in accordance with (4) Interconnection of Phase Conductors Between Transformer
4.50.1.7 shall not be considered secondary ties. Supply Points. Where the tie consists of more than one conductor per
As used in this section, the word transformer means a transformer or a phase or neutral, the conductors of each phase or neutral shall comply
bank of transformers operating as a unit. with one of the following provisions.

(a) Tie Circuits. Tie circuits shall be provided with overcurrent a. Interconnected. The conductors shall be interconnected in
order to establish a load supply point, and the protective device 4.50.1.7 Parallel Operation. Transformers shall be permitted to be
specified in 4.50.1.6(a)(3) shall be provided in each ungrounded tie operated in parallel and switched as a unit, provided the overcurrent
conductor at this point on both sides of the interconnection. The means protection for each transformer meets the requirements of 4.50.1.3(a)
of interconnection shall have an ampacity not less than the load to be for primary and secondary protective devices over 600 volts, or
served. 4.50.1.3(b) for primary and secondary protective devices 600 volts or
less.
b. Not Interconnected. The loads shall be connected to one or
more individual conductors of a paralleled conductor tie without 4.50.1.8 Guarding. Transformers shall be guarded as specified in
interconnecting the conductors of each phase or neutral and without 4.50.1.8(a) through 4.50.1.8(d).
the protection specified in 4.50.1.6(a)(3) at load connection points.
Where this is done, the tie conductors of each phase or neutral shall (a) Mechanical Protection. Appropriate provisions shall be made to
have a combined capacity ampacity of not less than 133 percent of the minimize the possibility of damage to transformers from external
rated secondary current of the highest rated transformer supplying the causes where the transformers are exposed to physical damage.
secondary tie system, the total load of such taps shall not exceed the
rated secondary current of the highest rated transformer, and the loads (b) Case or Enclosure. Dry-type transformers shall be provided
shall be equally divided on each phase and on the individual with a noncombustible moisture-resistant case or enclosure that
conductors of each phase as far as practicable. provides protection against the accidental insertion of foreign objects.

(5) Tie Circuit Control. Where the operating voltage exceeds 150 (c) Exposed Energized Parts. Switches or other equipment
volts to ground, secondary ties provided with limiters shall have a operating at 600 volts, nominal, or less and serving only equipment
switch at each end that, when open, de-energizes the associated tie within a transformer enclosure shall be permitted to be installed in the
conductors and limiters. The current rating of the switch shall not be transformer enclosure if accessible to licensed electrical practitioner or
less than the rated current ampacity of the conductors connected to the non licensed electrical practitioner under the supervision of a licensed
switch. It shall be capable of interrupting its rated current, and it shall electrical practitioner only. All energized parts shall be guarded in
be constructed so that it will not open under the magnetic forces accordance with 1.10.2.2 and 1.10.3.5.
resulting from short-circuit current.
(d) Voltage Warning. The operating voltage of exposed live parts
(b) Overcurrent Protection for Secondary Connections. Where of transformer installations shall be indicated by signs or visible
secondary ties are used, an overcurrent device rated or set at not more markings on the equipment or structures.
than 250 percent of the rated secondary current of the transformers
shall be provided in the secondary connections of each transformer 4.50.1.9 Ventilation. The ventilation shall be adequate to dispose of
supplying the tie system. In addition, an automatic circuit breaker the transformer full-load losses without creating a temperature rise that
actuated by a reverse-current relay set to open the circuit at not more is in excess of the transformer rating.
than the rated secondary current of the transformer shall be provided
in the secondary connection of each transformer. FPN No. 1: See ANSI/IEEE C57.12.00-1993, General Requirements for Liquid-
Immersed Distribution, Power, and Regulating Transformers, and ANSI/IEEE
C57.12.01-1989, General Requirements for Dry-Type Distribution and Power
(c) Grounding. Where the secondary tie system is grounded, each Transformers.
transformer secondary supplying the tie system shall be grounded in FPN No. 2: Additional losses may occur in some transformers where nonsinusoidal
currents are present, resulting in increased heat in the transformer above its rating.
accordance with the requirements of 2.50.2.11 for separately derived See ANSI/IEEE C57.110-1993, Recommended Practice for Establishing
systems. Transformer Capability When Supplying Nonsinusoidal Load Currents, where
transformers are utilized with nonlinear loads.
 4.50.2 Specific Provisions Applicable to Different
Transformers with ventilating openings shall be installed so that the Types of Transformers
ventilating openings are not blocked by walls or other obstructions.
The required clearances shall be clearly marked on the transformer. 4.50.2.1 Dry-Type Transformers Installed Indoors.

4.50.1.10 Grounding. Exposed non–current-carrying metal parts of (a) Not Over 112½ kVA. Dry-type transformers installed indoors
transformer installations, including fences, guards, and so forth, shall and rated 112½ kVA or less shall have a separation of at least 305 mm
be grounded where required under the conditions and in the manner (12 in.) from combustible material unless separated from the
specified for electric equipment and other exposed metal parts in combustible material by a fire-resistant, heat-insulated barrier.
Article 2.50.
Exception: This rule shall not apply to transformers rated for 600
4.50.1.11 Marking. Each transformer shall be provided with a volts, nominal, or less that are completely enclosed, with or without
nameplate giving the name of the manufacturer, rated kilovolt- ventilating openings.
amperes, frequency, primary and secondary voltage, impedance of
transformers 25 kVA and larger, required clearances for transformers (b) Over 112½ kVA. Individual dry-type transformers of more than
with ventilating openings, and the amount and kind of insulating liquid 112½ kVA rating shall be installed in a transformer room of fire-
where used. In addition, the nameplate of each dry-type transformer resistant construction. Unless specified otherwise in this article, the
shall include the temperature class for the insulation system. term fire resistant means a construction having a minimum fire rating
of 1 hour.
4.50.1.12 Terminal Wiring Space. The minimum wire-bending space
at fixed, 600-volt and below terminals of transformer line and load Exception No. 1: Transformers with Class 155 or higher insulation
connections shall be as required in 3.12.1.6. Wiring space for pigtail systems and separated from combustible material by a fire-resistant,
connections shall conform to Table 3.14.2.2(b). heat-insulating barrier or by not less than 1 800 mm horizontally and
3 600 mm vertically.
4.50.1.13 Accessibility. All transformers and transformer vaults shall Exception No. 2: Transformers with Class 155 or higher insulation
be readily accessible to licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed systems and completely enclosed except for ventilating openings.
electrical practitioner under the supervision of a licensed electrical
practitioner for inspection and maintenance or shall meet the FPN: See ANSI/ASTM E119-1995, Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction
and Materials, and NFPA 251-1999, Standard Methods of Tests of Fire Endurance
requirements of 4.50.1.13(a) or 4.50.1.13(b). of Building Construction and Materials.

(a) Open Installations. Dry-type transformers 600 volts, nominal, (c) Over 35,000 Volts. Dry-type transformers rated over
or less, located in the open on walls, columns, or structures, shall not 35 000 volts shall be installed in a vault complying with Part 4.50.3.
be required to be readily accessible.
4.50.2.2 Dry-Type Transformers Installed Outdoors. Dry-type
(b) Hollow Space Installations. Dry-type transformers 600 volts, transformers installed outdoors shall have a weatherproof enclosure.
nominal, or less and not exceeding 50 kVA shall be permitted in
hollow spaces of buildings not permanently closed in by structure, Transformers exceeding 112½ kVA shall not be located within
provided they meet the ventilation requirements of 4.50.1.9 and 300 mm of combustible materials of buildings unless the transformer
separation from combustible materials requirements of 4.50.2.1(a). has Class 155 insulation systems or higher and is completely enclosed
Transformers so installed shall not be required to be readily accessible. except for ventilating openings.
4.50.2.3 Less-Flammable Liquid-Insulated Transformers.
Transformers insulated with listed less-flammable liquids that have a 4.50.2.4 Nonflammable Fluid-Insulated Transformers.
fire point of not less than 300°C shall be permitted to be installed in Transformers insulated with a dielectric fluid identified as
accordance with 4.50.2.3(a) or 4.50.2.3(b). nonflammable shall be permitted to be installed indoors or outdoors.
Such transformers installed indoors and rated over 35 000 volts shall
(a) Indoor Installations. Indoor installations shall be permitted in be installed in a vault. Such transformers installed indoors shall be
accordance with one of the following: furnished with a liquid confinement area and a pressure-relief vent.
The transformers shall be furnished with a means for absorbing any
(1) In Type I or Type II buildings, in areas where all of the gases generated by arcing inside the tank, or the pressure-relief vent
following requirements are met: shall be connected to a chimney or flue that will carry such gases to an
environmentally safe area.
a. The transformer is rated 35 000 volts or less.
b. No combustible materials are stored. FPN: Safety may be increased if fire hazard analyses are performed for such
transformer installations.
c. A liquid confinement area is provided.
d. The installation complies with all restrictions provided for in
For the purposes of this section, a nonflammable dielectric fluid is one
the listing of the liquid.
that does not have a flash point or fire point and is not flammable in
air.
(2) With an automatic fire extinguishing system and a liquid
confinement area, provided the transformer is rated 35 000 volts or
4.50.2.5 Askarel-Insulated Transformers Installed Indoors.
less
Askarel-insulated transformers installed indoors and rated over 25
kVA shall be furnished with a pressure-relief vent. Where installed in
(3) In accordance with 4.50.2.6
a poorly ventilated place, they shall be furnished with a means for
absorbing any gases generated by arcing inside the case, or the
(b) Outdoor Installations. Less-flammable liquid-filled
pressure-relief vent shall be connected to a chimney or flue that carries
transformers shall be permitted to be installed outdoors, attached to,
such gases outside the building. Askarel-insulated transformers rated
adjacent to, or on the roof of buildings, where installed in accordance
over 35 000 volts shall be installed in a vault.
with (1) or (2):
4.50.2.6 Oil-Insulated Transformers Installed Indoors. Oil-
(1) For Type I and Type II buildings, the installation shall comply
insulated transformers installed indoors shall be installed in a vault
with all restrictions provided for in the listing of the liquid.
constructed as specified in Part 4.50.3.
FPN: Installations adjacent to combustible material, fire escapes, or door and
window openings may require additional safeguards such as those listed in Exception No. 1: Where the total capacity does not exceed 112½ kVA,
4.50.2.7. the vault specified in Part 4.50.3 shall be permitted to be constructed
of reinforced concrete that is not less than 100 mm thick.
(2) In accordance with 4.50.2.7. Exception No. 2: Where the nominal voltage does not exceed 600, a
vault shall not be required if suitable arrangements are made to
FPN No. 1: As used in this section, Type I and Type II buildings refers to Type I
and Type II building construction as defined in NFPA 220-1999, Standard on prevent a transformer oil fire from igniting other materials and the
Types of Building Construction. Combustible materials refers to those materials not total capacity in one location does not exceed 10 kVA in a section of
classified as noncombustible or limited-combustible as defined in NFPA 220-1999, the building classified as combustible or 75 kVA where the
Standard on Types of Building Construction.
surrounding structure is classified as fire-resistant construction.
FPN No. 2: See definition of Listed in Article 1.1.
Exception No. 3: Electric furnace transformers that have a total rating
not exceeding 75 kVA shall be permitted to be installed without a vault Oil enclosures shall be permitted to consist of fire-resistant dikes,
in a building or room of fire-resistant construction, provided suitable curbed areas or basins, or trenches filled with coarse, crushed stone.
arrangements are made to prevent a transformer oil fire from Oil enclosures shall be provided with trapped drains where the
spreading to other combustible material. exposure and the quantity of oil involved are such that removal of oil
Exception No. 4: A transformer that has a total rating not exceeding is important.
75 kVA and a supply voltage of 600 volts or less that is an integral
part of charged-particle-accelerating equipment shall be permitted to FPN: For additional information on transformers installed on poles or structures or
under ground, see ANSI C2-2002, National Electrical Safety Code.
be installed without a vault in a building or room of noncombustible
or fire-resistant construction, provided suitable arrangements are
4.50.2.8 Modification of Transformers. When modifications are
made to prevent a transformer oil fire from spreading to other
made to a transformer in an existing installation that change the type
combustible material.
of the transformer with respect to Part 4.50.2, such transformer shall
Exception No. 5: Transformers shall be permitted to be installed in a
be marked to show the type of insulating liquid installed, and the
detached building that does not comply with Part III of this article if
modified transformer installation shall comply with the applicable
neither the building nor its contents present a fire hazard to any other
requirements for that type of transformer.
building or property, and if the building is used only in supplying
electric service and the interior is accessible only to licensed electrical
4.50.3 Transformer Vaults
practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner under the
supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner.
4.50.3.1 Location. Vaults shall be located where they can be
Exception No. 6: Oil-insulated transformers shall be permitted to be
ventilated to the outside air without using flues or ducts wherever such
used without a vault in portable and mobile surface mining equipment
an arrangement is practicable.
(such as electric excavators) if each of the following conditions is met:
(a) Provision is made for draining leaking fluid to the ground.
4.50.3.2 Walls, Roofs, and Floors. The walls and roofs of vaults shall
(b) Safe egress is provided for personnel.
be constructed of materials that have adequate structural strength for
(c) A minimum 6 mm steel barrier is provided for personnel
the conditions with a minimum fire resistance of 3 hours. The floors of
protection.
vaults in contact with the earth shall be of concrete that is not less than
100 mm thick, but where the vault is constructed with a vacant space
4.50.2.7 Oil-Insulated Transformers Installed Outdoors.
or other stories below it, the floor shall have adequate structural
Combustible material, combustible buildings, and parts of buildings,
strength for the load imposed thereon and a minimum fire resistance of
fire escapes, and door and window openings shall be safeguarded from
3 hours. For the purposes of this section, studs and wallboard
fires originating in oil-insulated transformers installed on roofs,
construction shall not be acceptable.
attached to or adjacent to a building or combustible material.
Exception: Where transformers are protected with automatic
In cases where the transformer installation presents a fire hazard, one
sprinkler, water spray, carbon dioxide, or halon, construction of
or more of the following safeguards shall be applied according to the
1 hour rating shall be permitted.
degree of hazard involved:
FPN No. 1: For additional information, see ANSI/ASTM E119-1995, Method for
(1) Space separations Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials, and NFPA 251-1999, Standard
(2) Fire-resistant barriers Methods of Tests of Fire Endurance of Building Construction and Materials.

(3) Automatic fire suppression systems FPN No. 2: A typical 3-hour construction is 150 mm thick reinforced concrete.
(4) Enclosures that confine the oil of a ruptured transformer tank
4.50.3.3 Doorways. Vault doorways shall be protected in accordance (c) Size. For a vault ventilated by natural circulation of air to an
with 4.50.3.3(a), (b), and (c). outdoor area, the combined net area of all ventilating openings, after
deducting the area occupied by screens, gratings, or louvers, shall not
(a) Type of Door. Each doorway leading into a vault from the be less than 1 900 mm2 (3 in.2) per kVA of transformer capacity in
building interior shall be provided with a tight-fitting door that has a service, and in no case shall the net area be less than 0.1 m2 (1 ft2) for
minimum fire rating of 3 hours. The authority having jurisdiction shall any capacity under 50 kVA.
be permitted to require such a door for an exterior wall opening where
conditions warrant. (d) Covering. Ventilation openings shall be covered with durable
gratings, screens, or louvers, according to the treatment required in
Exception: Where transformers are protected with automatic order to avoid unsafe conditions.
sprinkler, water spray, carbon dioxide, or halon, construction of
1 hour rating shall be permitted. (e) Dampers. All ventilation openings to the indoors shall be
provided with automatic closing fire dampers that operate in response
FPN: For additional information, see NFPA 80-1999, Standard for Fire Doors and to a vault fire. Such dampers shall possess a standard fire rating of not
Fire Windows.
less than 1½ hours.
(b) Sills. A door sill or curb that is of sufficient height to confine the FPN: See ANSI/UL 555-1995, Standard for Fire Dampers.
oil from the largest transformer within the vault shall be provided, and
in no case shall the height be less than 100 mm. (f) Ducts. Ventilating ducts shall be constructed of fire-resistant
material.
(c) Locks. Doors shall be equipped with locks, and doors shall be
kept locked, access being allowed only to licensed electrical 4.50.3.6 Drainage. Where practicable, vaults containing more than
practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner under the 100 kVA transformer capacity shall be provided with a drain or other
supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner. Personnel doors shall means that will carry off any accumulation of oil or water in the vault
swing out and be equipped with panic bars, pressure plates, or other unless local conditions make this impracticable. The floor shall be
devices that are normally latched but open under simple pressure. pitched to the drain where provided.
4.50.3.5 Ventilation Openings. Where required by 4.50.1.9, openings 4.50.3.7 Water Pipes and Accessories. Any pipe or duct system
for ventilation shall be provided in accordance with 4.50.3.5(a) foreign to the electrical installation shall not enter or pass through a
through 4.50.3.5(f). transformer vault. Piping or other facilities provided for vault fire
protection, or for transformer cooling, shall not be considered foreign
(a) Location. Ventilation openings shall be located as far as possible to the electrical installation.
from doors, windows, fire escapes, and combustible material.
4.50.3.8 Storage in Vaults. Materials shall not be stored in
(b) Arrangement. A vault ventilated by natural circulation of air transformer vaults.
shall be permitted to have roughly half of the total area of openings
required for ventilation in one or more openings near the floor and the
remainder in one or more openings in the roof or in the sidewalls near
the roof, or all of the area required for ventilation shall be permitted in
one or more openings in or near the roof.
 ARTICLE 4.55 — PHASE CONVERTERS 4.55.1.5 Equipment Grounding Connection. A means for
attachment of an equipment grounding conductor termination in
4.55.1 General accordance with 2.50.1.8 shall be provided.

4.55.1.1 Scope. This article covers the installation and use of phase 4.55.1.6 Conductors.
converters.
(a) Ampacity. The ampacity of the single-phase supply conductors
4.55.1.2 Definitions. shall be determined by 4.55.1.6(a)(1) or (a)(2).

Manufactured Phase. The manufactured or derived phase FPN: Single-phase conductors sized to prevent a voltage drop not exceeding 3
percent from the source of supply to the phase converter may help ensure proper
originates at the phase converter and is not solidly connected to either starting and operation of motor loads.
of the single-phase input conductors.
(1) Variable Loads. Where the loads to be supplied are variable,
Phase Converter. An electrical device that converts single-phase the conductor ampacity shall not be less than 125 percent of the phase
power to 3-phase electrical power. converter nameplate single-phase input full-load amperes.
(2) Fixed Loads. Where the phase converter supplies specific fixed
FPN: Phase converters have characteristics that modify the starting torque and
locked-rotor current of motors served, and consideration is required in selecting a
loads, and the conductor ampacity is less than 125 percent of the phase
phase converter for a specific load. converter nameplate single-phase input full-load amperes, the
conductors shall have an ampacity not less than 250 percent of the sum
Rotary-Phase Converter. A device that consists of a rotary of the full-load, 3-phase current rating of the motors and other loads
transformer and capacitor panel(s) that permits the operation of served where the input and output voltages of the phase converter are
3-phase loads from a single-phase supply. identical. Where the input and output voltages of the phase converter
are different, the current as determined by this section shall be
Static-Phase Converter. A device without rotating parts, sized for a multiplied by the ratio of output to input voltage.
given 3-phase load to permit operation from a single-phase supply.
(b) Manufactured Phase Marking. The manufactured phase
4.55.1.3 Other Articles. All applicable requirements of this Code conductors shall be identified in all accessible locations with a
shall apply to phase converters except as amended by this article. distinctive marking. The marking shall be consistent throughout the
system and premises.
4.55.1.4 Marking. Each phase converter shall be provided with a
permanent nameplate indicating the following: 4.55.1.7 Overcurrent Protection. The single-phase supply conductors
and phase converter shall be protected from overcurrent by 4.55.1.7(a)
(1) Manufacturer’s name or 4.55.1.7(b). Where the required fuse or nonadjustable circuit
(2) Rated input and output voltages breaker rating or settings of adjustable circuit breakers do not
(3) Frequency correspond to a standard rating or setting, a higher rating or setting
(4) Rated single-phase input full-load amperes that does not exceed the next higher standard rating shall be permitted.
(5) Rated minimum and maximum single load in kilovolt-amperes
(kVA) or horsepower (a) Variable Loads. Where the loads to be supplied are variable,
(6) Maximum total load in kilovolt-amperes (kVA) or horsepower overcurrent protection shall be set at not more than 125 percent of the
(7) For a rotary-phase converter, 3-phase amperes at full load phase converter nameplate single-phase input full-load amperes.
 (b) Fixed Loads. Where the phase converter supplies specific fixed (d) Voltage Ratios. The calculations in 4.55.1.8(c) shall apply
loads and the conductors are sized in accordance with 4.55.1.6(a)(2), directly where the input and output voltages of the phase converter are
the conductors shall be protected in accordance with their ampacity. identical. Where the input and output voltages of the phase converter
The overcurrent protection determined from this section shall not are different, the current shall be multiplied by the ratio of the output
exceed 125 percent of the phase converter nameplate single-phase to input voltage.
input amperes.
4.55.1.9 Connection of Single-Phase Loads. Where single-phase
4.55.1.8 Disconnecting Means. Means shall be provided to disconnect loads are connected on the load side of a phase converter, they shall
simultaneously all ungrounded single-phase supply conductors to the not be connected to the manufactured phase.
phase converter.
4.55.1.10 Terminal Housings. A terminal housing in accordance with
(a) Location. The disconnecting means shall be readily accessible the provisions of 4.30.1.12 shall be provided on a phase converter.
and located in sight from the phase converter.
4.55.2 Specific Provisions Applicable to
(b) Type. The disconnecting means shall be a switch rated in Different Types of Phase Converters
horsepower, a circuit breaker, or a molded-case switch. Where only
nonmotor loads are served, an ampere-rated switch shall be permitted. 4.55.2.1 Disconnecting Means. The single-phase disconnecting
means for the input of a static phase converter shall be permitted to
(c) Rating. The ampere rating of the disconnecting means shall not serve as the disconnecting means for the phase converter and a single
be less than 115 percent of the rated maximum single-phase input full- load if the load is within sight of the disconnecting means.
load amperes or, for specific fixed loads, shall be permitted to be
selected from 4.55.1.8(c)(1) or (c)(2). 4.55.2.2 Start-Up. Power to the utilization equipment shall not be
supplied until the rotary-phase converter has been started.
(1) Current Rated Disconnect. The disconnecting means shall be a
circuit breaker or molded-case switch with an ampere rating not less 4.55.2.3 Power Interruption. Utilization equipment supplied by a
than 250 percent of the sum of the following: rotary-phase converter shall be controlled in such a manner that power
to the equipment will be disconnected in the event of a power
a. Full-load, 3-phase current ratings of the motors interruption.
b. Other loads served
FPN: Magnetic motor starters, magnetic contactors, and similar devices, with
manual or time delay restarting for the load, provide restarting after power
(2) Horsepower Rated Disconnect. The disconnecting means shall interruption.
be a switch with a horsepower rating. The equivalent locked rotor
current of the horsepower rating of the switch shall not be less than 4.55.2.4 Capacitors. Capacitors that are not an integral part of the
200 percent of the sum of the following: rotary-phase conversion system but are installed for a motor load shall
be connected to the line side of that motor overload protective device.
a. Nonmotor loads
b. The 3-phase, locked-rotor current of the largest motor as
determined from Table 4.30.14.5(b) ARTICLE 4.60 — CAPACITORS
c. The full-load current of all other 3-phase motors operating at
the same time 4.60.1.1 Scope. This article covers the installation of capacitors on
electric circuits.
Surge capacitors or capacitors included as a component part of other 4.60.1.8 Conductors.
apparatus and conforming with the requirements of such apparatus are
excluded from these requirements. (a) Ampacity. The ampacity of capacitor circuit conductors shall
not be less than 135 percent of the rated current of the capacitor. The
This article also covers the installation of capacitors in hazardous ampacity of conductors that connect a capacitor to the terminals of a
(classified) locations as modified by Articles 5.1 through 5.3. motor or to motor circuit conductors shall not be less than one-third
the ampacity of the motor circuit conductors and in no case less than
4.60.1.2 Enclosing and Guarding. 135 percent of the rated current of the capacitor.

(a) Containing More Than 11 L (3 gal) of Flammable Liquid. (b) Overcurrent Protection. An overcurrent device shall be
Capacitors containing more than 11 L (3 gal) of flammable liquid shall provided in each ungrounded conductor for each capacitor bank. The
be enclosed in vaults or outdoor fenced enclosures complying with rating or setting of the overcurrent device shall be as low as
Part 1.10.3. This limit shall apply to any single unit in an installation practicable.
of capacitors.
Exception: A separate overcurrent device shall not be required for a
(b) Accidental Contact. Where capacitors are accessible to capacitor connected on the load side of a motor overload protective
unauthorized and unqualified persons, they shall be enclosed, located, device.
or guarded so that persons cannot come into accidental contact or
bring conducting materials into accidental contact with exposed (c) Disconnecting Means. A disconnecting means shall be provided
energized parts, terminals, or buses associated with them. However, no in each ungrounded conductor for each capacitor bank and shall meet
additional guarding is required for enclosures accessible only to the following requirements:
authorized and licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed
electrical practitioner under the supervision of a licensed electrical (1) The disconnecting means shall open all ungrounded
practitioner. conductors simultaneously.
(2) The disconnecting means shall be permitted to disconnect the
4.60.1 600 Volts, Nominal, and Under capacitor from the line as a regular operating procedure.
(3) The rating of the disconnecting means shall not be less than
4.60.1.6 Discharge of Stored Energy. Capacitors shall be provided 135 percent of the rated current of the capacitor.
with a means of discharging stored energy.
Exception: A separate disconnecting means shall not be required
(a) Time of Discharge. The residual voltage of a capacitor shall be where a capacitor is connected on the load side of a motor controller.
reduced to 50 volts, nominal, or less within 1 minute after the
capacitor is disconnected from the source of supply. 4.60.1.9 Rating or Setting of Motor Overload Device. Where a
motor installation includes a capacitor connected on the load side of
(b) Means of Discharge. The discharge circuit shall be either the motor overload device, the rating or setting of the motor overload
permanently connected to the terminals of the capacitor or capacitor device shall be based on the improved power factor of the motor
bank or provided with automatic means of connecting it to the circuit.
terminals of the capacitor bank on removal of voltage from the line.
Manual means of switching or connecting the discharge circuit shall The effect of the capacitor shall be disregarded in determining the
not be used. motor circuit conductor rating in accordance with 4.30.2.2.
 be provided with prominently displayed caution signs in accordance
4.60.1.10 Grounding. Capacitor cases shall be grounded in with 4.90.2.2 to prevent switching load current.
accordance with Article 2.50.
(c) Additional Requirements for Series Capacitors. The proper
Exception: Capacitor cases shall not be grounded where the switching sequence shall be ensured by use of one of the following:
capacitor units are supported on a structure designed to operate at
other than ground potential. (1) Mechanically sequenced isolating and bypass switches
(2) Interlocks
4.60.1.12 Marking. Each capacitor shall be provided with a nameplate (3) Switching procedure prominently displayed at the switching
giving the name of the manufacturer, rated voltage, frequency, kilovar location
or amperes, number of phases, and, if filled with a combustible liquid,
the volume of liquid. Where filled with a nonflammable liquid, the 4.60.2.2 Overcurrent Protection.
nameplate shall so state. The nameplate shall also indicate whether a
capacitor has a discharge device inside the case. (a) Provided to Detect and Interrupt Fault Current. A means
shall be provided to detect and interrupt fault current likely to cause
4.60.2 Over 600 Volts, Nominal dangerous pressure within an individual capacitor.

4.60.2.1 Switching. (b) Single Pole or Multipole Devices. Single-pole or multipole

devices shall be permitted for this purpose.
(a) Load Current. Group-operated switches shall be used for
capacitor switching and shall be capable of the following: (c) Protected Individually or in Groups. Capacitors shall be
permitted to be protected individually or in groups.
(1) Carrying continuously not less than 135 percent of the rated
current of the capacitor installation (d) Protective Devices Rated or Adjusted. Protective devices for
(2) Interrupting the maximum continuous load current of each capacitors or capacitor equipment shall be rated or adjusted to operate
capacitor, capacitor bank, or capacitor installation that will be within the limits of the safe zone for individual capacitors. If the
switched as a unit protective devices are rated or adjusted to operate within the limits for
(3) Withstanding the maximum inrush current, including Zone 1 or Zone 2, the capacitors shall be enclosed or isolated.
contributions from adjacent capacitor installations
(4) Carrying currents due to faults on capacitor side of switch In no event shall the rating or adjustment of the protective devices
exceed the maximum limit of Zone 2.
(b) Isolation.
FPN: For definitions of Safe Zone, Zone 1, and Zone 2, see ANSI/IEEE 18-1992,
Shunt Power Capacitors.
(1) General. A means shall be installed to isolate from all sources
of voltage each capacitor, capacitor bank, or capacitor installation that
4.60.2.3 Identification. Each capacitor shall be provided with a
will be removed from service as a unit. The isolating means shall
permanent nameplate giving the manufacturer’s name, rated voltage,
provide a visible gap in the electrical circuit adequate for the operating
frequency, kilovar or amperes, number of phases, and the volume of
voltage.
liquid identified as flammable, if such is the case.
(2) Isolating or Disconnecting Switches with No Interrupting
Rating. Isolating or disconnecting switches (with no interrupting
4.60.2.4 Grounding. Capacitor neutrals and cases, if grounded, shall
rating) shall be interlocked with the load-interrupting device or shall
be grounded in accordance with Article 2.50.
4.70.1.4 Conductor Insulation. Insulated conductors used for
Exception: Where the capacitor units are supported on a structure connections between resistance elements and controllers shall be
that is designed to operate at other than ground potential. suitable for an operating temperature of not less than 90°C (194°F).

4.60.2.5 Means for Discharge. Exception: Other conductor insulations shall be permitted for motor
starting service.
(a) Means to Reduce the Residual Voltage. A means shall be
provided to reduce the residual voltage of a capacitor to 50 volts or 4.70.2 Over 600 Volts, Nominal
less within 5 minutes after the capacitor is disconnected from the
source of supply. 4.70.2.1 General.

(b) Connection to Terminals. A discharge circuit shall be either (a) Protected Against Physical Damage. Resistors and reactors
permanently connected to the terminals of the capacitor or provided shall be protected against physical damage.
with automatic means of connecting it to the terminals of the capacitor
bank after disconnection of the capacitor from the source of supply. (b) Isolated by Enclosure or Elevation. Resistors and reactors
The windings of motors, transformers, or other equipment directly shall be isolated by enclosure or elevation to protect personnel from
connected to capacitors without a switch or overcurrent device accidental contact with energized parts.
interposed shall meet the requirements of 4.60.2.5(a).
(c) Combustible Materials. Resistors and reactors shall not be
installed in close enough proximity to combustible materials to
ARTICLE 4.70 — RESISTORS AND REACTORS constitute a fire hazard and shall have a clearance of not less than 305
mm (12 in.) from combustible materials.
4.70.1 600 Volts, Nominal, and Under
(d) Clearances. Clearances from resistors and reactors to grounded
4.70.1.1 Scope. This article covers the installation of separate resistors surfaces shall be adequate for the voltage involved.
and reactors on electric circuits.
FPN: See Article 4.90.
Exception: Resistors and reactors that are component parts of other
apparatus. (e) Temperature Rise from Induced Circulating Currents.
Metallic enclosures of reactors and adjacent metal parts shall be
This article also covers the installation of resistors and reactors in installed so that the temperature rise from induced circulating currents
hazardous (classified) locations as modified by Articles 5.1 through is not hazardous to personnel or does not constitute a fire hazard.
5.4.
4.70.2.2 Grounding. Resistor and reactor cases or enclosures shall be
4.70.1.2 Location. Resistors and reactors shall not be placed where grounded in accordance with Article 2.50.
exposed to physical damage.
Exception: Resistor or reactor cases or enclosures supported on a
4.70.1.3 Space Separation. A thermal barrier shall be required if the structure designed to operate at other than ground potential shall not
space between the resistors and reactors and any combustible material be grounded.
is less than 300 mm.
4.70.2.3 Oil-Filled Reactors. Installation of oil-filled reactors, in (a) Vented Lead-Acid Batteries. Cells and multicompartment
addition to the above requirements, shall comply with applicable batteries with covers sealed to containers of nonconductive, heat-
requirements of Article 4.50. resistant material shall not require additional insulating support.

(b) Vented Alkaline-Type Batteries. Cells with covers sealed to

ARTICLE 4.80 — STORAGE BATTERIES jars of nonconductive, heat-resistant material shall require no
additional insulation support. Cells in jars of conductive material shall
4.80.1.1 Scope. The provisions of this article shall apply to all be installed in trays of nonconductive material with not more than 20
stationary installations of storage batteries. cells (24 volts, nominal) in the series circuit in any one tray.

4.80.1.2 Definitions. (c) Rubber Jars. Cells in rubber or composition containers shall
require no additional insulating support where the total nominal
Nominal Battery Voltage. The voltage calculated on the basis of 2 voltage of all cells in series does not exceed 150 volts. Where the total
volts per cell for the lead-acid type and 1.2 volts per cell for the alkali voltage exceeds 150 volts, batteries shall be sectionalized into groups
type. of 150 volts or less, and each group shall have the individual cells
installed in trays or on racks.
Sealed Cell or Battery. A sealed cell or battery is one that has no
provision for the addition of water or electrolyte or for external (d) Sealed Cells or Batteries. Sealed cells and multicompartment
measurement of electrolyte specific gravity. The individual cells shall sealed batteries constructed of nonconductive, heat-resistant material
be permitted to contain a venting arrangement as described in shall not require additional insulating support. Batteries constructed of
4.80.1.10(b). a conducting container shall have insulating support if a voltage is
present between the container and ground.
Storage Battery. A battery comprised of one or more rechargeable
cells of the lead-acid, nickel-cadmium, or other rechargeable 4.80.1.7 Insulation of Batteries of Over 250 Volts. The provisions of
electrochemical types. 4.80.1.6 shall apply to storage batteries having the cells connected so
as to operate at a nominal voltage exceeding 250 volts, and, in
4.80.1.3 Wiring and Equipment Supplied from Batteries. Wiring addition, the provisions of this section shall also apply to such
and equipment supplied from storage batteries shall be subject to the batteries. Cells shall be installed in groups having a total nominal
requirements of this Code applying to wiring and equipment operating voltage of not over 250 volts. Insulation, which can be air, shall be
at the same voltage, unless otherwise permitted by 4.80.1.4. provided between groups and shall have a minimum separation
between live battery parts of opposite polarity of 50 mm for battery
4.80.1.4 Overcurrent Protection for Prime Movers. Overcurrent voltages not exceeding 600 volts.
protection shall not be required for conductors from a battery rated
less than 50 volts if the battery provides power for starting, ignition, or 4.80.1.8 Racks and Trays. Racks and trays shall comply with
control of prime movers. Section 3.0.1.3 shall not apply to these 4.80.1.8(a) and 4.80.1.8(b).
conductors.
(a) Racks. Racks, as required in this article, are rigid frames
4.80.1.6 Insulation of Batteries Not Over 250 Volts. This section designed to support cells or trays. They shall be substantial and be
shall apply to storage batteries having cells connected so as to operate made of one of the following:
at a nominal battery voltage of not over 250 volts.
(1) Metal, treated so as to be resistant to deteriorating action by
the electrolyte and provided with nonconducting members directly ARTICLE 490 — EQUIPMENT, OVER 600 VOLTS, NOMINAL
supporting the cells or with continuous insulating material other than
paint on conducting members 4.90.1 General
(2) Other construction such as fiberglass or other suitable
nonconductive materials 4.90.1.1 Scope. This article covers the general requirements for
equipment operating at more than 600 volts, nominal.
(b) Trays. Trays are frames, such as crates or shallow boxes usually
of wood or other nonconductive material, constructed or treated so as FPN No. 1: See NFPA 70E-2004, Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace,
for electrical safety requirements for employee workplaces.
to be resistant to deteriorating action by the electrolyte. FPN No. 2: For further information on hazard signs and labels, see ANSI Z535-4,
Product Signs and Safety Labels.
4.80.1.9 Battery Locations. Battery locations shall conform to
4.80.1.9(a), (b), and (c). 4.90.1.2 Definition.

(a) Ventilation. Provisions shall be made for sufficient diffusion High Voltage. For the purposes of this article, more than 600 volts,
and ventilation of the gases from the battery to prevent the nominal.
accumulation of an explosive mixture.
4.90.1.3 Oil-Filled Equipment. Installation of electrical equipment,
(b) Live Parts. Guarding of live parts shall comply with 1.10.2.2. other than transformers covered in Article 4.50, containing more than
38 L (10 gal) of flammable oil per unit shall meet the requirements of
(c) Working Space. Working space about the battery systems shall Parts 4.50.2 and 4.50.3.
comply with 1.10.2.1. Working clearance shall be measured from the
edge of the battery rack. 4.90.2 Equipment — Specific Provisions

4.80.1.10 Vents. 4.90.2.1 Circuit-Interrupting Devices.

(a) Vented Cells. Each vented cell shall be equipped with a flame (a) Circuit Breakers.
arrester that is designed to prevent destruction of the cell due to
ignition of gases within the cell by an external spark or flame under (1) Location.
normal operating conditions.
a. Circuit breakers installed indoors shall be mounted either in
(b) Sealed Cells. Sealed battery or cells shall be equipped with a metal-enclosed units or fire-resistant cell-mounted units, or they shall
pressure-release vent to prevent excessive accumulation of gas be permitted to be open-mounted in locations accessible to licensed
pressure, or the battery or cell shall be designed to prevent scatter of electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner under the
cell parts in event of a cell explosion. supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner only.
b. Circuit breakers used to control oil-filled transformers shall
either be located outside the transformer vault or be capable of
operation from outside the vault.
c. Oil circuit breakers shall be arranged or located so that
adjacent readily combustible structures or materials are safeguarded in
an approved manner.
 (2) Operating Characteristics. Circuit breakers shall have the (b) Power Fuses and Fuseholders.
following equipment or operating characteristics:
(1) Use. Where fuses are used to protect conductors and
a. An accessible mechanical or other approved means for equipment, a fuse shall be placed in each ungrounded conductor. Two
manual tripping, independent of control power. power fuses shall be permitted to be used in parallel to protect the
b. Be release free (trip free). same load if both fuses have identical ratings and both fuses are
c. If capable of being opened or closed manually while installed in an identified common mounting with electrical
energized, main contacts that operate independently of the speed of the connections that divide the current equally. Power fuses of the vented
manual operation. type shall not be used indoors, under ground, or in metal enclosures
d. A mechanical position indicator at the circuit breaker to show unless identified for the use.
the open or closed position of the main contacts. (2) Interrupting Rating. The interrupting rating of power fuses
e. A means of indicating the open and closed position of the shall not be less than the maximum fault current the fuse is required to
breaker at the point(s) from which they may be operated. interrupt, including contributions from all connected sources of
energy.
(3) Nameplate. A circuit breaker shall have a permanent and (3) Voltage Rating. The maximum voltage rating of power fuses
legible nameplate showing manufacturer’s name or trademark, shall not be less than the maximum circuit voltage. Fuses having a
manufacturer’s type or identification number, continuous current minimum recommended operating voltage shall not be applied below
rating, interrupting rating in megavolt-amperes (MVA) or amperes, this voltage.
and maximum voltage rating. Modification of a circuit breaker (4) Identification of Fuse Mountings and Fuse Units. Fuse
affecting its rating(s) shall be accompanied by an appropriate change mountings and fuse units shall have permanent and legible nameplates
of nameplate information. showing the manufacturer’s type or designation, continuous current
rating, interrupting current rating, and maximum voltage rating.
(4) Rating. Circuit breakers shall have the following ratings: (5) Fuses. Fuses that expel flame in opening the circuit shall be
designed or arranged so that they function properly without hazard to
a. The continuous current rating of a circuit breaker shall not be persons or property.
less than the maximum continuous current through the circuit breaker. (6) Fuseholders. Fuseholders shall be designed or installed so that
b. The interrupting rating of a circuit breaker shall not be less they are de-energized while a fuse is being replaced.
than the maximum fault current the circuit breaker will be required to
interrupt, including contributions from all connected sources of Exception: Fuses and fuseholders designed to permit fuse
energy. replacement by licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed
c. The closing rating of a circuit breaker shall not be less than electrical practitioner under the supervision of a licensed electrical
the maximum asymmetrical fault current into which the circuit breaker practitioner using equipment designed for the purpose without de-
can be closed. energizing the fuseholder shall be permitted.
d. The momentary rating of a circuit breaker shall not be less
than the maximum asymmetrical fault current at the point of (7) High-Voltage Fuses. Metal-enclosed switchgear and
installation. substations that utilize high-voltage fuses shall be provided with a
e. The rated maximum voltage of a circuit breaker shall not be gang-operated disconnecting switch. Isolation of the fuses from the
less than the maximum circuit voltage. circuit shall be provided by either connecting a switch between the
source and the fuses or providing roll-out switch and fuse-type
construction. The switch shall be of the load-interrupter type, unless
mechanically or electrically interlocked with a load-interrupting
device arranged to reduce the load to the interrupting capability of the (d) Oil-Filled Cutouts.
switch.
(1) Continuous Current Rating. The continuous current rating of
Exception: More than one switch shall be permitted as the oil-filled cutouts shall not be less than the maximum continuous
disconnecting means for one set of fuses where the switches are current through the cutout.
installed to provide connection to more than one set of supply (2) Interrupting Rating. The interrupting rating of oil-filled cutouts
conductors. The switches shall be mechanically or electrically shall not be less than the maximum fault current the oil-filled cutout is
interlocked to permit access to the fuses only when all switches are required to interrupt, including contributions from all connected
open. A conspicuous sign shall be placed at the fuses identifying the sources of energy.
presence of more than one source. (3) Voltage Rating. The maximum voltage rating of oil-filled
cutouts shall not be less than the maximum circuit voltage.
(c) Distribution Cutouts and Fuse Links — Expulsion Type. (4) Fault Closing Rating. Oil-filled cutouts shall have a fault
closing rating not less than the maximum asymmetrical fault current
(1) Installation. Cutouts shall be located so that they may be that can occur at the cutout location, unless suitable interlocks or
readily and safely operated and re-fused, and so that the exhaust of the operating procedures preclude the possibility of closing into a fault.
fuses does not endanger persons. Distribution cutouts shall not be used (5) Identification. Oil-filled cutouts shall have a permanent and
indoors, underground, or in metal enclosures. legible nameplate showing the rated continuous current, rated
(2) Operation. Where fused cutouts are not suitable to interrupt the maximum voltage, and rated interrupting current.
circuit manually while carrying full load, an approved means shall be (6) Fuse Links. Fuse links shall have a permanent and legible
installed to interrupt the entire load. Unless the fused cutouts are identification showing the rated continuous current.
interlocked with the switch to prevent opening of the cutouts under (7) Location. Cutouts shall be located so that they are readily and
load, a conspicuous sign shall be placed at such cutouts identifying safely accessible for re-fusing, with the top of the cutout not over
that they shall not be operated under load. 1 500 mm above the floor or platform.
(3) Interrupting Rating. The interrupting rating of distribution (8) Enclosure. Suitable barriers or enclosures shall be provided to
cutouts shall not be less than the maximum fault current the cutout is prevent contact with nonshielded cables or energized parts of oil-filled
required to interrupt, including contributions from all connected cutouts.
sources of energy.
(4) Voltage Rating. The maximum voltage rating of cutouts shall (e) Load Interrupters. Load-interrupter switches shall be permitted
not be less than the maximum circuit voltage. if suitable fuses or circuit breakers are used in conjunction with these
(5) Identification. Distribution cutouts shall have on their body, devices to interrupt fault currents. Where these devices are used in
door, or fuse tube a permanent and legible nameplate or identification combination, they shall be coordinated electrically so that they will
showing the manufacturer’s type or designation, continuous current safely withstand the effects of closing, carrying, or interrupting all
rating, maximum voltage rating, and interrupting rating. possible currents up to the assigned maximum short-circuit rating.
(6) Fuse Links. Fuse links shall have a permanent and legible
identification showing continuous current rating and type. Where more than one switch is installed with interconnected load
(7) Structure Mounted Outdoors. The height of cutouts mounted terminals to provide for alternate connection to different supply
outdoors on structures shall provide safe clearance between lowest conductors, each switch shall be provided with a conspicuous sign
energized parts (open or closed position) and standing surfaces, in identifying this hazard.
accordance with 1.10.3.5(e).
(1) Continuous Current Rating. The continuous current rating of
interrupter switches shall equal or exceed the maximum continuous
current at the point of installation. (2) Mechanical interlocks
(2) Voltage Rating. The maximum voltage rating of interrupter (3) Switching procedure prominently displayed at the switching
switches shall equal or exceed the maximum circuit voltage. location
(3) Identification. Interrupter switches shall have a permanent and
legible nameplate including the following information: manufacturer’s 4.90.2.4 Minimum Space Separation. In field-fabricated
type or designation, continuous current rating, interrupting current installations, the minimum air separation between bare live conductors
rating, fault closing rating, maximum voltage rating. and between such conductors and adjacent grounded surfaces shall not
(4) Switching of Conductors. The switching mechanism shall be be less than the values given in Table 4.90.2.4. These values shall not
arranged to be operated from a location where the operator is not apply to interior portions or exterior terminals of equipment designed,
exposed to energized parts and shall be arranged to open all manufactured, and tested in accordance with accepted national
ungrounded conductors of the circuit simultaneously with one standards.
operation. Switches shall be arranged to be locked in the open
position. Metal-enclosed switches shall be operable from outside the 4.90.3 Equipment — Metal-Enclosed Power Switchgear and
enclosure. Industrial Control Assemblies
(5) Stored Energy for Opening. The stored-energy operator shall
be permitted to be left in the uncharged position after the switch has 4.90.3.1 General. This part covers assemblies of metal-enclosed
been closed if a single movement of the operating handle charges the power switchgear and industrial control, including but not limited to
operator and opens the switch. switches, interrupting devices and their control, metering, protection
(6) Supply Terminals. The supply terminals of fused interrupter and regulating equipment, where an integral part of the assembly, with
switches shall be installed at the top of the switch enclosure, or, if the associated interconnections and supporting structures. This part also
terminals are located elsewhere, the equipment shall have barriers includes metal-enclosed power switchgear assemblies that form a part
installed so as to prevent persons from accidentally contacting of unit substations, power centers, or similar equipment.
energized parts or dropping tools or fuses into energized parts.
4.90.3.2 Arrangement of Devices in Assemblies. Arrangement of
4.90.2.2 Isolating Means. Means shall be provided to completely devices in assemblies shall be such that individual components can
isolate an item of equipment. The use of isolating switches shall not be safely perform their intended function without adversely affecting the
required where there are other ways of de-energizing the equipment safe operation of other components in the assembly.
for inspection and repairs, such as draw-out-type metal-enclosed 4.90.3.3 Guarding of High-Voltage Energized Parts Within a
switchgear units and removable truck panels. Compartment.

Isolating switches not interlocked with an approved circuit- Where access for other than visual inspection is required to a
interrupting device shall be provided with a sign warning against compartment that contains energized high-voltage parts, barriers shall
opening them under load. be provided to prevent accidental contact by persons, tools, or other
equipment with energized parts. Exposed live parts shall only be
A fuseholder and fuse, designed for the purpose, shall be permitted as permitted in compartments accessible to licensed electrical practitioner
an isolating switch. or non licensed electrical practitioner under the supervision of a
licensed electrical practitioner. Fuses and fuseholders designed to
4.90.2.3 Voltage Regulators. Proper switching sequence for enable future replacement without de-energizing the fuse holder shall
regulators shall be ensured by use of one of the following: only be permitted for use by licensed electrical practitioner or non
licensed electrical practitioner under the supervision of a licensed
(1) Mechanically sequenced regulator bypass switch(es) electrical practitioner.
 Table 4.90.2.4 Minimum Clearance of Live Parts*
Minimum Clearance of Live Parts
Nominal Impulse Withstand, B.I.L (kV) Phase-to-Phase Phase-to-Ground
Voltage Rating Indoors Outdoors Indoors Outdoors
(kV) Indoors Outdoors (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
2.4–4.16 60 95 115 180 80 155
7.2 75 95 140 180 105 155
13.8 95 110 195 305 130 180
14.4 110 110 230 305 170 180

23 125 150 270 385 190 255

34.5 150 150 320 385 245 255
200 200 460 460 335 335
46 — 20 — 460 — 335
— 250 — 535 — 435
69 — 250 — 535 — 435
— 350 — 790 — 635

115 — 550 — 1350 — 1070

138 — 550 — 1350 — 1070
— 650 — 1605 — 1270
161 — 650 — 1605 — 1270
— 750 — 1830 — 1475
230 — 750 — 1830 — 1475
— 900 — 2265 — 1805
— 1050 — 2670 — 2110
*The values given are the minimum clearance for rigid parts and bare conductors under favorable service conditions. They shall be increased
for conductor movement or under unfavorable service conditions or wherever space limitations permit. The selection of the associated impulse
withstand voltage for a particular system voltage is determined by the characteristics of the surge protective equipment.
4.90.3.4 Guarding of Low-Voltage Energized Parts Within a
Compartment. Energized bare parts mounted on doors shall be 4.90.3.9 Door Stops and Cover Plates. External hinged doors or
guarded where the door must be opened for maintenance of equipment covers shall be provided with stops to hold them in the open position.
or removal of draw-out equipment. Cover plates intended to be removed for inspection of energized parts
or wiring shall be equipped with lifting handles and shall not exceed
4.90.3.5 Clearance for Cable Conductors Entering Enclosure. The 1.1 m2 (12 ft2) in area or 27 kg (60 lb) in weight, unless they are
unobstructed space opposite terminals or opposite raceways or cables hinged and bolted or locked.
entering a switchgear or control assembly shall be adequate for the
type of conductor and method of termination. 4.90.3.10 Gas Discharge from Interrupting Devices. Gas discharged
during operating of interrupting devices shall be directed so as not to
4.90.3.6 Accessibility of Energized Parts. endanger personnel.

(a) High-Voltage Equipment. Doors that would provide 4.90.3.11 Inspection Windows. Windows intended for inspection of
unqualified persons access to high-voltage energized parts shall be disconnecting switches or other devices shall be of suitable transparent
locked. material.

(b) Low-Voltage Control Equipment. Low-voltage control 4.90.3.12 Location of Devices.

equipment, relays, motors, and the like shall not be installed in
compartments with exposed high-voltage energized parts or high- (a) Control and Instrument Transfer Switch Handles or
voltage wiring unless either of the following conditions is met: Pushbuttons. Control and instrument transfer switch handles or
pushbuttons other than those covered in 4.90.3.12(b) shall be in a
(1) The access means is interlocked with the high-voltage switch readily accessible location at an elevation of not over 2 000 mm.
or disconnecting means to prevent the access means from being
opened or removed. Exception: Operating handles requiring more than 23 kg (50 lb) of
force shall be located no higher than 1 700 mm in either the open or
(2) The high-voltage switch or disconnecting means is in the closed position.
isolating position.
(b) Infrequently Operated Devices. Operating handles for
(c) High-Voltage Instruments or Control Transformers and infrequently operated devices, such as drawout fuses, fused potential
Space Heaters. High-voltage instrument or control transformers and or control transformers and their primary disconnects, and bus transfer
space heaters shall be permitted to be installed in the high-voltage switches, shall be permitted to be located where they are safely
compartment without access restrictions beyond those that apply to the operable and serviceable from a portable platform.
high-voltage compartment generally.
4.90.3.13 Interlocks — Interrupter Switches. Interrupter switches
4.90.3.7 Grounding. Frames of switchgear and control assemblies equipped with stored energy mechanisms shall have mechanical
shall be grounded. interlocks to prevent access to the switch compartment unless the
stored energy mechanism is in the discharged or blocked position.
4.90.3.8 Grounding of Devices. Devices with metal cases or frames,
or both, such as instruments, relays, meters, and instrument and 4.90.3.14 Stored Energy for Opening. The stored energy operator
control transformers, located in or on switchgear or control, shall have shall be permitted to be left in the uncharged position after the switch
the frame or case grounded. has been closed if a single movement of the operating handle charges
the operator and opens the switch. 4.90.4 Mobile and Portable Equipment

4.90.3.15 Fused Interrupter Switches. 4.90.4.1 General.

(a) Supply Terminals. The supply terminals of fused interrupter (a) Covered. The provisions of this part shall apply to installations
switches shall be installed at the top of the switch enclosure or, if the and use of high-voltage power distribution and utilization equipment
terminals are located elsewhere, the equipment shall have barriers that is portable, mobile, or both, such as substations and switch houses
installed so as to prevent persons from accidentally contacting mounted on skids, trailers, or cars; mobile shovels; draglines; cranes;
energized parts or dropping tools or fuses into energized parts. hoists; drills; dredges; compressors; pumps; conveyors; underground
excavators; and the like.
(b) Backfeed. Where fuses can be energized by backfeed, a sign
shall be placed on the enclosure door identifying this hazard. (b) Other Requirements. The requirements of this part shall be
additional to, or amendatory of, those prescribed in Articles 1.1
(c) Switching Mechanism. The switching mechanism shall be through 7.25 of this Code. Special attention shall be paid to Article
arranged to be operated from a location outside the enclosure where 2.50.
the operator is not exposed to energized parts and shall be arranged to
open all ungrounded conductors of the circuit simultaneously with one (c) Protection. Adequate enclosures, guarding, or both, shall be
operation. Switches shall be capable of being locked in the open provided to protect portable and mobile equipment from physical
position. damage.

4.90.3.16 Circuit Breakers — Interlocks. (d) Disconnecting Means. Disconnecting means shall be installed
for mobile and portable high-voltage equipment according to the
(a) Circuit Breakers. Circuit breakers equipped with stored energy requirements of Part 2.30.8 and shall disconnect all ungrounded
mechanisms shall be designed to prevent the release of the stored conductors.
energy unless the mechanism has been fully charged.
4.90.4.2 Overcurrent Protection. Motors driving single or multiple
(b) Mechanical Interlocks. Mechanical interlocks shall be provided dc generators supplying a system operating on a cyclic load basis do
in the housing to prevent the complete withdrawal of the circuit not require overload protection, provided that the thermal rating of the
breaker from the housing when the stored energy mechanism is in the ac drive motor cannot be exceeded under any operating condition. The
fully charged position, unless a suitable device is provided to block the branch-circuit protective device(s) shall provide short-circuit and
closing function of the circuit breaker before complete withdrawal. locked-rotor protection and shall be permitted to be external to the
equipment.
4.90.3.17 Metal Enclosed and Metal Clad Service Equipment.
Metal enclosed and metal clad switchgear installed as high-voltage 4.90.4.3 Enclosures. All energized switching and control parts shall
service equipment shall include a ground bus for the connection of be enclosed in effectively grounded metal cabinets or enclosures.
service cable shields and to facilitate the attachment of safety grounds These cabinets or enclosures shall be marked “DANGER — HIGH
for personnel protection. This bus shall be extended into the VOLTAGE — KEEP OUT” and shall be locked so that only
compartment where the service conductors are terminated. authorized and licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed
electrical practitioner under the supervision of a licensed electrical
practitioner can enter. Circuit breakers and protective equipment shall
have the operating means projecting through the metal cabinet or
enclosure so these units can be reset without opening locked doors.
With doors closed, reasonable safe access for normal operation of 4.90.5.3 Branch-Circuit Requirements.
these units shall be provided.
(a) Rating. Each boiler shall be supplied from an individual branch
4.90.4.4 Collector Rings. The collector ring assemblies on revolving- circuit rated not less than 100 percent of the total load.
type machines (shovels, draglines, etc.) shall be guarded to prevent
accidental contact with energized parts by personnel on or off the (b) Common-Trip Fault-Interrupting Device. The circuit shall be
machine. protected by a 3-phase, common-trip fault-interrupting device, which
shall be permitted to automatically reclose the circuit upon removal of
4.90.4.5 Power Cable Connections to Mobile Machines. A metallic an overload condition but shall not reclose after a fault condition.
enclosure shall be provided on the mobile machine for enclosing the
terminals of the power cable. The enclosure shall include provisions (c) Phase-Fault Protection. Phase-fault protection shall be
for a solid connection for the ground wire(s) terminal to effectively provided in each phase, consisting of a separate phase-overcurrent
ground the machine frame. Ungrounded conductors shall be attached relay connected to a separate current transformer in the phase.
to insulators or be terminated in approved high-voltage cable couplers
(which include ground wire connectors) of proper voltage and ampere (d) Ground Current Detection. Means shall be provided for
rating. The method of cable termination used shall prevent any strain detection of the sum of the neutral and ground currents and shall trip
or pull on the cable from stressing the electrical connections. The the circuit-interrupting device if the sum of those currents exceeds the
enclosure shall have provision for locking so only authorized and greater of 5 amperes or 7½ percent of the boiler full-load current for
licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner 10 seconds or exceeds an instantaneous value of 25 percent of the
under the supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner may open it boiler full-load current.
and shall be marked
(e) Grounded Neutral Conductor. The grounded neutral conductor
DANGER — HIGH VOLTAGE — KEEP OUT. shall be as follows:

4.90.4.6 High-Voltage Portable Cable for Main Power Supply. (1) Connected to the pressure vessel containing the electrodes
Flexible high-voltage cable supplying power to portable or mobile (2) Insulated for not less than 600 volts
equipment shall comply with Article 2.50 and Part 4.0.3. (3) Have not less than the ampacity of the largest ungrounded
branch-circuit conductor
4.90.5 Electrode-Type Boilers (4) Installed with the ungrounded conductors in the same
raceway, cable, or cable tray, or, where installed as open conductors,
4.90.5.1 General. The provisions of this part shall apply to boilers in close proximity to the ungrounded conductors
operating over 600 volts, nominal, in which heat is generated by the (5) Not used for any other circuit
passage of current between electrodes through the liquid being heated.
4.90.5.4 Pressure and Temperature Limit Control. Each boiler shall
4.90.5.2 Electric Supply System. Electrode-type boilers shall be be equipped with a means to limit the maximum temperature, pressure,
supplied only from a 3-phase, 4-wire solidly grounded wye system, or or both, by directly or indirectly interrupting all current flow through
from isolating transformers arranged to provide such a system. Control the electrodes. Such means shall be in addition to the temperature,
circuit voltages shall not exceed 150 volts, shall be supplied from a pressure, or both, regulating systems and pressure relief or safety
grounded system, and shall have the controls in the ungrounded valves.
conductor.
4.90.5.5 Grounding. All exposed non–current-carrying metal parts of
the boiler and associated exposed grounded structures or equipment
shall be bonded to the pressure vessel or to the neutral conductor to
which the vessel is connected in accordance with 2.50.5.13, except the
ampacity of the bonding jumper shall not be less than the ampacity of
the neutral conductor.
 (a) Electrical apparatus that has an alternative type of protection for
use in the appropriate hazardous (classified) location.
(b) Electrical apparatus not so protected that shall not be used in a
Chapter 5. Special Occupancies hazardous (classified) location.

FPN: Associated nonincendive field wiring apparatus has designated associated

nonincendive field wiring apparatus connections for nonincendive field wiring
ARTICLE 5.0 — HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATIONS, apparatus and may also have connections for other electrical apparatus.
CLASSES I, II, AND III, DIVISIONS 1 AND 2
Combustible Gas Detection System. A protection technique utilizing
FPN: Rules that are followed by a reference in brackets contain text that has been stationary gas detectors in industrial establishments.
extracted from NFPA 497, Recommended Practice for the Classification of Flammable
Liquids, Gases, or Vapors and of Hazardous (Classified) Locations for Electrical
Installations in Chemical Process Areas, 2004 edition, and NFPA 499, Recommended Control Drawing. A drawing or other document provided by the
Practice for the Classification of Combustible Dusts and of Hazardous (Classified) manufacturer of the intrinsically safe or associated apparatus, or of the
Locations for Electrical Installation in Chemical Process Areas, 2004 edition. Only
editorial changes were made to the extracted text to make it consistent with this Code. nonincendive field wiring apparatus or associated nonincendive field
wiring apparatus, that details the allowed interconnections between the
5.0.1.1 Scope — Articles 5.0 Through 5.4. Articles 5.0 through 5.4 intrinsically safe and associated apparatus or between the nonincendive
cover the requirements for electrical and electronic equipment and wiring field wiring apparatus or associated nonincendive field wiring apparatus.
for all voltages in Class I, Divisions 1 and 2; Class II, Divisions 1 and 2;
and Class III, Divisions 1 and 2 locations where fire or explosion hazards Dust-Ignitionproof. Equipment enclosed in a manner that excludes
may exist due to flammable gases or vapors, flammable liquids, dusts and does not permit arcs, sparks, or heat otherwise generated or
combustible dust, or ignitible fibers or flyings. liberated inside of the enclosure to cause ignition of exterior
accumulations or atmospheric suspensions of a specified dust on or in the
FPN No. 1: The unique hazards associated with explosives, pyrotechnics, and vicinity of the enclosure.
blasting agents are not addressed in this article.
FPN: For further information on dust-ignitionproof enclosures, see Type 9 enclosure in
FPN No. 2: For the requirements for electrical and electronic equipment and wiring for
ANSI/NEMA 250-1991, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, and ANSI/UL 1203-1994,
all voltages in Class I, Zone 0, Zone 1, and Zone 2 hazardous (classified) locations
Explosionproof and Dust-Ignitionproof Electrical Equipment for Hazardous (Classified)
where fire or explosion hazards may exist due to flammable gases or vapors or
Locations.
flammable liquids, refer to Article 5.5.

FPN No. 3: For the requirements for electrical and electronic equipment and wiring for Dusttight. Enclosures constructed so that dust will not enter under
all voltages in Zone 20, Zone 21, and Zone 22 hazardous (classified) locations where
fire or explosion hazards may exist due to combustible dusts or ignitible fibers or
specified test conditions.
flyings, refer to Article 5.6.
FPN: See ANSI/ISA 12.12.01-2000, Nonincendive Electrical Equipment for Use in
Class I and II, Division 2, and Class III, Divisions 1 and 2 Hazardous (Classified)
5.0.1.2 Definitions. For purposes of Articles 5.0 through 5.4 and Articles Locations, and UL 1604-1994, Electrical Equipment for Use in Class I and II, Division
5.10 through 5.16, the following definitions apply. 2 and Class III Hazardous (Classified) Locations.

Associated Nonincendive Field Wiring Apparatus. Apparatus in Electrical and Electronic Equipment. Materials, fittings, devices,
which the circuits are not necessarily nonincendive themselves but that appliances, and the like that are part of, or in connection with, an
affect the energy in nonincendive field wiring circuits and are relied electrical installation.
upon to maintain nonincendive energy levels. Associated nonincendive
field wiring apparatus may be either of the following:
 FPN: Portable or transportable equipment having self-contained power supplies, such ignition of a specified flammable gas–air, vapor–air, or dust–air mixture
as battery-operated equipment, could potentially become an ignition source in
hazardous (classified) locations. See ISA-RP12.12.03-2002, Portable Electronic due to arcing or thermal means.
Products Suitable for Use in Class I and II, Division 2, Class I Zone 2 and Class III,
Division 1 and 2 Hazardous (Classified) Locations. FPN: For further information, see ANSI/ISA 12.12.01-2000, Nonincendive Electrical
Equipment for Use in Class I and II, Division 2, and Class III, Divisions 1 and 2
Hazardous (Classified) Locations.
Explosionproof Apparatus. Apparatus enclosed in a case that is
capable of withstanding an explosion of a specified gas or vapor that may
Nonincendive Field Wiring. Wiring that enters or leaves an
occur within it and of preventing the ignition of a specified gas or vapor
equipment enclosure and, under normal operating conditions of the
surrounding the enclosure by sparks, flashes, or explosion of the gas or
equipment, is not capable, due to arcing or thermal effects, of igniting the
vapor within, and that operates at such an external temperature that a
flammable gas–air, vapor–air, or dust–air mixture. Normal operation
surrounding flammable atmosphere will not be ignited thereby.
includes opening, shorting, or grounding the field wiring.
FPN: For further information, see ANSI/UL 1203-1994, Explosion-Proof and Dust-
Ignition-Proof Electrical Equipment for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations. Nonincendive Field Wiring Apparatus. Apparatus intended to be
connected to nonincendive field wiring.
Hermetically Sealed. Equipment sealed against the entrance of an
external atmosphere where the seal is made by fusion, for example, FPN: For further information see ANSI/ISA 12.12.01-2000, Nonincendive Electrical
Equipment for Use in Class I and II, Division 2, and Class III, Divisions 1 and 2
soldering, brazing, welding, or the fusion of glass to metal. Hazardous (Classified) Locations.

FPN: For further information, see ANSI/ISA 12.12.01-2000, Nonincendive Electrical

Equipment for Use in Class I and II, Division 2, and Class III, Division 1 and 2 Oil Immersion. Electrical equipment immersed in a protective liquid
Hazardous (Classified) Locations. in such a way that an explosive atmosphere that may be above the liquid
or outside the enclosure cannot be ignited.
Nonincendive Circuit. A circuit, other than field wiring, in which any
arc or thermal effect produced under intended operating conditions of the FPN: For further information, see ANSI/UL 698-1995, Industrial Control Equipment for
Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations.
equipment is not capable, under specified test conditions, of igniting the
flammable gas–air, vapor–air, or dust–air mixture.
Purged and Pressurized. The process of (1) purging, supplying an
FPN: Conditions are described in ANSI/ISA 12.12.01-2000, Nonincendive Electrical enclosure with a protective gas at a sufficient flow and positive pressure
Equipment for Use in Class I and II, Division 2, and Class III, Divisions 1 and 2 to reduce the concentration of any flammable gas or vapor initially
Hazardous (Classified) Locations. present to an acceptable level; and (2) pressurization, supplying an
enclosure with a protective gas with or without continuous flow at
Nonincendive Component. A component having contacts for making sufficient pressure to prevent the entrance of a flammable gas or vapor, a
or breaking an incendive circuit and the contacting mechanism is combustible dust, or an ignitible fiber.
constructed so that the component is incapable of igniting the specified
flammable gas–air or vapor–air mixture. The housing of a nonincendive FPN: For further information, see ANSI/ NFPA 496-2003, Purged and Pressurized
component is not intended to exclude the flammable atmosphere or Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.
contain an explosion.
Unclassified Locations. Locations determined to be neither Class I,
FPN: For further information, see UL 1604-1994, Electrical Equipment for Use in Division 1; Class I, Division 2; Class I, Zone 0; Class I, Zone 1; Class I,
Class I and II, Division 2, and Class III Hazardous (Classified) Locations. Zone 2; Class II, Division 1; Class II, Division 2; Class III, Division 1;
Class III, Division 2; or any combination thereof.
Nonincendive Equipment. Equipment having electrical/electronic
circuitry that is incapable, under normal operating conditions, of causing
5.0.1.3 Other Articles. Except as modified in Articles 5.0 through 5.4,
FPN No. 5: For further information on electrical systems for hazardous (classified)
all other applicable rules contained in this Code shall apply to electrical locations on offshore oil- and gas-producing platforms, see ANSI/API RP 14F-1999,
equipment and wiring installed in hazardous (classified) locations. Recommended Practice for Design and Installation of Electrical Systems for Fixed
and Floating Offshore Petroleum Facilities for Unclassified and Class I, Division 1 and
Division 2 Locations.
5.0.1.4 General.
5.0.1.5 Classifications of Locations.
(a) Documentation. All areas designated as hazardous (classified)
locations shall be properly documented. This documentation shall be (a) Classifications of Locations. Locations shall be classified
available to those authorized to design, install, inspect, maintain, or depending on the properties of the flammable vapors, liquids, or gases, or
operate electrical equipment at the location. combustible dusts or fibers that may be present, and the likelihood that a
flammable or combustible concentration or quantity is present. Where
(b) Reference Standards. Important information relating to topics pyrophoric materials are the only materials used or handled, these
covered in Chapter 5 may be found in other publications. locations shall not be classified. Each room, section, or area shall be
FPN No. 1: It is important that the authority having jurisdiction be familiar with
considered individually in determining its classification.
recorded industrial experience as well as with the standards of the National Fire
Protection Association (NFPA), the American Petroleum Institute (API), and the FPN: Through the exercise of ingenuity in the layout of electrical installations for
Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (ISA) that may be of use in the hazardous (classified) locations, it is frequently possible to locate much of the
classification of various locations, the determination of adequate ventilation, and the equipment in a reduced level of classification or in an unclassified location and, thus,
protection against static electricity and lightning hazards. to reduce the amount of special equipment required.

FPN No. 2: For further information on the classification of locations, see NFPA 30-
2003, Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code; NFPA 32-2004, Standard for
Rooms and areas containing ammonia refrigeration systems that are
Drycleaning Plants; NFPA 33-2003, Standard for Spray Application Using Flammable equipped with adequate mechanical ventilation may be classified as
or Combustible Materials; NFPA 34-2003, Standard for Dipping and Coating “unclassified” locations.
Processes Using Flammable or Combustible Liquids; NFPA 35-1999, Standard for the
Manufacture of Organic Coatings; NFPA 36-2004, Standard for Solvent Extraction
Plants; NFPA 45-2004, Standard on Fire Protection for Laboratories Using Chemicals; FPN: For further information regarding classification and ventilation of areas involving
NFPA 50A-1999, Standard for Gaseous Hydrogen Systems at Consumer Sites; NFPA ammonia, see ANSI/ASHRAE 15-1994, Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration,
50B-1999, Standard for Liquefied Hydrogen Systems at Consumer Sites; NFPA 58- and ANSI/CGA G2.1-1989, Safety Requirements for the Storage and Handling of
2004, Liquefied Petroleum Gas Code; NFPA 59-2004, Utility LP-Gas Plant Code; Anhydrous Ammonia.
NFPA 497-2004, Recommended Practice for the Classification of Flammable Liquids,
Gases, or Vapors and of Hazardous (Classified) Locations for Electrical Installations (b) Class I Locations. Class I locations are those in which flammable
in Chemical Process Areas; NFPA 499-2004, Recommended Practice for the
Classification of Combustible Dusts and of Hazardous (Classified) Locations for gases or vapors are or may be present in the air in quantities sufficient to
Electrical Installations in Chemical Process Areas; NFPA 820-2003, Standard for Fire produce explosive or ignitible mixtures. Class I locations shall include
Protection in Wastewater Treatment and Collection Facilities; ANSI/API RP500-1997,
Recommended Practice for Classification of Locations of Electrical Installations at
those specified in 5.0.1.5(b)(1) and (b)(2).
Petroleum Facilities Classified as Class I, Division 1 and Division 2; ISA 12.10-1988,
Area Classification in Hazardous (Classified) Dust Locations. (1) Class I, Division 1. A Class I, Division 1 location is a location
FPN No. 3: For further information on protection against static electricity and lightning
hazards in hazardous (classified) locations, see NFPA 77-2000, Recommended a. In which ignitible concentrations of flammable gases or vapors
Practice on Static Electricity; NFPA 780-2004, Standard for the Installation of can exist under normal operating conditions, or
Lightning Protection Systems; and API RP 2003-1998, Protection Against Ignitions
Arising Out of Static Lightning and Stray Currents.
b. In which ignitible concentrations of such gases or vapors may
FPN No. 4: For further information on ventilation, see NFPA 30-2003, Flammable and
Combustible Liquids Code; and API RP 500-1997, Recommended Practice for
exist frequently because of repair or maintenance operations or because
Classification of Locations for Electrical Installations at Petroleum Facilities Classified of leakage, or
as Class I, Division 1 and Division 2.
 c. In which breakdown or faulty operation of equipment or a. In which volatile flammable liquids or flammable gases are
processes might release ignitible concentrations of flammable gases or handled, processed, or used, but in which the liquids, vapors, or gases
vapors and might also cause simultaneous failure of electrical equipment will normally be confined within closed containers or closed systems
in such a way as to directly cause the electrical equipment to become a from which they can escape only in case of accidental rupture or
source of ignition. breakdown of such containers or systems or in case of abnormal
operation of equipment, or
FPN No. 1: This classification usually includes the following locations:

(1) Where volatile flammable liquids or liquefied flammable gases are transferred b. In which ignitible concentrations of gases or vapors are
from one container to another normally prevented by positive mechanical ventilation and which might
(2) Interiors of spray booths and areas in the vicinity of spraying and painting become hazardous through failure or abnormal operation of the
operations where volatile flammable solvents are used
(3) Locations containing open tanks or vats of volatile flammable liquids ventilating equipment, or
(4) Drying rooms or compartments for the evaporation of flammable solvents
(5) Locations containing fat- and oil-extraction equipment using volatile flammable
solvents
c. That is adjacent to a Class I, Division 1 location, and to which
(6) Portions of cleaning and dyeing plants where flammable liquids are used ignitible concentrations of gases or vapors might occasionally be
(7) Gas generator rooms and other portions of gas manufacturing plants where communicated unless such communication is prevented by adequate
flammable gas may escape
(8) Inadequately ventilated pump rooms for flammable gas or for volatile positive-pressure ventilation from a source of clean air and effective
flammable liquids safeguards against ventilation failure are provided.
(9) The interiors of refrigerators and freezers in which volatile flammable materials
are stored in open, lightly stoppered, or easily ruptured containers
FPN No. 1: This classification usually includes locations where volatile flammable
(10) All other locations where ignitible concentrations of flammable vapors or gases
liquids or flammable gases or vapors are used but that, in the judgment of the
are likely to occur in the course of normal operations
authority having jurisdiction, would become hazardous only in case of an accident or
of some unusual operating condition. The quantity of flammable material that might
FPN No. 2: In some Division 1 locations, ignitible concentrations of flammable gases
escape in case of accident, the adequacy of ventilating equipment, the total area
or vapors may be present continuously or for long periods of time. Examples include
involved, and the record of the industry or business with respect to explosions or fires
the following:
are all factors that merit consideration in determining the classification and extent of
each location.
(1) The inside of inadequately vented enclosures containing instruments normally
venting flammable gases or vapors to the interior of the enclosure
FPN No. 2: Piping without valves, checks, meters, and similar devices would not
(2) The inside of vented tanks containing volatile flammable liquids
ordinarily introduce a hazardous condition even though used for flammable liquids or
(3) The area between the inner and outer roof sections of a floating roof tank
gases. Depending on factors such as the quantity and size of the containers and
containing volatile flammable fluids
ventilation, locations used for the storage of flammable liquids or liquefied or
(4) Inadequately ventilated areas within spraying or coating operations using
compressed gases in sealed containers may be considered either hazardous
volatile flammable fluids
(classified) or unclassified locations. See NFPA 30-2003, Flammable and
(5) The interior of an exhaust duct that is used to vent ignitible concentrations of
Combustible Liquids Code, and NFPA 58-2004, Liquefied Petroleum Gas Code.
gases or vapors

Experience has demonstrated the prudence of avoiding the (c) Class II Locations. Class II locations are those that are hazardous
installation of instrumentation or other electric equipment in these because of the presence of combustible dust. Class II locations shall
particular areas altogether or where it cannot be avoided because it is include those specified in 5.0.1.5(c)(1) and (c)(2).
essential to the process and other locations are not feasible [see
5.0.1.5(a), FPN] using electric equipment or instrumentation approved (1) Class II, Division 1. A Class II, Division 1 location is a location
for the specific application or consisting of intrinsically safe systems as
described in Article 5.4. a. In which combustible dust is in the air under normal operating
conditions in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitible
(2) Class I, Division 2. A Class I, Division 2 location is a location mixtures, or
 b. Where mechanical failure or abnormal operation of machinery (1) Class III, Division 1. A Class III, Division 1 location is a location
or equipment might cause such explosive or ignitible mixtures to be in which easily ignitible fibers or materials producing combustible
produced, and might also provide a source of ignition through flyings are handled, manufactured, or used.
simultaneous failure of electric equipment, through operation of
protection devices, or from other causes, or FPN No. 1: Such locations usually include some parts of rayon, cotton, and other
textile mills; combustible fiber manufacturing and processing plants; cotton gins and
cotton-seed mills; flax-processing plants; clothing manufacturing plants; woodworking
c. In which Group E combustible dusts may be present in plants; and establishments and industries involving similar hazardous processes or
quantities sufficient to be hazardous. conditions.

FPN No. 2: Easily ignitible fibers and flyings include rayon, cotton (including cotton
FPN: Dusts containing magnesium or aluminum are particularly hazardous, and the linters and cotton waste), sisal or henequen, istle, jute, hemp, tow, cocoa fiber,
use of extreme precaution is necessary to avoid ignition and explosion. oakum, baled waste kapok, Spanish moss, excelsior, and other materials of similar
nature.
(2) Class II, Division 2. A Class II, Division 2 location is a location
(2) Class III, Division 2. A Class III, Division 2 location is a location
a. In which combustible dust due to abnormal operations may be in which easily ignitible fibers are stored or handled other than in the
present in the air in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitible process of manufacture.
mixtures; or
5.0.1.6 Material Groups. For purposes of testing, approval, and area
b. Where combustible dust accumulations are present but are classification, various air mixtures (not oxygen-enriched) shall be
normally insufficient to interfere with the normal operation of electrical grouped in accordance with 5.0.1.6(a) and 5.0.1.6(b).
equipment or other apparatus, but could as a result of infrequent
malfunctioning of handling or processing equipment become suspended Exception: Equipment identified for a specific gas, vapor, or dust.
in the air; or
FPN: This grouping is based on the characteristics of the materials. Facilities are
available for testing and identifying equipment for use in the various atmospheric
c. In which combustible dust accumulations on, in, or in the groups.
vicinity of the electrical equipment could be sufficient to interfere with
the safe dissipation of heat from electrical equipment, or could be (a) Class I Group Classifications. Class I groups shall be according
ignitible by abnormal operation or failure of electrical equipment. to 5.0.1.6(a)(1) through (a)(4).

FPN No. 1: The quantity of combustible dust that may be present and the adequacy of FPN No. 1: FPN Nos. 2 and 3 apply to 5.0.1.6(a).
dust removal systems are factors that merit consideration in determining the
classification and may result in an unclassified area. FPN No. 2: The explosion characteristics of air mixtures of gases or vapors vary with
the specific material involved. For Class I locations, Groups A, B, C, and D, the
FPN No. 2: Where products such as seed are handled in a manner that produces low classification involves determinations of maximum explosion pressure and maximum
quantities of dust, the amount of dust deposited may not warrant classification. safe clearance between parts of a clamped joint in an enclosure. It is necessary,
therefore, that equipment be identified not only for class but also for the specific group
of the gas or vapor that will be present.
(d) Class III Locations. Class III locations are those that are
hazardous because of the presence of easily ignitible fibers or flyings, but FPN No. 3: Certain chemical atmospheres may have characteristics that require
in which such fibers or flyings are not likely to be in suspension in the air safeguards beyond those required for any of the Class I groups. Carbon disulfide is
one of these chemicals because of its low ignition temperature [100°C (212°F)] and
in quantities sufficient to produce ignitible mixtures. Class III locations the small joint clearance permitted to arrest its flame.
shall include those specified in 5.0.1.5(d)(1) and (d)(2).
(1) Group A. Acetylene. [NFPA 497:3.3]
 (2) Group B. Flammable gas, flammable liquid–produced vapor, or
combustible liquid–produced vapor mixed with air that may burn or (1) Group E. Atmospheres containing combustible metal dusts,
explode, having either a maximum experimental safe gap (MESG) value including aluminum, magnesium, and their commercial alloys, or other
less than or equal to 0.45 mm or a minimum igniting current ratio (MIC combustible dusts whose particle size, abrasiveness, and conductivity
ratio) less than or equal to 0.40. [NFPA 497:3.3] present similar hazards in the use of electrical equipment. [NFPA
499:3.3]
FPN: A typical Class I, Group B material is hydrogen.
FPN: Certain metal dusts may have characteristics that require safeguards beyond
Exception No. 1: Group D equipment shall be permitted to be used for those required for atmospheres containing the dusts of aluminum, magnesium, and
their commercial alloys. For example, zirconium, thorium, and uranium dusts have
atmospheres containing butadiene, provided all conduit runs into extremely low ignition temperatures (as low as 20°C) and minimum ignition energies
explosionproof equipment are provided with explosionproof seals lower than any material classified in any of the Class I or Class II groups.
installed within 450 mm of the enclosure.
(2) Group F. Atmospheres containing combustible carbonaceous
Exception No. 2: Group C equipment shall be permitted to be used for dusts that have more than 8 percent total entrapped volatiles (see ASTM
atmospheres containing allyl glycidyl ether, n-butyl glycidyl ether, D 3175-89, Standard Test Method for Volatile Material in the Analysis
ethylene oxide, propylene oxide, and acrolein, provided all conduit runs Sample for Coal and Coke, for coal and coke dusts) or that have been
into explosionproof equipment are provided with explosionproof seals sensitized by other materials so that they present an explosion hazard.
installed within 450 mm of the enclosure. Coal, carbon black, charcoal, and coke dusts are examples of
carbonaceous dusts. [NFPA 499:3.3]
(3) Group C. Flammable gas, flammable liquid–produced vapor, or
combustible liquid–produced vapor mixed with air that may burn or (3) Group G. Atmospheres containing combustible dusts not
explode, having either a maximum experimental safe gap (MESG) value included in Group E or F, including flour, grain, wood, plastic, and
greater than 0.45 mm and less than or equal to 0.75 mm, or a minimum chemicals.
igniting current ratio (MIC ratio) greater than 0.40 and less than or equal
to 0.80. [NFPA 497:3.3] FPN No. 1: For additional information on group classification of Class II materials, see
NFPA 499-2004, Recommended Practice for the Classification of Combustible Dusts
and of Hazardous (Classified) Locations for Electrical Installations in Chemical
FPN: A typical Class I, Group C material is ethylene. Process Areas.

FPN No. 2: The explosion characteristics of air mixtures of dust vary with the
(4) Group D. Flammable gas, flammable liquid–produced vapor, or materials involved. For Class II locations, Groups E, F, and G, the classification
combustible liquid–produced vapor mixed with air that may burn or involves the tightness of the joints of assembly and shaft openings to prevent the
explode, having either a maximum experimental safe gap (MESG) value entrance of dust in the dust-ignitionproof enclosure, the blanketing effect of layers of
dust on the equipment that may cause overheating, and the ignition temperature of
greater than 0.75 mm or a minimum igniting current ratio (MIC ratio) the dust. It is necessary, therefore, that equipment be identified not only for the class,
greater than 0.80. [NFPA 497:3.3] but also for the specific group of dust that will be present.

FPN No. 3: Certain dusts may require additional precautions due to chemical
FPN No. 1: A typical Class I, Group D material is propane.
phenomena that can result in the generation of ignitible gases. See the latest edition
of the Philippine Electrical Code, Part 2, Coal Handling Areas.
FPN No. 2: For classification of areas involving ammonia atmospheres, see
ANSI/ASHRAE 15-1994, Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration, and ANSI/CGA
G2.1-1989, Safety Requirements for the Storage and Handling of Anhydrous 5.0.1.7 Protection Techniques. Section 5.0.1.7(a) through 5.0.1.7(l)
Ammonia. shall be acceptable protection techniques for electrical and electronic
equipment in hazardous (classified) locations.
(b) Class II Group Classifications. Class II groups shall be in
accordance with 5.0.1.6(b)(1) through (b)(3).
 (a) Explosionproof Apparatus. This protection technique shall be (k) Combustible Gas Detection System. A combustible gas detection
permitted for equipment in Class I, Division 1 or 2 locations. system shall be permitted as a means of protection in industrial
establishments with restricted public access and where the conditions of
(b) Dust Ignitionproof. This protection technique shall be permitted maintenance and supervision ensure that only licensed electrical
for equipment in Class II, Division 1 or 2 locations. practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner under the supervision
of a licensed electrical practitioner service the installation. Gas detection
(c) Dusttight. This protection technique shall be permitted for equipment shall be listed for detection of the specific gas or vapor to be
equipment in Class II, Division 2 or Class III, Division 1 or 2 locations. encountered. Where such a system is installed, equipment specified in
5.0.1.7(k)(1), (k)(2), or (k)(3) shall be permitted.
(d) Purged and Pressurized. This protection technique shall be The type of detection equipment, its listing, installation location(s),
permitted for equipment in any hazardous (classified) location for which alarm and shutdown criteria, and calibration frequency shall be
it is identified. documented when combustible gas detectors are used as a protection
technique.
(e) Intrinsic Safety. This protection technique shall be permitted for
equipment in Class I, Division 1 or 2; or Class II, Division 1 or 2; or FPN No. 1: For further information, see ANSI/ISA-12.13.01, Performance
Requirements, Combustible Gas Detectors.
Class III, Division 1 or 2 locations. The provisions of Articles 5.1
through 5.3 and Articles 5.10 through 5.16 shall not be considered FPN No. 2: For further information, see ANSI/API RP 500, Recommended Practice for
applicable to such installations, except as required by Article 5.4, and Classification of Locations for Electrical Installations at Petroleum Facilities Classified
as Class I, Division I or Division 2.
installation of intrinsically safe apparatus and wiring shall be in
accordance with the requirements of Article 5.4. FPN No. 3: For further information, see ISA-RP12.13.02, Installation, Operation, and
Maintenance of Combustible Gas Detection Instruments.

(f) Nonincendive Circuit. This protection technique shall be permitted

(1) Inadequate Ventilation. In a Class I, Division 1 location that is so
for equipment in Class I, Division 2; Class II, Division 2; or Class III,
classified due to inadequate ventilation, electrical equipment suitable for
Division 1 or 2 locations.
Class I, Division 2 locations shall be permitted.
(g) Nonincendive Equipment. This protection technique shall be
(2) Interior of a Building. In a building located in, or with an opening
permitted for equipment in Class I, Division 2; Class II, Division 2; or
into, a Class I, Division 2 location where the interior does not contain a
Class III, Division 1 or 2 locations.
source of flammable gas or vapor, electrical equipment for unclassified
locations shall be permitted.
(h) Nonincendive Component. This protection technique shall be
permitted for equipment in Class I, Division 2; Class II, Division 2; or
(3) Interior of a Control Panel. In the interior of a control panel
Class III, Division 1 or 2 locations.
containing instrumentation utilizing or measuring flammable liquids,
gases, or vapors, electrical equipment suitable for Class I, Division 2
(i) Oil Immersion. This protection technique shall be permitted for
locations shall be permitted.
current-interrupting contacts in Class I, Division 2 locations as described
in 5.1.3.16(b)(1)b.
(l) Other Protection Techniques. Other protection techniques used in
equipment identified for use in hazardous (classified) locations.
(j) Hermetically Sealed. This protection technique shall be permitted
for equipment in Class I, Division 2; Class II, Division 2; or Class III,
Division 1 or 2 locations.
5.0.1.8 Equipment. Articles 5.0 through 5.4 require equipment
construction and installation that ensure safe performance under (2) Equipment that has been identified for a Division 1 location shall
conditions of proper use and maintenance. be permitted in a Division 2 location of the same class, group, and
temperature class and shall comply with (a) or (b) as applicable.
FPN No. 1: It is important that inspection authorities and users exercise more than
ordinary care with regard to installation and maintenance.
a. Intrinsically safe apparatus having a control drawing requiring
FPN No. 2: Since there is no consistent relationship between explosion properties and the installation of associated apparatus for a Division 1 installation shall
ignition temperature, the two are independent requirements. be permitted to be installed in a Division 2 location if the same
FPN No. 3: Low ambient conditions require special consideration. Explosionproof or associated apparatus is used for the Division 2 installation.
dust-ignitionproof equipment may not be suitable for use at temperatures lower than
-25°C (-13°F) unless they are identified for low-temperature service. However, at low
ambient temperatures, flammable concentrations of vapors may not exist in a location
b. Equipment that is required to be explosionproof shall
classified as Class I, Division 1 at normal ambient temperature. incorporate seals per 5.1.2.6(a) or 5.1.2.6(d) when the wiring methods of
5.1.2.1(b) are employed.
(a) Approval for Class and Properties.
(3) Where specifically permitted in Articles 5.1 through 5.3, general-
(1) Equipment shall be identified not only for the class of location purpose equipment or equipment in general-purpose enclosures shall be
but also for the explosive, combustible, or ignitible properties of the permitted to be installed in Division 2 locations if the equipment does not
specific gas, vapor, dust, fiber, or flyings that will be present. In addition, constitute a source of ignition under normal operating conditions.
Class I equipment shall not have any exposed surface that operates at a
temperature in excess of the ignition temperature of the specific gas or (4) Equipment that depends on a single compression seal, diaphragm,
vapor. Class II equipment shall not have an external temperature higher or tube to prevent flammable or combustible fluids from entering the
than that specified in 5.0.1.8(c)(2). Class III equipment shall not exceed equipment shall be identified for a Class I, Division 2 location even if
the maximum surface temperatures specified in 5.3.1.5. installed in an unclassified location. Equipment installed in a Class I,
Division 1 location shall be identified for the Class I, Division 1 location.
FPN: Luminaires (lighting fixtures) and other heat-producing apparatus, switches,
circuit breakers, and plugs and receptacles are potential sources of ignition and are FPN: Equipment used for flow measurement is an example of equipment having a
investigated for suitability in classified locations. Such types of equipment, as well as single compression seal, diaphragm, or tube.
cable terminations for entry into explosionproof enclosures, are available as listed for
Class I, Division 2 locations. Fixed wiring, however, may utilize wiring methods that
are not evaluated with respect to classified locations. Wiring products such as cable, (5) Unless otherwise specified, normal operating conditions for
raceways, boxes, and fittings, therefore, are not marked as being suitable for Class I, motors shall be assumed to be rated full-load steady conditions.
Division 2 locations. Also see 5.0.1.8(b)(6)(a).

Suitability of identified equipment shall be determined by any of the (6) Where flammable gases or combustible dusts are or may be
following: present at the same time, the simultaneous presence of both shall be
considered when determining the safe operating temperature of the
a. Equipment listing or labeling electrical equipment.

FPN: The characteristics of various atmospheric mixtures of gases, vapors, and dusts
b. Evidence of equipment evaluation from a qualified testing depend on the specific material involved.
laboratory or inspection agency concerned with product evaluation
(b) Marking. Equipment shall be marked to show the environment for
c. Evidence acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction such as which it has been evaluated. Unless otherwise specified or allowed in
a manufacturer’s self-evaluation or an owner’s engineering judgment
(b)(6), the marking shall include the information specified in (b)(1) the special range of ambient temperatures. The marking shall include
through (b)(5). either the symbol “Ta” or “Tamb.”

(1) Class. The marking shall specify the class(es) for which the FPN: As an example, such a marking might be “–30°C Ta +40°C.”
equipment is suitable.

(2) Division. The marking shall specify the division if the equipment Table 5.0.1.8(b) Classification of Maximum Surface Temperature
is suitable for Division 2 only. Equipment suitable for Division 1 shall be Temperature Class
Maximum Temperature 0C
permitted to omit the division marking. (T Code)
450 T1
FPN: Equipment not marked to indicate a division, or marked “Division 1” or “Div. 1,” 300 T2
is suitable for both Division 1 and 2 locations; see 5.0.1.8(a)(2). Equipment marked
“Division 2” or “Div. 2” is suitable for Division 2 locations only.
280 T2A
260 T2B
(3) Material Classification Group. The marking shall specify the 230 T2C
applicable material classification group(s) in accordance with 5.0.1.6. 215 T2D
200 T3
Exception: Fixed luminaires (lighting fixtures) marked for use only in 180 T3A
Class I, Division 2 or Class II, Division 2 locations shall not be required 165 T3B
to indicate the group. 160 T3C
135 T4
(4) Equipment Temperature. The marking shall specify the 120 T4A
temperature class or operating temperature at a 40°C ambient 100 T5
temperature, or at the higher ambient temperature if the equipment is 85 T6
rated and marked for an ambient temperature of greater than 40°C. The
temperature class, if provided, shall be indicated using the temperature
class (T Codes) shown in Table 5.0.1.8(b). Equipment for Class I and (6) Special Allowances.
Class II shall be marked with the maximum safe operating temperature,
as determined by simultaneous exposure to the combinations of Class I a. General Purpose Equipment. Fixed general-purpose equipment
and Class II conditions. in Class I locations, other than fixed luminaires (lighting fixtures), that is
acceptable for use in Class I, Division 2 locations shall not be required to
Exception: Equipment of the non–heat-producing type, such as junction be marked with the class, division, group, temperature class, or ambient
boxes, conduit, and fittings, and equipment of the heat-producing type temperature range.
having a maximum temperature not more than 100°C shall not be
required to have a marked operating temperature or temperature class. b. Dusttight Equipment. Fixed dusttight equipment, other than
fixed luminaires (lighting fixtures), that is acceptable for use in Class II,
FPN: More than one marked temperature class or operating temperature, for gases Division 2 and Class III locations shall not be required to be marked with
and vapors, dusts, and different ambient temperatures, may appear.
the class, division, group, temperature class, or ambient temperature
range.
(5) Ambient Temperature Range. For equipment rated for a
temperature range other than –25°C to +40°C, the marking shall specify c. Associated Apparatus. Associated intrinsically safe apparatus
and associated nonincendive field wiring apparatus that are not protected
by an alternative type of protection shall not be marked with the class, entries into explosionproof equipment shall be made up with at least five
division, group, or temperature class. Associated intrinsically safe threads fully engaged.
apparatus and associated nonincendive field wiring apparatus shall be
marked with the class, division, and group of the apparatus to which it is Exception: For listed explosionproof equipment, factory threaded NPT
to be connected. entries shall be made up with at least 4½ threads fully engaged.

d. Simple Apparatus. “Simple apparatus” as defined in Article 5.4, (1) Equipment Provided with Threaded Entries for NPT Threaded
shall not be required to be marked with class, division, group, Conduit or Fittings. For equipment provided with threaded entries for
temperature class, or ambient temperature range. NPT threaded conduit or fittings, listed conduit, conduit fittings, or cable
fittings shall be used.
(c) Temperature.
FPN: Thread form specifications for NPT threads are located in ANSI/ASME B1.20.1-
1983, Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch).
(1) Class I Temperature. The temperature marking specified in
5.0.1.8(b) shall not exceed the ignition temperature of the specific gas or
(2) Equipment Provided with Threaded Entries for Metric Threaded
vapor to be encountered.
Conduit or Fittings. For equipment with metric threaded entries, such
FPN: For information regarding ignition temperatures of gases and vapors, see NFPA
entries shall be identified as being metric, or listed adapters to permit
497-2004, Recommended Practice for the Classification of Flammable Liquids, connection to conduit or NPT-threaded fittings shall be provided with the
Gases, or Vapors, and of Hazardous (Classified) Locations for Electrical Installations equipment. Adapters shall be used for connection to conduit or NPT-
in Chemical Process Areas.
threaded fittings. Listed cable fittings that have metric threads shall be
permitted to be used.
(2) Class II Temperature. The temperature marking specified in
5.0.1.8(b) shall be less than the ignition temperature of the specific dust FPN: Threading specifications for metric threaded entries are located in ISO 965/1-
to be encountered. For organic dusts that may dehydrate or carbonize, the 1980, Metric Screw Threads, and ISO 965/3-1980, Metric Screw Threads.
temperature marking shall not exceed the lower of either the ignition
temperature or 165°C.

FPN: See NFPA 499-2004, Recommended Practice for the Classification of

Combustible Dusts and of Hazardous (Classified) Locations for Electrical Installations
in Chemical Process Areas, for minimum ignition temperatures of specific dusts. Table 5.0.1.8(c)(2) Class II Temperatures
Equipment (Such as Motors or
The ignition temperature for which equipment was approved prior to Equipment Power Transformer) that May Be
this requirement shall be assumed to be as shown in Table 5.0.1.8(c)(2). Not Subject to Overloaded
Class II Group
Overloading Normal Abnormal
0
C Operation Operation
(d) Threading. All NPT threaded conduit and fittings referred to 0 0
C C
herein shall be threaded with a National (American) Standard Pipe Taper E 200 200 200
(NPT) thread that provides a taper of 1 in 16 (19 mm taper per 300 mm). F 200 150 200
Conduit and fittings shall be made wrenchtight to prevent sparking when G 165 120 165
fault current flows through the conduit system, and to ensure the
explosionproof integrity of the conduit system where applicable.
Equipment provided with threaded entries for field wiring connections
shall be installed in accordance with 5.0.1.8(d)(1) or (d)(2). Threaded
 (e) Fiber Optic Cable Assembly. Where a fiber optic cable assembly
contains conductors that are capable of carrying current, the fiber optic (a) Class I, Division 1.
cable assembly shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of
Articles 5.0, 5.1, 5.2, or 5.3, as applicable. (1) General. In Class I, Division 1 locations, the wiring methods in
(a) through (d) shall be permitted.
5.0.1.9 Specific Occupancies. Articles 5.10 through 5.17 cover garages,
aircraft hangars, motor fuel dispensing facilities, bulk storage plants, a. Threaded rigid metal conduit or threaded steel intermediate
spray application, dipping and coating processes, and health care metal conduit.
facilities.
Exception: Rigid nonmetallic conduit complying with Article 352 shall
be permitted where encased in a concrete envelope a minimum of 50 mm
ARTICLE 5.1 — CLASS I LOCATIONS thick and provided with not less than 600 mm of cover measured from
the top of the conduit to grade. The concrete encasement shall be
5.1.1 General permitted to be omitted where subject to the provisions of 5.14.1.8,
Exception No. 2; and 5.15.1.8(a). Threaded rigid metal conduit or
5.1.1.1 Scope. Article 5.1 covers the requirements for electrical and threaded steel intermediate metal conduit shall be used for the last 600
electronic equipment and wiring for all voltages in Class I, Division 1 mm of the underground run to emergence or to the point of connection to
and 2 locations where fire or explosion hazards may exist due to the aboveground raceway. An equipment grounding conductor shall be
flammable gases or vapors or flammable liquids. included to provide for electrical continuity of the raceway system and
for grounding of non–current-carrying metal parts.
FPN: For the requirements for electrical and electronic equipment and wiring for all
voltages in Class I, Zone 0, Zone 1, or Zone 2 hazardous (classified) locations where
fire or explosion hazards may exist due to flammable gases or vapors or flammable
b. Type MI cable with termination fittings listed for the location.
liquids, refer to Article 5.5. Type MI cable shall be installed and supported in a manner to avoid
tensile stress at the termination fittings.
5.1.1.5 General. The general rules of this Code shall apply to the electric
wiring and equipment in locations classified as Class I in 5.0.1.5. c. In industrial establishments with restricted public access, where
the conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that only licensed
Exception: As modified by this article. electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner under the
supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner service the installation,
Equipment listed and marked in accordance with 5.5.1.9(c)(2) for use in Type MC-HL cable, listed for use in Class I, Division 1 locations, with a
Class I, Zone 0, 1, or 2 locations shall be permitted in Class I, Division 2 gas/vaportight continuous corrugated metallic sheath, an overall jacket of
locations for the same gas and with a suitable temperature class. suitable polymeric material, separate grounding conductors in
Equipment listed and marked in accordance with 5.5.1.9(c)(2) for use in accordance with 2.50.6.13, and provided with termination fittings listed
Class I, Zone 0 locations shall be permitted in Class I, Division 1 or for the application.
Division 2 locations for the same gas and with a suitable temperature
class. FPN: See 330.12 for restrictions on use of Type MC cable.

5.1.2 Wiring d. In industrial establishments with restricted public access, where

the conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that only licensed
5.1.2.1 Wiring Methods. Wiring methods shall comply with 5.1.2.1(a) electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner under the
or 5.1.2.1(b). supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner service the installation,
Type ITC-HL cable, listed for use in Class I, Division 1 locations, with a b. Flexible metal conduit with listed fittings
gas/vaportight continuous corrugated metallic sheath, an overall jacket of
suitable polymeric material and provided with termination fittings listed c. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit with listed fittings
for the application.
d. Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit with listed fittings
(2) Flexible Connections. Where necessary to employ flexible
connections, as at motor terminals, flexible fittings listed for Class I, e. Flexible cord listed for extra-hard usage and provided with listed
Division 1 locations or flexible cord in accordance with the provisions of bushed fittings. An additional conductor for grounding shall be included
5.1.3.41 shall be permitted. in the flexible cord.

(3) Boxes and Fittings. All boxes and fittings shall be approved for FPN: See 5.1.2.21(b) for grounding requirements where flexible conduit is used.
Class I, Division 1.
(3) Nonincendive Field Wiring. Nonincendive field wiring shall be
(b) Class I, Division 2. permitted using any of the wiring methods permitted for unclassified
locations. Nonincendive field wiring systems shall be installed in
(1) General. In Class I, Division 2 locations, the following wiring accordance with the control drawing(s). Simple apparatus, not shown on
methods shall be permitted: the control drawing, shall be permitted in a nonincendive field wiring
circuit, provided the simple apparatus does not interconnect the
a. All wiring methods permitted in Article 5.1.2.1(a). nonincendive field wiring circuit to any other circuit.

FPN: Simple apparatus is defined in 5.4.1.2.

b. Threaded rigid metal conduit, threaded steel intermediate metal
conduit.
Separate nonincendive field wiring circuits shall be installed in
accordance with one of the following:
c. Enclosed gasketed busways, enclosed gasketed wireways.
a. In separate cables
d. Type PLTC cable in accordance with the provisions of Article
7.25, or in cable tray systems. PLTC shall be installed in a manner to
b. In multiconductor cables where the conductors of each circuit
avoid tensile stress at the termination fittings.
are within a grounded metal shield
e. Type ITC cable as permitted in 7.27.1.4.
c. In multiconductor cables, where the conductors of each circuit
have insulation with a minimum thickness of 0.25 mm
f. Type MI, MC, MV, or TC cable with termination fittings, or in
cable tray systems and installed in a manner to avoid tensile stress at the
d. Boxes and Fittings. Boxes and fittings shall not be required to be
termination fittings. Single conductor Type MV cables shall be shielded
explosionproof except as required by 5.1.3.6(b)(1), 5.1.3.16(b)(1), and
or metallic armored.
5.1.3.51(b)(1).
(2) Flexible Connections. Where provision must be made for limited
5.1.2.6 Sealing and Drainage. Seals in conduit and cable systems shall
flexibility, one or more of the following shall also be permitted:
comply with 5.1.2.6(a) through 5.1.2.6(f). Sealing compound shall be
used in Type MI cable termination fittings to exclude moisture and other
a. Flexible metal fittings
fluids from the cable insulation.
 FPN No. 1: Seals are provided in conduit and cable systems to minimize the passage (3) Are enclosed within a factory-sealed explosionproof chamber
of gases and vapors and prevent the passage of flames from one portion of the
electrical installation to another through the conduit. Such communication through located within the enclosure, identified for the location, and marked
Type MI cable is inherently prevented by construction of the cable. Unless specifically “factory sealed” or equivalent, unless the enclosure entry is metric
designed and tested for the purpose, conduit and cable seals are not intended to
prevent the passage of liquids, gases, or vapors at a continuous pressure differential
designator 50 mm diameter or larger
across the seal. Even at differences in pressure across the seal equivalent to a few
inches of water, there may be a slow passage of gas or vapor through a seal and (4) Are in nonincendive circuits
through conductors passing through the seal. See 5.1.2.6(e)(2). Temperature
extremes and highly corrosive liquids and vapors can affect the ability of seals to
perform their intended function. See 5.1.2.6(c)(2). Factory-sealed enclosures shall not be considered to serve as a seal
for another adjacent explosionproof enclosure that is required to have a
FPN No. 2: Gas or vapor leakage and propagation of flames may occur through the
2
interstices between the strands of standard stranded conductors larger than 30 mm . conduit seal.
Special conductor constructions, for example, compacted strands or sealing of the
individual strands, are means of reducing leakage and preventing the propagation of Conduit seals shall be installed within 460 mm from the enclosure.
flames.
Only explosionproof unions, couplings, reducers, elbows, capped
(a) Conduit Seals, Class I, Division 1. In Class I, Division 1 elbows, and conduit bodies similar to L, T, and Cross types that are not
locations, conduit seals shall be located in accordance with 5.1.2.6(a)(1) larger than the trade size of the conduit shall be permitted between the
through (a)(4). sealing fitting and the explosionproof enclosure.

(1) Entering Enclosures. In each conduit entry into an explosionproof (2) Pressurized Enclosures. In each conduit entry into a pressurized
enclosure where either of the following apply: enclosure where the conduit is not pressurized as part of the protection
system. Conduit seals shall be installed within 460 mm from the
a. The enclosure contains apparatus, such as switches, circuit pressurized enclosure.
breakers, fuses, relays, or resistors, that may produce arcs, sparks, or FPN No. 1: Installing the seal as close as possible to the enclosure will reduce
high temperatures that are considered to be an ignition source in normal problems with purging the dead airspace in the pressurized conduit.
operation.
FPN No. 2: For further information, see NFPA 496-2003, Standard for Purged and
Pressurized Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.
b. The entry is metric designator 50 mm diameter or larger and the
enclosure contains terminals, splices, or taps. (3) Two or More Explosionproof Enclosures. Where two or more
explosionproof enclosures for which conduit seals are required under
For the purposes of this section, high temperatures shall be 5.1.2.6(a)(1) are connected by nipples or by runs of conduit not more
considered to be any temperatures exceeding 80 percent of the than 900 mm long, a single conduit seal in each such nipple connection
autoignition temperature in degrees Celsius of the gas or vapor involved. or run of conduit shall be considered sufficient if located not more than
460 mm from either enclosure.
Exception to 5.1.2.6(a)(1)a: Seals shall not be required for conduit
entering an enclosure where such switches, circuit breakers, fuses, (4) Class I, Division 1 Boundary. In each conduit run leaving a Class
relays, or resistors comply with one of the following: I, Division 1 location. The sealing fitting shall be permitted on either side
of the boundary of such location within 3 000 mm of the boundary and
(1) Are enclosed within a chamber hermetically sealed against the shall be designed and installed so as to minimize the amount of gas or
entrance of gases or vapors vapor within the Division 1 portion of the conduit from being
communicated to the conduit beyond the seal. Except for listed
(2) Are immersed in oil in accordance with 5.1.3.16(b)(1)b.
explosionproof reducers at the conduit seal, there shall be no union, minimizing passage of gases under normal operating conditions and shall
coupling, box, or fitting between the conduit seal and the point at which be accessible.
the conduit leaves the Division 1 location.
Exception No. 1: Metal conduit that contains no unions, couplings,
Exception No. 1: Metal conduit that contains no unions, couplings, boxes, or fittings, and passes completely through a Class I, Division 2
boxes, or fittings, and passes completely through a Class I, Division 1 location with no fittings less than 300 mm beyond each boundary, shall
location with no fittings less than 300 mm beyond each boundary, shall not be required to be sealed if the termination points of the unbroken
not require a conduit seal if the termination points of the unbroken conduit are in unclassified locations.
conduit are in unclassified locations.
Exception No. 2: Conduit systems terminating at an unclassified
Exception No. 2: For underground conduit installed in accordance with location where a wiring method transition is made to cable tray,
3.0.1.5 where the boundary is beneath the ground, the sealing fitting cablebus, ventilated busway, Type MI cable, or cable not installed in any
shall be permitted to be installed after the conduit leaves the ground, but cable tray or raceway system, shall not be required to be sealed where
there shall be no union, coupling, box, or fitting, other than listed passing from the Class I, Division 2 location into the unclassified
explosionproof reducers at the sealing fitting, in the conduit between the location. The unclassified location shall be outdoors or, if the conduit
sealing fitting and the point at which the conduit leaves the ground. system is all in one room, it shall be permitted to be indoors. The
conduits shall not terminate at an enclosure containing an ignition
(b) Conduit Seals, Class I, Division 2. In Class I, Division 2 source in normal operation.
locations, conduit seals shall be located in accordance with 5.1.2.6(b)(1)
and (b)(2). Exception No. 3: Conduit systems passing from an enclosure or room
that is unclassified as a result of pressurization into a Class I, Division 2
(1) Entering Enclosures. For connections to enclosures that are location shall not require a seal at the boundary.
required to be explosionproof, a conduit seal shall be provided in
accordance with 5.1.2.6(a)(1) and (a)(3). All portions of the conduit run FPN: For further information, refer to NFPA 496-2003, Standard for Purged and
Pressurized Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.
or nipple between the seal and such enclosure shall comply with
5.1.2.1(a).
Exception No. 4: Segments of aboveground conduit systems shall not be
required to be sealed where passing from a Class I, Division 2 location
(2) Class I, Division 2 Boundary. In each conduit run passing from a
into an unclassified location if all of the following conditions are met:
Class I, Division 2 location into an unclassified location. The sealing
fitting shall be permitted on either side of the boundary of such location
(1) No part of the conduit system segment passes through a Class I,
within 3 000 mm of the boundary. Rigid metal conduit or threaded steel
Division 1 location where the conduit contains unions, couplings, boxes,
intermediate metal conduit shall be used between the sealing fitting and
or fittings within 300 mm of the Class I, Division 1 location.
the point at which the conduit leaves the Division 2 location, and a
(2) The conduit system segment is located entirely in outdoor
threaded connection shall be used at the sealing fitting. Except for listed
locations.
reducers at the conduit seal, there shall be no union, coupling, box, or
(3) The conduit system segment is not directly connected to canned
fitting between the conduit seal and the point at which the conduit leaves
pumps, process or service connections for flow, pressure, or analysis
the Division 2 location. Conduits shall be sealed to minimize the amount
measurement, and so forth, that depend on a single compression seal,
of gas or vapor within the Division 2 portion of the conduit from being
diaphragm, or tube to prevent flammable or combustible fluids from
communicated to the conduit beyond the seal. Such seals shall not be
entering the conduit system.
required to be explosionproof but shall be identified for the purpose of
 (4) The conduit system segment contains only threaded metal (6) Conductor Fill. The cross-sectional area of the conductors
conduit, unions, couplings, conduit bodies, and fittings in the permitted in a seal shall not exceed 25 percent of the cross-sectional area
unclassified location. of a rigid metal conduit of the same trade size unless it is specifically
(5) The conduit system segment is sealed at its entry to each identified for a higher percentage of fill.
enclosure or fitting housing terminals, splices, or taps in Class I,
Division 2 locations. (d) Cable Seals, Class I, Division 1. In Class I, Division 1 locations,
cable seals shall be located according to 5.1.2.6(d)(1) through (d)(3).
(c) Class I, Divisions 1 and 2. Seals installed in Class I, Division 1
and Division 2 locations shall comply with 5.1.2.6(c)(1) through (c)(6). (1) At Terminations. Cable shall be sealed at all terminations. The
sealing fitting shall comply with 5.1.2.6(c). Multiconductor Type MC-
Exception: Seals not required to be explosionproof by 5.1.2.6(b)(2) or HL cables with a gas/vaportight continuous corrugated metallic sheath
5.4.1.70. and an overall jacket of suitable polymeric material shall be sealed with a
listed fitting after removing the jacket and any other covering so that the
(1) Fittings. Enclosures for connections or equipment shall be sealing compound surrounds each individual insulated conductor in such
provided with an integral means for sealing, or sealing fittings listed for a manner as to minimize the passage of gases and vapors.
the location shall be used. Sealing fittings shall be listed for use with one
or more specific compounds and shall be accessible. Exception: Shielded cables and twisted pair cables shall not require the
removal of the shielding material or separation of the twisted pairs,
(2) Compound. The compound shall provide a seal against passage provided the termination is by an approved means to minimize the
of gas or vapors through the seal fitting, shall not be affected by the entrance of gases or vapors and prevent propagation of flame into the
surrounding atmosphere or liquids, and shall not have a melting point of cable core.
less than 93°C.
(2) Cables Capable of Transmitting Gases or Vapors. Cables in
(3) Thickness of Compounds. Except for listed cable sealing fittings, conduit with a gas/vaportight continuous sheath capable of transmitting
the thickness of the sealing compound in a completed seal shall not be gases or vapors through the cable core shall be sealed in the Division 1
less than the metric designator (trade size) of the sealing fitting expressed location after removing the jacket and any other coverings so that the
in the units of measurement employed, and in no case less than 16 mm. sealing compound will surround each individual insulated conductor and
the outer jacket.
(4) Splices and Taps. Splices and taps shall not be made in fittings
intended only for sealing with compound, nor shall other fittings in Exception: Multiconductor cables with a gas/vaportight continuous
which splices or taps are made be filled with compound. sheath capable of transmitting gases or vapors through the cable core
shall be permitted to be considered as a single conductor by sealing the
(5) Assemblies. In an assembly where equipment that may produce cable in the conduit within 460 mm of the enclosure and the cable end
arcs, sparks, or high temperatures is located in a compartment separate within the enclosure by an approved means to minimize the entrance of
from the compartment containing splices or taps, and an integral seal is gases or vapors and prevent the propagation of flame into the cable
provided where conductors pass from one compartment to the other, the core, or by other approved methods. For shielded cables and twisted
entire assembly shall be identified for the location. Seals in conduit pair cables, it shall not be required to remove the shielding material or
connections to the compartment containing splices or taps shall be separate the twisted pair.
provided in Class I, Division 1 locations where required by
5.1.2.6(a)(1)b. (3) Cables Incapable of Transmitting Gases or Vapors. Each
multiconductor cable in conduit shall be considered as a single conductor
if the cable is incapable of transmitting gases or vapors through the cable (3) Cables Capable of Transmitting Gases or Vapors. Cables with a
core. These cables shall be sealed in accordance with 5.1.2.6(a). gas/vaportight continuous sheath capable of transmitting gases or vapors
through the cable core shall not be required to be sealed except as
(e) Cable Seals, Class I, Division 2. In Class I, Division 2 locations, required in 5.1.2.6(e)(1), unless the cable is attached to process
cable seals shall be located in accordance with 5.1.2.6(e)(1) through equipment or devices that may cause a pressure in excess of 1 500
(e)(4). pascals (150 mm of water) to be exerted at a cable end, in which case a
seal, barrier, or other means shall be provided to prevent migration of
(1) Terminations. Cables entering enclosures that are required to be flammables into an unclassified location.
explosionproof shall be sealed at the point of entrance. The sealing fitting
shall comply with 5.1.2.6(b)(1). Multiconductor cables with a Exception: Cables with an unbroken gas/vaportight continuous sheath
gas/vaportight continuous sheath capable of transmitting gases or vapors shall be permitted to pass through a Class I, Division 2 location without
through the cable core shall be sealed in a listed fitting in the Division 2 seals.
location after removing the jacket and any other coverings so that the
sealing compound surrounds each individual insulated conductor in such (4) Cables Without Gas/Vaportight Sheath. Cables that do not have
a manner as to minimize the passage of gases and vapors. gas/vaportight continuous sheath shall be sealed at the boundary of the
Multiconductor cables in conduit shall be sealed as described in Division 2 and unclassified location in such a manner as to minimize the
5.1.2.6(d). passage of gases or vapors into an unclassified location.

Exception No. 1: Cables passing from an enclosure or room that is (f) Drainage.
unclassified as a result of Type Z pressurization into a Class I, Division 2
location shall not require a seal at the boundary. (1) Control Equipment. Where there is a probability that liquid or
other condensed vapor may be trapped within enclosures for control
Exception No. 2: Shielded cables and twisted pair cables shall not equipment or at any point in the raceway system, approved means shall
require the removal of the shielding material or separation of the twisted be provided to prevent accumulation or to permit periodic draining of
pairs, provided the termination is by an approved means to minimize the such liquid or condensed vapor.
entrance of gases or vapors and prevent propagation of flame into the
cable core. (2) Motors and Generators. Where the authority having jurisdiction
judges that there is a probability that liquid or condensed vapor may
(2) Cables That Do Not Transmit Gases or Vapors. Cables that have accumulate within motors or generators, joints and conduit systems shall
a gas/vaportight continuous sheath and do not transmit gases or vapors be arranged to minimize the entrance of liquid. If means to prevent
through the cable core in excess of the quantity permitted for seal fittings accumulation or to permit periodic draining are judged necessary, such
shall not be required to be sealed except as required in 5.1.2.6(e)(1). The means shall be provided at the time of manufacture and shall be
minimum length of such cable run shall not be less than that length that considered an integral part of the machine.
limits gas or vapor flow through the cable core to the rate permitted for
seal fittings [(200 cm3/hr) of air at a pressure of 1 500 pascals (150 mm (3) Canned Pumps, Process, or Service Connections, etc. For canned
of water)]. pumps, process, or service connections for flow, pressure, or analysis
measurement, and so forth, that depend on a single compression seal,
FPN No. 1: See ANSI/UL 886-1994, Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use in Hazardous diaphragm, or tube to prevent flammable or combustible fluids from
(Classified) Locations.
entering the electrical raceway or cable system capable of transmitting
FPN No. 2: The cable core does not include the interstices of the conductor strands. fluids, an additional approved seal, barrier, or other means shall be
provided to prevent the flammable or combustible fluid from entering the
raceway or cable system capable of transmitting fluids beyond the point of grounding for service equipment or point of grounding of a
additional devices or means, if the primary seal fails. The additional separately derived system.
approved seal or barrier and the interconnecting enclosure shall meet the
temperature and pressure conditions to which they will be subjected upon Exception: The specific bonding means shall be required only to the
failure of the primary seal, unless other approved means are provided to nearest point where the grounded circuit conductor and the grounding
accomplish this purpose. Drains, vents, or other devices shall be electrode are connected together on the line side of the building or
provided so that primary seal leakage will be obvious. structure disconnecting means as specified in 2.50.2.13(a), (b), and (c),
provided the branch-circuit overcurrent protection is located on the load
FPN: See also the fine print notes to 5.1.2.6. side of the disconnecting means.
Process-connected equipment that is listed and marked “Dual Seal” FPN: See 2.50.5.11 for additional bonding requirements in hazardous (classified)
shall not require additional process sealing when used within the locations.
manufacturer’s ratings.
(b) Types of Equipment Grounding Conductors. Where flexible
FPN: For construction and testing requirements for dual seal process connected metal conduit or liquidtight flexible metal conduit is used as permitted in
equipment, refer to ISA 12.27.01, Requirements for Process Sealing Between 5.1.2.1(b) and is to be relied on to complete a sole equipment grounding
Electrical Systems and Potentially Flammable or Combustible Process Fluids.
path, it shall be installed with internal or external bonding jumpers in
parallel with each conduit and complying with 2.50.5.13.
5.1.2.11 Conductor Insulation, Class I, Divisions 1 and 2. Where
condensed vapors or liquids may collect on, or come in contact with, the
Exception: In Class I, Division 2 locations, the bonding jumper shall be
insulation on conductors, such insulation shall be of a type identified for
permitted to be deleted where all of the following conditions are met:
use under such conditions; or the insulation shall be protected by a sheath
of lead or by other approved means.
(1) Listed liquidtight flexible metal conduit 1 800 mm or less in
length, with fittings listed for grounding, is used.
5.1.2.16 Uninsulated Exposed Parts, Class I, Divisions 1 and 2. There
(2) Overcurrent protection in the circuit is limited to 10 amperes or
shall be no uninsulated exposed parts, such as electric conductors, buses,
less.
terminals, or components, that operate at more than 30 volts (15 volts in
(3) The load is not a power utilization load.
wet locations). These parts shall additionally be protected by a protection
technique according to 5.0.1.7(e), 5.0.1.7(f), or 5.0.1.7(g) that is suitable
5.1.2.26 Surge Protection.
for the location.
(a) Class I, Division 1. Surge arresters, transient voltage surge
5.1.2.21 Grounding and Bonding, Class I, Divisions 1 and 2. Wiring
suppressors (TVSS), and capacitors shall be installed in enclosures
and equipment in Class I, Division 1 and 2 locations shall be grounded as
identified for Class I, Division 1 locations. Surge-protective capacitors
specified in Article 2.50 and with the requirements in 5.1.2.21(a) and
shall be of a type designed for specific duty.
5.1.2.21(b).
(b) Class I, Division 2. Surge arresters and TVSS shall be nonarcing,
(a) Bonding. The locknut-bushing and double-locknut types of
such as metal-oxide varistor (MOV) sealed type, and surge-protective
contacts shall not be depended on for bonding purposes, but bonding
capacitors shall be of a type designed for specific duty. Enclosures shall
jumpers with proper fittings or other approved means of bonding shall be
be permitted to be of the general-purpose type. Surge protection of types
used. Such means of bonding shall apply to all intervening raceways,
other than described in this paragraph shall be installed in enclosures
fittings, boxes, enclosures, and so forth between Class I locations and the
identified for Class I, Division 1 locations.
 for Class I, Division 1 locations include explosionproof enclosures and
5.1.2.31 Multiwire Branch Circuits. In a Class I, Division 1 location, a purged and pressurized enclosures.
multiwire branch circuit shall not be permitted.
FPN: See NFPA 496-2003, Standard for Purged and Pressurized Enclosures for
Electrical Equipment.
Exception: Where the disconnect device(s) for the circuit opens all
ungrounded conductors of the multiwire circuit simultaneously.
(b) Class I, Division 2. In Class I, Division 2 locations, meters,
instruments, and relays shall comply with 5.1.3.6(b)(1) through (b)(6).
5.1.3 Equipment
(1) Contacts. Switches, circuit breakers, and make-and-break
5.1.3.1 Transformers and Capacitors.
contacts of pushbuttons, relays, alarm bells, and horns shall have
enclosures identified for Class I, Division 1 locations in accordance with
(a) Class I, Division 1. In Class I, Division 1 locations, transformers
5.1.3.6(a).
and capacitors shall comply with 5.1.3.1(a)(1) and (a)(2).
Exception: General-purpose enclosures shall be permitted if current-
(1) Containing Liquid That Will Burn. Transformers and capacitors
interrupting contacts comply with one of the following:
containing a liquid that will burn shall be installed only in vaults that
comply with 4.50.3.1 through 4.50.3.8 and with (1) through (4) as
(1) Are immersed in oil
follows:
(2) Are enclosed within a chamber that is hermetically sealed
a. There shall be no door or other communicating opening between
against the entrance of gases or vapors
the vault and the Division 1 location.
(3) Are in nonincendive circuits
b. Ample ventilation shall be provided for the continuous removal
(4) Are listed for Division 2
of flammable gases or vapors.
c. Vent openings or ducts shall lead to a safe location outside of
(2) Resistors and Similar Equipment. Resistors, resistance devices,
buildings.
thermionic tubes, rectifiers, and similar equipment that are used in or in
d. Vent ducts and openings shall be of sufficient area to relieve
connection with meters, instruments, and relays shall comply with
explosion pressures within the vault, and all portions of vent ducts within
5.1.3.6(a).
the buildings shall be of reinforced concrete construction.
Exception: General-purpose-type enclosures shall be permitted if such
(2) Not Containing Liquid That Will Burn. Transformers and
equipment is without make-and-break or sliding contacts [other than as
capacitors that do not contain a liquid that will burn shall be installed in
provided in 5.1.3.6(b)(1)] and if the maximum operating temperature of
vaults complying with 5.1.3.1(a)(1) or be approved for Class I locations.
any exposed surface will not exceed 80 percent of the ignition
temperature in degrees Celsius of the gas or vapor involved or has been
(b) Class I, Division 2. In Class I, Division 2 locations, transformers
tested and found incapable of igniting the gas or vapor. This exception
and capacitors shall comply with 4.50.2.1 through 4.50.2.7.
shall not apply to thermionic tubes.
5.1.3.6 Meters, Instruments, and Relays.
(3) Without Make-or-Break Contacts. Transformer windings,
impedance coils, solenoids, and other windings that do not incorporate
(a) Class I, Division 1. In Class I, Division 1 locations, meters,
sliding or make-or-break contacts shall be provided with enclosures.
instruments, and relays, including kilowatt-hour meters, instrument
General-purpose-type enclosures shall be permitted.
transformers, resistors, rectifiers, and thermionic tubes, shall be provided
with enclosures identified for Class I, Division 1 locations. Enclosures
 (4) General-Purpose Assemblies. Where an assembly is made up of (b) Class I, Division 2. Switches, circuit breakers, motor controllers,
components for which general-purpose enclosures are acceptable as and fuses in Class I, Division 2 locations shall comply with
provided in 5.1.3.6(b)(1), (b)(2), and (b)(3), a single general-purpose 5.1.3.16(b)(1) through (b)(4).
enclosure shall be acceptable for the assembly. Where such an assembly
includes any of the equipment described in 5.1.3.6(b)(2), the maximum (1) Type Required. Circuit breakers, motor controllers, and switches
obtainable surface temperature of any component of the assembly shall intended to interrupt current in the normal performance of the function
be clearly and permanently indicated on the outside of the enclosure. for which they are installed shall be provided with enclosures identified
Alternatively, equipment shall be permitted to be marked to indicate the for Class I, Division 1 locations in accordance with 5.1.3.6(a), unless
temperature class for which it is suitable, using the temperature class (T general-purpose enclosures are provided and any of the following apply:
Code) of Table 5.0.1.8(b).
a. The interruption of current occurs within a chamber hermetically
(5) Fuses. Where general-purpose enclosures are permitted in sealed against the entrance of gases and vapors.
5.1.3.6(b)(1) through (b)(4), fuses for overcurrent protection of b. The current make-and-break contacts are oil-immersed and of
instrument circuits not subject to overloading in normal use shall be the general-purpose type having a 50 mm minimum immersion for power
permitted to be mounted in general-purpose enclosures if each such fuse contacts and a 25 mm minimum immersion for control contacts.
is preceded by a switch complying with 5.1.3.6(b)(1). c. The interruption of current occurs within a factory-sealed
explosionproof chamber.
(6) Connections. To facilitate replacements, process control d. The device is a solid state, switching control without contacts,
instruments shall be permitted to be connected through flexible cord, where the surface temperature does not exceed 80 percent of the ignition
attachment plug, and receptacle, provided all of the following conditions temperature in degrees Celsius of the gas or vapor involved.
apply:
(2) Isolating Switches. Fused or unfused disconnect and isolating
a. A switch complying with 5.1.3.6(b)(1) is provided so that the switches for transformers or capacitor banks that are not intended to
attachment plug is not depended on to interrupt current. interrupt current in the normal performance of the function for which
b. The current does not exceed 3 amperes at 115 volts, nominal. they are installed shall be permitted to be installed in general-purpose
c. The power-supply cord does not exceed 900 mm, is of a type enclosures.
listed for extra-hard usage or for hard usage if protected by location, and
is supplied through an attachment plug and receptacle of the locking and (3) Fuses. For the protection of motors, appliances, and lamps, other
grounding type. than as provided in 5.1.3.16(b)(4), standard plug or cartridge fuses shall
d. Only necessary receptacles are provided. be permitted, provided they are placed within enclosures identified for
e. The receptacle carries a label warning against unplugging under the location; or fuses shall be permitted if they are within general-
load. purpose enclosures, and if they are of a type in which the operating
element is immersed in oil or other approved liquid, or the operating
5.1.3.16 Switches, Circuit Breakers, Motor Controllers, and Fuses. element is enclosed within a chamber hermetically sealed against the
entrance of gases and vapors, or the fuse is a nonindicating, filled,
(a) Class I, Division 1. In Class I, Division 1 locations, switches, current-limiting type.
circuit breakers, motor controllers, and fuses, including pushbuttons,
relays, and similar devices, shall be provided with enclosures, and the (4) Fuses Internal to Luminaires (Lighting Fixtures). Listed cartridge
enclosure in each case, together with the enclosed apparatus, shall be fuses shall be permitted as supplementary protection within luminaires
identified as a complete assembly for use in Class I locations. (lighting fixtures).
5.1.3.21 Control Transformers and Resistors. Transformers, of air, and also arranged to automatically de-energize the equipment
impedance coils, and resistors used as, or in conjunction with, control when the air supply fails
equipment for motors, generators, and appliances shall comply with (3) Of the totally enclosed inert gas-filled type supplied with a
5.1.3.21(a) and 5.1.3.21(b). suitable reliable source of inert gas for pressurizing the enclosure, with
devices provided to ensure a positive pressure in the enclosure and
(a) Class I, Division 1. In Class I, Division 1 locations, transformers, arranged to automatically de-energize the equipment when the gas
impedance coils, and resistors, together with any switching mechanism supply fails
associated with them, shall be provided with enclosures identified for (4) Of a type designed to be submerged in a liquid that is flammable
Class I, Division 1 locations in accordance with 5.1.3.6(a). only when vaporized and mixed with air, or in a gas or vapor at a
pressure greater than atmospheric and that is flammable only when
(b) Class I, Division 2. In Class I, Division 2 locations, control mixed with air; and the machine is arranged so to prevent energizing it
transformers and resistors shall comply with 5.1.3.21(b)(1) through until it has been purged with the liquid or gas to exclude air, and also
(b)(3). arranged to automatically de-energize the equipment when the supply of
liquid or gas or vapor fails or the pressure is reduced to atmospheric
(1) Switching Mechanisms. Switching mechanisms used in
conjunction with transformers, impedance coils, and resistors shall Totally enclosed motors of the types specified in 5.1.3.26(a)(2) or
comply with 5.1.3.16(b). 5.1.3.26(a)(3) shall have no external surface with an operating
temperature in degrees Celsius in excess of 80 percent of the ignition
(2) Coils and Windings. Enclosures for windings of transformers, temperature of the gas or vapor involved. Appropriate devices shall be
solenoids, or impedance coils shall be permitted to be of the general- provided to detect and automatically de-energize the motor or provide an
purpose type. adequate alarm if there is any increase in temperature of the motor
beyond designed limits. Auxiliary equipment shall be of a type identified
(3) Resistors. Resistors shall be provided with enclosures; and the for the location in which it is installed.
assembly shall be identified for Class I locations, unless resistance is
nonvariable and maximum operating temperature, in degrees Celsius, FPN: See D 2155-69, ASTM Test Procedure.
will not exceed 80 percent of the ignition temperature of the gas or vapor
involved or has been tested and found incapable of igniting the gas or (b) Class I, Division 2. In Class I, Division 2 locations, motors,
vapor. generators, and other rotating electric machinery in which are employed
sliding contacts, centrifugal or other types of switching mechanism
5.1.3.26 Motors and Generators. (including motor overcurrent, overloading, and overtemperature
devices), or integral resistance devices, either while starting or while
(a) Class I, Division 1. In Class I, Division 1 locations, motors, running, shall be identified for Class I, Division 1 locations, unless such
generators, and other rotating electric machinery shall be one of the sliding contacts, switching mechanisms, and resistance devices are
following: provided with enclosures identified for Class I, Division 2 locations in
accordance with 5.1.3.6(b). The exposed surface of space heaters used to
(1) Identified for Class I, Division 1 locations prevent condensation of moisture during shutdown periods shall not
(2) Of the totally enclosed type supplied with positive-pressure exceed 80 percent of the ignition temperature in degrees Celsius of the
ventilation from a source of clean air with discharge to a safe area, so gas or vapor involved when operated at rated voltage, and the maximum
arranged to prevent energizing of the machine until ventilation has been surface temperature (based on a 40°C ambient) shall be permanently
established and the enclosure has been purged with at least 10 volumes marked on a visible nameplate mounted on the motor. Otherwise, space
heaters shall be identified for Class I, Division 2 locations. In Class I,
Division 2 locations, the installation of open or nonexplosionproof Class I, Division 1 location shall be provided not more than 300 mm
enclosed motors, such as squirrel-cage induction motors without brushes, from the point of attachment to the supporting box or fitting.
switching mechanisms, or similar arc-producing devices that are not
identified for use in a Class I, Division 2 location, shall be permitted. (4) Supports. Boxes, box assemblies, or fittings used for the support
of luminaires (lighting fixtures) shall be identified for Class I locations.
FPN No. 1: It is important to consider the temperature of internal and external
surfaces that may be exposed to the flammable atmosphere.
(b) Class I, Division 2. In Class I, Division 2 locations, luminaires
FPN No. 2: It is important to consider the risk of ignition due to currents arcing across (lighting fixtures) shall comply with 5.1.3.31(b)(1) through
discontinuities and overheating of parts in multisection enclosures of large motors and 5.1.3.31(b)(6).
generators. Such motors and generators may need equipotential bonding jumpers
across joints in the enclosure and from enclosure to ground. Where the presence of
ignitible gases or vapors is suspected, clean-air purging may be needed immediately (1) Luminaires (Lighting Fixtures). Where lamps are of a size or type
prior to and during start-up periods.
that may, under normal operating conditions, reach surface temperatures
FPN No. 3: For further information on the application of electric motors in Class I, exceeding 80 percent of the ignition temperature in degrees Celsius of
Division 2 hazardous (classified) locations, see IEEE Std. 1349-2001,IEEE Guide for the gas or vapor involved, fixtures shall comply with 5.1.3.31(a)(1) or
the Application of Electric Motors in Class I, Division 2 Hazardous (Classified)
Locations. shall be of a type that has been tested in order to determine the marked
operating temperature or temperature class (T Code).
5.1.3.31 Luminaires (Lighting Fixtures). Luminaires (lighting fixtures)
shall comply with 5.1.3.31(a) or (b). (2) Physical Damage. Luminaires (lighting fixtures) shall be
protected from physical damage by suitable guards or by location. Where
(a) Class I, Division 1. In Class I, Division 1 locations, luminaires there is danger that falling sparks or hot metal from lamps or fixtures
(lighting fixtures) shall comply with 5.1.3.31(a)(1) through (a)(4). might ignite localized concentrations of flammable vapors or gases,
suitable enclosures or other effective protective means shall be provided.
(1) Luminaires (Lighting Fixtures). Each luminaire (lighting fixture)
shall be identified as a complete assembly for the Class I, Division 1 (3) Pendant Luminaires (Fixtures). Pendant luminaires (lighting
location and shall be clearly marked to indicate the maximum wattage of fixtures) shall be suspended by threaded rigid metal conduit stems,
lamps for which it is identified. Luminaires (lighting fixtures) intended threaded steel intermediate metal conduit stems, or other approved
for portable use shall be specifically listed as a complete assembly for means. For rigid stems longer than 300 mm, permanent and effective
that use. bracing against lateral displacement shall be provided at a level not more
than 300 mm above the lower end of the stem, or flexibility in the form
(2) Physical Damage. Each luminaire (lighting fixture) shall be of an identified fitting or flexible connector shall be provided not more
protected against physical damage by a suitable guard or by location. than 300 mm from the point of attachment to the supporting box or
fitting.
(3) Pendant Luminaires (Lighting Fixtures). Pendant luminaires
(lighting fixtures) shall be suspended by and supplied through threaded (4) Portable Lighting Equipment. Portable lighting equipment shall
rigid metal conduit stems or threaded steel intermediate conduit stems, comply with 5.1.3.31(a)(1).
and threaded joints shall be provided with set-screws or other effective
means to prevent loosening. For stems longer than 300 mm, permanent Exception: Where portable lighting equipment is mounted on movable
and effective bracing against lateral displacement shall be provided at a stands and is connected by flexible cords, as covered in 5.1.3.41, it shall
level not more than 300 mm above the lower end of the stem, or be permitted, where mounted in any position, if it conforms to
flexibility in the form of a fitting or flexible connector identified for the 5.1.3.31(b)(2).
 (5) Switches. Switches that are a part of an assembled fixture or of (2) Motors. Motors of motor-driven utilization equipment shall
an individual lampholder shall comply with 5.1.3.16(b)(1). comply with 5.1.3.26(b).

(6) Starting Equipment. Starting and control equipment for electric- (3) Switches, Circuit Breakers, and Fuses. Switches, circuit breakers,
discharge lamps shall comply with 5.1.3.21(b). and fuses shall comply with 5.1.3.16(b).

Exception: A thermal protector potted into a thermally protected 5.1.3.41 Flexible Cords, Class I, Divisions 1 and 2.
fluorescent lamp ballast if the luminaire (lighting fixture) is identified for
the location. (a) Permitted Uses. Flexible cord shall be permitted:

5.1.3.36 Utilization Equipment. (1) For connection between portable lighting equipment or other
portable utilization equipment and the fixed portion of their supply
(a) Class I, Division 1. In Class I, Division 1 locations, all utilization circuit.
equipment shall be identified for Class I, Division 1 locations.
(2) For that portion of the circuit where the fixed wiring methods of
(b) Class I, Division 2. In Class I, Division 2 locations, all utilization 5.1.2.1(a) cannot provide the necessary degree of movement for fixed
equipment shall comply with 5.1.3.36(b)(1) through (b)(3). and mobile electrical utilization equipment, and the flexible cord is
protected by location or by a suitable guard from damage and only in an
(1) Heaters. Electrically heated utilization equipment shall conform industrial establishment where conditions of maintenance and
with either item (1) or (2): engineering supervision ensure that only licensed electrical practitioner
or non licensed electrical practitioner under the supervision of a licensed
a. The heater shall not exceed 80 percent of the ignition electrical practitioner install and service the installation.
temperature in degrees Celsius of the gas or vapor involved on any
surface that is exposed to the gas or vapor when continuously energized (3) For electric submersible pumps with means for removal without
at the maximum rated ambient temperature. If a temperature controller is entering the wet-pit. The extension of the flexible cord within a suitable
not provided, these conditions shall apply when the heater is operated at raceway between the wet-pit and the power source shall be permitted.
120 percent of rated voltage.
(4) For electric mixers intended for travel into and out of open-type
Exception No. 1: For motor-mounted anticondensation space heaters, mixing tanks or vats.
see 5.1.3.26.
(b) Installation. Where flexible cords are used, the cords shall comply
Exception No. 2: Where a current-limiting device is applied to the with all of the following:
circuit serving the heater to limit the current in the heater to a value less
than that required to raise the heater surface temperature to 80 percent (1) Be of a type listed for extra-hard usage
of the ignition temperature. (2) Contain, in addition to the conductors of the circuit, a grounding
conductor complying with 4.0.2.4
b. The heater shall be identified for Class I, Division 1 locations. (3) Be connected to terminals or to supply conductors in an
approved manner
Exception: Electrical resistance heat tracing identified for Class I, (4) Be supported by clamps or by other suitable means in such a
Division 2 locations. manner that there is no tension on the terminal connections
 (5) Be provided with suitable seals where the flexible cord enters (3) In nonincendive circuits
boxes, fittings, or enclosures of the explosionproof type (4) Part of a listed nonincendive component

Exception to (5): Seals shall not be required as provided in 5.1.2.1(b) (2) Resistors and Similar Equipment. Resistors, resistance devices,
and 5.1.3.6(b)(6). thermionic tubes, rectifiers, and similar equipment shall comply with
5.1.3.6(b)(2).
(6) Be of continuous length.
(3) Protectors. Enclosures shall be provided for lightning protective
FPN: See 5.1.2.11 for flexible cords exposed to liquids having a deleterious effect on devices and for fuses. Such enclosures shall be permitted to be of the
the conductor insulation.
general-purpose type.
5.1.3.46 Receptacles and Attachment Plugs, Class I, Divisions 1 and
(4) Wiring and Sealing. All wiring shall comply with 5.1.2.1(b),
2. Receptacles and attachment plugs shall be of the type providing for
5.1.2.6(b), and 5.1.2.6(c).
connection to the grounding conductor of a flexible cord and shall be
identified for the location.
ARTICLE 5.2 — CLASS II LOCATIONS
Exception: As provided in 5.1.3.6(b)(6).
5.2.1 General
5.1.3.51 Signaling, Alarm, Remote-Control, and Communications
Systems.
5.2.1.1 Scope. Article 5.2 covers the requirements for electrical and
electronic equipment and wiring for all voltages in Class II, Division 1
(a) Class I, Division 1. In Class I, Division 1 locations, all apparatus
and 2 locations where fire or explosion hazards may exist due to
and equipment of signaling, alarm, remote-control, and communications
combustible dust.
systems, regardless of voltage, shall be identified for Class I, Division 1
locations, and all wiring shall comply with 5.1.2.1(a), 5.1.2.6(a), and
5.2.1.5 General. The general rules of this Code shall apply to the electric
5.1.2.6(c).
wiring and equipment in locations classified as Class II locations in
5.0.1.5(c).
(b) Class I, Division 2. In Class I, Division 2 locations, signaling,
alarm, remote-control, and communications systems shall comply with
Exception: As modified by this Article.
5.1.3.51(b)(1) through (b)(4).
Equipment installed in Class II locations shall be able to function at full
(1) Contacts. Switches, circuit breakers, and make-and-break
rating without developing surface temperatures high enough to cause
contacts of pushbuttons, relays, alarm bells, and horns shall have
excessive dehydration or gradual carbonization of any organic dust
enclosures identified for Class I, Division 1 locations in accordance with
deposits that may occur.
5.1.3.6(a).
FPN: Dust that is carbonized or excessively dry is highly susceptible to spontaneous
Exception: General-purpose enclosures shall be permitted if current- ignition.
interrupting contacts are one of the following:
(1) Immersed in oil Explosionproof equipment and wiring shall not be required and shall not
(2) Enclosed within a chamber hermetically sealed against the be acceptable in Class II locations unless identified for such locations.
entrance of gases or vapors
 5.2.2 Wiring 5.2.3.41.

5.2.2.1 Wiring Methods. Wiring methods shall comply with 5.2.2.1(a) FPN: See 5.2.2.21(b) for grounding requirements where flexible conduit is used.
or 5.2.2.1(b).
(b) Class II, Division 2.
(a) Class II, Division 1.
(1) General. In Class II, Division 2 locations, the following wiring
(1) General. In Class II, Division 1 locations, the wiring methods in methods shall be permitted:
(1) through (4) shall be permitted.
a. All wiring methods permitted in 5.2.2.1(a).
a. Threaded rigid metal conduit, or threaded steel intermediate b. Rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit, electrical
metal conduit. metallic tubing, dusttight wireways.
b. Type MI cable with termination fittings listed for the location. c. Type MC or MI cable with listed termination fittings.
Type MI cable shall be installed and supported in a manner to avoid d. Type PLTC in cable trays.
tensile stress at the termination fittings. e. Type ITC in cable trays.
c. In industrial establishments with limited public access, where f. Type MC, MI, or TC cable installed in ladder, ventilated trough,
the conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that only licensed or ventilated channel cable trays in a single layer, with a space not less
electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner under the than the larger cable diameter between the two adjacent cables, shall be
supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner service the installation, the wiring method employed.
Type MC cable, listed for use in Class II, Division 1 locations, with a
gas/vaportight continuous corrugated metallic sheath, an overall jacket of Exception to (6): Type MC cable listed for use in Class II, Division 1
suitable polymeric material, separate grounding conductors in locations shall be permitted to be installed without the spacings required
accordance with 2.50.6.13, and provided with termination fittings listed by (6).
for the application, shall be permitted.
d. Fittings and boxes shall be provided with threaded bosses for (2) Flexible Connections. Where provision must be made for
connection to conduit or cable terminations and shall be dusttight. flexibility, 5.2.2.1(a)(2) shall apply.
Fittings and boxes in which taps, joints, or terminal connections are
made, or that are used in Group E locations, shall be identified for Class (3) Nonincendive Field Wiring. Nonincendive field wiring shall be
II locations. permitted using any of the wiring methods permitted for unclassified
locations. Nonincendive field wiring systems shall be installed in
(2) Flexible Connections. Where necessary to employ flexible accordance with the control drawing(s). Simple apparatus, not shown on
connections, one or more of the following shall also be permitted: the control drawing, shall be permitted in a nonincendive field wiring
circuit, provided the simple apparatus does not interconnect the
a. Dusttight flexible connectors nonincendive field wiring circuit to any other circuit.
b. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit with listed fittings
FPN: Simple apparatus is defined in 5.4.1.2.
c. Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit with listed fittings
d. Interlocked armor Type MC cable having an overall jacket of
Separate nonincendive field wiring circuits shall be installed in
suitable polymeric material and provided with termination fittings listed
accordance with one of the following:
for Class II, Division 1 locations.
e. Flexible cord listed for extra-hard usage and provided with
a. In separate cables
bushed fittings. Where flexible cords are used, they shall comply with
 5.2.2.21 Grounding and Bonding, Class II, Divisions 1 and 2. Wiring
b. In multiconductor cables where the conductors of each circuit and equipment in Class II, Division 1 and 2 locations shall be grounded
are within a grounded metal shield as specified in Article 250 and with the requirements in 5.2.2.21(a) and
5.2.2.21(b).
c. In multiconductor cables where the conductors of each circuit
have insulation with a minimum thickness of 0.25 mm. (a) Bonding. The locknut-bushing and double-locknut types of contact
shall not be depended on for bonding purposes, but bonding jumpers
d. Boxes and Fittings. All boxes and fittings shall be dusttight. with proper fittings or other approved means of bonding shall be used.
Such means of bonding shall apply to all intervening raceways, fittings,
5.2.2.6 Sealing, Class II, Divisions 1 and 2. Where a raceway provides boxes, enclosures, and so forth, between Class II locations and the point
communication between an enclosure that is required to be dust- of grounding for service equipment or point of grounding of a separately
ignitionproof and one that is not, suitable means shall be provided to derived system.
prevent the entrance of dust into the dust-ignitionproof enclosure through
the raceway. One of the following means shall be permitted: Exception: The specific bonding means shall only be required to the
nearest point where the grounded circuit conductor and the grounding
(a) A permanent and effective seal electrode conductor are connected together on the line side of the
(b) A horizontal raceway not less than 3 000 mm long building or structure disconnecting means as specified in 2.50.2.13(a),
(c) A vertical raceway not less than 1 500 mm long and extending (b), and (c), if the branch-circuit overcurrent protection is located on the
downward from the dust-ignitionproof enclosure load side of the disconnecting means.
(d) A raceway installed in a manner equivalent to (2) or (3) that
extends only horizontally and downward from the dust-ignition proof FPN: See 2.50.5.11 for additional bonding requirements in hazardous (classified)
locations.
enclosures.
(b) Types of Equipment Grounding Conductors. Where flexible
Where a raceway provides communication between an enclosure that is
conduit is used as permitted in 5.2.2.1, it shall be installed with internal
required to be dust-ignitionproof and an enclosure in an unclassified
or external bonding jumpers in parallel with each conduit and complying
location, seals shall not be required.
with 2.50.5.13.
Sealing fittings shall be accessible.
Exception: In Class II, Division 2 locations, the bonding jumper shall be
permitted to be deleted where all of the following conditions are met:
Seals shall not be required to be explosionproof.
(1) Listed liquidtight flexible metal conduit 1 800 mm or less in
FPN: Electrical sealing putty is a method of sealing.
length, with fittings listed for grounding, is used.
(2) Overcurrent protection in the circuit is limited to 10 amperes or
5.2.2.16 Uninsulated Exposed Parts, Class II, Divisions 1 and 2. There less.
shall be no uninsulated exposed parts, such as electric conductors, buses, (3) The load is not a power utilization load.
terminals, or components, that operate at more than 30 volts (15 volts in
wet locations). These parts shall additionally be protected by a protection 5.2.2.26 Surge Protection — Class II, Divisions 1 and 2. Surge
technique according to 5.0.1.7(e), 5.0.1.7(f), or 5.0.1.7(g) that is suitable arresters and transient voltage surge suppressors (TVSS) installed in a
for the location. Class II, Division 1 location shall be in suitable enclosures. Surge-
protective capacitors shall be of a type designed for specific duty.
5.2.2.31 Multiwire Branch Circuits. In a Class II, Division 1 location, a (1) Containing Liquid That Will Burn. Transformers and capacitors
multiwire branch circuit shall not be permitted. containing a liquid that will burn shall be installed in vaults that comply
with 4.50.3.1 through 4.50.3.8.
Exception: Where the disconnect device(s) for the circuit opens all
ungrounded conductors of the multiwire circuit simultaneously. (2) Containing Askarel. Transformers containing askarel and rated in
excess of 25 kVA shall be as follows:
5.2.3 Equipment
a. Provided with pressure-relief vents
5.2.3.1 Transformers and Capacitors. b. Provided with a means for absorbing any gases generated by
arcing inside the case, or the pressure-relief vents shall be connected to a
(a) Class II, Division 1. In Class II, Division 1 locations, transformers chimney or flue that will carry such gases outside the building
and capacitors shall comply with 5.2.3.1(a)(1) through (a)(3). c. Have an airspace of not less than 150 mm between the
transformer cases and any adjacent combustible material
(1) Containing Liquid That Will Burn. Transformers and capacitors
containing a liquid that will burn shall be installed only in vaults (3) Dry-Type Transformers. Dry-type transformers shall be installed
complying with 4.50.3.1 through 4.50.3.8, and, in addition, (1), (2), and in vaults or shall have their windings and terminal connections enclosed
(3) shall apply. in tight metal housings without ventilating or other openings and shall
a. Doors or other openings communicating with the Division 1 operate at not over 600 volts, nominal.
location shall have self-closing fire doors on both sides of the wall, and
the doors shall be carefully fitted and provided with suitable seals (such 5.2.3.16 Switches, Circuit Breakers, Motor Controllers, and Fuses.
as weather stripping) to minimize the entrance of dust into the vault.
b. Vent openings and ducts shall communicate only with the (a) Class II, Division 1. In Class II, Division 1 locations, switches,
outside air. circuit breakers, motor controllers, and fuses shall comply with
c. Suitable pressure-relief openings communicating with the 5.2.3.16(a)(1) through (a)(3).
outside air shall be provided.
(1) Type Required. Switches, circuit breakers, motor controllers, and
(2) Not Containing Liquid That Will Burn. Transformers and fuses, including pushbuttons, relays, and similar devices that are intended
capacitors that do not contain a liquid that will burn shall be installed in to interrupt current during normal operation or that are installed where
vaults complying with 4.50.3.1 through 4.50.3.8 or be identified as a combustible dusts of an electrically conductive nature may be present,
complete assembly, including terminal connections for Class II locations. shall be provided with identified dust-ignitionproof enclosures.

(3) Metal Dusts. No transformer or capacitor shall be installed in a (2) Isolating Switches. Disconnecting and isolating switches
location where dust from magnesium, aluminum, aluminum bronze containing no fuses and not intended to interrupt current and not installed
powders, or other metals of similarly hazardous characteristics may be where dusts may be of an electrically conductive nature shall be provided
present. with tight metal enclosures that shall be designed to minimize the
entrance of dust and that shall (1) be equipped with telescoping or close-
(b) Class II, Division 2. In Class II, Division 2 locations, transformers fitting covers or with other effective means to prevent the escape of
and capacitors shall comply with 5.2.3.1(b)(1) through (b)(3). sparks or burning material and (2) have no openings (such as holes for
attachment screws) through which, after installation, sparks or burning
material might escape or through which exterior accumulations of dust or
adjacent combustible material might be ignited.
 are part of an automatically timed starting sequence shall be permitted
(3) Metal Dusts. In locations where dust from magnesium, to have enclosures complying with 5.2.3.21(b)(2).
aluminum, aluminum bronze powders, or other metals of similarly
hazardous characteristics may be present, fuses, switches, motor 5.2.3.26 Motors and Generators.
controllers, and circuit breakers shall have enclosures identified for such
locations. (a) Class II, Division 1. In Class II, Division 1 locations, motors,
generators, and other rotating electrical machinery shall be in
(b) Class II, Division 2. In Class II, Division 2 locations, enclosures conformance with either of the following:
for fuses, switches, circuit breakers, and motor controllers, including
pushbuttons, relays, and similar devices, shall be dusttight. (1) Identified for Class II, Division 1 locations
(2) Totally enclosed pipe-ventilated, meeting temperature limitations
5.2.3.21 Control Transformers and Resistors. in 5.2.1.5

(a) Class II, Division 1. In Class II, Division 1 locations, control (b) Class II, Division 2. In Class II, Division 2 locations, motors,
transformers, solenoids, impedance coils, resistors, and any overcurrent generators, and other rotating electrical equipment shall be totally
devices or switching mechanisms associated with them shall have dust- enclosed nonventilated, totally enclosed pipe-ventilated, totally enclosed
ignitionproof enclosures identified for Class II locations. No control water-air-cooled, totally enclosed fan-cooled or dust-ignitionproof for
transformer, impedance coil, or resistor shall be installed in a location which maximum full-load external temperature shall be in accordance
where dust from magnesium, aluminum, aluminum bronze powders, or with 5.0.1.8(c)(2) for normal operation when operating in free air (not
other metals of similarly hazardous characteristics may be present unless dust blanketed) and shall have no external openings.
provided with an enclosure identified for the specific location.
Exception: If the authority having jurisdiction believes accumulations of
(b) Class II, Division 2. In Class II, Division 2 locations, transformers nonconductive, nonabrasive dust will be moderate and if machines can
and resistors shall comply with 5.2.3.21(b)(1) through (b)(3). be easily reached for routine cleaning and maintenance, the following
shall be permitted to be installed:
(1) Switching Mechanisms. Switching mechanisms (including (1) Standard open-type machines without sliding contacts,
overcurrent devices) associated with control transformers, solenoids, centrifugal or other types of switching mechanism (including motor
impedance coils, and resistors shall be provided with dusttight overcurrent, overloading, and overtemperature devices), or integral
enclosures. resistance devices
(2) Standard open-type machines with such contacts, switching
(2) Coils and Windings. Where not located in the same enclosure mechanisms, or resistance devices enclosed within dusttight housings
with switching mechanisms, control transformers, solenoids, and without ventilating or other openings
impedance coils shall be provided with tight metal housings without (3) Self-cleaning textile motors of the squirrel-cage type
ventilating openings.
5.2.3.29 Ventilating Piping. Ventilating pipes for motors, generators, or
(3) Resistors. Resistors and resistance devices shall have dust- other rotating electric machinery, or for enclosures for electric
ignitionproof enclosures identified for Class II locations. equipment, shall be of metal not less than 0.50 mm in thickness or of
equally substantial noncombustible material and shall comply with all of
Exception: Where the maximum normal operating temperature of the the following:
resistor will not exceed 120°C, nonadjustable resistors or resistors that
(1) Lead directly to a source of clean air outside of buildings
 (2) Be screened at the outer ends to prevent the entrance of small
animals or birds (2) Physical Damage. Each luminaire (fixture) shall be protected
(3) Be protected against physical damage and against rusting or against physical damage by a suitable guard or by location.
other corrosive influences
(3) Pendant Luminaires (Fixtures). Pendant luminaires (fixtures)
Ventilating pipes shall also comply with 5.2.3.29(a) and 5.2.3.29(b). shall be suspended by threaded rigid metal conduit stems, threaded steel
intermediate metal conduit stems, by chains with approved fittings, or by
(a) Class II, Division 1. In Class II, Division 1 locations, ventilating other approved means. For rigid stems longer than 300 mm, permanent
pipes, including their connections to motors or to the dust-ignitionproof and effective bracing against lateral displacement shall be provided at a
enclosures for other equipment, shall be dusttight throughout their level not more than 300 mm above the lower end of the stem, or
length. For metal pipes, seams and joints shall comply with one of the flexibility in the form of a fitting or a flexible connector listed for the
following: location shall be provided not more than 300 mm from the point of
attachment to the supporting box or fitting. Threaded joints shall be
(1) Be riveted and soldered provided with set-screws or other effective means to prevent loosening.
(2) Be bolted and soldered Where wiring between an outlet box or fitting and a pendant luminaire
(3) Be welded (fixture) is not enclosed in conduit, flexible cord listed for hard usage
(4) Be rendered dusttight by some other equally effective means shall be used, and suitable seals shall be provided where the cord enters
the luminaire (fixture) and the outlet box or fitting. Flexible cord shall
(b) Class II, Division 2. In Class II, Division 2 locations, ventilating not serve as the supporting means for a fixture.
pipes and their connections shall be sufficiently tight to prevent the
entrance of appreciable quantities of dust into the ventilated equipment (4) Supports. Boxes, box assemblies, or fittings used for the support
or enclosure and to prevent the escape of sparks, flame, or burning of luminaires (lighting fixtures) shall be identified for Class II locations.
material that might ignite dust accumulations or combustible material in
the vicinity. For metal pipes, lock seams and riveted or welded joints (b) Class II, Division 2. In Class II, Division 2 locations, luminaires
shall be permitted; and tight-fitting slip joints shall be permitted where (lighting fixtures) shall comply with 5.2.3.31(b)(1) through (b)(5).
some flexibility is necessary, as at connections to motors.
(1) Portable Lighting Equipment. Portable lighting equipment shall
5.2.3.31 Luminaires (Lighting Fixtures). Luminaires (lighting fixtures) be identified for Class II locations. They shall be clearly marked to
shall comply with 5.2.3.31(a) and 5.2.3.31(b). indicate the maximum wattage of lamps for which they are designed.

(a) Class II, Division 1. In Class II, Division 1 locations, luminaires (2) Fixed Lighting. Luminaires (lighting fixtures) for fixed lighting,
(lighting fixtures) for fixed and portable lighting shall comply with where not of a type identified for Class II locations, shall provide
5.2.3.31(a)(1) through (a)(4). enclosures for lamps and lampholders that shall be designed to minimize
the deposit of dust on lamps and to prevent the escape of sparks, burning
(1) Fixtures. Each luminaire (fixture) shall be identified for Class II material, or hot metal. Each fixture shall be clearly marked to indicate
locations and shall be clearly marked to indicate the maximum wattage the maximum wattage of the lamp that shall be permitted without
of the lamp for which it is designed. In locations where dust from exceeding an exposed surface temperature in accordance with
magnesium, aluminum, aluminum bronze powders, or other metals of 5.0.1.8(c)(2) under normal conditions of use.
similarly hazardous characteristics may be present, luminaires (fixtures)
for fixed or portable lighting and all auxiliary equipment shall be
identified for the specific location.
 (3) Physical Damage. Luminaires (lighting fixtures) for fixed (3) Switches, Circuit Breakers, and Fuses. Enclosures for switches,
lighting shall be protected from physical damage by suitable guards or by circuit breakers, and fuses shall be dusttight.
location.
(4) Transformers, Solenoids, Impedance Coils, and Resistors.
(4) Pendant Luminaires (Fixtures). Pendant luminaires (fixtures) Transformers, solenoids, impedance coils, and resistors shall comply
shall be suspended by threaded rigid metal conduit stems, threaded steel with 5.2.3.21(b).
intermediate metal conduit stems, by chains with approved fittings, or by
other approved means. For rigid stems longer than 300 mm, permanent 5.2.3.41 Flexible Cords — Class II, Divisions 1 and 2. Flexible cords
and effective bracing against lateral displacement shall be provided at a used in Class II locations shall comply with all of the following:
level not more than 300 mm above the lower end of the stem, or
flexibility in the form of an identified fitting or a flexible connector shall (a) Be of a type listed for extra-hard usage
be provided not more than 300 mm from the point of attachment to the
supporting box or fitting. Where wiring between an outlet box or fitting Exception: Flexible cord listed for hard usage as permitted by
and a pendant luminaire (fixture) is not enclosed in conduit, flexible cord 5.2.3.31(a)(3) and (b)(4).
listed for hard usage shall be used. Flexible cord shall not serve as the
supporting means for a fixture. (b) Contain, in addition to the conductors of the circuit, a grounding
conductor complying with 4.0.2.4
(5) Electric-Discharge Lamps. Starting and control equipment for
electric-discharge lamps shall comply with the requirements of (c) Be connected to terminals or to supply conductors in an approved
5.2.3.21(b). manner

5.2.3.36 Utilization Equipment. (d) Be supported by clamps or by other suitable means in such a
manner that there will be no tension on the terminal connections
(a) Class II, Division 1. In Class II, Division 1 locations, all utilization
equipment shall be identified for Class II locations. Where dust from (e) Be provided with suitable seals to prevent the entrance of dust
magnesium, aluminum, aluminum bronze powders, or other metals of where the flexible cord enters boxes or fittings that are required to be
similarly hazardous characteristics may be present, such equipment shall dust-ignitionproof
be identified for the specific location.
5.2.3.46 Receptacles and Attachment Plugs.
(b) Class II, Division 2. In Class II, Division 2 locations, all utilization
equipment shall comply with 5.2.3.36(b)(1) through (b)(4). (a) Class II, Division 1. In Class II, Division 1 locations, receptacles
and attachment plugs shall be of the type providing for connection to the
(1) Heaters. Electrically heated utilization equipment shall be grounding conductor of the flexible cord and shall be identified for Class
identified for Class II locations. II locations.

Exception: Metal-enclosed radiant heating panel equipment shall be (b) Class II, Division 2. In Class II, Division 2 locations, receptacles
dusttight and marked in accordance with 5.0.1.8(b). and attachment plugs shall be of the type that provides for connection to
the grounding conductor of the flexible cord and shall be designed so that
(2) Motors. Motors of motor-driven utilization equipment shall connection to the supply circuit cannot be made or broken while live
comply with 5.2.3.26(b). parts are exposed.
5.2.3.51 Signaling, Alarm, Remote-Control, and Communications
Systems; and Meters, Instruments, and Relays. (b) Class II, Division 2. In Class II, Division 2 locations, signaling,
alarm, remote-control, and communications systems; and meters,
FPN: See Article 8.0 for rules governing the installation of communications circuits. instruments, and relays shall comply with 5.2.3.51(b)(1) through (b)(5).
(a) Class II, Division 1. In Class II, Division 1 locations, signaling, (1) Contacts. Enclosures shall comply with 5.2.3.51(a)(2), or
alarm, remote-control, and communications systems; and meters, contacts shall have tight metal enclosures designed to minimize the
instruments, and relays shall comply with 5.2.3.51(a)(1) through (a)(6). entrance of dust and shall have telescoping or tight-fitting covers and no
openings through which, after installation, sparks or burning material
(1) Wiring Methods. The wiring method shall comply with might escape.
5.2.3.1(a).
Exception: In nonincendive circuits, enclosures shall be permitted to be
(2) Contacts. Switches, circuit breakers, relays, contactors, fuses and of the general-purpose type.
current-breaking contacts for bells, horns, howlers, sirens, and other
devices in which sparks or arcs may be produced shall be provided with (2) Transformers and Similar Equipment. The windings and terminal
enclosures identified for a Class II location. connections of transformers, choke coils, and similar equipment shall be
provided with tight metal enclosures without ventilating openings.
Exception: Where current-breaking contacts are immersed in oil or
where the interruption of current occurs within a chamber sealed against (3) Resistors and Similar Equipment. Resistors, resistance devices,
the entrance of dust, enclosures shall be permitted to be of the general- thermionic tubes, rectifiers, and similar equipment shall comply with
purpose type. 5.2.3.31(a)(3).
(3) Resistors and Similar Equipment. Resistors, transformers, choke Exception: Enclosures for thermionic tubes, nonadjustable resistors, or
coils, rectifiers, thermionic tubes, and other heat-generating equipment rectifiers for which maximum operating temperature will not exceed
shall be provided with enclosures identified for Class II locations. 120°C (248°F) shall be permitted to be of the general-purpose type.
Exception: Where resistors or similar equipment are immersed in oil or (4) Rotating Machinery. Motors, generators, and other rotating
enclosed in a chamber sealed against the entrance of dust, enclosures electric machinery shall comply with 5.2.3.26(b).
shall be permitted to be of the general-purpose type.
(5) Wiring Methods. The wiring method shall comply with
(4) Rotating Machinery. Motors, generators, and other rotating 5.2.2.1(b).
electric machinery shall comply with 5.2.3.26(a).

(5) Combustible, Electrically Conductive Dusts. Where dusts are of a ARTICLE 5.3 — CLASS III LOCATIONS
combustible, electrically conductive nature, all wiring and equipment
shall be identified for Class II locations. 5.3.1 General
(6) Metal Dusts. Where dust from magnesium, aluminum, aluminum 5.3.1.1 Scope. Article 5.3 covers the requirements for electrical and
bronze powders, or other metals of similarly hazardous characteristics electronic equipment and wiring for all voltages in Class III, Division 1
may be present, all apparatus and equipment shall be identified for the and 2 locations where fire or explosion hazards may exist due to ignitible
specific conditions. fibers or flyings.
 locations. Nonincendive field wiring systems shall be installed in
5.3.1.5 General. The general rules of this Code shall apply to electric accordance with the control drawing(s). Simple apparatus, not shown on
wiring and equipment in locations classified as Class III locations in the control drawing, shall be permitted in a nonincendive field wiring
5.0.1.5(d). circuit, provided the simple apparatus does not interconnect the
nonincendive field wiring circuit to any other circuit.
Exception: As modified by this Article.
FPN: Simple apparatus is defined in 5.4.1.2.
Equipment installed in Class III locations shall be able to function at full
rating without developing surface temperatures high enough to cause Separate nonincendive field wiring circuits shall be installed in
excessive dehydration or gradual carbonization of accumulated fibers or accordance with one of the following:
flyings. Organic material that is carbonized or excessively dry is highly
susceptible to spontaneous ignition. The maximum surface temperatures a. In separate cables
under operating conditions shall not exceed 165°C for equipment that is b. In multiconductor cables where the conductors of each circuit
not subject to overloading, and 120°C for equipment (such as motors or are within a grounded metal shield
power transformers) that may be overloaded. c. In multiconductor cables where the conductors of each circuit
have insulation with a minimum thickness of 0.25 mm
FPN: For electric trucks, see NFPA 505-2002, Fire Safety Standard for Powered
Industrial Trucks Including Type Designations, Areas of Use, Conversions, (b) Class III, Division 2. In Class III, Division 2 locations, the wiring
Maintenance, and Operation.
method shall comply with 5.3.2.1(a).
5.3.2 Wiring
Exception: In sections, compartments, or areas used solely for storage
and containing no machinery, open wiring on insulators shall be
5.3.2.1 Wiring Methods. Wiring methods shall comply with 5.3.2.1(a)
permitted where installed in accordance with Article 3.98, but only on
or 5.3.2.1(b).
condition that protection as required by 3.98.2.6(c) be provided where
conductors are not run in roof spaces and are well out of reach of
(a) Class III, Division 1. In Class III, Division 1 locations, the wiring
sources of physical damage.
method shall be rigid metal conduit, rigid nonmetallic conduit,
intermediate metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing, dusttight
5.3.2.16 Uninsulated Exposed Parts, Class III, Divisions 1 and 2.
wireways, or Type MC or MI cable with listed termination fittings.
There shall be no uninsulated exposed parts, such as electric conductors,
buses, terminals, or components, that operate at more than 30 volts (15
(1) Boxes and Fittings. All boxes and fittings shall be dusttight.
volts in wet locations). These parts shall additionally be protected by a
protection technique according to 5.0.1.7(e), 5.0.1.7(f), or 5.0.1.7(g) that
(2) Flexible Connections. Where necessary to employ flexible
is suitable for the location.
connections, dusttight flexible connectors, liquidtight flexible metal
conduit with listed fittings, liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit with
Exception: As provided in 5.3.3.56.
listed fittings, or flexible cord in conformance with 5.3.3.41 shall be
used.
5.3.2.21 Grounding and Bonding — Class III, Divisions 1 and 2.
FPN: See 5.3.2.21(b) for grounding requirements where flexible conduit is used. Wiring and equipment in Class III, Division 1 and 2 locations shall be
grounded as specified in Article 2.50 and with the following additional
(3) Nonincendive Field Wiring. Nonincendive field wiring shall be requirements in 5.3.2.21(a) and 5.3.2.21(b).
permitted using any of the wiring methods permitted for unclassified
 (a) Bonding. The locknut-bushing and double-locknut types of controllers, and fuses, including pushbuttons, relays, and similar devices,
contacts shall not be depended on for bonding purposes, but bonding shall be provided with dusttight enclosures.
jumpers with proper fittings or other approved means of bonding shall be
used. Such means of bonding shall apply to all intervening raceways, 5.3.3.21 Control Transformers and Resistors — Class III, Divisions 1
fittings, boxes, enclosures, and so forth, between Class III locations and and 2. Transformers, impedance coils, and resistors used as or in
the point of grounding for service equipment or point of grounding of a conjunction with control equipment for motors, generators, and
separately derived system. appliances shall be provided with dusttight enclosures complying with
the temperature limitations in 5.3.1.5.
Exception: The specific bonding means shall only be required to the
nearest point where the grounded circuit conductor and the grounding 5.3.3.26 Motors and Generators — Class III, Divisions 1 and 2. In
electrode conductor are connected together on the line side of the Class III, Divisions 1 and 2 locations, motors, generators, and other
building or structure disconnecting means as specified in 2.50.2.13(a), rotating machinery shall be totally enclosed nonventilated, totally
(b), and (c), if the branch-circuit overcurrent protection is located on the enclosed pipe ventilated, or totally enclosed fan cooled.
load side of the disconnecting means.
Exception: In locations where, in the judgment of the authority having
FPN: See 2.50.5.11 for additional bonding requirements in hazardous (classified) jurisdiction, only moderate accumulations of lint or flyings are likely to
locations.
collect on, in, or in the vicinity of a rotating electric machine and where
such machine is readily accessible for routine cleaning and maintenance,
(b) Types of Equipment Grounding Conductors. Where flexible
one of the following shall be permitted:
conduit is used as permitted in 5.3.2.1, it shall be installed with internal
or external bonding jumpers in parallel with each conduit and complying
(1) Self-cleaning textile motors of the squirrel-cage type
with 2.50.5.13.
(2) Standard open-type machines without sliding contacts,
centrifugal or other types of switching mechanisms, including motor
Exception: In Class III, Division 1 and 2 locations, the bonding jumper
overload devices
shall be permitted to be deleted where all of the following conditions are
(3) Standard open-type machines having such contacts, switching
met:
mechanisms, or resistance devices enclosed within tight housings without
ventilating or other openings
(1) Listed liquidtight flexible metal 1 800 mm or less in length, with
fittings listed for grounding, is used.
5.3.3.29 Ventilating Piping — Class III, Divisions 1 and 2. Ventilating
(2) Overcurrent protection in the circuit is limited to 10 amperes or
pipes for motors, generators, or other rotating electric machinery, or for
less.
enclosures for electric equipment, shall be of metal not less than 0.50
(3) The load is not a power utilization load.
mm in thickness, or of equally substantial noncombustible material, and
shall comply with the following:
5.3.3 Equipment
(1) Lead directly to a source of clean air outside of buildings
5.3.3.1 Transformers and Capacitors — Class III, Divisions 1 and 2.
(2) Be screened at the outer ends to prevent the entrance of small
Transformers and capacitors shall comply with 5.2.3.1(b).
animals or birds
(3) Be protected against physical damage and against rusting or
5.3.3.16 Switches, Circuit Breakers, Motor Controllers, and Fuses —
other corrosive influences
Class III, Divisions 1 and 2. Switches, circuit breakers, motor
Ventilating pipes shall be sufficiently tight, including their connections, 5.3.3.36 Utilization Equipment — Class III, Divisions 1 and 2.
to prevent the entrance of appreciable quantities of fibers or flyings into
the ventilated equipment or enclosure and to prevent the escape of (a) Heaters. Electrically heated utilization equipment shall be
sparks, flame, or burning material that might ignite accumulations of identified for Class III locations.
fibers or flyings or combustible material in the vicinity. For metal pipes,
lock seams and riveted or welded joints shall be permitted; and tight- (b) Motors. Motors of motor-driven utilization equipment shall
fitting slip joints shall be permitted where some flexibility is necessary, comply with 5.3.3.26.
as at connections to motors.
(c) Switches, Circuit Breakers, Motor Controllers, and Fuses.
5.3.3.31 Luminaires (Lighting Fixtures) — Class III, Divisions 1 and Switches, circuit breakers, motor controllers, and fuses shall comply with
2. 5.3.3.16.

(a) Fixed Lighting. Luminaires (lighting fixtures) for fixed lighting 5.3.3.41 Flexible Cords — Class III, Divisions 1 and 2. Flexible cords
shall provide enclosures for lamps and lampholders that are designed to shall comply with the following:
minimize entrance of fibers and flyings and to prevent the escape of
sparks, burning material, or hot metal. Each luminaire (fixture) shall be (1) Be of a type listed for extra-hard usage
clearly marked to show the maximum wattage of the lamps that shall be (2) Contain, in addition to the conductors of the circuit, a grounding
permitted without exceeding an exposed surface temperature of 165°C conductor complying with 4.0.2.4
under normal conditions of use. (3) Be connected to terminals or to supply conductors in an approved
manner
(b) Physical Damage. A luminaire (fixture) that may be exposed to (4) Be supported by clamps or other suitable means in such a manner
physical damage shall be protected by a suitable guard. that there will be no tension on the terminal connections
(5) Be provided with suitable means to prevent the entrance of fibers or
(c) Pendant Luminaires (Fixtures). Pendant luminaires (fixtures) flyings where the cord enters boxes or fittings
shall be suspended by stems of threaded rigid metal conduit, threaded
intermediate metal conduit, threaded metal tubing of equivalent 5.3.3.46 Receptacles and Attachment Plugs — Class III, Divisions 1
thickness, or by chains with approved fittings. For stems longer than 300 and 2. Receptacles and attachment plugs shall be of the grounding type
mm, permanent and effective bracing against lateral displacement shall and shall be designed so as to minimize the accumulation or the entry of
be provided at a level not more than 300 mm above the lower end of the fibers or flyings, and shall prevent the escape of sparks or molten
stem, or flexibility in the form of an identified fitting or a flexible particles.
connector shall be provided not more than 300 mm from the point of
attachment to the supporting box or fitting. Exception: In locations where, in the judgment of the authority having
jurisdiction, only moderate accumulations of lint or flyings will be likely
(d) Portable Lighting Equipment. Portable lighting equipment shall to collect in the vicinity of a receptacle, and where such receptacle is
be equipped with handles and protected with substantial guards. readily accessible for routine cleaning, general-purpose grounding-type
Lampholders shall be of the unswitched type with no provision for receptacles mounted so as to minimize the entry of fibers or flyings shall
receiving attachment plugs. There shall be no exposed current-carrying be permitted.
metal parts, and all exposed non–current-carrying metal parts shall be
grounded. In all other respects, portable lighting equipment shall comply 5.3.3.51 Signaling, Alarm, Remote-Control, and Local Loudspeaker
with 5.3.3.31(a). Intercommunications Systems — Class III, Divisions 1 and 2.
Signaling, alarm, remote-control, and local loudspeaker
intercommunications systems shall comply with the requirements of (I.S.) apparatus, wiring, and systems for Class I, II, and III locations.
Article 5.3 regarding wiring methods, switches, transformers, resistors,
motors, luminaires (lighting fixtures), and related components. FPN: For further information, see ANSI/ISA RP 12.06.01-2002, Wiring Methods for
Hazardous (Classified) Locations Instrumentation — Part 1: Intrinsic Safety.

5.3.3.56 Electric Cranes, Hoists, and Similar Equipment — Class III,

5.4.1.2 Definitions.
Divisions 1 and 2. Where installed for operation over combustible fibers
or accumulations of flyings, traveling cranes and hoists for material
Associated Apparatus. Apparatus in which the circuits are not
handling, traveling cleaners for textile machinery, and similar equipment
necessarily intrinsically safe themselves but that affect the energy in the
shall comply with 5.3.3.56(a) through (d).
intrinsically safe circuits and are relied on to maintain intrinsic safety.
Associated apparatus may be either of the following:
(a) Power Supply. Power supply to contact conductors shall be
electrically isolated from all other systems, ungrounded, and shall be
(1) Electrical apparatus that has an alternative-type protection for use
equipped with an acceptable ground detector that gives an alarm and
in the appropriate hazardous (classified) location
automatically de-energizes the contact conductors in case of a fault to
(2) Electrical apparatus not so protected that shall not be used within a
ground or gives a visual and audible alarm as long as power is supplied
hazardous (classified) location
to the contact conductors and the ground fault remains.
FPN No. 1: Associated apparatus has identified intrinsically safe connections for
(b) Contact Conductors. Contact conductors shall be located or intrinsically safe apparatus and also may have connections for nonintrinsically safe
guarded so as to be inaccessible to other than authorized persons and apparatus.

shall be protected against accidental contact with foreign objects. FPN No. 2: An example of associated apparatus is an intrinsic safety barrier, which is
a network designed to limit the energy (voltage and current) available to the protected
circuit in the hazardous (classified) location, under specified fault conditions.
(c) Current Collectors. Current collectors shall be arranged or
guarded so as to confine normal sparking and prevent escape of sparks or
Control Drawing. See definition in 5.0.1.2.
hot particles. To reduce sparking, two or more separate surfaces of
contact shall be provided for each contact conductor. Reliable means
Different Intrinsically Safe Circuits. Intrinsically safe circuits in
shall be provided to keep contact conductors and current collectors free
which the possible interconnections have not been evaluated and
of accumulations of lint or flyings.
identified as intrinsically safe.
(d) Control Equipment. Control equipment shall comply with
Intrinsically Safe Apparatus. Apparatus in which all the circuits are
5.3.3.16 and 5.3.3.21.
intrinsically safe.
5.3.3.61 Storage Battery Charging Equipment — Class III, Divisions
Intrinsically Safe Circuit. A circuit in which any spark or thermal
1 and 2. Storage battery charging equipment shall be located in separate
effect is incapable of causing ignition of a mixture of flammable or
rooms built or lined with substantial noncombustible materials. The
combustible material in air under prescribed test conditions.
rooms shall be constructed to prevent the entrance of ignitible amounts
of flyings or lint and shall be well ventilated. FPN: Test conditions are described in ANSI/UL 913-1997, Standard for Safety,
Intrinsically Safe Apparatus and Associated Apparatus for Use in Class I, II, and III,
Division 1, Hazardous (Classified) Locations.
ARTICLE 5.4 — INTRINSICALLY SAFE SYSTEMS
Intrinsically Safe System. An assembly of interconnected intrinsically
5.4.1.1 Scope. This article covers the installation of intrinsically safe safe apparatus, associated apparatus, and interconnecting cables in that
those parts of the system that may be used in hazardous (classified) (b) Location. Intrinsically safe apparatus shall be permitted to be
locations are intrinsically safe circuits. installed in any hazardous (classified) location for which it has been
identified. General-purpose enclosures shall be permitted for intrinsically
FPN: An intrinsically safe system may include more than one intrinsically safe circuit. safe apparatus.
Simple Apparatus. An electrical component or combination of Associated apparatus shall be permitted to be installed in any
components of simple construction with well-defined electrical hazardous (classified) location for which it has been identified or, if
parameters that does not generate more than 1.5 volts, 100 milliamps, protected by other means, permitted by Articles 5.1 through 5.3 and
and 25 milliwatts, or a passive component that does not dissipate more Article 5.5.
than 1.3 watts and is compatible with the intrinsic safety of the circuit in
which it is used. Simple apparatus shall be permitted to be installed in any hazardous
(classified) location in which the maximum surface temperature of the
FPN: The following apparatus are examples of simple apparatus:
simple apparatus does not exceed the ignition temperature of the
flammable gases or vapors, flammable liquids, combustible dusts, or
(a) Passive components, for example, switches, junction boxes,
ignitible fibers or flyings present.
resistance temperature devices, and simple semiconductor devices such
as LEDs
For simple apparatus, the maximum surface temperature can be
determined from the values of the output power from the associated
(b) Sources of generated energy, for example, thermocouples and
apparatus or apparatus to which it is connected to obtain the temperature
photocells, which do not generate more than 1.5 V, 100 mA, and 25 mW
class. The temperature class can be determined by:
5.4.1.3 Application of Other Articles. Except as modified by this
(1) Reference to Table 5.4.1.10(b)
article, all applicable articles of this Code shall apply.
(2) Calculation using the formula:
5.4.1.4 Equipment. All intrinsically safe apparatus and associated
apparatus shall be listed.
T = PoRth + Tamb
Exception: Simple apparatus, as described on the control drawing, shall
where:
not be required to be listed.
T is the surface temperature
5.4.1.10 Equipment Installation.
Po is the output power marked on the associated apparatus or
(a) Control Drawing. Intrinsically safe apparatus, associated
intrinsically safe apparatus
apparatus, and other equipment shall be installed in accordance with the
control drawing(s).
Rth is the thermal resistance of the simple apparatus
Exception: A simple apparatus that does not interconnect intrinsically
Tamb is the ambient temperature (normally 40°C) and reference
safe circuits.
Table 5.0.1.8(b)
FPN: The control drawing identification is marked on the apparatus.
 In addition, components with a surface area smaller than 10 cm2
(excluding lead wires) may be classified as T5 if their surface FPN: Sheet metal partitions 0.90 mm or thicker are generally considered acceptable.
temperature does not exceed 150°C.
Exception No. 2: Where either (1) all of the intrinsically safe circuit
conductors or (2) all of the nonintrinsically safe circuit conductors are in
Table 5.4.1.10 Assessment for T4 Classification According to grounded metal-sheathed or metal-clad cables where the sheathing or
Component Size and Temperature cladding is capable of carrying fault current to ground.
Requirement for T4 FPN: Cables meeting the requirements of Articles 3.30 and 3.32 are typical of those
Total Surface Area
Classification (Based on 40°C considered acceptable.
Excluding Lead Wires
Ambient Temperature)
< 20 mm2 Surface temperature ≤ 275°C (2) Within Enclosures.
≥ 20 mm2 ≤ 10 cm2 Surface temperature ≤ 200°C
≥ 20 mm2 Power not exceeding 1.3 W* a. Conductors of intrinsically safe circuits shall be separated at
* Reduce to 1.2 W with an ambient of 60°C or 1.0 W with 80°C ambient temperature. least 50 mm from conductors of any nonintrinsically safe circuits, or as
specified in 5.4.1.30(a)(2).

FPN: The following apparatus are examples of simple apparatus: b. All conductors shall be secured so that any conductor that might
(1) Passive components, for example, switches, junction boxes, resistance come loose from a terminal cannot come in contact with another
temperature devices, and simple semiconductor devices such as LEDs terminal.
(2) Sources of generated energy, for example, thermocouples and photocells,
FPN No. 1: The use of separate wiring compartments for the intrinsically safe and
which do not generate more than 1.5 V, 100 mA, and 25 mW nonintrinsically safe terminals is the preferred method of complying with this
requirement.
5.4.1.20 Wiring Methods. Intrinsically safe apparatus and wiring shall FPN No. 2: Physical barriers such as grounded metal partitions or approved insulating
be permitted to be installed using any of the wiring methods suitable for partitions or approved restricted access wiring ducts separated from other such ducts
unclassified locations, including Chapter 7 and Chapter 8. Sealing shall by at least 19 mm can be used to help ensure the required separation of the wiring.
be as provided in
5.4.1.70, and separation shall be as provided in 5.4.1.30. (3) Other (Not in Raceway or Cable Tray Systems). Conductors and
cables of intrinsically safe circuits run in other than raceway or cable tray
5.4.1.30 Separation of Intrinsically Safe Conductors. systems shall be separated by at least 50 mm and secured from
conductors and cables of any nonintrinsically safe circuits.
(a) From Nonintrinsically Safe Circuit Conductors.
Exception: Where either (1) all of the intrinsically safe circuit
(1) In Raceways, Cable Trays, and Cables. Conductors of conductors are in Type MI or MC cables or (2) all of the nonintrinsically
intrinsically safe circuits shall not be placed in any raceway, cable tray, safe circuit conductors are in raceways or Type MI or MC cables where
or cable with conductors of any nonintrinsically safe circuit. the sheathing or cladding is capable of carrying fault current to ground.

Exception No. 1: Where conductors of intrinsically safe circuits are (b) From Different Intrinsically Safe Circuit Conductors. Different
separated from conductors of nonintrinsically safe circuits by a distance intrinsically safe circuits shall be in separate cables or shall be separated
of at least 50 mm and secured, or by a grounded metal partition or an from each other by one of the following means:
approved insulating partition.
 (1) The conductors of each circuit are within a grounded metal (classified) locations, associated apparatus shall be bonded in accordance
shield. with 5.1.2.21(a), 5.2.2.21(a), 5.3.2.21(a), or 5.5.1.25, as applicable.
(2) The conductors of each circuit have insulation with a minimum
thickness of 0.25 mm. 5.4.1.70 Sealing. Conduits and cables that are required to be sealed by
5.1.2.6, 5.2.2.6, and 5.5.1.16 shall be sealed to minimize the passage of
Exception: Unless otherwise identified. gases, vapors, or dusts. Such seals shall not be required to be
explosionproof or flameproof.
(3) The clearance between two terminals for connection of field
wiring of different intrinsically safe circuits shall be at least 6 mm unless Exception: Seals shall not be required for enclosures that contain only
this clearance is permitted to be reduced by the control drawing. intrinsically safe apparatus, except as required by 5.1.2.6(f)(3).

5.4.1.50 Grounding. 5.4.1.80 Identification. Labels required by this section shall be suitable
for the environment where they are installed with consideration given to
(a) Intrinsically Safe Apparatus, Associated Apparatus, and exposure to chemicals and sunlight.
Raceways. Intrinsically safe apparatus, associated apparatus, cable
shields, enclosures, and raceways, if of metal, shall be grounded. (a) Terminals. Intrinsically safe circuits shall be identified at terminal
and junction locations in a manner that will prevent unintentional
FPN: Supplementary bonding to the grounding electrode may be needed for some interference with the circuits during testing and servicing.
associated apparatus, for example, zener diode barriers, if specified in the control
drawing. See ANSI/ISA RP 12.06.01-2002, Wiring Methods for Hazardous (Classified)
Locations Instrumentation Part 1: Intrinsic Safety. (b) Wiring. Raceways, cable trays, and other wiring methods for
intrinsically safe system wiring shall be identified with permanently
(b) Connection to Grounding Electrodes. Where connection to a affixed labels with the wording “Intrinsic Safety Wiring” or equivalent.
grounding electrode is required, the grounding electrode shall be as The labels shall be located so as to be visible after installation and placed
specified in 2.50.3.3(a)(1), (a)(2), (a)(3), and (a)(4) and shall comply so that they may be readily traced through the entire length of the
with 2.50.2.11(a)(7). Section 2.50.3.3(a)(5), (a)(6), and (a)(7) shall not be installation. Intrinsic safety circuit labels shall appear in every section of
used if electrodes specified in 2.50.3.3(a)(1), (a)(2), (a)(3), or (a)(4) are the wiring system that is separated by enclosures, walls, partitions, or
available. floors. Spacing between labels shall not be more than 7 600 mm.

(c) Shields. Where shielded conductors or cables are used, shields shall Exception: Circuits run underground shall be permitted to be identified
be grounded. where they become accessible after emergence from the ground.

Exception: Where a shield is part of an intrinsically safe circuit. FPN No. 1: Wiring methods permitted in unclassified locations may be used for
intrinsically safe systems in hazardous (classified) locations. Without labels to identify
the application of the wiring, enforcement authorities cannot determine that an
5.4.1.60 Bonding. installation is in compliance with this Code.

FPN No. 2: In unclassified locations, identification is necessary to ensure that

(a) Hazardous Locations. In hazardous (classified) locations, nonintrinsically safe wire will not be inadvertently added to existing raceways at a later
intrinsically safe apparatus shall be bonded in the hazardous (classified) date.
location in accordance with 2.50.5.11.
(c) Color Coding. Color coding shall be permitted to identify
(b) Unclassified. In unclassified or nonhazardous locations, where intrinsically safe conductors where they are colored light blue and where
metal raceways are used for intrinsically safe system wiring in hazardous no other conductors colored light blue are used. Likewise, color coding
shall be permitted to identify raceways, cable trays, and junction boxes
where they are colored light blue and contain only intrinsically safe FPN: See ANSI/ISA 12.23.01-2002, Electrical Apparatus for Use in Class I, Zone 1
Hazardous (Classified) Locations, Type of Protection — Encapsulation “m”; and
wiring. ANSI/UL 60079–18, Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres — Part 18:
Encapsulation “m.”

ARTICLE 5.5 — CLASS I, ZONE 0, 1, AND 2 LOCATIONS Flameproof “d.” Type of protection where the enclosure will
withstand an internal explosion of a flammable mixture that has
FPN: Rules that are followed by a reference in brackets contain text that has been penetrated into the interior, without suffering damage and without
extracted from NFPA 497-2004, Recommended Practice for the Classification of
Flammable Liquids, Gases, or Vapors and of Hazardous (Classified) Locations for
causing ignition, through any joints or structural openings in the
Electrical Installations in Chemical Process Areas. Only editorial changes were made enclosure, of an external explosive gas atmosphere consisting of one or
to the extracted text to make it consistent with this Code. more of the gases or vapors for which it is designed.
5.5.1.1 Scope. This article covers the requirements for the zone FPN: See ANSI/ISA 12.22.01-2002, Electrical Apparatus for Use in Class I, Zone 1
classification system as an alternative to the division classification and 2 Hazardous (Classified) Locations, Type of Protection — Flameproof “d”; and
ANSI/UL 60079–1, Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres — Part 1:
system covered in Article 5.0 for electrical and electronic equipment and Flameproof enclosures “d.”
wiring for all voltages in Class I, Zone 0, Zone 1, and Zone 2 hazardous
(classified) locations where fire or explosion hazards may exist due to Increased Safety “e.” Type of protection applied to electrical
flammable gases, vapors, or liquids. equipment that does not produce arcs or sparks in normal service and
under specified abnormal conditions, in which additional measures are
FPN: For the requirements for electrical and electronic equipment and wiring for all
voltages in Class I, Division 1 or Division 2; Class II, Division 1 or Division 2; and
applied so as to give increased security against the possibility of
Class III, Division 1 or Division 2 hazardous (classified) locations where fire or excessive temperatures and of the occurrence of arcs and sparks.
explosion hazards may exist due to flammable gases or vapors, flammable liquids, or
combustible dusts or fibers, refer to Articles 5.0 through 5.4. FPN: See ANSI/ISA — 12.16.01-2002, Electrical Apparatus for Use in Class I, Zone 1
Hazardous (Classified) Locations, Type of Protection — Increased Safety “e”; and
5.5.1.2 Definitions. For purposes of this article, the following definitions ANSI/UL 60079-7, Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres — Part 7:
Increased Safety “e.”
apply.
Intrinsic Safety “i.” Type of protection where any spark or thermal
Combustible Gas Detection System. A protection technique utilizing
effect is incapable of causing ignition of a mixture of flammable or
stationary gas detectors in industrial establishments.
combustible material in air under prescribed test conditions.
Electrical and Electronic Equipment. Materials, fittings, devices, FPN No. 1: See ANSI/UL 913-1997, Intrinsically Safe Apparatus and Associated
appliances, and the like that are part of, or in connection with, an Apparatus for Use in Class I, II, and III, Hazardous Locations; ISA 12.02.01-1999,
electrical installation. Electrical Apparatus for Use in Class I, Zones 0, 1 and 2 Hazardous (Classified)
Locations — Intrinsic Safety “i”; and ANSI/UL 60079-11, Electrical apparatus for
explosive gas atmospheres — Part II: Intrinsic safety “i.”
FPN: Portable or transportable equipment having self-contained power supplies, such
as battery-operated equipment, could potentially become an ignition source in FPN No. 2: Intrinsic safety is designated type of protection “ia” for use in Zone 0
hazardous (classified) locations. locations. Intrinsic safety is designated type of protection “ib” for use in Zone 1
locations.
Encapsulation “m.” Type of protection where electrical parts that FPN No. 3: Intrinsically safe associated apparatus, designated by [ia] or [ib], is
could ignite an explosive atmosphere by either sparking or heating are connected to intrinsically safe apparatus (“ia” or “ib,” respectively) but is located
enclosed in a compound in such a way that this explosive atmosphere outside the hazardous (classified) location unless also protected by another type of
protection (such as flameproof).
cannot be ignited.
 Oil Immersion “o.” Type of protection where electrical equipment is Zone 2; Class II, Division 1; Class II, Division 2; Class III, Division 1;
immersed in a protective liquid in such a way that an explosive Class III, Division 2; or any combination thereof.
atmosphere that may be above the liquid or outside the enclosure cannot
be ignited. 5.5.1.3 Other Articles. All other applicable rules contained in this Code
shall apply to electrical equipment and wiring installed in hazardous
FPN: See ISA 12.26.01-1998, Electrical Apparatus for Use in Class I, Zone 1 (classified) locations.
Hazardous (Classified) Locations, Type of Protection — Oil-Immersion “o”; and
ANSI/UL 60079-6, Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres — Part 6: Oil-
immersion “o.” Exception: As modified by Article 5.4 and this Article.

Powder Filling “q.” Type of protection where electrical parts capable 5.5.1.4 General.
of igniting an explosive atmosphere are fixed in position and completely
surrounded by filling material (glass or quartz powder) to prevent the (a) Documentation for Industrial Occupancies. All areas in
ignition of an external explosive atmosphere. industrial occupancies designated as hazardous (classified) locations
shall be properly documented. This documentation shall be available to
FPN: See ANSI/ISA-12.25.01-2002, Electrical Apparatus for Use in Class I, Zone 1 those authorized to design, install, inspect, maintain, or operate electrical
Hazardous (Classified) Locations Type of Protection — Powder Filling “q”; and
ANSI/UL 60079-5, Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres — Part 5: equipment at the location.
Powder filling “q.”
FPN: For examples of area classification drawings, see ANSI/API RP 505-1997,
Purged and Pressurized. Type of protection for electrical equipment Recommended Practice for Classification of Locations for Electrical Installations at
Petroleum Facilities Classified as Class I, Zone 0, Zone 1, or Zone 2; ISA
that uses the technique of guarding against the ingress of the external RP12.24.01-1998, Recommended Practice for Classification of Locations for Electrical
atmosphere, which may be explosive, into an enclosure by maintaining a Installations Classified as Class I, Zone 0, Zone 1, or Zone 2; IEC 60079-10-1995,
Electrical Apparatus for Explosive Gas Atmospheres, Classification of Hazardous
protective gas therein at a pressure above that of the external atmosphere. Areas; and Model Code of Safe Practice in the Petroleum Industry, Part 15: Area
Classification Code for Petroleum Installations, IP 15, The Institute of Petroleum,
FPN No. 1: See NFPA 496-2003, Standard for Purged and Pressurized Enclosures London.
for Electrical Equipment.

FPN No. 2: See IEC 60079-2-2000, Electrical Apparatus for Explosive Gas (b) Reference Standards. Important information relating to topics
Atmospheres — Part 2: Electrical Apparatus, Type of Protection “p”; and IEC 60079- covered in Chapter 5 may be found in other publications.
13-1982, Electrical Apparatus for Explosive Gas Atmospheres — Part 13:
Construction and Use of Rooms or Buildings Protected by Pressurization.
FPN No. 1: It is important that the authority having jurisdiction be familiar with
recorded industrial experience as well as with standards of the National Fire
Type of Protection “n.” Type of protection where electrical Protection Association (NFPA), the American Petroleum Institute (API), the
Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (ISA), and the International
equipment, in normal operation, is not capable of igniting a surrounding Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) that may be of use in the classification of various
explosive gas atmosphere and a fault capable of causing ignition is not locations, the determination of adequate ventilation, and the protection against static
likely to occur. electricity and lightning hazards.

FPN No. 2: For further information on the classification of locations, see ANSI/API RP
FPN: See ANSI/UL 60079-15-2002, Electrical apparatus for explosive gas 505-1997, Recommended Practice for Classification of Locations for Electrical
atmospheres — Part 15: Type of protection “n”; and ANSI/ISA 12.12.02-2003, Installations at Petroleum Facilities Classified as Class I, Zone 0, Zone 1, or Zone 2;
Electrical apparatus for use in Class I, Zone 2 Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Type ISA RP 12.24.01-1998, Recommended Practice for Classification of Locations for
of protection “n.” Electrical Installations Classified as Class I, Zone 0, Zone 1, or Zone 2; IEC 60079-10-
1995, Electrical Apparatus for Explosive Gas Atmospheres, Classification of
Unclassified Locations. Locations determined to be neither Class I, Hazardous Areas; and Model Code of Safe Practice in the Petroleum Industry, Part
15: Area Classification Code for Petroleum Installations, IP 15, The Institute of
Division 1; Class I, Division 2; Class I, Zone 0; Class I, Zone 1; Class I, Petroleum, London.
 FPN No. 3: For further information on protection against static electricity and lightning
hazards in hazardous (classified) locations, see NFPA 77-2000, Recommended FPN: For further information regarding classification and ventilation of areas involving
Practice on Static Electricity; NFPA 780-2004, Standard for the Installation of ammonia, see ANSI/ASHRAE 15-1994, Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration;
Lightning Protection Systems; and API RP 2003-1998, Protection Against Ignitions and ANSI/CGA G2.1-1989 (14-39), Safety Requirements for the Storage and
Arising Out of Static Lightning and Stray Currents. Handling of Anhydrous Ammonia.
FPN No. 4: For further information on ventilation, see NFPA 30-2003, Flammable and
Combustible Liquids Code, and ANSI/API RP 505-1997, Recommended Practice for (b) Class I, Zone 0, 1, and 2 Locations. Class I, Zone 0, 1, and 2
Classification of Locations for Electrical Installations at Petroleum Facilities Classified locations are those in which flammable gases or vapors are or may be
as Class I, Zone 0, Zone 1, or Zone 2.
present in the air in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitible
FPN No. 5: For further information on electrical systems for hazardous (classified) mixtures. Class I, Zone 0, 1, and 2 locations shall include those specified
locations on offshore oil and gas producing platforms, see ANSI/API RP 14FZ-2000,
Recommended Practice for Design and Installation of Electrical Systems for Fixed
in 5.5.1.5(b)(1), (b)(2), and (b)(3).
and Floating Offshore Petroleum Facilities for Unclassified and Class I, Zone 0, Zone
1, and Zone 2 Locations. (1) Class I, Zone 0. A Class I, Zone 0 location is a location in which
FPN No. 6: For further information on the installation of electrical equipment in
hazardous (classified) locations in general, see IEC 60079-14-1996, Electrical a. Ignitible concentrations of flammable gases or vapors are
Apparatus for Explosive Gas Atmospheres — Part 14: Electrical Installations in present continuously, or
Explosive Gas Atmospheres (Other Than Mines), and IEC 60079-16-1990, Electrical
Apparatus for Explosive Gas Atmospheres — Part 16: Artificial Ventilation for the b. Ignitible concentrations of flammable gases or vapors are
Protection of Analyzer(s) Houses. present for long periods of time.
FPN No. 7: For further information on application of electrical equipment in hazardous
(classified) locations in general, see ANSI/ISA 12.00.01-2002, Electrical Apparatus for FPN No. 1: As a guide in determining when flammable gases or vapors are present
Use in Class I, Zones 0 and 1, Hazardous (Classified) Locations: General continuously or for long periods of time, refer to ANSI/API RP 505-1997,
Requirements; ISA 12.01.01-1999, Definitions and Information Pertaining to Electrical Recommended Practice for Classification of Locations for Electrical Installations of
Apparatus in Hazardous (Classified) Locations; and ANSI/UL 60079-0, Electrical Petroleum Facilities Classified as Class I, Zone 0, Zone 1 or Zone 2; ISA 12.24.01-
apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres — Part 0: General requirements. 1998, Recommended Practice for Classification of Locations for Electrical Installations
Classified as Class I, Zone 0, Zone 1, or Zone 2; IEC 60079-10-1995, Electrical
Apparatus for Explosive Gas Atmospheres, Classifications of Hazardous Areas; and
5.5.1.5 Classifications of Locations. Area Classification Code for Petroleum Installations, Model Code, Part 15, Institute of
Petroleum.

(a) Classification of Locations. Locations shall be classified FPN No. 2: This classification includes locations inside vented tanks or vessels that
depending on the properties of the flammable vapors, liquids, or gases contain volatile flammable liquids; inside inadequately vented spraying or coating
enclosures, where volatile flammable solvents are used; between the inner and outer
that may be present and the likelihood that a flammable or combustible roof sections of a floating roof tank containing volatile flammable liquids; inside open
concentration or quantity is present. Where pyrophoric materials are the vessels, tanks and pits containing volatile flammable liquids; the interior of an exhaust
only materials used or handled, these locations shall not be classified. duct that is used to vent ignitible concentrations of gases or vapors; and inside
inadequately ventilated enclosures that contain normally venting instruments utilizing
Each room, section, or area shall be considered individually in or analyzing flammable fluids and venting to the inside of the enclosures.
determining its classification.
FPN No. 3: It is not good practice to install electrical equipment in Zone 0 locations
except when the equipment is essential to the process or when other locations are not
FPN No. 1: See 5.5.1.7 for restrictions on area classification.
feasible. [See 5.5.1.5(a) FPN No. 2.] If it is necessary to install electrical systems in a
Zone 0 location, it is good practice to install intrinsically safe systems as described by
FPN No. 2: Through the exercise of ingenuity in the layout of electrical installations for
Article 5.4.
hazardous (classified) locations, it is frequently possible to locate much of the
equipment in reduced level of classification or in an unclassified location and, thus, to
reduce the amount of special equipment required. (2) Class I, Zone 1. A Class I, Zone 1 location is a location

Rooms and areas containing ammonia refrigeration systems that are a. In which ignitible concentrations of flammable gases or vapors
equipped with adequate mechanical ventilation may be classified as are likely to exist under normal operating conditions; or
“unclassified” locations.
 b. In which ignitible concentrations of flammable gases or vapors result of the abnormal operation of the equipment with which the liquids
may exist frequently because of repair or maintenance operations or or gases are handled, processed, or used; or
because of leakage; or c. In which ignitible concentrations of flammable gases or vapors
c. In which equipment is operated or processes are carried on, of normally are prevented by positive mechanical ventilation but which
such a nature that equipment breakdown or faulty operations could result may become hazardous as a result of failure or abnormal operation of the
in the release of ignitible concentrations of flammable gases or vapors ventilation equipment; or
and also cause simultaneous failure of electrical equipment in a mode to d. That is adjacent to a Class I, Zone 1 location, from which
cause the electrical equipment to become a source of ignition; or ignitible concentrations of flammable gases or vapors could be
d. That is adjacent to a Class I, Zone 0 location from which communicated, unless such communication is prevented by adequate
ignitible concentrations of vapors could be communicated, unless positive-pressure ventilation from a source of clean air and effective
communication is prevented by adequate positive pressure ventilation safeguards against ventilation failure are provided.
from a source of clean air and effective safeguards against ventilation
failure are provided. FPN: The Zone 2 classification usually includes locations where volatile flammable
liquids or flammable gases or vapors are used but which would become hazardous
only in case of an accident or of some unusual operating condition.
FPN No. 1: Normal operation is considered the situation when plant equipment is
operating within its design parameters. Minor releases of flammable material may be
part of normal operations. Minor releases include the releases from mechanical 5.5.1.6 Material Groups. For purposes of testing, approval, and area
packings on pumps. Failures that involve repair or shutdown (such as the breakdown classification, various air mixtures (not oxygen enriched) shall be
of pump seals and flange gaskets, and spillage caused by accidents) are not
considered normal operation. grouped as required in 5.5.1.6(a), (b), and (c).
FPN No. 2: This classification usually includes locations where volatile flammable FPN: Group I is intended for use in describing atmospheres that contain firedamp (a
liquids or liquefied flammable gases are transferred from one container to another. In mixture of gases, composed mostly of methane, found underground, usually in
areas in the vicinity of spraying and painting operations where flammable solvents are mines). This Code does not apply to installations underground in mines. See 90.2(b).
used; adequately ventilated drying rooms or compartments for evaporation of
flammable solvents; adequately ventilated locations containing fat and oil extraction
equipment using volatile flammable solvents; portions of cleaning and dyeing plants Group II shall be subdivided into IIC, IIB, and IIA, as noted in 5.5.1.6(a),
where volatile flammable liquids are used; adequately ventilated gas generator rooms (b), and (c), according to the nature of the gas or vapor, for protection
and other portions of gas manufacturing plants where flammable gas may escape;
inadequately ventilated pump rooms for flammable gas or for volatile flammable
techniques “d,” “ia,” “ib,” “[ia],” and “[ib],” and, where applicable, “n”
liquids; the interiors of refrigerators and freezers in which volatile flammable materials and “o.”
are stored in the open, lightly stoppered, or in easily ruptured containers; and other
locations where ignitible concentrations of flammable vapors or gases are likely to FPN No. 1: The gas and vapor subdivision as described above is based on the
occur in the course of normal operation but not classified Zone 0. maximum experimental safe gap (MESG), minimum igniting current (MIC), or both.
Test equipment for determining the MESG is described in IEC 60079-1A-1975,
(3) Class I, Zone 2. A Class I, Zone 2 location is a location Amendment No. 1 (1993), Construction and Verification Tests of Flameproof
Enclosures of Electrical Apparatus; and UL Technical Report No. 58 (1993). The test
equipment for determining MIC is described in IEC 60079-11-1999, Electrical
a. In which ignitible concentrations of flammable gases or vapors Apparatus for Explosive Gas Atmospheres — Part 11: Intrinsic Safety “i.” The
are not likely to occur in normal operation and, if they do occur, will classification of gases or vapors according to their maximum experimental safe gaps
and minimum igniting currents is described in IEC 60079-12-1978, Classification of
exist only for a short period; or Mixtures of Gases or Vapours with Air According to Their Maximum Experimental
b. In which volatile flammable liquids, flammable gases, or Safe Gaps and Minimum Igniting Currents.
flammable vapors are handled, processed, or used but in which the FPN No. 2: Verification of electrical equipment utilizing protection techniques “e,” “m,”
liquids, gases, or vapors normally are confined within closed containers “p,” and “q,” due to design technique, does not require tests involving MESG or MIC.
of closed systems from which they can escape, only as a result of Therefore, Group II is not required to be subdivided for these protection techniques.
accidental rupture or breakdown of the containers or system, or as a FPN No. 3: It is necessary that the meanings of the different equipment markings and
Group II classifications be carefully observed to avoid confusion with Class I, Divisions
1 and 2, Groups A, B, C, and D.
 concentrations of vapors may not exist in a location classified Class I, Zones 0, 1, or 2
at normal ambient temperature.
Class I, Zone 0, 1, and 2, groups shall be as follows:
(a) Supervision of Work. Classification of areas and selection of
(a) Group IIC. Atmospheres containing acetylene, hydrogen, or
equipment and wiring methods shall be under the supervision of a
flammable gas, flammable liquid-produced vapor, or combustible liquid-
licensed electrical practitioner.
produced vapor mixed with air that may burn or explode, having either a
maximum experimental safe gap (MESG) value less than or equal to 0.50
(b) Dual Classification. In instances of areas within the same facility
mm or minimum igniting current ratio (MIC ratio) less than or equal to
classified separately, Class I, Zone 2 locations shall be permitted to abut,
0.45. [NFPA 497:3.3]
but not overlap, Class I, Division 2 locations. Class I, Zone 0 or Zone 1
FPN: Group IIC is equivalent to a combination of Class I, Group A, and Class I, Group
locations shall not abut Class I, Division 1 or Division 2 locations.
B, as described in 5.0.1.6(a)(1) and 5.0.1.6(a)(2).
(c) Reclassification Permitted. A Class I, Division 1 or Division 2
(b) Group IIB. Atmospheres containing acetaldehyde, ethylene, or location shall be permitted to be reclassified as a Class I, Zone 0, Zone 1,
flammable gas, flammable liquid-produced vapor, or combustible liquid- or Zone 2 location, provided all of the space that is classified because of
produced vapor mixed with air that may burn or explode, having either a single flammable gas or vapor source is reclassified under the
maximum experimental safe gap (MESG) values greater than 0.50 mm requirements of this article.
and less than or equal to 0.90 mm or minimum igniting current ratio
(MIC ratio) greater than 0.45 and less than or equal to 0.80. [NFPA (d) Solid Obstacles. Flameproof equipment with flanged joints shall
497:3.3] not be installed such that the flange openings are closer than the
distances shown in Table 5.5.1.7(d) to any solid obstacle that is not a part
FPN: Group IIB is equivalent to Class I, Group C, as described in 5.0.1.6(a)(3). of the equipment (such as steelworks, walls, weather guards, mounting
brackets, pipes, or other electrical equipment) unless the equipment is
(c) Group IIA. Atmospheres containing acetone, ammonia, ethyl listed for a smaller distance of separation.
alcohol, gasoline, methane, propane, or flammable gas, flammable
liquid-produced vapor, or combustible liquid-produced vapor mixed with
air that may burn or explode, having either a maximum experiment safe
gap (MESG) value greater than 0.90 mm or minimum igniting current Table 5.5.1.7(d) Minimum Distance of Obstructions
ratio (MIC ratio) greater than 0.80. [NFPA 497:3.3] From Flameproof “d” Flange Openings
FPN: Group IIA is equivalent to Class I, Group D as described in 5.0.1.6(a)(4).
Gas Group Minimum Distance (mm)
IIC 40
5.5.1.7 Special Precaution. Article 5.5 requires equipment construction IIB 30
and installation that ensures safe performance under conditions of proper IIA 10
use and maintenance.

FPN No. 1: It is important that inspection authorities and users exercise more than
ordinary care with regard to the installation and maintenance of electrical equipment in 5.5.1.8 Protection Techniques. Acceptable protection techniques for
hazardous (classified) locations.
electrical and electronic equipment in hazardous (classified) locations
FPN No. 2: Low ambient conditions require special consideration. Electrical shall be as described in 5.5.1.8(a) through 5.5.1.8(i).
equipment depending on the protection techniques described by 5.5.1.8(a) may not
be suitable for use at temperatures lower than -20°C unless they are identified for use
at lower temperatures. However, at low ambient temperatures, flammable FPN: For additional information, see ANSI/ISA 12.00.01-2002, Electrical Apparatus for
Use in Class I, Zones 0 and 1 Hazardous (Classified) Locations, General
 Requirements; ANSI/ISA 12.01.01-2002, Definitions and Information Pertaining to 5.5.1.8(i)(1), i(2), or i(3) shall be permitted. The type of detection
Electrical Apparatus in Hazardous (Classified) Locations; and ANSI/UL 60079–0,
Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres — Part 0: General requirements. equipment, its listing, installation location(s), alarm and shutdown
criteria, and calibration frequency shall be documented when
(a) Flameproof “d”. This protection technique shall be permitted for combustible gas detectors are used as a protection technique.
equipment in Class I, Zone 1 or Zone 2 locations.
FPN No. 1: For further information, see ANSI/ISA-12.13.01, Performance
Requirements, Combustible Gas Detectors.
(b) Purged and Pressurized. This protection technique shall be
permitted for equipment in those Class I, Zone 1 or Zone 2 locations for FPN No. 2: For further information, see ANSI/API RP 505,Recommended Practice for
Classification of Locations for Electrical Installations at Petroleum Facilities Classified
which it is identified. as Class I, Zone 0, Zone 1, and Zone 2.

(c) Intrinsic Safety. This protection technique shall be permitted for FPN No. 3: For further information, see ISA-RP12.13.02, Installation, Operation, and
Maintenance of Combustible Gas Detection Instruments.
apparatus and associated apparatus in Class I, Zone 0, Zone 1, or Zone 2
locations for which it is listed. (1) Inadequate Ventilation. In a Class I, Zone 1 location that is so
classified due to inadequate ventilation, electrical equipment suitable for
(d) Type of Protection “n”. This protection technique shall be Class I, Zone 2 locations shall be permitted.
permitted for equipment in Class I, Zone 2 locations. Type of protection
“n” is further subdivided into nA, nC, and nR. (2) Interior of a Building. In a building located in, or with an opening
FPN: See Table 5.5.1.9(c)(2)d for the descriptions of subdivisions for type of
into, a Class I, Zone 2 location where the interior does not contain a
protection “n”. source of flammable gas or vapor, electrical equipment for unclassified
locations shall be permitted.
(e) Oil Immersion “o”. This protection technique shall be permitted
for equipment in Class I, Zone 1 or Zone 2 locations. (3) Interior of a Control Panel. In the interior of a control panel
containing instrumentation utilizing or measuring flammable liquids,
(f) Increased Safety “e”. This protection technique shall be permitted gases, or vapors, electrical equipment suitable for Class I, Zone 2
for equipment in Class I, Zone 1 or Zone 2 locations. locations shall be permitted.

(g) Encapsulation “m”. This protection technique shall be permitted 5.5.1.9 Equipment.
for equipment in Class I, Zone 1 or Zone 2 locations.
(a) Suitability. Suitability of identified equipment shall be determined
(h) Powder Filling “q”. This protection technique shall be permitted by one of the following:
for equipment in Class I, Zone 1 or Zone 2 locations.
(1) Equipment listing or labeling
(i) Combustible Gas Detection System. A combustible gas detection (2) Evidence of equipment evaluation from a qualified testing
system shall be permitted as a means of protection in industrial laboratory or inspection agency concerned with product evaluation
establishments with restricted public access and where the conditions of (3) Evidence acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction such as
maintenance and supervision ensure that only licensed electrical a manufacturer's self-evaluation or an owner's engineering judgment
practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner under the supervision
of a licensed electrical practitioner service the installation. Gas detection (b) Listing.
equipment shall be listed for detection of the specific gas or vapor to be
encountered. Where such a system is installed, equipment specified in (1) Equipment that is listed for a Zone 0 location shall be permitted
in a Zone 1 or Zone 2 location of the same gas or vapor, provided that it e. Applicable gas classification group(s) in accordance with Table
is installed in accordance with the requirements for the marked type of 5.5.1.9(c)
protection. Equipment that is listed of a Zone 1 location shall be f. Temperature classification in accordance with 5.5.1.9(d)(1)
permitted in a Zone 2 location of the same gas or vapor, provided that it
is installed in accordance with the requirements for the marked type of Exception No. 1: Associated apparatus NOT suitable for installation in
protection. a hazardous (classified) locations shall be required to be marked only
with (3), (4), and (5), but BOTH the symbol AEx (3) and the symbol for
(2) Equipment shall be permitted to be listed for a specific gas or the type of protection (4) shall be enclosed within the same square
vapor, specific mixtures of gases or vapors, or any specific combination brackets, for example, [AEx ia] IIC.
of gases or vapors.
Exception No. 2: Simple apparatus as defined in 5.4.1.2 shall not be
FPN: One common example is equipment marked for “IIB. + H2.” required to have a marked operating temperature or temperature class.
(c) Marking. Equipment shall be marked in accordance with Electrical equipment of types of protection “e,” “m,” “p,” or “q”
5.5.1.9(c)(1) or (c)(2). shall be marked Group II. Electrical equipment of types of protection
“d,” “ia,” “ib,” “[ia],” or “[ib]” shall be marked Group IIA, IIB, or IIC,
(1) Division Equipment. Equipment identified for Class I, Division 1 or for a specific gas or vapor. Electrical equipment of types of protection
or Class I, Division 2 shall, in addition to being marked in accordance “n” shall be marked Group II unless it contains enclosed-break devices,
with 5.0.1.8(b), be permitted to be marked with all of the following: nonincendive components, or energy-limited equipment or circuits, in
which case it shall be marked Group IIA, IIB, or IIC, or a specific gas or
a. Class I, Zone 1 or Class I, Zone 2 (as applicable) vapor. Electrical equipment of other types of protection shall be marked
b. Applicable gas classification group(s) in accordance with Table Group II unless the type of protection utilized by the equipment requires
5.5.1.9(c) that it be marked Group IIA, IIB, or IIC, or a specific gas or vapor.
c.Temperature classification in accordance with 5.5.1.9(d)(1)
FPN No. 1: An example of the required marking for intrinsically safe apparatus for
installation in Class I, Zone 0 is “Class I, Zone 0, AEx ia IIC T6.” An explanation of the
marking that is required is shown in FPN Figure 5.5.1.9(c)(2).
Table 5.5.1.9(c) Gas Classification Groups
Gas Group Comment FPN No. 2: An example of the required marking for intrinsically safe associated
apparatus mounted in a flameproof enclosure for installation in Class I, Zone 1 is
IIC See 5.5.1.6(a)(1) “Class I, Zone 1 AEx d[ia] IIC T4.”
IIB See 5.5.1.6(a)(2)
IIA See 5.5.1.6(a)(3) FPN No. 3: An example of the required marking for intrinsically safe associated
apparatus NOT for installation in a hazardous (classified) location is “[AEx ia] IIC.”

(d) Class I Temperature. The temperature marking specified below

(2) Zone Equipment. Equipment meeting one or more of the shall not exceed the ignition temperature of the specific gas or vapor to
protection techniques described in 5.5.1.8 shall be marked with all of the be encountered.
following in the order shown:
a. Class FPN: For information regarding ignition temperatures of gases and vapors, see NFPA
b. Zone 497-2004, Recommended Practice for the Classification of Flammable Liquids,
Gases, or Vapors and of Hazardous (Classified) Locations for Electrical Installations
c. Symbol “AEx” in Chemical Process Areas; and IEC 60079-20-1996, Electrical Apparatus for
d. Protection technique(s) in accordance with Table Explosive Gas Atmospheres, Data for Flammable Gases and Vapours, Relating to the
5.5.1.9(c)(2)(4) Use of Electrical Apparatus.
 (1) Temperature Classifications. Equipment shall be marked to show
the operating temperature or temperature class referenced to a 40°C
(104°F) ambient. The temperature class, if provided, shall be indicated
using the temperature class (T Code) shown in Table 5.5.1.9(d)(1).
Electrical equipment designed for use in the ambient temperature
range between -20°C and +40°C shall require no additional ambient
temperature marking.
Electrical equipment that is designed for use in a range of ambient
temperatures other than -20°C and +40°C is considered to be special; and
the ambient temperature range shall then be marked on the equipment,
including either the symbol “Ta” or “Tamb” together with the special
range of ambient temperatures. As an example, such a marking might be
“-30°C Ta + 40°C.”
Electrical equipment suitable for ambient temperatures exceeding
40°C shall be marked with both the maximum ambient temperature and
Figure 5.5.1.9(c)(2) Zone Equipment Marking the operating temperature or temperature class at that ambient
temperature.

Exception No. 1: Equipment of the non–heat-producing type, such as

conduit fittings, and equipment of the heat-producing type having a
Table 5.5.1.9(c)(2)d Types of Protection Designation maximum temperature of not more than 100°C shall not be required to
Designation Technique Zone* have a marked operating temperature or temperature class.
d Flameproof enclosure 1
e Increased safety 1 Exception No. 2: Equipment identified for Class I, Division 1 or
ia Intrinsic safety 0 Division 2 locations as permitted by 5.5.1.20(b) and 5.5.1.20(d) shall be
ib Intrinsic safety 1 permitted to be marked in accordance with 5.0.1.8(b) and Table
[ia] Associated apparatus Unclassified 5.0.1.8(b).
[ib] Associated apparatus Unclassified
m Encapsulation 1
nA Nonsparking equipment 2 Table 5.5.1.9(d)(1) Classification of Maximum Surface
nC Sparking equipment in which 2 Temperature for Group II Electrical Equipment
the contacts are suitably Temperature Class Maximum Surface
protected other than by (T Code) Temperature (oC)
restricted breathing enclosure T1 ≤ 450
nR Restricted breathing enclosure 2 T2 ≤ 300
o Oil immersion 1 T3 ≤ 200
p Purged and pressurized 1 or 2 T4 ≤ 135
q Powder filled 1 T5 ≤ 100
* Does not address use where a combination of techniques is used.
T6 ≤ 85
 FPN: Article 5.4 only includes protection technique “ia.”
(e) Threading. All NPT threaded conduit and fittings referred to
herein shall be threaded with a National (American) Standard Pipe Taper (b) Class I, Zone 1.
(NPT) thread that provides a taper of 1 in 16 (19mm taper per 300 mm).
Conduit and fittings shall be made wrenchtight to prevent sparking when (1) General. In Class I, Zone 1 locations, the wiring methods in
fault current flows through the conduit system, and to ensure the (b)(1)a through (b)(1)f shall be permitted.
explosionproof or flameproof integrity of the conduit system where
applicable. Equipment provided with threaded entries for field wiring a. All wiring methods permitted by 5.5.1.15(a).
connections shall be installed in accordance with 5.5.1.9(e)(1) or
5.5.1.9(e)(2). Threaded entries into explosionproof or flameproof b. In industrial establishments with restricted public access, where
equipment shall be made up with at least five threads fully engaged. the conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that only licensed
electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner under the
Exception: For listed explosionproof or flameproof equipment, factory supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner service the installation,
threaded NPT entries shall be made up with at least 4½ threads fully and where the cable is not subject to physical damage, Type MC-HL
engaged. cable listed for use in Class I, Zone 1 or Division 1 locations, with a
gas/vaportight continuous corrugated metallic sheath, an overall jacket of
(1) Equipment Provided with Threaded Entries for NPT Threaded suitable polymeric material, separate grounding conductors in
Conduit or Fittings. For equipment provided with threaded entries for accordance with 2.50.6.13, and provided with termination fittings listed
NPT threaded conduit or fittings, listed conduit fittings or cable fittings for the application.
shall be used.
FPN: See 330.12 for restrictions on use of Type MC cable.

FPN: Thread form specifications for NPT threads are located in ANSI/ASME B1.20.1-
1983, Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch). c. In industrial establishments with restricted public access, where
the conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that only licensed
(2) Equipment Provided with Threaded Entries for Metric Threaded electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner under the
Conduit or Fittings. For equipment with metric threaded entries, such supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner service the installation,
entries shall be identified as being metric, or listed adapters to permit and where the cable is not subject to physical damage, Type ITC-HL
connection to conduit or NPT-threaded fittings shall be provided with the cable, listed for use in Class I, Zone 1 or Division 1 locations, with a
equipment. Adapters shall be used for connection to conduit or NPT- gas/vaportight continuous corrugated metallic sheath, an overall jacket of
threaded fittings. Listed cable fittings that have metric threads shall be suitable polymeric material and provided with termination fittings listed
permitted to be used. for the application.

FPN: Threading specifications for metric threaded entries are located in ISO 965/1- d. Type MI cable with termination fittings listed for Class I, Zone
1980, Metric Screw Threads; and ISO 965/3-1980, Metric Screw Threads.
1 or Division 1 locations. Type MI cable shall be installed and supported
in a manner to avoid tensile stress at the termination fittings.
5.5.1.15 Wiring Methods. Wiring methods shall maintain the integrity
of protection techniques and shall comply with 5.5.1.15(a) through
e. Threaded rigid metal conduit, or threaded steel intermediate
5.5.1.15(c).
metal conduit.
(a) Class I, Zone 0. In Class I, Zone 0 locations, only intrinsically safe
f. Rigid nonmetallic conduit complying with Article 352 shall be
wiring methods in accordance with Article 5.4 shall be permitted.
permitted where encased in a concrete envelope a minimum of 50 mm
thick and provided with not less than 600 mm of cover measured from apparatus does not interconnect the nonincendive field wiring circuit to
the top of the conduit to grade. Threaded rigid metal conduit or threaded any other circuit.
steel intermediate metal conduit shall be used for the last 600 mm of the
underground run to emergence or to the point of connection to the FPN: Simple apparatus is defined in 5.4.1.2.
aboveground raceway. An equipment grounding conductor shall be
included to provide for electrical continuity of the raceway system and Separate nonincendive field wiring circuits shall be installed in
for grounding of non–current-carrying metal parts. accordance with one of the following:

(2) Flexible Connections. Where necessary to employ flexible 1. In separate cables

connections, flexible fittings listed for Class I, Zone 1 or Division 1
locations or flexible cord in accordance with the provisions of 5.5.1.17 2. In multiconductor cables where the conductors of each circuit
shall be permitted. are within a grounded metal shield

(c) Class I, Zone 2. 3. In multiconductor cables where the conductors of each circuit
have insulation with a minimum thickness of 0.25 mm.
(1) General. In Class I, Zone 2 locations, the wiring methods in
(c)(1)(a) through (c)(1)(g) shall be permitted. (2) Flexible Connections. Where provision must be made for limited
flexibility, flexible metal fittings, flexible metal conduit with listed
a. All wiring methods permitted by 5.5.1.15(b). fittings, liquidtight flexible metal conduit with listed fittings, liquidtight
flexible nonmetallic conduit with listed fittings, or flexible cord in
b. Types MI, MC, MV, or TC cable with termination fittings, or in accordance with the provisions of 5.5.1.17 shall be permitted.
cable tray systems and installed in a manner to avoid tensile stress at the
FPN: See 5.5.1.25(b) for grounding requirements where flexible conduit is used.
termination fittings. Single conductor Type MV cables shall be shielded
or metallic-armored.
5.5.1.16 Sealing and Drainage. Seals in conduit and cable systems shall
comply with 5.5.1.16(a) through 5.5.1.16(e). Sealing compound shall be
c. Type ITC cable as permitted in 7.27.1.4.
used in Type MI cable termination fittings to exclude moisture and other
fluids from the cable insulation.
d. Type PLTC cable in accordance with the provisions of Article
725, or in cable tray systems. PLTC shall be installed in a manner to FPN No. 1: Seals are provided in conduit and cable systems to minimize the passage
avoid tensile stress at the termination fittings. of gases and vapors and prevent the passage of flames from one portion of the
electrical installation to another through the conduit. Such communication through
Type MI cable is inherently prevented by construction of the cable. Unless specifically
e. Enclosed gasketed busways, enclosed gasketed wireways. designed and tested for the purpose, conduit and cable seals are not intended to
prevent the passage of liquids, gases, or vapors at a continuous pressure differential
across the seal. Even at differences in pressure across the seal equivalent to a few
f. Threaded rigid metal conduit, threaded steel intermediate metal inches of water, there may be a slow passage of gas or vapor through a seal and
conduit. through conductors passing through the seal. See 5.5.1.16(c)(2)b.
Temperature extremes and highly corrosive liquids and vapors can affect the ability of
seals to perform their intended function. See 5.5.1.16(d)(2).
g. Nonincendive field wiring shall be permitted using any of the
wiring methods permitted for unclassified locations. Nonincendive field FPN No. 2: Gas or vapor leakage and propagation of flames may occur through the
2
wiring systems shall be installed in accordance with the control interstices between the strands of standard stranded conductors larger than 30 mm .
Special conductor constructions, for example, compacted strands or sealing of the
drawing(s). Simple apparatus, not shown on the control drawing, shall be individual strands, are means of reducing leakage and preventing the propagation of
permitted in a nonincendive field wiring circuit, provided the simple flames.
 (a) Zone 0. In Class I, Zone 0 locations, seals shall be located (2) Explosionproof Equipment. Conduit seals shall be provided for
according to 5.5.1.16(a)(1), (a)(2), and (a)(3). each conduit entering explosionproof equipment according to (b)(2)a,
(b)(2)b, and (b)(2)c.
(1) Conduit Seals. Seals shall be provided within 3 000 mm of where
a conduit leaves a Zone 0 location. There shall be no unions, couplings, a. In each conduit entry into an explosionproof enclosure where
boxes, or fittings, except listed reducers at the seal, in the conduit run either (1) the enclosure contains apparatus, such as switches, circuit
between the seal and the point at which the conduit leaves the location. breakers, fuses, relays, or resistors, that may produce arcs, sparks, or
high temperatures that are considered to be an ignition source in normal
Exception: A rigid unbroken conduit that passes completely through the operation, or (2) the entry is metric designator 50 mm diameter or larger
Zone 0 location with no fittings less than 300 mm beyond each boundary and the enclosure contains terminals, splices, or taps. For the purposes of
shall not be required to be sealed if the termination points of the this section, high temperatures shall be considered to be any
unbroken conduit are in unclassified locations. temperatures exceeding 80 percent of the autoignition temperature in
degrees Celsius of the gas or vapor involved.
(2) Cable Seals. Seals shall be provided on cables at the first point of
termination after entry into the Zone 0 location. Exception: Conduit entering an enclosure where such switches, circuit
breakers, fuses, relays, or resistors comply with one of the following:
(3) Not Required to Be Explosionproof or Flameproof. Seals shall
not be required to be explosionproof or flameproof. (1) Are enclosed within a chamber hermetically sealed against the
entrance of gases or vapors.
(b) Zone 1. In Class I, Zone 1 locations, seals shall be located in (2) Are immersed in oil.
accordance with 5.5.1.16(b)(1) through (b)(8). (3) Are enclosed within a factory-sealed explosionproof chamber
located within the enclosure, identified for the location, and marked
(1) Type of Protection “d” or “e” Enclosures. Conduit seals shall be “factory sealed” or equivalent, unless the entry is metric designator 50
provided within 50 mm for each conduit entering enclosures having type mm diameter or larger. Factory-sealed enclosures shall not be
of protection “d” or “e.” considered to serve as a seal for another adjacent explosionproof
enclosure that is required to have a conduit seal.
Exception No. 1: Where the enclosure having type of protection “d” is
marked to indicate that a seal is not required. b. Conduit seals shall be installed within 460 mm from the
enclosure. Only explosionproof unions, couplings, reducers, elbows,
Exception No. 2: For type of protection “e,” conduit and fittings capped elbows, and conduit bodies similar to L, T, and cross types that
employing only NPT to NPT raceway joints or fittings listed for type of are not larger than the trade size of the conduit shall be permitted
protection “e” shall be permitted between the enclosure and the seal, between the sealing fitting and the explosionproof enclosure.
and the seal shall not be required to be within 50 mm of the entry.
c. Where two or more explosionproof enclosures for which conduit
FPN: Examples of fittings employing other than NPT threads include conduit seals are required under 5.5.1.16(b)(2) are connected by nipples or by
couplings, capped elbows, unions, and breather drains.
runs of conduit not more than 900 mm long, a single conduit seal in each
such nipple connection or run of conduit shall be considered sufficient if
Exception No. 3: For conduit installed between type of protection “e”
located not more than 460 mm from either enclosure.
enclosures employing only NPT to NPT raceway joints or conduit fittings
listed for type of protection “e,” a seal shall not be required.
 (3) Pressurized Enclosures. Conduit seals shall be provided in each separate the twisted pair.
conduit entry into a pressurized enclosure where the conduit is not
pressurized as part of the protection system. Conduit seals shall be (6) Cables Incapable of Transmitting Gases or Vapors. Each
installed within 460 mm from the pressurized enclosure. multiconductor cable in conduit shall be considered as a single conductor
if the cable is incapable of transmitting gases or vapors through the cable
FPN No. 1: Installing the seal as close as possible to the enclosure reduces problems core. These cables shall be sealed in accordance with 5.5.1.16(d).
with purging the dead airspace in the pressurized conduit.

FPN No. 2: For further information, see NFPA 496-2003, Standard for Purged and (7) Cables Entering Enclosures. Cable seals shall be provided for
Pressurized Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.
each cable entering flameproof or explosionproof enclosures. The seal
shall comply with 5.5.1.16(d).
(4) Class I, Zone 1 Boundary. Conduit seals shall be provided in
each conduit run leaving a Class I, Zone 1 location. The sealing fitting (8) Class I, Zone 1 Boundary. Cables shall be sealed at the point at
shall be permitted on either side of the boundary of such location within which they leave the Zone 1 location.
3 000 mm of the boundary and shall be designed and installed so as to
minimize the amount of gas or vapor within the Zone 1 portion of the Exception: Where cable is sealed at the termination point.
conduit from being communicated to the conduit beyond the seal. Except
for listed explosionproof reducers at the conduit seal, there shall be no (c) Zone 2. In Class I, Zone 2 locations, seals shall be located in
union, coupling, box, or fitting between the conduit seal and the point at accordance with 5.5.1.16(c)(1) and (c)(2).
which the conduit leaves the Zone 1 location.
(1) Conduit Seals. Conduit seals shall be located in accordance with
Exception: Metal conduit containing no unions, couplings, boxes, or (c)(1)a and (c)(1)b.
fittings and passing completely through a Class I, Zone 1 location with
no fittings less than 300 mm beyond each boundary shall not require a a. For connections to enclosures that are required to be flameproof
conduit seal if the termination points of the unbroken conduit are in or explosionproof, a conduit seal shall be provided in accordance with
unclassified locations. 5.5.1.16(b)(1) and 5.5.1.16(b)(2). All portions of the conduit run or
nipple between the seal and such enclosure shall comply with
(5) Cables Capable of Transmitting Gases or Vapors. Conduits 5.5.1.16(b).
containing cables with a gas/vaportight continuous sheath capable of
transmitting gases or vapors through the cable core shall be sealed in the b. In each conduit run passing from a Class I, Zone 2 location into
Zone 1 location after removing the jacket and any other coverings so that an unclassified location. The sealing fitting shall be permitted on either
the sealing compound surrounds each individual insulated conductor and side of the boundary of such location within 3 000 mm of the boundary
the outer jacket. and shall be designed and installed so as to minimize the amount of gas
or vapor within the Zone 2 portion of the conduit from being
Exception: Multiconductor cables with a gas/vaportight continuous communicated to the conduit beyond the seal. Rigid metal conduit or
sheath capable of transmitting gases or vapors through the cable core threaded steel intermediate metal conduit shall be used between the
shall be permitted to be considered as a single conductor by sealing the sealing fitting and the point at which the conduit leaves the Zone 2
cable in the conduit within 460 mm of the enclosure and the cable end location, and a threaded connection shall be used at the sealing fitting.
within the enclosure by an approved means to minimize the entrance of Except for listed explosionproof reducers at the conduit seal, there shall
gases or vapors and prevent the propagation of flame into the cable be no union, coupling, box, or fitting between the conduit seal and the
core, or by other approved methods. For shielded cables and twisted point at which the conduit leaves the Zone 2 location.
pair cables, it shall not be required to remove the shielding material or
Exception No. 1: Metal conduit containing no unions, couplings, boxes, (4) The conduit system segment contains only threaded metal
or fittings and passing completely through a Class I, Zone 2 location conduit, unions, couplings, conduit bodies, and fittings in the
with no fittings less than 300 mm beyond each boundary shall not be unclassified location.
required to be sealed if the termination points of the unbroken conduit
are in unclassified locations. (5) The conduit system segment is sealed at its entry to each
enclosure or fitting housing terminals, splices, or taps in Class I, Zone 2
Exception No. 2: Conduit systems terminating at an unclassified locations.
location where a wiring method transition is made to cable tray,
cablebus, ventilated busway, Type MI cable, or cable that is not installed (2) Cable Seals. Cable seals shall be located in accordance with
in a raceway or cable tray system shall not be required to be sealed (c)(2)a, (c)(2)b, and (c)(2)c.
where passing from the Class I, Zone 2 location into the unclassified
location. The unclassified location shall be outdoors or, if the conduit a. Explosionproof and Flameproof Enclosures. Cables entering
system is all in one room, it shall be permitted to be indoors. The enclosures required to be flameproof or explosionproof shall be sealed at
conduits shall not terminate at an enclosure containing an ignition the point of entrance. The seal shall comply with 5.5.1.16(d).
source in normal operation. Multiconductor cables with a gas/vaportight continuous sheath capable
of transmitting gases or vapors through the cable core shall be sealed in
Exception No. 3: Conduit systems passing from an enclosure or room the Zone 2 location after removing the jacket and any other coverings so
that is unclassified as a result of pressurization into a Class I, Zone 2 that the sealing compound surrounds each individual insulated conductor
location shall not require a seal at the boundary. in such a manner as to minimize the passage of gases and vapors.
Multiconductor cables in conduit shall be sealed as described in
FPN: For further information, refer to NFPA 496-2003, Standard for Purged and 5.5.1.16(b)(4).
Pressurized Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.

Exception No. 1: Cables passing from an enclosure or room that is

Exception No. 4: Segments of aboveground conduit systems shall not be
unclassified as a result of Type Z pressurization into a Class I, Zone 2
required to be sealed where passing from a Class I, Zone 2 location into
location shall not require a seal at the boundary.
an unclassified location if all the following conditions are met:
Exception No. 2: Shielded cables and twisted pair cables shall not
(1) No part of the conduit system segment passes through a Class I,
require the removal of the shielding material or separation of the twisted
Zone 0 or Class I, Zone 1 location where the conduit contains unions,
pairs, provided the termination is by an approved means to minimize the
couplings, boxes, or fittings within 300 mm of the Class I, Zone 0 or
entrance of gases or vapors and prevent propagation of flame into the
Class I, Zone 1 location.
cable core.
(2) The conduit system segment is located entirely in outdoor
b. Cables That Will Not Transmit Gases or Vapors. Cables with a
locations.
gas/vaportight continuous sheath and that will not transmit gases or
vapors through the cable core in excess of the quantity permitted for seal
(3) The conduit system segment is not directly connected to canned
fittings shall not be required to be sealed except as required in
pumps, process or service connections for flow, pressure, or analysis
5.5.1.16(c)(2)a. The minimum length of such cable run shall not be less
measurement, and so forth, that depend on a single compression seal,
than the length that limits gas or vapor flow through the cable core to the
diaphragm, or tube to prevent flammable or combustible fluids from
rate permitted for seal fittings [200 cm3/hr of air at a pressure of 1500
entering the conduit system.
pascals (150 mm of water)].
 FPN No. 1: See ANSI/UL 886-1994, Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use in Hazardous Exception: Listed cable sealing fittings shall not be required to have a
(Classified) Locations.
minimum thickness equal to the trade size of the fitting.
FPN No. 2: The cable core does not include the interstices of the conductor strands.
(4) Splices and Taps. Splices and taps shall not be made in fittings
c. Cables Capable of Transmitting Gases or Vapors. Cables with a intended only for sealing with compound, nor shall other fittings in
gas/vaportight continuous sheath capable of transmitting gases or vapors which splices or taps are made be filled with compound.
through the cable core shall not be required to be sealed except as
required in 5.5.1.16(c)(2)a, unless the cable is attached to process (5) Conductor Fill. The cross-sectional area of the conductors
equipment or devices that may cause a pressure in excess of 1500 pascals permitted in a seal shall not exceed 25 percent of the cross-sectional area
(150 mm of water) to be exerted at a cable end, in which case a seal, of a rigid metal conduit of the same trade size unless it is specifically
barrier, or other means shall be provided to prevent migration of listed for a higher percentage of fill.
flammables into an unclassified area.
(e) Drainage.
Exception: Cables with an unbroken gas/vaportight continuous sheath
shall be permitted to pass through a Class I, Zone 2 location without (1) Control Equipment. Where there is a probability that liquid or
seals. other condensed vapor may be trapped within enclosures for control
equipment or at any point in the raceway system, approved means shall
d. Cables Without Gas/Vaportight Continuous Sheath. Cables that be provided to prevent accumulation or to permit periodic draining of
do not have gas/vaportight continuous sheath shall be sealed at the such liquid or condensed vapor.
boundary of the Zone 2 and unclassified location in such a manner as to
minimize the passage of gases or vapors into an unclassified location. (2) Motors and Generators. Where the authority having jurisdiction
judges that there is a probability that liquid or condensed vapor may
FPN: The cable sheath may be either metal or a nonmetallic material.
accumulate within motors or generators, joints and conduit systems shall
be arranged to minimize entrance of liquid. If means to prevent
(d) Class I, Zones 0, 1, and 2. Where required, seals in Class I, Zones
accumulation or to permit periodic draining are judged necessary, such
0, 1, and 2 locations shall comply with 5.5.1.16(d)(1) through (d)(5).
means shall be provided at the time of manufacture and shall be
considered an integral part of the machine.
(1) Fittings. Enclosures for connections or equipment shall be
provided with an integral means for sealing, or sealing fittings listed for
(3) Canned Pumps, Process, or Service Connections, and So Forth.
the location shall be used. Sealing fittings shall be listed for use with one
For canned pumps, process, or service connections for flow, pressure, or
or more specific compounds and shall be accessible.
analysis measurement, and so forth, that depend on a single compression
seal, diaphragm, or tube to prevent flammable or combustible fluids from
(2) Compound. The compound shall provide a seal against passage
entering the electrical conduit system, an additional approved seal,
of gas or vapors through the seal fitting, shall not be affected by the
barrier, or other means shall be provided to prevent the flammable or
surrounding atmosphere or liquids, and shall not have a melting point
combustible fluid from entering the conduit system beyond the additional
less than 93°C.
devices or means if the primary seal fails.
(3) Thickness of Compounds. In a completed seal, the minimum
The additional approved seal or barrier and the interconnecting
thickness of the sealing compound shall not be less than the trade size of
enclosure shall meet the temperature and pressure conditions to which
the sealing fitting and, in no case, less than 16 mm.
they will be subjected upon failure of the primary seal, unless other
approved means are provided to accomplish the purpose in the preceding Exception: As provided in 5.5.1.16.
paragraph.
Electric submersible pumps with means for removal without entering the
Drains, vents, or other devices shall be provided so that primary seal wet-pit shall be considered portable utilization equipment. The extension
leakage is obvious. of the flexible cord within a suitable raceway between the wet-pit and the
power source shall be permitted.
FPN: See also the fine print notes to 5.5.1.16.
Electric mixers intended for travel into and out of open-type mixing
Process-connected equipment that is listed and marked “Dual Seal” tanks or vats shall be considered portable utilization equipment.
shall not require additional process sealing when used within the
manufacturer’s ratings. FPN: See 5.5.1.18 for flexible cords exposed to liquids having a deleterious effect on the
conductor insulation.
FPN: For construction and testing requirements for dual seal process, connected
equipment, refer to ISA 12.27.01, Requirements for Process Sealing Between 5.5.1.18 Conductors and Conductor Insulation.
Electrical Systems and Potentially Flammable or Combustible Process Fluids.

(a) Conductors. For type of protection “e,” field wiring conductors

5.5.1.17 Flexible Cords, Class I, Zones 1 and 2. A flexible cord shall
shall be copper. Every conductor (including spares) that enters Type “e”
be permitted for connection between portable lighting equipment or other
equipment shall be terminated at a Type “e” terminal.
portable utilization equipment and the fixed portion of their supply
circuit. Flexible cord shall also be permitted for that portion of the circuit
(b) Conductor Insulation. Where condensed vapors or liquids may
where the fixed wiring methods of 5.5.1.15(b) cannot provide the
collect on, or come in contact with, the insulation on conductors, such
necessary degree of movement for fixed and mobile electrical utilization
insulation shall be of a type identified for use under such conditions, or
equipment, in an industrial establishment where conditions of
the insulation shall be protected by a sheath of lead or by other approved
maintenance and engineering supervision ensure that only licensed
means.
electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner under the
supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner install and service the
5.5.1.19 Uninsulated Exposed Parts. There shall be no uninsulated
installation, and the flexible cord is protected by location or by a suitable
exposed parts, such as electric conductors, buses, terminals, or
guard from damage. The length of the flexible cord shall be continuous.
components that operate at more than 30 volts (15 volts in wet locations).
Where flexible cords are used, the cords shall comply with all of the
These parts shall additionally be protected by type of protection ia, ib, or
following:
nA that is suitable for the location.
(1) Be of a type listed for extra-hard usage
5.5.1.20 Equipment Requirements.
(2) Contain, in addition to the conductors of the circuit, a grounding
conductor complying with 4.0.2.4
(a) Zone 0. In Class I, Zone 0 locations, only equipment specifically
(3) Be connected to terminals or to supply conductors in an approved
listed and marked as suitable for the location shall be permitted.
manner
(4) Be supported by clamps or by other suitable means in such a
Exception: Intrinsically safe apparatus listed for use in Class I, Division
manner that there will be no tension on the terminal connections
1 locations for the same gas, or as permitted by 5.5.1.9(b)(2), and with a
(5) Be provided with listed seals where the flexible cord enters boxes,
suitable temperature class shall be permitted.
fittings, or enclosures that are required to be explosionproof or
flameproof
 (b) Zone 1. In Class I, Zone 1 locations, only equipment specifically instructions (if any) provided by the manufacturer.
listed and marked as suitable for the location shall be permitted.
5.5.1.21 Multiwire Branch Circuits. In a Class I, Zone 1 location, a
Exception No. 1: Equipment identified for use in Class I, Division 1 or multiwire branch circuit shall not be permitted.
listed for use in Class I, Zone 0 locations for the same gas, or as
permitted by 5.5.1.9(b)(2), and with a suitable temperature class shall be Exception: Where the disconnect device(s) for the circuit opens all
permitted. ungrounded conductors of the multiwire circuit simultaneously.

Exception No. 2: Equipment identified for Class I, Zone 1, or Zone 2 5.5.1.22 Increased Safety “e” Motors and Generators. In Class I,
type of protection “p” shall be permitted. Zone 1 locations, Increased Safety “e” motors and generators of all
voltage ratings shall be listed for Class I, Zone 1 locations, and shall
(c) Zone 2. In Class I, Zone 2 locations, only equipment specifically comply with all of the following:
listed and marked as suitable for the location shall be permitted.
(1) Motors shall be marked with the current ratio, IA/IN, and time, tE.
Exception No. 1: Equipment listed for use in Class I, Zone 0 or Zone 1 (2) Motors shall have controllers marked with the model or
locations for the same gas, or as permitted by 5.5.1.9(b)(2), and with a identification number, output rating (horsepower or kilowatt), full-load
suitable temperature class, shall be permitted. amperes, starting current ratio (IA/IN), and time (tE) of the motors that
they are intended to protect; the controller marking shall also include the
Exception No. 2: Equipment identified for Class I, Zone 1 or Zone 2 type specific overload protection type (and setting, if applicable) that is listed
of protection “p” shall be permitted. with the motor or generator.
(3) Connections shall be made with the specific terminals listed with
Exception No. 3: Equipment identified for use in Class I, Division 1 or the motor or generator.
Division 2 locations for the same gas, or as permitted by 5.5.1.9(b)(2), (4) Terminal housings shall be permitted to be of substantial,
and with a suitable temperature class shall be permitted. nonmetallic, nonburning material, provided an internal grounding means
between the motor frame and the equipment grounding connection is
Exception No. 4: In Class I, Zone 2 locations, the installation of open or incorporated within the housing.
nonexplosionproof or nonflameproof enclosed motors, such as squirrel- (5) The provisions of Part 4.30.3 shall apply regardless of the voltage
cage induction motors without brushes, switching mechanisms, or rating of the motor.
similar arc-producing devices that are not identified for use in a Class I, (6) The motors shall be protected against overload by a separate
Zone 2 location shall be permitted. overload device that is responsive to motor current. This device shall be
selected to trip or shall be rated in accordance with the listing of the
FPN No. 1: It is important to consider the temperature of internal and external motor and its overload protection.
surfaces that may be exposed to the flammable atmosphere.
(7) Sections 4.30.3.2(c) and 4.30.3.14 shall not apply to such motors.
FPN No. 2: It is important to consider the risk of ignition due to currents arcing across (8) The motor overload protection shall not be shunted or cut out
discontinuities and overheating of parts in multisection enclosures of large motors and during the starting period.
generators. Such motors and generators may need equipotential bonding jumpers
across joints in the enclosure and from enclosure to ground. Where the presence of
ignitible gases or vapors is suspected, clean air purging may be needed immediately 5.5.1.25 Grounding and Bonding. Grounding and bonding shall comply
prior to and during start-up periods.
with Article 250 and the requirements in 5.5.1.25(a) and 5.5.1.25(b).
(d) Manufacturer’s Instructions. Electrical equipment installed in
(a) Bonding. The locknut-bushing and double-locknut types of
hazardous (classified) locations shall be installed in accordance with the
contacts shall not be depended on for bonding purposes, but bonding
jumpers with proper fittings or other approved means of bonding shall be requirements of this article.
used. Such means of bonding shall apply to all intervening raceways,
fittings, boxes, enclosures, and so forth, between Class I locations and FPN No. 1: For the requirements for electrical and electronic equipment and wiring for
all voltages in Class I, Division 1 or Division 2; Class II, Division 1 or Division 2; Class
the point of grounding for service equipment or point of grounding of a III, Division 1 or Division 2; and Class I, Zone 0 or Zone 1 or Zone 2 hazardous
separately derived system. (classified) locations where fire or explosion hazards may exist due to flammable
gases or vapors, flammable liquids, or combustible dusts or fibers, refer to Articles 5.0
through 5.5.
Exception: The specific bonding means shall be required only to the
nearest point where the grounded circuit conductor and the grounding FPN No. 2: Zone 20, Zone 21, and Zone 22 area classifications are based on the
modified IEC area classification system as defined in ISA 12.10.05, Electrical
electrode are connected together on the line side of the building or Apparatus for Use in Zone 20, Zone 21, and Zone 22 Hazardous (Classified)
structure disconnecting means as specified in 2.50.2.13(a), (b), and (c), Locations — Classification of Zone 20, Zone 21, and Zone 22 Hazardous (Classified)
provided the branch-circuit overcurrent protection is located on the load Locations (IEC61241-10 Mod).
side of the disconnecting means. FPN No. 3: The unique hazards associated with explosives, pyrotechnics, and
blasting agents are not addressed in this article.
FPN: See 2.50.5.11 for additional bonding requirements in hazardous (classified)
locations.
5.6.1.2 Definitions. For purposes of this article, the following definitions
apply.
(b) Types of Equipment Grounding Conductors. Where flexible
metal conduit or liquidtight flexible metal conduit is used as permitted in
Associated Nonincendive Field Wiring Apparatus. Apparatus in
5.5.1.15(c) and is to be relied on to complete a sole equipment grounding
which the circuits are not necessarily nonincendive themselves but that
path, it shall be installed with internal or external bonding jumpers in
affect the energy in nonincendive field wiring circuits and are relied
parallel with each conduit and complying with 2.50.5.13.
upon to maintain nonincendive energy levels. Associated nonincendive
field wiring apparatus may be either of the following:
Exception: In Class I, Zone 2 locations, the bonding jumper shall be
permitted to be deleted where all of the following conditions are met:
(1) Electrical apparatus that has an alternative type of protection for
use in the appropriate hazardous (classified) location
(a) Listed liquidtight flexible metal conduit 1 800 mm or less in
length, with fittings listed for grounding, is used.
(2) Electrical apparatus not so protected that shall not be used in a
(b) Overcurrent protection in the circuit is limited to 10 amperes or
hazardous (classified) location
less.
(c) The load is not a power utilization load. FPN: Associated nonincendive field wiring apparatus has designated associated
nonincendive field wiring apparatus connections for nonincendive field wiring
ARTICLE 5.6 — ZONE 20, 21, AND 22 LOCATIONS FOR apparatus and may also have connections for other electrical apparatus.

COMBUSTIBLE DUSTS, FIBERS, AND FLYINGS

Dust-Ignitionproof. Equipment enclosed in a manner that excludes
5.6.1.1 Scope. This article covers the requirements for the zone dusts and does not permit arcs, sparks, or heat otherwise generated or
classification system as an alternative to the division classification liberated inside of the enclosure to cause ignition of exterior
system covered in Article 5.0, Article 5.2, and Article 5.3 for electrical accumulations or atmospheric suspensions of a specified dust on or in the
and electronic equipment and wiring for all voltages in Zone 20, Zone vicinity of the enclosure.
21, and Zone 22 hazardous (classified) locations where fire and FPN: For further information on dust-ignitionproof enclosures, see Type 9 enclosure in
explosion hazards may exist due to combustible dusts, or ignitible fibers ANSI/NEMA 250-1991, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, and ANSI/UL 1203-1994,
or flyings. Combustible metallic dusts are not covered by the Explosionproof and Dust-Ignitionproof Electrical Equipment for Hazardous (Classified)
Locations.
 FPN: For further information, see ANSI/ NFPA 496-2003, Purged and Pressurized
Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.
Dusttight. Enclosures constructed so that dust will not enter under
specified test conditions.
Zone 20 Hazardous (Classified) Location. An area where
FPN: See ANSI/ISA 12.12.01-2000, Nonincendive Electrical Equipment for Use in
combustible dust or ignitible fibers and flyings are present continuously
Class I and II, Division 2, and Class III, Divisions 1 and 2 Hazardous (Classified) or for long periods of time in quantities sufficient to be hazardous, as
Locations, and UL 1604-1994, Electrical Equipment for Use in Class I and II, Division classified by 5.6.1.5(b)(1).
2 and Class III Hazardous (Classified) Locations.

Zone 21 Hazardous (Classified) Location. An area where

Nonincendive Circuit. A circuit, other than field wiring, in which any
combustible dust or ignitible fibers and flyings are likely to exist
arc or thermal effect produced under intended operating conditions of the
occasionally under normal operation in quantities sufficient to be
equipment is not capable, under specified test conditions, of igniting the
hazardous, as classified by 5.6.1.5(b)(2).
flammable gas–air, vapor–air, or dust–air mixture.

FPN: Conditions are described in ANSI/ISA 12.12.01-2000, Nonincendive Electrical Zone 22 Hazardous (Classified) Location. An area where
Equipment for Use in Class I and II, Division 2, and Class III, Divisions 1 and 2 combustible dust or ignitible fibers and flyings are not likely to occur
Hazardous (Classified) Locations. under normal operation in quantities sufficient to be hazardous, as
classified by 5.6.1.5(b)(3).
Nonincendive Equipment. Equipment having electrical/electronic
circuitry that is incapable, under normal operating conditions, of causing 5.6.1.4 General.
ignition of a specified flammable gas–air, vapor–air, or dust–air mixture
due to arcing or thermal means. (a) Documentation for Industrial Occupancies. Areas designated as
FPN: Conditions are described in ANSI/ISA 12.12.01-2000, Nonincendive Electrical
hazardous (classified) locations shall be properly documented. This
Equipment for Use in Class I and II, Division 2, and Class III, Divisions 1 and 2 documentation shall be available to those authorized to design, install,
Hazardous (Classified) Locations. inspect, maintain or operate electrical equipment.

Nonincendive Field Wiring. Wiring that enters or leaves an (b) Reference Standards. Important information relating to topics
equipment enclosure and, under normal operating conditions of the covered in Chapter 5 are found in other publications.
equipment, is not capable, due to arcing or thermal effects, of igniting the
flammable gas–air, vapor–air, or dust–air mixture. Normal operation FPN: It is important that the authority having jurisdiction be familiar with the recorded
includes opening, shorting, or grounding the field wiring. industrial experience as well as with standards of the National Fire Protection
Association (NFPA), the ISA, International Society for Measurement and Control, and
the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) that may be of use in the
Nonincendive Field Wiring Apparatus. Apparatus intended to be classification of various locations, the determination of adequate ventilation, and the
protection against static electricity and lightning hazards.
connected to nonincendive field wiring.

FPN: Conditions are described in ANSI/ISA 12.12.01-2000, Nonincendive Electrical 5.6.1.5 Classification of Locations.
Equipment for Use in Class I and II, Division 2, and Class III, Divisions 1 and 2
Hazardous (Classified) Locations. (a) Classifications of Locations. Locations shall be classified on the
basis of the properties of the combustible dust, ignitible fibers or flyings
Pressurized. The process of supplying an enclosure with a protective that may be present, and the likelihood that a combustible or combustible
gas with or without continuous flow at sufficient pressure to prevent the concentration or quantity is present. Each room, section, or area shall be
entrance of combustible dust, or an ignitible fiber or flying. considered individually in determining its classification. Where
pyrophoric materials are the only materials used or handled, these in the release of ignitible concentrations of combustible dust, or ignitible
locations are outside of the scope of this article. fibers or flyings and also cause simultaneous failure of electrical
equipment in a mode to cause the electrical equipment to become a
(b) Zone 20, Zone 21, and Zone 22 Locations. Zone 20, Zone 21, and source of ignition; or
Zone 22 locations are those in which combustible dust, ignitible fibers,
or flyings are or may be present in the air or in layers, in quantities d. That is adjacent to a Zone 20 location from which ignitible
sufficient to produce explosive or ignitible mixtures. Zone 20, Zone 21, concentrations of dust or ignitible fibers or flyings could be
and Zone 22 locations shall include those specified in 5.6.1.5(b)(1), communicated, unless communication is prevented by adequate positive
(b)(2), and (b)(3). pressure ventilation from a source of clean air and effective safeguards
against ventilation failure are provided.
FPN: Through the exercise of ingenuity in the layout of electrical installations for
hazardous (classified) locations, it is frequently possible to locate much of the FPN No. 1: As a guide to classification of Zone 21 locations, refer to ISA 12.10.05,
equipment in a reduced level of classification, and, thus, to reduce the amount of Electrical Apparatus for Use In Zone 20, Zone 21, and Zone 22 Hazardous
special equipment required. (Classified) Locations — Classification of Zone 20, Zone 21, and Zone 22 Hazardous
(Classified) Locations (IEC61241-10 Mod).
(1) Zone 20. A Zone 20 location is a location in which
FPN No. 2: This classification usually includes locations outside dust containment and
in the immediate vicinity of access doors subject to frequent removal or opening for
a. Ignitible concentrations of combustible dust or ignitible fibers or operation purposes when internal combustible mixtures are present; locations outside
flyings are present continuously. dust containment in the proximity of filling and emptying points, feed belts, sampling
points, truck dump stations, belt dump over points, etc. where no measures are
employed to prevent the formation of combustible mixtures; locations outside dust
b. Ignitible concentrations of combustible dust or ignitible fibers or containment where dust accumulates and where due to process operations the dust
layer is likely to be disturbed and form combustible mixtures; locations inside dust
flyings are present for long periods of time. containment where explosive dust clouds are likely to occur (but neither continuously,
nor for long periods, nor frequently) as, for example, silos (if filled and/or emptied only
FPN No. 1: As a guide to classification of Zone 20 locations, refer to ISA 12.10.05, occasionally) and the dirty side of filters if large self-cleaning intervals are occurring.
Electrical Apparatus for Use in Zone 20, Zone 21, and Zone 22 Hazardous
(Classified) Locations — Classification of Zone 20, Zone 21, and Zone 22 Hazardous
(Classified) Locations (IEC61241-10 Mod). (3) Zone 22. A Zone 22 location is a location
FPN No. 2: Zone 20 classification includes locations inside dust containment systems; a. In which ignitible concentrations of combustible dust or ignitible
hoppers, silos, etc., cyclones and filters, dust transport systems, except some parts of
belt and chain conveyors, etc.; blenders, mills, dryers, bagging equipment, etc. fibers or flyings are not likely to occur in normal operation, and if they
do occur, will only persist for a short period; or
(2) Zone 21. A Zone 21 location is a location
b. In which combustible dust, or fibers, or flyings are handled,
a. In which ignitible concentrations of combustible dust or ignitible processed, or used but in which the dust, fibers, or flyings are normally
fibers or flyings are likely to exist occasionally under normal operating confined within closed containers of closed systems from which they can
conditions; or escape only as a result of the abnormal operation of the equipment with
which the dust, or fibers, or flyings are handled, processed, or used; or
b. In which ignitible concentrations of combustible dust or
ignitible fibers or flyings may exist frequently because of repair or c. That is adjacent to a Zone 21 location, from which ignitible
maintenance operations or because of leakage; or concentrations of dust or fibers or flyings could be communicated, unless
such communication is prevented by adequate positive pressure
c. In which equipment is operated or processes are carried on, of ventilation from a source of clean air and effective safeguards against
such a nature that equipment breakdown or faulty operations could result ventilation failure are provided.
 classified because of a single combustible dust or ignitible fiber or flying
FPN No. 1: As a guide to classification of Zone 22 locations, refer to ISA 12.10.05, source is reclassified under the requirements of this article.
Electrical Apparatus for Use in Zone 20, Zone 21, and Zone 22 Hazardous
(Classified) Locations — Classification of Zone 20, Zone 21, and Zone 22 Hazardous
(Classified) Locations (IEC61241-10 Mod). (d) Simultaneous Presence of Flammable Gases and Combustible
FPN No. 2: Zone 22 locations usually include outlets from bag filter vents, because in
Dusts, Fibers, or Flyings. Where flammable gases or combustible dusts,
the event of a malfunction there can be emission of combustible mixtures; locations fibers, or flyings are or may be present at the same time, the
near equipment that has to be opened at infrequent intervals or equipment that from simultaneous presence shall be considered during the selection and
experience can easily form leaks where, due to pressure above atmospheric, dust will
blow out; pneumatic equipment, flexible connections that can become damaged, etc.;
installation of the electrical equipment and the wiring methods, including
storage locations for bags containing dusty product, since failure of bags can occur the determination of the safe operating temperature of the electrical
during handling, causing dust leakage; and locations where controllable dust layers equipment.
are formed that are likely to be raised into explosive dust/air mixtures. Only if the layer
is removed by cleaning before hazardous dust–air mixtures can be formed is the area
designated non-hazardous. 5.6.1.8 Protection Techniques. Acceptable protection techniques for
FPN No. 3: Locations that normally are classified as Zone 21 can fall into Zone 22
electrical and electronic equipment in hazardous (classified) locations
when measures are employed to prevent the formation of explosive dust–air mixtures. shall be as described in 5.6.1.8(a) through 5.6.1.8(f).
Such measures include exhaust ventilation. The measures should be used in the
vicinity of (bag) filling and emptying points, feed belts, sampling points, truck dump
stations, belt dump over points, etc.
(a) Dust Ignitionproof. This protection technique shall be permitted
for equipment in Zone 20, Zone 21, and Zone 22 locations for which it is
5.6.1.6 Special Precaution. Article 5.6 requires equipment construction identified.
and installation that ensures safe performance under conditions of proper
use and maintenance. (b) Pressurized. This protection technique shall be permitted for
equipment in Zone 21, and Zone 22 locations for which it is identified.
FPN: It is important that inspection authorities and users exercise more than ordinary
care with regard to the installation and maintenance of electrical equipment in (c) Intrinsic Safety. This protection technique shall be permitted for
hazardous (classified) locations.
equipment in Zone 20, Zone 21, and Zone 22 locations for which it is
identified. Installation of intrinsically safe apparatus and wiring shall be
(a) Implementation of Zone Classification System. Classification of
in accordance with the requirements of Article 5.4.
areas, engineering and design, selection of equipment and wiring
methods, installation, and inspection shall be performed by licensed
(d) Dusttight. This protection technique shall be permitted for
electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner under the
equipment in Zone 22 locations for which it is identified.
supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner.
(e) Nonincendive Circuit. This protection technique shall be
(b) Dual Classification. In instances of areas within the same facility
permitted for equipment in Zone 22 locations for which it is identified.
classified separately, Zone 22 locations shall be permitted to abut, but
not overlap, Class II or Class III, Division 2 locations. Zone 20 or Zone
(f) Nonincendive Equipment. This protection technique shall be
21 locations shall not abut Class II or Class III, Division 1 or Division 2
permitted for equipment in Zone 22 locations for which it is identified.
locations.
5.6.1.9 Equipment Requirements.
(c) Reclassification Permitted. A Class II or Class III, Division 1 or
Division 2 location shall be permitted to be reclassified as a Zone 20,
(a) Suitability. Suitability of identified equipment shall be determined
Zone 21, or Zone 22 location, provided that all of the space that is
by one of the following:
 (1) Equipment listing or labeling
(2) Evidence of equipment evaluation from a qualified testing Exception No. 2: Equipment identified for Class II, Division 1 or Class
laboratory or inspection agency concerned with product evaluation II, Division 2 locations as permitted by 5.6.1.20(b) and 5.6.1.20(c) shall
(3) Evidence acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction such as a be permitted to be marked in accordance with 5.0.1.6(d) and Table
manufacturer's self-evaluation or an owner's engineering judgment 5.0.1.6(d).

(b) Listing. (e) Threading. All NPT threads referred to herein shall be threaded
with a National (American) Standard Pipe Taper (NPT) thread that
(1) Equipment that is listed for Zone 20 shall be permitted in a Zone provides a taper of 1 in 16 (19 mm taper per 300mm). Conduit and
21 or Zone 22 location of the same dust, or ignitible fiber, or flying. fittings shall be made wrenchtight to prevent sparking when the fault
Equipment that is listed for Zone 21 may be used in a Zone 22 location current flows through the conduit system, and to ensure the integrity of
of the same dust, fiber, or flying. the conduit system. Equipment provided with threaded entries for field
wiring connections shall be installed in accordance with 5.6.1.9(e)(1) or
(2) Equipment shall be permitted to be listed for a specific dust, or (e)(2).
ignitible fiber or flying, or any specific combination of dusts, fibers, or
flyings. (1) Equipment Provided with Threaded Entries for NPT Threaded
Conduit or Fittings. For equipment provided with threaded entries for
(c) Marking. Equipment identified for Class II, Division 1 or Class II, NPT threaded conduit or fittings, listed conduit fittings, or cable fittings
Division 2 shall, in addition to being marked in accordance with shall be used.
5.0.1.8(b), be permitted to be marked with both of the following:
(2) Equipment Provided with Threaded Entries for Metric Threaded
(1) Zone 20, 21, or 22 (as applicable) Conduit or Fittings. For equipment with metric threaded entries, such
(2) Temperature classification in accordance with 5.6.1.9(d) entries shall be identified as being metric, or listed adapters to permit
connection to conduit or NPT-threaded fittings shall be provided with the
(d) Temperature Classifications. Equipment shall be marked to show equipment. Adapters shall be used for connection to conduit or NPT-
the operating temperature referenced to a 40°C ambient. Electrical threaded fittings. Listed cable fittings that have metric threads shall be
equipment designed for use in the ambient temperature range between - permitted to be used.
20°C and +40°C shall require no additional ambient temperature
marking. Electrical equipment that is designed for use in a range of 5.6.1.15 Wiring Methods. Wiring methods shall maintain the integrity
ambient temperatures other than -20°C and +40°C is considered to be of the protection techniques and shall comply with 5.6.1.15(a), (b), or
special; and the ambient temperature range shall then be marked on the (c).
equipment, including either the symbol “Ta” or “Tamb” together with
the special range of ambient temperatures. As an example, such a (a) Zone 20. In Zone 20 locations, the wiring methods in (1) through
marking might be “–30°C Ta +40°C.” Electrical equipment suitable for (5) shall be permitted.
ambient temperatures exceeding 40°C shall be marked with both the
maximum ambient temperature and the operating temperature at that (1) Threaded rigid metal conduit, or threaded steel intermediate
ambient temperature. metal conduit.

Exception No. 1: Equipment of the non–heat-producing type, such as (2) Type MI cable with termination fittings listed for the location.
conduit fittings, shall not be required to have a marked operating Type MI cable shall be installed and supported in a manner to avoid
temperature. tensile stress at the termination fittings.
 (2) Fittings and boxes that are dusttight, provided with threaded
Exception: MI cable and fittings listed for Class II, Division 1 locations bosses for connection to conduit, in which taps, joints, or terminal
are permitted to be used. connections are not made, and are not used in locations where metal dust
is present, may be used
(3) In industrial establishments with limited public access, where the
conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that only licensed (c) Zone 22. In Zone 22 locations, the wiring methods in (1) through
electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner under the (8) shall be permitted.
supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner service the installation,
Type MC cable, listed for continuous use in Zone 20 locations, with a (1) All wiring methods permitted in 5.6.1.15(b).
gas/vaportight continuous corrugated metallic sheath, and overall jacket (2) Rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit, electrical
of suitable polymeric material, separate grounding conductors in metallic tubing, dusttight wireways.
accordance with 2.50.6.13, and provided with termination fittings listed (3) Type MC or MI cable with listed termination fittings.
for the application, shall be permitted. (4) Type PLTC in cable trays.
(5) Type ITC in cable trays.
Exception: MC cable and fittings listed for Class II, Division 1 locations (6) Type MC, MI, MV, or TC cable installed in ladder, ventilated
are permitted to be used. trough, or ventilated channel cable trays in a single layer, with a space
not less than the larger cable diameter between two adjacent cables, shall
(4) Fittings and boxes shall be identified for use in Zone 20 be the wiring method employed. Single conductor Type MV cables shall
locations. be shielded or metallic armored.
(7) Nonincendive field wiring shall be permitted using any of the
Exception: Boxes and fittings listed for Class II, Division 1 locations are wiring methods permitted for unclassified locations. Nonincendive field
permitted to be used. wiring systems shall be installed in accordance with the control
drawing(s).
(5) Where necessary to employ flexible connections, liquidtight Simple apparatus, not shown on the control drawing, shall be
flexible metal conduit with listed fittings, liquidtight flexible nonmetallic permitted in a nonincendive field wiring circuit, provided the simple
conduit with listed fittings, or flexible cord listed for extra-hard usage apparatus does not interconnect the nonincendive field wiring circuit to
and provided with listed fittings shall be used. Where flexible cords are any other circuit.
used, they shall also comply with 5.6.1.17. Where flexible connections
are subject to oil or other corrosive conditions, the insulation of the FPN: Simple apparatus is defined in 5.4.1.2.
conductors shall be of a type listed for the condition or shall be protected
by means of a suitable sheath. Separation of nonincendive field wiring circuits shall be in
accordance with one of the following:
Exception: Flexible conduit and flexible conduit and cord fittings listed
for Class II, Division 1 locations are permitted to be used. a. Be in separate cables
b. Be in multiconductor cables where the conductors of each
FPN: See 5.6.1.25 for grounding requirements where flexible conduit is used. circuit are within a grounded metal shield
c. Be in multiconductor cables where the conductors have
(b) Zone 21. In Zone 21 locations, the wiring methods in (b)(1) and insulation with a minimum thickness of 0.25 mm
(b)(2) shall be permitted.
(8) Boxes and fittings shall be dusttight.
(1) All wiring methods permitted in 5.6.1.15(a)
5.6.1.16 Sealing. Where necessary to protect the ingress of combustible Exception No. 1: Apparatus listed for use in Class II, Division 1 or
dust, or ignitible fibers, or flyings, or to maintain the type of protection, Class II, Division 2 locations with a suitable temperature class shall be
seals shall be provided. The seal shall be identified as capable of permitted.
preventing the ingress of combustible dust or ignitible fibers or flyings
and maintaining the type of protection but need not be explosionproof or Exception No. 2: Pressurized equipment identified for Class II, Division
flameproof. 1 or Division 2 shall be permitted.

5.6.1.17 Flexible Cords. Flexible cords used in Zone 20, Zone 21, and (d) Manufacturer's Instructions. Electrical equipment installed in
Zone 22 locations shall comply with all of the following: hazardous (classified) locations shall be installed in accordance with the
instructions (if any) provided by the manufacturer.
(1) Be of a type listed for extra-hard usage
(2) Contain, in addition to the conductors of the circuit, a grounding (e) Temperature. The temperature marking specified in 5.6.1.9(c)(2)e
conductor in complying with 4.0.2.4 shall comply with (e)(1) or (e)(2).
(3) Be connected to terminals or to supply conductors in an approved
manner (1) For combustible dusts, less than the lower of either the layer or
(4) Be supported by clamps or by other suitable means in such a cloud ignition temperature of the specific combustible dust. For organic
manner to minimize tension on the terminal connections dusts that may dehydrate or carbonize, the temperature marking shall not
(5) Be provided with suitable seals to prevent the entrance of exceed the lower of either the ignition temperature or 165°C.
combustible dust, or ignitible fibers, or flyings where the flexible cord
enters boxes or fittings (2) For ignitible fibers or flyings, less than 165°C for equipment that
is not subject to overloading, or 120°C for equipment (such as motors or
5.6.1.20 Equipment Installation. power transformers) that may be overloaded.

(a) Zone 20. In Zone 20 locations, only equipment listed and marked FPN: See NFPA 499-2004, Recommended Practice for the Classification of
Combustible Dusts and of Hazardous (Classified) Locations for Electrical Installations
as suitable for the location shall be permitted. in Chemical Processing Areas, for minimum ignition temperatures of specific dusts.

Exception: Intrinsically safe apparatus listed for use in Class II, 5.6.1.21 Multiwire Branch Circuits. In Zone 20 and Zone 21 locations,
Division 1 locations with a suitable temperature class shall be permitted. a multiwire branch circuit shall not be permitted.

(b) Zone 21. In Zone 21 locations, only equipment listed and marked Exception: Where the disconnect device(s) for the circuit opens all
as suitable for the location shall be permitted. ungrounded conductors of the multiwire circuit simultaneously.

Exception No. 1: Apparatus listed for use in Class II, Division 1 5.6.1.25 Grounding and Bonding. Grounding and bonding shall comply
locations with a suitable temperature class shall be permitted. with Article 2.50 and the requirements in 5.6.1.25(a) and 5.6.1.25(b).

Exception No. 2: Pressurized equipment identified for Class II, Division (a) Bonding. The locknut-bushing and double-locknut types of
1 shall be permitted. contacts shall not be depended on for bonding purposes, but bonding
jumpers with proper fittings or other approved means of bonding shall be
(c) Zone 22. In Zone 22 locations, only equipment listed and marked used. Such means of bonding shall apply to all intervening raceways,
as suitable for the location shall be permitted. fittings, boxes, enclosures, and so forth, between Zone 20, Zone 21, and
Zone 22 locations and the point of grounding for service equipment or such rules are modified in Articles 5.11 through 5.17. Where unusual
point of grounding of a separately derived system. conditions exist in a specific occupancy, the authority having jurisdiction
shall judge with respect to the application of specific rules.
Exception: The specific bonding means shall be required only to the
nearest point where the grounded circuit conductor and the grounding
electrode conductor are connected together on the line side of the ARTICLE 5.11 — COMMERCIAL GARAGES,
building or structure disconnecting means as specified in 2.50.2.13(a), REPAIR AND STORAGE
(b), and (c), if the branch side overcurrent protection is located on the
load side of the disconnecting means. FPN: Rules that are followed by a reference in brackets contain text that has been
extracted from NFPA 30A-2003, Code for Motor Fuel Dispensing Facilities and Repair
Garages. Only editorial changes were made to the extracted text to make it consistent
FPN: See 2.50.5.11 for additional bonding requirements in hazardous (classified) with this Code.
locations.

5.11.1.1 Scope. These occupancies shall include locations used for

(b) Types of Equipment Grounding Conductors. Where flexible
service and repair operations in connection with self-propelled vehicles
conduit is used as permitted in 5.6.1.15, it shall be installed with internal
(including, but not limited to, passenger automobiles, buses, trucks, and
or external bonding jumpers in parallel with each conduit and complying
tractors) in which volatile flammable liquids or flammable gases are used
with 2.50.5.13.
for fuel or power.
Exception: In Zone 22 locations, the bonding jumper shall be permitted
5.11.1.3 Classifications of Locations.
to be deleted where all of the following conditions are met:
(a) Unclassified Locations.
(1) Listed liquidtight flexible metal conduit 1 800 mm or less in
length, with fittings listed for grounding, is used.
(1) Parking and Repair Garages. Parking garages used for parking or
storage shall be permitted to be unclassified. Repair garages shall be
(2) Overcurrent protection in the circuit is limited to 10 amperes or
permitted to be unclassified when designed in accordance with
less.
5.11.1.3(a)(2) through 5.11.1.3(a)(7).
(3) The load is not a power utilization load. FPN: For further information, see NFPA 88A-2002, Standard for Parking Structures,
and NFPA 30A-2003, Code for Motor Fuel Dispensing Facilities and Repair Garages.

ARTICLE 5.10 — HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) (2) Alcohol-Based Windshield Washer Fluid. The storage, handling,
LOCATIONS — SPECIFIC or dispensing into motor vehicles of alcohol-based windshield washer
fluid in areas used for the service and repair operations of the vehicles
5.10.1.1 Scope. Articles 5.11 through 5.17 cover occupancies or parts of shall not cause such areas to be classified as hazardous (classified)
occupancies that are or may be hazardous because of atmospheric locations.
concentrations of flammable liquids, gases, or vapors, or because of
deposits or accumulations of materials that may be readily ignitible. FPN: For further information, see 8.3.5, Exception, of NFPA 30A-2003, Code for
Motor Fuel Dispensing Facilities and Repair Garages.

5.10.1.2 General. The general rules of this Code and the provisions of (3) Specific Areas Adjacent to Classified Locations. Areas adjacent
Articles 5.0 through 5.4 shall apply to electric wiring and equipment in to classified locations in which flammable vapors are not likely to be
occupancies within the scope of Articles 5.11 through 5.17, except as released, such as stock rooms, switchboard rooms, and other similar
locations, shall not be classified where mechanically ventilated at a rate (b) Classified Locations.
of four or more air changes per hour, or designed with positive air
pressure, or where effectively cut off by walls or partitions. (1) Flammable Fuel Dispensing Areas. Areas in which flammable
fuel is dispensed into vehicle fuel tanks shall conform to Article 5.14.
(4) Pits in Lubrication or Service Room Where Class I Liquids Are
Not Transferred. Any pit, belowgrade work area, or subfloor work area (2) Lubrication or Service Room Where Class I Liquids or Gaseous
that is provided with exhaust ventilation at a rate of not less than 0.3 Fuels (Such as Natural Gas, Hydrogen, or LPG) Are Not Transferred.
m3/min/m2 of floor area at all times that the building is occupied or when The following spaces that are not designed in accordance with
vehicles are parked in or over this area and where exhaust air is taken 5.11.1.3(a)(4) shall be classified as Class I, Division 2:
from a point within 300 mm of the floor of the pit, belowgrade work
area, or subfloor work area is unclassified. [NFPA 30A:7.4.5.4 and Table a. Entire area within any unventilated pit, belowgrade work area,
8.3.1] or subfloor area.

(5) Up to a Level of 460 mm Above the Floor in Lubrication or b. Area up to 460 mm above any such unventilated pit, belowgrade
Service Rooms Where Class I Liquids Are Transferred. For each floor, work area, or subfloor work area and extending a distance of 900 mm
the entire area up to a level of 460 mm above the floor shall be horizontally from the edge of any such pit, belowgrade work area, or
considered unclassified where there is mechanical ventilation providing a subfloor work area.
minimum of four air changes per hour or 0.3 cubic meter per minute of
exchanged air for each square meter of floor area. Ventilation shall (3) Lubrication or Service Room Where Class I Liquids or Gaseous
provide for air exchange across the entire floor area, and exhaust air shall Fuels (Such as Natural Gas, Hydrogen, or LPG) Are Transferred. The
be taken at a point within 300 mm of the floor. following spaces that are not designed in accordance with 5.11.1.3(a)(5)
shall be classified as follows:
(6) Flammable Liquids Having Flash Points Below 38°C. Where
flammable liquids having a flash point below 38°C (such as gasoline) or a. Up to a Level of 460 mm Above the Floor. For each floor, the
gaseous fuels (such as natural gas, hydrogen, or LPG) will not be entire area up to a level of 460 mm above the floor shall be a Class I,
transferred, such location shall be considered to be unclassified. unless Division 2 location.
the location is required to be classified in accordance with 5.11.1.3(b)(2)
or (b)(4). b. Any Unventilated Pit or Depression Below Floor Level. Any
unventilated pit or depression below floor level shall be a Class I,
(7) Within 460 mm of the Ceiling. In major repair garages, where Division 1 location and shall extend up to said floor level.
lighter-than-air gaseous fuels (such as natural gas or hydrogen) vehicles
are repaired or stored, the area within 460 mm of the ceiling shall be c. Any Ventilated Pit or Depression Below Floor Level. Any
considered unclassified where ventilation of at least 0.3 m3/min/m2 of ventilated pit or depression in which six air changes per hour are
ceiling area taken from a point within 460 mm of the highest point in the exhausted from a point within 300 mm of the floor level of the pit shall
ceiling is provided. be a Class I, Division 2 location.

FPN: For further information on the definition of major repair garage, see 3.3.12.1 of d. Space Above an Unventilated Pit or Depression Below Floor
NFPA 30A-2003, Code for Motor Fuel Dispensing Facilities and Repair Garages.
Level. Above a pit, or depression below floor level, the space up to 460
mm above the floor or grade level and 900 mm horizontally from a
lubrication pit shall be a Class I, Division 2 location.
 e. Dispenser for Class I Liquids, Other Than Fuels. Within 900 5.11.1.7 Wiring and Equipment Installed Above Class I Locations.
mm of any fill or dispensing point, extending in all directions shall be a
Class I, Division 2 location. See also 5.11.1.3(b)(1). (a) Wiring in Spaces Above Class I Locations.

(4) Within 460 mm of the Ceiling. In major repair garages where (1) Fixed Wiring Above Class I Locations. All fixed wiring above
lighter-than-air gaseous fuel (such as natural gas or hydrogen) vehicles Class I locations shall be in metal raceways, rigid nonmetallic conduit,
are repaired or stored, ceiling spaces that are not designed in accordance electrical nonmetallic tubing, flexible metal conduit, liquidtight flexible
with 5.11.1.3(a)(7) shall be classified as Class I, Division 2. metal conduit, or liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit, or shall be
Type MC, AC, MI, manufactured wiring systems, or PLTC cable in
FPN: For further information on the definition of major repair garage, see 3.3.12.1 of accordance with Article 7.25, or Type TC cable or Type ITC cable in
NFPA 30A, 2003, Code for Motor Fuel Dispensing Facilities and Repair Garages.
accordance with Article 7.27. Cellular metal floor raceways or cellular
concrete floor raceways shall be permitted to be used only for supplying
5.11.1.4 Wiring and Equipment in Class I Locations.
ceiling outlets or extensions to the area below the floor, but such
raceways shall have no connections leading into or through any Class I
(a) Wiring Located in Class I Locations. Within Class I locations as
location above the floor.
classified in 5.11.1.3, wiring shall conform to applicable provisions of
Article 5.1.
(2) Pendant. For pendants, flexible cord suitable for the type of
service and listed for hard usage shall be used.
(b) Equipment Located in Class I Locations. Within Class I
locations as defined in 5.11.1.3, equipment shall conform to applicable
(b) Electrical Equipment Installed Above Class I Locations.
provisions of Article 5.1.
(1) Fixed Electrical Equipment. Electrical equipment in a fixed
(1) Fuel-Dispensing Units. Where fuel-dispensing units (other than
position shall be located above the level of any defined Class I location
liquid petroleum gas, which is prohibited) are located within buildings,
or shall be identified for the location.
the requirements of Article 5.14 shall govern.
Where mechanical ventilation is provided in the dispensing area, the
a. Arcing Equipment. Equipment that is less than 3 600 mm above
control shall be interlocked so that the dispenser cannot operate without
the floor level and that may produce arcs, sparks, or particles of hot
ventilation, as prescribed in 5.0.1.5(b)(2).
metal, such as cutouts, switches, charging panels, generators, motors, or
other equipment (excluding receptacles, lamps, and lampholders) having
(2) Portable Lighting Equipment. Portable lighting equipment shall
make-and-break or sliding contacts, shall be of the totally enclosed type
be equipped with handle, lampholder, hook, and substantial guard
or constructed so as to prevent the escape of sparks or hot metal particles.
attached to the lampholder or handle. All exterior surfaces that might
come in contact with battery terminals, wiring terminals, or other objects
b. Fixed Lighting. Lamps and lampholders for fixed lighting that is
shall be of nonconducting material or shall be effectively protected with
located over lanes through which vehicles are commonly driven or that
insulation. Lampholders shall be of an unswitched type and shall not
may otherwise be exposed to physical damage shall be located not less
provide means for plug-in of attachment plugs. The outer shell shall be
than 3 600 mm above floor level, unless of the totally enclosed type or
of molded composition or other suitable material. Unless the lamp and its
constructed so as to prevent escape of sparks or hot metal particles.
cord are supported or arranged in such a manner that they cannot be used
in the locations classified in 5.11.1.3, they shall be of a type identified
5.11.1.9 Sealing. Seals conforming to the requirements of 5.1.2.6 and
for Class I, Division 1 locations.
5.1.2.6(b)(2) shall be provided and shall apply to horizontal as well as
vertical boundaries of the defined Class I locations.
 as provided in Article 200, receptacles, attachment plugs, connectors,
5.11.1.10 Special Equipment. and similar devices shall be of the grounding type, and the grounded
conductor of the flexible cord shall be connected to the screw shell of
(a) Battery Charging Equipment. Battery chargers and their control any lampholder or to the grounded terminal of any utilization equipment
equipment, and batteries being charged, shall not be located within supplied.
locations classified in 5.11.1.3.
(2) Approved Means. Approved means shall be provided for
(b) Electric Vehicle Charging Equipment. maintaining continuity of the grounding conductor between the fixed
wiring system and the non–current-carrying metal portions of pendant
(1) General. All electrical equipment and wiring shall be installed in luminaires (fixtures), portable lamps, and portable utilization equipment.
accordance with Article 6.25, except as noted in 5.11.1.10(b)(2) and
(b)(3). Flexible cords shall be of a type identified for extra-hard usage.
ARTICLE 5.13 — AIRCRAFT HANGARS
(2) Connector Location. No connector shall be located within a Class
I location as defined in 5.11.1.3. 5.13.1.1 Scope. This article shall apply to buildings or structures in any
part of which aircraft containing Class I (flammable) liquids or Class II
(3) Plug Connections to Vehicles. Where the cord is suspended from (combustible) liquids whose temperatures are above their flash points are
overhead, it shall be arranged so that the lowest point of sag is at least housed or stored and in which aircraft might undergo service, repairs, or
150 mm above the floor. Where an automatic arrangement is provided to alterations. It shall not apply to locations used exclusively for aircraft
pull both cord and plug beyond the range of physical damage, no that have never contained fuel or unfueled aircraft.
additional connector shall be required in the cable or at the outlet.
FPN No. 1: For definitions of aircraft hangar and unfueled aircraft, see NFPA 409-
2004, Standard on Aircraft Hangars.
5.11.1.12 Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection for
Personnel. All 125-volt and/or 250-volt, single-phase, 15- and 20- FPN No. 2: For further information on fuel classification see NFPA 30-2003,
Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code.
ampere receptacles installed in areas where electrical diagnostic
equipment, electrical hand tools, or portable lighting equipment are to be
used shall have ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection for personnel. 5.13.1.2 Definitions. For the purpose of this article, the following
definitions shall apply.
5.11.1.16 Grounded and Grounding Requirements.
Mobile Equipment. Equipment with electric components suitable to
(a) General Grounding Requirements. All metal raceways, the metal be moved only with mechanical aids or is provided with wheels for
armor or metallic sheath on cables, and all non–current-carrying metal movement by person(s) or powered devices.
parts of fixed or portable electrical equipment, regardless of voltage,
shall be grounded as provided in Article 2.50. Portable Equipment. Equipment with electric components suitable to
be moved by a single person without mechanical aids.
(b) Supplying Circuits with Grounded and Grounding Conductors
in Class I Locations. Grounding in Class I locations shall comply with 5.13.1.3 Classification of Locations.
5.1.2.21.
(a) Below Floor Level. Any pit or depression below the level of the
(1) Circuits Supplying Portable Equipment or Pendants. Where a hangar floor shall be classified as a Class I, Division 1 or Zone 1 location
circuit supplies portables or pendants and includes a grounded conductor that shall extend up to said floor level.
 shall be permitted to be any suitable type wiring method recognized in
(b) Areas Not Cut Off or Ventilated. The entire area of the hangar, Chapter 3.
including any adjacent and communicating areas not suitably cut off
from the hangar, shall be classified as a Class I, Division 2 or Zone 2 (b) Pendants. For pendants, flexible cord suitable for the type of
location up to a level 460 mm above the floor. service and identified for hard usage or extra-hard usage shall be used.
Each such cord shall include a separate equipment grounding conductor.
(c) Vicinity of Aircraft. The area within 1 500 mm horizontally from
aircraft power plants or aircraft fuel tanks shall be classified as a Class I, (c) Arcing Equipment. In locations above those described in 5.13.1.3,
Division 2 or Zone 2 location that shall extend upward from the floor to a equipment that is less than 3 000 mm above wings and engine enclosures
level 1 500 mm above the upper surface of wings and of engine of aircraft and that may produce arcs, sparks, or particles of hot metal,
enclosures. such as lamps and lampholders for fixed lighting, cutouts, switches,
receptacles, charging panels, generators, motors, or other equipment
(d) Areas Suitably Cut Off and Ventilated. Adjacent areas in which having make-and-break or sliding contacts, shall be of the totally
flammable liquids or vapors are not likely to be released, such as stock enclosed type or constructed so as to prevent the escape of sparks or hot
rooms, electrical control rooms, and other similar locations, shall not be metal particles.
classified where adequately ventilated and where effectively cut off from
the hangar itself by walls or partitions. Exception: Equipment in areas described in 5.13.1.3(d) shall be
permitted to be of the general-purpose type.
5.13.1.4 Wiring and Equipment in Class I Locations.
(d) Lampholders. Lampholders of metal-shell, fiber-lined types shall
(a) General. All wiring and equipment that is or may be installed or not be used for fixed incandescent lighting.
operated within any of the Class I locations defined in 5.13.1.3 shall
comply with the applicable provisions of Article 5.1 or Article 5.5 for the (e) Stanchions, Rostrums, or Docks. Where stanchions, rostrums, or
division or zone in which they are used. docks are not located or likely to be located in a Class I location, as
Attachment plugs and receptacles in Class I locations shall be defined in 5.13.1.3(c), wiring and equipment shall comply with 5.13.1.7,
identified for Class I locations or shall be designed such that they cannot except that such wiring and equipment not more than 450 mm above the
be energized while the connections are being made or broken. floor in any position shall comply with 5.13.1.4(b). Receptacles and
attachment plugs shall be of a locking type that will not readily
(b) Stanchions, Rostrums, and Docks. Electric wiring, outlets, and disconnect.
equipment (including lamps) on or attached to stanchions, rostrums, or
docks that are located or likely to be located in a Class I location, as (f) Mobile Stanchions. Mobile stanchions with electric equipment
defined in 5.13.1.3(c), shall comply with the applicable provisions of complying with 5.13.1.7(e) shall carry at least one permanently affixed
Article 5.1 or Article 5.5 for the division or zone in which they are used. warning sign with the following words or equivalent:

5.13.1.7 Wiring and Equipment Not Installed in Class I Locations. WARNING — KEEP 1.5 METERS CLEAR OF
AIRCRAFT ENGINES AND FUEL TANK AREAS
(a) Fixed Wiring. All fixed wiring in a hangar but not installed in a
Class I location as classified in 5.13.1.3 shall be installed in metal 5.13.1.8 Underground Wiring.
raceways or shall be Type MI, TC, or MC cable.
(a) Wiring and Equipment Embedded, Under Slab, or Under
Exception: Wiring in unclassified locations, as described in 5.13.1.3(d), Ground. All wiring installed in or under the hangar floor shall comply
with the requirements for Class I, Division 1 locations. Where such (c) External Power Sources for Energizing Aircraft.
wiring is located in vaults, pits, or ducts, adequate drainage shall be
provided. (1) Not Less Than 460 mm Above Floor. Aircraft energizers shall be
designed and mounted such that all electric equipment and fixed wiring
(b) Uninterrupted Raceways, Embedded, Under Slab, or will be at least 460 mm above floor level and shall not be operated in a
Underground. Uninterrupted raceways that are embedded in a hangar Class I location as defined in 5.13.1.3(c).
floor or buried beneath the hangar floor shall be considered to be within
the Class I location above the floor, regardless of the point at which the (2) Marking for Mobile Units. Mobile energizers shall carry at least
raceway descends below or rises above the floor. one permanently affixed warning sign with the following words or
equivalent:
5.13.1.9 Sealing. Seals shall be provided in accordance with 5.1.2.6 or
5.5.1.16, as applicable. Sealing requirements specified shall apply to WARNING — KEEP 1.5 METERS CLEAR OF
horizontal as well as to vertical boundaries of the defined Class I AIRCRAFT ENGINES AND FUEL TANK AREAS
locations.
(3) Cords. Flexible cords for aircraft energizers and ground support
5.13.1.10 Special Equipment. equipment shall be identified for the type of service and extra-hard usage
and shall include an equipment grounding conductor.
(a) Aircraft Electrical Systems.
(d) Mobile Servicing Equipment with Electric Components.
(1) De-energizing Aircraft Electrical Systems. Aircraft electrical
systems shall be de-energized when the aircraft is stored in a hangar and, (1) General. Mobile servicing equipment (such as vacuum cleaners,
whenever possible, while the aircraft is undergoing maintenance. air compressors, air movers) having electric wiring and equipment not
suitable for Class I, Division 2 or Zone 2 locations shall be so designed
(2) Aircraft Batteries. Aircraft batteries shall not be charged where and mounted that all such fixed wiring and equipment will be at least 460
installed in an aircraft located inside or partially inside a hangar. mm above the floor. Such mobile equipment shall not be operated within
the Class I location defined in 5.13.1.3(c) and shall carry at least one
(b) Aircraft Battery Charging and Equipment. Battery chargers and permanently affixed warning sign with the following words or
their control equipment shall not be located or operated within any of the equivalent:
Class I locations defined in 5.13.1.3 and shall preferably be located in a
separate building or in an area such as defined in 5.13.1.3(d). Mobile WARNING — KEEP 1.5 METERS CLEAR OF
chargers shall carry at least one permanently affixed warning sign with AIRCRAFT ENGINES AND FUEL TANK AREAS
the following words or equivalent:
(2) Cords and Connectors. Flexible cords for mobile equipment shall
WARNING — KEEP 1.5 METERS CLEAR OF be suitable for the type of service and identified for extra-hard usage and
AIRCRAFT ENGINES AND FUEL TANK AREAS shall include an equipment grounding conductor. Attachment plugs and
receptacles shall be identified for the location in which they are installed
Tables, racks, trays, and wiring shall not be located within a Class I and shall provide for connection of the equipment grounding conductor.
location and, in addition, shall comply with Article 4.80.
(3) Restricted Use. Equipment that is not identified as suitable for
Class I, Division 2 locations shall not be operated in locations where
maintenance operations likely to release flammable liquids or vapors are any lampholder or to the grounded terminal of any utilization equipment
in progress. supplied.

(e) Portable Equipment. (2) Approved Means. Approved means shall be provided for
maintaining continuity of the grounding conductor between the fixed
(1) Portable Lighting Equipment. Portable lighting equipment that is wiring system and the non–current-carrying metal portions of pendant
used within a hangar shall be identified for the location in which they are luminaires (fixtures), portable lamps, and portable utilization equipment.
used. For portable lamps, flexible cord suitable for the type of service
and identified for extra-hard usage shall be used. Each such cord shall
include a separate equipment grounding conductor. ARTICLE 5.14 — MOTOR FUEL DISPENSING FACILITIES

(2) Portable Utilization Equipment. Portable utilization equipment FPN: Rules that are followed by a reference in brackets contain text that has been
extracted from NFPA 30A-2003, Code for Motor Fuel Dispensing Facilities and Repair
that is or may be used within a hangar shall be of a type suitable for use Garages. Only editorial changes were made to the extracted text to make it consistent
in Class I, Division 2 or Zone 2 locations. For portable utilization with this Code.
equipment, flexible cord suitable for the type of service and approved for
extra-hard usage shall be used. Each such cord shall include a separate 5.14.1.1 Scope. This article shall apply to motor fuel dispensing
equipment grounding conductor. facilities, marine/motor fuel dispensing facilities, motor fuel dispensing
facilities located inside buildings, and fleet vehicle motor fuel dispensing
5.13.1.12 Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection for facilities.
Personnel. All 125-volt and/or 250-volt, 50/60 Hz, single phase, 15– and
20-ampere receptacles installed in areas where electrical diagnostic FPN: For further information regarding safeguards for motor fuel dispensing facilities,
see NFPA 30A-2003, Code for Motor Fuel Dispensing Facilities and Repair Garages.
equipment, electrical hand tools, or portable lighting equipment are to be
used shall have ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection for personnel. 5.14.1.2 Definition.
5.13.1.16 Grounded and Grounding Requirements. Motor Fuel Dispensing Facility. That portion of a property where
motor fuels are stored and dispensed from fixed equipment into the fuel
(a) General Grounding Requirements. All metal raceways, the metal tanks of motor vehicles or marine craft or into approved containers,
armor or metallic sheath on cables, and all non–current-carrying metal including all equipment used in connection therewith. [NFPA
parts of fixed or portable electrical equipment, regardless of voltage, 30A:3.3.11]
shall be grounded as provided in Article 2.50. Grounding in Class I
locations shall comply with 5.1.2.21 for Class I, Division 1 and 2 FPN: Refer to Articles 5.10 and 5.11 with respect to electric wiring and equipment for
locations and 5.5.1.25 for Class I, Zone 0, 1, and 2 locations. other areas used as lubritoriums, service rooms, repair rooms, offices, salesrooms,
compressor rooms, and similar locations.

(b) Supplying Circuits with Grounded and Grounding Conductors

5.14.1.3 Classification of Locations.
in Class I Locations.
(a) Unclassified Locations. Where the authority having jurisdiction
(1) Circuits Supplying Portable Equipment or Pendants. Where a
can satisfactorily determine that flammable liquids having a flash point
circuit supplies portables or pendants and includes a grounded conductor
below 38°C, such as gasoline, will not be handled, such location shall not
as provided in Article 2.0, receptacles, attachment plugs, connectors, and
be required to be classified.
similar devices shall be of the grounding type, and the grounded
conductor of the flexible cord shall be connected to the screw shell of
 (b) Classified Locations.

(1) Class I Locations. Table 5.14.1.3(b)(1) shall be applied where

Class I liquids are stored, handled, or dispensed and shall be used to
delineate and classify motor fuel dispensing facilities and commercial
garages as defined in Article 5.11. Table 5.15.1.3 shall be used for the
purpose of delineating and classifying aboveground tanks. A Class I
location shall not extend beyond an unpierced wall, roof, or other solid
partition. [NFPA 30A:8.1, 8.3]

(2) Compressed Natural Gas, Liquefied Natural Gas, and Liquefied

Petroleum Gas Areas. Table 5.14.1.3(b)(2) shall be used to delineate and
classify areas where compressed natural gas (CNG), liquefied natural gas
(LNG), or liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) are stored, handled, or
dispensed. Where CNG or LNG dispensers are installed beneath a
canopy or enclosure, either the canopy or the enclosure shall be designed
to prevent accumulation or entrapment of ignitible vapors, or all
electrical equipment installed beneath the canopy or enclosure shall be
suitable for Class I, Division 2 hazardous (classified) locations.
Dispensing devices for liquefied petroleum gas shall be located not less
than 1 500 mm from any dispensing device for Class I liquids. [NFPA
30A:12.1, 12.4, 12.5]

FPN No. 1: For information on area classification where liquefied petroleum gases are
dispensed, see NFPA 58-2004, Liquefied Petroleum Gas Code.

FPN No. 2: For information on classified areas pertaining to LP-Gas systems other
than residential or commercial, see NFPA 58-2004, Liquefied Petroleum Gas Code,
and NFPA 59-2004, Utility LP-Gas Plant Code.

FPN No. 3: See 5.55.1.21 for motor fuel dispensing stations in marinas and
boatyards.

5.14.1.4 Wiring and Equipment Installed in Class I Locations. All

electrical equipment and wiring installed in Class I locations as classified
in 5.14.1.3 shall comply with the applicable provisions of Article 5.1.

Exception: As permitted in 5.14.1.8.

FPN: For special requirements for conductor insulation, see 5.1.2.11.

 Table 5.14.1.3(b)(1). Class I Locations — Motor Fuel Dispensing Facilities
Class I,
Location Extent of Classified Location
Group D Division
Underground Tank
Fill Opening 1 Any pit, box, or space below grade level, any part of which is within the Division 1 or 2
classified location.

2 Up to 450 mm above grade level within a horizontal radius of 3 000 mm from a loose fill
connection and within a horizontal radius of 1 500 mm from tight fill connection.
Vent-Discharging Upward
1 Within 900 mm of open end of vent, extending in all directions.

2 Space between 900 mm and 1 500 mm of open end of vent, extending in all directions
Dispensing Device4
(except overhead type)2
Pits 1 Any pit, box, or space below grade level, any part of which is within the Division 1 or 2
classified location.
FPN: Space classification inside the dispenser enclosure is covered in Power Operated
dispensing Device for Petroleum Products, ANSI/UL 87-1995.

Dispenser 2 Within 450 mm horizontally in all directions extending to grade from the dispenser
enclosure or that portion of the dispenser enclosure containing liquid handling components.
FPN: Space classification inside the dispenser enclosure is covered in Power Operated
dispensing Device for Petroleum Products, ANSI/UL 87-1995.

Outdoor 2 Up to 450 mm above grade level within 6 000 mm horizontally of any edge of enclosure.
Indoor
With Mechnical Ventilation 2 Up to 450 mm above grade or floor level within 6 000 mm horizontally of any edge of
enclosure.
With Gravity Ventilation
2 Up to 450 mm above grade or floor level within 7 600 mm horizontally of any edge of
enclosure.
Table 5.14.1.3(b)(1) (Continued)
Class I,
Location Extent of Classified Location
Group D Division
4
Dispensing Device
Overhead Type2 1 The space within the dispenser enclosure, and all electrical equipment integral with the
dispenser hose or nozzle.
2 A space extending 450 mm horizontally in all directions beyond the enclosure and
extending to grade.
2 Up to 450 mm above grade level within 6 000 mm horizontally measured from a point
vertically below the edge of any dispenser enclosure.
Remote Pump — Outdoor 1 Any pit, box, or space below grade level if any part is within a horizontal distance of
3 000 mm from any edge of pump.
2 Within 900 mm of any edge of pump, extending in all directions. Also up to 450 mm
above grade level within 3 000 mm horizontally fron any edge of pump.
Remote Pump—Indoor 1 Entire space within any pit.
2 Within 1 500 mm of any edge of pump, extending in all direction. Also up to 900 mm
above grade level within 7 600 mm horizontally from any edge of pump.
Lubrication or Service Room — Without 2 Entire area within any pit used for lubrication or similar service where Class I liquids may
Dispensing be released.
2 Area up to 460 mm above any such pit, and extending a distance of 900 mm horizontally
from the edge of the pit.
2 Entire unventilated area within any pit, below grade area, or subfloor area.
2 Area up to 460 mm above any such unventilated pit, below grade work area, or subfloor
work area and extending a distance of 900 mm horizontally from the edge of any such pit,
below grade work area, subfloor work area.
Unclassified Any pit, below grade work area, or subfloor work area that is provided with exhaust
ventilation at a rate of not less than 0.3 m3 /minute/m2 of floor area at all times that the
building is occupied or when vehicles are parked in or over this area and where exhaust
air is taken from a point within 300 mm of the floor of the pit, below grade work area, or
subfloor work area.
Table 5.14.1.3(b)(1) (Continued)
Class I,
Location Extent of Classified Location
Group D Division
3
Special Enclosure Inside Building 1 Entire enclosure.
Sales, Storage, and Rest Rooms Unclassified If there is any opening to these rooms within the extent of a Division 1 location, the entire
room shall be classified as Division 1.
Vapor Processing System Pits 1 Any pit , box, or space below grade level, any part of which is within a Division 1 or 2
classified location or that houses any equipment used to transport or process vapors.
Vapor Processing Equipment Located 2 Within any protective enclosure housing vapor processing equipment.
Within Protective Enclosures

FPN: See Automative and Marine Service

Station Code, NFPA 30A-1996, Section 4-
5.7
Vapor Processing Equipment Not Within 2 The space within 450 mm in all directions of equipment containing flammabale vapor or
Protective Enclosures (excluding piping liquid extending to grade level. Up to 450 mm above grade level within 3 000 mm
and combustion devices) horizontally of the vapor processing equipment.
Equipment Enclosures 1 Any space within the enclosure where vapor or liquid is present under normal operating
conditions.
Vacuum-Assist Blowers 2 The space within 450 mm in all directions extending to grade level. Up to 450 mm. above
grade level within 3 000 mm horizontally.
1
Refer to Figure 5.14.1.2 for an illustration of classified location around dispensing devices.
2
Ceiling mounted hose reel.
3
FPN: See Automotive and Marine Service Station Code, NFPA 30A-1996, Section 2-2.
4
FPN: Area classification inside the dispenser enclosure is covered in Power-Operated Dispensing Devices for Petroleum Products, ANSI/UL
87-1995.
 Table 5.14.1.3(b)(2). Electrical Equipment Classified Areas for Dispensing Devices
Extent of Classified Area
Dispensing Device
Class I, Division 1 Class I, Division 2
Compressed natural Entire space within the dispenser enclosure 1 500 mm in all directions from
gas dispenser enclosure

Liquefied natural gas Entire space within the dispenser enclosure and From 1 500 mm to 3 000 mm in all
1 500 mm in all directions from the dispenser directions from the dispenser enclosure
enclosure

Liquefied petroleum Entire space within the dispenser enclosure; 450 Up to 450 mm aboveground and within
gas mm from the exterior surface of the dispenser 6 000 mm horizontally from any edge of
enclosure to an elevation of 1 200 mm above the the dispenser enclosure, including pits
base of the dispenser; the entire pit or open or trenches within this area when
space beneath the dispenser and within 6 000 provided with adequate mechanical
mm horizontally from any edge of the dispenser ventilation
when the pit or trench is not mechanically
ventilated.
[NFPA 30A: Table 12.6.2]
 5.14.1.7 Wiring and Equipment Above Class I Locations. Wiring and
equipment above the Class I locations as classified in 5.14.1.3 shall
comply with 5.11.1.7.

5.14.1.8 Underground Wiring. Underground wiring shall be installed in

threaded rigid metal conduit or threaded steel intermediate metal conduit.
Any portion of electrical wiring that is below the surface of a Class I,
Division 1, or a Class I, Division 2, location [as classified in Table
5.14.1.3(b)(1) and Table 5.14.1.3(b)(2)] shall be sealed within 3 000 mm
of the point of emergence above grade. Except for listed explosionproof
reducers at the conduit seal, there shall be no union, coupling, box, or
fitting between the conduit seal and the point of emergence above grade.
Refer to Table 3.0.1.5.

Exception No. 1: Type MI cable shall be permitted where it is installed

in accordance with Article 3.32.

Exception No. 2: Rigid nonmetallic conduit shall be permitted where

buried under not less than 600 mm cover. Where rigid nonmetallic
conduit is used, threaded rigid metal conduit or threaded steel
intermediate metal conduit shall be used for the last 600 mm of the
underground run to emergence or to the point of connection to the
aboveground raceway, and an equipment grounding conductor shall be
included to provide electrical continuity of the raceway system and for
grounding of non–current-carrying metal parts.

5.14.1.9 Sealing.
Figure 5.14.1.3 Classified locations adjacent to
dispensers as detailed in Table 5.14.1.3(b)(1) (a) At Dispenser. A listed seal shall be provided in each conduit run
entering or leaving a dispenser or any cavities or enclosures in direct
communication therewith. The sealing fitting shall be the first fitting
after the conduit emerges from the earth or concrete.
5.14.1.4 Wiring and Equipment Installed in Class I Locations. All
electrical equipment and wiring installed in Class I locations as classified (b) At Boundary. Additional seals shall be provided in accordance
in 5.14.1.3 shall comply with the applicable provisions of Article 5.1. with 5.1.2.6. Sections 5.1.2.6(a)(4) and (b)(2) shall apply to horizontal as
well as to vertical boundaries of the defined Class I locations.
Exception: As permitted in 5.14.1.8.
5.14.1.11 Circuit Disconnects.
FPN: For special requirements for conductor insulation, see 5.1.2.11.
(a) General. Each circuit leading to or through dispensing
equipment, including equipment for remote pumping systems, shall be
provided with a clearly identified and readily accessible switch or other ARTICLE 5.15 — BULK STORAGE PLANTS
acceptable means, located remote from the dispensing devices, to
disconnect simultaneously from the source of supply, all conductors of FPN: Rules that are followed by a reference in brackets contain text that has been
extracted from NFPA 30-2003, Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code. Only
the circuits, including the grounded conductor, if any. editorial changes were made to the extracted text to make it consistent with this Code.
Single-pole breakers utilizing handle ties shall not be permitted.
5.15.1.1 Scope. This article covers a property or portion of a property
(b) Attended Self-Service Motor Fuel Dispensing Facilities. where flammable liquids are received by tank vessel, pipelines, tank car,
Emergency controls as specified in 5.14.1.11(a) shall be installed at a or tank vehicle and are stored or blended in bulk for the purpose of
location acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction, but controls shall distributing such liquids by tank vessel, pipeline, tank car, tank vehicle,
not be more than 30 m from dispensers. [NFPA 30A:6.7.1] portable tank, or container.

(c) Unattended Self-Service Motor Fuel Dispensing Facilities. 5.15.1.2 Definition.

Emergency controls as specified in 5.14.1.11(a) shall be installed at a
location acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction, but the control Bulk Plant or Terminal. That portion of a property where liquids are
shall be more than 6 000 mm but less than 30 m from the dispensers. received by tank vessel, pipelines, tank car, or tank vehicle and are stored
Additional emergency controls shall be installed on each group of or blended in bulk for the purpose of distributing such liquids by tank
dispensers or the outdoor equipment used to control the dispensers. vessel, pipeline, tank car, tank vehicle, portable tank, or container.
Emergency controls shall shut off all power to all dispensing equipment [NFPA 30:3.3.32.1]
at the station. Controls shall be manually reset only in a manner
approved by the authority having jurisdiction. [NFPA 30A:6.7.2] FPN: For further information, see NFPA 30-2003, Flammable and Combustible
Liquids Code.
FPN: For additional information, see 6.7.1 and 6.7.2 of NFPA 30A-2003, Code for
Motor Fuel Dispensing Facilities and Repair Garages. 5.15.1.3 Class I Locations. Table 5.15.1.3 shall be applied where Class I
liquids are stored, handled, or dispensed and shall be used to delineate
5.14.1.13 Provisions for Maintenance and Service of Dispensing and classify bulk storage plants. The class location shall not extend
Equipment. Each dispensing device shall be provided with a means to beyond a floor, wall, roof, or other solid partition that has no
remove all external voltage sources, including feedback, during periods communicating openings. [NFPA 30:8.1, 8.2.2]
of maintenance and service of the dispensing equipment. The location of
this means shall be permitted to be other than inside or adjacent to the FPN No. 1: The area classifications listed in Table 5.15.1.3 are based on the premise
dispensing device. The means shall be capable of being locked in the that the installation meets the applicable requirements of NFPA 30-2003, Flammable
and Combustible Liquids Code, Chapter 5, in all respects. Should this not be the case,
open position. the authority having jurisdiction has the authority to classify the extent of the classified
space.
5.14.1.16 Grounding. All metal raceways, the metal armor or metallic FPN No. 2: See 5.55.1.21 for gasoline dispensing stations in marinas and boatyards.
sheath on cables, and all non–current-carrying metal parts of fixed
portable electrical equipment, regardless of voltage, shall be grounded as 5.15.1.4 Wiring and Equipment Located in Class I Locations. All
provided in Article 2.50. Grounding in Class I locations shall comply electrical wiring and equipment within the Class I locations defined in
with 5.1.3.31. 5.15.1.3 shall comply with the applicable provisions of Article 5.1 or
Article 5.5 for the division or zone in which they are used.

Exception: As permitted in 5.15.1.8.

 Table 5.15.1.3 Electrical Area Classifications
Class I,
Location Zone Extent of Classified Location
Division
Indoor equipment installed in 1 0 The entire area associated with such equipment where flammable gases or vapors are present continuously o
accordance with Section 5.3 of for long periods of time
NFPA 30 where flammable
vapor–air mixtures can exist 1 1 Area within 1 500 mm of any edge of such equipment, extending in all directions.
under normal operation
2 2 Area between 1 500 mm and 2 400 mm of any edge of such equipment, extending in all directions; also
space up to 900 mm above floor or grade level within 1 500 mm to 7 600 mm horizontally from any edge o
such equipment1
Outdoor equipment of the type 1 0 The entire area associated with such equipment where flammable gases or vapors are present continuously
covered in Section 5.3 of NFPA or for long periods of time.
30 where flammable vapor–air
mixtures may exist under normal 1 1 Area within 900 mm of any edge of such equipment, extending in all directions.
operation
2 2 Area between 900 mm and 2 400 mm of any edge of such equipment, extending in all directions; also,
space up to 900 mm above floor or grade level within 900 mm to 3 000 mm horizontally from any edge of
such equipment
Tank storage installations inside 1 1 All equipment located below grade level
buildings
2 2 Any equipment located at or above grade level
Tank – Aboveground2 1 0 Inside fixed roof tank.

1 1 Area inside dike where dike height is greater than the distance from the tank to the dike for more than 50
percent of the tank circumference.

Shell, Ends, or Roof and Dike 2 2 Within 3 000 mm from shell, ends, or roof of tank; also, area inside dike to level of top of tank
Area
Area inside of vent piping or opening.
Vent 1 0
Within 1 500 mm of open end of vent, extending in all directions.
Floating Roof with fixed outer 1 1
roof

Floating Roof with no fixed 1 1 Area above the floating roof and within the shell.
outer roof
Table 5.15.1.3 (Continued)
Class I,
Location Zone Extent of Classified Location
Division
Underground tank fill opening 1 1 Any pit, or space below grade level, if any part is within a Division 1 or 2, or Zone 1 or 2, classified
location.

2 2 Up to 450 mm above grade level within a horizontal radius of 3 000 mm from a loose fill connection, and
within a horizontal radius of 1 500 mm from a tight fill connection.
Vent – discharging upward 1 0 Area inside of vent piping or opening.

1 1 Within 900 mm of open end of vent, extending in all directions.

2 2 Area between 900 mm and 1 500 mm of open end of vent, extending in all directions.

Drum and container filling – 1 0 Area inside the drum or container .

outdoors or indoors
1 1 Within 900 mm of vent and fill openings, extending in all directions.

2 2 Area between 900 mm and 1 500 mm from vent or fill opening, extending in all directions; also, up to 450
mm above floor or grade level within a horizontal radius of 3 000 mm from vent or fill opening.
Pumps, bleeders, withdrawal
fittings,
Indoors 2 2 Within 1 500 mm of any edge of such devices, extending in all directions; also, up to 900 mm above floor
or grade level within 7 600 mm horizontally from any edge of such devices.
Within 900 mm of any edge of such devices, extending in all directions. Also, up to 450 mm above grad
Outdoors 2 2 level within 3 000 mm horizontally from any edge of such devices.
Pits and sumps
Without mechanical 1 1 Entire area within a pit or sump if any part is within a Division 1 or 2, or Zone 1 or 2, classified location.
ventilation
Entire area within a pit or sump if any part is within a Division 1 or 2, or Zone 1 or 2, classified location .
With adequate mechanical 2 2
ventilation Entire pit or sump

Containing valves, fittings, or 2 2

piping, and not within a
Division 1 or 2, or Zone 1 or
2, classified location 2 2
Entire pit or sump
Table 5.15.1.3 (Continued)
Class I,
Location Zone Extent of Classified Location
Division
Drainage ditches, separators,
impounding basins
Outdoors 2 2 Area up to 450 mm above ditch, separator, or basin; also, area up to 450 mm above grade within 4 500
mm horizontally from any edge .

Indoors Same classified area as pits.

Tank vehicle and tank car2 loading 1 0 Area inside of the tank.
through open dome
1 1 Within 900 mm of edge of dome, extending in all directions.

2 2 Area between 900 mm and 4 500 mm from edge of dome, extending in all directions.
Loading through bottom 1 0 Area inside of the tank.
connections with atmospheric
venting 1 1 Within 900 mm of point of venting to atmosphere, extending in all directions.

2 2 Area between 900 mm and 4 500 mm from point of venting to atmosphere, extending in all directions; also
up to 450 mm above grade within a horizontal radius of 3 000 mm from point of loading connection.
Office and rest rooms Ordinary Ordinary If there is any opening to these rooms within the extent of an indoor classified location, the room shall b
classified the same as if the wall, curb, or partition did not exist.
Loading through closed dome with 1 1 Within 900 mm of open end of vent, extending in all directions.
atmospheric venting
2 2 Area between 900 mm and 4 500 mm from open end of vent, extending in all directions; also, within 900
mm of edge of dome, extending in all directions.

Loading through closed dome with 2 2 Within 900 mm of point of connection of both fill and vapor lines extending in all directions
vapor control
Bottom loading with vapor control 2 2 Within 900 mm of point of connections, extending in all directions; also up to 450 mm above grade within
or any bottom unloading a horizontal radius of 3 000 mm from point of connections.
Storage and repair garage for tank 1 1 All pits or spaces below floor level.
vehicles.
2 2 Area up to 450 mm above floor or grade level for entire storage or repair garage.

Garages for other than tank Ordinary Ordinary If there is any opening to these rooms within the extent of an outdoor classified location, the entire room
vehicles. shall be classified the same as the area classification at the point of the opening.
Table 5.15.1.3 (Continued)
Class I,
Location Zone Extent of Classified Location
Division
Outdoor drum storage Ordinary Ordinary

Inside rooms or storage lockers 2 2 Entire room

used for the storage of Class I
liquids
Indoor warehousing where there is Ordinary Ordinary If there is any opening to these rooms within the extent of an indoor classified location, the room shall be
no flammable liquid transfer classified the same as if the wall, curb, or partition did not exist.
Piers and wharves See Figure 5.15.1.3.
1
The release of Class I liquids may generate vapors to the extent that the entire building, and possibly an area surrounding it, should be
considered a Class I, Division 2 or Zone 2 location.
2
When classifying extent of area, consideration shall be given to fact that tank cars or tank vehicles may be spotted at varying points.
Therefore, the extremities of the loading or unloading positions shall be used. [NFPA 30:Table 8.2.2]
 Exception: As permitted in 5.15.1.8.

5.15.1.7 Wiring and Equipment Above Class I Locations.

(a) Fixed Wiring. All fixed wiring above Class I locations shall be in
metal raceways or PVC Schedule 80 rigid nonmetallic conduit, or
equivalent, or be Type MI, TC, or MC cable.

(b) Fixed Equipment. Fixed equipment that may produce arcs, sparks,
or particles of hot metal, such as lamps and lampholders for fixed
lighting, cutouts, switches, receptacles, motors, or other equipment
having make-and-break or sliding contacts, shall be of the totally
enclosed type or be constructed so as to prevent the escape of sparks or
hot metal particles.

(c) Portable Lamps or Other Utilization Equipment. Portable lamps

or other utilization equipment and their flexible cords shall comply with
the provisions of Article 5.1 or Article 5.5 for the class of location above
which they are connected or used.

Notes: 5.15.1.8 Underground Wiring.

(1) The “source of vapor” shall be the operating envelope and stored position of the
outboard flange connection of the loading arm (or hose).
(a) Wiring Method. Underground wiring shall be installed in threaded
(2) The berth area adjacent to tanker and barge cargo tanks is to be Division 2 to the rigid metal conduit or threaded steel intermediate metal conduit or,
following extent:
where buried under not less than 600 mm of cover, shall be permitted in
a. 7 600 mm horizontally in all directions on the pier side from that portion of the hull rigid nonmetallic conduit or a listed cable. Where rigid nonmetallic
containing cargo tanks.
b. From the water level 7 600 mm above the cargo tanks at their highest position.
conduit is used, threaded rigid metal conduit or threaded steel
intermediate metal conduit shall be used for the last 600 mm of the
(3) Additional locations may have to be classified as required by the presence of other conduit run to emergence or to the point of connection to the
sources of flammable liquids on the berth, or by Coast Guard or other regulations.
aboveground raceway. Where cable is used, it shall be enclosed in
threaded rigid metal conduit or threaded steel intermediate metal conduit
Figure 5.15.1.3 Marine Terminal Handling
from the point of lowest buried cable level to the point of connection to
Flammable Liquids. [NFPA 30:Figure 7.7.16]
the aboveground raceway.

(b) Insulation. Conductor insulation shall comply with 5.1.2.11.

5.15.1.4 Wiring and Equipment Located in Class I Locations. All
(c) Nonmetallic Wiring. Where rigid nonmetallic conduit or cable
electrical wiring and equipment within the Class I locations defined in
with a nonmetallic sheath is used, an equipment grounding conductor
5.15.1.3 shall comply with the applicable provisions of Article 5.1 or
shall be included to provide for electrical continuity of the raceway
Article 5.5 for the division or zone in which they are used.
system and for grounding of non–current-carrying metal parts.
 5.16.1.2 Definitions. For the purpose of this article, the following
5.15.1.9 Sealing. Sealing requirements shall apply to horizontal as well definitions shall apply.
as to vertical boundaries of the defined Class I locations. Buried
raceways and cables under defined Class I locations shall be considered Spray Area. Normally, locations outside of buildings or localized
to be within a Class I, Division 1 or Zone 1 location. operations within a larger room or space. Such are normally provided
with some local vapor extraction/ventilation system. In automated
5.15.1.10 Special Equipment — Gasoline Dispensers. Where gasoline operations, the area limits shall be the maximum area in the direct path of
or other volatile flammable liquids or liquefied flammable gases are spray operations. In manual operations, the area limits shall be the
dispensed at bulk stations, the applicable provisions of Article 5.14 shall maximum area of spray when aimed at 180 degrees to the application
apply. surface.

5.15.1.16 Grounding. All metal raceways, the metal armor or metallic Spray Booth. An enclosure or insert within a larger room used for
sheath on cables, and all non–current-carrying metal parts of fixed or spray/coating/dipping applications. A spray booth may be fully enclosed
portable electrical equipment, regardless of voltage, shall be grounded as or have open front or face and may include separate conveyor entrance
provided in Article 250. Grounding in Class I locations shall comply and exit. The spray booth is provided with a dedicated ventilation
with 5.1.2.21 for Class I, Division 1 and 2 locations and 5.5.1.25 for exhaust but may draw supply air from the larger room or have a
Class I, Zone 0, 1, and 2 locations. dedicated air supply.

FPN: For information on grounding for static protection, see 4.5.3.4 and 4.5.3.5 of Spray Room. A purposefully enclosed room built for
NFPA 30-2003, Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code.
spray/coating/dipping applications provided with dedicated ventilation
supply and exhaust. Normally the room is configured to house the item
to be painted, providing reasonable access around the item/process.
ARTICLE 5.16 — SPRAY APPLICATION, DIPPING,
Depending on the size of the item being painted, such rooms may
AND COATING PROCESSES
actually be the entire building or the major portion thereof.
FPN: Rules that are followed by a reference in brackets contain text that has been
extracted from NFPA 33-2003, Standard for Spray Application Using Flammable and 5.16.1.3 Classification of Locations. Classification is based on
Combustible Materials, or NFPA 34-2003, Standard for Dipping and Coating dangerous quantities of flammable vapors, combustible mists, residues,
Processes Using Flammable or Combustible Liquids. Only editorial changes were
made to the extracted text to make it consistent with this Code. dusts, or deposits.

5.16.1.1 Scope. This article covers the regular or frequent application of (a) Class I, Division 1 or Class I, Zone 0 Locations. The following
flammable liquids, combustible liquids, and combustible powders by spaces shall be considered Class I, Division 1, or Class I, Zone 0, as
spray operations and the application of flammable liquids, or applicable:
combustible liquids at temperatures above their flashpoint, by dipping,
coating, or other means. (1) The interior of any open or closed container of a flammable
liquid
FPN: For further information regarding safeguards for these processes, such as fire
protection, posting of warning signs, and maintenance, see NFPA 33-2003, Standard
for Spray Application Using Flammable and Combustible Materials, and NFPA 34-
(2) The interior of any dip tank or coating tank
2003, Standard for Dipping and Coating Processes Using Flammable or Combustible
Liquids. For additional information regarding ventilation, see NFPA 91-2004, Standard FPN: For additional guidance and explanatory diagrams, see 4.3.5 of NFPA 33-2003,
for Exhaust Systems for Air Conveying of Vapors, Gases, Mists, and Noncombustible Standard for Spray Application Using Flammable or Combustible Materials, and
Particulate Solids. Sections 4.2, 4.3, and 4.4 of NFPA 34-2003, Standard for Dipping and Coating
Processes Using Flammable or Combustible Liquids.
 2, or Class II, Division 2 locations shown in Figure 5.16.1.3(b)(2) shall
(b) Class I or Class II, Division 1 Locations. The following spaces extend from the edges of the open face or open front of the booth or
shall be considered Class I, Division 1, or Class I, Zone 1, or Class II, room in accordance with the following:
Division 1 locations, as applicable:
a. If the exhaust ventilation system is interlocked with the spray
(1) The interior of spray booths and rooms except as specifically application equipment, the Division 2 or Zone 2 location shall extend 1
provided in 5.16.1.3(d). 500 mm horizontally and 900 mm vertically from the open face or open
(2) The interior of exhaust ducts. front of the booth or room, as shown in Figure 5.16.1.3(b)(2), top.
(3) Any area in the direct path of spray operations.
(4) For open dipping and coating operations, all space within a 1 b. If the exhaust ventilation system is not interlocked with the
500-mm radial distance from the vapor sources extending from these spray application equipment, the Division 2 or Zone 2 location shall
surfaces to the floor. The vapor source shall be the liquid exposed in the extend 3 000 mm horizontally and 900 mm vertically from the open face
process and the drainboard, and any dipped or coated object from which or open front of the booth or room, as shown in Figure 5.16.1.3(b)(2),
it is possible to measure vapor concentrations exceeding 25 percent of bottom.
the lower flammable limit at a distance of 300 mm, in any direction,
from the object. For the purposes of this subsection, interlocked shall mean that the
(5) Sumps, pits, or belowgrade channels within 7 600 mm spray application equipment cannot be operated unless the exhaust
horizontally of a vapor source. If the sump, pit, or channel extends ventilation system is operating and functioning properly and spray
beyond 7 600 mm from the vapor source, it shall be provided with a application is automatically stopped if the exhaust ventilation system
vapor stop or it shall be classified as Class I, Division 1 for its entire fails. [NFPA 33:6.5.2]
length.
(6) All space in all directions outside of but within 900 mm of open (3) Open-Top Spraying. For spraying operations conducted within an
containers, supply containers, spray gun cleaners, and solvent distillation open top spray booth, the space 900 mm vertically above the booth and
units containing flammable liquids. within 900 mm of other booth openings shall be considered Class I,
Division 2, Class I, Zone 2, or Class II, Division 2. [NFPA 33:6.5.3]
(c) Class I or Class II, Division 2 Locations. The following spaces
shall be considered Class I, Division 2 or Class I, Zone 2, or Class II, (4) Enclosed Booths and Rooms. For spraying operations confined to
Division 2 as applicable. an enclosed spray booth or room, the space within 900 mm in all
directions from any openings shall be considered Class I, Division 2,
(1) Open Spraying. For open spraying, all space outside of but within Class I, or Zone 2, or Class II, Division 2 as shown in Figure
6 000 mm horizontally and 3 000 mm vertically of the Class I, Division 1 5.16.1.3(b)(4). [NFPA 33:6.5.4]
or Class I, Zone 1 location as defined in 5.16.1.3(a), and not separated
from it by partitions. See Figure 5.16.1.3(b)(1). [NFPA 33:6.5.1] (5) Dip Tanks and Drain Boards — Surrounding Space. For dip
tanks and drain boards, the 900-mm space surrounding the Class I,
(2) Closed-Top, Open-Face, and Open-Front Spraying. If spray Division 1 or Class I, Zone 1 location as defined in 5.16.1.3(a)(4) and as
application operations are conducted within a closed-top, open-face, or shown in Figure 5.16.1.3(b)(5). [NFPA 34:6.4.3]
open-front booth or room, any electrical wiring or utilization equipment
located outside of the booth or room but within the boundaries
designated as Division 2 or Zone 2 in Figure 5.16.1.3(b)(2) shall be
suitable for Class I, Division 2, Class I, Zone 2, or Class II, Division 2
locations, whichever is applicable. The Class I, Division 2, Class I, Zone
 Figure 5.16.1.3(c)(2) Class I, Division 2, Class I, Zone 2,
or Class II, Division 2 Locations Adjacent to a Closed Top,
Open Face, or Open Front Spray Booth or Room.
Figure 5.16.1.3(c)(1) Electrical Area Classification [NFPA 33:Figure 6.5.2(a) and 6.5.2(b)]
for Open Spray Areas. [NFPA 33:Figure 6.5.1]
 Figure 5.16.1.3(c)(4) Class I, Division 2, Class I,
Zone 2, or Class II, Division 2 Locations Adjacent
to an Enclosed Spray Booth or Spray Room.
[NFPA 33:Figure 6.5.4]
Figure 5.16.1.3(c)(5) Electrical Area Classification for Open Processes Without
Vapor Containment or Ventilation. [NFPA 33:Figure 6.4(b)]
 (6) Dip Tanks and Drain Boards — Space Above Floor. For dip FPN: For further information regarding safeguards, see NFPA 86-2003, Standard for
Ovens and Furnaces.
tanks and drain boards, the space 900 mm above the floor and extending
6 000 mm horizontally in all directions from the Class I, Division 1 or
5.16.1.4 Wiring and Equipment in Class I Locations.
Class I, Zone 1 location.
(a) Wiring and Equipment — Vapors. All electric wiring and
Exception: This space shall not be required to be considered a
equipment within the Class I location (containing vapor only — not
hazardous (classified) location where the vapor source area is 0.46 m2
residues) defined in 5.16.1.3 shall comply with the applicable provisions
or less and where the contents of the open tank trough or container do
of Article 5.1 or Article 5.5, as applicable.
not exceed 19 L. In addition, the vapor concentration during operation
and shutdown periods shall not exceed 25 percent of the lower
(b) Wiring and Equipment — Vapors and Residues. Unless
flammable limit outside the Class I location specified in 5.16.1.3(a)(4).
specifically listed for locations containing deposits of dangerous
[NFPA 34:6.4.4]
quantities of flammable or combustible vapors, mists, residues, dusts, or
deposits (as applicable), there shall be no electrical equipment in any
(7) Open Containers. All space in all directions within 600 mm of the
spray area as herein defined whereon deposits of combustible residue
Division 1 or Zone 1 area surrounding open containers, supply
may readily accumulate, except wiring in rigid metal conduit,
containers, spray gun cleaners, and solvent distillation units containing
intermediate metal conduit, Type MI cable, or in metal boxes or fittings
flammable liquids, as well as the area extending 1 500 mm beyond the
containing no taps, splices, or terminal connections. [NFPA 33:6.4.2]
Division 1 or Zone 1 area up to a height of 460 mm above the floor or
grade level. [NFPA 33:6.5.5.1(2)]
(c) Illumination. Illumination of readily ignitible areas through panels
of glass or other transparent or translucent material shall be permitted
(d) Enclosed Coating and Dipping Operations. The space adjacent
only if it complies with the following:
to an enclosed dipping or coating process or apparatus shall be
considered unclassified. [NFPA 34:6.5.2]
(1) Fixed lighting units are used as the source of illumination.
(2) The panel effectively isolates the Class I location from the area in
Exception: The space within 900 mm in all directions from any opening
which the lighting unit is located.
in the enclosures shall be classified as Class I, Division 2 or Class I,
(3) The lighting unit is identified for its specific location.
Zone 2, as applicable. [NFPA 34:6.5.3]
(4) The panel is of a material or is protected so that breakage is
unlikely.
(e) Adjacent Locations. Adjacent locations that are cut off from the
(5) The arrangement is such that normal accumulations of hazardous
defined Class I or Class II locations by tight partitions without
residue on the surface of the panel will not be raised to a dangerous
communicating openings, and within which flammable vapors or
temperature by radiation or conduction from the source of illumination.
combustible powders are not likely to be released, shall be unclassified.
(d) Portable Equipment. Portable electric lamps or other utilization
(f) Unclassified Locations. Locations using drying, curing, or fusion
equipment shall not be used in a spray area during spray operations.
apparatus and provided with positive mechanical ventilation adequate to
prevent accumulation of flammable concentrations of vapors, and
Exception No. 1: Where portable electric lamps are required for
provided with effective interlocks to de-energize all electrical equipment
operations in spaces not readily illuminated by fixed lighting within the
(other than equipment identified for Class I locations) in case the
spraying area, they shall be of the type identified for Class I, Division 1
ventilating equipment is inoperative, shall be permitted to be unclassified
or Class 1, Zone 1 locations where readily ignitible residues may be
where the authority having jurisdiction so judges.
present. [NFPA 33:6.9]
 5.16.1.10 Special Equipment.
Exception No. 2: Where portable electric drying apparatus is used in
automobile refinishing spray booths and the following requirements are (a) Fixed Electrostatic Equipment. This section shall apply to any
met. equipment using electrostatically charged elements for the atomization,
charging, and/or precipitation of hazardous materials for coatings on
(a) The apparatus and its electrical connections are not located articles or for other similar purposes in which the charging or atomizing
within the spray enclosure during spray operations. device is attached to a mechanical support or manipulator. This shall
(b) Electrical equipment within 460 mm of the floor is identified for include robotic devices. This section shall not apply to devices that are
Class I, Division 2 or Class I, Zone 2 locations. held or manipulated by hand. Where robot or programming procedures
(c) All metallic parts of the drying apparatus are electrically bonded involve manual manipulation of the robot arm while spraying with the
and grounded. high voltage on, the provisions of 5.16.1.10(b) shall apply. The
(d) Interlocks are provided to prevent the operation of spray installation of electrostatic spraying equipment shall comply with
equipment while drying apparatus is within the spray enclosure, to allow 5.16.1.10(a)(1) through (a)(10). Spray equipment shall be listed. All
for a 3-minute purge of the enclosure before energizing the drying automatic electrostatic equipment systems shall comply with
apparatus and to shut off drying apparatus on failure of ventilation 5.16.1.4(a)(1) through (a)(9).
system.
(1) Power and Control Equipment. Transformers, high-voltage
(e) Electrostatic Equipment. Electrostatic spraying or detearing supplies, control apparatus, and all other electric portions of the
equipment shall be installed and used only as provided in 5.16.1.10. equipment shall be installed outside of the Class I location as defined in
5.16.1.3 or be of a type identified for the location.
FPN: For further information, see NFPA 33-2003, Standard for Spray Application
Using Flammable or Combustible Materials.
Exception: High-voltage grids, electrodes, electrostatic atomizing
heads, and their connections shall be permitted within the Class I
5.16.1.7 Wiring and Equipment Not Within Class I and II Locations.
location.
(a) Wiring. All fixed wiring above the Class I and II locations shall be
(2) Electrostatic Equipment. Electrodes and electrostatic atomizing
in metal raceways, rigid nonmetallic conduit, or electrical nonmetallic
heads shall be adequately supported in permanent locations and shall be
tubing, or shall be Type MI, TC, or MC cable. Cellular metal floor
effectively insulated from ground. Electrodes and electrostatic atomizing
raceways shall be permitted only for supplying ceiling outlets or
heads that are permanently attached to their bases, supports,
extensions to the area below the floor of a Class I or II location, but such
reciprocators, or robots shall be deemed to comply with this section.
raceways shall have no connections leading into or through the Class I or
II location above the floor unless suitable seals are provided.
(3) High-Voltage Leads. High-voltage leads shall be properly
insulated and protected from mechanical damage or exposure to
(b) Equipment. Equipment that may produce arcs, sparks, or particles
destructive chemicals. Any exposed element at high voltage shall be
of hot metal, such as lamps and lampholders for fixed lighting, cutouts,
effectively and permanently supported on suitable insulators and shall be
switches, receptacles, motors, or other equipment having make-and-
effectively guarded against accidental contact or grounding.
break or sliding contacts, where installed above a Class I or II location or
above a location where freshly finished goods are handled, shall be of the
(4) Support of Goods. Goods being coated using this process shall be
totally enclosed type or be constructed so as to prevent the escape of
supported on conveyors or hangers. The conveyors or hangers shall be
sparks or hot metal particles.
arranged (1) to ensure that the parts being coated are electrically
connected to ground with a resistance of 1 megohm or less and (2) to (a)(10)b.
prevent parts from swinging.
a. Conveyors or hangers shall be arranged so as to maintain a safe
(5) Automatic Controls. Electrostatic apparatus shall be equipped distance of at least twice the sparking distance between goods being
with automatic means that will rapidly de-energize the high-voltage painted and electrodes, electrostatic atomizing heads, or charged
elements under any of the following conditions: conductors. Warnings defining this safe distance shall be posted.
b. The equipment shall provide an automatic means of rapidly de-
a. Stoppage of ventilating fans or failure of ventilating equipment energizing the high-voltage elements in the event the distance between
from any cause the goods being painted and the electrodes or electrostatic atomizing
b. Stoppage of the conveyor carrying goods through the high- heads falls below that specified in (a). [NFPA 33:Chapter 11]
voltage field unless stoppage is required by the spray process
c. Occurrence of excessive current leakage at any point in the high- (b) Electrostatic Hand-Spraying Equipment. This section shall
voltage system apply to any equipment using electrostatically charged elements for the
d. De-energizing the primary voltage input to the power supply atomization, charging, and/or precipitation of materials for coatings on
articles, or for other similar purposes in which the atomizing device is
(6) Grounding. All electrically conductive objects in the spray area, hand-held or manipulated during the spraying operation. Electrostatic
except those objects required by the process to be at high voltage, shall hand-spraying equipment and devices used in connection with paint-
be adequately grounded. This requirement shall apply to paint containers, spraying operations shall be of listed types and shall comply with
wash cans, guards, hose connectors, brackets, and any other electrically 5.16.1.10(b)(1) through (b)(5).
conductive objects or devices in the area.
(1) General. The high-voltage circuits shall be designed so as not to
(7) Isolation. Safeguards such as adequate booths, fencing, railings, produce a spark of sufficient intensity to ignite the most readily ignitible
interlocks, or other means shall be placed about the equipment or of those vapor–air mixtures likely to be encountered, or result in
incorporated therein so that they, either by their location, character, or appreciable shock hazard upon coming in contact with a grounded object
both, ensure that a safe separation of the process is maintained. under all normal operating conditions. The electrostatically charged
exposed elements of the handgun shall be capable of being energized
(8) Signs. Signs shall be conspicuously posted to convey the only by an actuator that also controls the coating material supply.
following:
(2) Power Equipment. Transformers, power packs, control apparatus,
a. Designate the process zone as dangerous with regard to fire and and all other electric portions of the equipment shall be located outside of
accident the Class I location or be identified for the location.
b. Identify the grounding requirements for all electrically
conductive objects in the spray area Exception: The handgun itself and its connections to the power supply
c. Restrict access to licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed shall be permitted within the Class I location.
electrical practitioner under the supervision of a licensed electrical
practitioner only (3) Handle. The handle of the spraying gun shall be electrically
connected to ground by a metallic connection and be constructed so that
(9) Insulators. All insulators shall be kept clean and dry. the operator in normal operating position is in intimate electrical contact
with the grounded handle to prevent buildup of a static charge on the
(10) Other Than Nonincendive Equipment. Spray equipment that operator’s body. Signs indicating the necessity for grounding other
cannot be classified as nonincendive shall comply with (a)(10)a and persons entering the spray area shall be conspicuously posted.
 (4) Electrostatic Equipment. All electrically conductive objects in the (3) Electrostatic Hand-Spraying Equipment. The provisions of
spraying area shall be adequately grounded. This requirement shall apply 5.16.1.10(b) and 5.16.1.10(c)(1) shall apply to electrostatic hand-
to paint containers, wash cans, and any other electrical conductive spraying equipment.
objects or devices in the area. The equipment shall carry a prominent,
permanently installed warning regarding the necessity for this grounding (4) Electrostatic Fluidized Beds. Electrostatic fluidized beds and
feature. associated equipment shall be of identified types. The high-voltage
circuits shall be designed so that any discharge produced when the
(5) Support of Objects. Objects being painted shall be maintained in charging electrodes of the bed are approached or contacted by a
metallic contact with the conveyor or other grounded support. Hooks grounded object shall not be of sufficient intensity to ignite any powder–
shall be regularly cleaned to ensure adequate grounding of 1 megohm or air mixture likely to be encountered or to result in an appreciable shock
less. Areas of contact shall be sharp points or knife edges where possible. hazard.
Points of support of the object shall be concealed from random spray
where feasible; and, where the objects being sprayed are supported from a. Transformers, power packs, control apparatus, and all other
a conveyor, the point of attachment to the conveyor shall be located so as electric portions of the equipment shall be located outside the powder-
to not collect spray material during normal operation. [NFPA 33:Chapter coating area or shall otherwise comply with the requirements of
12] 5.16.1.10(c)(1).

(c) Powder Coating. This section shall apply to processes in which Exception: The charging electrodes and their connections to the power
combustible dry powders are applied. The hazards associated with supply shall be permitted within the powder-coating area.
combustible dusts are present in such a process to a degree, depending on
the chemical composition of the material, particle size, shape, and b. All electrically conductive objects within the powder-coating
distribution. area shall be adequately grounded. The powder-coating equipment shall
carry a prominent, permanently installed warning regarding the necessity
(1) Electric Equipment and Sources of Ignition. Electric equipment for grounding these objects.
and other sources of ignition shall comply with the requirements of c. Objects being coated shall be maintained in electrical contact
Article 5.2. Portable electric lamps and other utilization equipment shall (less than 1 megohm) with the conveyor or other support in order to
not be used within a Class II location during operation of the finishing ensure proper grounding. Hangers shall be regularly cleaned to ensure
processes. Where such lamps or utilization equipment are used during effective electrical contact. Areas of electrical contact shall be sharp
cleaning or repairing operations, they shall be of a type identified for points or knife edges where possible.
Class II, Division 1 locations, and all exposed metal parts shall be d. The electric equipment and compressed air supplies shall be
effectively grounded. interlocked with a ventilation system so that the equipment cannot be
operated unless the ventilating fans are in operation. [NFPA 33:Chapter
Exception: Where portable electric lamps are required for operations in 15]
spaces not readily illuminated by fixed lighting within the spraying area,
they shall be of the type listed for Class II, Division 1 locations where 5.16.1.16 Grounding. All metal raceways, the metal armors or metallic
readily ignitible residues may be present. sheath on cables, and all non–current-carrying metal parts of fixed or
portable electrical equipment, regardless of voltage, shall be grounded as
(2) Fixed Electrostatic Spraying Equipment. The provisions of provided in Article 2.50. Grounding shall comply with 5.1.2.21, 5.2.2.21,
5.16.1.10(a) and 5.16.1.10(c)(1) shall apply to fixed electrostatic or 5.5.1.25, as applicable.
spraying equipment.
 designated to be used for the administration of any flammable or
ARTICLE 5.17 — HEALTH CARE FACILITIES nonflammable inhalation anesthetic agent in the course of examination or
treatment, including the use of such agents for relative analgesia.
FPN: Rules that are followed by a reference in brackets contain text that has been
extracted from NFPA 99-2002, Standard for Health Care Facilities. Only editorial
changes were made to the extracted text to make it consistent with this Code. Critical Branch. A subsystem of the emergency system consisting of
feeders and branch circuits supplying energy to task illumination, special
5.17.1 General power circuits, and selected receptacles serving areas and functions
related to patient care, and which are connected to alternate power
5.17.1.1 Scope. The provisions of this article shall apply to electrical sources by one or more transfer switches during interruption of the
construction and installation criteria in health care facilities that provide normal power source.
services to human beings.
Electrical Life-Support Equipment. Electrically powered equipment
The requirements in Parts 5.17.2 and 5.17.3 not only apply to single- whose continuous operation is necessary to maintain a patient’s life.
function buildings but are also intended to be individually applied to
their respective forms of occupancy within a multifunction building (e.g., Emergency System. A system of circuits and equipment intended to
a doctor’s examining room located within a limited care facility would supply alternate power to a limited number of prescribed functions vital
be required to meet the provisions of 5.17.2.1). to the protection of life and safety.

FPN: For information concerning performance, maintenance, and testing criteria, refer Equipment System. A system of circuits and equipment arranged for
to the appropriate health care facilities documents. delayed, automatic, or manual connection to the alternate power source
and that serves primarily 3-phase power equipment.
5.17.1.2 Definitions.
Essential Electrical System. A system comprised of alternate sources
Alternate Power Source. One or more generator sets, or battery of power and all connected distribution systems and ancillary equipment,
systems where permitted, intended to provide power during the designed to ensure continuity of electrical power to designated areas and
interruption of the normal electrical services or the public utility functions of a health care facility during disruption of normal power
electrical service intended to provide power during interruption of sources, and also designed to minimize disruption within the internal
service normally provided by the generating facilities on the premises. wiring system.
Ambulatory Health Care Facility. A building or part thereof used to Exposed Conductive Surfaces. Those surfaces that are capable of
provide services or treatment to four or more patients at the same time carrying electric current and that are unprotected, unenclosed, or
and meeting either (1) or (2). unguarded, permitting personal contact. Paint, anodizing, and similar
coatings are not considered suitable insulation, unless they are listed for
(1) Those facilities that provide, on an outpatient basis, treatment for such use.
patients that would render them incapable of taking action for self-
preservation under emergency conditions without assistance from others, Fault Hazard Current. See Hazard Current.
such as hemodialysis units or freestanding emergency medical units.
(2) Those facilities that provide, on an outpatient basis, surgical Flammable Anesthetics. Gases or vapors, such as fluroxene,
treatment requiring general anesthesia. cyclopropane, divinyl ether, ethyl chloride, ethyl ether, and ethylene,
which may form flammable or explosive mixtures with air, oxygen, or
Anesthetizing Location. Any area of a facility that has been reducing gases such as nitrous oxide.
 of feeders and branch circuits, meeting the requirements of Article 7.0
Flammable Anesthetizing Location. Any area of the facility that has and intended to provide adequate power needs to ensure safety to
been designated to be used for the administration of any flammable patients and personnel, and which are automatically connected to
inhalation anesthetic agents in the normal course of examination or alternate power sources during interruption of the normal power source.
treatment.
Limited Care Facility. A building or part thereof used on a 24-hour
Hazard Current. For a given set of connections in an isolated power basis for the housing of four or more persons who are incapable of self-
system, the total current that would flow through a low impedance if it preservation because of age, physical limitation due to accident or
were connected between either isolated conductor and ground. illness, or mental limitations, such as mental retardation/developmental
disability, mental illness, or chemical dependency.
Fault Hazard Current. The hazard current of a given isolated system
with all devices connected except the line isolation monitor. Line Isolation Monitor. A test instrument designed to continually
check the balanced and unbalanced impedance from each line of an
Monitor Hazard Current. The hazard current of the line isolation isolated circuit to ground and equipped with a built-in test circuit to
monitor alone. exercise the alarm without adding to the leakage current hazard.

Total Hazard Current. The hazard current of a given isolated system Monitor Hazard Current. See Hazard Current.
with all devices, including the line isolation monitor, connected.
Nurses’ Stations. Areas intended to provide a center of nursing
Health Care Facilities. Buildings or portions of buildings in which activity for a group of nurses serving bed patients, where the patient calls
medical, dental, psychiatric, nursing, obstetrical, or surgical care are are received, nurses are dispatched, nurses’ notes written, inpatient charts
provided. Health care facilities include, but are not limited to, hospitals, prepared, and medications prepared for distribution to patients. Where
nursing homes, limited care facilities, clinics, medical and dental offices, such activities are carried on in more than one location within a nursing
and ambulatory care centers, whether permanent or movable. unit, all such separate areas are considered a part of the nurses’ station.

Hospital. A building or part thereof used for the medical, psychiatric, Nursing Home. A building or part thereof used for the lodging,
obstetrical, or surgical care, on a 24-hour basis, of four or more boarding, and nursing care, on a 24-hour basis, of four or more persons
inpatients. Hospital, wherever used in this Code, shall include general who, because of mental or physical incapacity, may be unable to provide
hospitals, mental hospitals, tuberculosis hospitals, children’s hospitals, for their own needs and safety without the assistance of another person.
and any such facilities providing inpatient care. Nursing home, wherever used in this Code, shall include nursing and
convalescent homes, skilled nursing facilities, intermediate care
Isolated Power System. A system comprising an isolating transformer facilities, and infirmaries of homes for the aged.
or its equivalent, a line isolation monitor, and its ungrounded circuit
conductors. Patient Bed Location. The location of an inpatient sleeping bed; or
the bed or procedure table used in a critical patient care area.
Isolation Transformer. A transformer of the multiple-winding type,
with the primary and secondary windings physically separated, which Patient Care Area. Any portion of a health care facility wherein
inductively couples its secondary winding to the grounded feeder patients are intended to be examined or treated. Areas of a health care
systems that energize its primary winding. facility in which patient care is administered are classified as general
care areas or critical care areas, either of which may be classified as a
Life Safety Branch. A subsystem of the emergency system consisting wet location. The governing body of the facility designates these areas in
accordance with the type of patient care anticipated and with the
following definitions of the area classification. Reference Grounding Point. The ground bus of the panelboard or
isolated power system panel supplying the patient care area.
FPN: Business offices, corridors, lounges, day rooms, dining rooms, or similar areas
typically are not classified as patient care areas.
Relative Analgesia. A state of sedation and partial block of pain
perception produced in a patient by the inhalation of concentrations of
General Care Areas. Patient bedrooms, examining rooms, treatment
nitrous oxide insufficient to produce loss of consciousness (conscious
rooms, clinics, and similar areas in which it is intended that the patient
sedation).
will come in contact with ordinary appliances such as a nurse call
system, electrical beds, examining lamps, telephone, and entertainment
Selected Receptacles. A minimum number of electric receptacles to
devices. In such areas, it may also be intended that patients be connected
accommodate appliances ordinarily required for local tasks or likely to
to electromedical devices (such as heating pads, electrocardiographs,
be used in patient care emergencies.
drainage pumps, monitors, otoscopes, ophthalmoscopes, intravenous
lines, etc.).
Task Illumination. Provision for the minimum lighting required to
carry out necessary tasks in the described areas, including safe access to
Critical Care Areas. Those special care units, intensive care units,
supplies and equipment, and access to exits.
coronary care units, angiography laboratories, cardiac catheterization
laboratories, delivery rooms, operating rooms, and similar areas in which
Therapeutic High Frequency Diathermy Equipment. Therapeutic
patients are intended to be subjected to invasive procedures and
high-frequency diathermy equipment is therapeutic induction and
connected to line-operated, electromedical devices.
dielectric heating equipment.
Wet Locations. Those patient care areas that are normally subject to
Total Hazard Current. See Hazard Current.
wet conditions while patients are present. These include standing fluids
on the floor or drenching of the work area, either of which condition is
X-Ray Installations, Long-Time Rating. A rating based on an
intimate to the patient or staff. Routine housekeeping procedures and
operating interval of 5 minutes or longer.
incidental spillage of liquids do not define a wet location.
X-Ray Installations, Mobile. X-ray equipment mounted on a
Patient Equipment Grounding Point. A jack or terminal bus that
permanent base with wheels, casters, or a combination of both to
serves as the collection point for redundant grounding of electric
facilitate moving the equipment while completely assembled.
appliances serving a patient vicinity or for grounding other items in order
to eliminate electromagnetic interference problems.
X-Ray Installations, Momentary Rating. A rating based on an
operating interval that does not exceed 5 seconds.
Patient Vicinity. In an area in which patients are normally cared for,
the patient vicinity is the space with surfaces likely to be contacted by
X-Ray Installations, Portable. X-ray equipment designed to be hand
the patient or an attendant who can touch the patient. Typically in a
carried.
patient room, this encloses a space within the room not less than 1 800
mm beyond the perimeter of the bed in its nominal location, and
X-Ray Installations, Transportable. X-ray equipment to be installed
extending vertically not less than 2 300 mm above the floor.
in a vehicle or that may be readily disassembled for transport in a
vehicle.
Psychiatric Hospital. A building used exclusively for the psychiatric
care, on a 24-hour basis, of four or more inpatients.
 5.17.2 Wiring and Protection 5.17.2.4 Grounding of Receptacles and Fixed Electric Equipment in
Patient Care Areas. Wiring in patient care areas shall comply with
5.17.2.1 Applicability. 5.17.2.4(a) and 5.17.2.4(b).

(a) Applicability. Part II shall apply to patient care areas of all health (a) Wiring Methods. All branch circuits serving patient care areas
care facilities. shall be provided with a ground path for fault current by installation in a
metal raceway system, or a cable having a metallic armor or sheath
(b) Not Covered. Part II shall not apply to the following: assembly. The metal raceway system, or metallic cable armor, or sheath
assembly shall itself qualify as an equipment grounding return path in
(1) Business offices, corridors, waiting rooms, and the like in accordance with 2.50.6.9.
clinics, medical and dental offices, and outpatient facilities
(2) Areas of nursing homes and limited care facilities wired in (b) Insulated Equipment Grounding Conductor. The grounding
accordance with Chapters 1 through 4 of this Code where these areas are terminals of all receptacles and all non–current-carrying conductive
used exclusively as patient sleeping rooms surfaces of fixed electric equipment likely to become energized that are
subject to personal contact, operating at over 100 volts, shall be
FPN: See NFPA 101®-2003, Life Safety Code®. grounded by an insulated copper conductor. The equipment grounding
conductor shall be sized in accordance with Table 2.50.6.13 and installed
5.17.2..2 General Installation — Construction Criteria. The purpose in metal raceways or as a part of listed cables having a metallic armor or
of this article is to specify the installation criteria and wiring methods sheath assembly with the branch-circuit conductors supplying these
that minimize electrical hazards by the maintenance of adequately low receptacles or fixed equipment.
potential differences only between exposed conductive surfaces that are
likely to become energized and could be contacted by a patient. Exception No. 1: Metal faceplates shall be permitted to be grounded by
means of a metal mounting screw(s) securing the faceplate to a grounded
FPN: In a health care facility, it is difficult to prevent the occurrence of a conductive or
capacitive path from the patient’s body to some grounded object, because that path outlet box or grounded wiring device.
may be established accidentally or through instrumentation directly connected to the
patient. Other electrically conductive surfaces that may make an additional contact Exception No. 2: Luminaires (light fixtures) more than 2 300 mm above
with the patient, or instruments that may be connected to the patient, then become
possible sources of electric currents that can traverse the patient’s body. The hazard the floor and switches located outside of the patient vicinity shall not be
is increased as more apparatus is associated with the patient, and, therefore, more required to be grounded by an insulated equipment grounding
intensive precautions are needed. Control of electric shock hazard requires the
limitation of electric current that might flow in an electric circuit involving the patient’s
conductor.
body by raising the resistance of the conductive circuit that includes the patient, or by
insulating exposed surfaces that might become energized, in addition to reducing the 5.17.2.5 Panelboard Bonding. The equipment grounding terminal buses
potential difference that can appear between exposed conductive surfaces in the
patient vicinity, or by combinations of these methods. A special problem is presented of the normal and essential branch-circuit panelboards serving the same
by the patient with an externalized direct conductive path to the heart muscle. The individual patient vicinity shall be bonded together with an insulated
patient may be electrocuted at current levels so low that additional protection in the
design of appliances, insulation of the catheter, and control of medical practice is
continuous copper conductor not smaller than 5.5 mm2 (2.6 mm dia.).
required. Where two or more panelboards serving the same individual patient
vicinity are served from separate transfer switches on the emergency
5.17.2.3 Wiring Methods. Except as modified in this article, wiring system, the equipment grounding terminal buses of those panelboards
methods shall comply with the applicable requirements of Chapters 1 shall be bonded together with an insulated continuous copper conductor
through 4 of this Code. not smaller than 5.5 mm2 (2.6 mm dia.). This conductor shall be
permitted to be broken in order to terminate on the equipment grounding
terminal bus in each panelboard.
 Operating time of the disconnecting devices shall be considered in
5.17.2.7 Receptacles with Insulated Grounding Terminals. selecting the time spread between these two bands to achieve 100 percent
Receptacles with insulated grounding terminals, as permitted in selectivity.
2.50.7.17(d), shall be identified; such identification shall be visible after
installation. FPN: See 2.30.7.6, fine print note, for transfer of alternate source where ground-fault
protection is applied.

FPN: Caution is important in specifying such a system with receptacles having

insulated grounding terminals, since the grounding impedance is controlled only by (d) Testing. When equipment ground-fault protection is first installed,
the equipment grounding conductors and does not benefit functionally from any each level shall be performance tested to ensure compliance with
parallel grounding paths. This type of installation is typically used where a reduction of
electrical noise (electromagnetic interference) is necessary and parallel grounding 5.17.2.8(c).
paths are to be avoided.
5.17.2.9 General Care Areas.
5.17.2.8 Ground-Fault Protection.
(a) Patient Bed Location. Each patient bed location shall be supplied
(a) Applicability. The requirements of 5.17.2.8 shall apply to hospitals by at least two branch circuits, one from the emergency system and one
and other buildings (including multiple occupancy buildings) with from the normal system. All branch circuits from the normal system shall
critical care areas or utilizing electrical life support equipment, and originate in the same panelboard.
buildings that provide the required essential utilities or services for the
operation of critical care areas or electrical life support equipment. Exception No. 1: Branch circuits serving only special-purpose outlets or
receptacles, such as portable X-ray outlets, shall not be required to be
(b) Feeders. Where ground-fault protection is provided for operation served from the same distribution panel or panels.
of the service disconnecting means or feeder disconnecting means as
specified by 2.30.7.6 or 2.15.1.10, an additional step of ground-fault Exception No. 2: Requirements of 5.17.2.9(a) shall not apply to patient
protection shall be provided in all next level feeder disconnecting means bed locations in clinics, medical and dental offices, and outpatient
downstream toward the load. Such protection shall consist of overcurrent facilities; psychiatric, substance abuse, and rehabilitation hospitals;
devices and current transformers or other equivalent protective sleeping rooms of nursing homes and limited care facilities meeting the
equipment that shall cause the feeder disconnecting means to open. requirements of 5.17.2.1(b)(2).
The additional levels of ground-fault protection shall not be installed as
follows: Exception No. 3: A general care patient bed location served from two
separate transfer switches on the emergency system shall not be required
(1) On the load side of an essential electrical system transfer switch to have circuits from the normal system.
(2) Between the on-site generating unit(s) described in 5.17.3.11(b)
and the essential electrical system transfer switch(es) (b) Patient Bed Location Receptacles. Each patient bed location shall
(3) On electrical systems that are not solidly grounded wye systems be provided with a minimum of four receptacles. They shall be permitted
with greater than 150 volts to ground but not exceeding 600 volts phase- to be of the single or duplex types or a combination of both. All
to-phase receptacles, whether four or more, shall be listed “hospital grade” and so
identified. Each receptacle shall be grounded by means of an insulated
(c) Selectivity. Ground-fault protection for operation of the service and copper conductor sized in accordance with Table 2.50.6.13.
feeder disconnecting means shall be fully selective such that the feeder
device, but not the service device, shall open on ground faults on the load Exception No. 1: Requirements of 5.17.2.9(b) shall not apply to
side of the feeder device. A six-cycle minimum separation between the psychiatric, substance abuse, and rehabilitation hospitals meeting the
service and feeder ground-fault tripping bands shall be provided.
requirements of 5.17.2.1(b)(2). b. An emergency system branch circuit supplied by a different
transfer switch than the other receptacles at the same location
Exception No. 2: Psychiatric security rooms shall not be required to
have receptacle outlets installed in the room. (2) Receptacle Requirements. The receptacles required in
5.17.2.10(b)(1) shall be permitted to be of the single or duplex types or a
FPN: It is not intended that there be a total, immediate replacement of existing non– combination of both. All receptacles, whether six or more, shall be listed
hospital grade receptacles. It is intended, however, that non–hospital grade
receptacles be replaced with hospital grade receptacles upon modification of use, “hospital grade” and so identified. Each receptacle shall be grounded to
renovation, or as existing receptacles need replacement. the reference grounding point by means of an insulated copper
equipment grounding conductor.
(c) Pediatric Locations. Receptacles located within the rooms,
bathrooms, playrooms, activity rooms, and patient care areas of pediatric (c) Patient Vicinity Grounding and Bonding (Optional). A patient
wards shall be listed tamper resistant or shall employ a listed tamper vicinity shall be permitted to have a patient equipment grounding point.
resistant cover. The patient equipment grounding point, where supplied, shall be
permitted to contain one or more listed grounding and bonding jacks. An
5.17.2.10 Critical Care Areas. equipment bonding jumper not smaller than 5.5 mm2 (2.6 mm dia.) shall
be used to connect the grounding terminal of all grounding-type
(a) Patient Bed Location Branch Circuits. Each patient bed location receptacles to the patient equipment grounding point. The bonding
shall be supplied by at least two branch circuits, one or more from the conductor shall be permitted to be arranged centrically or looped as
emergency system and one or more circuits from the normal system. At convenient.
least one branch circuit from the emergency system shall supply an
outlet(s) only at that bed location. All branch circuits from the normal FPN: Where there is no patient equipment grounding point, it is important that the
distance between the reference grounding point and the patient vicinity be as short as
system shall be from a single panelboard. Emergency system receptacles possible to minimize any potential differences.
shall be identified and shall also indicate the panelboard and circuit
number supplying them. (d) Panelboard Grounding. Where a grounded electrical distribution
system is used and metal feeder raceway or Type MC or MI cable is
Exception No. 1: Branch circuits serving only special-purpose installed, grounding of a panelboard or switchboard shall be ensured by
receptacles or equipment in critical care areas shall be permitted to be one of the following means at each termination or junction point of the
served by other panelboards. raceway or Type MC or MI cable:
Exception No. 2: Critical care locations served from two separate (1) A grounding bushing and a continuous copper bonding jumper,
transfer switches on the emergency system shall not be required to have sized in accordance with 2.50.6.13, with the bonding jumper connected
circuits from the normal system. to the junction enclosure or the ground bus of the panel
(2) Connection of feeder raceways or Type MC or MI cable to
(b) Patient Bed Location Receptacles. threaded hubs or bosses on terminating enclosures
(3) Other approved devices such as bonding-type locknuts or
(1) Minimum Number and Supply. Each patient bed location shall be bushings
provided with a minimum of six receptacles, at least one of which shall
be connected to either of the following: (e) Additional Protective Techniques in Critical Care Areas
(Optional). Isolated power systems shall be permitted to be used for
a. The normal system branch circuit required in 5.17.2.10(a) critical care areas, and, if used, the isolated power system equipment
shall be listed as isolated power equipment. The isolated power system
shall be designed and installed in accordance with 5.17.7.1. (b) Isolated Power Systems. Where an isolated power system is
utilized, the isolated power equipment shall be listed as isolated power
Exception: The audible and visual indicators of the line isolation equipment, and the isolated power system shall be designed and installed
monitor shall be permitted to be located at the nursing station for the in accordance with 5.17.7.1.
area being served.
FPN: For requirements for installation of therapeutic pools and tubs, see Part 6.80.6.
(f) Isolated Power System Grounding. Where an isolated
ungrounded power source is used and limits the first-fault current to a 5.17.2.12 Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection for
low magnitude, the grounding conductor associated with the secondary Personnel. Ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection for personnel shall
circuit shall be permitted to be run outside of the enclosure of the power not be required for receptacles installed in those critical care areas where
conductors in the same circuit. the toilet and basin are installed within the patient room.

FPN: Although it is permitted to run the grounding conductor outside of the conduit, it 5.17.3 Essential Electrical System
is safer to run it with the power conductors to provide better protection in case of a
second ground fault.
5.17.3.1 Scope. The essential electrical system for these facilities shall
comprise a system capable of supplying a limited amount of lighting and
(g) Special-Purpose Receptacle Grounding. The equipment
power service, which is considered essential for life safety and orderly
grounding conductor for special-purpose receptacles, such as the
cessation of procedures during the time normal electrical service is
operation of mobile X-ray equipment, shall be extended to the reference
interrupted for any reason. This includes clinics, medical and dental
grounding points of branch circuits for all locations likely to be served
offices, outpatient facilities, nursing homes, limited care facilities,
from such receptacles. Where such a circuit is served from an isolated
hospitals, and other health care facilities serving patients.
ungrounded system, the grounding conductor shall not be required to be
run with the power conductors; however, the equipment grounding FPN: For information on the need for an essential electrical system, see NFPA 99-
terminal of the special-purpose receptacle shall be connected to the 2002, Standard for Health Care Facilities.
reference grounding point.
5.17.3.2 Application of Other Articles. The essential electrical system
5.17.2.11 Wet Locations. shall meet the requirements of Article 7.0, except as amended by Article
5.17.
(a) Receptacles and Fixed Equipment. All receptacles and fixed
equipment within the area of the wet location shall have ground-fault 5.17.3.6 Essential Electrical Systems for Hospitals.
circuit-interrupter protection for personnel if interruption of power under
fault conditions can be tolerated, or be served by an isolated power (a) Applicability. The requirements of Part 5.17.3, 5.17.3.6 through
system if such interruption cannot be tolerated. 5.17.3.11, shall apply to hospitals where an essential electrical system is
required.
Exception: Branch circuits supplying only listed, fixed, therapeutic and
diagnostic equipment shall be permitted to be supplied from a normal FPN No. 1: For performance, maintenance, and testing requirements of essential
electrical systems in hospitals, see NFPA 99-2002, Standard for Health Care
grounded service, single- or 3-phase system, provided that Facilities. For installation of centrifugal fire pumps, see NFPA 20-2002, Standard for
the Installation of Stationary Fire Pumps for Fire Protection.
(a) Wiring for grounded and isolated circuits does not occupy the FPN No. 2: For additional information, see NFPA 99-2002, Standard for Health Care
same raceway, and Facilities.
(b) All conductive surfaces of the equipment are grounded.
 (b) General.

(1) Separate Systems. Essential electrical systems for hospitals shall

be comprised of two separate systems capable of supplying a limited
amount of lighting and power service, which is considered essential for
life safety and effective hospital operation during the time the normal
electrical service is interrupted for any reason. These two systems shall
be the emergency system and the equipment system.

(2) Emergency Systems. The emergency system shall be limited to

circuits essential to life safety and critical patient care. These are
designated the life safety branch and the critical branch.

(3) Equipment System. The equipment system shall supply major

electrical equipment necessary for patient care and basic hospital
operation.

(4) Transfer Switches. The number of transfer switches to be used FPN Figure 5.17.3.6, No. 1 Hospital — Minimum
shall be based on reliability, design, and load considerations. Each Requirement for Transfer Switch Arrangement.
branch of the emergency system and each equipment system shall have
one or more transfer switches. One transfer switch shall be permitted to
serve one or more branches or systems in a facility with a maximum
demand on the essential electrical system of 150 kVA.

FPN No. 1: See NFPA 99-2002, Standard for Health Care Facilities: 4.4.3.2, Transfer
Switch Operation Type I; 4.4.2.1.4, Automatic Transfer Switch Features; and
4.4.2.1.6, Nonautomatic Transfer Device Features.

FPN No. 2: See FPN Figure 5.17.3.6, No. 1.

FPN No. 3: See FPN Figure 5.17.3.6, No. 2.

(5) Other Loads. Loads served by the generating equipment not

specifically named in Article 5.17 shall be served by their own transfer
switches such that the following conditions apply:

a. These loads shall not be transferred if the transfer will overload

the generating equipment.
b. These loads shall be automatically shed upon generating
equipment overloading.
FPN Figure 5.17.3.6, No. 2 Hospital — Minimum Requirement
(150 kVA or less) for Transfer Switch Arrangement.
 (6) Contiguous Facilities. Hospital power sources and alternate b. Where encased in not less than 50 mm of concrete, Schedule 40
power sources shall be permitted to serve the essential electrical systems rigid nonmetallic conduit, flexible nonmetallic or jacketed metallic
of contiguous or same site facilities. [NFPA 99:13.3.4.3] raceways, or jacketed metallic cable assemblies listed for installation in
concrete. Nonmetallic raceways shall not be used for branch circuits that
(c) Wiring Requirements. supply patient care areas.

(1) Separation from Other Circuits. The life safety branch and critical c. Listed flexible metal raceways and listed metal sheathed cable
branch of the emergency system shall be kept entirely independent of all assemblies in any of the following:
other wiring and equipment and shall not enter the same raceways,
boxes, or cabinets with each other or other wiring. 1. Where used in listed prefabricated medical headwalls
Wiring of the life safety branch and the critical branch shall be 2. In listed office furnishings
permitted to occupy the same raceways, boxes, or cabinets of other 3. Where fished into existing walls or ceilings, not otherwise
circuits not part of the branch where such wiring complies with one of accessible and not subject to physical damage
the following: 4. Where necessary for flexible connection to equipment

a. Is in transfer equipment enclosures (4) Flexible power cords of appliances or other utilization equipment
b. Is in exit or emergency luminaires (lighting fixtures) supplied connected to the emergency system.
from two sources
c. Is in a common junction box attached to exit or emergency (5) Secondary circuits of Class 2 or Class 3 communication or
luminaires (lighting fixtures) supplied from two sources signaling systems
d. Is for two or more emergency circuits supplied from the same
branch FPN: See 5.17.2.4 for additional grounding requirements in patient care areas.

The wiring of the equipment system shall be permitted to occupy the (d) Capacity of Systems. The essential electrical system shall have
same raceways, boxes, or cabinets of other circuits that are not part of the adequate capacity to meet the demand for the operation of all functions
emergency system. and equipment to be served by each system and branch.
Feeders shall be sized in accordance with Articles 2.15 and 2.20. The
(2) Isolated Power Systems. Where isolated power systems are generator set(s) shall have sufficient capacity and proper rating to meet
installed in any of the areas in 5.17.3.9(a)(1) and (a)(2), each system the demand produced by the load of the essential electrical system(s) at
shall be supplied by an individual circuit serving no other load. any given time.
Demand calculations for sizing of the generator set(s) shall be based on
(3) Mechanical Protection of the Emergency System. The wiring of any of the following:
the emergency system in hospitals shall be mechanically protected. (1) Prudent demand factors and historical data
Where installed as branch circuits in patient care areas, the installation (2) Connected load
shall comply with the requirements of 5.17.2.4(a) and 5.17.2.4(b). The (3) Feeder calculation procedures described in Article 2.20
following wiring methods shall be permitted: (4) Any combination of the above

a. Nonflexible metal raceways, Type MI cable, or Schedule 80 The sizing requirements in 7.0.1.5 and 7.1.1.6 shall not apply to
rigid nonmetallic conduit. Nonmetallic raceways shall not be used for hospital generator set(s).
branch circuits that supply patient care areas.
 (e) Receptacle Identification. The cover plates for the electrical (2) Alarms required for systems used for the piping of
receptacles or the electrical receptacles themselves supplied from the nonflammable medical gases
emergency system shall have a distinctive color or marking so as to be
readily identifiable. [NFPA 99:4.4.2.2.4.2(b)] FPN: See NFPA 99-2002, Standard for Health Care Facilities, 4.4.2.2.2.2(3).

5.17.3.7 Emergency System. Those functions of patient care depending (d) Communications Systems. Hospital communications systems,
on lighting or appliances that are connected to the emergency system where used for issuing instructions during emergency conditions.
shall be divided into two mandatory branches: the life safety branch and
the critical branch, described in 5.17.3.8 and 5.17.3.9. (e) Generator Set Location. Task illumination battery charger for
The branches of the emergency system shall be installed and connected emergency battery-powered lighting unit(s) and selected receptacles at
to the alternate power source so that all functions specified herein for the the generator set location.
emergency system shall be automatically restored to operation within 10
seconds after interruption of the normal source. [NFPA 99:4.4.2.2.2.1, (f) Elevators. Elevator cab lighting, control, communications, and
4.4.3.1] signal systems.

5.17.3.8 Life Safety Branch. No function other than those listed in (g) Automatic Doors. Automatically operated doors used for building
5.17.3.8(a) through 5.17.3.8(g) shall be connected to the life safety egress. [NFPA 99:4.4.2.2.2.2]
branch. The life safety branch of the emergency system shall supply
power for the following lighting, receptacles, and equipment. 5.17.3.9 Critical Branch.

(a) Illumination of Means of Egress. Illumination of means of egress, (a) Task Illumination and Selected Receptacles. The critical branch
such as lighting required for corridors, passageways, stairways, and of the emergency system shall supply power for task illumination, fixed
landings at exit doors, and all necessary ways of approach to exits. equipment, selected receptacles, and special power circuits serving the
Switching arrangements to transfer patient corridor lighting in hospitals following areas and functions related to patient care:
from general illumination circuits to night illumination circuits shall be
permitted, provided only one of two circuits can be selected and both (1) Critical care areas that utilize anesthetizing gases — task
circuits cannot be extinguished at the same time. illumination, selected receptacles, and fixed equipment
(2) The isolated power systems in special environments
FPN: See NFPA 101-2003, Life Safety Code, Sections 7.8 and 7.9. (3) Patient care areas — task illumination and selected receptacles in
the following:
(b) Exit Signs. Exit signs and exit directional signs.
a. Infant nurseries
FPN: See NFPA 101-2003, Life Safety Code, Section 7.10. b. Medication preparation areas
c. Pharmacy dispensing areas
(c) Alarm and Alerting Systems. Alarm and alerting systems d. Selected acute nursing areas
including the following: e. Psychiatric bed areas (omit receptacles)
f. Ward treatment rooms
(1) Fire alarms g. Nurses’ stations (unless adequately lighted by corridor
luminaires)
FPN: See NFPA 101-2003, Life Safety Code, Section 9.6 and 18.3.4.
 (4) Additional specialized patient care task illumination and recepta equipment system shall be permitted.
cles, where needed
(5) Nurse call systems (a) Equipment for Delayed Automatic Connection. The following
(6) Blood, bone, and tissue banks equipment shall be arranged for delayed automatic connection to the
(7) Telephone equipment rooms and closets alternate power source:
(8) Task illumination, selected receptacles, and selected power
circuits for the following: (1) Central suction systems serving medical and surgical functions,
including controls. Such suction systems shall be permitted on the
a. General care beds (at least one duplex receptacle per patient critical branch.
bedroom) (2) Sump pumps and other equipment required to operate for the
b. Angiographic labs safety of major apparatus, including associated control systems and
c. Cardiac catheterization labs alarms.
d. Coronary care units (3) Compressed air systems serving medical and surgical functions,
e. Hemodialysis rooms or areas including controls. Such air systems shall be permitted on the critical
f. Emergency room treatment areas (selected) branch.
g. Human physiology labs (4) Smoke control and stair pressurization systems, or both.
h. Intensive care units (5) Kitchen hood supply or exhaust systems, or both, if required to
i. Postoperative recovery rooms (selected) operate during a fire in or under the hood. [NFPA 99:4.4.2.2.3.4(5)]
(6) Supply, return, and exhaust ventilating systems for airborne
(9) Additional task illumination, receptacles, and selected power infectious/isolation rooms, protective environment rooms, exhaust fans
circuits needed for effective hospital operation. Single-phase fractional for laboratory fume hoods, nuclear medicine areas where radioactive
horsepower motors shall be permitted to be connected to the critical material is used, ethylene oxide evacuation and anesthesia evacuation.
branch. [NFPA 99:4.4.2.2.2.3(9)] Where delayed automatic connection is not appropriate, such ventilation
systems shall be permitted to be placed on the critical branch. [NFPA
(b) Subdivision of the Critical Branch. It shall be permitted to 99:4.4.2.2.3.4(6)]
subdivide the critical branch into two or more branches.
Exception: Sequential delayed automatic connection to the alternate
FPN: It is important to analyze the consequences of supplying an area with only power source to prevent overloading the generator shall be permitted
critical care branch power when failure occurs between the area and the transfer
switch. Some proportion of normal and critical power or critical power from separate where engineering studies indicate it is necessary.
transfer switches may be appropriate.
(b) Equipment for Delayed Automatic or Manual Connection. The
5.17.3.10 Equipment System Connection to Alternate Power Source. following equipment shall be arranged for either delayed automatic or
The equipment system shall be installed and connected to the alternate manual connection to the alternate power source:
power source such that the equipment described in 5.17.3.10(a) is
automatically restored to operation at appropriate time-lag intervals (1) Heating equipment to provide heating for operating, delivery,
following the energizing of the emergency system. Its arrangement shall labor, recovery, intensive care, coronary care, nurseries,
also provide for the subsequent connection of equipment described in infection/isolation rooms, emergency treatment spaces, and general
5.17.3.10(b). [NFPA 99:4.4.2.2.3.2] patient rooms and pressure maintenance (jockey or make-up) pump(s)
for water-based fire protection systems.
Exception: For essential electrical systems under 150 kVA, deletion of
the time-lag intervals feature for delayed automatic connection to the
Exception: Heating of general patient rooms and infection/isolation alternate sources for use when the normal source is interrupted. [NFPA
rooms during disruption of the normal source shall not be required 99:4.4.1.1.4]
under any of the following conditions:
(b) Alternate Source of Power. The alternate source of power shall be
(1) The outside design temperature is higher than -6.7°C. one of the following:
(2) The outside design temperature is lower than -6.7°C, and where
a selected room(s) is provided for the needs of all confined patients, only (1) Generator(s) driven by some form of prime mover(s) and located
such room(s) need be heated. on the premises
(3) The facility is served by a dual source of normal power. (2) Another generating unit(s) where the normal source consists of a
generating unit(s) located on the premises
FPN No. 1: The design temperature is based on the 97½ percent design value as (3) An external utility service when the normal source consists of a
shown in Chapter 24 of the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals (1997).
generating unit(s) located on the premises
FPN No. 2: For a description of a dual source of normal power, see 5.17.3.11(c), FPN. (4) A battery system located on the premises [NFPA 99:4.4.1.2]

(2) An elevator(s) selected to provide service to patient, surgical, (c) Location of Essential Electrical System Components. Careful
obstetrical, and ground floors during interruption of normal power. In consideration shall be given to the location of the spaces housing the
instances where interruption of normal power would result in other components of the essential electrical system to minimize interruptions
elevators stopping between floors, throw-over facilities shall be provided caused by natural forces common to the area (e.g., storms, floods,
to allow the temporary operation of any elevator for the release of earthquakes, or hazards created by adjoining structures or activities).
patients or other persons who may be confined between floors. Consideration shall also be given to the possible interruption of normal
(3) Hyperbaric facilities. electrical services resulting from similar causes as well as possible
(4) Hypobaric facilities. disruption of normal electrical service due to internal wiring and
(5) Automatically operated doors. equipment failures.
(6) Minimal electrically heated autoclaving equipment shall be
permitted to be arranged for either automatic or manual connection to the FPN: Facilities in which the normal source of power is supplied by two or more
separate central station-fed services experience greater than normal electrical service
alternate source. reliability than those with only a single feed. Such a dual source of normal power
(7) Controls for equipment listed in 5.17.3.10. consists of two or more electrical services fed from separate generator sets or a utility
(8) Other selected equipment shall be permitted to be served by the distribution network that has multiple power input sources and is arranged to provide
mechanical and electrical separation so that a fault between the facility and the
equipment system. [NFPA 99:4.4.2.2.3.5(9)] generating sources is not likely to cause an interruption of more than one of the facility
service feeders.
(c) AC Equipment for Nondelayed Automatic Connection.
Generator accessories, including but not limited to, the transfer fuel 5.17.3.16 Essential Electrical Systems for Nursing Homes and
pump, electrically operated louvers, and other generator accessories Limited Care Facilities.
essential for generator operation, shall be arranged for automatic
connection to the alternate power source. [NFPA 99:4.4.2.2.3.3] (a) Applicability. The requirements of Part 5.17.3, 5.17.3.16(c)
through 5.17.3.20, shall apply to nursing homes and limited care
5.17.3.11 Sources of Power. facilities.

(a) Two Independent Sources of Power. Essential electrical systems Exception: The requirements of Part 5.17.3, 5.17.3.16(c) through
shall have a minimum of two independent sources of power: a normal 5.17.3.20, shall not apply to freestanding buildings used as nursing
source generally supplying the entire electrical system and one or more homes and limited care facilities, provided that the following apply:
 more branches or systems in a facility with a maximum demand on the
(a) Admitting and discharge policies are maintained that preclude essential electrical system of 150 kVA. [NFPA 99:4.5.2.2.1]
the provision of care for any patient or resident who may need to be
sustained by electrical life-support equipment. FPN No. 1: See NFPA 99-2002, Standard for Health Care Facilities, 4.5.3.2, Transfer
Switch Operation Type II; 4.4.2.1.4, Automatic Transfer Switch Features; and
(b) No surgical treatment requiring general anesthesia is offered. 4.4.2.1.6, Nonautomatic Transfer Device Features.
(c) An automatic battery-operated system(s) or equipment is
provided that shall be effective for at least 1½ hours and is otherwise in FPN No. 2: See FPN Figure 5.17.3.17, No. 1.

accordance with 7.0.3.1 and that shall be capable of supplying lighting FPN No. 3: See FPN Figure 5.17.3.17, No. 2.
for exit lights, exit corridors, stairways, nursing stations, medical
preparation areas, boiler rooms, and communications areas. This system (c) Capacity of System. The essential electrical system shall have
shall also supply power to operate all alarm systems. [NFPA adequate capacity to meet the demand for the operation of all functions
99:17.3.4.1.2(3), 18.3.4.1.2(3)] and equipment to be served by each branch at one time.
FPN: See NFPA 101-2003, Life Safety Code.

(b) Inpatient Hospital Care Facilities. Nursing homes and limited

care facilities that provide inpatient hospital care shall comply with the
requirements of Part 5.17.3, 5.17.3.6 through 5.17.3.11.

(c) Facilities Contiguous or Located on the Same Site with

Hospitals. Nursing homes and limited care facilities that are contiguous
or located on the same site with a hospital shall be permitted to have their
essential electrical systems supplied by that of the hospital.

FPN: For performance, maintenance, and testing requirements of essential electrical

systems in nursing homes and limited care facilities, see NFPA 99-2002, Standard for
Health Care Facilities.

5.17.3.17 Essential Electrical Systems.

(a) General. Essential electrical systems for nursing homes and limited
care facilities shall be comprised of two separate branches capable of
supplying a limited amount of lighting and power service, which is
considered essential for the protection of life safety and effective FPN Figure 5.17.3.17, No. 1 Nursing Home and Limited
operation of the institution during the time normal electrical service is Health Care Facilities — Minimum Requirement
interrupted for any reason. These two separate branches shall be the life for Transfer Switch Arrangement.
safety branch and the critical branch. [NFPA 99:Annex A, 4.5.2.2.1]

(b) Transfer Switches. The number of transfer switches to be used

shall be based on reliability, design, and load considerations. Each
branch of the essential electrical system shall be served by one or more
transfer switches. One transfer switch shall be permitted to serve one or
 (e) Receptacle Identification. The cover plates for the electrical
receptacles or the electrical receptacles themselves supplied from the
emergency system shall have a distinctive color or marking so as to be
readily identifiable. [NFPA 99: 4.5.2.2.4.2]

5.17.3.18 Automatic Connection to Life Safety Branch. The life safety

branch shall be installed and connected to the alternate source of power
so that all functions specified herein shall be automatically restored to
operation within 10 seconds after the interruption of the normal source.
No functions other than those listed in 5.17.3.18(a) through 5.17.3.18(g)
shall be connected to the life safety branch. The life safety branch shall
supply power for the following lighting, receptacles, and equipment.

FPN: The life safety branch is called the emergency system in NFPA 99-2002,
Standard for Health Care Facilities.

(a) Illumination of Means of Egress. Illumination of means of egress

as is necessary for corridors, passageways, stairways, landings, and exit
doors and all ways of approach to exits. Switching arrangement to
transfer patient corridor lighting from general illumination circuits shall
FPN Figure 5.17.3.17, No. 2 Nursing Home and Limited
be permitted, providing only one of two circuits can be selected and both
Health Care Facilities — Minimum Requirement
circuits cannot be extinguished at the same time.
(150 kVA or less) for Transfer Switch Arrangement.
FPN: See NFPA 101-2003, Life Safety Code, Sections 7.8 and 7.9.

(b) Exit Signs. Exit signs and exit directional signs.

(d) Separation from Other Circuits. The life safety branch shall be FPN: See NFPA 101-2003, Life Safety Code, Section 7.10.
kept entirely independent of all other wiring and equipment and shall not
enter the same raceways, boxes, or cabinets with other wiring except as (c) Alarm and Alerting Systems. Alarm and alerting systems,
follows: including the following:

(1) In transfer switches (1) Fire alarms

(2) In exit or emergency luminaires (lighting fixtures) supplied from
two sources FPN: See NFPA 101-2003, Life Safety Code, Sections 9.6 and 18.3.4.

(3) In a common junction box attached to exit or emergency

luminaires (lighting fixtures) supplied from two sources (2) Alarms required for systems used for the piping of
nonflammable medical gases
The wiring of the critical branch shall be permitted to occupy the same FPN: See NFPA 99-2002, Standard for Health Care Facilities, 4.4.2.2.2.2(3).
raceways, boxes, or cabinets of other circuits that are not part of the life
safety branch. (d) Communications Systems. Communications systems, where used
for issuing instructions during emergency conditions.
 (e) Dining and Recreation Areas. Sufficient lighting in dining and (b) Delayed Automatic or Manual Connection. The following
recreation areas to provide illumination to exit ways. equipment shall be connected to the critical branch and shall be arranged
for either delayed automatic or manual connection to the alternate power
(f) Generator Set Location. Task illumination and selected source.
receptacles in the generator set location.
(1) Heating equipment to provide heating for patient rooms.
(g) Elevators. Elevator cab lighting, control, communications, and
signal systems. [NFPA 99:4.4.2.2.2.2(6), 4.5.2.2.2(7)] Exception: Heating of general patient rooms during disruption of the
normal source shall not be required under any of the following
5.17.3.19 Connection to Critical Branch. The critical branch shall be conditions:
installed and connected to the alternate power source so that the
equipment listed in 5.17.3.19(a) shall be automatically restored to (1) The outside design temperature is higher than -6.7°C.
operation at appropriate time-lag intervals following the restoration of (2) The outside design temperature is lower than -6.7°C and where
the life safety branch to operation. Its arrangement shall also provide for a selected room(s) is provided for the needs of all confined patients, only
the additional connection of equipment listed in 5.17.3.19(b) by either such room(s) need be heated.
delayed automatic or manual operation. (3) The facility is served by a dual source of normal power as
described in 5.17.3.20(c), FPN.
Exception: For essential electrical systems under 150 kVA, deletion of
the time-lag intervals feature for delayed automatic connection to the FPN: The outside design temperature is based on the 97½ percent design values as
shown in Chapter 24 of the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals (1997).
equipment system shall be permitted.
(2) Elevator service — in instances where disruption of power
(a) Delayed Automatic Connection. The following equipment shall
would result in elevators stopping between floors, throw-over facilities
be connected to the critical branch and shall be arranged for delayed
shall be provided to allow the temporary operation of any elevator for the
automatic connection to the alternate power source:
release of passengers. For elevator cab lighting, control, and signal
system requirements, see 5.17.3.18(g).
(1) Patient care areas — task illumination and selected receptacles in
the following:
(3) Additional illumination, receptacles, and equipment shall be
permitted to be connected only to the critical branch. [NFPA
a. Medication preparation areas
99:4.5.2.2.3.3(c)]
b. Pharmacy dispensing areas
c. Nurses’ stations (unless adequately lighted by corridor
5.17.3.20 Sources of Power.
luminaires)
(a) Two Independent Sources of Power. Essential electrical systems
(2) Sump pumps and other equipment required to operate for the
shall have a minimum of two independent sources of power: a normal
safety of major apparatus and associated control systems and alarms
source generally supplying the entire electrical system and one or more
(3) Smoke control and stair pressurization systems
alternate sources for use when the normal source is interrupted. [NFPA
(4) Kitchen hood supply and/or exhaust systems, if required to
99:4.4.1.1.4]
operate during a fire in or under the hood
(5) Supply, return, and exhaust ventilating systems for airborne
infectious isolation rooms
 (b) Alternate Source of Power. The alternate source of power shall be
a generator(s) driven by some form of prime mover(s) and located on the (c) Critical Care Areas. Where critical care areas are present, the
premises. essential electrical distribution system shall be as described in 5.17.3.6
through 5.17.3.11. [NFPA 99:14.3.4.2.2]
Exception No. 1: Where the normal source consists of generating units
on the premises, the alternate source shall be either another generator (d) Power Systems. Battery systems shall be installed in accordance
set or an external utility service. with the requirements of Article 700, and generator systems shall be as
described in 5.17.3.6 through 5.17.3.11.
Exception No. 2: Nursing homes or limited care facilities meeting the
requirements of 5.17.3.16(a), Exception, shall be permitted to use a 5.17.4 Inhalation Anesthetizing Locations
battery system or self-contained battery integral with the equipment.
[NFPA 99:17.3.4.1.3, 18.3.4.1.1] FPN: For further information regarding safeguards for anesthetizing locations, see
NFPA 99-2002, Standard for Health Care Facilities.

(c) Location of Essential Electrical System Components. Careful

5.17.4.1 Anesthetizing Location Classification.
consideration shall be given to the location of the spaces housing the
components of the essential electrical system to minimize interruptions FPN: If either of the anesthetizing locations in 5.17.4.1(a) or 5.17.4.1(b) is designated
caused by natural forces common to the area (e.g., storms, floods, a wet location, refer to 5.17.2.11.
earthquakes, or hazards created by adjoining structures or activities).
Consideration shall also be given to the possible interruption of normal (a) Hazardous (Classified) Location.
electrical services resulting from similar causes as well as possible
disruption of normal electrical service due to internal wiring and (1) Use Location. In a location where flammable anesthetics are
equipment failures. employed, the entire area shall be considered to be a Class I, Division 1
location that extends upward to a level 1 500 mm above the floor. The
FPN: Facilities in which the normal source of power is supplied by two or more remaining volume up to the structural ceiling is considered to be above a
separate central station-fed services experience greater than normal electrical service
reliability than those with only a single feed. Such a dual source of normal power
hazardous (classified) location. [NFPA 99:Annex E, E.1, and E.2]
consists of two or more electrical services fed from separate generator sets or a utility
distribution network that has multiple power input sources and is arranged to provide (2) Storage Location. Any room or location in which flammable
mechanical and electrical separation so that a fault between the facility and the
generating sources will not likely cause an interruption of more than one of the facility anesthetics or volatile flammable disinfecting agents are stored shall be
service feeders. considered to be a Class I, Division 1 location from floor to ceiling.

5.17.3.21 Essential Electrical Systems for Other Health Care (b) Other-Than-Hazardous (Classified) Location. Any inhalation
Facilities. anesthetizing location designated for the exclusive use of nonflammable
anesthetizing agents shall be considered to be an other-than-hazardous
(a) Essential Electrical Distribution. The essential electrical (classified) location.
distribution system shall be a battery or generator system.
5.17.4.2 Wiring and Equipment.
FPN: See NFPA 99–2002, Standard for Health Care Facilities.

(a) Within Hazardous (Classified) Anesthetizing Locations.

(b) Electrical Life Support Equipment. Where electrical life support
equipment is required, the essential electrical distribution system shall be (1) Isolation. Except as permitted in 5.17.7.1, each power circuit
as described in 5.17.3.6 through 5.17.3.11. [NFPA 99:14.3.4.2.1] within, or partially within, a flammable anesthetizing location as referred
to in 5.17.4.1 shall be isolated from any distribution system by the use of referred to in 5.17.4.1 shall be installed in rigid metal conduit, electrical
an isolated power system. [NFPA 99:Annex E, E.6.6.2] metallic tubing, intermediate metal conduit, Type MI cable, or Type MC
cable that employs a continuous, gas/vaportight metal sheath.
(2) Design and Installation. Where an isolated power system is
utilized, the isolated power equipment shall be listed as isolated power (2) Equipment Enclosure. Installed equipment that may produce arcs,
equipment, and the isolated power system shall be designed and installed sparks, or particles of hot metal, such as lamps and lampholders for fixed
in accordance with 5.17.7.1. lighting, cutouts, switches, generators, motors, or other equipment
having make-and-break or sliding contacts, shall be of the totally
(3) Equipment Operating at More Than 10 Volts. In hazardous enclosed type or be constructed so as to prevent escape of sparks or hot
(classified) locations referred to in 5.17.4.1, all fixed wiring and metal particles.
equipment and all portable equipment, including lamps and other
utilization equipment, operating at more than 10 volts between Exception: Wall-mounted receptacles installed above the hazardous
conductors shall comply with the requirements of 5.1.1.1 through (classified) location in flammable anesthetizing locations shall not be
5.1.2.16, and 5.1.3.1 through 5.1.3.51, and 5.1.2.21(a) and 5.1.2.21(b) for required to be totally enclosed or have openings guarded or screened to
Class I, Division 1 locations. All such equipment shall be specifically prevent dispersion of particles.
approved for the hazardous atmospheres involved. [NFPA 99: Annex E,
E.2.1, E.4.5, E.4.6, and E.4.7] (3) Luminaires (Lighting Fixtures). Surgical and other luminaires
(lighting fixtures) shall conform to 5.1.3.31(b).
(4) Extent of Location. Where a box, fitting, or enclosure is partially,
but not entirely, within a hazardous (classified) location(s), the hazardous Exception No. 1: The surface temperature limitations set forth in
(classified) location(s) shall be considered to be extended to include the 5.1.3.31(b)(1) shall not apply.
entire box, fitting, or enclosure.
Exception No. 2: Integral or pendant switches that are located above
(5) Receptacles and Attachment Plugs. Receptacles and attachment and cannot be lowered into the hazardous (classified) location(s) shall
plugs in a hazardous (classified) location(s) shall be listed for use in not be required to be explosionproof.
Class I, Group C hazardous (classified) locations and shall have
provision for the connection of a grounding conductor. (4) Seals. Approved seals shall be provided in conformance with
5.1.2.6, and 5.1.2.6(a)(4) shall apply to horizontal as well as to vertical
(6) Flexible Cord Type. Flexible cords used in hazardous (classified) boundaries of the defined hazardous (classified) locations.
locations for connection to portable utilization equipment, including
lamps operating at more than 8 volts between conductors, shall be of a (5) Receptacles and Attachment Plugs. Receptacles and attachment
type approved for extra-hard usage in accordance with Table 4.0.1.4 and plugs located above hazardous (classified) anesthetizing locations shall
shall include an additional conductor for grounding. be listed for hospital use for services of prescribed voltage, frequency,
rating, and number of conductors with provision for the connection of the
(7) Flexible Cord Storage. A storage device for the flexible cord grounding conductor. This requirement shall apply to attachment plugs
shall be provided and shall not subject the cord to bending at a radius of and receptacles of the 2-pole, 3-wire grounding type for single-phase,
less than 75 mm. 230-volt and/or 115-volt, nominal, ac service.

(b) Above Hazardous (Classified) Anesthetizing Locations. (6) 250-Volt Receptacles and Attachment Plugs Rated 50 and 60
Amperes. Receptacles and attachment plugs rated 250 volts, for
(1) Wiring Methods. Wiring above a hazardous (classified) location connection of 50-ampere and 60-ampere ac medical equipment for use
above hazardous (classified) locations, shall be arranged so that the 60-
ampere receptacle will accept either the 50-ampere or the 60-ampere 5.17.4.3 Grounding. In any anesthetizing area, all metal raceways and
plug. Fifty-ampere receptacles shall be designed so as not to accept the metal-sheathed cables and all non–current-carrying conductive portions
60-ampere attachment plug. The attachment plugs shall be of the 2-pole, of fixed electric equipment shall be grounded. Grounding in Class I
3-wire design with a third contact connecting to the insulated (green or locations shall comply with 5.1.2.21.
green with yellow stripe) equipment grounding conductor of the
electrical system. Exception: Equipment operating at not more than 10 volts between
conductors shall not be required to be grounded.
(c) Other-Than-Hazardous (Classified) Anesthetizing Locations.
5.17.4.4 Grounded Power Systems in Anesthetizing Locations.
(1) Wiring Methods. Wiring serving other-than-hazardous
(classified) locations, as defined in 5.17.4.1, shall be installed in a metal (a) Battery-Powered Emergency Lighting Units. One or more
raceway system or cable assembly. The metal raceway system or cable battery-powered emergency lighting units shall be provided in
armor or sheath assembly shall qualify as an equipment grounding return accordance with 7.0.3.1(f).
path in accordance with 2.50.6.9. Type MC and Type MI cable shall
have an outer metal armor or sheath that is identified as an acceptable (b) Branch-Circuit Wiring. Branch circuits supplying only listed,
grounding return path. fixed, therapeutic and diagnostic equipment, permanently installed above
the hazardous (classified) location and in other-than-hazardous
Exception: Pendant receptacle constructions that employ at least Type (classified) locations, shall be permitted to be supplied from a normal
SJO or equivalent flexible cords suspended not less than 1 800 mm from grounded service, single- or three-phase system, provided the following
the floor shall not be required to be installed in a metal raceway or cable apply:
assembly.
(1) Wiring for grounded and isolated circuits does not occupy the
(2) Receptacles and Attachment Plugs. Receptacles and attachment same raceway or cable.
plugs installed and used in other-than-hazardous (classified) locations (2) All conductive surfaces of the equipment are grounded.
shall be listed for hospital use for services of prescribed voltage, (3) Equipment (except enclosed X-ray tubes and the leads to the
frequency, rating, and number of conductors with provision for tubes) are located at least 2 400 mm above the floor or outside the
connection of the grounding conductor. This requirement shall apply to anesthetizing location.
2-pole, 3-wire grounding type for single-phase, 230-volt and/or 115-volt, (4) Switches for the grounded branch circuit are located outside the
nominal, ac service. hazardous (classified) location.

(3) 250-Volt Receptacles and Attachment Plugs Rated 50 Amperes Exception: Sections 5.17.4.4(b)(3) and (b)(4) shall not apply in other-
and 60 Amperes. Receptacles and attachment plugs rated 250 volts, for than-hazardous (classified) locations.
connection of 50-ampere and 60-ampere ac medical equipment for use in
other-than-hazardous (classified) locations, shall be arranged so that the (c) Fixed Lighting Branch Circuits. Branch circuits supplying only
60-ampere receptacle will accept either the 50-ampere or the 60-ampere fixed lighting shall be permitted to be supplied by a normal grounded
plug. Fifty-ampere receptacles shall be designed so as not to accept the service, provided the following apply:
60-ampere attachment plug. The attachment plugs shall be of the 2-pole,
3-wire design with a third contact connecting to the insulated (green or (1) Such luminaires (fixtures) are located at least 2 400 mm above
green with yellow stripe) equipment grounding conductor of the the floor.
electrical system. (2) All conductive surfaces of luminaires (fixtures) are grounded.
 (3) Wiring for circuits supplying power to luminaires (fixtures) does (2) A common low-voltage isolating transformer installed in an
not occupy the same raceway or cable for circuits supplying isolated other-than-hazardous (classified) location
power. (3) Individual dry-cell batteries
(4) Switches are wall-mounted and located above hazardous (4) Common batteries made up of storage cells located in an other-
(classified) locations. than-hazardous (classified) location

Exception: Sections 5.17.4.4(c)(1) and (c)(4) shall not apply in other- (c) Isolated Circuits. Isolating-type transformers for supplying low-
than-hazardous (classified) locations. voltage circuits shall have both of the following:

(d) Remote-Control Stations. Wall-mounted remote-control stations (1) Approved means for insulating the secondary circuit from the
for remote-control switches operating at 24 volts or less shall be primary circuit
permitted to be installed in any anesthetizing location. (2) The core and case grounded

(e) Location of Isolated Power Systems. Where an isolated power (d) Controls. Resistance or impedance devices shall be permitted to
system is utilized, the isolated power equipment shall be listed as isolated control low-voltage equipment but shall not be used to limit the
power equipment. Isolated power equipment and its grounded primary maximum available voltage to the equipment.
feeder shall be permitted to be located in an anesthetizing location,
provided it is installed above a hazardous (classified) location or in an (e) Battery-Powered Appliances. Battery-powered appliances shall
other-than-hazardous (classified) location. not be capable of being charged while in operation unless their charging
circuitry incorporates an integral isolating-type transformer.
(f) Circuits in Anesthetizing Locations. Except as permitted above,
each power circuit within, or partially within, a flammable anesthetizing (f) Receptacles or Attachment Plugs. Any receptacle or attachment
location as referred to in 5.17.4.1 shall be isolated from any distribution plug used on low-voltage circuits shall be of a type that does not permit
system supplying other-than-anesthetizing locations. interchangeable connection with circuits of higher voltage.

5.17.4.5 Low-Voltage Equipment and Instruments. FPN: Any interruption of the circuit, even circuits as low as 10 volts, either by any
switch or loose or defective connections anywhere in the circuit, may produce a spark
that is sufficient to ignite flammable anesthetic agents.
(a) Equipment Requirements. Low-voltage equipment that is
frequently in contact with the bodies of persons or has exposed current- 5.17.5 X-Ray Installations
carrying elements shall comply with one of the following:
Nothing in this part shall be construed as specifying safeguards against
(1) Operate on an electrical potential of 10 volts or less the useful beam or stray X-ray radiation.
(2) Approved as intrinsically safe or double-insulated equipment
(3) Be moisture resistant FPN No. 1: Radiation safety and performance requirements of several classes of X-
ray equipment are regulated under Public Law 90-602 and are enforced by the
Department of Health and Human Services.
(b) Power Supplies. Power shall be supplied to low-voltage
equipment from one of the following: FPN No. 2: In addition, information on radiation protection by the National Council on
Radiation Protection and Measurements is published as Reports of the National
Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement. These reports are obtainable from
(1) An individual portable isolating transformer (autotransformers NCRP Publications, P.O. Box 30175, Washington, DC 20014.
shall not be used) connected to an isolated power circuit receptacle by
means of an appropriate cord and attachment plug
5.17.5.1 Connection to Supply Circuit.
(2) Feeders. The ampacity of supply feeders and the current rating of
(a) Fixed and Stationary Equipment. Fixed and stationary X-ray overcurrent protective devices supplying two or more branch circuits
equipment shall be connected to the power supply by means of a wiring supplying X-ray units shall not be less than 50 percent of the momentary
method that meets the general requirements of this Code. demand rating of the largest unit plus 25 percent of the momentary
demand rating of the next largest unit plus 10 percent of the momentary
Exception: Equipment properly supplied by a branch circuit rated at not demand rating of each additional unit. Where simultaneous biplane
over 30 amperes shall be permitted to be supplied through a suitable examinations are undertaken with the X-ray units, the supply conductors
attachment plug and hard-service cable or cord. and overcurrent protective devices shall be 100 percent of the momentary
demand rating of each X-ray unit.
(b) Portable, Mobile, and Transportable Equipment. Individual
branch circuits shall not be required for portable, mobile, and FPN: The minimum conductor size for branch and feeder circuits is also governed by
voltage regulation requirements. For a specific installation, the manufacturer usually
transportable medical X-ray equipment requiring a capacity of not over specifies minimum distribution transformer and conductor sizes, rating of
60 amperes. disconnecting means, and overcurrent protection.

(c) Over 600-Volt Supply. Circuits and equipment operated on a (b) Therapeutic Equipment. The ampacity of conductors and rating
supply circuit of over 600 volts shall comply with Article 4.90. of overcurrent protective devices shall not be less than 100 percent of the
current rating of medical X-ray therapy equipment.
5.17.5.2 Disconnecting Means.
FPN: The ampacity of the branch-circuit conductors and the ratings of disconnecting
means and overcurrent protection for X-ray equipment are usually designated by the
(a) Capacity. A disconnecting means of adequate capacity for at least manufacturer for the specific installation.
50 percent of the input required for the momentary rating or 100 percent
of the input required for the long-time rating of the X-ray equipment, 5.17.5.4 Control Circuit Conductors.
whichever is greater, shall be provided in the supply circuit.
(a) Number of Conductors in Raceway. The number of control
(b) Location. The disconnecting means shall be operable from a circuit conductors installed in a raceway shall be determined in
location readily accessible from the X-ray control. accordance with 3.0.1.17.

(c) Portable Equipment. For equipment connected to a 230-volt (b) Minimum Size of Conductors. Size 0.75 mm2 (1.0 mm dia.) or
and/or 115-volt branch circuit of 30 amperes or less, a grounding-type 1.25 mm2 (1.2 mm dia.) fixture wires as specified in 7.25.2.7 and flexible
attachment plug and receptacle of proper rating shall be permitted to cords shall be permitted for the control and operating circuits of X-ray
serve as a disconnecting means. and auxiliary equipment where protected by not larger than 20-ampere
overcurrent devices.
5.17.5.3 Rating of Supply Conductors and Overcurrent Protection.
5.17.5.5 Equipment Installations. All equipment for new X-ray
(a) Diagnostic Equipment. installations and all used or reconditioned X-ray equipment moved to and
reinstalled at a new location shall be of an approved type.
(1) Branch Circuits. The ampacity of supply branch-circuit
conductors and the current rating of overcurrent protective devices shall 5.17.5.6 Transformers and Capacitors. Transformers and capacitors
not be less than 50 percent of the momentary rating or 100 percent of the that are part of X-ray equipment shall not be required to comply with
long-time rating, whichever is greater. Articles 4.50 and 4.60.
Capacitors shall be mounted within enclosures of insulating material or 5.17.6.2 Other-Than-Patient-Care Areas. In other-than-patient-care
grounded metal. areas, installations shall be in accordance with the appropriate provisions
of Articles 6.40, 7.25, 7.60, and 8.0.
5.17.5.7 Installation of High-Tension X-Ray Cables. Cables with
grounded shields connecting X-ray tubes and image intensifiers shall be 5.17.6.3 Signal Transmission Between Appliances.
permitted to be installed in cable trays or cable troughs along with X-ray
equipment control and power supply conductors without the need for (a) General. Permanently installed signal cabling from an appliance in
barriers to separate the wiring. a patient location to remote appliances shall employ a signal transmission
system that prevents hazardous grounding interconnection of the
5.17.5.8 Guarding and Grounding. appliances.

(a) High-Voltage Parts. All high-voltage parts, including X-ray tubes, FPN: See 5.17.2.4(a) for additional grounding requirements in patient care areas.
shall be mounted within grounded enclosures. Air, oil, gas, or other
suitable insulating media shall be used to insulate the high-voltage from (b) Common Signal Grounding Wire. Common signal grounding
the grounded enclosure. The connection from the high-voltage wires (i.e., the chassis ground for single-ended transmission) shall be
equipment to X-ray tubes and other high-voltage components shall be permitted to be used between appliances all located within the patient
made with high-voltage shielded cables. vicinity, provided the appliances are served from the same reference
grounding point.
(b) Low-Voltage Cables. Low-voltage cables connecting to oil-filled
units that are not completely sealed, such as transformers, condensers, oil 5.17.7 Isolated Power Systems
coolers, and high-voltage switches, shall have insulation of the oil-
resistant type. 5.17.7.1 Isolated Power Systems.

(c) Noncurrent–Carrying Metal Parts. Noncurrent-carrying metal (a) Installations.

parts of X-ray and associated equipment (controls, tables, X-ray tube
supports, transformer tanks, shielded cables, X-ray tube heads, etc.) shall (1) Isolated Power Circuits. Each isolated power circuit shall be
be grounded in the manner specified in Article 2.50, as modified by controlled by a switch that has a disconnecting pole in each isolated
5.17.2.4(a) and 5.17.2.4(b). circuit conductor to simultaneously disconnect all power. Such isolation
shall be accomplished by means of one or more transformers having no
5.17.6 Communications, Signaling Systems, Data Systems, Fire electrical connection between primary and secondary windings, by
Alarm Systems, and Systems Less Than 230 Volts, Nominal means of motor generator sets, or by means of suitably isolated batteries.

5.17.6.1 Patient Care Areas. Equivalent insulation and isolation to that (2) Circuit Characteristics. Circuits supplying primaries of isolating
required for the electrical distribution systems in patient care areas shall transformers shall operate at not more than 600 volts between conductors
be provided for communications, signaling systems, data system circuits, and shall be provided with proper overcurrent protection. The secondary
fire alarm systems, and systems less than 120 volts, nominal. voltage of such transformers shall not exceed 600 volts between
conductors of each circuit. All circuits supplied from such secondaries
FPN: An acceptable alternate means of providing isolation for patient/nurse call shall be ungrounded and shall have an approved overcurrent device of
systems is by the use of nonelectrified signaling, communications, or control devices proper ratings in each conductor. Circuits supplied directly from batteries
held by the patient or within reach of the patient.
or from motor generator sets shall be ungrounded and shall be protected
against overcurrent in the same manner as transformer-fed secondary
circuits. If an electrostatic shield is present, it shall be connected to the are identified in accordance with 2.0.1.10(b) for connection to the
reference grounding point. [NFPA 99:4.3.2.6.1] grounded circuit conductor.

(3) Equipment Location. The isolating transformers, motor generator (6) Wire-Pulling Compounds. Wire-pulling compounds that increase
sets, batteries and battery chargers, and associated primary or secondary the dielectric constant shall not be used on the secondary conductors of
overcurrent devices shall not be installed in hazardous (classified) the isolated power supply.
locations. The isolated secondary circuit wiring extending into a
hazardous anesthetizing location shall be installed in accordance with FPN No. 1: It is desirable to limit the size of the isolation transformer to 10 kVA or less
and to use conductor insulation with low leakage to meet impedance requirements.
5.1.2.1.
FPN No. 2: Minimizing the length of branch-circuit conductors and using conductor
(4) Isolation Transformers. An isolation transformer shall not serve insulations with a dielectric constant less than 3.5 and insulation resistance constant
greater than 6100 megohm-meters at 16°C reduces leakage from line to ground,
more than one operating room except as covered in (a)(4)a and (a)(4)b. reducing the hazard current.

For purposes of this section, anesthetic induction rooms are (b) Line Isolation Monitor.
considered part of the operating room or rooms served by the induction
rooms. (1) Characteristics. In addition to the usual control and overcurrent
protective devices, each isolated power system shall be provided with a
a. Induction Rooms. Where an induction room serves more than continually operating line isolation monitor that indicates total hazard
one operating room, the isolated circuits of the induction room shall be current. The monitor shall be designed such that a green signal lamp,
permitted to be supplied from the isolation transformer of any one of the conspicuously visible to persons in each area served by the isolated
operating rooms served by that induction room. power system, remains lighted when the system is adequately isolated
b. Higher Voltages. Isolation transformers shall be permitted to from ground. An adjacent red signal lamp and an audible warning signal
serve single receptacles in several patient areas where the following (remote if desired) shall be energized when the total hazard current
apply: (consisting of possible resistive and capacitive leakage currents) from
either isolated conductor to ground reaches a threshold value of 5 mA
1. The receptacles are reserved for supplying power to under nominal line voltage conditions. The line monitor shall not alarm
equipment requiring 150 volts or higher, such as portable X-ray units. for a fault hazard of less than 3.7 mA or for a total hazard current of less
2. The receptacles and mating plugs are not interchangeable with than 5 mA.
the receptacles on the local isolated power system. [NFPA
99:13.4.1.2.6.6] Exception: A system shall be permitted to be designed to operate at a
lower threshold value of total hazard current. A line isolation monitor
(5) Conductor Identification. The isolated circuit conductors shall be for such a system shall be permitted to be approved with the provision
identified as follows: that the fault hazard current shall be permitted to be reduced but not to
less than 35 percent of the corresponding threshold value of the total
a. Isolated Conductor No. 1 — Orange hazard current, and the monitor hazard current is to be correspondingly
b. Isolated Conductor No. 2 — Brown reduced to not more than 50 percent of the alarm threshold value of the
total hazard current.
For 3-phase systems, the third conductor shall be identified as
yellow. Where isolated circuit conductors supply 125-volt and/or 250- (2) Impedance. The line isolation monitor shall be designed to have
volt, single-phase, 15- and 20-ampere receptacles, the orange sufficient internal impedance such that, when properly connected to the
conductor(s) shall be connected to the terminal(s) on the receptacles that isolated system, the maximum internal current that can flow through the
line isolation monitor, when any point of the isolated system is grounded, Auditoriums Mortuary chapels
shall be 1 mA. Bowling lanes Multipurpose rooms
Club rooms Museums
Exception: The line isolation monitor shall be permitted to be of the Conference rooms Places of awaiting transportation
low-impedance type such that the current through the line isolation Courtrooms Places of religious worship
monitor, when any point of the isolated system is grounded, will not Dance halls Pool rooms
exceed twice the alarm threshold value for a period not exceeding 5 Dining and drinking Restaurants
milliseconds. facilities Skating rinks

FPN: Reduction of the monitor hazard current, provided this reduction results in an (b) Multiple Occupancies. Where an assembly occupancy forms a
increased “not alarm” threshold value for the fault hazard current, will increase circuit
capacity. portion of a building containing other occupancies, Article 5.18 applies
only to that portion of the building considered an assembly occupancy.
(3) Ammeter. An ammeter calibrated in the total hazard current of Occupancy of any room or space for assembly purposes by less than 100
the system (contribution of the fault hazard current plus monitor hazard persons in a building of other occupancy, and incidental to such other
current) shall be mounted in a plainly visible place on the line isolation occupancy, shall be classified as part of the other occupancy and subject
monitor with the “alarm on” zone at approximately the center of the to the provisions applicable thereto.
scale.
(c) Theatrical Areas. Where any such building structure, or portion
Exception: The line isolation monitor shall be permitted to be a thereof, contains a projection booth or stage platform or area for the
composite unit, with a sensing section cabled to a separate display panel presentation of theatrical or musical productions, either fixed or portable,
section on which the alarm or test functions are located. the wiring for that area, including associated audience seating areas, and
all equipment that is used in the referenced area, and portable equipment
FPN: It is desirable to locate the ammeter so that it is conspicuously visible to persons and wiring for use in the production that will not be connected to
in the anesthetizing location. permanently installed wiring, shall comply with Article 5.20.

FPN: For methods of determining population capacity, see local building code or, in its
ARTICLE 5.18 — ASSEMBLY OCCUPANCIES absence, NFPA 101-2003, Life Safety Code.

5.18.1.1 Scope. Except for the assembly occupancies explicitly covered 5.18.1.3 Other Articles.
by 5.20.1.1, this article covers all buildings or portions of buildings or
structures designed or intended for the gathering together of 100 or more (a) Hazardous (Classified) Areas. Electrical installations in
persons for such purposes as deliberation, worship, entertainment, eating, hazardous (classified) areas located in assembly occupancies shall
drinking, amusement, awaiting transportation, or similar purposes. comply with Article 5.0.

5.18.1.2 General Classification. (b) Temporary Wiring. In exhibition halls used for display booths, as
in trade shows, the temporary wiring shall be installed in accordance
(a) Examples. Assembly occupancies shall include, but not be limited with Article 5.90. Flexible cables and cords approved for hard or extra-
to, the following: hard usage shall be permitted to be laid on floors where protected from
contact by the general public. The ground-fault circuit-interrupter
Armories Exhibition halls requirements of 5.90.1.6 shall not apply.
Assembly halls Gymnasiums
Exception: Where conditions of supervision and maintenance ensure conference and meeting rooms in hotels or motels, courtrooms, dining
that only licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical facilities, restaurants, mortuary chapels, museums, libraries, and places
practitioner under the supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner of religious worship where the following apply:
will service the installation, flexible cords or cables identified in Table
4.0.1.4 for hard usage or extra-hard usage shall be permitted in cable (1) The electrical nonmetallic tubing or rigid nonmetallic conduit is
trays used only for temporary wiring. All cords or cables shall be installed concealed within walls, floors, and ceilings where the walls,
installed in a single layer. A permanent sign shall be attached to the floors, and ceilings provide a thermal barrier of material that has at least
cable tray at intervals not to exceed 7 600 mm. The sign shall read a 15-minute finish rating as identified in listings of fire-rated assemblies.
(2) The electrical nonmetallic tubing or rigid nonmetallic conduit is
CABLE TRAY FOR TEMPORARY WIRING ONLY installed above suspended ceilings where the suspended ceilings provide
a thermal barrier of material that has at least a 15-minute finish rating as
(c) Emergency Systems. Control of emergency systems shall comply identified in listings of fire-rated assemblies.
with Article 7.0.
Electrical nonmetallic tubing and rigid nonmetallic conduit are not
5.18.1.4 Wiring Methods. recognized for use in other space used for environmental air in
accordance with 3.0.1.22(c).
(a) General. The fixed wiring methods shall be metal raceways,
flexible metal raceways, nonmetallic raceways encased in not less than FPN: A finish rating is established for assemblies containing combustible (wood)
supports. The finish rating is defined as the time at which the wood stud or wood joist
50 mm of concrete, Type MI, MC, or AC cable containing an insulated reaches an average temperature rise of 121°C or an individual temperature rise of
equipment grounding conductor sized in accordance with Table 163°C as measured on the plane of the wood nearest the fire. A finish rating is not
2.50.6.13. intended to represent a rating for a membrane ceiling.

Exception: Fixed wiring methods shall be as provided in 5.18.1.5 Supply. Portable switchboards and portable power distribution
equipment shall be supplied only from listed power outlets of sufficient
(a) Audio signal processing, amplification, and reproduction voltage and ampere rating. Such power outlets shall be protected by
equipment — Article 6.40 overcurrent devices. Such overcurrent devices and power outlets shall
(b) Communications circuits — Article 8.0 not be accessible to the general public. Provisions for connection of an
(c) Class 2 and Class 3 remote-control and signaling circuits — equipment grounding conductor shall be provided. The neutral of feeders
Article 7.25 supplying solid-state, 3-phase, 4-wire dimmer systems shall be
(d) Fire alarm circuits — Article 7.60 considered a current-carrying conductor.

(b) Nonrated Construction. In addition to the wiring methods of ARTICLE 5.20 — THEATERS, AUDIENCE AREAS OF MOTION
5.18.1.4(a), nonmetallic-sheathed cable, Type AC cable, electrical PICTURE AND TELEVISION STUDIOS, PERFORMANCE
nonmetallic tubing, and rigid nonmetallic conduit shall be permitted to AREAS, AND SIMILAR LOCATIONS
be installed in those buildings or portions thereof that are not required to
be of fire-rated construction by the applicable building code. 5.20.1 General

FPN: Fire-rated construction is the fire-resistive classification used in building codes. 5.20.1.1 Scope. This article covers all buildings or that part of a building
or structure, indoor or outdoor, designed or used for presentation,
(c) Spaces with Finish Rating. Electrical nonmetallic tubing and rigid dramatic, musical, motion picture projection, or similar purposes and to
nonmetallic conduit shall be permitted to be installed in club rooms, specific audience seating areas within motion picture or television
studios. Stand Lamp (Work Light). A portable stand that contains a general-
purpose luminaire (lighting fixture) or lampholder with guard for the
5.20.1.2 Definitions. purpose of providing general illumination on the stage or in the
auditorium.
Border Light. A permanently installed overhead strip light.
Strip Light. A luminaire (lighting fixture) with multiple lamps
Breakout Assembly. An adapter used to connect a multipole arranged in a row.
connector containing two or more branch circuits to multiple individual
branch-circuit connectors. Two-Fer. An adapter cable containing one male plug and two female
cord connectors used to connect two loads to one branch circuit.
Bundled. Cables or conductors that are physically tied, wrapped, taped
or otherwise periodically bound together. 5.20.1.3 Motion Picture Projectors. Motion picture equipment and its
installation and use shall comply with Article 5.40.
Connector Strip. A metal wireway containing pendant or flush
receptacles. 5.20.1.4 Audio Signal Processing, Amplification, and Reproduction
Equipment. Audio signal processing, amplification, and reproduction
Drop Box. A box containing pendant- or flush-mounted receptacles equipment and its installation shall comply with Article 6.40.
attached to a multiconductor cable via strain relief or a multipole
connector. 5.20.1.5 Wiring Methods.

Footlight. A border light installed on or in the stage. (a) General. The fixed wiring method shall be metal raceways,
nonmetallic raceways encased in at least 50 mm of concrete, Type MI
Grouped. Cables or conductors positioned adjacent to one another but cable, MC cable, or AC cable containing an insulated equipment
not in continuous contact with each other. grounding conductor sized in accordance with Table 2.50.6.13.

Performance Area. The stage and audience seating area associated Exception: Fixed wiring methods shall be as provided in Article 6.40 for
with a temporary stage structure, whether indoors or outdoors, audio signal processing, amplification, and reproduction equipment, in
constructed of scaffolding, truss, platforms, or similar devices, that is Article 8.0 for communication circuits, in Article 7.25 for Class 2 and
used for the presentation of theatrical or musical productions or for Class 3 remote-control and signaling circuits, and in Article 7.60 for fire
public presentations. alarm circuits.

Portable Equipment. Equipment fed with portable cords or cables (b) Portable Equipment. The wiring for portable switchboards, stage
intended to be moved from one place to another. set lighting, stage effects, and other wiring not fixed as to location shall
be permitted with approved flexible cords and cables as provided
Portable Power Distribution Unit. A power distribution box elsewhere in Article 5.20. Fastening such cables and cords by
containing receptacles and overcurrent devices. uninsulated staples or nailing shall not be permitted.

Proscenium. The wall and arch that separates the stage from the (c) Nonrated Construction. Nonmetallic-sheathed cable, Type AC
auditorium (house). cable, electrical nonmetallic tubing, and rigid nonmetallic conduit shall
be permitted to be installed in those buildings or portions thereof that are
not required to be of fire-rated construction by the applicable building
code. 5.20.2.2 Guarding Back of Switchboard. Stage switchboards having
exposed live parts on the back of such boards shall be enclosed by the
5.20.1.6 Number of Conductors in Raceway. The number of building walls, wire mesh grilles, or by other approved methods. The
conductors permitted in any metal conduit, rigid nonmetallic conduit as entrance to this enclosure shall be by means of a self-closing door.
permitted in this article, or electrical metallic tubing for border or stage
pocket circuits or for remote-control conductors shall not exceed the 5.20.2.3 Control and Overcurrent Protection of Receptacle Circuits.
percentage fill shown in Table 1 of Chapter 9. Where contained within Means shall be provided at a stage-lighting switchboard to which load
an auxiliary gutter or a wireway, the sum of the cross-sectional areas of circuits are connected for overcurrent protection of stage-lighting branch
all contained conductors at any cross section shall not exceed 20 percent circuits, including branch circuits supplying stage and auditorium
of the interior cross-sectional area of the auxiliary gutter or wireway. The receptacles used for cord- and plug-connected stage equipment. Where
30-conductor limitation of 3.66.2.13 and 3.76.2.13 shall not apply. the stage switchboard contains dimmers to control nonstage lighting, the
locating of the overcurrent protective devices for these branch circuits at
5.20.1.7 Enclosing and Guarding Live Parts. Live parts shall be the stage switchboard shall be permitted.
enclosed or guarded to prevent accidental contact by persons and objects.
All switches shall be of the externally operable type. Dimmers, including 5.20.2.4 Metal Hood. A stage switchboard that is not completely
rheostats, shall be placed in cases or cabinets that enclose all live parts. enclosed dead-front and dead-rear or recessed into a wall shall be
provided with a metal hood extending the full length of the board to
5.20.1.8 Emergency Systems. Control of emergency systems shall protect all equipment on the board from falling objects.
comply with Article 7.0.
5.20.2.5 Dimmers. Dimmers shall comply with 5.20.2.5(a) through (d).
5.20.1.9 Branch Circuits. A branch circuit of any size supplying one or
more receptacles shall be permitted to supply stage set lighting. The (a) Disconnection and Overcurrent Protection. Where dimmers are
voltage rating of the receptacles shall not be less than the circuit voltage. installed in ungrounded conductors, each dimmer shall have overcurrent
Receptacle ampere ratings and branch-circuit conductor ampacity shall protection not greater than 125 percent of the dimmer rating and shall be
not be less than the branch-circuit overcurrent device ampere rating. disconnected from all ungrounded conductors when the master or
Table 2.10.2.3(b)(2) shall not apply. individual switch or circuit breaker supplying such dimmer is in the open
position.
5.20.1.10 Portable Equipment. Portable stage and studio lighting
equipment and portable power distribution equipment shall be permitted (b) Resistance- or Reactor-Type Dimmers. Resistance- or series
for temporary use outdoors, provided the equipment is supervised by reactor-type dimmers shall be permitted to be placed in either the
licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner grounded or the ungrounded conductor of the circuit. Where designed to
under the supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner while energized open either the supply circuit to the dimmer or the circuit controlled by
and barriered from the general public. it, the dimmer shall then comply with 4.4.1.2(b). Resistance- or reactor-
type dimmers placed in the grounded neutral conductor of the circuit
5.20.2 Fixed Stage Switchboards shall not open the circuit.

5.20.2.1 Dead Front. Stage switchboards shall be of the dead-front type (c) Autotransformer-Type Dimmers. The circuit supplying an
and shall comply with Part 4.8.4 unless approved based on suitability as autotransformer-type dimmer shall not exceed 250 volts between
a stage switchboard as determined by a qualified testing laboratory and conductors. The grounded conductor shall be common to the input and
recognized test standards and principles. output circuits.
 the ampacity of the neutral supplying the primary stage switchboard.
FPN: See 210.9 for circuits derived from autotransformers. Parallel neutral conductors shall comply with 3.10.1.4.
(d) Solid-State-Type Dimmers. The circuit supplying a solid-state (3) Separate Feeders to Single Primary Stage Switchboard (Dimmer
dimmer shall not exceed 250 volts between conductors unless the Bank). Installations with separate feeders to a single primary stage
dimmer is listed specifically for higher voltage operation. Where a switchboard shall have a disconnecting means for each feeder. The
grounded conductor supplies a dimmer, it shall be common to the input primary stage switchboard shall have a permanent and obvious label
and output circuits. Dimmer chassis shall be connected to the equipment stating the number and location of disconnecting means. If the
grounding conductor. disconnecting means are located in more than one distribution
switchboard, the primary stage switchboard shall be provided with
5.20.2.6 Type of Switchboard. A stage switchboard shall be either one barriers to correspond with these multiple locations.
or a combination of the types specified in 5.20.2.6(a), (b), and (c).
(b) Neutral. The neutral of feeders supplying solid-state, 3-phase, 4-
(a) Manual. Dimmers and switches are operated by handles wire dimming systems shall be considered a current-carrying conductor.
mechanically linked to the control devices.
(c) Supply Capacity. For the purposes of calculating supply capacity
(b) Remotely Controlled. Devices are operated electrically from a to switchboards, it shall be permissible to consider the maximum load
pilot-type control console or panel. Pilot control panels either shall be that the switchboard is intended to control in a given installation,
part of the switchboard or shall be permitted to be at another location. provided that the following apply:
(c) Intermediate. A stage switchboard with circuit interconnections is (1) All feeders supplying the switchboard shall be protected by an
a secondary switchboard (patch panel) or panelboard remote to the overcurrent device with a rating not greater than the ampacity of the
primary stage switchboard. It shall contain overcurrent protection. Where feeder.
the required branch-circuit overcurrent protection is provided in the (2) The opening of the overcurrent device shall not affect the proper
dimmer panel, it shall be permitted to be omitted from the intermediate operation of the egress or emergency lighting systems.
switchboard.
FPN: For calculation of stage switchboard feeder loads, see 2.20.3.1.
5.20.2.7 Stage Switchboard Feeders.
5.20.3 Fixed Stage Equipment Other Than Switchboards
(a) Type of Feeder. Feeders supplying stage switchboards shall be one
of the types in 5.20.2.7(a)(1) through (a)(3). 5.20.3.1 Circuit Loads.

(1) Single Feeder. A single feeder disconnected by a single (a) Circuits Rated 20 Amperes or Less. Footlights, border lights, and
disconnect device. proscenium sidelights shall be arranged so that no branch circuit
supplying such equipment carries a load exceeding 20 amperes.
(2) Multiple Feeders to Intermediate Stage Switchboard (Patch
Panel). Multiple feeders of unlimited quantity shall be permitted, (b) Circuits Rated Greater Than 20 Amperes. Where only heavy-
provided that all multiple feeders are part of a single system. Where duty lampholders are used, such circuits shall be permitted to comply
combined, neutral conductors in a given raceway shall be of sufficient with Article 2.10 for circuits supplying heavy-duty lampholders.
ampacity to carry the maximum unbalanced current supplied by multiple
feeder conductors in the same raceway, but they need not be greater than
5.20.3.2 Conductor Insulation. Foot, border, proscenium, or portable (b) Cords and Cables for Border Lights.
strip lights and connector strips shall be wired with conductors that have
insulation suitable for the temperature at which the conductors are (1) General. Cords and cables for supply to border lights shall be
operated, but not less than 125°C. The ampacity of the 125°C conductors listed for extra-hard usage. The cords and cables shall be suitably
shall be that of 60°C conductors. All drops from connector strips shall be supported. Such cords and cables shall be employed only where flexible
90°C wire sized to the ampacity of 60°C cords and cables with no more conductors are necessary. Ampacity of the conductors shall be as
than 150 mm of conductor extending into the connector strip. Section provided in 4.0.1.5.
3.10.1.15(b)(2)a shall not apply.
(2) Cords and Cables Not in Contact with Heat-Producing
FPN: See Table 3.10.1.13 for conductor types. Equipment. Listed multiconductor extra-hard-usage-type cords and
cables not in direct contact with equipment containing heat-producing
5.20.3.3 Footlights. elements shall be permitted to have their ampacity determined by Table
5.20.3.4. Maximum load current in any conductor with an ampacity
(a) Metal Trough Construction. Where metal trough construction is determined by Table 5.20.3.4 shall not exceed the values in Table
employed for footlights, the trough containing the circuit conductors 5.20.3.4.
shall be made of sheet metal not lighter than 0.8 mm and treated to
prevent oxidation. Lampholder terminals shall be kept at least 12 mm
from the metal of the trough. The circuit conductors shall be soldered to
the lampholder terminals. Table 5.20.3.4 Ampacity of Listed Extra-Hard-Usage Cords and
Cables with Temperature Ratings of 75ºC and 90ºC*
(b) Other-Than-Metal Trough Construction. Where the metal [Based on Ambient Temperature of 30ºC]
trough construction specified in 5.20.3.3(a) is not used, footlights shall Temperature Rating of Maximum
consist of individual outlets with lampholders wired with rigid metal Conductor Size Cords and Cable Rating of
conduit, intermediate metal conduit, or flexible metal conduit, Type MC [mm2 (mm dia.)] Overcurrent
0 0
cable, or mineral-insulated, metal-sheathed cable. The circuit conductors 75 C 90 C
Device
shall be soldered to the lampholder terminals. 2.0 (1.6) 24 28 15
3.5 (2.0) 32 35 20
(c) Disappearing Footlights. Disappearing footlights shall be 5.5 (2.6) 41 47 25
arranged so that the current supply is automatically disconnected when 8.0 (3.2) 57 65 35
the footlights are replaced in the storage recesses designed for them. 14 77 87 45
22 101 114 60
5.20.3.4 Borders and Proscenium Sidelights. 30 133 152 80
*Ampacity shown is the ampacity for multiconductor cords and cables where only
(a) General. Borders and proscenium sidelights shall be as follows: three copper conductors are current-carrying. If the number of current-carrying
conductors in a cord or cable exceeds three and the load diversity factor is a minimum of
(1) Constructed as specified in 5.20.3.3 50 percent, the ampacity of each conductor shall be reduced as shown in the following
table.
(2) Suitably stayed and supported
(3) Designed so that the flanges of the reflectors or other adequate
guards protect the lamps from mechanical damage and from accidental
contact with scenery or other combustible material
 Number of Conductors Percent of Ampacity operable switches, one switch being placed at a readily accessible
4-6 80 location on stage and the other where designated by the authority having
7-24 70 jurisdiction. The device shall be designed for the full voltage of the
25-42 60 circuit to which it is connected, no resistance being inserted. The device
43 and above 50 shall be located in the loft above the scenery and shall be enclosed in a
Note: Ultimate insulation temperature. In no case shall conductors be associated together suitable metal box having a tight, self-closing door.
in such a way with respect to the kind of circuit, the wiring method used, or the number of
conductors such that the temperature limit of the conductors will be exceeded.
A neutral conductor that carries only the unbalanced current from other conductors of the 5.20.4 Portable Switchboards on Stage
same circuit need not be considered as a current-carrying conductor.
In a 3-wire circuit consisting of two phase wires and the neutral of a 4-wire, 3-phase,
wye-connected system, a common conductor carries approximately the same current as
5.20.4.1 Road Show Connection Panel (A Type of Patch Panel). A
the line-to-neutral currents of the other conductors and shall be considered to be a current- panel designed to allow for road show connection of portable stage
carrying conductor. switchboards to fixed lighting outlets by means of permanently installed
On a 4-wire, 3-phase, wye circuit where the major portion of the load consists of
nonlinear loads such as electric-discharge lighting, electronic computer/data processing, or supplementary circuits. The panel, supplementary circuits, and outlets
similar equipment, there are harmonic currents present in the neutral conductor, and the shall comply with 5.20.4.1(a) through (d).
neutral shall be considered to be a current-carrying conductor.
(a) Load Circuits. Circuits shall terminate in grounding-type polarized
inlets of current and voltage rating that match the fixed-load receptacle.
5.20.3.5 Receptacles. Receptacles for electrical equipment on stages
shall be rated in amperes. Conductors supplying receptacles shall be in (b) Circuit Transfer. Circuits that are transferred between fixed and
accordance with Articles 3.10 and 4.0. portable switchboards shall have all circuit conductors transferred
simultaneously.
5.20.3.6 Connector Strips, Drop Boxes, Floor Pockets, and Other
Outlet Enclosures. Receptacles for the connection of portable stage- (c) Overcurrent Protection. The supply devices of these
lighting equipment shall be pendant or mounted in suitable pockets or supplementary circuits shall be protected by branch-circuit overcurrent
enclosures and shall comply with 5.20.3.5. Supply cables for connector protective devices. The individual supplementary circuit, within the road
strips and drop boxes shall be as specified in 5.20.3.4(b). show connection panel and theater, shall be protected by branch-circuit
overcurrent protective devices of suitable ampacity installed within the
5.20.3.7 Backstage Lamps (Bare Bulbs). Lamps (bare bulbs) installed road show connection panel.
in backstage and ancillary areas where they can come in contact with
scenery shall be located and guarded so as to be free from physical (d) Enclosure. Panel construction shall be in accordance with Article
damage and shall provide an air space of not less than 50 mm between 4.8.
such lamps and any combustible material.
5.20.4.2 Supply. Portable switchboards shall be supplied only from
Exception: Decorative lamps installed in scenery shall not be considered power outlets of sufficient voltage and ampere rating. Such power outlets
to be backstage lamps for the purpose of this section. shall include only externally operable, enclosed fused switches or circuit
breakers mounted on stage or at the permanent switchboard in locations
5.20.3.8 Curtain Machines. Curtain machines shall be listed. readily accessible from the stage floor. Provisions for connection of an
equipment grounding conductor shall be provided. The neutral of feeders
5.20.3.9 Smoke Ventilator Control. Where stage smoke ventilators are supplying solid-state, 3-phase, 4-wire dimmer systems shall be
released by an electrical device, the circuit operating the device shall be considered a current-carrying conductor.
normally closed and shall be controlled by at least two externally
5.20.4.3 Overcurrent Protection. Circuits from portable switchboards b. Reactor-type, autotransformer, and solid-state dimmers —
directly supplying equipment containing incandescent lamps of not over 125°C
300 watts shall be protected by overcurrent protective devices having a
rating or setting of not over 20 amperes. Circuits for lampholders over All control wiring shall comply with Article 7.25.
300 watts shall be permitted where overcurrent protection complies with
Article 2.10. (2) Protection. Each conductor shall have an ampacity not less than
the rating of the circuit breaker, switch, or fuse that it supplies. Circuit
5.20.4.4 Construction and Feeders. Portable switchboards and feeders interrupting and bus bracing shall be in accordance with 1.10.1.9 and
for use on stages shall comply with 5.20.4.4(a) through (p). 1.10.1.10. The short-circuit current rating shall be marked on the
switchboard.
(a) Enclosure. Portable switchboards shall be placed within an Conductors shall be enclosed in metal wireways or shall be securely
enclosure of substantial construction, which shall be permitted to be fastened in position and shall be bushed where they pass through metal.
arranged so that the enclosure is open during operation. Enclosures of
wood shall be completely lined with sheet metal of not less than 0.50 mm (g) Pilot Light. A pilot light shall be provided within the enclosure and
and shall be well galvanized, enameled, or otherwise properly coated to shall be connected to the circuit supplying the board so that the opening
prevent corrosion or be of a corrosion-resistant material. of the master switch does not cut off the supply to the lamp. This lamp
shall be on an individual branch circuit having overcurrent protection
(b) Energized Parts. There shall not be exposed energized parts rated or set at not over 15 amperes.
within the enclosure.
(h) Supply Conductors.
(c) Switches and Circuit Breakers. All switches and circuit breakers
shall be of the externally operable, enclosed type. (1) General. The supply to a portable switchboard shall be by means
of listed extra-hard usage cords or cables. The supply cords or cable shall
(d) Circuit Protection. Overcurrent devices shall be provided in each terminate within the switchboard enclosure, in an externally operable
ungrounded conductor of every circuit supplied through the switchboard. fused master switch or circuit breaker or in a connector assembly
Enclosures shall be provided for all overcurrent devices in addition to the identified for the purpose. The supply cords or cable (and connector
switchboard enclosure. assembly) shall have sufficient ampacity to carry the total load connected
to the switchboard and shall be protected by overcurrent devices.
(e) Dimmers. The terminals of dimmers shall be provided with
enclosures, and dimmer faceplates shall be arranged so that accidental (2) Single-Conductor Cables. Single-conductor portable supply cable
contact cannot be readily made with the faceplate contacts. sets shall not be smaller than 30 mm2 conductors. The equipment
grounding conductor shall not be smaller than 14 mm2 conductor. Single-
(f) Interior Conductors. conductor grounded neutral cables for a supply shall be sized in
accordance with 5.20.4.4(o)(2). Where single conductors are paralleled
(1) Type. All conductors other than busbars within the switchboard for increased ampacity, the paralleled conductors shall be of the same
enclosure shall be stranded. Conductors shall be approved for an length and size. Single-conductor supply cables shall be grouped together
operating temperature at least equal to the approved operating but not bundled. The equipment grounding conductor shall be permitted
temperature of the dimming devices used in the switchboard and in no to be of a different type, provided it meets the other requirements of this
case less than the following: section, and it shall be permitted to be reduced in size as permitted by
2.50.6.13. Grounded (neutral) and equipment grounding conductors shall
a. Resistance-type dimmers — 200°C; or be identified in accordance with 2.0.1.6, 2.50.6.10, and 3.10.1.12.
Grounded conductors shall be permitted to be identified by marking at additional overcurrent devices on its load side.
least the first 150 mm from both ends of each length of conductor with c. The supply conductors shall not penetrate walls, floors, or
white or gray. Equipment grounding conductors shall be permitted to be ceilings or be run through doors or traffic areas. The supply conductors
identified by marking at least the first 150 mm from both ends of each shall be adequately protected from physical damage.
length of conductor with green or green with yellow stripes. Where more d. The supply conductors shall be suitably terminated in an
than one nominal voltage exists within the same premises, each approved manner.
ungrounded conductor shall be identified by system. e. The supply conductors shall be supported in an approved
manner at least 2 100 mm above the floor except at terminations.
(3) Supply Conductors Not Over 3 000 mm Long. Where supply f. The supply conductors shall not be bundled.
conductors do not exceed 3 000 mm in length between supply and g. Tap conductors shall be in unbroken lengths.
switchboard or supply and a subsequent overcurrent device, the supply
conductors shall be permitted to be reduced in size where all of the (5) Supply Conductors Not Reduced in Size. Supply conductors not
following conditions are met: reduced in size under provisions of 5.20.4.4(h)(3) or 5.20.4.4(h)(4) shall
be permitted to pass through holes in walls specifically designed for the
a. The ampacity of the supply conductors shall be at least one- purpose. If penetration is through the fire-resistant–rated wall, it shall be
quarter of the ampacity of the supply overcurrent protection device. in accordance with 3.0.1.21.
b. The supply conductors shall terminate in a single overcurrent
protection device that will limit the load to the ampacity of the supply (i) Cable Arrangement. Cables shall be protected by bushings where
conductors. This single overcurrent device shall be permitted to supply they pass through enclosures and shall be arranged so that tension on the
additional overcurrent devices on its load side. cable is not transmitted to the connections. Where power conductors pass
c. The supply conductors shall not penetrate walls, floors, or through metal, the requirements of 3.0.1.20 shall apply.
ceilings or be run through doors or traffic areas. The supply conductors
shall be adequately protected from physical damage. (j) Number of Supply Interconnections. Where connectors are used
d. The supply conductors shall be suitably terminated in an in a supply conductor, there shall be a maximum number of three
approved manner. interconnections (mated connector pairs) where the total length from
e. Conductors shall be continuous without splices or connectors. supply to switchboard does not exceed 30 m. In cases where the total
f. Conductors shall not be bundled. length from supply to switchboard exceeds 30 m, one additional
g. Conductors shall be supported above the floor in an approved interconnection shall be permitted for each additional 30 m of supply
manner. conductor.

(4) Supply Conductors Not Over 6 000 mm Long. Where supply (k) Single-Pole Separable Connectors. Where single-pole portable
conductors do not exceed 6 000 mm in length between supply and cable connectors are used, they shall be listed and of the locking type.
switchboard or supply and a subsequent overcurrent protection device, Sections 4.0.1.10, 4.6.1.6, and 4.6.1.7 shall not apply to listed single-pole
the supply conductors shall be permitted to be reduced in size where all separable connectors and single-conductor cable assemblies utilizing
of the following conditions are met: listed single-pole separable connectors. Where paralleled sets of current-
carrying, single-pole separable connectors are provided as input devices,
a. The ampacity of the supply conductors shall be at least one-half they shall be prominently labeled with a warning indicating the presence
of the ampacity of the supply overcurrent protection device. of internal parallel connections. The use of single-pole separable
b. The supply conductors shall terminate in a single overcurrent connectors shall comply with at least one of the following conditions:
protection device that limits the load to the ampacity of the supply
conductors. This single overcurrent device shall be permitted to supply (1) Connection and disconnection of connectors are only possible
where the supply connectors are interlocked to the source, and it is not neutral terminal and its associated busbar, equivalent wiring, or both,
possible to connect or disconnect connectors when the supply is shall have an ampacity equal to at least that of the largest ungrounded
energized. single-phase supply terminal.
(2) Line connectors are of the listed sequential-interlocking type so
that load connectors shall be connected in the following sequence: (2) Supply Neutral. The power supply conductors for portable
switchboards shall be sized considering the neutral as a current-carrying
a. Equipment grounding conductor connection conductor. Where single-conductor feeder cables, not installed in
b. Grounded circuit conductor connection, if provided raceways, are used on multiphase circuits, the grounded neutral
c. Ungrounded conductor connection, and that disconnection shall conductor shall have an ampacity of at least 130 percent of the
be in the reverse order ungrounded circuit conductors feeding the portable switchboard.

(3) A caution notice shall be provided adjacent to the line connectors (p) Licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical
indicating that plug connection shall be in the following order: practitioner under the supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner.
The routing of portable supply conductors, the making and breaking of
a. Equipment grounding conductor connectors supply connectors and other supply connections, and the energization
b. Grounded circuit conductor connectors, if provided and de-energization of supply services shall be performed by licensed
c. Ungrounded conductor connectors, and that disconnection shall electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner under the
be in the reverse order supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner, and portable
switchboards shall be so marked, indicating this requirement in a
(l) Protection of Supply Conductors and Connectors. All supply permanent and conspicuous manner.
conductors and connectors shall be protected against physical damage by
an approved means. This protection shall not be required to be raceways. Exception: A portable switchboard shall be permitted to be connected to
a permanently installed supply receptacle by other than licensed
(m) Flanged Surface Inlets. Flanged surface inlets (recessed plugs) electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner under the
that are used to accept the power shall be rated in amperes. supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner, provided that the supply
receptacle is protected for its rated ampacity by an overcurrent device of
(n) Terminals. Terminals to which stage cables are connected shall be not greater than 150 amperes, and where the receptacle,
located so as to permit convenient access to the terminals. interconnection, and switchboard comply with all of the following:
(a) Employ listed multipole connectors suitable for the purpose for
(o) Neutral. every supply interconnection
(b) Prevent access to all supply connections by the general public
(1) Neutral Terminal. In portable switchboard equipment designed (c) Employ listed extra-hard usage multiconductor cords or cables
for use with 3-phase, 4-wire with ground supply, the supply neutral with an ampacity suitable for the type of load and not less than the
terminal, its associated busbar, or equivalent wiring, or both, shall have ampere rating of the connectors.
an ampacity equal to at least twice the ampacity of the largest
ungrounded supply terminal. 5.20.5 Portable Stage Equipment Other Than Switchboards

Exception: Where portable switchboard equipment is specifically 5.20.5.1 Arc Lamps. Arc lamps, including enclosed arc lamps and
constructed and identified to be internally converted in the field, in an associated ballasts, shall be listed. Interconnecting cord sets and
approved manner, from use with a balanced 3-phase, 4-wire with ground interconnecting cords and cables shall be extra-hard usage type and
supply to a balanced single-phase, 3-wire with ground supply, the supply listed.
 where it passes through metal and shall be arranged so that tension on the
5.20.5.2 Portable Power Distribution Units. Portable power cable will not be transmitted to the connections.
distribution units shall comply with 5.20.5.2(a) through (e).
FPN No. 1: See 5.20.3.2 for wiring of portable strips.
(a) Enclosure. The construction shall be such that no current-carrying FPN No. 2: See 5.20.5.8(a)(3) for insulation types required on single conductors.
part will be exposed.
5.20.5.5 Festoons. Joints in festoon wiring shall be staggered. Lamps
(b) Receptacles and Overcurrent Protection. Receptacles shall enclosed in lanterns or similar devices of combustible material shall be
comply with 5.20.3.5 and shall have branch-circuit overcurrent equipped with guards.
protection in the box. Fuses and circuit breakers shall be protected
against physical damage. Cords or cables supplying pendant receptacles 5.20.5.6 Special Effects. Electrical devices used for simulating lightning,
shall be listed for extra-hard usage. waterfalls, and the like shall be constructed and located so that flames,
sparks, or hot particles cannot come in contact with combustible
(c) Busbars and Terminals. Busbars shall have an ampacity equal to material.
the sum of the ampere ratings of all the circuits connected to the busbar.
Lugs shall be provided for the connection of the master cable. 5.20.5.7 Multipole Branch-Circuit Cable Connectors. Multipole
branch-circuit cable connectors, male and female, for flexible conductors
(d) Flanged Surface Inlets. Flanged surface inlets (recessed plugs) shall be constructed so that tension on the cord or cable is not transmitted
that are used to accept the power shall be rated in amperes. to the connections. The female half shall be attached to the load end of
the power supply cord or cable. The connector shall be rated in amperes
(e) Cable Arrangement. Cables shall be adequately protected where and designed so that differently rated devices cannot be connected
they pass through enclosures and be arranged so that tension on the cable together; however, a 20-ampere T-slot receptacle shall be permitted to
is not transmitted to the terminations. accept a 15-ampere attachment plug of the same voltage rating.
Alternating-current multipole connectors shall be polarized and comply
5.20.5.3 Bracket Fixture Wiring. with 4.6.1.6 and 4.6.1.9.

(a) Bracket Wiring. Brackets for use on scenery shall be wired FPN: See 4.0.1.10 for pull at terminals.
internally, and the fixture stem shall be carried through to the back of the
scenery where a bushing shall be placed on the end of the stem. 5.20.5.8 Conductors for Portables.
Externally wired brackets or other fixtures shall be permitted where
wired with cords designed for hard usage that extend through scenery (a) Conductor Type.
and without joint or splice in canopy of fixture back and terminate in an
approved-type stage connector located, where practical, within 460 mm (1) General. Flexible conductors, including cable extensions, used to
of the fixture. supply portable stage equipment shall be listed extra-hard usage cords or
cables.
(b) Mounting. Fixtures shall be securely fastened in place.
(2) Stand Lamps. Listed, hard usage cord shall be permitted to
5.20.5.4 Portable Strips. Portable strips shall be constructed in supply stand lamps where the cord is not subject to physical damage and
accordance with the requirements for border lights and proscenium is protected by an overcurrent device rated at not over 20 amperes.
sidelights in 5.20.3.4(a). The supply cable shall be protected by bushings
(3) High-Temperature Applications. A special assembly of
conductors in sleeving not longer than 1 000 mm shall be permitted to be (a) No Reduction in Current Rating. Each receptacle and its
employed in lieu of flexible cord if the individual wires are stranded and corresponding cable shall have the same current and voltage rating as the
rated not less than 125°C and the outer sleeve is glass fiber with a wall plug supplying it. It shall not be utilized in a stage circuit with a greater
thickness of at least 0.635 mm. current rating.
Portable stage equipment requiring flexible supply conductors with a
higher temperature rating where one end is permanently attached to the (b) Connectors. All connectors shall be wired in accordance with
equipment shall be permitted to employ alternate, suitable conductors as 5.20.5.7.
determined by a qualified testing laboratory and recognized test
standards. (c) Conductor Type. Conductors for adapters and two-fers shall be
listed, extra-hard usage or listed, hard usage (junior hard service) cord.
(4) Breakouts. Listed, hard usage (junior hard service) cords shall be Hard usage (junior hard service) cord shall be restricted in overall length
permitted in breakout assemblies where all of the following conditions to 1 000 mm.
are met:
5.20.6 Dressing Rooms
a. The cords are utilized to connect between a single multipole
connector containing two or more branch circuits and multiple 2-pole, 3- 5.20.6.1 Pendant Lampholders. Pendant lampholders shall not be
wire connectors. installed in dressing rooms.
b. The longest cord in the breakout assembly does not exceed 6
000 mm. 5.20.6.2 Lamp Guards. All exposed incandescent lamps in dressing
c. The breakout assembly is protected from physical damage by rooms, where less than 2 400 mm from the floor, shall be equipped with
attachment over its entire length to a pipe, truss, tower, scaffold, or other open-end guards riveted to the outlet box cover or otherwise sealed or
substantial support structure. locked in place.
d. All branch circuits feeding the breakout assembly are protected
by overcurrent devices rated at not over 20 amperes. 5.20.6.3 Switches Required. All lights and any receptacles adjacent to
the mirror(s) and above the dressing table counter(s) installed in dressing
(b) Conductor Ampacity. The ampacity of conductors shall be as rooms shall be controlled by wall switches installed in the dressing
given in 4.0.1.5, except multiconductor, listed, extra-hard usage portable room(s). Each switch controlling receptacles adjacent to the mirror(s)
cords that are not in direct contact with equipment containing heat- and above the dressing table counter(s) shall be provided with a pilot
producing elements shall be permitted to have their ampacity determined light located outside the dressing room, adjacent to the door to indicate
by Table 5.20.3.4. Maximum load current in any conductor with an when the receptacles are energized. Other outlets installed in the dressing
ampacity determined by Table 5.20.3.4 shall not exceed the values in room shall not be required to be switched.
Table 5.20.3.4.
5.20.7 Grounding
Exception: Where alternate conductors are allowed in 5.20.5.8(a)(3),
their ampacity shall be as given in the appropriate table in this Code for 5.20.7.1 Grounding. All metal raceways and metal-sheathed cables shall
the types of conductors employed. be grounded. The metal frames and enclosures of all equipment,
including border lights and portable luminaires (lighting fixtures), shall
5.20.5.9 Adapters. Adapters, two-fers, and other single- and multiple- be grounded. Grounding, where used, shall be in accordance with Article
circuit outlet devices shall comply with 5.20.5.9(a), (b), and (c). 2.50.
 ARTICLE 5.25 — CARNIVALS, CIRCUSES, FAIRS,
AND SIMILAR EVENTS 5.25.1.6 Protection of Electrical Equipment. Electrical equipment and
wiring methods in or on rides, concessions, or other units shall be
5.25.1 General Requirements provided with mechanical protection where such equipment or wiring
methods are subject to physical damage.
5.25.1.1 Scope. This article covers the installation of portable wiring and
equipment for carnivals, circuses, fairs, and similar functions, including 5.25.2 Power Sources
wiring in or on all structures.
5.25.2.1 Services. Services shall comply with 5.25.2.1(a) and
FPN: Portable as used in this Article refers to the non-permanent or transitory nature 5.25.2.1(b).
of the installations covered here, and not interpreted to mean installations (including
equipment) that can be easily moved as applied elsewhere in this Code.
(a) Guarding. Service equipment shall not be installed in a location
5.25.1.3 Other Articles. that is accessible to unqualified persons, unless the equipment is
lockable.
(a) Portable Wiring and Equipment. Wherever the requirements of
other articles of this Code and Article 5.25 differ, the requirements of (b) Mounting and Location. Service equipment shall be mounted on
Article 5.25 shall apply to the portable wiring and equipment. solid backing and be installed so as to be protected from the weather,
unless of weatherproof construction.
(b) Permanent Structures. Articles 5.18 and 5.20 shall apply to
wiring in permanent structures. 5.25.2.2 Multiple Sources of Supply. Where multiple services or
separately derived systems or both supply rides, attractions, and other
(c) Audio Signal Processing, Amplification, and Reproduction structures, all sources of supply that serve rides, attractions, or other
Equipment. Article 6.40 shall apply to the wiring and installation of structures separated by less than 3 600 mm shall be bonded to the same
audio signal processing, amplification, and reproduction equipment. grounding electrode system.

(d) Attractions Utilizing Pools, Fountains, and Similar Installations 5.25.3 Wiring Methods
with Contained Volumes of Water. This equipment shall be installed to
comply with the applicable requirements of Article 6.80. 5.25.3.1 Wiring Methods.

5.25.1.5 Overhead Conductor Clearances. (a) Type. Where flexible cords or cables are used, they shall be listed
for extra hard usage. Where flexible cords or cables are used and are not
(a) Vertical Clearances. Conductors shall have a vertical clearance to subject to physical damage, they shall be permitted to be listed for hard
ground in accordance with 2.25.1.18. These clearances shall apply only usage. Where used outdoors, flexible cords and cables shall also be listed
to wiring installed outside of tents and concessions. for wet locations and shall be sunlight resistant. Extra-hard usage flexible
cords or cables shall be permitted for use as permanent wiring on
(b) Clearance to Rides and Attractions. Amusement rides and portable amusement rides and attractions where not subject to physical
amusement attractions shall be maintained not less than 4 500 mm in any damage.
direction from overhead conductors operating at 600 volts or less, except
for the conductors supplying the amusement ride or attraction. (b) Single-Conductor. Single-conductor cable shall be permitted only
Amusement rides or attractions shall not be located under or within 4 500 in sizes 30 mm2 or larger.
mm horizontally of conductors operating in excess of 600 volts.
 (c) Open Conductors. Open conductors are prohibited except as part shall be protected from accidental breakage by a suitable fixture or
of a listed assembly or festoon lighting installed in accordance with lampholder with a guard.
Article 2.25.
5.25.3.3 Portable Distribution or Termination Boxes. Portable
(d) Splices. Flexible cords or cables shall be continuous without splice distribution or termination boxes shall comply with 5.25.3.3(a) through
or tap between boxes or fittings. 5.25.3.3(d).

(e) Cord Connectors. Cord connectors shall not be laid on the ground (a) Construction. Boxes shall be designed so that no live parts are
unless listed for wet locations. Connectors and cable connections shall exposed to accidental contact. Where installed outdoors, the box shall be
not be placed in audience traffic paths or within areas accessible to the of weatherproof construction and mounted so that the bottom of the
public unless guarded. enclosure is not less than 150 mm above the ground.

(f) Support. Wiring for an amusement ride, attraction, tent, or similar (b) Busbars and Terminals. Busbars shall have an ampere rating not
structure shall not be supported by any other ride or structure unless less than the overcurrent device supplying the feeder supplying the box.
specifically designed for the purpose. Where conductors terminate directly on busbars, busbar connectors shall
be provided.
(g) Protection. Flexible cords or cables accessible to the public shall
be arranged to minimize the tripping hazard and shall be permitted to be (c) Receptacles and Overcurrent Protection. Receptacles shall have
covered with nonconductive matting, provided that the matting does not overcurrent protection installed within the box. The overcurrent
constitute a greater tripping hazard than the uncovered cables. It shall be protection shall not exceed the ampere rating of the receptacle, except as
permitted to bury cables. The requirements of 3.0.1.5 shall not apply. permitted in Article 4.30 for motor loads.

(h) Boxes and Fittings. A box or fitting shall be installed at each (d) Single-Pole Connectors. Where single-pole connectors are used,
connection point, outlet, switchpoint, or junction point. they shall comply with 5.30.2.12.

5.25.3.2 Rides, Tents and Concessions. 5.25.3.4 Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI) Protection.

(a) Disconnecting Means. Each ride and concession shall be provided (a) Where GFCI Protection Is Required. The ground-fault circuit
with a fused disconnect switch or circuit breaker located within sight and interrupter shall be permitted to be an integral part of the attachment plug
within 1 800 mm of the operator’s station. The disconnecting means shall or located in the power-supply cord, within 300 mm of the attachment
be readily accessible to the operator, including when the ride is in plug. Listed cord sets incorporating ground-fault circuit-interrupter for
operation. Where accessible to unqualified persons, the enclosure for the personnel shall be permitted.
switch or circuit breaker shall be of the lockable type. A shunt trip device
that opens the fused disconnect or circuit breaker when a switch located (1) 125-volt and/or 250-volt, single-phase, 15- and 20-ampere non-
in the ride operator’s console is closed shall be a permissible method of locking type receptacles used for disassembly and reassembly or readily
opening the circuit. accessible to the general public.

(b) Portable Wiring Inside Tents and Concessions. Electrical wiring (2) Equipment that is readily accessible to the general public and
for lighting, where installed inside of tents and concessions, shall be supplied from a 125-volt and/or 250-volt, single-phase, 15- or 20-ampere
securely installed and, where subject to physical damage, shall be branch circuit.
provided with mechanical protection. All lamps for general illumination
 (b) Where GFCI Protection Is Not Required. Receptacles that only studios and motion picture studios using either film or electronic
facilitate quick disconnecting and reconnecting of electrical equipment cameras, except as provided in 5.20.1.1, and exchanges, factories,
shall not be required to be provided with GFCI protection. These laboratories, stages, or a portion of the building in which film or tape
receptacles shall be of the locking type. more than 22 mm in width is exposed, developed, printed, cut, edited,
rewound, repaired, or stored.
(c) Where GFCI Protection Is Not Permitted. Egress lighting shall
not be protected by a GFCI. FPN: For methods of protecting against cellulose nitrate film hazards, see NFPA 40-
2001, Standard for the Storage and Handling of Cellulose Nitrate Motion Picture Film.

5.25.4 Grounding and Bonding

5.30.1.2 Definitions.
5.25.4.1 Equipment Bonding. The following equipment connected to
Alternating-Current Power Distribution Box (Alternating-Current
the same source shall be bonded:
Plugging Box, Scatter Box). An ac distribution center or box that
contains one or more grounding-type polarized receptacles that may
(1) Metal raceways and metal-sheathed cable
contain overcurrent protection devices.
(2) Metal enclosures of electric equipment
(3) Metal frames and metal parts of rides, concessions, tents, trailers,
Bull Switch. An externally operated wall-mounted safety switch that
trucks, or other equipment that contain or support electrical equipment
may or may not contain overcurrent protection and is designed for the
connection of portable cables and cords.
5.25.4.2 Equipment Grounding. All equipment requiring grounding
shall be grounded by an equipment grounding conductor of a type and
Location (Shooting Location). A place outside a motion picture
size recognized by 2.50.6.9 and installed in accordance with Article 250.
studio where a production or part of it is filmed or recorded.
The equipment grounding conductor shall be bonded to the system
grounded conductor at the service disconnecting means or, in the case of
Location Board (Deuce Board). Portable equipment containing a
a separately derived system such as a generator, at the generator or first
lighting contactor or contactors and overcurrent protection designed for
disconnecting means supplied by the generator. The grounded circuit
remote control of stage lighting.
conductor shall not be connected to the equipment grounding conductor
on the load side of the service disconnecting means or on the load side of
Motion Picture Studio (Lot). A building or group of buildings and
a separately derived system disconnecting means.
other structures designed, constructed, or permanently altered for use by
the entertainment industry for the purpose of motion picture or television
5.25.4.3 Grounding Conductor Continuity Assurance. The continuity
production.
of the grounding conductor system used to reduce electrical shock
hazards as required by 2.50.6.5, 2.50.7.9, 4.6.1.3(c), and 5.90.1.4(d) shall
Plugging Box. A dc device consisting of one or more 2-pole, 2-wire,
be verified each time that portable electrical equipment is connected.
nonpolarized, nongrounding-type receptacles intended to be used on dc
circuits only.
ARTICLE 5.30 — MOTION PICTURE AND TELEVISION
Portable Equipment. Equipment intended to be moved from one
STUDIOS AND SIMILAR LOCATIONS
place to another.
5.30.1 General
Single-Pole Separable Connector. A device that is installed at the
ends of portable, flexible, single-conductor cable that is used to establish
5.30.1.1 Scope. The requirements of this article shall apply to television
connection or disconnection between two cables or one cable and a conductor sized in accordance with Table 2.50.6.13, Type MI cable, or in
single-pole, panel-mounted separable connector. approved raceways.

Spider (Cable Splicing Block). A device that contains busbars that are Exception: Communications circuits; audio signal processing,
insulated from each other for the purpose of splicing or distributing amplification, and reproduction circuits; Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3
power to portable cables and cords that are terminated with single-pole remote-control or signaling circuits and power-limited fire alarm
busbar connectors. circuits shall be permitted to be wired in accordance with Articles 6.40,
7.25, 7.60, and 8.0.
Stage Effect (Special Effect). An electrical or electromechanical piece
of equipment used to simulate a distinctive visual or audible effect such 5.30.2.2 Portable Wiring.
as wind machines, lightning simulators, sunset projectors, and the like.
(a) Stage Set Wiring. The wiring for stage set lighting and other
Stage Property. An article or object used as a visual element in a supply wiring not fixed as to location shall be done with listed hard
motion picture or television production, except painted backgrounds usage flexible cords and cables. Where subject to physical damage, such
(scenery) and costumes. wiring shall be listed extra-hard usage flexible cords and cables. Splices
or taps in cables shall be permitted if the total connected load does not
Stage Set. A specific area set up with temporary scenery and exceed the maximum ampacity of the cable.
properties designed and arranged for a particular scene in a motion
picture or television production. (b) Stage Effects and Electrical Equipment Used as Stage
Properties. The wiring for stage effects and electrical equipment used as
Stand Lamp (Work Light). A portable stand that contains a general- stage properties shall be permitted to be wired with single- or
purpose luminaire (lighting fixture) or lampholder with guard for the multiconductor listed flexible cords or cables if the conductors are
purpose of providing general illumination in the studio or stage. protected from physical damage and secured to the scenery by approved
cable ties or by insulated staples. Splices or taps shall be permitted where
Television Studio or Motion Picture Stage (Sound Stage). A such are made with listed devices and the circuit is protected at not more
building or portion of a building usually insulated from the outside noise than 20 amperes.
and natural light for use by the entertainment industry for the purpose of
motion picture, television, or commercial production. (c) Other Electrical Equipment. Cords and cables other than extra-
hard usage, where supplied as a part of a listed assembly, shall be
5.30.1.6 Portable Equipment. Portable stage and studio lighting permitted.
equipment and portable power distribution equipment shall be permitted
for temporary use outdoors if the equipment is supervised by licensed 5.30.2.3 Stage Lighting and Effects Control. Switches used for studio
electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner under the stage set lighting and effects (on the stages and lots and on location) shall
supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner while energized and be of the externally operable type. Where contactors are used as the
barriered from the general public. disconnecting means for fuses, an individual externally operable switch,
such as a tumbler switch, for the control of each contactor shall be
5.30.2 Stage or Set located at a distance of not more than 1 800 mm from the contactor, in
addition to remote-control switches. A single externally operable switch
5.30.2.1 Permanent Wiring. The permanent wiring shall be Type MC shall be permitted to simultaneously disconnect all the contactors on any
cable, Type AC cable containing an insulated equipment grounding one location board, where located at a distance of not more than 1 800
mm from the location board.
 protective devices (circuit breakers or fuses) for motion picture studio
5.30.2.4 Plugging Boxes. Each receptacle of dc plugging boxes shall be stage set lighting and the stage cables for such stage set lighting shall be
rated at not less than 30 amperes. as given in 5.30.2.8(a) through (g). The maximum ampacity allowed on a
given conductor, cable, or cord size shall be as given in the applicable
5.30.2.5 Enclosing and Guarding Live Parts. tables of Articles 3.10 and 4.0.

(a) Live Parts. Live parts shall be enclosed or guarded to prevent (a) Stage Cables. Stage cables for stage set lighting shall be protected
accidental contact by persons and objects. by means of overcurrent devices set at not more than 400 percent of the
ampacity given in the applicable tables of Articles 3.10 and 4.0.
(b) Switches. All switches shall be of the externally operable type.
(b) Feeders. In buildings used primarily for motion picture production,
(c) Rheostats. Rheostats shall be placed in approved cases or cabinets the feeders from the substations to the stages shall be protected by means
that enclose all live parts, having only the operating handles exposed. of overcurrent devices (generally located in the substation) having a
suitable ampere rating. The overcurrent devices shall be permitted to be
(d) Current-Carrying Parts. Current-carrying parts of bull switches, multipole or single-pole gang operated. No pole shall be required in the
location boards, spiders, and plugging boxes shall be enclosed, guarded, neutral conductor. The overcurrent device setting for each feeder shall
or located so that persons cannot accidentally come into contact with not exceed 400 percent of the ampacity of the feeder, as given in the
them or bring conductive material into contact with them. applicable tables of Article 3.10.

5.30.2.6 Portable Lamps. Portable lamps and work lights shall be (c) Cable Protection. Cables shall be protected by bushings where
equipped with flexible cords, composition or metal-sheathed porcelain they pass through enclosures and shall be arranged so that tension on the
sockets, and substantial guards. cable is not transmitted to the connections. Where power conductors pass
through metal, the requirements of 3.0.1.20 shall apply.
Exception: Portable lamps used as properties in a motion picture set or Portable feeder cables shall be permitted to temporarily penetrate fire-
television stage set, on a studio stage or lot, or on location shall not be rated walls, floors, or ceilings provided that all of the following apply:
considered to be portable lamps for the purpose of this section.
(1) The opening is of noncombustible material.
5.30.2.7 Portable Arc Lamps. (2) When in use, the penetration is sealed with a temporary seal of a
listed firestop material.
(a) Portable Carbon Arc Lamps. Portable carbon arc lamps shall be (3) When not in use, the opening shall be capped with a material of
substantially constructed. The arc shall be provided with an enclosure equivalent fire rating.
designed to retain sparks and carbons and to prevent persons or materials
from coming into contact with the arc or bare live parts. The enclosures (d) Location Boards. Overcurrent protection (fuses or circuit
shall be ventilated. All switches shall be of the externally operable type. breakers) shall be provided at the location boards. Fuses in the location
boards shall have an ampere rating of not over 400 percent of the
(b) Portable Noncarbon Arc Electric-Discharge Lamps. Portable ampacity of the cables between the location boards and the plugging
noncarbon arc lamps, including enclosed arc lamps, and associated boxes.
ballasts shall be listed. Interconnecting cord sets and interconnecting
cords and cables shall be extra-hard usage type and listed. (e) Plugging Boxes. Cables and cords supplied through plugging
boxes shall be of copper. Cables and cords smaller than 8.0 mm2 shall be
5.30.2.8 Overcurrent Protection — General. Automatic overcurrent attached to the plugging box by means of a plug containing two cartridge
fuses or a 2-pole circuit breaker. The rating of the fuses or the setting of 5.30.2.10 Grounding. Type MC cable, Type MI cable, metal raceways,
the circuit breaker shall not be over 400 percent of the rated ampacity of and all non–current-carrying metal parts of appliances, devices, and
the cables or cords as given in the applicable tables of Articles 3.10 and equipment shall be grounded as specified in Article 2.50. This shall not
4.0. Plugging boxes shall not be permitted on ac systems. apply to pendant and portable lamps, to stage lighting and stage sound
equipment, or to other portable and special stage equipment operating at
(f) Alternating-Current Power Distribution Boxes. Alternating- not over 150 volts dc to ground.
current power distribution boxes used on sound stages and shooting
locations shall contain connection receptacles of a polarized, grounding 5.30.2.11 Plugs and Receptacles.
type.
(a) Rating. Plugs and receptacles shall be rated in amperes. The
(g) Lighting. Work lights, stand lamps, and luminaires (fixtures) rated voltage rating of the plugs and receptacles shall not be less than the
1000 watts or less and connected to dc plugging boxes shall be by means circuit voltage. Plug and receptacle ampere ratings for ac circuits shall
of plugs containing two cartridge fuses not larger than 20 amperes, or not be less than the feeder or branch-circuit overcurrent device ampere
they shall be permitted to be connected to special outlets on circuits rating. Table 2.10.2.3(b)(2) shall not apply.
protected by fuses or circuit breakers rated at not over 20 amperes. Plug
fuses shall not be used unless they are on the load side of the fuse or (b) Interchangeability. Plugs and receptacles used in portable
circuit breakers on the location boards. professional motion picture and television equipment shall be permitted
to be interchangeable for ac or dc use on the same premises, provided
5.30.2.9 Sizing of Feeder Conductors for Television Studio Sets. they are listed for ac/dc use and marked in a suitable manner to identify
the system to which they are connected.
(a) General. It shall be permissible to apply the demand factors listed
in Table 5.30.2.9(a) to that portion of the maximum possible connected 5.30.2.12 Single-Pole Separable Connectors.
load for studio or stage set lighting for all permanently installed feeders
between substations and stages and to all permanently installed feeders (a) General. Where ac single-pole portable cable connectors are used,
between the main stage switchboard and stage distribution centers or they shall be listed and of the locking type. Sections 4.0.1.10, 4.6.1.6,
location boards. and 4.6.1.7 shall not apply to listed single-pole separable connections
and single-conductor cable assemblies utilizing listed single-pole
separable connectors. Where paralleled sets of current-carrying single-
Table 5.30.2.9(a) Demand Factors for Stage Set Lighting pole separable connectors are provided as input devices, they shall be
Portion of Stage Set Lighting Load to prominently labeled with a warning indicating the presence of internal
Feeder Demand parallel connections. The use of single-pole separable connectors shall
Which Demand Factor Applied
Factor comply with at least one of the following conditions:
(volt-amperes)
First 50 000 or less at 100 %
From 50 001 to 100 000 at 75% (1) Connection and disconnection of connectors are only possible
From 100 001 to 200 000 at 60% where the supply connectors are interlocked to the source and it is not
Remaining over 200 000 at 50% possible to connect or disconnect connectors when the supply is
energized.
(2) Line connectors are of the listed sequential-interlocking type so
that load connectors shall be connected in the following sequence:
(b) Portable Feeders. A demand factor of 50 percent of maximum
possible connected load shall be permitted for all portable feeders.
a. Equipment grounding conductor connection
 b. Grounded circuit conductor connection, if provided switch having a pole in each ungrounded conductor. This switch shall be
c. Ungrounded conductor connection, and that disconnection shall located outside of the vault and provided with a pilot light to indicate
be in the reverse order whether the switch is on or off. This switch shall disconnect from all
sources of supply all ungrounded conductors terminating in any outlet in
(3) A caution notice shall be provided adjacent to the line the vault.
connectors, indicating that plug connection shall be in the following
order: 5.30.5.2 Electrical Equipment in Cellulose Nitrate Film Storage
Vaults. Except as permitted in 5.30.5.1, no receptacles, outlets, heaters,
a. Equipment grounding conductor connectors portable lights, or other portable electric equipment shall be located in
b. Grounded circuit-conductor connectors, if provided cellulose nitrate film storage vaults. Electric motors shall be permitted,
c. Ungrounded conductor connectors, and that disconnection shall provided they are listed for the application and comply with Article 5.0,
be in the reverse order Class I, Division 2.

(b) Interchangeability. Single-pole separable connectors used in 5.30.6 Substations

portable professional motion picture and television equipment shall be
permitted to be interchangeable for ac or dc use or for different current 5.30.6.1 Substations. Wiring and equipment of over 600 volts, nominal,
ratings on the same premises, provided they are listed for ac/dc use and shall comply with Article 490.
marked in a suitable manner to identify the system to which they are
connected. 5.30.6.2 Portable Substations. Wiring and equipment in portable
substations shall conform to the sections applying to installations in
5.30.2.13 Branch Circuits. A branch circuit of any size supplying one or permanently fixed substations, but, due to the limited space available, the
more receptacles shall be permitted to supply stage set lighting loads. working spaces shall be permitted to be reduced, provided that the
equipment shall be arranged so that the operator can work safely and so
5.30.3 Dressing Rooms that other persons in the vicinity cannot accidentally come into contact
with current-carrying parts or bring conducting objects into contact with
5.30.3.1 Dressing Rooms. Fixed wiring in dressing rooms shall be them while they are energized.
installed in accordance with the wiring methods covered in Chapter 3.
Wiring for portable dressing rooms shall be approved. 5.30.6.3 Overcurrent Protection of Direct-Current Generators.
Three-wire generators shall have overcurrent protection in accordance
5.30.4 Viewing, Cutting, and Patching Tables with 4.45.1.12(e).

5.30.4.1 Lamps at Tables. Only composition or metal-sheathed, 5.30.6.4 Direct-Current Switchboards.

porcelain, keyless lampholders equipped with suitable means to guard
lamps from physical damage and from film and film scrap shall be used (a) General. Switchboards of not over 250 volts dc between
at patching, viewing, and cutting tables. conductors, where located in substations or switchboard rooms
accessible to licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical
5.30.5 Cellulose Nitrate Film Storage Vaults practitioner under the supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner
only, shall not be required to be dead-front.
5.30.5.1 Lamps in Cellulose Nitrate Film Storage Vaults. Lamps in
cellulose nitrate film storage vaults shall be installed in rigid fixtures of (b) Circuit Breaker Frames. Frames of dc circuit breakers installed
the glass-enclosed and gasketed type. Lamps shall be controlled by a on switchboards shall not be required to be grounded.
 and Similar Equipment. Motor generator sets, transformers, rectifiers,
rheostats, and similar equipment for the supply or control of current to
ARTICLE 5.40 — MOTION PICTURE PROJECTION ROOMS projection or spotlight equipment shall, where nitrate film is used, be
located in a separate room. Where placed in the projection room, they
5.40.1 General shall be located or guarded so that arcs or sparks cannot come in contact
with film, and the commutator end or ends of motor generator sets shall
5.40.1.1 Scope. The provisions of this article apply to motion picture comply with one of the conditions in 5.40.2.2(a)(1) through (a)(6).
projection rooms, motion picture projectors, and associated equipment of
the professional and nonprofessional types using incandescent, carbon (1) Types. Be of the totally enclosed, enclosed fan-cooled, or
arc, xenon, or other light source equipment that develops hazardous enclosed pipe-ventilated type.
gases, dust, or radiation.
(2) Separate Rooms or Housings. Be enclosed in separate rooms or
FPN: For further information, see NFPA 40-2001, Standard for the Storage and housings built of noncombustible material constructed so as to exclude
Handling of Cellulose Nitrate Motion Picture Film.
flyings or lint, and properly ventilated from a source of clean air.
5.40.1.2 Definitions.
(3) Solid Metal Covers. Have the brush or sliding-contact end of
motor-generator enclosed by solid metal covers.
Nonprofessional Projector. Nonprofessional projectors are those
types other than as described in 5.40.1.2.
(4) Tight Metal Housings. Have brushes or sliding contacts enclosed
in substantial, tight metal housings.
Professional Projector. A type of projector using 35- or 70-mm film
that has a minimum width of 35 mm and has on each edge 212
(5) Upper and Lower Half Enclosures. Have the upper half of the
perforations per meter, or a type using carbon arc, xenon, or other light
brush or sliding-contact end of the motor-generator enclosed by a wire
source equipment that develops hazardous gases, dust, or radiation.
screen or perforated metal and the lower half enclosed by solid metal
covers.
5.40.2 Equipment and Projectors of the Professional Type
(6) Wire Screens or Perforated Metal. Have wire screens or
5.40.2.1 Motion Picture Projection Room Required. Every
perforated metal placed at the commutator of brush ends. No dimension
professional-type projector shall be located within a projection room.
of any opening in the wire screen or perforated metal shall exceed 1.27
Every projection room shall be of permanent construction, approved for
mm, regardless of the shape of the opening and of the material used.
the type of building in which the projection room is located. All
projection ports, spotlight ports, viewing ports, and similar openings
(b) Switches, Overcurrent Devices, or Other Equipment. Switches,
shall be provided with glass or other approved material so as to
overcurrent devices, or other equipment not normally required or used
completely close the opening. Such rooms shall not be considered as
for projectors, sound reproduction, flood or other special effect lamps, or
hazardous (classified) locations as defined in Article 5.0.
other equipment shall not be installed in projection rooms.
FPN: For further information on protecting openings in projection rooms handling
cellulose nitrate motion picture film, see NFPA 101-2003, Life Safety Code. Exception No. 1: In projection rooms approved for use only with
cellulose acetate (safety) film, the installation of appurtenant electrical
5.40.2.2 Location of Associated Electrical Equipment. equipment used in conjunction with the operation of the projection
equipment and the control of lights, curtains, and audio equipment, and
(a) Motor Generator Sets, Transformers, Rectifiers, Rheostats, so forth, shall be permitted. In such projection rooms, a sign reading
“Safety Film Only Permitted in This Room” shall be posted on the 5.40.3 Nonprofessional Projectors
outside of each projection room door and within the projection room
itself in a conspicuous location. 5.40.3.1 Motion Picture Projection Room Not Required. Projectors of
the nonprofessional or miniature type, where employing cellulose acetate
Exception No. 2: Remote-control switches for the control of auditorium (safety) film, shall be permitted to be operated without a projection
lights or switches for the control of motors operating curtains and room.
masking of the motion picture screen shall be permitted to be installed in
projection rooms. 5.40.3.2 Approval. Projection equipment shall be listed.

(c) Emergency Systems. Control of emergency systems shall comply 5.40.4 Audio Signal Processing, Amplification,
with Article 7.0. and Reproduction Equipment

5.40.2.3 Work Space. Each motion picture projector, floodlight, 5.40.4.1 Audio Signal Processing, Amplification, and Reproduction
spotlight, or similar equipment shall have clear working space not less Equipment. Audio signal processing, amplification, and reproduction
than 800 mm wide on each side and at the rear thereof. equipment shall be installed as provided in Article 6.40.

Exception: One such space shall be permitted between adjacent pieces

of equipment. ARTICLE 5.45 — MANUFACTURED BUILDINGS

5.40.2.4 Conductor Size. Conductors supplying outlets for arc and 5.45.1.1 Scope. This article covers requirements for a manufactured
xenon projectors of the professional type shall not be smaller than 8.0 building and building components as herein defined.
mm2 and shall be of sufficient size for the projector employed.
Conductors for incandescent-type projectors shall conform to normal 5.45.1.2 Definitions.
wiring standards as provided in 2.10.2.5.
Building Component. Any subsystem, subassembly, or other system
5.40.2.5 Conductors on Lamps and Hot Equipment. Insulated designed for use in or integral with or as part of a structure, which can
conductors having a rated operating temperature of not less than 200°C include structural, electrical, mechanical, plumbing, and fire protection
shall be used on all lamps or other equipment where the ambient systems, and other systems affecting health and safety.
temperature at the conductors as installed will exceed 50°C.
Building System. Plans, specifications, and documentation for a
5.40.2.6 Flexible Cords. Cords approved for hard usage, as provided in system of manufactured building or for a type or a system of building
Table 4.0.1.4, shall be used on portable equipment. components, which can include structural, electrical, mechanical,
plumbing, and fire protection systems, and other systems affecting health
5.40.2.11 Approval. Projectors and enclosures for arc, xenon and and safety, and including such variations thereof as are specifically
incandescent lamps and rectifiers, transformers, rheostats, and similar permitted by regulation, and which variations are submitted as part of the
equipment shall be listed. building system or amendment thereto.

5.40..2.12 Marking. Projectors and other equipment shall be marked Closed Construction. Any building, building component, assembly,
with the manufacturer’s name or trademark and with the voltage and or system manufactured in such a manner that all concealed parts of
current for which they are designed in accordance with 1.10.1.21. processes of manufacture cannot be inspected before installation at the
building site without disassembly, damage, or destruction.
 Manufactured Building. Any building that is of closed construction (b) Not Over 1640 cm3. Any box not over 1640 cm3 in size, intended
and is made or assembled in manufacturing facilities on or off the for mounting in closed construction, shall be affixed with anchors or
building site for installation, or for assembly and installation on the clamps so as to provide a rigid and secure installation.
building site, other than manufactured homes, mobile homes, park
trailers, or recreational vehicles. 5.45.1.10 Receptacle or Switch with Integral Enclosure. A receptacle
or switch with integral enclosure and mounting means, where tested,
5.45.1.4 Wiring Methods. identified, and listed to applicable standards, shall be permitted to be
installed.
(a) Methods Permitted. All raceway and cable wiring methods
included in this Code and such other wiring systems specifically intended 5.45.1.11 Bonding and Grounding. Prewired panels and building
and listed for use in manufactured buildings shall be permitted with components shall provide for the bonding, or bonding and grounding, of
listed fittings and with fittings listed and identified for manufactured all exposed metals likely to become energized, in accordance with Parts
buildings. 2.50.5, 2.50.6, and 2.50.7.

(b) Securing Cables. In closed construction, cables shall be permitted 5.45.1.12 Grounding Electrode Conductor. Provisions shall be made to
to be secured only at cabinets, boxes, or fittings where 5.5 mm2 (2.6 mm route a grounding electrode conductor from the service, feeder, or
dia.) or smaller conductors are used and protection against physical branch-circuit supply to the point of attachment to the grounding
damage is provided. electrode.

5.45.1.5 Supply Conductors. Provisions shall be made to route the 5.45.1.13 Component Interconnections. Fittings and connectors that
service-entrance, service-lateral, feeder, or branch-circuit supply to the are intended to be concealed at the time of on-site assembly, where
service or building disconnecting means conductors. tested, identified, and listed to applicable standards, shall be permitted
for on-site interconnection of modules or other building components.
5.45.1.6 Installation of Service-Entrance Conductors. Service- Such fittings and connectors shall be equal to the wiring method
entrance conductors shall be installed after erection at the building site. employed in insulation, temperature rise, and fault-current withstand and
shall be capable of enduring the vibration and minor relative motions
Exception: Where point of attachment is known prior to manufacture. occurring in the components of manufactured building.

5.45.1.7 Service Equipment. Service equipment shall be installed in

accordance with 2.30.6.1. ARTICLE 5.47 — AGRICULTURAL BUILDINGS

5.45.1.8 Protection of Conductors and Equipment. Protection shall be 5.47.1.1 Scope. The provisions of this article shall apply to the following
provided for exposed conductors and equipment during processes of agricultural buildings or that part of a building or adjacent areas of
manufacturing, packaging, in transit, and erection at the building site. similar or like nature as specified in 5.47.1.1(a) and 5.47.1.1(b).

5.45.1.9 Boxes. (a) Excessive Dust and Dust with Water. Agricultural buildings
where excessive dust and dust with water may accumulate, including all
(a) Other Dimensions. Boxes of dimensions other than those required areas of poultry, livestock, and fish confinement systems, where litter
in Table 3.14.2.2(a) shall be permitted to be installed where tested, dust or feed dust, including mineral feed particles, may accumulate.
identified, and listed to applicable standards.
 (b) Corrosive Atmosphere. Agricultural buildings where a corrosive
atmosphere exists. Such buildings include areas where the following 5.47.1.5 Wiring Methods.
conditions exist:
(a) Wiring Systems. Types UF, NMC, copper SE cables, jacketed
(1) Poultry and animal excrement may cause corrosive vapors. Type MC cable, rigid nonmetallic conduit, liquidtight flexible
(2) Corrosive particles may combine with water. nonmetallic conduit, or other cables or raceways suitable for the location,
(3) The area is damp and wet by reason of periodic washing for with approved termination fittings, shall be the wiring methods
cleaning and sanitizing with water and cleansing agents. employed. The wiring methods of Part 5.2.2 shall be permitted for areas
(4) Similar conditions exist. described in 5.47.1.1(a).

5.47.1.2 Definitions. FPN: See 3.0.1.7 and 3.52.2.35 for installation of raceway systems exposed to widely
different temperatures.

Distribution Point. An electrical supply point from which service

(b) Mounting. All cables shall be secured within 200 mm of each
drops, service laterals, feeders, or branch circuits to agricultural
cabinet, box, or fitting. The 6 mm airspace required for nonmetallic
buildings, associated farm dwelling(s), and associated buildings under
boxes, fittings, conduit, and cables in 3.0.1.6(c) shall not be required in
single management are supplied.
buildings covered by this article.
FPN No. 1: Distribution points are also known as the center yard pole, meterpole, or
the common distribution point. (c) Equipment Enclosures, Boxes, Conduit Bodies, and Fittings.
FPN No. 2: The service point as defined in Article 1.1 is typically at the distribution
point. (1) Excessive Dust. Equipment enclosures, boxes, conduit bodies,
and fittings installed in areas of buildings where excessive dust may be
Equipotential Plane. An area where wire mesh or other conductive present shall be designed to minimize the entrance of dust and shall have
elements are embedded in or placed under concrete, bonded to all metal no openings (such as holes for attachment screws) through which dust
structures and fixed nonelectrical equipment that may become energized, could enter the enclosure.
and connected to the electrical grounding system to prevent a difference
in voltage from developing within the plane. (2) Damp or Wet Locations. In damp or wet locations, equipment
enclosures, boxes, conduit bodies, and fittings shall be placed or
Site-Isolating Device. A disconnecting means installed at the equipped so as to prevent moisture from entering or accumulating within
distribution point for the purposes of isolation, system maintenance, the enclosure, box, conduit body, or fitting. In wet locations, including
emergency disconnection, or connection of optional standby systems. normally dry or damp locations where surfaces are periodically washed
or sprayed with water, boxes, conduit bodies, and fittings shall be listed
5.47.1.3 Other Articles. For agricultural buildings not having conditions for use in wet locations and equipment enclosures shall be weatherproof.
as specified in 5.47.1.1, the electrical installations shall be made in
accordance with the applicable articles in this Code. (3) Corrosive Atmosphere. Where wet dust, excessive moisture,
corrosive gases or vapors, or other corrosive conditions may be present,
5.47.1.4 Surface Temperatures. Electrical equipment or devices equipment enclosures, boxes, conduit bodies, and fittings shall have
installed in accordance with the provisions of this article shall be corrosion resistance properties suitable for the conditions.
installed in a manner such that they will function at full rating without
FPN No. 1: See Table 4.30.7.11 for appropriate enclosure type designations.
developing surface temperatures in excess of the specified normal safe
operating range of the equipment or device. FPN No. 2: Aluminum and magnetic ferrous materials may corrode in agricultural
environments.
 (a) Minimize the Entrance of Dust. Luminaires (lighting fixtures)
(d) Flexible Connections. Where necessary to employ flexible shall be installed to minimize the entrance of dust, foreign matter,
connections, dusttight flexible connectors, liquidtight flexible conduit, or moisture, and corrosive material.
flexible cord listed and identified for hard usage shall be used. All
connectors and fittings used shall be listed and identified for the purpose. (b) Exposed to Physical Damage. Any luminaire (lighting fixture)
that may be exposed to physical damage shall be protected by a suitable
(e) Physical Protection. All electrical wiring and equipment subject to guard.
physical damage shall be protected.
(c) Exposed to Water. A luminaire (fixture) that may be exposed to
(f) Separate Equipment Grounding Conductor. Non–current- water from condensation, building cleansing water, or solution shall be
carrying metal parts of equipment, raceways, and other enclosures, where watertight.
required to be grounded, shall be grounded by a copper equipment
grounding conductor installed between the equipment and the building 5.47.1.9 Electrical Supply to Building(s) or Structure(s) from a
disconnecting means. If installed underground, the equipment grounding Distribution Point. Overhead electrical supply shall comply with
conductor shall be insulated or covered. 5.47.1.9(a) and 5.47.1.9(b), or with 5.47.1.9(c). Underground electrical
supply shall comply with 5.47.1.9(c) and 5.47.1.9(d).
(g) Receptacles. All 125-volt and/or 250-volt, single-phase, 15- and
20-ampere general-purpose receptacles installed in the following (a) Site-Isolating Device. Site-isolating devices shall comply with
locations shall have ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection for 5.47.1.9(a)(1) through (a)(9).
personnel:
(1) Where Required. A site-isolating device shall be installed at the
(1) In areas having an equipotential plane distribution point where two or more agricultural buildings, structures,
associated farm dwelling(s), or other buildings are supplied from the
(2) Outdoors distribution point.

(3) Damp or wet locations (2) Location. The site-isolating device shall be pole-mounted and
shall meet the clearance requirements of 2.30.2.3(a).
(4) Dirt confinement areas for livestock
(3) Operation. The site-isolating device shall simultaneously
5.47.1.6 Switches, Receptacles, Circuit Breakers, Controllers, and disconnect all ungrounded service conductors from the premises wiring.
Fuses. Switches, including pushbuttons, relays, and similar devices,
receptacles, circuit breakers, controllers, and fuses, shall be provided (4) Bonding Provisions. The site-isolating device enclosure shall be
with enclosures as specified in 5.47.1.5(c). bonded to the grounded circuit conductor and the grounding electrode
system.
5.47.1.7 Motors. Motors and other rotating electrical machinery shall be
totally enclosed or designed so as to minimize the entrance of dust, (5) Grounding. At the site-isolating device, the system grounded
moisture, or corrosive particles. conductor shall be connected to a grounding electrode system via a
grounding electrode conductor.
5.47.1.8 Luminaires (Lighting Fixtures). Luminaires (lighting fixtures)
shall comply with 5.47.1.8(a) through 5.47.1.8(c). (6) Rating. The site-isolating device shall be rated for the calculated
load as determined by Part 2.20.5.
 (7) Overcurrent Protection. The site-isolating device shall not be FPN: A system with a separate equipment grounding conductor is commonly referred
to as a “4-wire system” in single-phase applications.
required to provide overcurrent protection.
1. The equipment grounding conductor shall be the same size as
(8) Accessibility. Where the site-isolating device is not readily
the largest supply conductor if of the same material, or adjusted in size in
accessible, it shall be capable of being remotely operated by an operating
accordance with the equivalent size columns of Table 2.50.6.13 if of
handle installed at a readily accessible location. The operating handle of
different materials.
the site-isolating device, when in its highest position, shall not be more
than 2 000 mm above grade or a working platform.
2. The equipment grounding conductor is bonded to the
grounded circuit conductor and the site-isolating device at the
(9) Series Devices. An additional site-isolating device for the
distribution point.
premises wiring system shall not be required where a site-isolating
device meeting all applicable requirements of this section is provided by
3. A grounding electrode system is provided in accordance with
the serving utility as part of their service requirements.
Part 2.50.3 and connected to the equipment-grounding conductor at the
building(s) or structure(s) disconnecting means.
(b) Service Disconnecting Means and Overcurrent Protection at
the Building(s) or Structure(s). Where the service disconnecting means
4. The grounded circuit conductor is not connected to a
and overcurrent protection are located at the building(s) or structure(s),
grounding electrode or to any equipment-grounding conductor on the
the requirements of 5.47.1.9(b)(1) through (b)(3) shall apply.
load side of the distribution point.
(1) Conductor Sizing. The supply conductors shall be sized in
(c) Service Disconnecting Means and Overcurrent Protection at
accordance with Part 2.20.5.
the Distribution Point. Where the service disconnecting means and
overcurrent protection for each set of feeder conductors are located at the
(2) Conductor Installation. The supply conductors shall be installed
distribution point, feeders to building(s) or structure(s) shall meet the
in accordance with the requirements of Part 2.25.2.
requirements of 2.50.2.13 and Parts 2.25.1 and 2.25.2.
(3) Grounding and Bonding. For each building or structure, the FPN: Methods to reduce neutral-to-earth voltages in livestock facilities include
conditions in either (b)(3)a or (b)(3)b shall be permitted. supplying buildings or structures with 4-wire single-phase services, sizing 3-wire
single-phase service and feeder conductors to limit voltage drop to 2 percent, and
connecting loads line-to-line.
a. System with grounded neutral conductor. The grounded circuit
conductor shall be connected to the building disconnecting means and to (d) Direct-Buried Equipment Grounding Conductors. Where
the grounding electrode system of that building or structure where all the livestock is housed, any portion of a direct-buried equipment grounding
requirements of 2.50.2.13(b)(2) are met. conductor run to the building or structure shall be insulated or covered
FPN: A system with a grounded neutral conductor is commonly referred to as a “3-
copper.
wire system” in single-phase applications.
5.47.1.10 Equipotential Planes and Bonding of Equipotential Planes.
b. System with separate equipment grounding conductor. A The installation and bonding of equipotential planes shall comply with
separate equipment-grounding conductor shall be run with the supply 5.47.1.10(a) and 5.47.1.10(b). For the purposes of this section, the term
conductors to the building(s) or structure(s), and the following conditions livestock shall not include poultry.
shall be met:
 (a) Where Required. Equipotential planes shall be installed in all 5.50.1.2 Definitions.
concrete floor confinement areas in livestock buildings, and in all
outdoor confinement areas such as feedlots, containing metallic Appliance, Fixed. An appliance that is fastened or otherwise secured
equipment that may become energized and is accessible to livestock. The at a specific location.
equipotential plane shall encompass the area where the livestock stands
while accessing metallic equipment that may become energized. Appliance, Portable. An appliance that is actually moved or can
easily be moved from one place to another in normal use.
(b) Bonding. Equipotential planes shall be bonded to the electrical
grounding system. The bonding conductor shall be copper, insulated, FPN: For the purpose of this article, the following major appliances, other than built-in,
are considered portable if cord connected: refrigerators, range equipment, clothes
covered or bare, and not smaller than 8.0 mm2. The means of bonding to washers, dishwashers without booster heaters, or other similar appliances.
wire mesh or conductive elements shall be by pressure connectors or
clamps of brass, copper, copper alloy, or an equally substantial approved Appliance, Stationary. An appliance that is not easily moved from
means. Slatted floors that are supported by structures that are a part of an one place to another in normal use.
equipotential plane shall not require bonding.
Distribution Panelboard. See definition of panelboard in Article 100.
FPN No. 1: Methods to establish equipotential planes are described in American
Society of Agricultural Engineers (ASAE) EP473-2001, Equipotential Planes in Animal
Containment Areas. Feeder Assembly. The overhead or under-chassis feeder conductors,
including the grounding conductor, together with the necessary fittings
FPN No. 2: Low grounding electrode system resistances may reduce potential
differences in livestock facilities. and equipment or a power-supply cord listed for mobile home use,
designed for the purpose of delivering energy from the source of
electrical supply to the distribution panelboard within the mobile home.
ARTICLE 5.50 — MOBILE HOMES, MANUFACTURED
HOMES, AND MOBILE HOME PARKS Laundry Area. An area containing or designed to contain a laundry
tray, clothes washer, or a clothes dryer.
5.50.1 General
Manufactured Home. A structure, transportable in one or more
5.50.1.1 Scope. The provisions of this article cover the electrical sections, that is 2 400 mm or more in width or 12 m or more in length in
conductors and equipment installed within or on mobile and the traveling mode or, when erected on site, is 30 m2 or more; which is
manufactured homes, the conductors that connect mobile and built on a chassis and designed to be used as a dwelling, with or without
manufactured homes to a supply of electricity, and the installation of a permanent foundation, when connected to the required utilities,
electrical wiring, luminaires (fixtures), equipment, and appurtenances including the plumbing, heating, air conditioning, and electrical systems
related to electrical installations within a mobile home park up to the contained therein. Calculations used to determine the number of square
mobile home service-entrance conductors or, if none, the mobile home meters in a structure will be based on the structure’s exterior dimensions,
service equipment. measured at the largest horizontal projections when erected on site.
These dimensions include all expandable rooms, cabinets, and other
FPN: For additional information on manufactured housing see NFPA 501-2003, projections containing interior space but do not include inside bay
Standard on Manufactured Housing, and Part 3280, Manufactured Home Construction windows.
and Safety Standards, of the Federal Department of Housing and Urban
Development.
For the purpose of this Code and unless otherwise indicated, the term
mobile home includes manufactured homes.
 FPN No. 1: See the applicable building code for definition of the term permanent or intended for the display or demonstration of merchandise or
foundation.
machinery — shall not be required to meet the provisions of this article
FPN No. 2: See Part 3280, Manufactured Home Construction and Safety Standards, pertaining to the number or capacity of circuits required. It shall,
of the Federal Department of Housing and Urban Development, for additional however, meet all other applicable requirements of this article if
information on the definition.
provided with an electrical installation intended to be energized from a
Mobile Home. A factory-assembled structure or structures 230-volt or 115/230-volt ac power supply system. Where different
transportable in one or more sections that is built on a permanent chassis voltage is required by either design or available power supply system,
and designed to be used as a dwelling without a permanent foundation adjustment shall be made in accordance with other articles and sections
where connected to the required utilities and that includes the plumbing, for the voltage used.
heating, air-conditioning, and electric systems contained therein.
(b) In Other Than Mobile Home Parks. Mobile homes installed in
For the purpose of this Code and unless otherwise indicated, the term other than mobile home parks shall comply with the provisions of this
mobile home includes manufactured homes. article.

Mobile Home Accessory Building or Structure. Any awning, (c) Connection to Wiring System. The provisions of this article shall
cabana, ramada, storage cabinet, carport, fence, windbreak, or porch apply to mobile homes intended for connection to a wiring system rated
established for the use of the occupant of the mobile home on a mobile 230 volts, nominal, 2-wire ac, with one grounded phase conductor or
home lot. 115/230 volts, nominal, 3-wire ac, with grounded neutral.

Mobile Home Lot. A designated portion of a mobile home park (d) Listed or Labeled. All electrical materials, devices, appliances,
designed for the accommodation of one mobile home and its accessory fittings, and other equipment shall be listed or labeled by a qualified
buildings or structures for the exclusive use of its occupants. testing agency and shall be connected in an approved manner when
installed.
Mobile Home Park. A contiguous parcel of land that is used for the
accommodation of occupied mobile homes. 5.50.2 Mobile and Manufactured Homes

Mobile Home Service Equipment. The equipment containing the 5.50.2.1 Power Supply.
disconnecting means, overcurrent protective devices, and receptacles or
other means for connecting a mobile home feeder assembly. (a) Feeder. The power supply to the mobile home shall be a feeder
assembly consisting of not more than one listed 50-ampere mobile home
Park Electrical Wiring Systems. All of the electrical wiring, power-supply cord with an integrally molded or securely attached plug
luminaires (fixtures), equipment, and appurtenances related to electrical cap or a permanently installed feeder.
installations within a mobile home park, including the mobile home
service equipment. Exception No. 1: A mobile home that is factory equipped with gas or oil-
fired central heating equipment and cooking appliances shall be
5.50.1.4 General Requirements. permitted to be provided with a listed mobile home power-supply cord
rated 40 amperes.
(a) Mobile Home Not Intended as a Dwelling Unit. A mobile home
not intended as a dwelling unit — for example, those equipped for Exception No. 2: A feeder assembly shall not be required for
sleeping purposes only, contractor’s on-site offices, construction job manufactured homes constructed in accordance with 5.50.3.3(b).
dormitories, mobile studio dressing rooms, banks, clinics, mobile stores,
 (b) Power-Supply Cord. If the mobile home has a power-supply cord,
it shall be permanently attached to the distribution panelboard or to a
junction box permanently connected to the distribution panelboard, with
the free end terminating in an attachment plug cap.
Cords with adapters and pigtail ends, extension cords, and similar
items shall not be attached to, or shipped with, a mobile home.
A suitable clamp or the equivalent shall be provided at the distribution
panelboard knockout to afford strain relief for the cord to prevent strain
from being transmitted to the terminals when the power-supply cord is
handled in its intended manner.
The cord shall be a listed type with four conductors, one of which shall
be identified by a continuous green color or a continuous green color
with one or more yellow stripes for use as the grounding conductor.

(c) Attachment Plug Cap. The attachment plug cap shall be a 2-pole,
3-wire, grounding type, rated 50 amperes, 250 volts or 3-pole, 4-wire,
grounding type, rated 50 amperes, 125/250 volts with a configuration as
shown in Figure 5.50.2.1(c) and intended for use with the 50-ampere,
250-volt and 125/250-volt receptacle configurations shown in Figure
5.50.2.1(c). It shall be listed, by itself or as part of a power-supply cord Figure 5.50.2.1(c) 50-Ampere, 250-volt and 50-Ampere, 125/250-
assembly, for the purpose and shall be molded to or installed on the Volt Receptacle and Attachment Plug Cap Configurations, 2-pole, 3-
flexible cord so that it is secured tightly to the cord at the point where the wire and 3-Pole, 4-Wire, respectively, Grounding-Types, Used for
cord enters the attachment plug cap. If a right-angle cap is used, the Mobile Home Supply Cords and Mobile Home Parks. Please see
configuration shall be oriented so that the grounding member is farthest NEC 2005 page 70-447 and attached sketch on separate bond paper.
from the cord. Additional drawing of plug from WWY.

FPN: Complete details of the 50-ampere plug and receptacle configuration can be
found in the National Electrical Manufacturers Association Standard for Dimensions of
Attachment Plugs and Receptacles, ANSI/NEMA WD 6-1989, Figure 14-50.

(d) Overall Length of a Power-Supply Cord. The overall length of a (e) Marking. The power-supply cord shall bear the following marking:
power-supply cord, measured from the end of the cord, including bared
leads, to the face of the attachment plug cap shall not be less than 6 FOR USE WITH MOBILE HOMES — 40 AMPERES.
400 mm and shall not exceed 11 m. The length of the cord from the face
of the attachment plug cap to the point where the cord enters the mobile or
home shall not be less than 6 000 m.
FOR USE WITH MOBILE HOMES — 50 AMPERES.

(f) Point of Entrance. The point of entrance of the feeder assembly to

the mobile home shall be in the exterior wall, floor, or roof.
 (g) Protected. Where the cord passes through walls or floors, it shall
be protected by means of conduits and bushings or equivalent. The cord (a) Disconnecting Means. A single disconnecting means shall be
shall be permitted to be installed within the mobile home walls, provided provided in each mobile home consisting of a circuit breaker, or a switch
a continuous raceway having a maximum size of 30 mm is installed from and fuses and its accessories installed in a readily accessible location
the branch-circuit panelboard to the underside of the mobile home floor. near the point of entrance of the supply cord or conductors into the
mobile home. The main circuit breakers or fuses shall be plainly marked
(h) Protection Against Corrosion and Mechanical Damage. “Main.” This equipment shall contain a solderless type of grounding
Permanent provisions shall be made for the protection of the attachment connector or bar for the purposes of grounding, with sufficient terminals
plug cap of the power-supply cord and any connector cord assembly or for all grounding conductors. The neutral bar termination of the
receptacle against corrosion and mechanical damage if such devices are grounded circuit conductors shall be insulated in accordance with
in an exterior location while the mobile home is in transit. 5.50.2.7(a). The disconnecting equipment shall have a rating not less
than the calculated load. The distribution equipment, either circuit
(i) Mast Weatherhead or Raceway. Where the calculated load breaker or fused type, shall be located a minimum of 600 mm from the
exceeds 50 amperes or where a permanent feeder is used, the supply bottom of such equipment to the floor level of the mobile home.
shall be by means of either of the following:
FPN: See 5.50.2.11(b) for information on disconnecting means for branch circuits
designed to energize heating or air-conditioning equipment, or both, located outside
(1) One mast weatherhead installation, installed in accordance with the mobile home, other than room air conditioners.
Article 230, containing four continuous, insulated, color-coded feeder
conductors, one of which shall be an equipment grounding conductor A distribution panelboard shall be rated not less than 50 amperes and
employ a 2-pole circuit breaker rated 40 amperes for a 40-ampere supply
(2) A metal raceway or rigid nonmetallic conduit from the cord, or 50 amperes for a 50-ampere supply cord. A distribution
disconnecting means in the mobile home to the underside of the mobile panelboard employing a disconnect switch and fuses shall be rated 60
home, with provisions for the attachment to a suitable junction box or amperes and shall employ a single 2-pole, 60-ampere fuseholder with 40-
fitting to the raceway on the underside of the mobile home [with or or 50-ampere main fuses for 40- or 50-ampere supply cords, respectively.
without conductors as in 5.50.2.1(i)(1)]. The manufacturer shall provide The outside of the distribution panelboard shall be plainly marked with
written installation instructions stating the proper feeder conductor sizes the fuse size.
for the raceway and the size of the junction box to be used. The distribution panelboard shall be located in an accessible location
but shall not be located in a bathroom or a clothes closet. A clear
5.50.2.2 Disconnecting Means and Branch-Circuit Protective working space at least 800 mm wide and 800 mm in front of the
Equipment. The branch-circuit equipment shall be permitted to be distribution panelboard shall be provided. This space shall extend from
combined with the disconnecting means as a single assembly. Such a the floor to the top of the distribution panelboard.
combination shall be permitted to be designated as a distribution
panelboard. If a fused distribution panelboard is used, the maximum fuse (b) Branch-Circuit Protective Equipment. Branch-circuit
size for the mains shall be plainly marked with lettering at least 6 mm distribution equipment shall be installed in each mobile home and shall
high and visible when fuses are changed. include overcurrent protection for each branch circuit consisting of either
Where plug fuses and fuseholders are used, they shall be tamper-resistant circuit breakers or fuses.
Type S, enclosed in dead-front fuse panelboards. Electrical distribution The branch-circuit overcurrent devices shall be rated as follows:
panelboards containing circuit breakers shall also be dead-front type.
(1) Not more than the circuit conductors; and
FPN: See 1.10.1.22 concerning identification of each disconnecting means and each
service, feeder, or branch circuit at the point where it originated and the type marking
needed.
 (2) Not more than 150 percent of the rating of a single appliance 33 x length x width
rated 13.3 amperes or more that is supplied by an individual branch ————————— = No. of 15- (or 20-) ampere circuits
circuit; but 230 x 15 (or 20)
(3) Not more than the overcurrent protection size and of the type
marked on the air conditioner or other motor-operated appliance. or

(c) Two-Pole Circuit Breakers. Where circuit breakers are provided 33 x length x width
for branch-circuit protection, 240-volt circuits shall be protected by a 2- ————————— = No. of 15- (or 20-) ampere circuits
pole common or companion trip, or handle-tied paired circuit breakers. 115 x 15 (or 20)

(d) Electrical Nameplates. A metal nameplate on the outside adjacent

to the feeder assembly entrance shall read: (b) Small Appliances. In kitchens, pantries, dining rooms, and
breakfast rooms, two or more 20-ampere small-appliance circuits, in
THIS CONNECTION FOR 230-VOLT, addition to the number of circuits required elsewhere in this section, shall
2-POLE, 3-WIRE, 60-HERTZ, be provided for all receptacle outlets required by 5.50.2.4(d) in these
_____ AMPERE SUPPLY rooms. Such circuits shall have no other outlets.

or Exception No. 1: Receptacle outlets installed solely for the electrical

supply and support of an electric clock in any the rooms specified in
THIS CONNECTION FOR 120/240-VOLT, 5.50.2.3(b) shall be permitted.
3-POLE, 4-WIRE, 60-HERTZ,
_____ AMPERE SUPPLY Exception No. 2: Receptacle outlets installed to provide power for
supplemental equipment and lighting on gas-fired ranges, ovens, or
The correct ampere rating shall be marked in the blank space. counter-mounted cooking units shall be permitted.

Exception: For manufactured homes, the manufacturer shall provide in Exception No. 3: A single receptacle for refrigeration equipment shall
its written installation instructions or in the data plate the minimum be permitted to be supplied from an individual branch circuit rated 15
ampere rating of the feeder assembly or, where provided, the service amperes or greater.
entrance conductors intended for connection to the manufactured home.
The rating provided shall not be less than the minimum load calculated Countertop receptacle outlets installed in the kitchen shall be supplied
in accordance with 5.50.2.9. by not less than two small-appliance circuit branch circuits, either or both
of which shall be permitted to supply receptacle outlets in the kitchen
5.50.2.3 Branch Circuits. The number of branch circuits required shall and other locations specified in 5.50.2.3(b).
be determined in accordance with 5.50.2.3(a) through (e).
(c) Laundry Area. Where a laundry area is provided, a 20-ampere
(a) Lighting. The number of branch circuits shall be based on 33 volt- branch circuit shall be provided to supply the laundry receptacle
amperes/m2 times outside dimensions of the mobile home (coupler outlet(s). This circuit shall have no other outlets.
excluded) divided by 230 volts for 230 volts power supply and 115 volts
for 115/230 volts power supply to determine the number of 15- or 20- (d) General Appliances. (Including furnace, water heater, range, and
ampere lighting area circuits, for example, central or room air conditioner, etc.). There shall be one or more circuits
of adequate rating in accordance with the following:
 such as for dishwashers, disposals, refrigerators, freezers, and laundry
FPN: For central air conditioning, see Article 4.40. equipment.
(1) The ampere rating of fixed appliances shall not be over 50 Feeders supplying branch circuits shall be permitted to be protected by
percent of the circuit rating if lighting outlets (receptacles, other than a ground-fault circuit-interrupter in lieu of the provision for such
kitchen, dining area, and laundry, considered as lighting outlets) are on interrupters specified herein.
the same circuit.
(2) For fixed appliances on a circuit without lighting outlets, the sum (c) Cord-Connected Fixed Appliance. A grounding-type receptacle
of rated amperes shall not exceed the branch-circuit rating. Motor loads outlet shall be provided for each cord-connected fixed appliance
or continuous loads shall not exceed 80 percent of the branch-circuit installed.
rating.
(3) The rating of a single cord-and-plug-connected appliance on a (d) Receptacle Outlets Required. Except in the bath, closet, and hall
circuit having no other outlets shall not exceed 80 percent of the circuit areas, receptacle outlets shall be installed at wall spaces 600 mm wide or
rating. more so that no point along the floor line is more than 1 800 mm
(4) The rating of a range branch circuit shall be based on the range measured horizontally from an outlet in that space. In addition, a
demand as specified for ranges in 5.50.2.9(b)(5). receptacle outlet shall be installed in the following locations:
(e) Bathrooms. Bathroom receptacle outlets shall be supplied by at (1) Over or adjacent to countertops in the kitchen (at least one on
least one 20-ampere branch circuit. Such circuits shall have no other each side of the sink if countertops are on each side and are 300 mm or
outlets other than as provided for in 5.50.2.4(e)(2). over in width).
(2) Adjacent to the refrigerator and freestanding gas-range space. A
5.50.2.4 Receptacle Outlets. duplex receptacle shall be permitted to serve as the outlet for a
countertop and a refrigerator.
(a) Grounding-Type Receptacle Outlets. All receptacle outlets shall (3) At countertop spaces for built-in vanities.
comply with the following: (4) At countertop spaces under wall-mounted cabinets.
(5) In the wall at the nearest point to where a bar-type counter
(1) Be of grounding type attaches to the wall.
(2) Be installed according to 4.6.1.3 (6) In the wall at the nearest point to where a fixed room divider
(3) Except where supplying specific appliances, be 15- or 20- attaches to the wall.
ampere, 250-volt or 125-volt, either single or multiple type, and accept (7) In laundry areas within 1 800 mm of the intended location of the
parallel-blade or tandem-blade attachment plugs, respectively laundry appliance(s).
(8) At least one receptacle outlet located outdoors and accessible at
(b) Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters (GFCI). All 250-volt and/or grade level and not more than 2 000 mm above grade. A receptacle outlet
125-volt, single-phase, 15- and 20-ampere receptacle outlets installed located in a compartment accessible from the outside of the unit shall be
outdoors, in compartments accessible from outside the unit, or in considered an outdoor receptacle.
bathrooms, including receptacles in luminaires (light fixtures), shall have (9) At least one receptacle outlet shall be installed in bathrooms
GFCI protection. GFCI protection shall be provided for receptacle outlets within 900 mm of the outside edge of each basin. The receptacle outlet
serving countertops in kitchens, and receptacle outlets located within shall be located above or adjacent to the basin location. This receptacle
1 800 mm of a wet bar sink. shall be in addition to any receptacle that is a part of a luminaire (fixture)
or appliance. The receptacle shall not be enclosed within a bathroom
Exception: Receptacles installed for appliances in dedicated spaces, cabinet or vanity.
 (b) Accessibility. Every appliance shall be accessible for inspection,
(e) Pipe Heating Cable(s) Outlet. For the connection of pipe heating service, repair, or replacement without removal of permanent
cable(s), a receptacle outlet shall be located on the underside of the unit construction.
as follows:
(c) Pendants. Listed pendant-type luminaires (fixtures) or pendant
(1) Within 600 mm of the cold water inlet. cords shall be permitted.
(2) Connected to an interior branch circuit, other than a small
appliance branch circuit. It shall be permitted to use a bathroom (d) Bathtub and Shower Luminaires (Fixtures). Where a luminaire
receptacle circuit for this purpose. (lighting fixture) is installed over a bathtub or in a shower stall, it shall
(3) On a circuit where all of the outlets are on the load side of the be of the enclosed and gasketed type listed for wet locations.
ground-fault circuit-interrupter.
(4) This outlet shall not be considered as the receptacle required by 5.50.2.6 Wiring Methods and Materials. Except as specifically limited
5.50.2.4(d)(8). in this section, the wiring methods and materials included in this Code
shall be used in mobile homes. Aluminum conductors, aluminum alloy
(f) Receptacle Outlets Not Permitted. Receptacle outlets shall not be conductors, and aluminum core conductors such as copper-clad
permitted in the following locations: aluminum shall not be acceptable for use as branch-circuit wiring.

(1) Receptacle outlets shall not be installed within a bathtub or (a) Nonmetallic Boxes. Nonmetallic boxes shall be permitted only
shower space. with nonmetallic cable or nonmetallic raceways.
(2) A receptacle shall not be installed in a face-up position in any
countertop. (b) Nonmetallic Cable Protection. Nonmetallic cable located 400 mm
(3) Receptacle outlets shall not be installed above electric baseboard or less above the floor, if exposed, shall be protected from physical
heaters, unless provided for in the listing or manufacturer’s instructions. damage by covering boards, guard strips, or raceways. Cable likely to be
damaged by stowage shall be so protected in all cases.
(g) Receptacle Outlets Not Required. Receptacle outlets shall not be
required in the following locations: (c) Metal-Covered and Nonmetallic Cable Protection. Metal-
covered and nonmetallic cables shall be permitted to pass through the
(1) In the wall space occupied by built-in kitchen or wardrobe centers of the wide side of 50 mm by 100 mm studs. However, they shall
cabinets be protected where they pass through 50 mm by 50 mm studs or at other
(2) In the wall space behind doors that can be opened fully against a studs or frames where the cable or armor would be less than 30 mm from
wall surface the inside or outside surface of the studs where the wall covering
(3) In room dividers of the lattice type that are less than 2 400 mm materials are in contact with the studs. Steel plates on each side of the
long, not solid, and within 150 mm of the floor cable, or a tube, with not less than 1.3 mm wall thickness shall be
(4) In the wall space afforded by bar-type counters required to protect the cable. These plates or tubes shall be securely held
in place.
5.50.2.5 Luminaires (Fixtures) and Appliances.
(d) Metal Faceplates. Where metal faceplates are used, they shall be
(a) Fasten Appliances in Transit. Means shall be provided to effectively grounded.
securely fasten appliances when the mobile home is in transit. (See
5.50.2.7 for provisions on grounding.) (e) Installation Requirements. If a range, clothes dryer, or similar
appliance is connected by metal-covered cable or flexible metal conduit,
a length of not less than 900 mm of free cable or conduit shall be testing and approval shall include the wall and ceiling construction
provided to permit moving the appliance. The cable or flexible metal systems for which the boxes and devices are intended to be used.
conduit shall be secured to the wall. Type NM or Type SE cable shall not
be used to connect a range or dryer. This shall not prohibit the use of (j) Appliance Terminal Connections. Appliances having branch-
Type NM or Type SE cable between the branch-circuit overcurrent- circuit terminal connections that operate at temperatures higher than
protective device and a junction box or range or dryer receptacle. 60°C shall have circuit conductors as described in the following:

(f) Raceways. Where rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit (1) Branch-circuit conductors having an insulation suitable for the
is terminated at an enclosure with a locknut and bushing connection, two temperature encountered shall be permitted to be run directly to the
locknuts shall be provided, one inside and one outside of the enclosure. appliance.
Rigid nonmetallic conduit, electrical nonmetallic tubing, or surface (2) Conductors having an insulation suitable for the temperature
raceway shall be permitted. All cut ends of conduit and tubing shall be encountered shall be run from the appliance terminal connection to a
reamed or otherwise finished to remove rough edges. readily accessible outlet box placed at least 300 mm from the appliance.
These conductors shall be in a suitable raceway or Type AC or MC cable
(g) Switches. Switches shall be rated as follows: of at least 460 mm but not more than 1 800 mm in length.

(1) For lighting circuits, switches shall be rated not less than 10 (k) Component Interconnections. Fittings and connectors that are
amperes, 115 to 120 volts or 230 to 250 volts, and in no case less than intended to be concealed at the time of assembly shall be listed and
the connected load. identified for the interconnection of building components. Such fittings
and connectors shall be equal to the wiring method employed in
(2) Switches for motor or other loads shall comply with the insulation, temperature rise, and fault-current withstanding and shall be
provisions of 4.4.1.14. capable of enduring the vibration and shock occurring in mobile home
transportation.
(h) Under-Chassis Wiring (Exposed to Weather). Where outdoor or
under-chassis line-voltage (115 volts, nominal, or higher) wiring is FPN: See 5.50.2.10 for interconnection of multiple section units.
exposed to moisture or physical damage, it shall be protected by rigid
metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit. The conductors shall be 5.50.2.7 Grounding. Grounding of both electrical and nonelectrical
suitable for wet locations. metal parts in a mobile home shall be through connection to a grounding
bus in the mobile home distribution panelboard. The grounding bus shall
Exception:Type MI cable, electrical metallic tubing, or rigid nonmetallic be grounded through the green-colored insulated conductor in the supply
conduit shall be permitted where closely routed against frames and cord or the feeder wiring to the service ground in the service-entrance
equipment enclosures. equipment located adjacent to the mobile home location. Neither the
frame of the mobile home nor the frame of any appliance shall be
(i) Boxes, Fittings, and Cabinets. Boxes, fittings, and cabinets shall connected to the grounded circuit conductor in the mobile home. Where
be securely fastened in place and shall be supported from a structural the distribution panelboard is the service equipment as permitted by
member of the home, either directly or by using a substantial brace. 5.50.3.3(b), the grounded conductors and the equipment grounding bus
shall be connected.
Exception: Snap-in-type boxes. Boxes provided with special wall or
ceiling brackets and wiring devices with integral enclosures that (a) Grounded Conductor.
securely fasten to walls or ceilings and are identified for the use shall be
permitted without support from a structural member or brace. The (1) Insulated. The grounded circuit conductor shall be insulated from
the grounding conductors and from equipment enclosures and other between the distribution panelboard and accessible terminal on the
grounded parts. The grounded circuit conductor terminals in the chassis.
distribution panelboard and in ranges, clothes dryers, counter-mounted
cooking units, and wall-mounted ovens shall be insulated from the (2) Grounding Terminals. Grounding terminals shall be of the
equipment enclosure. Bonding screws, straps, or buses in the distribution solderless type and listed as pressure-terminal connectors recognized for
panelboard or in appliances shall be removed and discarded. Where the the wire size used. The bonding conductor shall be solid or stranded,
distribution panelboard is the service equipment as permitted by insulated or bare, and shall be 8.0 mm2 copper minimum, or equivalent.
5.50.3.3(b), the neutral conductors and the equipment grounding bus The bonding conductor shall be routed so as not to be exposed to
shall be connected. physical damage.

(2) Connections of Ranges and Clothes Dryers. Connections of (3) Metallic Piping and Ducts. Metallic gas, water, and waste pipes
ranges and clothes dryers with 115/230-volt, 3-wire ratings shall be made and metallic air-circulating ducts shall be considered bonded if they are
with 4-conductor cord and 3-pole, 4-wire, grounding-type plugs, with connected to the terminal on the chassis [see 5.50.2.7(c)(1)] by clamps,
230-volt, 2-wire ratings shall be made with 3-conductor cord and 2-pole, solderless connectors, or by suitable grounding-type straps.
3-wire, grounding-type plugs, or by Type AC cable, Type MC cable, or
conductors enclosed in flexible metal conduit. (4) Metallic Roof and Exterior Coverings. Any metallic roof and
exterior covering shall be considered bonded if the following conditions
(b) Equipment Grounding Means. are met:

(1) Supply Cord or Permanent Feeder. The green-colored insulated a. The metal panels overlap one another and are securely attached
grounding wire in the supply cord or permanent feeder wiring shall be to the wood or metal frame parts by metallic fasteners.
connected to the grounding bus in the distribution panelboard or b. The lower panel of the metallic exterior covering is secured by
disconnecting means. metallic fasteners at a cross member of the chassis by two metal straps
per mobile home unit or section at opposite ends.
(2) Electrical System. In the electrical system, all exposed metal
parts, enclosures, frames, lamp fixture canopies, and so forth shall be The bonding strap material shall be a minimum of 100 mm in width
effectively bonded to the grounding terminal or enclosure of the of material equivalent to the skin or a material of equal or better
distribution panelboard. electrical conductivity. The straps shall be fastened with paint-
penetrating fittings such as screws and starwashers or equivalent.
(3) Cord-Connected Appliances. Cord-connected appliances, such as
washing machines, clothes dryers, and refrigerators, and the electrical 5.50.2.8 Testing.
system of gas ranges and so forth, shall be grounded by means of a cord
with grounding conductor and grounding-type attachment plug. (a) Dielectric Strength Test. The wiring of each mobile home shall be
subjected to a 1-minute, 900-volt, dielectric strength test (with all
(c) Bonding of Non–Current-Carrying Metal Parts. switches closed) between live parts (including neutral) and the mobile
home ground. Alternatively, the test shall be permitted to be performed
(1) Exposed Non–Current-Carrying Metal Parts. All exposed non– at 1 080 volts for 1 second. This test shall be performed after branch
current-carrying metal parts that may become energized shall be circuits are complete and after luminaires (fixtures) or appliances are
effectively bonded to the grounding terminal or enclosure of the installed.
distribution panelboard. A bonding conductor shall be connected
Exception: Listed luminaires (fixtures) or appliances shall not be (b) Total Load for Determining Power Supply. Total load for
required to withstand the dielectric strength test. determining power supply is the sum of the following:

(b) Continuity and Operational Tests and Polarity Checks. Each (1) Lighting and small appliance load as calculated in 5.50.2.9(a)(5).
mobile home shall be subjected to all of the following: (2) Nameplate amperes for motors and heater loads (exhaust fans,
air conditioners, electric, gas, or oil heating). Omit smaller of the heating
(1) An electrical continuity test to ensure that all exposed and cooling loads, except include blower motor if used as air-conditioner
electrically conductive parts are properly bonded evaporator motor. Where an air conditioner is not installed and a 40-
(2) An electrical operational test to demonstrate that all equipment, ampere power-supply cord is provided, allow 15 amperes for a 230-volt
except water heaters and electric furnaces, is connected and in working supply or 15 amperes per leg for a 115/230-volt supply, for air
order conditioning.
(3) Electrical polarity checks of permanently wired equipment and (3) Twenty-five percent of current of largest motor in (2).
receptacle outlets to determine that connections have been properly made (4) Total of nameplate amperes for waste disposer, dishwasher,
water heater, clothes dryer, wall-mounted oven, cooking units. Where the
5.50.2.9 Calculations. The following method shall be employed in number of these appliances exceeds three, use 75 percent of total.
calculating the supply-cord and distribution-panelboard load for each (5) Derive amperes for freestanding range (as distinguished from
feeder assembly for each mobile home in lieu of the procedure shown in separate ovens and cooking units) by dividing the following values by
Article 2.20 and shall be based on a 2-wire, 230-volt supply with 230- 230 volts:
volt loads or on a 3-wire, 115/230-volt supply with 115-volt loads
balanced between the two legs of the 3-wire system.
Nameplate Rating (watts) Use (volt-amperes)
(a) Lighting, Small Appliance, and Laundry Load. 0 – 10 000 80 Percent of Rating
Over 10 000 – 12 500 8 000
(1) Lighting Volt-Amperes. Length times width of mobile home Over 12 500 – 13 500 8 400
floor (outside dimensions) times 33 volt-amperes/m2, for example, length Over 13 500 – 14 500 8 800
× width × 33 = lighting volt-amperes. Over 14 500 – 15 500 9 200
Over 15 500 – 16 500 9 600
(2) Small Appliance Volt-Amperes. Number of circuits times 1 500 Over 16 500 – 17 500 10 000
volt-amperes for each 20-ampere appliance receptacle circuit (see
definition of Appliance, Portable, with note in 5.50.1.2), for example,
number of circuits × 1 500 = small appliance volt-amperes.
(6) If outlets or circuits are provided for other than factory-installed
(3) Laundry Area Circuit Volt-Amperes. 1 500 volt-amperes. appliances, include the anticipated load.

(4) Total Volt-Amperes. Lighting volt-amperes plus small appliance FPN: Refer to Appendix D, Example D11, for an illustration of the application of this
volt-amperes plus laundry area volt-amperes equals total volt-amperes. calculation.

(5) Net Volt-Amperes. First 3 000 total volt-amperes at 100 percent (c) Optional Method of Calculation for Lighting and Appliance
plus remainder at 35 percent equals volt-amperes to be divided by 230 Load. The optional method for calculating lighting and appliance load
volts to obtain current (amperes) per leg. shown in 2.20.4.3 shall be permitted.
5.50.2.10 Interconnection of Multiple-Section Mobile or THIS CONNECTION IS FOR HEATING
Manufactured Home Units. AND/OR AIR-CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT.
THE BRANCH CIRCUIT IS RATED AT NOT
(a) Wiring Methods. Approved and listed fixed-type wiring methods MORE THAN _____ AMPERES, AT ______ VOLTS, 60 HERTZ,
shall be used to join portions of a circuit that must be electrically joined _____ CONDUCTOR AMPACITY.
and are located in adjacent sections after the home is installed on its A DISCONNECTING MEANS SHALL BE LOCATED
support foundation. The circuit’s junction shall be accessible for WITHIN SIGHT OF THE EQUIPMENT.
disassembly when the home is prepared for relocation.
The correct voltage and ampere rating shall be given. The tag shall be
FPN: See 5.50.2.6(k) for component interconnections. not less than 0.50 mm thick etched brass, stainless steel, anodized or
alclad aluminum, or equivalent. The tag shall not be less than 75 mm by
(b) Disconnecting Means. Expandable or multi-unit manufactured 45 mm minimum size.
homes not having permanently installed feeders that are to be moved
from one location to another shall be permitted to have disconnecting 5.50.2.16 Arc-Fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection.
means with branch-circuit protective equipment in each unit when so
located that after assembly or joining together of units, the requirements (a) Definition. Arc-fault circuit interrupters are defined in Article
of 5.50.2.1 will be met. 2.10.1.12(a).
5.50.2.11 Outdoor Outlets, Luminaires (Fixtures), Air-Cooling (b) Bedrooms of Mobile Homes and Manufactured Homes. All
Equipment, and So Forth. branch circuits that supply 250-volt and/or 125-volt, single-phase, 15-
and 20-ampere outlets installed in bedrooms of mobile homes and
(a) Listed for Outdoor Use. Outdoor luminaires (fixtures) and manufactured homes shall be protected by arc-fault circuit interrupter(s).
equipment shall be listed for outdoor use. Outdoor receptacle or
convenience outlets shall be of a gasketed-cover type for use in wet 5.50.3 Services and Feeders
locations. Where located on the underside of the home or located under
roof extensions or similarly protected locations, outdoor luminaires 5.50.3.1 Distribution System. The mobile home park secondary
(fixtures) and equipment shall be listed for use in damp locations. electrical distribution system to mobile home lots shall be single-phase,
230 volts or 115/230 volts, nominal. For the purpose of Part 5.50.3,
(b) Outside Heating Equipment, Air-Conditioning Equipment, or where the park service exceeds 230 volts, nominal, transformers and
Both. A mobile home provided with a branch circuit designed to secondary distribution panelboards shall be treated as services.
energize outside heating equipment, air-conditioning equipment, or both,
located outside the mobile home, other than room air conditioners, shall 5.50.3.2 Allowable Demand Factors. Park electrical wiring systems
have such branch-circuit conductors terminate in a listed outlet box, or shall be calculated (at 230 volts or 115/230 volts) on the larger of the
disconnecting means, located on the outside of the mobile home. A label following:
shall be permanently affixed adjacent to the outlet box and shall contain
the following information: (1) 16 000 volt-amperes for each mobile home lot
(2) The load calculated in accordance with 5.50.2.9 for the largest
typical mobile home that each lot will accept
It shall be permissible to calculate the feeder or service load in (b) Manufactured Home Service Equipment. The manufactured
accordance with Table 5.50.3.2. No demand factor shall be allowed for home service equipment shall be permitted to be installed in or on a
any other load, except as provided in this Code. manufactured home, provided that all of the following conditions are
met:
Service and feeder conductors to a mobile home in compliance with
3.10.1.15(b)(6) shall be permitted. (1) The manufacturer shall include in its written installation
instructions information indicating that the home shall be secured in
place by an anchoring system or installed on and secured to a permanent
Table 5.50.3.2 Demand Factors for Services and Feeders foundation.
Number of Mobile Homes Demand Factor (Percent)
1 100 (2) The installation of the service equipment shall comply with
2 55 Article 2.30.
3 44
4 39 (3) Means shall be provided for the connection of a grounding
5 33 electrode conductor to the service equipment and routing it outside the
6 29 structure.
7-9 28
10-12 27 (4) Bonding and grounding of the service shall be in accordance
13-15 26 with Article 2.50.
16-21 25
22-40 24 (5) The manufacturer shall include in its written installation
41-60 23 instructions one method of grounding the service equipment at the
61 and over 22 installation site. The instructions shall clearly state that other methods of
grounding are found in Article 2.50.

(6) The minimum size grounding electrode conductor shall be

specified in the instructions.
5.50.3.3 Service Equipment.
(7) A red warning label shall be mounted on or adjacent to the
(a) Mobile Home Service Equipment. The mobile home service service equipment. The label shall state the following:
equipment shall be located adjacent to the mobile home and not mounted
in or on the mobile home. The service equipment shall be located in sight WARNING
from and not more than 9 000 mm from the exterior wall of the mobile DO NOT PROVIDE ELECTRICAL POWER
home it serves. The service equipment shall be permitted to be located UNTIL THE GROUNDING ELECTRODE(S)
elsewhere on the premises, provided that a disconnecting means suitable IS INSTALLED AND CONNECTED
for use as service equipment is located within sight from and not more (SEE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS).
than 9 000 mm from the exterior wall of the mobile home it serves and is
rated not less than that required for service equipment per 5.50.3.3(c). Where the service equipment is not installed in or on the unit, the
Grounding at the disconnecting means shall be in accordance with installation shall comply with the other provisions of this section.
2.50.2.13.
 (c) Rating. Mobile home service equipment shall be rated at not less 5.50.3.4 Feeder.
than 100 amperes at 230 volts or 115/230 volts, and provisions shall be
made for connecting a mobile home feeder assembly by a permanent (a) Feeder Conductors. Feeder conductors shall consist of either a
wiring method. Power outlets used as mobile home service equipment listed cord, factory installed in accordance with 5.50.2.1(b), or a
shall also be permitted to contain receptacles rated up to 50 amperes with permanently installed feeder consisting of three or four insulated, color-
appropriate overcurrent protection. Fifty-ampere receptacles shall coded conductors that shall be identified by the factory or field marking
conform to the configuration shown in Figure 5.50.2.1(c). of the conductors in compliance with 3.10.1.12. Equipment grounding
conductors shall not be identified by stripping the insulation.
FPN: Complete details of the 50-ampere plug and receptacle configuration can be
found in ANSI/NEMA WD 6-1989, National Electrical Manufacturers Association
Standard for Wiring Devices — Dimensional Requirements, Figure 14-50. Exception: Where a feeder is installed between service equipment and a
disconnecting means as covered in 5.50.3.3(a), it shall be permitted to
(d) Additional Outside Electrical Equipment. Means for connecting omit the equipment grounding conductor where the grounded circuit
a mobile home accessory building or structure or additional electrical conductor is grounded at the disconnecting means as required in
equipment located outside a mobile home by a fixed wiring method shall 2.50.2.13(b).
be provided in either the mobile home service equipment or the local
external disconnecting means permitted in 5.50.3.3(a). (b) Feeder Capacity. Mobile home and manufactured home lot feeder
circuit conductors shall have a capacity not less than the loads supplied
(e) Additional Receptacles. Additional receptacles shall be permitted and shall be rated at not less than 100 amperes at 230 volts or 115/230
for connection of electrical equipment located outside the mobile home, volts.
and all such 250-volt and/or 125-volt, single-phase, 15- and 20-ampere
receptacles shall be protected by a listed ground-fault circuit interrupter.
ARTICLE 5.51 — RECREATIONAL VEHICLES AND
(f) Mounting Height. Outdoor mobile home disconnecting means RECREATIONAL VEHICLE PARKS
shall be installed so the bottom of the enclosure containing the
disconnecting means is not less than 600 mm above finished grade or 5.51.1 General
working platform. The disconnecting means shall be installed so that the
center of the grip of the operating handle, when in the highest position, is 5.51.1.1 Scope. The provisions of this article cover the electrical
not more than 2 000 mm above the finished grade or working platform. conductors and equipment other than low-voltage and automotive vehicle
circuits or extensions thereof, installed within or on recreational vehicles,
(g) Marking. Where a 250-volt or 125/250-volt receptacle is used in the conductors that connect recreational vehicles to a supply of
mobile home service equipment, the service equipment shall be marked electricity, and the installation of equipment and devices related to
as follows: electrical installations within a recreational vehicle park.

FPN: For information on low-voltage systems, see NFPA 1192-2002, Standard for
TURN DISCONNECTING SWITCH OR Recreational Vehicles, and ANSI/RVIA 12V, Low Voltage Systems in Conversion and
CIRCUIT BREAKER OFF BEFORE INSERTING Recreational Vehicles, 2002 edition.
OR REMOVING PLUG. PLUG MUST BE FULLY
INSERTED OR REMOVED. 5.51.1.2 Definitions. (See Article 1.0 for additional definitions.)

The marking shall be located on the service equipment adjacent to the Air-Conditioning or Comfort-Cooling Equipment. All of that
receptacle outlet. equipment intended or installed for the purpose of processing the
treatment of air so as to control simultaneously its temperature, humidity,
cleanliness, and distribution to meet the requirements of the conditioned Frame. Chassis rail and any welded addition thereto of metal thickness
space. of 1.35 mm or greater.

Appliance, Fixed. An appliance that is fastened or otherwise secured Low Voltage. An electromotive force rated 24 volts, nominal, or less,
at a specific location. supplied from a transformer, converter, or battery.

Appliance, Portable. An appliance that is actually moved or can Motor Home. A vehicular unit designed to provide temporary living
easily be moved from one place to another in normal use. quarters for recreational, camping, or travel use built on or permanently
attached to a self-propelled motor vehicle chassis or on a chassis cab or
FPN: For the purpose of this article, the following major appliances, other than built-in, van that is an integral part of the completed vehicle. (See Recreational
are considered portable if cord connected: refrigerators, range equipment, clothes
washers, dishwashers without booster heaters, or other similar appliances. Vehicle.)

Appliance, Stationary. An appliance that is not easily moved from Power-Supply Assembly. The conductors, including ungrounded,
one place to another in normal use. grounded, and equipment grounding conductors, the connectors,
attachment plug caps, and all other fittings, grommets, or devices
Camping Trailer. A vehicular portable unit mounted on wheels and installed for the purpose of delivering energy from the source of
constructed with collapsible partial side walls that fold for towing by electrical supply to the distribution panel within the recreational vehicle.
another vehicle and unfold at the campsite to provide temporary living
quarters for recreational, camping, or travel use. (See Recreational Recreational Vehicle. A vehicular-type unit primarily designed as
Vehicle.) temporary living quarters for recreational, camping, or travel use, which
either has its own motive power or is mounted on or drawn by another
Converter. A device that changes electrical energy from one form to vehicle. The basic entities are travel trailer, camping trailer, truck
another, as from alternating current to direct current. camper, and motor home.

Dead Front (as applied to switches, circuit breakers, switchboards, Recreational Vehicle Park. A plot of land upon which two or more
and distribution panelboards). Designed, constructed, and installed so recreational vehicle sites are located, established, or maintained for
that no current-carrying parts are normally exposed on the front. occupancy by recreational vehicles of the general public as temporary
living quarters for recreation or vacation purposes.
Disconnecting Means. The necessary equipment usually consisting of
a circuit breaker or switch and fuses, and their accessories, located near Recreational Vehicle Site. A plot of ground within a recreational
the point of entrance of supply conductors in a recreational vehicle and vehicle park set aside for the accommodation of a recreational vehicle on
intended to constitute the means of cutoff for the supply to that a temporary basis. It can be used as either a recreational vehicle site or as
recreational vehicle. a camping unit site.

Distribution Panelboard. A single panel or group of panel units Recreational Vehicle Site Feeder Circuit Conductors. The
designed for assembly in the form of a single panel, including buses, and conductors from the park service equipment to the recreational vehicle
with or without switches and/or automatic overcurrent-protective devices site supply equipment.
for the control of light, heat, or power circuits of small individual as well
as aggregate capacity; designed to be placed in a cabinet or cutout box Recreational Vehicle Site Supply Equipment. The necessary
placed in or against a wall or partition and accessible only from the front. equipment, usually a power outlet, consisting of a circuit breaker or
switch and fuse and their accessories, located near the point of entrance
of supply conductors to a recreational vehicle site and intended to supply source shall be permitted to be connected to a 230-volt or
constitute the disconnecting means for the supply to that site. 115/230-volt source, provided the entire wiring system and equipment
are rated and installed in full conformity with Parts 5.51.1, 5.51.2, 5.51.3,
Recreational Vehicle Stand. That area of a recreational vehicle site 5.51.4, and 5.51.5 requirements of this article covering 230-volt or
intended for the placement of a recreational vehicle. 115/230-volt electrical systems. Circuits fed from ac transformers shall
not supply dc appliances.
Transformer. A device that, when used, raises or lowers the voltage
of alternating current of the original source. (b) Voltage Converters (230-Volt or 115-Volt Alternating Current
to Low-Voltage Direct Current). The 230-volt or 115-volt ac side of
Travel Trailer. A vehicular unit, mounted on wheels, designed to the voltage converter shall be wired in full conformity with Parts 5.51.1,
provide temporary living quarters for recreational, camping, or travel 5.51.2, 5.51.3, 5.51.4, and 5.51.5 requirements of this article for 230-volt
use, of such size or weight as not to require special highway movement or 115-volt electrical systems.
permits when towed by a motorized vehicle, and of gross trailer area less
than 30 m2. (See Recreational Vehicle.) Exception: Converters supplied as an integral part of a listed appliance
shall not be subject to 5.51.2.1(b).
Truck Camper. A portable unit constructed to provide temporary
living quarters for recreational, travel, or camping use, consisting of a All converters and transformers shall be listed for use in recreation
roof, floor, and sides, designed to be loaded onto and unloaded from the vehicles and designed or equipped to provide over-temperature
bed of a pick-up truck. (See Recreational Vehicle.) protection. To determine the converter rating, the following formula shall
be applied to the total connected load, including average battery charging
5.51.1.4 General Requirements. rate, of all 12-volt equipment:
The first 20 amperes of load at 100 percent, plus
(a) Not Covered. A recreational vehicle not used for the purposes as The second 20 amperes of load at 50 percent, plus
defined in 5.51.1.2 shall not be required to meet the provisions of Part I All load above 40 amperes at 25 percent
pertaining to the number or capacity of circuits required. It shall,
however, meet all other applicable requirements of this article if the Exception: A low-voltage appliance that is controlled by a momentary
recreational vehicle is provided with an electrical installation intended to switch (normally open) that has no means for holding in the closed
be energized from a 230-volt or 115/230-volt, nominal, ac power-supply position or refrigerators with a 230-volt or 115-volt function shall not be
system. considered as a connected load when determining the required converter
rating. Momentarily energized appliances shall be limited to those used
(b) Systems. This article covers combination electrical systems, to prepare the vehicle for occupancy or travel.
generator installations, and 230-volt or 115/230-volt, nominal, systems.
(c) Bonding Voltage Converter Enclosures. The non–current-
FPN: For information on low-voltage systems, refer to NFPA 1192-2002, Standard on carrying metal enclosure of the voltage converter shall be bonded to the
Recreational Vehicles, and ANSI/RVIA 12V-2002, Standard for Low-Voltage Systems
in Conversion and Recreational Vehicles. frame of the vehicle with a minimum 8.0 mm2 copper conductor. The
voltage converter shall be provided with a separate chassis bonding
5.51.2 Combination Electrical Systems conductor that shall not be used as a current-carrying conductor.

5.51.2.1 Combination Electrical Systems. (d) Dual-Voltage Fixtures, Including Luminaires or Appliances.
Fixtures, including luminaires, or appliances having both 230-volt or
(a) General. Vehicle wiring suitable for connection to a battery or dc 115-volt and low-voltage connections shall be listed for dual voltage.
 type and be installed in listed flexible conduit or listed liquidtight
(e) Autotransformers. Autotransformers shall not be used. flexible conduit. The point of first termination shall be in one of the
following:
(f) Receptacles and Plug Caps. Where a recreational vehicle is
equipped with a 120-volt or 120/240-volt ac system, a low-voltage (1) Panelboard
system, or both, receptacles and plug caps of the low-voltage system (2) Junction box with a blank cover
shall differ in configuration from those of the 230-volt, 115-volt or (3) Junction box with a receptacle
115/230-volt system. Where a vehicle equipped with a battery or other (4) Enclosed transfer switch
low-voltage system has an external connection for low-voltage power, (5) Receptacle assembly listed in conjunction with the generator
the connector shall have a configuration that will not accept 230-volt,
115-volt or 115/230-volt power. The panelboard or junction box with a receptacle shall be installed
within the vehicle’s interior and within 460 mm of the compartment wall
5.51.3 Other Power Sources but not inside the compartment. If the generator is below the floor level
and not in a compartment, the panelboard or junction box with receptacle
5.51.3.1 Generator Installations. shall be installed within the vehicle interior within 460 mm of the point
of entry into the vehicle. A junction box with a blank cover shall be
(a) Mounting. Generators shall be mounted in such a manner as to be mounted on the compartment wall and shall be permitted inside or
effectively bonded to the recreational vehicle chassis. outside the compartment. A receptacle assembly listed in conjunction
with the generator shall be mounted in accordance with its listing. If the
(b) Generator Protection. Equipment shall be installed to ensure that generator is below floor level and not in a compartment, the junction box
the current-carrying conductors from the engine generator and from an with blank cover shall be mounted either to any part of the generator
outside source are not connected to a vehicle circuit at the same time. supporting structure (but not to the generator) or to the vehicle floor
Receptacles used as disconnecting means shall be accessible (as within 460 mm of any point directly above the generator on either the
applied to wiring methods) and capable of interrupting their rated current inside or outside of the floor surface. Overcurrent protection in
without hazard to the operator. accordance with 2.40.1.4 shall be provided for supply conductors as an
integral part of a listed generator or shall be located within 460 mm of
(c) Installation of Storage Batteries and Generators. Storage their point of entry into the vehicle.
batteries and internal-combustion-driven generator units (subject to the
provisions of this Code) shall be secured in place to avoid displacement 5.51.3.2 Multiple Supply Source.
from vibration and road shock.
(a) Multiple Supply Sources. Where a multiple supply system
(d) Ventilation of Generator Compartments. Compartments consisting of an alternate power source and a power-supply cord is
accommodating internal-combustion-driven generator units shall be installed, the feeder from the alternate power source shall be protected by
provided with ventilation in accordance with instructions provided by the an overcurrent-protective device. Installation shall be in accordance with
manufacturer of the generator unit. 5.51.3.1(a), 5.51.3.1(b), and 5.51.4.1.

FPN: For generator compartment construction requirements, see NFPA 1192-2002, (b) Multiple Supply Sources Capacity. The multiple supply sources
Standard on Recreational Vehicles.
shall not be required to be of the same capacity.
(e) Supply Conductors. The supply conductors from the engine
(c) Alternate Power Sources Exceeding 30 Amperes. If an alternate
generator to the first termination on the vehicle shall be of the stranded
power source exceeds 30 amperes, 115 volts, nominal, it shall be
permissible to wire it as a 230-volt, nominal, system, a 115-volt, (c) Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection. The internal
nominal, system or a 115/230-volt, nominal, system, provided an wiring of a recreational vehicle having only one 15- or 20-ampere branch
overcurrent-protective device of the proper rating is installed in the circuit as permitted in 5.51.4.3(a) and 5.51.4.3(b) shall have ground-fault
feeder. circuit-interrupter protection for personnel. The ground-fault circuit
interrupter shall be installed at the point where the power supply
(d) Power-Supply Assembly Not Less Than 30 Amperes. The assembly terminates within the recreational vehicle. Where a separable
external power-supply assembly shall be permitted to be less than the cord set is not employed, the ground-fault circuit interrupter shall be
calculated load but not less than 30 amperes and shall have overcurrent permitted to be an integral part of the attachment plug of the power
protection not greater than the capacity of the external power-supply supply assembly. The ground-fault circuit interrupter shall provide
assembly. protection also under the conditions of an open grounded circuit
conductor, interchanged circuit conductors, or both.
5.51.3.3 Other Sources. Other sources of ac power, such as inverters,
motor generators, or engine generators, shall be listed for use in 5.51.4.2 Receptacle Outlets Required.
recreational vehicles and shall be installed in accordance with the terms
of the listing. Other sources of ac power shall be wired in full conformity (a) Spacing. Receptacle outlets shall be installed at wall spaces 600
with the requirements in Parts 5.51.1, 5.51.2, 5.51.3, 5.51.4, and 5.51.5 mm wide or more so that no point along the floor line is more than 1 800
covering 230-volt and 115-volt electrical systems. mm, measured horizontally, from an outlet in that space.

5.51.3.4 Alternate Source Restriction. Transfer equipment, if not Exception No. 1: Bath and hall areas.
integral with the listed power source, shall be installed to ensure that the
current-carrying conductors from other sources of ac power and from an Exception No. 2: Wall spaces occupied by kitchen cabinets, wardrobe
outside source are not connected to the vehicle circuit at the same time. cabinets, built-in furniture, behind doors that may open fully against a
wall surface, or similar facilities.
5.51.4 Nominal 230-Volt, 115-Volt or 115/230-Volt Systems
(b) Location. Receptacle outlets shall be installed as follows:
5.51.4.1 230-Volt, 115-Volt or 115/230-Volt, Nominal, Systems.
(1) Adjacent to countertops in the kitchen (at least one on each side
(a) General Requirements. The electrical equipment and material of of the sink if countertops are on each side and are 300 mm or over in
recreational vehicles indicated for connection to a wiring system rated width)
230 volts, nominal, 2-wire with ground, 115 volts, nominal, 2-wire with (2) Adjacent to the refrigerator and gas range space, except where a
ground, or a wiring system rated 115/230 volts, nominal, 3-wire with gas-fired refrigerator or cooking appliance, requiring no external
ground, shall be listed and installed in accordance with the requirements electrical connection, is factory installed
of Parts 5.51.1, 5.51.2, 5.51.3, 5.51.4, and 5.51.5. Electrical equipment (3) Adjacent to countertop spaces of 300 mm or more in width that
connected line-to-line shall have a voltage rating of 208–230 volts. cannot be reached from a receptacle required in 5.51.4.2(b)(1) by a cord
of 1 800 mm without crossing a traffic area, cooking appliance, or sink
(b) Materials and Equipment. Electrical materials, devices,
appliances, fittings, and other equipment installed in, intended for use in, (c) Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection. Where provided,
or attached to the recreational vehicle shall be listed. All products shall each 250-volt and/or 125-volt, single-phase, 15- or 20-ampere receptacle
be used only in the manner in which they have been tested and found outlet shall have ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection for personnel
suitable for the intended use. in the following locations:
 (1) Adjacent to a bathroom lavatory
(2) Where the receptacles are installed to serve the countertop (b) One 20-Ampere Circuit. One 20-ampere circuit to supply lights,
surfaces and are within 1 800 mm of any lavatory or sink receptacle outlets, and fixed appliances. Such recreational vehicles shall
be equipped with one 20-ampere switch and fuse or one 20-ampere
Exception No. 1: Receptacles installed for appliances in dedicated circuit breaker.
spaces, such as for dishwashers, disposals, refrigerators, freezers, and
laundry equipment. (c) Two to Five 15- or 20-Ampere Circuits. A maximum of five 15-
or 20-ampere circuits to supply lights, receptacle outlets, and fixed
Exception No. 2: Single receptacles for interior connections of appliances shall be permitted. Such recreational vehicles shall be
expandable room sections. equipped with a distribution panelboard rated at 230 volts maximum for
a 230 volts power supply or 115 volts maximum for a 115 volts power
Exception No. 3: De-energized receptacles that are within 1 800 mm of supply, with a 30-ampere rated main power supply assembly. Not more
any sink or lavatory due to the retraction of the expandable room than two 230-volt or 115-volt thermostatically controlled appliances (i.e.,
section. air conditioner and water heater) shall be installed in such systems unless
appliance isolation switching, energy management systems, or similar
(3) In the area occupied by a toilet, shower, tub, or any combination methods are used.
thereof
(4) On the exterior of the vehicle Exception: Additional 15- or 20-ampere circuits shall be permitted
where a listed energy management system rated at 30-ampere maximum
Exception: Receptacles that are located inside of an access panel that is is employed within the system.
installed on the exterior of the vehicle to supply power for an installed
appliance shall not be required to have ground-fault circuit-interrupter FPN: See 2.10.2.4(a) for permissible loads. See 5.51.4.6(c) for main disconnect and
overcurrent protection requirements.
protection.
(d) More Than Five Circuits Without a Listed Energy
The receptacle outlet shall be permitted in a listed luminaire (lighting
Management System. A 50-ampere, 230-volt or 115/230-volt power-
fixture). A receptacle outlet shall not be installed in a tub or combination
supply assembly shall be used where six or more circuits are employed.
tub–shower compartment.
The load distribution shall ensure a reasonable current balance between
phases.
(d) Face-Up Position. A receptacle shall not be installed in a face-up
position in any countertop or similar horizontal surfaces within the living
5.51.4.4 Branch-Circuit Protection.
area.
(a) Rating. The branch-circuit overcurrent devices shall be rated as
5.51.4.3 Branch Circuits Required.
follows:
Each recreational vehicle containing a 230-volt or 115-volt electrical
(1) Not more than the circuit conductors, and
system shall contain one of the following.
(2) Not more than 150 percent of the rating of a single appliance
rated 13.3 amperes or more and supplied by an individual branch circuit,
(a) One 15-Ampere Circuit. One 15-ampere circuit to supply lights,
but
receptacle outlets, and fixed appliances. Such recreational vehicles shall
(3) Not more than the overcurrent protection size marked on an air
be equipped with one 15-ampere switch and fuse or one 15-ampere
conditioner or other motor-operated appliances
circuit breaker.
 (b) Location. The distribution panelboard shall be installed in a readily
(b) Protection for Smaller Conductors. A 20-ampere fuse or circuit accessible location. Working clearance for the panelboard shall be not
breaker shall be permitted for protection for fixtures, including less than 600 mm wide and 800 mm deep.
luminaires, leads, cords, or small appliances, and 2.0mm2 (1.6 mm dia.)
tap conductors, not over 1 800 mm long for recessed luminaires (lighting Exception No. 1: Where the panelboard cover is exposed to the inside
fixtures). aisle space, one of the working clearance dimensions shall be permitted
to be reduced to a minimum of 560 mm. A panelboard is considered
(c) Fifteen-Ampere Receptacle Considered Protected by 20 exposed where the panelboard cover is within 50 mm of the aisle’s
Amperes. If more than one receptacle or load is on a branch circuit, a finished surface.
15-ampere receptacle shall be permitted to be protected by a 20-ampere
fuse or circuit breaker. Exception No. 2: Compartment doors used for access to a generator
shall be permitted to be equipped with a locking system.
5.51.4.5 Power-Supply Assembly. Each recreational vehicle shall have
only one of the following main power-supply assemblies. (c) Dead-Front Type. The distribution panelboard shall be of the
dead-front type and shall consist of one or more circuit breakers or Type
(a) Fifteen-Ampere Main Power-Supply Assembly. Recreational S fuseholders. A main disconnecting means shall be provided where
vehicles wired in accordance with 5.51.4.3(a) shall use a listed 15- fuses are used or where more than two circuit breakers are employed. A
ampere or larger main power-supply assembly. main overcurrent protective device not exceeding the power-supply
assembly rating shall be provided where more than two branch circuits
(b) Twenty-Ampere Main Power-Supply Assembly. Recreational are employed.
vehicles wired in accordance with 5.51.4.3(b) shall use a listed 20-
ampere or larger main power-supply assembly. 5.51.4.7 Means for Connecting to Power Supply.

(c) Thirty-Ampere Main Power-Supply Assembly. Recreational (a) Assembly. The power-supply assembly or assemblies shall be
vehicles wired in accordance with 5.51.4.3(c) shall use a listed 30- factory supplied or factory installed and be of one of the types specified
ampere or larger main power-supply assembly. herein.

(d) Fifty-Ampere Power-Supply Assembly. Recreational vehicles (1) Separable. Where a separable power-supply assembly consisting
wired in accordance with 5.51.4.3(d) shall use a listed 50-ampere, 230- of a cord with a female connector and molded attachment plug cap is
volt or 115/230-volt main power-supply assembly. provided, the vehicle shall be equipped with a permanently mounted,
flanged surface inlet (male, recessed-type motor-base attachment plug)
5.51.4.6 Distribution Panelboard. wired directly to the distribution panelboard by an approved wiring
method. The attachment plug cap shall be of a listed type.
(a) Listed and Appropriately Rated. A listed and appropriately rated
distribution panelboard or other equipment specifically listed for this (2) Permanently Connected. Each power-supply assembly shall be
purpose shall be used. The grounded conductor termination bar shall be connected directly to the terminals of the distribution panelboard or
insulated from the enclosure as provided in 5.51.4.15(c). An equipment conductors within a junction box and provided with means to prevent
grounding terminal bar shall be attached inside the metal enclosure of the strain from being transmitted to the terminals. The ampacity of the
panelboard. conductors between each junction box and the terminals of each
distribution panelboard shall be at least equal to the ampacity of the
power-supply cord. The supply end of the assembly shall be equipped
with an attachment plug of the type described in 5.51.4.7(c). Where the
cord passes through the walls or floors, it shall be protected by means of
conduit and bushings or equivalent. The cord assembly shall have
permanent provisions for protection against corrosion and mechanical
damage while the vehicle is in transit.

(b) Cord. The cord exposed usable length shall be measured from the
point of entrance to the recreational vehicle or the face of the flanged
surface inlet (motor-base attachment plug) to the face of the attachment
plug at the supply end.
The cord exposed usable length, measured to the point of entry on the
vehicle exterior, shall be a minimum of 7 600 mm where the point of
entrance is at the side of the vehicle or shall be a minimum 9 000 mm
where the point of entrance is at the rear of the vehicle.
Where the cord entrance into the vehicle is more than 900 mm above
the ground, the minimum cord lengths above shall be increased by the
vertical distance of the cord entrance heights above 900 mm.

FPN: See 5.51.4.7(e).

(c) Attachment Plugs.

(1) Units with One 15-Ampere Branch Circuit. Recreational vehicles

having only one 15-ampere branch circuit as permitted by 5.51.4.3(a)
shall have an attachment plug that shall be 2-pole, 3-wire grounding
type, rated 15 amperes, 250 volts or 125 volts, conforming to the
configuration shown in Figure 5.51.4.7(c).

FPN: Complete details of this configuration can be found in National Electrical

Manufacturers Association’s ANSI/NEMA WD 6-1989, Standard for Dimensions of
Attachment Plugs and Receptacle, Figure 5.15.

(2) Units with One 20-Ampere Branch Circuit. Recreational vehicles

having only one 20-ampere branch circuit as permitted in 5.51.4.3(b) Figure 5.51.4.7(c) Configurations for Grounding-Type Receptacles
shall have an attachment plug that shall be 2-pole, 3-wire grounding and Attachment Plug Caps Used for Recreational Vehicle Supply
type, rated 20 amperes, 250 volts or 125 volts, conforming to the Cords and Recreational Vehicle Lots.
configuration shown in Figure 5.51.4.7(c).

FPN: Complete details of this configuration can be found in ANSI/NEMA WD 6-1989,

National Electrical Manufacturers Association’s Standard for Dimensions of
Attachment Plugs and Receptacles, Figure 5.20.
 (3) Units with Two to Five 15- or 20-Ampere Branch Circuits.
Recreational vehicles wired in accordance with 5.51.4.3(c) shall have an (e) Location. The point of entrance of a power-supply assembly shall
attachment plug that shall be 2-pole, 3-wire grounding type, rated 30 be located within 4 500 mm of the rear, on the left (road) side or at the
amperes, 250 volts or 125 volts, conforming to the configuration shown rear, left of the longitudinal center of the vehicle, within 460 mm of the
in Figure 5.51.4.7(c), intended for use with units rated at 30 amperes, outside wall.
250 volts or 125 volts.
Exception No. 1: A recreational vehicle equipped with only a listed
FPN: Complete details of this configuration can be found in ANSI/NEMA WD 6-1989, flexible drain system or a side-vent drain system shall be permitted to
National Electrical Manufacturers Association’s Standard for Dimensions of
Attachment Plugs and Receptacles, Figure TT. have the electrical point of entrance located on either side, provided the
drain(s) for the plumbing system is (are) located on the same side.
(4) Units with 50-Ampere Power Supply Assembly. Recreational
vehicles having a power-supply assembly rated 50 amperes as permitted Exception No. 2: A recreational vehicle shall be permitted to have the
by 5.51.4.3(d) shall have a 3-pole, 4-wire grounding-type attachment electrical point of entrance located more than 4 500 mm from the rear.
plug rated 50 amperes, 125/250 volts, conforming to the configuration Where this occurs, the distance beyond the 4 500 mm dimension shall be
shown in Figure 5.51.4.7(c). added to the cord’s minimum length as specified in 5.51.4.7(b).

FPN: Complete details of this configuration can be found in ANSI/NEMA WD 6-1989, Exception No. 3: Recreational vehicles designed for transporting
National Electrical Manufacturers Association’s Standard for Dimensions of livestock shall be permitted to have the electrical point of entrance
Attachment Plugs and Receptacles, Figure 14.50.
located on either side or the front.
(d) Labeling at Electrical Entrance. Each recreational vehicle shall
have permanently affixed to the exterior skin, at or near the point of 5.51.4.8 Wiring Methods.
entrance of the power-supply cord(s), a label 75 mm × 45 mm minimum
size, made of etched, metal-stamped, or embossed brass, stainless steel, (a) Wiring Systems. Cables and raceways installed in accordance with
or anodized or alclad aluminum not less than 0.50 mm thick, or other Articles 3.20, 3.22, 3.30 through 3.40, 3.42 through 3.62, 3.86, and 3.88
suitable material (e.g., 0.13 mm thick plastic laminate) that reads, as shall be permitted in accordance with their applicable article, except as
appropriate, either otherwise specified in this article. An equipment grounding means shall
be provided in accordance with 2.50.6.9.
THIS CONNECTION IS FOR 110–125-VOLT AC,
60 HZ, ____ AMPERE SUPPLY. (b) Conduit and Tubing. Where rigid metal conduit or intermediate
metal conduit is terminated at an enclosure with a locknut and bushing
or connection, two locknuts shall be provided, one inside and one outside of
the enclosure. All cut ends of conduit and tubing shall be reamed or
THIS CONNECTION IS FOR 115/230-VOLT AC, otherwise finished to remove rough edges.
3-POLE, 4-WIRE, 60 HZ, ______ AMPERE SUPPLY.
(c) Nonmetallic Boxes. Nonmetallic boxes shall be acceptable only
or with nonmetallic-sheathed cable or nonmetallic raceways.

THIS CONNECTION IS FOR 230-VOLT AC, (d) Boxes. In walls and ceilings constructed of wood or other
2-POLE, 3-WIRE, 60 HZ, ______ AMPERE SUPPLY. combustible material, boxes and fittings shall be flush with the finished
surface or project therefrom.
The correct ampere rating shall be marked in the blank space.
 (e) Mounting. Wall and ceiling boxes shall be mounted in accordance device, the cable loop shall be considered as an integral portion of the
with Article 3.14. device.

Exception No. 1: Snap-in-type boxes or boxes provided with special wall (k) Physical Damage. Where subject to physical damage, exposed
or ceiling brackets that securely fasten boxes in walls or ceilings shall be nonmetallic cable shall be protected by covering boards, guard strips,
permitted. raceways, or other means.

Exception No. 2: A wooden plate providing a 40 mm minimum width (l) Metal Faceplates. Metal faceplates shall be of ferrous metal not
backing around the box and of a thickness of 12 mm or greater (actual) less than 0.75 mm in thickness or of nonferrous metal not less than
attached directly to the wall panel shall be considered as approved 1.0 mm in thickness. Nonmetallic faceplates shall be listed.
means for mounting outlet boxes.
(m) Metal Faceplates Effectively Grounded. Where metal faceplates
(f) Raceway and Cable Continuity. Raceways and cable sheaths shall are used, they shall be effectively grounded.
be continuous between boxes and other enclosures.
(n) Moisture or Physical Damage. Where outdoor or under-chassis
(g) Protected. Metal-clad, Type AC, or nonmetallic-sheathed cables wiring is 115 volts, nominal, or over and is exposed to moisture or
and electrical nonmetallic tubing shall be permitted to pass through the physical damage, the wiring shall be protected by rigid metal conduit, by
centers of the wide side of 50 mm by 100 mm wood studs. However, intermediate metal conduit, or by electrical metallic tubing, rigid
they shall be protected where they pass through 50 mm by 50 mm wood nonmetallic conduit, or Type MI cable, that is closely routed against
studs or at other wood studs or frames where the cable or tubing would frames and equipment enclosures or other raceway or cable identified for
be less than 30 mm from the inside or outside surface. Steel plates on the application.
each side of the cable or tubing or a steel tube, with not less than 1.3 mm
wall thickness, shall be installed to protect the cable or tubing. These (o) Component Interconnections. Fittings and connectors that are
plates or tubes shall be securely held in place. Where nonmetallic- intended to be concealed at the time of assembly shall be listed and
sheathed cables pass through punched, cut, or drilled slots or holes in identified for the interconnection of building components. Such fittings
metal members, the cable shall be protected by bushings or grommets and connectors shall be equal to the wiring method employed in
securely fastened in the opening prior to installation of the cable. insulation, temperature rise, and fault-current withstanding and shall be
capable of enduring the vibration and shock occurring in recreational
(h) Bends. No bend shall have a radius of less than five times the cable vehicles.
diameter.
(p) Method of Connecting Expandable Units. The method of
(i) Cable Supports. Where connected with cable connectors or connecting expandable units to the main body of the vehicle shall
clamps, cables shall be supported within 300 mm of outlet boxes, comply with 5.51.4.8(p)(1) or (p)(2):
distribution panelboards, and splice boxes on appliances. Supports shall
be provided every 1 400 mm at other places. (1) Cord-and-Plug Connected. Cord and plug connections shall
comply with (a) through (d).
(j) Nonmetallic Box Without Cable Clamps. Nonmetallic-sheathed
cables shall be supported within 200 mm of a nonmetallic outlet box a. That portion of a branch circuit that is installed in an expandable
without cable clamps. Where wiring devices with integral enclosures are unit shall be permitted to be connected to the portion of the branch
employed with a loop of extra cable to permit future replacement of the circuit in the main body of the vehicle by means of an attachment plug
and cord listed for hard usage. The cord and its connections shall
conform to all provisions of Article 4.0 and shall be considered as a blank cover is used, the free ends of the conductors shall be adequately
permitted use under 4.0.1.7. Where the attachment plug and cord are capped or taped.
located within the vehicle’s interior, use of plastic thermoset or elastomer (3) A label conforming to 5.51.4.7(d) shall be placed on or adjacent
parallel cord Type SPT-3, SP-3, or SPE shall be permitted. to the junction box and shall read
b. Where the receptacle provided for connection of the cord to the
main circuit is located on the outside of the vehicle, it shall be protected AIR-CONDITIONING CIRCUIT.
with a ground-fault circuit interrupter for personnel and be listed for wet THIS CONNECTION IS FOR AIR CONDITIONERS
locations. A cord located on the outside of a vehicle shall be identified RATED 110–125-VOLT AC, 60 HZ,
for outdoor use. ___ AMPERES MAXIMUM. DO NOT EXCEED CIRCUIT RATING.
c. Unless removable or stored within the vehicle interior, the cord
assembly shall have permanent provisions for protection against or
corrosion and mechanical damage while the vehicle is in transit.
d. The attachment plug and cord shall be installed so as not to AIR-CONDITIONING CIRCUIT.
permit exposed live attachment plug pins. THIS CONNECTION IS FOR AIR CONDITIONERS
RATED 230-VOLT AC, 60 HZ,
(2) Direct Wired. That portion of a branch circuit that is installed in ___ AMPERES MAXIMUM. DO NOT EXCEED CIRCUIT RATING.
an expandable unit shall be permitted to be connected to the portion of
the branch circuit in the main body of the vehicle by means of flexible An ampere rating, not to exceed 80 percent of the circuit rating, shall
cord in accordance with 5.51.4.8(p)(2)a through (p)(2)d. be legibly marked in the blank space.

a. The flexible cord shall be listed for hard usage and for use in wet (4) The circuit shall serve no other purpose.
locations.
b. The flexible cord shall be permitted to pass through the interior (r) Prewiring for Generator Installation. Prewiring installed for the
of a wall or through a floor in lengths not to exceed 600 mm before purpose of facilitating future generator installation shall conform to the
terminating at an outlet. other applicable portions of this article and the following:
c. The flexible cord shall be installed in a nonflexible conduit or
tubing that runs continuously from the outlet box inside the recreational (1) Circuit conductors shall be appropriately sized in relation to the
vehicle to a strain relief connector listed for use in wet locations that is anticipated load and shall be protected by an overcurrent device in
located on the underside of the recreational vehicle. accordance with their ampacities.
d. The outer jacket of the flexible cord shall not be removed for (2) Where junction boxes are utilized at either of the circuit
that portion that is installed in the conduit or tubing. originating or terminus points, free ends of the conductors shall be
adequately capped or taped.
(q) Prewiring for Air-Conditioning Installation. Prewiring installed (3) Where devices such as receptacle outlet, transfer switch, and so
for the purpose of facilitating future air-conditioning installation shall forth, are installed, the installation shall be complete, including circuit
conform to the applicable portions of this article and the following: conductor connections. All devices shall be listed and appropriately
rated.
(1) An overcurrent protective device with a rating compatible with (4) A label conforming to 5.51.4.7(d) shall be placed on the cover of
the circuit conductors shall be installed in the distribution panelboard and each junction box containing incomplete circuitry and shall read, as
wiring connections completed. appropriate, either
(2) The load end of the circuit shall terminate in a junction box with
a blank cover or other listed enclosure. Where a junction box with a
 GENERATOR CIRCUIT. THIS CONNECTION assembly.
IS FOR GENERATORS RATED 110–125-VOLT AC,
60 HZ, ______ AMPERES MAXIMUM. 5.51.4.13 Receptacles. All receptacle outlets shall be of the grounding
type and installed in accordance with 4.6.1.3 and 2.10.2.3.
or
5.51.4.14 Luminaires (Lighting Fixtures).
GENERATOR CIRCUIT. THIS CONNECTION
IS FOR GENERATORS RATED 115/230-VOLT AC, (a) General. Any combustible wall or ceiling finish exposed between
60 HZ, _______ AMPERES MAXIMUM. the edge of a luminaire (fixture) canopy, or pan and the outlet box, shall
be covered with noncombustible material or a material identified for the
or purpose.

GENERATOR CIRCUIT. THIS CONNECTION (b) Shower Luminaires (Fixtures). If a luminaire (lighting fixture) is
IS FOR GENERATORS RATED 230-VOLT AC, provided over a bathtub or in a shower stall, it shall be of the enclosed
60 HZ, ______ AMPERES MAXIMUM. and gasketed type and listed for the type of installation, and it shall be
ground-fault circuit-interrupter protected.
The correct ampere rating shall be legibly marked in the blank space.
(c) Outdoor Outlets, Luminaires (Fixtures), Air-Cooling
5.51.4.9 Conductors and Boxes. The maximum number of conductors Equipment, and So On. Outdoor luminaires (fixtures) and other
permitted in boxes shall be in accordance with 3.14.2.2. equipment shall be listed for outdoor use.

5.51.4.10 Grounded Conductors. The identification of grounded 5.51.4.15 Grounding. (See also 5.51.4.17 on bonding of non–current-
conductors shall be in accordance with 2.0.1.6. carrying metal parts.)

5.51.4.11 Connection of Terminals and Splices. Conductor splices and (a) Power-Supply Grounding. The grounding conductor in the supply
connections at terminals shall be in accordance with 1.10.1.14. cord or feeder shall be connected to the grounding bus or other approved
grounding means in the distribution panelboard.
5.51.4.12 Switches.
(b) Distribution Panelboard. The distribution panelboard shall have a
(a) Rating. Switches shall be rated in accordance with 5.51.4.12(a)(1) grounding bus with sufficient terminals for all grounding conductors or
and (a)(2). other approved grounding means.

(1) Lighting Circuits. For lighting circuits, switches shall be rated not (c) Grounded Conductor. The grounded circuit conductor (neutral)
less than 10 amperes, 230-250 volts or 115–125 volts and in no case less shall be insulated from the equipment grounding conductors and from
than the connected load. equipment enclosures and other grounded parts. The grounded (neutral)
circuit terminals in the distribution panelboard and in ranges, clothes
(2) Motors or Other Loads. Switches for motor or other loads shall dryers, counter-mounted cooking units, and wall-mounted ovens shall be
comply with the provisions of 4.4.1.14. insulated from the equipment enclosure. Bonding screws, straps, or buses
in the distribution panelboard or in appliances shall be removed and
(b) Location. Switches shall not be installed within wet locations in discarded. Connection of electric ranges and electric clothes dryers
tub or shower spaces unless installed as part of a listed tub or shower utilizing a grounded (neutral) conductor, if cord-connected, shall be
made with 4-conductor cord and 3-pole, 4-wire grounding-type plug caps receptacle, luminaire (fixture), or other device fed from the box will not
and receptacles. interfere with or interrupt the grounding continuity.

5.51.4.16 Interior Equipment Grounding. (f) Cord-Connected Appliances. Cord-connected appliances, such as
washing machines, clothes dryers, refrigerators, and the electrical system
(a) Exposed Metal Parts. In the electrical system, all exposed metal of gas ranges, and so forth, shall be grounded by means of an approved
parts, enclosures, frames, luminaire (lighting fixture) canopies, and so cord with equipment grounding conductor and grounding-type
forth, shall be effectively bonded to the grounding terminals or enclosure attachment plug.
of the distribution panelboard.
5.51.4.17 Bonding of Non–Current-Carrying Metal Parts.
(b) Equipment Grounding and Bonding Conductors. Bare wires,
insulated wire with an outer finish that is green or green with one or (a) Required Bonding. All exposed non–current-carrying metal parts
more yellow stripes, shall be used for equipment grounding or bonding that may become energized shall be effectively bonded to the grounding
conductors only. terminal or enclosure of the distribution panelboard.

(c) Grounding of Electrical Equipment. Grounding of electrical (b) Bonding Chassis. A bonding conductor shall be connected
equipment shall be accomplished by one or more of the following between any distribution panelboard and an accessible terminal on the
methods: chassis. Aluminum or copper-clad aluminum conductors shall not be
used for bonding if such conductors or their terminals are exposed to
(1) Connection of metal raceway, the sheath of Type MC and Type corrosive elements.
MI cable where the sheath is identified for grounding, or the armor of
Type AC cable to metal enclosures. Exception: Any recreational vehicle that employs a unitized metal
(2) A connection between the one or more equipment grounding chassis-frame construction to which the distribution panelboard is
conductors and a metal enclosure by means of a grounding screw, which securely fastened with a bolt(s) and nut(s) or by welding or riveting shall
shall be used for no other purpose, or a listed grounding device. be considered to be bonded.
(3) The equipment grounding conductor in nonmetallic-sheathed
cable shall be permitted to be secured under a screw threaded into the (c) Bonding Conductor Requirements. Grounding terminals shall be
luminaire (fixture) canopy other than a mounting screw or cover screw, of the solderless type and listed as pressure terminal connectors
or attached to a listed grounding means (plate) in a nonmetallic outlet recognized for the wire size used. The bonding conductor shall be solid
box for luminaire (fixture) mounting. [Grounding means shall also be or stranded, insulated or bare, and shall be 8.0 mm2 copper minimum, or
permitted for luminaire (fixture) attachment screws.] equal.

(d) Grounding Connection in Nonmetallic Box. A connection (d) Metallic Roof and Exterior Bonding. The metal roof and exterior
between the one or more grounding conductors brought into a covering shall be considered bonded where both of the following
nonmetallic outlet box shall be so arranged that a connection can be conditions apply:
made to any fitting or device in that box that requires grounding.
(1) The metal panels overlap one another and are securely attached
(e) Grounding Continuity. Where more than one equipment to the wood or metal frame parts by metal fasteners.
grounding or bonding conductor of a branch circuit enters a box, all such (2) The lower panel of the metal exterior covering is secured by
conductors shall be in good electrical contact with each other, and the metal fasteners at each cross member of the chassis, or the lower panel is
arrangement shall be such that the disconnection or removal of a bonded to the chassis by a metal strap.
 with a 50-ampere, 125/250-volt receptacle conforming to the
(e) Gas, Water, and Waste Pipe Bonding. The gas, water, and waste configuration as identified in Figure 5.51.4.7(c). These electrical supplies
pipes shall be considered grounded if they are bonded to the chassis. shall be permitted to include additional receptacles that have
configurations in accordance with 5.51.6.11. A minimum of 70 percent
(f) Furnace and Metal Air Duct Bonding. Furnace and metal of all recreational vehicle sites with electrical supply shall each be
circulating air ducts shall be bonded. equipped with a 30-ampere, 250-volt or 125-volt receptacle conforming
to Figure 5.51.4.7(c). This supply shall be permitted to include additional
5.51.4.18 Appliance Accessibility and Fastening. Every appliance shall receptacle configurations conforming to 5.51.6.11. The remainder of all
be accessible for inspection, service, repair, and replacement without recreational vehicle sites with electrical supply shall be equipped with
removal of permanent construction. Means shall be provided to securely one or more of the receptacle configurations conforming to 5.51.6.11.
fasten appliances in place when the recreational vehicle is in transit. Dedicated tent sites with a 15- or 20-ampere electrical supply shall be
permitted to be excluded when determining the percentage of
5.51.5 Factory Tests recreational vehicle sites with 30- or 50-ampere receptacles.
Additional receptacles shall be permitted for the connection of electrical
5.51.5.1 Factory Tests (Electrical). Each recreational vehicle designed equipment outside the recreational vehicle within the recreational vehicle
with a 230-volt, 115-volt or a 115/230-volt electrical system shall park.
withstand the applied potential without electrical breakdown of a 1- All 250-volt and 125-volt, single-phase, 15- and 20-ampere receptacles
minute, 900-volt dielectric strength test, or a 1-second, 1 080-volt shall have listed ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection for personnel.
dielectric strength test, with all switches closed, between ungrounded and
grounded conductors and the recreational vehicle ground. During the FPN: The percentage of 50 ampere sites required by 5.51.6.1 may be inadequate for
seasonal recreational vehicle sites serving a higher percentage of recreational
test, all switches and other controls shall be in the “on” position. vehicles with 50 ampere electrical systems. In that type of recreational vehicle park,
Fixtures, including luminaires and permanently installed appliances, the percentage of 50 ampere sites could approach 100 percent.
shall not be required to withstand this test. The test shall be performed
after branch circuits are complete prior to energizing the system and 5.51.6.2 Distribution System. Receptacles rated at 50 amperes shall be
again after all outer coverings and cabinetry have been secured. supplied from a branch circuit of the voltage class and rating of the
receptacle. Other recreational vehicle sites with 250-volt or 125-volt, 20-
Each recreational vehicle shall be subjected to all of the following: and 30-ampere receptacles shall be permitted to be derived from any
grounded distribution system that supplies 230-volt or 115-volt single-
(1) A continuity test to ensure that all metal parts are properly phase power. The neutral conductors shall not be reduced in size below
bonded the size of the ungrounded conductors for the site distribution. The
(2) Operational tests to demonstrate that all equipment is properly neutral conductors shall be permitted to be reduced in size below the
connected and in working order minimum required size of the ungrounded conductors for 230-volt, line-
(3) Polarity checks to determine that connections have been properly to-line, permanently connected loads only.
made
5.51.6.3 Calculated Load.
5.51.6 Recreational Vehicle Parks
(a) Basis of Calculations. Electrical service and feeders shall be
5.51.6.1 Type Receptacles Provided. Every recreational vehicle site calculated on the basis of not less than 9600 volt-amperes per site
with electrical supply shall be equipped with at least one 20-ampere, equipped with 50-ampere, 230-volt or 115/230-volt supply facilities;
250-volt or 125-volt receptacle. A minimum of 20 percent of all 3600 volt-amperes per site equipped with both 20-ampere and 30-ampere
recreational vehicle sites, with electrical supply, shall each be equipped supply facilities; 2400 volt-amperes per site equipped with only 20-
ampere supply facilities; and 600 volt-amperes per site equipped with Table 5.51.7.3 Demand Factors for Site Feeders and
only 20-ampere supply facilities that are dedicated to tent sites. The Service-Entrance Conductors for Park Sites
demand factors set forth in Table 5.51.6.3 shall be the minimum Number of Recreational Demand Factor
allowable demand factors that shall be permitted in calculating load for Vehicles Sites (percent)
service and feeders. Where the electrical supply for a recreational vehicle 1 100
site has more than one receptacle, the calculated load shall only be 2 90
calculated for the highest rated receptacle. 3 80
Where the electrical supply is in a location that serves two recreational 4 75
vehicles, the equipment for both sites must comply with 5.51.6.7 and the 5 65
calculated load shall only be computed for the two receptacles with the 6 60
highest rating. 7-9 55
10-12 50
(b) Transformers and Secondary Distribution Panelboards. For the 13-15 48
purpose of this Code, where the park service exceeds 230 volts, 16-18 47
transformers and secondary distribution panelboards shall be treated as 19-21 45
services. 22-24 43
25-35 42
(c) Demand Factors. The demand factor for a given number of sites 36 plus 41
shall apply to all sites indicated. For example, 20 sites calculated at 45
percent of 3 600 volt-amperes results in a permissible demand of 1 620
volt-amperes per site or a total of 32 400 volt-amperes for 20 sites.
5.51.6.4 Overcurrent Protection. Overcurrent protection shall be
FPN: These demand factors may be inadequate in areas of extreme hot or cold
temperature with loaded circuits for heating or air conditioning. provided in accordance with Article 2.40.

(d) Feeder-Circuit Capacity. Recreational vehicle site feeder-circuit 5.51.6.5 Grounding. All electrical equipment and installations in
conductors shall have adequate ampacity for the loads supplied and shall recreational vehicle parks shall be grounded as required by Article 2.50.
be rated at not less than 30 amperes. The grounded conductors shall have
the same ampacity as the ungrounded conductors. 5.51.6.6 Grounding — Recreational Vehicle Site Supply Equipment.

FPN: Due to the long circuit lengths typical in most recreational vehicle parks, feeder (a) Exposed Non–Current-Carrying Metal Parts. Exposed non–
conductor sizes found in the ampacity tables of Article 3.10 may be inadequate to current-carrying metal parts of fixed equipment, metal boxes, cabinets,
maintain the voltage regulation suggested in the fine print note to 2.10.2.1. Total
circuit voltage drop is a sum of the voltage drops of each serial circuit segment, where and fittings that are not electrically connected to grounded equipment
the load for each segment is calculated using the load that segment sees and the shall be grounded by a continuous equipment grounding conductor run
demand factors of 5.51.6.3(a).
with the circuit conductors from the service equipment or from the
transformer of a secondary distribution system. Equipment grounding
Loads for other amenities such as, but not limited to, service buildings, conductors shall be sized in accordance with 2.50.6.13 and shall be
recreational buildings, and swimming pools shall be sized separately and permitted to be spliced by listed means.
then be added to the value calculated for the recreational vehicle sites The arrangement of equipment grounding connections shall be such
where they are all supplied by one service. that the disconnection or removal of a receptacle or other device will not
interfere with, or interrupt, the grounding continuity.
 (b) Secondary Distribution System. Each secondary distribution accordance with 1.10.2.1.
system shall be grounded at the transformer.
(f) Marking. Where the site supply equipment contains a 250-volt or
(c) Neutral Conductor Not to Be Used as an Equipment Ground. 125/250-volt receptacle, the equipment shall be marked as follows:
The neutral conductor shall not be used as an equipment ground for “Turn disconnecting switch or circuit breaker off before inserting or
recreational vehicles or equipment within the recreational vehicle park. removing plug. Plug must be fully inserted or removed.” The marking
shall be located on the equipment adjacent to the receptacle outlet.
(d) No Connection on the Load Side. No connection to a grounding
electrode shall be made to the neutral conductor on the load side of the 5.51.6.8 Protection of Outdoor Equipment.
service disconnecting means except as covered in 2.50.2.11(a) for
separately derived systems and 2.50.2.13(b)(2) for separate buildings. (a) Wet Locations. All switches, circuit breakers, receptacles, control
equipment, and metering devices located in wet locations or outside of a
5.51.6.7 Recreational Vehicle Site Supply Equipment. building shall be rainproof equipment.

(a) Location. Where provided on back-in sites, the recreational vehicle (b) Meters. If secondary meters are installed, meter sockets without
site electrical supply equipment shall be located on the left (road) side of meters installed shall be blanked off with an approved blanking plate.
the parked vehicle, on a line that is 1 500 mm to 2 100 mm from the left
edge (driver’s side of the parked RV) of the stand and shall be located at 5.51.6.9 Clearance for Overhead Conductors. Open conductors of not
any point on this line from the rear of the stand to 4 500 mm forward of over 600 volts, nominal, shall have a vertical clearance of not less than 5
the rear of the stand. 500 mm and a horizontal clearance of not less than 900 mm in all areas
For pull-through sites, the electrical supply equipment shall be subject to recreational vehicle movement. In all other areas, clearances
permitted to be located at any point along the line that is 1 500 mm to 2 shall conform to 2.25.1.18 and 2.25.1.19.
100 mm from the left edge (driver’s side of the parked RV) from 4 900
mm forward of the rear of the stand to the center point between the two FPN: For clearances of conductors over 600 volts, nominal, see 2.25.3.11 and
2.25.3.12.
roads that gives access to and egress from the pull-through sites.
The left edge (driver’s side of the parked RV) of the stand shall be
5.51.6.10 Underground Service, Feeder, Branch-Circuit, and
marked.
Recreational Vehicle Site Feeder-Circuit Conductors.
(b) Disconnecting Means. A disconnecting switch or circuit breaker
(a) General. All direct-burial conductors, including the equipment
shall be provided in the site supply equipment for disconnecting the
grounding conductor if of aluminum, shall be insulated and identified for
power supply to the recreational vehicle.
the use. All conductors shall be continuous from equipment to
equipment. All splices and taps shall be made in approved junction boxes
(c) Access. All site supply equipment shall be accessible by an
or by use of material listed and identified for the purpose.
unobstructed entrance or passageway not less than 600 mm wide and
2 000 mm high.
(b) Protection Against Physical Damage. Direct-buried conductors
and cables entering or leaving a trench shall be protected by rigid metal
(d) Mounting Height. Site supply equipment shall be located not less
conduit, intermediate metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing with
than 600 mm or more than 2 000 mm above the ground.
supplementary corrosion protection, rigid nonmetallic conduit,
liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit, liquidtight flexible metal
(e) Working Space. Sufficient space shall be provided and maintained
conduit, or other approved raceways or enclosures. Where subject to
about all electrical equipment to permit ready and safe operation, in
physical damage, the conductors or cables shall be protected by rigid 5.52.1.4 General Requirements. A park trailer as specified in 5.52.1.2
metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit, or Schedule 80 rigid is intended for seasonal use. It is not intended as a permanent dwelling
nonmetallic conduit. All such protection shall extend at least 460 mm unit or for commercial uses such as banks, clinics, offices, or similar.
into the trench from finished grade.
5.52.2 Low-Voltage Systems
FPN: See 3.0.1.5 and Article 3.40 for conductors or Type UF cable used underground
or in direct burial in earth.
5.52.2.1 Low-Voltage Systems.
5.51.6.11 Receptacles. A receptacle to supply electric power to a
(a) Low-Voltage Circuits. Low-voltage circuits furnished and
recreational vehicle shall be one of the configurations shown in Figure
installed by the park trailer manufacturer, other than those related to
5.51.4.7(c) in the following ratings.
braking, are subject to this Code. Circuits supplying lights subject to
Municipal, City, Provincial or National regulations shall comply with
(1) 50-ampere — 125/250-volt, 50-ampere, 3-pole, 4-wire
applicable government regulations and this Code.
grounding type for 115/230-volt systems
(2) 30-ampere — 250-volt or 125-volt, 30-ampere, 2-pole, 3-wire
(b) Low-Voltage Wiring.
grounding type for 230-volt or 115-volt systems, respectively
(3) 20-ampere — 250-volt or 125-volt, 20-ampere, 2-pole, 3-wire
(1) Material. Copper conductors shall be used for low-voltage
grounding type for 230-volt or 115-volt systems, respectively
circuits.
FPN: Complete details of these configurations can be found in ANSI/NEMA WD 6-
1989, National Electrical Manufacturers Association’s Standard for Dimensions of Exception: A metal chassis or frame shall be permitted as the return
Attachment Plugs and Receptacles, Figures 14-50, TT, and 5-20. path to the source of supply.

(2) Conductor Types. Conductors shall conform to the requirements

ARTICLE 5.52 — PARK TRAILERS for Type GXL, HDT, SGT, SGR, or Type SXL or shall have insulation
in accordance with Table 3.10.1.13 or the equivalent. Conductor sizes
5.52.1 General 0.75 mm2 (1.0 mm dia.) through 14 mm2 or SAE shall be listed. Single-
wire, low-voltage conductors shall be of the stranded type.
5.52.1.1 Scope. The provisions of this article cover the electrical
conductors and equipment installed within or on park trailers not covered FPN: See SAE Standard J1128-1995 for Types GXL, HDT, and SXL and SAE
fully under Articles 5.50 and 5.51. Standard J1127-1995 for Types SGT and SGR.

5.52.1.2 Definition. (See Articles 100, 5.50, and 5.51 for additional (3) Marking. All insulated low-voltage conductors shall be surface
definitions.) marked at intervals not greater than 1 200 mm as follows:

Park Trailer. A unit that is built on a single chassis mounted on a. Listed conductors shall be marked as required by the listing
wheels and has a gross trailer area not exceeding 40 m2 in the set-up agency.
mode. b. SAE conductors shall be marked with the name or logo of the
manufacturer, specification designation, and wire size.
5.52.1.3 Other Articles. Wherever the provisions of other articles and c. Other conductors shall be marked with the name or logo of the
Article 5.52 differ, the provisions of Article 5.52 shall apply. manufacturer, temperature rating, wire size, conductor material, and
insulation thickness.
 (d) Battery Installations. Storage batteries subject to the provisions of
(c) Low-Voltage Wiring Methods. this Code shall be securely attached to the unit and installed in an area
vaportight to the interior and ventilated directly to the exterior of the
(1) Physical Protection. Conductors shall be protected against unit. Where batteries are installed in a compartment, the compartment
physical damage and shall be secured. Where insulated conductors are shall be ventilated with openings having a minimum area of 1100 mm2 at
clamped to the structure, the conductor insulation shall be supplemented both the top and at the bottom. Where compartment doors are equipped
by an additional wrap or layer of equivalent material, except that for ventilation, the openings shall be within 50 mm of the top and
jacketed cables shall not be required to be so protected. Wiring shall be bottom. Batteries shall not be installed in a compartment containing
routed away from sharp edges, moving parts, or heat sources. spark- or flame-producing equipment.

(2) Splices. Conductors shall be spliced or joined with splicing (e) Overcurrent Protection.
devices that provide a secure connection or by brazing, welding, or
soldering with a fusible metal or alloy. Soldered splices shall first be (1) Rating. Low-voltage circuit wiring shall be protected by
spliced or joined to be mechanically and electrically secure without overcurrent protective devices rated not in excess of the ampacity of
solder, and then soldered. All splices, joints, and free ends of conductors copper conductors, in accordance with Table 5.52.2.1(e)(1).
shall be covered with an insulation equivalent to that on the conductors.

(3) Separation. Battery and other low-voltage circuits shall be Table 5.52.2.1(e)(1) Low-Voltage Overcurrent Protection
physically separated by at least a 12 mm gap or other approved means Wire Size
Ampacity Wire Type
from circuits of a different power source. Acceptable methods shall be by [mm2 (mm dia.)]
clamping, routing, or equivalent means that ensure permanent total 0.75 6 Stranded only
separation. Where circuits of different power sources cross, the external 1.25 8 Stranded only
jacket of the nonmetallic-sheathed cables shall be deemed adequate 2.0 (1.6) 15 Stranded or Solid
separation. 3.5 (2.0) 20 Stranded or Solid
5.5 (2.6) 30 Stranded or Solid
(4) Ground Connections. Ground connections to the chassis or frame
shall be made in an accessible location and shall be mechanically secure.
Ground connections shall be by means of copper conductors and copper (2) Type. Circuit breakers or fuses shall be of an approved type,
or copper-alloy terminals of the solderless type identified for the size of including automotive types. Fuseholders shall be clearly marked with
wire used. The surface on which ground terminals make contact shall be maximum fuse size and shall be protected against shorting and physical
cleaned and be free from oxide or paint or shall be electrically connected damage by a cover or equivalent means.
through the use of a cadmium, tin, or zinc-plated internal/external-
toothed lockwasher or locking terminals. Ground terminal attaching FPN: For further information, see ANSI/SAE J554-1987, Standard for Electric Fuses
screws, rivets or bolts, nuts, and lockwashers shall be cadmium, tin, or (Cartridge Type); SAE J1284-1988, Standard for Blade Type Electric Fuses; and UL
275-1993, Standard for Automotive Glass Tube Fuses.
zinc-plated except rivets shall be permitted to be unanodized aluminum
where attaching to aluminum structures.
(3) Appliances. Appliances such as pumps, compressors, heater
The chassis-grounding terminal of the battery shall be bonded to the
blowers, and similar motor-driven appliances shall be installed in
unit chassis with a minimum 8.0 mm2 copper conductor. In the event the
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
power lead from the battery exceeds 8.0 mm2, the bonding conductor
Motors that are controlled by automatic switching or by latching-
shall be of an equal size.
type manual switches shall be protected in accordance with 4.30.3.2(b).
 to the total connected load, including average battery charging rate, of all
(4) Location. The overcurrent protective device shall be installed in 12-volt equipment:
an accessible location on the unit within 460 mm of the point where the The first 20 amperes of load at 100 percent; plus
power supply connects to the unit circuits. If located outside the park The second 20 amperes of load at 50 percent; plus
trailer, the device shall be protected against weather and physical All load above 40 amperes at 25 percent
damage.
Exception: A low-voltage appliance that is controlled by a momentary
Exception: External low-voltage supply shall be permitted to have the switch (normally open) that has no means for holding in the closed
overcurrent protective device within 460 mm after entering the unit or position shall not be considered as a connected load when determining
after leaving a metal raceway. the required converter rating. Momentarily energized appliances shall
be limited to those used to prepare the unit for occupancy or travel.
(f) Switches. Switches shall have a dc rating not less than the
connected load. (c) Bonding Voltage Converter Enclosures. The non–current-
carrying metal enclosure of the voltage converter shall be bonded to the
(g) Luminaires (Lighting Fixtures). All low-voltage interior frame of the unit with an 8.0 mm2 copper conductor minimum. The
luminaires (lighting fixtures) rated more than 4 watts, employing lamps grounding conductor for the battery and the metal enclosure shall be
rated more than 1.2 watts, shall be listed. permitted to be the same conductor.

5.52.3 Combination Electrical Systems (d) Dual-Voltage Fixtures Including Luminaires or Appliances.
Fixtures, including luminaires, or appliances having both 230-volt or
5.52.3.1 Combination Electrical Systems. 115-volt and low-voltage connections shall be listed for dual voltage.

(a) General. Unit wiring suitable for connection to a battery or other (e) Autotransformers. Autotransformers shall not be used.
low-voltage supply source shall be permitted to be connected to a 115-
volt source, provided that the entire wiring system and equipment are (f) Receptacles and Plug Caps. Where a park trailer is equipped with
rated and installed in full conformity with Parts 5.52.1, 5.52.3, 5.52.4, a 230-volt, 115-volt or 115/230-volt ac system, a low-voltage system, or
and 5.52.5 requirements covering 230-volt or 115-volt electrical systems. both, receptacles and plug caps of the low-voltage system shall differ in
Circuits fed from ac transformers shall not supply dc appliances. configuration from those of the 230-volt, 115-volt or 115/230-volt
system. Where a unit equipped with a battery or dc system has an
(b) Voltage Converters (230-Volt or 115-Volt Alternating Current external connection for low-voltage power, the connector shall have a
to Low-Voltage Direct Current). The 230-volt or 115-volt ac side of configuration that will not accept 230-volt or 115-volt power.
the voltage converter shall be wired in full conformity with Parts 5.52.1,
5.52.3, 5.52.4, and 5.52.5 requirements for 230-volt or 115-volt electrical 5.52.4 Nominal 230-Volt, 115-Volt or 115/230-Volt Systems
systems.
5.52.4.1 230-Volt, 115-Volt or 115/230-Volt, Nominal, Systems.
Exception: Converters supplied as an integral part of a listed appliance
shall not be subject to 5.52.3.1(b). (a) General Requirements. The electrical equipment and material of
park trailers indicated for connection to a wiring system rated 230 volts,
All converters and transformers shall be listed for use in recreation nominal, 2-wire with ground, 115 volts, nominal, 2-wire with ground, or
units and designed or equipped to provide over-temperature protection. a wiring system rated 115/230 volts, nominal, 3-wire with ground, shall
To determine the converter rating, the following formula shall be applied be listed and installed in accordance with the requirements of Parts
5.52.1, 5.52.3, 5.52.4, and 5.52.5. Exception: Receptacles installed for appliances in dedicated spaces,
such as for dishwashers, disposals, refrigerators, freezers, and laundry
(b) Materials and Equipment. Electrical materials, devices, equipment.
appliances, fittings, and other equipment installed, intended for use in, or
attached to the park trailer shall be listed. All products shall be used only (3) In the area occupied by a toilet, shower, tub, or any combination
in the manner in which they have been tested and found suitable for the thereof
intended use. (4) On the exterior of the unit

5.52.4.2 Receptacle Outlets Required. Exception: Receptacles that are located inside of an access panel that is
installed on the exterior of the unit to supply power for an installed
(a) Spacing. Receptacle outlets shall be installed at wall spaces 600 appliance shall not be required to have ground-fault circuit-interrupter
mm wide or more so that no point along the floor line is more than 1 800 protection.
mm, measured horizontally, from an outlet in that space.
The receptacle outlet shall be permitted in a listed luminaire (lighting
Exception No. 1: Bath and hall areas. fixture). A receptacle outlet shall not be installed in a tub or combination
tub–shower compartment.
Exception No. 2: Wall spaces occupied by kitchen cabinets, wardrobe
cabinets, built-in furniture; behind doors that may open fully against a (d) Pipe Heating Cable Outlet. Where a pipe heating cable outlet is
wall surface; or similar facilities. installed, the outlet shall be as follows:

(b) Location. Receptacle outlets shall be installed as follows: (1) Located within 600 mm of the cold water inlet
(2) Connected to an interior branch circuit, other than a small
(1) Adjacent to countertops in the kitchen (at least one on each side appliance branch circuit
of the sink if countertops are on each side and are 300 mm or over in (3) On a circuit where all of the outlets are on the load side of the
width) ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection for personnel
(2) Adjacent to the refrigerator and gas range space, except where a (4) Mounted on the underside of the park trailer and shall not be
gas-fired refrigerator or cooking appliance, requiring no external considered to be the outdoor receptacle outlet required in 5.52.4.2(e)
electrical connection, is factory-installed
(3) Adjacent to countertop spaces of 300 mm or more in width that (e) Outdoor Receptacle Outlets. At least one receptacle outlet shall
cannot be reached from a receptacle required in 5.52.4.2(b)(1) by a cord be installed outdoors. A receptacle outlet located in a compartment
of 1 800 mm without crossing a traffic area, cooking appliance, or sink accessible from the outside of the park trailer shall be considered an
outdoor receptacle. Outdoor receptacle outlets shall be protected as
(c) Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection. Each 250-volt or required in 5.52.4.2(c)(4).
125-volt, single-phase, 15- or 20-ampere receptacle shall have ground-
fault circuit-interrupter protection for personnel in the following (f) Receptacle Outlets Not Permitted.
locations:
(1) Shower or Bathtub Space. Receptacle outlets shall not be
(1) Where the receptacles are installed to serve kitchen countertop installed in or within reach (800 mm) of a shower or bathtub space.
surfaces
(2) Within 1 800 mm of any lavatory or sink (2) Face-Up Position. A receptacle shall not be installed in a face-up
position in any countertop.
 box and provided with means to prevent strain from being transmitted to
5.52.4.4 Power Supply. the terminals. The ampacity of the conductors between each junction box
and the terminals of each distribution panelboard shall be at least equal to
(a) Feeder. The power supply to the park trailer shall be a feeder the ampacity of the power-supply cord. The supply end of the assembly
assembly consisting of not more than one listed 30-ampere or 50-ampere shall be equipped with an attachment plug of the type described in
park trailer power-supply cord with an integrally molded or securely 5.52.4.5(c). Where the cord passes through the walls or floors, it shall be
attached cap, or a permanently installed feeder. protected by means of conduit and bushings or equivalent. The cord
assembly shall have permanent provisions for protection against
(b) Power-Supply Cord. If the park trailer has a power-supply cord, it corrosion and mechanical damage while the unit is in transit.
shall be permanently attached to the distribution panelboard or to a
junction box permanently connected to the distribution panelboard, with (b) Cord Length. The cord-exposed usable length shall be measured
the free end terminating in a molded-on attachment plug cap. from the point of entrance to the park trailer or the face of the flanged
Cords with adapters and pigtail ends, extension cords, and similar surface inlet (motor-base attachment plug) to the face of the attachment
items shall not be attached to, or shipped with, a park trailer. plug at the supply end.
A suitable clamp or the equivalent shall be provided at the distribution The cord-exposed usable length, measured to the point of entry on the
panelboard knockout to afford strain relief for the cord to prevent strain unit exterior, shall be a minimum of 7 000 mm where the point of
from being transmitted to the terminals when the power-supply cord is entrance is at the side of the unit, or shall be a minimum 8 500 mm
handled in its intended manner. where the point of entrance is at the rear of the unit. The maximum
The cord shall be a listed type with 3-wire, 230 volts or 3-wire, length shall not exceed 11 m.
115-volt or 4-wire, 115/230-volt conductors, one of which shall be Where the cord entrance into the unit is more than 900 mm above the
identified by a continuous green color or a continuous green color with ground, the minimum cord lengths above shall be increased by the
one or more yellow stripes for use as the grounding conductor. vertical distance of the cord entrance heights above 900 mm.

(c) Mast Weatherhead or Raceway. Where the calculated load (c) Attachment Plugs.
exceeds 50 amperes or where a permanent feeder is used, the supply
shall be by means of one of the following: (1) Units with Two to Five 15- or 20-Ampere Branch Circuits. Park
(1) One mast weatherhead installation, installed in accordance with trailers wired in accordance with 5.52.4.7(a) shall have an attachment
Article 2.30, containing four continuous, insulated, color-coded feeder plug that shall be 2-pole, 3-wire grounding-type, rated 30 amperes, 250
conductors, one of which shall be an equipment grounding conductor volts or 125 volts, conforming to the configuration shown in Figure
(2) A metal raceway, rigid nonmetallic conduit, or liquidtight 5.52.4.5(c) intended for use with units rated at 30 amperes, 250 volts or
flexible nonmetallic conduit from the disconnecting means in the park 125 volts.
trailer to the underside of the park trailer, with provisions for the
attachment to a suitable junction box or fitting to the raceway on the FPN: Complete details of this configuration can be found in ANSI/NEMA WD 6-1989,
National Electrical Manufacturers Association’s Standard for Dimensions of
underside of the park trailer [with or without conductors as in Attachment Plugs and Receptacles, Figure TT.
5.50.2.1(i)(1)]
(2) Units with 50-Ampere Power Supply Assembly. Park trailers
5.52.4.5 Cord. having a power-supply assembly rated 50 amperes as permitted by
5.52.4.4(b) shall have a 3-pole, 4-wire grounding-type attachment plug
(a) Permanently Connected. Each power-supply assembly shall be rated 50 amperes, 125/250 volts, conforming to the configuration shown
factory supplied or factory installed and connected directly to the in Figure 5.52.4.5(c).
terminals of the distribution panelboard or conductors within a junction
 FPN: Complete details of this configuration can be found in ANSI/NEMA WD 6-1989, The correct ampere rating shall be marked in the blank space.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association Standard for Dimensions of Attachment
Plugs and Receptacles, Figure 14-50.
(e) Location. The point of entrance of a power-supply assembly shall
be located within 4 500 mm of the rear, on the left (road) side or at the
rear, left of the longitudinal center of the unit, within 460 mm of the
outside wall.

Exception: A park trailer shall be permitted to have the electrical point

of entrance located more than 4 500 mm from the rear. Where this
occurs, the distance beyond the 4 500 mm dimension shall be added to
the cord’s minimum length as specified in 5.51.4.7(b).

5.52.4.6 Distribution Panelboard.

(a) Listed and Appropriately Rated. A listed and appropriately rated

distribution panelboard shall be used. The grounded conductor
termination bar shall be insulated from the enclosure as provided in
Figure 5.52.4.5(c) Attachment Cap and Receptacle Configurations. 5.52.4.16(c). An equipment grounding terminal bar shall be attached
inside the metal enclosure of the panelboard.

(d) Labeling at Electrical Entrance. Each park trailer shall have (b) Location. The distribution panelboard shall be installed in a readily
permanently affixed to the exterior skin, at or near the point of entrance accessible location. Working clearance for the panelboard shall be not
of the power-supply assembly, a label 75 mm × 45 mm minimum size, less than 600 mm wide and 800 mm deep.
made of etched, metal-stamped, or embossed brass, stainless steel, or
anodized or alclad aluminum not less than 0.50 mm thick, or other Exception: Where the panelboard cover is exposed to the inside aisle
suitable material (e.g., 0.13 mm thick plastic laminate), that reads, as space, one of the working clearance dimensions shall be permitted to be
appropriate, either reduced to a minimum of 560 mm. A panelboard shall be considered
exposed where the panelboard cover is within 50 mm of the aisle’s
THIS CONNECTION IS FOR 110–125-VOLT AC, finished surface.
60 HZ, 30 AMPERE SUPPLY.
(c) Dead-Front Type. The distribution panelboard shall be of the
or dead-front type. A main disconnecting means shall be provided where
fuses are used or where more than two circuit breakers are employed. A
THIS CONNECTION IS FOR 115/230-VOLT AC, main overcurrent protective device not exceeding the power-supply
3-POLE, 4-WIRE, 60 HZ, ______ AMPERE SUPPLY. assembly rating shall be provided where more than two branch circuits
are employed.
or
5.52.4.7 Branch Circuits. Branch circuits shall be determined in
THIS CONNECTION IS FOR 230-VOLT AC, accordance with 5.52.4.7(a) and 5.52.4.7(b).
2-POLE, 3-WIRE, 60 HZ, ______ AMPERE SUPPLY.
(a) Two to Five 15- or 20-Ampere Circuits. Two to five 15- or 20-
ampere circuits to supply lights, receptacle outlets, and fixed appliances
shall be permitted. Such park trailers shall be equipped with a (3) General Appliances. (including furnace, water heater, space
distribution panelboard rated at 230 volts maximum for a 230 volts heater, range, and central or room air conditioner, etc.) An individual
power supply or 115 volts maximum for a 115 volts power supply, with a branch circuit shall be permitted to supply any load for which it is rated.
30-ampere rated main power supply assembly. Not more than two 230- There shall be one or more circuits of adequate rating in accordance with
volt or 115-volt thermostatically controlled appliances (e.g., air (a) through (d).
conditioner and water heater) shall be installed in such systems unless
appliance isolation switching, energy management systems, or similar FPN No. 1: For the laundry branch circuit, see 2.10.1.11(c)(2).
FPN No. 2: For central air conditioning, see Article 4.40.
methods are used.
a. The total rating of fixed appliances shall not exceed 50 percent
Exception: Additional 15- or 20-ampere circuits shall be permitted
of the circuit rating if lighting outlets, general-use receptacles, or both,
where a listed energy management system rated at 30 amperes maximum
are also supplied.
is employed within the system.
b. For fixed appliances with a motor(s) larger than horsepower,
(b) More Than Five Circuits. Where more than five circuits are
the total calculated load shall be based on 125 percent of the largest
needed, they shall be determined in accordance with 5.52.4.7(b)(1),
motor plus the sum of the other loads. Where a branch circuit supplies
(b)(2), and (b)(3).
continuous load(s) or any combination of continuous and noncontinuous
loads, the branch-circuit conductor size shall be in accordance with
(1) Lighting. Based on 33 volt-amperes/m2 multiplied by the outside
2.10.2.1(a).
dimensions of the park trailer (coupler excluded) divided by 230 volts for
230 volts power supply or 115 volts for 115/230 volts power supply to
c. The rating of a single cord- and plug-connected appliance
determine the number of 15- or 20-ampere lighting area circuits, for
supplied by other than an individual branch circuit shall not exceed 80
example,
percent of the circuit rating.
33 x length x width d. The rating of a range branch circuit shall be based on the range
———————— = No. of 15- (or 20-) ampere circuits demand as specified for ranges in 5.52.4.8(b)(5).
230 x 15 (or 20)
5.52.4.8 Calculations. The following method shall be employed in
or computing the supply-cord and distribution-panelboard load for each
feeder assembly for each park trailer in lieu of the procedure shown in
33 x length x width Article 2.20 and shall be based on a 2-wire, 230-volt supply with
———————— = No. of 15- (or 20-) ampere circuits 230-volt loads or 3-wire, 115/230-volt supply with 115-volt loads
115 x 15 (or 20) balanced between the two phases of the 3-wire system.

The lighting circuits shall be permitted to serve built-in gas ovens (a) Lighting and Small Appliance Load. Lighting Volt-Amperes:
with electric service only for lights, clocks or timers, or listed cord- Length times width of park trailer floor (outside dimensions) times 33
connected garbage disposal units. volt-amperes/m2 (3 VA/ft2). For example,

(2) Small Appliances. Small appliance branch circuits shall be Length × width × 33 = lighting volt-amperes
installed in accordance with 2.10.1.11(c)(1).
 Small Appliance Volt-Amperes: Number of circuits times 1500 volt-
amperes for each 20-ampere appliance receptacle circuit (see definition (6) If outlets or circuits are provided for other than factory-installed
of Appliance, Portable with note) including 1500 volt-amperes for appliances, include the anticipated load.
laundry circuit. For example,
FPN: Refer to Appendix D, Example D12, for an illustration of the application of this
calculation.
No. of circuits × 1500 = small appliance volt-amperes
(c) Optional Method of Calculation for Lighting and Appliance
Total: Lighting volt-amperes plus small appliance volt-amperes = total
Load. For park trailers, the optional method for calculating lighting and
volt-amperes
appliance load shown in 2.20.4.3 shall be permitted.
First 3 000 total volt-amperes at 100 percent plus remainder at 35
5.52.4.9 Wiring Methods.
percent = volt-amperes to be divided by 230 volts to obtain current
(amperes) per line or per leg.
(a) Wiring Systems. Cables and raceways installed in accordance with
Articles 3.20, 3.22, 3.30 through 3.40, 3.42 through 3.62, 3.86, and 3.88
(b) Total Load for Determining Power Supply. Total load for
shall be permitted in accordance with their applicable article, except as
determining power supply is the sum of the following:
otherwise specified in this article. An equipment grounding means shall
be provided in accordance with 2.50.6.9.
(1) Lighting and small appliance load as calculated in 5.52.4.8(a).
(2) Nameplate amperes for motors and heater loads (exhaust fans,
(b) Conduit and Tubing. Where rigid metal conduit or intermediate
air conditioners, electric, gas, or oil heating). Omit smaller of the heating
metal conduit is terminated at an enclosure with a locknut and bushing
and cooling loads, except include blower motor if used as air-conditioner
connection, two locknuts shall be provided, one inside and one outside of
evaporator motor. Where an air conditioner is not installed and a 50-
the enclosure. All cut ends of conduit and tubing shall be reamed or
ampere power-supply cord is provided, allow 15 amperes per phase for
otherwise finished to remove rough edges.
air conditioning.
(3) Twenty-five percent of current of largest motor in (b)(2).
(c) Nonmetallic Boxes. Nonmetallic boxes shall be acceptable only
(4) Total of nameplate amperes for disposal, dishwasher, water
with nonmetallic-sheathed cable or nonmetallic raceways.
heater, clothes dryer, wall-mounted oven, cooking units. Where the
number of these appliances exceeds three, use 75 percent of total.
(d) Boxes. In walls and ceilings constructed of wood or other
(5) Derive amperes for freestanding range (as distinguished from
combustible material, boxes and fittings shall be flush with the finished
separate ovens and cooking units) by dividing the following values by
surface or project therefrom.
230 volts:
(e) Mounting. Wall and ceiling boxes shall be mounted in accordance
Nameplate Rating (Watts) Use (volt-amperes) with Article 3.14.
0 – 10 000 80 percent of Rating
Over 10 000 – 12 500 8 000 Exception No. 1: Snap-in-type boxes or boxes provided with special wall
Over 12 500 – 13 500 8 400 or ceiling brackets that securely fasten boxes in walls or ceilings shall be
Over 13 500 – 14 500 8 800 permitted.
Over 14 500 – 15 500 9 200
Over 15 500 – 16 500 9 600 Exception No. 2: A wooden plate providing a 40-mm minimum width
Over 16 500 – 17 500 10 000 backing around the box and of a thickness of 12 mm or greater (actual)
attached directly to the wall panel shall be considered as approved (l) Metal Faceplates Effectively Grounded. Where metal faceplates
means for mounting outlet boxes. are used, they shall be effectively grounded.

(f) Sheath Armor. The sheath of nonmetallic-sheathed cable, metal- (m) Moisture or Physical Damage. Where outdoor or under-chassis
clad cable, and Type AC cable shall be continuous between outlet boxes wiring is 115 volts, nominal, or over and is exposed to moisture or
and other enclosures. physical damage, the wiring shall be protected by rigid metal conduit, by
intermediate metal conduit, or by electrical metallic tubing or rigid
(g) Protected. Metal-clad, Type AC, or nonmetallic-sheathed cables nonmetallic conduit that is closely routed against frames and equipment
and electrical nonmetallic tubing shall be permitted to pass through the enclosures or other raceway or cable identified for the application.
centers of the wide side of 50 mm by 100 mm wood studs. However,
they shall be protected where they pass through 50 mm by 50 mm wood (n) Component Interconnections. Fittings and connectors that are
studs or at other wood studs or frames where the cable or tubing would intended to be concealed at the time of assembly shall be listed and
be less than 30 mm from the inside or outside surface. Steel plates on identified for the interconnection of building components. Such fittings
each side of the cable or tubing, or a steel tube, with not less than 1.3 mm and connectors shall be equal to the wiring method employed in
wall thickness, shall be installed to protect the cable or tubing. These insulation, temperature rise, and fault-current withstanding, and shall be
plates or tubes shall be securely held in place. Where nonmetallic- capable of enduring the vibration and shock occurring in park trailers.
sheathed cables pass through punched, cut, or drilled slots or holes in
metal members, the cable shall be protected by bushings or grommets (o) Method of Connecting Expandable Units. The method of
securely fastened in the opening prior to installation of the cable. connecting expandable units to the main body of the vehicle shall
comply with the following as applicable:
(h) Cable Supports. Where connected with cable connectors or
clamps, cables shall be supported within 300 mm of outlet boxes, (1) That portion of a branch circuit that is installed in an expandable
distribution panelboards, and splice boxes on appliances. Supports shall unit shall be permitted to be connected to the branch circuit in the main
be provided every 1 400 mm at other places. body of the vehicle by means of a flexible cord or attachment plug and
cord listed for hard usage. The cord and its connections shall conform to
(i) Nonmetallic Box Without Cable Clamps. Nonmetallic-sheathed all provisions of Article 4.0 and shall be considered as a permitted use
cables shall be supported within 200 mm of a nonmetallic outlet box under 4.0.1.7.
without cable clamps. (2) If the receptacle provided for connection of the cord to the main
circuit is located on the outside of the unit, it shall be protected with a
Exception: Where wiring devices with integral enclosures are employed ground-fault circuit interrupter for personnel and be listed for wet
with a loop of extra cable to permit future replacement of the device, the locations. A cord located on the outside of a unit shall be identified for
cable loop shall be considered as an integral portion of the device. outdoor use.
(3) Unless removable or stored within the unit interior, the cord
(j) Physical Damage. Where subject to physical damage, exposed assembly shall have permanent provisions for protection against
nonmetallic cable shall be protected by covering boards, guard strips, corrosion and mechanical damage while the unit is in transit.
raceways, or other means. (4) If an attachment plug and cord is used, it shall be installed so as
not to permit exposed live attachment plug pins.
(k) Metal Faceplates. Metal faceplates shall be of ferrous metal not
less than 0.75 mm in thickness or of nonferrous metal not less than 1.0 (p) Prewiring for Air-Conditioning Installation. Prewiring installed
mm in thickness. Nonmetallic faceplates shall be listed. for the purpose of facilitating future air-conditioning installation shall
conform to the applicable portions of this article and the following:
 5.52.4.13 Switches. Switches shall be rated as required by 5.52.4.13(a)
(1) An overcurrent protective device with a rating compatible with and 5.52.4.13(b).
the circuit conductors shall be installed in the distribution panelboard and
wiring connections completed. (a) Lighting Circuits. For lighting circuits, switches shall be rated not
(2) The load end of the circuit shall terminate in a junction box with less than 10 amperes, 230/250 volts or 115/125 volts, and in no case less
a blank cover or other listed enclosure. Where a junction box with a than the connected load.
blank cover is used, the free ends of the conductors shall be adequately
capped or taped. (b) Motors or Other Loads. For motors or other loads, switches shall
have ampere or horsepower ratings, or both, adequate for loads
(3) A label conforming to 5.52.4.5(d) shall be placed on or adjacent controlled. (An ac general-use snap switch shall be permitted to control a
to the junction box and shall read motor 2 hp or less with full-load current not over 80 percent of the switch
ampere rating.)
AIR-CONDITIONING CIRCUIT.
THIS CONNECTION IS FOR AIR CONDITIONERS 5.52.4.14 Receptacles. All receptacle outlets shall be of the grounding
RATED 110–125-VOLT AC, 60 HZ, type and installed in accordance with 2.10.2.3 and 4.6.1.3.
____ AMPERES MAXIMUM.
DO NOT EXCEED CIRCUIT RATING. 5.52.4.15 Luminaires (Lighting Fixtures).

or (a) General. Any combustible wall or ceiling finish exposed between

the edge of a luminaire (fixture) canopy or pan and the outlet box shall
AIR-CONDITIONING CIRCUIT. be covered with noncombustible material or a material identified for the
THIS CONNECTION IS FOR AIR CONDITIONERS purpose.
RATED 230-VOLT AC, 60 HZ,
____ AMPERES MAXIMUM. (b) Shower Luminaires (Fixtures). If a luminaire (lighting fixture) is
DO NOT EXCEED CIRCUIT RATING. provided over a bathtub or in a shower stall, it shall be of the enclosed
and gasketed type and listed for the type of installation, and it shall be
An ampere rating, not to exceed 80 percent of the circuit rating, shall ground-fault circuit-interrupter protected.
be legibly marked in the blank space. The switch for shower luminaires (lighting fixtures) and exhaust fans,
located over a tub or in a shower stall, shall be located outside the tub or
(4) The circuit shall serve no other purpose. shower space.

5.52.4.10 Maximum Number of Conductors in Boxes. The maximum (c) Outdoor Outlets, Luminaires (Fixtures), Air-Cooling
number of conductors permitted in boxes shall be in accordance with Equipment, and So On. Outdoor luminaires (fixtures) and other
3.14.2.2. equipment shall be listed for outdoor use.

5.52.4.11 Grounded Conductors. The identification of grounded 5.52.4.16 Grounding. (See also 5.52.4.18 on bonding of non–current-
conductors shall be in accordance with 2.0.1.6. carrying metal parts.)

5.52.4.12 Connection of Terminals and Splices. Conductor splices and (a) Power-Supply Grounding. The grounding conductor in the supply
connections at terminals shall be in accordance with 1.10.1.14. cord or feeder shall be connected to the grounding bus or other approved
grounding means in the distribution panelboard.
 attached to a listed grounding means (plate) in a nonmetallic outlet box
(b) Distribution Panelboard. The distribution panelboard shall have a for luminaire (fixture) mounting [grounding means shall also be
grounding bus with sufficient terminals for all grounding conductors or permitted for luminaire (fixture) attachment screws].
other approved grounding means.
(d) Grounding Connection in Nonmetallic Box. A connection
(c) Grounded Conductor. The grounded circuit conductor (neutral) between the one or more grounding conductors brought into a
shall be insulated from the equipment grounding conductors and from nonmetallic outlet box shall be arranged so that a connection can be
equipment enclosures and other grounded parts. The grounded (neutral) made to any fitting or device in that box that requires grounding.
circuit terminals in the distribution panelboard and in ranges, clothes
dryers, counter-mounted cooking units, and wall-mounted ovens shall be (e) Grounding Continuity. Where more than one equipment
insulated from the equipment enclosure. Bonding screws, straps, or buses grounding conductor of a branch circuit enters a box, all such conductors
in the distribution panelboard or in appliances shall be removed and shall be in good electrical contact with each other, and the arrangement
discarded. Connection of electric ranges and electric clothes dryers shall be such that the disconnection or removal of a receptacle, fixture,
utilizing a grounded (neutral) conductor, if cord-connected, shall be including a luminaire, or other device fed from the box will not interfere
made with 4-conductor cord and 3-pole, 4-wire, grounding-type plug with or interrupt the grounding continuity.
caps and receptacles.
(f) Cord-Connected Appliances. Cord-connected appliances, such as
5.52.4.17 Interior Equipment Grounding. washing machines, clothes dryers, refrigerators, and the electrical system
of gas ranges, and so on, shall be grounded by means of an approved
(a) Exposed Metal Parts. In the electrical system, all exposed metal cord with equipment grounding conductor and grounding-type
parts, enclosures, frames, luminaire (lighting fixture) canopies, and so attachment plug.
forth, shall be effectively bonded to the grounding terminals or enclosure
of the distribution panelboard. 5.52.4.18 Bonding of Non–Current-Carrying Metal Parts.

(b) Equipment Grounding Conductors. Bare wires, green-colored (a) Required Bonding. All exposed non–current-carrying metal parts
wires, or green wires with a yellow stripe(s) shall be used for equipment that may become energized shall be effectively bonded to the grounding
grounding conductors only. terminal or enclosure of the distribution panelboard.

(c) Grounding of Electrical Equipment. Where grounding of (b) Bonding Chassis. A bonding conductor shall be connected
electrical equipment is specified, it shall be permitted as follows: between any distribution panelboard and an accessible terminal on the
chassis. Aluminum or copper-clad aluminum conductors shall not be
(1) Connection of metal raceway (conduit or electrical metallic used for bonding if such conductors or their terminals are exposed to
tubing), the sheath of Type MC and Type MI cable where the sheath is corrosive elements.
identified for grounding, or the armor of Type AC cable to metal
enclosures. Exception: Any park trailer that employs a unitized metal chassis-frame
(2) A connection between the one or more equipment grounding construction to which the distribution panelboard is securely fastened
conductors and a metal box by means of a grounding screw, which shall with a bolt(s) and nut(s) or by welding or riveting shall be considered to
be used for no other purpose, or a listed grounding device. be bonded.
(3) The equipment grounding conductor in nonmetallic-sheathed
cable shall be permitted to be secured under a screw threaded into the (c) Bonding Conductor Requirements. Grounding terminals shall be
luminaire (fixture) canopy other than a mounting screw or cover screw or of the solderless type and listed as pressure terminal connectors
recognized for the wire size used. The bonding conductor shall be solid shall be permanently affixed within 150 mm from the listed box or
or stranded, insulated or bare, and shall be 8.0 mm2 copper minimum or disconnecting means, and shall contain the following information:
equivalent.
THIS CONNECTION IS FOR HEATING
(d) Metallic Roof and Exterior Bonding. The metal roof and exterior AND/OR AIR-CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT.
covering shall be considered bonded where both of the following THE BRANCH CIRCUIT IS RATED AT NOT MORE THAN ______
conditions apply: AMPERES, AT ______ VOLTS, 60 HZ, _______ CONDUCTOR
AMPACITY.
(1) The metal panels overlap one another and are securely attached A DISCONNECTING MEANS SHALL BE
to the wood or metal frame parts by metal fasteners. LOCATED WITHIN SIGHT OF THE EQUIPMENT.
(2) The lower panel of the metal exterior covering is secured by
metal fasteners at each cross member of the chassis, or the lower panel is The correct voltage and ampere rating shall be given. The tag shall not
bonded to the chassis by a metal strap. be less than 0.50 mm thick etched brass, stainless steel, anodized or
alclad aluminum, or equivalent. The tag shall not be less than 75 mm ×
(e) Gas, Water, and Waste Pipe Bonding. The gas, water, and waste 45 mm minimum size.
pipes shall be considered grounded if they are bonded to the chassis.
5.52.5 Factory Tests
(f) Furnace and Metal Air Duct Bonding. Furnace and metal
circulating air ducts shall be bonded. 5.52.5.1 Factory Tests (Electrical). Each park trailer shall be subjected
to the tests required by 5.52.5.1(a) and 5.52.5.1(b).
5.52.4.19 Appliance Accessibility and Fastening.
(a) Circuits of 230 Volts, 115 Volts or 115/230 Volts. Each park
Every appliance shall be accessible for inspection, service, repair, and trailer designed with a 230-volt, 115-volt or a 115/230-volt electrical
replacement without removal of permanent construction. Means shall be system shall withstand the applied potential without electrical breakdown
provided to securely fasten appliances in place when the park trailer is in of a 1-minute, 900-volt dielectric strength test, or a 1-second, 1 080-volt
transit. dielectric strength test, with all switches closed, between ungrounded and
grounded conductors and the park trailer ground. During the test, all
5.52.4.20 Outdoor Outlets, Fixtures, Including Luminaires, Air- switches and other controls shall be in the on position. Fixtures,
Cooling Equipment, and So On. including luminaires, and permanently installed appliances shall not be
required to withstand this test.
(a) Listed for Outdoor Use. Outdoor fixtures, including luminaires, Each park trailer shall be subjected to the following:
and equipment shall be listed for outdoor use. Outdoor receptacle or
convenience outlets shall be of a gasketed-cover type for use in wet (1) A continuity test to ensure that all metal parts are properly
locations. bonded
(2) Operational tests to demonstrate that all equipment is properly
(b) Outside Heating Equipment, Air-Conditioning Equipment, or connected and in working order
Both. A park trailer provided with a branch circuit designed to energize (3) Polarity checks to determine that connections have been properly
outside heating equipment or air-conditioning equipment, or both, made
located outside the park trailer, other than room air conditioners, shall (4) Receptacles requiring GFCI protection shall be tested for correct
have such branch-circuit conductors terminate in a listed outlet box or function by the use of a GFCI testing device
disconnecting means located on the outside of the park trailer. A label
 (b) Low-Voltage Circuits. Low-voltage circuit conductors in each
park trailer shall withstand the applied potential without electrical Exception: Where the floating building has multiple occupancy, each
breakdown of a 1-minute, 500-volt or a 1-second, 600-volt dielectric occupant shall be permitted to be supplied by a single set of feeder
strength test. The potential shall be applied between ungrounded and conductors extended from the occupant’s service equipment to the
grounded conductors. occupant’s panelboard.
The test shall be permitted on running light circuits before the lights
are installed, provided the unit’s outer covering and interior cabinetry 5.53.2.4 Installation of Services and Feeders.
have been secured. The braking circuit shall be permitted to be tested
before being connected to the brakes, provided the wiring has been (a) Flexibility. Flexibility of the wiring system shall be maintained
completely secured. between floating buildings and the supply conductors. All wiring shall be
installed so that motion of the water surface and changes in the water
level will not result in unsafe conditions.
ARTICLE 5.53 — FLOATING BUILDINGS
(b) Wiring Methods. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit or liquidtight
5.53.1 General flexible nonmetallic conduit with approved fittings shall be permitted for
feeders and where flexible connections are required for services. Extra-
5.53.1.1 Scope. This article covers wiring, services, feeders, and hard usage portable power cable listed for both wet locations and
grounding for floating buildings. sunlight resistance shall be permitted for a feeder to a floating building
where flexibility is required. Other raceways suitable for the location
5.53.1.2 Definition. shall be permitted to be installed where flexibility is not required.

Floating Building. A building unit as defined in Article 1.0 that floats FPN: See 5.55.1.1 and 5.55.1.13.
on water, is moored in a permanent location, and has a premises wiring
system served through connection by permanent wiring to an electricity 5.53.3 Grounding
supply system not located on the premises.
5.53.3.1 General Requirements. Grounding at floating buildings shall
5.53.1.3 Application of Other Articles. Wiring for floating buildings comply with 5.53.3.1(a) through (d).
shall comply with the applicable provisions of other articles of this Code,
except as modified by this article. (a) Grounding of Electrical and Nonelectrical Parts. Grounding of
both electrical and nonelectrical parts in a floating building shall be
5.53.2 Services and Feeders through connection to a grounding bus in the building panelboard.

5.53.2.1 Location of Service Equipment. The service equipment for a (b) Installation and Connection of Equipment Grounding
floating building shall be located adjacent to, but not in or on, the Conductor. The equipment grounding conductor shall be installed with
building or any floating structure. the feeder conductors and connected to a grounding terminal in the
service equipment.
5.53.2.2. Service Conductors. One set of service conductors shall be
permitted to serve more than one set of service equipment. (c) Identification of Equipment Grounding Conductor. The
equipment grounding conductor shall be an insulated copper conductor
5.53.2.3 Feeder Conductors. Each floating building shall be supplied by with a continuous outer finish that is either green or green with one or
a single set of feeder conductors from its service equipment. more yellow stripes. For conductors larger than 14 mm2, or where
multiconductor cables are used, re-identification of conductors as purpose of repair, berthing, launching, storage, or fueling of small craft
allowed in 2.50.6.10(a)(2)b and (a)(2)c or 2.50.6.10(b)(2) and (b)(3) and the moorage of floating buildings.
shall be permitted. Private, noncommercial docking facilities constructed or occupied for the
use of the owner or residents of the associated single-family dwelling are
(d) Grounding Electrode Conductor Connection. The grounding not covered by this article.
terminal in the service equipment shall be grounded by connection
through an insulated grounding electrode conductor to a grounding FPN: See NFPA 303-2000, Fire Protection Standard for Marinas and Boatyards, for
additional information.
electrode on shore.
5.55.1.2 Definitions.
5.53.3.2 Insulated Neutral. The grounded circuit conductor (neutral)
shall be an insulated conductor identified in conformance with 2.0.1.6.
Electrical Datum Plane. The electrical datum plane is defined as
The neutral conductor shall be connected to the equipment grounding
follows:
terminal in the service equipment, and, except for that connection, it shall
be insulated from the equipment grounding conductors, equipment
(1) In land areas subject to tidal fluctuation, the electrical datum
enclosures, and all other grounded parts. The neutral circuit terminals in
plane is a horizontal plane 600 mm above the highest tide level for the
the panelboard and in ranges, clothes dryers, counter-mounted cooking
area occurring under normal circumstances, that is, highest high tide.
units, and the like shall be insulated from the enclosures.
(2) In land areas not subject to tidal fluctuation, the electrical datum
5.53.3.3 Equipment Grounding.
plane is a horizontal plane 600 mm above the highest water level for the
area occurring under normal circumstances.
(a) Electrical Systems. All enclosures and exposed metal parts of
electrical systems shall be bonded to the grounding bus.
(3) The electrical datum plane for floating piers and landing stages
that are (a) installed to permit rise and fall response to water level,
(b) Cord-Connected Appliances. Where required to be grounded,
without lateral movement, and (b) that are so equipped that they can rise
cord-connected appliances shall be grounded by means of an equipment
to the datum plane established for (1) or (2), is a horizontal plane 800
grounding conductor in the cord and a grounding-type attachment plug.
mm above the water level at the floating pier or landing stage and a
minimum of 300 mm above the level of the deck.
5.53.3.4 Bonding of Non–Current-Carrying Metal Parts. All metal
parts in contact with the water, all metal piping, and all non–current-
Marine Power Outlet. An enclosed assembly that can include
carrying metal parts that may become energized shall be bonded to the
receptacles, circuit breakers, fused switches, fuses, watt-hour meter(s),
grounding bus in the panelboard.
and monitoring means approved for marine use.

5.55.1.4 Distribution System. Yard and pier distribution systems shall

ARTICLE 5.55 — MARINAS AND BOATYARDS
not exceed 600 volts phase to phase.
5.55.1.1 Scope. This article covers the installation of wiring and
5.55.1.5 Transformers. Transformers and enclosures shall be
equipment in the areas comprising fixed or floating piers, wharves,
specifically approved for the intended location. The bottom of enclosures
docks, and other areas in marinas, boatyards, boat basins, boathouses,
for transformers shall not be located below the electrical datum plane.
yacht clubs, boat condominiums, docking facilities associated with
residential condominiums, any multiple docking facility, or similar
5.55.1.7 Location of Service Equipment. The service equipment for
occupancies, and facilities that are used, or intended for use, for the
floating docks or marinas shall be located adjacent to, but not on or in, Table 5.55.1.12 Demand Factors
the floating structure. Sum of the Rating of the
Number of Receptacles
Receptacles (percent)
5.55.1.9 Electrical Connections. All electrical connections shall be 1–4 100
located at least 300 mm above the deck of a floating pier. All electrical 5–8 90
connections shall be located at least 300 mm above the deck of a fixed 9 – 14 80
pier but not below the electrical datum plane. 15 – 30 70
31 – 40 60
5.55.1.10 Electrical Equipment Enclosures. 41 – 50 50
51 – 70 40
(a) Securing and Supporting. Electrical equipment enclosures 71 – plus 30
installed on piers above deck level shall be securely and substantially
supported by structural members, independent of any conduit connected Notes:
1. Where shore power accommodations provide two receptacles specifically for an
to them. If enclosures are not attached to mounting surfaces by means of individual boat slip and these receptacles have different voltages (for example, one 30
external ears or lugs, the internal screw heads shall be sealed to prevent ampere, 250 volt and one 50 ampere, 125/250 volt), only the receptacle with the larger
kilowatt demand shall be required to be calculated.
seepage of water through mounting holes. 2. If the facility being installed includes individual kilowatt-hour submeters for each slip
and is being calculated using the criteria listed in Table 5.55.1.12, the total demand
(b) Location. Electrical equipment enclosures on piers shall be located amperes may be multiplied by 0.9 to achieve the final demand amperes.
so as not to interfere with mooring lines.
FPN: These demand factors may be inadequate in areas of extreme hot or cold
temperatures with loaded circuits for heating, air-conditioning, or refrigerating
5.55.1.11 Circuit Breakers, Switches, Panelboards, and Marine equipment.
Power Outlets. Circuit breakers and switches installed in gasketed
enclosures shall be arranged to permit required manual operation without
exposing the interior of the enclosure. All such enclosures shall be
arranged with a weep hole to discharge condensation. (2) Portable Power Cables. Extra-hard usage portable power cables
rated not less than 75°C, 600 volts; listed for both wet locations and
5.55.1.12 Load Calculations for Service and Feeder Conductors. sunlight resistance; and having an outer jacket rated to be resistant to
General lighting and other loads shall be calculated in accordance with temperature extremes, oil, gasoline, ozone, abrasion, acids, and
Article 2.20, and, in addition, the demand factors set forth in Table chemicals shall be permitted as follows:
5.55.1.12 shall be permitted for each service and/or feeder circuit
supplying receptacles that provide shore power for boats. These a. As permanent wiring on the underside of piers (floating or fixed)
calculations shall be permitted to be modified as indicated in notes (1) b. Where flexibility is necessary as on piers composed of floating
and (2) to Table 5.55.1.12. sections
c. Temporary Wiring. Temporary wiring, except as permitted by
5.55.1.13 Wiring Methods and Installation. Article 5.90, shall not be used to supply power to boats.

(a) Wiring Methods. (b) Installation.

(1) General. Wiring methods of Chapter 3 shall be permitted where (1) Overhead Wiring. Overhead wiring shall be installed to avoid
identified for use in wet locations. possible contact with masts and other parts of boats being moved in the
yard.
 Conductors and cables shall be routed to avoid wiring closer than 6 fittings of nonmetallic material to provide a threaded connection into
000 mm from the outer edge or any portion of the yard that can be used enclosures on rigid nonmetallic conduit, employing joint design as
for moving vessels or stepping or unstepping masts. recommended by the conduit manufacturer, for attachment of the fitting
(2) Outside Branch Circuits and Feeders. Outside branch circuits and to the conduit shall be acceptable, provided the equipment and method of
feeders shall comply with Article 2.25 except that clearances for attachment are approved and the assembly meets the requirements of
overhead wiring in portions of the yard other than those described in installation in damp or wet locations as applicable.
5.55.1.13(b)(1) shall not be less than 5 500 mm above grade.
(3) Wiring Over and Under Navigable Water. Wiring over and under 5.55.1.15 Grounding. Wiring and equipment within the scope of this
navigable water shall be subject to approval by the authority having article shall be grounded as specified in Article 2.50 and as required by
jurisdiction. 5.55.1.15(a) through 5.55.1.15(e).

FPN: See NFPA 303-2000, Fire Protection Standard for Marinas and Boatyards, for (a) Equipment to Be Grounded. The following items shall be
warning sign requirements.
connected to an equipment grounding conductor run with the circuit
conductors in the same raceway, cable, or trench:
(4) Portable Power Cables.
(1) Metal boxes, metal cabinets, and all other metal enclosures
a. Where portable power cables are permitted by 5.55.1.13(a)(2),
(2) Metal frames of utilization equipment
the installation shall comply with the following:
(3) Grounding terminals of grounding-type receptacles
1. Cables shall be properly supported.
(b) Type of Equipment Grounding Conductor. The equipment
2. Cables shall be located on the underside of the pier.
grounding conductor shall be an insulated copper conductor with a
3. Cables shall be securely fastened by nonmetallic clips to
continuous outer finish that is either green or green with one or more
structural members other than the deck planking.
yellow stripes. The equipment grounding conductor of Type MI cable
4. Cables shall not be installed where subject to physical
shall be permitted to be identified at terminations. For conductors larger
damage.
than 14 mm2, or where multiconductor cables are used, re-identification
5. Where cables pass through structural members, they shall be
of conductors as allowed in 2.50.6.10(a)(2)b and (a)(2)c or
protected against chafing by a permanently installed oversized sleeve of
2.50.6.10(b)(2) and (b)(3) shall be permitted.
nonmetallic material.
(c) Size of Equipment Grounding Conductor. The insulated copper
b. Where portable power cables are used as permitted in
equipment grounding conductor shall be sized in accordance with
5.55.1.13(a)(2)b, there shall be an approved junction box of corrosion-
2.50.6.13 but not smaller than 3.5 mm2 (2.0 mm dia.).
resistant construction with permanently installed terminal blocks on each
pier section to which the feeder and feeder extensions are to be
(d) Branch-Circuit Equipment Grounding Conductor. The
connected. Metal junction boxes and their covers, and metal screws and
insulated equipment grounding conductor for branch circuits shall
parts that are exposed externally to the boxes, shall be of corrosion-
terminate at a grounding terminal in a remote panelboard or the
resistant materials or protected by material resistant to corrosion.
grounding terminal in the main service equipment.
(5) Protection. Rigid metal or nonmetallic conduit suitable for the
(e) Feeder Equipment Grounding Conductors. Where a feeder
location shall be installed to protect wiring above decks of piers and
supplies a remote panelboard, an insulated equipment grounding
landing stages and below the enclosure that it serves. The conduit shall
conductor shall extend from a grounding terminal in the service
be connected to the enclosure by full standard threads. The use of special
equipment to a grounding terminal in the remote panelboard.
 (4) Ratings. Shore power for boats shall be provided by single
5.55.1.17 Disconnecting Means for Shore Power Connection(s). receptacles rated not less than 30 amperes.
Disconnecting means shall be provided to isolate each boat from its
supply connection(s). FPN: For locking- and grounding-type receptacles for auxiliary power to boats, see
NFPA 303-2000, Fire Protection Standard for Marinas and Boatyards.

(a) Type. The disconnecting means shall be permitted to consist of a

a. Receptacles rated not less than 30 amperes or more than 50
circuit breaker, switch, or both, and shall be properly identified as to
amperes shall be of the locking and grounding type.
which receptacle it controls.
FPN: For various configurations and ratings of locking and grounding-type receptacles
(b) Location. The disconnecting means shall be readily accessible, and caps, see ANSI/NEMA 18WD 6-1989, National Electrical Manufacturers
located not more than 800 mm from the receptacle it controls, and shall Association’s Standard for Dimensions of Attachment Plugs and Receptacles.

be located in the supply circuit ahead of the receptacle. Circuit breakers

or switches located in marine power outlets complying with this section b. Receptacles rated for 60 amperes or 100 amperes shall be of the
shall be permitted as the disconnecting means. pin and sleeve type.

FPN: For various configurations and ratings of pin and sleeve receptacles, see
5.55.1.19 Receptacles. Receptacles shall be mounted not less than 300 ANSI/UL 1686, UL Standard for Safety Pin and Sleeve Configurations.
mm above the deck surface of the pier and not below the electrical datum
plane on a fixed pier. (b) Other Than Shore Power.

(a) Shore Power Receptacles. (1) Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI) Protection for
Personnel. Fifteen- and 20-ampere, single-phase, 250-volt and 125-volt
(1) Enclosures. Receptacles intended to supply shore power to boats receptacles installed outdoors, in boathouses, in buildings used for
shall be housed in marine power outlets listed as marina power outlets or storage, maintenance, or repair where portable electrical hand tools,
listed for set locations, or shall be installed in listed enclosures protected electrical diagnostic equipment, or portable lighting equipment are to be
from the weather or in listed weatherproof enclosures. The integrity of used shall be provided with GFCI protection for personnel. Receptacles
the assembly shall not be affected when the receptacles are in use with in other locations shall be protected in accordance with 2.10.1.8(b).
any type of booted or nonbooted attachment plug/cap inserted.
(2) Marking. Receptacles other than those supplying shore power to
(2) Strain Relief. Means shall be provided where necessary to reduce boats shall be permitted to be housed in marine power outlets with the
the strain on the plug and receptacle caused by the weight and catenary receptacles that provide shore power to boats, provided they are marked
angle of the shore power cord. to clearly indicate that they are not to be used to supply power to boats.

(3) Branch Circuits. Each single receptacle that supplies shore power 5.55.1.21 Motor Fuel Dispensing Stations — Hazardous (Classified)
to boats shall be supplied from a marine power outlet or panelboard by Locations. Electrical wiring and equipment located at or serving motor
an individual branch circuit of the voltage class and rating corresponding fuel dispensing stations shall comply with Article 5.14 in addition to the
to the rating of the receptacle. requirements of this article. All electrical wiring for power and lighting
shall be installed on the side of the wharf, pier, or dock opposite from the
FPN: Supplying receptacles at voltages other than the voltages marked on the liquid piping system.
receptacle may cause overheating or malfunctioning of connected equipment, for
example, supplying single-phase, 115/230-volt, 3-wire loads from a 208Y/120-volt, 3-
wire source. FPN: For additional information, see NFPA 303-2000, Fire Protection Standard for
Marinas and Boatyards, and NFPA 30A-2003, Motor Fuel Dispensing Facilities and
Repair Garages.
 holiday decorative lighting and similar purposes.
5.55.1.22 Repair Facilities — Hazardous (Classified) Locations.
Electrical wiring and equipment located at facilities for the repair of (c) Emergencies and Tests. Temporary electrical power and lighting
marine craft containing flammable or combustible liquids or gases shall installations shall be permitted during emergencies and for tests,
comply with Article 5.11 in addition to the requirements of this article. experiments, and developmental work.

5.55.1.23 Marine Hoists, Railways, Cranes, and Monorails. Motors (d) Removal. Temporary wiring shall be removed immediately upon
and controls for marine hoists, railways, cranes, and monorails shall not completion of construction or purpose for which the wiring was installed.
be located below the electrical datum plane. Where it is necessary to
provide electric power to a mobile crane or hoist in the yard and a 5.90.1.4 General.
trailing cable is utilized, it shall be a listed portable power cable rated for
the conditions of use and be provided with an outer jacket of distinctive (a) Services. Services shall be installed in conformance with Article
color for safety. 2.30.

(b) Feeders. Overcurrent protection shall be provided in accordance

ARTICLE 5.90 — TEMPORARY INSTALLATIONS with 2.40.1.4, 2.40.1.5, 2.40.9.1, and 2.40.9.2. They shall originate in an
approved distribution center. Conductors shall be permitted within cable
5.90.1.1 Scope. The provisions of this article apply to temporary assemblies or within multiconductor cords or cables of a type identified
electrical power and lighting installations. in Table 4.0.1.4 for hard usage or extra-hard usage. For the purpose of
this section, Type NM and Type NMC cables shall be permitted to be
5.90.1.2 All Wiring Installations. used in any dwelling, building, or structure without any height limitation
or limitation by building construction type and without concealment
(a) Other Articles. Except as specifically modified in this article, all within walls, floors, or ceilings.
other requirements of this Code for permanent wiring shall apply to
temporary wiring installations. Exception: Single insulated conductors shall be permitted where
installed for the purpose(s) specified in 5.90.1.3(c), where accessible
(b) Approval. Temporary wiring methods shall be acceptable only if only to licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical
approved based on the conditions of use and any special requirements of practitioner under the supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner.
the temporary installation.
(c) Branch Circuits. All branch circuits shall originate in an approved
5.90.1.3 Time Constraints. power outlet or panelboard. Conductors shall be permitted within cable
assemblies or within multiconductor cord or cable of a type identified in
(a) During the Period of Construction. Temporary electrical power Table 4.0.1.4 for hard usage or extra-hard usage. Conductors shall be
and lighting installations shall be permitted during the period of protected from overcurrent as provided in 2.40.1.4, 2.40.1.5, and
construction, remodeling, maintenance, repair, or demolition of 2.40.9.1. For the purposes of this section, Type NM and Type NMC
buildings, structures, equipment, or similar activities. cables shall be permitted to be used in any dwelling, building, or
structure without any height limitation or limitation by building
FPN: For temporary wiring permit requirements please refer to Section 1.2.3.1. construction type and without concealment within walls, floors, or
ceilings.
(b) Decorative Lighting. Temporary electrical power and lighting
installations shall be permitted for a period not to exceed 90 days for Exception: Branch circuits installed for the purposes specified in
5.90.1.3(b) or 5.90.1.3(c) shall be permitted to be run as single insulated shall be avoided. Where passing through doorways or other pinch points,
conductors. Where the wiring is installed in accordance with 5.90.1.3(b), protection shall be provided to avoid damage.
the voltage to ground shall not exceed 250 volts, the wiring shall not be
subject to physical damage, and the conductors shall be supported on (i) Termination(s) at Devices. Flexible cords and cables entering
insulators at intervals of not more than 3 000 mm; or, for festoon enclosures containing devices requiring termination shall be secured to
lighting, the conductors shall be so arranged that excessive strain is not the box with fittings designed for the purpose.
transmitted to the lampholders.
(j) Support. Cable assemblies and flexible cords and cables shall be
(d) Receptacles. All receptacles shall be of the grounding type. Unless supported in place at intervals that ensure that they will be protected
installed in a continuous grounded metal raceway or metal-covered from physical damage. Support shall be in the form of staples, cable ties,
cable, all branch circuits shall contain a separate equipment grounding straps, or similar type fittings installed so as not to cause damage.
conductor, and all receptacles shall be electrically connected to the Vegetation shall not be used for support of overhead spans of branch
equipment grounding conductors. Receptacles on construction sites shall circuits or feeders.
not be installed on branch circuits that supply temporary lighting.
Receptacles shall not be connected to the same ungrounded conductor of Exception: For holiday lighting in accordance with 5.90.1.3(b), where
multiwire circuits that supply temporary lighting. the conductors or cables are arranged with proper strain relief devices,
tension take-up devices, or other approved means to avoid damage from
(e) Disconnecting Means. Suitable disconnecting switches or plug the movement of the live vegetation, trees shall be permitted to be used
connectors shall be installed to permit the disconnection of all for support of overhead spans of branch circuit conductors or cables.
ungrounded conductors of each temporary circuit. Multiwire branch
circuits shall be provided with a means to disconnect simultaneously all 5.90.1.5 Listing of Decorative Lighting. Decorative lighting used for
ungrounded conductors at the power outlet or panelboard where the holiday lighting and similar purposes, in accordance with 5.90.1.3(b),
branch circuit originated. Approved handle ties shall be permitted. shall be listed.

(f) Lamp Protection. All lamps for general illumination shall be 5.90.1.6 Ground-Fault Protection for Personnel. Ground-fault
protected from accidental contact or breakage by a suitable fixture or protection for personnel for all temporary wiring installations shall be
lampholder with a guard. provided to comply with 5.90.1.6(a) and 5.90.1.6(b). This section shall
Brass shell, paper-lined sockets, or other metal-cased sockets shall not apply only to temporary wiring installations used to supply temporary
be used unless the shell is grounded. power to equipment used by personnel during construction, remodeling,
maintenance, repair, or demolition of buildings, structures, equipment, or
(g) Splices. On construction sites, a box shall not be required for similar activities.
splices or junction connections where the circuit conductors are
multiconductor cord or cable assemblies, provided that the equipment (a) Receptacle Outlets. All 250-volt, single-phase, 15-, 20-, and
grounding continuity is maintained with or without the box. See 30-ampere receptacle outlets that are not a part of the permanent wiring
1.10.1.14(b) and 4.0.1.9. A box, conduit body, or terminal fitting having of the building or structure and that are in use by personnel shall have
a separately bushed hole for each conductor shall be used wherever a ground-fault circuit interrupter protection for personnel. If a receptacle(s)
change is made to a conduit or tubing system or a metal-sheathed cable is installed or exists as part of the permanent wiring of the building or
system. structure and is used for temporary electric power, ground-fault circuit-
interrupter protection for personnel shall be provided. For the purposes
(h) Protection from Accidental Damage. Flexible cords and cables of this section, cord sets or devices incorporating listed ground-fault
shall be protected from accidental damage. Sharp corners and projections circuit interrupter protection for personnel identified for portable use
shall be permitted. b. When there is evidence of damage
c. Before equipment is returned to service following any
Exception: In industrial establishments only, where conditions of repairs
maintenance and supervision ensure that only licensed electrical d. At intervals not exceeding 3 months
practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner under the supervision
of a licensed electrical practitioner are involved, an assured equipment b. The tests required in item (2)(a) shall be recorded and made
grounding conductor program as specified in 5.90.1.6(b)(2) shall be available to the authority having jurisdiction.
permitted for only those receptacle outlets used to supply equipment that
would create a greater hazard if power was interrupted or having a 5.90.1.7 Guarding. For wiring over 600 volts, nominal, suitable fencing,
design that is not compatible with GFCI protection. barriers, or other effective means shall be provided to limit access only to
authorized and licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical
(b) Use of Other Outlets. Receptacles other than 250-volt and/or practitioner under the supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner.
125-volt, single-phase, 15-, 20-, and 30-ampere receptacles shall have
protection in accordance with (b)(1) or the assured equipment grounding
conductor program in accordance with (b)(2).

(1) GFCI Protection. Ground-fault circuit interrupter protection for

personnel.

(2) Assured Equipment Grounding Conductor Program. A written

assured equipment grounding conductor program continuously enforced
at the site by one or more designated persons to ensure that equipment
grounding conductors for all cord sets, receptacles that are not a part of
the permanent wiring of the building or structure, and equipment
connected by cord and plug are installed and maintained in accordance
with the applicable requirements of 2.50.6.5, 2.50.7.9, 4.6.1.3(c), and
5.90.1.4(d).

a. The following tests shall be performed on all cord sets,

receptacles that are not part of the permanent wiring of the building or
structure, and cord-and-plug-connected equipment required to be
grounded:

1. All equipment grounding conductors shall be tested for

continuity and shall be electrically continuous.
2. Each receptacle and attachment plug shall be tested for correct
attachment of the equipment grounding conductor. The equipment
grounding conductor shall be connected to its proper terminal.
3. All required tests shall be performed as follows:

a. Before first use on site

 listing, unless otherwise approved by special permission.

(a) Field installed skeleton tubing shall not be required to be listed

where installed in conformance with this Code.
Chapter 6. Special Equipment
(b) Outline lighting shall not be required to be listed as a system
when it consists of listed luminaires (lighting fixtures) wired in
ARTICLE 6.0 — ELECTRIC SIGNS AND accordance with Chapter 3.
OUTLINE LIGHTING
6.0.1.4 Markings.
6.0.1 General
(a) Signs and Outline Lighting Systems. Signs and outline lighting
6.0.1.1 Scope. This article covers the installation of conductors and systems shall be marked with the manufacturer’s name, trademark, or
equipment for electric sign and outline lighting. All installations and other means of identification; and, input voltage and current rating.
equipment using neon tubing, such as signs, decorative elements,
skeleton tubing, or art forms, are covered by this article. (b) With Incandescent Lamp Holders. Signs and outline lighting
systems with incandescent lamp holders shall be marked to indicate
See Art 1.1 for the definition of Electric Sign & Outline Lighting the maximum allowable wattage of lamps. The markings shall be
permanently installed, in letters at least 6.00 mm high, and shall be
6.0.1.2 Definitions. located where visible during relamping.

Electric-Discharge Lighting. Systems of illumination utilizing 6.0.1.5 Branch Circuits.

fluorescent lamps, high intensity discharge (HID) lamps, or neon
tubing. (a) Required Branch Circuit. Each commercial building and each
commercial occupancy accessible to pedestrians shall be provided
Neon Tubing. Electric-discharge tubing manufactured into shapes with at least one outlet in an accessible location at each entrance to
that form letters, parts of letters, skeleton tubing, outline lighting, other each tenant space for sign or outline lighting system use. The outlet(s)
decorative elements, or art forms, and filled with various inert gases. shall be supplied by a branch circuit rated at least 20 amperes that
supplies no other load. Service hallways or corridors shall not be
Section Sign. A sign or outline lighting system, shipped as considered accessible to pedestrians.
subassemblies, that requires field-installed wiring between the
subassemblies to complete the overall sign. (b) Rating. Branch circuits that supply signs shall be rated in
accordance with:
Sign Body. A portion of a sign that may provide protection from the
weather, but is not an electrical enclosure. (1) Incandescent and Fluorescent. Branch circuits that supply signs
and outline lighting systems containing incandescent and fluorescent
Skeleton Tubing. Neon tubing that is itself the sign or outline forms of illumination shall be rated not to exceed 20 amperes.
lighting and not attached to an enclosure or sign body. (2) Neon. Branch circuits that supply neon tubing installations
shall not be rated in excess of 30 amperes.
6.0.1.3 Listing. Electric signs and outline lighting — fixed, mobile, or
portable — shall be listed and installed in conformance with that
 (c) Wiring Methods. Wiring methods used to supply signs shall a. The disconnecting means shall be permitted to be located
comply with: within sight of the controller or in the same enclosure with the
controller.
(1) Supply. The wiring method used to supply signs and outline b. The disconnecting means shall disconnect the sign or outline
lighting systems shall terminate within a sign, an outline lighting lighting system and the controller from all ungrounded supply
system enclosure, a suitable box, or a conduit body. conductors.
(2) Enclosures as Pull Boxes. Signs and transformer enclosures c. The disconnecting means shall be designed so that no pole
shall be permitted to be used as pull or junction boxes for conductors can be operated independently and it shall be capable of being locked
supplying other adjacent signs, outline lighting systems, or floodlights in the open position.
that are part of a sign, and shall be permitted to contain both branch
and secondary circuit conductors. (b) Control Switch Rating. Switches, flashers, and similar devices
(3) Metal poles used to support signs shall be permitted to enclose controlling transformers and electronic power supplies shall be rated
supply conductors, provided the poles and conductors are installed in for controlling inductive loads or have a current rating not less than
accordance with 4.10.4.1(b). twice the current rating of the transformer.

6.0.1.6 Disconnects. Each sign and outline lighting system, or feeder FPN: See 4.4.1.14 for rating of snap switches.
circuit or branch circuit supplying a sign or outline lighting system,
shall be controlled by an externally operable switch or circuit breaker 6.0.1.7 Grounding. Signs and metal equipment of outline lighting
that will open all ungrounded conductors. Signs and outline lighting systems shall be grounded.
systems located within fountains shall have the disconnect located in
accordance with 6.80.1.12. (a) Flexible Metal Conduit Length. Listed flexible metal conduit
or listed liquidtight flexible metal conduit that encloses the secondary
Exception No. 1: A disconnecting means shall not be required for an wiring of a transformer or power supply for use with electric discharge
exit directional sign located within a building. tubing shall be permitted as a bonding means in lengths not exceeding
Exception No. 2: A disconnecting means shall not be required for 30 m.
cord-connected signs with an attachment plug.
(b) Small Metal Parts. Small metal parts not exceeding 50 mm in
(a) Location. any dimension, not likely to be energized, and spaced at least 19 mm
from neon tubing shall not require bonding.
(1) Within Sight of the Sign. The disconnecting means shall be
within sight of the sign or outline lighting system that it controls. (c) Nonmetallic Conduit. Where listed nonmetallic conduit is used
Where the disconnecting means is out of the line of sight from any to enclose the secondary wiring of a transformer or power supply and
section that may be energized, the disconnecting means shall be a bonding conductor is required, the bonding conductor shall be
capable of being locked in the open position. installed separate and remote from the nonmetallic conduit and be
spaced at least 40 mm from the conduit when the circuit is operated at
(2) Within Sight of the Controller. The following shall apply for 100 Hz or less or 45 mm when the circuit is operated at over 100 Hz.
signs or outline lighting systems operated by electronic or electro-
mechanical controllers located external to the sign or outline lighting (d) Bonding Conductors. Bonding conductors shall be copper and
system: not smaller than 2.0 mm2 (1.6 mm dia.)
 (e) Metal Building Parts. Metal parts of a building shall not be (d) Wet Location. Signs and outline lighting system equipment
permitted as a grounded or equipment grounding conductor. for wet location use, other than listed watertight type, shall be
weatherproof and have drain holes, as necessary, in accordance with
(f) Signs in Fountains. Signs or outline lighting installed inside a the following.
fountain shall have all metal parts and equipment grounding
conductors bonded to the equipment grounding conductor for the (1) Drain hole shall not be larger than 13 mm or smaller than 6.00
fountain recirculating system. The bonding connection shall be as near mm
as practicable to the fountain and shall be permitted to be made to (2) Every low point or isolated section of the equipment shall have
metal piping systems that are bonded in 6.80.5.4. at least one drain hole.
(3) Drain holes shall be positioned such that there will be no
FPN: Refer to Section 6.0.2.3(j) for additional restrictions on length of high-voltage external obstructions.
secondary conductors.

6.0.1.10 Portable or Mobile Signs

6.0.1.8 Enclosures. Live parts other than lamps and neon tubing shall
be enclosed. Transformers and power supplies provided with an
(a) Support. Portable or mobile signs shall be adequately supported
integral enclosure, including a primary and secondary circuit splice
and readily movable without the use of tools.
enclosure, shall not require an additional enclosure.
(b) Attachment Plug. An attachment plug shall be provided for
each portable or mobile sign.
(a) Strength. Enclosures shall have ample structural strength and
(c) Wet or Damp Location. Portable or mobile signs in wet or
rigidity.
damp locations shall meet all of the following.
(b) Material. Sign and outline lighting system enclosures shall be
constructed of metal or shall be listed.
(1) Cords. All cords shall be junior hard service or hard service
(c) Minimum Thickness of Enclosure Metal. Sheet copper or
types as designated in Table 4.0.1.4, and have an equipment grounding
aluminum shall be at least 0.50 mm thick. Sheet steel shall be at least
conductor.
0.40 mm thick.
(2) Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter. Portable or mobile signs
(d) Protection of Metal. Metal parts of equipment shall be
shall be provided with factory-installed ground-fault circuit-interrupter
protected from corrosion.
protection for personnel. The ground-fault circuit interrupter shall be
an integral part of the attachment plug or shall be located in the power-
6.0.1.9 Location.
supply cord within 300 mm of the attachment plug.
(a) Vehicles. Sign or outline lighting system equipment shall be at
(d) Dry Location. Portable or mobile signs in dry locations shall
least 4 300 mm above areas accessible to vehicles unless protected
meet the following.
from physical damage.
(b) Pedestrians. Neon tubing accessible to pedestrians, other than
(1) Cords shall be SP-2, SPE-2, SPT-2, or heavier, as designated
dry-location portable signs, shall be protected from physical damage.
in Table 4.0.1.4.
(c) Adjacent to Combustible Materials. Signs and outline lighting
(2) The cord shall not exceed 4 500 mm in length.
systems shall be installed so that adjacent combustible materials shall
not be subjected to temperatures in excess of 90ºC.
6.0.0.12 Field-Installed Secondary Wiring. The field-installed
The spacing between wood or other combustible materials and an
secondary circuit wiring of section signs shall comply with 6.0.2.2 if
incandescent or HID lamp or compact fluorescent lamp (CFL) or
1 000 volts or less, or with 6.0.2.3 if over 1 000 volts.
lampholder shall not be less than 50 mm.
6.0.1.21 Ballasts, Transformers, and Electronic Power Supplies. secondary-circuit ground-fault protection:

(a) Accessibility. Ballasts, transformers, and electronic power (1) Transformers with isolated secondaries and with a maximum
supplies shall be located where accessible and shall be securely open circuit voltage of 7 500 volts or less
fastened in place. (2) Transformers with integral porcelain or glass secondary
(b) Location. Ballasts, transformers, and electronic power supplies housing for the neon tubing and requiring no field wiring of the
shall be installed as near to the lamps or neon tubing as practicable to secondary circuit
keep the secondary conductors as short as possible.
(c) Wet Location. Ballasts, transformers, and electronic power (c) Voltage. Secondary-circuit voltage shall not exceed 15 000 volts,
supplies used in wet locations shall be of the weatherproof type or be nominal, under any load condition. The voltage to ground of any
of the outdoor type and protected from the weather by placement in a output terminals of the secondary circuit shall not exceed 7 500 volts,
sign body or separate enclosure. under any load conditions.
(d) Working Space. A working space at least 900 mm high, 900 (d) Rating. Transformers and electronic power supplies shall have a
mm wide, by 900 mm deep shall be provided at each ballast, secondary-circuit current rating of not more than 300 mA.
transformer, and electronic power supply or its enclosure where not (e) Secondary Connections. Secondary circuit outputs shall not be
installed in a sign. connected in parallel or in series.
(e) Attic & Soffit Locations. Ballasts, transformers, and electronic (f) Marking. A transformer or power supply must be marked to
power supplies shall be permitted to be located in attics and soffits, indicate that it has secondary fault protection.
provided there is an access door at least 900 mm by 600 mm and a
passageway of at least 900 mm high by 600 mm wide with a suitable 6.0.1.24. Class 2 Power Sources. In addition to the requirements of
permanent walkway at least 300 mm wide extending from the point of Article 6.0, signs and outline lighting systems supplied by Class 2
entry to each component. transformers, power supplies, and power sources shall comply with
(f) Suspended Ceilings. Ballasts, transformers, and electronic 7.25.3.1.
power supplies shall be permitted to be located above suspended
ceilings, provided their enclosures are securely fastened in place and 6.0.2 Field-Installed Skeleton Tubing
not dependent on the suspended ceiling grid for support. Ballasts,
transformers, and electronic power supplies installed in suspended 6.0.2.1 Applicability. Part 6.0.2 shall apply only to field-installed
ceilings shall not be connected to the branch circuit by flexible cord. skeleton tubing. These requirements are in addition to the
requirements of Part 6.0.1.
6.0.1.22 Ballasts.
6.0.2.2 Neon Secondary-Circuit Conductors, 1 000 Volts or Less,
(a) Type. Ballasts shall be identified for the use and shall be listed. Nominal.
(b) Thermal Protection. Ballasts shall be thermally protected.
(a) Wiring Method. Conductors shall be installed using any wiring
6.0.1.23 Transformers and Electronic Power Supplies. method included in Chapter 3 suitable for the conditions.
(b) Insulation and Size. Conductors shall be insulated, listed for the
(a) Type. Transformers and electronic power supplies shall be purpose, and not smaller than 0.75 mm2 (1.0 mm dia.).
identified for the use and shall be listed. (c) Number of Conductors in Raceway. The number of conductors
in a raceway shall be in accordance with Table 1 of Chapter 9.
(b) Secondary-Circuit Ground-Fault Protection. Transformers (d) Installation. Conductors shall be installed so they are not
and electronic power supplies other than the following shall have subject to physical damage.
 (e) Protection of Leads. Bushings shall be used to protect wires (f) Insulators and Bushings. Insulators and bushings for conductors
passing through an opening in metal. shall be listed for the purpose.
(g) Conductors in Raceways.
6.0.2.3 Neon Secondary Circuit Conductors, Over 1 000 Volts,
Nominal. (1) Damp or Wet Locations. In damp or wet locations, the
insulation on all conductors shall extend not less than 100 mm beyond
(a) Wiring Method. the metal conduit or tubing.
(2) Dry Location. In dry location, the insulation on all conductors
(1) Installation. Conductors shall be installed on insulators, in shall extend not less than 65 mm beyond the metal conduit or tubing.
rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit, rigid nonmetallic
conduit, liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit, flexible metal (h) Between Neon Tubing and Grounded Midpoint. Conductors
conduit, liquidtight flexible metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing, shall be permitted to run from the ends of neon tubing to the grounded
metal enclosures, or other equipment listed for the purpose. Wiring midpoint of transformers or electronic power supplies listed for the
methods shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of purpose and provided with terminals at the midpoint.
Chapter 3. (i) Dwelling Occupancies. Equipment having an open circuit
(2) Number of Conductors. Conduit or tubing hall contain only voltage exceeding 1 000 volts shall not be installed in or on dwelling
one conductor. occupancies.
(3) Size. Conduit or tubing shall be a minimum of 15 mm dia. (j) Length of Secondary Circuit Conductors.
(4) Spacing from Ground. Other than at the location of
connecftion to a metal enclosure or sign body, nonmetallic conduit or (1) Secondary Conductor to the First Electrode. The length of
flexible nonmetallic conduit shall be spaced at least 40 mm from secondary circuit conductors from a high-voltage terminal or lead of a
grounded or bonded parts when the conduit contains a conductor transformer or electronic power supply to the first neon tube electrode
operating at 100 Hz or less, and shall be spaced no less than 45 mm shall not exceed the following:
from grounded or bonded parts when conduit contains a conductor a. 6 000 mm where installed in metal conduit or tubing
operating at more than 100 Hz. b. 15 000 mm where installed in nonmetallic conduit
(5) Metal Building Parts. Metal parts of a building shall not be (2) Other Secondary Circuit Conductors. All other sections of
permitted as a secondary return conductor or an equipment grounding secondary circuit conductor in a neon tube circuit shall be as short as
conductor. practicable.

(b) Insulation and Size. Conductors shall be insulated, listed as gas 6.0.2.12 Neon Tubing.
tube sign and ignition cable type GTO, rated for 5, 10, or 15 kV, not
smaller than 0.75 mm2 (1.0 mm dia.) and have a minimum temperature (a) Design. The length and design of the tubing shall not cause a
rating of 105ºC. continuous overcurrent beyond the design loading of the transformer
(c) Installation. Conductors shall be installed so they are not subject or electronic power supply.
to physical damage. (b) Support. Tubing shall be supported by listed tube supports.
(d) Bends in Conductors. Sharp bends in insulated conductors shall (c) Spacing. A spacing of not less than 6 mm shall be maintained
be avoided. between the tubing and the nearest surface, other than its support.
(e) Spacing. Conductors shall be separated from each other and
from all objects other than insulators or neon tubing by a spacing of 6.0.2.13 Electrode Connections.
not less than 40 mm. GTO cable installed in metal conduit or tubing
requires no spacing b/n the cable insulation and the conduit or tubing. (a) Accessibility. Terminals of the electrode shall not be accessible
to unqualified persons. other air-handling spaces where listed for this application and installed
in accordance with 3.0.1.22.
(b) Electrode Connections. Connections shall be made by use of a
connection device, twisting the wires together, or use of an electrode Exception No. 1: In concealed spaces, one end of tapped cable shall
receptacle. Connections shall be electrically and mechanically secure be permitted to extend into hollow walls for direct termination at
and shall be in an enclosure listed for the purpose. switch and outlet points.

(c) Support. The neon tubing and conductor shall be supported not Exception No. 2: Manufactured wiring system assemblies installed
more than 150 mm from the electrode connection. outdoors shall be listed for use in outdoor locations.

(d) Receptacles. Electrode receptacles shall be listed. 6.4.1.5 Uses Not Permitted. Manufactured wiring system types shall
not be permitted where limited by the applicable article in Chapter 3
(e) Bushings. Where electrodes penetrate an enclosure, bushings for the wiring method used in its construction.
listed for the purpose shall be used, unless receptacles are provided.
6.4.1.6 Construction.
(f) Wet Locations. A listed cap shall be used to close the opening
between neon tubing and a receptacle where the receptacle penetrates (a) Cable or Conduit Types.
a building. Where a bushing or neon tubing penetrates a building, the
opening between neon tubing and the bushing shall be sealed. (1) Cables. Cable shall be listed Type AC cable or listed Type MC
cable containing nominal 600-volt, 8.0 mm2(3.2 mm dia) to 3.5 mm2
(g) Electrode Enclosures. Electrode enclosures shall be listed. (2.0 mm dia) insulated copper conductors with a bare or insulated
copper equipment grounding conductor equivalent in size to the
ARTICLE 6.4 — MANUFACTURED WIRING SYSTEMS ungrounded conductor.

6.4.1.1 Scope. The provisions of this article apply to field-installed Other cables as listed in 7.25.3.21, 8.0.5.4, 8.20.5.4, and 8.30.6.1
wiring using off-site manufactured subassemblies for branch circuits, shall be permitted in manufactured wiring systems for wiring of
remote-control circuits, signaling circuits, and communications equipment within the scope of their respective articles.
circuits in accessible areas.
(2) Conduits. Conduit shall be listed flexible metal conduit or
6.4.1.2 Definition. listed liquidtight flexible conduit containing nominal 600-volt,
8.0 mm2(3.2 mm dia) to 3.5 mm2 (2.0 mm dia) insulated copper
Manufactured Wiring System. A system containing component conductors with a bare or insulated copper equipment grounding
parts that are assembled in the process of manufacture and cannot be conductor equivalent in size to the ungrounded conductor.
inspected at the building site without damage or destruction to the
assembly. Exception No. 1 to (1) and (2): A luminaire(fixture) tap, maximum
1 800 mm long, intended for connection to a single fixture shall be
6.4.1.3 Other Articles. Except as modified by the requirements of permitted to contain conductors smaller than 3.5 mm2 (2.0 mm dia.)
this article, all other applicable articles of this Code shall apply. but not smaller than 0.75 mm2 (1.0 mm dia.).

6.4.1.4 Uses Permitted. The manufactured wiring systems shall be Exception No. 2 to (1) and (2): Listed manufactured wiring
permitted in accessible and dry locations and in ducts, plenums, and assemblies containing conductors smaller than 3.5 mm2 (2.0 mm dia.)
shall be permitted for remote-control, signaling, or communication providing power for lighting accessories and appliances in wired
circuits. partitions. These partitions shall not extend from floor to ceiling.

(3) Flexible Cord. Flexible cord suitable for hard usage, with Exception: Where permitted by the authority having jurisdiction, these
minimum 3.5 mm2 (2.0 mm dia.) conductors, shall be permitted as part relocatable wired partitions shall be permitted to extend to the ceiling
of a listed factory-made assembly not exceeding 1 800 mm in length but shall not penetrate the ceiling.
when making a transition between components of a manufactured
wiring system and utilization equipment, other than luminaries, not (a) Use. These assemblies shall be installed and used only as
permanently secured to the building structure. The cord shall be provided for by this article.
visible for its entire length and shall not be subject to strain or physical (b) Other Articles. Except as modified by the requirements of this
damage. article, all other articles of this Code shall apply.
(c) Hazardous (Classified) Locations. Where used in hazardous
(b) Marking. Each section shall be marked to identify the type of (classified) locations, these assemblies shall conform with Articles 5.0
cable, flexible cord, or conduit. through 5.17 in addition to this article.

(c) Receptacles and Connectors. Receptacles and connectors shall 6.5.1.3 Wireways. All conductors and connections shall be contained
be of the locking type, uniquely polarized and identified for the within wiring channels of metal or other material identified as suitable
purpose and shall be part of a listed assembly for the appropriate for the conditions of use. Wiring channels shall be free of projections
system. or other conditions that may damage conductor insulation.

(d) Other Component Parts. Other component parts shall be listed 6.5.1.4 Partition Interconnections. The electrical connection
for the appropriate system. between partitions shall be a flexible assembly identified for use with
wired partitions or shall be permitted to be installed using flexible cord
(e) Securing and Supporting. Manufactured wiring systems shall provided all the following conditions are met.
be secured and supported in accordance with the applicable cable or
conduit article for the cable or conduit type employed. (1) The cord is extra-hard usage type with 3.5 mm2 (2.0 mm dia.)or
larger conductors, with an insulated grounding conductor.
(f) Luminaires (Fixtures). Installation of listed electric-discharge (2) The partitions are mechanically contiguous.
luminaries (fixtures) complying with 4.10.6.9(c) shall be permitted. (3) The cord is not longer than necessary for maximum positioning
of the partitions but is in no case to exceed 600 mm.
6.4.1.7 Unused Outlets. All unused outlets shall be capped to (4) The cord is terminated at an attachment plug and cord connector
effectively close the connector openings. with strain relief.

ARTICLE 6.5 — OFFICE FURNISHINGS (CONSISTING OF 6.5.1.5 Lighting Accessories. Lighting equipment listed and
LIGHTING ACCESSORIES AND WIRED PARTITIONS) identified for use with wired partitions shall comply with all of the
following.
6.5.1.1 Scope. This article covers electrical equipment, lighting
accessories, and wiring systems used to connect, or contained within, (a) Support. A means for secure attachment or support shall be
or installed on relocatable wired partitions. provided.

6.5.1.2 General. Wiring systems shall be identified as suitable for (b) Connection. Where cord and plug connection is provided, the
cord length shall be suitable for the intended application but shall not
exceed 2 700 mm in length. The cord shall not be smaller than (c) Receptacle Outlets, Maximum. Individual partitions or groups
0.75 mm2 (1.0 mm dia.), shall contain an equipment grounding of interconnected individual partitions shall not contain more than
conductor, and shall be of the hard usage type. Connection by other thirteen 15-ampere, 125-volt and/or 250-volt receptacle outlets.
means shall be identified as suitable for the condition of use.
(d) Multiwire Circuits, Not Permitted. Individual partitions or
(c) Receptacle Outlet. Convenience receptacles shall not be groups of interconnected individual partitions shall not contain
permitted in lighting accessories. multiwire circuits.

6.5.1.6 Fixed-Type Partitions. Wired partitions that are fixed FPN: See 2.10.1.4 for circuits supplying partitions in 6.5.1.6 and 6.5.1.7.
(secured to building surfaces) shall be permanently connected to the
building electrical system by one of the wiring as methods of Chapter
3. Multiwire branch circuits supplying power to permanently ARTICLE 6.10 — CRANES AND HOISTS
connected freestanding partitions shall be provided with a means to
disconnect simultaneously all ungrounded conductors at the 6.10.1 General
panelboard where the branch circuit originates.
6.10.1.1 Scope. This article covers the installation of electrical
6.5.1.7 Freestanding-Type Partitions. Partitions of the freestanding equipment and wiring used in connection with cranes, monorail hoists,
type (not fixed) shall be permitted to be permanently connected to the hoists, and all runways.
building electrical system by one of the wiring methods of Chapter 3.
FPN: For further information, see ANSI B-30, Safety Code for Cranes, Derricks,
Multiwire branch circuits supplying power to permanently connected Hoists, Jacks, and Slings.
freestanding partitions shall be provided with a means to disconnect
simultaneously all ungrounded conductors at the panelboard where the 6.10.1.2 Special Requirements for Particular Locations.
branch circuit originates.
(a) Hazardous (Classified) Locations. All equipment that operates
6.5.1.8 Freestanding-Type Partitions, Cord and Plug Connected. in a hazardous (classified) location shall conform to Article 5.0.
Individual partitions of the freestanding type, or groups of individual
partitions that are electrically connected, mechanically contiguous, and (1) Equipment used in locations that are hazardous because of the
do not exceed 9 000 mm when assembled, shall be permitted to be presence of flammable gases or vapors shall conform to Article 5.1.
connected to the building electrical system by a single flexible cord (2) Equipment used in locations that are hazardous because of
and plug, provided all of the following conditions are met. combustible dust shall conform to Article 5.2.
(3) Equipment used in locations that are hazardous because of the
(a) Flexible Power-Supply Cord. The flexible power-supply cord presence of easily ignitible fibers or flyings shall conform to Article
shall be extra-hard usage type with 3.5 mm2 (2.0 mm dia.) or larger 5.3
conductors with an insulated equipment grounding conductor and not
exceeding 600 mm in length. (b) Combustible Materials. Where a crane, hoist, or monorail hoist
operates over readily combustible material, the resistors shall be
(b) Receptacle Supplying Power. The receptacle(s) supplying located as permitted in the following:
power shall be on a separate circuit serving only panels and no other
loads and shall be located not more than 300 mm from the partition (1) In a well-ventilated cabinet composed of noncombustible
that is connected to it. material constructed so that it will not emit flames or molten metal
 (2) In a cage or cab constructed of noncombustible material that separately bushed hole for each conductor shall be used wherever a
encloses the sides of the cage or cab from the floor to a point at least change is made from a raceway or cable to open wiring. A fitting used
150 mm above the top of the resistors for this purpose shall not contain taps or splices and shall not be used
at luminaire (fixture) outlets.
(c) Electrolytic Cell Lines. See 6.68.1.32.
(b) Bushing in Lieu of a Box. A bushing shall be permitted to be
6.10.2 Wiring used in lieu of a box at the end of a rigid metal conduit, intermediate
metal conduit, or electrical metallic tubing where the raceway
6.10.2.1 Wiring Method. Conductors shall be enclosed in raceways or terminates at unenclosed controls or similar equipment including
be Type AC cable with insulated grounding conductor, Type MC contact conductors, collectors, resistors, brakes, power-circuit limit
cable, or Type MI cable unless otherwise permitted in (a) through (e). switches, and dc split-frame motors.

(a) Contact. Conductors. Contact conductors are not required to be 6.10.2.3 Types of Conductors. Conductors shall comply with Table
enclosed in raceways. 3.10.1.13 unless otherwise permitted in 6.10.2.3(a) through
6.10.2.3(d).
(b) Exposed Conductors. Short lengths of open conductors at
resistors, collectors, and other equipment are not required to be (a) Exposed to External Heat or Connected to Resistors. A
enclosed in raceways. conductor(s) exposed to external heat or connected to resistors shall
have a flame-resistant outer covering or be covered with flame-
(c) Where flexible connections are necessary, flexible stranded resistant tape individually or as a group.
conductors shall be used. Conductors shall be in flexible metal
conduit, liequidtight fexible metal conduit, liquidtight flexible (b) Contact Conductors. Contact conductors along runways, crane
nonmetallic conduit, multiconductor cable, or an approved nonmetallic bridges, and monorails shall be permitted to be bare, and shall be
flexible raceway. copper, aluminum, steel, or other alloys or combinations thereof in the
form of hard drawn wire, tees, angles, tee rails, or other stiff shapes.
(d) Where multiconductor cable is used with a suspended
pushbutton station, the station shall be supported in some satisfactory (c) Flexibility. Where flexibility is required, flexible cord or cable
manner that protects the electric conductors against strain. shall be permitted to be used and, where necessary, cable reels or take-
up devices shall be used.
(e) Where flexibility is required for power or control to moving
parts, a cord suitable for the purpose shall be permitted provided (d) Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 Circuits. Conductors for Class 1,
Class 2, and Class 3 remote-control, signaling, and power-limited
(1) Suitable strain relief and protection from physical damage is circuits, installed in accordance with Article 7.25, shall be permitted.
provided, and
(2) In Class 1, Division 2 locations, cord shall be approved for 6.10.2.4 Rating and Size of Conductors.
extra-hard usage.
(a) Ampacity. The allowable ampacities of conductors shall be as
6.10.2.2 Raceway or Cable Terminal Fittings. Conductors leaving shown in Table 6.10.2.4(a).
raceways or cables shall comply with one of the following.
FPN: For the ampacities of conductors between controllers and resistors, see
4.30.2.3.
(a) Separately Bushed Hole. A box or terminal fitting that has a
 (b) Secondary Resistor Conductors. Where the secondary resistor (e) Calculation of Motor Load.
is separate from the controller, the minimum size of the conductors
between controller and resistor shall be calculated by multiplying the (1) Single Motor. For one motor, 100 percent of motor nameplate
motor secondary current by the appropriate factor from Table full-load ampere rating shall be used.
6.10.2.4(b) and selecting a wire from Table 6.10.2.4(a). (2) Multiple Motors on Single Crane or Hoists. For multiple
motors on a single crane or hoist, the minimum ampacity of the power
supply conductors shall be the nameplate full-load ampere rating of
Table 6.10.2.4(B) Secondary Conductor Rating Factors the largest motor or group of motors for any single crane motion, plus
Time in Seconds Ampacity of Wire in Percent of 50 percent of the nameplate full-load ampere rating of the next largest
On Off Full-Load Secondary Current motor or group of motors, using that column of Table 6.10.2.4(a) that
5 75 35 applies to the longest time-rated motor.
10 70 45 (3) Multiple Cranes or Hoists on a Common Conductor. For
15 75 55 multiple cranes or hoists, or both, supplied by a common conductor
15 45 65 system, compute the motor minimum ampacity for each crane as
15 30 75 defined in 6.10.2.4(e), add them together, and multiply the sum by the
15 15 85 appropriate demand factor from Table 6.10.2.4(e).
Continuous Duty 110

Table 6.10.2.4(e) Demand Factors

(c) Minimum Size. Conductors external to motors and controls Number of Cranes or Hoists Demand Factor
shall not be smaller than 1.25 mm2 (1.2 mm dia.) unless otherwise 2 0.95
permitted in (1) and (2). 3 0.91
4 0.87
(1) 0.75 mm2 (1.0 mm dia.) wire in multiconductor cord shall be 5 0.84
permitted for control circuits at not over 7 amperes. 6 0.81
(2) Wires not smaller than 0.50 mm2 (0.80 mm dia.) shall be 7 0.78
permitted for electronic circuits.

(d) Contact Conductors. Contact wires shall have an ampacity not (f) Other Loads. Additional loads, such as heating, lighting, and air
less than that required by Table 6.10.2.4(d) for 75ºC wire, and in no conditioning, shall be provided for by application of the appropriate
case shall they be smaller than the following: sections of this Code.

Table 6.10.2.4(D) Contact Conductor Supports (g) Nameplate. Each crane, monorail, or hoist shall be provided
Distance Between End Strain with a visible nameplate marked with the manufacture’s name, the
Size of Wire rating in volts, frequency, number of phases, and circuit amperes as
Insulation or Clamp Type
(mm2) calculated in 6.10.2.4(e) and 6.10.2.4(f).
Intermediate Supports (m)
Less than 9 14
9 – 18 22 6.10.2.5 Common Return. Where a crane or hoist is operated by
Over 18 30 more than one motor, a common-return conductor of proper ampacity
shall be permitted.
 Table 6.10.2.4(a) Ampacities of Insulated Copper Conductors Used with Short-Time Rated Crane
and Hoist Motors. Based on Ambient Temperature of 30ºC. Up to Four Conductors in Raceway
or Cable1 Up to 3 ac2 or 4 dc1 Conductors in Raceway or Cable.
Maximum Operating
750C 900C 1250C
Temperature
Types
Types Types
TA, TBS, SA, SIS, PFA,
Conductor Size MTW, RH, RHW, THW, FEP, FEPB, PFA, PFAH,
FEP, FEPB, RHH, THHN,
[mm2 (mm dia.)] THWN, XHHW, SA, TFE, Z, ZW
XHHW, Z, ZW
60 Min 30 Min 60 Min 30 Min 60 Min 30 Min
1.25 (1.2) 8.5 10 — — — —
2.0 (1.6) 24 25 29 30 36 38
3.5 (2.0) 32 35 38 43 48 53
5.5 (2.6) 42 45 51 54 63 68
8.0 (3.2) 52 57 60 65 69 76
14 80 91 87 100 107 126
22 104 120 115 135 138 163
30 118 138 128 150 154 185
38 125 153 138 168 184 222
50 172 210 191 234 229 275
60 196 236 217 260 268 327
80 260 316 283 345 344 420
100 282 347 300 376 424 522
125 360 415 395 456 504 628
150 460 588 452 643 594 745
200 520 665 574 735 718 910
250 661 848 726 916 898 1 145
Table 6.10.2.4(a) Continued…
AMPACITY CORRECTION FACTOR
For ambient temperature other than 300C, multiply the ampacities
Ambient Temperature (oC)
shown above by the appropriate factor shown below.
21-25 1.05 1.05 1.04 1.04 1.02 1.02
26-30 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
31-35 0.94 0.94 0.96 0.96 0.97 0.97
36-40 0.88 0.88 0.91 0.91 0.95 0.95
41-45 0.82 0.82 0.87 0.87 0.92 0.92
46-50 0.75 0.75 0.82 0.82 0.89 0.89
51-55 0.67 0.67 0.76 0.76 0.86 0.86
56-60 0.58 0.58 0.71 0.71 0.83 0.83
61-70 0.33 0.33 0.58 0.58 0.76 0.76
71-80 — — 0.41 0.41 0.69 0.69
81-90 — — — — 0.61 0.61
91-100 — — — — 0.51 0.51
101-120 — — — — 0.40 0.40
Note: Other insulations shown in Table 3.10.1.13 and approved for the temperature and location shall be permitted to be substituted for those
shown in Table 6.10.2.4(a). The allowable ampacities of conductors used with 15-minute motors shall be the 30-minute ratings increased by 12
percent.
1
For 5 to 8 simultaneously energized power conductors in raceway or cable, the ampacity of each power conductor shall be reduced to a value
of 80 percent of that shown in the table.
2
For 4 to 6 simultaneously energized 125ºC ac power conductors in raceway or cable, the ampacity of each power conductor shall be reduced
to a value of 80 percent of that shown in the table.
 phase of a 3-phase, ac system furnishing power to the carrier, crane, or
6.10.3 Contact Conductors trolley, provided all of the following conditions are met.

6.10.3.1 Installation of Contact Conductors. Contact conductors (1) The conductors supplying the other two phases of the power
shall comply with (a) through (h). supply are insulated.
(2) The power for all phases is obtained from an insulating
(a) Locating or Guarding Contact Conductors. Runway contact transformer.
conductors shall be guarded, and bridge contact conductors shall be (3) The voltage does not exceed 300 volts.
located or guarded in a manner that persons cannot inadvertently touch (4) The rail serving as a conductor is effectively grounded at the
energized current-carrying parts. transformer and also shall be permitted to be grounded by the fittings
used for the suspension or attachment of the rail to a building or
(b) Contact Wires. Wires that are used as contact conductors shall structure.
be secured at the ends by means of approved strain insulators and shall
be mounted on approved insulators so that the extreme limit of (g) Electrical Continuity of Contact Conductors. All sections of
displacement of the wire will not bring the latter within less than 40 contact conductors shall be mechanically joined to provide a
mm from the surface wired over. continuous electrical connection.

(c) Supports Along Runways. Main contact conductors carried (h) Not to Supply Other Equipment. Contact conductors shall not
along runways shall be supported on insulating supports placed at be used as feeders for any equipment other than the crane(s) or hoist(s)
intervals not exceeding 6 000 mm unless otherwise permitted in that they are primarily designed to serve.
6.10.3.1(f).
Such conductors shall be separated not less than 150 mm, other than 6.10.3.2 Collectors. Collectors shall be designed so as to reduce to a
for monorail hoists where a spacing of not less than 75 mm shall be minimum sparking between them and the contact conductor; and,
permitted. Where necessary, intervals between insulating supports where operated in rooms used for the storage of easily ignitible
shall be permitted to be increased up to 12 m, the separation between combustible fibers and materials, they shall comply with Section
conductors being increased proportionately. 5.3.3.56.

(d) Supports on Bridges. Bridge wire contact conductors shall be 6.10.4 Disconnecting Means
kept at least 65 mm apart, and, where the span exceeds 25 m,
insulating saddles shall be placed at intervals not exceeding 15 m. 6.10.4.1 Runway Conductor Disconnecting Means. A disconnecting
means that has a continuous ampere rating not less than that computed
(e) Supports for Rigid Conductors. Conductors along runways and in 6.10.2.4(e) and 6.10.2.4(f) shall be provided between the runway
crane bridges, that are of the rigid type specified in 6.10.2.3(b) and not contact conductors and the power supply. Such disconnecting means
contained within an approved enclosed assembly, shall be carried on shall consist of a motor-circuit switch, circuit breaker, or molded case
insulating supports spaced at intervals of not more than 80 times the switch. This disconnecting means shall be as follows:
vertical dimension of the conductor, but in no case greater than 4 500
mm, and spaced apart sufficiently to give a clear electrical separation (1) Readily accessible and operable from the ground or floor level
of conductors or adjacent collectors of not less than 25 mm. (2) Capable of being locked in the open position
(3) Open all ungrounded conductors simultaneously
(f) Track as Circuit Conductor. Monorail, tram rail, or crane (4) Placed within view of the runway contact conductors
runway tracks shall be permitted as a conductor of current for one
6.10.4.2 Disconnecting Means for Cranes and Monorail Hoists. A 6.10.5.1(a). Branch-circuit taps, where made, shall comply with
motor-circuit switch or circuit breaker arranged to be locked in the 6.10.5.2(b).
open position shall be provided in the leads from the runway contact
conductors or other power supply on all cranes and monorail hoists. (a) Fuse or Circuit Breaker Rating. Crane, hoist, and monorail
The disconnecting means shall be capable of being locked in the open hoist motor branch circuits shall be protected by fuses or inverse-time
position. circuit breakers that have a rating in accordance with Table 4.30.4.2.
Where a monorail hoist or hand-propelled crane bridge installation Where two or more motors operate a single motion, the sum of their
meets all of the following, the disconnecting means shall be permitted nameplate current ratings shall be considered as that of a single motor.
to be omitted.
(1) The unit is controlled from the ground or floor level. (b) Taps.
(2) The unit is within view of the power supply disconnecting means
(3) No fixed work platform has been provided for servicing the unit. (1) Multiple Motors. Where two or more motors are connected to
the same branch circuit, each tap conductor to an individual motor
Where the disconnecting means is not readily accessible from the shall have an ampacity not less than one-third that of the branch
crane or monorail hoist operating station, means shall be provided at circuit. Each motor shall be protected from overload according to
the operating station to open the power circuit to all motors of the 6.10.5.3.
crane or monorail hoist. (2) Control Circuits. Where taps to control circuits originate on
the load side of a branch-circuit protective device, each tap and piece
6.10.4.3 Rating of Disconnecting Means. The continuous ampere of equipment shall be protected in accordance with 4.30.6.2.
rating of the switch or circuit breaker required by 6.10.4.2 shall not be (3) Brake Coils. Taps without separate overcurrent protection
less than 50 percent of the combined short-time ampere rating of the shall be permitted to brake coils.
motors, nor less than 75 percent of the sum of the short-time ampere
rating of the motors required for any single motion. 6.10.5.3 Overload Protection.

6.10.5 Overcurrent Protection (a) Motor and Branch-Circuit Overload Protection. Each motor,
motor controller, and branch-circuit conductor shall be protected from
6.10.5.1 Feeders, Runway Conductors. overload by one of the following means.

(a) Single Feeder. The runway supply conductors and main contact (1) A single motor shall be considered as protected where the
conductors of a crane or monorail shall be protected by an overcurrent branch-circuit overcurrent device meets the rating requirements of
device(s) that shall not be greater than the largest rating or setting of 6.10.5.2.
any branch-circuit protective device plus the sum of the nameplate (2) Overload relay elements in each ungrounded circuit
ratings of all the other loads with application of the demand factors conductor, with all relay elements protected from short circuit by the
from Table 6.10.2.4(e). branch-circuit protection.
(3) Thermal sensing devices, sensitive to motor temperature or to
(b) More than One Feeder Circuit. Where more than one feeder temperature and current, that are thermally in contact with the motor
circuit is installed to supply runway conductors, each feeder circuit winding(s). A hoist or trolley is considered to be protected if the
shall be sized and protected in compliance with 6.10.5.1(a). sensing device is connected in the hoist’s upper limit switch circuit so
as to prevent further hoisting during an overload condition of either
6.10.5.2 Branch-Circuit Short-Circuit and Ground-Fault motor.
Protection. Branch circuits shall be protected in accordance with
 (b) Manually Controlled Motor. If the motor is manually (a) Taps to Control Transformers. Taps to control transformers
controlled, with spring return controls, the overload protective device shall be considered as protected where the secondary circuit is
shall not be required to protect the motor against stalled rotor protected by a device rated or set at not more than 200 percent of the
conditions. rated secondary current of the transformer and not more than 200
percent of the ampacity of the control circuit conductors.
(c) Multimotor. Where two or more motors drive a single trolley,
truck, or bridge and are controlled as a unit and protected by a single (b) Continuity of Power. Where the opening of the control circuit
set of overload devices with a rating equal to the sum of their rated would create a hazard, as for example, the control circuit of a hot
full-load currents. A hoist or trolley shall be considered to be protected metal crane, the control circuit conductors shall be considered as being
if the sensing device is connected in the hoist’s upper limit switch properly protected by the branch-circuit overcurrent devices.
circuit so as to prevent further hoisting during an over temperature
condition of either motor. 6.10.6.5 Limit Switch. A limit switch or other device shall be
provided to prevent the load block from passing the safe upper limit of
(d) Hoists and Monorail Hoists. Hoists and monorail hoists and travel of all hoisting mechanisms.
their trolleys that are not used as part of an overhead traveling crane
shall not require individual motor overload protection, provided the 6.10.6.7 Clearance. The dimension of the working space in the
largest motor does not exceed 7½ hp and all motors are under manual direction of access to live parts that are likely to require examination,
control of the operator. adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized shall be a
minimum of 750 mm. Where controls are enclosed in cabinets, the
6.10.6 Control door(s) shall either open at least 90 degrees or be removable.

6.10.6.1 Separate Controllers. Each motor shall be provided with an 6.10.7 Grounding
individual controller unless otherwise permitted in (a) or (b).
6.10.7.1 Grounding. All exposed non-current-carrying metal parts of
(a) Motions with More Than One Motor. Where two or more cranes, monorail hoists, hoists, and accessories, including pendant
motors drive a single hoist, carriage, truck, or bridge, they shall be controls, shall be metallically joined together into a continuous
permitted to be controlled by a single controller. electrical conductor so that the entire crane or hoist will be grounded
in accordance with Article 2.50. Moving parts, other than removable
(b) Multiple Motion Controller. One controller shall be permitted accessories or attachments, that have metal-to-metal bearing surfaces
to be switched between motors, provided the following conditions: shall be considered to be electrically connected to each other through
the bearing surfaces for grounding purposes. The trolley frame and
(1) The controller has a horsepower rating that is not lower than bridge frame shall not be considered as electrically grounded through
the horsepower rating of the largest motor. the bridge and trolley wheels and its respective tracks. A separate
(2) Only one motor is operated at one time. bonding conductor shall be provided.

6.10.6.3 Overcurrent Protection. Conductors of control circuits shall

be protected against overcurrent. Control circuits shall be considered
as protected by overcurrent devices that are rated or set at not more
than 300 percent of the ampacity of the control conductors, unless
otherwise permitted in (a) or (b).
 ARTICLE 6.20 — ELEVATORS, DUMBWAITERS, used to drive an electric motor, or the pumping unit used to power
ESCALATORS, MOVING WALKS, WHEELCHAIR hydraulic control equipment.
LIFTS, AND STAIRWAY CHAIR LIFTS
Controller, Operation. The electric device(s) for that part of the
6.20.1 General control system that initiates the starting, stopping, and direction of
motion in response to a signal from an operating device.
6.20.1.1 Scope. This article covers the installation of electrical
equipment and wiring used in connection with elevators, dumbwaiters, Machine Room (for Elevator, Dumbwaiter). An enclosed
escalators, moving walks, wheelchair lifts, and stairway chair lifts. machinery space outside the hoistway, intended for full bodily entry,
that contains the electrical driving machine or the hydraulic machine.
FPN No. 1: For further information, see ASME/ANSI A17.1-2000, Safety Code for The room could also contain electrical and/or mechanical equipment
Elevators and Escalators.
FPN No. 2: For further information, see ASME/ANSI A17.5-1996 (CSA B44.1- used directly in connection with the elevator or dumbwaiter.
1996), Elevator and Escalator Electrical Equipment Certification Standard.
Machinery Space (for Elevator, Dumbwaiter). A space inside or
6.20.1.2 Definitions. outside the hoistway, intended to be accessed with or without full
bodily entry, that contains elevator or dumbwaiter mechanical
Control Room (for Elevator, Dumbwaiter). An enclosed control equipment, and could also contain electrical equipment used directly
space outside the hoistway, intended for full bodily entry, that contains in connection with the elevator or dumbwaiter. This space could also
the elevator motor controller. The room could also contain electrical contain the electric driving machine or the hydraulic machine.
and/or mechanical equipment used directly in connection with the
elevator or dumbwaiter but not the electric driving machine or the Operating Device. The car switch, push buttons, key or toggle
hydraulic machine. switch(s), or other devices used to activate the operation controller.

Control Space (for Elevator, Dumbwaiter). A space inside or Signal Equipment. Includes audible and visual equipment such as
outside the hoistway, intended to be accessed with or without full chimes, gongs, lights, and displays that convey information to the user.
bodily entry, that contains the elevator motor controller. This space
could also contain electrical and/or mechanical equipment used FPN No. 1: The motor controller, motion controller, and operation controller may be
located in a single enclosure or a combination of enclosures.
directly in connection with the elevator or dumbwaiter but not the
electric driving machine or the hydraulic machine. FPN No. 2: Figure 6.20.1.2 is for information only.

Control System. The overall system governing the starting, 6.20.1.3 Voltage Limitations. The supply voltage shall not exceed
stopping, direction of motion, acceleration, speed, and retardation of 300 volts between conductors unless otherwise permitted in (a)
the moving member. through (c).

Controller, Motion. The electric device(s) for that part of the (a) Power Circuits. Branch circuits to door operator controllers and
control system that governs the acceleration, speed, retardation, and door motors and branch circuits and feeders to motor controllers,
stopping of the moving member. driving machine motors, machine brakes, and motor-generator sets
shall not have a circuit voltage in excess of 600 volts. Internal voltages
Controller, Motor. The operative units of the control system of power conversion and functionally associated equipment, including
comprised of the starter device(s) and power conversion equipment the interconnecting wiring, shall be permitted to have higher voltages
provided that all such equipment and wiring shall be listed for the
higher voltages. Where the voltage exceeds 600 volts, warning labels
or signs that read “DANGER — HIGH VOLTAGE” shall be attached
to the equipment and shall be plainly visible.

(b) Lighting Circuits. Lighting circuits shall comply with the

requirements of Article 4.10.

(c) Heating and Air-Conditioning Circuits. Branch circuits for

heating and air-conditioning equipment located on the elevator car
shall not have a circuit voltage in excess of 600 volts.

6.20.1.4 Live Parts Enclosed. All live parts of electrical apparatus in

the hoistways, at the landings, in or on the cars of elevators and
dumbwaiters, in the wellways or the landings of escalators or moving
walks, or in the runways and machinery spaces of wheelchair lifts and
stairway chair lifts shall be enclosed to protect against accidental
contact.

FPN: See 1.10.2.2 for guarding of live parts (600 volts, nominal, or less).

6.20.1.5Working Clearances. Working space shall be provided about

controllers, disconnecting means, and other electrical equipment. The
minimum working space shall not be less than that specified in
1.10.2.1(a).
Where conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that only
licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner
under the supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner will examine,
adjust, service, and maintain the equipment, the clearance
requirements of 1.10.2.1(a) shall be waived as permitted in 6.20.1.5(a)
through 6.20.1.5(d).

(a) Flexible Connections to Equipment. Electrical equipment in

(a)(1) through (a)(4) is provided with flexible leads to all external
connections so that it can be repositioned to meet the clear working
space requirements of 1.10.2.1(a).
Figure 6.20.1.2 Control System
 (1) Controllers and disconnecting means for dumbwaiters, (c) Other Wiring. All conductors in raceways shall have flame-
escalator, moving walks, wheelchair lifts, and stairway chair lifts retardant insulation.
installed in the same space with the driving machine Conductors shall be Type MTW, TF, TFF, TFN, TFFN, THHN,
(2) Controllers and disconnecting means for elevators installed in THW, THWN, TW, XHHW, hoistway cable, or any other conductor
the hoistway or on the car with insulation designated as flame retardant. Shielded conductors
(3) Controllers for door operators shall be permitted, if such conductors are insulated for the maximum
(4) Other electrical equipment installed in the hoistway or on the nominal circuit voltage applied to any conductor within the cable or
car raceway system.

(b) Guards. Live parts of the electrical equipment are suitably (d) Insulation. All conductors shall have an insulation voltage
guarded, isolated, or insulated, and the equipment can be examined, rating equal to at least the maximum nominal circuit voltage applied to
adjusted, serviced, or maintained while energized without removal of any conductor within the enclosure, cable, or raceway. Insulations and
this protection. outer coverings that are marked for limited smoke and are so listed
shall be permitted.
FPN: See definition of Exposed in Article 1.0.
6.20.2.2 Minimum Size of Conductors. The minimum size of
(c) Examination, Adjusting, and Servicing. Electrical equipment conductors, other than conductors that form an integral part of control
is not required to be examined, adjusted, serviced, or maintained while equipment, shall be in accordance with 6.20.2.2(a) and 6.20.2.2(b).
energized.
(a) Traveling Cables.
(d) Low Voltage. Uninsulated parts are at a voltage not greater than
30 volts rms, 42 volts peak, or 60 volts dc. (1) Lighting Circuits. For lighting circuits: Copper 2.0 mm2 (1.6
mm dia.). Copper 0.50 mm2 (0.80 mm dia.) or larger conductors shall
6.20.2 Conductors be permitted in parallel, provided the ampacity is equivalent to at least
that of 2.0 mm2 (1.6 mm dia.) copper.
6.20.2.1 Insulation of Conductors. The insulation of conductors shall (2) Other Circuits. For other circuits, 0.50 mm2 (0.80 mm dia.)
comply with 6.20.2.1(a) through 6.20.2.1(d). copper.
FPN: One method of determining that conductors are flame retardant is by testing
the conductors to the VW-1 (Vertical-Wire) Flame Test inANSI/UL 1581-1991, (b) Other Wiring. 0.20 mm2 (0.50 mm dia.) copper. Smaller size
Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords. listed conductors shall be permitted.

(a) Hoistway Door Interlock Wiring. The conductors to the 6.20.2.3 Feeder and Branch-Circuit Conductors. Conductors shall
hoistway door interlocks from the hoistway riser shall be flame have an ampacity in accordance with 6.20.2.3(a) through 6.20.2.3(d).
retardant and suitable for a temperature of not less than 200ºC. With generator field control, the conductor ampacity shall be based on
Conductors shall be Type SF or equivalent. the nameplate current rating of the driving motor of the motor-
generator set that supplies power to the elevator motor.
(b) Traveling Cables. Traveling cables used as flexible connections
between the elevator or dumbwaiter car or counterweight and the FPN No. 1: The heating of conductors depends on root-mean-square current
values, which, with generator field control, are reflected by the nameplate current
raceway shall be of the types of elevator cable listed in Table 4.0.1.4 rating of the motor-generator driving motor rather than by the rating of the elevator
or other approved types.
 motor, which represents actual but short-time and intermittent full-load current
values.
FPN No. 2: See Figure 6.20.2.3. Single-Line Diagram

(a) Conductors Supplying Single Motor. Conductors supplying a

single motor shall have an ampacity not less than the percentage of
motor nameplate current determined from 4.30.2.2(a) General and
4.30.2.2(e) Other than Continuous Duty.

FPN: Elevator motor currents, or those of similar functions, may exceed the
nameplate value, but since they are inherently intermittent duty, and the heating of
the motor and conductors is dependent on the root-mean-square (rms) current
value, conductors are sized for duty cycle service as shown in Table 4.30.2.2(e).

(b) Conductors Supplying a Single Motor Controller. Conductors

supplying a single motor controller shall have an ampacity not less
than the motor controller nameplate current rating, plus all other
connected loads.

FPN: Motor controller nameplate current rating may be derived based on the rms
value of the motor current using an intermittent duty cycle and other control system
loads, if applicable.

(c) Conductors Supplying a Single Power Transformer.

Conductors supplying a single power transformer shall have an
ampacity not less than the nameplate current rating of the power
transformer plus all other connected loads.

FPN No. 1: The nameplate current rating of a power transformer supplying a motor
controller reflects the nameplate current rating of the motor controller at line voltage
(transformer primary).

FPN No. 2: See Appendix D, Example D17.

(d) Conductors Supplying More than One Motor, Motor

Controller, or Power Transformer. Conductors supplying more than
one motor, motor controller, or power transformer shall have an
ampacity not less than the sum of the nameplate current ratings of the
equipment plus all other connected loads. The ampere ratings of
motors to be used in the summation shall be determined from Table
4.30.2.2(e), and 4.30.2.4 and 4.30.2.4, Exception No. 1. Figure 6.20.2.3 Single -Line Diagram
FPN: See Appendix D, Examples D16 and D17.
6.20.2.4 Feeder Demand Factor. Feeder conductors of less ampacity Type MC, MI, or AC cable unless otherwise permitted in 6.20.3.1(a)
than required by 6.20.2.3 shall be permitted subject to the through 6.20.3.1(c).
requirements of Table 6.20.2.4.
(a) Elevators.
FPN: Demand factors are based on 50 percent duty cycle (i.e., half time on and
half time off).
(1) Hoistways.

a. Flexible metal conduit, liquidtight flexible metal conduit, or

Table 6.20.2.4 Feeder Demand Factors for Elevators
liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit shall be permitted in hoistways
Number of Elevators on a between risers and limit switches, interlocks, operating buttons, and
Demand Factor
Single Feeder similar devices.
1 1.00 b. Cables used in Class 2 power-limited circuits shall be
2 0.95 permitted to be installed between risers and signal equipment and
3 0.90 operating devices provided the cables are supported and protected
4 0.85 from physical damage and are of a jacketed and flame-retardant type.
5 0.82 c. Flexible cords and cables that are components of listed
6 0.79 equipment and used in circuits operating at 30 volts rms or less or
7 0.77 42 volts dc or less shall be permitted in lengths not to exceed 1 800
8 0.75 mm, provided the cords and cables are supported and protected from
9 0.73 physical damage and are of a jacketed and flame-retardant type.
10 or more 0.72 d. Flexible metal conduit, liquidtight flexible metal conduit,
liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit or flexible cords and cables, or
conductors grouped together and taped or corded that are part of listed
6.20.2.5 Motor Controller Rating. The motor controller rating shall equipment, a driving machine, or a driving machine brake shall be
comply with Section 4.30.7.3. The rating shall be permitted to be less permitted in the hoistway, in lengths not to exceed 1 800 mm, without
than the nominal rating of the elevator motor, when the controller being installed in a raceway and where located to be protected from
inherently limits the available power to the motor and is marked as physical damage and are of a flame-retardant type.
power limited.
(2) Cars.
FPN: For controller markings, see 430.8.

6.20.3 Wiring a. Flexible metal conduit, liquidtight flexible metal conduit, or

liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit of 10 mm (12 mm) nominal
6.20.3.1 Wiring Methods. Conductors and optical fibers located in trade size or larger, not exceeding 1 800 mm in length shall be
hoistways, in escalator and moving walk wellways, in wheelchair lifts, permitted on cars where located so as to be free from oil and if
stairway chair lift runways, and machinery spaces, in or on cars, and in securely fastened in place.
machine and control rooms, not including the traveling cables
connecting the car or counterweight and hoistway wiring, shall be Exception: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit of 10 mm (12 mm)
installed in rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit, electrical nominal trade size or larger, as defined by 3.56.1.2(2) shall be
metallic tubing, rigid nonmetallic conduit, or wireways, or shall be permitted in lengths in excess of 1 800 mm.
 b. Hard-service cords and junior hard-service cords that exceeding 1 800 mm in length, such leads shall be permitted to be
conform to the requirements of Article 4.0 (Table 4.0.1.4) shall be extended to connect directly to controller terminal studs without
permitted as flexible connections between the fixed wiring on the car regard to the carrying-capacity requirements of Articles 4.30 and 4.45.
and devices on the car doors or gates. Hard-service cords only shall be Auxiliary gutters shall be permitted in machine and control rooms
permitted as flexible connections for the top-of-car operating device or between controllers, starters, and similar apparatus.
the car-top work light. Devices or fixtures shall be grounded by means c. Flexible cords and cables that are components of listed
of an equipment grounding conductor run with the circuit conductors. equipment and used in circuits operating at 30 volts rms or less or 42
Cables with smaller conductors and other types and thicknesses of volts dc or less shall be permitted in lengths not to exceed 1 800 mm
insulation and jackets shall be permitted as flexible connections provided the cords and cables are supported and protected from
between the fixed wiring on the car and devices on the car doors or physical damage and are of a jacketed and flame-retardant type.
gates, if listed for this use. d. On existing or listed equipment, conductors shall also be
c. Flexible cords and cables that are components of listed permitted to be grouped together and taped or corded without being
equipment and used in circuits operating at 30 volts rms or less or 42 installed in a raceway. Such cable groups shall be supported at
volts dc or less shall be permitted in lengths not to exceed 1 800 mm intervals not over 900 mm and located so as to be protected from
provided the cords and cables are supported and protected from physical damage.
physical damage and are of a jacketed and flame-retardant type.
d. Flexible metal conduit, liquidtight flexible metal conduit, (4) Counterweight. Flexible metal conduit, liquidtight flexible
liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit or flexible cords and cables, or metal conduit, liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit or flexible
conductors grouped together and taped or corded that are part of listed cords and cables, or conductors grouped together and taped or corded
equipment, a driving machine, or a driving machine brake shall be that are part of listed equipment, a driving machine, or a driving
permitted on the car assembly, in lengths not to exceed 1 800 mm machine brake shall be permitted on the counterweight assembly, in
without being installed in a raceway and where located to be protected lengths not to exceed 1 800 mm without being installed in a raceway
from physical damage and are of a flame-retardant type. and where located to be protected from physical damage and are of a
flame-retardant type.
(3) Within Machine Room, Control Rooms, and Machinery
Spaces and Control Spaces. (b) Escalators.

a. Flexible metal conduit, liquidtight flexible metal conduit, or (1) Wiring Methods. Flexible metal conduit, liquidtight flexible
liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit of 10 mm (12 mm) nominal metal conduit, or liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit shall be
trade size or larger, not exceeding 1 800 mm in length, shall be permitted in escalator and moving walk wellways. Flexible metal
permitted between control panels and machine motors, machine conduit or liquidtight flexible conduit of 10 mm (12 mm) nominal
brakes, motor-generator sets, disconnecting means, and pumping unit trade size shall be permitted in lengths not in excess of 1 800 mm.
motors and valves.
Exception: 10 mm (12 mm) nominal trade size or larger liquidtight
Exception: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit, as defined in flexible nonmetallic conduit, as defined in 3.56.1.2(2), shall be
3.56.1.2(2) shall be permitted to be installed in lengths in excess of permitted to be installed in lengths in excess of 1 800 mm.
1 800 mm.
(2) Class 2 Circuit Cables. Cables used in Class 2 power-limited
b. Where motor-generators, machine motors, or pumping unit circuits shall be permitted to be installed within escalators and moving
motors and valves are located adjacent to or underneath control walkways provided the cables are supported and protected from
equipment and are provided with extra-length terminal leads not physical damage and are of a jacketed and flame-retardant type.
 (3) Flexible Cords. Hard-service cords that conform to the the machine room/ machinery space lighting and receptacle(s).
requirements of Article 4.0 (Table 4.0.1.4) shall be permitted as Required lighting shall not be connected to the load side of a
flexible connections on escalators and moving walk control panels and ground-fault circuit interrupter.
disconnecting means where the entire control panel and disconnecting
means are arranged for removal from machine spaces as permitted in (b) Lighting Switch. The machine room lighting switch shall be
6.20.1.5. located at the point of entry to such machine rooms/machinery spaces.

(c) Wheelchair Lifts and Stairway Chair Lift Raceways. (c) Duplex Receptacle. At least one 125-volt and/or 250-volt,
single-phase, duplex receptacle shall be provided in each machine
(1) Wiring Methods. Flexible metal conduit or liquidtight flexible room and machinery space.
metal conduit shall be permitted in wheelchair lifts and stairway chair
lift runways and machinery spaces. Flexible metal conduit or FPN: See Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators, ANSI/ASME A17.1-2000, for
illumination levels.
liquidtight flexible conduit of 10 mm (12 mm) nominal trade size shall
be permitted in lengths not in excess of 1 800 mm.
6.20.3.4 Branch Circuit for Hoistway Pit Lighting and
Receptacles.
Exception: 10 mm (12 mm) nominal trade size or larger liquidtight
flexible nonmetallic conduit, as defined in 3.56.1.2(2), shall be
(a) Separate Branch Circuit. A separate branch circuit shall supply
permitted to be installed in lengths in excess of 1 800 mm.
the hoistway pit lighting and receptacles. Required lighting shall not
be connected to the load side of a ground-fault circuit interrupter.
(2) Class 2 Circuit Cables. Cables used in Class 2 power-limited
circuits shall be permitted to be installed within wheelchair lifts and
(b) Lighting Switch. The lighting switch shall be located so as to
stairway chair lift runways and machinery spaces provided the cables
be readily accessible from the pit access door.
are supported and protected from physical damage and are of a
jacketed and flame-retardant type.
(c) Duplex Receptacle. At least one 125-volt and/or 250-volt,
single-phase, duplex receptacle shall be provided in the hoistway pit.
6.20.3.2 Branch Circuits for Car Lighting, Receptacle(s),
Ventilation, Heating, and Air Conditioning. FPN: See Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators, ANSI/ASME A17.1-2000, for
illumination levels.
(a) Car Light Source. A separate branch circuit shall supply the car
lights, receptacle(s), auxiliary lighting power source, and ventilation 6.20.3.5. Branch Circuit for Other Utilization Equipment.
on each elevator car. The overcurrent device protecting the branch
circuit shall be located in the elevator machine room/machinery space. (a) Additional Branch Circuits. Additional branch circuit(s)shall
(b) Air-Conditioning and Heating Source. A dedicated branch supply utilization equipment not identified in 6.20.3.2, 6.20.3.3, and
circuit shall supply the air-conditioning and heating units on each 6.20.3.4. Other utilization equipment shall be restricted to that
elevator car. The overcurrent device protecting the branch circuit shall equipment identified in 6.20.1.1.
be located in the elevator machine room/machinery space.
(b) Overcurrent Devices. The overcurrent devices protecting the
6.20.3.3 Branch Circuit for Machine Room/Machinery Space branch circuit(s) shall be located in the elevator machinery room or
Lighting and Receptacle(s). control room/machinery space or control space.

(a) Separate Branch Circuit. A separate branch circuit shall supply

 6.20.4 Installation of Conductors 6.20.4.6 Wiring in Hoistways and Machine Rooms.

6.20.4.1 Metal Wireways and Nonmetallic Wireways. The sum of (a) Uses Permitted. Only such electric wiring, raceways, and cables
the cross-sectional area of the individual conductors in a wireway shall used directly in connection with the elevator or dumbwaiter, including
not be more than 50 percent of the interior cross-sectional area of the wiring for signals; for communication with the car; for lighting,
wireway. heating, air conditioning, and ventilating the elevator car; for fire
Vertical runs of wireways shall be securely supported at intervals not detecting systems; for pit sump pumps; and for heating, lighting, and
exceeding 4 500 mm and shall have not more than one joint between ventilating the hoistway, shall be permitted inside the hoistway and the
supports. Adjoining wireway sections shall be securely fastened machine room.
together to provide a rigid joint.
(b) Lightning Protection. Bonding of elevator rails (car and/or
6.20.4.2 Number of Conductors in Raceways. The sum of the cross- counterweight) to a lightning protection system grounding down
sectional area of the individual conductors in raceways shall not conductor(s), shall be permitted. The lightning protection system
exceed 40 percent of the interior cross-sectional area of the raceway, grounding down conductor(s) shall not be located within the hoistway.
except as permitted in6.20.4.1 for wireways. Elevator rails or other hoistway equipment shall not be used as the
grounding down conductor for lightning protection systems.
6.20.4.3 Supports. Supports for cables or raceways in a hoistway or in
an escalator or moving walk wellway or wheelchair lift and stairway FPN: See Section 2.50.5.17 for bonding requirements. For further information, see
Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems, NFPA 780-2004.
chair lift runway shall be securely fastened to the guide rail; escalator
or moving walk truss; or to the hoistway, wellway, or runway
(c) Main Feeders. Main feeders for supplying power to elevators
construction.
and dumbwaiters shall be installed outside the hoistway unless as
follows.
6.20.4.4 Auxiliary Gutters. Auxiliary gutters shall not be subject to
the restrictions of 3.66.2.3(2) as to length or of 3.66.2.13 as to number
(1) By special permission, feeders for elevators shall be permitted
of conductors.
within an existing hoistway if no conductors are spliced within the
hoistway.
6.20.4.5 Different Systems in One Raceway or Traveling Cable.
(2) Feeders shall be permitted inside the hoistway for elevators
Optical fiber cables and conductors for operating devices, operation
with driving machine motors located in the hoistway or on the car or
and motion control, power, signaling, fire alarm, lighting, heating, and
counterweight.
air-conditioning circuits of 600 volts or less shall be permitted to be
run in the same traveling cable or raceway system if all conductors are
6.20.4.7 Electrical Equipment in Garages and Similar
insulated for the maximum voltage applied to any conductor within the
Occupancies. Electrical equipment and wiring used for elevators,
cables or raceway system and if all live parts of the equipment are
dumbwaiters, escalators, moving walks, and wheelchair lifts and
insulated from ground for this maximum voltage. Such a traveling
stairway chair lifts in garages shall comply with the requirements of
cable or raceway shall also be permitted to include shielded
Article 5.11.
conductors and/or one or more coaxial cables, if such conductors are
insulated for the maximum voltage applied to any conductor within the FPN: Garages used for parking or storage and where no repair work is done in
cable or raceway system. Conductors shall be permitted to be covered accordance with 5.11.1.3 are not classified.
with suitable shielding for telephone, audio, video, or higher frequency
communications circuits.
 6.20.5 Traveling Cables connections, as fixed wiring, provided they are suitably supported and
protected from physical damage.
6.20.5.1 Suspension of Traveling Cables. Traveling cables shall be
suspended at the car and hoistways’ ends, or counterweight end where 6.20.6 Disconnecting Means and Control
applicable, so as to reduce the strain on the individual copper
conductors to a minimum. 6.20.6.1 Disconnecting Means. A single means for disconnecting all
ungrounded main power supply conductors for each unit shall be
Traveling cables shall be supported by one of the following means: provided and be designed so that no pole can be operated
independently. Where multiple driving machines are connected to a
(1) By its steel supporting member(s) single elevator, escalator, moving walk, or pumping unit, there shall be
(2) By looping the cables around supports for unsupported lengths one disconnecting means to disconnect the motor(s) and control valve
less than 30 m operating magnets.
(3) By suspending from the supports by a means that automatically The disconnecting means for the main power supply conductors shall
tightens around the cable when tension is increased for unsupported not disconnect the branch circuit required in 6.20.3.2, 6.20.3.3, and
lengths up to 60 m. 6.20.3.4.

FPN: Unsupported length for the hoistway suspension means is that length of (a) Type. The disconnecting means shall be an enclosed externally
cable as measured from the point of suspension in the hoistway to the bottom of
the loop, with the elevator car located at the bottom landing. Unsupported length operable fused motor circuit switch or circuit breaker capable of being
for the car suspension means is that length of cable as measured from the point of locked in the open position. The disconnecting means shall be a listed
suspension on the car to the bottom of the loop, with the elevator car located at the
top landing.
device.

FPN: For additional information, see Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators,
6.20.5.2 Hazardous (Classified) Locations. In hazardous (classified) ASME/ANSI A17.1-2000.
locations, traveling cables shall be of a type approved for hazardous
(classified) locations and shall comply with 5.1.3.41, 5.2.3.41, or Exception: Where an individual branch circuit supplies a wheelchair
5.3.3.41, as applicable. lift, the disconnecting means required by 6.20.6.1(c)(4) shall be
permitted to comply with 4.30.9.9(c). This disconnecting means shall
6.20.5.3 Location of and Protection for Cables. Traveling cable be listed and shall be capable of being locked in the open position.
supports shall be located so as to reduce to a minimum the possibility
of damage due to the cables coming in contact with the hoistway (b) Operation. No provision shall be made to open or close this
construction or equipment in the hoistway. Where necessary, suitable disconnecting means from any other part of the premises. If sprinklers
guards shall be provided to protect the cables against damage. are installed in hoistways, machine rooms, or machinery spaces, the
disconnecting means shall be permitted to automatically open the
6.20.5.4 Installation of Traveling Cables. Traveling cable shall be power supply to the affected elevator(s) prior to the application of
permitted to be run without the use of a raceway for a distance not water. No provision shall be made to automatically close this
exceeding 1 800 mm in length as measured from the first point of disconnecting means. Power shall only be restored by manual means.
support on the elevator car or hoistway wall, or counterweight where
applicable, provided the conductors are grouped together and taped or FPN: To reduce hazards associated with water on live elevator electrical
equipment.
corded, or in the original sheath.
Traveling cables shall be permitted to be continued to elevator
(c) Location. The disconnecting means shall be located where it is
controller enclosures and to elevator car and machine room
readily accessible to licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed
electrical practitioner under the supervision of a licensed electrical 6.20.6.2 Power from More than One Source.
practitioner.
(a) Single-car and Multicar Installations. On single-car and
(1) On Elevators Without Generator Field Control. On multicar installations, equipment receiving electrical power from more
elevators without generator field control, the disconnecting means than one source shall be provided with a disconnecting means for each
shall be located within sight of the motor controller. Driving machines source of electrical power. The disconnecting means shall be within
or motion and operation controllers not within sight of the sight of the equipment served.
disconnecting means shall be provided with a manually operated
switch installed in the control circuit to prevent starting. The manually (b) Warning Sign for Multiple Disconnecting Means. Where
operated switch(s) shall be installed adjacent to this equipment. multiple disconnecting means are used and parts of the controllers
Where the driving machine is located in a remote machinery remain energized from a source other than the one disconnected, a
space, a single means for disconnecting all ungrounded main power warning sign shall be mounted on or next to the disconnecting means.
supply conductors shall be provided and be capable of being locked in The sign shall be clearly legible and shall read
the open position.
(2) On Elevators with Generator Field Control. On elevators WARNING — PARTS OF THE CONTROLLER ARE
with generator field control, the disconnecting means shall be located NOT DE-ENERGIZED BY THIS SWITCH
within sight of the motor controller for the driving motor of the motor-
generator set. Driving machines, motor-generator sets, or motion and (c) Interconnection Multicar Controllers. Where interconnections
operation controllers not within sight of the disconnecting means shall between controllers are necessary for the operation of the system on
be provided with a manually operated switch installed in the control multicar installations that remain energized from a source other than
circuit to prevent starting. The manually operated switch(s) shall be the one disconnected, a warning sign in accordance with 6.20.6.2(b)
installed adjacent to this equipment. shall be mounted on or next to the disconnecting means.
Where the driving machine or the motor-generator set is located in
a remote machinery space, a single means for disconnecting all 6.20.6.3 CarLight, Receptacle(s), and Ventilation Disconnecting
ungrounded main power supply conductors, shall be provided and be Means. Elevators shall have a single means for disconnecting all
capable of being locked in the open position. ungrounded car light, receptacle(s), and ventilation power-supply
(3) On Escalators and Moving Walks. On escalators and moving conductors for that elevator car.
walks, the disconnecting means shall be installed in the space where The disconnecting means shall be an enclosed externally operable
the controller is located. fused motor circuit switch or circuit breaker capable of being locked in
(4) On Wheelchair Lifts and Stairway Chair Lifts. On the open position and shall be located in the machine room for that
wheelchair lifts and stairway chair lifts, the disconnecting means shall elevator car. Where there is no machine room or control room, the
be located within sight of the motor controller. disconnecting means shall be located in the same space as the
disconnecting means required by 6.20.6.1.
(d) Identification and Signs. Where there is more than one driving The disconnecting means shall be numbered to correspond to the
machine in a machine room, the disconnecting means shall be identifying number of the elevator car whose light source they control.
numbered to correspond to the identifying number of the driving The disconnecting means shall be provided with a sign to identify the
machine that they control. location of the supply side overcurrent protective device.
The disconnecting means shall be provided with a sign to identify
the location of the supply side overcurrent protective device. 6.20.6.4 Heating and Air-Conditioning Disconnecting Means.
Elevators shall have a single means for disconnecting all ungrounded
car heating and air-conditioning power-supply conductors for that
elevator car. (1) Duty on elevator and dumbwaiter driving machine motors and
driving motors of motor-generators used with generator field control
The disconnecting means shall be an enclosed externally operable shall be rated as intermittent. Such motors shall be protected against
fused motor circuit switch or circuit breaker capable of being locked in overload in accordance with 4.30.3.3.
the open position and shall be located in the machine room for that (2) Duty on escalator and moving walk driving machine motors
elevator car. Where there is no machine room or control room, the shall be rated as continuous. Such motors shall be protected against
disconnecting means shall be located in the same space as the overload in accordance with 4.30.3.2.
disconnecting means required by 6.20.6.1. (3) Escalator and moving walk driving machine motors and
Where there is equipment for more than one elevator car in the driving motors of motor-generator sets shall be protected against
machine room, the disconnecting means shall be numbered to running overload as provided in Table 4.30.3.7.
correspond to the identifying number of the elevator car whose heating (4) Duty on wheelchair lift and stairway chair lift driving machine
and air conditioning source they control. motors shall be rated as intermittent. Such motors shall be protected
The disconnecting means shall be provided with a sign to identify the against overload in accordance with 4.30.3.3.
location of the supply side overcurrent protective device.
FPN: For further information, see Section 4.30.3.4 for orderly shutdown.
6.20.6.5. Utilization Equipment Disconnecting Means. Each branch
circuit for other utilization equipment shall have a single means for (c) Motor Feeder Short-Circuit and Ground-Fault Protection.
disconnecting all ungrounded conductors. The disconnecting means Motor feeder short-circuit and ground-fault protection shall be as
shall be capable of being locked in the open position and shall be required in Part 4.30.5.
located in the machine room or control room/machine space or control
space. Where there is more than one branch circuit for other utilization (d) Motor Branch-Circuit Short-Circuit and Ground-Fault
equipment, the disconnecting means shall be numbered to correspond Protection. Motor branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault
to the identifying number of the equipment served. The disconnecting protection shall be as required in Part 4.30.4.
means shall be provided with a sign to identify the location of the
supply side overcurrent protective device. 6.20.7.2 Selective Coordination. Where more than one driving
machine disconnecting means is supplied by a single feeder, the
6.20.7 Overcurrent Protection overcurrent protective devices in each disconnecting means shall be
selectively coordinated with any other supply side overcurrent
6.20.7.1 Overcurrent Protection. Overcurrent protection shall be protective devices.
provided as follows.
6.20.8 Machine Room
(a) Operating Devices, Control, and Signaling Circuits.
Operating devices, control and signaling circuits shall be protected 6.20.8.1 Guarding Equipment. Elevator, dumbwaiter, escalator, and
against overcurrent in accordance with the requirements of Sections moving walk driving machines; motor-generator sets; motor
7.25.2.3 and 7.25.2.4. controllers; and disconnecting means shall be installed in a room or
Class 2 power-limited circuits shall be protected against overcurrent enclosure set aside for that purpose unless otherwise permitted in (a)
in accordance with the requirements Notes to Tables 11(a) and 11(b). or (b). The room or enclosure shall be secured against unauthorized
access.
(b) Overload Protection for Motors. Motor and branch-circuit
overload protection shall conform to Part 4.30.3. (a) Motor Controllers. Motor controllers shall be permitted outside
the spaces herein specified, provided they are in enclosures with doors
or removable panels that are capable of being locked in the closed A single receptacle supplying a permanently installed sump pump
position and the disconnecting means is located adjacent to or is an shall not require ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection.
integral part of the motor controller. Motor controller enclosures for
escalator or moving walks shall be permitted in the balustrade on the 6.20.10 Emergency and Standby Power Systems
side located away from the moving steps or moving treadway. If the
disconnecting means is an integral part of the motor controller, it shall 6.20.10.1 Emergency and Standby Power Systems. An elevator(s)
be operable without opening the enclosure. shall be permitted to be powered by an emergency or standby power
system.
(b) Driving Machines. Elevators with driving machines located on
the car, counterweight, or in the hoistway, and driving machines for FPN: See ASME/ANSI A17.1-2000, Rule 2.27.2, and CAN/CSA-B44-1994, Clause
3.12.13, for additional information.
dumbwaiters, wheelchair lifts, and stairway lifts shall be permitted
outside the spaces herein specified.
(a) Regenerative Power. For elevator systems that regenerate
power back into the power source, which is unable to absorb the
6.20.9 Grounding
regenerative power under overhauling elevator load conditions, a
means shall be provided to absorb this power.
6.20.9.1 Metal Raceways Attached to Cars. Metal raceways, Type
MC cable, Type MI cable, or Type AC cable attached to elevator cars
(b) Other Building Loads. Other building loads, such as power and
shall be bonded to grounded metal parts of the car that they contact.
lighting shall be permitted as the energy absorption means required in
(a) provided that such loads are automatically connected to the
6.20.9.2 Electric Elevators. For electric elevators, the frames of all
emergency or standby power system operating the elevators and are
motors, elevator machines, controllers, and the metal enclosures for all
large enough to absorb the elevator regenerative power.
electrical equipment in or on the car or in the hoistway shall be
grounded in accordance with Article 2.50.
(c) Disconnecting Means. The disconnecting means required by
6.20.6.1 shall disconnect the elevator from both the emergency or
6.20.9.3 Nonelectric Elevators. For elevators other than electric
standby power system and the normal power system.
having any electric conductors attached to the car, the metal frame of
Where an additional power source is connected to the load side of
the car, where normally accessible to persons, shall be grounded in
the disconnecting means, the disconnecting means required in 6.20.6.1
accordance with Article 2.50.
shall be provided with an auxiliary contact that is positively opened
mechanically and the opening shall not be solely dependent on
6.20.9.4 Escalators, Moving Walks, Wheelchair Lifts, and
springs. This contact shall cause the additional power source to be
Stairway Chair Lifts. Escalators, moving walks, wheelchair lifts, and
disconnected from its load when the disconnecting means is in the
stairway chair lifts shall comply with Article 250.
open position.
6.20.9.5 Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection for
Personnel. Each 125-volt and/or 250-volt, single-phase, 15- and 20-
ARTICLE 6.25 — ELECTRIC VEHICLE
ampere receptacle installed in pits, in hoistways, on elevator car tops,
CHARGING SYSTEM
and in escalator and moving walk wellways shall be of the ground-
fault circuit-interrupter type.
6.25.1 General
All 125-volt and/or 250-volt, single-phase, 15- and 20-ampere
receptacles installed in machine rooms and machinery spaces shall
6.25.1.1 Scope. The provisions of this article cover the electrical
have ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection for personnel.
conductors and equipment external to an electric vehicle that connect electric vehicle connectors, attachment plugs, and all other fittings,
an electric vehicle to a supply of electricity by conductive or inductive devices, power outlets, or apparatuses installed specifically for the
means, and the installation of equipment and devices related to electric purpose of delivering energy from the premises wiring to the electric
vehicle charging. vehicle.

FPN: For industrial trucks, see Fire Safety Standard for Powered Industrial Trucks Personnel Protection System. A system of personnel protection
Including Type Designations, Areas of Use, Conversions, Maintenance, and
Operation, NFPA 505-2002. devices and constructional features that when used together provide
protection against electric shock of personnel.
6.25.1.2 Definitions.
6.25.1.3 Other Articles. Wherever the requirements of other articles
Electric Vehicle. An automotive-type vehicle for highway use, such of this Code and Article 6.25 differ, the requirements of Article 6.25
as passenger automobiles, buses, trucks, vans, and the like, primarily shall apply.
powered by an electric motor that draws current from a rechargeable
storage battery, fuel cell, photovoltaic array, or other source of electric 6.25.1.4 Voltages. Unless other voltages are specified, the nominal ac
current. For the purpose of this article, electric motorcycles and system voltages of 120, 120/240, 208Y/120, 240, 480Y/277, 480,
similar type vehicles and off-road self-propelled electric vehicles, such 600Y/347, and 600 volts shall be used to supply equipment covered by
as industrial trucks, hoists, lifts, transports, golf carts, airline ground this article.
support equipment, tractors, boats, and the like, are not included.
6.25.1.5 Listed or Labeled. All electrical materials, devices, fittings,
Electric Vehicle Connector. A device that by insertion into an and associated equipment shall be listed or labeled.
electric vehicle inlet, establishes an electrical connection to the electric
vehicle for the purpose of charging and information exchange. This is 6.25.2 Wiring Methods
part of the electric vehicle coupler.
6.25.2.1 Electric Vehicle Coupler. The electric vehicle coupler shall
Electric Vehicle Coupler. A mating electric vehicle inlet and comply with 6.25.2.1(a) through 6.25.2.1(f).
electric vehicle connector set.
(a) Polarization. The electric vehicle coupler shall be polarized
Electric Vehicle Inlet. The device on the electric vehicle into which unless part of a system identified and listed as suitable for the purpose.
the electric vehicle connector is inserted for charging and information
exchange. This is part of the electric vehicle coupler. For the purposes (b) Noninterchangeability. The electric vehicle coupler shall have
of this Code, the electric vehicle inlet is considered to be part of the a configuration that is noninterchangeable with wiring devices in other
electric vehicle and not part of the electric vehicle supply equipment. electrical systems. Nongrounding-type electric vehicle couplers shall
not be interchangeable with grounding-type electric vehicle couplers.
Electric Vehicle Nonvented Storage Battery. A hermetically-
sealed battery comprised of one or more rechargeable electrochemical (c) Construction and Installation. The electric vehicle coupler
cells that has no provision for release of excessive gas pressure, or the shall be constructed and installed so as to guard against inadvertent
addition of water or electrolyte, or for external measurements of contact by persons with parts made live from the electric vehicle
electrolyte specific gravity. supply equipment or the electric vehicle battery.

Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment. The conductors, including the (d) Unintentional Disconnection. The electric vehicle coupler shall
ungrounded, grounded, and equipment grounding conductors and the be provided with a positive means to prevent unintentional
disconnection.
(c) Ventilation Required. Where marking is required by
(e) Grounding Pole. The electric vehicle coupler shall be provided 6.25.5.2(d), the electric vehicle supply equipment shall be clearly
with a grounding pole, unless part of a system identified and listed as marked by the manufacturer “Ventilation Required.” The marking
suitable for the purpose in accordance with Article 2.50. shall be located so as to be clearly visible after installation.

(f) Grounding Pole Requirements. If a grounding pole is provided, 6.25.3.4 Means of Coupling. The means of coupling to the electric
the electric vehicle coupler shall be designed so that the grounding vehicle shall be either conductive or inductive. Attachment plugs,
pole connection is the first to make and the last to break contact. electric vehicle connectors, and electric vehicle inlets shall be listed or
labeled for the purpose.
6.25.3 Equipment Construction
6.25.3.5 Cable. The electric vehicle supply equipment cable shall be
6.25.3.1 Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment. Electric vehicle supply Type EV, EVJ, EVE, EVJE, EVT, or EVJT flexible cable as specified
equipment rated at 250-volt, single phase, 15 or 20 amperes or part of in Article 4.0 and Table 4.0.1.4. Ampacities shall be as specified in
a system identified and listed as suitable for the purpose and meeting Table 4.0.1.5(a) for 5.5 mm2 (2.6 mm dia.) and smaller and Table
the requirements of 6.25.3.6, 6.25.3.7, and 6.25.5.2 shall be permitted 4.0.1.5(b) for 8.0 mm2 (3.2 mm dia.) and larger. The overall length of
to be cord and plug connected. All other electric vehicle supply the cable shall not exceed 7 600 mm. Other cable types and assemblies
equipment shall be permanently connected and fastened in place. This listed as being suitable for the purpose, including optional hybrid
equipment shall have no exposed live parts. communications, signal, and optical fiber cables, shall be permitted.

6.25.3.2 Rating. Electric vehicle supply equipment shall have 6.25.3.6 Interlock. Electric vehicle supply equipment shall be
sufficient rating to supply the load served. For the purposes of this provided with an interlock that de-energizes the electric vehicle
article, electric vehicle charging loads shall be considered to be connector and its cable whenever the electric connector is uncoupled
continuous loads. from the electric vehicle. An interlock shall not be required for
portable cord- and plug-connected electric vehicle supply equipment
6.25.3.3 Markings. The electric vehicle supply equipment shall intended for connection to receptacle outlets rated 125-volts and/or
comply with (a) through (c). 250-volts, single phase, 15 and 20 amperes.

(a) General. All electric vehicle supply equipment shall be marked 6.25.3.7 Automatic De-energization of Cable. The electric vehicle
by the manufacturer supply equipment or the cable-connector combination of the
equipment shall be provided with an automatic means to de-energize
FOR USE WITH ELECTRIC VEHICLES the cable conductors and electric vehicle connector upon exposure to
strain that could result in either cable rupture or separation of the cable
(b) Ventilation Not Required. Where marking is required by from the electric connector and exposure of live parts. Automatic
6.25.5.2(c), the electric vehicle supply equipment shall be clearly means to de-energize the cable conductors and electric vehicle
marked by the manufacturer. connector shall not be required for portable cord- and plug-connected
electric vehicle supply equipment intended for connection to
VENTILATION NOT REQUIRED receptacle outlets rated at 125-volt and/or 250-volt, single phase, 15
and 20 amperes.
The marking shall be located so as to be clearly visible after
installation.
 6.25.4 Control and Protection 6.25.5 Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment Locations

6.25.4.1 Overcurrent Protection. Overcurrent protection for feeders 6.25.5.1 Hazardous (Classified) Locations. Where electric vehicle
and branch circuits supplying electric vehicle supply equipment shall supply equipment or wiring is installed in a hazardous (classified)
be sized for continuous duty and shall have a rating of not less than location, the requirements of Articles 5.0 through 5.16 shall apply.
125 percent of the maximum load of the electric vehicle supply
equipment. Where noncontinuous loads are supplied from the same 6.25.5.2 Indoor Sites. Indoor sites shall include, but not be limited to,
feeder or branch circuit, the overcurrent device shall have a rating of integral, attached, and detached residential garages; enclosed and
not less than the sum of the noncontinuous loads plus 125 percent of underground parking structures; repair and nonrepair commercial
the continuous loads. garages; and agricultural buildings.

6.25.4.2 Personnel Protection System. The electric vehicle supply (a) Location. The electric vehicle supply equipment shall be
equipment shall have a listed system of protection against electric located to permit direct connection to the electric vehicle.
shock of personnel. The personnel protection system shall be
composed of listed personnel protection devices and constructional (b) Height. Unless specifically listed for the purpose and location,
features. Where cord- and plug-connected electric vehicle supply the coupling means of the electric vehicle supply equipment shall be
equipment is used, the interrupting device of a listed personnel stored or located at a height of not less than 450 mm and not more
protection system shall be provided and shall be an integral part of the than 1 200 mm above the floor level.
attachment plug or shall be located in the power supply cable not more
than 300 mm from the attachment plug. (c) Ventilation Not Required. Where electric vehicle nonvented
storage batteries are used or where the electric vehicle supply
6.25.4.3 Disconnecting Means. For electric vehicle supply equipment equipment is listed or labeled as suitable for charging electric vehicles
rated more than 60 amperes or more than 150 volts to ground, the indoors without ventilation and marked in accordance with
disconnecting means shall be provided and installed in a readily 6.25.3.3(b), mechanical ventilation shall not be required.
accessible location. The disconnecting means shall be capable of being
locked in the open position. (d) Ventilation Required. Where the electric vehicle supply
equipment is listed or labeled as suitable for charging electric vehicles
6.25.4.5 Loss of Primary Source. Means shall be provided such that that require ventilation for indoor charging and marked in accordance
upon loss of voltage from the utility or other electric system(s), energy with 6.25.3.3(c), mechanical ventilation, such as a fan, shall be
cannot be backfed through the electric vehicle supply equipment to the provided. The ventilation shall include both supply and exhaust
premises wiring system unless permitted by 6.25.4.6. equipment and shall be permanently installed and located to intake
from, and vent directly to, the outdoors. Positive pressure ventilation
6.25.4.6 Interactive Systems. Electric vehicle supply equipment and systems shall only be permitted in buildings or areas that have been
other parts of a system, either on-board or off-board the vehicle, that specifically designed and approved for that application. Mechanical
are identified for and intended to standby system or an electric power ventilation requirements shall be determined by one of the methods
production source or provide for bi-directional power feed shall be specified in 6.25.5.2(d)(1) through (d)(4).
listed as suit-system, the requirements of Article 702 shall apply, and
when used as an electric power production source, the requirements of (1) Table Values. For supply voltages and currents specified in
Article 7.5 shall apply. Table 6.25.5.2(d)(1) or Table 6.25.5.2(d)(2), the minimum ventilation
requirements shall be specified in Table 6.25.5.2(d)(1) or
6.25.5.2(d)(2) for each of the total number of electric vehicles that can Table 6.25.5.2(d)(1) Minimum Ventilation Required in
be charged at one time. Cubic Metres per Minute(m3/min) for Each of the Total
(2) Other Values. For supply voltages and currents other than Number of Electric Vehicles that Can Be Charged at One Time
specified in Table 6.25.5.2(d)(1) or Table 6.25.5.2(d)(2), the minimum Branch-
ventilation requirements shall be calculated by means of the following Circuit
general formulas as applicable: Branch-Circuit Voltage
Ampere
Rating
a. Single phase: Single Phase Three Phase
230 V or 230 V or 460 V or
Ventilation single phase in cubic meters per minute (m3/min) 115 V
115/230 V 230Y/133 V 460Y/266 V
15 1.004 2.008 — —
(volts)(amperes) 20 1.338 2.677 4.636 9.273
= —————————— 30 2.008 4.015 6.954 13.909
1 718 40 2.677 5.354 9.273 18.545
50 3.346 6.692 11.591 23.181
b. Three phase: 60 4.015 8.030 13.909 27.818
100 6.692 13.284 23.181 46.363
Ventilation three phase in cubic meters per minute (m3/min) 150 — — 34.772 69.544
200 — — 46.363 92.725
1.732 (volts)(amperes) 250 — — 57.953 115.907
= —————————— 300 — — 69.544 139.088
1 718 350 — — 81.135 162.270
400 — — 92.725 185.451
(3) Engineered System. For an electric vehicle supply equipment
ventilation system designed by a person qualified to perform such
calculations as an integral part of a building’s total ventilation system,
the minimum ventilation requirements shall be permitted to be 6.25.5.3 Outdoor Sites. Outdoor sites shall include, but not be limited
determined per calculations specified in the engineering study. to, residential carports and driveways, curbside, open parking
(4) Supply Circuits. The supply circuit to the mechanical structures, parking lots, and commercial charging facilities.
ventilation equipment shall be electrically interlocked with the electric
vehicle supply equipment and shall remain energized during the entire (a) Location. The electric vehicle supply equipment shall be located
electric vehicle charging cycle. Electric vehicle supply equipment to permit direct connection to the electric vehicle.
shall be marked in accordance with 6.25.3.3. Electric vehicle supply (b) Height. Unless specifically listed for the purpose and location, the
equipment receptacles rated at 125-volt and/or 250-volt, single phase, coupling means of electric vehicle supply equipment shall be stored or
15 and 20 amperes shall be marked in accordance with 6.25.3.3(c) and located at a height of not less than 600 mm and not more than 1 200
shall be switched and the mechanical ventilation system shall be mm above the parking surface.
electrically interlocked through the switch supply power to the
receptacle.
 Table 6.25.5.2(d)(2) Minimum Ventilation Required in (a) Individual Welders. The ampacity of the supply conductors
Cubic Feet per Minute (cfm) for Each of the Total shall not be less than the I1eff value on the rating plate. Alternatively, if
Number of Electric Vehicles that Can Be Charged at One Time the I1eff is not given, the ampacity of the supply conductors shall not be
Branch- less than the current value determined by multiplying the rated
Circuit primary current in amperes given on the welder rating plate by the
Branch-Circuit Voltage factor shown in Table 6.30.2.1(a) based on the duty cycle of the
Ampere
Rating welder.
Single Phase Three Phase (b) Group of Welders. Minimum conductor ampacity shall be
230 V or 230 V or 460 V or based on the individual currents determined in 6.30.2.1(a) as the sum
115 V of 100 percent of the two largest welders, plus 85 percent of the third
115/230 V 230Y/133 V 460Y/266 V
15 35.421 70.842 — — largest welder, plus 70 percent of the fourth largest welder, plus 60
20 47.228 94.456 163.602 327.205 percent of all remaining welders.
30 70.842 141.684 245.404 490.807
40 94.456 188.912 327.205 654.409 Exception: Percentage values lower than those given in 6.30.2.1(b)
50 118.070 236.140 409.006 818.012 shall be permitted in cases where the work is such that a high-
60 141.684 283.368 490.807 981.614 operating duty cycle for individual welders is impossible.
100 236.140 472.279 818.012 1636.023
FPN: Duty cycle considers welder loading based on the use to be made of each
150 — — 1227.018 2454.035 welder and the number of welders supplied by the conductors that will be in use at
200 — — 1636.023 3272.047 the same time. The load value used for each welder considers both the magnitude
250 — — 2045.029 4090.058 and the duration of the load while the welder is in use.

300 — — 69.544 139.088

350 — — 81.135 162.270
400 — — 92.725 185.451 Table 6.30.2.1(a) Duty Cycle Multiplication
Factors for Arc Welders
Duty Cycle Multiplier for Arc Welders
Nonmotor
Motor Generator
ARTICLE 6.30 — ELECTRIC WELDERS Generator
100 1.00 1.00
6.30.1 General 90 0.95 0.96
80 0.89 0.91
6.30.1.1 Scope. This article covers apparatus for electric arc welding, 70 0.84 0.86
resistance welding, plasma cutting, and other similar welding and 60 0.78 0.81
cutting process equipment that is connected to an electric supply 50 0.71 0.75
system. 40 0.63 0.69
30 0.55 0.62
6.30.2 Arc Welders 20 or less 0.45 0.55

6.30.2.1 Ampacity of Supply Conductors. The ampacity of

conductors for arc welders shall be in accordance with 6.30.2.1(a) and 6.30.2.2 Overcurrent Protection. Overcurrent protection for arc
6.30.2.1(b). welders shall be as provided in 6.30.2.2(a) and 6.30.2.2(b). Where the
values as determined by this section do not correspond with the
standard ampere ratings provided in 2.40.1.6 or the rating or setting (3) Number of phases
specified results in unnecessary opening of the overcurrent device, the (4) Primary voltage
next higher standard rating or setting shall be permitted. (5) I1max and I1eff , or rated primary current
(6) Maximum open-circuit voltage
(a) For Welders. Each welder shall have overcurrent protection (7) Rated secondary current and
rated or set at not more than 200 percent of I1max. Alternatively, if the (8) Basis of rating, such as the duty cycle
I1max is not given, the overcurrent protection shall be rated or set at not
more than 200 percent of the rated primary current of the welder. 6.30.2.5 Grounding of Welder Secondary Circuit. The secondary
An overcurrent device shall not be required for a welder that has circuit conductors of an arc welder, consisting of the electrode
supply conductors protected by an overcurrent device rated or set at conductor and the work conductor, shall not be considered as premises
not more than 200 percent of I1max or the rated primary current of the wiring for the purpose of applying Article 2.50.
welder.
If the supply conductors for a welder are protected by an overcurrent FPN: Connecting welder secondary circuits to grounded objects can create parallel
paths and can cause objectionable current over equipment grounding conductors.
device rated or set at not more than 200 percent of Imax or rated
primary current of the welder, a separate overcurrent device shall not
6.30.3 Resistance Welders
be required.
6.30.3.1 Ampacity of Supply Conductors. The ampacity of the
(b) For Conductors. Conductors that supply one or more welders
supply conductors for resistance welders necessary to limit the voltage
shall be protected by an overcurrent device rated or set at not more
drop to a value permissible for the satisfactory performance of the
than 200 percent of the conductor rating.
welder is usually greater than that required to prevent overheating as
FPN: I1max is the maximum value of the rated supply current at maximum rated
described in 6.30.3.1(a) and 6.30.3.1(b).
output.I1eff is the maximum value of the effective supply current, calculated from the
rated supply current (I1), the corresponding duty cycle (duty factor) (X), and the (a) Individual Welders. The rated ampacity for conductors for
supply current at no-load (I0) by the following formula.
individual welders shall comply with the following.

(1) The ampacity of the supply conductors for a welder that may
Ileff = I21X+ I0(1-X)
be operated at different times at different values of primary current or
duty cycle shall not be less than 70 percent of the rated primary
current for seam and automatically fed welders, and 50 percent of the
6.30.2.3 Disconnecting Means. A disconnecting means shall be
rated primary current for manually operated nonautomatic welders.
provided in the supply circuit for each arc welder that is not equipped
(2) The ampacity of the supply conductors for a welder wired for a
with a disconnect mounted as an integral part of the welder.
specific operation for which the actual primary current and duty cycle
The disconnecting means shall be a switch or circuit breaker, and its
are known and remain unchanged shall not be less than the product of
rating shall not be less than that necessary to accommodate
the actual primary current and the multiplier specified in Table
overcurrent protection as specified under 6.30.2.2.
6.30.3.1(a)(2) for the duty cycle at which the welder will be operated.
6.30.2.4 Marking. A rating plate shall be provided for arc welders
(b) Groups of Welders. The ampacity of conductors that supply
giving the following information:
two or more welders shall not be less than the sum of the value
obtained in accordance with 6.30.3.1(a) for the largest welder supplied
(1) Name of manufacturer
and 60 percent of the values obtained for all the other welders
(2) Frequency
supplied. (a) For Welders. Each welder shall have an overcurrent device
rated or set at not more than 300 percent of the rated primary current
FPN: Explanation of Terms of the welder. If the supply conductors for a welder are protected by an
overcurrent device rated or set at not more than 200 percent of the
(1) The rated primary current is the rated kilovolt-amperes (kVA) rated primary current of the welder, a separate overcurrent device shall
multiplied by 1 000 and divided by the rated primary voltage, using not be required.
values given on the nameplate.
(2) The actual primary current is the current drawn from the (b) For Conductors. Conductors that supply one or more welders
supply circuit during each welder operation at the particular heat tap shall be protected by an overcurrent device rated or set at not more
and control setting used. than 300 percent of the conductor rating.
(3) The duty cycle is the percentage of the time during which the
welder is loaded. For instance, a spot welder supplied by a 60-Hz 6.30.3.3 Disconnecting Means. A switch or circuit breaker shall be
system (216 000 cycles per hour) making four hundred 15-cycle welds provided by which each resistance welder and its control equipment
per hour would have a duty cycle of 2.8 percent (400 multiplied by 15, can be disconnected from the supply circuit. The ampere rating of this
divided by 216 000, multiplied by 100). A seam welder operating 2 disconnecting means shall not be less than the supply conductor
cycles “on” and 2 cycles “off” would have a duty cycle of 50 percent. ampacity determined in accordance with 6.30.3.1. The supply circuit
switch shall be permitted as the welder disconnecting means where the
circuit supplies only one welder.
Table 6.30.3.1(a)(2) Duty Cycle Multiplication
Factors for Resistance Welders 6.30.3.4 Marking. A nameplate shall be provided for each resistance
Duty Cycle (percent) Multiplier welder giving the following information:
50 0.71
40 0.63 (1) Name of manufacturer
30 0.55 (2) Frequency
25 0.50 (3) Primary voltage
20 0.45 (4) Rated kilovolt-amperes (kVA) at 50 percent duty cycle
15 0.39 (5) Maximum and minimum open-circuit secondary voltage
10 0.32 (6) Short-circuit secondary current at maximum secondary voltage,
7.5 0.27 and
5 or less 0.22 (7) Specified throat and gap setting

6.30.4 Welding Cable

6.30.3.2 Overcurrent Protection. Overcurrent protection for 6.30.4.1 Conductors. Insulation of conductors intended for use in the
resistance welders shall be as provided in 6.30.3.2(a) and 6.30.3.2(b). secondary circuit of electric welders shall be flame retardant.
Where the values as determined by this section do not correspond with
the standard ampere ratings provided in 2.40.1.6 or the rating or 6.30.4.2 Installation. Cables shall be permitted to be installed in a
setting specified results in unnecessary opening of the overcurrent dedicated cable tray as provided in 6.30.4.2(a), (b), and (c).
device, the next higher standard rating or setting shall be permitted.
(a) Cable Support. The cable tray shall provide support at not
greater than 150 mm intervals.
 intended for use by another piece of audio equipment. Amplifier is the
(b) Spread of Fire and Products of Combustion. The installation term used to denote an audio amplifier within this article.
shall comply with 3.0.1.21.
Audio Autotransformer. A transformer with a single winding and
(c) Signs. A permanent sign shall be attached to the cable tray at multiple taps intended for use with an amplifier loudspeaker signal
intervals not greater than 6 000 mm. The sign shall read output.

CABLE TRAY FOR WELDING CABLES ONLY Audio Signal Processing Equipment. Electrically operated
equipment that produces or processes, or both, electronic signals that,
when appropriately amplified and reproduced by a loudspeaker,
ARTICLE 6.40 — AUDIO SIGNAL PROCESSING, produce an acoustic signal within the range of normal human hearing
AMPLIFICATION, AND REPRODUCTION (typically 20-20 kHz). Within this article, the terms equipment and
EQUIPMENT audio equipment are assumed to be equivalent to audio signal
processing equipment.
6.40.1 General
FPN: This equipment includes, but is not limited to, loudspeakers; headphones;
pre-amplifiers; microphones and their power supplies; mixers; MIDI (musical
6.40.1.1 Scope. This article covers equipment and wiring for audio instrument digital interface) equipment or other digital control systems; equalizers,
signal generation, recording, processing, amplification and compressors, and other audio signal processing equipment; audio media recording
reproduction; distribution of sound; public address; speech input and playback equipment including turntables, tape decks and disk players (audio
and multimedia), synthesizers, tone generators, and electronic organs. Electronic
systems; temporary audio system installations; and electronic organs organs and synthesizers may have integral or separate amplification and
or other electronic musical instruments. This also includes audio loudspeakers. With the exception of amplifier outputs, virtually all such equipment
is used to process signals (utilizing analog or digital techniques) that have
systems subject to Part 5.17.6, and Articles 5.18, 5.20, 5.25, and 5.30. nonhazardous levels of voltage or current potential.

FPN No. 1: Examples of permanently installed distributed audio system locations

include, but are not limited to, restaurant, hotel, business office, commercial and Audio System. Within this article, the term audio system means the
retail sales environments, churches, and schools. Both portable and permanently totality of all equipment and interconnecting wiring used to fabricate a
installed equipment locations include, but are not limited to, residences,
auditoriums, theaters, stadiums, and movie and television studios. Temporary
fully functional audio signal processing, amplification, and
installations include, but are not limited to, auditoriums, theaters, stadiums (which reproduction system.
use both temporary and permanently installed systems), and outdoor events such
as fairs, festivals, circuses, public events, and concerts.
Audio Transformer. A transformer with two or more electrically
FPN No. 2: Fire and burglary alarm signaling devices are specifically not isolated windings and multiple taps intended for use with an amplifier
encompassed by this article. loudspeaker signal output.
6.40.1.2 Definitions. For purposes of this article, the following Equipment Rack. A framework for the support enclosure, or both,
definitions apply. of equipment. May be portable or stationary. See ANSI/EIA/310-D-
1992, Cabinets, Racks, Panels and Associated Equipment.
Abandoned Audio Distribution Cable. Installed audio distribution
cable that is not terminated at equipment and not identified for future Loudspeaker. Equipment that converts an ac electric signal into an
use with a tag. acoustic signal. The term speaker is commonly used to mean
loudspeaker.
Audio Amplifier or Pre-Amplifier. Electronic equipment that
increases the current or voltage, or both, potential of an audio signal Maximum Output Power. The maximum output power delivered
by an amplifier into its rated load as determined under specified test equipment is presumed to be removed at the conclusion of the event.
conditions. This may exceed the manufacturer’s rated output power for
the same amplifier. 6.40.1.3 Locations and Other Articles. Circuits and equipment shall
comply with 6.40.1.3(a) through 6.40.1.3(l), as applicable.
Mixer. Equipment used to combine and level match a multiplicity of
electronic signals, such as from microphones, electronic instruments, (a) Spread of Fire or Product of Combustion. See 3.0.1.21.
and recorded audio.
(b) Ducts, Plenums, and Other Air-Handling Spaces. See
Mixer-Amplifier. Equipment that combines the functions of a 3.0.1.22, where installed in ducts or plenums or other space used for
mixer and amplifier within a single enclosure. environmental air.

Portable Equipment. Equipment fed with portable cords or cables FPN: Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems,
NFPA 90A-2002, 2-3.10.1(a), Exception No. 3, permits loudspeakers, loudspeaker
intended to be moved from one place to another. assemblies, and their accessories listed in accordance with Fire Test for Heat and
Visible Smoke Release for Discrete Products and Their Accessories Installed in
Powered Loudspeaker. Equipment that consists of a loudspeaker Air-Handling Spaces, UL 2043-1996, to be installed in other spaces used for
environmental air (ceiling cavity plenums).
and amplifier within the same enclosure. Other signal processing may
also be included. (c) Cable Trays. Cable trays shall be used in accordance with
Article 3.18.
Rated Load Impedance. The amplifier manufacturer’s stated or
marked speaker impedance into which an amplifier will deliver its FPN: See 7.25.3.21(c) for the use of Class 2, Class 3, and Type PLTC cable in
rated output power. 2Ω, 4Ω, and 8Ω are typical ratings. cable trays.

Rated Output Power. The amplifier manufacturer’s stated or (d) Hazardous (Classified) Locations. Equipment used in
marked output power capability into its rated load. hazardous (classified) locations shall comply with the applicable
requirements of Chapter 5.
Rated Output Voltage. For audio amplifiers of the constant-voltage
type, this is the nominal output voltage when the amplifier is (e) Assembly Occupancies. Equipment used in places of ssembly
delivering full rated power. Rated output voltage is used for shall comply with Article 5.18.
determining approximate acoustic output in distributed speaker
systems that typically employ impedance matching transformers. (f) Theaters, Audience Areas of Motion Picture and Television
Typical ratings are 25 volts, 70.7 volts, and 100 volts. Studios, and Similar Locations. Equipment used in theaters,
audience areas of motion picture and television studios, and similar
Technical Power System. An electrical distribution system with locations shall comply with Article 5.20.
grounding in accordance with 2.50.7.17(d), where the equipment
grounding conductor is isolated from the premises grounded conductor (g) Carnivals, Circuses, Fairs, and Similar Events. Equipment
except at a single grounded termination point within a branch circuit used in carnivals, circuses, fairs, and similar events shall comply with
panelboard, the originating (main breaker) branch-circuit panelboard, Article 5.25.
or at the premises grounding electrode.
(h) Motion Picture and Television Studios. Equipment used in
Temporary Equipment. Portable wiring and equipment intended motion picture and television studios shall comply with Article 5.30.
for use with events of a transient or temporary nature where all
 (i) Swimming Pools, Fountains, and Similar Locations. Audio 6.40.1.7 Grounding.
equipment used in or near swimming pools, fountains, and similar
locations shall comply with Article 6.80. (a) General. Wireways and auxiliary gutters shall be grounded and
bonded in accordance with the requirements of Article 2.50. Where the
(j) Combination Systems. Where the authority having jurisdiction wireway or auxiliary gutter does not contain power-supply wires, the
permits audio systems for paging or music, or both, to be combined equipment grounding conductor shall not be required to be larger than
with fire alarm systems, the wiring shall comply with Article 7.60. 2.0 mm2 (1.6 mm dia.) copper or its equivalent. Where the wireway or
auxiliary gutter contains power-supply wires, the equipment grounding
FPN: For installation requirements for such combination systems, refer to National conductor shall not be smaller than specified in 2.50.6.13.
Fire Alarm Code®, NFPA 72-1996, and Life Safety Code,® NFPA 101®, 1997.

(b) Separately Derived Systems with 60 Volts to Ground.

(k) Antennas. Equipment used in audio systems that contain an
Grounding of separately derived systems with 60 volts to ground shall
audio or video tuner and an antenna input shall comply with Article
be in accordance with 6.47.1.6.
8.10. Wiring other than antenna wiring that connects such equipment
to other audio equipment shall comply with this article.
(c) Isolated Ground Receptacles. Isolated grounding-type
receptacles shall be permitted as described in 2.50.7.17(d), and for the
(l) Generators. Generators shall be installed in accordance with
implementation of other technical power systems in compliance with
4.45.1.10 through 4.45.1.12, 4.45.1.14 through 4.45.1.16, and
Article 2.50. For separately derived systems with 60 volts to ground,
4.45.1.18.
the branch-circuit equipment grounding conductor shall be terminated
as required in 6.47.1.6(b).
6.40.1.4 Protection of Electrical Equipment. Amplifiers,
loudspeakers, and other equipment shall be so located or protected so FPN: See 4.6.1.2(d) for grounding-type receptacles and required identification.
as to guard against environmental exposure or physical damage, such
as might result in fire, shock, or personal hazard. 6.40.1.8 Grouping of Conductors. Insulated conductors of different
systems grouped or bundled so as to be in close physical contact with
6.40.1.5 Access to Electrical Equipment Behind Panels Designed to each other in the same raceway or other enclosure, or in portable cords
Allow Access. Access to equipment shall not be denied by an or cables, shall comply with 3.0.1.3(c)(1).
accumulation of wires and cables that prevents removal of panels,
including suspended ceiling panels. 6.40.1.9 Wiring Methods.
6.40.1.6 Mechanical Execution of Work. Equipment and cabling (a) Wiring to and Between Audio Equipment.
shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. Cables for
installed systems shall be supported by the building structure in such a (1) Power Wiring. Wiring and equipment from source of power
manner that the cable will not be damaged by normal building use. to and between devices connected to the premises wiring systems shall
Such cables shall be supported by straps, staples, hangers, or similar comply with the requirements of Chapters 1 through 4, except as
fittings designed and installed so as not to damage the cable. The modified by this article.
installation shall conform to 3.0.1.4(d) and 3.0.1.11. (2) Separately Derived Power Supply Wiring. Separately
derived systems shall comply with the applicable articles of this Code,
FPN: Accepted industry practices are described in ANSI/NECA/BICSI 568-2001,
Standard for Installing Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling, and except as modified by this article. Separately derived systems with 60
other ANSI-approved installation standards. volts to ground shall be permitted for use in audio system installations
as specified in Article 6.47.
 (3) Other Wiring. All wiring not connected to the premises (d) Use of Audio Transformers and Autotransformers. Audio
wiring system or to a wiring system separately derived from the transformers and autotransformers shall only be used for audio signals
premises wiring system shall comply with Article 7.25. in a manner so as not to exceed the manufacturer’s stated input or
output voltage, impedance, or power limitations. The input or output
(b) Auxiliary Power Supply Wiring. Equipment that has a separate wires of an audio transformer or autotransformer shall be allowed to
input for an auxiliary power supply shall be wired in compliance with connect directly to the amplifier or loudspeaker terminals. No
Article 7.25. Battery installation shall be in accordance with Article electrical terminal or lead shall be required to be grounded or bonded.
4.80.
6.40.1.10 Audio Systems Near Bodies of Water. Audio systems near
FPN No. 1: This section does not apply to the use of uninterruptable power supply bodies of water, either natural or artificial, shall be subject to the
(ups) equipment, or other sources of supply, that are intended to act as a direct
replacement for the primary circuit power source and are connected to the primary following restrictions specified in 6.40.1.10(a) and 6.40.1.10(b).
circuit input.

FPN No. 2: Refer to National Fire Alarm Code, NFPA 72-2002, where equipment is
Exception: This section does not include audio systems intended for
used for a fire alarm system. use on boats, yachts, or other forms of land or water transportation
used near bodies of water, whether or not supplied by branch-circuit
(c) Output Wiring and Listing of Amplifiers. Amplifiers with power.
output circuits carrying audio program signals shall be permitted to
employ Class 1, Class 2, or Class 3 wiring where the amplifier is listed FPN: See 6.80.2.8 for installation of underwater audio equipment.

and marked for use with the specific class of wiring method. Such
listing shall ensure the energy output is equivalent to the shock and (a) Equipment Supplied by Branch-Circuit Power. Audio system
fire risk of the same class as stated in Article 7.25. Overcurrent equipment supplied by branch-circuit power shall not be placed
protection shall be provided and shall be permitted to be inherent to laterally within 1 500 mm of the inside wall of a pool, spa, hot tub, or
the amplifier. fountain, nor within 1 500 mm of the prevailing or tidal high water
Audio circuits wired using Class 1 wiring methods shall not occupy mark. The equipment shall be provided with branch-circuit power
the same raceway or enclosure with other than audio circuits wired protected by a ground-fault circuit interrupter where required by other
using Class 1 wiring methods. articles.
Audio circuits wired using Class 2 wiring methods shall not occupy
the same raceway or enclosure with other than audio circuits wired (b) Equipment Not Supplied by Branch-Circuit Power. Audio
using Class 2 wiring methods. system equipment powered by a listed Class 2 power supply or by the
Audio circuits wired using Class 3 wiring methods shall not occupy output of an amplifier listed as permitting the use of Class 2 wiring
the same raceway or enclosure with other than audio circuits wired shall only be restricted in placement by the manufacturer’s
using Class 3 wiring methods. recommendations.

FPN: Placement of the power supply or amplifier, if supplied by branch-circuit

FPN No. 1: Amplifiers for Fire Protective Signaling Systems, ANSI/UL 1711-1994,
power, is still subject to 6.40.1.10(a).
contains requirements for the listing of amplifiers used for fire alarm systems in
compliance with National Fire Alarm Code, NFPA 72-2002.
6.40.2 Permanent Audio System Installations
FPN No. 2: Examples of requirements for listing amplifiers used in residential,
commercial, and professional use are found in Commercial Audio Equipment,
ANSI/UL 813-1996, Professional Video and Audio Equipment, ANSI/UL 1419- 6.40.2.1 Use of Flexible Cords and Cables.
1997, Audio-Video Products and Accessories, ANSI/UL 1492-1996, or Audio/Video
and Musical Instrument Apparatus for Household, Commercial, and Similar Use,
ANSI/UL 6500-1996. (a) Between Equipment and Branch-Circuit Power. Power
supply cords for audio equipment shall be suitable for the use and shall
be permitted to be used where the interchange, maintenance, or repair
of such equipment is facilitated through the use of a power supply 6.40.2.2 Wiring of Equipment Racks. Equipment racks shall be
cord. fabricated of metal and grounded. Bonding shall not be required if the
rack is connected to a technical power ground.
(b) Between Loudspeakers and Amplifiers, or Between Equipment racks shall be wired in a neat and workmanlike manner.
Loudspeakers. Cables used to connect loudspeakers to each other or Wires, cables, structural components, or other equipment shall not be
to an amplifier shall comply with Article 7.25. Other listed cable types placed in such a manner as to prevent reasonable access to equipment
and assemblies, including optional hybrid communications, signal, and power switches and resettable or replaceable circuit overcurrent
optical fiber cables, shall be permitted. protection devices.
Supply cords or cables, if used, shall terminate within the equipment
(c) Between Equipment. Cables used for the distribution of audio rack enclosure in an identified connector assembly. The supply cords
signals between equipment shall comply with Article 7.25. Other or cable (and connector assembly, if used) shall have sufficient
listed cable types and assemblies, including optional hybrid ampacity to carry the total load connected to the equipment rack and
communications, signal, and optical fiber cables, shall be permitted. shall be protected by overcurrent devices.
Other cable types and assemblies specified by the equipment
manufacturer as acceptable for the use shall be permitted in 6.40.2.3 Conduit or Tubing.
accordance with 1.10.1.3(b).
(a) Number of Conductors. The number of conductors permitted in
(d) Between Equipment and Power Supplies Other than Branch- a single conduit or tubing shall not exceed the percentage fill specified
Circuit Power. The following power supplies, other than branch- in Table 1, Chapter 9.
circuit power supplies, shall be installed and wired between equipment
in accordance with the requirements of this Code for the voltage and (b) Nonmetallic Conduit or Tubing and Insulating Bushings. The
power delivered: use of nonmetallic conduit or tubing and insulating bushings shall be
permitted where a technical ground system is employed and shall
(1) Storage batteries comply with applicable articles.
(2) Transformers
(3) Transformer rectifiers. 6.40.2.4 Wireways, Gutters, and Auxiliary Gutters. The use of
(4) Other ac or dc power supplies metallic and nonmetallic wireways, gutters, and auxiliary gutters shall
be permitted for use with audio signal conductors and shall comply
FPN: For some equipment, sources such as in (1) and (2) will serve as the only with applicable articles with respect to permitted locations,
source of power. These could, in turn, be supplied with intermittent or continuous
branch-circuit power. construction, and fill.

(e) Between Equipment Racks and Premises Wiring System. 6.40.2.5 Loudspeaker Installation in Fire Resistance- Rated
Flexible cords and cables shall be permitted for the electrical Partitions, Walls, and Ceilings. Loudspeakers installed in a fire
connection of permanently installed equipment racks to the premises resistance-rated partition, wall, or ceiling shall be listed for the
wiring system to facilitate access to equipment or for the purpose of purpose or installed in an enclosure or recess that maintains the fire
isolating the technical ground of the rack from the premises ground. resistance rating.
Connection shall be made using either approved plugs and receptacles
FPN: Fire-rated construction is the fire-resistive classification used in building
or by direct connection within an approved enclosure. Flexible cords codes. One method of determining fire rating is testing in accordance with
and cables shall not be subjected to physical manipulation or abuse Standard Methods of Tests of Fire Endurance of Building Construction and
while the rack is in use. Materials, NFPA 251-1999.
 Flexible cords and cables used for the distribution of audio signals
6.40.3 Portable and Temporary between equipment shall comply with Articles 4.0 and Article 7.25,
Audio System Installations respectively. Cords and cables listed for portable use, either hard or
extra-hard service as defined by Article 4.0, shall also be permitted.
6.40.3.1 Multipole Branch-Circuit Cable Connectors. Multipole Other listed cable types and assemblies, including optional hybrid
branch-circuit cable connectors, male and female, for power supply communications, signal, and optical fiber cables, shall be permitted.
cords and cables shall be constructed so that tension on the cord or
cable will not be transmitted to the connections. The female half shall (d) Between Equipment, Equipment Racks, and Power Supplies
be attached to the load end of the power supply cord or cable. The Other than Branch-Circuit Power. Wiring between the following
connector shall be rated in amperes and designed so that differently power supplies, other than branch-circuit power supplies, shall be
rated devices cannot be connected together. Alternating-current installed, connected, or wired in accordance with the requirements of
multipole connectors shall be polarized and comply with 4.6.1.6(a) this Code for the voltage and power required:
and 4.6.1.6(b) and 4.6.1.9. Alternating-current or direct-current
multipole connectors utilized for connection between loudspeakers (1) Storage batteries
and amplifiers, or between loudspeakers, shall not be compatible with (2) Transformers
nonlocking 15- or 20-ampere rated connectors intended for branch- (3) Transformer rectifiers
circuit power, nor with connectors rated 250 volts or greater of either (4) Other ac or dc power supplies
the locking or nonlocking type. Signal cabling not intended for such
loudspeaker and amplifier interconnection shall not be permitted to be (e) Between Equipment Racks and Branch-Circuit Power. The
compatible with multipole branch-circuit cable connectors of any supply to a portable equipment rack shall be by means of listed extra-
accepted configuration. hard usage cords or cables, as defined in Table 4.0.1.4. For outdoor
portable or temporary use, the cords or cables shall be further listed as
FPN: See 4.0.1.10 for pull at terminals. being suitable for wet locations and sunlight resistant. Section
5.20.1.5, 5.20.1.10 and 5.25.1.3 shall apply as appropriate when the
6.40.3.2 Use of Flexible Cords and Cables. following conditions exist:
(a) Between Equipment and Branch-Circuit Power. Power (1) Where equipment racks include audio and lighting and/or
supply cords for audio equipment shall be listed and shall be permitted power equipment
to be used where the interchange, maintenance, or repair of such (2) When using and constructing of cable extensions, adapters, and
equipment is facilitated through the use of a power supply cord. breakout assemblies
(b) Between Loudspeakers and Amplifiers, or Between 6.40.3.3 Wiring of Equipment Racks. Equipment racks fabricated of
Loudspeakers. Flexible cords and cables used to connect metal shall be grounded. Nonmetallic racks with covers (if provided)
loudspeakers to each other or to an amplifier shall comply with removed shall not allow access to Class 1, Class 3, or primary circuit
Articles 4.0 and Article 7.25, respectively. Cords and cables listed for power without the removal of covers over terminals or the use of tools.
portable use, either hard or extra-hard usage as defined by Article 4.0, Equipment racks shall be wired in a neat and workmanlike manner.
shall also be permitted. Other listed cable types and assemblies, Wires, cables, structural components, or other equipment shall not be
including optional hybrid communications, signal, and optical fiber placed in such a manner as to prevent reasonable access to equipment
cables, shall be permitted. power switches and resettable or replaceable circuit overcurrent
protection devices.
(c) Between Equipment and/or Between Equipment Racks.
Wiring that exits the equipment rack for connection to other (a) Disconnecting means complying with 6.45.1.10 are provided.
equipment or to a power supply shall be relieved of strain or otherwise
suitably terminated such that a pull on the flexible cord or cable shall (b) A separate heating/ventilating/air-conditioning (HVAC) system
not increase the risk of damage to the cable or connected equipment is provided that is dedicated for information technology equipment use
such as to cause an unreasonable risk of fire or electric shock. and is separated from other areas of occupancy. Any HVAC system
that serves other occupancies shall be permitted to also serve the
6.40.3.4 Environmental Protection of Equipment. Temporary information technology equipment room if fire/smoke dampers are
outdoor, unsheltered placement or use of portable equipment not listed provided at the point of penetration of the room boundary. Such
for the purpose shall be permitted only where appropriate protection of dampers shall operate on activation of smoke detectors and also by
such equipment from adverse weather conditions is provided to operation of the disconnecting means required by 6.45.1.10.
prevent risk of fire or electrical shock. Where the system is intended to
remain operable during adverse weather, arrangements shall be made FPN: For further information, see Standard for the Protection of Information
Technology Equipment, NFPA 75-2003. Chapter 10, 10.1, 10.1.1, 10.1.2, and
for maintaining operation and ventilation of heat dissipating 10.1.3.
equipment.
(c) Listed information technology equipment is installed.
6.40.3.5 Protection of Wiring. Where accessible to the public,
flexible cords and cables laid or run on the ground or on the floor shall (d) The room is occupied only by those personnel needed for the
be covered with approved nonconductive mats. Cables and mats shall maintenance and functional operation of the installed information
be arranged so as not to present a tripping hazard. technology equipment.

6.40.3.6 Equipment Access. Equipment likely to present a risk of fire, (e) The room is separated from other occupancies by fire-resistant-
electrical shock, or physical injury to the public shall be protected by rated walls, floors, and ceilings with protected openings.
barriers or supervised by licensed electrical practitioner or non
licensed electrical practitioner under the supervision of a licensed FPN: For further information, see Standard for the Protection of Information
electrical practitioner so as to prevent public access. Technology Equipment, NFPA 75-2003

ARTICLE 6.45 — INFORMATION 6.45.1.5 Supply Circuits and Interconnecting Cables.

TECHNOLOGY EQUIPMENT
(a) Branch-Circuit Conductors. The branch-circuit conductors
6.45.1.1 Scope. This article covers equipment, power-supply wiring, supplying one or more units of a data processing system shall have an
equipment interconnecting wiring, and grounding of information ampacity not less than 125 percent of the total connected load.
technology equipment and systems, including terminal units, in an
information technology equipment room. (b) Cord-and-Plug Connections. The data processing system shall
be permitted to be connected to a branch circuit by any of the
FPN: For further information, see Standard for the Protection of Information following means:
Technology Equipment, NFPA 75-2003
(1) Flexible cord and an attachment plug cap not to exceed 4 500
6.45.1.2 Special Requirements for Information Technology m.
Equipment Room. This article applies, provided all the following (2) Cord set assembly. Where run on the surface of the floor, they
conditions are met. shall be protected against physical damage.
 (c) Interconnecting Cables. Separate data processing units shall be
permitted to be interconnected by means of cables and cable FPN: One method of defining fire resistance is by establishing that the cables do
not spread fire to the top of the tray in the “Vertical Tray Flame Test” referenced in
assemblies listed for the purpose. Where run on the surface of the the Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords, ANSI/UL 1581-2001.
floor, they shall be protected against physical damage. Another method of defining fire resistance is for the damage (char length) not to
exceed 1.5 m when performing the CSA “Vertical Flame Test — Cables in Cable
Trays,” as described in Test Methods for Electrical Wires and Cables, CSA C22.2
(d) Under Raised Floors. Power cables, communications cables, No. 0.3-M-2001.
connecting cables, interconnecting cables, and receptacles associated
with the information technology equipment shall be permitted under a (6) Abandoned cables shall be removed unless contained in metal
raised floor, provided the following conditions are met:. raceways.

(1) The raised floor is of suitable construction and the area under (e) Securing in Place. Power cables; communications cables;
the floor is accessible. connecting cables; interconnecting cables; and associated boxes,
(2) The branch-circuit supply conductors to receptacles or field- connectors, plugs, and receptacles that are listed as part of, or for,
wired equipment are in rigid metal conduit, rigid nonmetallic conduit, information technology equipment shall not be required to be secured
intermediate metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing, metal wireway, in place.
surface metal raceway with metal cover, flexible metal conduit,
liquidtight flexible metal or nonmetallic conduit, Type MI cable, Type 6.45.1.6 Cables Not in Information Technology Equipment Room.
MC cable, or Type AC cable. These supply conductors shall be Cables extending beyond the information technology equipment room
installed in accordance with the requirements of 3.0.1.11. shall be subject to the applicable requirements of this Code.
(3) Ventilation in the underfloor area is used for the information
technology equipment room only, except as provided in 6.45.1.4(2). FPN: For signaling circuits, refer to Article 7.25; for fiber optic circuits, refer to
Article 7.70; and for communications circuits, refer to Article 8.0. For fire alarm
The ventilation system shall be so arranged, with approved smoke systems, refer to Article 7.60.
detection devices, that upon the detection of fire or products of
combustion in the underfloor space the circulation of air will cease. 6.45.1.7 Penetrations. Penetrations of the fire-resistant room
(4) Openings in raised floors for cables protect cables against boundary shall be in accordance with 3.0.1.21.
abrasions and minimize the entrance of debris beneath the floor.
(5) Cables, other than those covered in (2) and those complying 6.45.1.10 Disconnecting Means. A means shall be provided to
with (a), (b), and (c) below, shall be listed as Type DP cable having disconnect power to all electronic equipment in the information
adequate fire-resistant characteristics suitable for use under raised technology equipment room. There shall also be a similar means to
floors of an information technology equipment room. disconnect the power to all dedicated HVAC systems serving the room
and cause all required fire/smoke dampers to close. The control for
a. Interconnecting cables enclosed in a raceway. these disconnecting means shall be grouped and identified and shall be
b. Interconnecting cables listed with equipment manufactured readily accessible at the principal exit doors. A single means to control
prior to July 1, 1994, being installed with that equipment. both the electronic equipment and HVAC systems shall be permitted.
c. Cable type designations Type TC (Article 3.36); Types CL2,
CL3, and PLTC (Article 7.25); Type ITC (Article 7.27); Types NPLF Exception: Installations qualifying under the provisions of Article
and FPL (Article 760); Types OFC and OFN (Article 7.70); Types CM 6.85.
(Article 8.0); Type CATV (Article 8.20). These designations shall be
permitted to have an additional letter P or R or G. Green insulated 6.45.1.11 Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPS). Unless otherwise
single conductor cables, 14 mm2 and larger, marked “for use in cable permitted in 6.45.1.11(1) or 6.45.1.11(2), UPS systems installed
trays” or “for CT use” shall be permitted for equipment grounding. within the information technology room, and their supply and output
circuits, shall comply with 6.45.1.10. The disconnecting means shall separately derived systems operating at 120 volts line-to-line and 60
also disconnect the battery from its load. volts to ground for sensitive electronic equipment.

(a) Installations qualifying under the provisions of Article 6.85. 6.47.1.3 General. Use of a separately derived 120-volt single-phase 3-
wire system with 60 volts on each of two ungrounded conductors to a
(b) Power sources limited to 750 volt-amperes or less derived either grounded neutral conductor shall be permitted for the purpose of
from UPS equipment or from battery circuits integral to electronic reducing objectionable noise in sensitive electronic equipment
equipment. locations, provided that the following conditions apply:

6.45.1.15 Grounding. All exposed noncurrent-carrying metal parts of (1) The system is installed only in commercial or industrial
an information technology system shall be grounded in accordance occupancies.
with Article 2.50 or shall be double insulated. Power systems derived (2) The system’s use is restricted to areas under close supervision by
within listed information technology equipment that supply licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner
information technology systems through receptacles or cable under the supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner.
assemblies supplied as part of this equipment shall not be considered (3) All of the requirements in 6.47.1.4 through 6.47.1.8 are met.
separately derived for the purpose of applying 2.50.2.1(d). Where
signal reference structures are installed, they shall be bonded to the 6.47.1.4 Wiring Methods.
equipment grounding system provided for the information technology
equipment. (a) Panelboards and Overcurrent Protection. Use of standard
single-phase panelboards and distribution equipment with a higher
FPN No. 1: The bonding and grounding requirements in the product standards voltage rating shall be permitted. The system shall be clearly marked
governing this listed equipment ensure that it complies with Article 2.50.
on the face of the panel or on the inside of the panel doors. Common
FPN No. 2: Where isolated grounding-type receptacles are used, see 2.50.7.17(d) trip two-pole circuit breakers or a combination two-pole fused
and 4.6.1.2(d). disconnecting means that are identified for use at the system voltage
shall be provided for both ungrounded conductors in all feeders and
6.45.1.16 Marking. Each unit of an information technology system branch circuits. Branch circuits and feeders shall be provided with a
supplied by a branch circuit shall be provided with a manufacturer’s means to simultaneously disconnect all ungrounded conductors.
nameplate, which shall also include the input power requirements for
voltage, frequency, and maximum rated load in amperes. (b) Junction Boxes. All junction box covers shall be clearly marked
to indicate the distribution panel and the system voltage.
6.45.1.17 Power Distribution Units. Power distribution units that are
used for information technology equipment shall be permitted to have (c) Color Coding. All feeders and branch-circuit conductors
multiple panelboards within a single cabinet, provided that each installed under this section shall be identified as to system at all splices
panelboard has no more than 42 overcurrent devices and the power and terminations by color, marking, tagging, or equally effective
distribution unit is utilization equipment listed for information means. The means of identification shall be posted at each branch-
technology application. circuit panelboard and at the disconnecting means for the building.

(d) Voltage Drop. The voltage drop on any branch circuit shall not
ARTICLE 6.47 – SENSITIVE ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT exceed 1.5 percent. The combined voltage drop of feeder and branch-
circuit conductors shall not exceed 2.5 percent.
6.47.1.1 Scope. This article covers the installation and wiring of
 (1) Fixed Equipment. The voltage drop on branch circuits FPN No. 1: See 2.50.6.13 for equipment grounding conductor sizing requirements
where circuit conductors are adjusted in size to compensate for voltage drop.
supplying equipment connected using wiring methods in Chapter 3
shall not exceed 1.5 percent. The combined voltage drop of feeder and FPN No. 2: These requirements limit the impedance of the ground fault path where
branch-circuit conductors shall not exceed 2.5 percent. only 60 volts apply to a fault condition instead of the usual 120 volts.

(2) Cord-Connected Equipment. The voltage drop on branch 6.47.1.7 Receptacles.

circuits supplying receptacles shall not exceed 1 percent. For the
purposes of making this calculations, the load connected to the (a) General. Where receptacles are used as a means of connecting
receptafcle outlet shall be considered to be 50 percent of the branch- equipment, the following conditions shall be met:
circuit rating. The combined voltage drop of feeder and branch-circuit
conductors shall not exceed 2.0 percent. (1) All 15- and 20-ampere receptacles shall be GFCI protected.

FPN: The purpose of this provision is to limit voltage drop to 1.5 percent where (2) All outlet strips, adapters, receptacle covers, and faceplates
portable cords may be used as a means of connecting equipment. shall be marked with the following words or equivalent:

6.47.1.5 Three-Phase Systems. Where 3-phase power is supplied, a

separately derived 6-phase “wye” system with 60 volts to ground WARNING – TECHNICAL POWER
installed under this article shall be configured as three separately Do not connect to lighting equipment.
derived 120-volt single-phase systems having a combined total of no For electronic equipment use only.
more than six main disconnects. 60/120 V 1 Фac
GFCI protected
6.47.1.6 Grounding.
(3) A 125-volt, single-phase, 15- or 20-ampere-rated receptacle
(a) General. The system shall be grounded as provided in 2.50.2.11 outlet having one of its current-carrying poles connected to a grounded
as separately derived sing-phase 3-wire system. circuit conductor shall be located within 1 800 mm of all permanently
installed 15- or 20-ampere-rated 60/120-volt technical pwer-system
(b) Grounding Conductors Required. Permanently wired receptacles.
utilization equipment and receptacles shall be grounded by means of
an equipment grounding conductor run with the circuit conductors to (4) All 125-volt receptacles used for 60/120-volt technical pwer
an equipment grounding bus prominently marked “Technical shall have a unique configuration and be identified for use with this
Equipment Ground: in the originating branch-circuit panelboard. The class of system. All 125-volt, single-phase, 15- or 20-ampere-rated
grounding bus shall be connected to the grounded conductor on the receptacle outlets and attachment plusgs that are identified for use with
line side of the separately derived system’s disconnecting means. The grounded circuit conductors shall be permitted in machine rooms,
grounding conductor shall not be smaller than that specified in Table control rooms, equipment rooms, equipment racks, and other similar
2.50.6.13 and run with the feeder conductors. The technical equipment locations that are restricted to use by licensed electrical practitioner or
grounding bus need not be bonded to the panelboard enclosure. Other non licensed electrical practitioner under the supervision of a licensed
grounding methods authorized elsewhere in this Code shall be electrical practitioner.
permitted where the impedance of the grounding return path does not
exceed the impedance of equipment grounding conductors sized and (b) Isolated Ground Receptacles. Isolated ground receptacles shall
installed in accordance with this article. be permitted as described in 2.50.7.17(d); however, the branch circuit
equipment grounding conductor shall be terminated as required in through 6.50.1.6(d).
6.47.1.6(b).
(a) Size. Not less than 0.08 mm2 (0.3 mm dia.) for electronic signal
6.47.1.8 Lighting Equipment. Lighting equipment installed under circuits and not less than 0.125 mm2 (mm dia.) for electromagnetic
this article for the purpose of reducing electrical noise originating from valve supply and the like. A main common-return conductor in the
lighting equipment shall meet the conditions of 6.47.1.8(a) through electromagnetic supply shall not be less than 2.0 mm2 (1.6 mm dia.).
6.47.1.8(c).
(b) Insulation. Conductors shall Friday lhave thermoplastic or
(a) Disconnecting Means. All luminaries (lighting fixtures) thermosetting insulation.
connected to separately derived systems operating at 60 volts to
ground, and associated control equipment if provided, shall have a (c) Conductors to Be Cabled. Except for the common-return
disconnecting means that simultaneously opens all ungrounded conductor and conductors inside the organ proper, the organ sections
conductors. The disconnecting means shall be located within sight of and the organ console conductors shall be cabled. The common-return
the luminaire (lighting fixture) or be capable of being locked in the conductors shall be permitted under an additional covering enclosing
open position. both cable and return conductor, or shall be permitted as a separate
conductor and shall be permitted to be in contact with the cable.
(b) Luminaires (Lighting Fixtures). All luminaries (lighting
fixtures) shall be permanently installed and listed for connection to a (d) Cable Covering. Each cable shall be provided with an outer
separately derived system at 120 volts line-to-line and 60 volts to covering, either overall or on each of any subassemblies of grouped
ground. conductors. Tape shall be permitted in place of a covering. Where not
installed in metal raceway, the covering shall be flame retardant or the
(c) Screw-Shell. Luminaires installed under this section shall not cable or each cable subassembly shall be covered with a closely
have an exposed lamp screw-shell. wound fireproof tape.

ARTICLE 6.50 — PIPE ORGANS FPN: One method of determining that cable is resistant to flame spread is by
testing the cable to the VW-1 (vertical-wire) flame test in the ANSI/UL 1581-1991,
Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables and Flexible Cords.
6.50.1.1 Scope. This article covers those electrical circuits and parts of
electrically operated pipe organs that are employed for the control of 6.50.1.6 Installation of Conductors. Cables shall be securely fastened
the sounding apparatus and keyboards. in place and shall be permitted to be attached directly to the organ
structure without insulating supports. Cables shall not be placed in
6.50.1.3 Other Articles. Electronic organs shall comply with the contact with other conductors.
appropriate provisions of Article 6.40.
6.50.1.8 Overcurrent Protection. Circuits shall be so arranged that
6.50.1.4 Source of Energy. The source of power shall be a 0.125 mm2 (mm dia.) and 0.08 mm2 (0.3 mm dia.) conductors shall be
transformer-type rectifier, the dc potential of which shall not exceed protected by an overcurrent device rated at not more than 6 amperes.
30 volts dc. Other conductor sizes shall be protected in accordance with their
ampacity. A common return conductor shall not require overcurrent
6.50.1.5 Grounding. The rectifier shall be grounded according to the protection.
provisions in 2.50.6.3(b).

6.50.1.6 Conductors. Conductors shall comply with 6.50.1.6(a)

 ARTICLE 6.60 — X-RAY EQUIPMENT 6.60.1.4 Connection to Supply Circuit.

6.60.1 General (a) Fixed and Stationary Equipment. Fixed and stationary X-ray
equipment shall be connected to the power supply by means of a
6.60.1.1 Scope. This article covers all X-ray equipment operating at wiring method meeting the general requirements of this Code.
any frequency or voltage for industrial or other nonmedical or Equipment properly supplied by a branch circuit rated at not over 30
nondental use. amperes shall be permitted to be supplied through a suitable
attachment plug cap and hard-service cable or cord.
FPN: See Part 5.17.5, for X-ray installations in health care facilities.
(b) Portable, Mobile, and Transportable Equipment. Individual
Nothing in this article shall be construed as specifying safeguards branch circuits shall not be required for portable, mobile, and
against the useful beam or stray X-ray radiation. transportable X-ray equipment requiring a capacity of not over 60
amperes. Portable and mobile types of X-ray equipment of any
FPN No. 1: Radiation safety and performance requirements of several classes of
X-ray equipment are regulated under Public Law 90-602 and are enforced by the capacity shall be supplied through a suitable hard-service cable or
Department of Health and Human Services. cord. Transportable X-ray equipment of any capacity shall be
FPN No. 2: In addition, information on radiation protection by the National Council
permitted to be connected to its power supply by suitable connections
on Radiation Protection and Measurements is published as Reports of the National and hard-service cable or cord.
Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement. These reports can be obtained
from NCRP Publications, 7910 Woodmont Ave., Suite 1016, Bethesda, MD 20814.
(c) Over 600 Volts, Nominal. Circuits and equipment operated at
more than 600 volts, nominal, shall comply with Article 490.
6.60.1.2 Definitions.
6.60.1.5 Disconnecting Means. A disconnecting means of adequate
Long-Time Rating. A rating based on an operating interval of 5
capacity for at least 50 percent of the input required for the momentary
minutes or longer.
rating or 100 percent of the input required for the long-time rating of
the X-ray equipment, whichever is greater, shall be provided in the
Mobile. X-ray equipment mounted on a permanent base with wheels
supply circuit. The disconnecting means shall be operable from a
and/or casters for moving while completely assembled.
location readily accessible from the X-ray control. For equipment
connected to a 230-volt, nominal, branch circuit of 30 amperes or less,
Momentary Rating. A rating based on an operating interval that
a grounding-type attachment plug cap and receptacle of proper rating
does not exceed 5 seconds.
shall be permitted to serve as a disconnecting means.
Portable. X-ray equipment designed to be hand-carried.
6.60.1.6 Rating of Supply Conductors and Overcurrent Protection.
Transportable. X-ray equipment to be installed in a vehicle or that
(a) Branch-Circuit Conductors. The ampacity of supply branch-
may be readily disassembled for transport in a vehicle.
circuit conductors and the overcurrent protective devices shall not be
less than 50 percent of the momentary rating or 100 percent of the
6.60.1.3 Hazardous (Classified) Locations. Unless approved for the
long-time rating, whichever is greater.
location, X-ray and related equipment shall not be installed or
operated in hazardous (classified) locations.
(b) Feeder Conductors. The rated ampacity of conductors and
FPN: See Part 5.17.4.
overcurrent devices of a feeder for two or more branch circuits
supplying X-ray units shall not be less than 100 percent of the
momentary demand rating [as determined by (a)] of the two largest X-
ray apparatus plus 20 percent of the momentary ratings of other X-ray 6.60.2.2 Portable and Mobile Equipment. Portable and mobile
apparatus. equipment shall comply with 6.60.2.1, but the manually controlled
device shall be located in or on the equipment.
FPN: The minimum conductor size for branch and feeder circuits is also governed
by voltage regulation requirements. For a specific installation, the manufacturer
usually specifies minimum distribution transformer and conductor sizes, rating of
disconnect means, and overcurrent protection. 6.60.2.4 Industrial and Commercial Laboratory Equipment.

6.60.1.7 Wiring Terminals. X-ray equipment not provided with a (a) Radiographic and Fluoroscopic Types. All radiographic- and
permanently attached cord or cord set shall be provided with suitable fluoroscopic-type equipment shall be effectively enclosed or shall
wiring terminals or leads for the connection of power-supply have interlocks that de-energize the equipment automatically to
conductors of the size required by the rating of the branch circuit for prevent ready access to live current-carrying parts.
the equipment.
(b) Diffraction and Irradiation Types. Diffraction- and
6.60.1.8 Number of Conductors in Raceway. The number of control irradiation-type equipment or installations not effectively enclosed or
circuit conductors installed in a raceway shall be determined in provided with interlocks to prevent access to live current-carrying
accordance with 3.0.1.17. parts during operation shall be provided with a positive means to
indicate when they are energized. The indicator shall be a pilot light,
6.60.1.9 Minimum Size of Conductors. Size 0.75 mm2 (1.0 mm dia.) readable meter deflection, or equivalent means.
or 1.25 mm2 (1.2 mm dia.) fixture wires, as specified in Section
7.25.2.7, and flexible cords shall be permitted for the control and 6.60.2.5 Independent Control. Where more than one piece of
operating circuits of X-ray and auxiliary equipment where protected equipment is operated from the same high-voltage circuit, each piece
by not larger than 20-ampere overcurrent devices. or each group of equipment as a unit shall be provided with a high-
voltage switch or equivalent disconnecting means. This disconnecting
6.60.1.10 Equipment Installations. All equipment for new X-ray means shall be constructed, enclosed, or located so as to avoid contact
installations and all used or reconditioned X-ray equipment moved to by persons with its live parts.
and reinstalled at a new location shall be of an approved type.
6.60.3 Transformers and Capacitors
6.60.2 CONTROL
6.60.3.1 General. Transformers and capacitors that are part of an X-
6.60.2.1 Fixed and Stationary Equipment. ray equipment shall not be required to comply with Articles 4.50 and
4.60.
(a) Separate Control Device. A separate control device, in addition
to the disconnecting means, shall be incorporated in the X-ray control 6.60.3.2 Capacitors. Capacitors shall be mounted within enclosures of
supply or in the primary circuit to the high-voltage transformer. This insulating material or grounded metal.
device shall be a part of the X-ray equipment but shall be permitted in
a separate enclosure immediately adjacent to the X-ray control unit. 6.60.4 Guarding and Grounding

(b) Protective Device. A protective device, which shall be permitted 6.60.4.1 General
to be incorporated into the separate control device, shall be provided to
control the load resulting from failures in the high-voltage circuit. (a) High-Voltage Parts. All high-voltage parts, including X-ray
tubes, shall be mounted within grounded enclosures. Air, oil, gas, or multipliers, oscillator-type units using vacuum tubes, inverters using
other suitable insulating media shall be used to insulate the high solid state devices, or motor generator equipment.
voltage from the grounded enclosure. The connection from the high-
voltage equipment to X-ray tubes and other high-voltage components Dielectric Heating. Dielectric heating is the heating of a nominally
shall be made with high-voltage shielded cables. insulating material due to its own dielectric losses when the material is
placed in a varying electric field.
(b) Low-Voltage Cables. Low-voltage cables connecting to oil-
filled units that are not completely sealed, such as transformers, Heating Equipment. The term heating equipment as used in this
condensers, oil coolers, and high-voltage switches, shall have article includes any equipment used for heating purposes whose heat is
insulation of the oil-resistant type. generated by induction or dielectric methods.

6.60.4.2 Grounding. Noncurrent-carrying metal parts of X-ray and Heating Equipment Applicator. The device used to transfer energy
associated equipment (controls, tables, X-ray tube supports, between the output circuit and the object or mass to be heated.
transformer tanks, shielded cables, X-ray tube heads, etc.) shall be
grounded in the manner specified in Article 2.50. Portable and mobile Induction Heating, Melting and Welding. The heating of a
equipment shall be provided with an approved grounding-type nominally conductive material due to its own I2R losses when the
attachment plug cap. material is placed in a varying electromagnetic field.

Exception: Battery-operated equipment. 6.65.1.3 Other Articles. Wiring from the source of power to the
heating equipment shall comply with Chapters 1 through 4. Circuits
ARTICLE 6.65 — INDUCTION AND and equipment operated at more than 600 volts, nominal, shall comply
DIELECTRIC HEATING with Article 4.90.

6.65.1 General 6.65.1.4 Hazardous (Classified) Locations Heating equipment shall

not be installed in hazardous (classified) locations as defined in Article
6.65.1.1 Scope. This article covers the construction and installation of 5.0 unless the equipment and wiring are designed and approved for the
induction and dielectric heating equipment and accessories for hazardous (classified) locations.
industrial and scientific applications. Medical or dental applications,
appliances, or line frequency pipelines and vessels heating are not 6.65.1.5 Output Circuit. The output circuit shall include all output
covered in this article. components external to the converting device, including contactors,
switches, bus bars, and other conductors. The current flow from the
FPN No. 1: See Part 4.27.5, for line frequency induction heating of pipelines and output circuit to ground under operating and ground-fault conditions
vessels.
shall be limited to a value that does not cause 50 volts or more to
ground to appear on any accessible part of the heating equipment and
6.65.1.2 Definitions.
its load. The output circuit shall be permitted to be isolated from
ground.
Converting Device. That part of the heating equipment that
converts input mechanical or electrical energy to the voltage, current,
6.65.1.7 Remote Control
and frequency suitable for the heating applicator. A converting device
shall consist of equipment using mains frequency, all static
(a) Multiple Control Points. Where multiple control points are
used for applicator energization, a means shall be provided and
interlocked so that the applicator can be energized from only one components required for a complete heating equipment installation
control point at a time. A means for de-energizing the applicator shall shall be guarded.
be provided at each control point.
6.65.2.2 Enclosures. The converting apparatus (including the dc line)
(b) Foot Switches. Switches operated by foot pressure shall be and high-frequency electric circuits (excluding the output circuits and
provided with a shield over the contact button to avoid accidental remote-control circuits) shall be completely contained within an
closing of a foot switch. enclosure or enclosures of noncombustible material.

6.65.1.10 Ampacity of Supply Conductors. The ampacity of supply 6.65.2.3 Panel Controls. All panel controls shall be of dead-front
conductors shall be determined by 6.65.10 (a) or 6.65.10(b). construction.

(a) Nameplate Rating. The ampacity of conductors supplying one 6.65.2.4 Access to Internal Equipment. Doors or detachable panels
or more pieces of equipment shall not be less than the sum of the shall be employed for internal access. Where doors are used giving
maneplate ratings for the largest group of machines capable of access to voltages from 500 to 1 000 volts ac or dc, either door locks
simultaneous operation, plus 100 percent of the standby currents of the shall be provided or interlocking shall be installed. Where doors are
remaining machines. Where standby currents are not given on the used giving access to voltages of over 1 000 volts ac or dc, either
nameplate, the nameplate rating shall be used as the standby current. mechanical lockouts with a disconnecting means to prevent access
until voltage is removed from the cubicle, or both door interlocking
(b) Motor-Generator Equipment. The ampacity of supply and mechanical door locks, shall be provided. Detachable panels not
conductors for motor generator equipment shall be determined in normally used for access to such parts shall be fastened in a manner
Accordance with Part 4.30.2. that will make them inconvenient to remove.

6.65.1.11 Overcurrent Protection. Overcurrent protection for the 6.65.2.5 Warning Labels or Signs. Warning labels or signs that read
heating equipment shall be provided as specified in Article 2.40. This “DANGER — HIGH VOLTAGE — KEEP OUT” shall be attached to
overcurrent protection shall be permitted to be provided separately or the equipment and shall be plainly visible where unauthorized persons
as a part of the equipment. might come in contact with energized parts, even when doors are open
or when panels are removed from compartments containing over 250
6.65.1.12 Disconnecting Means. A readily accessible disconnecting volts ac or dc.
means shall be provided to disconnect each heating equipment from its
supply circuit. The disconnecting means shall be located within sight 6.65.2.6 Capacitors. The time and means of discharge shall be in
from the controller or be capable of being locked in the open position. accordance with 4.60.1.6 for capacitors rated 600 volts, nominal, and
The rating of this disconnecting means shall not be less than the under. The time and means of discharge shall be in accordance with
nameplate rating of the heating equipment. Motor-generator 4.60.2.5 for capacitors rated over 600 volts, nominal. Capacitor
equipment shall comply with Part 4.30.9. The supply circuit internal pressure switches connected to a circuit-interrupter device
disconnecting means shall be permitted to serve as the heating shall be permitted for capacitor overcurrent protection.
equipment disconnecting means where only one heating equipment is
supplied. 6.65.2.7 Dielectric Heating Applicator Shielding. Protective cages
or adequate shielding shall be used to guard dielectric heating
6.65.2 Guarding, Grounding, and Labeling applicators. Interlock switches shall be used on all hinged access
doors, sliding panels, or other easy means of access to the applicator.
6.65.2.1 Component Interconnection. The interconnection All interlock switches shall be connected in such a manner as to
remove all power from the applicator when any one of the access 6.68.1.2 Definitions.
doors or panels is open.
Cell Line. An assembly of electrically interconnected electrolytic
6.65.2.8 Grounding and Bonding. Grounding or inter-unit bonding, cells supplied by a source of direct-current power.
or both, shall be used wherever required for circuit operation, for
limiting to a safe value radio frequency potentials between all exposed Cell Line Attachments and Auxiliary Equipment. As applied to
noncurrent-carrying parts of the equipment and earth ground, between this article, cell line attachments and auxiliary equipment include, but
all equipment parts and surrounding objects, and between such objects are not limited to, auxiliary tanks; process piping; duct work;
and earth ground. Such grounding and bonding shall be installed in structural supports; exposed cell line conductors; conduits and other
accordance with Parts 2.50.2 and 2.50.5. raceways; pumps, positioning equipment, and cell cutout or bypass
electrical devices. Auxiliary equipment includes tools, welding
FPN: Under certain conditions, contact between the object being heated and the machines, crucibles, and other portable equipment used for operation
applicator results in an unsafe condition, such as eruption of heated materials. This
unsafe condition may be prevented by grounding of the object being heated and and maintenance within the electrolytic cell line working zone.
ground detection. In the cell line working zone, auxiliary equipment includes the
exposed conductive surfaces of ungrounded cranes and crane-mounted
6.65.2.9 Marking. Each heating equipment shall be provided with a cell-servicing equipment.
nameplate giving the manufacturer’s name and model identification
and the following input data: line volts, frequency, number of phases, Electrically Connected. A connection capable of carrying current
maximum current, full-load kilovolt-amperes (kVA), and full-load as distinguished from connection through electromagnetic induction.
power factor. Additional data shall be permitted.
Electrolytic Cell. A tank or vat in which electrochemical reactions
are caused by applying electrical energy for the purpose of refining or
ARTICLE 6.68 — ELECTROLYTIC CELLS producing usable materials.

6.68.1.1 Scope. The provisions of this article apply to the installation Electrolytic Cell Line Working Zone. The cell line working zone
of the electrical components and accessory equipment of electrolytic is the space envelope wherein operation or maintenance is normally
cells, electrolytic cell lines, and process power supply for the performed on or in the vicinity of exposed energized surfaces of
production of aluminum, cadmium, chlorine, copper, fluorine, electrolytic cell lines or their attachments.
hydrogen peroxide, magnesium, sodium, sodium chlorate, and zinc.
Not covered by this article are cells used as a source of electric energy 6.68.1.3 Other Articles.
and for electroplating processes and cells used for the production of
hydrogen. (a) Lighting, Ventilating, Material Handling. Chapters 1 through
4 shall apply to services, feeders, branch circuits, and apparatus for
FPN No. 1: In general, any cell line or group of cell lines operated as a unit for the
production of a particular metal, gas, or chemical compound may differ from any
supplying lighting, ventilating, material handling, and the like, that are
other cell lines producing the same product because of variations in the particular outside the electrolytic cell line working zone.
raw materials used, output capacity, use of proprietary methods or process
practices, or other modifying factors to the extent that detailed Code requirements
become overly restrictive and do not accomplish the stated purpose of this Code.
(b) Systems Not Electrically Connected. Those elements of a cell
line power-supply system that are not electrically connected to the cell
FPN No. 2: For further information, see Standard for Electrical Safety Practices in supply system, such as the primary winding of a two-winding
Electrolytic Cell Line Working Zones, IEEE 463-1993.
transformer, the motor of a motor-generator set, feeders, branch
circuits, disconnecting means, motor controllers, and overload
protective equipment shall be required to comply with all applicable
provisions of this Code. 6.68.1.11 Direct-Current Cell Line Process Power Supply.

(c) Electrolytic Cell Lines. Electrolytic cell lines shall comply with (a) Not Grounded. The dc cell line process power-supply
the provisions of Chapters 1, 2, 3, and 4 except as amended in conductors shall not be required to be grounded.
6.68.1.3(c)(1), (c)(2), (c)(3), or (c)(4).
(b) Metal Enclosures Grounded. All metal enclosures of dc cell
(1) The electrolytic cell line conductors shall not be required to line process power-supply apparatus operating at a power-supply
comply with the provisions of Articles 1.10, 2.10, 2.15, 2.20, and potential between terminals of over 50 volts shall be grounded as
2.25. See 6.68.1.11. follows:
(2) Overcurrent protection of electrolytic cell dc process power
circuits shall not be required to comply with the requirements of (1) Through protective relaying equipment, or
Article 240. (2) By a minimum 60 mm2 copper grounding conductor or a
(3) Equipment located or used within the electrolytic cell line conductor of equal or greater conductance.
working zone or associated with the cell line dc power circuits shall
not be required to comply with the provisions of Article 2.50. (c) Grounding Requirements. The grounding connections required
(4) The electrolytic cells, cell line attachments, and the wiring of by 6.68.1.11(b) shall be installed in accordance with 2.50.1.8,
auxiliary equipments and devices within the cell line working zone 2.50.1.10, 2.50.1.12, 2.50.3.19, and 2.50.3.21.
shall not be required to comply with the provisions of Articles 1.10,
2.10, 2.15, 2.20, and 2.25. See 6.68.1.30. 6.68.1.12 Cell Line Conductors.

FPN: See 6.68.1.15 for equipment, apparatus, and structural component (a) Insulation and Material. Cell line conductors shall be either
grounding.
bare, covered, or insulated and of copper, aluminum, copper-clad
aluminum, steel, or other suitable material.
6.68.1.10 Cell Line Working Zone.
(b) Size. Cell line conductors shall be of such cross-sectional area
(a) Area Covered. The space envelope of the cell line working zone
that the temperature rise under maximum load conditions and at
shall encompass any space:
maximum ambient shall not exceed the safe operating temperature of
the conductor insulation or the material of the conductor supports.
(1) Within 2 400 mm above energized surfaces of electrolytic cell
lines or their energized attachments.
(c) Connections. Cell line conductors shall be joined by bolted,
(2) Below energized surfaces of electrolytic cell lines or their
welded, clamped, or compression connectors.
energized attachments, provided the headroom in the space beneath is
less than 2 400 mm.
6.68.1.13 Disconnecting Means.
(3) Within 1 000 mm horizontally from energized surfaces of
electrolytic cell lines or their energized attachments or from the space
(a) More than One Process Power Supply. Where more than one
envelope described in 6.68.1.10(a)(1) or (a)(2).
dc cell line process power supply serves the same cell line, a
disconnecting means shall be provided on the cell line circuit side of
(b) Area Not Covered. The cell line working zone shall not be
each power supply to disconnect it from the cell line circuit.
required to extend through or beyond walls, floors, roofs, partitions,
barriers, or the like.
(b) Removable Links or Conductors. Removable links or
removable conductors shall be permitted to be used as the
disconnecting means. 6.68.1.21 Power Supply Circuits and Receptacles for Portable
Electrical Equipment.
6.68.1.14 Shunting Means.
(a) Isolated Circuits. Circuits supplying power to ungrounded
(a) Partial or Total Shunting. Partial or total shunting of cell line receptacles for hand-held, cord-connected equipments shall be
circuit current around one or more cells shall be permitted. electrically isolated from any distribution system supplying areas other
than the cell line working zone and shall be ungrounded. Power for
(b) Shunting One or More Cells. The conductors, switches, or these circuits shall be supplied through isolating transformers.
combination of conductors and switches used for shunting one or more Primaries of such transformers shall operate at not more than 600 volts
cells shall comply with the applicable requirements of 6.68.1.12. between conductors and shall be provided with proper overcurrent
protection. The secondary voltage of such transformers shall not
6.68.1.15 Grounding. For equipment, apparatus, and structural exceed 300 volts between conductors, and all circuits supplied from
components that are required to be grounded by provisions of Article such secondaries shall be ungrounded and shall have an approved
6.68, the provisions of Article 2.50 shall apply, except a water pipe overcurrent device of proper rating in each conductor.
electrode shall not be required to be used. Any electrode or
combination of electrodes described in 2.50.3.3 shall be permitted. (b) Noninterchangeability. Receptacles and their mating plugs for
ungrounded equipment shall not have provision for a grounding
6.68.1.20 Portable Electrical Equipment. conductor and shall be of a configuration that prevents their use for
equipment required to be grounded.
(a) Portable Electrical Equipment Not to Be Grounded. The
frames and enclosures of portable electrical equipment used within the (c) Marking. Receptacles on circuits supplied by an isolating
cell line working zone shall not be grounded. transformer with an ungrounded secondary shall be a distinctive
configuration, distinctively marked, and shall not be used in any other
Exception No. 1: Where the cell line voltage does not exceed 200 volts location in the plant.
dc, these frames and enclosures shall be permitted to be grounded.
6.68.1.30 Fixed and Portable Electrical Equipment.
Exception No. 2: These frames and enclosures shall be permitted to be
grounded where guarded. (a) Electrical Equipment Not Required to Be Grounded.
Alternating-current systems supplying fixed and portable electrical
(b) Isolating Transformers. Electrically powered, hand-held, cord- equipments within the cell line working zone shall not be required to
connected portable equipment with ungrounded frames or enclosures be grounded.
used within the cell line working zone shall be connected to receptacle
circuits that have only ungrounded conductors such as a branch circuit (b) Exposed Conductive Surfaces Not Required to Be Grounded.
supplied by an isolating transformer with an ungrounded secondary. Exposed conductive surfaces, such as electrical equipment housings,
cabinets, boxes, motors, raceways, and the like, that are within the cell
(c) Marking. Ungrounded portable electrical equipment shall be line working zone shall not be required to be grounded.
distinctively marked and shall employ plugs and receptacles of a
configuration that prevents connection of this equipment to grounding (c) Wiring Methods. Auxiliary electrical equipment such as motors,
receptacles and that prevents inadvertent interchange of ungrounded transducers, sensors, control devices, and alarms, mounted on an
and grounded portable electrical equipments.
electrolytic cell or other energized surface, shall be connected to (3) Pendant pushbutton with nonconductive supporting means and
premises wiring systems by any of the following means. having nonconductive surfaces or ungrounded exposed conductive
surfaces
(1) Multiconductor hard usage cord. (4) Radio.
(2) Wire or cable in suitable raceways or metal or nonmetallic
cable trays. If metal conduit, cable tray, armored cable, or similar 6.68.1.40 Enclosures. General-purpose electrical equipment
metallic systems are used, they shall be installed with insulating enclosures shall be permitted where a natural draft ventilation system
breaks such that they will not cause a potentially hazardous electrical prevents the accumulation of gases.
condition.
ARTICLE 6.69 — ELECTROPLATING
(d) Circuit Protection. Circuit protection shall not be required for
control and instrumentation that are totally within the cell line working 6.69.1.1 Scope. The provisions of this article apply to the installation
zone. of the electrical components and accessory equipment that supply the
(e) Bonding. Bonding of fixed electrical equipment to the energized power and controls for electroplating, anodizing, electropolishing, and
conductive surfaces of the cell line, its attachments, or auxiliaries shall electrostripping. For purposes of this article, the term electroplating
be permitted. Where fixed electrical equipment is mounted on an shall be used to identify any or all of these processes.
energized conductive surface, it shall be bonded to that surface.
6.69.1.3 General. Equipment for use in electroplating processes shall
6.68.1.31 Auxiliary Nonelectric Connections. Auxiliary nonelectric be identified for such service.
connections, such as air hoses, water hoses, and the like, to an
electrolytic cell, its attachments, or auxiliary equipments shall not 6.69.1.5 Branch-Circuit Conductors. Branch-circuit conductors
have continuous conductive reinforcing wire, armor, braids, and the supplying one or more units of equipment shall have an ampacity of
like. Hoses shall be of a nonconductive material. not less than 125 percent of the total connected load. The ampacities
for busbars shall be in accordance with 366.10.
6.68.1.32 Cranes and Hoists.
6.69.1.6 Wiring Methods. Conductors connecting the electrolyte tank
(a) Conductive Surfaces to Be Insulated from Ground. The equipment to the conversion equipment shall be in accordance with
conductive surfaces of cranes and hoists that enter the cell line 6.69.1.6(a) and 6.69.1.6(b).
working zone shall not be required to be grounded. The portion of an
overhead crane or hoist that contacts an energized electrolytic cell or (a) Systems Not Exceeding 50 Volts Direct Current. Insulated
energized attachments shall be insulated from ground. conductors shall be permitted to be run without insulated support
provided they are protected from physical damage. Bare copper or
(b) Hazardous Electrical Conditions. Remote crane or hoist aluminum conductors shall be permitted where supported on
controls that may introduce hazardous electrical conditions into the insulators.
cell line working zone shall employ one or more of the following
systems: (b) Systems Exceeding 50 Volts Direct Current. Insulated
conductors shall be permitted to be run on insulated supports, provided
(1) Isolated and ungrounded control circuit in accordance with they are protected from physical damage. Bare copper or aluminum
6.68.1.21(a) conductors shall be permitted where supported on insulators and
(2) Nonconductive rope operator guarded against accidental contact up to the point of termination in
accordance with 1.10.2.2.
 associated electrical equipment including the logic controller(s) and
6.69.1.7 Warning Signs. Warning signs shall be posted to indicate the associated software or logic together with the machine actuators and
presence of bare conductors. sensors are considered as part of the industrial machine].

6.69.1.8 Disconnecting Means. Industrial Manufacturing System. A systematic array of one or

more industrial machines not portable by hand and that includes any
(a) More than One Power Supply. Where more than one power associated material handling, manipulating, gauging, measuring, or
supply serves the same dc system, a disconnecting means shall be inspection equipment.
provided on the dc side of each power supply.
6.70.1.3 Machine Nameplate Data.
(b) Removable Links or Conductors. Removable links or
removable conductors shall be permitted to be used as the (a) Permanent Nameplate. A permanent nameplate shall be
disconnecting means. attached to the control equipment enclosure or machine and shall be
plainly visible after installation. The nameplate shall include the
6.69.1.9 Overcurrent Protection. Direct-current conductors shall be following information:
protected from overcurrent by one or more of the following:
(1) Supply voltage, phase, frequency, and full-load current
(1) Fuses or circuit breakers, (2) Maximum ampere rating of the short-circuit and ground-fault
(2) A current-sensing device that operates a disconnecting means, protective device
or (3) Ampere rating of largest motor, from the motor nameplate, or
(3) Other approved means load
(4) Short circuit current rating of the machine industrial control
ARTICLE 6.70 — INDUSTRIAL MACHINERY panel based on one of the following:

6.70.1.1 Scope. This article covers the definition of, the nameplate a. Short circuit current rating of a listed and labeled machine
data for, and the size and overcurrent protection of supply conductors control enclosure or assembly.
to industrial machinery. b. Short circuit current rating established utilizing an approved
method.
FPN: For information on the workspace requirements for equipment containing
supply conductor terminals, see 1.10.2.1. For information on the workspace FPN: UL 508A-2001, Supplement SB, is an example of an approved method.
reqwuirements for machine power and control equipment, see Electrical Standard
for Industrial Machinery, NFPA 79-2002.
(5) Electrical diagram number(s) or the number of the index to the
6.70.1.2 Definitions. electrical drawings.

Industrial Machinery (Machine). A power-driven machine (or a The full-load current shown on the nameplate shall not be less
group of machines working together in a coordinated manner), not than the sum of the full-load currents required for all motors and other
portable by hand while working, that is used to process material by equipment that may be in operation at the same time under normal
cutting; forming; pressure; electrical, thermal, or optical techniques; conditions of use. Where unusual type loads, duty cycles, etc., require
lamination; or a combination of these processes. It can include oversized conductors, the required capacity shall be included in the
associated equipment used to transfer material or tooling (including marked “full-load current.” Where more than one incoming supply
fixtures), assemble/disassemble, inspect or test, or package. [The
circuit is to be provided, the nameplate shall state the above
information for each circuit. Exception: Where one or more instantaneous trip circuit breakers or
motor short-circuit protectors are used for motor branch-circuit short-
FPN: See 4.30.2.2(e) and 4.30.2.6 for duty cycle requirements. circuit and ground-fault protection as permitted by 4.30.4.2(c), the
procedure specified above for determining the maximum rating of the
(b) Overcurrent Protection. Where overcurrent protection is protective device for the circuit supplying the machine shall apply with
provided in accordance with 6.70.1.4(b), the machine shall be marked the following provision. For the purpose of the calculation, each
“overcurrent protection provided at machine supply terminals.” instantaneous trip circuit breaker or motor short-circuit protector
shall be assumed to have a rating not exceeding the maximum
6.70.1.4 Supply Conductors and Overcurrent Protection. percentage of motor full-load current permitted by Table 4.30.4.2 for
the type of machine supply circuit protective device employed.
(a) Size. The size of the supply conductor shall be such as to have an
ampacity not less than 125 percent of the full-load current rating of all Where no branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protective
resistance heating loads plus 125 percent of the full-load current rating device is provided with the machine, the rating or setting of the
of highest rated motor plus the sum of the full-load current ratings of overcurrent protective device shall be based on 4.30.4.2 and 4.30.4.3,
all other connected motors and apparatus that may be in operation at as applicable.
the same time.

FPN No. 1: See the 0 – 2 000-volt ampacity tables of Article 3.10 for ampacity of
conductors rated 600 volts and below. ARTICLE 6.75 — ELECTRICALLY DRIVEN OR
CONTROLLED IRRIGATION MACHINES
FPN No. 2: See 4.30.2.2(e) and 4.30.2.6 for duty cycle requirements.

6.75.1 General
(b) Disconnecting Means. A machine shall be considered as an
individual unit and therefore shall be provided with disconnecting 6.75.1.1 Scope. The provisions of this article apply to electrically
means. The disconnecting means shall be permitted to be supplied by driven or controlled irrigation machines, and to the branch circuits and
branch circuits protected by either fuses or circuit breakers. The controllers for such equipment.
disconnecting means shall not be required to incorporate overcurrent
protection. 6.75.1.2 Definitions.
(c) Overcurrent Protection. Where furnished as part of the Center Pivot Irrigation Machines. A multimotored irrigation
machine, overcurrent protection shall consist of a single circuit breaker machine that revolves around a central pivot and employs alignment
or set of fuses, the machine shall bear the marking required in switches or similar devices to control individual motors.
6.70.1.3, and the supply conductors shall be considered either as
feeders or taps as covered by 2.40.2.2. Collector Rings. An assembly of slip rings for transferring
The rating or setting of the overcurrent protective device for the electrical energy from a stationary to a rotating member.
circuit supplying the machine shall not be greater than the sum of the
largest rating or setting of the branch-circuit short-circuit and ground- Irrigation Machines. An electrically driven or controlled machine,
fault protective device provided with the machine, plus 125 percent of with one or more motors, not hand portable, and used primarily to
the full-load current rating of all resistance heating loads, plus the sum transport and distribute water for agricultural purposes.
of the full-load currents of all other motors and apparatus that may be
in operation at the same time.
6.75.1.3 Other Articles. These provisions are in addition to, or
amendatory of, the provisions of Article 430 and other articles in this (1) The manufacturer’s name, the rated voltage, the phase, and the
Code that apply except as modified in this article. frequency
(2) The current rating of the machine, and
6.75.1.4 Irrigation Cable. (3) The rating of the main disconnecting means and size of
overcurrent protection required
(a) Construction. The cable used to interconnect enclosures on the
structure of an irrigation machine shall be an assembly of stranded, 6.75.1.7 Equivalent Current Ratings. Where intermittent duty is not
insulated conductors with nonhygroscopic and nonwicking filler in a involved, the provisions of Article 4.30 shall be used for determining
core of moisture- and flame-resistant nonmetallic material overlaid ratings for controllers, disconnecting means, conductors, and the like.
with a metallic covering and jacketed with a moisture-, corrosion-, and Where irrigation machines have inherent intermittent duty, the
sunlight-resistant nonmetallic material. following determinations of equivalent current ratings in 6.75.1.7(a)
The conductor insulation shall be of a type listed in Table 3.10.1.13 and 6.75.1.7(b) shall be used.
for an operating temperature of 75ºC and for use in wet locations. The
core insulating material thickness shall not be less than 0.76 mm, and (a) Continuous-Current Rating. The equivalent continuous-
the metallic overlay thickness shall not be less than 0.20 mm. The current rating for the selection of branch-circuit conductors and
jacketing material thickness shall not be less than 1.27 mm. overcurrent protection shall be equal to 125 percent of the motor
A composite of power, control, and grounding conductors in the nameplate full-load current rating of the largest motor plus a quantity
cable shall be permitted. equal to the sum of each of the motor nameplate full-load current
ratings of all remaining motors on the circuit multiplied by the
(b) Alternate Wiring Methods. Installation of other listed cables maximum percent duty cycle at which they can continuously operate.
complying with the construction requirements of 6.75.1.4(a) shall be
permitted. (b) Locked-Rotor Current. The equivalent locked-rotor current
rating shall be equal to the numerical sum of the locked-rotor current
(c) Supports. Irrigation cable shall be secured by straps, hangers, or of the two largest motors plus 100 percent of the sum of the motor
similar fittings identified for the purpose and installed as not to nameplate full-load current ratings of all the remaining motors on the
damage the cable. Cable shall be supported at intervals not exceeding circuit.
1 200 mm.
6.75.1.8 Disconnecting Means.
(d) Fittings. Fittings shall be used at all points where irrigation
cable terminates. The fittings shall be designed for use with the cable (a) Main Controller. A controller that is used to start and stop the
and shall be suitable for the conditions of service. complete machine shall meet all of the following requirements:

6.75.1.5 More than Three Conductors in a Raceway or Cable. The (1) An equivalent continuous current rating not less than specified
signal and control conductors of a raceway or cable shall not be in 6.75.1.7(a) or 6.75.2.2(a)
counted for the purpose of derating the conductors as required in (2) A horsepower rating not less than the value from Table
3.10.1.15(b)(2)a. 4.30.13.11(a) and Table 4.30.13.11(b) based on the equivalent locked-
rotor current specified in 6.75.1.7(b) or 6.75.2.2(b).
6.75.1.6 Marking on Main Control Panel. The main control panel
shall be provided with a nameplate that shall give the following Exception: A listed molded case switch shall not require a horsepower
information: rating.
 (b) Main Disconnecting Means. The main disconnecting means for 6.75.1.11 Collector Rings.
the machine shall provide overcurrent protection and shall be at the
point of connection of electrical power to the machine or shall be (a) Transmitting Current for Power Purposes. Collector rings
visible and not more than 15 m from the machine and shall be readily shall have a current rating not less than 125 percent of the full-load
accessible and capable of being locked in the open position. This current of the largest device served plus the full-load current of all
disconnecting means shall have a horsepower and current rating not other devices served, or as determined from 6.75.1.7(a) or 6.75.2.2(a).
less than required for the main controller.
(b) Control and Signal Purposes. Collector rings for control and
Exception 1: Circuit breakers without marked horsepower ratings signal purposes shall have a current rating not less than 125 percent of
shall be permitted in accordance with 4.30.9.9. the full-load current of the largest device served plus the full-load
Exception 2: A listed fusible molded case switch without marked current of all other devices served.
horsepower ratings shall be permitted.
(c) Grounding. The collector ring used for grounding shall have a
(c) Disconnecting Means for Individual Motors and Controllers. current rating of not less than that sized in accordance with
A disconnecting means shall be provided to simultaneously disconnect 6.75.1.11(a).
all ungrounded conductors for each motor and controller and shall be
located as required by Part 4.30.9. The disconnecting means shall not (d) Protection. Collector rings shall be protected from the expected
be required to be readily accessible. environment and from accidental contact by means of a suitable
enclosure.
6.75.1.9 Branch-Circuit Conductors. The branch-circuit conductors
shall have an ampacity not less than specified in 6.75.1.7(a) or 6.75.1.12 Grounding. The following equipment shall be grounded:
6.75.2.2(a).
(1) All electrical equipment on the irrigation machine
6.75.1.10 Several Motors on One Branch Circuit. (2) All electrical equipment associated with the irrigation machine
(3) Metal junction boxes and enclosures, and
(a) Protection Required. Several motors, each not exceeding 2-hp (4) Control panels or control equipment that supply or control
rating, shall be permitted to be used on an irrigation machine circuit electrical equipment to the irrigation machine
protected at not more than 30 amperes at 600 volts, nominal, or less,
provided all of the following conditions are met. Exception: Grounding shall not be required on machines where all of
the following provisions are met.
(1) The full-load rating of any motor in the circuit shall not
exceed 6 amperes. (a) The machine is electrically controlled but not electrically
(2) Each motor in the circuit shall have individual overload driven.
protection in accordance with 4.30.3.2. (b) The control voltage is 30 volts or less.
(3) Taps to individual motors shall not be smaller than 2.0 mm2 (c) The control or signal circuits are current limited as specified
(1.6 mm dia.) copper and not more than 7 500 mm in length. in Chapter 9, Tables 11(a) and 11(b).

(b) Individual Protection Not Required. Individual branch-circuit 6.75.1.13 Methods of Grounding. Machines that require grounding
short-circuit protection for motors and motor controllers shall not be shall have a noncurrent-carrying equipment grounding conductor
required where the requirements of 6.75.1.10(a) are met. provided as an integral part of each cord, cable, or raceway. This
grounding conductor shall be sized not less than the largest supply (a) Continuous-Current Rating. The equivalent continuous-
conductor in each cord, cable, or raceway. Feeder circuits supplying current rating for the selection of branch-circuit conductors and
power to irrigation machines shall have an equipment grounding branch-circuit devices shall be equal to 125 percent of the motor
conductor sized according to Table 2.50.6.13. nameplate full-load current rating of the largest motor plus 60 percent
of the sum of the motor nameplate full-load current ratings of all
6.75.1.14 Bonding. Where electrical grounding is required on an remaining motors on the circuit.
irrigation machine, the metallic structure of the machine, metallic (b) Locked-Rotor Current. The equivalent locked-rotor current
conduit, or metallic sheath of cable shall be bonded to the grounding rating shall be equal to the numerical sum of two times the locked-
conductor. Metal-to-metal contact with a part that is bonded to the rotor current of the largest motor plus 80 percent of the sum of the
grounding conductor and the noncurrent-carrying parts of the machine motor nameplate full-load current ratings of all the remaining motors
shall be considered as an acceptable bonding path. on the circuit.

6.75.1.15 Lightning Protection. If an irrigation machine has a

stationary point, a grounding electrode system in accordance with Part ARTICLE 6.80 — SWIMMING POOLS, FOUNTAINS,
2.50.3, shall be connected to the machine at the stationary point for AND SIMILAR INSTALLATIONS
lightning protection.
6.80.1 General
6.75.1.16 Energy from More than One Source. Equipment within an
enclosure receiving electrical energy from more than one source shall 6.80.1.1 Scope. The provisions of this article apply to the construction
not be required to have a disconnecting means for the additional and installation of electrical wiring for and equipment in or adjacent to
source, provided that its voltage is 30 volts or less and it meets the all swimming, wading, therapeutic, and decorative pools, fountains,
requirements of Part 7.25.3. hot tubs, spas, and hydromassage bathtubs, whether permanently
installed or storable, and to metallic auxiliary equipment, such as
6.75.1.17 Connectors. External plugs and connectors on the pumps, filters, and similar equipment. The term body of water used
equipment shall be of the weatherproof type. throughout Part 6.80.1 applies to all bodies of water covered in this
Unless provided solely for the connection of circuits meeting the scope unless otherwise amended.
requirements of Part 7.25.3, external plugs and connectors shall be
constructed as specified in 2.50.6.15(a). 6.80.1.2 Definitions.

6.75.2 Center Pivot Irrigation Machines Cord- and Plug-Connected Lighting Assembly. A lighting
assembly consisting of a lighting fixture intended for installation in the
6.75.2.1 General. The provisions of Part 6.75.2 are intended to cover wall of a spa, hot tub, or storable pool, and a cord- and plug-connected
additional special requirements that are peculiar to center pivot transformer.
irrigation machines. See 6.75.1.2 for definition of Center Pivot
Irrigation Machines. Dry-Niche Luminaire (Lighting Fixture). A lighting fixture
intended for installation in the wall of a pool or fountain in a niche that
6.75.2.2 Equivalent Current Ratings. In order to establish ratings of is sealed against the entry of pool water.
controllers, disconnecting means, conductors, and the like, for the
inherent intermittent duty of center pivot irrigation machines, the Equipment, Fixed. Equipment that is fastened or otherwise secured
following determination shall be used. at a specific location.
 Equipment, Portable. Equipment that is actually moved or can of any nature. These units are primarily constructed for their aesthetic
easily be moved from one place to another in normal use. value and are not intended for swimming or wading.

Equipment, Stationary. Equipment that is not easily moved from Permanently Installed Swimming, Wading, and Therapeutic
one place to another place in normal use. Pools. Those that are constructed in the ground or partially in the
ground, and all others capable of holding water in a depth greater than
Forming Shell. A structure designed to support a wet-niche lighting 1 000 mm and all pools installed inside of a building, regardless of
fixture assembly and intended for mounting in a pool or fountain water depth, whether or not served by electrical circuits of any nature.
structure.
Pool. As used in this article, the term includes swimming, wading,
Fountain. As used in this article, the term includes fountains, and permanently installed therapeutic pools.
ornamental pools, display pools, and reflection pools. It does not
include drinking fountains. Pool Cover, Electrically Operated. Motor-driven equipment
designed to cover and uncover the water surface of a pool by means of
Hydromassage Bathtub. A permanently installed bathtub equipped a flexible sheet or rigid frame.
with a recirculating piping system, pump, and associated equipment. It
is designed so it can accept, circulate, and discharge water upon each Self-Contained Spa or Hot Tub. Factory-fabricated unit consisting
use. of a spa or hot tub vessel with all water-circulating, heating, and
control equipment integral to the unit. Equipment may include pumps,
Maximum Water Level. The highest level that water can reach air blowers, heaters, lights, controls, sanitizer generators, etc.
before it spills out.
No-Niche Luminaire (Lighting Fixture). A lighting fixture Self-Contained Therapeutic Tubs or Hydrotherapeutic Tanks. A
intended for installation above or below the water without a niche. factory-fabricated unit consisting of a therapeutic tub or
hydrotherapeutic tank with all water-circulating, heating, and control
Packaged Spa or Hot Tub Equipment Assembly. A factory- equipment integral to the unit. Equipment may include pumps, air
fabricated unit consisting of water-circulating, heating, and control blowers, heaters, light controls, sanitizer generators, etc.
equipment mounted on a common base, intended to operate a spa or
hot tub. Equipment may include pumps, air blowers, heaters, lights, Spa or Hot Tub. A hydromassage pool, or tub for recreational or
controls, sanitizer generators, etc. therapeutic use, not located in health care facilities, designed for
immersion of users, and usually having a filter, heater, and motor-
Packaged Therapeutic Tub or Hydrotherapeutic Tank driven blower. It may be installed indoors or outdoors, on the ground
Equipment Assembly. A factory-fabricated unit consisting of water- or supporting structure, or in the ground or supporting structure.
circulating, heating, and control equipment mounted on a common Generally, a spa or hot tub is not designed or intended to have its
base, intended to operate a therapeutic tub or hydrotherapeutic tank. contents drained or discharged after each use.
Equipment may include pumps, air blowers, heaters, lights, controls,
sanitizer generators, etc. Storable Swimming or Wading Pool. Those that are constructed
on or above the ground and are capable of holding water to a
Permanently Installed Decorative Fountains and Reflection maximum depth of 1 000 mm, or a pool with nonmetallic, molded
Pools. Those that are constructed in the ground, on the ground, or in a polymeric walls or inflatable fabric walls regardless of dimension.
building in such a manner that the fountain cannot be readily
disassembled for storage, whether or not served by electrical circuits Through-Wall Lighting Assembly. A lighting assembly intended
for installation above grade, on or through the wall of a pool, (1) Through-wall lighting assemblies and underwater luminaries
consisting of two interconnected groups of components separated by (lighting fixtures), other than those low-voltage systems listed for the
the pool wall. application without a grounding conductor.
(2) All electrical equipment located within 1 500 mm of the inside
Wet-Niche Luminaire (Lighting Fixture). A lighting fixture wall of the specified body of water
intended for installation in a forming shell mounted in a pool or (3) All electrical equipment associated with the recirculationg
fountain structure where the fixture will be completely surrounded by system of the specified body of water
water. (4) Junction boxes
(5) Transformer enclosures
6.80.1.3 Other Articles. Except as modified by this article, wiring and (6) Ground-fault circuit interrupters
equipment in or adjacent to pools and fountains shall comply with (7) Panelboards that are not part of the service equipment and that
other applicable provisions of this Code, including those provisions supply any electrical equipment associated with the specified body of
identified in Table 6.80.1.3. water.

6.80.1.7 Cord-and Plug-Connected Equipment. Fixed or stationary

Table 6.80.3 Other Articles equipment other than an underwater luminaire (lighting fixture) for a
Topic Section or Article permanently installed pool shall be permitted to be connected with a
Wiring Chapter 1-4 flexible cord to facilitate the removal or disconnection fro
Junction box support 3.14.2.9 maintenance or repair.
Rigid nonmetallic conduit 3.52.2.3
Audio Equipment 6.40.1, 6.40.2 (a) Length. For other than storable pools, the flexible cord shall not
Adjacent to pools and fountains 6.40.1.10 exceed 900 mm in length.
Underwater speakers*
*Underwater loudspeakers shall be installed in accordance with (b) Equipment Grounding. The flexbile cord shall have a copper
6.80.2.8(a). equipment grounding conductor sized in accordance with 2.50.6.13
but not smaller than 3.5 mm2. The cord shall terminate in a grounding-
type attachment plug.
6.80.1.4 Approval of Equipment. All electrical equipment installed
in the water, walls, or decks of pools, fountains, and similar (c) Construction. The equipment grounding conductors shall be
installations shall comply with the provisions of this article. connected to a fixed metal part of the assembly. The removable part
shall be mounted on or bonded to the fixed metal part.
6.80.1.5 Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters. Ground-fault circuit
interrupters (GFCIs) shall be self-contained units, circuit-breaker 6.80.1.8 Overhead Conductor Clearances. Overhead conductors
types, receptacle types, or other approved types. shall meet the clearance requirements in this section. Where a
minimum clearance from the water level is given, the measurement
6.80.1.6 Grounding. Electrical equipment shall be grounded in shall be taken from the maximum water level of the specified body of
accordance with Parts 2.50.5, 2.50.6, and 2.50.7 and connected by water.
wiring methods of Chapter 3, except as modified by this article. The
following equipment shall be grounded: (a) Power. With respect to service drop conductors and open
overhead wiring, swimming pool and similar installations shall
comply with the minimum clearances given in Table 6.80.1.8 and
illustrated in Figure 6.80.1.8.

FPN: Open overhead wiring as used in this article typically refers to conductor(s)
not in an enclosed raceway.

Figure 6.80.1.8 Clearances from Pool Structures

(b) Communication Systems. Communication, radio, and

television coaxial cables within the scope of Articles 8.0 through 8.20
shall be permitted at a height of not less than 3 000 mm above
swimming and wading pools, diving structures, and observation
stands, towers, or platforms.
(c) Network-Powered Broadband Communications Systems. The
minimum clearances fro overhead network-powered broadband
communications systems conductors from pools or fountains shall
comply with the provisions in Table 6.80.1.8 for conductors operating
at 0 to 750 volts to ground.

6.80.1.9 Electric Pool Water Heaters. All electric pool water heaters
shall have the heating elements subdivided into loads not exceeding
48 amperes and protected at not over 60 amperes. The ampacity of the
branch-circuit conductors and the rating or setting of overcurrent
protective devices shall not be less than 125 percent of the total
nameplate-rated load.
 Table 6.80.1.8 Overhead Conductor Clearances
Insulated Supply or
Service Drop Cables, 0 –
750 Volts to Ground,
Supported on and Cabled All Other Supply or Service-Drop Conductors
Clearance Parameters Together with an Voltage to Ground
Effectively Grounded Bare
Messenger or Effectively
Grounded Neutral
Conductor 0 through 15 kV Over 15 through 50 kV
Clearance in any
direction to the water
level, edge of water
A. surface, base of diving 6 900 mm 7 500 mm 8 000 mm
platform, or
permanently anchored
raft
Clearance in any
B. direction to the diving 4 400 mm 5 200 mm 5 500 mm
platform or tower
Horizontal limit of
clearance measured This limit shall extend to the outer edge of the structures listed in A and B of this
C.
from inside wall of the table but not to less than 3 000 mm
pool
6.80.1.10 Underground Wiring Location. Underground wiring shall 6.80.2.2. Motors.
not be permitted under the pool or within the area extending 1 500 mm
horizontally from the inside wall of the pool unless this wiring is (a) Wiring Methods.
necessary to supply pool equipment permitted by this article. Where
space limitations prevent wiring from being routed 1 500 mm or more (1) General. The branch circuits for pool-associated motors shall
from the pool, such wiring shall be permitted where installed in rigid be installed in rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit, rigid
metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit, or a nonmetallic raceway nonmetallic conduit, or Type MC cable listed for the location. Other
system. All metal conduit shall be corrosion resistant and suitable for wiring methods and materials shall be permitted in specific locations
the location. The minimum burial depth shall be as given in Table or applications as covered in this section. Any wiring method
6.80.1.10. employed shall contain an insulated copper equipment grounding
conductor sized in accordance with 2.50.6.13 but not smaller than 3.5
mm2.
Table 6.80.1.10 Minimum Burial Depths (2) On or Within Buildings. Where installed on or within
Minimum Burial buildings, electrical metallic tubing shall be permitted.
Wiring Method (3) Flexible Connections. Where necessary to employ flexible
(mm)
Rigid metal conduit 150 connections at or adjacent to the motor, liquidtight flexible metal or
Intermediate metal conduit 150 nonmetallic conduit with approved fittings shall be permitted.
Nonmetallic raceways listed for direct burial 450 (4) One-Family Dwellings. In the interior of one-family
without concrete encasement dwellings, or in the interior of accessory buildings associated with a
Other approved raceways* 450 one-family dwelling, any of the wiring methods recognized in Chapter
*Raceways approved for burial only where concrete encased shall require a concrete 3 of this Code that comply with the provisions of this paragraph shall
envelope not less than 50 mm thick. be permitted. Where run in a cable assembly, the equipment grounding
conductor shall be permitted to be uninsulated, but it shall be enclosed
within the outer sheath of the cable assembly.
(5) Cord-and-Plug Connections. Pool-associated motors shall be
6.80.1.11 Equipment Rooms and Pits. Electric equipment shall not permitted to employ cord-and-plug connections. The flexible cord
be installed in rooms or pits that do not have adequate drainage to shall not exceed 900 mm in length. The flexible cord shall include an
prevent water accumulation during normal operation or filter equipment grounding conductor sized in accordance with 2.50.6.13
maintenance. and shall terminate in a grounding-type attachment plug.

6.80.1.12 Maintenance Disconnecting Means. One or more means to (b) Double Insulated Pool Pumps. A listed cord-and-plug-
disconnect all ungrounded conductors shall be provided for all connected pool pump incorporating an approved system of double
utilization equipment other than lighting. Each means shall be readily insulation that provides a means for grounding only the internal and
accessible and within sight from its equipment. nonaccessible, non–current-carrying metal parts of the pump shall be
connected to any wiring method recognized in Chapter 3 that is
6.80.2 Permanently Installed Pools suitable for the location. Where the bonding grid is connected to the
equipment grounding conductor of the motor circuit in accordance
6.80.2.1General. Electrical installations at permanently installed pools with the second paragraph of 6.80.2.7(b)(4), the branch circuit wiring
shall comply with the provisions of Parts 6.80.1 and 6.80.2 of this shall comply with 6.80.2.2(a).
article.
6.80.2.3 Area Lighting, Receptacles, and Equipment. (b) Luminaires (Lighting Fixtures), Lighting Outlets, and
Ceiling-Suspended (Paddle) Fans.
(a) Receptacles.
(1) New Outdoor Installation Clearances. In outdoor pool areas,
(1) Circulation and Sanitation System, Location. Receptacles luminaires (lighting fixtures), lighting outlets, and ceiling-suspended
that provide power for water-pump motors or for other loads directly (paddle) fans installed above the pool or the area extending 1 500 mm
related to the circulation and sanitation system shall be located at least horizontally from the inside walls of the pool shall be installed at a
3 000 mm from the inside walls of the pool, or not less than 1 500 mm height not less than 3 600 mm above the maximum water level of the
from the inside walls of the pool if they meet all of the following pool.
conditions: (2) Indoor Clearances. For installations in indoor pool areas, the
a. Consist of single receptacles clearances shall be the same as for outdoor areas unless modified as
b. Employ a locking configuration provided in this paragraph. If the branch circuit supplying the
c. Are of the grounding type equipment is protected by a ground-fault circuit interrupter, the
d. Have GFCI protection following equipment shall be permitted at a height not less than 2 300
mm above the maximum pool water level:
(2) Other Receptacles, Location. Other receptacles shall be not
less than 3 000 mm from the inside walls of a pool. a. Totally enclosed luminaires (fixtures)
(3) Dwelling Unit(s). Where a permanently installed pool is b. Ceiling-suspended (paddle) fans identified for use beneath
installed at a dwelling unit(s), no fewer than one 230-volt 15- or 20- ceiling structures such as provided on porches or patios
ampere receptacle on a general-purpose branch circuit shall be located
not less than 3 000 m from, and not more than 6 000 mm from, the (3) Existing Installations. Existing luminaires (lighting fixtures)
inside wall of the pool. This receptacle shall be located not more than and lighting outlets located less than 1 500 mm measured horizontally
2 000 mm above the floor, platform, or grade level serving the pool. from the inside walls of a pool shall be not less than 1 500 mm above
(4) Restricted Space. Where a pool is within 3 000 mm of a the surface of the maximum water level, shall be rigidly attached to
dwelling and the dimensions of the lot preclude meeting the required the existing structure, and shall be protected by a ground-fault circuit
clearances, not more than one receptacle outlet shall be permitted if interrupter.
not less than 1 500 mm measured horizontally from the inside wall of (4) GFCI Protection in Adjacent Areas. Luminaires (lighting
the pool. fixtures), lighting outlets, and ceiling-suspended (paddle) fans
(5) GFCI Protection. All 15- and 20-ampere, single-phase, 230- installed in the area extending between 1 500 mm and 3 000 mm
volt receptacles located within 6 000 mm of the inside walls of a pool horizontally from the inside walls of a pool shall be protected by a
shall be protected by a ground-fault circuit interrupter. Receptacles ground-fault circuit interrupter unless installed not less than 1 500 mm
that supply pool pump motors and that are rated 15 or 20 amperes, 125 above the maximum water level and rigidly attached to the structure
volts through 250 volts, single phase, shall be provided with GFCI adjacent to or enclosing the pool.
protection. (5) Cord-and-Plug-Connected Luminaires (Lighting Fixtures).
(6) Measurements. In determining the dimensions in this section Cord-and-plug-connected luminaires (lighting fixtures) shall comply
addressing receptacle spacings, the distance to be measured shall be with the requirements of 6.80.1.7 where installed within 4 900 mm of
the shortest path the supply cord of an appliance connected to the any point on the water surface, measured radially.
receptacle would follow without piercing a floor, wall, ceiling,
doorway with hinged or sliding door, window opening, or other (c) Switching Devices. Switching devices shall be located at least 1
effective permanent barrier. 500 mm horizontally from the inside walls of a pool unless separated
from the pool by a solid fence, wall, or other permanent barrier.
Alternatively, a switch that is listed as being acceptable for use within (6) Bottom-Mounted Luminaires (Fixtures). A luminaire
1 500 mm shall be permitted. (lighting fixture) facing upward shall have the lens adequately guarded
to prevent contact by any person.
6.80.2.4 Underwater Luminaires (Lighting Fixtures). This section (7) Dependence on Submersion. Luminaires (fixtures) that
covers all luminaires (lighting fixtures) installed below the normal depend on submersion for safe operation shall be inherently protected
water level of the pool. against the hazards of overheating when not submerged.
(8) Compliance. Compliance with these requirements shall be
(a) General. obtained by the use of a listed underwater luminaire (lighting fixture)
and by installation of a listed ground-fault circuit interrupter in the
(1) Luminaire (Fixture) Design, Normal Operation. The design branch circuit or a listed transformer for luminaires (fixtures)
of an underwater luminaire (lighting fixture) supplied from a branch operating at not more than 15 volts.
circuit either directly or by way of a transformer meeting the
requirements of this section shall be such that, where the luminaire (b) Wet-Niche Luminaires (Fixtures).
(fixture) is properly installed without a ground-fault circuit interrupter,
there is no shock hazard with any likely combination of fault (1) Forming Shells. Forming shells shall be installed for the
conditions during normal use (not relamping). mounting of all wet-niche underwater luminaires (fixtures) and shall
(2) Transformers. Transformers used for the supply of be equipped with provisions for conduit entries. Metal parts of the
underwater luminaires (fixtures), together with the transformer luminaire (fixture) and forming shell in contact with the pool water
enclosure, shall be listed as a swimming pool and spa transformer. The shall be of brass or other approved corrosion-resistant metal. All
transformer shall be an isolated winding type with an ungrounded forming shells used with nonmetallic conduit systems, other than those
secondary that has a grounded metal barrier between the primary and that are part of a listed low-voltage lighting system not requiring
secondary windings. grounding, shall include provisions for terminating an 8 mm2 copper
(3) GFCI Protection, Relamping. A ground-fault circuit conductor.
interrupter shall be installed in the branch circuit supplying luminaires (2) Wiring Extending Directly to the Forming Shell. Conduit
(fixtures) operating at more than 15 volts such that there is no shock shall be installed from the forming shell to a junction box or other
hazard during relamping. The installation of the ground-fault circuit enclosure conforming to the requirements in 6.80.2.5. Conduit shall be
interrupter shall be such that there is no shock hazard with any likely rigid metal, intermediate metal, liquidtight flexible nonmetallic, or
fault-condition combination that involves a person in a conductive rigid nonmetallic.
path from any ungrounded part of the branch circuit or the luminaire
(fixture) to ground. a. Metal Conduit. Metal conduit shall be approved and shall be
(4) Voltage Limitation. No luminaires (lighting fixtures) shall be of brass or other approved corrosion-resistant metal.
installed for operation on supply circuits over 150 volts between b. Nonmetallic Conduit. Where a nonmetallic conduit is used,
conductors. an 8 mm2 insulated solid or stranded copper bonding jumper shall be
(5) Location, Wall-Mounted Luminaires (Fixtures). Luminaires installed in this conduit unless a listed low-voltage lighting system not
(lighting fixtures) mounted in walls shall be installed with the top of requiring grounding is used. The bonding jumper shall be terminated
the luminaire (fixture) lens not less than 450 mm below the normal in the forming shell, junction box or transformer enclosure, or ground-
water level of the pool, unless the luminaire (lighting fixture) is listed fault circuit-interrupter enclosure. The termination of the 8 mm2
and identified for use at lesser depths. No luminaire (fixture) shall be bonding jumper in the forming shell shall be covered with, or
installed less than 100 mm below the normal water level of the pool. encapsulated in, a listed potting compound to protect the connection
from the possible deteriorating effect of pool water.
 (3) Equipment Grounding Provisions for Cords. Wet-niche (fixture) shall meet the construction requirements of 6.80.2.4(b)(3) and
luminaires (lighting fixtures) that are supplied by a flexible cord or be installed in accordance with the requirements of 6.80.1.2(b). Where
cable shall have all exposed non–current-carrying metal parts connection to a forming shell is specified, the connection shall be to
grounded by an insulated copper equipment grounding conductor that the mounting bracket.
is an integral part of the cord or cable. This grounding conductor shall
be connected to a grounding terminal in the supply junction box, (e) Through-Wall Lighting Assembly. A through-wall lighting
transformer enclosure, or other enclosure. The grounding conductor assembly shall be equipped with a threaded entry or hub, or a
shall not be smaller than the supply conductors and not smaller than 16 nonmetallic hub, for the purpose of accommodating the termination of
AWG. the supply conduit. A through-wall lighting assembly shall meet the
(4) Luminaire (Fixture) Grounding Terminations. The end of construction requirements of 6.80.2.4(b)(3) and be installed in
the flexible-cord jacket and the flexible-cord conductor terminations accordance with the requirements of 6.80.2.4. Where connection to a
within a luminaire (fixture) shall be covered with, or encapsulated in, a forming shell is specified, the connection shall be to the conduit
suitable potting compound to prevent the entry of water into the termination point.
luminaire (fixture) through the cord or its conductors. In addition, the
grounding connection within a luminaire (fixture) shall be similarly (f) Branch-Circuit Wiring.
treated to protect such connection from the deteriorating effect of pool
water in the event of water entry into the luminaire (fixture). (1) Wiring Methods. Branch-circuit wiring on the supply side of
(5) Luminaire (Fixture) Bonding. The luminaire (fixture) shall enclosures and junction boxes connected to conduits run to wet-niche
be bonded to and secured to the forming shell by a positive locking and no-niche luminaires (fixtures), and the field wiring compartments
device that ensures a low-resistance contact and requires a tool to of dry-niche luminaires (fixtures), shall be installed using rigid metal
remove the luminaire (fixture) from the forming shell. Bonding shall conduit, intermediate metal conduit, liquidtight flexible nonmetallic
not be required for luminaires (fixtures) that are listed for the conduit, or rigid nonmetallic conduit. Where installed on buildings,
application and have no non–current-carrying metal parts. electrical metallic tubing shall be permitted, and where installed within
(6) Servicing. All luminaires shall be removable from the water buildings, electrical nonmetallic tubing, Type MC cable, or electrical
for relamping or normal maintenance. Luminaires shall be installed in metallic tubing shall be permitted.
such a manner that personnel can reach the luminaire for relamping,
maintenance, or inspection while on the deck or equivalently dry Exception: Where connecting to transformers for pool lights,
location. liquidtight flexible metal conduit or liquidtight flexible nonmetallic
conduit shall be permitted. The length shall not exceed 1 800 mm for
(c) Dry-Niche Luminaires (Fixtures). any one length or exceed 3 000 mm in total length used. Liquidtight
flexible nonmetallic conduit, Type B (LFNC-B), shall be permitted in
(1) Construction. A dry-niche luminaire (lighting fixture) shall be lengths longer than 1 800 mm.
provided with a provision for drainage of water and a means for
accommodating one equipment grounding conductor for each conduit (2) Equipment Grounding. Through-wall lighting assemblies,
entry. wet-niche, dry-niche, or no-niche luminaires (lighting fixtures) shall
(2) Junction Box. A junction box shall not be required but, if be connected to an insulated copper equipment grounding conductor
used, shall not be required to be elevated or located as specified in installed with the circuit conductors. The equipment grounding
6.80.2.5(a)(2) if the luminaire (fixture) is specifically identified for the conductor shall be installed without joint or splice except as permitted
purpose. in (f)(2)a and (f)(2)b. The equipment grounding conductor shall be
sized in accordance with Table 2.50.6.13 but shall not be smaller than
(d) No-Niche Luminaires (Fixtures). A no-niche luminaire 3.5 mm2.
 luminaire (fixture) shall meet the requirements of this section.
Exception: An equipment grounding conductor between the wiring
chamber of the secondary winding of a transformer and a junction box (1) Construction. The junction box shall be listed as a swimming
shall be sized in accordance with the overcurrent device in this circuit. pool junction box and shall comply with the following conditions:

a. If more than one underwater luminaire (lighting fixture) is a. Be equipped with threaded entries or hubs or a nonmetallic
supplied by the same branch circuit, the equipment grounding hub.
conductor, installed between the junction boxes, transformer b. Be compromised of copper, brass, suitable plastic, or other
enclosures, or other enclosures in the supply circuit to wet-niche approved corrosion-resistant material.
luminaires (fixtures), or between the field-wiring compartments of c. Be provided with electrical continuity between every
dry-niche luminaires (fixtures), shall be permitted to be terminated on connected metal conduit and the grounding terminals by means of
grounding terminals. copper, brass, or other approved corrosion-resistant metal that is
b. If the underwater luminaire (lighting fixture) is supplied from integral with the box.
a transformer, ground-fault circuit interrupter, clock-operated switch,
or a manual snap switch that is located between the panelboard and a (2) Installation. Where the luminaire (fixture) operates over 15
junction box connected to the conduit that extends directly to the volts, the junction box location shall comply with (a)(2)a and (a)(2)b.
underwater luminaire (lighting fixture), the equipment grounding Where the luminaire (fixture) operates at less than 15 volts, the
conductor shall be permitted to terminate on grounding terminals on junction box location shall be permitted to comply with (a)(2)c.
the transformer, ground-fault circuit interrupter, clock-operated switch
enclosure, or an outlet box used to enclose a snap switch. a. Vertical Spacing. The junction box shall be located not less
than 100 mm, measured from the inside of the bottom of the box,
(3) Conductors. Conductors on the load side of a ground-fault above the ground level, or pool deck, or not less than 200 mm above
circuit interrupter or of a transformer, used to comply with the the maximum pool water level, whichever provides the greater
provisions of 6.80.2.4(a)(8), shall not occupy raceways, boxes, or elevation.
enclosures containing other conductors unless one of the following b. Horizontal Spacing. The junction box shall be located not
conditions applies: less than 1 200 mm from the inside wall of the pool, unless separated
from the pool by a solid fence, wall, or other permanent barrier.
a. The other conductors are protected by ground-fault circuit c. Flush Deck Box. If used on a lighting system operating at 15
interrupters. volts or less, a flush deck box shall be permitted if both of the
b. The other conductors are grounding conductors. following apply:
c. The other conductors are supply conductors to a feed-through
type ground-fault circuit interrupter. 1. An approved potting compound is used to fill the box to
d. Ground-fault circuit interrupters shall be permitted in a prevent the entrance of moisture.
panelboard that contains circuits protected by other than ground-fault 2. The flush deck box is located not less than 1 200 mm from
circuit interrupters. the inside wall of the pool.

6.80.2.5 Junction Boxes and Enclosures for Transformers or (b) Other Enclosures. An enclosure for a transformer, ground-fault
Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters. circuit interrupter, or a similar device connected to a conduit that
extends directly to a forming shell or mounting bracket of a no-niche
(a) Junction Boxes. A junction box connected to a conduit that luminaire (fixture) shall meet the requirements of this section.
extends directly to a forming shell or mounting bracket of a no-niche
 (1) Construction. The enclosure shall be listed and labeled for the (f) Grounding. The junction box, transformer enclosure, or other
purpose and meet the following requirements: enclosure in the supply circuit to a wet-niche or no-niche luminaire
(lighting fixture) and the field-wiring chamber of a dry-niche
a. Equipped with threaded entries or hubs or a nonmetallic hub luminaire (lighting fixture) shall be grounded to the equipment
b. Comprised of copper, brass, suitable plastic, or other grounding terminal of the panelboard. This terminal shall be directly
approved corrosion-resistant material connected to the panelboard enclosure.
c. Provided with an approved seal, such as duct seal at the
conduit connection, that prevents circulation of air between the 6.80.2.6 Feeders. These provisions shall apply to any feeder on the
conduit and the enclosures supply side of panelboards supplying branch circuits for pool
d. Provided with electrical continuity between every connected equipment covered in 6.80.2 and on the load side of the service
metal conduit and the grounding terminals by means of copper, brass, equipment or the source of a separately derived system.
or other approved corrosion-resistant metal that is integral with the
box (a) Wiring Methods. Feeders shall be installed in rigid metal
conduit, intermediate metal conduit, liquidtight, flexible nonmetallic
(2) Installation. conduit, or rigid nonmetallic conduit. Electrical metallic tubing shall
be permitted where installed on or within a building, and electrical
a. Vertical Spacing. The enclosure shall be located not less than nonmetallic tubing shall be permitted where installed within a
100 mm, measured from the inside of the bottom of the box, above the building.
ground level, or pool deck, or not less than 200 mm above the
maximum pool water level, whichever provides the greater elevation. Exception: An existing feeder between an existing remote panelboard
b. Horizontal Spacing. The enclosure shall be located not less and service equipment shall be permitted to run in flexible metal
than 1 200 mm from the inside wall of the pool, unless separated from conduit or an approved cable assembly that includes an equipment
the pool by a solid fence, wall, or other permanent barrier. grounding conductor within its outer sheath. The equipment
grounding conductor shall comply with 2.50.2.5(a)(5).
(c) Protection. Junction boxes and enclosures mounted above the
grade of the finished walkway around the pool shall not be located in (b) Grounding. An equipment grounding conductor shall be
the walkway unless afforded additional protection, such as by location installed with the feeder conductors between the grounding terminal of
under diving boards, adjacent to fixed structures, and the like. the pool equipment panelboard and the grounding terminal of the
applicable service equipment or source of a separately derived system.
(d) Grounding Terminals. Junction boxes, transformer enclosures, For other than (1) existing feeders covered in 6.80.2.6(a), Exception,
and ground-fault circuit-interrupter enclosures connected to a conduit or (2) feeders to separate buildings that do not utilize an insulated
that extends directly to a forming shell or mounting bracket of a no- equipment grounding conductor in accordance with 6.80.2.6(b)(2), this
niche luminaire (fixture) shall be provided with a number of grounding equipment grounding conductor shall be insulated.
terminals that shall be at least one more than the number of conduit
entries. (1) Size. This conductor shall be sized in accordance with
2.50.6.13 but not smaller than 3.5 mm2. On separately derived
(e) Strain Relief. The termination of a flexible cord of an systems, this conductor shall be sized in accordance with Table
underwater lighting fixture within a junction box, transformer 2.50.3.17 but not smaller than 8 mm2.
enclosure, ground-fault circuit interrupter, or other enclosure shall be (2) Separate Buildings. A feeder to a separate building or
provided with a strain relief. structure shall be permitted to supply swimming pool equipment
branch circuits, or feeders supplying swimming pool equipment
branch circuits, if the grounding arrangements in the separate building including electric motors, shall be bonded. Accessible metal parts of
meet the requirements in 250.32(b)(1). Where installed in other than listed equipment incorporating an approved system of double
existing feeders covered in 6.80.2.6(a), Exception, a separate insulation and providing a means for grounding internal nonaccessible,
equipment grounding conductor shall be an insulated conductor. non–current-carrying metal parts shall not be bonded by a direct
connection to the equipotential bonding grid. The means for grounding
6.80.2.7 Equipotential Bonding. internal nonaccessible, non–current carrying metal parts shall be an
equipment grounding conductor run with the power-supply conductors
(a) Performance. The equipotential bonding required by this in the case of motors supplied with a flexible cord, or a grounding
section shall be installed to eliminate voltage gradients in the pool area terminal in the case of motors intended for permanent connection.
as prescribed. Where a double-insulated water-pump motor is installed under the
provisions of this rule, a solid 8 mm2 copper conductor that is of
2
FPN: The 8 mm or larger solid copper bonding conductor shall not be required to sufficient length to make a bonding connection to a replacement motor
be extended or attached to any remote panelboard, service equipment, or any
electrode. shall be extended from the bonding grid to an accessible point in the
motor vicinity. Where there is no connection between the swimming
(b) Bonded Parts. The parts specified in 6.80.2.7(b)(1) through pool bonding grid and the equipment grounding system for the
(b)(5) shall be bonded together. premises, this bonding conductor shall be connected to the equipment
grounding conductor of the motor circuit.
(1) Metallic Structural Components. All metallic parts of the (5) Metal Wiring Methods and Equipment. Metal-sheathed
pool structure, including the reinforcing metal of the pool shell, coping cables and raceways, metal piping, and all fixed metal parts that are
stones, and deck, shall be bonded. The usual steel tie wires shall be within the following distances of the pool, except those separated from
considered suitable for bonding the reinforcing steel together, and the pool by a permanent barrier, shall be bonded.
welding or special clamping shall not be required. These tie wires shall
be made tight. If reinforcing steel is effectively insulated by an a. Within 1 500 mm horizontally of the inside walls of the pool
encapsulating nonconductive compound at the time of manufacture b. Within 3 700 mm measured vertically above the maximum
and installation, it shall not be required to be bonded. Where water level of the pool, or any observation stands, towers, or
reinforcing steel of the pool shell or the reinforcing steel of coping platforms, or any diving structures
stones and deck is encapsulated with a nonconductive compound or
another conductive material is not available, provisions shall be made (c) Equipotential Bonding Grid. The parts specified in 6.80.2.7(b)
for an alternative means to eliminate voltage gradients that would shall be connected to an equipotential bonding grid with a solid copper
otherwise be provided by unencapsulated, bonded reinforcing steel. conductor, insulated, covered, or bare, not smaller than 8 mm2 or rigid
(2) Underwater Lighting. All metal forming shells and mounting metal conduit of brass or other identified corrosion-resistant metal
brackets of no-niche luminaires (fixtures) shall be bonded unless a conduit. Connection shall be made by exothermic welding or by listed
listed low-voltage lighting system with nonmetallic forming shells not pressure connectors or clamps that are labeled as being suitable for the
requiring bonding is used. purpose and are of stainless steel, brass, copper, or copper alloy. The
(3) Metal Fittings. All metal fittings within or attached to the pool equipotential common bonding grid shall extend under paved walking
structure shall be bonded. Isolated parts that are not over 100 mm in surfaces for 1 000 mm horizontally beyond the inside walls of the pool
any dimension and do not penetrate into the pool structure more than and shall be permitted to be any of the following:
25 mm shall not require bonding.
(4) Electrical Equipment. Metal parts of electrical equipment (1) Structural Reinforcing Steel. The structural reinforcing steel
associated with the pool water circulating system, including pump of a concrete pool where the reinforcing rods are bonded together by
motors and metal parts of equipment associated with pool covers, the usual steel tie wires or the equivalent
 (2) Bolted or Welded Metal Pools. The wall of a bolted or (2) Wiring Methods. Rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal
welded metal pool conduit of brass or other identified corrosion-resistant metal or rigid
(3) Alternate Means. This system shall be permitted to be nonmetallic conduit shall extend from the forming shell to a suitable
constructed as specified in (a) through (c): junction box or other enclosure as provided in 6.80.2.5. Where rigid
nonmetallic conduit is used, a 8.0 mm2 (3.2 mm dia.) insulated copper
a. Materials and Connections. The grid shall be constructed of conductor shall be installed in this conduit with provisions for
minimum 8 mm2 bare solid copper conductors. Conductors shall be terminating in the forming shell and the junction box. The termination
bonded to each other at all points of crossing. Connections shall be of the 8.0 mm2 (3.2 mm dia.) conductor in the forming shell shall be
made as required by 6.80.2.7(d). covered with, or encapsulated in, a suitable potting compound to
b. Grid Structure. The equipotential bonding grid shall cover protect such connection from the possible deteriorating effect of pool
the contour of the pool and the pool deck extending 1 000 mm water.
horizontally from the inside walls of the pool. The equipotential (3) Forming Shell and Metal Screen. The forming shell and
bonding grid shall be arranged in a 300 mm by 300 mm network of metal screen shall be of brass or other approved corrosion-resistant
conductors in a uniformly spaced perpendicular grid pattern with metal. All forming shells shall include provisions for terminating an 8
tolerance of 100 mm. mm2 copper conductor.
c. Securing. The below-grade grid shall be secured within or
under the pool and deck media. (b) Electrically Operated Pool Covers.

(d) Connections. Where structural reinforcing steel or the walls of (1) Motors and Controllers. The electric motors, controllers, and
bolted or welded metal pool structures are used as an equipotential wiring shall be located at 1 500 mm from the inside wall of the pool
bonding grid for nonelectrical parts, the connections shall be made in unless separated from the pool by a wall, cover, or other permanent
accordance with 2.50.1.8. barrier. Electric motors installed below grade level shall be of the
totally enclosed type. The device that controls the operation of the
(e) Pool Water Heaters. For pool water heaters rated at more than motor for an electrically operated pool cover shall be located such that
50 amperes that have specific instructions regarding bonding and the operator has full view of the pool.
grounding, only those parts designated to be bonded shall be bonded,
and only those parts designated to be grounded shall be grounded. FPN No. 1: For cabinets installed in damp and wet locations, see 3.12.1.2(a).
FPN No. 2: For switches or circuit breakers installed in wet locations, see 4.4.1.4.
FPN No. 3: For protection against liquids, see 4.30.1.11.
6.80.2.8 Specialized Pool Equipment
(2) Protection. The electric motor and controller shall be
(a) Underwater Audio Equipment. All underwater audio connected to a circuit protected by a ground-fault circuit interrupter.
equipment shall be identified for the purpose.
(c) Deck Area Heating. These provisions of this section shall apply
(1) Speakers. Each speaker shall be mounted in an approved to all pool deck areas, including a covered pool, where electrically
metal forming shell, the front of which is enclosed by a captive metal operated comfort heating units are installed within 6 000 mm of the
screen, or equivalent, that is bonded to and secured to the forming inside wall of the pool.
shell by a positive locking device that ensures a low-resistance contact
and requires a tool to open for installation or servicing of the speaker. (1) Unit Heaters. Unit heaters shall be rigidly mounted to the
The forming shell shall be installed in a recess in the wall or floor of structure and shall be of the totally enclosed or guarded types. Unit
the pool. heaters shall not be mounted over the pool or within the area extending
1 500 mm horizontally from the inside walls of a pool.
 (2) Permanently Wired Radiant Heaters. Radiant electric (a) 15 Volts or Less. A luminaire (lighting fixture) shall be part fo a
heaters shall be suitably guarded and securely fastened to their cord- and plug-connected lighting assembly. This assembly shall be
mounting device(s). Heaters shall not be installed over a pool or within listed as an assembly for the purpose and have the following
the area extending 1 500 mm horizontally from the inside walls of the construction features:
pool and shall be mounted at least 3 700 mm vertically above the pool
deck unless otherwise approved. (1) No exposed metal parts
(3) Radiant Heating Cables Not Permitted. Radiant heating (2) A luminaire (fixture) lamp that operates at 15 volts or less
cables embedded in or below the deck shall not be permitted. (3) An impact-resistant polymeric lens, luminaire (fixture) body,
and transformer enclosure
6.80.3 Storable Pools (4) A transformer meeting the requirements of 6.80.2.4(a)(2) with
a primary rating not over 250 volts
6.80.3.1 General. Electrical installations at storable pools shall
comply with the provisions of Parts 6.80.1 and 6.80.3. (b) Over 15 Volts But Not Over 250 Volts. A lighting assembly
without a transformer, and with the fixture lamp(s) operating at not
6.80.3.2 Pumps. A cord-connected pool filter pump shall incorporate over 250 volts, shall be permitted to be cord- and plug-connected
an approved system of double insulation or its equivalent and shall be where the assembly is listed as an assembly for the purpose. The
provided with means for grounding only the internal and installation shall comply with 6.80.2.4(a)(5), and the assembly shall
nonaccessible non-current-carrying metal parts of the appliance. have the following construction features:
The means for grounding shall be an equipment grounding conductor
run with the power-supply conductors in the flexible cord that is (1) No exposed metal parts.
properly terminated in a grounding-type attachment plug having a (2) An impact-resistant polymeric lens and luminaire (fixture)
fixed grounding contact member. body.
(3) A ground-fault circuit interrupter with open neutral protection
6.80.3.3 Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters Required. All electrical is provided as an integral part of the assembly.
equipment, including power-supply cords, used with storable pools (4) The luminaire (fixture) lamp is permanently connected to the
shall be protected by ground-fault circuit interrupters. ground-fault circuit interrupter with open-neutral protection.
All 125-volt and/or 250-volt receptacles located within 6 000 mm of (5) Compliance with the requirements of 6.80.2.4(a).
the inside walls of a storable pool shall be protected by a ground-fault
circuit interrupter. In determining these dimensions, the distance to be 6.80.3.5 Receptacle Locations. Receptacles shall not be less than 3
measured shall be the shortest path the supply cord of an appliance 000 mm from the inside walls of a pool. In determining these
connected to the receptacle would follow without piercing a floor, dimensions, the distance to be measured shall be the shortest path the
wall, ceiling, doorway with hinged or sliding door, window opening, supply cord of an appliance connected to the receptacle would follow
or other effective permanent barrier. without piercing a floor, wall, ceiling, doorway with hinged or sliding
door, window opening, or other effective permanent barrier.
FPN: Where flexible cords are used, see 4.0.1.4.
6.80.4 Spas and Hot Tubs
6.80.3.4 Luminaires (Lighting Fixtures). An underwater luminaire
(lighting fixture), if installed, shall be installed in or on the wall of the 6.80.4.1. General. Electrical installations at spas and hot tubs shall
storable pool. It shall comply with either 6.80.3.4(a) or 6.80.3.4(b). comply with the provisions of 6.80.1 and 6.80.4.

6.80.4.2 Emergency Switch for Spas and Hot Tubs. A clearly

labeled emergency shutoff or control switch for the purpose of except as modified by this section and shall be connected by the
stopping the motor(s) that provide power to the recirculation system wiring methods of Chapter 3.
and jet system shall be installed readily accessible to the users and at
least 1 500 mm away, adjacent to, and within sight of the spa or hot Exception: Listed spa and hot tub packaged units rated 20 amperes or
tub. This requirement shall not apply to single-family dwellings. less shall be permitted to be cord and plug connected to facilitate the
removal or disconnection of the unit for maintenance and repair.
6.80.4.3 Outdoor Installations. A spa or hot tub installed outdoors
shall comply with the provisions of Parts 6.80.1 and 6.80.2 except as (a) Receptacles. At least one 125-volt and/or 250-volt, 15- or 20-
permitted in 6.80.4.3(a) and 6.80.4.3(b), that would otherwise apply to ampere receptacle on a general-purpose branch circuit shall be located
pools installed outdoors. a minimum of 1 500 mm from and not more than 3 000 mm from the
inside wall of the spa or hot tub.
(a) Flexible Connections. Listed packaged spa or hot tub equipment
assemblies or self-contained spas or hot tubs utilizing a factory- (1) Location. Receptacles shall be located at least 1 500 mm
installed or assembled control panel or panelboard shall be permitted measured horizontally from the inside walls of the spa or hot tub.
to use flexible connections as covered in 6.80.4.3(a)(1) and (a)(2). (2) Protection, General. Receptacles of 125 volts located
within 3 000 mm of the inside walls of a spa or hot tub shall be
(1) Flexible Conduit. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit or protected by a ground-fault circuit interrupter.
liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit shall be permitted in lengths of (3) Protection, Spa or Hot Tub Supply Receptacle. Receptacles
not more than 1 800 mm. that provide power for a spa or hot tub shall be ground-fault circuit-
(2) Cord-and-Plug Connections. Cord-and-plug connections interrupter protected.
with a cord not longer than 4 600 mm shall be permitted where (4) Measurements. In determining the dimensions in this section
protected by a ground-fault circuit interrupter. addressing receptacle spacings, the distance to be measured shall be
the shortest path the supply cord of an appliance connected to the
(b) Bonding. Bonding by metal-to-metal mounting on a common receptacle would follow without piercing a floor, wall, ceiling,
frame or base shall be permitted. The metal bands or hoops used to doorway with hinged or sliding door, window opening, or other
secure wooden staves shall not be required to be bonded as required in effective permanent barrier.
6.80.2.7.
(b) Installation of Luminaires (Lighting Fixtures), Lighting
(c) Interior Wiring to Outdoor Installations. In the interior of a Outletls, and Ceiling-Suspended (Paddle) Fans.
one-family dwelling or in the interior of another building or structure
associated with a one-family dwelling, any of the wiring methods (1) Elevation. Luminaires (lighting fixtures), except as covered in
recognized in Chapter 3 of this Code that contain a copper equipment 6.80.4.4(b)(2), lighting outlets, and ceiling-suspended (paddle) fans
grounding conductor that is insulated or enclosed within the outer located over the spa or hot tub or within 1 500 mm from the inside
sheath of the wiring method and not smaller than 3.5 mm dia shall be walls of the spa or hot tub shall comply with the clearances specified
permitted to be used for the connection to motor, heating, and control in (b)(1)a, (b)(1)b, and (b)(1)c above the maximum water level.
loads that are part of a self-contained spa or hot tub or a packaged spa
or hot tub equipment assembly. Wiring to an underwater light shall a. Without GFCI. Where no GFCI protection is provided, the
comply with 6.80.2.4 or 6.80.3.4. mounting height shall be not less than 3 700 mm.
b. With GFCI. Where GFCI protection is provided, the
6.80.4.4 Indoor Installations. A spa or hot tub installed indoors shall mounting height shall be permitted to be not less than 2 300 mm.
comply with the provisions of Parts 6.80.1 and 6.80.2 of this article
 c. Below 2 300 mm. Luminaires (lighting fixtures) meeting the hot tub shall be bonded by any of the following methods:
requirements of item (1) or (2) and protected by a ground-fault circuit
interrupter shall be permitted to be installed less than 2 300 mm over a (1) The interconnection of threaded metal piping and fittings
spa or hot tub: (2) Metal-to-metal mounting on a common frame or base
(3) The provisions of a copper bonding jumper, insulated,
1. Recessed luminaire (fixtures) with a glass or plastic lens covered, or bare, not smaller than 3.2 mm dia. solid.
and nonmetallic or electrically isolated metal trim, suitable for use in
damp locations. (f) Grounding. The following equipment shall be grounded:
2. Surface-mounted luminaire (fixtures) with a glass or plastic
globe and a nonmetallic body or a metallic body isolated from contact (1) All electric equipment located within 1 500 mm of the inside
suitable for use in damp locations. wall of the spa or hot tub
(2) All electric equipment associated with the circulating system
(2) Underwater Applications. Underwater luminaires (lighting of the spa or hot tub
fixtures) shall comply with the provisions of 6.80.2.4 or 6.80.3.4.
(g) Underwater Audio Equipment. Underwater audio
(c) Wall Switches. Switches shall be located at least 1 500 mm, equipment shall comply with the provisions of Part 6.80.2.
measured horizontally, from the inside walls of the spa or hot tub.
6.80.4.5 Protection. Except as otherwise provided in this section, the
(d) Bonding. The following parts shall be bonded together. outlet(s) that supplies a self-contained spa or hot tub, a packaged spa
or hot tub equipment assembly, or a field-assembled spa or hot tub
(1) All metal fittings within or attached to the spa or hot tub shall be protected by a ground-fault circuit interrupter.
structure.
(2) Metal parts of electrical equipment associated with the spa or (a) Listed Units. If so marked, a listed self-contained unit or listed
hot tub water circulating system, including pump motors. packaged equipment assembly that includes integral ground-fault
(3) Metal conduit and metal piping within 1 500 mm of the inside circuit-interrupter protection for all electrical parts within the unit or
walls of the spa or hot tub and that are not separated from the spa or assembly (pumps, air blowers, heaters, lights, controls, sanitizer
hot tub by a permanent barrier. generators, wiring, and so forth) shall be permitted without additional
(4) All metal surfaces that are within 1 500 mm of the inside walls GFCI protection.
of the spa or hot tub and not separated from the spa or hot tub area by
a permanent barrier. (b) Other Units. A field assembled spa or hot tub rated 3 phase or
rated over 250 volts or with a heater load of more than 50 amperes
Exception: Small conductive surfaces not likely to become energized, shall not require the supply to be protected by a ground-fault circuit
such as air and water jets and drain fittings, where not connected to interrupter.
metallic piping, towel bars, mirror frames, and similar nonelectrical
equipment, shall not be required to be bonded. (c) Combination Pool and Spa or Hot Tub. A combination
pool/hot tub or spa assembly commonly bonded need not be protected
(5) Electrical devices and controls not associated with the spas or by a ground-fault circuit interrupter.
hot tubs shall be located a minimum of 1 500 mm away from such
units or be bonded to the spa or hot tub system. FPN: See 6.80.1.2 for definitions of self-contained spa or hot tub and for packaged
spa or hot tub equipment assembly.

(e) Methods of Bonding. All metal parts associated with the spa or
 6.80.5 Fountains
(f) Servicing. All equipment shall be removable from the water for
6.80.5.1 General. The provisions of Parts 6.80.1 and 6.80.5 of this relamping or normal maintenance. Fixtures shall not be permanently
article shall apply to all permanently installed fountains as defined in imbedded into the fountain structure so that the water level must be
6.80.1.2. Fountains that have water common to a pool shall reduced or fountain drained for relamping, maintenance, or inspection.
additionally comply with the requirement in Part 6.80.2 of this article.
Part 6.80.5 does not cover self-contained, portable fountains not larger (g) Stability. Equipment shall be inherently stable or be securely
than 1 500 mm in any dimension. Portable fountains shall comply with fastened in place.
Parts 4.22.2 and 4.22.3.
6.80.5.3 Junction Boxes and Other Enclosures.
6.80.5.2 Luminaires (Lighting Fixtures), Submersible Pumps, and
Other Submersible Equipment. (a) General. Junction boxes and other enclosures used for other than
underwater installation shall comply with 6.80.2.5.
(a) Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter. Luminaires (lighting
fixtures), submersible pumps, and other submersible equipment unless (b) Underwater Junction Boxes and Other Underwater
listed for operation at 15 volts or less and supplied by a transformer Enclosures. Junction boxes and other underwater enclosures shall
that complies with 6.80.2.4(a)(2), shall be protected by a ground-fault meet the requirements of 6.80.5.3(b)(1) and (b)(2).
circuit interrupter.
(1) Construction.
(b) Operating Voltage. No luminaires (lighting fixtures) shall be
installed for operation on supply circuits over 150 volts between a. Underwater enclosures shall be equipped with provisions for
conductors. Submersible pumps and other submersible equipment threaded conduit entries or compression glands or seals for cord entry.
shall operate at 300 volts or less between conductors. b. Underwater enclosures shall be submersible and made of
copper, brass, or other approved corrosion-resistant material.
(c) Lighting Fixture Lenses. Lighting fixtures shall be installed
with the top of the fixture lens below the normal water level of the (2) Installation. Underwater enclosure installations shall comply
fountain unless approved for above-water locations. A lighting fixture with (a) and (b).
facing upward shall have the lens adequately guarded to prevent
contact by any person. a. Underwater enclosures shall be filled with an approved
potting compound to prevent the entry of moisture.
(d) Overheating Protection. Electrical equipment that depends on b. Underwater enclosures shall be firmly attached to the
submersion for safe operation shall be protected against overheating supports or directly to the fountain surface and bonded as required.
by a low-water cutoff or other approved means when not submerged. Where the junction box is supported only by the conduit, the conduit
shall be of copper, brass, stainless steel, or other approved corrosion-
(e) Wiring. Equipment shall be equipped with provisions for resistant metal. Where the box is fed by nonmetallic conduit, it shall
threaded conduit entries or be provided with a suitable flexible cord. have additional supports and fasteners of copper, brass, or other
The maximum length of exposed cord in the fountain shall be limited approved corrosion-resistant material.
to 3 000 mm. Cords extending beyond the fountain perimeter shall be
enclosed in approved wiring enclosures. Metal parts of equipment in FPN: See 3.14.2.9 for support of enclosures.
contact with water shall be of brass or other approved corrosion-
resistant metal. 6.80.5.4 Bonding. All metal piping systems associated with the
fountain shall be bonded to the equipment grounding conductor of the addition, the ground connection within equipment shall be similarly
branch circuit supplying the fountain. treated to protect such connections from the deteriorating effect of
water that may enter into the equipment.
FPN: See 2.50.6.13 for sizing of these conductors.
(d) Terminations. Connections with flexible cord shall be
6.80.5.5 Grounding. The following equipment shall be grounded: permanent, except that grounding-type attachment plugs and
receptacles shall be permitted to facilitate removal or disconnection
(1) All electrical equipment located within the fountain or within 1 for maintenance, repair, or storage of fixed or stationary equipment not
500 mm of the inside wall of the fountain located in any water-containing part of a fountain.
(2) All electrical equipment associated with the recirculating system
of the fountain 6.80.5.8 Signs.
(3) Panelboards that are not part of the service equipment and that
supply any electrical equipment associated with the fountain (a) General. This section covers electric signs installed within a
fountain or within 3 000 mm of the fountain edge.
6.80.5.6 Methods of Grounding.
(b) Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection for Personnel.
(a) Applied Provisions. The provisions of 6.80.2.2(a), All circuits supplying the sign shall have ground-fault circuit-
6.80.2.4(b)(3), 6.80.2.4(f)(1), 6.80.2.4(f)(2), 6.80.2.5(f), and 6.80.2.6 interrupter protection for personnel.
shall apply.
(c) Location.
(b) Supplied by a Flexible Cord. Electrical equipment that is
supplied by a flexible cord shall have all exposed noncurrent-carrying (1) Fixed or Stationary. A fixed or stationary electric sign
metal parts grounded by an insulated copper equipment grounding installed within a fountain shall be not less than 1 500 mm inside the
conductor that is an integral part of this cord. This grounding fountain measured from the outside edges of the fountain.
conductor shall be connected to a grounding terminal in the supply (2) Portable. A portable electric sign shall not be placed within a
junction box, transformer enclosure, or other enclosure. pool or fountain or within 1 500 mm measured horizontally from the
inside walls of the fountain.
6.80.5.7 Cord- and Plug-Connected Equipment.
(d) Disconnect. A sign shall have a local disconnecting means in
(a) Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter. All electrical equipment, accordance with 6.0.1.6 and 6.80.1.12.
including power-supply cords, shall be protected by ground-fault (e) Bonding and Grounding. A sign shall be grounded and bonded
circuit interrupters. in accordance with 6.0.1.7.
(b) Cord Type. Flexible cord immersed in or exposed to water shall 6.80.5.8 GFCI Protection for Adjacent Receptacle Outlets. All 15-
be of a type for extra hard usage, as designated in Table 4.0.1.4 and or 20-ampere, single-phase 125-volt through 250-volt receptacles
shall be a listed type with a “W” suffix. located within 6 000 mm of a fountain edge shall be provided with
GFCI protection.
(c) Sealing. The end of the flexible cord jacket and the flexible cord
conductor termination within equipment shall be covered with, or
encapsulated in, a suitable potting compound to prevent the entry of
water into the equipment through the cord or its conductors. In
 6.80.6 Pools and Tubs for Therapeutic Use (b) Bonding. The following parts shall be bonded together.

6.80.6.1 General. The provisions of Parts 6.80.1 and 6.80.6 shall (1) All metal fittings within or attached to the tub structure.
apply to pools and tubs for therapeutic use in health care facilities, (2) Metal parts of electrical equipment associated with the tub
gymnasiums, athletic training rooms, and similar areas. Portable water circulating system, including pump motors.
therapeutic appliances shall comply with Parts 4.22.2 and 4.22.3. (3) Metal-sheathed cables and raceways and metal piping that are
within 1 500 mm of the inside walls of the tub and not separated from
FPN: See 5.17.1.2 for definition of health care facilities. the tub by a permanent barrier.
(4) All metal surfaces that are within 1 500 mm of the inside walls
6.80.6.2 Permanently Installed Therapeutic Pools. Therapeutic of the tub and not separated from the tub area by a permanent barrier.
pools that are constructed in the ground, on the ground, or in a (5) Electrical devices and controls not associated with the
building in such a manner that the pool cannot be readily disassembled therapeutic tubs shall be located a minimum of 1 500 mm away from
shall comply with Parts 6.80.1 and 6.80.2. such units
Exception: The limitations of 6.80.2.3(b)(1) through (b)(4) shall not (c) Methods of Bonding. All metal parts associated with the tub
apply where all luminaires (lighting fixtures) are of the totally shall be bonded by any of the following methods:
enclosed type.
(1) The interconnection of threaded metal piping and fittings,
6.80.6.3 Therapeutic Tubs (Hydrotherapeutic Tanks). Therapeutic (2) Metal-to-metal mounting on a common frame or base,
tubs, used for the submersion and treatment of patients, that are not (3) Connections by suitable metal clamps, or
easily moved from one place to another in normal use or that are (4) By the provisions of a solid copper bonding jumper, insulated,
fastened or otherwise secured at a specific location, including covered, or bare, not smaller than 3.2 mm dia.
associated piping systems, shall conform to this part.
(d) Grounding.
(a) Protection. Except as otherwise provided in this section, the
outlet(s) that supplies a self-contained therapeutic tub or (1) Fixed or Stationary Equipment. The equipment specified in
hydrotherapeutic tank, a packaged therapeutic tub or hydrotherapeutic (d)(1)a and (d)(1)b shall be grounded.
tank, or a field-assembled therapeutic tub or hydrotherapeutic tank a. Location. All electrical equipment located within 1 500 mm
shall be protected by a ground-fault circuit interrupter. of the inside wall of the tub shall be grounded
b. Circulation System. All electrical equipment associated with
(1) Listed Units. If so marked, a listed self-contained unit or listed the circulating system of the tub shall be grounded.
packaged equipment assembly that includes integral ground-fault
circuit-interrupter protection for all electrical parts within the unit or (2) Portable Equipment. Portable therapeutic appliances shall
assembly (pumps, air blowers, heaters, lights, controls, sanitizer meet the grounding requirements in 2.50.6.5.
generators, wiring, and so forth) shall be permitted without additional
GFCI protection. (e) Receptacles. All receptacles within 1 500 mm of a therapeutic
(2) Other Units. A therapeutic tub or hydrotherapeutic tank rated tub shall be protected by a ground-fault circuit interrupter.
3 phase or rated over 250 volts or with a heater load of more than 50
amperes shall not require the supply to be protected by a ground-fault (f) Luminaires (Lighting Fixtures). All luminaires (lighting
circuit interrupter. fixtures) used in therapeutic tub areas shall be of the totally enclosed
type.
 6.82.1.2 Definitions.
6.80.7 Hydromassage Bathtubs
Artificially Made Bodies of Water. Bodies of water that have been
6.80.7.1 General. Hydromassage bathtubs as defined in 6.80.1.2 shall constructed or modified to fit some decorative or commercial purpose
comply with Part 6.80.7. They shall not be required to comply with such as, but not limited to, aeration ponds, fish farm ponds, storm
other parts of this article. retention basins, treatment ponds, irrigation (channel) facilities. Water
depths may vary seasonally or be controlled.
6.80.7.2 Protection. Hydromassage bathtubs and their associated
electrical components shall be protected by a ground-fault circuit Electrical Datum Plane. The electrical datum plane as used in this
interrupter. All 125-volt and/or 250-volt, single-phase receptacles article is defined as follows:
within 1 500 mm measured horizontally of the inside walls of a
hydromassage tub shall be protected by a ground-fault circuit (1) In land areas subject to tidal fluctuation, the electrical datum
interrupter(s). plane is a horizontal plane 600 mm above the highest tide level for the
area occurring under normal circumstances, that is, highest high tide.
6.80.7.2 Other Electrical Equipment. Lighting fixtures, switches, (2) In land areas not subject to tidal fluctuation, the electrical
receptacles, and other electrical equipment located in the same room, datum plane is a horizontal plane 600 mm above the highest water
and not directly associated with a hydromassage bathtub, shall be level for the area occurring under normal circumstances.
installed in accordance with the requirements of Chapters 1 through 4 (3) In land areas subject to flooding, the electrical datum plane
in this Code covering the installation of that equipment in bathrooms. based on (1) or (2) above is a horizontal plane 600 mm above the point
identified as the prevailing high water mark or an equivalent
6.80.7.3 Accessibility. Hydromassage bathtub electrical equipment benchmark based on seasonal or storm-driven flooding from the
shall be accessible without damaging the building structure or building authority having jurisdiction.
finish. (4) The electrical datum plane for floating structures and landing
stages that are (1) installed to permit rise and fall response to water
6.80.7.4 Bonding. All metal piping systems, metal parts of electrical level, without lateral movement, and (2) that are so equipped that they
equipment, and pump motors associated with the hydromassage tub can rise to the datum plane established for (1) or (2) above, is a
shall be bonded together using a copper bonding jumper, insulated, horizontal plane 750 mm above the water level at the floating structure
covered, or bare, not smaller than 3.2 mm dia. solid. or landing stage and a minimum of 300 mm above the level of the
deck.

ARTICLE 6.82 — NATURAL AND ARTIFICIALLY Equipotential Plane. An area where wire mesh or other conductive
MADE BODIES OF WATER elements are on, embedded in, or placed under the walk surface within
75 mm, bonded to all metal structures and fixed nonelectrical
6.82.1 General equipment that may become energized, and connected to the electrical
grounding system to prevent a difference in voltage from developing
6.82.1.1 Scope. This article applies to the installation of electrical within the plane.
wiring for, and equipment in and adjacent to, natural or artificially
made bodies of water not covered by other articles in this Code, such Natural Bodies of Water. Bodies of water such as lakes, streams,
as but not limited to aeration ponds, fish farm ponds, storm retention ponds, rivers, and other naturally occurring bodies of water, which
basins, treatment ponds, irrigation (channels) facilities. may vary in depth throughout the year.
 Shoreline. The farthest extent of standing water under the
applicable conditions that determine the electrical datum plane for the (b) Location. The disconnecting means shall be readily accessible
specified body of water. on land and shall be located in the supply circuit ahead of the structure
or the equipment connection. The disconnecting means shall be
6.82.1.3 Other Articles. Wiring and equipment in or adjacent to located not more than 750 mm from the structure or equipment
natural or artificially made bodies of water shall comply with the connection. The disconnecting means shall be within sight of, but not
applicable provisions of other articles of this Code, except as modified closer than, 1 500 m horizontally from the edge of the shoreline and
by this article. If the water is subject to boat traffic, the wiring shall live parts elevated a minimum of 300 mm above the electrical datum
comply with 5.55.1.13(b). plane.

6.82.2 Installation 6.82.2.6 Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Protection.

Fifteen- and 20-ampere single-phase, 125-volt through 250-volt
6.82.2.1 Electrical Equipment and Transformers. Electrical receptacles installed outdoors and in or on floating buildings or
equipment and transformers, including their enclosures, shall be structures within the electrical datum plane area that are used for
specifically approved for the intended location. No portion of an storage, maintenance, or repair where portable electric hand tools,
enclosure for electrical equipment not identified for operation while electrical diagnostic equipment, or portable lighting equipment are to
submerged shall be located below the electrical datum plane. be used shall be provided with GFCI protection. The GFCI protection
device shall be located not less than 300 mm above the established
6.82.2.2 Location of Service Equipment. On land, the service electrical datum plane.
equipment for floating structures and submersible electrical equipment
shall be located no closer than 1 500 mm horizontally from the 6.82.3 Grounding and Bonding
shoreline and live parts elevated a minimum of 300 mm above the
electrical datum plane. Service equipment shall disconnect when the 6.82.3.1 Grounding. Wiring and equipment within the scope of this
water level reaches the height of the established electrical datum article shall be grounded as specified in Articles 2.50, 5.53, and 5.55
plane. and with the requirements in 6.82.3.

6.82.2.3 Electrical Connections. All electrical connections not 6.82.3.2 Equipment Grounding Conductors.
intended for operation while submerged shall be located at least 300
mm above the deck of a floating or fixed structure, but not below the (a) Type. Equipment grounding conductors shall be insulated
electrical datum plane. copper conductors sized in accordance with 2.50.6.13 but not smaller
than 3.5 mm2.
6.82.2.4 Wiring Methods and Installation. Wiring methods and
installations of Chapter 3 and Articles 5.53, 5.55, and 5.90 shall be (b) Feeders. Where a feeder supplies a remote panel board, an
permitted where identified for use in wet locations. insulated equipment grounded conductor shall extend from a
grounding terminal in the service to a grounding terminal and busbar
6.82.2.5 Disconnecting Means for Floating Structures or in the remote panel board.
Submersible Electrical Equipment.
(c) Branch Circuits. The insulated equipment grounding conductor
(a) Type. The disconnecting means shall be permitted to consist of a for branch circuits shall terminate at a grounding terminal in a remote
circuit breaker, switch, or both and shall be properly identified as to panel board or the grounding terminal in the main service equipment.
which structure or equipment it controls.
 (d) Cord-and-Plug-Connected Appliances. Where required to be ARTICLE 6.85 — INTEGRATED ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
grounded, cord-and-plug-connected appliances shall be grounded by
means of an equipment grounding conductor in the cord and a 6.85.1 General
grounding-type attachment plug.
6.85.1.1 Scope. This article covers integrated electrical systems, other
6.82.3.3 Bonding of Non–Current-Carrying Metal Parts. All metal than unit equipment, in which orderly shutdown is necessary to ensure
parts in contact with the water, all metal piping, tanks, and all non– safe operation. An integrated electrical system as used in this article is
current-carrying metal parts that may become energized shall be a unitized segment of an industrial wiring system where all of the
bonded to the grounding bus in the panelboard. following conditions are met:

6.82.3.4 Equipotential Planes and Bonding of Equipment Planes. (1) An orderly shutdown is required to minimize personnel hazard
An equipotential plane shall be installed where required in this section and equipment damage,
to mitigate step and touch voltages at electrical equipment. (2) The conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that
licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner
(a) Areas Requiring Equipotential Planes. Equipotential planes under the supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner will service
shall be installed adjacent to all outdoor service equipment or the system. The name(s) of the licensed electrical practitioner(s) or
disconnecting means that control equipment in or on water, that have a non licensed electrical practitioner(s) under the supervision of a
metallic enclosure and controls accessible to personnel, and that are licensed electrical practitioner shall be kept in a permanent record at
likely to become energized. The equipotential plane shall encompass the office of the establishment in charge of the completed installation.
the area around the equipment and shall extend from the area directly A person designated as a licensed electrical practitioner or non
below the equipment out not less than 900 mm in all directions from licensed electrical practitioner under the supervision of a licensed
which a person would be able to stand and come in contact with the electrical practitioner shall possess the skills and knowledge related to
equipment. the construction and operation of the electrical equipment and
installation and shall have received documented safety training on the
(b) Areas Not Requiring Equipotential Planes. Equipotential hazards involved. Documentation of their qualifications shall be on
planes shall not be required for the controlled equipment supplied by file with the office of the establishment in charge of the completed
the service equipment or disconnecting means. All circuits rated not installation.
more than 60 amperes at 120 through 250 volts, single phase, shall (3) Effective safeguards, acceptable to the authority having
have GFCI protection. jurisdiction, are established and maintained

(c) Bonding. Equipotential planes shall be bonded to the electrical 6.85.1.3 Application of Other Articles. The articles/sections in Table
grounding system. The bonding conductor shall be solid copper, 6.85.1.3 apply to particular cases of installation of conductors and
insulated, covered or bare, and not smaller than 8 mm2. Connections equipment, where there are orderly shutdown requirements that are in
shall be made by exothermic welding or by listed pressure connectors addition to those of this article or are modifications of them.
or clamps that are labeled as being suitable for the purpose and are of
stainless steel, brass, copper, or copper alloy. 6.85.2 Orderly Shutdown

6.85.2.1 Location of Overcurrent Devices in or on Premises.

Location of overcurrent devices that are critical to integrated electrical
systems shall be permitted to be accessible, with mounting heights
permitted to ensure security from operation by unqualified personnel.
 ARTICLE 6.90 — SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEMS
Table 6.85.1.3 Aqpplication of Other Articles
6.90.1 General
Conductor/Equipment Section
More than one building or 2.25.2 6.90.1.1 Scope. The provisions of this article apply to solar
other structure photovoltaic electrical energy systems including the array circuit(s),
Ground-fault protection of 2.30.7.6, Exception No. 1 inverter(s), and controller(s) for such systems [See Figure 6.90.1.1(a)
equipment and Fig. 6.90.1.1(b)]. Solar photovoltaic systems covered by this
Protection of conductors 2.40.1.4 article may be interactive with other electrical power production
Electrical system coordination 2.40.1.12 sources or stand alone, with or without electrical energy storage such
Ground-fault protection of 2.40.1.13(1) as batteries. These systems may have ac or dc output for utilization.
equipment
Grounding ac systems of 50 to 2.50.2.2
1 000 volts
Equipment protection 4.27.3.9
Orderly shutdown 4.30.3.14
Disconnection 4.30.6.4, Exception Nos. 1 and 2
Disconnecting means in sight 4.30.9.2(a), Exception No. 2
from controller
Energy from more than one 4.30.9.13, Exception Nos. 1 and 2
source
Disconnecting means 6.45.1.10, Exception
Uninterruptible power supplies 6.45.1.11(1)
(UPS)
Point of connection 7.5.1.12(a)

6.85.2.3 Direct-Current System Grounding. Two-wire dc circuits

shall be permitted to be ungrounded.

6.85.2.5 Ungrounded Control Circuits. Where operational continuity

is required, control circuits of 250 volts, or less, from separately
Notes:
derived systems shall be permitted to be ungrounded.
1. These diagrams are intended to be a means of identification for photovoltaic
system components, circuits, and connections.
2. Disconnecting means required by Part 6.90.3 are not shown.
3. Systems grounding and equipment grounding are not shown. See Part 6.90.5.

Figure 6.90.1.1(a) Identification of solar

photovoltaic system components
 Array. A mechanically integrated assembly of modules or panels
with a support structure and foundation, tracker, and other
components, as required, to form a direct-current power-producing
unit.

Bipolar Potovoltaic Array. A photovoltaic array that has two

outputs, each having opposite polarity to a common reference point or
center tap.

Blocking Diode. A diode used to block reverse flow of current into

a photovoltaic source circuit.

Building Integrated Photovoltaics. Photovoltaic cells, devices,

modules, or modular materials that are integrated into the outer surface
or structure of a building and serve as the outer protective surface of
that building.

Charge Controller. Equipment that controls dc voltage or dc

current, or both, used to charge a battery.

Notes: Diversion Charge Controller. Equipment that regulates the

1. These diagrams are intended to be a means of identification for photovoltaic charging process of a battery by diverting power from energy storage
system components, circuits, and connections.
2. Disconnecting means and overcurrent protection required by Article 6.90 are not to direct-current or alternating –current loads or to an interconnected
shown. utility service.
3. Systems grounding and equipment grounding are not shown. See Part 6.90.5.
4. Custom designs occur in each configuration and some components are optical. Electrical Production and Distribution Network. A power
production, distribution, and utilization system, such as a utility
Figure 6.90.1.1(b) Identification of solar photovoltaic system system and connected loads, that is external to and not controlled by
components in common system configurations the photovoltaic power system.

Hybrid System. A system comprised of multiple power sources.

These power sources may include photovoltaic, wind, micro-hydro
generators, engine-driven generators, and others, but do not include
6.90.1.2 Definitions. electrical production and distribution network systems. Energy storage
systems, such as batteries, do not constitute a power source for the
Alternating-Current (ac) Module (Alternating-Current purpose of this definition.
Photovoltaic Module). A complete, environmentally protected unit
consisting of solar cells, optics, inverter, and other components, Interactive System. A solar photovoltaic system that operates in
exclusive of tracker, designed to generate ac power when exposed to parallel with and may deliver power to an electrical production and
sunlight. distribution network. For the purpose of this definition, an energy
storage subsystem of a solar photovoltaic system, such as a battery, is installations, the photovoltaic system voltage is the highest voltage
not another electrical production source. between any two dc conductors.

Inverter. Equipment that is used to change voltage level or Solar Cell. The basic photovoltaic device that generates electricity
waveform, or both, of electrical energy. Commonly, an inverter [also when exposed to light.
known as a power conditioning unit (PCU) or power conversion
system (PCS)] is a device that changes dc input to an ac output. Solar Photovoltaic System. The total components and subsystems
Inverters may also function as battery chargers that use alternating that, in combination, convert solar energy into electrical energy
current from another source and convert it into direct current for suitable for connection to a utilization load.
charging batteries.
Stand-Alone System. A solar photovoltaic system that supplies
Inverter Input Circuit. Conductors between the inverter and the power independently of an electrical production and distribution
battery in stand-alone systems or the conductors between the inverter network.
and the photovoltaic output circuits for electrical production and
distribution network. 6.90.1.3 Other Articles. Wherever the requirements of other articles
of this Code and Article 6.90 differ, the requirements of Article 6.90
Inverter Output Circuit. Conductors between the inverter and an shall apply and, if the system is operated in parallel with a primary
ac load center for stand-alone systems or the conductors between the source(s) of electricity, the requirements in 7.5.1.14, 7.5.1.16,
inverter and the service equipment or another electric power 7.5.1.32, and 7.5.1.43 shall apply.
production source, such as a utility, for electrical production and
distribution network. Exception: Solar photovoltaic systems, equipment, or wiring installed
in a hazardous (classified) location shall also comply with 5.0.1.1,
Module. A complete, environmentally protected unit consisting of 5.5.1.1, and 5.10.1.1.
solar cells, optics, and other components, exclusive of tracker,
designed to generate dc power when exposed to sunlight. 6.90.1.4 Installation.

Panel. A collection of modules mechanically fastened together, (a) Solar Photovoltaic System. A solar photovoltaic system shall
wired, and designed to provide a field-installable unit. be permitted to supply a building or other structure in addition to any
service(s) of another electricity supply system(s).
Photovoltaic Output Circuit. Circuit conductors between the
photovoltaic source circuit(s) and the inverter or dc utilization (b) Conductors of Different Systems. Photovoltaic source circuits
equipment. and photovoltaic output circuits shall not be contained in the same
raceway, cable tray, cable, outlet box, junction box, or similar fitting
Photovoltaic Power Source. An array or aggregate of arrays that as feeders or branch circuits of other systems, unless the conductors of
generates dc power at system voltage and current. the different systems are separated by a partition or are connected
together.
Photovoltaic Source Circuit. Circuits between modules and from
modules to the common connection point(s) of the dc system. (c) Module Connection Arrangement. The connections to a
module or panel shall be arranged so that removal of a module or
Photovoltaic System Voltage. The direct current (dc) voltage of panel from a photovoltaic source circuit does not interrupt a grounded
any photovoltaic source or photovoltaic output circuit. For multiwire conductor to another photovoltaic source circuit. Sets of modules
interconnected as systems rated at 50 volts or less, with or without considered an inverter output circuit.
blocking diodes, and having a single overcurrent device shall be
considered as a single-source circuit. Supplementary overcurrent (c) Disconnecting Means. A single disconnecting means, in
devices used for the exclusive protection of the photovoltaic modules accordance with Sections 6.90.3.3 and 6.90.3.5, shall be permitted for
are not considered as overcurrent devices for the purpose of this the combined ac output of one or more ac modules. Additionally, each
section ac module in a multiple ac-module system shall be provided with a
connector, bolted, or terminal-type disconnecting means.
(d) Equipment. Inverters or motor generators shall be identified for
use in solar photovoltaic systems. (d) Ground-Fault Detection. Alternating-current-module systems
shall be permitted to use a single detection device to detect only ac
6.90.1.5 Ground-Fault Protection. Roof-mounted dc photovoltaic ground faults and to disable the array by removing ac power to the ac
arrays located on dwellings shall be provided with dc ground-fault module(s).
protection to reduce fire hazards.
(e) Overcurrent Protection. The output circuits of ac modules shall
(a) Ground-Fault Detection and Interruption. The ground-fault be permitted to have overcurrent protection and conductor sizing in
protection device or system shall be capable of detecting a ground accordance with 2.40.1.5(b)(2).
fault, interrupting the flow of fault current, and providing an indication
of the fault. 6.90.2. Circuit Requirements

(b) Disconnection of Conductors. The ungrounded conductors of 6.90.2.1 Maximum Voltage.

the faulted source circuit shall be automatically disconnected. If the
grounded conductors of the faulted source circuit are disconnected to (a) Maximum System Voltage. In a dc photovoltaic source circuit
comply with the requirements of 6.90.1.5(a), all conductors of the or output circuit, the maximum system voltage for that circuit shall be
faulted source circuit shall be opened automatically and computed as the sum of the rated open-circuit voltage of the series-
simultaneously. Opening the grounded conductor of the array or connected photovoltaic modules corrected for the lowest expected
opening the faulted sections of the array shall be permitted to interrupt ambient temperature. For crystalline and multi-crystalline silicon
the ground-fault current path. modules, the rated open-circuit voltage shall be multiplied by the
correction factor provided in Table 6.90.2.1. This voltage shall be used
(c) Labels and Markings. Labels and markings shall be applied to determine the voltage rating of cables, disconnects, overcurrent
near the ground-fault indicator at a visible location stating that if a devices, and other equipment. Where the lowest expected ambient
ground fault is indicated, the normally grounded conductors may be temperature is below -40ºC, or where other than crystalline or multi-
energized and ungrounded. crystalline silicon photovoltaic modules are used, the system voltage
adjustment shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer’s
6.90.1.6 Alternating-Current (ac) Modules. instructions.

(a) Photovoltaic Source Circuits. The requirements of Article 6.90 (b) Direct-Current Utilization Circuits. The voltage of dc
pertaining to photovoltaic source circuits shall not apply to ac utilization circuits shall conform with 2.10.1.6.
modules. The photovolaic source circuit, conductors, and inverters
shall be considered as internal wiring of an ac module. (c) Photovoltaic Source and Output Circuits. In one- and two-
family dwellings, photovoltaic source circuits and photovoltaic output
(b) Inverter Output Circuit. The output of an ac module shall be circuits that do not include lampholders, fixtures, or receptacles shall
be permitted to have a maximum system voltage up to 600 volts. Other
installations with a maximum system voltage over 600 volts shall 6.90.2.2 Circuit Sizing and Current.
comply with Part 6.90.1.
(a) Computation of Maximum Circuit Current. The maximum
Table 6.90.2.1 Voltage Correction Factors for Crystalline and current for the specific circuit shall be calculated in accordance with
Multi-Crystalline Silicon Modules 6.90.2.2(a)(1) through (a)(4).
Correction factor for ambient
Ambient temperatures below 250C, multiply the (1) Photovoltaic Source Circuit Currents. The maximum
Temperature (0C) rated open-circuit voltage by the current shall be the sum of parallel module rated short-circuit currents
appropriate correction factor shown below multiplied by 125 percent.
25 to 10 1.06 (2) Photovoltaic Output Circuit Currents. The maximum
9 to 0 1.10 current shall be the sum of parallel source circuit maximum currents as
– 1 to – 10 1.13 calculated in 6.90.2.2(a)(1).
– 11 to – 20 1.17 (3) Inverter Output Circuit Current. The maximum current
– 21 to – 40 1.25 shall be the inverter continuous output current rating.
(4) Stand-Alone Inverter Input Circuit Current. The
maximum current shall be the stand-alone continuous inverter input
(d) Circuits Over 150 Volts to Ground. In one- and two-family current rating when the inverter is producing rated power at the lowest
dwellings, live parts in photovoltaic source circuits and photovoltaic input voltage.
output circuits over 150 volts to ground shall not be accessible to other
than licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical (b) Ampacity and Overcurrent Device Ratings. Photovoltaic
practitioner under the supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner system currents shall be considered continuous.
while energized.
(1) Sizing of Conductors and Overcurrent Devices. The circuit
FPN: See 1.10.2.2 for guarding of live parts, and 2.10.1.6 for voltage to ground and conductors and overcurrent devices shall be sized to carry not less than
between conductors. 125 percent of the maximum currents as calculated in 6.90.2.2(a). The
rating or setting of overcurrent devices shall be permitted in
(e) Bipolar Source and Output Circuits. For 2-wire circuits accordance with 2.40.1.4(b) and (c).
connected to bipolar systems, the maximum system voltage shall be
the highest voltage between the conductors of the 2-wire circuit if all Exception: Circuits containing an assembly, together with its
of the following conditions apply: overcurrent device(s), that is listed for continuous operation at 100
percent of its rating shall be permitted to be utilized at 100 percent of
(1) One conductor of each circuit is solidly grounded. its rating.
(2) Each circuit is connected to a separate subarray.
(3) The equipment is clearly marked with a label as follows: (2) Internal Current Limitation. Overcurrent protection for
photovoltaic output circuits with devices that internally limit the
WARNING current from the photovoltaic output circuit shall be permitted to be
BIPOLAR PHOTOVOLTAIC ARRAY. rated at less than the value calculated in 6.90.2.2(b)(1). This reduced
DISCONNECTION OF NEUTRAL OR rating shall be at least 125 percent of the limited current value.
GROUNDED CONDUCTORS MAY RESULT IN Photovoltaic output circuit conductors shall be sized in accordance
OVERVOLTAGE ON ARRAY OR INVERTER. with 6.90.2.2(b)(1).
 4.50.1.3 by considering first one side of the transformer, then the other
Exception: An overcurrent device in an assembly listed for continuous side of the transformer, as the primary.
operation at 100 percent of its rating shall be permitted to be utilized
at 100 percent of its rating. Exception: A power transformer with a current rating on the side
connected toward the photovoltaic power source not less than the
(c) Systems with Multiple Direct-Current Voltages. For a short-circuit output current rating of the inverter shall be permitted
photovoltaic power source that has multiple output circuit voltages and without overcurrent protection from that source.
employs a common-return conductor, the ampacity of the common-
return conductor shall not be less than the sum of the ampere ratings of (c) Photovoltaic Source Circuits. Branch-circuit or supplementary-
the overcurrent devices of the individual output circuits. type overcurrent devices shall be permitted to provide overcurrent
protection in photovoltaic source circuits. The overcurrent devices
(d) Sizing of Module Interconnection Conductors. Where a single shall be accessible, but shall not be required to be readily accessible.
overcurrent device is used to protect a set of two or more parallel- Standard values of supplementary overcurrent devices allowed by
connected module circuits, the ampacity of each of the module this section shall be in one ampere size increments, starting at one
interconnection conductors shall not be less than the sum of the rating ampere up to and including 15 amperes. Higher standard values above
of the single fuse plus 125 percent of the short-circuit current from the 15 amperes for supplementary overcurrent devices shall be based on
other parallel-connected modules. the standard sizes provided in 2.40.1.6(a).

6.90.2.3 Overcurrent Protection. (d) Direct-Current Rating. Overcurrent devices, either fuses or
circuit breakers, used in any dc portion of a photovoltaic power system
(a) Circuits and Equipment. Photovoltaic source circuit, shall be listed for use in dc circuits and shall have the appropriate
photovoltaic output circuit, inverter output circuit, and storage battery voltage, current, and interrupt ratings.
circuit conductors and equipment shall be protected in accordance
with the requirements of Article 2.40. Circuits connected to more than (e) Series Overcurrent Protection. In series-connected strings of
one electrical source shall have overcurrent devices located so as to two or more modules, a single overcurrent protection device shall be
provide overcurrent protection from all sources. permitted.

Exception: An overcurrent device shall not be required for circuit 6.90.2.4 Stand-Alone Systems. The premises wiring system shall be
conductors sized in accordance with 6.90.2.2(b) and located where adequate to meet the requirements of this Code for a similar
(a) There are no external sources such as parallel-connected installation connected to a service. The wiring on the supply side of
source circuits, batteries, or backfeed from inverters, or the building or structure disconnecting means shall comply with this
(b) The short-circuit currents from all sources do not exceed the Code except as modified by (a) and (b).
ampacity of the conductors.
(a) Inverter Output. The ac inverter output from a stand-alone
FPN: Possible backfeed of current from any source of supply, including a supply system shall be permitted to supply ac power to the building or
through an inverter into the photovoltaic output circuit and photovoltaic source
circuits, is a consideration in determining whether adequate overcurrent protection structure disconnecting means at current levels below the rating of that
from all sources is provided for conductors and modules. disconnecting means.

(b) Power Transformers. Overcurrent protection for a transformer (b) Sizing and Protection. The circuit conductors between the
with a source(s) on each side shall be provided in accordance with inverter output and the building or structure disconnecting means shall
be sized based on the output rating of the inverter. These conductors
shall be protected from overcurrents in accordance with Article 2.40. isolating switches, overcurrent devices, and blocking diodes shall be
The overcurrent protection shall be located at the output of the permitted on the photovoltaic side of the photovoltaic disconnecting
inverter. means.

(c) Single 120-Volt Supply. The inverter output of a stand-alone (c) Requirements for Disconnecting Means. Means shall be
solar photovoltaic system shall be permitted to supply 120 volts to provided to disconnect all conductors in a building or other structure
single-phase, 3-wire, 120/240-volt service equipment or distribution from the photovoltaic system conductors.
panels where there are no 240-volt outlets and where there are no
multiwire branch circuits. In all installations, the rating of the (1) Location. The photovoltaic disconnecting means shall be
overcurrent device connected to the output of the inverter shall be less installed at a readily accessible location either on the outside of a
than the rating of the neutral bus in the service equipment. This building or structure or inside nearest the point of entrance of the
equipment shall be marked with the following words or equivalent: system conductors.

WARNING Exception: Installations that comply with 6.90.4.1(e) shall be

SINGLE 120-VOLT SUPPLY. DO NOT CONNECT permitted to have the disconnecting means located remote from the
MULTIWIRE BRANCH CIRCUITS point of entry of the system conductors.

6.90.3 Disconnecting Means The photovoltaic system disconnecting means shall not be
installed in bathrooms.
6.90.3.1 All Conductors. Means shall be provided to disconnect all
current-carrying conductors of a photovoltaic power source from all (2) Marking. Each photovoltaic system disconnecting means shall
other conductors in a building or other structure. A switch or circuit be permanently marked to identify it as a photovoltaic system
breaker shall not be installed in a grounded conductor unless that disconnect.
switch or circuit breaker is part of a ground-fault detection system (3) Suitable for Use. Each photovoltaic system disconnecting
required by 6.90.1.5 and that switch or circuit breaker is automatically means shall be suitable for the prevailing conditions. Equipment
opened and indicated as a normal function of the device in responding installed in hazardous (classified) locations shall comply with the
to ground faults. requirements of Articles 5.0 through 5.17.
(4) Maximum Number of Disconnects. The photovoltaic system
FPN: The grounded conductor may have a bolted or terminal disconnecting means disconnecting means shall consist of not more than six switches or six
to allow maintenance or troubleshooting by licensed electrical practitioner or non
licensed electrical practitioner under the supervision of a licensed electrical circuit breakers mounted in a single enclosure, in a group of separate
practitioner. enclosures, or in or on a switchboard.
(5) Grouping. The photovoltaic system disconnecting means shall
be grouped with other disconnecting means for the system to comply
6.90.3.2 Additional Provisions. Photovoltaic disconnecting means with 6.90.3.2(c)(4). A photovoltaic disconnecting means shall not be
shall comply with 6.90.3.2(a) through 6.90.3.2(d). required at the photovoltaic module or array location.

(a) Disconnecting Means. The disconnecting means shall not be (d) Utility-Interactive Inverters Mounted in Not-Readily-
required to be suitable as service equipment and shall be rated in Accessible Locations. Utility-interactive inverters shall be permitted
accordance with 6.90.3.5. to be mounted on roofs or other exterior areas that are not readily
accessible. These installations shall comply with (1) through (4):
(b) Equipment. Equipment such as photovoltaic source circuit
 (1) A direct-current photovoltaic disconnecting means shall be the disconnecting means. The sign shall be clearly legible and shall
mounted within sight of or in the inverter. read substantially:
(2) An alternating-current disconnecting means shall be mounted
within sight of or in the inverter. WARNING
(3) The alternating-current output conductors from the inverter ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD
and an additional alternating-current disconnecting means for the DO NOT TOUCH TERMINALS
inverter shall comply with 6.90.3.2(c)(1). TERMINALS ON BOTH THE LINE AND LOAD SIDES
(4) A plaque shall be installed in accordance with 7.5.1.10. MAY BE ENERGIZED IN THE OPEN POSITION.

6.90.3.3 Disconnection of Photovoltaic Equipment. Means shall be Exception: A connector shall be permitted to be used as an ac or dc
provided to disconnect equipment, such as inverters, batteries, charge disconnecting means provided that it complies with the requirement of
controllers, and the like, from all ungrounded conductors of all 6.90.4.3 and is listed and identified for the use.
sources. If the equipment is energized from more than one source, the
disconnecting means shall be grouped and identified. 6.90.3.6 Installation and Service of an Array. Open circuiting, short
A single disconnecting means in accordance with 6.90.3.5 shall be circuiting, or opaque covering shall be used to disable an array or
permitted for the combined ac output of one or more inverters or ac portions of an array for installation and service.
modules in an interactive system.
FPN: Photovoltaic modules are energized while exposed to light. Installation,
replacement, or servicing of array components while a module(s) is irradiated may
6.90.3.4 Fuses. Disconnecting means shall be provided to disconnect a expose persons to electric shock.
fuse from all sources of supply if the fuse is energized from both
directions and is accessible to other than licensed electrical 6.90.4 Wiring Methods
practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner under the
supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner. Such a fuse in a 6.90.4.1 Methods Permitted.
photovoltaic source circuit shall be capable of being disconnected
independently of fuses in other photovoltaic source circuits. (a) Wiring Systems. All raceway and cable wiring methods
included in this Code and other wiring systems and fittings specifically
6.90.3.5 Switch or Circuit Breaker. The disconnecting means for intended and identified for use on photovoltaic arrays shall be
ungrounded conductors shall consist of a manually operable switch(es) permitted. Where wiring devices with integral enclosures are used,
or circuit breaker(s) complying with all of the following requirements: sufficient length of cable shall be provided to facilitate replacement.

(1) Located where readily accessible, FPN: Photovoltaic modules operate at elevated temperatures when exposed to
(2) Externally operable without exposing the operator to contact high ambient temperatures and to bright sunlight. These temperatures may
routinely exceed 70°C in many locations. Module interconnection conductors are
with live parts, available with insulation rated for wet locations and a temperature rating of 90°C or
(3) Plainly indicating whether in the open or closed position, and greater.
(4) Shall have an interrupting rating sufficient for the nominal
circuit voltage and the current that is available at the line terminals of (b) Single Conductor Cable. Types SE, UF, USE and USE-2
the equipment. single-conductor cable shall be permitted in photovoltaic source
circuits where installed in the same manner as a Type UF
Where all terminals of the disconnecting means may be energized in multiconductor cable in accordance with Article 3.39. Where exposed
the open position, a warning sign shall be mounted on or adjacent to to direct rays of the sun, Type UF cable identified as sunlight-resistant
or Type USE cable shall be used.
 (c) Flexible Cords and Cables. Flexible cords and cables, where 6.90.4.2 Component Interconnections. Fittings and connectors that
used to connect the moving parts of tracking PV modules, shall are intended to be concealed at the time of on-site assembly, where
comply with Article 4.0 and shall be of a type identified as a hard listed for such use, shall be permitted for on-site interconnection of
service cord or portable power cable; shall be suitable for extra-hard modules or other array components. Such fittings and connectors shall
usage, listed for outdoor use, water resistant, and sunlight resistant. be equal to the wiring method employed in insulation, temperature
Allowable ampacities shall be in accordance with 4.0.1.5. For ambient rise, and fault-current withstand, and shall be capable of resisting the
temperatures exceeding 30ºC, the ampacities shall be derated by the effects of the environment in which they are used.
appropriate factors given in Table 6.90.4.1(c).
6.90.4.3 Connectors. The connectors permitted by Article 6.90 shall
comply with 6.90.4.3(a) through 6.90.4.3(e).

Table 6.90.4.1(c) Correction Factors (a) Configuration. The connectors shall be polarized and shall have
Ambient Temperature Rating of Conductor a configuration that is noninterchangeable with receptacles in other
Temperature electrical systems on the premises.
600C 750C 900C 1050C
(0C)
30 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 (b) Guarding. The connectors shall be constructed and installed so
31 - 35 0.91 0.94 0.96 0.97 as to guard against inadvertent contact with live parts by persons.
36 - 40 0.82 0.88 0.91 0.93
41 - 45 0.71 0.82 0.87 0.89 (c) Type. The connectors shall be of the latching or locking type.
46 – 50 0.58 0.75 0.82 0.86
51 - 55 0.41 0.67 0.76 0.82 (d) Grounding Member. The grounding member shall be the first
56 - 60 — 0.58 0.71 0.77 to make and the last to break contact with the mating connector.
61 - 70 — 0.33 0.58 0.68
71 - 80 — — 0.41 0.58 (e) Interruption of Circuit. The connectors shall be capable of
interrupting the circuit current without hazard to the operator.

(d) Small Conductor Cables. Single-conductor cables listed for 6.90.4.4 Access to Boxes. Junction, pull, and outlet boxes located
outdoor use that are sunlight resistant and moisture resistant with sizes behind modules or panels shall be installed so that the wiring
1.25 mm2 (1.2 mm dia.) and 0.75 mm2 (1.0 mm dia.) shall be contained in them can be rendered accessible directly or by
permitted for module interconnections where such cables meet the displacement of a module(s) or panel(s) secured by removable
ampacity requirements of 6.90.2.2. Section 3.10.1.15 shall be used to fasteners and connected by a flexible wiring system.
determine the cable ampacity and temperature derating factors.
6.90.4.5 Ungrounded Photovoltaic Power Systems. Photovoltaic
(e) Direct-Current Photovoltaic Source and Output Circuits power systems shall be permitted to operate with ungrounded
Inside a Building. Where direct current photovoltaic source or output photovoltaic source and output circuits where the system complies
circuits of a utility-interactive inverter from a building-integrated or with 6.90.4.5(a) through 6.90.4.5(g).
other photovoltaic system are run inside a building or structure, they
shall be contained in metallic raceways or enclosures from the point of (a) Disconnects. All photovoltaic source and output circuit
penetration of the surface of the building or structure to the first conductors shall have disconnects complying with 6.90.3.
readily accessible disconnecting means. The disconnecting means
shall comply with 690.14(A) through 690.14(D). (b) Overcurrent Protection. All photovoltaic source and output
circuit conductors shall have overcurrent protection complying with
6.90.2.3. Exception: Systems complying with 6.90.4.5.

(c) Ground-Fault Protection. All photovoltaic source and output 6.90.5.2 Point of System Grounding Connection. The dc circuit
circuits shall be provided with a ground-fault protection device or grounding connection shall be made at any single point on the
system that complies with (1) through (3): photovoltaic output circuit.

(1) Detects a ground fault. FPN: Locating the grounding connection point as close as practicable to the
photovoltaic source will better protect the system from voltage surges due to
(2) Indicates that a ground fault has occurred lightning.
(3) Automatically disconnects the conductors and/or shuts off the
utility-interactive inverter or charge controller for that portion of the 6.90.5.3 Equipment Grounding. Exposed noncurrent-carrying metal
faulted array parts of module frames, equipment, and conductor enclosures shall be
grounded regardless of voltage.
(d) The photovoltaic source and output conductors shall consist of
sheathed (jacketed) multi-conductor cables or shall be installed in a 6.90.5.5 Size of Equipment Grounding Conductor. Where not
raceway. protected by the ground-fault protection equipment required by
(e) The photovoltaic power system direct-current circuits shall be 6.90.1.5, the equipment-grounding conductor for photovoltaic source
permitted to be used with ungrounded battery systems complying with and photovoltaic output circuits shall be sized for 125 percent of the
6.90.8.1(g). photovoltaic-originated short-circuit currents in that circuit. Where
(f) The photovoltaic power source shall be labeled with the protected by the ground-fault protection equipment required by
following warning at each junction box, combiner box, disconnect, 6.90.1.5, the equipment-grounding conductors for photovoltaic source
and device where the ungrounded circuits may be exposed during and photovoltaic output circuits shall be sized in accordance with
service: 2.50.6.13.

WARNING 6.90.5.7 Grounding Electrode System.

ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD. THE DIRECT
CURRENT CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS OF THIS (a) Alternating-Current Systems. If installing an ac system, a
PHOTOVOLTAIC POWER SYSTEM ARE grounding electrode system shall be provided in accordance with
UNGROUNDED BUT MAY BE ENERGIZED 2.50.3.1 through 2.50.3.11. The grounding electrode conductor shall
WITH RESPECT TO GROUND DUE TO be installed in accordance with 2.50.3.15.
LEAKAGE PATHS AND/OR GROUND FAULTS.
(b) Direct-Current Systems. If installing a dc system, a grounding
(g) The inverters or charge controllers used in systems with electrode system shall be provided in accordance with 2.50.8.7 for
ungrounded photovoltaic source and output circuits shall be listed for grounded systems or 250.169 for ungrounded systems. The grounding
the purpose. electrode conductor shall be installed in accordance with 2.50.3.15.

6.90.5 Grounding (c) Systems with Alternating-Current and Direct-Current

Grounding Requirements. Photovoltaic power systems with both
6.90.5.1 System Grounding. For a photovoltaic power source, one alternating-current and direct-current (dc) grounding requirements
conductor of a 2-wire system rated over 50 volts and a neutral shall be permitted to be grounded as described in (1) or (2):
conductor of a 3-wire system shall be solidly grounded.
 (1) A grounding-electrode conductor shall be connected between 6.90.6.2 Alternating-Current Photovoltaic Modules. Alternating-
the identified dc grounding point to a separate dc grounding electrode. current modules shall be marked with identification of terminals or
The dc grounding-electrode conductor shall be sized according to leads, and with identification of the following rating:
2.50.8.7. The dc grounding electrode shall be bonded to the ac-
grounding electrode to make a grounding electrode system according (1) Nominal operating ac voltage
to 2.50.3.3 and 2.50.3.4. The bonding conductor shall be no smaller (2) Nominal operating ac frequency
than the largest grounding electrode conductor, either ac or dc. (3) Maximum ac power
(2) The dc grounding electrode conductor and ac grounding (4) Maximum ac current, and
electrode conductor shall be connected to a single grounding electrode. (5) Maximum overcurrent device rating for ac module protection
The separate grounding electrode conductors shall be sized as required
by 2.50.3.17 (ac) and 2.50.8.7 (dc). 6.90.6.3 Direct-Current Photovoltaic Power Source. A marking for
the direct-current photovoltaic power source indicating items (1)
6.90.5.8 Continuity of Equipment Grounding Systems. Where the through (4) shall be provided by the installer at an accessible location
removal of equipment disconnects the bonding connection between the at the disconnecting means for this power source:
grounding electrode conductor and exposed conducting surfaces in the
photovoltaic source or output circuit equipment, a bonding jumper (1) Operating current
shall be installed while the equipment is removed. (2) Operating voltage
(3) Maximum system voltage
6.90.5.9 Continuity of Photovoltaic Source and Output Circuit (4) Short-circuit current
Grounded Conductors. Where the removal of the utility-interactive
inverter or other equipment disconnects the bonding connection FPN: Reflecting systems used for irradiance enhancement may result in increased
levels of output current and power.
between the grounding electrode conductor and the photovoltaic
source and/or photovoltaic output circuit grounded conductor, a
6.90.6.4 Interactive System Point of Interconnection. All interactive
bonding jumper shall be installed to maintain the system grounding
system(s) points of interconnection with other sources shall be marked
while the inverter or other equipment is removed.
at an accessible location at the disconnecting means as a power source
with the maximum ac output operating current and the operating ac
6.90.6 Marking
voltage.
6.90.6.1 Modules. Modules shall be marked with identification of
6.90.6.5 Photovoltaic Power Systems Employing Energy Storage.
terminals or leads as to polarity, maximum overcurrent device rating
Photovoltaic power systems employing energy storage shall also be
for module protection, and with the following ratings:
marked with the maximum operating voltage, including any
equalization voltage and the polarity of the grounded circuit
(1) Open-circuit voltage
conductor.
(2) Operating voltage
(3) Maximum permissible system voltage
6.90.6.6 Identification of Power Sources.
(4) Operating current
(5) Short-circuit current, and
(a) Facilities with Stand-Alone Systems. Any structure or building
(6) Maximum power
with a photovoltaic power system that is not connected to a utility
service source and is a stand-alone system shall have a permanent
plaque or directory installed on the exterior of the building or structure
at a readily visible location acceptable to the authority having
jurisdiction. The plaque or directory shall indicate the location of (b) Three Phase. Three-phase inverters and 3-phase ac modules in
system disconnecting means and that the structure contains a stand- interactive systems shall have all phases automatically de-energized
alone electrical power system. upon loss of, or unbalanced, voltage in one or more phases unless the
interconnected system is designed so that significant unbalanced
(b) Facilities with Utility Services and PV Systems. Buildings or voltages will not result.
structures with both utility service and a photovoltaic system shall
have a permanent plaque or directory providing the location of the 6.90.7.5 Point of Connection. The output of a photovoltaic power
service disconnecting means and the photovoltaic system source shall be connected as specified in 6.90.7.5(a) or 6.90.7.5(b).
disconnecting means, if not located at the same location.
(a) Supply Side. A photovoltaic power source shall be permitted to
6.90.7 Connection to Other Sources be connected to the supply side of the service disconnecting means as
permitted in 2.30.6.13(6).
6.90.7.1 Identified Interactive Equipment. Only inverters and ac
modules listed and identified as interactive shall be permitted in (b) Load Side. A photovoltaic power source shall be permitted to be
interactive systems. connected to the load side of the service disconnecting means of the
other source(s) at any distribution equipment on the premises provided
6.90.7.2 Loss of Interactive System Power. An inverter or an ac that all of the following conditions are met.
module in an interactive solar photovoltaic system shall automatically
de-energize its output to the connected electrical production and (1) Each source interconnection shall be made at a dedicated
distribution network upon loss of voltage in that system and shall circuit breaker or fusible disconnecting means.
remain in that state until the electrical production and distribution (2) The sum of the ampere ratings of overcurrent devices in
network voltage has been restored. circuits supplying power to a busbar or conductor shall not exceed the
A normally interactive solar photovoltaic system shall be permitted to rating of the busbar or conductor.
operate as a stand-alone system to supply loads that have been
disconnected from electrical production and distribution network Exception: For a dwelling unit, the sum of the ampere ratings of the
sources. overcurrent devices shall not exceed 120 percent of the rating of the
busbar or conductor.
6.90.7.3 Ampacity of Neutral Conductor. If a single-phase, 2-wire
inverter output is connected to the neutral and one ungrounded (3) The interconnection point shall be on the line side of all
conductor (only) of a 3-wire system or of a 3-phase, 4-wire, wye- ground-fault protection equipment.
connected system, the maximum load connected between the neutral
and any one ungrounded conductor plus the inverter output rating shall Exception: Connection shall be permitted to be made to the load side
not exceed the ampacity of the neutral conductor. of ground-fault protection, provided that there is ground-fault
protection for equipment from all ground-fault current sources.
6.90.7.4 Unbalanced Interconnections.
(4) Equipment containing overcurrent devices in circuits
(a) Single Phase. Single-phase inverters for photovoltaic systems supplying power to a busbar or conductor shall be marked to indicate
and ac modules in interactive solar photovoltaic systems shall not be the presence of all sources.
connected to 3-phase power systems unless the interconnected system
is designed so that significant unbalanced voltages cannot result.
Exception: Equipment with power supplied from a single point of the interrupting or withstand ratings of other equipment in that circuit.
connection. The installation of current-limiting fuses shall comply with 6.90.3.4.

(5) Circuit breakers, if backfed, shall be identified for such (d) Battery Nonconductive Cases and Conductive Racks.
operation. Dedicated circuit breakers backfed from listed utility- Flooded, vented, lead-acid batteries with more than twenty-four 2-volt
interactive inverters complying with 6.90.7.1 shall not be required to cells connected in series (48 volts, nominal) shall not use conductive
be individually clamped to the panelboard bus bars. A front panel cases or shall not be installed in conductive cases. Conductive racks
shall clamp all circuit breakers to the panelboard bus bars. Main circuit used to support the nonconductive cases shall be permitted where no
breakers connected directly to energized feeders shall also be rack material is located within 150 mm of the tops of the
individually clamped. nonconductive cases.
This requirement shall not apply to any type of valve-regulated lead-
6.90.8 Storage Batteries acid (VRLA) battery or any other types of sealed batteries that may
require steel cases for proper operation.
6.90.8.1 Installation.
(e) Disconnection of Series Battery Circuits. Battery circuits
(a) General. Storage batteries in a solar photovoltaic system shall be subject to field servicing, where more than twenty-four 2-volt cells are
installed in accordance with the provisions of Article 4.80. The connected in series (48 volts, nominal), shall have provisions to
interconnected battery cells shall be considered grounded where the disconnect the series-connected strings into segments of 24 cells or
photovoltaic power source is installed in accordance with 6.90.5.1. less for maintenance by licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed
electrical practitioner under the supervision of a licensed electrical
(b) Dwellings. practitioner. Non–load-break bolted or plug-in disconnects shall be
permitted.
(1) Operating Voltage. Storage batteries for dwellings shall have
the cells connected so as to operate at less than 50 volts nominal. (f) Battery Maintenance Disconnecting Means. Battery
Lead-acid storage batteries for dwellings shall have no more than installations, where there are more than twenty-four 2-volt cells
twenty-four 2-volt cells connected in series (48-volts nominal). connected in series (48 volts, nominal), shall have a disconnecting
means, accessible only to licensed electrical practitioner or non
Exception: Where live parts are not accessible during routine battery licensed electrical practitioner under the supervision of a licensed
maintenance, a battery system voltage in accordance with 6.90.2.1 electrical practitioner, that disconnects the grounded circuit
shall be permitted. conductor(s) in the battery electrical system for maintenance. This
disconnecting means shall not disconnect the grounded circuit
(2) Guarding of Live Parts. Live parts of battery systems for conductor(s) for the remainder of the photovoltaic electrical system. A
dwellings shall be guarded to prevent accidental contact by persons or non–load-break-rated switch shall be permitted to be used as the
objects, regardless of voltage or battery type. disconnecting means.

FPN: Batteries in solar photovoltaic systems are subject to extensive charge- (g) Battery Systems of More Than 48 Volts. On photovoltaic
discharge cycles and typically require frequent maintenance, such as checking
electrolyte and cleaning connections. systems where the battery system consists of more than twenty-four 2-
volt cells connected in series (more than 48 volts, nominal), the battery
(c) Current Limiting. A listed, current-limiting, overcurrent device system shall be permitted to operate with ungrounded conductors,
shall be installed in each circuit adjacent to the batteries where the provided the following conditions are met:
available short-circuit current from a battery or battery bank exceeds
 (1) The photovoltaic array source and output circuits shall comply battery voltage. The power rating of the diversion load shall be at least
with 6.90.5.1. 150 percent of the power rating of the photovoltaic array.
(2) The dc and ac load circuits shall be solidly grounded. b. The conductor ampacity and the rating of the overcurrent
(3) All main ungrounded battery input/output circuit conductors device for this circuit shall be at least 150 percent of the maximum
shall be provided with switched disconnects and overcurrent current rating of the diversion charge controller.
protection.
(4) A ground-fault detector and indicator shall be installed to (3) PV Systems Using Utility-Interactive Inverters.
monitor for ground faults in the battery bank. Photovoltaic power systems using utility-interactive inverters to
control battery state-of-charge by diverting excess power into the
utility system shall comply with (1) and (2):
6.90.8.2 Charge Control.
a. These systems shall not be required to comply with
(a) General. Equipment shall be provided to control the charging 6.90.8.2(b)(2). The charge regulation circuits used shall comply with
process of the battery. Charge control shall not be required where the the requirements of 6.90.2.2.
design of the photovoltaic source circuit is matched to the voltage b. These systems shall have a second, independent means of
rating and charge current requirements of the interconnected battery controlling the battery charging process for use when the utility is not
cells, and the maximum charging current multiplied by 1 hour is less present or when the primary charge controller fails or is disabled.
than 3 percent of the rated battery capacity expressed in ampere-hours
or as recommended by the battery manufacturer. 6.90.8.4 Battery Interconnections. Flexible cables, as identified in
All adjusting means for control of the charging process shall be Article 4.0, in sizes 60 mm2 and larger shall be permitted within the
accessible only to licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed battery enclosure from battery terminals to nearby junction box where
electrical practitioner under the supervision of a licensed electrical they shall be connected to an approved wiring method. Flexible
practitioner. battery cables shall also be permitted between batteries and cells
within the battery enclosure. Such cables shall be listed for hard
FPN: Certain battery types such as valve-regulated lead acid or nickel cadmium service use and identified as moisture resistant.
can experience thermal failure when overcharged.

6.90.9 Systems Over 600 Volts

(b) Diversion Charge Controller.
6.90.9.1 General. Solar photovoltaic systems with a maximum system
(1) Sole Means of Regulating Charging. A photovoltaic power
voltage over 600 volts dc shall comply with Article 4.90 and other
system employing a diversion charge controller as the sole means of
requirements applicable to installations rated over 600 volts.
regulating the charging of a battery shall be equipped with a second
independent means to prevent overcharging of the battery.
6.90.9.6 Definitions. For the purposes of Part 6.90.9, the voltages used
(2) Circuits with Direct-Current Diversion Charge Controller
to determine cable and equipment ratings shall be defined as follows.
and Diversion Load. Circuits containing a dc diversion charge
controller and a dc diversion load shall comply with the following:
Battery Circuits. In battery circuits, the voltage shall be the highest
voltage experienced under charging or equalizing conditions.
a. The current rating of the diversion load shall be less than or
equal to the current rating of the diversion load charge controller. The
Photovoltaic Circuits. In dc photovoltaic source circuits and
voltage rating of the diversion load shall be greater than the maximum
photovoltaic output circuits, the voltage shall be the maximum system
voltage.
 Point of Common Coupling. The point at which the power
production and distribution network and the customer interface occurs
ARTICLE 6.92 — FUEL CELL SYSTEMS in an interactive system. Typically, this is the load side of the power
network meter.
6.92.1 General
Stand-Alone System. A fuel cell system that supplies power
6.92.1.1 Scope. This article identifies the requirements for the independently of an electrical production and distribution network.
installation of fuel cell power systems, which may be stand-alone or
interactive with other electrical power production sources and may be 6.92.1.3 Other Articles. Wherever the requirements of other articles
with or without electrical energy storage such as batteries. These of this Code and Article 6.92 differ, the requirements of Article 6.92
systems may have ac or dc output for utilization. shall apply, and, if the system is operated in parallel with a primary
source(s) of electricity, the requirements in 7.5.1.14, 7.5.1.16,
6.92.1.2 Definitions. 7.5.1.32, and 7.5.1.43 shall apply.

Fuel Cell. An electrochemical system that consumes fuel to produce 6.92.1.4 Installation.
an electric current. The main chemical reaction used in a fuel cell for
producing electric power is not combustion. However, there may be (a) Fuel Cell System. A fuel cell system shall be permitted to
sources of combustion used within the overall fuel cell system such as supply a building or other structure in addition to any service(s) of
reformers/fuel processors. another electricity supply system(s).
(b) Identification. A permanent plaque or directory, denoting all
Fuel Cell System. The complete aggregate of equipment used to electrical power sources on or in the premises, shall be installed at
convert chemical fuel into usable electricity. A fuel cell system each service equipment location.
typically consists of a reformer, stack, power inverter, and auxiliary
equipment. 6.92.1.6 Listing Requirement. The fuel cell system shall be evaluated
and listed for its intended application prior to installation.
Interactive System. A fuel cell system that operates in parallel with
and may deliver power to an electrical production and distribution 6.92.2 Circuit Requirements
network. For the purpose of this definition, an energy storage
subsystem of a fuel cell system, such as a battery, is not another 6.92.2.1 Circuit Sizing and Current.
electrical production source.
(a) Nameplate Rated Circuit Current. The nameplate(s) rated
Maximum System Voltage. The highest fuel cell inverter output circuit current shall be the rated current indicated on the fuel cell
voltage between any ungrounded conductors present at accessible nameplate(s).
output terminals.
(b) Conductor Ampacity and Overcurrent Device Ratings. The
Output Circuit. The conductors used to connect the fuel cell system ampacity of the feeder circuit conductors from the fuel cell system(s)
to its electrical point of delivery. In the case of sites that have series- to the premises wiring system shall not be less than the greater of (1)
or parallel-connected multiple units, the term output circuit also refers nameplate(s) rated circuit current or (2) the rating of the fuel cell
to the conductors used to electrically interconnect the fuel cell system(s) overcurrent protective device(s).
system(s).
 (c) Ampacity of Grounded or Neutral Conductor. If an shall be marked as follows:
interactive single-phase, 2-wire fuel cell output(s) is connected to the
grounded or neutral conductor and a single ungrounded conductor of a WARNING
3-wire system or of a 3-phase, 4-wire wye-connected system, the SINGLE 120-VOLT SUPPLY.
maximum unbalanced neutral load current plus the fuel cell system(s) DO NOT CONNECT MULTIWIRE
output rating shall not exceed the ampacity of the grounded or neutral BRANCH CIRCUITS!
conductor.

6.92.2.2 Overcurrent Protection. 6.92.3Disconnecting Means

(a) Circuits and Equipment. If the fuel cell system is provided 6.92.3.1 All Conductors. Means shall be provided to disconnect all
with overcurrent protection sufficient to protect the circuit conductors current-carrying conductors of a fuel cell system power source from
that supply the load, additional circuit overcurrent devices shall not be all other conductors in a building or other structure.
required. Equipment and conductors connected to more than one
electrical source shall be protected. 6.92.3.2 Provisions. The provisions of 2.25.2.2 and 2.25.2.4 through
2.25.2.11 shall apply to the fuel cell source disconnecting means. The
(b) Accessibility. Overcurrent devices shall be readily accessible. disconnecting means shall not be required to be suitable as service
equipment and shall be rated in accordance with 6.92.3.5.
6.92.2.3 Stand-Alone Systems. The premises wiring system shall
meet the requirements of this Code except as modified by 6.92.2.3(a), 6.92.3.3 Switch or Circuit Breaker. The disconnecting means for
(b), and (a). ungrounded conductors shall consist of readily accessible, manually
operable switch(es) or circuit breaker(s).
(a) Fuel Cell System Output. The fuel cell system output from a Where all terminals of the disconnecting means may be energized in
stand-alone system shall be permitted to supply ac power to the the open position, a warning sign shall be mounted on or adjacent to
building or structure disconnecting means at current levels below the the disconnecting means. The sign shall be clearly legible and shall
rating of that disconnecting means. have the following words or equivalent:

(b) Sizing and Protection. The circuit conductors between the fuel DANGER
cell system(s) output and the building or structure disconnecting ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD.
means shall be sized based on the output rating of the fuel cell DO NOT TOUCH TERMINALS.
system(s). These conductors shall be protected from overcurrents in TERMINALS ON BOTH THE LINE AND
accordance with 2.40.1.4. The overcurrent protection shall be located LOAD SIDES MAY BE ENERGIZED
at the output of the fuel cell system(s). IN THE OPEN POSITION.

(c) Single 120-Volt Nominal Supply. The inverter output of a

stand-alone fuel cell system shall be permitted to supply 120 volts, 6.92.4 Wiring Methods
nominal, to single-phase, 3-wire 120/240-volt service equipment or
distribution panels where there are no 240-volt loads and where there 6.92.4.1 Wiring Systems. All raceway and cable wiring methods
are no multiwire branch circuits. In all installations, the rating of the included in Chapter 3 of this Code and other wiring systems and
overcurrent device connected to the output of the fuel cell system(s) fittings specifically intended and identified for use with fuel cell
shall be less than the rating of the service equipment. This equipment systems shall be permitted. Where wiring devices with integral
enclosures are used, sufficient length of cable shall be provided to 6.92.6.3 Stored Energy. A fuel cell system that stores electrical
facilitate replacement. energy shall require the following warning sign, or equivalent, at the
location of the service disconnecting means of the premises:
6.92.5 Grounding
WARNING
6.92.5.1 System Grounding. For a fuel cell system output circuit, one FUEL CELL POWER SYSTEM CONTAINS
conductor of a 2-wire system rated over 50 volts and a neutral ELECTRICAL ENERGY STORAGE DEVICES.
conductor of a 3-wire system shall be solidly grounded by either
6.92.5.1(a) or 6.92.5.1(b).
6.92.7 Connection to Other Circuits
(a) Stand-Alone Systems. Grounding and bonding shall be in
accordance with 2.50.2.11. 6.92.7.1 Transfer Switch. A transfer switch shall be required in non–
grid-interactive systems that use utility grid backup. The transfer
(b) Other Than Stand-Alone Systems. switch shall maintain isolation between the electrical production and
(1) Two-Wire Systems. One conductor shall be terminated at the distribution network and the fuel cell system. The transfer switch shall
grounded circuit conductor terminal of the premises wiring system. be permitted to be located externally or internally to the fuel cell
(2) Three-Wire Systems. The neutral conductor shall be system unit. When the utility service conductors of the structure are
terminated at the grounded circuit conductor terminal of the premises connected to the transfer switch, the switch shall comply with Part
wiring system. 2.30.5.

6.92.5.4 Equipment Grounding Conductor. A separate equipment 6.92.7.2 Identified Interactive Equipment. Only fuel cell systems
grounding conductor shall be installed. listed and identified as interactive shall be permitted in interactive
systems.
6.92.5.5 Size of Equipment Grounding Conductor. The equipment
grounding conductor shall be sized in accordance with 2.50.6.13. 6.92.7.3 Output Characteristics. The output of a fuel cell system
operating in parallel with an electric supply system shall be compatible
6.92.5.7 Grounding Electrode System. Any supplementary with the voltage, wave shape, and frequency of the system to which it
grounding electrode(s) required by the manufacturer shall be is connected.
connected to the equipment grounding conductor specified in 2.50.6.9.
FPN: The term compatible does not necessarily mean matching the primary source
wave shape.
6.92.6 Marking
6.92.7.4 Loss of Interactive System Power. The fuel cell system shall
6.92.6.1 Fuel Cell Power Sources. A marking specifying the fuel cell
be provided with a means of detecting when the electrical production
system, output voltage, output power rating, and continuous output
and distribution network has become de-energized and shall not feed
current rating shall be provided at the disconnecting means for the fuel
the electrical production and distribution network side of the point of
cell power source at an accessible location on the site.
common coupling during this condition. The fuel cell system shall
remain in that state until the electrical production and distribution
6.92.6.2 Fuel Shut-Off. The location of the manual fuel shut-off valve
network voltage has been restored.
shall be marked at the location of the primary disconnecting means of
the building or circuits supplied.
A normally interactive fuel cell system shall be permitted to operate as (4) Equipment containing overcurrent devices in circuits
a stand-alone system to supply loads that have been disconnected from supplying power to a busbar or conductor shall be marked to indicate
electrical production and distribution network sources. the presence of all sources.
(5) Equipment such as circuit breakers, if backfed, shall be
6.92.7.5 Unbalanced Interconnections. identified for such operation.
(6) The circuit breaker on the dedicated output of a utility-
(a) Single Phase. Single-phase interactive fuel cell systems shall not interactive inverter shall be positioned in the distribution equipment at
be connected to a 3-phase power system unless the interactive system the opposite (load) end from the input feeder connection or main
is so designed that significant unbalanced voltages cannot result. circuit location. A permanent warning label shall be applied to the
distribution equipment with the following, or equivalent:
(b) Three Phase. Three-phase interactive fuel cell systems shall
have all phases automatically de-energized upon loss of voltage, or WARNING
upon unbalance of voltage in one or more phases, unless the FUEL CELL POWER SYSTEM OUTPUT.
interactive system is designed so that significant unbalanced voltages DO NOT RELOCATE THIS CIRCUIT BREAKER.
will not result.
6.92.8 Outputs Over 600 Volts
6.92.7.6 Point of Connection. The output of a fuel cell system power
source shall be connected as specified in 6.92.7.7(a) or 6.92.7.7(b). 6.92.8.1 General. Fuel cell systems with a maximum output voltage
over 600 volts ac shall comply with the requirements of other articles
(a) Supply Side. A fuel cell system power source shall be permitted applicable to such installations.
to be connected to the supply side of the service disconnecting means
as permitted in 2.30.6.13(6).
ARTICLE 6.95 — FIRE PUMPS
(b) Load Side. A fuel cell system power source shall be permitted to
be connected to the load side of the service disconnecting means of the FPN: Rules that are followed by a reference in brackets contain text that has been
extracted from NFPA 20-2003, Standard for the Installation of Stationary Pumps
other source(s) at any distribution equipment on the premises, for Fire Protection. Only editorial changes were made to the extracted text to make
provided that all of the following conditions are met: it consistent with this Code.

(1) Each source interconnection shall be made at a dedicated 6.95.1.1 Scope.

circuit breaker or fusible disconnecting means.
(2) The sum of the ampere ratings of overcurrent devices in (a) Covered. This article covers the installation of the following:
circuits supplying power to a busbar or conductor shall not exceed the
rating of the busbar or conductor. (1) Electric power sources and interconnecting circuits
(2) Switching and control equipment dedicated to fire pump
Exception: For a dwelling unit, the sum of the ampere ratings of the drivers
overcurrent devices shall not exceed 120 percent of the rating of the
busbar or conductor. (b) Not Covered. This article does not cover the following:

(3) The interconnection point shall be on the line side of all (1) The performance, maintenance, and acceptance testing of the
ground-fault protection equipment. fire pump system, and the internal wiring of the components of the
system
 (2) Pressure maintenance (jockey or makeup) pumps (2) On-Site Power Production Facility. A fire pump shall be
permitted to be supplied by an on-site power production facility. The
FPN: See Standard for the Installation of Centrifugal Fire Pumps, NFPA 20-2003, source facility shall be located and protected to minimize the
for further information.
possibility of damage by fire. [NFPA 20:9.2.3]

(b) Multiple Sources. Where reliable power cannot be obtained

6.95.1.2 Definitions.
from a source described in 6.95.1.3(a), power shall be supplied from
an approved combination of two or more of either of such sources, or
Fault Tolerant External Control Circuits. Those control circuits
from an approved combination of feeders constituting two or more
either entering or leaving the fire pump controller enclosure, which if
power sources as covered in 6.95.1.3(b)(2), or from an approved
broken, disconnected, or shorted will not prevent the controller from
combination of one or more of such power sources in combination
starting the fire pump from all other internal or external means and
with an on-site standby generator complying with 6.95.1.3(b)(1) and
may cause the controller to start the pump under these conditions.
(b)(3).
On-Site Power Production Facility. The normal supply of electric
power for the site that is expected to be constantly producing power.
(1) Generator Capacity. An on-site generator(s) used to comply
with this section shall be of sufficient capacity to allow normal starting
On-Site Standby Generator. A facility producing electric power on
and running of the motor(s) driving the fire pump(s) while supplying
site as the alternate supply of electric power. It differs from an on-site
all other simultaneously operated load. Automatic shedding of one or
power production facility, in that it is not constantly producing power.
more optional standby loads in order to comply with this capacity
requirement shall be permitted. A tap ahead of the on-site generator
6.95.1.3 Power Source(s) for Electric Motor-Driven Fire Pumps.
disconnecting means shall not be required. The requirements of
Electric motor-driven fire pumps shall have a reliable source of power.
4.30.9.13 shall not apply. [NFPA 20:9.6.1]
(2) Feeder Sources. This section applies to multi-building
(a) Individual Sources. Where reliable, and where capable of
campus-style complexes with fire pumps at one or more buildings.
carrying indefinitely the sum of the locked-rotor current of the fire
Where sources in 6.95.1.3(a) are not practicable, and with the approval
pump motor(s) and the pressure maintenance pump motor(s) and the
of the authority having jurisdiction, two or more feeder sources shall
full-load current of the associated fire pump accessory equipment
be permitted as one power source or as more than one power source
when connected to this power supply, the power source for an electric
where such feeders are connected to or derived from separate utility
motor-driven fire pump shall be one or more of the following.
services. The connection(s), overcurrent protective device(s), and
disconnecting means for such feeders shall meet the requirements of
(1) Electric Utility Service Connection. A fire pump shall be
6.95.1.4(b). [NFPA 20:9.2.5.3]
permitted to be supplied by a separate service, or by a tap located
(3) Arrangement. The power sources shall be arranged so that a
ahead of and not within the same cabinet, enclosure, or vertical
fire at one source will not cause an interruption at the other source.
switchboard section as the service disconnecting means. The
[NFPA 20:2.5.1]
connection shall be located and arranged so as to minimize the
possibility of damage by fire from within the premises and from
6.95.1.4 Continuity of Power. Circuits that supply electric motor-
exposing hazards. A tap ahead of the service disconnecting means
driven fire pumps shall be supervised from inadvertent disconnection
shall comply with 2.30.6.13(5). The service equipment shall comply
as covered in (a) or (b).
with the labeling requirements in 2.30.1.2 and the location
requirements in 2.30.6.3(b). [NFPA 20:9.2.2]
 (a) Direct Connection. The supply conductors shall directly (c) Disconnect Marking. The disconnecting means shall be
connect the power source to either a listed fire pump controller or marked “Fire Pump Disconnecting Means.” The letters shall be at least
listed combination fire pump controller and power transfer switch. 25 mm in height, and they shall be visible without opening enclosure
[NFPA 20:9.3.2.2.2] doors or covers.

(b) Supervised Connection. A single disconnecting means and (d) Controller Marking. A placard shall be placed adjacent to
associated overcurrent protective device(s) shall be permitted to be the fire pump controller stating the location of this disconnecting
installed between a remote power source and one of the following: means and the location of the key (if the disconnecting means is
locked).
(1) A listed fire pump controller
(2) A listed fire pump power transfer switch, or (e) Supervision. The disconnecting means shall be supervised
(3) A listed combination fire pump controller and power transfer in the closed position by one of the following methods:
switch
(1) Central station, proprietary, or remote station signal device
For systems installed under the provisions of 6.95.1.3(b)(2) only, (2) Local signaling service that will cause the sounding of an
such additional disconnecting means and associated overcurrent audible signal at a constantly attended point
protective device(s) shall be permitted as required to comply with (3) Locking the disconnecting means in the closed position
other provisions of this Code. Overcurrent protective devices between (4) Sealing of disconnecting means and approved weekly
an on-site standby generator and a fire pump controller shall be recorded inspections when the disconnecting means are located within
selected and sized according to 4.30.5.2 to provide short-circuit fenced enclosures or in buildings under the control of the owner
protection only. All disconnecting devices and overcurrent protective [NFPA 20:9.3.2.2.3]
devices that are unique to the fire pump loads shall comply with
6.95.1.4(b)(1) through (b)(5). 6.95.1.5 Transformers. Where the service or system voltage is
different from the utilization voltage of the fire pump motor,
(a) Overcurrent Device Selection. The overcurrent protective transformer(s) protected by disconnecting means and overcurrent
device(s) shall be selected or set to carry indefinitely the sum of the protective devices shall be permitted to be installed between the
locked-rotor current of the fire pump motor(s) and the pressure system supply and the fire pump controller in accordance with
maintenance pump motor(s) and the full-load current of the associated 6.95.1.5(a) and (b), or (c). Only transformers covered in 6.95.1.5(c)
fire pump accessory equipment when connected to this power supply. shall be permitted to supply loads not directly associated with the fire
pump system.
(b) Disconnecting Means. The disconnecting means shall be
(a) Size. Where a transformer supplies an electric motor-driven fire
(1) Be identified as suitable for use as service equipment, pump, it shall be rated at a minimum of 125 percent of the sum of the
(2) Be lockable in the closed position, and fire pump motor(s) and pressure maintenance pump(s) motor loads,
(3) Not be located within equipment that feeds loads other and 100 percent of the associated fire pump accessory equipment
than the fire pump. supplied by the transformer.
(4) Be located sufficiently remote from other building or other
fire pump source disconnecting means that inadvertent (b) Overcurrent Protection. The primary overcurrent protective
contemporaneous operation would be unlikely. device(s) shall be selected or set to carry indefinitely the sum of the
locked-rotor current of the fire pump motor(s) and the pressure
maintenance pump motor(s) and the full-load current of the associated
fire pump accessory equipment when connected to this power supply. conductors on the load side of the service disconnecting means that
Secondary overcurrent protection shall not be permitted. The constitute the normal source of supply to that fire pump.
requirement to carry the locked-rotor currents indefinitely shall not
apply to conductors or devices other than overcurrent devices in the Exception: Where there are multiple sources of supply with means for
fire pump motor circuit(s). automatic connection from one source to the other, the requirement
shall only apply to those conductors on the load side of that point of
(c) Feeder Source. Where a feeder source is provided in accordance automatic connection between sources.
with 6.95.1.3(b)(2), transformers supplying the fire pump system shall
be permitted to supply other loads. All other loads shall be calculated (b) Circuit Conductors. Fire pump supply conductors on the load
in accordance with Article 2.20, including demand factors as side of the final disconnecting means and overcurrent device(s)
applicable. permitted by 6.95.1.4(b) shall be kept entirely independent of all other
wiring. They shall supply only loads that are directly associated with
(1) Size. Transformers shall be rated at a minimum of 125 percent the fire pump system, and they shall be protected to resist potential
of the sum of the fire pump motor(s) and pressure maintenance damage by fire, structural failure, or operational accident. They shall
pump(s) motor loads, and 100 percent of the remaining load supplied be permitted to be routed through a building(s) using one of the
by the transformer. following methods:
(2) Overcurrent Protection. The transformer size, the feeder
size, and the overcurrent protective device(s) shall be coordinated such (1) Be encased in a minimum 50 mm of concrete
that overcurrent protection is provided for the transformer in (2) Be within an enclosed construction dedicated to the fire pump
accordance with 4.50.1.3 and for the feeder in accordance with circuit(s) and having a minimum of a 1-hour fire resistive rating
2.15.1.3, and such that the overcurrent protective device(s) is selected (3) Be a listed electrical circuit protective system with a minimum
or set to carry indefinitely the sum of the locked-rotor current of the 1-hour fire rating
fire pump motor(s), the pressure maintenance pump motor(s), the full-
load current of the associated fire pump accessory equipment, and 100 Exception: The supply conductors located in the electrical equipment
percent of the remaining loads supplied by the transformer. The room where they originate and in the fire pump room shall not be
requirement to carry the locked-rotor currents indefinitely shall not required to have the minimum 1-hour fire separation or fire resistance
apply to conductors or devices in the fire pump motor circuit(s). rating, unless otherwise required by 7.0.2.1(d) of this Code.

6.95.1.6 Power Wiring. Power circuits and wiring methods shall (c) Conductor Size.
comply with the requirements in 6.95.1.6(a) through (h), and as
permitted in 230.90(a), Exception No. 4; 2.30.7.5, Exception No. 4; (1) Fire Pump Motors and Other Equipment. Conductors
2.30.7.6, Exception No. 2; 2.40.1.13; 2.30..8.9; 2.40.1.4(a); and supplying a fire pump motor(s), pressure maintenance pumps, and
4.30.3.1. associated fire pump accessory equipment shall have a minimum
rating of 125 percent of the sum of the fire pump motor(s) and
(a) Service Conductors. Supply conductors shall be physically pressure maintenance motor(s) full-load current(s), and 100 percent of
routed outside a building(s) and shall be installed as service entrance the associated fire pump accessory equipment.
conductors in accordance with Article 2.30. Where supply conductors (2) Fire Pump Motors Only. Conductors supplying only a fire
cannot be physically routed outside buildings, they shall be permitted pump motor(s) shall have a minimum rating of 125 percent of the fire
to be routed through buildings where installed in accordance with pump motor(s) full-load current(s).
2.30.1.6(1) or 2.30.1.6(2). Where a fire pump is wired under the
provisions of 6.95.1.3(b)(2), this requirement shall apply to all supply
 (d) Overload Protection. Power circuits shall not have automatic 6.95.1.7 Voltage Drop. The voltage at the controller line terminals
protection against overloads. Branch-circuit and feeder conductors shall not drop more than 15 percent below normal (controller-rated
shall be protected against short circuit only. Where a tap is made to voltage) under motor starting conditions. The voltage at the motor
supply a fire pump, the wiring shall be treated as service conductors in terminals shall not drop more than 5 percent below the voltage rating
accordance with 2.30.1.6. The applicable distance and size restrictions of the motor when the motor is operating at 115 percent of the full-
in 2.40.2.2 shall not apply. load current rating of the motor.

Exception No. 1: Conductors between storage batteries and the engine Exception: This limitation shall not apply for emergency run
shall not require overcurrent protection or disconnecting means. mechanical starting. [NFPA 20:9.4]

Exception No. 2: For on-site standby generator(x0 rated to produce 6.95.1.10 Listed Equipment. Diesel engine fire pump controllers,
continuous current in excess of 225 percent of the full-load amperes of electric fire pump controllers, electric motors, fire pump power
the fire pump motor, the conductors between the on-site generator(s) transfer switches, foam pump controllers, and limited service
and the combination fire pump transfer switch controller or controllers shall be listed for fire pump service. [NFPA 20:9.5.1.1,
separtately mounted transfer switch shall be installed in accordance 10.1.2.1, 12.1.3.1]
with 6.95.1.6(b) or protected in accordance with 4.30.4.2.
The protection provided shall be in accordance with the short-circuit 6.95.1.12 Equipment Location.
current rating of the combination fire pump transfer switch controller
or separtately mounted transfer switch. (a) Controllers and Transfer Switches. Electric motor-driven fire
pump controllers and power transfer switches shall be located as close
(e) Pump Wiring. All wiring from the controllers to the pump as practicable to, and within sight of, the motors that they control.
motors shall be in rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit,
liquidtight flexible metal conduit, or liquidtight flexible nonmetallic (b) Engine-Drive Controllers. Engine-drive fire pump controllers
conduit Type LFNC-B, or Type MI cable. shall be located as close as is practical to, and within sight of, the
engines that they control.
(f) Junction Points. Where wire connectors are used in the fire
pump circuit, the connectors shall be listed. A fire pump controller or (c) Storage Batteries. Storage batteries for fire pump engine drives
fire pump power transfer switch, where provided, shall not be used as shall be supported above the floor, secured against displacement, and
a junction box to supply other equipment including a pressure located where they are not subject to physical damage, flooding with
maintenance (jockey) pump(s). A fire pump controller and fire pump water, excessive temperature, or excessive vibration.
power transfer switch, where provided, shall not serve any load other
than the fire pump for which it is intended. (d) Energized Equipment. All energized equipment parts shall be
located at least 300 mm above the floor level.
(g) Mechanical Protection. All wiring from engine controllers and
batteries shall be protected against mechanical injury, and shall be (e) Protection Against Pump Water. Fire pump controllers and
installed in accordance with the controller and engine manufacturer’s power transfer switches shall be located or protected so that they will
instructions. not be damaged by water escaping from pumps or pump connections.

(h) Ground Fault Protection of Equipment. Ground fault (f) Mounting. All fire pump control equipment shall be mounted in
protection of equipment shall not be permitted for fire pumps. a substantial manner on noncombustible supporting structures.
6.95.1.14 Control Wiring. kept entirely independent of all other wiring. They shall be protected
to resist potential damage by fire or structural failure. They shall be
(a) Control Circuit Failures. External control circuits shall be permitted to be routed through a building(s) encased in 50 mm of
arranged so that failure of any external circuit (open or short circuit) concrete or within enclosed construction dedicated to the fire pump
shall not prevent the operation of a pump(s) from all other internal or circuits and having a minimum 1-hour fire resistance rating, or circuit
external means. Breakage, disconnecting, shorting of the wires, or loss protective systems with a minimum of 1-hour fire resistance. The
of power to these circuits may cause continuous running of the fire installation shall comply with any restrictions provided in the listing of
pump, but shall not prevent the controller(s) from starting the fire the electrical circuit protective system used.
pump(s) due to causes other than these external control circuits. All
control conductors within the fire pump room that are not fault tolerant
shall be protected against physical damage. [NFPA 20:10.5.2.6,
12.5.2.5]

(b) Sensor Functioning. No undervoltage, phase-loss, frequency-

sensitive, or other sensor(s) shall be installed that automatically or
manually prohibit actuation of the motor contactor. [NFPA
20:10.4.5.6]

Exception: A phase loss sensor(s) shall be permitted only as a part of

a listed fire pump controller.

(c) Remote Device(s). No remote device(s) shall be installed that

will prevent automatic operation of the transfer switch. [NFPA
20:10.8.1.3]

(d) Engine-Drive Control Wiring. All wiring between the

controller and the diesel engine shall be stranded and sized to
continuously carry the charging or control currents as required by the
controller manufacturer. Such wiring shall be protected against
mechanical injury. Controller manufacturer’s specifications for
distance and wire size shall be followed. [NFPA 20:12.3.5.1].

(e) Electric Fire Pump Control Wiring Methods. All electric

motor-driven fire pump control wiring shall be in rigid metal conduit,
intermediate metal conduit, liquidtight flexible metal conduit,
liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit Type B (LFNC-B), listed Type
MC cable with an impervious covering, or Type MI cable.

(f) Generator Control Wiring Methods. Control conductors

installed between the fire pump power transfer switch and the standby
generator supplying the fire pump during normal power loss shall be
 7.0.1.2 Application of Other Articles. Except as modified by this
article, all applicable articles of this Code shall apply.

Chapter 7. Special Conditions 7.0.1.3 Equipment Approval. All equipment shall be approved for
use on emergency systems.
ARTICLE 7.0 — EMERGENCY SYSTEMS
7.0.1.4 Tests and Maintenance.
7.0.1 General
(a) Conduct or Witness Test. The authority having jurisdiction
7.0.1.1 Scope. The provisions of this article apply to the electrical shall conduct or witness a test of the complete system upon installation
safety of the installation, operation, and maintenance of emergency and periodically afterward.
systems consisting of circuits and equipment intended to supply,
distribute, and control electricity for illumination, power, or both, to (b) Tested Periodically. Systems shall be tested periodically on a
required facilities when the normal electrical supply or system is schedule acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction to ensure the
interrupted. systems are maintained in proper operating condition.
Emergency systems are those systems legally required and classed as
emergency by municipal, state, federal, or other codes, or by any (c) Battery Systems Maintenance. Where battery systems or unit
governmental agency having jurisdiction. These systems are intended equipments are involved, including batteries used for starting, control,
to automatically supply illumination, power, or both, to designated or ignition in auxiliary engines, the authority having jurisdiction shall
areas and equipment in the event of failure of the normal supply or in require periodic maintenance.
the event of accident to elements of a system intended to supply,
distribute, and control power and illumination essential for safety to (d) Written Record. A written record shall be kept of such tests and
human life. maintenance.

FPN No. 1: For further information regarding wiring and installation of emergency (e) Testing Under Load. Means for testing all emergency lighting
systems in health care facilities, see Article 5.17. and power systems during maximum anticipated load conditions shall
FPN No. 2: For further information regarding performance and maintenance of be provided.
emergency systems in health care facilities, see NFPA 99-2002, Standard for
Health Care Facilities. FPN: For testing and maintenance procedures of emergency power supply
systems (EPSSs), see NFPA 110-2002, Standard for Emergency and Standby
FPN No. 3: Emergency systems are generally installed in places of assembly Power Systems.
where artificial illumination is required for safe exiting and for panic control in
buildings subject to occupancy by large numbers of persons, such as hotels,
theaters, sports arenas, health care facilities, and similar institutions. Emergency 7.0.1.5 Capacity.
systems may also provide power for such functions as ventilation where essential
to maintain life, fire detection and alarm systems, elevators, fire pumps, public
safety communications systems, industrial processes where current interruption
(a) Capacity and Rating. An emergency system shall have
would produce serious life safety or health hazards, and similar functions. adequate capacity and rating for all loads to be operated
simultaneously. The emergency system equipment shall be suitable for
FPN No. 4: For specification of locations where emergency lighting is considered
essential to life safety, see NFPA 101®-2003, Life Safety Code®. the maximum available fault current at its terminals.
FPN No. 5: For further information regarding performance of emergency and (b) Selective Load Pickup, Load Shedding, and Peak Load
standby power systems, see NFPA 110-2002, Standard for Emergency and
Standby Power Systems. Shaving. The alternate power source shall be permitted to supply
emergency, legally required standby, and optional standby system (b) Carrying Load. To indicate that the battery is carrying load.
loads where the source has adequate capacity or where automatic
selective load pickup and load shedding is provided as needed to (c) Not Functioning. To indicate that the battery charger is not
ensure adequate power to (1) the emergency circuits, (2) the legally functioning.
required standby circuits, and (3) the optional standby circuits, in that
order of priority. The alternate power source shall be permitted to be (d) Ground Fault. To indicate a ground fault in solidly grounded
used for peak load shaving, provided these conditions are met. wye emergency systems of more than 150 volts to ground and circuit-
Peak load-shaving operation shall be permitted for satisfying the test protective devices rated 1 000 amperes or more. The sensor for the
requirement of 7.0.1.4(b), provided all other conditions of 7.0.1.4 are ground-fault signal devices shall be located at, or ahead of, the main
met. system disconnecting means for the emergency source, and the
A portable or temporary alternate source shall be available whenever maximum setting of the signal devices shall be for a ground-fault
the emergency generator is out of service for major maintenance or current of 1 200 amperes. Instructions on the course of action to be
repair. taken in event of indicated ground fault shall be located at or near the
sensor location.
7.0.1.6 Transfer Equipment.
FPN: For signals for generator sets, see NFPA 110-2002, Standard for Emergency
and Standby Power Systems.
(a) General. Transfer equipment, including automatic transfer
switches, shall be automatic, identified for emergency use, and
7.0.1.8 Signs.
approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Transfer equipment
shall be designed and installed to prevent the inadvertent
(a) Emergency Sources. A sign shall be placed at the service
interconnection of normal and emergency sources of supply in any
entrance equipment, indicating type and location of on-site emergency
operation of the transfer equipment. Transfer equipment and electric
power sources.
power production systems installed to permit operation in parallel with
the normal source shall meet the requirements of Article 7.5.
Exception: A sign shall not be required for individual unit equipment
as specified in 7.0.3.1(f).
(b) Bypass Isolation Switches. Means shall be permitted to bypass
and isolate the transfer equipment. Where bypass isolation switches
(b) Grounding. Where the grounded circuit conductor connected to
are used, inadvertent parallel operation shall be avoided.
the emergency source is connected to a grounding electrode conductor
at a location remote from the emergency source, there shall be a sign
(c) Automatic Transfer Switches. Automatic transfer switches
at the grounding location that shall identify all emergency and normal
shall be electrically operated and mechanically held.
sources connected at that location.
(d) Use. Transfer equipment shall supply only emergency loads.
7.0.2 Circuit Wiring
7.0.1.7 Signals. Audible and visual signal devices shall be provided,
7.0.2.1 Wiring, Emergency System.
where practicable, for the purpose described in 7.0.1.7(a) through
7.0.1.7(d).
(a) Identification. All boxes and enclosures (including transfer
switches, generators, and power panels) for emergency circuits shall
(a) Derangement. To indicate derangement of the emergency
be permanently marked so they will be readily identified as a
source.
component of an emergency circuit or system.
 f. Be a cable listed to maintain circuit integrity for not less than
(b) Wiring. Wiring of two or more emergency circuits supplied 1 hour when installed in accordance with the listing requirements
from the same source shall be permitted in the same raceway, cable,
box, or cabinet. Wiring from an emergency source or emergency (2) Feeder-Circuit Equipment. Equipment for feeder circuits
source distribution overcurrent protection to emergency loads shall be (including transfer switches, transformers, and panelboards) shall be
kept entirely independent of all other wiring and equipment, unless located either in spaces fully protected by approved automatic fire
otherwise permitted in (1) through (4): suppression systems (including sprinklers, carbon dioxide systems) or
in spaces with a 1-hour fire resistance rating.
(1) Wiring from the normal power source located in transfer
equipment enclosures FPN: For the definition of occupancy classification, see Section 6.1 of NFPA 101-
2003, Life Safety Code.
(2) Wiring supplied from two sources in exit or emergency
luminaires (lighting fixtures)
7.0.3 Sources of Power
(3) Wiring from two sources in a common junction box, attached
to exit or emergency luminaires (lighting fixtures)
7.0.3.1 General Requirements. Current supply shall be such that, in
(4) Wiring within a common junction box attached to unit
the event of failure of the normal supply to, or within, the building or
equipment, containing only the branch circuit supplying the unit
group of buildings concerned, emergency lighting, emergency power,
equipment and the emergency circuit supplied by the unit equipment
or both shall be available within the time required for the application
but not to exceed 10 seconds. The supply system for emergency
(c) Wiring Design and Location. Emergency wiring circuits shall
purposes, in addition to the normal services to the building and
be designed and located so as to minimize the hazards that might cause
meeting the general requirements of this section, shall be one or more
failure due to flooding, fire, icing, vandalism, and other adverse
of the types of systems described in 7.0.3.1(a) through 7.0.3.1(e). Unit
conditions.
equipment in accordance with 7.0.3.1(f) shall satisfy the applicable
requirements of this article.
(d) Fire Protection. Emergency systems shall meet the additional
In selecting an emergency source of power, consideration shall be
requirements in 7.0.2.1(d)(1) and (d)(2) assembly occupancies for not
given to the occupancy and the type of service to be rendered, whether
less than 1 000 persons or in buildings above 23 m in height with any
of minimum duration, as for evacuation of a theater, or longer
of the following occupancy classes: assembly, educational, residential,
duration, as for supplying emergency power and lighting due to an
detention and correctional, business, and mercantile.
indefinite period of current failure from trouble either inside or outside
the building.
(1) Feeder-Circuit Wiring. Feeder-circuit wiring shall meet one of
Equipment shall be designed and located so as to minimize the hazards
the following conditions:
that might cause complete failure due to flooding, fires, icing, and
vandalism.
a. Be installed in spaces or areas that are fully protected by an
Equipment for sources of power as described in 7.0.3.1(a) through
approved automatic fire suppression system
7.0.3.1(e) where located within assembly occupancies for greater than
b. Be a listed electrical circuit protective system with a
1 000 persons or in buildings above 23 m in height with any of the
minimum 1-hour fire rating
following occupancy classes — assembly, educational, residential,
c. Be protected by a listed thermal barrier system for electrical
detention and correctional, business, and mercantile — shall be
system components
installed either in spaces fully protected by approved automatic fire
d. Be protected by a fire-rated assembly listed to achieve a
suppression systems (sprinklers, carbon dioxide systems, and so forth)
minimum fire rating of 1 hour
or in spaces with a 1-hour fire rating.
e. Be embedded in not less than 50 mm of concrete
 FPN No. 1: For the definition of occupancy classification, see Section 6.1 of NFPA Exception: Where acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction, the
101-2003, Life Safety Code.
use of other than on-site fuels shall be permitted where there is a low
FPN No. 2: Assignment of degree of reliability of the recognized emergency supply probability of a simultaneous failure of both the off-site fuel delivery
system depends on the careful evaluation of the variables at each particular system and power from the outside electrical utility company.
installation.

(a) Storage Battery. Storage batteries used as a source of power for (4) Battery Power and Dampers. Where a storage battery is used
emergency systems shall be of suitable rating and capacity to supply for control or signal power or as the means of starting the prime
and maintain the total load for a minimum period of 1½ hours, without mover, it shall be suitable for the purpose and shall be equipped with
the voltage applied to the load falling below 87½ percent of normal. an automatic charging means independent of the generator set. Where
Batteries, whether of the acid or alkali type, shall be designed and the battery charger is required for the operation of the generator set, it
constructed to meet the requirements of emergency service and shall shall be connected to the emergency system. Where power is required
be compatible with the charger for that particular installation. for the operation of dampers used to ventilate the generator set, the
For a sealed battery, the container shall not be required to be dampers shall be connected to the emergency system.
transparent. However, for the lead acid battery that requires water (5) Auxiliary Power Supply. Generator sets that require more than
additions, transparent or translucent jars shall be furnished. 10 seconds to develop power shall be permitted if an auxiliary power
Automotive-type batteries shall not be used. supply energizes the emergency system until the generator can pick up
An automatic battery charging means shall be provided. the load.
(6) Outdoor Generator Sets. Where an outdoor housed generator
(b) Generator Set. set is equipped with a readily accessible disconnecting means located
within sight of the building or structure supplied, an additional
(1) Prime Mover-Driven. For a generator set driven by a prime disconnecting means shall not be required where ungrounded
mover acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction and sized in conductors serve or pass through the building or structure.
accordance with 7.0.1.5, means shall be provided for automatically
starting the prime mover on failure of the normal service and for (c) Uninterruptible Power Supplies. Uninterruptible power
automatic transfer and operation of all required electrical circuits. A supplies used to provide power for emergency systems shall comply
time-delay feature permitting a 15-minute setting shall be provided to with the applicable provisions of 7.0.3.1(a) and 7.0.3.1(b).
avoid retransfer in case of short-time reestablishment of the normal
source. (d) Separate Service. Where acceptable to the authority having
(2) Internal Combustion as Prime Movers. Where internal jurisdiction as suitable for use as an emergency source of power, an
combustion engines are used as the prime mover, an on-site fuel additional service shall be permitted. This service shall be in
supply shall be provided with an on-premise fuel supply sufficient for accordance with the applicable provisions of Article 2.30 and the
not less than 2 hours’ full-demand operation of the system. Where following additional requirements:
power is needed for the operation of the fuel transfer pumps to deliver
fuel to a generator set day tank, this pump shall be connected to the (1) Separate service drop or service lateral
emergency power system. (2) Service conductors sufficiently remote electrically and
(3) Dual Supplies. Prime movers shall not be solely dependent on physically from any other service conductors to minimize the
a public utility gas system for their fuel supply or municipal water possibility of simultaneous interruption of supply
supply for their cooling systems. Means shall be provided for
automatically transferring from one fuel supply to another where dual (e) Fuel Cell System. Fuel cell systems used as a source of power
fuel supplies are used. for emergency systems shall be of suitable rating and capacity to
supply and maintain the total load for not less than 2 hours of full- for unit equipment shall be permitted if it originates from the same
demand operation. panelboard as that of the normal lighting circuits and is provided with
Installation of a fuel cell system shall meet the requirements of Parts a lock-on feature.
6.92.2 through 6.92.8.
Where a single fuel cell system serves as the normal supply for the 7.0.4 Emergency System Circuits for Lighting and Power
building or group of buildings concerned, it shall not serve as the sole
source of power for the emergency standby system. 7.0.4.1 Loads on Emergency Branch Circuits. No appliances and no
lamps, other than those specified as required for emergency use, shall
(f) Unit Equipment. Individual unit equipment for emergency be supplied by emergency lighting circuits.
illumination shall consist of the following:
7.0.4.2 Emergency Illumination. Emergency illumination shall
(1) A rechargeable battery include all required means of egress lighting, illuminated exit signs,
(2) A battery charging means and all other lights specified as necessary to provide required
(3) Provisions for one or more lamps mounted on the equipment, illumination.
or shall be permitted to have terminals for remote lamps, or both Emergency lighting systems shall be designed and installed so that the
(4) A relaying device arranged to energize the lamps failure of any individual lighting element, such as the burning out of a
automatically upon failure of the supply to the unit equipment light bulb, cannot leave in total darkness any space that requires
emergency illumination.
The batteries shall be of suitable rating and capacity to supply and Where high-intensity discharge lighting such as high- and low-
maintain at not less than 87½ percent of the nominal battery voltage pressure sodium, mercury vapor, and metal halide is used as the sole
for the total lamp load associated with the unit for a period of at least source of normal illumination, the emergency lighting system shall be
1½ hours, or the unit equipment shall supply and maintain not less required to operate until normal illumination has been restored.
than 60 percent of the initial emergency illumination for a period of at
least 1½ hours. Storage batteries, whether of the acid or alkali type, Exception: Alternative means that ensure emergency lighting
shall be designed and constructed to meet the requirements of illumination level is maintained shall be permitted.
emergency service.
Unit equipment shall be permanently fixed in place (i.e., not 7.0.4.3 Circuits for Emergency Lighting. Branch circuits that supply
portable) and shall have all wiring to each unit installed in accordance emergency lighting shall be installed to provide service from a source
with the requirements of any of the wiring methods in Chapter 3. complying with 7.0.3.1 when the normal supply for lighting is
Flexible cord-and-plug connection shall be permitted, provided that interrupted. Such installations shall provide either of the following:
the cord does not exceed 900 mm in length. The branch circuit feeding
the unit equipment shall be the same branch circuit as that serving the (1) An emergency lighting supply, independent of the general
normal lighting in the area and connected ahead of any local switches. lighting supply, with provisions for automatically transferring the
The branch circuit that feeds unit equipment shall be clearly identified emergency lights upon the event of failure of the general lighting
at the distribution panel. Emergency luminaires (illumination fixtures) system supply
that obtain power from a unit equipment and are not part of the unit (2) Two or more separate and complete systems with independent
equipment shall be wired to the unit equipment as required by 7.0.2.1 power supply, each system providing sufficient current for emergency
and by one of the wiring methods of Chapter 3. lighting purposes

Exception: In a separate and uninterrupted area supplied by a Unless both systems are used for regular lighting purposes and are
minimum of three normal lighting circuits, a separate branch circuit both kept lighted, means shall be provided for automatically
energizing either system upon failure of the other. Either or both are not required for illumination when there is sufficient daylight shall
systems shall be permitted to be a part of the general lighting system be permitted to be controlled by an automatic light-actuated device.
of the protected occupancy if circuits supplying lights for emergency
illumination are installed in accordance with other sections of this 7.0.6 Overcurrent Protection
article.
7.0.6.1 Accessibility. The branch-circuit overcurrent devices in
7.0.4.4 Circuits for Emergency Power. For branch circuits that emergency circuits shall be accessible to authorized persons only.
supply equipment classed as emergency, there shall be an emergency
supply source to which the load will be transferred automatically upon 7.0.6.2 Ground-Fault Protection of Equipment. The alternate source
the failure of the normal supply. for emergency systems shall not be required to have ground-fault
protection of equipment with automatic disconnecting means. Ground-
7.0.5 Control — Emergency Lighting Circuits fault indication of the emergency source shall be provided per
7.0.1.7(d).
7.0.5.1 Switch Requirements. The switch or switches installed in
emergency lighting circuits shall be arranged so that only authorized 7.0.6.3 Coordination. Emergency system(s) overcurrent devices shall
persons have control of emergency lighting. be selectively coordinated with all supply side overcurrent protective
devices.
Exception No. 1: Where two or more single-throw switches are
connected in parallel to control a single circuit, at least one of these
switches shall be accessible only to authorized persons. ARTICLE 7.1 — LEGALLY REQUIRED
STANDBY SYSTEMS
Exception No. 2: Additional switches that act only to put emergency
lights into operation but not disconnect them shall be permissible. 7.1.1 General

Switches connected in series or 3- and 4-way switches shall not be 7.1.1.1 Scope. The provisions of this article apply to the electrical
used. safety of the installation, operation, and maintenance of legally
required standby systems consisting of circuits and equipment
7.0.5.2 Switch Location. All manual switches for controlling intended to supply, distribute, and control electricity to required
emergency circuits shall be in locations convenient to authorized facilities for illumination or power, or both, when the normal electrical
persons responsible for their actuation. In facilities covered by Articles supply or system is interrupted.
5.18 and 5.20, a switch for controlling emergency lighting systems The systems covered by this article consist only of those that are
shall be located in the lobby or at a place conveniently accessible permanently installed in their entirety, including the power source.
thereto.
In no case shall a control switch for emergency lighting be placed in a FPN No. 1: For additional information, see NFPA 99-2002, Standard for Health
Care Facilities.
motion-picture projection booth or on a stage or platform.
FPN No. 2: For further information regarding performance of emergency and
Exception: Where multiple switches are provided, one such switch standby power systems, see NFPA 110-2002, Standard for Emergency and
Standby Power Systems.
shall be permitted in such locations where arranged so that it can only
energize the circuit, but cannot de-energize the circuit. FPN No. 3: For further information, see ANSI/IEEE 446-1995,Recommended
Practice for Emergency and Standby Power Systems for Industrial and
Commercial Applications.
7.0.5.3 Exterior Lights. Those lights on the exterior of a building that
7.1.1.2 Definition. Legally Required Standby Systems. Those systems Power Systems.
required and so classed as legally required standby by municipal, state,
federal, or other codes or by any governmental agency having 7.1.1.6 Capacity and Rating. A legally required standby system shall
jurisdiction. These systems are intended to automatically supply power have adequate capacity and rating for the supply of all equipment
to selected loads (other than those classed as emergency systems) in intended to be operated at one time. Legally required standby system
the event of failure of the normal source. equipment shall be suitable for the maximum available fault current at
its terminals.
FPN: Legally required standby systems are typically installed to serve loads, such The legally required standby alternate power source shall be permitted
as heating and refrigeration systems, communications systems, ventilation and to supply both legally required standby and optional standby system
smoke removal systems, sewage disposal, lighting systems, and industrial
processes, that, when stopped during any interruption of the normal electrical loads under either of the following conditions:
supply, could create hazards or hamper rescue or fire-fighting operations.
(1) Where the alternate source has adequate capacity to handle all
7.1.1.3 Application of Other Articles. Except as modified by this connected loads
article, all applicable articles of this Code shall apply. (2) Where automatic selective load pickup and load shedding is
provided that will ensure adequate power to the legally required
7.1.1.4 Equipment Approval. All equipment shall be approved for standby circuits
the intended use.
7.1.1.7 Transfer Equipment.
7.1.1.5 Tests and Maintenance for Legally Required Standby
Systems. (a) General. Transfer equipment, including automatic transfer
switches, shall be automatic and identified for standby use and
(a) Conduct or Witness Test. The authority having jurisdiction approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Transfer equipment
shall conduct or witness a test of the complete system upon shall be designed and installed to prevent the inadvertent
installation. interconnection of normal and alternate sources of supply in any
operation of the transfer equipment. Transfer equipment and electric
(b) Tested Periodically. Systems shall be tested periodically on a power production systems installed to permit operation in parallel with
schedule and in a manner acceptable to the authority having the normal source shall meet the requirements of Article 7.5.
jurisdiction to ensure the systems are maintained in proper operating
condition. (b) Bypass Isolation Switches. Means to bypass and isolate the
transfer switch equipment shall be permitted. Where bypass isolation
(c) Battery Systems Maintenance. Where batteries are used for switches are used, inadvertent parallel operation shall be avoided.
control, starting, or ignition of prime movers, the authority having
jurisdiction shall require periodic maintenance. (c) Automatic Transfer Switches. Automatic transfer switches
shall be electrically operated and mechanically held.
(d) Written Record. A written record shall be kept on such tests
and maintenance. 7.1.1.8 Signals. Audible and visual signal devices shall be provided,
where practicable, for the purposes described in 7.1.1.8(a), (b), and
(e) Testing Under Load. Means for testing legally required standby (c).
systems under load shall be provided.
(a) Derangement. To indicate derangement of the standby source.
FPN: For testing and maintenance procedures of emergency power supply
systems (EPSSs), see NFPA 110-2002, Standard for Emergency and Standby
 (b) Carrying Load. To indicate that the standby source is carrying accordance with 7.1.3.1(g) shall satisfy the applicable requirements of
load. this article.
In selecting a legally required standby source of power, consideration
(c) Not Functioning. To indicate that the battery charger is not shall be given to the type of service to be rendered, whether of short-
functioning. time duration or long duration.
Consideration shall be given to the location or design, or both, of all
FPN: For signals for generator sets, see NFPA 110-2002, Standard for Emergency equipment to minimize the hazards that might cause complete failure
and Standby Power Systems.
due to floods, fires, icing, and vandalism.
7.1.1.9 Signs. FPN: Assignment of degree of reliability of the recognized legally required standby
supply system depends on the careful evaluation of the variables at each particular
(a) Mandated Standby. A sign shall be placed at the service installation.
entrance indicating type and location of on-site legally required
standby power sources. (a) Storage Battery. A storage battery shall be of suitable rating
and capacity to supply and maintain at not less than 87½ percent of
Exception: A sign shall not be required for individual unit equipment system voltage the total load of the circuits supplying legally required
as specified in 7.1.3.1(g). standby power for a period of at least 1½ hours.
Batteries, whether of the acid or alkali type, shall be designed and
(b) Grounding. Where the grounded circuit conductor connected to constructed to meet the service requirements of emergency service and
the legally required standby power source is connected to a grounding shall be compatible with the charger for that particular installation.
electrode conductor at a location remote from the legally required For a sealed battery, the container shall not be required to be
standby power source, there shall be a sign at the grounding location transparent. However, for the lead acid battery that requires water
that shall identify all legally required standby power and normal additions, transparent or translucent jars shall be furnished.
sources connected at that location. Automotive-type batteries shall not be used.
An automatic battery charging means shall be provided.
7.1.2 Circuit Wiring
(b) Generator Set.
7.1.2.1 Wiring Legally Required Standby Systems. The legally
required standby system wiring shall be permitted to occupy the same (1) Prime Mover-Driven. For a generator set driven by a prime
raceways, cables, boxes, and cabinets with other general wiring. mover acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction and sized in
accordance with 7.1.1.6, means shall be provided for automatically
7.1.3 Sources of Power starting the prime mover upon failure of the normal service and for
automatic transfer and operation of all required electrical circuits. A
7.1.3.1 Legally Required Standby Systems. Current supply shall be time-delay feature permitting a 15-minute setting shall be provided to
such that, in the event of failure of the normal supply to, or within, the avoid retransfer in case of short-time re-establishment of the normal
building or group of buildings concerned, legally required standby source.
power will be available within the time required for the application but (2) Internal Combustion Engines as Prime Mover. Where internal
not to exceed 60 seconds. The supply system for legally required combustion engines are used as the prime mover, an on-site fuel
standby purposes, in addition to the normal services to the building, supply shall be provided with an on-premise fuel supply sufficient for
shall be permitted to comprise one or more of the types of systems not less than 2 hours’ full-demand operation of the system.
described in 7.1.3.1(a) through 7.1.3.1(f). Unit equipment in (3) Dual Fuel Supplies. Prime movers shall not be solely
dependent on a public utility gas system for their fuel supply or
municipal water supply for their cooling systems. Means shall be FPN: See 2.30.6.13 for equipment permitted on the supply side of a service
disconnecting means.
provided for automatically transferring one fuel supply to another
where dual fuel supplies are used.
(f) Fuel Cell System. Fuel cell systems used as a source of power
for legally required standby systems shall be of suitable rating and
Exception: Where acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction, the
capacity to supply and maintain the total load for not less than 2 hours
use of other than on-site fuels shall be permitted where there is a low
of full-demand operation.
probability of a simultaneous failure of both the off-site fuel delivery
Installation of a fuel cell system shall meet the requirements of Parts
system and power from the outside electrical utility company.
6.92.2 through 6.92.8.
Where a single fuel cell system serves as the normal supply for the
(4) Battery Power. Where a storage battery is used for control or
building or group of buildings concerned, it shall not serve as the sole
signal power or as the means of starting the prime mover, it shall be
source of power for the legally required standby system.
suitable for the purpose and shall be equipped with an automatic
charging means independent of the generator set.
(g) Unit Equipment. Individual unit equipment for legally required
(5) Outdoor Generator Sets. Where an outdoor housed generator
standby illumination shall consist of the following:
set is equipped with a readily accessible disconnecting means located
within sight of the building or structure supplied, an additional
(1) A rechargeable battery
disconnecting means shall not be required where ungrounded
(2) A battery charging means
conductors serve or pass through the building or structure.
(3) Provisions for one or more lamps mounted on the equipment
and shall be permitted to have terminals for remote lamps
(c) Uninterruptible Power Supplies. Uninterruptible power
(4) A relaying device arranged to energize the lamps
supplies used to provide power for legally required standby systems
automatically upon failure of the supply to the unit equipment
shall comply with the applicable provisions of 7.1.3.1(a) and
7.1.3.1(b).
The batteries shall be of suitable rating and capacity to supply and
maintain at not less than 87½ percent of the nominal battery voltage
(d) Separate Service. Where acceptable to the authority having
for the total lamp load associated with the unit for a period of at least
jurisdiction as a source of power, an additional service shall be
1½ hours, or the unit equipment shall supply and maintain not less
permitted. This service shall be in accordance with the applicable
than 60 percent of the initial legally required standby illumination for
provisions of Article 2.30, with separate service drop or lateral
a period of at least 1½ hours. Storage batteries, whether of the acid or
sufficiently remote electrically and physically from any other service
alkali type, shall be designed and constructed to meet the requirements
to minimize the possibility of simultaneous interruption of supply
of emergency service.
from an occurrence in another service.
Unit equipment shall be permanently fixed in place (i.e., not
portable) and shall have all wiring to each unit installed in accordance
(e) Connection Ahead of Service Disconnecting Means. Where
with the requirements of any of the wiring methods in Chapter 3.
acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction, connections located
Flexible cord-and-plug connection shall be permitted, provided that
ahead of and not within the same cabinet, enclosure, or vertical
the cord does not exceed 900 mm in length. The branch circuit feeding
switchboard section as the service disconnecting means shall be
the unit equipment shall be the same branch circuit as that serving the
permitted. The legally required standby service shall be sufficiently
normal lighting in the area and connected ahead of any local switches.
separated from the normal main service disconnecting means to
Legally required standby luminaires (illumination fixtures) that obtain
prevent simultaneous interruption of supply through an occurrence
power from a unit equipment and are not part of the unit equipment
within the building or groups of buildings served.
shall be wired to the unit equipment by one of the wiring methods of
Chapter 3.
FPN: Optional standby systems are typically installed to provide an alternate
source of electric power for such facilities as industrial and commercial buildings,
Exception: In a separate and uninterrupted area supplied by a farms, and residences and to serve loads such as heating and refrigeration
minimum of three normal lighting circuits, a separate branch circuit systems, data processing and communications systems, and industrial processes
for unit equipment shall be permitted if it originates from the same that, when stopped during any power outage, could cause discomfort, serious
interruption of the process, damage to the product or process, or the like.
panelboard as that of the normal lighting circuits and is provided with
a lock-on feature. 7.2.1.3 Application of Other Articles. Except as modified by this
article, all applicable articles of this Code shall apply.
7.1.4 Overcurrent Protection
7.2.1.4 Equipment Approval. All equipment shall be approved for
7.1.4.1 Accessibility. The branch-circuit overcurrent devices in legally the intended use.
required standby circuits shall be accessible to authorized persons
only. 7.2.1.5 Capacity and Rating. An optional standby system shall have
adequate capacity and rating for the supply of all equipment intended
7.1.4.3 Ground-Fault Protection of Equipment. The alternate source to be operated at one time. Optional standby system equipment shall
for legally required standby systems shall not be required to have be suitable for the maximum available fault current at its terminals.
ground-fault protection of equipment. The user of the optional standby system shall be permitted to select the
load connected to the system.
7.1.4.4 Coordination. Legally required standby system(s) overcurrent
devices shall be selectively coordinated with all supply side 7.2.1.6 Transfer Equipment. Transfer equipment shall be suitable for
overcurrent protective devices. the intended use and designed and installed so as to prevent the
inadvertent interconnection of normal and alternate sources of supply
in any operation of the transfer equipment. Transfer equipment and
ARTICLE 7.2 — OPTIONAL STANDBY SYSTEMS electric power production systems installed to permit operation in
parallel with the normal source shall meet the requirements of Article
7.2.1 General 7.5.
Transfer equipment, located on the load side of branch circuit
7.2.1.1 Scope. The provisions of this article apply to the installation protection, shall be permitted to contain supplementary overcurrent
and operation of optional standby systems. protection having an interrupting rating sufficient for the available
The systems covered by this article consist of those that are fault current that the generator can deliver. The supplementary
permanently installed in their entirety, including prime movers, and overcurrent protection devices shall be part of a listed transfer
those that are arranged for a connection to a premises wiring system equipment.
from a portable alternate power supply. Transfer equipment shall be required for all standby systems subject to
the provisions of this article and for which an electric-utility supply is
7.2.1.2 Definition. either the normal or standby source.
Optional Standby Systems. Those systems intended to supply Exception: Temporary connection of a portable generator without
power to public or private facilities or property where life safety does transfer equipment shall be permitted where conditions of
not depend on the performance of the system. Optional standby maintenance and supervision ensure that only licensed electrical
systems are intended to supply on-site generated power to selected practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner under the
loads either automatically or manually. supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner service the installation
and where the normal supply is physically isolated by a lockable grounding electrode in accordance with 2.50.2.11.
disconnect means or by disconnection of the normal supply
conductors. (b) Nonseparately Derived System. Where a portable optional
standby source is used as a nonseparately derived system, the
7.2.1.7 Signals. Audible and visual signal devices shall be provided, equipment grounding conductor shall be bonded to the system
where practicable, for the following purposes. grounding electrode.

(1) Derangement. To indicate derangement of the optional standby 7.2.4 Sources of Power
source.
(2) Carrying Load. To indicate that the optional standby source is 7.2.4.1 Outdoor Generator Sets. Where an outdoor housed generator
carrying load. set is equipped with a readily accessible disconnecting means located
within sight of the building or structure supplied, an additional
Exception: Signals shall not be required for portable standby power disconnecting means shall not be required where ungrounded
sources. conductors serve or pass through the building or structure.

7.2.1.8 Signs.
ARTICLE 7.5 — INTERCONNECTED ELECTRIC
(a) Standby. A sign shall be placed at the service-entrance POWER PRODUCTION SOURCES
equipment that indicates the type and location of on-site optional
standby power sources. A sign shall not be required for individual unit 7.5.1.1 Scope. This article covers installation of one or more electric
equipment for standby illumination. power production sources operating in parallel with a primary
source(s) of electricity.
(b) Grounding. Where the grounded circuit conductor connected to
the optional standby power source is connected to a grounding FPN: Examples of the types of primary sources are a utility supply, on-site electric
power source(s), or other sources.
electrode conductor at a location remote from the optional standby
power source, there shall be a sign at the grounding location that shall
7.5.1.2 Definition.
identify all optional standby power and normal sources connected at
that location.
Interactive System. An electric power production system that is
operating in parallel with and capable of delivering energy to an
7.2.2 Circuit Wiring
electric primary source supply system.
7.2.2.1 Wiring Optional Standby Systems. The optional standby
7.5.1.3 Other Articles. Interconnected electric power production
system wiring shall be permitted to occupy the same raceways, cables,
sources shall comply with this article and also with the applicable
boxes, and cabinets with other general wiring.
requirements of the articles in Table 7.5.1.3.
7.2.3 Grounding
Exception No. 1: Installation of solar photovoltaic systems operated
as interconnected power sources shall be in accordance with Article
7.2.3.1 Portable Generator Grounding.
6.90.
Exception No. 2: Installation of fuel cell systems operated as
(a) Separately Derived System. Where a portable optional standby
interconnected power sources shall be in accordance with Article
source is used as a separately derived system, it shall be grounded to a
6.92. (3) Safeguards and protective equipment are established and
maintained.

Table 7.5.1.3 Other Articles 7.5.1.14 Output Characteristics. The output of a generator or other
Equipment/System Article electric power production source operating in parallel with an electric
Generators 4.45 supply system shall be compatible with the voltage, wave shape, and
Emergency systems 7.0 frequency of the system to which it is connected.
Legally required standby systems 7.1
FPN: The term compatible does not necessarily mean matching the primary source
Optional standby systems wave shape.
7.2
7.5.1.16 Interrupting and Short-Circuit Current Rating.
Consideration shall be given to the contribution of fault currents from
all interconnected power sources for the interrupting and short-circuit
7.5.1.10 Directory. A permanent plaque or directory, denoting all current ratings of equipment on interactive systems.
electrical power sources on or in the premises, shall be installed at
each service equipment location and at locations of all electric power 7.5.1.20 Disconnecting Means, Sources. Means shall be provided to
production sources capable of being interconnected. disconnect all ungrounded conductors of an electric power production
source(s) from all other conductors.
Exception: Installations with large numbers of power production
sources shall be permitted to be designated by groups. 7.5.1.21 Disconnecting Means, Equipment. Means shall be provided
to disconnect equipment, such as inverters or transformers associated
7.5.1.12 Point of Connection. The outputs of electric power with a power production source, from all ungrounded conductors of all
production systems shall be interconnected at the premises service sources of supply. Equipment intended to be operated and maintained
disconnecting means. as an integral part of a power production source exceeding 1 000 volts
shall not be required to have a disconnecting means.
(a) Integrated Electric System. The outputs shall be permitted to
be interconnected at a point or points elsewhere on the premises where 7.5.1.22 Disconnect Device. The disconnecting means for ungrounded
the system qualifies as an integrated electric system and incorporates conductors shall consist of a manually or power operable switch(es) or
protective equipment in accordance with all applicable sections of circuit breaker(s) with the following features:
Article 6.85.
(1) Located where accessible
(b) General. The outputs shall be permitted to be interconnected at (2) Externally operable without exposing the operator to contact
a point or points elsewhere on the premises where all of the following with live parts and, if power operable, of a type that can be opened by
conditions are met: hand in the event of a power supply failure
(3) Plainly indicating whether in the open or closed position
(1) The aggregate of nonutility sources of electricity has a capacity (4) Having ratings not less than the load to be carried and the fault
in excess of 100 kW, or the service is above 1 000 volts. current to be interrupted
(2) The conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that
licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner For disconnect equipment energized from both sides, a marking shall
under the supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner service and be provided to indicate that all contacts of the disconnect equipment
operate the system.
may be energized. source supply system outage has occurred and whether there should be automatic
disconnection. When the primary source supply system is restored, special
detection methods can be required to limit exposure of power production sources
FPN No. 1: In parallel generation systems, some equipment, including knife blade to out-of-phase reconnection.
switches and fuses, is likely to be energized from both directions. See 240.40. FPN No. 2: Induction-generating equipment on systems with significant
FPN No. 2: Interconnection to an off-premises primary source could require a capacitance can become self-excited upon loss of primary source and experience
visibly verifiable disconnecting device. severe overvoltage as a result.

7.5.1.30 Overcurrent Protection. Conductors shall be protected in 7.5.1.42 Unbalanced Interconnections. A 3-phase electric power
accordance with Article 2.40. Equipment and conductors connected to production source shall be automatically disconnected from all
more than one electrical source shall have a sufficient number of ungrounded conductors of the interconnected systems when one of the
overcurrent devices located so as to provide protection from all phases of that source opens. This requirement shall not be applicable
sources. to an electric power production source providing power for an
emergency or legally required standby system.
(a) Generators. Generators shall be protected in accordance with
4.45.1.12. 7.5.1.43 Synchronous Generators. Synchronous generators in a
parallel system shall be provided with the necessary equipment to
(b) Solar Photovoltaic Systems. Solar photovoltaic systems shall establish and maintain a synchronous condition.
be protected in accordance with Article 6.90.
7.5.1.50 Grounding. Interconnected electric power production sources
(c) Transformers. Overcurrent protection for a transformer with a shall be grounded in accordance with Article 2.50.
source(s) on each side shall be provided in accordance with 4.50.1.3
by considering first one side of the transformer, then the other side of Exception: For direct-current systems connected through an inverter
the transformer, as the primary. directly to a grounded service, other methods that accomplish
equivalent system protection and that utilize equipment listed and
(d) Fuel Cell Systems. Fuel cell systems shall be protected in identified for the use shall be permitted.
accordance with Article 6.92.

7.5.1.32 Ground-Fault Protection. Where ground-fault protection is ARTICLE 7.20 — CIRCUITS AND EQUIPMENT
used, the output of an interactive system shall be connected to the OPERATING AT LESS THAN 50 VOLTS
supply side of the ground-fault protection.
7.20.1.1 Scope. This article covers installations operating at less than
Exception: Connection shall be permitted to be made to the load side 50 volts, direct current or alternating current.
of ground-fault protection, provided that there is ground-fault
protection for equipment from all ground-fault current sources. 7.20.1.2 Other Articles. Installations operating at less than 50 volts,
direct current or alternating current, as covered in Articles 4.11, 5.17,
7.5.1.40 Loss of Primary Source. Upon loss of primary source, an 5.50, 5.51, 5.52, 6.50, 6.69, 6.90, 7.25, and 7.60 shall not be required
electric power production source shall be automatically disconnected to comply with this article.
from all ungrounded conductors of the primary source and shall not be
reconnected until the primary source is restored. 7.20.1.3 Hazardous (Classified) Locations. Installations coming
within the scope of this article and installed in hazardous (classified)
FPN No. 1: Risks to personnel and equipment associated with the primary source
could occur if an interactive electric power production source can operate as an
locations shall also comply with the appropriate provisions of Articles
island. Special detection methods can be required to determine that a primary 5.0 through 5.17.
 FPN: The circuits described herein are characterized by usage and electrical
2 power limitations that differentiate them from electric light and power circuits;
7.20.1.4 Conductors. Conductors shall not be smaller than 3.5 mm therefore, alternative requirements to those of Chapters 1 through 4 are given with
(2.0 mm dia.) copper or equivalent. Conductors for appliance branch regard to minimum wire sizes, derating factors, overcurrent protection, insulation
circuits supplying more than one appliance or appliance receptacle requirements, and wiring methods and materials.

shall not be smaller than 5.5 mm2 (2.6 mm dia.) copper or equivalent.
7.25.1.2 Definitions.
7.20.1.5 Lampholders. Standard lampholders that have a rating of not
less than 660 watts shall be used. Abandoned Class 2, Class 3, and PLTC Cable. Installed Class 2,
Class 3, and PLTC cable that is not terminated at equipment and not
7.20.1.6 Receptacle Rating. Receptacles shall have a rating of not less identified for future use with a tag.
than 15 amperes. Circuit Integrity (CI) Cable. Cable(s) used for remote control,
signaling, or power-limited systems that supply critical circuits to
7.20.1.7 Receptacles Required. Receptacles of not less than 20- ensure survivability for continued circuit operation for a specified time
ampere rating shall be provided in kitchens, laundries, and other under fire conditions.
locations where portable appliances are likely to be used. Class 1 Circuit. The portion of the wiring system between the load
side of the overcurrent device or power-limited supply and the
7.20.1.8 Overcurrent Protection. Overcurrent protection shall connected equipment. The voltage and power limitations of the source
comply with Article 2.40. are in accordance with 7.25.2.1.
Class 2 Circuit. The portion of the wiring system between the load
7.20.1.9 Batteries. Installations of storage batteries shall comply with side of a Class 2 power source and the connected equipment. Due to
Article 4.80. its power limitations, a Class 2 circuit considers safety from a fire
initiation standpoint and provides acceptable protection from electric
7.20.1.10 Grounding. Grounding shall be as provided in Article 2.50. shock.
Class 3 Circuit. The portion of the wiring system between the load
7.20.1.11 Mechanical Execution of Work. Circuits operating at less side of a Class 3 power source and the connected equipment. Due to
than 50 volts shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. its power limitations, a Class 3 circuit considers safety from a fire
Cables shall be supported by the building structure in such a manner initiation standpoint. Since higher levels of voltage and current than
that the cable will not be damaged by normal building use. for Class 2 are permitted, additional safeguards are specified to
provide protection from an electric shock hazard that could be
encountered.
ARTICLE 7.25 — CLASS 1, CLASS 2, AND CLASS 3
REMOTE-CONTROL, SIGNALING, 7.25.1.3 Other Articles. Circuits and equipment shall comply with the
AND POWER-LIMITED CIRCUITS articles or sections listed in 7.25.1.3(a) through 7.25.1.3(g). Only those
sections of Article 3.0 referenced in this article shall apply to Class 1,
7.25.1 General Class 2, and Class 3 circuits.

7.25.1.1 Scope. This article covers remote-control, signaling, and (a) Number and Size of Conductors in Raceway. Section 3.0.1.17.
power-limited circuits that are not an integral part of a device or
appliance. (b) Spread of Fire or Products of Combustion. Section 3.0.1.21.
The accessible portion of abandoned Class 2, Class 3, and PLTC
cables shall be removed.
 (a) Remote-Control Circuits. Remote-control circuits for safety-
(c) Ducts, Plenums, and Other Air-Handling Spaces. Class 1, control equipment shall be classified as Class 1 if the failure of the
Class 2, and Class 3 circuits installed in ducts, plenums, or other space equipment to operate introduces a direct fire or life hazard. Room
used for environmental air shall comply with 3.0.1.22. Type CL2P or thermostats, water temperature regulating devices, and similar controls
CL3P cables and plenum signaling raceways shall be permitted for used in conjunction with electrically controlled household heating and
Class 2 and Class 3 circuits installed in other spaces used for air conditioning shall not be considered safety-control equipment.
environmental air.
(b) Physical Protection. Where damage to remote-control circuits
(d) Hazardous (Classified) Locations. Articles 5.0 through 5.16 of safety control equipment would introduce a hazard, as covered in
and Part 5.17.4, where installed in hazardous (classified) locations. 7.25.1.11(a), all conductors of such remote-control circuits shall be
installed in rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit, rigid
(e) Cable Trays. Article 3.92, where installed in cable tray. nonmetallic conduit, electrical metallic tubing, Type MI cable, Type
MC cable, or be otherwise suitably protected from physical damage.
(f) Motor Control Circuits. Part 4.30.6 where tapped from the load
side of the motor branch-circuit protective device(s) as specified in 7.25.1.15 Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 Circuit Requirements. A
4.30.6.2(a). remote-control, signaling, or power-limited circuit shall comply with
the following parts of this article:
(g) Instrumentation Tray Cable. See Article 7.27.
(1) Class 1 Circuits: Parts I and II
7.25.1.7 Access to Electrical Equipment Behind Panels Designed to (2) Class 2 and Class 3 Circuits: Parts I and III
Allow Access. Access to electrical equipment shall not be denied by
an accumulation of wires and cables that prevents removal of panels, 7.25.2 Class 1 Circuits
including suspended ceiling panels.
7.25.2.1 Class 1 Circuit Classifications and Power Source
7.25.1.8 Mechanical Execution of Work. Class 1, Class 2, and Class Requirements. Class 1 circuits shall be classified as either Class 1
3 circuits shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. Cables power-limited circuits where they comply with the power limitations
and conductors installed exposed on the surface of ceilings and of 7.25.2.1(a) or as Class 1 remote-control and signaling circuits
sidewalls shall be supported by the building structure in such a manner where they are used for remote-control or signaling purposes and
that the cable will not be damaged by normal building use. Such comply with the power limitations of 7.25.2.1(b).
cables shall be supported by straps, staples, hangers, or similar fittings
designed and installed so as not to damage the cable. The installation (a) Class 1 Power-Limited Circuits. These circuits shall be
shall also conform with 3.0.1.4(d). supplied from a source that has a rated output of not more than 30
volts and 1 000 volt-amperes.
7.25.1.10 Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 Circuit Identification. Class
1, Class 2, and Class 3 circuits shall be identified at terminal and (1) Class 1 Transformers. Transformers used to supply power-
junction locations, in a manner that prevents unintentional interference limited Class 1 circuits shall comply with the applicable sections
with other circuits during testing and servicing. within Parts 4.50.1 and 4.50.2.
(2) Other Class 1 Power Sources. Power sources other than
7.25.1.11 Safety-Control Equipment. transformers shall be protected by overcurrent devices rated at not
more than 167 percent of the volt-ampere rating of the source divided
by the rated voltage. The overcurrent devices shall not be
interchangeable with overcurrent devices of higher ratings. The devices shall be located as specified in 7.25.2.4(a), (b), (c), (d), or (e).
overcurrent device shall be permitted to be an integral part of the
power supply. (a) Point of Supply. Overcurrent devices shall be located at the
To comply with the 1 000 volt-ampere limitation of 7.25.2.1(a), point where the conductor to be protected receives its supply.
the maximum output (VAmax) of power sources other than
transformers shall be limited to 2500 volt-amperes, and the product of (b) Feeder Taps. Class 1 circuit conductors shall be permitted to be
the maximum current (Imax) and maximum voltage (Vmax) shall not tapped, without overcurrent protection at the tap, where the
exceed 10 000 volt-amperes. These ratings shall be determined with overcurrent device protecting the circuit conductor is sized to protect
any overcurrent-protective device bypassed. the tap conductor.
VAmax is the maximum volt-ampere output after one minute of
operation regardless of load and with overcurrent protection bypassed, (c) Branch Circuit Taps. Class 1 circuit conductors 2.0 mm2
if used. Current-limiting impedance shall not be bypassed when (1.6 mm dia.) and larger that are tapped from the load side of the
determining VAmax. overcurrent-protective device(s) of a controlled light and power circuit
Imax is the maximum output current under any noncapacitive shall require only short-circuit and ground-fault protection and shall be
load, including short circuit, and with overcurrent protection bypassed, permitted to be protected by the branch-circuit overcurrent protective
if used. Current-limiting impedance should not be bypassed when device(s) where the rating of the protective device(s) is not more than
determining Imax. Where a current-limiting impedance, listed for the 300 percent of the ampacity of the Class 1 circuit conductor.
purpose or as part of a listed product, is used in combination with a
stored energy source, for example, storage battery, to limit the output (d) Primary Side of Transformer. Class 1 circuit conductors
current, Imax limits apply after 5 seconds. supplied by the secondary of a single-phase transformer having only a
Vmax is the maximum output voltage regardless of load with rated 2-wire (single-voltage) secondary shall be permitted to be protected by
input applied. overcurrent protection provided on the primary side of the transformer,
provided this protection is in accordance with 4.50.1.3 and does not
(b) Class 1 Remote-Control and Signaling Circuits. These circuits exceed the value determined by multiplying the secondary conductor
shall not exceed 600 volts. The power output of the source shall not be ampacity by the secondary-to-primary transformer voltage ratio.
required to be limited. Transformer secondary conductors other than 2 wire shall not be
considered to be protected by the primary overcurrent protection.
7.25.2.3 Class 1 Circuit Overcurrent Protection. Overcurrent
protection for conductors 2.0 mm2 (1.6 mm dia.) and larger shall be (e) Input Side of Electronic Power Source. Class 1 circuit
provided in accordance with the conductor ampacity, without applying conductors supplied by the output of a single-phase, listed electronic
the derating factors of 3.10.1.15 to the ampacity calculation. power source, other than a transformer, having only a 2-wire (single
Overcurrent protection shall not exceed 7 amperes for 18 AWG voltage) output for connection to Class 1 circuits shall be permitted to
conductors and 10 amperes for 16 AWG. be protected by overcurrent protection provided on the input side of
the electronic power source, provided this protection does not exceed
Exception: Where other articles of this Code permit or require other the value determined by multiplying the Class 1 circuit conductor
overcurrent protection. ampacity by the output-to-input voltage ratio. Electronic power source
outputs, other than 2 wire (single voltage), shall not be considered to
FPN: For example, see 4.30.6.2 for motors, 6.10.6.3 for cranes and hoists, and be protected by the primary overcurrent protection.
5.17.5.4(b) and 6.60.1.9 for X-ray equipment.

7.25.2.5 Class 1 Circuit Wiring Methods. Class 1 circuits shall be

7.25.2.4 Class 1 Circuit Overcurrent Device Location. Overcurrent
installed in accordance with Part 3.0.1 and with the wiring methods
from the appropriate articles in Chapter 3. c. The conductors are permanently and effectively separated
from the power supply conductors and securely fastened to racks,
Exception No. 1: The provisions of 7.25.2.6 through 7.25.2.8 shall be insulators, or other approved supports.
permitted to apply in installations of Class 1 circuits.
Exception No. 2: Methods permitted or required by other articles of (4) In Cable Trays. In cable trays, where the Class 1 circuit
this Code shall apply to installations of Class 1 circuits. conductors and power-supply conductors not functionally associated
with them are separated by a solid fixed barrier of a material
7.25.2.6 Conductors of Different Circuits in the Same Cable, Cable compatible with the cable tray, or where the power-supply or Class 1
Tray, Enclosure, or Raceway. Class 1 circuits shall be permitted to circuit conductors are in a metal-enclosed cable.
be installed with other circuits as specified in 7.25.2.6(a) and
7.25.2.6(b). 7.25.2.7 Class 1 Circuit Conductors.

(a) Two or More Class 1 Circuits. Class 1 circuits shall be (a) Sizes and Use. Conductors of sizes 18 AWG and 16 AWG shall
permitted to occupy the same cable, cable tray, enclosure, or raceway be permitted to be used, provided they supply loads that do not exceed
without regard to whether the individual circuits are alternating current the ampacities given in 4.2.1.5 and are installed in a raceway, an
or direct current, provided all conductors are insulated for the approved enclosure, or a listed cable. Conductors larger than 16 AWG
maximum voltage of any conductor in the cable, cable tray, enclosure, shall not supply loads greater than the ampacities given in 3.10.1.15.
or raceway. Flexible cords shall comply with Article 4.0.

(b) Class 1 Circuits with Power Supply Circuits. Class 1 circuits (b) Insulation. Insulation on conductors shall be suitable for 600
shall be permitted to be installed with power supply conductors as volts. Conductors larger than 16 AWG shall comply with Article 310.
specified in 7.25.2.6(b)(1) through (b)(4). Conductors in sizes 18 AWG and 16 AWG shall be Type FFH-2, KF-
2, KFF-2, PAF, PAFF, PF, PFF, PGF, PGFF, PTF, PTFF, RFH-2,
(1) In a Cable, Enclosure, or Raceway. Class 1 circuits and power RFHH-2, RFHH-3, SF-2, SFF-2, TF, TFF, TFFN, TFN, ZF, or ZFF.
supply circuits shall be permitted to occupy the same cable, enclosure, Conductors with other types and thicknesses of insulation shall be
or raceway only where the equipment powered is functionally permitted if listed for Class 1 circuit use.
associated.
(2) In Factory- or Field-Assembled Control Centers. Class 1 7.25.2.8 Number of Conductors in Cable Trays and Raceway, and
circuits and power supply circuits shall be permitted to be installed in Derating.
factory- or field-assembled control centers.
(3) In a Manhole. Class 1 circuits and power supply circuits shall (a) Class 1 Circuit Conductors. Where only Class 1 circuit
be permitted to be installed as underground conductors in a manhole in conductors are in a raceway, the number of conductors shall be
accordance with one of the following: determined in accordance with 3.0.1.17. The derating factors given in
3.10.1.15(b)(2)a shall apply only if such conductors carry continuous
a. The power-supply or Class 1 circuit conductors are in a metal- loads in excess of 10 percent of the ampacity of each conductor.
enclosed cable or Type UF cable.
b. The conductors are permanently separated from the power- (b) Power-Supply Conductors and Class 1 Circuit Conductors.
supply conductors by a continuous firmly fixed nonconductor, such as Where power-supply conductors and Class 1 circuit conductors are
flexible tubing, in addition to the insulation on the wire. permitted in a raceway in accordance with 7.25.2.6, the number of
conductors shall be determined in accordance with 3.0.1.17. The
derating factors given in 3.10.1.15(b)(2)a shall apply as follows:
 (2) A current-limiting impedance, listed for the purpose, or part of a listed
product, used in conjunction with a non–power-limited transformer or a stored
(1) To all conductors where the Class 1 circuit conductors carry energy source, for example, storage battery, to limit the output current
continuous loads in excess of 10 percent of the ampacity of each (3) A thermocouple
conductor and where the total number of conductors is more than three (4) Limited voltage/current or limited impedance secondary communications
circuits of listed industrial control equipment
(2) To the power-supply conductors only, where the Class 1 circuit
conductors do not carry continuous loads in excess of 10 percent of the (4) Listed information technology (computer) equipment limited
ampacity of each conductor and where the number of power-supply power circuits.
conductors is more than three
(c) Class 1 Circuit Conductors in Cable Trays. Where Class 1 FPN: One way to determine applicable requirements for listing of information
circuit conductors are installed in cable trays, they shall comply with technology (computer) equipment is to refer to UL 1950-1995, Standard for Safety
of Information Technology Equipment, Including Electrical Business Equipment.
the provisions of 3.92.1.9 through 3.92.1.11. Typically such circuits are used to interconnect information technology equipment
for the purpose of exchanging information (data).
7.25.2.9 Circuits Extending Beyond One Building. Class 1 circuits
that extend aerially beyond one building shall also meet the (5) A dry cell battery shall be considered an inherently limited
requirements of Article 2.25. Class 2 power source, provided the voltage is 30 volts or less and the
capacity is equal to or less than that available from series connected
7.25.3 Class 2 and Class 3 Circuits No. 6 carbon zinc cells.

7.25.3.1 Power Sources for Class 2 and Class 3 Circuits. (b) Interconnection of Power Sources. Class 2 or Class 3 power
sources shall not have the output connections paralleled or otherwise
(a) Power Source. The power source for a Class 2 or a Class 3 interconnected unless listed for such interconnection.
circuit shall be as specified in 7.25.3.1(a)(1), (a)(2), (a)(3), (a)(4), or
(a)(5):

FPN No. 1: Figure 7.25.3.1 illustrates the relationships between Class 2 or Class 3
power sources, their supply, and the Class 2 or Class 3 circuits.
FPN No. 2: Table 11(a) and Table 11(b) in Chapter 9 provide the requirements for
listed Class 2 and Class 3 power sources.

(1) A listed Class 2 or Class 3 transformer

(2) A listed Class 2 or Class 3 power supply
(3) Other listed equipment marked to identify the Class 2 or Class
3 power source

Exception No. 1: Thermocouples shall not require listing as a Class 2 Figure 7.25.3.1 Class 2 and Class 3 Circuits.
power source.
Exception No. 2: Limited power circuits of listed equipment where
these circuits have energy levels rated at or below the limits 7.25.3.2 Circuit Marking. The equipment supplying the circuits shall
established in Chapter 9, Table 11(a) and Table 11(b). be durably marked where plainly visible to indicate each circuit that is
a Class 2 or Class 3 circuit.
FPN: Examples of other listed equipment are as follows:
(1) A circuit card listed for use as a Class 2 or Class 3 power source where used
as part of a listed assembly
7.25.3.11 Wiring Methods on Supply Side of the Class 2 or Class 3 Exception No. 2: Other wiring methods and materials installed in
Power Source. Conductors and equipment on the supply side of the accordance with the requirements of 7.25.1.3 shall be permitted to
power source shall be installed in accordance with the appropriate extend or replace the conductors and cables described in 7.25.4.1 and
requirements of Chapters 1 through 4. Transformers or other devices permitted by 7.25.3.12(b).
supplied from electric light or power circuits shall be protected by an
overcurrent device rated not over 20 amperes. 7.25.3.14 Installation of Conductors and Equipment in Cables,
Compartments, Cable Trays, Enclosures, Manholes, Outlet Boxes,
Exception: The input leads of a transformer or other power source Device Boxes, and Raceways for Class 2 and Class 3 Circuits.
supplying Class 2 and Class 3 circuits shall be permitted to be smaller Conductors and equipment for Class 2 and Class 3 circuits shall be
than 2.0 mm2 (1.6 mm dia.), but not smaller than 18 AWG if they are installed in accordance with 7.25.3.15 through 7.25.3.18.
not over 300 mm long and if they have insulation that complies with
7.25.2.7(b). 7.25.3.15 Separation from Electric Light, Power, Class 1, Non–
Power-Limited Fire Alarm Circuit Conductors, and Medium
7.25.3.12 Wiring Methods and Materials on Load Side of the Class Power Network-Powered Broadband Communications Cables.
2 or Class 3 Power Source. Class 2 and Class 3 circuits on the load
side of the power source shall be permitted to be installed using wiring (a) General. Cables and conductors of Class 2 and Class 3 circuits
methods and materials in accordance with either 7.25.3.12(a) or shall not be placed in any cable, cable tray, compartment, enclosure,
7.25.3.12(b). manhole, outlet box, device box, raceway, or similar fitting with
conductors of electric light, power, Class 1, non–power-limited fire
(a) Class 1 Wiring Methods and Materials. Installation shall be in alarm circuits, and medium power network-powered broadband
accordance with 7.25.2.5. communications circuits unless permitted by 7.25.3.15(b) through
7.25.3.15(j).
Exception No. 1: The derating factors given in 3.10.1.15(b)(2)a shall (b) Separated by Barriers. Class 2 and Class 3 circuits shall be
not apply. permitted to be installed together with the conductors of electric light,
Exception No. 2: Class 2 and Class 3 circuits shall be permitted to be power, Class 1, non–power-limited fire alarm and medium power
reclassified and installed as Class 1 circuits if the Class 2 and Class 3 network-powered broadband communications circuits where they are
markings required in 7.25.3.2 are eliminated and the entire circuit is separated by a barrier.
installed using the wiring methods and materials in accordance with (c) Raceways Within Enclosures. In enclosures, Class 2 and Class
Part II, Class 1 circuits. 3 circuits shall be permitted to be installed in a raceway to separate
them from Class 1, non–power-limited fire alarm and medium power
FPN: Class 2 and Class 3 circuits reclassified and installed as Class 1 circuits are network-powered broadband communications circuits.
no longer Class 2 or Class 3 circuits, regardless of the continued connection to a
Class 2 or Class 3 power source. (d) Associated Systems Within Enclosures. Class 2 and Class 3
circuit conductors in compartments, enclosures, device boxes, outlet
(b) Class 2 and Class 3 Wiring Methods. Conductors on the load boxes, or similar fittings shall be permitted to be installed with electric
side of the power source shall be insulated at not less than the light, power, Class 1, non–power-limited fire alarm, and medium
requirements of 7.25.4.1 and shall be installed in accordance with power network-powered broadband communications circuits where
7.25.3.14 and 7.25.3.21. they are introduced solely to connect the equipment connected to Class
2 and Class 3 circuits, and where (1) or (2) applies:
Exception No. 1: As provided for in 6.20.3.1 for elevators and similar
equipment. (1) The electric light, power, Class 1, non–power-limited fire
alarm, and medium power network-powered broadband
communications circuit conductors are routed to maintain a minimum
of 6 mm separation from the conductors and cables of Class 2 and (g) Closed-Loop and Programmed Power Distribution. Class 2
Class 3 circuits. and Class 3 conductors shall be permitted to be installed in accordance
(2) The circuit conductors operate at 150 volts or less to ground with 7.80.1.6.
and also comply with one of the following:
a. The Class 2 and Class 3 circuits are installed using Type CL3, (h) Cable Trays. Class 2 and Class 3 circuit conductors shall be
CL3R, or CL3P or permitted substitute cables, provided these Class 3 permitted to be installed in cable trays, where the conductors of the
cable conductors extending beyond the jacket are separated by a electric light, Class 1, and non–power-limited fire alarm circuits are
minimum of 6 mm or by a nonconductive sleeve or nonconductive separated by a solid fixed barrier of a material compatible with the
barrier from all other conductors. cable tray or where the Class 2 or Class 3 circuits are installed in Type
b. The Class 2 and Class 3 circuit conductors are installed as a MC cable.
Class 1 circuit in accordance with 7.25.2.1.
(i) In Hoistways. In hoistways, Class 2 or Class 3 circuit conductors
(e) Enclosures with Single Opening. Class 2 and Class 3 circuit shall be installed in rigid metal conduit, rigid nonmetallic conduit,
conductors entering compartments, enclosures, device boxes, outlet intermediate metal conduit, liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit, or
boxes, or similar fittings shall be permitted to be installed with Class electrical metallic tubing. For elevators or similar equipment, these
1, non–power-limited fire alarm and medium power network-powered conductors shall be permitted to be installed as provided in 6.20.3.1.
broadband communications circuits where they are introduced solely
to connect the equipment connected to Class 2 and Class 3 circuits. (j) Other Applications. For other applications, conductors of Class
Where Class 2 and Class 3 circuit conductors must enter an enclosure 2 and Class 3 circuits shall be separated by at least 50 mm (2 in.) from
that is provided with a single opening, they shall be permitted to enter conductors of any electric light, power, Class 1 non–power-limited fire
through a single fitting (such as a tee), provided the conductors are alarm or medium power network-powered broadband communications
separated from the conductors of the other circuits by a continuous and circuits unless one of the following conditions is met:
firmly fixed nonconductor, such as flexible tubing.
(f) Manholes. Underground Class 2 and Class 3 circuit conductors (1) Either (a) all of the electric light, power, Class 1, non–power-
in a manhole shall be permitted to be installed with Class 1, non– limited fire alarm and medium power network-powered broadband
power-limited fire alarm and medium power network-powered communications circuit conductors or (b) all of the Class 2 and Class 3
broadband communications circuits where one of the following circuit conductors are in a raceway or in metal-sheathed, metal-clad,
conditions is met: non–metallic-sheathed, or Type UF cables.
(2) All of the electric light, power, Class 1 non–power-limited fire
(1) The electric light, power, Class 1, non–power-limited fire alarm, and medium power network-powered broadband
alarm and medium power network-powered broadband communications circuit conductors are permanently separated from all
communications circuit conductors are in a metal-enclosed cable or of the Class 2 and Class 3 circuit conductors by a continuous and
Type UF cable. firmly fixed nonconductor, such as porcelain tubes or flexible tubing,
(2) The Class 2 and Class 3 circuit conductors are permanently in addition to the insulation on the conductors.
and effectively separated from the conductors of other circuits by a
continuous and firmly fixed nonconductor, such as flexible tubing, in 7.25.3.16 Installation of Conductors of Different Circuits in the
addition to the insulation or covering on the wire. Same Cable, Enclosure, or Raceway.
(3) The Class 2 and Class 3 circuit conductors are permanently
and effectively separated from conductors of the other circuits and (a) Two or More Class 2 Circuits. Conductors of two or more
securely fastened to racks, insulators, or other approved supports. Class 2 circuits shall be permitted within the same cable, enclosure, or
raceway. using Class 2 or Class 3 wiring methods in compliance with Sections
7.25.3.14 and 7.25.3.21, shall not be permitted to be installed in the
(b) Two or More Class 3 Circuits. Conductors of two or more same cable or raceway with Class 2 or Class 3 conductors or cables.
Class 3 circuits shall be permitted within the same cable, enclosure, or
raceway. 7.25.3.17 Installation of Circuit Conductors Extending Beyond
One Building. Where Class 2 or Class 3 circuit conductors extend
(c) Class 2 Circuits with Class 3 Circuits. Conductors of one or beyond one building and are run so as to be subject to accidental
more Class 2 circuits shall be permitted within the same cable, contact with electric light or power conductors operating over 300
enclosure, or raceway with conductors of Class 3 circuits, provided volts to ground, or are exposed to lightning on interbuilding circuits on
that the insulation of the Class 2 circuit conductors in the cable, the same premises, the requirements of the following shall also apply:
enclosure, or raceway is at least that required for Class 3 circuits.
(d) Class 2 and Class 3 Circuits with Communications Circuits. (1) Sections 8.0.2.1, 8.0.2.7, 8.0.2.10, 8.0.3.4, 8.0.4.1, 8.0.6.1(a),
and 8.0.6.1(b) for other than coaxial conductors
(1) Classified as Communications Circuits. Class 2 and Class 3 (2) Sections 8.20.2.1, 8.20.3.1, and 8.20.4.1 for coaxial conductors
circuit conductors shall be permitted in the same cable with
communications circuits, in which case the Class 2 and Class 3 circuits 7.25.3.18 Support of Conductors. Class 2 or Class 3 circuit
shall be classified as communications circuits and shall be installed in conductors shall not be strapped, taped, or attached by any means to
accordance with the requirements of Article 8.0. The cables shall be the exterior of any conduit or other raceway as a means of support.
listed as communications cables or multipurpose cables. These conductors shall be permitted to be installed as permitted by
(2) Composite Cables. Cables constructed of individually listed 3.0.1.11(b)(2).
Class 2, Class 3, and communications cables under a common jacket
shall be permitted to be classified as communications cables. The fire 7.25.3.21 Applications of Listed Class 2, Class 3, and PLTC
resistance rating of the composite cable shall be determined by the Cables. Class 2, Class 3, and PLTC cables shall comply with any of
performance of the composite cable. the requirements described in 7.25.3.21(a) through 7.25.3.21(h).

(e) Class 2 or Class 3 Cables with Other Circuit Cables. Jacketed (a) Plenums. Cables installed in ducts, plenums, and other spaces
cables of Class 2 or Class 3 circuits shall be permitted in the same used for environmental air shall be Type CL2P or CL3P. Listed wires
enclosure or raceway with jacketed cables of any of the following: and cables installed in compliance with 3.0.1.22 shall be permitted.
Listed plenum signaling raceways shall be permitted to be installed in
(1) Power-limited fire alarm systems in compliance with Article other spaces used for environmental air as described in 3.0.1.22(c).
7.60 Only Type CL2P or CL3P cable shall be permitted to be installed in
(2) Nonconductive and conductive optical fiber cables in these raceways.
compliance with Article 7.70
(3) Communications circuits in compliance with Article 8.0 (b) Riser. Cables installed in risers shall be as described in any of
(4) Community antenna television and radio distribution systems (b)(1), (b)(2), or (b)(3):
in compliance with Article 8.20
(5) Low-power, network-powered broadband communications in (1) Cables installed in vertical runs and penetrating more than one
compliance with Article 8.30 floor, or cables installed in vertical runs in a shaft, shall be Type CL2R
or CL3R. Floor penetrations requiring Type CL2R or CL3R shall
(f) Class 2 or Class 3 Conductors or Cables and Audio System contain only cables suitable for riser or plenum use. Listed riser
Circuits. Audio system circuits described in 6.40.1.9(c), and installed signaling raceways shall be permitted to be installed in vertical riser
runs in a shaft from floor to floor. Only Type CL2R, CL3R, CL2P, or under the supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner service the
CL3P cables shall be permitted to be installed in these raceways. installation, and where the cable is not subject to physical damage,
(2) Other cables as covered in Table 7.25.3.21 and other listed Type PLTC cable that complies with the crush and impact
wiring methods as covered in Chapter 3 shall be installed in metal requirements of Type MC cable and is identified for such use shall be
raceways, or located in a fireproof shaft having firestops at each floor. permitted to be exposed between the cable tray and utilization
(3) Type CL2, CL3, CL2X, and CL3X cables shall be permitted in equipment or device. The cable shall be continuously supported and
one- and two-family dwellings. Listed general purpose signaling protected against physical damage using mechanical protection such as
raceways shall be permitted for use with Type CL2, CL3, CL2X and dedicated struts, angles, or channels. The cable shall be secured at
CL3X cables. intervals not exceeding 1 800 mm.

FPN: See 3.0.1.21 for firestop requirements for floor penetrations. (e) Other Wiring Within Buildings. Cables installed in building
locations other than those covered in 7.25.3.21(a) through 7.25.3.21(d)
(c) Cable Trays. Cables installed in cable trays outdoors shall be shall be as described in any of (1) through (7).
Type PLTC. Cables installed in cable trays indoors shall be Types
PLTC, CL3P, CL3R, CL3, CL2P, CL2R, and CL2. (1) Type CL2 or CL3 shall be permitted.
Listed signaling raceways shall be permitted for use with cable (2) Type CL2X or CL3X shall be permitted to be installed in a
trays. raceway or in accordance with other wiring methods covered in
Chapter 3.
FPN: See 8.0.5.24(b) for cables permitted in cable trays.
(3) Cables shall be permitted to be installed in nonconcealed
spaces where the exposed length of cable does not exceed 3 000 mm.
(d) Hazardous (Classified) Locations. Cables installed in
(4) Listed Type CL2X cables less than 6 mm in diameter and
hazardous locations shall be as described in 7.25.3.21(d)(1) through
listed Type CL3X cables less than 6 mm in diameter shall be permitted
(d)(4).
to be installed in one- and two-family dwellings.
(5) Listed Type CL2X cables less than 6 mm in diameter and
(1) Type PLTC. Cables installed in hazardous (classified)
listed Type CL3X cables less than 6 mm in diameter shall be permitted
locations shall be Type PLTC. Where the use of Type PLTC cable is
to be installed in nonconcealed spaces in multifamily dwellings.
permitted by 5.1.2.1(b), 5.2.2.1(b), and 5.4.1.20, the cable shall be
(6) Type CMUC undercarpet communications wires and cables
installed in cable trays, in raceways, supported by messenger wire, or
shall be permitted to be installed under carpet.
otherwise adequately supported and mechanically protected by angles,
(7) In industrial establishments where the conditions of
struts, channels, or other mechanical means. The cable shall be
maintenance and supervision ensure that only licensed electrical
permitted to be directly buried where the cable is listed for this use.
practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner under the
(2) Intrinsically Safe Circuits and Nonincendive Field Wiring.
supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner service the installation,
Wiring for nonincendive circuits as permitted by 5.1.2.1(b)(3), and
and where the cable is not subject to physical damage, Type PLTC
wiring for intrinsically safe circuits as permitted by 5.4.1.20, shall be
cable that complies with the crush and impact requirements of Type
permitted for circuits derived from Class 2 sources.
MC cable and is identified for such use shall be permitted to be
(3) Thermocouple Circuits. Conductors in Type PLTC cables used
exposed between the cable tray and the utilization equipment or
for Class 2 thermocouple circuits shall be permitted to be any of the
device. The cable shall be continuously supported and protected
materials used for thermocouple extension wire.
against physical damage using mechanical protection such as
(4) In Industrial Establishments. In industrial establishments
dedicated struts, angles, or channels. The cable shall be supported and
where the conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that only
secured at intervals not exceeding 1 800 mm.
licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner
 (f) Cross-Connect Arrays. Type CL2 or CL3 conductors or cables
shall be used for cross-connect arrays.

(g) Class 2 and Class 3 Cable Substitutions. The substitutions for

Class 2 and Class 3 cables listed in Table 7.25.3.21 shall be permitted.
Where substitute cables are installed, the wiring requirements of Parts
7.25.1 and 7.25.3, shall apply.

FPN: For information on Types CMP, CMR, CM, and CMX cables, see 8.0.6.10.

(h) Class 2, Class 3, PLTC Circuit Integrity (CI) Cable or

Electrical Circuit Protective System. Circuit integrity (CI) cable or a
listed electrical circuit protective system shall be permitted for use in
remote control, signaling, or power limited systems that supply critical
circuits to ensure survivability for continued circuit operation for a
specified time under fire conditions.
Figure 7.25.3.21 Cable Substitution Hierarchy

7.25.4 Listing Requirements

Table 7.25.3.21 Cable Substitutions
Cable Type Permitted Substitutions 7.25.4.1 Listing and Marking of Class 2, Class 3, and Type PLTC
CL3P CMP Cables. Class 2, Class 3, and Type PLTC cables and nonmetallic
CL2P CMP, CL3P signaling raceways installed as wiring methods within buildings shall
CL3R CMP, CL3P, CMR be listed as being resistant to the spread of fire and other criteria in
CL2R CMP, CL3P, CL2P, CMR, CL3R accordance with 7.25.4.1(a) through 7.25.4.1(k) and shall be marked
PLTC in accordance with 7.25.4.1(l).
CL3 CMP, CL3P, CMR, CL3R, CMG, CM,
PLTC (a) Types CL2P and CL3P. Types CL2P and CL3P plenum cable
CL2 CMP, CL3P, CL2P, CMR, CL3R, CL2R, shall be listed as being suitable for use in ducts, plenums, and other
CMG, CM, PLTC, CL3 space for environmental air and shall also be listed as having adequate
CL3X CMP, CL3P, CMR, CL3R, CMG, CM, fire-resistant and low smoke-producing characteristics.
PLTC, CL3, CMX
CL2X CMP, CL3P, CL2P, CMR, CL3R, CL2R, FPN: One method of defining low smoke-producing cable is by establishing an
acceptable value of the smoke produced when tested in accordance with NFPA
CMG, CM, PLTC, CL3, CL2, CMX, 262-2002, Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and
CL3X Cables for Use in Air-Handling Spaces, to a maximum peak optical density of 0.5
and a maximum average optical density of 0.15. Similarly, one method of defining
fire-resistant cables is by establishing a maximum allowable flame travel distance
of 1 500 mm when tested in accordance with the same test.

(b) Types CL2R and CL3R. Types CL2R and CL3R riser cables
shall be marked as Type CL2R or CL3R, respectively, and be listed as
suitable for use in a vertical run in a shaft or from floor to floor and outer jacket shall be a sunlight- and moisture-resistant nonmetallic
shall also be listed as having fire-resistant characteristics capable of material.
preventing the carrying of fire from floor to floor.
Exception No. 1: Where a smooth metallic sheath, continuous
FPN: One method of defining fire-resistant characteristics capable of preventing corrugated metallic sheath, or interlocking tape armor is applied over
the carrying of fire from floor to floor is that the cables pass the requirements of
ANSI/UL 1666-2002, Test for Flame Propagation Height of Electrical and Optical- the nonmetallic jacket, an overall nonmetallic jacket shall not be
Fiber Cable Installed Vertically in Shafts. required. On metallic-sheathed cable without an overall nonmetallic
jacket, the information required in 3.10.1.11 shall be located on the
(c) Types CL2 and CL3. Types CL2 and CL3 cables shall be nonmetallic jacket under the sheath.
marked as Type CL2 or CL3, respectively, and be listed as suitable for Exception No. 2: Conductors in PLTC cables used for Class 2
general-purpose use, with the exception of risers, ducts, plenums, and thermocouple circuits shall be permitted to be any of the materials
other space used for environmental air, and shall also be listed as used for thermocouple extension wire.
being resistant to the spread of fire.
FPN: One method of defining resistant to the spread of fire is that the cables do not
FPN: One method of defining resistant to the spread of fire is that the cables do not spread fire to the top of the tray in the vertical tray flame test in ANSI/UL 1581-
spread fire to the top of the tray in the vertical tray flame test in ANSI/UL 1581- 1991, Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables and Flexible Cords.
1991, Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables and Flexible Cords. Another method of defining resistant to the spread of fire is for the damage (char
Another method of defining resistant to the spread of fire is for the damage (char length) not to exceed 1 480 mm when performing the CSA vertical flame test for
length) not to exceed 1 480 mm when performing the CSA vertical flame test for cables in cable trays, as described in CSA C22.2 No. 0.3-M-1985, Test Methods
cables in cable trays, as described in CSA C22.2 No. 0.3-M-1985, Test Methods for Electrical Wires and Cables.
for Electrical Wires and Cables.
(f) Circuit Integrity (CI) Cable or Electrical Circuit Protective
(d) Types CL2X and CL3X. Types CL2X and CL3X limited-use System. Cables used for survivability of critical circuits shall be listed
cables shall be marked as Type CL2X or CL3X respectively, and be as circuit integrity (CI) cable. Cables specified in 7.25.3.21(a), (b),
listed as being suitable for use in dwellings and for use in raceway and (d)(1), and (e), and used for circuit integrity, shall have the additional
shall also be listed as being resistant to flame spread. classification using the suffix “-CI”. Cables that are part of a listed
electrical circuit protective system shall be considered to meet the
FPN: One method of determining that cable is resistant to flame spread is by requirements of survivability.
testing the cable to the VW-1 (vertical wire) flame test in ANSI/UL 1581-1991,
Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables and Flexible Cords.
FPN: One method of defining circuit integrity is by establishing a minimum 2-hour
fire resistance rating when tested in accordance with UL 2196-2002, Standard for
(e) Type PLTC. Type PLTC nonmetallic-sheathed, power-limited Tests of Fire Resistive Cables.
tray cable shall be listed as being suitable for cable trays and shall
consist of a factory assembly of two or more insulated conductors (g) Class 2 and Class 3 Cable Voltage Ratings. Class 2 cables
under a nonmetallic jacket. The insulated conductors shall be 22 AWG shall have a voltage rating of not less than 150 volts. Class 3 cables
through 3.5 mm2 (2.0 mm dia.). The conductor material shall be shall have a voltage rating of not less than 300 volts.
copper (solid or stranded). Insulation on conductors shall be suitable
for 300 volts. The cable core shall be either (1) two or more parallel (h) Class 3 Single Conductors. Class 3 single conductors used as
conductors, (2) one or more group assemblies of twisted or parallel other wiring within buildings shall not be smaller than 18 AWG and
conductors, or (3) a combination thereof. A metallic shield or a shall be Type CL3. Conductor types described in 7.25.2.7(b) that are
metallized foil shield with drain wire(s) shall be permitted to be also listed as Type CL3 shall be permitted.
applied either over the cable core, over groups of conductors, or both.
The cable shall be listed as being resistant to the spread of fire. The
 FPN: One method of defining resistant to the spread of fire is that the cables do not
spread fire to the top of the tray in the vertical tray flame test in ANSI/UL 1581-
1991, Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables and Flexible Cords. Table 7.25.4.1 Cable Marking
Another method of defining resistant to the spread of fire is for the damage (char Cable Marking Type
length) not to exceed 1 480 mm when performing the CSA vertical flame test for
cables in cable trays as described in CSA C22.2 No. 0.3-M-1985, Test Methods for CL3P Class 3 plenum cable
Electrical Wires and Cables. CL2P Class 2 plenum cable
CL3R Class 3 riser cable
(i) Plenum Signaling Raceways. Plenum signaling raceways shall CL2R Class 2 riser cable
be listed as having adequate fire-resistant and low smoke-producing PLTC Power-limited tray cable
characteristics. CL3 Class 3 cable
CL2 Class 2 cable
(j) Riser Signaling Raceways. Riser signaling raceways shall be CL3X Class 3 cable, limited use
listed as having adequate fire-resistant characteristics capable of CL2X Class 2 cable, limited use
preventing the carrying of fire from floor to floor.
FPN: Class 2 and Class 3 cable types are listed in descending order of fire
FPN: One method of defining fire-resistant characteristics capable of preventing resistance rating, and Class 3 cables are listed above Class 2 cables because
the carrying of fire from floor to floor is that the raceways pass the requirements of Class 3 cables can substitute for Class 2 cables.
the Test for Flame Propagation (Riser) in UL 2024, Standard for Optical Fiber
Cable Raceway.

(k) General-Purpose Signaling Raceways. General-purpose

signaling raceways shall be listed as being resistant to the spread of ARTICLE 7.27 — INSTRUMENTATION TRAY
fire. CABLE: TYPE ITC
FPN: One method of defining resistance to the spread of fire is that the raceways
pass the requirements of the Vertical-Tray Flame Test (General use) in UL 2024, 7.27.1.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and
Standard for Optical Fiber Cable Raceway. construction specifications of instrumentation tray cable for
application to instrumentation and control circuits operating at 150
(l) Marking. Cables shall be marked in accordance with volts or less and 5 amperes or less.
3.10.1.11(a)(2), (a)(3), (a)(4), and (a)(5) and Table 7.25.4.1. Voltage
ratings shall not be marked on the cables. 7.27.1.2 Definition. Type ITC Instrumentation Tray Cable. A factory
assembly of two or more insulated conductors, with or without a
FPN: Voltage markings on cables may be misinterpreted to suggest that the cables
may be suitable for Class 1 electric light and power applications. grounding conductor(s), enclosed in a nonmetallic sheath.

Exception: Voltage markings shall be permitted where the cable has 7.27.1.3 Other Articles. In addition to the provisions of this article,
multiple listings and a voltage marking is required for one or more of installation of Type ITC cable shall comply with other applicable
the listings. articles of this Code, such as Articles 2.40, 2.50, 3.0, and 3.92.

7.27.1.4 Uses Permitted. Type ITC cable shall be permitted to be

used as follows in industrial establishments where the conditions of
maintenance and supervision ensure that only licensed electrical
practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner under the
supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner service the installation:
 (1) In cable trays. 7.27.1.6 Construction. The insulated conductors of Type ITC cable
(2) In raceways. shall be in sizes 22 AWG through 3.5 mm2 (2.0 mm dia.). The
(3) In hazardous locations as permitted in 5.1.2.1, 5.2.2.1, 5.3.2.1, conductor material shall be copper or thermocouple alloy. Insulation
5.4.1.20, 5.4.1.30, 5.4.1.80, and 5.5.1.15. on the conductors shall be rated for 300 volts. Shielding shall be
(4) Enclosed in a smooth metallic sheath, continuous corrugated permitted.
metallic sheath, or interlocking tape armor applied over the The cable shall be listed as being resistant to the spread of fire. The
nonmetallic sheath in accordance with 7.27.1.6. The cable shall be outer jacket shall be sunlight and moisture resistant.
supported and secured at intervals not exceeding 1 800 mm. Where a smooth metallic sheath, continuous corrugated metallic
(5) Without a metallic sheath or armor between cable tray and sheath, or interlocking tape armor is applied over the nonmetallic
equipment in lengths not to exceed 15 m, where the cable is supported sheath, an overall nonmetallic jacket shall not be required.
and protected against physical damage using mechanical protection,
such as struts, angles, or channels. The cable shall be supported and 7.27.1.7 Marking. The cable shall be marked in accordance with
secured at intervals not exceeding 1 800 mm. 3.10.1.11(a)(2), (a)(3), (a)(4), and (a)(5). Voltage ratings shall not be
(6) Between cable tray and equipment in lengths not to exceed 15 m, marked on the cable.
where the cable complies with the crush and impact requirements of
Type MC cable and is identified for such use. The cable shall be 7.27.1.8 Allowable Ampacity. The allowable ampacity of the
supported and secured at intervals not exceeding 1 800 mm. conductors shall be 5 amperes, except for 22 AWG conductors, which
(7) As aerial cable on a messenger. shall have an allowable ampacity of 3 amperes.
(8) Direct buried where identified for the use.
(9) Under raised floors in rooms containing industrial process 7.27.1.9 Overcurrent Protection. Overcurrent protection shall not
control equipment and rack rooms where arranged to prevent damage exceed 5 amperes for 20 AWG and larger conductors, and 3 amperes
to the cable. for 22 AWG conductors.
(10) Under raised floors in information technology equipment rooms
in accordance with 6.45.1.5(d)(5)c. 7.27.1.10 Bends. Bends in Type ITC cables shall be made so as not to
damage the cable.
7.27.1.5 Uses Not Permitted. Type ITC cable shall not be installed on
circuits operating at more than 150 volts or more than 5 amperes.
Installation of Type ITC cable with other cables shall be subject to the ARTICLE 7.60 — F IRE ALARM SYSTEMS
stated provisions of the specific articles for the other cables. Where the
governing articles do not contain stated provisions for installation with 7.60.1 General
Type ITC cable, the installation of Type ITC cable with the other
cables shall not be permitted. 7.60.1.1 Scope. This article covers the installation of wiring and
Type ITC cable shall not be installed with power, lighting, Class 1, or equipment of fire alarm systems including all circuits controlled and
non–power-limited circuits. powered by the fire alarm system.

Exception No. 1: Where terminated within equipment or junction FPN No. 1: Fire alarm systems include fire detection and alarm notification, guard’s
tour, sprinkler waterflow, and sprinkler supervisory systems. Circuits controlled and
boxes and separations are maintained by insulating barriers or other powered by the fire alarm system include circuits for the control of building systems
means. safety functions, elevator capture, elevator shutdown, door release, smoke doors
Exception No. 2: Where a metallic sheath or armor is applied over and damper control, fire doors and damper control and fan shutdown, but only
where these circuits are powered by and controlled by the fire alarm system. For
the nonmetallic sheath of the Type ITC cable. further information on the installation and monitoring for integrity requirements for
fire alarm systems, refer to the NFPA 72®-2002, National Fire Alarm Code®.
 FPN No. 2: Class 1, 2, and 3 circuits are defined in Article 7.25.
(d) Corrosive, Damp, or Wet Locations. Sections 1.10.1.11,
7.60.1.2 Definitions. 3.0.1.6, and 3.10.1.9 where installed in corrosive, damp, or wet
locations.
Abandoned Fire Alarm Cable. Installed fire alarm cable that is not
terminated at equipment other than a connector and not identified for (e) Building Control Circuits. Article 7.25 where building control
future use with a tag. circuits (e.g., elevator capture, fan shutdown) are associated with the
fire alarm system.
Fire Alarm Circuit. The portion of the wiring system between the
load side of the overcurrent device or the power-limited supply and the (f) Optical Fiber Cables. Where optical fiber cables are utilized for
connected equipment of all circuits powered and controlled by the fire fire alarm circuits, the cables shall be installed in accordance with
alarm system. Fire alarm circuits are classified as either non–power- Article 7.70.
limited or power-limited.
7.60.1.7 Access to Electrical Equipment Behind Panels Designed to
Fire Alarm Circuit Integrity (CI) Cable. Cable used in fire alarm Allow Access. Access to electrical equipment shall not be denied by
systems to ensure continued operation of critical circuits during a an accumulation of conductors and cables that prevents removal of
specified time under fire conditions. panels, including suspended ceiling panels.
Non–Power-Limited Fire Alarm Circuit (NPLFA). A fire alarm 7.60.1.8 Mechanical Execution of Work. Fire alarm circuits shall be
circuit powered by a source that complies with 7.60.2.1 and 7.60.2.3. installed in a neat workmanlike manner. Cables and conductors
installed exposed on the surface of ceilings and sidewalls shall be
Power-Limited Fire Alarm Circuit (PLFA). A fire alarm circuit supported by the building structure in such a manner that the cable will
powered by a source that complies with 7.60.3.1. not be damaged by normal building use. Such cables shall be
supported by straps, staples, hangers, or similar fittings designed and
7.60.1.3 Other Articles. Circuits and equipment shall comply with installed so as not to damage the cable. The installation shall also
7.60.1.3(a) through 7.60.1.3(f). Only those sections of Article 3.0 conform with 3.0.1.4(d).
referenced in this article shall apply to fire alarm systems.
7.60.1.9 Fire Alarm Circuit and Equipment Grounding. Fire alarm
(a) Spread of Fire or Products of Combustion. Section 3.0.1.21. circuits and equipment shall be grounded in accordance with Article
The accessible portion of abandoned fire alarm cables shall be 2.50.
removed.
7.60.1.10 Fire Alarm Circuit Identification. Fire alarm circuits shall
(b) Ducts, Plenums, and Other Air-Handling Spaces. Section be identified at terminal and junction locations in a manner that will
3.0.1.22, where installed in ducts or plenums or other spaces used for prevent unintentional interference with the signaling circuit during
environmental air. testing and servicing.
Exception: As permitted in 7.60.2.10(b)(1) and (b)(2) and 7.60.1.11 Fire Alarm Circuits Extending Beyond One Building.
7.60.3.21(a). Power-limited fire alarm circuits that extend beyond one building and
run outdoors either shall meet the installation requirements of Parts
(c) Hazardous (Classified) Locations. Articles 500 through 516 8.0.2, 8.0.3, and 8.0.4 or shall meet the installation requirements of
and Part 5.17.4, where installed in hazardous (classified) locations. Part 3.0.1. Non–power-limited fire alarm circuits that extend beyond
one building and run outdoors shall meet the installation requirements single-phase transformer that has only a 2-wire (single-voltage)
of Part 3.0.1 and the applicable sections of Part 2.25.1. secondary shall be permitted to be protected by overcurrent protection
provided by the primary (supply) side of the transformer, provided the
7.60.1.15 Fire Alarm Circuit Requirements. Fire alarm circuits shall protection is in accordance with 4.50.1.3 and does not exceed the
comply with 7.60.1.15(a) and 7.60.1.15(b). value determined by multiplying the secondary conductor ampacity by
the secondary-to-primary transformer voltage ratio. Transformer
(a) Non–Power-Limited Fire Alarm (NPLFA) Circuits. See Parts secondary conductors other than 2-wire shall not be considered to be
7.60.1 and 7.60.2. protected by the primary overcurrent protection.
Exception No. 3: Electronic power source output conductors. Non–
(b) Power-Limited Fire Alarm (PLFA) Circuits. See Parts 7.60.1 power-limited circuit conductors supplied by the output of a single-
and 7.60.3. phase, listed electronic power source, other than a transformer,
having only a 2-wire (single-voltage) output for connection to non–
7.60.2 Non–Power-Limited Fire Alarm (NPLFA) Circuits power-limited circuits shall be permitted to be protected by
overcurrent protection provided on the input side of the electronic
7.60.2.1 NPLFA Circuit Power Source Requirements. The power power source, provided this protection does not exceed the value
source of non–power-limited fire alarm circuits shall comply with determined by multiplying the non–power-limited circuit conductor
Chapters 1 through 4, and the output voltage shall not be more than ampacity by the output-to-input voltage ratio. Electronic power source
600 volts, nominal. These circuits shall not be supplied through outputs, other than 2-wire (single voltage), connected to non–power-
ground-fault circuit interrupters or arc-fault circuit interrupters. limited circuits shall not be considered to be protected by overcurrent
protection on the input of the electronic power source.
FPN: See 2.10.1.8(a)(5), Exception No. 3, for receptacles in dwelling-unit
unfinished basements that supply power for fire alarm systems. FPN: A single-phase, listed electronic power supply whose output supplies a 2-
wire (single-voltage) circuit is an example of a non–power-limited power source
7.60.2.3 NPLFA Circuit Overcurrent Protection. Overcurrent that meets the requirements of 7.60.2.1.
protection for conductors 2.0 mm2 (1.6 mm dia.) and larger shall be
provided in accordance with the conductor ampacity without applying 7.60.2.5 NPLFA Circuit Wiring Methods. Installation of non–
the derating factors of 3.10.1.15 to the ampacity calculation. power-limited fire alarm circuits shall be in accordance with
Overcurrent protection shall not exceed 7 amperes for 18 AWG 1.10.1.3(b), 3.0.1.11, 3.0.1.15, 3.0.1.17, and other appropriate articles
conductors and 10 amperes for 16 AWG conductors. of Chapter 3.

Exception: Where other articles of this Code permit or require other Exception No. 1: As provided in 7.60.2.6 through 7.60.2.10.
overcurrent protection. Exception No. 2: Where other articles of this Code require other
methods.
7.60.2.4 NPLFA Circuit Overcurrent Device Location. Overcurrent
devices shall be located at the point where the conductor to be 7.60.2.6 Conductors of Different Circuits in Same Cable,
protected receives its supply. Enclosure, or Raceway.

Exception No. 1: Where the overcurrent device protecting the larger (a) Class 1 with NPLFA Circuits. Class 1 and non–power-limited
conductor also protects the smaller conductor. fire alarm circuits shall be permitted to occupy the same cable,
Exception No. 2: Transformer secondary conductors. Non–power- enclosure, or raceway without regard to whether the individual circuits
limited fire alarm circuit conductors supplied by the secondary of a are alternating current or direct current, provided all conductors are
insulated for the maximum voltage of any conductor in the enclosure
or raceway. (b) Power-Supply Conductors and Fire Alarm Circuit
(b) Fire Alarm with Power-Supply Circuits. Power-supply and Conductors. Where power-supply conductors and fire alarm circuit
fire alarm circuit conductors shall be permitted in the same cable, conductors are permitted in a raceway in accordance with 7.60.2.6, the
enclosure, or raceway only where connected to the same equipment. number of conductors shall be determined in accordance with 3.0.1.17.
The derating factors given in 3.10.1.15(b)(2)a shall apply as follows:
7.60.2.7 NPLFA Circuit Conductors.
(1) To all conductors where the fire alarm circuit conductors carry
(a) Sizes and Use. Only copper conductors shall be permitted to be continuous loads in excess of 10 percent of the ampacity of each
used for fire alarm systems. Size 18 AWG and 16 AWG conductors conductor and where the total number of conductors is more than three
shall be permitted to be used, provided they supply loads that do not (2) To the power-supply conductors only, where the fire alarm
exceed the ampacities given in Table 4.2.1.5 and are installed in a circuit conductors do not carry continuous loads in excess of 10
raceway, an approved enclosure, or a listed cable. Conductors larger percent of the ampacity of each conductor and where the number of
than 16 AWG shall not supply loads greater than the ampacities given power-supply conductors is more than three
in 3.10.1.15, as applicable.
(b) Insulation. Insulation on conductors shall be suitable for 600 (c) Cable Trays. Where fire alarm circuit conductors are installed in
volts. Conductors larger than 16 AWG shall comply with Article 3.10. cable trays, they shall comply with 3.92.1.9 through 3.92.1.11.
Conductors 18 AWG and 16 AWG shall be Type KF-2, KFF-2, PAFF,
PTFF, PF, PFF, PGF, PGFF, RFH-2, RFHH-2, RFHH-3, SF-2, SFF-2, 7.60.2.10 Multiconductor NPLFA Cables. Multiconductor non–
TF, TFF, TFN, TFFN, ZF, or ZFF. Conductors with other types and power-limited fire alarm cables that meet the requirements of 7.60.4.1
thickness of insulation shall be permitted if listed for non–power- shall be permitted to be used on fire alarm circuits operating at 150
limited fire alarm circuit use. volts or less and shall be installed in accordance with 7.60.2.10(a) and
7.60.2.10(b).
FPN: For application provisions, see Table 4.2.1.3.
(a) NPLFA Wiring Method. Multiconductor non–power-limited
(c) Conductor Materials. Conductors shall be solid or stranded fire alarm circuit cables shall be installed in accordance with
copper. 7.60.2.10(a)(1), (a)(2), and (a)(3).
Exception to (b) and (c): Wire Types PAF and PTF shall be permitted (1) Exposed or Fished in Concealed Spaces. In raceway or
only for high-temperature applications between 90°C (194°F) and exposed on surface of ceiling and sidewalls or fished in concealed
250°C (482°F). spaces. Cable splices or terminations shall be made in listed fittings,
boxes, enclosures, fire alarm devices, or utilization equipment. Where
7.60.2.8 Number of Conductors in Cable Trays and Raceways, and installed exposed, cables shall be adequately supported and installed in
Derating. such a way that maximum protection against physical damage is
afforded by building construction such as baseboards, door frames,
(a) NPLFA Circuits and Class 1 Circuits. Where only non–power- ledges, and so forth. Where located within 2 100 mm of the floor,
limited fire alarm circuit and Class 1 circuit conductors are in a cables shall be securely fastened in an approved manner at intervals of
raceway, the number of conductors shall be determined in accordance not more than 450 mm.
with 3.0.1.17. The derating factors given in 3.10.1.15(b)(2)a shall (2) Passing Through a Floor or Wall. In metal raceway or rigid
apply if such conductors carry continuous load in excess of 10 percent nonmetallic conduit where passing through a floor or wall to a height
of the ampacity of each conductor. of 2 100 mm above the floor unless adequate protection can be
afforded by building construction such as detailed in 7.60.2.10(a)(1) or
unless an equivalent solid guard is provided. Exception No. 3: Type NPLFR-CI cable shall be permitted to be
(3) In Hoistways. In rigid metal conduit, rigid nonmetallic conduit, installed to provide a 2-hour circuit integrity rated cable.
intermediate metal conduit, liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit, or
electrical metallic tubing where installed in hoistways. (4) Other Wiring Within Buildings. Cables installed in building
locations other than the locations covered in 7.60.2.10(b)(1), (b)(2),
Exception: As provided for in 6.20.3.1 for elevators and similar and (b)(3) shall be Type NPLF.
equipment.
Exception No. 1: Chapter 3 wiring methods with conductors in
(b) Applications of Listed NPLFA Cables. The use of non–power- compliance with 7.60.2.7(c).
limited fire alarm circuit cables shall comply with 7.60.2.10(b)(1) Exception No. 2: Type NPLFP or Type NPLFR cables shall be
through (b)(4). permitted.
Exception No. 3: Type NPLF-CI cable shall be permitted to be
(1) Ducts and Plenums. Multiconductor non–power-limited fire installed to provide a 2-hour circuit integrity rated cable.
alarm circuit cables, Types NPLFP, NPLFR, and NPLF, shall not be
installed exposed in ducts or plenums. 7.60.3 Power-Limited Fire Alarm (PLFA) Circuits

FPN: See 3.0.1.22(b). 7.60.3.1 Power Sources for PLFA Circuits. The power source for a
power-limited fire alarm circuit shall be as specified in 7.60.3.1(a),
(2) Other Spaces Used for Environmental Air. Cables installed in (b), or (c). These circuits shall not be supplied through ground-fault
other spaces used for environmental air shall be Type NPLFP. circuit interrupters or arc-fault circuit interrupters.
Exception No. 1: Types NPLFR and NPLF cables installed in FPN No. 1: Tables 12(a) and 12(b) in Chapter 9 provide the listing requirements for
compliance with 3.0.1.22(c). power-limited fire alarm circuit sources.
FPN No. 2: See 2.10.1.8(a)(5), Exception No. 3, for receptacles in dwelling-unit
Exception No. 2: Other wiring methods in accordance with unfinished basements that supply power for fire alarm systems.
3.0.1.22(c) and conductors in compliance with 7.60.2.7(c).
Exception No. 3: Type NPLFP-CI cable shall be permitted to be (a) Transformers. A listed PLFA or Class 3 transformer.
installed to provide a 2-hour circuit integrity rated cable.
(b) Power Supplies. A listed PLFA or Class 3 power supply.
(3) Riser. Cables installed in vertical runs and penetrating more
than one floor or cables installed in vertical runs in a shaft shall be (c) Listed Equipment. Listed equipment marked to identify the
Type NPLFR. Floor penetrations requiring Type NPLFR shall contain PLFA power source.
only cables suitable for riser or plenum use.
FPN: Examples of listed equipment are a fire alarm control panel with integral
Exception No. 1: Type NPLF or other cables that are specified in power source; a circuit card listed for use as a PLFA source, where used as part of
a listed assembly; a current-limiting impedance, listed for the purpose or part of a
Chapter 3 and are in compliance with 7.60.2.7(c) and encased in listed product, used in conjunction with a non–power-limited transformer or a
metal raceway. stored energy source, for example, storage battery, to limit the output current.
Exception No. 2: Type NPLF cables located in a fireproof shaft
having firestops at each floor. 7.60.3.2 Circuit Marking. he equipment supplying PLFA circuits
shall be durably marked where plainly visible to indicate each circuit
FPN: See 3.0.1.21 for firestop requirements for floor penetrations. that is a power-limited fire alarm circuit.
 FPN: See 7.60.3.12(a), Exception No. 3, where a power-limited circuit is to be (b) PLFA Wiring Methods and Materials. Power-limited fire
reclassified as a non–power-limited circuit.
alarm conductors and cables described in 7.60.4.2 shall be installed as
detailed in 7.60.3.12(b)(1), (b)(2), or (b)(3) of this section. Devices
7.60.3.11 Wiring Methods on Supply Side of the PLFA Power
shall be installed in accordance with 1.10.1.3(b), 3.0.1.11(a), and
Source. Conductors and equipment on the supply side of the power
3.0.1.15.
source shall be installed in accordance with the appropriate
requirements of Part 7.60.2 and Chapters 1 through 4. Transformers or
(1) Exposed or Fished in Concealed Spaces. In raceway or
other devices supplied from power-supply conductors shall be
exposed on the surface of ceiling and sidewalls or fished in concealed
protected by an overcurrent device rated not over 20 amperes.
spaces. Cable splices or terminations shall be made in listed fittings,
boxes, enclosures, fire alarm devices, or utilization equipment. Where
Exception: The input leads of a transformer or other power source
installed exposed, cables shall be adequately supported and installed in
supplying power-limited fire alarm circuits shall be permitted to be
such a way that maximum protection against physical damage is
smaller than 2.0 mm2 (1.6 mm dia.), but not smaller than 18 AWG, if
afforded by building construction such as baseboards, door frames,
they are not over 300 mm long and if they have insulation that
ledges, and so forth. Where located within 2 100 mm of the floor,
complies with 7.60.2.7(b).
cables shall be securely fastened in an approved manner at intervals of
not more than 450 mm.
7.60.3.12 Wiring Methods and Materials on Load Side of the
(2) Passing Through a Floor or Wall. In metal raceways or rigid
PLFA Power Source. Fire alarm circuits on the load side of the
nonmetallic conduit where passing through a floor or wall to a height
power source shall be permitted to be installed using wiring methods
of 2 100 mm above the floor, unless adequate protection can be
and materials in accordance with 7.60.3.12(a), 7.60.3.12(b), or a
afforded by building construction such as detailed in 7.60.3.12(b)(1) or
combination of (a) and (b).
unless an equivalent solid guard is provided.
(3) In Hoistways. In rigid metal conduit, rigid nonmetallic conduit,
(a) NPLFA Wiring Methods and Materials. Installation shall be
intermediate metal conduit, or electrical metallic tubing where
in accordance with 7.60.2.5, and conductors shall be solid or stranded
installed in hoistways.
copper.
Exception: As provided for in 6.20.3.1 for elevators and similar
Exception No. 1: The derating factors given in 3.10.1.15(b)(2)a shall
equipment.
not apply.
Exception No. 2: Conductors and multiconductor cables described in
7.60.3.14 Installation of Conductors and Equipment in Cables,
and installed in accordance with 7.60.2.7 and 7.60.2.10 shall be
Compartments, Cable Trays, Enclosures, Manholes, Outlet Boxes,
permitted.
Device Boxes, and Raceways for Power-Limited Circuits.
Exception No. 3: Power-limited circuits shall be permitted to be
Conductors and equipment for power-limited fire alarm circuits shall
reclassified and installed as non–power-limited circuits if the power-
be installed in accordance with 7.60.3.15 through 7.60.3.18.
limited fire alarm circuit markings required by 7.60.3.2 are eliminated
and the entire circuit is installed using the wiring methods and
7.60.3.15 Separation from Electric Light, Power, Class 1, NPLFA,
materials in accordance with Part 7.60.2, Non–Power-Limited Fire
and Medium Power Network-Powered Broadband
Alarm Circuits.
Communications Circuit Conductors.
FPN: Power-limited circuits reclassified and installed as non–power-limited circuits
are no longer power-limited circuits, regardless of the continued connection to a (a) General. Power-limited fire alarm circuit cables and conductors
power-limited source. shall not be placed in any cable, cable tray, compartment, enclosure,
manhole, outlet box, device box, raceway, or similar fitting with
conductors of electric light, power, Class 1, non–power-limited fire (e) Enclosures with Single Opening. Power-limited fire alarm
alarm circuits, and medium power network-powered broadband circuit conductors entering compartments, enclosures, device boxes,
communications circuits unless permitted by 7.60.3.15(b) through outlet boxes, or similar fittings shall be permitted to be installed with
7.60.3.15(g). electric light, power, Class 1, non–power-limited fire alarm, and
medium power network-powered broadband communications circuits
(b) Separated by Barriers. Power-limited fire alarm circuit cables where they are introduced solely to connect the equipment connected
shall be permitted to be installed together with Class 1, non–power- to power-limited fire alarm circuits or to other circuits controlled by
limited fire alarm, and medium power network-powered broadband the fire alarm system to which the other conductors in the enclosure
communications circuits where they are separated by a barrier. are connected. Where power-limited fire alarm circuit conductors must
enter an enclosure that is provided with a single opening, they shall be
(c) Raceways Within Enclosures. In enclosures, power-limited fire permitted to enter through a single fitting (such as a tee), provided the
alarm circuits shall be permitted to be installed in a raceway within the conductors are separated from the conductors of the other circuits by a
enclosure to separate them from Class 1, non–power-limited fire continuous and firmly fixed nonconductor, such as flexible tubing.
alarm, and medium power network-powered broadband
communications circuits. (f) In Hoistways. In hoistways, power-limited fire alarm circuit
conductors shall be installed in rigid metal conduit, rigid nonmetallic
(d) Associated Systems Within Enclosures. Power-limited fire conduit, intermediate metal conduit, liquidtight flexible nonmetallic
alarm conductors in compartments, enclosures, device boxes, outlet conduit, or electrical metallic tubing. For elevators or similar
boxes, or similar fittings shall be permitted to be installed with electric equipment, these conductors shall be permitted to be installed as
light, power, Class 1, non–power-limited fire alarm, and medium provided in 6.20.3.1.
power network-powered broadband communications circuits where
they are introduced solely to connect the equipment connected to (g) Other Applications. For other applications, power-limited fire
power-limited fire alarm circuits, and comply with either of the alarm circuit conductors shall be separated by at least 50 mm from
following conditions: conductors of any electric light, power, Class 1, non–power-limited
fire alarm, or medium power network-powered broadband
(1) The electric light, power, Class 1, non–power-limited fire communications circuits unless one of the following conditions is met:
alarm, and medium power network-powered broadband
communications circuit conductors are routed to maintain a minimum (1) Either (a) all of the electric light, power, Class 1, non–power-
of 6 mm separation from the conductors and cables of power-limited limited fire alarm, and medium power network-powered broadband
fire alarm circuits. communications circuit conductors or (b) all of the power-limited fire
(2) The circuit conductors operate at 150 volts or less to ground alarm circuit conductors are in a raceway or in metal-sheathed, metal-
and also comply with one of the following: clad, nonmetallic-sheathed, or Type UF cables.
(2) All of the electric light, power, Class 1, non–power-limited fire
a. The fire alarm power-limited circuits are installed using Type alarm, and medium power network-powered broadband
FPL, FPLR, FPLP, or permitted substitute cables, provided these communications circuit conductors are permanently separated from all
power-limited cable conductors extending beyond the jacket are of the power-limited fire alarm circuit conductors by a continuous and
separated by a minimum of 6 mm or by a nonconductive sleeve or firmly fixed nonconductor, such as porcelain tubes or flexible tubing,
nonconductive barrier from all other conductors. in addition to the insulation on the conductors.
b. The power-limited fire alarm circuit conductors are installed
as non–power-limited circuits in accordance with 7.60.2.5.
7.60.3.16 Installation of Conductors of Different PLFA Circuits, including insulated copper tubing of pneumatically operated detectors,
Class 2, Class 3, and Communications Circuits in the Same Cable, employed for both detection and carrying signaling currents shall be
Enclosure, or Raceway. permitted to be used in power-limited circuits.

(a) Two or More PLFA Circuits. Cable and conductors of two or (b) Installation. Continuous line-type fire detectors shall be
more power-limited fire alarm circuits, communications circuits, or installed in accordance with 7.60.3.2 through 7.60.3.12 and 7.60.3.14.
Class 3 circuits shall be permitted within the same cable, enclosure, or
raceway. 7.60.3.21 Applications of Listed PLFA Cables. PLFA cables shall
comply with the requirements described in either 7.60.3.21(a), (b), or
(b) Class 2 Circuits with PLFA Circuits. Conductors of one or (c) or where cable substitutions are made as shown in 7.60.3.21(d).
more Class 2 circuits shall be permitted within the same cable,
enclosure, or raceway with conductors of power-limited fire alarm (a) Plenum. Cables installed in ducts, plenums, and other spaces
circuits, provided that the insulation of the Class 2 circuit conductors used for environmental air shall be Type FPLP. Types FPLP, FPLR,
in the cable, enclosure, or raceway is at least that required by the and FPL cables installed in compliance with 3.0.1.22 shall be
power-limited fire alarm circuits. permitted. Type FPLP-CI cable shall be permitted to be installed to
provide a 2-hour circuit integrity rated cable.
(c) Low-Power Network-Powered Broadband Communications
Cables and PLFA Cables. Low-power network-powered broadband (b) Riser. Cables installed in risers shall be as described in either
communications circuits shall be permitted in the same enclosure or (1), (2), or (3):
raceway with PLFA cables.
(1) Cables installed in vertical runs and penetrating more than one
(d) Audio System Circuits and PLFA Circuits. Audio system floor, or cables installed in vertical runs in a shaft, shall be Type
circuits described in 6.40.1.9(c) and installed using Class 2 or Class 3 FPLR. Floor penetrations requiring Type FPLR shall contain only
wiring methods in compliance with 7.25.3.14 and 7.25.3.21 shall not cables suitable for riser or plenum use. Type FPLR-CI cable shall be
be permitted to be installed in the same cable or raceway with power- permitted to be installed to provide a 2-hour circuit integrity rated
limited conductors or cables. cable.
(2) Other cables shall be installed in metal raceways or located in
7.60.3.17 Conductor Size. Conductors of 26 AWG shall be permitted a fireproof shaft having firestops at each floor.
only where spliced with a connector listed as suitable for 26 AWG to (3) Type FPL cable shall be permitted in one- and two-family
24 AWG or larger conductors that are terminated on equipment or dwellings.
where the 26 AWG conductors are terminated on equipment listed as
suitable for 26 AWG conductors. Single conductors shall not be FPN: See 3.0.1.21 for firestop requirements for floor penetrations.
smaller than 18 AWG.
(c) Other Wiring Within Buildings. Cables installed in building
7.60.3.18 Support of Conductors. Power-limited fire alarm circuit locations other than those covered in 7.60.3.21(a) or 7.60.3.21(b) shall
conductors shall not be strapped, taped, or attached by any means to be as described in either (1), (2), (3), or (4). Type FPL-CI cable shall
the exterior of any conduit or other raceway as a means of support. be permitted to be installed as described in either (1), (2), (3), or (4) to
provide a 2-hour circuit integrity rated cable.
7.60.3.19 Current-Carrying Continuous Line-Type Fire Detectors.
(1) Type FPL shall be permitted.
(a) Application. Listed continuous line-type fire detectors, (2) Cables shall be permitted to be installed in raceways.
 (3) Cables specified in Chapter 3 and meeting the requirements of
7.60.4.2(a) and 7.60.4.2(b) shall be permitted to be installed in Table 7.60.3.21 Cable Substitutions
nonconcealed spaces where the exposed length of cable does not Permitted
exceed 3 m. Cable Type References
Substitutions
(4) A portable fire alarm system provided to protect a stage or set FPLP 7.60.3.21(a) CMP
when not in use shall be permitted to use wiring methods in FPLR 7.60.3.21(b) CMP, FPLP, CMR
accordance with 5.30.2.2. FPL 7.60.3.21(c) CMP, FPLP, CMR,
FPLR, CMG, CM
(d) Fire Alarm Cable Substitutions. The substitutions for fire
alarm cables listed in Table 7.60.3.21 shall be permitted. Where
substitute cables are installed, the wiring requirements of Parts 7.60.1
and 7.60.3 shall apply. (a) NPLFA Conductor Materials. Conductors shall be 18 AWG or
larger solid or stranded copper.
FPN: For information on communications cables (CMP, CMR, CMG, CM), see
8.0.6.10.
(b) Insulated Conductors. Insulated conductors shall be suitable
7.60.4 Listing Requirements for 600 volts. Insulated conductors 2.0 mm2 (1.6 mm dia.) and larger
shall be one of the types listed in Table 3.10.1.13 or one that is
7.60.4.1 Listing and Marking of NPLFA Cables. Non–power- identified for this use. Insulated conductors 18 AWG and 16 AWG
limited fire alarm cables installed as wiring within buildings shall be shall be in accordance with 7.60.2.7.
listed in accordance with 7.60.4.1(a) and 7.60.4.1(b) and as being
resistant to the spread of fire in accordance with 7.60.4.1(c) through (c) Type NPLFP. Type NPLFP non–power-limited fire alarm cable
7.60.4.1(f), and shall be marked in accordance with 7.60.4.1(g). for use in other space used for environmental air shall be listed as
being suitable for use in other space used for environmental air as
described in 3.0.1.22(c) and shall also be listed as having adequate
fire-resistant and low smoke-producing characteristics.

FPN: One method of defining low smoke-producing cable is by establishing an

acceptable value of the smoke produced when tested in accordance with NFPA
262-2002, Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and
Cables for Use in Air-Handling Spaces, to a maximum peak optical density of 0.5
and a maximum average optical density of 0.15. Similarly, one method of defining
fire-resistant cables is be establishing a maximum allowable flame travel distance
of 1.52 m (5 ft) when tested in accordance with the same test.

(d) Type NPLFR. Type NPLFR non–power-limited fire alarm riser

cable shall be listed as being suitable for use in a vertical run in a shaft
or from floor to floor and shall also be listed as having fire-resistant
characteristics capable of preventing the carrying of fire from floor to
floor.
Figure 7.60.3.21 Cable Substitution Hierarchy.
FPN: One method of defining fire-resistant characteristics capable of preventing
the carrying of fire from floor to floor is that the cables pass ANSI/UL 1666-2002,
Test for Flame Propagation Height of Electrical and Optical-Fiber Cables Installed
Vertically in Shafts.
 7.60.4.2(h) and shall be marked in accordance with 7.60.4.2(i).
(e) Type NPLF. Type NPLF non–power-limited fire alarm cable Insulated continuous line-type fire detectors shall be listed in
shall be listed as being suitable for general-purpose fire alarm use, accordance with 7.60.4.2(j).
with the exception of risers, ducts, plenums, and other space used for
environmental air, and shall also be listed as being resistant to the
spread of fire.
Table 7.60.4.1(g) NPLFA Cable Markings
FPN No. 1: One method of defining resistant to the spread of fire is that the cables
Cable
do not spread fire to the top of the tray in the vertical-tray flame test in ANSI/UL Type Reference
1581-1991, Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables and Flexible Cords. Marking
FPN No. 2: Another method of defining resistant to the spread of fire is for the NPLFP Non–power-limited fire 760.31(d) and (h)
damage (char length) not to exceed 1 480 mm when performing the CSA vertical
flame test for cables in cable trays, as described in CSA C22.2 No. 0.3-M-1985, alarm circuit cable for use
Test Methods for Electrical Wires and Cables. in “other space used for
environmental air”
(f) Fire Alarm Circuit Integrity (CI) Cable or Electrical Circuit NPLFR Non–power-limited fire 760.31(e) and (h)
Protective System. Cables used for survivability of critical circuits alarm circuit riser cable
shall be listed as circuit integrity (CI) cable. Cables specified in NPLF Non–power-limited fire 760.31(f) and (h)
7.60.4.1(c), (d), and (e), and used for circuit integrity shall have the alarm circuit cable
additional classification using the suffix “-CI.” Cables that are part of Note: Cables identified in 7.60.4.1(c), (d), and (e) and meeting the requirements for
a listed electrical circuit protective system shall be considered to meet circuit integrity shall have the additional classification using the suffix “CI” (for
example, NPLFP-CI, NPLFR-CI, and NPLF-CI).
the requirements of survivability.

FPN No. 1: Fire alarm circuit integrity (CI) cable and electrical circuit protective
systems may be used for fire alarm circuits to comply with the survivability
requirements of NFPA 72®-2002, National Fire Alarm Code®, 6.9.4.3 and 6.9.4.6,
that the circuit maintain its electrical function during fire conditions for a defined
(a) Conductor Materials. Conductors shall be solid or stranded
period of time. copper.
FPN No. 2: One method of defining circuit integrity (CI) cable is by establishing a
minimum 2-hour fire resistance rating for the cable when tested in accordance with
UL 2196-1995, Standard for Tests of Fire Resistive Cables. (b) Conductor Size. The size of conductors in a multiconductor
cable shall not be smaller than 26 AWG. Single conductors shall not
(g) NPLFA Cable Markings. Multiconductor non–power-limited be smaller than 18 AWG.
fire alarm cables shall be marked in accordance with Table
7.60.4.1(g). Non–power-limited fire alarm circuit cables shall be (c) Ratings. The cable shall have a voltage rating of not less than
permitted to be marked with a maximum usage voltage rating of 150 300 volts.
volts. Cables that are listed for circuit integrity shall be identified with
the suffix “CI” as defined in 7.60.4.1(f). (d) Type FPLP. Type FPLP power-limited fire alarm plenum cable
shall be listed as being suitable for use in ducts, plenums, and other
FPN: Cable types are listed in descending order of fire resistance rating. space used for environmental air and shall also be listed as having
adequate fire-resistant and low smoke-producing characteristics.
7.60.4.2 Listing and Marking of PLFA Cables and Insulated
Continuous Line-Type Fire Detectors. Type FPL cables installed as FPN: One method of defining low smoke-producing cable is by establishing an
acceptable value of the smoke produced when tested in accordance with NFPA
wiring within buildings shall be listed as being resistant to the spread 262-2002, Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and
of fire and other criteria in accordance with 7.60.4.2(a) through Cables for Use in Air-Handling Spaces, to a maximum peak optical density of 0.5
and a maximum average optical density of 0.15. Similarly, one method of defining
 fire-resistant cables is be establishing a maximum allowable flame travel distance (h) Coaxial Cables. Coaxial cables shall be permitted to use 30
of 1 500 mm when tested in accordance with the same test.
percent conductivity copper-covered steel center conductor wire and
shall be listed as Type FPLP, FPLR, or FPL cable.
(e) Type FPLR. Type FPLR power-limited fire alarm riser cable
shall be listed as being suitable for use in a vertical run in a shaft or
(i) Cable Marking. The cable shall be marked in accordance with
from floor to floor and shall also be listed as having fire-resistant
Table 7.60.4.2(i). The voltage rating shall not be marked on the cable.
characteristics capable of preventing the carrying of fire from floor to
Cables that are listed for circuit integrity shall be identified with the
floor.
suffix CI as defined in 7.60.4.2(g).
FPN: One method of defining fire-resistant characteristics capable of preventing
the carrying of fire from floor to floor is that the cables pass the requirements of FPN: Voltage ratings on cables may be misinterpreted to suggest that the cables
ANSI/UL 1666-2002, Standard Test for Flame Propagation Height of Electrical and may be suitable for Class 1, electric light, and power applications.
Optical-Fiber Cable Installed Vertically in Shafts.
Exception: Voltage markings shall be permitted where the cable has
(f) Type FPL. Type FPL power-limited fire alarm cable shall be multiple listings and voltage marking is required for one or more of
listed as being suitable for general-purpose fire alarm use, with the the listings.
exception of risers, ducts, plenums, and other spaces used for
environmental air, and shall also be listed as being resistant to the FPN: Cable types are listed in descending order of fire-resistance rating.
spread of fire.
(j) Insulated Continuous Line-Type Fire Detectors. Insulated
FPN: One method of defining resistant to the spread of fire is that the cables do not continuous line-type fire detectors shall be rated in accordance with
spread fire to the top of the tray in the vertical-tray flame test in ANSI/UL 1581- 7.60.4.2(c), listed as being resistant to the spread of fire in accordance
1991, Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables and Flexible Cords.
Another method of defining resistant to the spread of fire is for the damage (char with 7.60.4.2(d) through 7.60.4.2(f), marked in accordance with
length) not to exceed 1 480 mm when performing the CSA vertical flame test for 7.60.4.2(i), and the jacket compound shall have a high degree of
cables in cable trays, as described in CSA C22.2 No. 0.3-M-1985, Test Methods
for Electrical Wires and Cables.
abrasion resistance.

(g) Fire Alarm Circuit Integrity (CI) Cable or Electrical Circuit

Protective System. Cables used for survivability of critical circuits
shall be listed as circuit integrity (CI) cable. Cables specified in
7.60.4.2(d), (e), (f), and (h) and used for circuit integrity shall have the
additional classification using the suffix “-CI.” Cables that are part of Table 7.60.4.2(i) Cable Markings
a listed electrical circuit protective system shall be considered to meet Cable Marking Type
the requirements of survivability. FPLP Power-limited fire alarm plenum
cable
FPN No. 1: Fire alarm circuit integrity (CI) cable and electrical circuit protective FPLR Power-limited fire alarm riser
systems may be used for fire alarm circuits to comply with the survivability
requirements of NFPA 72®-2002, National Fire Alarm Code®, 6.9.4.3 and 6.9.4.6,
cable
that the circuit maintain its electrical function during fire conditions for a defined FPL Power-limited fire alarm cable
period of time. Note: Cables identified in 7.60.4.2(d), (e), and (f) as meeting the requirements for
FPN No. 2: One method of defining circuit integrity (CI) cable is by establishing a circuit integrity shall have the additional classification using the suffix “CI” (for
minimum 2-hour fire resistance rating for the cable when tested in accordance with example, FPLP-CI, FPLR-CI, and FPL-CI).
UL 2196-1995, Standard for Tests of Fire Resistive Cables.
 installations of optical fiber cables and raceways where they are
ARTICLE 7.70 — OPTICAL FIBER CABLES installed in ducts or plenums or other space used for environmental air.
AND RACEWAYS
Exception: As permitted in 7.70.3.42(a).
7.70.1 General
7.70.1.6 Optical Fiber Cables. Optical fiber cables transmit light for
7.70.1.1 Scope. The provisions of this article apply to the installation control, signaling, and communications through an optical fiber.
of optical fiber cables and raceways. This article does not cover the
construction of optical fiber cables and raceways. 7.70.1.9 Types. Optical fiber cables can be grouped into three types.

7.70.1.2 Definitions. (a) Nonconductive. These cables contain no metallic members and
no other electrically conductive materials.
Abandoned Optical Fiber Cable. Installed optical fiber cable that (b) Conductive. These cables contain non–current-carrying
is not terminated at equipment other than a connector and not conductive members such as metallic strength members, metallic
identified for future use with a tag. vapor barriers, and metallic armor or sheath.
(c) Composite. These cables contain optical fibers and current-
Exposed. The circuit is in such a position that, in case of failure of carrying electrical conductors, and shall be permitted to contain non–
supports and insulation, contact with another circuit may result. current-carrying conductive members such as metallic strength
members and metallic vapor barriers. Composite optical fiber cables
FPN: See Article 1.0 for two other definitions of Exposed. shall be classified as electrical cables in accordance with the type of
electrical conductors.
Optical Fiber Raceway. A raceway designed for enclosing and
routing listed optical fiber cables. 7.70.1.12 Raceways for Optical Fiber Cables. Installations of
raceways shall comply with 7.70.1.12(a) through 7.70.1.12(d).
Point of Entrance. The point at which the cable emerges from an
external wall, from a concrete floor slab, or from a rigid metal conduit (a) Listed Chapter 3 Raceways. Listed optical fiber cable shall be
or an intermediate metal conduit grounded to an electrode in permitted to be installed in any type of listed raceway permitted in
accordance with 8.0.4.1(b). Chapter 3 where that listed raceway is installed in accordance with
Chapter 3. Where optical fiber cables are installed within raceway
7.70.1.3 Other Articles. Circuits and equipment shall comply with without current-carrying conductors, the raceway fill tables of Chapter
7.70.1.3(a) and 7.70.1.3(b). Only those sections of Article 300 3 and Chapter 9 shall not apply. Where nonconductive optical fiber
referenced in this article shall apply to optical fiber cables and cables are installed with electric conductors in a raceway, the raceway
raceways. fill tables of Chapter 3 and Chapter 9 shall apply.
(a) Spread of Fire or Products of Combustion. The requirements (b) Optical Fiber Raceways. Listed optical fiber cable shall be
of 3.0.1.21 for electrical installations shall also apply to installations of permitted to be installed in listed plenum optical fiber raceway, listed
optical fiber cables and raceways. The accessible portion of abandoned riser optical fiber raceway, or listed general-purpose optical fiber
optical fiber cables shall be removed. raceway installed in accordance with 7.70.3.42 and 362.24 through
362.56, where the requirements applicable to electrical nonmetallic
(b) Ducts, Plenums, and Other Air-Handling Spaces. The tubing shall apply.
requirements of 3.0.1.22 for electric wiring shall also apply to
 (c) Innerduct. Listed plenum optical fiber raceway, listed riser 7.70.3.1.
optical fiber raceway, or listed general-purpose optical fiber raceway
installed in accordance with 7.70.3.42 shall be permitted to be Exception No. 1: Optical fiber cables shall not be required to be listed
installed as innerduct in any type of listed raceway permitted in and marked where the length of the cable within the building,
Chapter 3. measured from its point of entrance, does not exceed 15 m and the
cable enters the building from the outside and is terminated in an
(d) Entering Buildings. Unlisted underground or outside plant enclosure.
construction plastic innerduct entering the building from the outside
shall be terminated and firestopped at the point of entrance. FPN: Splice cases or terminal boxes, both metallic and plastic types, typically are
used as enclosures for splicing or terminating optical fiber cables.

7.70.1.21 Access to Electrical Equipment Behind Panels Designed

Exception No. 2: Nonconductive optical fiber cables shall not be
to Allow Access. Access to electrical equipment shall not be denied by
required to be listed and marked where the cable enters the building
an accumulation of cables that prevents removal of panels, including
from the outside and is run in raceway systems installed in compliance
suspended ceiling panels.
with any of the following articles in Chapter 3: Article 3.42,
Intermediate Metal Conduit: Type IMC; Article 3.44, Rigid Metal
7.70.1.24 Mechanical Execution of Work. Optical fiber cables shall
Conduit: Type RMC; Article 3.52, Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit: Type
be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. Cables installed
RNC; and Article .358, Electrical Metallic Tubing: Type EMT.
exposed on the surface of ceilings and sidewalls shall be supported by
the building structure in such a manner that the cable will not be FPN No. 1: Cables types are listed in descending order of fire resistance rating.
damaged by normal building use. Such cables shall be secured by Within each fire resistance rating, nonconductive cable is listed first because it may
straps, staples, hangers, or similar fittings designed and installed so as substitute for the conductive cable.
FPN No. 2: See the referenced sections for requirements and permitted uses.
not to damage the cable. The installation shall also conform with
3.0.1.4(d) and 3.0.1.11. 7.70.3.21 Installation of Optical Fibers and Electrical Conductors.
FPN: Accepted industry practices are described in ANSI/NECA/BICSI 568-2001,
Standard for Installing Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling, and (a) With Conductors for Electric Light, Power, Class 1, Non–
other ANSI-approved installation standards. Power-Limited Fire Alarm, or Medium Power Network-Powered
Broadband Communications Circuits. Optical fibers shall be
7.70.2 Protection permitted within the same composite cable for electric light, power,
Class 1, non–power-limited fire alarm, or medium power network-
7.70.2.1 Grounding of Entrance Cables. Where exposed to contact powered broadband communications circuits operating at 600 volts or
with electric light or power conductors, the non–current-carrying less only where the functions of the optical fibers and the electrical
metallic members of optical fiber cables entering buildings shall be conductors are associated.
grounded as close to the point of entrance as practicable or shall be Nonconductive optical fiber cables shall be permitted to occupy the
interrupted as close to the point of entrance as practicable by an same cable tray or raceway with conductors for electric light, power,
insulating joint or equivalent device. Class 1, non–power-limited fire alarm, Type ITC, or medium power
network-powered broadband communications circuits, operating at
7.70.3 Cables Within Buildings 600 volts or less. Conductive optical fiber cables shall not be permitted
to occupy the same cable tray or raceway with conductors for electric
7.70.3.1 Installation and Marking of Listed Optical Fiber Cables. light, power, Class 1, non–power-limited fire alarm, Type ITC, or
Listed optical fiber cables shall be installed as wiring within buildings. medium power network-powered broadband communications circuits.
Optical fiber cables shall be marked in accordance with Table
 Composite optical fiber cables containing only current-carrying (2) Power-limited fire alarm systems in compliance with Article
conductors for electric light, power, Class 1 circuits rated 600 volts or 7.60
less shall be permitted to occupy the same cabinet, cable tray, outlet (3) Communications circuits in compliance with Article 8.0
box, panel, raceway, or other termination enclosure with conductors (4) Community antenna television and radio distribution systems
for electric light, power, or Class 1 circuits operating at 600 volts or in compliance with Article 8.20
less. (5) Low-power network-powered broadband communications
Nonconductive optical fiber cables shall not be permitted to occupy circuits in compliance with Article 8.30
the same cabinet, outlet box, panel, or similar enclosure housing the
electrical terminations of an electric light, power, Class 1, non–power- (c) Grounding. Non–current-carrying conductive members of
limited fire alarm, or medium power network-powered broadband optical fiber cables shall be grounded in accordance with Article 2.50.
communications circuit.

Exception No. 1: Occupancy of the same cabinet, outlet box, panel, or

similar enclosure shall be permitted where nonconductive optical fiber Table 7.70.3.1 Cable Markings
cable is functionally associated with the electric light, power, Class 1,
non–power-limited fire alarm, or medium power network-powered Cable
broadband communications circuit. Type Reference
Marking
Exception No. 2: Occupancy of the same cabinet, outlet box, panel, or OFNP Nonconductive optical fiber plenum 7.70.4.1(a) and
similar enclosure shall be permitted where nonconductive optical fiber cable 7.70.3.42
cables are installed in factory- or field-assembled control centers. OFCP Conductive optical fiber plenum 7.70.4.1(a) and
Exception No. 3: In industrial establishments only, where conditions cable 7.70.3.42(a)
of maintenance and supervision ensure that only licensed electrical OFNR Nonconductive optical fiber riser 7.70.4.1(b) and
practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner under the cable 7.70.3.42(b)
supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner service the OFCR Conductive optical fiber riser cable 7.70.4.1(b) and
installation, nonconductive optical fiber cables shall be permitted with 7.70.3.42(b)
circuits exceeding 600 volts. OFNG Nonconductive optical fiber 7.70.4.1(c) and
Exception No. 4: In industrial establishments only, where conditions general-purpose cable 7.70.3.42(c)
of maintenance and supervision ensure that only licensed electrical OFCG Conductive optical fiber general- 7.70.4.1(c) and
practitioner or non licensed electrical practitioner under the purpose cable 7.70.3.42(c)
supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner service the OFN Nonconductive optical fiber 7.70.4.1(d) and
installation, composite optical fiber cables shall be permitted to general-purpose cable 7.70.3.42(c)
contain current-carrying conductors operating over 600 volts. OFC Conductive optical fiber general- 7.70.4.1(d) and
purpose cable 7.70.3.42(c)
(b) With Other Conductors. Optical fibers shall be permitted in the
same cable, and conductive and nonconductive optical fiber cables
shall be permitted in the same cable tray, enclosure, or raceway with
conductors of any of the following: 7.70.3.42 Applications of Listed Optical Fiber Cables and
Raceways. Nonconductive and conductive optical fiber cables shall
(1) Class 2 and Class 3 remote-control, signaling, and power- comply with any of the requirements given in 7.70.3.42(a) through
limited circuits in compliance with Article 7.25 7.70.3.42(e) or where cable substitutions are made as shown in
7.70.3.42(f).
 (a) Plenums. Cables installed in ducts, plenums, and other spaces (e) Cable Trays. Optical fiber cables of the types listed in Table
used for environmental air shall be Type OFNP or OFCP. Abandoned 7.70.3.1 shall be permitted to be installed in cable trays.
cables shall not be permitted to remain. Types OFNR, OFCR, OFNG,
OFN, OFCG, and OFC cables installed in compliance with 3.0.1.22 FPN: It is not the intent to require that these optical fiber cables be listed
specifically for use in cable trays.
shall be permitted. Listed plenum optical fiber raceways shall be
permitted to be installed in ducts and plenums as described in
(f) Cable Substitutions. The substitutions for optical fiber cables
3.0.1.22(b) and in other spaces used for environmental air as described
listed in Table 7.70.3.42 shall be permitted.
in 3.0.1.22(c). Only type OFNP and OFCP cables shall be permitted to
be installed in these raceways.

FPN: See 8.14.1 of NFPA 13 (2002), Installation of Sprinkler Systems, for

Table 7.70.3.42 Cable Substitutions
requirements for sprinklers in concealed spaces containing exposed combustibles. Cable Type Permitted Substitutions
OFNP None
(b) Riser. Cables installed in risers shall be as described in any of OFCP OFNP
the following: OFNR OFNP
OFCR OFNP, OFCP, OFNR
(1) Cables installed in vertical runs and penetrating more than one OFNG, OFN OFNP, OFNR
floor, or cables installed in vertical runs in a shaft, shall be Type OFCG, OFC OFNP, OFCP, OFNR, OFCR, OFNG, OFN
OFNR or OFCR. Floor penetrations requiring Type OFNR or OFCR
shall contain only cables suitable for riser or plenum use. Abandoned
cables shall not be permitted to remain. Listed riser optical fiber
raceways shall be permitted to be installed in vertical riser runs in a
shaft from floor to floor. Only Type OFNP, OFCP, OFNR, and OFCR
cables shall be permitted to be installed in these raceways.
(2) Type OFNG, OFN, OFCG, and OFC cables shall be permitted
to be encased in a metal raceway or located in a fireproof shaft having
firestops at each floor.
(3) Type OFNG, OFN, OFCG, and OFC cables shall be permitted
in one- and two-family dwellings.

FPN: See 3.0.1.21 for firestop requirements for floor penetrations.

(c) Other Wiring Within Buildings. Cables installed in building

locations other than the locations covered in 7.70.3.42(a) and
Figure 7.70.3.42 Cable Substitution Hierarchy.
7.70.3.42(b) shall be Type OFNG, OFN, OFCG, or OFC. Such cables
shall be permitted to be installed in listed general-purpose optical fiber
raceways.
7.70.4 Listing Requirements
(d) Hazardous (Classified) Locations. Cables installed in
7.70.4.1 Optical Fiber Cables. Optical fiber cables shall be listed in
hazardous (classified) locations shall be any type indicated in Table
accordance with 7.70.4.1(a) through 7.70.4.1(d).
7.70.3.42.
 Another method of defining resistant to the spread of fire is for the damage (char
length) not to exceed 1 480 mm when performing the vertical flame test for cables
(a) Types OFND and OFCD. Types OFNP and OFCP. Types in cable trays, as described in CSA C22.2 No. 0.3-M-1985, Test Methods for
OFNP and OFCP nonconductive and conductive optical fiber plenum Electrical Wires and Cables.
cables shall be listed as being suitable for use in ducts, plenums, and
other space used for environmental air and shall also be listed as 7.70.4.4 Optical Fiber Raceways. Optical fiber raceways shall be
having adequate fire resistant and low smoke producing listed in accordance with 7.70.4.4(a) through 7.70.4.4(c).
characteristics.
(a) Plenum Optical Fiber Raceway. Plenum optical fiber raceways
FPN: One method of defining a cable that is low smoke producing cable and fire- shall be listed as having adequate fire-resistant and low smoke-
resistant cable is that the cable exhibits a maximum peak optical density of 0.5 or
less, an average optical density of 0.15 or less, and a maximum flame spread
producing characteristics.
distance of 1 500 mm or less when tested in accordance with NFPA 262–2002,
Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for Use FPN: One method of defining that an optical fiber raceway is a low smoke
in Air-Handling Spaces. producing raceway and a fire-resistant raceway is that the raceway exhibits a
maximum peak optical density of 0.5 or less, an average optical density of 0.15 or
less, and a maximum flame spread distance of 1 500 mm or less when tested in
(b) Types OFNR and OFCR. Types OFNR and OFCR accordance with the plenum test in UL 2024, Standard for Optical Fiber Cable
nonconductive and conductive optical fiber riser cables shall be listed Raceway.
as being suitable for use in a vertical run in a shaft or from floor to
floor and shall also be listed as having the fire-resistant characteristics (b) Riser Optical Fiber Raceway. Riser optical fiber raceways shall
capable of preventing the carrying of fire from floor to floor. be listed as having fire-resistant characteristics capable of preventing
the carrying of fire from floor to floor.
FPN: One method of defining fire-resistant characteristics capable of preventing
the carrying of fire from floor to floor is that the cables pass the requirements of FPN: One method of defining fire-resistant characteristics capable of preventing
ANSI/UL 1666-2002, Standard Test for Flame Propagation Height of Electrical and the carrying of fire from floor to floor is that the raceways pass the requirements of
Optical-Fiber Cable Installed Vertically in Shafts. the test for Flame Propagation (riser) in UL 2024, Standard for Optical Fiber Cable
Raceway.
(c) Types OFNG and OFCG. Types OFNG and OFCG
nonconductive and conductive general-purpose optical fiber cables (c) General-Purpose Optical Fiber Cable Raceway. General-
shall be listed as being suitable for general-purpose use, with the purpose optical fiber cable raceway shall be listed as being resistant to
exception of risers and plenums, and shall also be listed as being the spread of fire.
resistant to the spread of fire.
FPN: One method of defining resistance to the spread of fire is that the raceways
pass the requirements of the Vertical-Tray Flame Test (General Use) in UL 2024,
FPN: One method of defining resistance to the spread of fire is for the damage
Standard for Optical Fiber Cable Raceway.
(char length) not to exceed 1 480 m when performing the vertical flame test for
cables in cable trays, as described in CSA C22.2 No. 0.3-M-1985, Test Methods
for Electrical Wires and Cables.
ARTICLE 7.80 — CLOSED-LOOP AND
(d) Types OFN and OFC. Types OFN and OFC nonconductive and PROGRAMMED POWER DISTRIBUTION
conductive optical fiber cables shall be listed as being suitable for
general-purpose use, with the exception of risers, plenums, and other 7.80.1.1 Scope. The provisions of this article apply to premise power
spaces used for environmental air, and shall also be listed as being distribution systems jointly controlled by a signaling between the
resistant to the spread of fire. energy controlling equipment and utilization equipment.
FPN: One method of defining resistant to the spread of fire is that the cables do not
spread fire to the top of the tray in the vertical-tray flame test in ANSI/UL 1581-
1991, Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords.
7.80.1.2 General. 7.80.1.6 Cables and Conductors.

(a) Other Articles. Except as modified by the requirements of this (a) Hybrid Cable. Listed hybrid cable consisting of power,
article, all other applicable articles of this Code shall apply. communications, and signaling conductors shall be permitted under a
common jacket. The jacket shall be applied so as to separate the power
(b) Component Parts. All equipment and conductors shall be listed conductors from the communications and signaling conductors. An
and identified. optional outer jacket shall be permitted to be applied. The individual
conductors of a hybrid cable shall conform to the Code provisions
7.80.1.3 Control. The control equipment and all power switching applicable to their current, voltage, and insulation rating. The signaling
devices operated by the control equipment shall be listed and conductors shall not be smaller than 24 AWG copper.
identified. The system shall operate in accordance with 7.80.1.3(a) (b) Cables and Conductors in the Same Cabinet, Panel, or Box.
through 7.80.1.3(d). The power, communications, and signaling conductors of listed hybrid
cable are permitted to occupy the same cabinet, panel, or outlet box (or
(a) Characteristic Electrical Identification Required. Outlets similar enclosure housing the electrical terminations of electric light or
shall not be energized unless the utilization equipment first exhibits a power circuits) only if connectors specifically listed for hybrid cable
characteristic electrical identification. are employed.

(b) Conditions for De-Energization. Outlets shall be de-energized 7.80.1.7 Noninterchangeability. Receptacles, cord connectors, and
when any of the following conditions occur: attachment plugs used on closed-loop power distribution systems shall
be constructed so that they are not interchangeable with other
(1) A nominal-operation acknowledgment signal is not being receptacles, cord connectors, and attachment plugs.
received from the utilization equipment connected to the outlet.
(2) A ground-fault condition exists.
(3) An overcurrent condition exists.

(c) Additional Conditions for De-Energization When an Alternate

Source of Power Is Used. In addition to the requirements in
7.80.1.3(b), outlets shall be de-energized when any of the following
conditions occur:

(1) The grounded conductor is not properly grounded.

(2) Any ungrounded conductor is not at nominal voltage.

(d) Controller Malfunction. In the event of a controller

malfunction, all associated outlets shall be de-energized.

7.80.1.5 Power Limitation in Signaling Circuits. For signaling

circuits not exceeding 24 volts, the current required shall not exceed 1
ampere where protected by an overcurrent device or an inherently
limited power source.
 Communications Circuit Integrity (CI) Cable. Cable used in
communications systems to ensure continued operation of critical
circuits during a specified time under fire conditions.
Chapter 8. Communications Systems
Communications Equipment. The electronic equipment that
ARTICLE 8.0 — COMMUNICATIONS CIRCUITS performs the telecommunications operations for the transmission of
audio, video, and data, and including power equipment (e.g., dc
FPN: Rules that are followed by a reference in brackets contain text that has been converters, inverters and batteries) and technical support equipment
extracted from NFPA 97–2003, Standard Glossary of Terms Relating to Chimneys, (e.g., computers).
Vents, and Heat-Producing Appliances. Only editorial changes were made to the
extracted text to make it consistent with this Code.
Exposed. A circuit that is in such a position that, in case of failure
8.0.1 General of supports and insulation, contact with another circuit may result.

8.0.1.1 Scope. This article covers telephone, telegraph (except radio), FPN: See Article 1.1 for two other definitions of Exposed.

outside wiring for fire alarm and burglar alarm, and similar central
station systems; and telephone systems not connected to a central Point of Entrance. The point of entrance within a building is the
station system but using similar types of equipment, methods of point at which the wire or cable emerges from an external wall, from a
installation, and maintenance. concrete floor slab, or from a rigid metal conduit or an intermediate
metal conduit grounded to an electrode in accordance with 8.0.4.1(b).
FPN No. 1: For further information for fire alarm, sprinkler waterflow, and sprinkler
supervisory systems, see Article 7.60. Premises. The land and buildings of a user located on the user side
FPN No. 2: For installation requirements of optical fiber cables, see Article 7.70.
of the utility-user network point of demarcation.

FPN No. 3: For installation requirements for network-powered broadband Wire. A factory assembly of one or more insulated conductors
communications circuits, see Article 8.30.
without an overall covering.
8.0.1.2 Definitions. See Article 1.1. For purposes of this article, the
8.0.1.3 Other Articles
following additional definitions apply.
(a) Hybrid Power and Communications Cables. The provisions of
Block. A square or portion of a city, town, or village enclosed by
7.80.1.6 shall apply for listed hybrid power and communications
streets and including the alleys so enclosed, but not any street.
cables in closed-loop and programmed power distribution.
Air Duct. A conduit or passageway for conveying air to or from FPN: See 8.0.6.10(j) for hybrid power and communications cable in other
heating, cooling, air conditioning, or ventilating equipment, but not applications.
including the plenum. [NFPA 97:1.2.6].
(b) Hazardous (Classified) Locations. Communications circuits
Cable. A factory assembly of two or more conductors having an and equipment installed in a location that is classified in accordance
overall covering. with Article 5.0 shall comply with the applicable requirements of
Chapter 5.
Cable Sheath. A covering over the conductor assembly that may
include one or more metallic members, strength members, or jackets (c) Spread of Fire or Products of Combustion. Section 3.0.1.21
shall apply. The accessible portion of abandoned communications (a) On Poles and In-Span. Where communications wires and
cables shall not be permitted to remain. cables and electric light or power conductors are supported by the
same pole or run parallel to each other in-span, the conditions
(d) Equipment in Other Space Used for Environmental Air. described in 8.0.2.1(a)(1) through (a)(4) shall be met.
Section 3.0.1.22(c) shall apply.
(1) Relative Location. Where practicable, the communications
8.0.1.18 Installation of Equipment. Equipment electrically wires and cables shall be located below the electric light or power
connected to a telecommunications network shall be listed in conductors.
accordance with 8.0.6.1. Installation of equipment shall also comply (2) Attachment to Crossarms. Communications wires and cables
with 1.10.1.3(b). shall not be attached to a crossarm that carries electric light or power
conductors.
Exception: This listing requirement shall not apply to test equipment (3) Climbing Space. The climbing space through communications
that is intended for temporary connection to a telecommunications wires and cables shall comply with the requirements of 2.25.1.14(d).
network by licensed electrical practitioner or non licensed electrical (4) Clearance. Supply service drops of 0–750 volts running above
practitioner under the supervision of a licensed electrical practitioner and parallel to communications service drops shall have a minimum
during the course of installation, maintenance, or repair of separation of 300 mm at any point in the span, including the point of
telecommunications equipment or systems. and at their attachment to the building, provided the nongrounded
conductors are insulated and that a clearance of not less than
8.0.1.21 Access to Electrical Equipment Behind Panels Designed to 1 000 mm is maintained between the two services at the pole.
Allow Access. Access to electrical equipment shall not be denied by
an accumulation of wires and cables that prevents removal of panels, (b) Above Roofs. Communications wires and cables shall have a
including suspended ceiling panels. vertical clearance of not less than 2 500 mm from all points of roofs
above which they pass.
8.0.1.24 Mechanical Execution of Work. Communications circuits
and equipment shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. Exception No. 1:Auxiliary buildings, such as garages and the like.
Cables installed exposed on the surface of ceilings and sidewalls shall
be supported by the building structure in such a manner that the cable Exception No. 2: A reduction in clearance above only the overhanging
will not be damaged by normal building use. Such cables shall be portion of the roof to not less than 450 mm shall be permitted if (1) not
secured by straps, staples, hangers, or similar fittings designed and more than 1 200 mm of communications service-drop conductors pass
installed so as not to damage the cable. The installation shall also above the roof overhang and (2) they are terminated at a through- or
conform with 3.0.1.4(d) and 3.0.1.11. above-the-roof raceway or approved support.

FPN: Accepted industry practices are described in ANSI/NECA/BICSI 568-2001, Exception No. 3: Where the roof has a slope of not less than 100 mm
Standard for Installing Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling, and
other ANSI-approved installation standards in 300 mm, a reduction in clearance to not less than 900 mm shall be
permitted.
8.0.2 Wires and Cables Outside and Entering Buildings
FPN: See Article 1: For additional information regarding overhead wires and
cables, see ANSI C2-2002, Philippine Electrical Code, Part 2, Safety Rules for
8.0.2.1 Overhead Communications Wires and Cables. Overhead Overhead Lines.
communications wires and cables entering buildings shall comply with
8.0.2.1(a) and 8.0.2.1(b). 8.0.2.4 Underground Circuits Entering Buildings. Underground
communications wires and cables entering buildings shall comply with
(a) and (b). (c) Entering Buildings. Where a primary protector is installed
inside the building, the communications wires and cables shall enter
(a) With Electric Light or Power Conductors. Underground the building either through a noncombustible, nonabsorbent insulating
communications wires and cables in a raceway, handhole enclosure, or bushing or through a metal raceway. The insulating bushing shall not
manhole containing electric light, power, Class 1, or nonpower-limited be required where the entering communications wires and cables (1)
fire alarm circuit conductors shall be in a section separated from such are in metal-sheathed cable, (2) pass through masonry, (3) meet the
conductors by means of brick, concrete, or tile partitions or by means requirements of 8.0.2.7(a) and fuses are omitted as provided in
of a suitable barrier. 8.0.3.1(a)(1), or (a)(4) meet the requirements of 8.0.2.7(a) and are
used to extend circuits to a building from a cable having a grounded
(b) Underground Block Distribution. Where the entire street metallic sheath. Raceways or bushings shall slope upward from the
circuit is run underground and the circuit within the block is placed so outside or, where this cannot be done, drip loops shall be formed in the
as to be free from likelihood of accidental contact with electric light or communications wires and cables immediately before they enter the
power circuits of over 300 volts to ground, the insulation requirements building.
of 8.0.2.7(a) and 8.0.2.7(c) shall not apply, insulating supports shall Raceways shall be equipped with an approved service head. More
not be required for the conductors, and bushings shall not be required than one communications wire and cable shall be permitted to enter
where the conductors enter the building. through a single raceway or bushing. Conduits or other metal
raceways located ahead of the primary protector shall be grounded.
8.0.2.7 Circuits Requiring Primary Protectors. Circuits that require
primary protectors as provided in Section 8.0.3.1 shall comply with 8.0.2.10 Lightning Conductors. Where practicable, a separation of at
the following. least 1 800 mm shall be maintained between communications wires
and cables on buildings and lightning conductors.
(a) Insulation, Wires, and Cables. Communications wires and
cables without a metallic shield, running from the last outdoor support 8.0.3 Protection
to the primary protector, shall be listed .
8.0.3.1 Protective Devices.
(b) On Buildings. Communications wires and cables in accordance
with 8.0.2.7(a) shall be separated at least 100 mm from electric light or (a) Application. A listed primary protector shall be provided on
power conductors not in a raceway or cable, or be permanently each circuit run partly or entirely in aerial wire or aerial cable not
separated from conductors of the other system by a continuous and confined within a block. Also, a listed primary protector shall be
firmly fixed nonconductor in addition to the insulation on the wires, provided on each circuit, aerial or underground, located within the
such as porcelain tubes or flexible tubing. Communications wires and block containing the building served so as to be exposed to accidental
cables in accordance with 8.0.2.7(a) exposed to accidental contact with contact with electric light or power conductors operating at over 300
electric light and power conductors operating at over 300 volts to volts to ground. In addition, where there exists a lightning exposure,
ground and attached to buildings shall be separated from woodwork by each interbuilding circuit on a premises shall be protected by a listed
being supported on glass, porcelain, or other insulating material. primary protector at each end of the interbuilding circuit. Installation
of primary protectors shall also comply with 1.10.1.3(b).
Exception: Separation from woodwork shall not be required where
fuses are omitted as provided for in 8.0.3.1(a)(1), or where conductors FPN No. 1: On a circuit not exposed to accidental contact with power conductors,
providing a listed primary protector in accordance with this article helps protect
are used to extend circuits to a building from a cable having a against other hazards, such as lightning and above-normal voltages induced by
grounded metal sheath. fault currents on power circuits in proximity to the communications circuit.
 FPN No. 2: Interbuilding circuits are considered to have a lightning exposure suitable for this purpose for application with circuits extending from a
unless one or more of the following conditions exist.
cable with an effectively grounded metallic sheath member(s), and (2)
(1) Circuits in large metropolitan areas where buildings are close together and the insulated conductors safely fuse on all currents greater than the
sufficiently high to intercept lightning. current-carrying capacity of the primary protector and of the primary
(2) Interbuilding cable runs of 42 m or less, directly buried or in underground
conduit, where a continuous metallic cable shield or a continuous metallic conduit protector grounding conductor
containing the cable is bonded to each building grounding electrode system.
(3) Areas having an average of five or fewer thunderstorm days per year and
earth resistivity of less than 100 ohm-meters.
(2) Fused Primary Protectors. Where the requirements listed
under 8.0.3.1(a)(1)a through 8.0.3.1(a)(1)e are not met, fused-type
(1) Fuseless Primary Protectors. Fuseless-type primary primary protectors shall be used. Fused-type primary protectors shall
protectors shall be permitted under any of the following conditions: consist of an arrester connected between each line conductor and
ground, a fuse in series with each line conductor, and an appropriate
a. Where conductors enter a building through a cable with mounting arrangement. Primary protector terminals shall be marked to
grounded metallic sheath member(s) and where the conductors in the indicate line, instrument, and ground, as applicable.
cable safely fuse on all currents greater than the current-carrying
capacity of the primary protector and of the primary protector (b) Location. The primary protector shall be located in, on, or
grounding conductor immediately adjacent to the structure or building served and as close
b. Where insulated conductors in accordance with 8.0.2.7(a) are as practicable to the point of entrance.
used to extend circuits to a building from a cable with an effectively
FPN: See 8.0.1.2 for the definition of point of entrance.
grounded metallic sheath member(s) and where the conductors in the
cable or cable stub, or the connections between the insulated
For purposes of this section, primary protectors located at mobile
conductors and the exposed plant, safely fuse on all currents greater
home service equipment located in sight from and not more than 9 000
than the current-carrying capacity of the primary protector, or the
mm from the exterior wall of the mobile home it serves, or at a mobile
associated insulated conductors and of the primary protector
home disconnecting means grounded in accordance with 2.50.2.13 and
grounding conductor
located in sight from and not more than 9 000 mm from the exterior
c. Where insulated conductors in accordance with 8.0.2.7(a) or
wall of the mobile home it serves, shall be considered to meet the
8.0.2.7(b) are used to extend circuits to a building from other than a
requirements of this section.
cable with a metallic sheath member(s) where (1) the primary
protector is listed as being suitable for this purpose for application FPN: Selecting a primary protector location to achieve the shortest practicable
with circuits extending from other than a cable with metallic sheath primary protector grounding conductor helps limit potential differences between
members, and (2) the connections of the insulated conductors to the communications circuits and other metallic systems.

exposed plant or the conductors of the exposed plant safely fuse on all
currents greater than the current-carrying capacity of the primary (c) Hazardous (Classified) Locations. The primary protector shall
protector, or associated insulated conductors and of the primary not be located in any hazardous (classified) location as defined in
protector grounding conductor Article 5.0, nor in the vicinity of easily ignitible material.
d. Where insulated conductors in accordance with 8.0.2.7(a) are
used to extend circuits aerially to a building from an unexposed buried Exception: As permitted in 5.1.3.51,5.2.3.51, and 5.3.3.51.
or underground circuit
e. Where insulated conductors in accordance with 8.0.2.7(a) are (d) Secondary Protectors . Where a secondary protector is installed
used to extend circuits to a building from cable with an effectively in series with the indoor communications wire and cable between the
grounded metallic sheath member(s) and where (1) the combination of primary protector and the equipment, it shall be listed for the purpose
the primary protector and insulated conductors is listed as being in accordance with 8.0.6.1(b).
 FPN: Secondary protectors on exposed circuits are not intended for use without (5) Run in Straight Line. The grounding conductor shall be run
primary protectors.
to the grounding electrode in as straight a line as practicable.
(6) Physical Damage. Where necessary, the grounding conductor
8.0.3.4 Cable Grounding. The metallic sheath of communications
shall be guarded from physical damage. Where the grounding
cables entering buildings shall be grounded as close as practicable to
conductor is run in a metal raceway, both ends of the raceway shall be
the point of entrance or shall be interrupted as close to the point of
bonded to the grounding conductor or the same terminal or electrode
entrance as practicable by an insulating joint or equivalent device.
to which the grounding conductor is connected.
FPN: See 8.0.1.2 for the definition of point of entrance.
(b) Electrode. The grounding conductor shall be connected as
8.0.4 Grounding Methods follows.

8.0.4.1 Cable and Primary Protector Grounding. The metallic (1) In Buildings or Structures with Grounding Means. To the
member(s) of the cable sheath, where required to be grounded by nearest accessible location on the following:
8.0.3.4, and primary protectors shall be grounded as specified in
8.0.4.1(a) through 8.0.4.1(d). a. The building or structure grounding electrode system as
covered in 2.50.3.1
(a) Grounding Conductor. b. The grounded interior metal water piping system within 1 500
mm from its point of entrance to the building as covered in 2.50.3.3
(1) Insulation. The grounding conductor shall be insulated and c. The power service accessible means external to enclosures as
shall be listed as suitable for the purpose. covered in 2.50.5.5
(2) Material. The grounding conductor shall be copper or other d. The metallic power service raceway
corrosion-resistant conductive material, stranded or solid. e. The service equipment enclosure
(3) Size. The grounding conductor shall not be smaller than f. The grounding electrode conductor or the grounding electrode
2.0 mm2 (1.6 mm dia.). conductor metal enclosure
(4) Length. The primary protector grounding conductor shall be g. To the grounding conductor or the grounding electrode of a
as short as practicable. In one- and two-family dwellings, the primary building or structure disconnecting means that is grounded to an
protector grounding conductor shall be as short as practicable, not to electrode as covered in 2.50.2.13
exceed 6 000 mm in length.
For purposes of this section, the mobile home service equipment
FPN: Similar grounding conductor length limitations applied at apartment buildings or the mobile home disconnecting means, as described in Section
and commercial buildings help to reduce voltages that may be developed between 8.0.3.1(b), shall be considered accessible.
the building's power and communications systems during lightning events.

Exception: In one- and two-family dwellings where it is not (2) If the building or structure served has no grounding means the
practicable to achieve an overall maximum primary protector grounding conductor shall be connected, as described in 8.0.4.1(b)(1),
grounding conductor length of 6 000 mm, a separate communications the grounding conductor shall be connected to either of the following:
ground rod meeting the minimum dimensional criteria of
8.0.4.1(b)(2)b shall be driven, the primary protector shall be grounded a. To any one of the individual electrodes described in
to the communications ground rod in accordance with 8.0.4.1(c), and 2.50.3.3(a)(1), (a)(2), (a)(3), or (a)(4)
the communications ground rod shall be bonded to the power
grounding electrode system in accordance with 8.0.4.1(d). b. If the building or structure served has no grounding means, as
described in 8.0.4.1(b)(1) or (b)(2)a, to an effectively grounded metal (2) Where the mobile home is supplied by cord and plug.
structure or to a ground rod or pipe not less than 1 500 mm in length
and 13 mm in diameter, driven, where practicable, into permanently 8.0.5 Communications Wires and Cables Within Buildings
damp earth and separated from lightning conductors as covered in
8.0.2.10 and at least 1 800 mm from electrodes of other systems. 8.0.5.1 Raceways for Communications Wires and Cables. Where
Steam or hot water pipes or lightning-rod conductors shall not be communications wires and cables are installed in a raceway, the
employed as electrodes for protectors. raceway shall be of a type permitted in Chapter 3 or a listed
nonmetallic raceway complying with 8.0.6.13, and installed in
(c) Electrode Connection. Connections to grounding electrodes accordance with 3.62.2.15 through 3.62.2.47, where the requirements
shall comply with 2.50.3.21. applicable to electrical nonmetallic tubing apply.

(d) Bonding of Electrodes. A bonding jumper not smaller than Exception: Conduit fill restrictions shall not apply.
14 mm2 copper or equivalent shall be connected between the
communications grounding electrode and power grounding electrode 8.0.5.4 Installation and Marking of Communications Wires and
system at the building or structure served where separate electrodes Cables. Listed communications wires and cables and listed
are used. multipurpose cables shall be installed as wiring within buildings.
Communications cables and under-carpet communications wires shall
Exception: At mobile homes as covered in 8.0.4.7. be marked in accordance with Table 8.0.5.4. The cable voltage rating
shall not be marked on the cable or on the under-carpet
FPN No. 1: See Section 2.50.3.11 for use of air terminals (lightning rods). communications wire.
FPN No. 2: Bonding together of all separate electrodes limits potential differences
between them and between their associated wiring systems. FPN: Voltage markings on cables may be misinterpreted to suggest that the cables
may be suitable for Class 1, electric light, and power applications.

8.0.4.7 Primary Protector Grounding and Bonding at Mobile

Exception No. 1: Voltage markings shall be permitted where the cable
Homes.
has multiple listings and voltage marking is required for one or more
of the listings.
(a) Grounding. Where there is no mobile home service equipment
located in sight from and not more than 9 000 mm from the exterior
Exception No. 2: Listing and marking shall not be required where the
wall of the mobile home it serves, or there is no mobile home
length of the cable within the building, measured from its point of
disconnecting means grounded in accordance with 2.50.2.13 and
entrance, does not exceed 15 m and the cable enters the building from
located within sight from and not more than 9 000 mm from the
the outside and is terminated in an enclosure or on a listed primary
exterior wall of the mobile home it serves, the primary protector
protector.
ground shall be in accordance with 8.0.4.1(b)(2).
(b) Bonding. The primary protector grounding terminal or FPN No. 1: Splice cases or terminal boxes, both metallic and plastic types, are
grounding electrode shall be bonded to the metal frame or available typically used as enclosures for splicing or terminating telephone cables.
grounding terminal of the mobile home with a copper grounding
FPN No. 2: This exception limits the length of unlisted outside plant cable to 15 m,
conductor not smaller than 3.5 mm2 (2.0 mm dia.) under any of the while 8.0.3.1(b) requires that the primary protector shall be located as close as
following conditions: practicable to the point at which the cable enters the building. Therefore, in
installations requiring a primary protector, the outside plant cable may not be
permitted to extend 15 m into the building if it is practicable to place the primary
(1) Where there is no mobile home service equipment or protector closer 15 m to the entrance point.
disconnecting means as in 8.0.4.7(a)
 FPN No. 1: Cable types are listed in descending order of fire resistance rating. Article 7.60
FPN No. 2: See the referenced sections for permitted uses. 3. Nonconductive and conductive optical fiber cables in
compliance with Article 7.70
Table 8.0.5.4 Cable Markings 4. Community antenna television and radio distribution
Cable systems in compliance with Article 8.20
Type References 5. Low power network-powered broadband communications
Marking
CMP Communication plenum cable 8.0.6.10(a) and circuits in compliance with Article 8.30
8.0.5.45(a)
CMR Communication riser cable 8.0.6.10(b) and b. Class 2 and Class 3 Circuits. Class 1 circuits shall not be run
8.0.5.45(b) in the same cable with communications circuits. Class 2 and Class 3
CMG Communication general-purpose 8.0.6.10(c) and circuit conductors shall be permitted in the same cable with
cable 8.0.5.45(d) and communications circuits, in which case the Class 2 and Class 3 circuits
(e)(1) shall be classified as communications circuits and shall meet the
CM Communication general-purpose 8.0.6.10(d) and requirements of this article. The cables shall be listed as
cable 8.0.5.45(d) and communications cables or multipurpose cables.
(e)(1)
CMX Communication cable, limited 8.0.6.10(e) and Exception: Cables constructed of individually listed Class 2, Class 3,
use 8.0.5.45(e)(2), and communications cables under a common jacket shall not be
(3), (4), and (5) required to be classified as communications cable. The fire-resistance
CMUC Under-carpet communication 8.0.6.10(f) and rating of the composite cable shall be determined by the performance
wire and cable 8.0.5.45(e)(6) of the composite cable.

c. Electric Light, Power, Class 1, Nonpower-Limited Fire

8.0.5.24 Installation of Communications Wires, Cables, and Alarm, and Medium Power Network-Powered Broadband
Equipment. Communications wires and cables from the protector to Communications Circuits in Raceways, Compartments, and Boxes.
the equipment or, where no protector is required, communications Communications conductors shall not be placed in any raceway,
wires and cables attached to the outside or inside of the building shall compartment, outlet box, junction box, or similar fitting with
comply with 8.0.5.24(a) through 8.0.5.24(d). conductors of electric light, power, Class 1, non–power-limited fire
alarm, or medium power network-powered broadband
(a) Separation from Other Conductors. communications circuits.

(1) In Raceways, Boxes, and Cables. Exception No. 1: Where all of the conductors of electric light, power,
Class 1, nonpower-limited fire alarm, and medium power network-
a. Other Power-Limited Circuits. Communications cables shall powered broadband communications circuits are separated from all of
be permitted in the same raceway or enclosure with cables of any of the conductors of communications circuits by a permanent barrier or
the following: listed divider.

1. Class 2 and Class 3 remote-control, signaling, and power- Exception No. 2: Power conductors in outlet boxes, junction boxes, or
limited circuits in compliance with Article 7.25 similar fittings or compartments where such conductors are
2. Power-limited fire alarm systems in compliance with introduced solely for power supply to communications equipment. The
power circuit conductors shall be routed within the enclosure to
maintain a minimum of 6 mm separation from the communications 8.0.5.45 Applications of Listed Communications Wires and
circuit conductors. Cables, and Communications Raceways. Communications wires
and cables shall comply with the requirements of 8.0.5.45(a) through
Exception No. 3: As permitted by 6.20.4.5. 8.0.5.45(f) or where cable substitutions are made in accordance with
8.0.5.45(g).
(2) Other Applications. Communications wires and cables shall
be separated at least 50 mm from conductors of any electric light, (a) Plenum. Cables installed in ducts, plenums, and other spaces
power, Class 1, nonpower-limited fire alarm, or medium power used for environmental air shall be Type CMP. Abandoned cables
network-powered broadband communications circuits. shall not be permitted to remain. Types CMP, CMR, CMG, CM, and
CMX and communications wire installed in compliance with 3.0.1.22
Exception No. 1: Where either (1) all of the conductors of the electric shall be permitted. Listed plenum communications raceways shall be
light, power, Class 1, nonpower-limited fire alarm, and medium power permitted to be installed in ducts and plenums as described in
network-powered broadband communications circuits are in a 3.0.1.22(b) and in other spaces used for environmental air as described
raceway or in metal-sheathed, metal-clad, nonmetallic-sheathed, Type in 3.0.1.22(c). Only Type CMP cable shall be permitted to be installed
AC, or Type UF cables, or (2) all of the conductors of communications in these raceways.
circuits are encased in raceway.
FPN: See 8.14.1 of NFPA 13-2002, Installation of Sprinkler Systems, for
requirements for sprinklers in concealed spaces containing exposed combustibles.
Exception No. 2: Where the communications wires and cables are
permanently separated from the conductors of electric light, power,
(b) Riser. Cables installed in risers shall comply with the following:
Class 1, nonpower-limited fire alarm, and medium power network-
powered broadband communications circuits by a continuous and
(1) Cables in Vertical Runs. Cables installed in vertical runs and
firmly fixed nonconductor, such as porcelain tubes or flexible tubing,
penetrating more than one floor, or cables installed in vertical runs in a
in addition to the insulation on the wire.
shaft, shall be Type CMR. Floor penetrations requiring Type CMR
shall contain only cables suitable for riser or plenum use. Abandoned
(b) Cable Trays. Types CMP, CMR, CMG, and CM
cables shall not be permitted to remain. Listed riser communications
communications cables shall be permitted to be installed in cable
raceways shall be permitted to be installed in vertical riser runs in a
trays. Communications raceways, as described in 8.0.6.10, shall be
shaft from floor to floor. Only Type CMR and CMP cables shall be
permitted to be installed in cable trays.
permitted to be installed in these raceways.
(c) Support of Conductors. Raceways shall be used for their
(2) Metal Raceways or Fireproof Shafts. Listed communications
intended purpose. Communications cables or wires shall not be
cables shall be encased in a metal raceway or located in a fireproof
strapped, taped, or attached by any means to the exterior of any
shaft having firestops at each floor.
conduit or raceway as a means of support.
(3) One- and Two-Family Dwellings. Type CM and CMX cable
Exception: Overhead (aerial) spans of communications cables or
shall be permitted in one- and two-family dwellings
wires shall be permitted to be attached to the exterior of a raceway-
type mast intended for the attachment and support of such conductors. FPN: See 8.0.1.3(c) for firestop requirements for floor penetrations.

(d) Wiring in Ducts for Dust, Loose Stock, or Vapor Removal. (c) Distributing Frames and Cross-Connect Arrays. Listed
3.0.1.22(a) shall apply. communications wire and Types CMP, CMR, CMG, and CM
communications cables shall be used in distributing frames and cross-
connect arrays. FPN: For information on Types CMP, CMR, CMG, CM, and CMX cables, see
8.0.6.10.

(d) Cable Trays. Types CMP, CMR, CMG, and CM

communications cables shall be permitted to be installed in cable
Table 8.0.5.6 Cable Uses and Permitted Substitutions
trays.
Cable Permitted
Use References
(e) Other Wiring Within Buildings. Cables installed in building Type Substitution
locations other than the locations covered in 8.0.5.45(a) through CMR Communications riser 8.0.5.45(b) CMP
8.0.5.45(d) shall be in accordance with 8.0.5.45(e)(1) through (e)(6). cable
CMG, Communications 8.0.5.45(e)(1) CMP, CMR
(1) General. Cables shall be Type CMG or Type CM. Listed CM general-purpose cable 8.0.5.45(e)
communications general-purpose raceways shall be permitted. Only CMX Communications CMP, CMR,
Types CMG, CM, CMR, or CMP cables shall be permitted to be cable, limited use CMG, CM
installed in general purpose communications raceways.
FPN: See Figure 8.0.5.45, Cable Substitution Hierarchy.

(2) In Raceways. Listed communications wires that are enclosed

in a raceway of a type included in Chapter 3 shall be permitted.

(3) Nonconcealed Spaces. Type CMX communications cable

shall be permitted to be installed in non-concealed spaces where the
exposed length of cable does not exceed 3 000 mm.

(4) One- and Two-Family Dwellings. Type CMX

communications cables that are less than 6 mm in diameter shall be
permitted to be installed in one- or two-family dwellings.

(5) Multi-Family Dwellings. Type CMX communications cables

that are less than 6 mm in diameter and installed in non-concealed
spaces in multifamily dwellings.

(6) Under Carpets. Type CMUC under-carpet communications Figure 8.0.5.45 Cable Substitution Hierarchy
wires and cables shall be permitted to be installed under carpet.

(f) Hybrid Power and Communications Cable. Hybrid power and 8.0.6 Listing Requirements
communications cable listed in accordance with 8.0.6.10(i) shall be
permitted to be installed in one-and two-family dwellings. 8.0.6.1 Equipment. Communications equipment shall be listed as
being suitable for electrical connection to a telecommunications
(g) Cable Substitutions. Substitutions for communications cables network.
listed in Table 8.0.5.45 shall be considered suitable for the purpose
and shall be permitted. FPN: One way to determine applicable requirements is to refer to UL 1950-1993,
Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment, Including Electrical
 Business Equipment, third edition; UL 1459-1995, Standard for Safety, Telephone used for environmental air and shall also be listed as having adequate
Equipment, third edition; or UL 1863-1995, Standard for Safety, Communications
Circuit Accessories, second edition. For information on listing requirements for fire-resistant and low smoke-producing characteristics.
communications raceways, see UL 2024-1995, Standard for Optical Fiber
Raceways. FPN: One method of defining a cable that is low smoke-producing cable and fire-
resistant cable is that the cable exhibits a maximum peak optical density of 0.5 or
less, an average optical density of 0.15 or less, and a maximum flame spread
(a) Primary Protectors. The primary protector shall consist of an distance of 1 500 mm or less when tested in accordance with NFPA 262-2002,
arrester connected between each line conductor and ground in an Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for Use
appropriate mounting. Primary protector terminals shall be marked to in Air-Handling Spaces.
indicate line and ground as applicable.
(b) Type CMR. Type CMR communications riser cable shall be
FPN: One way to determine applicable requirements for a listed primary protector listed as being suitable for use in a vertical run in a shaft or from floor
is to refer to ANSI/UL 497-1995, Standard for Protectors for Paired Conductor to floor and shall also be listed as having fire-resistant characteristics
Communications Circuits.
capable of preventing the carrying of fire from floor to floor.
(b) Secondary Protectors. The secondary protector shall be listed FPN: One method of defining fire-resistant characteristics capable of preventing
as suitable to provide means to safely limit currents to less than the the carrying of fire from floor to floor is that the cables pass the requirements of the
current-carrying capacity of listed indoor communications wire and Standard Test for Flame Propagation Height of Electrical and Optical-Fiber Cable
Installed Vertically in Shafts, ANSI/UL 1666-2002.
cable, listed telephone set line cords, and listed communications
terminal equipment having ports for external wire line
(c) Type CMG. Type CMG general-purpose communications cable
communications circuits. Any overvoltage protection, arresters, or
shall be listed as being suitable for general-purpose communications
grounding connection shall be connected on the equipment terminals
use, with the exception of risers and plenums, and shall also be listed
side of the secondary protector current-limiting means.
as being resistant to the spread of fire.
FPN: One way to determine applicable requirements for a listed secondary
protector is to refer to UL 497A-1996, Standard for Secondary Protectors for FPN: One method of defining resistant to the spread of fire is for the damage (char
Communications Circuits. length) not to exceed 1 500 mm when performing the vertical flame test for cables
in cable trays, as described in Test Methods for Electrical Wires and Cables, CSA
C22.2 No. 0.3-M 1985.
8.0.6.4 Drop Wire and Cable. Communications wires and cables
without a metallic shield, running from the last outdoor support to the (d) Type CM. Type CM communications cable shall be listed as
primary protector, shall be listed as being suitable for the purpose and being suitable for general-purpose communications use, with the
shall have current-carrying capacity as specified in 8.0.3.1(a)(1)b or exception of risers and plenums, and shall also be listed as being
(a)(1)c. resistant to the spread of fire.

8.0.6.10 Communications Wires and Cables. Communications wires FPN: One method of defining resistant to the spread of fire is that the cables do not
and cables shall have a voltage rating of not less than 300 volts and spread fire to the top of the tray in the vertical-tray flame test in the Reference
Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables and Flexible Cords, ANSI/UL 1581-1991.
shall be listed in accordance with 8.0.6.10(a) through 8.0.6.10(j). Another method of defining resistant to the spread of fire is for the damage (char
Conductors in communications cables, other than in a coaxial cable, length) not to exceed 1 500 mm when performing the vertical flame test for cables
in cable trays, as described in Test Methods for Electrical Wires and Cables, CSA
shall be copper. C22.2 No. 0.3-M-1985.

FPN: See 8.0.6.1 for listing requirement for equipment.

(e) Type CMX. Type CMX limited use communications cable shall
be listed as being suitable for use in dwellings and for use in raceway
(a) Type CMP. Type CMP communications plenum cable shall be
and shall also be listed as being resistant to flame spread.
listed as being suitable for use in ducts, plenums, and other spaces
 FPN: One method of determining that cable is resistant to flame spread is by Article 3.34, and the communications cable is a listed Type CM, the
testing the cable to the VW-1 (vertical-wire) flame test in the Reference Standard
for Electrical Wires, Cables and Flexible Cords, ANSI/UL 1581-1991. jackets on the listed NM or NM-B and listed CM cables are rated for
600 volts minimum, and the hybrid cable is listed as being resistant to
(f) Type CMUC Under-Carpet Wire and Cable. Type CMUC the spread of fire.
under-carpet communications wire and cable shall be listed as being
FPN: One method of defining resistant to the spread of fire is that the cables do not
suitable for under-carpet use and shall also be listed as being resistant spread fire to the top of the tray in the vertical-tray flame test in the Reference
to flame spread. Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables and Flexible Cords, ANSI/UL 1581-1991.
Another method of defining resistant to the spread of fire is for the damage (char
FPN: One method of determining that cable is resistant to flame spread is by length) not to exceed 1 500 mm when performing the vertical flame test for cables
testing the cable to the VW-1 (vertical-wire) flame test in the Reference Standard in cable trays, as described in Test Methods for Electrical Wires and Cables, CSA
for Electrical Wires, Cable and Flexible Cord, ANSI/UL 1581-1991 C22.2 No. 0.3-M-1985.

(g) Multipurpose (MP) Cables. Cables that meet the requirements 8.0.6.13 Communications Raceways. Communications raceways
for Types CMP, CMR, CMG, and CM and also satisfy the shall be listed in accordance with 8.0.6.13(a) through 8.0.6.13(c).
requirements of 7.60.4.2(b) for multiconductor cables and 7.60.4.2(h)
for coaxial cables shall be permitted to be listed and marked as (a) Plenum Communications Raceways. Plenum communications
multipurpose cable Types MPP, MPR, MPG, and MP, respectively. raceways listed as plenum optical fiber raceways shall be permitted for
use in ducts, plenums, and other spaces used for environmental air and
(h) Communications Circuit Integrity (CI) Cable. Cables suitable shall also be listed as having adequate fire-resistant and low-smoke
for use in communications systems to ensure survivability of critical producing characteristics.
circuits during a specified time under fire conditions shall be listed as
FPN: One method of defining that an optical fiber raceway is a low smoke
circuit integrity (CI) cable. Cables identified in 8.0.3.1(a), (b), (c), (d), producing raceway and a fire-resistant raceway is that the raceway exhibits a
and (e) that meet the requirements for circuit integrity shall have the maximum peak optical density of 0.5 or less, an average optical density of 0.15 or
additional classification using the suffix “CI.” less, and a maximum flame spread distance of 1 500 mm or less when tested in
accordance with the plenum test in UL 2024, Standard for Optical Fiber Cable
Raceway.
FPN: One method of defining circuit integrity (CI) cable is by establishing a
minimum 2-hour fire resistance rating for the cable when tested in accordance with
UL 2196-1995, Standard for Tests of Fire Resistive Cables. (b) Riser Communications Raceway. Riser communications
raceways shall be listed as having adequate fire-resistant
(i) Communications Wires. Communications wires, such as characteristics capable of preventing the carrying of fire from floor to
distributing frame wire and jumper wire, shall be listed as being floor.
resistant to the spread of fire.
FPN: One method of defining fire-resistant characteristics capable of preventing
the carrying of fire from floor to floor is that the raceways pass the requirements of
FPN: One method of defining resistant to the spread of fire is that the cables do not
the test for Flame Propagation (riser) in UL 2024, Standard for Optical Fiber Cable
spread fire to the top of the tray in the vertical-tray flame test in the Reference
Raceway.
Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables and Flexible Cords, ANSI/UL 1581-1991.
Another method of defining resistant to the spread of fire is for the damage (char
length) not to 1 500 mm when performing the vertical flame test — cables in cable (c) General-Purpose Communications Raceway. General-purpose
trays, as described in Test Methods for Electrical Wires and Cables, CSA C22.2
No. 0.3-M-1985.
communications raceways shall be listed as having adequate fire-
resistant characteristics.
(j) Hybrid Power and Communications Cable. Listed hybrid
FPN: One method of defining resistance to the spread of fire is that the raceways
power and communications cable shall be permitted where the power pass the requirements of the Vertical-Tray Flame Test (General Use) in UL 2024,
cable is a listed Type NM or NM-B conforming to the provisions of Standard for Optical Fiber Cable Raceway.
 support is less than 11 m.

ARTICLE 8.10 — RADIO AND TELEVISION EQUIPMENT 8.10.2.2 Supports. Outdoor antennas and lead-in conductors shall be
securely supported. The antennas or lead-in conductors shall not be
8.10.1 General attached to the electric service mast. They shall not be attached to
poles or similar structures carrying open electric light or power wires
8.10.1.1 Scope. This article covers antenna systems for radio and or trolley wires of over 250 volts between conductors. Insulators
television receiving equipment, amateur radio transmitting and supporting the antenna conductors shall have sufficient mechanical
receiving equipment, and certain features of transmitter safety. This strength to safely support the conductors. Lead-in conductors shall be
article covers antennas such as multi-element, vertical rod, and dish, securely attached to the antennas.
and also covers the wiring and cabling that connects them to
equipment. This article does not cover equipment and antennas used 8.10.2.3 Avoidance of Contacts with Conductors of Other Systems.
for coupling carrier current to power line conductors. Outdoor antennas and lead-in conductors from an antenna to a
building shall not cross over open conductors of electric light or power
8.10.1.2 Definitions. For definitions applicable to this article, see circuits and shall be kept well away from all such circuits so as to
Article 1.1. avoid the possibility of accidental contact. Where proximity to open
electric light or power service conductors of less than 250 volts
8.10.1.3 Other Articles. Wiring from the source of power to and between conductors cannot be avoided, the installation shall be such as
between devices connected to the interior wiring system shall comply to provide a clearance of at least 600 mm.
with Chapters 1 through 4 other than as modified by Parts 6.40.1 and Where practicable, antenna conductors shall be installed so as not to
6.40.2. Wiring for audio signal processing, amplification, and cross under open electric light or power conductors.
reproduction equipment shall comply with Article 6.40. Coaxial cables
that connect antennas to equipment shall comply with Article 8.20. 8.10.2.4 Splices. Splices and joints in antenna spans shall be made
mechanically secure with approved splicing devices or by such other
8.10.1.4 Community Television Antenna. The antenna shall comply means as will not appreciably weaken the conductors.
with this article. The distribution system shall comply with Article
8.20. 8.10.2.5 Grounding. Masts and metal structures supporting antennas
shall be grounded in accordance with 8.10.2.11.
8.10.1.5 Radio Noise Suppressors. Radio interference eliminators,
interference capacitors, or noise suppressors connected to power- 8.10.2.6 Size of Wire-Strung Antenna — Receiving Station.
supply leads shall be of a listed type. They shall not be exposed to
physical damage. (a) Size of Antenna Conductors. Outdoor antenna conductors for
receiving stations shall be of a size not less than given in Table
8.10.2 Receiving Equipment — Antenna Systems 8.10.2.6(a).

8.10.2.1 Material. Antennas and lead-in conductors shall be of hard- (b) Self-Supporting Antennas. Outdoor antennas, such as vertical
drawn copper, bronze, aluminum alloy, copper-clad steel, or other rods, dishes, or dipole structures, shall be of corrosion-resistant
high-strength, corrosion-resistant material. materials and of strength suitable to withstand wind loading
conditions, and shall be located well away from overhead conductors
Exception: Soft-drawn or medium-drawn copper shall be permitted for of electric light and power circuits of over 150 volts to ground, so as to
lead-in conductors where the maximum span between points of
avoid the possibility of the antenna or structure falling into or making reduced but shall not be less than 100 mm. The clearance between
accidental contact with such circuits. lead-in conductors and any conductor forming a part of a lightning rod
system shall not be less than 1 800 mm unless the bonding referred to
in 2.50.3.11 is accomplished. Underground conductors shall be
Table 8.10.2.6(a) Size of Receiving Station separated at least 300 mm from conductors of any light or power
Outdoor Antenna Conductors circuits or Class 1 circuits.
Minimum Size of Conductors Where
[mm2 (mm dia.)] Exception: Where the electric light or power conductors, Class 1
Material Maximum Open Span Length Is conductors, or lead-in conductors are installed in raceways or metal
Less than cable armor.
11m to 45 m Over 45 m
11 m
Aluminum alloy, 0.65 (0.9) 2.0 (1.6) 3.5 (2.0) (b) Antennas and Lead-ins — Indoors. Indoor antennas and
hard drawn indoor lead-ins shall not be run nearer than 50 mm to conductors of
copper other wiring systems in the premises.
Copper-clad steel, 0.50 (0.8) 0.90 (1.1) 2.0 (1.6)
bronze, or other Exception No. 1: Where such other conductors are in metal raceways
high-strength or cable armor.
material
Exception No. 2: Where permanently separated from such other
conductors by a continuous and firmly fixed nonconductor, such as
porcelain tubes or flexible tubing.
8.10.2.7 Size of Lead-in — Receiving Station. Lead-in conductors
from outside antennas for receiving stations shall, for various (c) In Boxes or Other Enclosures. Indoor antennas and indoor
maximum open span lengths, be of such size as to have a tensile lead-ins shall be permitted to occupy the same box or enclosure with
strength at least as great as that of the conductors for antennas as conductors of other wiring systems where separated from such other
specified in 8.10.2.6. Where the lead-in consists of two or more conductors by an effective permanently installed barrier.
conductors that are twisted together, are enclosed in the same
covering, or are concentric, the conductor size shall, for various 8.10.2.9 Electric Supply Circuits Used in Lieu of Antenna —
maximum open span lengths, be such that the tensile strength of the Receiving Stations. Where an electric supply circuit is used in lieu of
combination will be at least as great as that of the conductors for an antenna, the device by which the radio receiving set is connected to
antennas as specified in 8.10.2.6. the supply circuit shall be listed.

8.10.2.8 Clearances — Receiving Stations. 8.10.2.10 Antenna Discharge Units — Receiving Stations.

(a) Outside of Buildings. Lead-in conductors attached to buildings (a) Where Required. Each conductor of a lead-in from an outdoor
shall be installed so that they cannot swing closer than 600 mm to the antenna shall be provided with a listed antenna discharge unit.
conductors of circuits of 250 volts or less between conductors, or
3 000 mm to the conductors of circuits of over 250 volts between Exception: Where the lead-in conductors are enclosed in a continuous
conductors, except that in the case of circuits not over 150 volts metallic shield that is either permanently and effectively grounded or
between conductors, where all conductors involved are supported so as is protected by an antenna discharge unit.
to ensure permanent separation, the clearance shall be permitted to be
 (b) Location. Antenna discharge units shall be located outside the practicable from the mast or discharge unit to the grounding electrode.
building or inside the building between the point of entrance of the
lead-in and the radio set or transformers, and as near as practicable to (f) Electrode. The grounding conductor shall be connected as
the entrance of the conductors to the building. The antenna discharge follows.
unit shall not be located near combustible material or in a hazardous
(classified) location as defined in Article 5.0. (1) To the nearest accessible location on the following:

(c) Grounding. The antenna discharge unit shall be grounded in a. The building or structure grounding electrode system as
accordance with 8.10.2.11. covered in 2.50.3.1
b. The grounded interior metal water piping system within
8.10.2.11 Grounding Conductors — Receiving Stations. Grounding 1 500 mm from its point of entrance to the building, as covered in
conductors shall comply with 8.10.2.11(a) through 8.10.2.11(k). 2.50.3.3
c. The power service accessible means external to the building,
(a) Material. The grounding conductor shall be of copper, as covered in 2.50.5.5
aluminum, copper-clad steel, bronze, or similar corrosion-resistant d. The metallic power service raceway
material. Aluminum or copper-clad aluminum grounding conductors e. The service equipment enclosure, or
shall not be used where in direct contact with masonry or the earth or f. The grounding electrode conductor or the grounding electrode
where subject to corrosive conditions. Where used outside, aluminum conductor metal enclosures; or
or copper-clad aluminum shall not be installed within 450 mm of the
earth. (2) If the building or structure served has no grounding means, as
described in 8.10.2.11(f)(1), to any one of the individual electrodes
(b) Insulation. Insulation on grounding conductors shall not be described in 2.50.3.3; or
required.
(3) If the building or structure served has no grounding means, as
(c) Supports. The grounding conductors shall be securely fastened described in 8.10.2.11(f)(1) or (f)(2), to an effectively grounded metal
in place and shall be permitted to be directly attached to the surface structure or to any of the individual electrodes described in 2.50.3.3.
wired over without the use of insulating supports.
(g) Inside or Outside Building. The grounding conductor shall be
Exception: Where proper support cannot be provided, the size of the permitted to be run either inside or outside the building.
grounding conductors shall be increased proportionately.
(h) Size. The grounding conductor shall not be smaller than 5.5 mm2
(d) Mechanical Protection. The grounding conductor shall be (2.6 mm dia.) copper, 8.0 mm2 (3.2 mm dia.) aluminum, or 0.90 mm2
protected where exposed to physical damage, or the size of the (1.1 mm dia.) copper-clad steel or bronze.
grounding conductors shall be increased proportionately to
compensate for the lack of protection. Where the grounding conductor (i) Common Ground. A single grounding conductor shall be
is run in a metal raceway, both ends of the raceway shall be bonded to permitted for both protective and operating purposes.
the grounding conductor or to the same terminal or electrode to which
the grounding conductor is connected. (j) Bonding of Electrodes. A bonding jumper not smaller than 14
mm2 copper or equivalent shall be connected between the radio and
(e) Run in Straight Line. The grounding conductor for an antenna television equipment grounding electrode and the power grounding
mast or antenna discharge unit shall be run in as straight a line as
electrode system at the building or structure served where separate conductors attached to buildings shall also comply with these
electrodes are used. requirements.

(k) Electrode Connection. Connections to grounding electrodes Exception: Where the lead-in conductors are enclosed in a continuous
shall comply with 2.50.3.21. metallic shield that is permanently and effectively grounded, they shall
not be required to comply with these requirements. Where grounded,
8.10.3 Amateur Transmitting and the metallic shield shall also be permitted to be used as a conductor.
Receiving Stations — Antenna Systems
8.10.3.5 Entrance to Building. Except where protected with a
8.10.3.1 Other Sections. In addition to complying with Part 8.10.3, continuous metallic shield that is permanently and effectively
antenna systems for amateur transmitting and receiving stations shall grounded, lead-in conductors for transmitting stations shall enter
also comply with 8.10.2.1 through 8.10.2.5. buildings by one of the following methods:

8.10.3.2 Size of Antenna. Antenna conductors for transmitting and (1) Through a rigid, noncombustible, nonabsorbent insulating tube
receiving stations shall be of a size not less than given in Table or bushing
8.10.3.2. (2) Through an opening provided for the purpose in which the
entrance conductors are firmly secured so as to provide a clearance of
Table 8.10.3.2 Size of Amateur Station at least 50 mm, or
Outdoor Antenna Conductors (3) Through a drilled window panel.
Minimum Size of Conductors
[mm2 (mm dia.)] 8.10.3.6 Protection Against Accidental Contact. Lead-in conductors
Material to radio transmitters shall be located or installed so as to make
Where Maximum Open Span Length Is
Less than 45 m Over 45 m accidental contact with them difficult.
Hard-drawn copper 2.0 (1.6) 5.5 (2.6)
Copper-clad steel, 2.0 (1.6) 3.5 (2.0) 8.10.3.7 Antenna Discharge Units — Transmitting Stations. Each
bronze, or other conductor of a lead-in for outdoor antennas shall be provided with an
high-strength antenna discharge unit or other suitable means that will drain static
material charges from the antenna system.

Exception No. 1: Where protected by a continuous metallic shield that

8.10.3.3 Size of Lead-in Conductors. Lead-in conductors for is permanently and effectively grounded.
transmitting stations shall, for various maximum span lengths, be of a
size at least as great as that of conductors for antennas as specified in Exception No. 2: Where the antenna is permanently and effectively
8.10.3.2. grounded.

8.10.3.4 Clearance on Building. Antenna conductors for transmitting 8.10.3.8 Grounding Conductors–Amateur Transmitting and
stations, attached to buildings, shall be firmly mounted at least 75 mm Receiving Stations. Grounding conductors shall comply with
clear of the surface of the building on nonabsorbent insulating 8.10.3.8(a) through 8.10.3.8(c).
supports, such as treated pins or brackets equipped with insulators
having not less than 75 mm creepage and airgap distances. Lead-in (a) Other Sections. All grounding conductors for amateur
transmitting and receiving stations shall comply with 8.10.2.11(a)
through 8.10.2.11(k). ARTICLE 8.20 — COMMUNITY ANTENNA TELEVISION
AND RADIO DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
(b) Size of Protective Grounding Conductor. The protective
grounding conductor for transmitting stations shall be as large as the FPN: Rules that are followed by a reference in brackets contain text that has been
extracted from NFPA 97-2003, Standard Glossary of Terms Relating to Chimneys,
lead-in, but not smaller than 5.5 mm2 (2.6 mm dia.) copper, bronze, or Vents, and Heat-Producing Appliances. Only editorial changes were made to the
copper-clad steel. extracted text to make it consistent with this Code

(c) Size of Operating Grounding Conductor. The operating 8.20.1 General

grounding conductor for transmitting stations shall not be less than
2.0 mm2 (1.6 mm dia.) copper or its equivalent. 8.20.1.1 Scope. This article covers coaxial cable distribution of radio
frequency signals typically employed in community antenna television
8.10.4 Interior Installation — Transmitting Stations (CATV) systems.

8.10.4.1 Clearance from Other Conductors. All conductors inside 8.20.1.2 Definitions. See Article 1.1. For the purposes of this article,
the building shall be separated at least 100 mm from the conductors of the following additional definitions apply.
any electric light, power, or signaling circuit.
Abandoned Coaxial Cable. Installed coaxial cable that is not
Exception No. 1: As provided in Article 6.40. terminated at equipment other than a coaxial connector and not
identified for future use with a tag.
Exception No. 2: Where separated from other conductors by raceway
or some firmly fixed nonconductor, such as porcelain tubes or flexible Air Duct. A conduit or passageway for conveying air to or from
tubing. heating, cooling, air conditioning, or ventilating equipment, but not
including the plenum. [NFPA 97:1.2.6]
8.10.4.2 General. Transmitters shall comply with 8.10.4.2(a) through
8.10.4.2(c). Exposed. An exposed cable is one that is in such a position that, in
case of failure of supports and insulation, contact with another circuit
(a) Enclosing. The transmitter shall be enclosed in a metal frame or could result.
grille, or separated from the operating space by a barrier or other
equivalent means, all metallic parts of which are effectively connected FPN: See Article 1.1 for two other definitions of Exposed.

to ground.
Point of Entrance. The point within a building at which the cable
(b) Grounding of Controls. All external metal handles and controls emerges from an external wall, from a concrete floor slab, or from a
accessible to the operating personnel shall be effectively grounded. rigid metal conduit or an intermediate metal conduit grounded to an
electrode in accordance with 8.20.4.1(b).
(c) Interlocks on Doors. All access doors shall be provided with
interlocks that will disconnect all voltages of over 350 volts between Premises. The land and buildings of a user located on the user side
conductors when any access door is opened. of utility-user network point of demarcation.

8.20.1.3 Other Articles. Circuits and equipment shall comply with

8.20.1.3(a) through 8.20.1.3(g).
 (a) Spread of Fire or Products of Combustion. Section 3.0.1.21 such a manner that the cable will not be damaged by normal building
shall apply. The accessible portion of abandoned coaxial cables shall use. Such cables shall be secured by straps, staples, hangers, or similar
be removed. fittings designed and installed so as not to damage the cable. The
installation shall also conform with 3.0.1.4(d) and 3.0.1.11.
(b) Ducts, Plenums, and Other Air-Handling Spaces. Section
3.0.1.22, where installed in ducts, plenums or other spaces used for FPN: Accepted industry practices are described in ANSI/NECA/BICSI 568–2001,
Standard for Installing Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling, and
environmental air shall apply. other ANSI-approved installation standards.

Exception: As permitted in 8.20.5.45(a). 8.20.2 Cables Outside and Entering Buildings

(c) Installation and Use. Section 1.10.1.3 shall apply. 8.20.2.1 Overhead Cables. Coaxial cables, prior to the point of
grounding, as defined in 8.20.3.1, shall comply with 8.20.2.1(a)
(d) Installations of Conductive and Nonconductive Optical Fiber through 8.20.2.1(f).
Cables. Article 7.70 shall apply.
(a) On Poles. Where practicable, conductors on poles shall be
(e) Communications Circuits. Article 8.0. located below the electric light, power, Class 1, or nonpower-limited
fire alarm circuit conductors and shall not be attached to a crossarm
(f) Network-Powered Broadband Communications Systems. that carries electric light or power conductors.
Article 8.30 shall apply.
(b) Lead-in Clearance. Lead-in or aerial-drop cables from a pole or
(g) Alternate Wiring Methods. The wiring methods of Article 8.30 other support, including the point of initial attachment to a building or
shall be permitted to substitute for the wiring methods of Article 8.20. structure, shall be kept away from electric light, power, Class 1, or
nonpower-limited fire alarm circuit conductors so as to avoid the
FPN: Use of Article 8.30 wiring methods will facilitate the upgrading of Article 8.20
installations to network-powered broadband applications.
possibility of accidental contact.

8.20.1.15 Energy Limitations. Coaxial cable shall be permitted to Exception: Where proximity to electric light, power, Class 1, or
deliver low-energy power to equipment that is directly associated with nonpower-limited fire alarm circuit service conductors cannot be
the radio frequency distribution system if the voltage is not over 60 avoided, the installation shall be such as to provide clearances of not
volts and if the current supply is from a transformer or other device less than 300 mm from light, power, Class 1, or nonpower-limited fire
that has energy-limiting characteristics. alarm circuit service drops. The clearance requirement shall apply at
all points along the drop, and it shall increase to 1 000 mm at the
8.20.1.21 Access to Electrical Equipment Behind Panels Designed pole.
to Allow Access. Access to electrical equipment shall not be denied by
an accumulation of wires and cables that prevents removal of panels, (c) On Masts. Aerial cable shall be permitted to be attached to an
including suspended ceiling panels. above-the-roof raceway mast that does not enclose or support
conductors of electric light or power circuits.
8.20.1.24 Mechanical Execution of Work. Community antenna
television and radio distribution systems shall be installed in a neat (d) Above Roofs. Cables shall have a vertical clearance of not less
and workmanlike manner. Cables installed exposed on the surface of than 2 400 mm from all points of roofs above which they pass.
ceiling and sidewalls shall be supported by the building structure in
Exception No. 1: Auxiliary buildings such as garages and the like.
Exception No. 2: A reduction in clearance above only the overhanging FPN: For additional information regarding overhead wires and cables, see ANSI
C2-2002, Philippine Electrical Code, Part 2, Safety Rules for Overhead Lines.
portion of the roof to not less than 450 mm shall be permitted if (1) not
more than 1 200 mm of communications service drop conductors pass
8.20.2.4 Underground Circuits Entering Buildings.
above the roof overhang, and (2) they are terminated at a raceway
mast or other approved support.
(a) Underground Systems. Underground coaxial cables in a duct,
pedestal, handhole enclosure, or manhole that contains electric light or
Exception No. 3: Where the roof has a slope of not less than 100 mm
power conductors or Class 1 circuits shall be in a section permanently
in 300 mm, a reduction in clearance to not less than 900 mm shall be
separated from such conductors by means of a suitable barrier.
permitted.
(b) Direct-Buried Cables and Raceways. Direct-buried coaxial
(e) Between Buildings. Cables extending between buildings and
cable shall be separated at least 300 mm from conductors of any light
also the supports or attachment fixtures shall be acceptable for the
or power or Class 1 circuit.
purpose and shall have sufficient strength to withstand the loads to
which they may be subjected.
Exception No. 1: Where electric service conductors or coaxial cables
are installed in raceways or have metal cable armor.
Exception: Where a cable does not have sufficient strength to be self-
supporting, it shall be attached to a supporting messenger cable that,
Exception No. 2: Where electric light or power branch-circuit or
together with the attachment fixtures or supports, shall be acceptable
feeder conductors or Class 1 circuit conductors are installed in a
for the purpose and shall have sufficient strength to withstand the
raceway or in metal-sheathed, metal-clad, or Type UF or Type USE
loads to which they may be subjected.
cables; or the coaxial cables have metal cable armor or are installed
in a raceway.
(f) On Buildings. Where attached to buildings, cables shall be
securely fastened in such a manner that they will be separated from
8.20.3 Protection
other conductors as follows.
8.20.3.1 Grounding of Outer Conductive Shield of a Coaxial
(1) Electric Light or Power. The coaxial cable shall have a
Cable. The outer conductive shield of the coaxial cable shall be
separation of at least 100 mm from electric light, power, Class 1, or
grounded at the building premises as close to the point of cable
nonpower-limited fire alarm circuit conductors not in raceway or
entrance or attachment as practicable.
cable, or be permanently separated from conductors of the other
For purposes of this section, grounding located at mobile home service
system by a continuous and firmly fixed nonconductor in addition to
equipment located in sight from and not more than 9 000 mm from the
the insulation on the wires.
exterior wall of the mobile home it serves, or at a mobile home
(2) Other Communications Systems. Coaxial cable shall be
disconnecting means grounded in accordance with 2.50.2.13 and
installed so that there will be no unnecessary interference in the
located in sight from and not more than 9 000 mm from the exterior
maintenance of the separate systems. In no case shall the conductors,
wall of the mobile home it serves, shall be considered to meet the
cables, messenger strand, or equipment of one system cause abrasion
requirements of this section.
to the conductors, cable, messenger strand, or equipment of any other
system. FPN: Selecting a grounding location to achieve the shortest practicable grounding
(3) Lightning Conductors. Where practicable, a separation of at conductor helps limit potential differences between CATV and other metallic
least 1 800mm shall be maintained between any coaxial cable and systems.

lightning conductors.
 (a) Shield Grounding. Where the outer conductive shield of a (5) Run in Straight Line. The grounding conductor shall be run
coaxial cable is grounded, no other protective devices shall be to the grounding electrode in as straight a line as practicable.
required. (6) Physical Protection. Where subject to physical damage, the
grounding conductor shall be adequately protected. Where the
(b) Shield Protection Devices. Grounding of a coaxial drop cable grounding conductor is run in a metal raceway, both ends of the
shield by means of a protective device that does not interrupt the raceway shall be bonded to the grounding conductor or the same
grounding system within the premises shall be permitted. terminal or electrode to which the grounding conductor is connected.

8.20.4 Grounding Methods (b) Electrode. The grounding conductor shall be connected as
follows.
8.20.4.1 Cable Grounding. Where required by 8.20.3.1, the shield of
the coaxial cable shall be grounded as specified in 8.20.4.1(a) through (1) In Buildings or Structures with Grounding Means. To the
8.20.4.1(d). nearest accessible location on the following:

(a) Grounding Conductor. a. The building or structure grounding electrode system as

covered in 2.50.3.1
(1) Insulation. The grounding conductor shall be insulated and b. The grounded interior metal water piping system, within
shall be listed as suitable for the purpose. 1 500 mm from its point of entrance to the building, as covered in
(2) Material. The grounding conductor shall be copper or other 2.50.3.3
corrosion-resistant conductive material, stranded or solid. c. The power service accessible means external to enclosures as
(3) Size. The grounding conductor shall not be smaller than covered in 2.50.5.5
2.0 mm2 (1.6 mm dia.). It shall have a current-carrying capacity d. The metallic power service raceway
approximately equal to that of the outer conductor of the coaxial cable. e. The service equipment enclosure
The grounding conductor shall not be required to exceed 14 mm2. f. The grounding electrode conductor or the grounding electrode
(4) Length. The grounding conductor shall be as short as conductor metal enclosure, or
practicable. In one- and two-family dwellings, the grounding g. To the grounding conductor or to the grounding electrode of a
conductor shall be as short as practicable, not to exceed 6 000 mm in building or structure disconnecting means that is grounded to an
length. electrode as covered in 2.50.2.13

FPN: Similar grounding conductor length limitations applied at apartment buildings (2) In Buildings or Structures Without Grounding Means. If the
and commercial buildings will help to reduce voltages that may be developed
between the building's power and communications systems during lightning building or structure served has no grounding means, as described in
events. 8.20.4.1(b)(1):

Exception: In one- and two-family dwellings where it is not a. To any one of the individual electrodes described in
practicable to achieve an overall maximum grounding conductor 2.50.3.3(a)(1), (a)(2), (a)(3), (a)(4); or,
length of 6 000mm, a separate ground as specified in 2.50.3.3(a)(5), b. If the building or structure served has no grounding means, as
(a)(6), or (a)(7) shall be used, the grounding conductor shall be described in 8.20.4.1(b)(1) or (b)(2)a, to an effectively grounded metal
grounded to the separate ground in accordance with 2.50.3.21, and structure or to any one of the individual electrodes described in
the separate ground bonded to the power grounding electrode system 2.50.3.3(a)(5), (a)(6), and (a)(7).
in accordance with 8.20.4.1(d).
 (c) Electrode Connection. Connections to grounding electrodes 8.20.5 Cables Within Buildings
shall comply with 2.50.3.21.
(d) Bonding of Electrodes. A bonding jumper not smaller than 14 8.20.5.1 Raceways for Coaxial Cables. Where coaxial cables are
mm2 copper or equivalent shall be connected between the community installed in a raceway, the raceway shall be either of a type permitted
antenna television systems grounding electrode and the power in Chapter 3 and installed in accordance with Chapter 3 or a listed
grounding electrode system at the building or structure served where nonmetallic raceway complying with 8.20.6.4(a), (b) or (c), as
separate electrodes are used. applicable, and installed in accordance with 3.62.2.15 through
3.62.2.47, where the requirements applicable to electrical nonmetallic
Exception: At mobile homes as covered in 8.20.4.7. tubing apply.

FPN No. 1: See 2.50.3.11 for use of air terminals (lightning rods). Exception No. 1: Conduit fill restrictions shall not apply.
FPN No. 2: Bonding together of all separate electrodes will limit potential
differences between them and between their associated wiring systems. 8.20.5.2 Installation and Marking of Coaxial Cables. Listed coaxial
cables shall be installed as wiring within buildings. Cables shall be
8.20.4.4 Equipment Grounding. Unpowered equipment and marked in accordance with Table 8.20.5.4. The cable voltage rating
enclosures or equipment powered by the coaxial cable shall be shall not be marked on the cable.
considered grounded where connected to the metallic cable shield.
FPN: Voltage markings on cables could be misinterpreted to suggest that the
cables may be suitable for Class 1, electric light, and power applications.
8.20.4.7 Bonding and Grounding at Mobile Homes.
Exception No. 1: Voltage markings shall be permitted where the cable
(a) Grounding. Where there is no mobile home service equipment
has multiple listings and voltage marking is required for one or more
located in sight from and not more than 9 000 mm from the exterior
of the listings.
wall of the mobile home it serves, or there is no mobile home
disconnecting means grounded in accordance with 2.50.2.13 and
Exception No. 2: Listing and marking shall not be required where the
located within sight from and not more than 9 000 mm from the
length of the cable within the building, measured from its point of
exterior wall of the mobile home it serves, the coaxial cable shield
entrance, does not exceed 15 m and the cable enters the building from
ground, or surge arrester ground, shall be in accordance with
the outside and is terminated at a grounding block.
8.20.4.1(b)(2) and (3).

(b) Bonding. The coaxial cable shield grounding terminal, surge

Table 8.20.5.4 Cable Markings
arrester grounding terminal, or grounding electrode shall be bonded to
the metal frame or available grounding terminal of the mobile home Cable
Type Reference
with a copper grounding conductor not smaller than 3.5 mm2 Marking
(2.0 mm dia.) under any of the following conditions: CATVP CATV plenum 8.20.6.1(a) and
cable 8.20.5.45(a)
(1) Where there is no mobile home service equipment or CATVR CATV riser cable 8.20.6.1(b) and
disconnecting means as in 8.20.4.7(a), or CATV CATV cable 8.20.5.45(b)
(2) Where the mobile home is supplied by cord and plug. CATVX CATV cable, 8.20.6.1(c) and
limited use 8.20.5.45(c)
8.20.6.1(d) and
8.20.5.45(c)
 distribution equipment. The power circuit conductors shall be routed
FPN No. 1: Cable type are listed in descending order of fire-resistance rating within the enclosure to maintain a minimum 6.0 mm separation from
FPN No. 2: See the referenced sections for listing requirements and permitted
uses. coaxial cables.

8.20.5.24 Installation of Cables and Equipment. Beyond the point (2) Other Applications. Coaxial cable shall be separated at least
of grounding, as defined in 8.20.3.1, the cable installation shall 50 mm from conductors of any electric light, power, Class 1,
comply with 8.20.5.24(a) through 8.20.5.24(c). nonpower-limited fire alarm, or medium power network-powered
broadband communications circuits.
(a) Separation from Other Conductors.
Exception No. 1: Where either (1) all of the conductors of electric
(1) In Raceways and Boxes. light, power, Class 1, nonpower-limited fire alarm, and medium power
network-powered broadband communications and circuits are in a
a. Other Circuits. Coaxial cables shall be permitted in the same raceway, or in metal-sheathed, metal-clad, nonmetallic-sheathed,
raceway or enclosure with jacketed cables of any of the following: Type AC, or Type UF cables, or (2) all of the coaxial cables are
encased in raceway.
1. Class 2 and Class 3 remote-control, signaling, and power-
limited circuits in compliance with Article 7.25 Exception No. 2: Where the coaxial cables are permanently separated
2. Power-limited fire alarm systems in compliance with from the conductors of electric light, power, Class 1, nonpower-
Article 7.60 limited fire alarm, and medium power network-powered broadband
3. Nonconductive and conductive optical fiber cables in communications circuits by a continuous and firmly fixed
compliance with Article 7.70 nonconductor, such as porcelain tubes or flexible tubing, in addition
4. Communications circuits in compliance with Article 8.0 to the insulation on the wire.
5. Low power network-powered broadband communications
circuits in compliance with Article 8.30 (b) Hybrid Power and Coaxial Cabling. The provisions of
7.80.1.6 shall apply for listed hybrid power and coaxial cabling in
b. Electric Light, Power, Class 1, Nonpower-Limited Fire closed-loop and programmed power distribution.
Alarm, and Medium Power Network-Powered Broadband
Communications Circuits. Coaxial cable shall not be placed in any (c) Support of Cables. Raceways shall be used for their intended
raceway, compartment, outlet box, junction box, or other enclosures purpose. Coaxial cables shall not be strapped, taped, or attached by
with conductors of electric light, power, Class 1, nonpower-limited any means to the exterior of any conduit or raceway as a means of
fire alarm, or medium power network-powered broadband support.
communications circuits.
Exception No. 1: Overhead (aerial) spans of coaxial cables shall be
Exception No. 1: Where all of the conductors of electric light, power, permitted to be attached to the exterior of a raceway-type mast
Class 1, nonpower-limited fire alarm, and medium power network- intended for the attachment and support of such cables.
powered broadband communications circuits are separated from all of
the coaxial cables by a permanent barrier or listed divider. 8.20.5.45 Applications of Listed CATV Cables and CATV
Raceways. CATV cables shall comply with 8.20.5.45(a) through
Exception No. 2: Power circuit conductors in outlet boxes, junction 8.20.5.45(d) or where cable substitutions are made as shown in Table
boxes, or similar fittings or compartments where such conductors are 8.20.5.45.
introduced solely for power supply to the coaxial cable system
 (a) Plenum. Cables installed in ducts, plenums, and other spaces
used for environmental air shall be Type CATVP. Abandoned cables (1) General. Type CATV shall be permitted. Listed CATV
shall not be permitted to remain. Types CATVP, CATVR, CATV, and general-purpose raceways shall be permitted. Only Types CATV,
CATVX cables installed in compliance with 3.0.1.22 shall be CATVX, CATVR, or CATVP cables shall be permitted to be installed
permitted. Listed plenum CATV raceways shall be permitted to be in general-purpose communications raceways.
installed in ducts and plenums as described in 3.0.1.22(b) and in other
spaces used for environmental air as described in 3.0.1.22(c). Only (2) In Raceways. Type CATVX shall be permitted to be installed
Type CATVP cable shall be permitted to be installed in these in raceway.
raceways.
(3) Nonconcealed Spaces. Type CATVX shall be permitted to be
FPN: See 8.14.1 of NFPA 13-2002, Installation of Sprinkler Systems, for installed in nonconcealed spaces where the exposed length of cable
requirements for sprinklers in concealed spaces containing exposed combustibles.
does not exceed 3 000 mm.
(b) Riser. Cables installed in risers shall comply with any of the
(4) One- and Two-Family Dwellings. Type CATVX cables that
requirements of the following:
are less than 10 mm in diameter shall be permitted to be installed in
one- and two-family dwellings.
(1) Cables in Vertical Runs. Cables installed in vertical runs and
penetrating more than one floor, or cables installed in vertical runs in a
(5) Multifamily Dwellings. Type CATVX cables that are less
shaft, shall be Type CATVR. Floor penetrations requiring Type
than 10 mm in diameter shall be permitted to be installed in
CATVR shall contain only cables suitable for riser or plenum use.
multifamily dwellings.
Abandoned cables shall not be permitted to remain. Listed riser CATV
raceways shall be permitted to be installed in vertical riser runs in a FPN No. 1: See Figure 8.20.5.45, Cable Substitution Hierarchy.
shaft from floor to floor. Only Type CATVR and CATVP cables shall
be permitted to be installed in these raceways. FPN No. 2: The substitute cables in Table 8.20.5.45 are only coaxial-type cables.

(2) Metal Raceways or Fireproof Shafts. Types CATV and

CATVX cables shall be permitted to be encased in a metal raceway or
located in a fireproof shaft having fire-stops at each floor.
Table 8.20.5.45 Coaxial Cable Uses and Permitted Substitutions
(3) One- and Two-Family Dwellings. Types CATV and CATVX Cable Type Permitted Substitution
cables shall be permitted in one- and two-family dwellings. CATVP CMP, BLP
CATVR CATVP, CMP, CMR, BMR, BLP, BLR
FPN: See 8.20.1.3(a) for the firestop requirements for floor penetrations. CATV CATVP, CMP, CATVR, CMR, CMG, CM,
BMR, BM, BLP, BLR, BL
(c) Cable Trays. Cables installed in cable trays shall be Types CATVX CATVP, CMP, CATVR, CMR, CATV,
CATVP, CATVR, and CATV. CMG, CM, BMR, BM, BLP, BLR, BL,
BLX
(d) Other Wiring Within Buildings. Cables installed in building
locations other than the locations covered in 8.20.5.45(a) and
8.20.5.45(b) shall be with any of the requirements in 8.20.5.45(d)(1)
through (d)(5). Abandoned cables in hollow spaces shall not be
permitted to remain.
 resistant characteristics capable of preventing the carrying of fire from
floor to floor.

FPN: One method of defining fire-resistant characteristics capable of preventing

the carrying of fire from floor to floor is that the cables pass the requirements of the
Standard Test for Flame Propagation Height of Electrical and Optical-Fiber Cable
Installed Vertically in Shafts, ANSI/UL 1666-2002.

(c) Type CATV. Type CATV community antenna television cable

shall be listed as being suitable for general purpose CATV use, with
the exception of risers and plenums, and shall also be listed as being
resistant to the spread of fire.

FPN: One method of defining resistant to the spread of fire is that the cables do not
spread fire to the top of the tray in the vertical-tray flame test in the Reference
Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables and Flexible Cords, ANSI/UL 1581-1991.
Another method of defining resistant to the spread of fire is for the damage (char
length) not to exceed 1 500 mm when performing the vertical flame test for cables
in cable trays, as described in Test Methods for Electrical Wires and Cables, CSA
C22.2 No. 0.3-M-1985.
Figure 8.20.5.45 Cable Substitution Hierarchy
(d) Type CATVX. Type CATVX limited-use community antenna
television cable shall be listed as being suitable for use in dwellings
and for use in raceway and shall also be listed as being resistant to
flame spread.
8.20.6 Listing Requirements
FPN: One method of determining that cable is resistant to flame spread is by
testing the cable to the VW-1 (vertical-wire) flame test in the Reference Standard
8.20.6.1 Coaxial Cables. Cables shall be listed in accordance with for Electrical Wires, Cables and Flexible Cords, ANSI/UL 1581-1991.
8.20.6.1(a) through 8.20.6.1(d).
8.20.6.4 CATV Raceways. CATV raceways shall be listed in
(a) Type CATVP. Type CATVP community antenna television accordance with 8.20.6.4(a) through 8.20.6.4(c).
plenum cable shall be listed as being suitable for use in ducts,
plenums, and other spaces used for environmental air and shall also be (a) Plenum CATV Raceways. Plenum CATV raceways shall be
listed as having adequate fire-resistant and low smoke-producing listed for use in other spaces used for environmental air and shall also
characteristics. be listed as having adequate fire-resistant and low smoke-producing
characteristics.
FPN: One method of defining low smoke-producing cable and fire-resistant cable is
that the cable exhibits a maximum peak optical density of 0.5 or less, an average
optical density of 0.15 or less, and a maximum flame spread distance of 1 500 mm FPN: One method of defining that an optical fiber raceway is a low smoke
or less when tested in accordance with NFPA 262, Standard Method of Test for producing raceway and a fire-resistant raceway is that the raceway exhibits a
Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for Use in Air Handling Spaces. maximum peak optical density of 0.5 or less, an average optical density of 0.15 or
less, and a maximum flame spread distance of 1 500 mm or less when tested in
accordance with the plenum test in Standard for Optical-Fiber Cable Raceway, UL
(b) Type CATVR. Type CATVR community antenna television 2024.
riser cable shall be listed as being suitable for use in a vertical run in a
shaft or from floor to floor and shall also be listed as having fire-
 (b) Riser CATV Raceways. Riser CATV raceways shall be listed that is not terminated at equipment other than a connector and not
for use in risers and shall also be listed as having adequate fire- identified for future use with a tag.
resistant characteristics capable of preventing the carrying of fire from
floor to floor. Block. A square or portion of a city, town, or village enclosed by
streets and including the alleys so enclosed, but not any street.
FPN: One method of defining fire-resistant characteristics capable of preventing
the carrying of fire from floor to floor is that the raceways pass the requirements of
the Test for Flame Propagation (Riser) in Standard for Optical-Fiber Cable Exposed to Accidental Contact with Electrical Light or Power
Raceway, UL 2024. Conductors. The circuit is in such a position that, in case of failure of
supports or insulation, contact with another circuit may result.
(c) General-Purpose CATV Raceways. General purpose CATV
raceways shall be listed suitable for general-purpose use and shall also Fault Protection Device. An electronic device intended for the
be listed as being resistant to the spread of fire. protection of personnel and functions under fault conditions, such as
network-powered broadband communications cable short or open
FPN: One method of defining resistance to the spread of fire is that the raceway circuit, to limit the current or voltage, or both, for a low power
pass the requirements of the Vertical-Tray Flame Test (General Use) in Standard
for Optical-Fiber Cable Raceway, UL 2024. network-powered broadband communications circuit and provide
acceptable protection from electric shock.

ARTICLE 8.30 — NETWORK-POWERED BROADBAND Network Interface Unit (NIU). A device that converts a broadband
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS signal into component voice, audio, video, data, and interactive
services signals. The NIU provides isolation between the network
8.30.1 General power and the premises signal circuits. The NIU may also contain
primary and secondary protectors.
8.30.1.1 Scope. This article covers network-powered broadband
communications systems that provide any combination of voice, Network-Powered Broadband Communications Circuit. The
audio, video, data, and interactive services through a network interface circuit extending from the communications utility’s serving terminal
unit. or tap up to and including the NIU.

FPN No. 1: A typical basic system configuration includes a cable supplying power FPN: A typical single-family network-powered communications circuit consists of a
and broadband signal to a network interface unit that converts the broadband communications drop or communications service cable and an NIU, and includes
signal to the component signals. Typical cables are coaxial cable with both the communications utility’s serving terminal or tap where it is not under the
broadband signal and power on the center conductor, composite metallic cable exclusive control of the communications utility.
with a coaxial member for the broadband signal and a twisted pair for power, and
composite optical fiber cable with a pair of conductors for power. Larger systems
may also include network components such as amplifiers that require network
Point of Entrance. The point within a building at which the cable
power. emerges from an external wall, from a concrete floor slab, or from a
rigid metal conduit or an intermediate metal conduit grounded to an
FPN No. 2: See Introduction for installations of broadband communications
systems that are not covered. electrode in accordance with 8.30.4.1(b).

8.30.1.2 Definitions. See Article 1.1. For purposes of this article, the Premises Wiring. The circuits located on the user side of the
following additional definitions apply. network interface unit.

Abandoned Network-Powered Broadband Communications 8.30.1.3 Other Articles. Circuits and equipment shall comply with
Cable. Installed network-powered broadband communications cable 8.30.1.3(a) through 8.30.1.3(e).
 an accumulation of wires and cables that prevent removal of panels,
(a) Spread of Fire or Products of Combustion. Section 3.0.1.21 including suspended ceiling panels.
shall apply. The accessible portion of abandoned network-powered
broadband communications cables shall be removed.
Table 8.30.1.15 Limitations for Network-Powered Broadband
(b) Ducts, Plenums, and Other Air-Handling Spaces. Section Communications Systems
3.0.1.22 shall apply, where installed in ducts, plenums or other spaces Network Power Source Low Medium
used for environmental air. Circuit voltage, Vmax (volts)1 0 – 100 0-150
Power limitation, VAmax (volt-amperes)1 250 250
Exception: As permitted in 8.30.5.22(b). 1
Current limitations, Imax (amperes) 1 000/ Vmax 1 000/ Vmax
Maximum power rating (volt-amperes) 100 100
(c) Equipment in Other Space Used for Environmental Air. Maximum voltage rating (volts) 100 150
Section 3.0.1.22(c) shall apply. Maximum overcurrent protection 100/ Vmax NA
(amperes) 2
(d) Output Circuits. As appropriate for the services provided, the 1
Vmax, Imax, and VAmax are determined with the current-limiting impedance in the
output circuits derived from the network interface unit shall comply circuit (not bypassed) as follows:
with the requirements of the following: Vmax — Maximum system voltage regardless of load with rated input applied.
imax — Maximum system current under any noncapacitive load, including short
circuit, and with overcurrent protection bypassed if used. Imax limits apply after 1
(1) Installations of communications circuits — Article 8.0 minute of operation.
(2) Installations of community antenna television and radio VAmax — Maximum volt-ampere output after 1 minute of operation regardless of
distribution circuits — Article 8.20 load and overcurrent protection bypassed if used.
2
Overcurrent protection is not required where the current-limiting device provides
equivalent current limitation and the current-limiting device does not reset until power
Exception: 8.30.3.1(b)(3) shall apply where protection is provided in or the load is removed.
the output of the NIU.

(3) Installations of optical fiber cables — Article 7.70

(4) Installations of Class 2 and Class 3 circuits — Article 7.25 8.30.1.24 Mechanical Execution of Work. Network-powered
(5) Installations of power-limited fire alarm circuits—Article 7.60 broadband communications circuits and equipment shall be installed in
a neat and workmanlike manner. Cables installed exposed on the
(e) Hazardous (Classified) Locations. Network-powered surface of ceilings and sidewalls shall be supported by the building
broadband communications circuits and equipment installed in a structure in such a manner that the cable will not be damaged by
location that is classified in accordance with Article 5.0 shall comply normal building use. Such cables shall be secured by straps, staples,
with the applicable requirements of Chapter 5. hangers, or similar fittings designed and installed so as not to damage
the cable. The installation shall also conform with 3.0.1.4(d) and
8.30.1.15 Power Limitations. Network-powered broadband 3.0.1.11.
communications systems shall be classified as having low or medium
power sources as defined in Table 8.30.1.15. FPN: Accepted industry practices are described in ANSI/NECA/BICSI 568–2001,
Standard for Installing Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling, and
other ANSI-approved installation standards.
8.30.1.21 Access to Electrical Equipment Behind Panels Designed
to Allow Access. Access to electrical equipment shall not be denied by
 8.30.2 Cables Outside and Entering Buildings (c) Lead-in Clearance. Lead-in or aerial-drop network-powered
broadband communications cables from a pole or other support,
8.30.2.1 Entrance Cables. Cables installed outdoors shall be listed as including the point of initial attachment to a building or structure, shall
suitable for the application. In addition, network-powered broadband be kept away from electric light, power, Class 1, or non-power-limited
communications cables located outside and entering buildings shall fire alarm circuit conductors so as to avoid the possibility of accidental
comply with 8.30.2.1(a) and 8.30.2.1(b). contact.

(a) Medium Power Circuits. Medium power network-powered Exception: Where proximity to electric light, power, Class 1, or non-
broadband communications circuits located outside and entering power-limited fire alarm circuit service conductors cannot be avoided,
buildings shall be installed using Type BMU, Type BM, or Type BMR the installation shall be such as to provide clearances of not less than
network-powered broadband communications medium power cables. 300 mm from light, power, Class 1, or non-power-limited fire alarm
circuit service drops. The clearance requirement shall apply to all
(b) Low Power Circuits. Low power network-powered broadband points along the drop, and it shall increase to 1 000 mm at the pole.
communications circuits located outside and entering buildings shall
be installed using Type BLU or Type BLX low power network- (d) Clearance from Ground. Overhead spans of network-powered
powered broadband communications cables. Cables shown in Table broadband communication cables shall conform to not less than the
8.30.5.1 shall be permitted to substitute. following:

Exception: Outdoor community antenna television and radio (1) 2 900 mm — above finished grade, sidewalks, or from any
distribution system coaxial cables installed prior to January 1, 2000, platform or projection from which they might be reached and
and installed in accordance with Article 8.20, shall be permitted for accessible to pedestrians only
low-power type, network-powered broadband communications
circuits. (2) 3 500 mm — over residential property and driveways, and
those commercial areas not subject to truck traffic
8.30.2.5 Aerial Cables. Aerial network-powered broadband
communications cables shall comply with 8.30.2.5(a) through (3) 4 700 mm — over public streets, alleys, roads, parking areas
8.30.2.5(i). subject to truck traffic, driveways on other than residential property,
and other land traversed by vehicles such as cultivated, grazing, forest,
FPN: For additional information regarding overhead wires and cables, see ANSI and orchard
C2-2002, Philippine Electrical Code, Part 2, Safety Rules For Overhead Lines.

FPN: These clearances have been specifically chosen to correlate with the latest
(a) On Poles. Where practicable, network-powered broadband edition of the Philippine Electrical Code, Part 2, which provides for clearances of
communications cables on poles shall be located below the electric wires, conductors, and cables above ground and roadways, rather than using the
clearances referenced in 2.25.1.18. Because Article 8.0 and Article 8.20 have had
light, power, Class 1, or non-power-limited fire alarm circuit no required clearances, the communications industry has used the clearances
conductors and shall not be attached to a crossarm that carries electric from the PEC 2 for their installed cable plant.
light or power conductors.
(e) Over Pools. Clearance of network-powered broadband
(b) Climbing Space. The climbing space through network-powered communications cable in any direction from the water level, edge of
broadband communications cables shall comply with the requirements pool, base of diving platform, or anchored raft shall comply with those
of 2.25.1.14(d). clearances in 6.80.1.8.

(f) Above Roofs. Network-powered broadband communications

cables shall have a vertical clearance of not less than 2 400 mm from may be subjected.
all points of roofs above which they pass.
(i) On Buildings. Where attached to buildings, network-powered
Exception No. 1: Auxiliary buildings such as garages and the like. broadband communications cables shall be securely fastened in such a
manner that they will be separated from other conductors in
Exception No. 2: A reduction in clearance above only the overhanging accordance with 8.30.2.5(i)(1) through (i)(4).
portion of the roof to not less than 450 mm shall be permitted if (1) not
more than 1 200 mm of the broadband communications drop cables (1) Electric Light or Power. The network-powered broadband
pass above the roof overhang, and (2) they are terminated at a communications cable shall have a separation of at least 100 mm from
through-the-roof raceway or support. electric light, power, Class 1, or non-power-limited fire alarm circuit
conductors not in raceway or cable, or be permanently separated from
Exception No. 3: Where the roof has a slope of not less than 100 mm conductors of the other system by a continuous and firmly fixed
in 300 mm, a reduction in clearance to not less than 900 mm shall be nonconductor in addition to the insulation on the wires.
permitted.
(2) Other Communications Systems. Network-powered
(g) Final Spans. Final spans of network-powered broadband broadband communications cables shall be installed so that there will
communications cables without an outer jacket shall be permitted to be be no unnecessary interference in the maintenance of the separate
attached to the building, but they shall be kept not less than 900 mm systems. In no case shall the conductors, cables, messenger strand, or
from windows that are designed to be opened, doors, porches, equipment of one system cause abrasion to the conductors, cables,
balconies, ladders, stairs, fire escapes, or similar locations. messenger strand, or equipment of any other system.

Exception: Conductors run above the top level of a window shall be (3) Lightning Conductors. Where practicable, a separation of at
permitted to be less than 900 mm requirement above. least 1 800 mm shall be maintained between any network-powered
broadband communications cable and lightning conductors.
Overhead network-powered broadband communications cables shall
not be installed beneath openings through which materials may be (4) Protection from Damage. Network-powered broadband
moved, such as openings in farm and commercial buildings, and shall communications cables attached to buildings and located within 2 400
not be installed where they will obstruct entrance to these building mm of finished grade shall be protected by enclosures, raceways, or
openings. other approved means.

(h) Between Buildings. Network-powered broadband Exception: A low power network-powered broadband communications
communications cables extending between buildings and also the circuit that is equipped with a listed fault protection device,
supports or attachment fixtures shall be acceptable for the purpose and appropriate to the network-powered broadband communications cable
shall have sufficient strength to withstand the loads to which they may used, and located on the network side of the network-powered
be subjected. broadband communications cable being protected.

Exception: Where a network-powered broadband communications 8.30.2.8 Underground Circuits Entering Buildings.
cable does not have sufficient strength to be self-supporting, it shall be
attached to a supporting messenger cable that, together with the (a) Underground Systems. Underground network-powered
attachment fixtures or supports, shall be acceptable for the purpose broadband communications cables in a duct, pedestal, handhole
and shall have sufficient strength to withstand the loads to which they enclosure, or manhole that contains electric light, power conductors,
non-power-limited fire alarm circuit conductors, or Class 1 circuits
shall be in a section permanently separated from such conductors by
means of a suitable barrier.

(b) Direct-Buried Cables and Raceways. Direct-buried network-

powered broadband communications cables shall be separated at least
300 mm from conductors of any light, power, non-power-limited fire
alarm circuit conductors or Class 1 circuit.

Exception No. 1: Where electric service conductors or network-

powered broadband communications cables are installed in raceways
or have metal cable armor.

Exception No. 2: Where electric light or power branch-circuit or

feeder conductors, nonpower-limited fire alarm circuit conductors, or
Class 1 circuit conductors are installed in a raceway or in metal-
sheathed, metal-clad, or Type UF or Type USE cables; or the
network-powered broadband communications cables have metal cable
armor or are installed in a raceway.

(c) Mechanical Protection. Direct-buried cable, conduit, or other

raceways shall be installed to meet the minimum cover requirements
of Table 8.30.2.8. In addition, direct-buried cables emerging from the
ground shall be protected by enclosures, raceways, or other approved
means extending from the minimum cover distance required by Table
8.30.2.8 below grade to a point at least 2 400 mm above finished
grade. In no case shall the protection be required to exceed 450 mm
below finished grade. Type BMU and BLU direct-buried cables
emerging from the ground shall be installed in rigid metal conduit,
intermediate metal conduit, rigid nonmetallic conduit, or other
approved means extending from the minimum cover distance required
by Table 8.30.2.8 below grade to the point of entrance.

Exception: A low power network-powered broadband communications

circuit that is equipped with a listed fault protection device,
appropriate to the network-powered broadband communications cable
used, and located on the network side of the network-powered
broadband communications cable being protected.
Table 8.30.2.8 Network-Powered Broadband Communications Systems Minimum Cover Requirements, Burial
in Millimetres (Cover is the shortest distance measured between a point on the top surface of any direct-buried
cable, conduit, or other raceway and the top surface of finished grade, concrete, or similar cover.)
Rigid Metal Nonmetallic Raceways
Conduit or Listed or Direct Burial;
Direct Intermediate Without Concrete
Location of Wiring Method or Circuit
Burial Metal Encasement or Other
Cables Conduit Approved Raceways
(mm) (mm) (mm)
All locations not specified below 450 150 300
In trench below 50 mm thick concrete or equivalent 300 150 150
Under a building (in raceways only) 0 0 0
Under minimum of 100 mm thick concrete exterior slab 300 100 100
with no vehicular traffic and the slab extending not
less than 150 mm beyond the underground installation
One- and two-family dwelling driveways and outdoor 300 300 300
parking areas and used only for dwelling related
purposes
Notes:
1. Raceways approved for burial only where concrete encased shall require a concrete envelope not less than 50 mm thick.
2. Lesser depths shall be permitted where cables rise for terminations or splices or where access is otherwise required.
3. Where solid rock is encountered, all wiring shall be installed in metal or nonmetallic raceway permitted for direct burial. The raceways shall
be covered by a minimum of 50 mm of concrete extending down to rock.
4. Low power network-powered broadband communications circuits using directly buried community antenna television and radio distribution
system coaxial cables that were installed outside and entering buildings prior to January 1, 2000, in accordance with Article 8.20 shall be
permitted where buried to a minimum depth of 300 mm.
 (d) Pools. Cables located under the pool or within the area connected between each conductor to be protected and ground, a fuse
extending 1 500 mm horizontally from the inside wall of the pool shall in series with each conductor to be protected, and an appropriate
meet those clearances and requirements specified in 6.80.1.10. mounting arrangement. Fused primary protector terminals shall be
marked to indicate line, instrument, and ground, as applicable.
8.30.3 Protection
(b) Location. The location of the primary protector, where required,
8.30.3.1 Primary Electrical Protection. shall comply with (b)(1), (b)(2), or (b)(3).

(a) Application. Primary electrical protection shall be provided on (1) A listed primary protector shall be applied on each network-
all network-powered broadband communications conductors that are powered broadband communications cable external to and on the
neither grounded nor interrupted and are run partly or entirely in aerial network side of the network interface unit.
cable not confined within a block. Also, primary electrical protection (2) The primary protector function shall be an integral part of and
shall be provided on all aerial or underground network-powered contained in the network interface unit. . The network interface unit
broadband communications conductors that are neither grounded nor shall be listed as being suitable for application with network-powered
interrupted and are located within the block containing the building broadband communications systems and shall have an external
served so as to be exposed to lightning or accidental contact with marking indicating that it contains primary electrical protection.
electric light or power conductors operating at over 300 volts to (3) The primary protector(s) shall be provided on the derived
ground circuit(s) (output side of the NIU), and the combination of the NIU
and the protector(s) shall be listed as being suitable for application
Exception: Where electrical protection is provided on the derived with network-powered broadband communications systems.
circuit(s) (output side of the NIU) in accordance with 8.30.3.1(b)(3).
A primary protector, whether provided integrally or external to the
FPN No. 1: On network-powered broadband communications conductors not network interface unit, shall be located as close as practicable to the
exposed to lightning or accidental contact with power conductors, providing
primary electrical protection in accordance with this article will help protect against point of entrance.
other hazards, such as ground potential rise caused by power fault currents, and For purposes of this section, a network interface unit and any
above-normal voltages induced by fault currents on power circuits in proximity to externally provided primary protectors located at mobile home service
the network-powered broadband communications conductors.
equipment located in sight from and not more than 9 000 mm from the
FPN No. 2: Network-powered broadband communications circuits are considered exterior wall of the mobile home it serves, or at a mobile home
to have a lightning exposure unless one or more of the following conditions exist.
disconnecting means grounded in accordance with 2.50.2.13 and
(1) Circuits in large metropolitan areas where buildings are close together and located in sight from and not more than 9 000 mm from the exterior
sufficiently high to intercept lightning. wall of the mobile home it serves, shall be considered to meet the
(2) Areas having an average of five or fewer thunderstorm days per year and
earth resistivity of less than 100 ohm-metres. requirements of this section.

FPN: Selecting a network interface unit and primary protector location to achieve
(1) Fuseless Primary Protectors. Fuseless-type primary the shortest practicable primary protector grounding conductor helps limit potential
protectors shall be permitted where power fault currents on all differences between communications circuits and other metallic systems.
protected conductors in the cable are safely limited to a value no
greater than the current-carrying capacity of the primary protector and (c) Hazardous (Classified) Locations. The primary protector or
of the primary protector grounding conductor. equipment providing the primary protection function shall not be
(2) Fused Primary Protectors. Where the requirements listed located in any hazardous (classified) location as defined in Article 5.0
under 8.30.3.1(a)(1) are not met, fused-type primary protectors shall or in the vicinity of easily ignitable material.
be used. Fused-type primary protectors shall consist of an arrester
Exception: As permitted in 5.1.3.51, 5.2.3.51, and 5.3.3.51. protected conductor(s) of the network-powered broadband
communications cable. The grounding conductor shall not be required
8.30.3.4 Grounding or Interruption of Metallic Members of to exceed 14 mm2.
Network-Powered Broadband Communications Cables. The (4) Length. The grounding conductor shall be as short as
shields of network-powered broadband communications cables used practicable. In one-family and multifamily dwellings, the grounding
for communications or powering shall be grounded at the building as conductor shall be as short as permissible, not to exceed 6 000 mm in
close as practicable to the point of entrance or attachment of the NIU. length.
Metallic cable members not used for communications or powering
shall be grounded or interrupted by an insulating joint or equivalent FPN: Similar grounding conductor length limitations applied at apartment buildings
and commercial buildings will help to reduce voltages that may be developed
device as close as practicable to the point of entrance or attachment of between the building's power and communications systems during lightning
the NIU. events.
For purposes of this section, grounding or interruption of network-
powered broadband communications cable metallic members installed Exception: In one- and two-family dwellings where it is not
at mobile home service equipment located in sight from and no more practicable to achieve an overall maximum grounding conductor
than 9 000 mm from the exterior wall of the mobile home it serves, or length of 6 000 mm, a separate communications ground rod meeting
at a mobile home disconnecting means grounded in accordance with the minimum dimensional criteria of 8.30.4.1(b)(2)b shall be driven,
2.50.2.13 and located in sight from and not more than 9 000 mm from and the grounding conductor shall be connected to the
the exterior wall of the mobile home it serves, shall be considered to communications ground rod in accordance with 8.30.4.1(c). The
meet the requirements of this section. communications ground rod shall be bonded to the power grounding
electrode system in accordance with 8.30.4.1(d).
FPN: Selecting a grounding location to achieve the shortest practicable grounding
conductor helps limit potential differences between the network-powered
broadband communications circuits and other metallic systems.
(5) Run in Straight Line. The grounding conductor shall be run
to the grounding electrode in as straight a line as practicable.
8.30.4 Grounding Methods (6) Physical Protection. Where subject to physical damage, the
grounding conductor shall be adequately protected. Where the
8.30.4.1 Cable, Network Interface Unit, and Primary Protector grounding conductor is run in a metal raceway, both ends of the
Grounding. Network interface units containing protectors, NIUs with raceway shall be bonded to the grounding conductor or the same
metallic enclosures, primary protectors, and the metallic members of terminal or electrode to which the grounding conductor is connected.
the network-powered broadband communications cable that are
intended to be grounded shall be grounded as specified in 8.30.4.1(a) (b) Electrode. The grounding conductor shall be connected as
through 8.30.4.1(d). follows.

(a) Grounding Conductor. (1) In Buildings or Structures with Grounding Means. To the
nearest accessible location on the following:
(1) Insulation. The grounding conductor shall be insulated and
shall be listed as suitable for the purpose. a. The building or structure grounding electrode system as
(2) Material. The grounding conductor shall be copper or other covered in 2.50.3.1
corrosion-resistant conductive material, stranded or solid. b. The grounded interior metal water piping system, within
(3) Size. The grounding conductor shall not be smaller than 1 500 mm from its point of entrance to the building, as covered in
2.0 mm2 (1.6 mm dia.), and shall have a current-carrying capacity 2.50.3.1
approximately equal to that of the grounded metallic member(s) and c. The power service accessible means external to enclosures as
covered in 2.50.5.5
d. The metallic power service raceway Exception: At mobile homes as covered in 8.30.4.2.
e. The service equipment enclosure
f. The grounding electrode conductor or the grounding electrode FPN No. 1: See 2.50.3.11 for use of lightning rods.
conductor metal enclosure, or FPN No. 2: Bonding together of all separate electrodes limits potential differences
g. To the grounding conductor or to the grounding electrode of a between them and between their associated wiring systems.
building or structure disconnecting means that is grounded to an
electrode as covered in 2.50.2.13 8.30.4.2 Bonding and Grounding at Mobile Homes.

For purposes of this section, the mobile home service equipment (a) Grounding. Where there is no mobile home service equipment
or the mobile home disconnecting means, as described in 8.30.3.4, located in sight from and not more than 9 000 mm from the exterior
shall be considered accessible. wall of the mobile home it serves, or there is no mobile home
disconnecting means grounded in accordance with 2.50.2.13 and
(2) In Buildings or Structures Without Grounding Means. If located within sight from and not more than 9 000 mm from the
the building or structure served has no grounding means, as described exterior wall of the mobile home it serves, the network-powered
in (b)(1), the grounding conductor shall be connected to either of the broadband communications cable, network interface unit, and primary
following: protector ground, shall be installed in accordance with 8.30.4.1(b)(2).
a. To any one of the individual electrodes described in
2.50.3.3(a)(1), (a)(2), (a)(3), or (a)(4) (b) Bonding. The network-powered broadband communications
b. If the building or structure served has no grounding means, as cable grounding terminal, network interface unit grounding terminal, if
described in 8.30.4.1(b)(1) or (b)(2)a, to an effectively grounded metal present, and primary protector grounding terminal shall be bonded
structure or to a ground rod or pipe not less than 1 500 mm in length together with a copper bonding conductor not smaller than 3.5 mm2
and 13 mm in diameter, driven, where practicable, into permanently (2.0 mm dia.). The network-powered broadband communications
damp earth and separated from lightning conductors as covered in cable grounding terminal, network interface unit grounding terminal,
8.0.2.10 and at least 1 800 mm from electrodes of other systems. primary protector grounding terminal, or the grounding electrode shall
Steam or hot water pipes or lightning-rod conductors shall not be be bonded to the metal frame or available grounding terminal of the
employed as electrodes for protectors, NIUs with integral protection, mobile home with a copper bonding conductor not smaller than
grounded metallic members, NIUs with metallic enclosures, and other 3.5 mm2 (2.0 mm dia.) under any of the following conditions:
equipment.
(1) Where there is no mobile home service equipment or
(c) Electrode Connection. Connections to grounding electrodes disconnecting means as in 8.30.4.2(a), or
shall comply with Section 2.50.3.21. Connectors, clamps, fittings, or (2) Where the mobile home is supplied by cord and plug
lugs used to attach grounding conductors and bonding jumpers to
grounding electrodes or to each other that are to be concrete encased
or buried in the earth shall be suitable for its application. 8.30.5 Wiring Methods Within Buildings

(d) Bonding of Electrodes. A bonding jumper not smaller than 14 8.30.5.1 Installation of Network-Powered Broadband
mm2 copper or equivalent shall be connected between the network- Communications Cables and Equipment. Cable and equipment
powered broadband communications system grounding electrode and installations within buildings shall comply with 8.30.5.1(a) through
the power grounding electrode system at the building or structure 8.30.5.1(d), as applicable.
served where separate electrodes are used.
 (a) Separation of Conductors. communications cable shall not be placed in any raceway,
compartment, outlet box, junction box, or similar fittings with
(1) In Raceways and Enclosures. conductors of electric light, power, Class 1, or nonpower-limited fire
alarm circuit cables.
a. Low and Medium Power Network-Powered Broadband
Communications Circuit Cables. Low and medium power network- Exception No. 1: Where all of the conductors of electric light, power,
powered broadband communications cables shall be permitted in the Class 1, non-power-limited fire alarm circuits are separated from all
same raceway or enclosure. of the network-powered broadband communications cables by a
b. Low Power Network-Powered Broadband Communications permanent barrier or listed divider.
Circuit Cables. Low power network-powered broadband
communications cables shall be permitted in the same raceway or Exception No. 2: Power circuit conductors in outlet boxes, junction
enclosure with jacketed cables of any of the circuits shown below: boxes, or similar fittings or compartments where such conductors are
introduced solely for power supply to the network-powered broadband
1. Class 2 and Class 3 remote-control, signaling, and power- communications system distribution equipment. The power circuit
limited circuits in compliance with Article 7.25 conductors shall be routed within the enclosure to maintain a
2. Power-limited fire alarm systems in compliance with minimum 6-mm separation from network-powered broadband
Article 7.60 communications cables.
3. Communications circuits in compliance with Article 8.0
4. Nonconductive and conductive optical fiber cables in (2) Other Applications. Network-powered broadband
compliance with Article 7.70 communications cable shall be separated at least 50 mm from
5. Community antenna television and radio distribution conductors of any electric light, power, Class 1, and non-power-
systems in compliance with Article 8.20 limited fire alarm circuits.

c. Medium Power Network-Powered Broadband Exception No. 1: Where either (1) all of the conductors of electric
Communications Circuit Cables. Medium power network-powered light, power, Class 1, and non-power-limited fire alarm circuits are in
broadband communications cables shall not be permitted in the same a raceway, or in metal-sheathed, metal-clad, nonmetallic-sheathed,
raceway or enclosure with conductors of any of the circuits shown Type AC, or Type UF cables, or (2) all of the network-powered
below: broadband communications cables are encased in raceway.

1. Class 2 and Class 3 remote-control, signaling, and power- Exception No. 2: Where the network-powered broadband
limited circuits in compliance with Article 7.25 communications cables are permanently separated from the
2. Power-limited fire alarm systems in compliance with conductors of electric light, power, Class 1, and non-power-limited
Article 7.60 fire alarm circuits by a continuous and firmly fixed nonconductor,
3. Communications circuits in compliance with Article 8.0 such as porcelain tubes or flexible tubing, in addition to the insulation
4. Conductive optical fiber cables in compliance with Article on the wire.
7.70
5. Community antenna television and radio distribution (b) Support of Conductors. Raceways shall be used for their
systems in compliance with Article 8.20 intended purpose. Network-powered broadband communications
cables shall not be strapped, taped, or attached by any means to the
d. Electric Light, Power, Class 1, Non–Powered Broadband exterior of any conduit or raceway as a means of support.
Communications Circuit Cables. Network-powered broadband
 (c) Cable Substitutions. The substitutions for network-powered
broadband cables listed in Table 8.30.5.1 shall be permitted. All cables Exception: Type BMU cable where the cable enters the building from
in Table 8.30.5.1, other than network-powered broadband cables, shall the outside and is run in rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal
be coaxial cables. conduit, and such conduits are grounded to an electrode in
accordance with 8.30.4.1(b).

Table 8.30.5.1 Cable Substitutions 8.30.5.22 Low Power Network-Powered Broadband

Cable Communications System Wiring Methods. Low power network-
Permitted Cable Substitutions powered broadband communications systems shall comply with any of
Type
BM BMR the requirements of 8.30.5.22(a) through 8.30.5.22(d).
BLP CMP, CL3P
BLR CMP, CL3P, CMR, CL3R, BLP, BMR (a) In Buildings. Low-power network-powered broadband
BL CMP, CMR, CM, CMG, CL3P, CL3R, CL3, BMR, BM, communications systems shall be installed within buildings using
BLP, BLR listed Type BLX, Type BL, Type BLR, or Type BLP network-
BLX CMP, CMR, CM, CMG, CMX, CL3P, CL3R, CL3, powered broadband communications low-power cables.
CL3X, BMR, BM, BLP, BRP, BL
(b) Ducts, Plenums, and Other Air-Handling Spaces. Cables
installed in ducts, plenums, and other spaces used for environmental
(d) Installation and Use. Section 1.10.1.3(b) shall apply. air shall be Type BLP. Type BLX cable installed in compliance with
3.0.1.22.
8.30.5.19 Medium Power Network-Powered Broadband
Communications System Wiring Methods. Medium power network- (c) Riser. Cables installed in risers shall comply with any of the
powered broadband communications systems shall be installed within requirements in 8.30.5.22(c)(1), (c)(2), or (c)(3).
buildings using listed Type BM or Type BMR, network-powered
broadband communications medium power cables. (1) Cables in Vertical Runs. Cables installed in vertical runs and
penetrating more than one floor, or cables installed in vertical runs in a
(a) Ducts, Plenums, and Other Air-Handling Spaces. Section shaft, shall be Type BLP, BLR or BMR. Floor penetrations requiring
3.0.1.22 shall apply. Type BMR or BLR shall contain only cables suitable for riser or
plenum use.
(b) Riser. Cables installed in vertical runs and penetrating more than (2) Metal Raceways or Fireproof Shafts. Type BLX cables shall
one floor, or cables installed in vertical runs in a shaft, shall be Type be permitted to be encased in a metal raceway or located in a fireproof
BMR. Floor penetrations requiring Type BMR shall contain only shaft having firestops at each floor.
cables suitable for riser or plenum use. (3) One- and Two-Family Dwellings. Type BLX or BL cables
less than 10 mm in diameter shall be permitted in one- and two-family
Exception No. 1: Type BM cables encased in metal raceway or located dwellings.
in a fireproof shaft that has firestops at each floor.
(d) Other Wiring. Cables installed in locations other than the
Exception No. 2: Type BM cables in one- and two-family dwellings. locations covered in 8.30.5.22(a), (b) and (c) shall comply with the
requirements of 8.30.5.22(d)(1) through (d)(5).
(c) Other Wiring. Cables installed in locations other than the
locations covered in 8.30.5.19(a) and 8.30.5.19(b) shall be Type BM. (1) General. Type BLP, BL, or BM shall be permitted.
 with Article 8.20 and are used for low power network-powered
(2) In Raceways. Type BLX shall be permitted to be installed in a broadband communications circuits.
raceway.
Exception No. 2: Substitute cables for network-powered broadband
(3) Type BLU Cable. Type BLU cable entering the building from communications cables shall be permitted as shown in Table 8.30.5.1.
outside shall be permitted to be run in rigid metal conduit or
intermediate metal conduit. Such conduits shall be grounded to an (a) Listing and Marking. Listing and marking of network-powered
electrode in accordance with 8.30.4.1(b). broadband communications cables shall comply with 8.30.6.1(a)(1) or
(a)(2).
(4) One- and Two-Family Dwellings. Type BLX or BL cables
less than 10 mm in diameter shall be permitted to be installed in one- (1) Type BMU, Type BM, and Type BMR Cables. Network-
and two-family dwellings. powered broadband communications medium power underground
cable, Type BMU; network-powered broadband communications
(5) Type BLX Cable. Type BLX cable entering the building from medium power cable, Type BM; and network-powered broadband
outside and terminated at a grounding block or a primary protection communications medium power riser cable, Type BMR, shall be
location shall be permitted to be installed, provided that the length of factory-assembled cables consisting of a jacketed coaxial cable, a
cable within the building does not exceed 15 m. jacketed combination of coaxial cable and multiple individual
conductors, or a jacketed combination of an optical fiber cable and
FPN: This provision limits the length of Type BLX cable to 15 m, while 8.30.3.1(b) multiple individual conductors. The insulation for the individual
requires that the primary protector, or NIU with integral protection, be located as
close as practicable to the point at which the cable enters the building. Therefore, conductors shall be rated for 300 volts minimum. Cables intended for
in installations requiring a primary protector, or NIU with integral protection, Type outdoor use shall be listed as suitable for the application. Cables shall
BLX cable may not be permitted to extend 15 m into the building if it is practicable be marked in accordance with 3.10.1.11. Type BMU cables shall be
to place the primary protector closer than 15 m to the entrance point.
jacketed and listed as being suitable for outdoor underground use.
8.30.5.25 Protection Against Physical Damage. Section 3.0.1.4 shall Type BM cables shall be listed as being suitable for general purpose
apply. use, with the exception of risers and plenums, and shall also be listed
as being resistant to the spread of fire. Type BMR cables shall be
8.30.5.28 Bends. Bends in network broadband cable shall be made so listed as being suitable for use in a vertical run in a shaft or from floor
as not to damage the cable. to floor and shall also be listed as having fire-resistant characteristics
capable of preventing the carrying of fire from floor to floor.

FPN No. 1: One method of defining resistant to spread of fire is that the cables do
8.30.6 Listing Requirements not spread fire to the top of the tray in the vertical tray flame test in the Reference
Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables and Flexible Cords, ANSI/UL 1581-1991.
Another method of defining resistant to the spread of fire is for the damage (char
8.30.6.1 Network-Powered Broadband Communications length) not to exceed 1 500 mm when performing the CSA vertical flame test for
Equipment and Cables. Network-powered broadband cables in cable trays, as described in Test Methods for Electrical Wires and
communications equipment and cables shall be listed as suitable for Cables, CSA C22.2 No. 0.3-M-1985.
the purpose. FPN No. 2: One method of defining fire-resistant characteristics capable of
preventing the carrying of fire from floor to floor is that the cables pass the
Exception No. 1: This listing requirement shall not apply to requirements of the Standard Test for Flame Propagation Height of Electrical and
Optical-Fiber Cable Installed Vertically in Shafts, ANSI/UL 1666-2002.
community antenna television and radio distribution system coaxial
cables that were installed prior to January 1, 2000, in accordance (2) Type BLU, Type BLX, and Type BLP Cables. Network-
powered broadband communications low power underground cable,
Type BLU; limited use network-powered broadband communications
low power cable, Type BLX; network-powered broadband
communications low-power cable, Type BL; network-powered
broadband communications low-power riser cable, Type BLR; and
network-powered broadband communications low-power plenum
cable, Type BLP, shall be factory-assembled cables consisting of a
jacketed coaxial cable, a jacketed combination of coaxial cable and
multiple individual conductors, or a jacketed combination of an optical
fiber cable and multiple individual conductors. The insulation for the
individual conductors shall be rated for 300 volts minimum. Cables
intended for outdoor use shall be listed as suitable for the application.
Cables shall be marked in accordance with 3.10.1.11. Type BLU
cables shall be jacketed and listed as being suitable for outdoor
underground use. Type BLX limited-use cables shall be listed as being
suitable for use outside, for use in dwellings, and for use in raceways
and shall also be listed as being resistant to flame spread. Type BL
cables shall be listed as being suitable for general-purpose use, with
the exception of risers and plenums, and shall also be listed as being
resistant to the spread of fire. Type BLR cables shall be listed as being
suitable for use in a vertical run in a shaft or from floor to floor and
shall also be listed as having fire-resistant characteristics capable of
preventing the carrying of fire from floor to floor. Type BLP cables
shall be listed as being suitable for use in ducts, plenums, and other
spaces used for environmental air and shall also be listed as having
adequate fire-resistant and low smoke-producing characteristics.

FPN No. 1: One method of determining that cable is flame retardant is by testing
the cable to VW-1 (vertical-wire) flame test in the Reference Standard for Electrical
Wires, Cables and Flexible Cords, ANSI/UL 1581-1991.

FPN No. 2: One method of defining resistant to spread of fire is that the cables do
not spread fire to the top of the tray in the vertical tray flame test in ANSI/UL 1584-
1991, Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables and Flexible Cords.

FPN No. 3: One method of defining fire-resistant characteristics capable of

preventing the carrying of fire from floor to floor is that the cables pass the
requirements of ANSI/UL 1666-1997, Standard Test for Flame Propagation Height
of Electrical and Optical-Fiber Cable Installed Vertically in Shafts.

FPN No. 4: One method of defining a cable that is low smoke-producing cable and
fire-resistant cable is that the cable exhibits a maximum peak optical density of 0.5
or less, an average optical density of 0.15 or less, and a maximum flame spread
distance of 1 500 mm or less when tested in accordance with NFPA 262-1999,
Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for Use
in Air Handling Spaces.